Badasses Of the Multiverse: Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 1: “De La Plata Podrido.”
A person is about to have a very bad day.
Within the same hour of finding out he has six months to live, he learns that a small army of badasses want vengeance against him.
And the only chance he has of surviving his problems, is he has to flee to the east coast of Mexico. To the mysterious city of De La Plata Podrido.
Where he has has to go shark fishing for badasses, while using himself as live bait.
Can the person whom brought together the Badasses Of the Multiverse, outwit them, and pull off the con-job of a lifetime? Or, will he be caught by them, and do the cha-cha in hell?
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 1: “De La Plata Podrido.”
Chapter 01: “Falling Hammers.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
A few lyrics of “The Gambler” song, from 1978. “The Gambler” song is owned by United Artists, writing by Don Schlitz, sung by Kenny Rogers.
“You got to know when to hold them.”
“Know when to fold'em.”
“Know when to walk away.”
“Know when to run.”
Truer words were never spoken.
(_)
Reality, An Alternate Earth. Date, early twenty-first century, early autumn. Place, Southeastern United States. Time, in the afternoon.
Inside a doctor's office, a neither young, nor old, tall, fair skin man was sitting in chair, waiting for the results of his medical tests. Among other things, he had on a t-shirt, jeans, a leather belt, and tennis shoes.
He had been waiting in the office for over twenty minutes, according to the digital watch, on his wrist.
Just then, the doctor walked into the office, and shut the door behind him. The doctor then sat down, in his desk chair, in front of the man. With nothing between them.
The doctor has a closed manila folder in his right hand, as he looked at the man.
The man looked back at the doctor, as the man asked, “So, what are the results for my sudden weight loss?” He mentally added, 'I know this is going to be bad news. I never get good news in my life.'
The doctor answered, “You have cancer.” The doctor then pulled out a small piece of paper and pen. He used the outside of the manila folder as backing, to write down something, as he stated, “The name for the cancer is quite long. But, it basically means with treatment, you can live up to two or three more years. Though, given how early we caught this, five years would not be impossible to reach for you.”
When the doctor finished writing one the piece of paper, he put up his pen. He then handed the piece of paper to the man.
The man took the piece of paper, and looked at the name. After which, he pocketed the piece of paper.
The man thought, 'I will look up the name one the internet, for later research. Though, that does not mean much, since I am next to broke. So, let's see how bad this news really is.'
The man said, “Thank you. Still, I don't have the money for treatments. So, how long do I got without medical intervention?”
The doctor stated, “Six months. Maybe less.”
The man inquired, “What should I expect?”
The doctor explained, “The good news is you have time. You have around six months to left. It is good that you were bit overweight before this. And you noticed your sudden weight loss of the course of a few weeks. We caught this early. But, without treatments, you have about six months to live. Basically, you will slowly lose weight, and waste away, until the you die.”
The man commented, “So, towards the end, I will become a living skeleton? I have seen that first hand. It is not pretty.”
The doctor stated, “No. It isn't. And that is what is going to happen to you.”
The man asked, “Anything else?”
The doctor said, “Yes. Towards the end, you energy will drop out, and you will find yourself tired all the time. To the point that you will be unable to leave you bed, and someone will have to take care of you.”
The man stood up from chair. He looked down at the doctor, whom was still sitting in his chair. The man said, in a calm tone of voice that set the doctor on edge, “Fine. There are worse ways to go.”
The doctor offered, “Given the seriousness of the diagnosis. I would understand if you wanted a second opinion. I could recommend some doctors to refer you too. Or, I would refer you to a specific doctor you might want to see.”
The man responded, “No. That will not be necessary. You have been a family friend, for years. I believe you.”
The man thought, 'Given the sudden weight lose, it can only be cancer, or something worse. Like my digestive track is shutting down. Which is not treatable, and it would kill me even sooner. No. I will just deal with the cancer.'
The doctor inquired, “What are you going to do, now?”
The man flatly answered, “I will settle my bill at receptionist desk, leave the building, and use what time I have left to the best of my abilities.”
He then turned to the door. He opened the door, and left office. With him leaving the door open behind him.
Ten minutes later, after the man paid cash for the doctors visit, he exited the building, got into his vehicle, and drove home.
Within five minutes, the man reached his family home. He drove into the driveway of the home, and parked his vehicle. He got out, locked his vehicle, and walked around his family house, to reach the post box by the street.
The mail did not usually come for a few more hours, but the man needed to do something to take his mind off of his problems. And doing such a small chore was like a few drops of water to a parched man, in need to something to drink.
The man soon reached the mailbox. As he opened the mailbox, he saw only a large, sealed envelope inside.
The man pulled out the envelope, and looked at it. He noted that the envelope had his name on it, in print. But, the envelope did not have any address, nor stamp on it.
He thought, 'Someone must have just dropped this directly into my mailbox. Not a wise idea. But, I got nothing better than to see what it inside. What is the worst that can happen? I am poisoned, and die a much quicker, merciful death that what I am already facing.'
He held the envelop his left hand, as he walked to the front door. When he reached the front door, he pulled out his keys, with his right hand, and he selected the key, from his key chain in his right hand, that he needed to unlocked the front door.
After unlocking the front door to his home. He opened it, walked inside, and shut the door behind him. As he pocketed his keys, he soon realized that he was the only one in the house.
He kept the envelope in his left hand, as he walked into the family living room, and sat down in a cushioned chair, behind the family coffee table. Behind the coffee table, on the opposite side the cushioned chair, was the family's large, wall mounted, flat screen TV. And to the sides of the coffee table, were couches, and small tables with lamps on them.
As he leaned back in the chair, he put the envelope in his lap.
The man thought, 'Given the circumstances of my life, I have tried to be as honest, and responsible as I can. I kept my nose clean. Never got in trouble with the law. I don't even have so much as a parking ticket. Never did any illegal drugs. Never smoked a day in my life. I rarely, ever touched alcohol. I have even started avoiding the fired foods and soda. And as I am now dying, what do I have to show for my life?'
'No friends. No girlfriend. No children. No job. No life. No money. No future. Living with my parents... I am a total loser.'
'At least I wrote that story. Which I finished posting a few months ago. To a website I enjoyed visiting. I possibly mildly entertained a few people. So, my life wasn't a total waste.'
He then leaned up, picked up the envelope. He opened it, as he continued his thoughts, 'And writing that series, Badasses Of the Multiverse, was pretty fun. I got a lot of laughs, and enjoyment, in doing so.'
He then dumped the contents of the envelope onto the coffee table in front of him.
What he saw inside surprised him.
There were three items that spilled onto the coffee table.
The man then looked into the envelope, and he found nothing else inside. He crush the envelope and threw it in a small trash can, which was by the chair he was sitting in, to the man's left side.
The man then looked at the three items on the table.
The first thing he looked at was a small business card.
As he picked it up, he saw that the text on the front of the card was in both spanish, and english.
The man did not know spanish, but he knew english, very well.
The english part read, 'Devil's Hotel and Resort.' Along with the hotel's address and phone number.
He mentally asked, 'Who would go to a hotel name, the Devil's Hotel?'
He set the card back down, and he picked up the second item. It was a folded piece of paper. He unfolded the paper to see that it was a flier for a the reopening of a bar.
Like the business card, the flier was in both spanish and englist text. The bar was called, The Rats Nest. And it listed the bar's address and phone number.
The man then noticed that both the card and flier addresses were located in the same city, in Mexico.
The man folded the flier back up, and he set it by the business card.
The man also check the business card, flier, and envelop itself, again. He then thought, with mild curiosity, 'There are no dates on any of these items... Interesting... Now, what is this, that came with these items?'
He then looked at the third and most mysterious item, as he picked it up, to get a close little at it.
It was a small gold ring, with small jewels lining the outside of it. The ring was too tiny for his fingers.
He thought, 'This ring is even too small for an adult's finger. It looks like it was made for a small child's finger. How odd. Still, I wonder if this is a joke. If not, I will have to look into more information on these items, later. I think it best I keep them close to me, as well.”
He then collected all three items, put them together, and into his left front pants pocket.
He thought, in a melancholy mood, 'Not that it really matters. I am dying. Though, drying is a wonderful excuse to go on my very first pub crawl. And a lot of other experiences I always want to do, but was worried I might die, or worse, if I did. Now, what is the worst that can happen. I die. I am dying already. So, why not? I think I will.'
Next, he picked up the remote off the coffee table, as he thought, 'But, that is for later. In a few hours. Right now, I need to decompress on what I have just found out. So, let's see what is on TV.'
He then turned on the TV, and set the TV to a news station.
Suddenly he saw the last person he ever expected to see on TV. Or, anywhere in reality, in live action, or any visual format, outside of text.
He quickly switched through the channels, as he thought, with worry, 'This has got to be some sort of sick, twisted joke.'
As he flipped through the channels, he saw the same person on all the channels, doing the same thing, at the same time. With the video feeds all clearly links to one broadcast.
He thought, 'No. It cannot be a joke. No one personally knows I wrote those stories. And someone had to have hacked the satellite communications systems, in real time. Only, a person with resources could do this. Oh man. No matter how this works out. This going to turn up a hornets nest, leading right to my doorstep.'
'And I thought finding out I was dying of cancer was the worst news I would get today. It is looking like I won't have to worry about the cancer killing me, because this could blow up in my face.'
On the screen was a young, fair skinned woman, with short white hair. That was not the giveaway.
The giveaway was the background, and the woman's outfit.
The first was the background was a red tarp with a symbol on it. It looked like the Soviet, Beat the Whites with the Red Wedge, symbol.
The man thought in denial, 'No. No. No. No. This is not happening.'
The second was the woman's outfit. It was very familiar black armor, fitted to her slender form, while having nothing mask above the woman's neckline, reveal her pretty face and short white head of hair.
Also, the woman had been speaking chinese and then she switch to french. Unfortunately, the man did not know either language.
The man thought in disbelief, “That is Scorpius. And not just any Scorpius, the one I wrote about. The one I changed into a healthy Sebacean woman. The one I put in change of her realities Peacekeepers Forces. And in book four, I gave her multiversal hyperspace gate technology... I think I just inadvertently fucked over my own planet.'
'But, that is not possible... Though, I guess it could be possible, considering I played with almost every imaginable twist and turn one can do with multiverse traveling, and technology for such traveling.'
'I have always been slightly precognitive. But, to think that my imagination may have cracked reality is both a wild, and very, very scary thought. So, what am I going to do now?'
'Too bad I don't know what she is saying. And I don't have time for her to get to english. I have to get out of here, now.'
'I have got to go, while I still can. Because eventually, all the major players are going to figure out what is going on.'
'To paraphrase Thompson. My only chance is that the very idea of the situation is so excessive that those in authority could not possibly believe it. And it will take time for those in authority to admit the truth, to even get the ball rolling on dropping the hammer on me.'
'Fictional characters, that are from multiple fictional realities, coming into real life is going to take a little bit of getting use to, before they even try to track down the writer of this insanity. Me.'
'Fortunately, in dealing with my stories, I always used a VPN, an alias e-mail address, and I never used my real name, nor did I state any background information about myself. So, it will take a little time, for them to connect the dots to me. But, not much. Once the authorities put the pieces together, it will on be a matter of hours until they get me.'
'So, I have no time. I need to get what I here. While leaving a note with my family. Then, I have to leave.'
'What I need to get is my savings. My money. Fortunately, I never trusted banks, and except for a little bit for my debit account, I keep the rest in cash on hand. In hidden locations in my home.'
'It is not a lot. Nowhere near enough to treat my cancer. But, it will get me what I am going, with a little extra, to buy me time, until I figure out what to do.'
'Still, where do I go?... Of course. Mexico. The package I got it tied to this. And even if it is a trap. It is my only real option. And my only real lead to this mess. Canada is too far. And I have clues with the business card and flier...'
The man then realized, as he mentally reflected, with concern, and a bit of dread, 'Somebody already found me. But, instead of capturing me, they left me clues. And a direction to go. They are clearly trying to help me. Like in the movie, Total Recall. Only, they did not give me any money. Then again, money is traceable.'
'And now that I think about it. That is a bad example. Considering Hauser betrayed Quaid and Melina. Yet, I am not looking a gift horse in the mouth. These are the only leads I got. And I will keep these three items with me, until I figure out what is going on.'
'Luckily, my passport is currently valid. And it is here in my home. I also have enough money to live on, in Mexico, for a few months. Which gives me time to come up with a better plan.'
'What else am I going to need? Some pairs of clothing. A razor. A cloth. A comb. That should be it. Also, I should leave my cellphone here. That is a real quick way of getting traced. Fortunately, my vehicle does not have a GPS system on it.'
'And I should not bring any weapons with me. Not even my pocket knife. Even though it is a dangerous place, having those items will only get me into legal troubles...'
'Besides, being shot dead in a mugging is a lot better death than from the cancer that is slowly eating away at me. Or, being caught by those after me.'
'Though, I am keeping my nail clippers, and disposable lighter.'
'Still, how will I get across the border without them taking too close a look at me?... That's it. But, that plan will only work if I am traveling light.'
'Having to buy some supplies, soon after crossing the border, will eat some of my savings. But, it will be worth it, if I can get across the border without a problem. And if I am right, no one will expect I am trying to escape to Mexico. As long as I give that excuse. The only question is, can I make it to be border, before the hammer finally drops on me. And I am reported to the border patrol.'
He turned off the tv with the remote in his hand. He then tossed the remote onto the coffee table.
He got out from his seat, as he thought, 'Now, I just need to get my items, and get that note written. It will have to be a short note, and then I need to leave. Though, I wonder what this city, De La Plata Podrido, is like. I don't even know what that spanish name means.'
The man then went to retrieve the items in his home, that he needed.
Twenty minutes later, he had a couple of changes of clothing, and a few other items, for his trip. He had his money, in his now thick wallet, in his right side pocket. Though, his wallet was still thin enough to fold.
And had his passport beside his wallet, in his right side pocket.
He thought, 'If they do search me. The last place they would look for money on me, would be my wallet. And it is the obvious place one would put it.'
'And my wallet is a nice mix of ones, fives, tens, twenties, and hundreds. If I had all hundreds, and I was searched. Questions would be asked.'
'And I can also use the excuse that I was just planning to go shopping while down there. Such as something nice for me family.'
'In such a position, I will even ask what the duties fees for items such as clothing, and jewelry are. To make everything appear legitimate.'
'Now, to leave the note, I wrote.'
The man then headed picked up the piece of paper he wrote the note on. He headed to the kitchen table. He set the note on the table, and place both the salt and pepper shakers on top of it, so it would not move. He then finished getting ready to leave.
The note read.
Hello family,
I cannot explain what is going on. All I can say is that I have recently realized that the reason crazy and badass are associated with each other is that no one sane messes with members of either group. Now, I have learned that I have inadvertently angered people that would fall in both categories. I have to leave, before they find me.
Do not call the police about me. It will only make things worse for everyone involved. And if strange women, or men, ever come to you, asking about me. Or, looking for me. Be completely honest with them. And cooperate with them, to your fullest. With you answering any question they have about me.
I hope you all lead good lives.
Goodbye.
At the bottom was the man's signature, in his real name.
Two minutes later, after a quick bathroom break, they man retrieve a bottle of water, collected his belongings, and left for his vehicle. With him locking the door he used to exit the home, behind him.
A minute later, he was in the vehicle, with his items. Half a minute later, he was on the road, with his seatbelt on.
Five minutes later, of driving. He reached a gas station on his way out of town, towards the west. He filled up his vehicle's gas tank, walked into the store, paid for the gas in cash, along with an interstate map, and he then left the store.
He then got back into his vehicle.
Next, he put on his seatbelt.
As he started his vehicle, he thought, 'Now, it is a race to see if I can get out of the county, before the hammer comes down on me. And using a vehicle is the safest method. Bus, plane, and boat are heavily monitored by the state. And they all were too isolated. If things immediately went south... This is going to be a long few days.'
He then drove out of town, at the speed limit. So, he would not be stopped by any of the police.
(_)
Later on, as he drove his car onto the interstate, in the direction of the border, the man mentally reflected, 'On this trip, it has occurred to me, that I need to take a few more precautions. I need a disguise, and an alias.'
'I have a few simple ideas on the disguise. All it is will be a few minor changes. Now, the alias. What should I got by? It has to be a broad name. Something that came be used both as a first, middle, and last name. A gender neutral name. But, one that I can live with. It also can be used by different races, including my own. And it is tied to my heritage... I know. Lee. Ya, Lee will do. How about, J.D. Lee. As in John Doe Lee.'
Lee cracked a grin, as he continued his thoughts, 'Yea. J.D. Lee also goes along with my sense of humor. And I will just tell people my name is, Lee.'
'Now, to see what is on the radio. I hope it is not a report of an alien invasion. But, I would like to know more about the details of that message.'
Lee continued down the road, as he turned on his radio, and set the tuner to a talk radio station.
(_)
Over the next two and a half days, Lee travel around fifteen hundred miles. He took three, four hour long naps in the front, drivers seat. With Lee using the alarm function on his digital clock to wake up.
He took these naps, so he would not fall asleep at the wheel. He also had several cups of coffee on the road, a few gasoline refuels, a few meals to go, and some restroom trips. He was currently in south Texas, on a sunny fall morning, as he headed on the interstate, for the south tip of the state, and its border with Mexico.
Lee was currently driving through Brownsville, Texas, on the interstate. Which was almost to the very south tip of Texas.
During those few days of travel, Lee kept the radio on the talk radio channels, for the most part. It seemed that that the broadcast was a simple, one sentence recording, which was looped for about six hours on all TV channels, and most radios stations.
The message was, in english, with Scorpius stating, “We want the writer.” And the message repeated that request in several languages, before repeating the loop, by stating the same message in english.
And there were no reports of planetary invasion by an alien military.
While Lee drove down the interstate, he thought, 'Given both internal, and foreign, issues, currently happening. It seems the various governments did not mind the media talking about this. Mainly because it was not their fault, and it distracted the people from other matters. The government here is even spinning the communications breech as justification for more spending on intelligent agencies... The figures.'
'Also, the message is a simple, as it is brilliant. That message was solely intended for me. To flush me out. And it worked, and got me running.'
'If Scorpius has been any more detailed, the local authorities would likely already figured out it was me, and caught me. So, the message had to be direct, but vague, and mysterious.'
'The person, outfit, background, and message, was enough to let me know they were after me. That was the entire point. I doubt even my readers would fully believe what happened. And I don't dare check the message boards I use, because everything is monitored, and recorded.'
'That being said. It is not surprising there are no reports of an alien invasion. Scorpius realizes that if she launched a planetary invasion, I might get killed in the crossfire. Given Scorpius' nature, I would guess Scorpius is not going to send any of her agents after me. Because, I pretty much gave her everything she ever wanted. Health, power, respect, at a level she was unable to accomplish on her own.'
'No. It is the other women in my series that want my head. Such as Violin, Aeryn, the Lagoon women. The list goes on, and on.'
'And by women, I mean those that were originally women, and the gender bent men I messed with, in my stories. And there are a lot of them. And they are all dangerous. And I am an idiot for messing with them like that.'
'In addition, that is not counting the none gender bent men, whom would likely want my hide, as well. Though, that is a much shorter list, and they do not usually run with the group connected to Scorpius. So, that means the women will like be after me, for now.'
'And Scorpius did the broadcast, and hacking of the communications systems, as a favor to Violin.'
'Besides, coming after me would get a lot of her forces needlessly killed. Plus, she doesn't want to rule this planet of lunatics and dreamers. And destroying any Earth would annoy Violin, and the other women she is doing this favor for.'
'Taking all this into consideration, I am guessing the women want to do this discreetly. Which is good for everyone involved. Though, that still means some of the most dangerous women in the multiverse coming after me. This is serious. But, it is a lot better than a planetary invasion on my account.'
'If there was a planetary invasion, I would surrender myself, immediately. I could write that off as a heroes sacrifice, and make sure they are able to torture me, before I die. To make sure they sated their vengeance on me, and not my homeworld.'
'Though, after everything I have given Scorpius, I don't think I will have to worry about her. The others, yes. But, not her.'
'Still, them finding me is going to be difficult. I used aliases, and VPNs, when I used the internet. That is probably why they cannot use their reality devices to just show up on my door step. They don't know who I am, what I look like, nor where I am from. As far as a reality device is concerned, my alias is more connect to the proxy servers I use, than myself.'
'And since most computers, on the planet, have firewalls and anti-virus programs of different types. Even if they hacked the internet, looking for me, it would take time to put the pieces together.'
'Though, since they are clearly doing this in secret, they know that doing such hacking would attract the wrong kind of attention from the local authorities. So, they won't try to hack the internet for the information. Except may simple IP tracing directly from the website servers I posted on. But, the VPN would cause problems with that. Still, I can use that in my advantage, when I get ready for them.'
'Also, they might look in the U.S. midwest, where I set Bob's origins at. When, I am from the southeastern U.S. Making it so that Bob was from the midwest was an intelligent move on my part.'
'Still, someone is going to get me if I don't get out of the country, right now.'
Lee then saw the sign that said the mexican border was a few miles ahead.
He thought, 'Good. I am almost to the border. Time to park and change clothes, one more time.'
He pulled off the interstate, and to a small outlet mall.
Lee parked away from the other cars, in the middle of the parking lot. He turned off his vehicle, and he left the keys in the ignition.
He then pulled out a set of fresh clothing.
He thought, 'Last pair of clean clothing I brought with me. Too bad I cannot take my clothing with me. But, with my plan, doing so would raise suspicions if I did. And this clean clothing will help hide my body oder. Still, I am also going to have to shave before I leave the parking lot. And fortunately, I have a fresh, unopened bottle of water. Which I bought, to wet my face with.'
'And I don't have any bathroom issues. I took a pee break half an hour ago. And other issues were taking care of earlier today.'
Lee then moved to the front passenger side of the vehicle, for more room.
Lee then quickly changed his clothing. Fresh underwear, socks, t-shirt, and pants. Next, he looped his belt through his clean pair of pants, put back on his shoes, and tied them. Afterward, he pulled out his items that were in his old pants, and put them into his new pants. These items including a handkerchief, nail clippers, disposable lighter, passport, a little loose change, and his wallet.
He had put the Devil's Hotel business card, and the folded Rats Nest flier into his wallet, with his money.
Also, during his traveling, he bought a string, and looped his mysterious ring, into a necklace, which was hidden under his shirt.
He then pulled out his razor, comb, a clean cloth, and a few, unopened bottle of water.
Lee thought, 'Too bad it is too much trouble to use shave cream in here. Nor, do I have access to warm water. I just have to be careful not to get any serious nicks.'
Lee then used the water to wet his face, and he moved over to the passenger side of the front seat to use the vanity mirror to shave. A couple of minutes later, he finished shaving. He dampened his clean cloth with the water, and wipes his face. He found that he has no serious nicks on his face. He then used the bottle from the water to wet his hair, so he could comb and set it.
When he was finished, he capped the bottle and put it away. Tossed the razor, and cloth into the backseat of the vehicle. And he put his comb into his pocket.
Finally, Lee moved back over to the driver's side of his vehicle.
He started the vehicle, drove out of the parking lot, and back onto the interstate, as he headed for the U.S. border with Mexico.
When Lee reached the border, he parked his vehicle in nearby parking lot.
After he turned off the vehicle. He just sat there, staring into space for a minute, as he realized he was about to do something both necessary, and incredibly stupid.
Lee thought, 'The sad fact is that no one can help me with this. I have to do this myself. And this is very risky. I will likely end up dead, or worse. But sometimes, a person just has to roll the dice, and see what happens.'
He then got out of his vehicle. He left the keys in the glove box, and the vehicle unlocked.
Lee thought, 'It is not like I am going to need the keys. And if someone takes the vehicle, they might throw the authorities off my scent, for a little while. Buying me more time, as I escape.'
Lee then headed towards the pedestrian line for the border check point.
It took him about five minutes to reach the pedestrian line for the border check point.
Given it was the mid-morning, on a weekday, the line was not very long.
Half an hour later, he made it to the U.S. border checkpoint.
As he presented the U.S. border agent his passport, the agent asked, “So, what is your business in Mexico?”
Lee calmly answered, so his lie was more believable, “I am visiting relatives in Brownsville, and I decided to take a day trip.”
As the agent looked at Lee's passport, he casually said, “Well, have fun, and be careful.”
Lee honestly replied, “Thank you. I will. And I hope you have a good day too.”
The agent stamped Lee's passport, and closed it.
As the agent handed Lee back his passport, he smiled, while he said, “I appreciate that. You can go on through.”
Lee gently took his passport, and slid it into his pocket. He then walked into the border zone between the U.S. and Mexico. With him getting into the pedestrian line for the Mexican border checkpoint
Half an hour later, Lee made it through the Mexican border checkpoint, and he was currently in Matamoros, Tamaulipas.
Lee then went into a nearby tourist section, and bought an english map of Mexico. Which folded, and put into a pocket.
He then found a restroom, to pee.
As Lee walked out of the restroom, he began to walk through the crowd of people. And as he look out, among the crowds, for a split second, he thought he caught sight of a fair skinned woman, with long red hair, in the distance.
Lee forced himself to remain calm has he turned away from that direction. He continued to casually walking, as he thought, 'Oh hell!... Could it be one of them?... I hope not. And just to make sure, I better get out of here.'
Soon after, he was able to find a mexican taxi driver that spoke english.
As he got into the back of the taxi, the driver asked, “So, where to?”
Lee answered, “I am not sure where it is exactly. If it is too far, let me know how far you can take me in the direction I want to go.”
The driver replied, “Okay. So, again, where to?”
Lee said, “I am trying to get to the Devil's Hotel, in De La Plata Podrido.”
The driver laughed, for a few seconds.
Lee inquired, “Dare I ask why you are laughing?”
As the driver calmed down, the driver answered, in an amused tone of voice, “This one wants to go hell, and he doesn't even know it. Still, you want to go there?”
Lee thought, 'More like hell is ten steps behind me.' He said, “Yes. Can you get me there? If so, how long will it take you?”
The driver stated, “I can get you there in three hours. ”
Lee questioned, “Good. So, how much?”
The driver stated, “Two hundred, U.S.”
Lee pulled out his wallet, and pulled a fifty from it. He handed it to the driver, as he said, “Fifty now. The rest, when get me there.”
As the driver took the fifty, he replied, “Fair enough.” The driver then turned to face in front of him, as he put his taxi in gear.
Lee inquired, “So, what is the city we are heading to like?”
The driver answered, “It is an island city, with a very colorful history. And we got plenty of time to talk about. Now, buckle up. The roads and drivers in my county can be dangerous. And the police can be worse. I know how to avoid all those problems. And I have yet to lose a customer, while in my cab.”
Lee buckled his belt, as he replied, “Glad to hear it.”
While the taxi driver kept his eyes on the road, he asked, “Since we are going be together for a while, what is your name?”
Lee answered, “Lee. Yours?”
The driver answered, “Vincent.”
(_)
Two and a half hours later, a fax came into the U.S. border checkpoint between Brownsville, Texas to Matamoros, Tamaulipas.
The fax had a picture of Lee's face, and it stated that he was wanted for questioning as a material witness, for various crimes.
Though, by then, Lee was long gone, and far into Mexico.
(_)
About that time, during the sunny day, Lee was still inside the backseat of the taxi. And he saw that he and the taxi driver, were driving on the highway paralleling the coastline.
Lee and Vincent has been talking over casual stuff for the last couple of hours. And Lee has been able to keep himself awake for the time being.
Presently, Lee had the mexican map he bought open, as he was trying to locate the city, De La Plata Podrido.
After ten minutes of not finding it, he folded his map back up, and put it into one of his pants pockets.
Lee asked, “By the way, why cannot I find De La Plata Podrido on the map?”
Vincent was in the front driver's seat. He kept his eyes on the road, as he drove, while he replied, “That is become it is not on any map. That is part of the colorful history of Plata Podrido.”
Lee requested, “You might as well tell me. We got nothing better to do.”
Vincent admitted, “You are correct about that. Well, the name of the city, in english means, Of The Rotten Silver.”
Lee thought, 'This is not good.'
Vincent continued, “Plata Podrido was originally a landfill on a sandbar. The landfill was began in nineteen o three, by the nearby coastal cities of Tamailipas. Over time it became an island. And by the nineteen sixties, it was a large island. At that time, the island was over ten miles wide, from east to west. And was over twenty miles long, from north to south. Of course, the island has likely increased in size, since then.”
Lee sarcastically thought, 'Great. I am going to city literally build on a garbage dump. If I didn't have cancer, I would be worried about my long term health.'
Vincent continued, “In the early nineteen sixties, someone got the idea to try to development the unnamed island. The person spent a large fortune dumping ten feet of top soil over the entire island. This took years. He also added plants on top. And while the development plans fell through, the plants, bushes, and trees, did somehow survive and thrive.”
Lee mentally admitted, 'Okay. This sounds better than I thought. In many cases, ten feet of soil is a good barrier.”
Vincent continued, “Along with this. Over the years, the constant tides, currents, and storms, have added quiet a nice beach around the island. And the locals try hard to keep their beach clean. Also, the underground garbage piles only start several feet passed the dirt. Long after you pass the beach. And the garage is several feet underground. So, you would have to dig down to find it.”
Lee thought, 'So, they have a beach there, that is natural and clean. Even though it is not beach season here, it is nice to know that there are some naturally clean places on that island, to spend time at.'
Vincent continued, “With soil, trees, and plants there, by the early nineteen seventies, some of the poor, from parts of the region, started moving there to live. Then, the drug trade took off in the late seventies and early eighties. And the island became a natural staging point, for smuggling, between latin america and the U.S.”
Lee mentally wondered, 'Why do illegal drugs always seem to come into play in these situations?'
Vincent continued, “At the same time, the cold war went into high gear in latin america. Such wars had few winners, and mostly losers. Those that lost, and were hunted, followed the drug trade to the island, where found the place to be a safe haven.”
“Everyone from business owners that lost everything, due to either war, or political upheaval. To soldiers and rebels that either lost their wars, or got tired of fighting. All types have fled, and come to call the island their new home.”
Lee thought, 'Meaning that for over the last three decades, Plata Podrido has attracted badasses, from all over the world, whom are looking for a more quiet life. If I want to continue breathing, I am going to have to be very polite to those that live in that city. Still, that also means that the violent crime is not insanely high there, because a thief might get their neck broke if they try to mug the wrong person.'
'And those after me will have to be on their toes as well. Unless than want to attract attention that even they might not be able to handle.'
Vincent continued, “During the mid nineteen eighties, due to the population growth, the local state of Tamaulipas put in place semi-legitimate government and services. Water pipes, power-lines, sewer lines, waste treatment plants, phone lines, a hospital, a fire department, a school were put in place by the government. The water for the city from a desalination plant, pulled directly from the sea. And it safe to drink. Even for those outside of the county. And the waste treatment plant is on the opposite side of the island, from the desalination plant.”
Lee thought, 'Those are major pluses. And I was worried about the water ice. I am still not going to drink from the tap. Though, that is now a minor issue.'
Vincent continued, “The reason the state officials did this was simple. They were getting good bribe money from the drug trade, and they did not want to ruin their gravy train. Also, the island was isolated, and what went through there, did not go through other cities. Which brought in tourist revenue was up in those cities, due to less crime. Though, the Plata Podrio gets some tourism. Such as yourself.”
Lee thought, 'I am less of a tourist, and more of a person on the run.'
Vincent continued, “At the national level, officially, the Mexican government, considers the island to be no mans land. For them it is an environmental and political embarrassment. That is why it is not on any map.”
Lee thought, 'That makes sense on a few levels. If the island does not technically exist on a map, then it also offers plausible deniability for the Mexican government.'
Vincent continued, “As long as things stay quiet, and the bribes flow to the national officials, the Mexican government will not send in the military in to destroy the city.”
Lee mentally worried, 'I might be the proverbial match stick, to the powder keg that is Plata Podrido. I hope not. I have nothing against the people there.'
Vincent continued, “Given the no mans land status of the island, the city on the island is one of the few places where the Mexican government looks the other way, and ignores their ultra strict immigration laws. Thus, allowing foreigners to live their with little worries from the law, as long as they behave.”
Lee thought, 'So, that is one of the major reasons the badasses that came to the city would stay there. And with so many foreigners, it will make it easier for me to hide there.'
Vincent continued, “The police are more lazy than corrupt. They only enforce the law when someone makes a mess of things.”
Lee thought, 'This is very good. Such police are usually lazy until the shit hits the fan. I am the type of person that does not have to worry about such police, because I am polite, and I keep my nose out of trouble. On the other hand, most of those after me are troublemakers. And if I play my cards right, I might be able to use a situation that could develop from such circumstances to my advantage.'
Vincent continued, “Rumor has it. There are many armed people in the city.”
Lee mentally reflected, 'That is would be obvious. Given everything else you just told me about the city.'
Vincent continued, “And most people there speak both spanish and english. And some even speak other languages. So, the language barrier there, for you, should not be too bad.”
Lee spoke up, “That is great to hear.” He mentally considered, 'After hearing all that, I think I might enjoy the time I am planning to spend in Plata Podrido.'
Vincent asked, “So, what do you think?”
Lee replied, “I think it is an interesting tale. And you are a good storyteller.”
Vincent said, “Thank you.”
(_)
A minute later, their taxi came to a fork in the highway.
Lee saw that the fork to their left, lead to a bridge, and an island in the distance.
Vincent then turned the taxi onto the bridge, as he stated, “We are now on the bridge to the island of De La Plata Podrido. We should be at the hotel in ten minutes.”
Lee complimented, “Sounds great. And you have been a wonderful driver, and company.”
Vincent kept his eyes on the road, as he smiled. He responded, “I appreciate that. I do enjoy it when I have polite customers.”
As they cross bridge, they got both got a close look at it.
The bridge they were crossing over was a highway, concrete bridge. The bridge was two standard lanes wide, and was two hundred yards long, and was set about twenty feet above the sea level. And Lee guessed, from the mud he saw at the bottom, it was low tide.
As the exited the bridge and into the city of De La Plata Podrido, Lee thought, 'I think I just stepped into the Twilight Zone.'
(_)
Just under ten minutes later, They drove into the parking lot of the Devil's Hotel.
There was a large sign by the street, which stated, “Devil's Hotel and Resort”, in english.
Less than a minute later, Vincent stopped them in front of the front lobby doors of the hotel, with Lee's side being the facing the sidewalk running along the outside the hotel.
Vincent turned around to face Lee, as he said, “Here we are.”
Lee pulled out his wallet, and gave Vincent the hundred and fifty U.S. dollars they agreed to.
Vincent turned and collected the cash. He said, “Pleasure doing business with you.”
Lee pocketed his wallet, as he stated, “You got me here safe and sound. You did a good job.”
Vincent replied, “It is what I do. Good Luck, Lee. You are going to need it in this town.”
Lee responded, “You to, Vincent.”
Lee then got out of the taxi.
As soon as Lee closed the taxi door behind him, with him standing on the sidewalk, Vincent drove his taxi away. Though, Vincent was polite, and he did not floor his gas pedal. Instead, it was a gradual build to speed.
Lee watched Vincent head back the way he came.
Lee thought, 'I guess he doesn't want to stay here. Though, he was polite enough not to floor the gas pedal. Oh well. Now, let's find out where, here, is.'
Lee looked around himself.
He saw that the hotel was set from the road by a large parking lot, which was about a quarter full.
Lee thought, 'Judging from the number of cars, this is not bad for an off season. This place must be good, in some ways.'
Between the windowed walls of the front of the building and the sidewalk, there were a row of bushes running across the hotel, except for the windowed double doors in front of him, which he guessed lead to the lobby, and two other smaller doors on opposite ends of the side of the building, which Lee guessed were there as fire escapes.
The sidewalk in the front of the hotel was eight feet wide, except for the parts of the sidewalk that let to the doors on the side, which were twelve feet wide.
In front of the double-doors was an awning which stretched eight feet out, to protect the doors from rain.
The building itself, was rectangular, and looked to be around two hundred yards long, with the lobby doors in the center. And Lee counted that the hotel was thirty stories high. He could not tell what the depth of the hotel was. But, he guessed that it was just as long in depth, as length.
There were balconies lining all floors above ground level. Lee guessed that this was the case on the other sides of the hotel.
Lee saw that all the windows were tinted, but he could see into the lobby itself.
And Lee could hear the breaking of wave coming from behind the hotel.
He thought, 'I would guess this place is set by the beach, which is in back of the hotel. Though, it is a little cool to be going to the beach right now. Still, it is a peaceful sound. I wonder what the inside of this place looks like'
Lee then turned, and walked inside. As he entered the double doors, he found himself in an entryway between the first set of double doors, then the second set of double doors that let to the lobby.
As he entered the lobby, the first thing he noticed a was the tinted windows allow for plenty of light into the lobby, with the lobby itself being fairly large. Though, the tinted windows prevented the lobby from being too bright.
There were cushioned chairs and couches every where.
The couches were situated so that each of the three cushioned couches were set as a square, around a small coffee table.
There were four such square sets of couch furniture in the lobby. Two set by the windows, on each side of the lobby doors. And two behind the first two sets of couches.
There were also cushioned chairs set around the room, with two chairs with a small coffee table between them.
Lee saw that there were a few people of various walks of life sitting in these chairs and couches, around the lobby.
To Lee's left, he saw there was a hallway, with a sign in both spanish and english that read, “Devil's Hotel Restaurant and Bar”. Under that line, it read in both spanish, then english, “Breakfast buffet in the mornings”.
To Lee's right there was a hallway that looked to lead to a bank of elevators.
And there were two hallways leading straight back from the sides of the lobby, and deeper into the hotel.
Lee also saw that the check in desk, which was set across the room from the double-doors
It was then that Lee noticed that the music has suddenly changed, as he walked inside. It only took a few seconds for him to realize it, as he looked around.
Then, he recognized the song that was playing.
Lee thought, 'That song is, Hotel California. This is not a good sign. Still, I might as well face the music, so to speak, and check in.'
Lee calmly turned and walked over to the check in desk. Where he saw two clerks.
When Lee reached the check in desk, the hotel clerk in front of him, looked up at Lee.
Lee saw that the other clerk behind the desk, was doing some paperwork. He also noticed they were where hotel uniforms. Which were dark blue, button up, short sleeve shirt. And dark violet pants.
Lee said, “I would like to rent a room.”
The clerk replied, in english, “That will be fine.”
Lee though, 'Good. He is speaks english. Now, to get down to business.' He pulled out his wallet, and he showed the clerk the business card he had of the Devil's Hotel. He stated, “Someone gave me this.”
The clerk smiled, as he stated, “That is good. Because we offer a ten percent discount to those that present one of our business cards when they check in. We like repeat business.”
The clerks comment made Lee happy, as he thought, 'If I ever find out who sent me that business card, I am going to have to thank him, or her.' Lee replied, “As do I. So, what are the weekly and monthly rates for the hotel?”
The clerk told Lee the rates. And what rates were for what rooms, on what floors.
Lee thought, 'Those are very cheap rates, when compared hotels in the U.S. The high floors and those facing the ocean are more expensive. But, I should be able to afford a few months, with money to spare for clothing, other items. Including food. If I get one of the lower floor rooms, not facing the ocean.'
Lee said, “Those are good rates. I think I will take a suite on the lower floor. A one bedroom suites, not facing the ocean. Though, not on the ground floor.”
Lee thought, 'The ground floor is the busiest floor of the hotel. I do not want to sleep on the busiest floor here, for several reasons.'
'Among those reasons, are when those are me, come here. One of them will likely check who is staying on the ground floor. With their reasoning that I would stay on the ground floor, because it would be easier to escape from. As such, staying on the ground floor will only make me appear more suspicious.'
'I also cannot get rope, or rope ladder, for a balcony escape, on a higher floor. They would be to hard to hide. And they searched my room, that would give me away. And I cannot jump down from a second story balcony, or higher, without breaking my leg, or even my name.'
'So, a balcony escape is out. I will just have to figure out other possible escape routes. Before I set my trap.'
The clerk compliment, “A wise choice. Do you have any other questions?”
Lee stated, “Yes. I have a few. I hope you don't mind.”
The clerk replied, “Not at all.”
Lee asked, “Can I pay in U.S. cash?”
The clerk answered, “Yes. You will find most shops, businesses, and restaurants, in this city accept U.S. Also, this hotel offers a fair exchange rate between the U.S. dollar and the Mexican peso. Along with a few other currencies.”
Lee inquired, “That is nice to know. Do you need my ID to check in?”
The clerk said, “No. This is a, no questions asked, hotel.”
Lee questioned, “Do I need to make a security deposit with the hotel?”
The clerk stated, “No. But, if you damage your hotel suite, without reason, and should you refuse to pay for repairs, we will hurt you.”
Lee agreed, “That is fair. What about TV, phone, and internet?”
The clerk said, “We get our TV off of a satellite dish. We have a nice selection of channels to choose from. This includes a number of english channels, many are also seen in the U.S. Our phone and internet come from a dedicated fiber optic cable, that goes straight to a highspeed server on the mainland.”
“Our phone system is voice over IP, and we we offer wireless highspeed internet. When you get to you room, you will find a paper by your phone that lists both that suites hotel number, the check in desk number, and the wireless password for the hotel. If that paper is not there, place inform us and we will give you the information.”
Lee inquired, “Do you monitor you internet and phone service? And if so, will I be billed for my use of those services?”
The clerk explained, “We charge you extra for usage, and how much you download, after a daily hundred gigabyte cap, that begins at midnight. We only monitor usage. Not content. Such as being a bandwidth hog. Meaning don't upload stuff. And don't download at more than five megabytes a second. Also, we will question you if you start making several long distance phone calls. And we will charge you for those phone calls.”
Lee replied, “That is reasonable.” Lee then noticed one of the cameras high on the wall, near the ceiling of the room, to his right side. He looked at the camera, as he thought, 'I need to ask another question.'
Lee turned back to the clerk, as he inquired, “Is your security system tied to the internet? Such as your camera system?”
The clerk answered, “No. Our camera system is not tied to the internet. The cameras are on a standalone system. A lot of people come here for vice. And we respect their privacy. And your privacy. As long as no one is hurt, we don't care what you do. And neither do the local police.”
Lee thought, 'That answers that question.' He commented, “I find that comforting. Though, I am not into such vices.”
The clerk smirked, as he replied, “That is your choice.”
Lee requested, “So, let's start the ball rolling. I would like to check in for a month. And as I said, on lower floor. Though, not on the ground floor. And a suite not facing the ocean, so I can get a better rate.”
The clerk said, “That will be fine. We prefer frugal customers. Such customers usually return year after year.”
Lee thought, 'That is interesting.' He inquired, “So, you are not trying to get me to rent a suite, but the next three suites, in my possible future visits?”
The clerk replied, “Exactly.”
Lee honestly commented, “I am glad at least somewhere on this planet, such wise business sense still exists.”
The clerk said, “Then, I think you will like your stay here.”
Lee replied, “I think I will agree with you.”
The clerk asked, “So, would you like to pay up front in cash.”
Lee answered, “Yes. As soon as the paperwork is done.”
The clerk said, “That will be fine.”
Ten minutes later, the clerk printed off the paperwork, and Lee used his alias to sign the paperwork, J.D. Lee. Though, Lee did read the paperwork first. It was just a couple of sheets of paper. They were liability forms, and there was no fine print. Just standard stuff, and given the name of the hotel, he did check to make sure he was not signing away his soul. Which the clerk assured him was not the case. And all that was required on the paperwork, was his signature, or in this case, he alias. The forms did not even require him to date his signature.
Lee figured the clerks would date the forms, after he handed them back. Likely with a rubber stamp, with ink.
After Lee finished with the paperwork, and handed it back to the clerk, with his left hand. Lee then pulled out his wallet, and the money he needed to pay for the room, for a month. Next, he put his wallet back into his pocket, with his right hand, while he used his left hand to pay the clerk.
The clerk took the money and counted it. He saw that the payment was all there.
The clerk then went and retrieved a keyring from the board, behind the check in desk. Along with the clerk presenting Lee with his receipt.
After the clerk came back, he handed the keyring, and receipt, to Lee. He stated, “This key is to a room on the third floor. When you get to the third floor, take a right, and keep going. Then, take a left, you will find this room to your right. It has a balcony that faces the pool. Which is the south end of the building. You can even see the ocean to your left, from the balcony. Also, we have an excellent cleaning staff. If the room is not spotless, with the sheets clean. Contact us.”
“If you find any bedbugs, or other pests, contact us immediately. We will find you an other room for free, for a week. Fortunately, we are always on top of such problems. When we have a bedbug problem in a room, we replace the carpet, and mattresses. We are very serious about quality, and cleanliness here, at the Devil's Hotel.”
Lee took the keyring, and receipt. After pulled out his wallet, sticking the receipt into his wallet, and putting his wallet back into a pants pocket, he looked at the keyring. He saw that there was a key on it, and not an electronic keycard, but an actual key to his room. There was also a plastic tag on the key ring with listed his room number.
Lee pocket the keyring, as he looked up at the clerk. He said, “That all sounds great.”
The clerk commented, “While you ask about your soul, with the contracts you signed. I am surprised you did not ask about the Hotel's name.”
Lee responded, “I just figured there was no point in asking. I am sure the owner of the hotel had his, or her, reasons for the name, and I prefer not to be judgmental.”
The clerk replied, “That is what I figured, as well.”
Lee inquired, “So, you don't know the answer, either?
The clerk admitted, “Nope. And I am not going to ask. This job pays too well for me to screw up.”
Lee complimented, “Well, don't worry. You are doing a great job so far.”
The clerk replied, “I appreciate that.”
Lee mentioned, “I have had a long day. I am going to turn in for right now.”
The clerk said, “If you have any problem with the room, or the services we provide, just call the check in desk number, any time, day or night, and we will be more than happy to help. All the clerks here are very polite. Just dial the pound symbol on the phone to reach us.”
Lee replied, “If I need anything, I will. And thanks.”
Lee then turned to his right, and he walked towards the elevator bay.
(_)
A few minutes later, after taking an elevator, Lee was on the third floor of the hotel. He took the clerk's directions, and he soon found his the hallway door to his suite.
He use the key unlock and open the door.
After he walked in, turned on the ceiling light, with a wall switch.
He then closed the door behind him, and he locked the deadbolt, on top of the knob on the door. With the knob set to automatically lock, after it was released from being turned open.
Lee found that the suite had two rooms. One was the bedroom, with a one bed, table, a couple of cushioned chairs by the table. There was nightstand, to the left of the bed, between the bed and the wall. On the nightstand was a small lamp on it, a phone, a digital alarm clock, a TV remote, and a paper with information by the phone.
There was a nice sized, flat screen TV mounted to the wall across from the bed.
Under the TV was a chest of drawers. By the TV, on the check of draws was a microwave. By the chest of drawers, on the ground, facing the door, was a small refrigerator and freezer.
By the refrigerator was a small, steel trash can.
Lee noticed that there was a small wall safe near the door to the hallway. Lee looked at the safe for a few seconds, as he thought, 'I need to get the combination to that safe some time, from the check in desk clerks. But, that is a small matter.'
Lee then walked to the sliding glass door, which was across the room from the door to the interior of the hotel. He saw heave curtains. He pulled back on of the curtains, to see a nice balcony outside.
Next, he looked by the wall, beside the sliding glass door to see the heater and air conditioner machine. He walked over and turned on the heater slightly. He found that the digital temperature gauge on the machine listed both Celsius and Fahrenheit.
Lee set it to seventy-five degrees Fahrenheit.
Lee then walked over to the door to the other room in the suite. The bathroom.
He opened the door and turned on the lights to see that the bathroom was very clean. There was complimentary bar soup, shampoo, toilet paper, and various towels in the bathroom. The bathroom was fairly large for its type. Lee felt that he was not to small for the room.
The bathroom had tiled floor and walls. The bathroom had a tub in it, with a shower nozzle. It has a western style, old style, three gallon toilet. And there was a vanity sink, with a large mirror above the sink.
Lee turned off the bathroom lights, and he re-entered the bedroom area.
He walked over to the bed and opened up the folder sheets to find that everything appeared to be fresh and clean.
The sheets even felt clean to Lee's sense of touch.
He then bent down and look at the carpet.
The carpet appeared to have been recently shampooed and vacuum.
He thought, 'They were not joking about cleanness. This place is cleaner than my bedroom, back home. Which is fairly clean. I think I am going to like this room. Now, to get some rest.
He then walked over to the wall, by the door, and he turned off the light.
The only light in the room was the outline from the heavy, closed curtains that were around glass doors.
Lee then went to his new bed, and kicked off his shoes.
Finally, he opened the sheets on his bed, and crashed on top of the sheets, to get some much needed rest.
Lee fell asleep only seconds after his head hit one of the two, large, comfortable pillows, on his twin sized bed.
(_)
Several hours later, Lee was laying on his back, with his head on a pillow, as he opened his eyes, and he yawned.
For a few seconds, he thought he was back home, in his bed, and this has been a dream. Then, he realized he was wearing his pants and socks. The previous three days of events came back to him.
He immediately turned his head to his left, to look at the digital clock on the nightstand.
The clock stated, six thirty-two AM.
Lee knew the sun had already rose form the ocean, due to the light coming for the outline of the curtains on the sliding glass door.
Lee thought, 'I slept for over eighteen hours... Still, that was a good sleep. This is a good bed... I might as well get up and face the day. I need to get cleaned up, and get a shower.'
'Though, I don't have shaving cream, razor, deodorant, toothbrush, toothpaste, nor spare change of clothing. Oh well, that was the price of escape. At least I have a comb for my hair. And I have the money to replace those items. So, those shortages will change very soon. And a shower will help... And I am hungry. I hope that breakfast buffet is open right now.'
Lee then got up from his bed. The light from outside provided enough indirect light for him to see his way to the bathroom.
When he got into the bathroom, he turned on a lights inside. He then took off his clothing, and wrist watch. Next, he got cleaned up, showered. Fortunately, along with toilet paper and towels. The hotel provided complimentary small bars of soap, and a small bottle of shampoo.
After Lee showered, he dried off with the soft hotel towels, combed his hair, and he put back on his clothing, and watch.
He left his comb by the sink, in his bathroom.
As Lee put on his shoes, in his new bedroom, he saw on the clock that it was now six fifty AM.
He then checked himself in the bedroom mirror. And he looked alright.
He then looked at his watch, and a thought occurred to him.
Lee turned to the clock in the room, as he thought, 'I better adjust my watch to this time zone. I am a few hours off.'
Lee then adjusted his digital watch to the clock in his room.
Next, he made sure he had the key to the his suite, on the keyring. After he did so, he walked to the door to the hallway.
He unlocked the top deadbolt lock, he then turned the knob. After which, he walked into the hallway, and he gently shut the door behind him.
When Lee released the knob it automatically locked, just before it shut.
After which, Lee headed for the elevators, to get something to eat at the hotel bar and restaurant.
(_)
Three minutes later, Lee walked across the front, ground lobby, from the elevator banks on the right side of the lobby, to the hallway with the sign for the restaurant, on the left side of the lobby.
When he entered that left hallway, he turned to his left, and he saw the entrance to the restaurant was about thirty feet in front of him.
The entrance to the restaurant was a set of paned double-doors, which were currently open.
As he approached the doors, he saw no sign by the door, which stated the restaurant's business hours.
Lee thought, 'I will just ask an employee when this place opens and closes.'
It took only a few seconds for Lee to reach the restaurant. As he entered the establishment, he looked around the restaurant and bar.
In the center of the room were several round, wooden tables, in the tiled floor, with cushioned, armless, wooden chairs set around them, in grouped of four to six chair per table.
The room looked like it could seat over a hundred people.
Across the room, from the door was a small stage, set up from the floor. On Lee's right side, he sat on that side of the stage, against the wall, was some speakers, with four wireless microphones on top of the speakers. By the speakers were two flat screens mounted to the wall. One screen was angled towards the stage, the other screen was angled for the audience. All wires for the screens and speakers went into a large box that was set against the far corner of the wall, on the stage.
There was a sign by the stage, which said, in both spanish, and english, “Karaoke machine used night. All are welcome to give it a try. Wide music selection.”
Lee thought, 'Nice. I have never tried karaoke before. And I am more than willing to give it a go. I got nothing better to do in the evenings. When I am not working on my plans. I guess the screens must show the lyrics, both for the singer, and the audience. And the screen also probably is used to select the music. Given hard drive space for computers today, and the selection of music on this karaoke machine has is probably quite wide. Especially, considering this island is not an a map, and the management of this hotel likely doesn't have to worry about lawsuits.'
Lee then looked and saw that the bar counter was to his left, a few feet into the restaurant
Between the bar counter and the doors was a hallway for the kitchen area, and restrooms of the restaurant.
The bar counter itself was shaped like an upside down, uppercase, L, shape, with the counter running along parallel with the other side of the room, and then turning to face the stage. The entrance to the counter being beside the hallway, towards the front of the room.
Lee saw that the cash register was on the side of the bar counter, near the hallway, at the front of the restaurant.
Lee saw that the person manning the cash register was a woman, in a hotel clerk's uniform.
To Lee's right, he saw the breakfast buffet, with foot, and drinks, lining the far right side of the wall.
Lee looked at the people on the room, as he thought, “I would estimate that the room was about twenty percent full at the moment. Which, given the time of day, is pretty good. I think I got here before the breakfast crowd came. Now, got get something to eat.' He then turned to look at the cashier, as he continued his thought, 'I might as well pay the woman first. And maybe get some questions answered about this restaurant and bar.'
Lee then walked over to the cashier. He found that there was presently no line in front of the cashier.
As he stopped in front for the cashier, across the bar counter from her. The woman looked to be middle-aged, she was of average height, and physically fit, though, she had a little meet on her bones. And from her skin tone and facial features, she looked to be from India.
She looked up at Lee, as she said something in spanish.
Lee politely said, “Good morning. I apologize, but I do not know spanish.”
The woman replied, in english, with an indian accent, “That is quite alright. And good morning to you too. I am Emily. What would you like for breakfast.”
Lee answered, “Well Emily, how much is the buffet in U.S. cash?”
Emily told him.
Lee thought, 'That is very cheap. I hope the food, and drinks, are good.' Lee said, “I think I will order a buffet.”
After Emily rung him up on the cash register, he pulled out the cash for the buffet, and he got the receipt and change.
As Lee pocketed the receipt and change, he inquired, “Is it okay if I ask you a few questions?”
Emily replied, “Sure. We are not busy, yet. So, ask away.”
Lee asked, “I did not see a sign outside, in the hallway, by the restaurant, which stated its business hours. So, when does this restaurant open, and close? When do you serve alcohol? When do you serve off a menu? And when do you serve a buffet during the day?”
Emily casually commented, “That is okay. Those are all good questions. We do not have a sign there, because that sign keeps disappearing. We don't know why.”
“The restaurant opens at five thirty AM, and closes at midnight, or a little later. That depends on the bartender, whom gets in around ten thirty AM. He is a nice guy. The staff and customers like him.”
“For the most part, we do not serve alcohol in the morning, until the bartender gets in. We can get you a bottle of beer, but that is extra, to the cost of the buffet, since we already provide drinks for buffet. We only serve the breakfast buffet, everyday, from five thirty AM, to ten thirty AM. Also, it is all you can eat. We also have a breakfast menu during those hours.”
“For the rest of the day, we accept orders from our lunch and dinner menu, all the way, till about eleven thirty PM at night. That is when we start cleaning the kitchen. Though, we close the bar between eleven thirty to midnight. Depending on how busy we are. It is the bartender's call on that. Though, if we are not that busy, the bartender can sometimes call as early as ten thirty PM.”
“Still, you will find our menu selections nice. Also, there are some restaurants around town that are good, as well. The restaurants in this town cater to a number of different styles of food. We get a lot of foreigners coming to town and staying. And a few of us have opened up restaurants that serve food from our homelands. Most of us are pretty good a fixing food.”
Lee thought, 'That confirms Emily is from out of town. Now, for a few other questions I have.' He asked, “That is nice to know. What else do this hotel provide?”
Emily answered, “We have a laundry mat just up the hallway from here. We have indoor hot tubs, on the right side of the building, with sliding glass doors facing the fully sized, outdoor pool. With the other, direct entrance to the pool being down in the hallway, behind the desk, to our right. Once you enter that hallways, just immediately take another right, and keep going to the pool. You cannot miss the pool.”
“We have a full workout gym that overlooks the beach. A game room, with pool tables, and video games. And we have a small theater room in the hotel, on the ground floor that plays requested videos. Any videos, as long as it is not outright pornography. Movies, TV shows, animations, music videos. Whatever you want.”
“Though, this service is first come, first serve, on request. With then taking a few minutes to find the request, and waiting for what is playing to finish. But, it is free for customers of the hotel, to listen and watch. And we don't usually get a lot of requests on the off season. Most of the time, it is just families, and large group wanting to watch a movie somewhere, besides their hotel rooms.”
“Though, the theater cannot be closed for a private party. It is open to all customers, as long as those customer behave and are not disruptive.”
Lee responded, “Thank you. You had been very helpful, Emily.”
Emily replied, “You're welcome. And enjoy your meal.”
Lee inquired, “I plan to. Still, I have one more question for you.”
Emily said, “Sure. What is it?”
Lee asked, “I don't mean to pry, but how did someone from India end up here, in Mexico?”
Emily stated, “It is okay. When we were young and stupid, once. My younger, Grace, and I joined a group to try to end the hidden apartheid of India. We lost, but the two of us got away. And now we are here.”
Lee thought, 'So, they were revolutionaries. Interesting. Not surprising. But, interesting. Also, Emily and Grace are obviously aliases for these two sisters. So, they are not worried if people know those aliases, because they cannot be traced back to their past in India. And with over a billion people in that nation, it is hard to backtrack two of them. Now, to be polite.'
Lee said, “Thank you.”
Emily replied, “No problem.”
Lee then turned, and headed to the buffet, which was across the room. As he did so, he thought, 'What what Emily told me about herself, this place is getting more mysterious, by the day.'
Lee soon found that the buffet had mostly mexican breakfast food, and american breakfast food. Which was not surprising, given what both culture ate very practical types of food items for breakfast.
Still, Lee could not stomach the mexican food, even though he loved the taste of it. The food did not agree with him. But, there was plenty of other food to choose from.
Also, the drink selection was fair. There was bottled water, orange juice, apple juice, milk, and coffee, to choose from.
Lee soon had a plate of american food, including scrambled eggs, hash-browns, and french toast, in his right hand. He had a glass of an orange juice in his left hand. And he had his napkin and utensils, held between the glass and his left fingers
He soon found an empty table that he sat, as he began to eat his breakfast.
As he ate, he found that the food, and orange juice, were good.
(_)
When Lee finished his breakfast, he looked at his digital wrist watch, and he saw that it was seven thirty-four AM
He picked up his plate and glass, and walked over to the area where he saw people dumping their dirty dishes at.
As he turned and walked towards the hallway exit of the restaurant, he turned to Emily. As he passed by her, he politely said, “Please let cooks know they did a wonderful job with breakfast.”
Emily turned to Lee, as she smiled. She happily responded, “I will. And have a pleasant morning.”
Lee replied, “You to.” He then turned turned the doors of the restaurant, and a few seconds later, he walked out of the establishment.
As Lee turned to his right, and walked down the hallway, towards the lobby, he thought, 'I am going to need find out where some places are. I think it might be best if I ask the clerks up front.'
'The one yesterday was very nice. And so was Emily, here. Still, I need to also find out where the places I need. And when they are open.'
'Also, I need to know which ones have the best prices. And how to find these places on foot. I am going to have to walk where I need to get, to save money. But, I can use the exercise. Though, I am dying, if I start exercising now, and regularly, from here on in. I might buy myself an extra week of life.'
Lee then reached the exit to the front lobby. He turned for the check in desk.
When Lee reached the desk, and he asked the clerks on duty, the questions he needed. He found that the clerks at the check in desk were very helpful with his questions. They told him the places that were best for what he needed to get. Which had the best prices. How to get to those places on foot. And when they opened. Which, Lee found out that most of the places opened between eight and nine AM. Which meant they would open just as he reached them.
When Lee was finished with his questions, he thanked the clerks on duty, and walked out the lobby, and into the conformable sunny day, out onto the parking lot.
Lee soon walked out of the parking lot, and towards the make business district of the town, which was only a few blocks away from him.
As Lee headed to the places he needed to go, he kept an eye out for danger. But, he found that everyone was just going about their business, and they left him alone. Which, given the circumstances, was fine with Lee.
Because it was a weekday, there were no problems with any of the shops not being open that day.
The first place Lee went to, which he reached right after eight AM, when they opened, was a hair salon, that had a men's barber section.
The wait was short, and Lee soon was in the chair of the barber. First, Lee had a professional shave of his face. He found the barber did a wonderful job, with no nicks, nor cuts. Next, he got his hair cut into a masculine, short style. But, not a crew cut. Finally, he got his hair dyed, from his natural color, to black.
This was all part of Lee's plan. And he was happy with the salon's results. After he paid them for their services, he left the salon.
The next place Lee went to a small grocery store. There he got soap, shampoo, shaving cream, disposable razors, deodorant, toothbrush, toothpaste, dental tape, toothpicks, six bottles of water, and a small bag of candy. He also bought a deck of playing cards for his suite. So, he would have something to do during the times he was in his suite. All of these items fit in a small plastic bag.
And last, but not least, Lee went to a decently priced clothing store, where he bought several pairs of underwear, socks, pants, and shirts. He also bought a gym bag, a blue cloth jacket, a blue baseball cap, some nice looking sunglasses, and some large, fake glasses, with just clear plastic lens.
This all fit into two large clothing bags. One was a full bag. The other bag was half full. Lee stuck his grocery bag into the half filled bag.
And after all this, Lee found he still had plenty of money for food for the next few weeks.
Fortunately, the two bags were now that heavy. So, Lee was able carry them back to the hotel. Which was not to difficult. Though, Lee kept a more careful eye out for trouble, as he headed for the Devil's Hotel. But, luckily he had not problems.
It was ten thirty by the time Lee returned to the hotel.
After dropped some of the items off in his suite, on the third floor, he went back to the ground level, with his clothes, and gym bag, to wash them at hotel laundry mat.
Two hours later, Lee finished cleaning, and drying his clothing. He then stuffed his clothing into his gym bag, and he headed up to his suite on the third floor.
When he got his room, he pulled out his clothing, and folded all of it. He then put away all of his clothing, except a clean set of underwear, socks, t-shirt, and pants, the chest of drawers. Along with this, he left out his jacket, baseball cap. He even folded his gym bag up, and put it into the chest of drawers.
Afterward, placed his two sets of glasses, his bag of candy, and his deck of cards, by the TV. He then put his bottles of water into the refrigerator, except for one he took into the bathroom with him.
He then brushed his teeth with his new toothbrush and toothpaste. He used the bottle of water he had to rinse his mouth out.
Next, he took a shower, using the shampoo and soap he bought. After he was rinsed off, he used a towel to dry. When he was dry, he used his deodorant, and he put on his fresh clothing.
Lee also transferred the belongs in his old pants into the pockets of his new set of pants, along with him looping his belt through his new pants.
Once his belt was buckled, he tucked in his shirt.
After Lee put on, and tied his shoes, he then walked over and put on his large glasses, his blue baseball cap, and his blue cloth jacket.
The temperature outside was just cool enough to warrant wearing a jacket, without anyone being suspicious about it.
Lee then walked into the bathroom, and looking at himself in the mirror.
With his the new black hair style, glasses, and baseball cap, Lee could barely recognized himself.
He said out loud, “This will do.” He then mentally added, 'Now, to get some lunch. The way Emily spoke of the bartender here. He sounds like he could be useful to me, in a number of ways.'
Lee turned off the lights, and shut the locked door to his suite behind him. He then headed down the hallway, to the elevator bay, and the ground floor, to go to the hotel restaurant and bar.
As Lee walked though the lobby, out of the corner of his eyes, he noticed a security camera.
He continued walking, as he thought, 'It is too bad that I was to tired to get my disguise before I got here. And a few of the cameras got a good look of my face, yesterday and this morning. Still, if I don't say anything about it, and wait a week, or two, it is likely that people will forget what I originally looked like, and the cameras footage will be deleted, so that hard drive space will be reused for new footage.'
'That just means that either way, my time table will be at least a few weeks, until I move forwards. Which is fine, because I am going to need that time to plan and prepare, for what I have in mind.'
Around a minute later, Lee walked into the restaurant, as he glanced at his watch to see that it was one o two PM. He then looked around the room to see that it was establishment was not busy.
Lee saw a few waitresses around the room. They were in hotel uniforms, and they were waiting the tables, but Lee felt like going to the bar.
Lee walked up to the bar counter, facing the left side of the room. And he sat in the stool. From behind the bar, an older man walked up to Lee.
The man had fair skin, and he looked to be in his early sixties. But, he was still in good physical shape. Though, his body build was a little on the lean side. He had clearly shaved the hair on his head, as he was bald. Also, he had a dyed blond goatee, mustache, and eyebrows.
The man wore a white t-shirt, under a green sweater, with brown pants, and black dress shoes. He also wore a red newsboy cap on his head. But, around the cap, Lee could clearly see the man had shaved his head bald.
Lee thought, 'Given this guy's clear age, why would he dye his facial hair, yet shave his hair. Unless, he is in hiding. From what, I don't know, nor do I care. Still, I wonder if this is the guy that Emily was talking about?'
The man said, in crystal clear english, “Hello. What can I get for you, today?”
Lee requested, “A menu. Also, this morning, Emily said that bartender. I guess you. Were a decent guy. So, I thought I would meet you.”
The old man smile, as he replied, “Emily is such a sweet dear”
Lee agreed, “From what little I know of her, I would agree. My name is, Lee. What is yours?”
The man answered, “I am, Melvin. Nice to meet you, Lee.” He then extended his right hand.
Lee shook the Melvin's hand, with his own right hand. As Lee did so, Lee noted that Melvin's handshake was firm, but not tight. Just like Lee's own grip. which Melvin noticed, as well.
Lee thought, 'A firm handshake is a good sign of character.' He said, “And it is nice to meet you, Melvin.”
A second later, they broke their handshake.
Melvin then pulled out a menu from under the counter. He set it in front of Lee, on the counter, as he said, “The menu is in spanish, and english. I have other customers. I will be back in a minute, for you to tell me what you want.”
While Lee picked up the menu, and looked at it, he replied, “That will be fine, Melvin.”
(_)
Lee ordered a club sandwich, with chips, and a soda. He found that the meal was tasty, good, and at a decent price.
After he finished his meal, he paid for it, left Melvin a fair tip, and politely requested that Melvin let the cooks know they did a good job.
Melvin happily said he would.
Lee use the restaurant men's restroom, and he then left for the hotel lobby.
When he reached the lobby, he looked at his watch to see that it was one forty PM.
Lee looked up, at the check in desk, as he thought, 'I guess it is time to find the Rats Nest bar.' He then headed to the check in desk.
(_)
Fortunately, after Lee got directions to the Rats Nest bar, it only took him only forty minutes to walk to the bar, at a reasonable walking pace.
The outside of the bar was wooden, and brown colored, for the most part. There was a parking lot the left side of the bar, when coming into the building.
The front of the bar was line with large, paneled windows, except for a door in the center.
On the top front of the building, there was a sign, which looked like it could be lit during the night, in large letters, in english, “Rats Nest.”
At Lee looked at the front of the Rats Nest, he thought, 'When I looked at the front of this bar, and inside, through the front windows, why does Rock quote, at the first episode of Black Lagoon come to mind? The so called bar at the end of the world you see in westerns, quote.'
'The clerks at the Devil's Hotel did warn me that the Rat Nest was a tough place. But, I still have to come here.'
'Though, I did one time look into dangers bar on the internet. And I found that there are actual bars in real life that are dangerous as the Yellowflag in Black Lagoon. Or, in some cases, even more dangerous. And I don't have a gun.'
'Oh well. I have to check out this lead. I have no choice. And I am facing worse, so there is not much to worry about... So, I might as well walk in.'
Lee then walked up to the front door, open it, walked inside, and gently close it behind him.
As he stood, with his back to the closed door, he looked inside the bar, and he saw that it was not very large room.
The bar had brown wooden floor, bar counter, stools, tables, and chairs, giving the bar an old western motif. He also saw that the left side of the room was line with large, paneled windows, like the front of the bar.
When Lee turned to his left side, he could see that parking lot to the bar through the windows on the left side of the room.
To Lee's right there was a bar counter, in a right side up, L, shape that faced the side of the bar, and the front of the bar, with cushioned stools along the counter.
Across from the bar were several round tables, with cushioned, wooden armless chairs.
Lee estimated that the room could fit around a fifty people in all.
On the back wall, near the middle of the room, there were doors for the restroom, beside each other. With the doors being directly in line with the front door. The door to Lee's left side had a, men, label on the door. And the other door, to Lee's right side, had a, woman, label on the door.
The door to the other parts of the building, was behind the bar counter, on the right wall, by the back, right back corner of the room.
Also, the bar counter entrance was right beside the door corner door, in right back part of the bar.
On the far end of the bar counter, near the door to the back part of building, was a cash register.
Lee also noticed there were not that many people there. Most of them were sitting at a table, in the back left corner of the bar, playing poker, with money.
And the bartender to the Rats Nest appeared to be a very beautiful, young woman, in pants and a shirt. She had a slender build. And she had her hair in a short, feminine hair style, that was very professional looking.
Lee thought, 'I might as well be polite, and order a beer.'
Lee walked up to the bar counter, and sat to where his back was to the windows showing in the parking lot.
This also allowed him to see the front door.
Lee thought, 'It is always wise to keep an eye towards the front door in places like this. Never turn you back to the front door.'
From behind the bar counter, the beautiful woman walked up to Lee.
Lee looked at her in her eyes, not her chest, as he thought, 'In situations like this. First impressions are very important. I need to look at her face, not her breasts.'
The woman noticed this. Still, she said, in a slight hard, no nonsense, tone of voice, in fluent english, “What do you want?”
Lee continued to look at her face, as he thought, 'She can probably tell I am from the U.S., so she just started with english. Now, to make my order.' He answered, “A bottle of beer. Something cheap, tasty, and cold.”
The woman cracked a grin, as she said, “Sure. Two U.S. dollars.”
Lee pulled out two dollars from his wallet and handed it to her, with his left hand, while he pocketed his wallet with his right hand.
The woman took the money. The then woman pulled a cold beer from a refrigerator under the table, and set it in front of Lee.
After which, the woman went to check on her other customers.
Lee looked at the bottle of beer, as he gripped it with his right hand. It was cold to the touch, and it was a cheap, though tasty American brand.
Lee used his left hand to open the cap of the bottle, without a problem. He then took a drink from the beer, as he thought, 'I will give her this. She will give you what you ask for.'
Over the course of the next ten minutes, Lee just sipped his beer, as he starred in front of him, at the mirror over the shelf of bottles, across the bar counter. He thought, 'What am I suppose to do now? I am at the rough bar. Clearly not going to cause trouble. But, the flier lead me here. So, what am I suppose to do now. Maybe I just need to think on my plans. I got nothing better to do.'
From the corner of his eye, Lee noticed the bartender glancing over at him. He thought, 'That is the third time she has done that in the last few minutes. But, I don't liked it.”
The woman then walked over to him. She casually said, “You look like a man with a lot on his mind. And I am a woman that is just bored enough to ask. I have noticed that you didn't look at my breasts when you first came in. And instead, you consciously looked at my face. That earned you points in my book.”
Lee looked at her, in the face, as he replied, “Thank you. And the name is, Lee.”
The woman replied, “Lee? That is an asian name?”
Lee thought, 'Interesting. She did not tell me her name. Not that it matters. I am in hiding. And asking such questions will get me noticed. Though, I do need to make one thing clear about my alias.'
Lee corrected, “Actually, Lee is both an asian name, and a name for caucasians from the southeastern United States. And the name, Lee, means two different things, depending on if it is the asian meaning, or the american meaning.”
The woman responded, with slight curiosity in her voice, “Interesting. And Lee, you have an odd look about you. You look like a man who is both running from trouble, and running towards trouble. So, what got you to come all the way out here?”
Lee shrugged, “You could say that I was channeling so serious mojo, and I got out before I was burned.”
The bartender smirked, as she commented, “Let me guess. A woman?”
Lee coyly replied, “Something like that.”
The bartender said, “You know there is nothing worse in hell's fury than a woman scorned.”
Lee corrected, “You are wrong about that. There is nothing worse in hell's fury than women scorned. Plural.”
The bartender let out a laugh. She stated, “Whatever you are, Lee, you are in clearly trouble. My kind of trouble. So, good luck with that.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
The bartender cracked a grin, as she looked at Lee. She then turned, and went to see to her other customers.
Meanwhile, Lee turned to look around the bar, as he sipped his beer, which was now almost empty.
Lee thought, 'Let's admit it. I'm screwed. From the broadcast, the women are looking for me. Or, should I saw, whom they call, the writer.'
'The only plan that I can come up with is that I use myself as bait, by posting something on the internet, and let them trace it to this town. The hotel to be exact. Any wider an area, and things become too difficult for me manage. I need them close for this plan to work.'
'But, by doing so, I am literally dancing with tigers. In an insane, high stakes, cat and mouse game. Hoping they won't eat me, while I quietly steal one of their bells, or reality devices, in this case, without them knowing it, until I am gone.'
'The only good news is I used aliases and a VPN, along with the police state of the internet, with firewalls on top of firewalls, they don't know my real name and likeness. And the disguise and alias I have now will help myself even further.'
'Also, the plan is workable. Though, it will be a few weeks before I do this. I do not want to pulled the trigger on this just yet. Not until I have a good lay of the land around here. After I have fun the proper planning and preparation.'
'When I am ready, I will post something on the internet, that they can trace here from the IP address record. While, I make sure I am not recorded in doing so. The hotel does have wireless internet access.'
'The reason I don't get a computer myself is to fold. I cannot afford the money, and I would be tempted to use it often, and I am sure, if I did, I would get caught by someone tracing me. So, I have to use someone else's computer.'
'Though, all I need to do is pay someone that is going to leave, in a day, or two, to allow me use their computer for five minutes. Not hard, I just have to be careful. A hundred bucks, and a kind word will probably let me use someone's computer. I say I just need to check my e-mail real quick. And leave message. Then, I put the message, and delete my tracks on the computer. Hell, the person can watch, he or she won't notice anything wrong.'
'The message I am planning on posting is. Sorry for everything.'
'Then, I hope the women take the bait, and send a few in their group after me.'
'I am looking at one to three women, at most. This is a manageable number. They will not be watching each others backs all the time. I just wait for my opportunity. Next, it is a matter of drugging them, and stealing one of their reality devices. Not impossible. I just have to be on my toes. Once I have the reality device. I can escape into the multiverse, and seek treatment for my medical problems. Among other things. And it will be simple as that...'
Lee inwardly groaned, as he mentally admitted, 'Ah, let's be honest. I am dealing with Murphy's Law here. It will not be that simple. But, it is a workable plan.'
Lee then saw man with a well groomed, full beard, and long hair cropped in a ponytail by a scrunchy, sitting in the corner table. The man had clean out the other five men sitting at the table, by playing various hands of poker.
For a second, Lee eyes and the man's eyes locked.
Lee thought, 'Damn it. I got someone's attention. This is bad. I just have to be polite, and I can probably get out of this. But, not knowing spanish is going to likely get me hurt here. Still, there is nothing I can do about that.'
As the others at the corner table got up and left the bar, the man also got up, collected his money, pocketed his cash, and calmly walked over to Lee.
The man was had fair skin, and he wore a dark plaid button up, long sleeved shirt, brown pants, brown leather belt, and black cowboy boots.
When the man reached Lee, he sat in a stool beside Lee, at the bar counter.
The man turned to face Lee, and the front of the bar behind Lee, as he calmly said, in english, “Hello.”
Lee replied, “Hello.”
The man said, “I am, Sam. What is your name?”
Lee answered, “Lee.”
Sam smiled, as he stated, “Nice to meet you, Lee. You look a like a man without friend in this town.”
Lee mentally thought, 'More like this planet. Hell, more like this multiverse.' He admitted, “You could say that, Sam”
Sam offered, “Want to join me for a round of poker?”
Lee thought, 'I just watched you hammer those people. Still, I wonder exactly what type of game you are playing?' He inquired, “What type?'
Sam said, “Casual five card draw poker. Nothing special. Five card draw. Up to three cards replaced. Betting, bluffing, and calling. Betting starts at one dollar, U.S.”
Lee stated, “It has been a while since I played some poker. And if you are looking for an easy mark, you are going to have try a better pitch. I just saw you clean out those five men at the table.”
Sam chuckled. He then complimented, “You may not have a friend, but you clearly have some common sense. I like that. And I am also bored out of my mind. I have plenty of money, but not one here, save for the bartender, whom a sense of humor that I appreciate. Except perhaps for you.”
At the moment, the bartender was collecting glasses from across the room, at the table Sam had been sitting at it. Though, the bartender left Sam's drink alone, along with the deck of cards that was on the table.
The bartender had clearly overheard them, as she commented, “Thank you, Sam.”
Sam looked over at bartender, as he said, “You're welcome.” He then turned back to Lee, as he commented, “Anyway, you look like someone who really has nothing left to, except some cash. On the other hand, I have plenty cash. And I am doing this more as a hobby, than anything else. So, why not?”
Lee mentally admitted, 'Sam, you are right about me having nothing really left to lose. And I could use this to both practice my precognition, and my poker face. I won't get anywhere in my plan if I cannot hide my emotions better. So...' He replied, “Oh hell. I might, as well.”
Sam smiled at Lee, as he stated, “Good. Come with me to the corner table.” He stood up, and walked to the back left corner table.
Lee finished his bottle of beer and left it on the bar counter. He then got up and followed Sam to the table.
Meanwhile, the bartender walked back over to behind the bar counter.
Sam sat with his back to the corner, while Lee sat a little to Sam's left, across the table from him. This allowed Lee to still see the entrance to the bar with the corner of his left eye.
Sam pulled out some of his money, and placed it on the table.
Lee did the same.
Sam then picked up the deck of cards from the table, and he began shuffling them.
Sam soon finished shuffling. He then started to deal the cards, as he stated, “Don't worry. I will go easy on you. I have a feeling you have potential. And I do enjoying watching someone's potential come to the forefront.”
Lee replied, “I appreciate that. By the way, do you know the bartender's name? I have a feeling she would not answer that question, if I asked her.”
Sam grinned mischievously, as he said, “You would be right. No one knows, and that is the way she likes.”
Lee shrugged, as he replied, “Works for me.”
After the five cards were dealt for each of them, both men picked up their cards and looked at them.
Lee causal his body language, and facial expression relaxed, as he thought, 'Since I am playing for money, I have to have a poker face. And I have to prevent myself from showing any tails. If I get this down, I might start experimenting with my precognitive abilities. I have some ideas, but I will need someone's help. And Sam seems to be the kind of guy that might help.'
'And at least, this will help stop him from being bored. Which my earn me a friend here. Or, a quicker death, If it is playing. Either way, I don't have a bad hand. So, let's see how this plays out.'
Sam put down a U.S. dollar in the center of the table, as he stated, “I will start the betting pool with one dollar.”
Lee matched the U.S. dollar, and put down another dollar, as he said, “I will see that dollar. And raise you a dollar.”
Lee soon one the first hand. And they played around hand. And another hand.
The next few hours went by quickly for both men.
Lee lost some hands and won some hands. But, he won way more than he lost. The only time they stopped was to get a few beers, and for bathroom breaks.
As Lee held his cards, in the middle of the hand they were in, he knew he had a bad hand, as he said, “I fold.”
He then put his cards down, with Sam winning around twenty dollars from that hand.
As Sam collected the cards, and the pot, Lee looked at his watch, and he saw that it was five thirty PM.
Lee mentally realized, 'It is a forty minute walk to the Devil's Hotel. And it will be dark soon. I need to get back. Still, I think I got won quite a bit of money here. I would say around four hundred dollars. Though, he may have let me when. But, why?... Probably to someone around, to keep him entertained. He did say this was more of a hobby for him.'
'Still, four hundred dollars is four hundred dollars. If I am frugal. This will keep me fed for at least a month and a half, without me going into my savings.'
Lee stated, “I apologize, Sam. But, I don't have a car, and I have to walk back to where I am staying.”
Sam suggested, “Why not call a taxi?”
Lee stated, “I need the exercise, and I am trying to save money.”
Sam requested, “That is understandable. My I join you in your walk?”
Lee shrugged, as he said, “Sure.”
Both men then collected this money, and Sam also collected the cards. With Sam putting his cards back into the cardboard box for his playing cards. The men then pocketed their items.
The two men then got up from the table, and heading for the front door.
On their way out out of the bar, Lee dropped a ten dollar tip on the counter for the bartender.
At that moment, the bartender had been standing behind the bar counter. She saw the tip that Lee had laid.
As the bartender collected the ten dollar bills, she said, “Thanks.”
Lee turned his head, as he said, “You're welcome.” He then looked to his front, as he opened the door for Sam. Next, Lee followed behind Sam, with Lee closing the door behind him.
When the reached outside, the turned and walked down the right side of the sidewalk, when exiting the bar.
Sam slowed down enough, for Lee to catch up. He then walked at a cause pace, beside Lee, to Lee's right side.
As they walked down the sidewalk, Sam asked, “So, where are you staying?”
Lee answered, “The Devil's Hotel.”
Sam commented, “So, am I.”
Lee responded, “That is not surprising. I have been here for just over twenty-four hours. And except for the name, the place is nice. My suite is good. The employees are polite. The food and drinks are nice. And the prices on everything are great deals.”
Sam agreed, “Exactly. That is why I checked in there. I did some research first, and I found the place had the best bang for my buck, and it came highly recommended by those that have stayed there.”
Lee said, “Yes. They did say they like repeat business. That seems to be a rarity nowadays. Most businesses are just trying to make a quick buck, as their customers expensive.”
Sam replied, “I know. And I don't get that.”
Lee stated, “It is short sightedness. That is all.”
Sam said, “I guess that is true.”
The two continued talking, as they walked towards the hotel they were both staying at.
Lee found that Sam was a good conversationalist, and that he was very knowledgeable. But, Lee was careful not to give away who he really ways, and why he was in De La Plata Podrido.
After around forty minutes of walking, they made it to the front lobby doors of the Devil's Hotel.
Lee thought, 'Looks like we are becoming fast friends. I have never had a friend before. I won't mind having at least one in my lifetime.'
As they entered the hotel lobby, they both noticed the music in the lobby change to a song that Lee recognized the new song. It was, Deranged, by Coheed and Cambria.
Sam stated, “I do not know this song.”
Lee said, “It is a new song, with a catchy tune.” He mentally add, 'I will refrain from telling him that the song is from a Batman video game, and what the lyrics to the song mean.'
Sam inquired, “So, are you hungry?”
Lee said, “I could use some supper.”
Sam commented, “So, can I.”
Lee suggested, “Hotel bar then?”
Sam agreed, “Why not? I also hear they have karaoke every night.”
Lee replied, “I am game if you are. But, I have never done karaoke before.”
Sam said, in a supportive, positive tone of voice, “Don't worry. It's fun, and easy to learn. Now, let's head there.”
The two men then turned to their left, in the hotel lobby, as they headed for the hotel restaurant and bar.
When they got there, they found people were already starting to use the karaoke machine to sing, which started as six PM. Most of them did okay. And in such singing, it was the effort that counted. With the audience cheering the good performances, but not booing the less than good performances.
The two men sat at the bar counter, with them facing the left wall of the room. The entrance to the restaurant was to their left side, and the stage was to their right side.
Sam saw to Lee's left side.
The two men then ordered their meals, and a couple of bottles of beer to drink.
As they ate, they continued talking between bites, and drinks.
After the finished eating supper, they stayed in the bar, as they each had a bottle of beer almost every hour, while they watched the karaoke performances.
Over the next few hours, Lee and Sam also took a few opportunities to sing some songs. As the people who wanted to sing kept rotating, after singing one song.
Both of them sang badly, with two exceptions.
Sam did a marvelous job of singing karaoke for the Randy Travis song, Highway Junkie.
Sam got a standing ovation at the end of his performance.
Lee turn was next. He sang Kenny Rogers version of, The Gambler song, which everyone clapped when he finished.
Sam and Lee even sang a few songs together, in a duet.
It was a great night for Lee. Probably one of the best nights of his life.
Around ten PM, they called it a night. They paid Melvin for their meals, and drinks. Along with each of them giving him a nice tip.
(_)
Both of Sam and Lee soon made it to the elevator bay together. They saw there was no one else around them.
Sam pushed one of the up button on the panel, between two of elevators, on the side of the room.
Sam then turned to Lee, as he suggested, “Would you like to meet again, tomorrow morning?”
Lee replied, “Sure. When, and where?”
Sam answered, “Let's say eight thirty tomorrow in the morning. We can play poker and talk in the lobby in the morning. And head to the Rats Nest in the afternoon.”
Lee said, “Okay. But, we can alternate playing games, besides poker.”
One of the elevators opened. The two men saw the elevator was empty. They both stepped inside, and turned around to face the open elevator doorway.
As doors closed, Lee selective the third floor, while Sam selected the tenth floor.
Sam replied, “Sure.”
Lee thought, 'Now, to ask for his help, for my precognitive abilities, without getting to detailed.'
Lee requested, “And when we play poker, there like you help with something.”
Sam inquired, “What you have in mind.”
Lee stated, “There is a trick I would like to teach myself, that I think playing poker with you, could help with.”
Sam inquired, “Sounds interesting. What is it.”
Lee thought, 'If I don't tell him, I could blow this friendship, before it even develops. So, why not?' He explained, “Well, believe it or not, I am precognitive. I can sense the future. But, I am not very good at it. And I was wondering if I could try to develop that skill when it comes to playing poker.”
Sam raised an eyebrow, as he stated, “Now, that sounds interesting. I would love to help you.”
Lee smiled, as he replied, “Thank you. We will do it for a little bit, tomorrow morning. But, when we do, no money until I get the hang of of this trick.”
Sam agreed, “Sure. I can understand. And when you do master that trick, you will be one formidable poker player. If not a fighter.”
Lee pointed out, “I am not a fighter. I am just a fool in a bad spot of luck.”
Sam chuckled, as he shook his head. He said, “That is pretty much what they all say, in the beginning.”
Lee replied, “We'll see.”
The elevator door opened to the third floor, as stated by the digital readout, above the floor selection panel, in the elevator.
Lee commented, “This is my floor.”
Lee walked out of the elevator, and turned to face Sam, as he said, “See you tomorrow morning, Sam.”
Sam smiled, as he replied, “See you to, Lee.”
The elevators doors then closed.
Lee turned and headed down the hallway, his room.
When Lee reached his room, unlocked the door, and turned on the ceiling light. He then walked over to the lamp light by his bed, turned it on, and then switched off the ceiling light.
As he headed for the bed, he grabbed the TV remote, on top of the chest of drawers.
He was intent on watching some TV, for a few minutes. Then, something occurred to him, as he thought, 'This hotel offers both TV and internet. That reminds me. I need to do something, before I forget too.”
Lee set the TV remote back on top of the chest of drawers. He then walked over to the steel trash can, and picked it up, with his left hand. He saw that the trash can was empty. Next, he walked over the heavy curtains that were in front of the sliding glass window.
He used his right hand to opened the have curtains, by the draw string, to his right, by the corner of the sliding glass door, as he thought, 'I hope this does not damage the trash can. If there is a problem, I will pay for a new trash can. Still, I have to do this. If I have any hope of getting through this alive, I have to live completely off the grid.'
Lee then unlocked the latch to the sliding glass door, at the top of the door, to his right side. He then pushed, by its handle, to his left side, to open it.
He then walked into his suite's balcony, which had a steal, guardrail.
Even though it was night, Lee's lamp light provided all the light he needed to see with, to do this.
Also, it was fortunate that it was not too windy.
Lee pulled out his passport, his wallet, and his lighter.
From his wallet, he pulled out his ID cards. He then put his wallet back into a pants pocket.
After which, he used his lighter to set each of his pieces of ID to burn. As they caught fire, he dropped them into the steel trash can, and he watched them melt and turn to ashes.
He burned all his ID cards. He started with his passport. Soon, among other IDs, he had destroyed his driver's license, bank cards, concealed weapons license.
When Lee finished, he thought, 'No turning back, now. But, this had to be done. These IDs could be used to find me. Someone could steal my wallet. Or, if I hid the IDs here, they could pick the lock to my room, and find my IDs in here. Either way would likely lead for it to be game over for me. Now, to clean up.'
After Lee made sure there was nothing but ashes, he got a bottle of water, and pour a little bit of water into the trash can, to stop the smoldering. When he was sure it was no longer hot. He took the trash can into the hotel bedroom.
Lee closed the sliding glass door, and the curtains, behind himself.
He then found the plastic groceries bag he had brought with him, earlier that day.
He took the trash can, and the plastic bag, into the bathroom.
Lee turned on the bathroom light, and used some toilet paper to clean out the ashes from the bottom of the trash can. He put the toilet paper, and the ashes, into the plastic bag. When he was finished, he saw that the bottom of the steel trash can was fine.
He tied up the plastic bag, and he set the trash can back by the refrigerator, on the floor, with the closed plastic bag place by the trash can.
As he when back to wash his hands, he thought, 'I will dump that plastic bag into another trash can, elsewhere in the hotel, tomorrow. And I think I will just head to sleep now.'
Lee then got ready for bed, turned off the lights in his suite, headed for his bed and he went to sleep.
(_)
The next few weeks were filled with interesting misadventures for Lee. Many of those adventures involved Sam.
Lee had found that he had developed a wonderful friendship with Sam.
They played poker a lot, sometimes including other people. Lee found he tended to win more than he lost. And not just from Sam. Lee won money from others, at playing poker. Lee found that was he really developing his poker face skills very well. With him being able to remain calm on command, at a moments notice.
Also, the two men being together, others tended to back off, and leave them alone.
Lee found it odd that while Sam usually shuffled and dealt their cards, Lee won more often, than not, against him. Still, when one lost money to the other, they didn't seem to mind. And Lee made sure not to lose too much during an unlucky streak, which was rare for him.
Also, when it was just Lee and Sam, Sam let Lee experiment with his precognition and playing poker. And the results were interesting, as Lee was slowly able to develop his precognitive abilities further than they naturally were. Lee's psychic ability seemed to amaze Sam. As Sam found that this added ability made playing Lee even more unpredictable.
In addition, they played other games with each other. At the hotel, they played pool. Though, that ended quickly, when Sam showed how good a pool shark he was. When he broke the pool balls, and ran the table, in one turn.
Fortunately, Lee had not been betting money at the time. And Sam just wanted to show how good he was at other games.
Lee complimented Sam on his skills. Though, after such a demonstration, Lee fell back to playing Sam at poker, where he felt that he would have better chances with Sam. And Same did not mind, Lee's reaction to his skills.
During this time, when Lee was not with Sam, Lee worked on his plan, while learning more about the city of Plata Podrido. This included him mapping out, in his head, where the elevator bays and staircases were, in the Devil's Hotel. So, he could come up with several escape routes, if need be.
Among other things and places Lee learned about, he found two other places that he liked to eat at.
One place Lee ate at, from time to time, depending on his mood, was a american style, greasy spoon diner, which served breakfast, lunch, and supper, any time they were open.
The diner was open from six AM, to midnight. And Lee came in there regularly, at different times, to have breakfast, lunch, or dinner.
The diner was called, the Last Resort Diner.
The diner was the only place in town which Lee found to serve good sweet iced tea, and grits.
And while there were occasional workers doing their shifts, three of the workers stood out to Lee.
Those three were two of the waitresses, and one of the cooks.
The two waitresses were a black haired fair skin woman, and redheaded fair skin woman. Both women were slender, young, and pretty. The redhead had short hair, while the black haired woman long hair that hung loosely, down to her shoulders blades.
The black haired woman was named, Lori. The redhead was named, Mary.
There cook was a muscular black haired man with tanned skin. His name was George.
Though, Lee found George to be a good cook, half the time. The other half... Well, the food was edible.
Lee was always polite to all three of them, and they turned the favor.
When the food was good, he complimented them. When it was not, he said nothing. He also made sure to tip those whom serve his food.
And those three seemed to be coming into work every day, pulling eighteen hour shifts. Lee did not know how they did it, and he knew it was rude to ask. Thus, he did not bring up the subject. Though, he admired their work ethic.
The other place Lee found, that he liked to it at, was a food truck that was manned by two slender, young, fair skinned, pretty blond women. One had short blond hair, and the other had long blond hair. Though, they were clearly not sisters.
The two women were based on a street, on the eastern beach of the island.
The two women served sandwiches, including hamburgers, and french fries. Also, they served bottles of water and various sodas.
Lee preferred to go there for lunch. And he also complimented them on their food, and tipped them well.
They appreciated Lee's manners, and his money.
Though, Lee never did get the names of the two women.
(_)
Over three weeks into Lee's stay at the Devil's Hotel, one night, Lee was in the Devil's Hotel restaurant.
Sam had already turned in for the evening. After he paid his tab, he left.
Meanwhile, Lee was drinking the last of his bottle of beer, at the bar counter, with the counter in front of him, as he faced the left side of the room.
Lee found that according to his wrist watch, it was midnight. And as he looked around, he saw only him, and Melvin, the bartender, were in the room.
Lee could sense that he was slightly buzzed from the beers he had been drinking that night. Though, he was feeling more relax, than anything else.
Lee still had a little bit of beer in his bottle, as he set it on the counter in front of him.
Lee thought, 'I am not completely drunk. So, much as just buzz. I am more relaxed, than happy, sad, or angry. This is just the way I like to feel.'
'And as long as I don't drive, I should be fine. And I am going to sleep, in my room, after this. So, that will not be a problem. Still, this is a good opportunity to learn some things about, Melvin.'
Lee saw that Melvin was near him, behind the bar counter, and he was drying some been mugs by hand, with a dish rag.
Lee said, “Hey Melvin. You want to talk about anything? It is just you and me right now. And I am in a good mood to talk.”
Melvin set down his glass and rag, on the shelf on the wall, behind the bar. He then looked over at Lee. He smiled, as he turned, and walked took a few steps closer to Lee.
Melvin came to a stop, as he stood across the counter from Lee. While looking at Lee, he responded, in a casual tone of voice, “Sure. What you do want to talk about?”
Lee replied, “That depends. What do you want to talk about, Melvin?”
Melvin asked, “Well Lee, I was wondering. Where are you from?”
Lee returned Melvin's smile, as he said, “I am from the southeastern United States. I am what you would call a redneck. You?”
Melvin answered, “Russia.”
Lee complimented, “Now, that I think about it, I can barely tell the hint of an accent in your voice.”
Melvin replied, “Thank you. I have a lot of experience with speaking english. So, why are you here?”
Lee thought, 'I will keep it vague. But, might as well be honest. If I am going to learning in front him, I have to give a little to receive a little.' He answered, “Trouble with the law. How about yourself?”
Melvin said, “About the same. Only a lot more complicated for myself.”
Lee offered, “I am all ears.”
Melvin countered, “Isn't that my job?”
Both men chuckled at Melvin's joke.
As they calmed down, Melvin took a deep breath. He then slowly let out that breath.
Melvin the looked back at Lee's eyes, and he saw that Lee's eyes were warm, with a sense of compassion.
Lee saw Melvin's eyes, and he that Melvin's eyes showed a very tired person. And not just physically. But, emotionally, as well.
Melvin stated, “Given my life. I consider myself a very lucky man to get out of my troubles in one piece. It started when I was young, and I was drafted into the Russia military. One thing lead to another, and I ended up a paratrooper.”
“This was during a time, that I sent into the middle of a very horrible war. After my comrades and I got out of that hellhole, in one piece, we discharged from the Russian military. And my military company decided to go freelance.”
“I should have quit right then. But, at the time, I was still young and stupid. Though, the city we moved to wasn't that bad. It was summer all year around. And except for the occasional crazy, everyone knew to leave us alone. Our captain took care of us. She cared out all of us.”
“Then, things got weird. Really weird.”
“But, eventually, things started calm down, but our sergeant resigned.”
“Last I heard, he hooked up with two kids, he is on an endless vacation. Lucky bastard.”
“It was calm for a while under our captain's command. We had many adventures. The captain even got a brown haired girlfriend along the way named, B. I guess time can wear down many people's resolve. Not that we minded. We always figured she swung that way. It explained a lot.”
Lee did not miss the pronoun drops. And while he did not show his reaction on the outside, he thought with wonder, 'Holy crap. Melvin was a member of Hotel Moscow. And with the mention of, B, he has to be from the Hotel Moscow I wrote about. This is the first time I have met a reality traveler, face to face.'
'And this is a good, casual meeting. It could not be a better meeting between the two of us. Though, I am not telling him, who I really am. Also, he is clearly not after me. I think he is hiding from them, like I am. And Melvin is clearly an alias. I have to find out more. For any other reason than I kind of left the Hotel Moscow plot lines open ended. I wonder how things played out?'
Lee asked, “So, what happened next?”
Melvin coyly answered, “Let's just say, that except for the captain, we got older. And many of us had too many regrets. The captain decided to offer us all eternal youth, for a price. Everyone else still alive, took up the captain's offer, but me. I didn't realize at the time that her offer was more of an order, than an offer.”
“I ran. I grabbed my... traveling equipment, but the equipment was shot during my escape. It was totaled, but the equipment still got me here. And I have been making the most out of being here, for the last five years.”
Lee thought, 'Meaning, except for this guy, the rest of the surviving members of Hotel Moscow had the vat process done to them. They have undergone a gender change to a woman, and youth restoration with that super-soldier serum.'
'On the other hand, Melvin wanted to remain a man. He ran, got a reality device, it was shot, and the damage to the device created a blind jump to this reality, for Melvin.'
'Maybe, this incident, of Melvin coming here, five years ago, was even the original crack to this reality. I don't know. But, it was five years ago, for him, and he has been hiding out here since then. Just like I am doing now. And being a bartender is wise job for the situation. It lets him keep an ear to the ground, without people asking him to many questions.'
'Also, this means Balalaika could still has her crew. And they are stronger, faster, and more powerful than ever. That could cause me problems, later on. Though, given the personalities of those after me, I doubt they will send Hotel Moscow to hunt me down. They want to personally deal with me.'
'And I admire Melvin for being this honest and open with me. I respect Melvin's wishes. And I will help him if he needs it.'
Melvin continued, “I have not seen any of them, or whom I think they would look like. So, I feel that I am in the clear. And this is a good life. This job pays okay. And clientele is always interesting. And the local people, the beaches, and weather, most of the time, are nice...”
From the expression of Melvin's face and eyes, Lee saw something occur to Melvin.
Melvin commented, in a sober tone of voice, “Oh god. As far as I know, I am literally the last man standing, from that town.” His tone of voice then began to contain a bit of mirth, as he continued, “You could say I traded one hotel for another hotel.”
Lee thought, 'That would be an understatement. And the first reality traveler I meet, is literally the last man standing from the situation. Now, that is ironic.'
'Still, it is good that he has not seen any of them since then. And unless Balalaika, or B, comes, I doubt anyone else would recognize you, Melvin. I know that Hotel Moscow members did not associate closely with those outside your group. That means I can still bait the others, without risk of you getting caught in the proverbial net they will try to use to catch me. Though...'
Lee suggested, “It sounds like you need a drink.”
Melvin chuckled.
Melvin pulled out a cold bottle of beer, from a fridge, under the counter, by them.
Melvin opened it.
Lee used his right hand to pick up his bottle of beer, from the counter. He toasted, “Live free. Die free.” He then drank the rest of his beer, and set the empty bottle on the counter.
Melvin accepted the toast, as he replied, “I hear that. So, what song did the lobby of the Devil's Hotel play for you, when you entered the hotel, for the first time?”
Lee thought, 'Interesting. I need to learn more about this matter.' He commented, “So, that wasn't my imagination. How does that work?”
Melvin stated, “I am not sure, myself. And I am not sure I want to know. But, the song that plays when you first enter, is the theme you are likely to live by while here.”
“Sometimes, it will also play a song when you walk in to a lobby with someone, or a group, with the song being the theme for you and those with you. You can always tell that it is for you, if you just walk in, and the music playing on the lobby the speakers suddenly changes, and starts playing another song.”
“That new song is your theme, during your stay here And it is a good way to be forewarned about what is coming your way. Though, the lobby ever plays a second song, later in your visit. Just for yourself. Unless it has been a while sense you have been to the Devil's Hotel.”
“So, I ask again. What song did you hear when you walked into the lobby, for the first time?”
Lee thought, 'I wonder why the lobby of this hotel played, Deranged, for Sam and I?... Though, I guess I might as well answer him. I will mention the song that the front lobby played for me. And I will not talk about the song that played for both Sam and I.'
Lee responded, “To answer your question, the lobby played, Hotel California.”
Melvin said, “Ouch. It looks like you are going to be stuck here for a while.”
Lee thought, 'Actually, given I am dying of cancer. That might be a hopeful song, in that I may have more time than I realize. Though, I long since decided, soon after I got here, that it is best not to time of my cancer. It just detract what I need to do. Still, I wonder.'
Lee shrugged, as inquired, “It could be worse. How about you? What song did lobby play for you?”
Melvin answered, “Welcome to the Jungle. And my life here has lived up to that theme. And what my life was like, before I came here, that is saying something.”
Lee agreed, in thought, 'It sure is.'
Lee then heard Melvin mutter under his breath, “It is not fun lacking back up. But then, you do what you got to do.”
Lee thought, 'Though, I am sure it is nothing that a former member of Hotel Moscow cannot handle.'
Lee suggested, “How about we change the subject? What movies do you like?”
Melvin said, “Well, my tastes have a wide range, when it comes to entertainment. But, I have found that I am a fan of Vin Diesel, along his action and sci-fi movies.”
Lee complimented, “Nice choice. Mister Diesel makes good movies. He is one of those few actors that appreciates, and understands, the genres of the roles of the movies he plays in.”
Melvin smiled, as he replied, “I know. I am especially drawn to the Riddick character he plays. I like the way he uses those knives. Riddick reminds me of myself, when I was young and stupid.”
Lee thought, 'Really?...' He said, “That is all very interesting. And Riddick is an interesting character. Not a hero. Not really a villain. He is just a guy that wants to be left alone.”
Melvin agreed, “Exactly.”
Lee mentioned, “And I must say, that Riddick game, Escape from Butchers Bay, is one of my all time favor first person shooter video games.”
Melvin agreed, “Yea. I played that on my laptop computer. It is a good game. Very stealth based, with good shadows and nightvision mechanics. Well, it is getting late, and I need to close.”
Lee got out of his stool. As he stood up, he pulled out his wallet. He said, “No problem. I was planning on heading to bed anyway. Good night, Melvin.”
Melvin replied, “Good night, Lee. And I enjoyed this conversation.” He headed for the cash register
Lee also walked over to the cashier register, as he stated, “Same here, Melvin.”
Lee then paid his bar tab, with Melvin. After which, he left the bar, for his room, to get some sleep.
(_)
A week later, after Lee got his hair dyed black, again, and he had used some of the money had had won from Sam, and a few others, to pay the front desk to extend his stay at the Devil's Hotel. He had paid for two more months to stay at the hotel.
Now, Lee was ready to leave the bait. He guessed that the security recordings of him entering the Devil's Hotel the first day he came to the hotel, had already been deleted. Because, there was no reason to keep them.
Lee had done nothing, and as far as he knew, there had been no disturbances during his stay at the Devil's Hotel. Though, he knew that was about to change.
Lee was careful, not to be recorded. Over the last few weeks, Lee had casually been taking his time, walking around the hotel. And he mentally noted where the security cameras were, from the corners of his eyes. He also noted the angles, and he did see a few blind spots.
One such blind spot, he noted, was on the outside concrete patio, leading to the beach. The patio was fairly long, and large. And there were outdoor tables. With each table surrounded by four outdoor cushions chairs. With large, open umbrellas sticking up from the tables, shading the chairs, and those sitting in the chairs.
The exact blind spot was a set of chairs, on the corner of the patio, against the building.
As Lee was about side, on the beach side patio, he looked around that morning, he saw his mark.
Lee saw tanned skinned man, with brown hair, whom was wearing in pants, and a loose t-shirt. The man was sitting at a table, in the blind spot. He was working on a laptop computer, on the table, with a computer mouse placed on the bottom of the laptop, below the built in keyboard. And the man had a frustrated look on his face.
Lee thought, 'This is my chance. There is a blind spot there. Plus, the open umbrellas. I just need to play my cards right. I can do this.'
Lee walked up to man. As he came to a stop under the umbrella the man was under, he asked, in a polite tone of voice, “Good morning, sir. Are you having computer problems?” He thought, 'If I am under the umbrella, and the blond spot, no one can read my lips from the recordings.'
The man looked up at Lee, with a pleading look in his eyes. He answered, in english, with a spanish accent, “Yes. My sons last night played some video games. Now the icons are too small, and the screen is too bright, and hurts my eyes to look at. And I am trying to figure out how to fix it, because I have some work I need to do on it. While, my wife plays on the beach with our sons.”
Lee glanced at the beach, where he saw a woman playing with two young boys. Due to the slightly cooler weather, they were in pants, shirt, and shoes. And they were not going swimming. But, they were clearly having fun.
Lee then looked back at the man, as he thought, 'This guy, and likely his family, is spanish. Not mexican, but actual spanish, from Spain. The accents between the two are easy to tell, if one knows what to hear for. I have been here long enough to know the difference.'
'I would guess this family is vacationing here, at this time, to save money, due to it being in the off season. That being said, I think I know what his boys did to his computer.'
'If they were playing games, they would likely set the laptop to high resolution. That would make the icons smaller. And the difficulty in seeing is due to the boys raising the gamma setting on the screen, so they could see the game they were playing better. And like small children, they forgot to return what they played with back to the way it was. Still, this is a wonderful opportunity.'
Lee offered, “I think I know what is wrong with your computer. And it is an easy fix. It will take me about a minute.”
The man replied, “Have at it. It is useless to me as it is.”
Lee sat down down in a chair, beside the man, at the table. He pulled the laptop to him. He looked at the screen. Even though the text was in spanish, which Lee did not know, the icons, symbols, and numerical symbols were the same as his computer, back home.
Lee quickly use the mouse to lower the screen resolution, and lower the gamma setting down, to where it did not hurt one's eyes to look at the screen.
Less than a minute after Lee has started working on the laptop computer, he was finished.
Lee turned the laptop screen in the direction of the man, as he inquired, “How is this?”
The man looked at it, and he smiled. He said, “Perfect. Thank you very much. Is there anything I can do for you?”
Lee thought, 'Now, is my chance.' He politely requested, “Just two items of note. First, could I use your computer to leave a message on a forum, real quick. It is nothing special. Just one sentence.”
The man said, “Okay. And the other favor?”
Lee replied, “Spend some time with your family. You are clearly on vacation, you might as well enjoy it.” He thought, 'These are the special moments in one's life. And he should not be wasting them working. When he should be spending time with his wife and kids.'
The man's smile widened, as he responded, “A wise suggestion. And here.” The man then turned the laptop in Lee's direction.
Lee quickly found the icon to the same web browser he used. Even in spanish, he know where all the setting and icons in the browser would do.
He quickly typed in english website forum he address, in the address bar. He then pressed, the enter key, on the laptop keyboard.
After the website came up in english, he found the login section.
As he type in his name and password, he thought, 'This is one of the website forums, I used a lot, to talk about my stories. I am glad I remember the account name and password. Also, I am sure it is being monitored the women, and maybe the authorities. And while there is risk this my backfire one me, very badly. This is still the best location on the internet, for me to place my bait. Because, it is tied to the stories I posted. And it uses the same account name, as the pseudonym I used for my stories.'
'In addition to this, I will need to cover my tracks.'
After Lee logged in, Lee went to the thread about his stories. He posted a one sentence message, with him creating a new thread in the forum, to do so.
The title of the topic of the thread, and the message in the body of the thread was the same. The message being, “Sorry about everything.”
Lee then closed out the tab to the website, and he pulled up the default homepage for the man's browser. He then type in the address to a news site. And then delete that tab page as well. So, if the man pulled up what page Lee has pulled up last, it would not be the forum website.
Next, Lee went into the browser settings, and he deleted the history of going to that specific website, and he also deleted the login, and tracking cookies, from that website. But, Lee left everything else on the man's computer alone.
Lee then closed the web browser, and turned the laptop screen towards the direction of the man, as he stated, “Here you go. And think you for letting me use it.”
The man moved his computer mouse off the laptop keyboard. He then closed the screen over the keyboard. Next, the man looked over at Lee, as he responded, “No problem. And have a great day.”
Lee got up from his seat. He looked at the man, as he thought, 'Now, one more question for this family man.' Lee inquired, in a casual tone of voice, “You too. And by the way, how long as you staying at the hotel?”
The man answered, “We are leaving in a few days.”
Lee said, “Okay. Have a great time.” He mentally added, 'With luck, he will be gone before the women get here. And my tracks will be completely covered.' He then turned, and walked away from the man, and back towards the beach entrance door to the hotel.
As Lee opened the door, from the reflection in the glass of the door, Lee saw that the man had joined his wife, and kids, in playing on the beach with them.
Lee smiled at the sight, for a few seconds. He then entered the hotel, and shut the door behind him.
(_)
A few days later, after the spanish man, and his family, that Lee had helped, left. It was the middle of the afternoon. But, the sky was covered in dark, ominous clouds, that blotted out the sun.
It had not yet started raining, but their was lightning and thunder outside.
Inside the Devil's Hotel, there were several people in the front lobby, sitting down in the various chairs and couches of the room. They listening to the music playing in the lobby, as they waited for the storm to clear, and they could to about their day.
Among these people, included Sam and Lee. They were sitting in cushioned armchairs, across from each other, as they place poker. Between them was a small coffee table, they used to place their money on, and for the pot, in the center of the table.
Lee was facing lobby entrance doors, and Sam was facing the check in desk.
Sam had won the last hand. But, Lee didn't mind.
As Sam dealt out another hand of cards, Lee thought, 'Sam and I both decided we did not want to risk getting soaked, if the bottom fell out on the storm, while we were on our way to the Rats Nest. So, we plan to stay here all day. Though, we haven't played poker all day. We got some lunch together, and we played a few rounds of pool in the game room.'
'And I am glad I didn't bet money on those pool games, because Sam is one hell of a pool shark. The man can play at a professional level.'
'He can do angles with the stick and cue ball that I had never thought possible in real life. I didn't even mind being beaten so thoroughly at pool, because just watching him play pool was entertainment in of itself. I saw same use the cue ball, and other balls, to sink five of his balls, in order, with one hit of his stick. I would not have believed it, if I had not seen it.'
'And that was just today. I remember when he ran the table on me, the first time we played. Just to show me he could. I am glad I don't bet money with him, at playing pool.'
'Also, it is nice that the hotel staff does not mind us playing cards here. Though, Melvin stated we could not play cards in the bar. He just has an issue with it. He said he did not want his bar to end up like a dive in a town he once lived in. I would bet money he was talking about the Yellowflag. And that is understandable. Anyway, Sam and I respected his wishes.'
Just then, the song changed to the opening beats to, Ballroom Blitz, by The Sweet.
While Lee did not show it on the outside, inwardly worried, as he thought, 'Oh no. What kind of walking storm could warrant that song to start playing?'
Lee looked at the front doors, and who he saw nearly cause him to drop his poker face.
Fortunately, after weeks of practice, Lee had taught himself how to remain calm in the face of immediate danger.
And danger just walked in though the front door. And she bought lots of her friends.
Up front were Revy, and Rock, as women. Both of them were wearing their usual clothing, with Rock wearing the long sleeved blouse and pants that Lee wrote her wear in her stories. Revy had on her crop top, and her blue denim cut-offs shorts.
Lee also saw that Revy did not have on her dual shoulder holsters, nor her semi-automatic nine millimeter ninety-two FS Inox pistols, in those holsters. In addition, on the ends of the grips of the pistols, where the magazines where exposed, showed the loaded magazines in the weapons were also the same stainless steel finish as the pistols were.
Behind her was Shenhua, Sawyer, and a small white haired, in a white maids dress, whom Lee guessed was Lotton. Shenhua and Sawyer where wearing their usual clothing. Shenhua was in her red, flowery qipao and white coat with yellow trimmings. And Sawyer in her usual purple and black goth clothing.
The next set was Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma. All of them were women. And unlike the Lagoon members of the group, the three of them wore casual clothing and not their usual outfits.
The next two people were Aeryn Sun Crichton, and a younger, dark blue haired woman, whom Lee guessed was Violin.
The next set of people were a mix of eight, older teenage girls, whom from their hair colors and skin tones, were all three of the trio sisters, Mikoto, Nodoka, and Yurika, and the Lagoon sisters, Molly, Sarah, Kristina, Rebecca, and Yukio. All of the teenagers were carrying luggage in their hands, and in some cases bags, with the straps on the bag, on their shoulders.
Lee saw that none of them had their weapons on their person. Or, that they were so hidden, that he could not tell.
Lee was able to maintain his poker face, as he thought, with concern, and disbelief, 'Oh, no, no, no. This is bad. Very, very bad. And the only good news is that none of them appeared to be armed, with their weapon on their bodies. Though, I am sure a few are concealing weapons, in their clothing... And the rest of their weapons are in their luggage.'
'Also, I need to get Sam to pay attention to the women, just in case they cause in trouble inside the lobby.'
Lee tapped Sam on his right foot. Sam looked at Lee in his eyes, as Lee looked into Sam's eyes.
So, as to not attract attention, in stead of speaking, or pointing with his fingers, Lee slightly tilted his head slightly to his right side, towards the women.
Sam understood what Lee was asking him to do, as he turned, and looked at the women, with Lee, for a few seconds, as the women walked towards the check in desk.
For a second, Lee's eyes and Rock's eyes met.
A few seconds later, both Lee and Sam went back to looking at their cards, but Lee continued to use the corner of his right eye to look at the women.
Lee remained calm on the outside, as he mentally lamented, 'I cannot believe I just looked Rock in her eyes. That is amazing.'
'And now that I think about it. Because they have their weapons in their luggage, instead of on their person, as they check in, means they are not looking for an immediate fight.'
'Also, I don't see any telepaths, nor empaths, that I recognize. I am thankful for such small mercies. If a psychic was here right now, they would likely find me on the spot, and it would be all over for myself. I still have a chance now. Though, a small one.'
'I am also thankful not see the Lovelace maids, with them.'
'But, this is still not good. There are too many of them here for my plan to work. And it was such a simple plan.'
Just then, the bottom fell out of the storm, and outside, the rain began pour.
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 1: “De La Plata Podrido.”
Chapter 02: “Getting to Know Your Matchsticks.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
It was a dark, cloudy, Autumn day, outside the front doors to the Devil's Hotel, as the group of women had made it to the front doors of the building.
Less than an hour ago, the badass group of women had teleported to a deserted part of the island they were on, in their four vehicles, loaded with people, and luggage. They had just made it to the hotel parking, with their luggage pulled out, and stacked behind them
They were happy they made it, before it had started to rain.
Before they went inside the Devil's Hotel, they stood together, right outside the front doors, with all of them complete under the awning.
They had set their luggage behind them, by the curb.
Their two leaders, Rock, and Revy, talked to them.
Rock and Revy stood, facing the rest of their group, with their backs right next to the front door. The rest of the group were looking at Rock and Revy.
Revy stated, in english, “Okay. We traced the fucker here. Let's find him, capture him, head home, and start taking our vengeance out on him. Though, Rock here has something to say first, before we go in.”
Rock commented, in english, “Before we go in there, I am setting some ground rules for us. I admit, as tempting as it is. If we go in their guns blazing, we are either going to scare the writer into running, before we can find him. Or worse, accidently kill the writer. So, we have to approach this in a more subtle manner.”
Molly asked, in english, “So, how do we approach this?”
Revy smirked, as she commented, “Simple. Our looks, and charms”
Shenhua teased, in english, “Revy, you are one to talk?”
While Revy frowned, the rest of the group laughed, for a few seconds.
As the group calmed down, Violin spoke up, in english, “Revy, you got the looks. But, you lack the personality and grace for charming someone.”
Revy dropped her frown, as she replied, “Okay. You have a point there.”
Akira pointed out, in english, “Guys. I do see a problem with our plan. The writer will recognize us on sight. We should have sent two or three people in disguise. Our daughters for example. We just have them dye their hair, and send them in with aliases. The writer won't recognize them, because he wrote them, not drew them.”
Yurika said, “We would have been open to doing that.”
Revy commented, “Nice idea. But, we are already here. And we are not leaving without him.”
Rock said, “Besides, the writer would likely recognized, at least, some us, even with such disguises. Even your daughters. And it would only make things confusing for us, in remembering everyone's aliases.”
Akira replied, “Okay.”
Natsuru mentioned, in english, “Speak of which. I checked. This place has all of our series, on various formats, and the writer's stories are online for anyone to read. It is possible that we might run across some people that recognize us. But, that does not mean they are the writer. So, if you are recognized, it would be best to play dumb, and talk to the rest of us, before doing anything about that person.”
Sawyer stated, in english, “Good point. If we get the wrong person, it will raise questions. And it will likely cause the right person to run.”
Aeryn said, in english, “Also, such actions could attract the authorities of this world. We need to avoid that at all cost, for various reasons. They could kill us, or at the very least, find the writer first.”
Kristina agreed, in english, “Yes. And I think that video by Scorpius likely already set everyone on edge.”
Rebecca stated, in english, “I still don't understand why Scorpius doesn't just send her secret agents in. They could probably find the writer in a day.”
Rock explained, “The same reason we don't bring in Hotel Moscow, nor the maids. We don't to start world war three. Besides, Scorpy refuses to help us with our search. I think she likes what the writer did for her. And she only did that broadcast as a favor to Violin.”
Nodoka looked at Violin, as she teased, in english, “Are you out of the dog house, yet?”
Violin looked at Aeryn, whom frowned. Violin answered, “Not yet. But, I'm getting there.”
Mikoto stated, in english, “I can understand not telling the maids. Roberta would tear this city apart looking for the writer. And Fabiola and Garcia are too close to Roberta. They would spill the beans to her. But, why are Balalaika and B not here? They are both sharp, and very skilled, in so many ways. We could use their skills here.”
Rock answered, “While Revy told both Balalaika and B. And I later talked to them about it. Both of those women understand the subtle nature of the situation. They say if the guy gets away, to contact them, and the two of them will personally help us hunt the writer down.”
“And for your next question. They told Revy and I, that they don't plan to involved the rest of the members of Hotel Moscow, because they didn't fully inform them of the situation. And they don't want to waste time just looking. They do have an organization to run for the writer. When he might not still even be here.”
“We have the time to look. And even with reality traveling technology, they don't.”
Mikoto inquired, “Good point. By the way, why doesn't Annie want to come? I know for a fact that our parents invited her.”
Akira answered, “Annie admitted that she did want to see the writer harmed. She refused to help us.”
Violin commented, “Given what the writer did for her, I can understand.”
Sawyer suggested, “What about Arcee?”
Revy pointed out, “She is too close to Chang. They are still good friends. And we don't even want to risk Megatron learning of the stories. Even that thought scares me. Considering what the writer almost did to him. He would literally tear apart this section of the multiverse looking for the writer.”
Rock agreed, “Yes. And that is why we have not mentioned the stories, to other victims of the second book. Some of them might not care how many civilians they have to kill to find the writer.”
Violin mentioned, “When you think about it, this writer literally pissed off all the wrong people in the multiverse. From a third person point of view. And literary standpoint. I can understand the sheer insanity he was going for. But, he went way too far. Especially in that second book. He likely wronged, and pissed off, almost every major human badass imaginable. I think, deadman walking, would fit his situation well.”
Rock stated, “That would be the understatement of the century.”
Molly asked, in english, “Speaking of Chang. What about the others? Chang? The Serenity Crew? The Lowe family? And where are they right now?”
Revy answered, “We don't know. We are fairly sure they are all in the Cowboy Bebop reality. But, we are not completely sure. If we just pop up and say hi, questions will be asked. We don't think they know what is going on. But, if River reads our minds, then, they will come running.”
Rock said, “Revy makes a good point there. Likely, Mal, and Spike, would have both their sets of friends here, hunting down the writer. The maids would tear this city apart to find the writer. And the others, I am not so sure. I know most of the women in their group are not upset with the writer, for various reasons. And I don't want to any fight them, if they were the first to catch the writer.”
Molly agreed, “That would cause problems.”
Ranma spoke up, in english, “By the way, why are Benny, Janet, and Dutch, not here?”
Revy answered, “Actually, they are in this reality. They are in the British Bahamas.”
Lotton sarcastically remarked, in english, “Lucky them.”
Natsuru inquired, “What are they doing there?”
Revy sarcastically answered, “Besides enjoying their time on the beach, they are studying the stories, and doing web searches. They are trying to build a profile on the writer. Rock and I figured those three were the best to do the job.”
Natsuru replied, “I agree.”
Sarah questioned, in english, “So, has mom, dad, and aunt Dutch, had any luck on a profile of the writer?”
Revy replied, “No. Not so far. But, we have the phone number to their room. And they plan to come over in a month, or so, if we have not had any luck in catching the writer, by then.”
Aeryn asked, “Is there anyone else here, that we know of, in this city?”
Rock smiled, as she answered, “Yes. Eda and Yolanda are here. They are working a different angle. We will tell you, later.”
Aeryn replied, “Interesting.”
Shenhua asked, “Are there any clues as to what the writer looks like?”
Revy said, in a disappointed tone of voice, “Nope. We don't know what the writer's looks like, nor even the writer's gender. Though, we are guessing the writer is male.”
Sarah inquired, “So, how do we search for the writer?”
Yukio suggested, in english, “Why don't we just go into the future and find out who the writer is, from our future selves?”
Molly stated, “Because we do not want to risk creating a paradox.”
Rebecca conceded, “Good point.”
Rock stated, “I think Revy has the right idea. We use our charms. We ask around. And we subtly test people. With luck, the writer will eventually give himself away. Or, we will at least start to build a list of those we think are the writer, whom we will check on later, with more thorough background checks.”
Lotton commented, “That is a nice idea. Also, the writer might be staying on the ground floor. If he need to got out of the hotel quickly, will allow him to escape more easily.”
Rock said, “That is an excellent point. We need to find out who is staying on the ground floor. That might narrow down our list of suspects.”
Natsuru stated, “I doubt that someone will try to escape by a second story balcony, or higher. That is a quick way for a normal person to break a leg. And rope, or rope ladder would be to hard to hide, if we started secretly searching rooms.”
Rock commented, “Those are also good points. But, we won't start searching rooms, until we have exhausted our other avenues of finding the writer. If we are caught in someone else's hotel suite, we could get thrown out of the hotel. Or, the local police might get in involved.”
Natsuru said, “I agree. Those are good point.”
Violin looked at the Lagoon daughters for a few seconds. She then turned to Rock, as she asked, “On another matter. What happens if we have any problems between each other?”
Rock firmly stated, “All internal disputes will be handled between Revy and I. We are in charge. If you mess up, and harm the wrong person, you go home. Understood?”
Except for Rock and Revy, some of the women said, “Yes.” Or, “Yea.” The other women nodded, or shrugged, in agreement.
Rock said, “Also, when you do think you have a lead, let Revy and I know. We will inform the others, and decide what to do. Now teenagers, handle the luggage. Be careful. Our weapons are in some of the suitcases. And it should be noted. We do not know the cops here. And Mexico has strict gun control and immigration laws. But from what I understand, this town is very lax on such matters. So, just don't cause too many problems.”
Ranma suggested, “And it would not be wise to come into this hotel like an armed military.”
Rock agreed, “Exactly. That is why I made sure no one was armed right now, as we walked inside the hotel. If we were, the hotel staff might turn us away.”
Rock then continued, in a serious tone of voice, “Also, don't lose your reality devices. We do not want them falling into the wrong hands. Especially, the writer's hands. He clearly knows enough about reality travel, that if he gets his hands on one of our reality devices, and we might never get this close to finding him, again.”
Revy stated, “Yes. We have to be careful about that. Okay girls. Let's go in there, and find this fucker. With luck, he will give himself away within the first ten minutes.”
As the teenagers picked up the luggage for everyone, Rebecca asked, “How will we know it is him, mom?”
Revy smile wickedly, as she said, “Because, my daughter, he will be pissing his pants, in fear, at the mere sight of us.”
The other laughed at Revy's joke, for a few seconds
As they calmed down, Yukio requested, “Is it okay if us teenagers, get rooms near each other, but away from the rest of you?”
Rock, Revy, Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru looked at each other. They all nodded. Rock then turned to Yukio, as she answered, “I don't see why not, daughter.”
Yukio replied, “Thanks, mom.”
Rock and Revy then turned around, and took the lead, as they entered the entryway, and then into the hotel lobby.
Shenhua, Sawyer, and Lotton were right behind them. Then Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru. Violin and Aeryn follow them. With the teenage daughters following behind them.
Rock noted that the music in the lobby suddenly changed to Ballroom Blitz, by The Sweet. She thought, 'I wonder why the music changed. And why it is that song, of all the songs, is the one playing. Still, it fits the mood.'
Rock saw people from all groups of life in the lobby. And almost all of the people there, turned and looked a the newcomers for a few seconds, before going back to the business.
Among the groups of people, there were a couple of families, with their children. Sports players. Some men in businesses suits. And two men, to Rock's right side, whom were sitting chairs, across from each other, at a small table, as they played poker for money.
Rock thought, with amusement, 'Some things never change, no matter where I go. The location can change, but there are almost always some pair of men, that are just, those two guys, doing their own thing.'
The black haired man with the blue baseball cap, large glasses, and blue cloth jacket, noticed them, as they walked to the check in desk, across the room.
The black haired tapped his friend, a man with a full beard and ponytail, on the right foot, with his own foot to get his attention. He titled his head towards Rock's group. Both of them looked at the woman for a few seconds.
Rock even locked eyes with the black haired man, for a few seconds, before Rock saw that both men had turned their heads towards each other. And they went back to their poker game.
The women soon made it to the check in desk. As the two clerks at the desk looked at the sixteen women, without even blinking in surprise, Rock stated, “We would like to rent some rooms here.”
The two clerks looked at each other. They then turned back to face Rock, and the other women, as one of the clerks asked, in english, “Short? Or, long term?”
Rock answered, “Likely long term?”
The clerks smile, as the same clerk that spoke to Rock, inquired, “How will you be paying?”
Rock asked, “Do you accept gold as payment?”
The smile from clerk whom spoke to Rock widened even further, as she replied, “By the troy ounce. And we even offer to buy gold at ten percent less than the current market rate, in either U.S. cash, or Mexican pesos. At long as the gold is pure.”
Rock pulled out a small bar of gold from her pocket, and set it on the top of the check in desk. She smirked, as she stated, “Test it all you want. You will find our gold is pure enough for you. And I will like to have some pesos and dollars out of the change.”
The clerk, whom Rock was talking to, pulled out a small instrument, and set it on the long end of the gold bar. She said, “Ma'am. This will only take a few seconds.”
A few seconds later, the woman looked at the results, as she continued smiling. She in the instrument behind the desk. She then pulled out a small set of electronic weight scales. She set the bar on the scales, as she stated, “Your bar is almost pure gold. We will accept this as payment.” She then pulled out a small calculator.
Rock replied, “Good. Now, I maybe right, but I am not foolish. I want some decent hotel rooms, that are fairly inexpensive.”
The clerk responded, “You will find we appreciate frugal customers. Because they are usually returning customers.”
Rock thought, 'Now, that is a change, from the usual people I use to deal with. And a good change at that.' She her smirk turned into a warmer smile, as she stated, “Then, I think we will have a wonderful business relationship.”
The clerk returned Rock's smile, as she said, “I agree. Also, some of us would prefer one bedroom suites, but with large bed.”
The clerk stated, “That will not be a problem.”
Rock replied, “Good.”
The clerk inquired, “Now, who will I make the bills for these rooms out too? And who will be staying in this room?”
Rock answered, “You can start with my room. Which will be a single bed suite, with a large bed. I am Rock. And the person will me, is Revy. We will be covering the bills for our entire group. And we will get to everyone, in a few minutes. Also, some of us would like rooms away from the rest of our group.”
The clerk replied, “That will be fine.”
Rock and the clerk then went about checking her family, her friends, and herself, into the Devil's Hotel.
(_)
Nearby, in his chair, Lee looked at his cards, as he used the corner of his eye to watch the women walk to the check desk.
Lee remained calm on the outside, as he mentally lamented, 'I cannot believe I just looked Rock in her eyes. That is amazing.'
'And now that I think about it. Because they have their weapons in their luggage, instead of on their person, as they check in, means they are not looking for an immediate fight.'
'Also, I don't see any telepaths, nor empaths, that I recognize. I am thankful for such small mercies. If a psychic was here right now, they would likely find me on the spot, and it would be all over for myself. I still have a chance now. Though, a small one.'
'I am also thankful not see the Lovelace maids, with them.'
'But, this is still not good. There are too many of them here for my plan to work. And it was such a simple plan.'
Just then, the bottom fell out of the storm, and outside, the rain began pour.
Lee mentally continued, 'Now, the timing of this rain is poetic. Still, my plan just blew up in my face. I thought this bait would attract a couple of fish, not a pod of killer whales. I dare not try to drug any of them now. They are going to be watching each other too closely. Plus, two of them are aliens, some of them have super-soldier abilities, and the others likely have fast metabolisms. I don't think knockout drugs would really work on any of them.'
'Though, my plan is salvageable. The more marks here, means more reality devices floating around. I just have to approach this from a different angle. Though, I know it is going to be hard as hell to get one of those devices, from the start. More of them, just increases the danger. Also, I have to figure out how to approach them. Also, I have to figure out when to approach them.'
'From a neutral, third party point of view, I am literally a middle-aged man, trying to approach a group of younger, pretty women. That looks wrong, no matter how I try to do it. So, I have to have a damn good reason just to approach them. Let alone speak to them. And if I do this wrong, or too early, I tip my hand that I am the writer, and it will be all over.'
'Yet. They don't know I am the writer. And there is no rush. It is best to wait a couple of days. If I wait long enough, since they are looking for the writer, they might eventually approach Sam and I. As they are looking for me. When that happens, all I got to do is play my cards right. So, for right now, as I think about this problem, I should just relax, and play poker with Sam.'
Lee then went back to focusing on playing his poker game with Sam, as the badass group of women, nearby, checked into the hotel. After they were checked in, and each group had been given their keys, they turned to their right, and walked towards the elevator bay, by the lobby, with their luggage, as they headed towards their suites.
(_)
Later that evening, as it continued to rain, thunder, and lightning, outside, Sam and Lee were eating at a table, in the hotel restaurant and bar. They were sitting in the corner table, to the right of the entrance to the restaurant. Both of them were sitting beside each other, with their backs to the corner, as they ate and talked to each other. With Lee sitting to Sam's right side.
Given the rain had disrupted the plans of most of the guests of the hotel, the hotel restaurant was nearly full.
Sam and Lee were almost finished with their dinners, as they saw the badass group of women walk into the restaurant. And this time, some of them appeared armed.
Revy and Molly had their semi-automatic pistols holsters in their shoulder holsters. Lee could tell that Shenhua had her knives hidden in her clothing. Rebecca had her long knives sheathed in their scabbards on her back. Kristina has her two gantlets hooked together, on the right side of her belt. Sarah had her katana sheathed in its scabbard, which was hooked to the left side of her belt.
Yukio did not have her machine gun, and Sawyer did not have her chainsaw.
Ranma had on her golden wrist braces, which stick out from under her long sleeved blouse.
Akira had her long knives sheathed on her back, and revolvers holstered on her hips, over her causal clothing.
Natsuru, Nodoka, Mikoto, Yurika, Aeryn, Violin, and Lotton appeared to be unarmed.
Lee thought, 'I guess they when up to their room, unpacked and put on their weapons.' Lee mentally lamented, as he continued his thoughts, 'And this was turning into such a pleasant evening. I wonder how Melvin is doing?' Lee then looked Melvin, whom was standing behind the bar counter.
Lee saw Melvin looked up at the women, and from the look in Melvin's eyes, Lee guessed that he recognized a few of them.
But, Melvin was able to keep his composure, and he only showed fear in his eyes, and only for a split second.
Lee thought, with admiration, 'Good job, Melvin. I doubt any of them noticed your reaction. If you just remain calm, you should get out of this alive, and in one piece.'
Lee then looked back at the group of women, he noticed Revy pulled out a cigarette and a lighter.
Lee thought, 'So, Revy went back to smoking. Why am I not surprised? I just hope that Melvin has enough sense to not tell her not to smoke. I don't want him to die, even if he was once a member of Hotel Moscow. He seems like such a nice guy.'
Lee then saw that Revy's lighter wouldn't work
Revy asked, in a loud tone of voice, “Does anyone have a light?”
Lee saw Mikoto take a step towards Revy, before she suddenly stop.
Lee thought, 'Intelligent move, not showing your fire abilities in front of witnesses. Also, since she is asking strangers for a lite, that means that none of the rest of the group smokes, or they quit smoking, depending on the person. And given she has her weapons with her, I don't think anyone is in a rush to give her a light. But, if none one does, that is going to put her in a bad mood. Which, no who knows her, wants to happen. So, I have no choice.'
'Besides, this is my chance to at least get a close look at Revy, without anyone else being the wiser.'
Lee quickly used his right hand to reach into his right, side pants pockets, and he pulled out his disposable lighter.
Lee held up his lighter and lit it.
Revy noticed Lee and his lighter. She turned and walked over to him.
Lee extinguished his lighter.
A few seconds later, when Revy reached Lee, he handed her his lighter, by the bottom, cool end.
As Revy used the lighters to light her cigarette, Lee got a chance to get a close look at her.
Lee thought, 'To the untrained eye, this much smaller, slender women would appear helpless. I know better. And I have no intentions of getting on her bad side, or the bad sides of her friends. Even though they are all out for my blood.'
While Revy took a poof of smoke from her cigarette, with her right hand, as she handed Lee back his lighter, with her left hand.
Lee took the lighter, and put it his pants pocket.
Revy casually said, “Thanks.” She then used her left hand to pulled out her open pack of cigarettes, as she offered, “Want one?”
Lee thought, with amusement, 'Why not?'
Lee replied, “Sure.” Lee took one of the cigarette. He put the cigarette into the inside pocket of his blue cloth jacket, as he thought, 'I think I will keep this one for a special occasion. And I will be careful not to wash it with my clothing.'
Revy then turned around, and walked over to rejoin her group.
Sam looked at Lee, as he asked, “What was that about?”
Lee continued looking at the women, as he answered, “When an armed woman wants a light for her cigarette, you make sure she gets the light.”
Sam agreed, “Wise words. And they seem like a rough crowd.”
Lee continued looking in front of them, as he said, “That is kind of obvious. I think we might want to walk out of here, in a minute. After we finish our meals. How about we continue our game of poker in the lobby?”
Sam replied, “Sounds great.”
Lee offered, “And when we finish, you can head on out, while I pay for both our meals.”
Sam said, in an appreciative and happy tone of voice, “Thanks.”
Lee replied, “You're welcome.” He thought, 'Sam, you don't have a clue who those women are. And until I have a chance to tell you, in private, without spilling the beans to you. I need to keep you as far away from these women, as possible.'
As the two men finished eating, Lee kept an eye on the group of women. He saw that they seat themselves at some tables, near the stage, in the back of the room. Lee finally stopped looking at them, when a waitress came over to them, to take their orders.
Lee thought, 'That waitress is braver than most people. But then, I have found that people find bravery and courage, when they need it.'
Lee also noticed that other customers were getting up, paying for their meals, and leaving the room, with Melvin manning the cash register.
Lee thought, 'It is nice that a number of people here are intelligent enough to see trouble coming a mile away. And it is unfortunate that the employees still have to play nice, and be careful. But, that goes with the dangers of their jobs. Still, I wish them the best.'
Lee had the last bite of his meal, and drank the last bit of his beer. He looked over and saw that Sam was finished with his meal, as well.
Lee turned to Sam, as he inquired, “Are you ready to go?”
Sam looked over at Lee, as answered, “Yes. I will see you in the lobby.”
Lee replied, “Okay.”
Both men then got up. Lee left a fair tip on the table, as Sam headed for the exit to the restaurant. Lee then headed to the cash register, on the bar counter, near the front of the room.
Lee saw there was Melvin as still being hand the cash register, as he was taking care of the last person waiting to pay their bill and left.
Lee then saw Melvin get the customer his change, and a receipt. As the customer turned and left the room, for the hotel hallway, Lee saw noticed him.
Lee thought, 'It would be nice to talk to him about this. But, it is too risky, in so many ways. First, I cannot outright tell Melvin what I know of these women, because he will ask how I know it. That would expose each of our secrets to the other. Also, some of the women have super-hearing, from the super-soldier serum they were exposed to. But, given the distance from the cash register and the tables by the stage, along with the background noise, from the talking, as long as we whisper, we should be okay.'
When Lee reached the cash register, the two men looked at each other, from across the cash register on the end of the bar counter. Melvin then quietly said, “How are you doing, Lee?”
Lee thought, 'Good. He knows about the super-hearing, as well. Probably Balalaika mentioned her abilities to her men, at some point.' Lee softly answered, “Fine. And Melvin, from the way you were looking at those women, I can tell you know them.”
Melvin quietly warned, “I know some of them. And they are all crazy dangerous. Don't mess with them. And don't give one of them a light, again.”
Lee whispered, “Don't worry, I won't. I just wanted to prevent a situation.”
Melvin softly replied, “Okay. That was a good call. Just don't do it, again.”
Lee quietly complimented, “Of course. And you clearly are intelligent enough not to stop them from smoking.”
Melvin softly mentioned, “Hey. I want to continue living. And them smoking is the least of my worries about them. Still, my situation reminds me of a quote from the Godfather movies.”
Lee quietly said, “Let me guess. When I thought I was out, they pull me back in.”
Melvin whispered, “That's the one.”
Lee softly responded, “Don't worry, your secret is safe with me. And good luck.”
Melvin quietly replied, “Thank you.”
Lee then stated, in a normal tone of voice, “By the way, I am paying for Sam's meal, as well.”
Melvin complimented, “That is nice of you.”
Melvin then rang Lee up for both his meal and drink, and Sam's meal and drink.
Lee paid the bill with his cash money. He then got his change and receipt. After which, he left the restaurant, for the hotel lobby, to meet up with Sam, to continue their ongoing poker game.
(_)
Hours later, inside the Devil's Hotel restaurant and bar, the only ones let in the room, were Melvin, and the group of badass women, whom some were starting to get drunk.
Even the waitresses, and kitchen staff had decided to clean up, and call it an early night. And Melvin didn't blame them for doing so. And he even gave them permission to leave for the night, when they had requested to leave the madness currently happening in the restaurant.
Still, someone had to stay behind to manage the chaos, and as the bartender for the restaurant, that person was, Melvin.
Also, the group of women had migrated from the tables near the stage, to closer to the bar counter. With some of the women now sitting in stools, at the bar counter.
And the women had starting taking turns, using the karaoke machine, to sing some songs for each other.
As Melvin served the women at the bar counter, some refills on their mixed drinks, he thought, 'I don't know which is the more wilder storm. The one that is slacking off outside, or the one here, inside... Likely the one right here, in front of me... Still, at least this isn't all bad. They clearly don't remember me. Boy am I happy about that. And some of them can even carry a tune.'
From Melvin's left to right, Rock, Revy, Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru were sitting on the stools, along the long end of the bar counter, with Natsuru being the closest woman to the cash register by the front end of the bar counter.
Just then, Rebecca walked up to the bar counter. Melvin saw here, as she looked at him. She requested, “Hey barterer. I need another bottle of beer.”
Melvin reached under the counter, pulled out a cold bottle of beer from the fridge, and handed it to Rebecca.
Rebecca took the bottle of beer, and walked way.
Melvin thought, 'Well, with the legal drinking age in Mexico being eighteen, there is not much I can do about these teenagers drinking. But, at least with them here, I can cut them off, before they get to drunk, and things get out of hand.
Melvin then glanced at Revy, and he noted that she was starting to look a little tipsy. He mentally added, 'While some of the people here are already at their limit. The question is how to cut them off without starting a gunfight?'
Ranma asked, “So, bartender. What is your name?”
Melvin looked over at the redhead, as he thought, 'I have seen her before. But, I just cannot place her.' He answered, “My name is Melvin. What is yours?”
Ranma answered, “Ranma.”
Melvin suddenly remember, as he mentally reflected, 'Ranma?.... She has to be. The martial artists that changes genders based off of water temperatures. I remember seeing the Ranma Half series, that Pedro showed me from his anime collection. That reminds me. Should, I call Pedro, and let him know what is going on here, at the hotel, with these women?... Best not too. He would likely not believe me. And he will learn about it, soon enough, on his own.'
'Still, I think it best I avoid hot water near Ranma. Or, I will end up in hot water, if she changes into a he, in front of me. But, what is Ranma doing here with Akira, Revy, and Rock. Also, she appears to be older, in her late twenties. And who is the blue haired woman, and the others here that I don't recognize?'
'It might be best to just try to ask. At least that way, if I slip up and say one of their names, in front of them, I have an excuse of them introducing themselves to me.'
Melvin looked over at the other women at the bar counter, as he asked, “And who are rest of you?”
Akira answered, “I am Akira.”
Melvin thought, 'Yea. Akira. I remember you from Roanapur. If I remember, you change gender with a sneeze. Best to keep the pepper away from you.'
Akira went onto say, “The blue haired woman by me is, Natsuru.”
Melvin mentally realized, “Natsuru from the Kampfer anime series. Another gender bender. Also, she looks as old as Akira does, and not the teenager that she, or rather, he was in that series.'
'Though, I do recognize Rock as woman. I long since heard about the Lagoon members gender bending.... And then there are my former comrades... I don't like the pattern I am seeing here...'
'That being said, I wonder why they are here? They are clearly not after me. If someone was here, after me, it would be the members of Hotel Moscow. Not them. Unfortunately, I cannot just ask them out right, without revealing who I am. So, I will just have to play along.'
Natsuru said, “Nice to meet you.”
Melvin replied, “Nice to meet all three of you.”
Akira stated, “The other redhead and the black haired women by us, at the bar, are Revy and Rock. Revy is the redhead. Rock is the black hair woman. Rock is fine. But, it might be best to leave Revy alone.”
Revy just laughed at Akira's comment.
Melvin mentally agreed, 'Very wise words.' He calmly replied, “I will keep that in mind. By the way, your group is driving away my best customers. And best tippers. Even my staff called it an early night, because of your group.”
Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru, looked around, and behind them, at how rowdy their friends, and daughters, were being.
They then looked back at Melvin. Akira sadly said, “Sorry about that. We will try to reign in the others. So, this won't happen again.”
Melvin thought, as he inwardly laughed, that did not show only the outside, 'Good luck with that. I remember hearing what Revy, Shenhua, and Sawyer did to you, that night at Rowan's Jackpot.'
'Still, I might as well be positive about it. Akira, you do have back up this time. Ranma and Natsuru might actually be more dangerous than Revy, Shenhua, and Sawyer. It is just that these two are more polite.'
Melvin sarcastically remarked, “I can clearly see that you are going to have your work cut out for you. Still, good luck in reigning in you your friends' wildness.”
Revy overheard Melvin comments. She stood up from her stool, as she loudly stated, “Wildness! You want wildness! I will give you wildness!” She then pulled out her pistols from her shoulder holsters.
Rock, Akira, Ranma, Natsuru, and Melvin all saw what she was going to do, as she pulled back the slides to her pistols, inserting rounds into her weapons' chambers, from the weapons' ammo clips.
Ranma stated, “Oh hell!”
Akira yelled, “Everyone! Duck and cover!”
Meanwhile, Melvin just ducked under the bar counter.
The rest of those in the room looked over at Akira, they then saw Revy just as she started to shoot up the empty bottle shelves, on the wall, behind the bar counter, in front of her.
Everyone else dropped down. In some cases, some of them even got under their tables.
Revy then began shooting up the restaurant and bar, with recklessness, though she did not aim at anyone. She was just going for the walls and furniture.
While Rock bent down, she thought, 'Damn it! It has been years since Revy has pulled this stunt. I am going to have to talk to her about this later. She is set a bad example as one of the leaders, in this mission, especially in front of our children.'
As Melvin ducked under this bar counter, he looked at his post-nineteen forty-seven TT thirty-three Tokarev semi-automatic pistol, which was hostler under right under the bar. The pistol used seven point sixty-two by twenty millimeter bullets. The magazine of Melvin's pistol held the maximum it could, which was eight rounds. And there was one round in the chamber of the pistol.
The only safety feature on the pistol was the hammer could be set to half cock, with the pistol not firing unless it was fully cocked back. This was dangerous, but Melvin was an expert with his pistol, and he knew he might someday need to use his pistol quickly, without much time to react.
Melvin also felt the sheath of his combat knife, against his lower back, where he hid his knife under this clothes.
Melvin thought, 'I wonder how many times Bao had to handle this? Still, how do I handle this? If I pulled my knife, or pistol, she will either kill me, or the others will. Still, I am backed into a corner. I hope she calms down. I really don't want to get into a fight with her... Still, this is Revy. The likely reason she is nicknamed, Revy, is that after she has revved up, she only rarely ever backs down.'
After Revy finished shooting, everyone got up from where they were hiding, and stood up.
Rock looked over at her friends and family, as she yelled, “Anyone hurt?”
Everyone shook their heads. And Rock accounted from everyone.
As Melvin stood up from the bar counter, he noticed that Revy was pointed her pistols at him. And given the slides were not locked in the pulled back positions, they were still loaded.
Revy demanded, in a slurred tone of voice, “Bartender, how about some more rum?”
Melvin scowled. But, he then noticed that Revy had here index fingers were resting against trigger guard, and not the triggers.
Melvin thought, 'I got one shot at this. And if I do this right. None of them will pull this stunt ever again one me.'
Melvin quickly used both handed to grab Revy's cutlasses, by the barrels, and from Revy's hands, without the weapons going off.
Everyone was shocked that someone had actually been able to do that.
Revy demanded, “Give me back my cutlasses!”
Melvin put the weapons under his bar counter. He then turned to Revy, as he flatly stated, with anger in his tone of voice, “No. You can have them back, in the morning. When you are sober. And after you pay for damages. You are lucky the walls, ceiling, and the bar counter, of this restaurant here, have an inch of steel under their covering. But even so, I know the police chief of this town, personally. A stray bullet hitting someone would land you in jail, or worse. And finally, it goes without saying, you are cut off for tonight.”
Revy sneered, “If you are not going to give me back my cutlasses, I am going to have to hurt you with my fists.” She then jumped over the counter. Her back was to the short end of the bar counter, with Melvin facing her front side.
Just as her feet hit the floor, she threw a punch at Melvin, with her right fist.
Melvin's reflexes kicked in.
Melvin sidestepped the blow, putting his front side to Revy's left side.
He then swung his right foot at an inward angle, against the back of Revy's lower legs.
While he was sure Revy's was off balance, he move his right foot back in an a right, outward, angle, until he planted it firmly on the floor. At the same time, he used his left hand to grab Revy by the front of her throat.
While, he used his right hand, to pulled out his combat knife, hiding in the back of his clothing.
As he used his left hand to haul Revy up, and towards other part of the counter, everyone one saw as he spun his combat knife in his right hand, until it stopped spinning, and he held it in downward angle.
As Revy upper back and head hit the top of the bar counter, with Melvin's left hand firmly hold her down by her throat, he brought down his knife until the tip was less than a centimeter above her left iris.
Revy immediately stopped struggling, as she realized how close to death she was.
While Revy was staring at the knife set right above her left eye, everyone else noticed that Melvin's eyes had lost all warmth in them, as he expression turned completely neutral.
Everyone in the bar went dead silent, as they saw some nobody literally holding Revy's life in his hands.
As Melvin looked down at Revy's face, he coldly said, “Listen carefully, little girl. No one shoots up my bar, and threatens the lives of my customers. No one. And if do this again, I will kill you.”
Revy smirked, as she stated, “You have no idea the trouble you are getting into. Now, let me go!”
Melvin flatly responded, with force in his tone of voice, “You are in no position to negotiate!... You think you are a real badass! How many people have you killed?!”
Revy continued smiling, as she answered, “Several.”
Melvin coldly inquired, “And how many children have you killed?”
Revy dropped her smirk, as she went quiet.
Melvin calmly, yet coldly stated, “Little girl, I have been in war. In order to survive, I have both seen and done a lot of horrible things, that you probably couldn't imagine. I have killed children without a second thought. Children, whom I knew beforehand, were kidnapped from their home, doped up, tied to bomb vests, and were sent out against us. And I still killed them without hesitation. All the while, I knew that they were in no way at fault for being in their situation. That they were already dead. And if I did not kill them, they would take me with them. Now, you can either die, or walk away. Which will it be?”
Revy thought, 'Shit! This guy is for real. And I thought there were no badasses in this world that could put me into this position.' She answered, “I will walk away.”
Melvin removed his knife from Revy's face, as he left go of the redhead's throat. He then took several steps be away from Revy.
Everyone saw the warmth return to Melvin's eyes. Though, he kept his neutral facial expression, as he said, “Good. As I said before. You will get your pistols, in the morning. After you sober up.”
Revy leaned up, and jumped over the bar. As she turned back to face Melvin, she warned him, “My cutlasses better be okay when I get them back tomorrow.”
While Melvin sheathed his knives behind his back, he smirked towards Revy. He stated, “Little girl. Given the way you act, I am surprised either of them are in one piece.”
Melvin's commented caused everyone else to laugh, but Revy, and Melvin himself.
A few seconds later, as the crowd calmed down, and started to relax, Ranma turned to Melvin, as she asked, “Where did you learn to fight like that?”
Though, on the outside, Melvin remained calm, as he turned to face the women looking at him. Inwardly, he mentally screamed, 'Oh hell! I tipped my hand a bit too much. I have to make this sound just right, or I just gave myself away to them. They will contact Balalaika, and it will be over for me... Still, this should shut them up. As they say, the most believable lie, is a lie hidden in a truth.'
Melvin flatly answered, “Afghanistan.”
The women gave him blank looks.
Melvin explained, as he planted the lie in the truth, “In late two thousand one, the U.S. invaded Afghanistan. And the got ugly, over there, after that. And I was on of the fools that did a tour in Afghanistan.”
The women looked at each other, and Rock said, “He is right. I checked it out. It is very ugly story involving a lot of death. Going from the east coast of the U.S., to the middle east.”
Melvin thought, 'I better change the subject, now.' Melvin stated, with a tone of authority, “Now, ladies. I am going to say this just once. If any of you try what you friend just did, I will have you all thrown out of this hotel. Do you all understand?”
The women just nodded, in response.
Melvin said, “Good. Now, this bar is officially closed for tonight. I will settle up your tabs tomorrow. I will be here at around ten thirty in the morning. Now, please leave.”
As Melvin watched all the women file out of his bar, he thought, 'No wonder Bao got so stressed out with this crowd. How the hell did he handle this almost every night? They are all insane!' He then looked at the mess left by Revy, as he mentally added, 'And messy!'
Melvin then went to get a broom, and dustpan, to start to clean up Revy's destruction. It took him and hour to clean up the bar. He then started to close up for the evening.
Soon after he finished closing up the bar, he unloaded Revy's pistols. Put them the ammo in one back, and the pistols, with the magazines in them, in another bag. Next, he collected his Tokarev pistol and headed for the hallway door. After he left the room, he locked the hallway doors to the hotel restaurant and bar behind him, as he headed to his hotel suite, to get some sleep for the night.
(_)
An hour later, after Melvin closed up the hotel bar, on the third floor of the Devil's Hotel, inside Lee's hotel suite, Lee was in bed, trying to get some sleep, when he heard a woman scream.
His eyes immediately snapped open, in the darkness of his room, as here heard sounds coming from the wall across the room, from his bed. The wall that the TV in the room was mounted to, and the chest of drawers were set against.
Lee sat up, as he tried to figure out what is going.
Lee thought, “If someone is being harmed next door, I am going to have to call the front desk to handle this. Because a domestic disturbance is less likely to have the police question me, as the neighbor, and a witness. Than, later questioning of someone possibly being hospitalized, or killed, if I do not act.'
He looked at the LED digital clock on the nightstand, by his bed. He saw that it was ten forty-five PM.
It was then, from the other side of the wall, from the TV and chest of drawers in Lee's suite, that Lee heard a female voice clearly scream,, “Ranma!”
He then started hearing other female voices, whom were moaning.
Lee swiftly put the pieces together, as he thought, 'Oh no. Please don't tell me I am sharing a wall with Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru. When I wrote them to be intimate lovers with each other, I did not think that one day I would be the poor fool on the other side of the wall, whom had to hear their sounds of ecstasy. And there is nothing I can do about it, right now.'
'It is not like I can just knock on their door, and ask them to be quiet. That would make for a horrible first impression. And I don't dare try to change to another room. With my luck, they will stick me by one of the other members of the crew. At least with these three, they value the lives of others, and they don't like to kill. The same cannot be said for most of the others in their group, except their daughters, and Violin. So, I will just have to live with this situation, for now. And at least there bed, or beds, are clearly not set against my wall, or I would also hear knocking as well.'
Lee then laid back down in his bed, and he tried to get to sleep.
But, the three neighbors were too loud. And thirty minutes later, he noted that he starting hearing male voices, mixed in with the female voices.
Lee thought, 'I guess they are swapping genders as they make love. It is unfortunate that I cannot understand what they are saying. Because, when they talk to each other, they are doing so in japanese. Oh well. At least I know that no one on the other side of the wall is getting hurt. It is just that they are not very private about their love.'
Fortunately, according to Lee's hotel clock, Lee noticed that they three others, on the other side of the wall went silent around midnight.
Lee was then able to get back to sleep, a few minutes later.
(_)
During next morning, it was nine thirty AM in the morning before Revy was able to even crawl out of bed.
During the previous night, after all the women left the hotel bar, Revy and Rock made it back to the suite they shared, Rock had read Revy the riot act. About how stupid her actions had been. That such a stunt could have caused the writer to run. That they got lucky that only Melvin was the witness, and that he was likely not to say a thing about it. Because doing so would be bad for his business.
Revy had to admit that her lover was right.
The two of them then went to sleep in the large bed they shared in their suite.
After Revy woke up, she notice that Rock was already gone.
Revy thought, 'Rock has always been a much more early riser than me. I will meet up with her, later. Right now, I have other things I need to do.'
She then went to exercise with a gym bar she had set up in the room the previous night. While she had the super-soldier serum, she liked to try to push her physical shape a little bit.
Though, Rock from Revy exercising to be humorous, considering she went back to smoking. Revy reminder her that she doesn't smoke that often now. Maybe a cigarette, every few days, to a week. With the super-soldier serum keeping her from being to addicted to her smoke, drinking, or drug habits, like all of those that had been exposed to the super-soldier serum.
When she finished her excising, she took a shower, dried off her hair, and body. She then got dressed.
By then, according to the hotel clock in her nightstand, by her bed, it was ten thirty AM.
She then looked over at her empty shoulder hostlers, that were on top of her chest of drawers.
She thought, 'Shit. From what the bartender told me, I guess it is time go down there, and get my cutlasses back. And I will have to pay for repairs. I got to admit, that... Melvin. I think that is his name. Has balls to take my cutlasses from me. He showed me that he might be able to take me in a fight. And he is even able to make me pay for damages, by holding my cutlasses hostage.'
'This Melvin is a lot more gutsy than Bao ever was. Case in point, Melvin is making me pay for my damages. Something Bao could never directly able to get me to do. Fortunately, I can pay for the damages. And I guess it is time to face the music.'
Revy then put on the empty shoulder holsters. After which, she left her hotel room, as she headed for the nearby elevator bay, to get to the ground floor of the hotel.
(_)
A few minutes later, Revy walk through the lobby. As she did so, she noticed the guy in the baseball cap, that gave her a light last night for her cigarette, and his bearded, ponytail friend walk out of lobby front doors. They were obviously heading for somewhere else.
Though, Revy paid them no mind, as she turned her had back towards her front, as she made her way to the hotel restaurant and bar.
A minute later, Revy walked to the entrance of the hotel restaurant. She saw the door to the paned double-doors were open. In addition, she saw that the doors were undamaged.
There was also a standalone sign by the left side of the door, that stated spanish, and below the spanish, in english, “Closed until 4:30 PM Today. For repairs.”
Revy walked passed the sign, as she entered the restaurant.
She looked around and saw her handiwork with more sober eyes.
While there were some bullet holes in the walls. Most of the damage was some shelves behind the bar counter, and some of the furniture on the far end of the bar, which was away from everyone else the previous night.
Revy then noticed by the bar counter, Melvin standing in the middle of the room, as he talked to a few men, in what sounds like spanish, which Revy did not know. The men had carpenters tools with them. She guess they were repair men.
A minute later, Revy watched the men walk away from Melvin. She thought, 'I might as well get this over with.'
Revy walked up to Melvin.
Melvin turned, and saw her coming.
As Revy came to a stop a few feet in front of him, she said, “I am hear to pay for repairs, and to pay for everyone's tab for last night.”
Melvin looked at Revy, as he thought, 'Well, from her demeanor, I would guess that she remembers last night's event. I best just not push the issue. I need to get this done, and out of the way.' He said, in english, “Good. How would you be paying?”
Revy reached into one of her shorts pockets, and she pulled out four small gold bars, as she answered, “I believe this gold will pay for everything.” She then handed the four bars to Melvin.
As Melvin looked at the gold bars in his right hand, he requested, “Come over to the counter, and let me test and weigh these bars first.” He turned and walled over to the bar counter.
Revy then followed Melvin.
Melvin walked behind the bar counter, by the cash register, while Revy walked in front of the bar counter. Where both of them were standing across from each other.
Revy watched as Melvin pulled out a small instrument with two wires, a calculator, and a small set of electronic weight scales.
Revy inquired, “Do all the hotel staff have this equipment?”
While Melvin tested the gold bars for their purity, he found all four of them to be pure. He answered, “No. Only the check in staff, and this restaurant. Though, in my time here, I have found that it pays to be prepared in this town.”
Revy asked, “How long has that been?”
Melvin then used the scales to weight each gold bar. He coyly answered, “A while.” He then finished doing some calculations with his calculator, on the weight to the current market value of the gold, which he checked a few days ago.
Melvin picked up one of the gold bar. He looked over at Revy, as he handed the gold bar back to her. He stated, “Three bars will be enough to pay for the bill and damages.”
Revy took the gold bar, pocketed the gold bar, as she thought, 'So, he is not going to cheat me. That is nice. Now, to get my cutlasses back.' She requested, “Thank you. Now, can I have my cutlasses back?”
Melvin said, “Yes.” He then pulled out both semi-automatic pistols, and a small plastic bag. He set all three items gently onto the bar counter, between them.
Melvin then stated, “The bag has your ammo in it. The clips are in the pistol. I must say, those are to very nice pistols. Are they modified nine millimeter Berettas?”
Melvin mentally added, 'It was interesting to have a good close look at Revy's weapons last night. It made what happen beforehand, almost worth it. Almost.'
Revy checked both pistols, to see they were empty. She then holstered both her weapons. As she picked up the bag of ammo, she thought, 'It would be rude, even for me, to try to load my weapons, right now. I will head back to my room, and check my pistols out before I load them. Though, I doubt he did anything to them, except disarm them. And given my actions last night, in his position, I would not hand myself a loaded weapon. Also, he probably knows about weapons from his time in the military.'
'Yet. I doubt he is the writer. He is too old. Clearly to badass. And the writer would know enough about us to never try that stunt on me. The only men that I can think of, that know us, whom would be crazy enough to try that with me, would be members of Hotel Moscow. He certainly could not be one of them. That is to crazy, even for me. What would a member of Hotel Moscow be doing here, as a bartender?'
'Still, I might as well be nice. He did compliment my weapons.”
Revy answered, “Yes. You have a nice eye for details.”
Melvin complimented, “And you have nice taste in weaponry.”
Revy replied, “Thank you. And you definitely laid down the law last night.”
Melvin thought, 'Now, I need to explain the situation her.' He calmly stated, “Revy, I don't lay down the law. I just don't take shit in my bar.”
Revy commented, “That's obvious. Also, how did you know my name, Melvin?”
Melvin though, 'Oh hell. I slipped up again. Wait a minute. I remember now. I have a perfect excuse. Though, it will not work for the rest of those from Roanapur.' He stated, “Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru introduced themselves to me. And the told me your name, and the woman you were with. I think her name was Rock.”
Revy replied, “That is correct.”
Melvin thought, 'I need an excuse to know the names of the others.' He said, “Though, I don't know the others with you.”
Revy shrugged, as she replied, “Don't worry. I will have my crew introduce themselves to you, later. Considering last night, and the fact we will likely be staying here for a while, it is the least we can do.”
Melvin went onto say, “Thank you. I looked forward to it. I prefer to know my customers names. Still... Listen Revy, I don't mind your friends, and yourself, being in my bar. But, you have to behave yourselves. I don't care what you do outside of this hotel. Though, even before you shot up the place, you drove away my customers and staff. I cannot allow that to continue. It is bad for business.”
Revy conceded, “Okay. Okay. I admit it. You have a point there. It is my fault for mistaking this city, for another city I know.”
Melvin thought, 'That would be a major mistake. This town is a lot more peaceful, and nicer than Roanapur. And this city can also be a lot more vicious, than Roanapur, when provoked.'
'For example, I know an auto mechanic, that lives in this city, whom could give the Bloodhound a run for her money. And I don't want to see you, or the others, killed, Revy. And not just because your death would likely send Hotel Moscow here, in force, to this town.'
'Though, I wonder if you have the guts to say the name of the city, Roanapur to me.' He inquired, “And where city would that be?”
Revy slyly answered, “Just a place in Thailand.”
Melvin thought, 'So, Rock has you women being secretive. That is understandable. And it is clear that Rock is the leader of your group. Considering, you would only do what Rock or Dutch would tell you. And I don't see Dutch here, in either gender. Still, it is best just be straight forward with you on how to act in this city.' He said, “Revy, if you and the others just behave, you will likely be fine in this city.”
Revy responded, “We will behave. Still, is there some place in this city that a person can cut loose at without worrying?”
Melvin flatly requested, “Define, cut loose?”
Revy casually stated, “Get drunk and wild.”
Melvin thought, 'It is tempting to tell Revy about the Rats Nest. But, I like the hot female bartender there too much to do that to her.'
Melvin said, “There are a number of other bars around here. Some very wild and dangerous. I am sure you will find one that you will like. Just keep in mind that I have found the police here are not the cliché corrupt cops. They are more lazy, than corrupt. And the police chief absolutely loathes bribery.”
Revy inquired, “Interesting. So, how does one keep off of this police chief's shit list?”
Melvin answered, “Don't make a mess in public. Don't kill people, unless they start the trouble first. Self-defense is fine. Do not harass the tourists. The police chief here has to do a balancing act. The two major incomes for this city are drug smuggling, and tourism. The drug smugglers understand that along as they don't start a war, and leave the locals and tourists alone, everything is fine. And the locals make sure to inform the tourists, to leave the drug smugglers along.”
“It has all work out so far, over the years, with only a few problems, now and then.”
“Still, in many cases, the police chief lets the locals have weapons. Such, as for their businesses. Because he knows that if the locals businesses are armed, there is less likely a chance for trouble. Or, if there is trouble, the business owners and employees can take care of the problem. With the local police getting rid of the bodies, and not worrying about the paperwork.”
Revy smiled, as she said, “I think I could get to like this town.”
Melvin mentally lamented, 'Oh brother. Revy thinking about moving here. That is a scary thought. Though...' He commented, “As I said. As long as you behave, you should be fine. But, if you are looking for trouble here, I can assure you this place can be dangerous.”
Revy said, “I will keep that in mind. And just to check, since you know the local police chief, are there going to be problems with me carrying my cutlasses in board daylight?”
Melvin cautioned, “Just don't flaunt your weapons, and walk with them on, everywhere, in public.”
Revy stated, “I have car, to take me where I want to go.”
Melvin thought, 'That is not surprising.' He said, “Then, there should not be a problem. Though, if there is a problem, and not violence involved. The police will likely give you a warning, they will let you keep your weapons.”
Revy responded, “That is great to hear. Thanks.”
Melvin replied, “You're welcome.”
Revy said, “See you, later.”
Revy then turned around, and briskly walked out of the restaurant, with her bag of a bullets in her right hand, as she headed for her hotel suite.
Meanwhile, Melvin watched Revy leave. As soon as Revy exited the room, turned the to her right, down the hallway, and out of sight, Melvin turned his attention to the items on the bar counter, in front of him. He placed the gold bars under the counter, to take to the hotel safe, in a few minutes.
After Melvin put up his instruments, he thought, 'It is nice to make a good, meaningful impression. Especially, with Revy. I don't think I have to worry about Revy, nor her crew, acting out of line here, again, anytime soon.'
For the rest of the day, Melvin noticed that none of the other badass women showed up in his restaurant, until closing that night, at midnight.
At midnight, that night, while Melvin closed his bar, he smiled, as he mentally realized, 'I am so happy that I was able to have a peaceful day, while having some of the most wild women in the multiverse staying in the hotel I work, and lived in... Well, stranger things have happened. It is too bad that there is no way I can think of to figure out why they are here. But, at least they not are here for me.'
Melvin then soon closed up the restaurant completely, he collected his Tokarev from its holster under the bar counter, and he headed to his hotel suite, to get some sleep.
(_)
The next few days went by peacefully, for the most part, for Lee. Lee noted that the women were approaching people, and talking to them. Lee guessed that they were using more subtle means to look for the writer.
Meanwhile, Lee just kept his distance, as he continued to try to figure a way to approach them. As none of them had approached him.
Lee mostly avoiding the hotel restaurant and bar, for his own safety. He just got breakfast, lunch, and dinner, elsewhere. Such as the Last Resort Diner, and the burger food truck.
In the meantime, he continued with business as usual. Which, for the most part, was him playing poker with Sam, or with Sam and others, at the Rats Nest. And he tended to win more money than he lost.
The only problem Lee had was at night. Every single night. From ten thirty PM, to midnight, Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru, would loudly make love to each other.
Their passionate actions prevented Lee from getting to sleep early.
But, there was nothing he could do about them, for the moment. Though, waiting to go to sleep until midnight was not that bad.
Though, Lee wished he knew what the three lovers were saying, in japanese, as they made love with each other. But, Lee realized that real life did not come with subtitles.
(_)
On the third night after the badass women had come to town, it was just after dark, as Sam and Lee decided to stay a little later at the Rats Nest. It was not the first time they had done so. And they found that as long as they were together, they did not have to worry about being attacked while they walk back to the hotel, at night.
Sam and Lee were playing poker in their usual corner table. Sam had his back to the corner, with Lee back to the right wall of the bar. This allowed Lee to see the front of the bar from the corner of his left eye.
The last time Lee looked towards the front of the room, there was about twenty men, and no women, except the bartender.
Lee turned his attention back to the poker game he was having with Sam, as he thought, 'It is not odd to have an off night, with no women customers. And I have seen the bartender be able to take care of herself. I have watched her outfight two men twice her size, with her bare hands. Also, she keeps a semi-automatic pistol under her bar counter, for emergencies.'
'All those that come to the Rats Nest, knows two things about the bartender. One, don't piss off the bartender. And two, if you are nice to her, she may take you home with her, for a night of pleasure.'
'That has not happened to myself. But, I have watched her take a few men home with her. And a couple of women, as well. She does seem to swing both was. That being said, she is clearly a badass, and she not to be messed with.'
'I am happy that she likes me, due to my manners, always paying my bills, and good tipping.'
'Yet. As I play poker, with Sam, here. I cannot seem to figure out why I am presently sensing of danger around me. Having developed my precognitive abilities has been interesting. And I can sense danger. But, it has to be direct. And it is not foolproof. I did not sense Rock, Revy, and their crew come into the hotel. The likely reason was that I was not in any immediate danger.'
'Though, I am sure if I keep an ear out, as I play, I should be okay.'
Lee then turned his attention back to the playing cards in his hand.
Less than a minute later, as Lee kept an ear towards the door. He overheard a man said, in english, with a heavy mexican accent, “Hey babes. Want to have some fun?”
Another man said, in english, also in a heavy mexican accent, “Come on. You know you all want to.”
Lee then heard a gunshot being fired.
Lee used the corner of his left eye to look at the front entrance, what he saw shocked him, but did not really surprise him.
There was a body of a man, laying one back, around his friends.
In front of the men, by the door, Lee saw that Revy and the Lagoon sisters. He did not see any of the other women. And the five sisters had their weapons in their hands.
Oddly enough, Revy just stood back, near the entrance, with her arms crossed, and weapons holstered.
Meanwhile, Molly had out her semi-automatic pistols, Sarah unsheathed her katana, Yukio held her machine gun up with both her hands, Rebecca had her long knives unsheathed, and Kristina had on her gantlets, as the men attacked the teenage girls for killing their friend.
It was not even a contest, as the girls, in their late teens, tore into the men.
Lee also noticed that the bartender could not be seen, meaning she was likely ducking under the bar counter.
Molly and Yukio used their weapons to quickly kill any of the men that pulled out weapons, or tried to escape out the back.
Though a couple of shots were fired by the men, but Lee could see from the corner of his eye that Sarah cut through the bullets, before they hit any of her family, or herself.
At the same time Sarah and Rebecca swiftly killing any men that approach the girls.
Kristina stood back, beside Molly and Yukio. Her flamethrowers were to dangerous in the enclosed space, so she was offering hand to hand protection for Molly and Yukio.
Lee felt more concern for his safety, than fear, as he thought, 'I would guess one of the men tried to get to close to them. And he got killed. Molly probably took the first shot. And they are really killing off the men in the front of the bar.'
'I don't know where the bartender is. I cannot see under the bar counter from this angle. But, I would guess the bartender is under her bar. That is a wise move on her part.'
'Yet. I wonder how Sam and I are going to handle this situation. We have no means of escape. We get up, we become targets. If we even look in their direction, we become targets. We crawl under our table, once they are finished killing these fools, they will come of and steal everything we have. Because they will see us as weak. Right now they likely don't know what to make of us. With them waiting until they finish with the others, to come and deal with us.'
'And even if we stay were we are, they still might kill us. Also, the bartender cannot help us in this situation. And I don't blame her for not getting involved.'
'The only chance we have is to do the most insane thing one can do in the middle of a gunfire fight. Ignore the gunfight. If they girls take notice, they will also wonder if we are insane. Which means, since we are not presenting a threat to them, they might leave us alone. And also they will not walk all over us. Still, I am just going to have to play this by ear, and hope Sam has enough sense to play along.'
'And all the while, we will have to hope not stray bullets hit us.'
Lee then intentionally ignored the gunfight, as he looked at his playing cards.
Sam looked at the playing cards in his right hand, as he calmly asked, “Think we should leave?”
Lee answered, “No. If we get up, we die. Let's just continue playing.”
Sam said, “That works for me.”
They continued this poker game, with Sam winning the hand.
Half a minute later, the sounds of violence stopped.
As they were in the middle of another hand of cards, Lee heard several sets of footsteps coming toward Sam and himself.
A few seconds later, Lee saw a feminine, tanned skinned right hand reach for their pot of money on the middle of the table.
Without looking up at them, Lee gently held his cards in his right hand, as he used his left hand grabbed the feminine right wrist. He firmly stated, “You are welcome to join us for a few hands of cards. But, you are not allowed to just take the pot, and leave.”
Lee let go of the right hand, as he turned to his left, to face the teenage girls.
To Lee's credit, he maintained his poker face, as he did not show any outward emotion at what he just saw right in front of him.
Less than six feet in front of him, were all five of the teenager Lagoon daughters.
From Lee's left to right, were Molly, Sarah, Kristina, Rebecca, and Yukio.
All of them were pointed their weapons at him, some only inches from his face. And none of them looked happy.
Yukio was pointed her automatic Browning M1918A2 machine gun at him. The browning automatic rifle had a modified 1918A3 SLR stock, and used a modified hundred round, double drum, Beta C-mag magazine. Also, Yukio did not have the shoulder stack on her body. She was holding the weapon steady, solely with her hands, while not showing any signs of trouble in doing so.
Rebecca was pointing the tips of her two Russian model eighteen twenty-seven pioneer long knives at him.
Kristina was pointed her flame throwing gauntlets at him.
Sarah was pointed the edge of her katana at him.
And Molly was pointing her two semi-automatic, stainless steel, M Nine Beretta pistols at him.
From behind them, Lee saw Revy at the bar, drinking a glass of what he guess was rum, which had just been served by the bartender, whom had already gotten up from behind the bar counter.
By the look on the face of the bartender, Lee could tell that she was not happy with the situation, they were all in.
Meanwhile, from the corner of Lee's right eye, he saw Sam was chuckling at his situation.
Kristina looked at the two men, as she inquired, “Do you think either of these two men could be the person we are looking for?”
Lee continued to maintain his poker face, as he mentally berated himself, 'This is like that Black Lagoon art picture, with Balalaika, Eda, Revy, Shenhua, and Roberta, holding their weapons, and pointing them towards the viewer. Only, in this situation, I am the intended target.'
'And what the hell is Sam laughing about. Maybe I misjudged him. Or, maybe he would just prefer laugh, than cry. I can under either possibility. Still, it does not matter. He is my own real friend here. I do not need to make an issue of his chuckling.'
Lee turned his attention back to the Lagoon five Lagoon daughter, whom were pointing their weapons, mere feet from him.
Lee remained calmed on the outside, as he mentally lamented, 'Besides, I would verbally curse in several languages, including a few fictional ones, but it would likely tip them off as to who I am...'
'Why did I have to play around with reincarnation? Why did I bring the badasses that died in the Black Lagoon series back to being among the living? Why did I make them a badass crew that were born and raised by badasses? Because I am an idiot. That is why!'
'I have to play this just right, or I am dead. Or worse... My best chance is to deflect, and humor them.'
Lee smiled at the women, as he said, “Hello ladies. This gentleman with me is Sam.” He mentally added, 'And there is the deflection.'
By then, Sam had stopped chuckling. He turned turned the five teenage women, as he calmly said, “Nice to meet you, ladies. We don't have any interest in the recent actions of have taken place here. Quite the contrary. Me and my friend here have been playing cards at this bar, for the last several months. So, we can all just walk away.”
The teenage women looked at each other for a moment.
They turned back to Lee and Sam, as Molly said, “If that is the case, then neither of these is the one we are looking for.”
Kristina stated, “I will let the others know.”
Lee thought, 'I am not going to look a gift horse in the mouth. But, thanks to Sam, for the alibi, I now get to implement my plan fully into action.'
From the corner of Lee's right eye, Lee saw Sam turned to look at him, as he asked, “Need any help with them?”
Lee did not take his eyes off the women, he then toss his cards over to Sam, as he answered, “I think I got this. Just keep dealing the deck. We will just use the current pot for the next hand.”
Sam replied, “Okay.” He then collected the cards. After which, he quickly shuffled and dealt five card to Lee, and five cards to himself. With the cards facing down.
Sam picked up his cards, and he looked at them.
Without looking at the cards, which were laying face down on the table, nor the pot, Lee played his bet, while he the push out two cards from his hand, and Sam replaced the cards.
Kristina then realized something about what Lee had said. She pointed out, “Okay. You introduced you friend, but not yourself.”
Lee continued to look at the five armed teenage women in front of him, as he introduced himself, in a casual tone of voice, “Well, I am J. D. Lee. The gambling man.” He thought, 'And here comes the build up for the humor.'
Lee then three three cards towards Sam.
Sam exchanged three cards for Lee, and to for himself.
The five older teenage girls and Revy started to laugh, as they lowered their weapons.
While the six women laughed, Lee did not look at his cards, as he and Sam placed their bets.
As the six women calmed down, without looking at his cards, Lee said, to Sam, “Call.”
Lee turned over his cards onto the table, without looking, as Sam looked at the cards and he realized he had lost.
Sam pushed the pot to Lee, as he collected the cards. He then started shuffling the cards again.
Meanwhile, the five sisters continued to focus on Lee, as Kristina commented, “Lee is a asian name. You are a white man.”
Lee looked at the five sisters, he calmly countered, “I will have you know that Lee is a southern name.”
By then, Lee had replaced his cards again, and placed his bets, all without looking. Lee said, “Fold.”
Sam collected his pot and redid the cards.
Both Revy and Molly noticed what was happening at the poker game, in front of them, with interest.
Kristina said, “As a black woman, I find such a name for you to be offensive.”
Lee continued to not look at the table, as he placed his bets and pulled out three cards for Sam to replace.
Lee thought, 'That is kind of hypocritical Kristina, considering you were a white man in your previous life. That you still remembers. Still, I am not going to dare risk saying a word about that. Now. Let us take this up a notch.'
Lee responded, while letting his southeastern U.S. accent become a bit heavier, “And as a southern gentleman, I find your ignorance and lack of tact to be annoying.”
This caused the four of the five sisters to roar with laughter. And thought Kristina did not laugh, she did maintain her compose.
Lee maintained his poker face, as he thought, 'Good. Kristina is not going to harm me for that veiled insult. And the comment made the others laugh. Just as I had hoped would happen.'
Lee did not look at the table, as he said to Sam, “Call.” Lee turned over his cards without looking and Sam realized he lost again.
Sam pushed the pot to Lee. He then collected the cards, and reshuffled the deck.
As four of the sisters calmed down, Yukio smirked, as she stated, “You are no gentlemen. A gentlemen does not in the clothes that you are wearing.”
Lee thought, 'Now, for the delivery.'
Lee casually joked, “Only fool would wear a suit and tie in a town like this. Doing so would just be asking for trouble.”
It took a second for the joke to register, with all teenage five of the girls, and Revy, started laugh at Lee's joke.
Lee thought, 'And that is the humor.'
Rebecca turned to Revy, as she stated, “Mom, is that why... err, Rokuro use to get into so much trouble?”
Revy's laughter soon turned to giggles, as she replied, “Very likely.”
Rebecca turned to her attention back towards Lee.
It was then that Molly decided to change the subject. She pointedly asked Lee, “How are you doing that?”
Lee thought, 'No point in trying to hide what she is talking about.'
Lee answered, “The card trick? It is pure instinct. I have been practicing it for a while, with Sam's help.”
Sam continued to looked at his cards, as he commented, in a relaxed tone of voice, “It is fun playing with a someone that can beat you without looking at the cards, or even the table.”
Molly inquired, “But, how exactly are doing you do that?”
Revy answered, “He's a pre-cog. He can sense the future.”
Lee looked over at Revy, as he smiled. He replied, “You got it in one, Miss Red. And thanks for the cigarette, a few nights ago.”
Revy replied, “You're welcome. And the name is, Revy. I have a friend that can do something similar.”
Lee remained calm out the outside, as he thought, with relief, 'Yea, Annie. AKA gender bent Darth Vader. Thank god, she is not here in town, or at the very least not in the hotel. Or, this would hunt would have ended very quickly, with me being caught.'
Lee said, to Revy, while pulling back on his southern accent, along with not showing a hint of sarcasm in his tone of voice, “Nice to meet you, Revy. And who are these fine ladies with you?”
Revy grinned, as she answered, “Well, the redhead with the machine gun is Yukio. The redhead with the blades is Rebecca. They are both mine. The girl with the brown dreadlocks is Kristina. The blond with the guns is Molly. And the blond with the sword is Sarah.”
Lee politely responded, “Nice to meet you, all.”
Sarah stated, “It is nice to meet you.” She then turned to the girls, as she pulled out a rage.
Sarah began cleaning off her katana with a rag she pulled from one of her pockets. A few seconds later, she sheathed her weapon into the scabbard attached to the left side of her belt. As she did so, she said, “It might be best if we let them be. It is not right to destroy those with gifts, and those that are willing to protect their own.”
Kristina replied, “I agree.”
Lee thought, 'It is good that I remember that in the reincarnation situation, I dropped their negative personality traits, while maintaining their positive personality traits. Sarah's sense of honor and valuing of skill is playing for me, and Sam.'
Lee said, “I think it is time for Sam and I to leave. Good night, ladies.”
Sam nodded once, in agreement.
Lee turned towards the table, as he and Sam quickly collected their money. Sam also collected his cards.
They didn't even count their money. They got up from their chairs, and stuffed the cash into their pants pockets.
They then calmed walked passed the teenage women.
The five teenage sisters turned to continue to look at them, as the two men walked away.
Sam and Lee then walked by the bar counter. They both stopped about five feet from where the bartender and Revy were.
Lee pulled out out some money. Counter it, to where it should cover Sam and his bar tab for that night, plus a little more for the bartender.
Lee set the money on the counter, as he stated, “This should cover our tab. And keep the change.”
The bartender collect the money, as she said, “Thanks.”
Lee asked, “Are you going to be open tomorrow. I kind of like this place.”
The female bartender turned to Lee, as she replied, “Come back late tomorrow afternoon.”
Lee nodded, as he said, “Okay. And have a pleasant night.” He then turned to Revy, while he nodded, as he stated, “And good night to you as well, Revy.”
Revy just smiled towards Lee.
Lee and Sam then walked passed Revy, and they soon exited the Rats Nest bar.
Right after they exited the bar, Lee saw two glints of metal shining on the sidewalk.
Lee bent down and saw that it was a bullet that had been split in half, in mid-flight.
Lee pocket the items, as he silently realized thought, 'This is likely Sarah's handiwork. Now, to get back to the hotel.'
Lee stood back up straight. Sam and him then turned and walking towards the Devil's Hotel.
While the two men walked side by side, with Sam being to Lee's right side, Lee turned to Sam, as he asked, “So, are the police going to look into the mess those girls just made?”
Sam looked over at Lee, as he answered, “I doubt it. The police here are not very corrupt, but at the same time, they have long since wrote off the Rats Nest as a place where bad people are going to die. As far as they are concerned, it saves them on paperwork and headaches.”
Lee said, in a slightly annoyed tone of voice, “That is nice of you to tell me after the fact.”
Sam countered, “At least we don't have to clean up the bodies. Though, it must be rough for a bartender to have to deal with that on a regular basis.”
Lee agreed, “You got that right. There is only one bartender I know of, than the woman in there, that had worse luck at their job.” Lee thought, 'Bao.' Lee then warned, “And keep in mind that the older redhead in there. Ah, Revy. Was the main headache for that guy. So, it is only going to get worse for that female bartender in there.”
Sam inquired, “So, you know her?”
Lee thought, 'Oh hell. I just backed myself into a corner without realizing it. Such a mistake could get me caught. Fortunately, it is just Sam who is with me. Still, I might as well be honest. While being vague, as I tried to salvage the situation.'
'Lee honestly answered, in a serious tone of voice, “I only know of her and her friends, through third party sources. And I don't want Revy and her friends to know that I know of them, nor where they are from.”
Sam stated, “My lips are sealed.”
Lee replied, “Thanks.”
Lee thought, with relief, 'Okay. One crisis averted. Now, to help keep my friend here, from accidentally getting himself killed.'
Lee said, in a sober tone of voice, “Still Sam, I know you like to take risks. I have seen you hit on girls who were standing right beside their boyfriends. But, I need you to listen to me. Words fail to describe how dangerous Revy and her friends are. If you value your life. If you wish to continue breathing. Then, leave those women alone. Do not hit on them.”
Sam replied, “I will keep that in mind.”
Lee asked, “Good. So, what are you planning to do for tonight?”
Sam stated, “I plan to go back to my hotel room, reflect on the fact we didn't get killed, and then get some sleep.”
Lee complimented, “Sounds like a good plan.”
Lee mentally reflected, 'Too bad I am going to have to wait a few hours to get some sleep, with the lovebirds in the room beside me. At least I can get buy a few beers from Melvin, and go into the hotel lobby to relax, and look at my prizes.'
'I have found that the hotel lobby music, during the night, is usually playing soft, relaxing music, unless someone walks in for the first time, and the speakers start playing that person's theme song. And that has happened a few times. Though, it is a rare occurrence at this time of night.'
The two men then continued walking towards the Devils' Hotel.
(_)
Two hours later, back at the hotel, Lee sat in a cushioned armchair, alone in the hotel lobby. The chair was on the right side of the lobby, near the elevators, and the chair itself face the lobby's front doors.
Sam had already head for his suite, to get some sleep.
Meanwhile, Lee went to the hotel restaurant, bought a few bottles of beer, and took them to the front lobby, to slowly drink them.
Presently, Lee was having a nice buzz from the alcohol he drank. But, he was nowhere near completely drunk. And he still his sense of self-control.
As Lee was enjoying his alcohol buzz, he was pondering his current situation.
In his right hand were the two evenly split bullet fragments.
Lee looked down at the impossibility rolling around in his very fingers.
Doing so seemed to make the entire situation that his life had become seem more real to him.
He began to lightly tossing the pieces a few inches into the air, with the bullets landing back into the palm of his right hand.
Lee then heard some people to his side enter from the lobby entrance. He ignored them.
A few seconds later, he heard masculine voice, beside him, ask, “Where did you get those bullet pieces from?”
Lee stopped tossing the bullet pieces, letting them land in his right hand, as he turned his head to see four men he immediately recognized.
The four men were dressed in masculine clothing. It was Rock, Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru, as men. Lee also noted that Rock had his black long hair in ponytail.
Even buzzed, Lee did not allow any outward emotional expression to his situation.
Lee thought, 'If I am slow to react, I will appear to be more drunk than I am. Now, to figure out this situation in front of me.'
'First question. How are they male? Three have the simple answer of them being able to control what genders they want to be. For Rock, I am guessing he used a packet of instant spring of drowned man. Still, the change left Rock with long hair in both forms. Unless she cuts it, then she had short hair in both gender forms.'
'This also means, at the very least, Rock and Revy have packets of that in their hotel suite. And likely others in their group do, as well. And I really, really don't want to know the details how they use those said packets. Though, I fear my imagination already filled in most of those gaps in, a while ago.'
'Second question. Why are they guys? I am guessing they are coming back from literally having a guys night out. This makes sense. They are all good friends, and the three lovers probably invited Rock with them on their guys night out. That is why Revy was by herself, as she chaperoned her five teenagers children. And I don't have a clue where the trio sisters, and the others are. Though, none of them are likely getting into anywhere the trouble that the Lagoon sisters did at the Rats Nest.'
'Third question. Why are they talking to me? They saw the bullet fragments, and Rock recognized the type of cut that was required to do it. Considering he helped raise Sarah, that is not surprising.'
'Fourth question. Who is who? Three of the four of them have black hair. And all four of them are japanese.'
This is not hard to guess. Rock looks similar in both gender forms. As either a guy, or girl. And Rock is the same mid-twenties age in both his gender forms.'
'Natsuru's blue hair is a dead give away. And boy, is he ripped with nice abs.'
'Ranma also did have a unique taste in clothing. He always wear red.'
'So, the black haired japanese man, with the short hair cut, I guess is Akira. I have to factor in his age difference between now, and the manga. Along with manga pictures being somewhat different that what real life looks like.'
'Ranma still looks to be in his twenties from the youth restoration. And Rock's age mirrors the same youthful age as his female form, due to the super-soldier serum. But, Akira and Natsuru, as men, look to be in their forties. But, they still look great.'
'Under different circumstances, as in my hide not being on the line, I would love for the opportunity to just sit down and chat with these four people, for hours on end. Still, all four of these people are very sharp. I better watch what I say...Wait a minute, what time is it?'
Lee quickly glanced at his wrist watch, and saw he what time it was, as he continued he thought, ' Oh yea. I could make this work for me, in several ways.'
Lee then turned his attention back to the four standing men, whom were looking at him, from ten feet away.
Lee intentionally, though slightly, slurred his speech, as he inquired, “Elsewhere... Would you like to look at them?”
Rock replied, “Sure.” He then walked over to Lee.
Rock came around to a stop, beside Lee, to Lee's front right side.
Lee then stayed in his seat, as he held up the bullet pieces towards Rock.
Lee said, “Here... Have a look for yourself.”
Lee then handed the bullet fragments to Rock, as Rock took them in his left hand.
As Rock looked at the bullet pieces, Lee stated, “A couple of hours ago, a friend and I were at the Rats Nest. A local bar. A group of five teenage girls and a woman a few years older than them, came into the bar and decide to clean house, by killing a number of men there. The only ones left alive were me, my friend, and the bartender.”
By then, the four standing men had walked around to face Lee.
Rock gulped. He asked, “Could you please describe these women?”
Lee answered, “Sure. There were three redheads. Two blonds. And one with brown dreadlocks.”
Rock muttered under his breath, “I am going to have a long talk with Revy, and the girls. And after that stunt she pulled at the hotel bar.”
Lee thought, 'So, that is why the bar was closed for the morning after they got here. Revy likely got drunk and shot it up. I hope that does not happen again.'
Suddenly, the digital watch started beeping. Lee quickly stopped the beeping.
Akira asked, “Why is your watch beeping?”
Lee inwardly smiled, as he thought, 'I am so going to love this.'
Lee answered, “Because it is twelve o'clock midnight, and this is when the trio of lovebirds, that have a room by mine, finally start wrapping up on their nightly lovemaking sessions. And they are loud. When they are making love, they are usually speaking, or should I say, passionately screaming in a foreign language. I would almost kill for a good night's sleep, before midnight.”
Akira asked, with discomfort evident in his tone of voice, “What do these people look like?”
Lee continued to inwardly smile, as he could tell that Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru already knew the answer, considering they were blushing.
Lee stated, “Three women. Clearly lesbians. I am not judging. I am just stating a fact. There was a blond. A redhead. And a girl that dyes her hair blue.” Lee looked over, as Natsuru, as he continued, “Actually, her hair is the same shade of blue as yours.”
The four men suddenly because visibly unconformable,
Natsuru quickly responded, by lying, “She is my sister.”
Lee honestly replied, “I can see the family resemblance.”
Ranma asked, “So, why didn't you ask them to keep it down?”
Lee answered, “Because, I don't even know their names. And it would have been rude to knock on their door. Speaking of which, I don't even know your names.”
Rock spoke up, “My name is Rokuro Okajima.”
Lee did not show it on the outside, but he was mildly impressed, as he thought, 'Good move. This allows you to still use you name as, Rock, when you are female. And Rokuro as male. Like Ranma use to do with the Ranko angle.'
Lee stood up, and turned to face Rock. He extended his right hand, as he said, “It is a pleasure to meet you, Mister Okajima.”
Rock shook Lee's hand. Both men could tell that the other had a firm, but not tight handshake.
Lee thought, 'The firmness of his grip means he is taking the situation seriously. Which is good. And the firmness of my grip shows him that I am serious. Because, it is always customary for to opponents to handshake, before the battle. It is just that Rock and the others here don't realize I am the one they are after, in this insane cat and mouse game. Now, to introduce myself to them.'
The two men left go. Lee then introduced himself, “I am J. D. Lee. And yes, Lee is a caucasian family name where I come from.”
Akira asked, “And where is that?”
Lee turned to Akira, as he answered, “The southeast U.S.”
Akira wondered, as he inquired, “Like Robert E. Lee?”
Lee thought, 'It figures Akira would make the connection. Given his time in college, in Atlanta, Georgia. Still, no harm, no foul.'
Lee responded, with a slightly forced slurred tone of voice, “Yes.” He then looked around the group, as he continued, in a slightly slurred speed tone, “Now gentlemen. If you don't mind. I intended to get some sleep. Have a pleasant night, yourselves.”
Lee the turned around, and walked for the elevators. So, he could get to his room and go to sleep. Though, as Lee made his way to the elevator bar, he made himself stagger a little bit, to maintain the illusion that he was drunk.
Fortunately, the other four men believed Lee's act, and Lee made it to the elevator bay. He soon made his way up to the third floor, and to his hotel suite, where he could get ready for bed, and get some much needed sleep.
(_)
That night, as Lee slept, he had strange dreams.
Lee was standing outside, during the day. Lee stood in the sunlight, as he looked in front of him, at a large, tall multistory building.
In front of the building was a redheaded woman, and a black haired man, with light skin complexions.
Lee then turned to his right and saw a white haired man, with a full, long, groomed beard, in a purple robe, holding a staff.
The white haired man struck the bottom of his staff onto the ground.
Suddenly, the shadow of the building in front of him cast over Lee.
Lee fell through the dark tunnel for several seconds, until he saw a light at the end.
When he broke through the end of the tunnel, he found himself in a huge, domed city, that was dimming list, like it was as dusk. He look up to see the he exited a dark interior side of the dome itself.
Instead of the feeling of falling, it felt like he was flying, only Lee has no control over it.
He fell down until he was flying above a six lane road, with a median and divider between the middle of the road.
He could see vehicles going one direction on half the road, the other direction on the other half of the road.
He continued flying at high speed, at he watched himself approach a large fortress, with a concrete fence, with pillars, and a gate that was opening in front of him.
As he got closer to the gate, he noticed the two outer lanes on each side of the road split and veered around the fortress, as the two middle lanes merged into one two lane road.
It was then that Lee noticed that there was a bright light on the other side of the gate entrance.
As he got closed to the gate, the light became blinding.
A second after he past thought the gate, and the light, he found the light was gone, and he was flying over a mountain range, during the day, in the early morning.
He was high enough that he was by the clouds.
He then looked down at a valley before him, which was covered in mist.
Suddenly, he trajectory changed, and started going straight down in the valley.
He passed though the mists, and felt himself hitting water.
He kept going deeper, until he emerge from the surface of the water on the other side.
As he began getting height, he found that he was not water, and that he was coming out of a lake, in a less mountainous, more hilly terrain.
It was the middle the day.
Lee then noticed that he had flight path in the sky had curved, with him heading to what look like a asian style, stone built, feudal palace.
As he got closer, he could see that the palace was populated. With the clothing of the men and women there, dating back to the feudal period in Asia.
While Lee passed over the front gates, he noticed that the guards standing there did not noticed him. Nor, did anyone else, as he flew above them.
The flight path changed again, as he slowed down, while change direction, to specific part of the palace.
A few seconds later, Lee found himself landing on his feet in a small, outdoor garden.
Lee looked around, and a few people walking about, but they ignored, as they continued about their business.
Lee thought, 'I am like a ghost to them. Which makes sense, in this insanity. And I feel draw towards someone, or something, inside the building in front of me. I have come this far. I might as well see who, or what it is.'
Lee noticed the doors to the building, in the direction he was draw to, were open.
Lee walked inside.
He was careful no to run enough anyone, as he continued walking. This whatever pull had on him, directed him through the hallways, until he saw a sliding door in the hallway, that opened to a room.
Lee felt he needed to walk inside.
After Lee walked in, he could see the room was someone personal bedchambers, but the room was far more modern than must of the palace.
There were electric, modern furniture, bedding, drawers, and even a coffee maker, with accessories, on a table across the room.
He then heard a feminine voice, from the other side of the room, calmly greet him, “Hello Lee.”
Lee turned to see a woman, with her back turned to him.
Even with her back turned to him, Lee could see that the woman was slender in build, had long black hair, and fair skin. She was also wearing a very fine silk robe.
She had a mirror in one hand, and brush in her other hand, as she combed her hair.
With her back turned to Lee, the woman casually said, “Lee? Do you not have people to meet? Somewhere to be?”
Before Lee could response, he eyes snapped open, and he realized he was laying on his pillow, in his bed, on his stomach, in his hotel suite, in the Devil's Hotel.
Lee rolled over, onto his back, and leaned up.
Lee looked around, and he could see from the illuminated outline of the heavy curtains, in front of the sliding glass door, that it was morning.
As he turned on the lamp beside his bed, he look at the digital clock by the lamp.
The clock read in red LED letters, seven thirty-five AM.
Lee rubbed his face, as he thought, with annoyance, 'I hate visions. I loath visions. They never make sense until the start to happen. And I tend to forget most of the details before they start to happen. Unfortunately, they are part of the package in being a pre-cog.'
'Thought, visions are completely unlike straight precognition, when I literally experience a part of my future life experiences. In those cases, there is usually a stretch of memory of a few seconds, to a few minutes, where I literally know what is going to happen for that short time frame, when it begins to happen. This is because I first live it in my sleep. Though, I don't fully recall it when I wake up. It does stay with me, and I usually have total recall of the events, beginning to end, once they start to happen.'
'And I like when my precognition does that. But, still I cannot make head or tails of the visions I sometimes have. They are like glimpses of several time periods. Like flipping through the pages of a book, without really looking at any page in particular... Well, I might as well get up and face the day.'
Lee then woke himself up, completely. He got up from his bed, shaved, cleaned up, showered, dried, and dressed for the day.
Roughly half an hour after he finished getting dress, around eight thirty AM, Lee was sitting on his bed watching an english channel on TV, while trying to decide what he wanted to do for breakfast.
Lee suddenly heard a knock on his door. Use then TV remote to turn off the TV. And he tossed the remote on top of his bed, to his right side.
Next, Lee got up, and he slowly when to the door. When he reached the door, look into the peephole.
Lee did a double-take.
Outside his door were Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru, all women at the time. And they were dressed in nice women's clothing. And they were clearly ready to face the day, as well.
Lee thought, 'I better say hi. After last night, they probably want to apologize to me. And this is a perfect opportunity for an official first impression with them.'
Lee quickly walked over to his chest of drawers, where he retrieved, and put on his blue baseball cap, large glasses, and blue cloth jacket. He then softly rushed back over to the door.
Lee opened the door. He then kindly greeted them, “Good morning, ladies. What can I do for you?”
Natsuru was the one to speak, as she greeted Lee, “Good morning. My brother informed me, a few minutes ago, that our nightly activities were disturbing you. We apologize for your discomfort.”
Akira continued for her blue haired lover, “We were not aware we were being so loud.”
Ranma finished for her two lovers, “Sorry about that. We will try to be more quieter in the future.”
Lee smiled, as he responded, “Thank you. And I hope you have a nice day.”
Just as Lee was about to close the door, Akira held it open with her right shoe in the doorway.
Lee let go of the door, with him letting the door stay open.
Akira, stated, “It has also come to our attention that we have been poor neighbors. So, we plan to take the time to introduce ourselves to everyone in the hotel, starting with you. My name is Akira. The blue haired girl is Natsuru. And the redhead here is Ranma.”
Lee replied, “Nice to meet all of you. I am J.D. Lee.”
Natsuru explained, “Still, when we said all of us. It did not just mean the three of us.”
Lee maintained an outward calmness, as he thought, 'Oh crap. They are not going too...'
Ranma said, in a manner that lead to no room for discussion, “We all are going down to the restaurant, so you can meet our friends.”
Akira then turned, and headed down the hallway, towards the elevator bay.
Ranma continued, “Akira is going ahead, to organization the introductions.”
Lee thought, 'There is no point in arguing with them. They are stronger, and better, than me, in every category. At least I have my wallet and keys already in my pants pocket. And my shoes are on.'
Lee replied, “Okay.”
Lee walked out of the door to his hotel suite, locking and shutting the door behind him.
Lee then walked beside Ranma and Natsuru, down the hallway, towards the elevators.
(_)
A few minutes later, Ranma, Natsuru, and Lee entered the hotel restaurant, Lee followed Ranma, with Natsuru behind him.
Lee saw that the badass crew were sitting in chairs, at set of tables, near the stage, in the back of the room.
Though, they were not the only customers in the room. But, the other customers were sitting away form the badass crew, in either in chairs, at tables near the entrance to the restaurant, or by the bar counter, in stool.
Lee did his best to remain calm, and composed, with his poker face on, as he thought, 'I miss not coming here for breakfast, but now I avoid it like the plague, because this is where these badasses come, first thing in the morning, for breakfast. And it is very unwise to deal with trained killers, when they are not fully awake, and hungry for food and drink.'
As they continued walking towards the badass crew, Lee saw that Akira was giving a speech to her friends. She was standing in the middle of the tables, where her friends were sitting, and eating their breakfast.
Lee overheard Akira say, in english, “Now, we have been here for a few days, and we have been very reclusive to the rest of the staff and guests of this hotel. And while we have talked to a few of them. To be honest, some of them are likely getting suspicious of us. So, Ranma, Natsuru, and I decided we would introduce all of us to each person in the hotel, starting with this fellow right here.”
Akira then gestured towards Lee.
The dark haired woman, that looked like Birdy Cephon, whom sat across from Aeryn at a table, said, in a sympathetic tone of voice, “That poor guy.”
Lee thought, 'And that would be, Violin.'
As soon as Ranma, Natsuru, and Lee approached the tables, Akira saw them, as she stated, “Let us get started. This is J. D. Lee. Now, before you ask, as someone with experience with both Chinese and American cultures, Lee, is a name used by both asians, and some caucasian Americans. Though, the name between the two peoples have completely different roots. Now, let us start our introductions.”
When they reached the center of the tables the groups were at, Lee stopped walking, while Ranma and Natsuru walked up to stand beside Akira, while facing Lee.
Lee made sure he appeared to be paying attention to every word that Akira spoke.
Akira pointed at a table where Shenhua and Sawyer, drinking cups of coffee. The coffee was being poured by Lotton.
Akira stated, “The chinese woman is Shenhua. The smaller woman is Sawyer. The woman pouring the coffee is Lotton.”
While doing his best to maintain his poker face, Lee was starting showing some nervousness on the outside. Though, Lee also felt some mild amusement, as he though, 'I find it interesting that Lotton is as hot as the rest of these women.'
Akira then pointed to Aeryn and Violin, as she stated, “This is Aeryn, and her spouse, Violin.”
Violin just lightly waved at Lee.
Akira then pointed at a table, where her, Ranma, and Natsuru's daughters were sitting at.
Akira pointed at the green haired girl first, “The green haired one is mine. Her name is Yurika. The blue haired girl with black highlights is Natsuru's child. She is named Mikoto. The purple haired girl is Ranma's daughter, and her named Nodoka.”
Akira then pointed at a table belonging to the five lagoon daughters.
Lee interrupted, “I have already met these five ladies.”
Akira started, “Oh, so these are the girls you... grunt.”
Lee noticed that Ranma gently elbows Akira in her ribs.
Lee thought, 'It makes sense that Ranma elbowed her lover, to keep her from revealing their true nature to me, because they would have to explain how they knew what happened last night. Still, I am nervous, and I cannot help it.'
Akira said, “Moving on, we now introduce you to our two leaders, Revy and Rock. The redhead is Revy. And the raven haired woman is Rock.”
Akira pointed at the table in front of him, in which Revy, and Rock, whom was now back to being a girl, were sitting at.
Lee mentally noted, 'Rock is back to being girl. No surprise there.'
Lee also noticed that Revy was smirking at him.
Lee thought, 'Revy is likely planning to tell them I am a pre-cog. Nothing I can do about that. Still, I better be polite.' Lee looked around at the group, as he said, “It is nice to meet you all.”
Meanwhile, Ranma, Akira, Natsuru went to join their daughters at the table they were sitting at.
This left Lee alone, in the center of the tables where the women were sitting at.
Lee thought, 'This is like being surround by pride of lions. Hungry lions at that. And I getting more nervous by the second.'
For all his poker skills, he could not hide the fact that he was startled by being surrounded by these badass women. All of whom wanted a piece of his hide, they just didn't know it was him they were looking for.
Lee silently realized in thought, 'I got to say something quick, or they are going start asking me questions. And I know what to do, to get out of this situation.'
Lee quickly said, “I freely admit, I am intimidated by being surrounded by so many beautiful women.”
The women around him laughed at his comment.
Lee thought, 'I will take the laughs over the pain, any day of the week.'
Aeryn commented, “You are an intelligent man.”
Lee turned to Aeryn, as he said, “Thank you.” He then looked around the group, as he continued, “Anyway, as I said before, it is nice meeting you. But, I have an errands to run. So, have a great morning.”
Lee then turned towards the front of the room, and walked away from their tables, towards the exit to the hallway. But, Lee did so at a calm, causal pace.
And by taking his time, this allowed him to overhear some of their conversations.
Lee thought, 'If I run, doing so will arouse their suspicions about me. And if I overhear something important from them, I cannot stop, nor change pace without alerting them. I must maintain this pace all the way to the outside of the restaurant.'
(_)
Nearby, Nodoka leaned towards the table with the lagoon daughters, as she asked, “Is that the gambler from last night? Whom you told us about?”
Molly turned to Nodoka, as she answered, “Yes”
Nodoka stated, “He doesn't look like much.”
Yukio snorted, “That guy was able to keep it together while we had our weapons draw on him, mere feet away from his body. And he was still able to play hands of poker with his friend at the same time, and win a few of those hands. Without looking at the cards. Don't underestimate him.”
(_)
While the conversation with the teenage girls went on, Rock overheard their conversation. She turned to Revy, as she asked, “So, you met him last night?”
Revy turned to Rock, as she stated, “Yep. He is a latent pre-cog. What he does at playing poker is amazing. Not as amazing as you, honey. But then, who is?”
Rock smiled at her lover's compliment, as she said, “Well, I met him last night, as well. And he had enough sense to pick up two pieces of a bullet that Sarah has sliced in half. Is he the one we're after?”
Revy answered, “Nah. The bearded guy with him said he has been here for several months. This doesn't fit the time frame, as we know of it.” Revy then spoke a little loud, towards her groups, as she inquired, “So, what is going on with our betting pool, on whom is most likely to catch this writer?”
Akira answered, “As usual, Rock is in first place. Given she is the most clever of all of us.”
Violin coughed.
Akira conceded, “Okay, she is second most clever of all of us.”
Revy admitted, “We'll give you that one, Violin. So, I guess I am third.”
Akira stated, “No. Natsuru is.”
Revy whined, “Why her?”
Akira answered, “Natsuru was trained, and worked, as a cop, for around two years.”
Revy asked, “By the way, what is up with that?”
Natsuru answered, “I needed a job at the time.”
Revy replied, “Fine. So, who is fourth?”
Akira said, “Aeryn.”
Aeryn pointed out, “I was trained in capture and retrieval.”
Revy inquired, “Dare I ask who is the fifth person?”
Akira replied, “Eda.”
Revy said, “Okay. I guess she can count in this betting pool. And she does have the skills to find the writer. Still, we haven't even spoken to her, since we came to this town. Though, we probably need do so.”
Sawyer stated, with her own repaired voice, which was lovely to hear, “Yes. We need to call her. I am sure Rock has her phone number.”
Rock commented, “I do. Actually, I did I talked with her, by phone, this morning, before Revy woke up. She and Yolanda are trying a different tactic to catch this person. They are trying to find him through his stomach.”
Ranma complimented, “Smart move.”
Revy asked, “So, who is number six?”
Akira stated, “You.”
Revy exclaimed, “Finally!”
Lee heard all this. A second later, he finally exited the bar, through the hallway entrance.
(_)
Half an hour later, after a brisk walk to the Last Resort Diner, Lee sat in a back corner of the restaurant, in a cushioned booth, with his back to back wall, of the far right corner of the room, allowing him to see the windows and front door, in the front side of the diner.
Lee's nerves has been frayed over the course of the last twenty hours, and after the events of the morning, what has happened finally mentally hit him. And all Lee was presently trying to do was to mentally collect himself, so he could continue on with the day, and his plans.
The black haired, fair skinned waitress, Lori, walked over to Lee's booth, and served him a cup of coffee.
Lee looked up at the woman, as he said, “Thanks, Lori.”
The woman just smiled, and went back to check on the other customers in the diner.
Given his frayed nerves, Lee could not help having his right hand shake, as he held the coffee cup by the handle, while he took a sip of moderately hot liquid.
After the small swallow of coffee, Lee thought, 'Three major close calls within twelve hours. On the bright side, now I officially know their names. So, there will be no questions on the matter, if I accidentally use their names. Except for Eda and Yolanda. But, I will get to them, later.'
'Also, I now know the hiding in plain sight routine works. And that they are concerned on keeping their secrets. I can use all this to my advantage. It means they will not do anything to flamboyant in public. Though, some of them just don't care. Like I saw last night, at the Rats Nest.'
'Still, I have to be careful to not reveal any personal information about myself, nor them. If they ask, I have to say I only like action movies. I have never heard of anime. And I don't care about using computers. And I don't dare tell any injokes. That will give me away immediately, given how genre savvy I made all of these women.'
'Speaking of which. Why the hell did I have to give them access to Tvtropes website? And make them so dangerously genre savvy? Because, I am an idiot. That is why!'
'And damn. I miss my collections of music, to anime, to movies, to TV shows. I miss having access to the internet.'
'Still, back to the matters at hand. I may have to come up with a cover story. Hiding out due to tax problems is likely the most believable cover story I can come up with, that has the least complications. It is such a boring crime, those not involved don't ask too many questions. And it is so common that it is hard to backtrack.'
'So, where will I say I am from? How about Nashville, Tennessee? I have been there a few times in my life? And I know enough about the place to convince someone that I have lived there, unless they have lived there, themselves. Which is not the case for these women.'
'All in all, I am still on the same plan as before. I just have to slightly modify my plan. That plan being to steal one of their reality devices, escape, and get cured of my cancer, along with other things. The introduction today was just one step towards to that goal. But, I have a bad feeling they will guard those devices as closely as they do their own virtue. For lack of a better term.'
'Also, they mentioned Eda and Yolanda are in town, and those two are trying to rope me through use of food. Now, the question is how?... Of course, they are the blonds from the burger van. Eda is the cashier, and Yolanda is the cook.'
'I forgot, that in the Black Lagoon omakes, how hot Yolanda looked as a young woman. And I did have her deaged and I had her lost right eye restored with a cybernetic eye that is just as good as her left eye. And with the artificial eye matching her right eye.'
'Honestly. Taking into account what I gave her. I don't think I have to much to worry about Yolanda. She will not stop the others from harming me. But, she will likely not take part in what they do to me. If they catch me.'
'Also, Eda honestly threw me because she was not wearing her shades, and she was not wearing a nuns outfit, nor trampy clothing. I did not do much to Eda. So, I am not sure how much she wants to capture me.'
'The two of them could be just in it for the challenge. Also, I cannot just stop eating there, without arousing their suspicions.'
'But, they cook good food, at a good price. Plus, I am now one of their regular customers. And I am always polite to them, compliment their cooking, and service, along with leaving nice tips. Doing all this can only help me in my situation. Still, I just have to be more careful, now that I know there are more of them here and after me, than just in Revy's group.'
Lee then noticed Lori walking by him, as he mentally added, 'Now, let's get some breakfast. And I will meet with Sam in the hotel lobby in an hour or so, to pick up on our continuous poker game. And I seem to be making good money at it.'
Lee turned to look up at Lori, as he stated, “Lori, I am ready to order.”
Lori turned her head towards him. She then walked over to him, as she asked, “What can I get for you, Lee?”
Lee then gave her, his order.
Ten minutes later, his breakfast was ready. He the ate his meal. When he finished, he got up from the booth he was sitting him, he paid for his meal, he thanked George for his good cooking, he tipped Lori some money. He then left to head back to the hotel, to meet with Sam.
(_)
The next few days were uneventful for anyone at the hotel. And Lee found that Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru were more quiet with their loving making, allowing Lee to get to sleep earlier.
Lee was grateful for this, and he turned off the alarm to his wrist watch.
Also, the afternoon, after the Rats Nest massacre, Lee and Sam found that the bartender had her bar already completely cleaned up, repaired, and she back in business, in record time.
When Sam and Lee asked about how she was able to do all this so quickly, she coyly stated was that she had a lot of experience in doing so.
Lee and Sam knew better than to ask her for the details.
(_)
Then, one night, over a week and a half after Rock, Revy, and their crew, had come to De La Plata Podrido. A few days after Lee was formally introduced to the badass women. On highways of the island, there was car chase between a red 1965 Pontiac GTO, and two much newer cars.
At the wheel of the GTO was Lee, whom was wondering, at the moment, whom posed the most danger to him right now. His passengers, or those chasing them.
Lee though for the sixth time that night, 'How do I get myself into these situations? Oh, that is right. Because, I am an idiot. That is why!'
(_)
Around six hours, and ten minutes earlier, it was late afternoon. In the lobby of the Devil's Hotel, Lee and Sam were playing cards at their usual table.
It had rained earlier that morning, and the two friends decided to stay at the hotel, for the day. Instead of heading for the Rats Nest, and risk getting rained on. Though, by the late afternoon, the sky had completely clear.
Lee and Sam were presently enjoying the soft rock music playing in the front lobby speaker, as they played cards, when Revy and Rock walked up to them.
Revy asked, “Hi guys. I have a question.”
Lee and Sam set down their cards, face down, as they looked up at the two women.
Sam offered, “Go ahead.”
Revy stated, “We are looking for a designated driver for tonight.”
Sam replied, “Well, I don't know how to drive a car. But, Lee does.”
Lee just glared at Sam. He then turned to Revy as he inquired, “Why don't you ask one of your other friends to take you?”
Revy answered, “Two reasons. One, they know better. Two, we want to go the Rats Nest. It is the only decent dive we could find in town. And they don't feel like coming with us.”
Lee said, “I am surprised the bartender let you back in there, after that night you had with those teenage girls.”
Revy smirked, as she stated, “Well, I have found gold has a way of making people very forgiving.”
Lee commented, “That must have been a lot of gold you paid that woman.”
Revy said, “It was. And we still have to pay for drinks. As you can guess, she is still a bit upset about that incident. But, I don't mind. The Rats Nest kinda reminds me of the Yellowflag.”
Lee played dumb, as he asked, “The what?”
Revy replied, “Never mind about that. Anyway, from asking around, we learned that you two are regulars at that place. And the bartender there likes you two. So, we figured the bartender will be a little nicer to us if one of you is there with us. So, are you going to take us?”
Rock said, in a comforting tone, “Don't worry, we are not that bad when we are drunk.”
Lee thought, 'If I turn them down, it will only end in pain for me. And whomever else they rope into going in my place.' Lee stated, “One condition. None of you take any weapons. I do not want a repeat of that night.”
Revy commented, “Works for me. Meet us out front in half an hour.”
As Revy and Rock walked away, Lee turned to Sam, as he casually inquired, “Do you want to come with me, and chaperone a bunch of violently psychotic women, whom are intent on getting drunk?”
Sam turned to Lee, and he just glared at Lee for a few seconds. He then began laughing very hard for several seconds. As he slowly stopped laughing, he answered, “Hell no. I have enough problems with such matters in my day.”
Lee said, “I don't want to know.”
Sam was still chuckling, as he complimented, “Good answer.”
Lee offered, “Still, would you like to get something to eat, right now, at the hotel restaurant? I got a feeling I am not going to be able to eat much to tonight.”
Sam said, “Sure. With those women tagging along, you will be to busy watching your back. I will even pay for it. Considering, I got you into this mess.”
Lee sarcastically replied, “Gee, thanks.” He continued, in a more normal tone of voice, “Still, we can probably get Melvin to do a rush order on orders, because I am in a hurry.” He mentally added, 'And Melvin knows how unwise it is to keep those women waiting.'
Both men then got up, and headed for the hotel restaurant.
(_)
Half an hour later, it was close to sunset, as Lee walked outside the front entrance of the hotel lobby, and onto the sidewalk, under the awning.
Melvin had fortunately been able to do a rush order on Lee's meal, and Lee finished his dinner with just enough time to stop by the men's restroom in the front lobby, before he headed outside.
Five minutes later, he was met by four women. Revy, Shenhua, Sawyer, and Lotton, whom had just walked outside, to join him.
Lee noted that having a close look at Lotton and Sawyer, standing next to each other, that Lotton was almost a short and petite as Sawyer.
Lee thought, 'What is Lotton doing here? I thought she didn't drink... Oh, that is right, I fixed it so she could drink alcohol with a problem in book three. And she did enjoy the occasional drink, then.'
Lotton was in a similar outfit that she wore as a man. Which was, among other things, a black long coat, shirt, and pants. Only, her clothing was cut much smaller to fit her smaller physical frame.
The other three women wore their usual clothing.
The women then looked over at Lee.
Lee noticed this, as he thought, 'I might as well say something polite.' He greeted them, “Hello ladies. I will be designated driver for the evening.”
The girls just looked at him with wicked grins on their lips.
Lee silently realized, as he inwardly groaned, in thought, 'This is going to be a long night.'
Just then, Rock pulled up, on the parking lot, along side the sidewalk, by Lee and the women, in a red, two door, 1965 Pontiac GTO, with the right passenger side facing them.
Lee thought, 'From the color, this might be the same car as from the series. And the one I slightly damaged in book three. Though, I left it those damages were repaired. And they were repaired, because later, they used it an early part of book two to escape Chang's forces, to the Lagoon PT boat, during that typhoon.'
Lee walked over to the passenger seat door, and opened it. He the reached in and used the latch by the front passenger seat, to lower front seat forward, so the others could enter the backseat. He then stood back up, stepped out of the way, while he used his left hand to motion to the women to get in.
After the four women squeezed into the back seat, with looked difficulty, Lee go raised the passenger seat, and got in the front. He then buckled up.
Lee stayed quiet, as Rock set the car into gear, and drove towards the closest exit, from the parking, to the road.
Lee looked over at the manual shift, as he thought, 'Great. They didn't tell me the car I would be driving is a manual shift, with a foot clutch. I know how to drive a manual, but I am just not that great at it. Still, I is best to stay quiet. I might hear something important said by the girls.'
Lee found that he was correct. The quiet did afford him the opportunity to listen to the girls in the backseat.
Lee overheard Lotton say, “It is nice that I no longer have problems drinking alcohol.”
Lee thought, 'That just confirms what I already knew.'
As Rock kept her eyes in front of her, on the road, she noticed that Lee was quiet. She commented, “You seem awfully quiet.”
Lee plainly stated, “After that night at the Rats Nest, I know better than to ask you to stay out of trouble. So, I am just going to stay quiet.”
Lee's comment got a few chuckles from the backseat.
Rock responded, “Fair enough.” She then continued driving them to the Rats Nest.
(_)
Five minutes later, they reached the Rats Nest, and parked on the side parking lot, to the left of the building.
Rock and Lee both helped those in the backseat get out, from both doors.
After locking and closing the car doors, Lee then walked over to the door to the Rats Nest entrance, and held it for the women.
Revy, Sawyer, Shenhua, and Lotton walked into the bar, without paying Lee any mind.
Though, when Rock passed by Lee, she handed him the keys to the car, as she said, “Thank you.”
Lee took the keys, on the keyring, and he put them into a pants pocket, as he replied, “You're welcome.”
Lee then walked into the bar, closing the door behind him.
As Lee walked inside, he noticed that the late crowd had yet to show up.
The only ones there, besides Lee, and the five women, were the bartender, and a few others.
The bartender looked up, from behind the bar counter. She frowned at what she saw, as she stated, “I am surprised to see you again, Revy.”
Revy smirked, “What can I say? This place reminds me of home.”
The bartender joked, “Where is that? Hell?”
Revy and the women by her, just laughed. While, Lee remained quiet.
As soon as they stopped laughing, Lee leaned towards Rock, as he said, “Rock, I will be by the bar counter.”
Rock turned to Lee, as she replied, “Okay.”
Lee then walked to the bar counter. As he did so, he noticed Rock, Revy, Sawyer, Shenhua, and Lotton walking to the left, back corner table that Sam and him usually used.
Lee then sat on a stool, on the long end of the bar counter, with his back to the windows on the left side of the bar.
The bartender walked up from behind the bar counter, to where she was facing Lee.
Lee turned towards the bartender, to look at her face.
The bartender inquired, “So, how were you roped into this madness?”
Lee looked up at her, as he answered, “At the Devil's Hotel, while Sam and I were sitting in the lobby, Sam mentioned I could drive a car. Though, I don't remember telling him. Still, I owe him, so I am let the matter slide.”
“Anyway, the girls noticed that Sam and I come here a lot. And that you appreciate our business. They thought if one of us was here with them it would earn brownie points with you. And so, they asked me... For lack of a better term. To be their designated driver.”
“And Sam showed some sanity, and he refused to join me in this disaster waiting to happen.'
The bartender gave Lee a sympathetic looked, as she stated, “Well, you have my sympathies. I respect you. You and Sam are polite. You always pay your bills. And you tip well. If things go down, I will try to help you get out of this mess alive.”
Lee smiled, as he said, “I appreciate that.”
The bartender commented, “And you are not the first man I have seen roped in by crazy women, against his will. I have seen a few. But, I think you are clearly the most savvy of them.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
The bartender asked, “So, what do you want?”
Lee requested, “A cold bottle of cola. And please keep a separate tab between me and them. I don't want to owe them anything. I will pay for my drinks. They can pay for theirs.”
The bartender complimented, “A wise idea.”
Lee said, “And if things go down. I will settled up with you tomorrow.”
The bartender replied, “That will be fine.” She then pulled out a set a cold bottle of cola on the top of the counter, as she said, “And this one is on the house, over the hell we both know you have just been forced into.”
Lee grinned again, towards the bartender, as he replied, “Thanks.”
The bartender returned Lee's smile, as she stated, “You're welcome.” She then went over to Rock, and the other women at the left, back corner table, to get their drink orders.
(_)
Around five and a half hours later, Lee sat at his stool, at the bar counter, sipping at his current, cold bottle of cola, as he kept an eye on the girls at the left, back corner table, where he and Sam usually sat at.
Lee thought, 'From the way those five girls look. I would say they are clearly drunk. And it took a lot of hard alcohol to get them at way. That is likely due to the super-soldier serum. Still, Rock looks only slightly drunk, while the other four are just about wasted.'
'But, they are not leaving, until they want to. Even the bartender knows better than to cut them off. At worst, we will carry them out to the car, when they pass out. And I will get their friends, back at the hotel, to get them out of the car, and take care of them.'
Lee then looked around him, to see that within the time they had been there, the bar had been packed with people. The room was practically standing room only.
Lee thought, 'Though, to make matters worse, the bar is packed with other men and women. Many of them look fairly rough. I have to stay on my toes. This could go very bad, very quickly. I just hope that even drunk, Rock and Lotton can keep the other three from starting a fight.'
Meanwhile, the beautiful bartender woman of the Rats Nest walked up to Lee, from behind the bar counter, as she inquired, “How are you holding up, Lee?”
Lee looked over at bartender, as he replied, “Good. How about you?”
The bartender answered, “Fine. As long as those five don't start a fight.”
Lee agreed, “My thoughts, exactly.”
Suddenly, a mexican man, whom Lee could smell alcohol his breath from the distance he was already out, approached Lee.
Lee looked over at the man, coming towards them.
Lee thought, 'This guy screams trouble.'
Lee stood up from his stool, as he turned to face the man, just as the man stopped about four feet from him. With both of them standing less than a foot from the bar counter. With the counter to Lee's left side, and the counter to the mexican man's right side.
The man asked, in english, “Do you know those hot women?” He then pointed at the girls, with his right hand.
Lee thought, 'Oh hell no! I can see this coming a mile away. And it will end in a bloodbath. Likely my blood. I have to play along in the hopes of saving everyone from their stupidity and horniness.'
Lee answered, by embellishing the truth a bit, “Yes. And sir. I completely agree with you. Those five are all smoking hot women. But, I do know enough about them to say that you want nothing to do with them. They are lesbians. Crazy. And drunk. But, if we are lucky, we might soon see them start to make out.”
Across the bar counter from Lee, the bartender had been paying attention to Lee's conversation. She giggled at Lee's comment.
The drunk man replied, “All women are crazy. Drunk just makes them easier to get to bed. And being lesbians means they haven't met a real man, yet.”
Lee mentally screamed, 'You have got to be kidding me! Who is he? The wittiest drunk in the west? I am going to have to play along.'
Lee looked over at the bartender, and she gave him a sympathetic look.
Lee looked back over at the man as he stated, “You are probably right. But, these are also very violent women. And between you and me, I find the redhead to be more masculine, in personality, than I could ever hope to be.”
The bartender snorted, while holding back her laughter.
The man suggested, “Then, how about I show them how much I am a man, by using your hide?”
He then used his right hand to pull out a small revolver from his a back pants pocket, and started to point it at Lee.
Lee didn't even blink and eye, as he quickly used his right foot to kick the man in the balls, forcing him to drop his gun. A second later, after both of Lee foot was back on the floor, next to his left foot, Lee followed up the kick, by used his right hand to swiftly grip the left side of the man's head, and slam it onto the top of the bar counter. Lee then held the man's head on the counter.
The bartender's jaw dropped at seeing this.
And a few others around Lee also noticed what had just happened.
(_)
From across the room, Lotton was the only one of the five women paying attention to what Lee had just done.
Watching Lee take down that guy reminded her of another event she said, first hand, several years ago. But, she was too drunk to remember, nor even care, what the event was.
(_)
As Lee held the man down, with his right hand, he looked at the man's head. He calmly stated, “I know you are angry with me, right now. And you have every right to be. But, you need to understand, that by doing this, I am saving your life.”
The bartender agreed, “He is right. He just saved your life. Those women are dangerous. You do not want to mess with them.”
Lee said, “Like the nice lady behind the counter is saying. If you knew all the facts of the situation, you would be thanking me, right now. Unfortunately, there are too many people around for me to tell you.”
Lee then used his left hand to pull out a fifty dollar bill from one of his pockets. He set the fifty dollar bill in front of the man, as he continued, “So, please treat yourself, and your friends, to some drinks on me. And I hope there are no hard feelings.”
Lee then let go of the man's head.
Suddenly, from the corner of his right eye, Lee could see a number of men, and a few women get up from their seats. They started walking towards him.
Lee mentally grumbled, 'It was worth a try.'
Then, from beside him, to his left, Lee saw the bartender swiftly pulled a semi-automatic pistol from under the bar counter. She quickly pulled back the slide, loading a round in the chamber, and cocking the hammer, as she pointed her weapon over the mexican man, whose head was on the table, and over towards the approaching adults.
The bartender firmly stated, “Hold it right there.” She then said to Lee, “I know you tried to avoid this. Get the girls out of here. Both you, and them, can settle your tabs later.”
Lee looked over at the bartender, he replied, “Thanks.” He then towards the left, back corner table, as yelled towards Revy, and the other women at the corner table, “Girls, time to leave!”
The women heard him. They took a look around, and realized what was going on. They got up from their seats, and headed for the front door.
As Lee watched them reached the front door, he swiftly took off for the front door, as well.
After Lee exit the bar, he met up with the girls, as he stated, in a commanding tone of voice, “Everyone, please get in the car.”
Rock was sober enough to ask, “What happened?”
Lee swiftly answered, “Too many drinks, too many guns, and too little common sense.”
Rock replied, “Ah. Been there. Done that.”
Lee responded, “Rock, that bartender is not going to be able to hold that crowd back for long. Help me get your friends to the car now. So, we can get out of here.”
Rock said, “Gotcha.”
Lee and Rock spent the next several awkward seconds herding four other much more drunk women into the car.
Sense Rock was not as drunk as the others, Lee had her sit in the front passenger seat, while the other women were in the backseat. Lee was in the driver's seat, as he started the car, turned on the front headlights, and he quickly got them onto the road.
As Lee saw that the fuel tank was nearly full, he thought, 'I am so happy that Rock knows to be prepare, beforehand, for unforeseen situations like this.'
(_)
A minute later, as they drove down a four lane highway, on the island, Rock noticed they were not heading in the direction of the hotel. She asked, “Why aren't we going to the hotel?”
Lee answered, “I got a bad feeling that I just pissed off the wrong people.” He mentally added, 'For a second time in my life. And my precognition is warning me of danger.' He continued, “And I don't want to lead them to our home, just yet.”
Suddenly, while driving on a four lane highway, divided by a low lying dirt median, with planted palm trees, Lee saw in the car's rear-view mirrors two modern cars gaining on them, at high speed.
Lee said, “I hate being right... Hold on girls. This is going to get rough.”
Sawyer quipped, “We like it rough.” The other girls in back just giggled.
Lee then pressed down on the accelerator of the car with his right foot. As he did so, he used his left hand on the steering wheel, his right hand to work the gear stick, and his left foot to work the clutch, as he shifted gears, while speaking up.
Right after Lee shifted gears, without a problem, he used his right hand to turn on the radio, on the center panel of the dashboard. He then fiddled with the frequency dial.
Rock commented, “We don't have time for music.”
Lee quipped, “There is always time for music. And it helps me relax.” He mentally added, 'And I have never been in a high speed chase before. I just read about them, saw videos of them, wrote about a few of them. And I could use something help me focus on the matter at hand.'
Suddenly, he hit on a song perfect for the occasional, as he heard the first cords to the english song, Radar Love, by Golden Earring.
Lee said, “Now, that is some chase music.”
Lotton commented, “I got to admit, he has taste. Now, that is good chase music.”
The other girls in back laughed.
Lee saw they were heading for the sea, with the road soon diverging splitting in a, T, shape, to both the left and the right.
He manually rolled down his window.
Lee stated, “You know, the one thing I love about these old style cars is, that you cannot do this with a newer model car.”
Suddenly, when the street diverged, used both his feet to full engaged the clutch pedal, while pressing partly on the brakes, and maintaining gas on the pedal. All the while he shifted through several gears, as he did a high speed whip-it u-turn back down the opposing lanes of the highway, passing by the two cars chasing them. And he then shifted back up the gears, while careful with the clutch, so the car would not stall.
After getting the car straighten out down the road, Lee pulled out his left arm out, while extending his middle finger to the people in the other two cars.
Revy blurted out, “Did he just give them the bird?”
Shenhua chirped, “He sure did.”
The girls in back laughed again.
The other cars had to slow down to do a u-turn, due to their anti-lock breaks preventing them from doing a whip-it, as well. Thus giving Lee and the girls more distance between them.
Lee pulled his arm back into the car, and rolled up his window, he also turned down on a two lane road.
As Lee did so, Revy asked, “So Lee, are you a Steve McQueen fan?”
Lee kept his eyes on the road, as he answered, “Nope. I am more of a Burt Reynolds fan. Smokey and the Bandit. That sort of thing. Though, I find the film Hooper to be highly underrated.” He mentally, 'And the Cannonball films, which I mentioned in book three of my stories. But, what I can I say, I am a fan, as the Archer series put it, of the man from Jupiter, Florida.'
Meanwhile, Rock could not believe what she saw. She turned to Lee, as she asked him, in a serious tone of voice, “Are you crazy? I know crazy. I love crazy. I am crazy. But, I did not think you were crazy.”
Lee soberly stated, “Nope. Not crazy. Just desperate. We are unarmed. You are all are drunk. I am not a fighter. If those guys catch us, if we are lucky, they will kill me, rape you girls, and then kill you. That is if we are lucky. We have to make them realize that we are too crazy to mess with.”
Rock conceded, “Good point. Just one problem. I have been down this street a few times. We are going to run out of road real soon.”
Lee stated, “Given what I have in mind, that will be fine. Still, the one thing I like about this city. The bartender at the Rats Nest told me that at night the cops don't give a damn about car chases, as long as there is no gunplay, nor people being run over.”
Rock agreed, “That's nice.”
A minute later, they reached the end of a deserted road, which was without street lights for the last mile they drove through. Lee down shifted, as he turned the car around, and came to a stop, while facing the car in the direction they came from.
They all saw the headlights of the two cars coming towards them, in the distance, by at least two miles away from them.
Lee began peeling out the back tires of the car. Smoke from the back tires and breaks could be seen from the back taillights of the vehicle.
Rock immediately realized what Lee had planned, as she thought, 'He is going to play chicken with them!'
Rock pleaded, “Lee, please don't do this. We can find another way.”
Lee looked over at Rock, as he raised an eyebrow. He countered, “Rock, I am in a car full of five hot women. If I wimped out now, I would have to turn in my man card.” He then turned back to face the front of the road.
Revy stated, “He's got you there, Rock!” She and the other three in back started laughing again.
Rock then noticed a dangerous smile start to curl on Lee's lips.
Lee smirked, as he asked, “Anyway, Rock. Do you know what the three scariest words you can hear from a redneck, whom is right beside you?”
Rock replied, “No.”
Rock saw Lee's smile turn feral, as he casually answered, “Hey. Watch this.”
Lee suddenly let go of the brake with his left foot, as the car accelerated forwards.
Lee then engaged the clutch with his left foot, while keeping his left foot on the accelerator, as he started shifting gears, launching the car forward, towards the two incoming cars.
The people in the other two cars coming towards them, saw this and accelerated their speed towards the Pontiac GTO, due to the GTO's front headlights.
Meanwhile, the women in back heard Lee and Rock's conversation, and they were all now laughing like hyenas.
Lee drove down the middle of the two lane road at high speed, as he stated, “I was taught not to be a road-hog, but I believe this in this case, I should make an exception to that rule.”
Lee thought, 'Given I am dying of cancer, dying in a crash like would be awesome, and great way to go. And the super-soldier serum the girls have in them should allow them to survive, and fully recover from any wreck like this. Meanwhile, the others in those cars are screwed.'
As they got closed two other cars, with a mile not between the two groups, Rock inquired, “You really think this will work?”
Lee admitted, “You're right. I am going to have to make this interesting.”
Lee then turned off the front headlights, and shift gears, while he floored the gas pedal.
Lee grinned wildly, as he said, “Now, it is interesting.”
Rock was starting to get scared, while the drunken girls in the backseat were just laughing even harder at what was unfolding around them.
When they were less than five hundred feet from the other two cars, Lee turned on the inside ceiling light of the car, so the drivers in the other two cars could see how crazy Lee and the women were in their car.
The drivers in the other two cars saw a man with a wicked grin on his face, a dark haired girl in the front passenger seat whom was slightly scared, and four women in back laughing their asses off.
Right before the three vehicles were about to hit, the two other cars veered off the road, allowing Lee and the girls to make a high speed escape.
Lee immediately turned on the front headlights, while turning off the car's ceiling light.
Without turned his eyes away from the road, he said, “And that is how you play the game of chicken.”
By then, the girls in back had calmed down enough to speak. Revy stated, “I give you an eight, Lee. Not bad for an amateur.”
Sawyer stated, in her beautiful tone of voice, “I would give him a six. His acceleration, and steering, needs a little work.”
Shenhua said, “I agree.”
Lotton stated, “If he was fully aware of all the facts of this situation, I would give him a ten for remaining so cool under pressure. But, as it stands, I give him a seven.”
Lee inwardly smiled at Lotton's compliment.
Lee asked, “And you, Rock?”
Rock had calm down, as she requested, in a tired tone of voice, “Just take us back to the hotel.”
Lee stated, “You got it.”
As Lee returned back into the city, he returned the car back to a sane speed, while he drove down the roads, towards the Devil's Hotel.
(_)
Fifteen minutes later, Lee had parked the car at the Devil's Hotel parking lot, and all of them out of the vehicle, with them standing behind the car, in a parking lane.
The five women were facing Lee.
Lee then handed Rock the keys to the car, as he said to them, “I hope I wasn't too bad of a driver tonight.”
Revy stated, “You were fine. Maybe we will do this again sometime.”
Rock groaned, “Let's hope not.”
Lee responded, “Well, have a good night, ladies. I am gone to the hotel bar, to get a drink. I could use one after a night like this.”
Lee then turned, and walked away from them. He headed toward the hotel lobby entrance, to get a drink from Melvin, at the hotel restaurant and bar.
Hold Them.
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 1: “De La Plata Podrido.”
Chapter 03: “City of the Savvy.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
De La Plata Podrido, Mexico. Inside, Lee suite, in the Devil's Hotel.
It was the morning after car chase in the GTO, and Lee felt relaxed, and more alive, than he had felt in his life.
After Lee got up from his bed, around seven thirty AM in the morning, he stood up and stretched, as he thought, 'I guess it is true what they say. That a life of adventure and excitement does make one feel more alive. Not that I plan to repeat last night's escapades.'
'Still, I am glad that Melvin called in a favor, and he had one of his cooks, fix for me meal, when we got back to the hotel restaurant.'
'That meal, and a few beers, were good. And he got a good laugh at what I told him. I will have to tell Sam what happened to me last night, when I see him later today.'
Among other things, Lee then got cleaned up, shaved, showered, dried off, and dressed.
After Lee put on his baseball cap, glasses, and jacket, he looked down at himself, as he thought, 'Barring, Rock, Revy, and their crew showing up in mass. These last few weeks have been good to me, in other ways. Such as my winnings at poker.'
'Now, that I have some cash. I plan to buy some nicer clothing, in a few days. Given my situation, I might need some nicer clothing than just causal wear. Still, I could use some breakfast at the Last Resort. I may have gotten on Revy and others good sides, but I am still not taking any chances with them.'
Lee then looked up, as he turned, and left the hotel room, for the hallway, to the elevator bay.
A few minutes later, as Lee walked through the front lobby, towards the front doors, he noticed Revy, Akira, and Violin approach him. Revy was wearing her usual clothing, with Akira and Violin wearing pants, shirts, and shoes, which looked nice on them.
Lee stopped and turned to face them, as he thought, 'I would guess that Revy decided to tell the others about last night's car chase. Well, on the bright side, her doing so does offer two advantages for me. It increases my street cred with them. With me now having a little street cred with them. And after last night's stunts, they are less likely to believe I am the writer.'
As the three women came to a stop in front of Lee, Lee greeted, “Good morning, ladies.”
Violin said, “Good morning, Lee.”
Lee thought, 'I am so glad that Violin retained John's southern manners.'
Akira mentioned, “Revy tells me that you drove one hell of a car chase last night.”
Lee casually replied, “You do what you got to do.”
Akira said, “True. From what Revy said, the chase sounded incredible. I didn't know you could do that.”
Lee honestly admitted, “Neither did I, until I did it.”
Revy inquired, “Really?”
Lee turned to Revy, as he answered, “Yes. I usually try to avoid car chases.”
Violin joked, “That is a wise thing to do, Lee. Still, it sounds like you rode that car hard, and put it away wet.”
Revy looked confused, Akira noticed Revy's expression. Akira explained, “It is a horse term.”
Revy looked over at Akira, then back to Lee. She stated, “Anyway Lee, I was too drunk to say this last night, but you did a good job driving last night.”
Lee commented, “You gave me an eight. I take that as a compliment. Thank you.”
Revy smiled, as she replied, “You're welcome.”
Akira said, “Still, that must have been a fun chase for you, Lee.”
Lee replied, “It depends on how you define fun. Lives were on the line. And I was more concerned with that, then having fun.”
Violin agreed, “That is the right approach to take in such a situation.”
Lee turned to Revy, as he asked, “By the way. Is that car okay? I did go a little rough with it last night.”
Revy answered, “I think so. But, Rock wants it checked out by a professional.”
Lee commented, “I hope you don't expect me to pay for repairs.”
Revy replied, “Nah. After the fun from last night, I will let this one slide.”
Lee said, “Thanks.”
Just then, Lee noticed two mexican men, in nice business suits walk into the hotel lobby, from the front entrance. Also, through the windows, Lee noticed a black, four door car parked right outside the front doors to the hotel. Lee then saw them look around, and they focused on him.
Lee thought, 'Oh no. This can only mean trouble.'
The two man in businesses suits, walked up to Lee, Revy, Akira, and Violin. One of the men asked, in english, with a spanish accented, “Are you the one known as, Lee?”
Lee thought, 'I cannot lie with Revy, Akira, and Violin, beside me.' He said, “Yes?”
The man stated, “We would like you to come with us. Our employer would like to meet you, over the matter of you attacking one of our friends.”
Lee did not show it on the outside, but on the inside he was worried, as he mentally realized, in thought, 'Oh crap. These guys are part of a mexican mafia. And so was the guy I hit last night. This is very bad.'
Revy asked, “What is going on here?”
Lee continued to look at the two men, as he answered, “This is about that guy I hit last night. Considering these men are here because of him, I am guessing they are part of the same... Organization.”
Revy thought, 'Meaning the local mafia.'
The other women around Lee also realized the subtext of Lee's comment.
Lee noticed both the three women and two men around him tensed up.
Lee thought, 'Crap. If I don't defuse the situation, this is going to go straight to hell for everyone.' He said, “I will come with you.” He then turned to the women, as he continued, “If I don't return by this evening. Then, I am dead. Tell Sam he can have the stuff in my room, and to have a nice life.”
Next, Lee turned and walked with the two men, until they were outside.
The three women then watched as Lee, and the other two men got into the black car outside, and drove away.
Violin said, “Whoa. Not many people would go to their deaths so calmly.”
Akira commented, “As far as he knows, he didn't have a choice. If he fought, they would have pulled their guns, and killed him, along with us.”
Revy pointed out, “But, we can defend ourselves. Lee knows that. He was there went my children tore through the Rats Nest.”
Akira explained, “Yes. I know. Still, there is something you may not realize, Revy. When I was in college in Atlanta, I talking to some people that had run-ins with the mexican mafia. If their counterparts here are any thing like in my reality, and yours, then they are very dangerous. Lee likely knew there would be further reprisals, if he resisted.”
Violin asked, “Do you want to rescue him, Revy?”
Revy answered, “No. After last night, I think Lee could probably get himself out of this trouble. And I have no desire to draw the attention of the local mafias.”
Violin conceded, “I see your point.”
Akira admitted, “As do I.”
Revy then said, “Okay. Let's go get some breakfast at the buffet table.”
Akira replied, “Sounds good to me.”
Violin commented, “I could use some scrambled eggs.”
The three women they headed for the hotel restaurant.
(_)
In the hotel restaurant that morning, Rock was already seated at a table, eating her the plate she made from the buffet table.
Rock was wearing her usual clothing. a white blouse, and light brown skirt.
She was almost through with both her plate, and her glass of milk, when she saw Melvin walk into the restaurant.
Rock mentally wondered, 'What is he doing here so early? Melvin doesn't usually come in until around ten thirty.'
She then watched at Melvin paid for his meal, walked over to the buffet. He then prepared a plate and drink for himself.
Rock thought, 'Oh, he is getting some breakfast for himself. Still, this is a perfect opportunity to talk to him about the GTO.'
A minute later, Rock watched as Melvin sat down at the bar counter, with him setting his plate and drink in front of him, on the counter. He then began to eat his breakfast.
Rock got up, and walked over to the bar counter. She then sat beside Melvin, to Melvin's right side. She said, “Good morning, Melvin.”
Melvin took a drink from his orange juice, to wash down his food. He then turned to Rock. He greeted her, “Good morning, Rock.”
Rock commented, “You are here earlier than normal, this morning.”
Melvin replied, “Yes. I got up earlier than usual this morning, and I didn't feel like doing my morning exercises. So, I came down here for some breakfast.”
Rock admitted, “I have had those days. I have a question for you.”
Melvin thought, 'I hope it is not something serious. From what Lee told me last night, they had one hell of a ride.' He said, “Sure. What do you need?”
Rock stated, “I need an auto mechanic to look at my car.”
Melvin replied, “I heard about that chase.”
Rock commented, “Word travels fast.” She thought, 'I wonder if Lee told him. That is very likely. Not that I will hold doing so against each of them.'
Melvin agreed, “Yes. It does. Though, this is a moderately large, populated city, it still has that small town mentality, where everyone knows everyone else. Or, they knew friend of someone else. Anyway, I do I know a good mechanic that will check your car out, for a decent price. He is a good friend, of mine. He will accept U.S., or Mexican currency.”
Rock replied, “That is good. What can you tell me about this man?”
Melvin held in a smirk, as he thought, 'Oh Rock. It would be so tempting tell you what I really know about my friend. But, I respect the privacy of my friends, and I will just vaguely warn you about him.'
Melvin said, “The man you want to speak to is named, Hernan Pena. He knows english, though he native language is spanish. He is a really great guy. And he has a nice family.” Melvin then looked Rock directly into her eyes, he firmly warned, “And I will say this only once. Do not. I repeat, do not threaten Hernan, nor his family. Do you understand?”
Rock saw the seriousness in Melvin's eyes. She thought, 'This guy is nice, but can be dangerous. That should not be a problem. I have dealt with worse.' She nodded once, as she replied, “Yes. I understand.”
Melvin responded, “Good. Now, here is how to get to Hernan's auto-shop, from here.” Melvin then gave Rock directions to Hernan's place of business. When Melvin finished with the directions, he said, “And, since this is a weekday, he should be open by now.”
Rock said, “I will looked into seeing him, after breakfast.”
Melvin replied, “Good luck. Though, it should not be a problem. As I said, Hernan is a great guy. As long as he, nor his family, are not threatened.... Though, if you are going to take Revy with you. I highly suggest you convince her to be polite, and go unarmed.”
Rock stated, “Oh, I will.”
Rock then noticed, Revy, Akira, and Violin walk into the restaurant, and they headed to the cashier, to pay for their breakfasts.
Rock said to Melvin, “Talk to you later.”
Melvin replied, “Have a good day, Rock.
Rock then walked over to where Revy, Akira, and Violin, whom were standing by the cashier.
They turned to looked at Rock.
Akira said, “Hi Rock.”
Violin stated, “Good to see you, Rock.”
Revy smirked, “Hi lover.”
Rock replied, “Hi girls.” She turned to Revy, as she stated, “I got some good news. Melvin told me about a good mechanic in town, whom he knew, that can check out the car.”
Revy casually said, “That sounds great.”
Rock stated, “We can head over their today, after breakfast.”
Revy shrugged, as she commented, “There is no rush. I got some plans for today, and tomorrow, for us. And I am not talking about just looking for the writer.” She then lean over and whispered into Rock's right ear.
Rock immediately blushed.
Revy leaned back straight, as Rock said, “Okay. The mechanic can wait. Still, while you are eating, I will give the details on this mechanic.”
Revy replied, “Sure.”
Rock then gave her long time lover the details over what she found out, from Melvin, along with Melvin's warning about not threatening the mechanic, nor his family.
(_)
Elsewhere on the island of De La Plata Podrido, Lee was inside the black car, as they road down a two lane road, along the beach, on of the more deserted section island, in the sunny day.
As Lee road in the car, he was in the back seat of the black, four door car, behind an empty passenger seat, on the right side of the car, with one of the men beside him, and the other man driving, in the left driver's side seat.
Lee calmly stated, “I want you to know. I have not interest in resisting you.”
The man beside Lee, to his left side, replied, in english, “Good. That means we won't have to hurt you until after the boss has his answers.”
Lee said, “I will answer his questions to the best of my abilities.”
The man driving commented, in english, “If you do so, you will likely have a quick death.”
Lee asked, “Were either of you in the cars chasing us last night?”
The man beside him stated, “No.”
Lee inquired, “Would it help my case if I mention that the man I hit, was drunk, and I tried to talk my way out of the situation. And I only hit after he pulled a gun on me.”
The man beside him admitted, “That might help you.”
The driver mentioned, “That sounds like something our friend would do. You might get out of this with say, a broken arm.”
Lee commented, “Then, my day is improving. Will I be meeting the person I hit last night?”
The man beside him answered, “No. The boss does not want violence, unless it is necessary. That is why you are still breathing. And from what we understand, our friend decided to let the boss handle you. And he left it at that.”
Lee just nodded, as he said, “Okay. That is one thing I don't have to worry about.”
The other two men just chuckled, at Lee's comment.
Lee looked outside the windows, as they drover down the road. They had stayed on the island, but they are nowhere near any of the locations that Lee knew about. Actually, they were heading towards a remote location of the island.
A minute later, Lee saw them drive up to an area, by the beach, which was walled-in, from the street, and sides, by a ten foot high concrete fence. Though, Lee saw the fence ended at the beach line.
When they came up to the steel metal gates to the driveway into the area, their car came to a stop.
Lee noticed the driver pulled out a remote, and press it. The gates suddenly opened, inwardly, and they drove into the area. With the gates closing behind them, a few seconds later.
As they passed the gates, Lee saw they were coming towards a large, one story, beach house.
The driver soon stopped the car beside the home.
Lee saw men with sub-machine guns near standing near the car.
The man beside him said, “Don't worry. Nothing is going to happen to you, until after you meet our employer. Now, please get out.”
Lee slowly opened the door. And stepped out.
The man that was beside him in the car, walked around the car, and face him. He said, “I am going to have to pad you down.”
Lee held up his arms, as he stated, “Go ahead. I am not armed.”
The man then swiftly padded Lee down. When he was done, he looked at the guards, and waved them off. He then looked over towards Lee, as he stated, “This way.” He turned, and began walking towards the home.
Lee followed the man in inside, as the driver stayed by the car.
After Lee was escorted through a few rooms and hallways, he found himself inside a large office.
The back end of the office, where Lee entered, was empty, except for some potted plants.
The walls and ceiling were gray, and the floor was black, office carpet.
On the far end of the room, was a large, black wooden desk. With a laptop computer on it.
To the left and right sides of the desk were shelves of DVDs, Blu-Rays, CD cases, and books.
Behind the desk, were large windows, that looked out into the beach, and ocean. Between the desk and the windows, was a large, black swivel chair, which was turned around to face the beach. There no chairs in the room, besides the swivel chair.
Lee guess, 'I would say their employer is sitting behind the chair. And I am about to meet a mob boss for the first time. I have to play this right, or it would be debatable which group would do worse to me. The girls, or this group.'
Lee then followed the man to the other side of the office, to where they were standing in front of the desk.
The man then walked to Lee's right, as he went around the desk, and spoke to the unseen man.
The man said, in english, “Lee is here, for you to talk, too. He gave us no trouble in bringing him here. And he stated he is willing to cooperate fully with our inquires.”
Lee thought, 'He is likely speaking in english for my benefit. I guess I may a good impression with him.'
The sitting man stated, in english, “Good. You may leave.”
The man then turned, and left the room. He shut the door behind him.
The man sitting behind the desk coldly stated, “Mister Lee, you have done something wrong last night. Do you know what that is?”
Lee calmly said, “I am willing to explain my actions. But, to whom I addressing?”
The man laughed, for a few seconds. Not menacing laugh, but a regular, sane laugh.
The mans swiveled his chair around, for Lee to see him.
Sitting in the chair, Lee saw a black haired mexican man, in his early forties, in good physical shape. The man wore a nice gray business suit.
The man calmly stated, “I am Paciano Del Soto. And I control this city. And before I kill you, I want to know why you hurt one of my men last night?”
Lee responded, “Mister Del Soto, I was saving his life. And the lives of his friends, that were there. Did you hear about the massacre at the Rats Nest a few nights ago?”
Paciano answered, “Yes.”
Lee explained, “Those were the same women that did that. And if I had not done what I did, you man would be dead, right now. Instead, he just has some mild bruises, but he will be fine. And no one was hurt in that chase. If I had taken those women to the hotel, where they are staying. Instead of given your men that chase, they would have been killed when they got there. Because those women also have friends, and a lot of firepower.”
Lee could clearly see from the look on Paciano's face, that he was thinking over what Lee had stated.
Paciano stated, “You are making some good points. I may not kill you. If you are correct. I may even let you go, unharmed.”
Lee remained calm on the outside, as he happily thought, 'Excellent.'
Paciano pulled out his cellphone, from an interior coat pocket. He dialed a number. He then spoke to someone on the other end in spanish.
Lee remained silent, and still, as the conversation took place.
A minute later, he hung up.
Paciano put his cellphone back into the same interior coat pocket that it had been in. He then turned to look at Lee.
Paciano stated, “I just called the Rats Nest bartender, at her home. She just confirmed what you said. You did save the life of my men. I appreciate that. But, before I let you go. I have two questions. First, why were you there with those women in the first place?”
Lee thought, 'I am glad the bartender is alive. And given she answered Mister Del Soto's questions, I am guessing she is alright. If she wasn't, she would not be so forthcoming.'
'Though, why would he have the home number to the bartender? Unless... She slept with him. I will say the man is not that bad looking, and he is in good shape. So, I can understand why she did it. Still, I need to answer his questions.'
Lee said, “They heard I was a regular at the Rats Nest, and I was staying at the hotel they were. And well... It is best to humor the crazies.”
Paciano nodded once, as he agreed, “That is true. My other question is, who are these women? They are clearly dangerous, and they are in my town.”
Lee thought, 'This is bad. How the hell do I explain the situation to him, without sounding like a lunatic? Even worse, if he believes me, what is to stop him from turning me over to them, to placate them. I have to be very careful in how I answer this question.'
Lee then noticed the set of english translated manga volumes, beside some anime blue-rays boxes, on the bookshelf to the his right of the desk.
The titles for manga and anime were, Black Lagoon.
Lee thought, 'You have got to be kidding me. Okay. I can make this work for me. If I do this right, I should be fine.'
Lee commented, “So, you are a Black Lagoon fan, Mister Del Soto?”
Paciano answered, “Yes. So, you know the series, as well.”
Lee casually responded, “Yes. I do. In more ways than I can state, right now. It is a series that has it all. Action. Guns. Hot babes that can kick some serious ass.”
Paciano cracked a grin, as he said, “You got that right. Me and my brother even sometimes joke that De La Plata Podrido is like Roanapur, only a lot nicer, with us in charge.”
Lee thought, 'It is not wise to tempt fate like that. Though, I wonder who your brother is? Still, I am in too deep already to ask about him. And I need to deal with the matter at hand.'
Lee stated, “Well, since you know that series. The good news is that I think I can answer your question. The problem is how to prove it without getting us both killed. Because, I cannot just tell you. You won't believe me. You will have to come with me to the hotel, be quiet, and watch. So, you can see the women, yourself. You will understand when you see them with your own eyes.”
Paciano said, “Your request is intriguing. But, just to let you know, I can handle myself in a fight.”
Lee replied, “That is good. You made need those skills, if those women catch wind of why we are there.”
Paciano realized, as he commented, “They don't realize how much you know about them.”
Lee admitted, “Exactly. And that very fact is the reason I am still breathing.”
Paciano inquired, “So, you are playing an angle with them?”
Lee replied, “Yes.”
Paciano said, “And you know them, but you won't tell me their names. And what does this have to do with the Black Lagoon series?”
Lee cryptically responded, “Let's just say that the women in the hotel, that I am talking about, or of the same type as the women at the Black Lagoon series.” He mentally added, 'Quiet literally.' He then continued, “If you come with me, you will soon understand the situation.”
Paciano questioned, “And how do I know this is not a trap?”
Lee stated, “Simple. I am putting my ass on the line just by telling you what I already have. And these women are extremely sharp when it comes to their wits. If they realize what I know, while you were with me, we will be both be dead. That is why, not matter what happens, you cannot tell them what we know.”
Paciano commented, “I don't know anything about them.”
Lee coyly replied, “You know more about them, than you realize.”
Paciano warned, “This better not be a waste of my time.”
Lee countered, “It won't. It will likely be the most significant event of your life.”
Paciano said, “Okay. I want to know what you know. You and I will head over there, just the two of us. I don't want to put my men in harms way.”
Lee complimented, “That is wise. And I respect your concern for you men. Also, just the two of us will likely not attract attention.”
Paciano agreed, “Correct.”
Lee pointed out, “Also, they don't know who you are. So, if they ask, I will just say you are a friend I met.”
Paciano replied, “That will work.”
Lee thought, 'I also need to know another thing, before we leave.' Lee inquired, “By the way, are you a fan of any other anime, or sci-fi series?”
Paciano answered, “Actually, I am a fan of quite a few series. The collection in here, are just my favorites, that I keep, so I can watch. If I get bored in my office, doing paperwork. That being said, my brother and I have a wide range of tastes. Including some weird tastes in fiction on the web.”
Lee thought, 'Oh, he could not mean?... Could he? I dare not ask.'
Paciano stood up from his chair.
As Lee looked at Paciano, he could not tell if the mexican was armed, or not, under his clothing.
Lee thought, 'I don't see any weapons on him, but that does not mean he isn't armed. I just hope he is not trigger happy.'
Paciano said, “Follow me. We will take one of my more common cars, back to the Devil's Hotel.
Paciano then lead Lee out of his office, and to his garage.
(_)
A few minutes later, Lee was in the passenger side of Paciano, brown colored, mid-level car, with Paciano in the driver's seat, driving down the road, back to the Devil's Hotel.
Paciano asked, “So, when we get to the hotel, what do you want me to do.”
Lee answer, “We will sit on the couch by the right front corner of the lobby. That will allow us to see those that walk into the hotel, along with those coming and going to the front elevators. We will just sit there and wait. Eventually, the girls will start to walk by. And if we are quiet, they will pass by without noticing us.”
Paciano complimented, “That is actually a very intelligent plan. I get to see the women, and what they look like, without interacting with them, and with less chance of them seeing me. I like it.”
Lee replied, “Thank you. Still, this plan hinges on silence. If you freakout, we are dead. Also, these women have very sharp hearing.”
Paciano stated, “I understand. And I doubt I will freakout at just looking as a bunch of girls.”
Lee mentally lamented, 'You might, when you realize who they really are.'
The two men then road the rest of the way to the Devil's Hotel in silence.
(_)
Several minutes later, they reached the parking lot of the Devil's Hotel.
Paciano parked his car at the Devil's Hotel parking lot, and they walked inside the front entrance, and into the lobby.
As they did so, the lobby music changed to a different song that both men knew.
Paciano said, “I know that song?”
Lee replied, “So, do I. Renegade, by Styx.”
Paciano said, “This is bad. They say this hotel is strange in that the song it plays for individuals, and groups, has something to do with their fate, while in the city.”
Lee agreed, “Yea. That is not a good song for men in our position. But, let's sit down, before we draw attention to ourselves.”
Paciano replied, “Agreed. I have a feeling that you were right to convince me to come here.”
Lee quietly reminded the mob boss, “Just remember. Whatever happens, we have to remain quiet, and appear to remain calm.”
Paciano softly replied, “I understand.”
Lee and Paciano then walked through the lobby, to the empty, front, right corner couch in the lobby. As both men sat across from each other on the couch, with their backs to the windows. They sat next to each other, Paciano sitting to Lee's left side.
The two men sat their for ten minutes, watching people come in an out, but nothing was happening.
Paciano thought, 'I wonder what Lee wants me to look for. He said I wonder understand, when I saw the women. But, I don't know what the women look like. And if this is a trick, why hasn't Lee run off? Nothing about this adds up.'
Suddenly, Paciano watched as two women, in their twenties casually walking together from the hotel elevator lobby, to his right, across the lobby, heading towards the hotel restaurant and bar, to his left. The two women had yet walk passed the two men.
This gave Paciano a clear look at their front sides, including their faces and eyes. Though, they could not clearly see the right sides of the two women.
As Paciano looked at them, as he thought, 'They looked familiar. But, I cannot place them.'
Both women were slender, pretty, and young. They looked to be in their mid-twenties.
The first woman has fair skinned asian, with long black hair, that was allow to drop loose behind her neck. She wore a long sleeved, white blouse, black pants, and black flat sole slippers.
The second woman was a asian with tanned skinned, and an odd shade of long red hair. Her hair was was tied back into pony tail, with a red scrunchy, except for the long bangs on the sides of her forehead.
She wore a black crop top shirt, blue denim cut-offs shorts, green boots, and she had two pistols, under her armpits, in shoulder holsters.
Paciano focused on the redheaded woman, as he thought, 'No. It couldn't be...'
Paciano then took a closer looked at the tanned skinned asain, and he saw she had yellow irises. And she turn slightly, as she walked away from them, and the different angle allowed Paciano to see the back side of the tribal tattoo on Revy's right shoulder, and upper right arm.
Paciano thought, in disbelief, 'No way. It could not be. It is impossible. Though, Lee stated that I already knew about them.'
Paciano looked over a Lee. He saw Lee looking back at him. He saw Lee simply nod once to his unspoken question. Lee then turned back to look in front of himself.
Paciano did the same, as they watched the two women leave the lobby, for the hotel restaurant.
Paciano continued his thoughts, 'Oh my lord. I understand what Lee meant now. That was Revy. As in Black Lagoon, Revy. Crazy, two-hands, Revy.'
'But, she is just a work of fiction from an anime and manga series. She shouldn't exist. But, she does.'
'And what about the other woman? Where did a see her from?. She looked like Rock from the Boys and Girls omake. Hell, she probably is Rock! But, how?!... Unless... From those writings... And they had multiverse reality traveling technology... Oh no... No. No. No...'
Suddenly, Paciano felt Lee lightly tap his right foot, with Lee's left foot.
Paciano looked over at Lee, to see Lee looking back at him.
Lee shook his head once, to tell him to calm down.
Paciano realized he was starting to become visibly upset. He forced himself to calm down. He thought, 'No wonder Lee told me not to freakout. And Lee knew what my reaction was going to be, and he warned me ahead of time. That was good thinking on his part.'
'Still, this is bad. No. Not bad. Bad would be the authorities invading the island. This is on a completely different level of bad from that. This is gates of Hell opening up, bad...'
'Of course, something like this would happen at a place called, The Devil's Hotel. The situation writes itself.'
'My brother and I should have never joked, and compared our home town to Roanapur... Still, I got to get a grip. This may not be that bad. If it is just those two, it is not the end of the world. This situation can be handled. That is, if it is just those two?”
Paciano and Lee then turned back to look in front of him.
A few minutes later, the two men watched as three women walk passing them, from the back hallway in front of them, and towards hotel restaurant, to Paciano and Lee's left.
Paciano immediately recognized two of the three women.
The one of the women in front was Shenhua, in her red, flowery, qipao, and white jacket. Paciano could make out where she was hiding her long knives and throwing knives. Beside her was Sawyer, in her purple and black goth clothing. Paciano notice there there were no scars on Sawyer's wrists, nor throat, along with her throat no longer having that hole below her chin.
And there was a small, young, white haired woman, walking a couple of steps behind Shenhua, and Sawyer, whom was wearing a white maids outfit.
Paciano thought, 'White hair?... Lotton. And Sawyer had no scars... In the stories, she had her wrists and throat repaired. She can now also speak normally... Oh hell, we're screwed! Oh god. I am in the Twilight Zone.'
'I always knew that heading up a mafia organization would get me in trouble, but not this type of trouble.'
(_)
As the minutes passed by, Lee noticed that Paciano was becoming increasingly nervous.
Lee thought, 'I was afraid this would happen. I need get him out of here, as quickly, and quietly, as possible. And to someplace more private. And I know just where to talk him.'
Just then, Ranma, Natsuru, Akira entered the hotel lobby from the front doors, and as they headed for the elevators, Akira stopped and looked towards them.
Lee overheard her say something japanese, with Ranma and Natsuru also stopping and turning to look at Lee and Paciano.
The three women then started walking towards the two men on the couch, by the windows.
As the women approached them, Lee mentally cursed, 'Oh crap. Murphy's Law just struck. I have to find an excuse for Mister Del Soto's behavior... That will work.'
As the three women stopped in front of them, from the corner of his eye, Lee could tell that Paciano was doing everything in his power not to freakout.
Lee thought, 'I would guess he knows who these ladies are. I need to defuse the situation now.' He greeted them, “Hi ladies.”
Ranma asked, in english, with concern in her voice, “Hi Lee. Is your friend alright?”
Lee lied, “Actually no, Ranma, he is not. He is coming down from some acid, and I am sitting with him. He is actually through the worst of it. About another hour, he should be fine.”
Ranma responded, “Okay. Let us know if you need any help.”
Lee faked a smile, as he replied, “I will. And thank you.”
The three women then turned, and walked towards the front elevator bay.
As the women left their sight, Paciano thought, with worry, 'I cannot believe what just happened. I personally met, Ranma, Natsuru, and Akira. And given they are together, and all adults, they have to be from those writings.'
'It is the only time those three were together, and adults, in anything. I need somewhere in private, where I can collect myself, before I go nuts at the insanity in front of me. Where?... The men's restroom. That is the most obvious place to go to get away from women.'
Paciano got up and headed for the men's restroom.
Lee quietly followed Paciano, as he realized where Paciano was heading.
Lee thought, 'Good. He has got the right idea. Still, we need to be careful, even in there.'
A few seconds later, they entered the men's restroom.
As the door closed behind them, Paciano turned around to face Lee.
Lee could see that Paciano was about to freakout.
Lee quickly cupped his right hand of Paciano's mouth, as he firmly said, in a quiet tone of voice, “I need you to keep yourself together for a few more seconds.”
Right after Lee let go of Paciano's mouth, the mob boss just nodded a few times in response.
Paciano then watched Lee walk further into the restroom.
Lee checked the stalls. He found them all empty. Until he came to the last one. The handicap accessible one. And the largest stall in the room.
Without even looking under it, Paciano watched as Lee knocked on the door, as Lee said, “Okay ladies. You can take this elsewhere. Some of us have business to conduct in here.”
Lee walked back over to Paciano, and stood beside him, both men looked towards the back of the restroom.
A few seconds later, two women came of the men's stall. And while their clothing were wrinkled, Paciano recognized them as, Aeryn and Violin. He thought, 'This just confirms what I suspected. That is Aeryn and Violin. Also, this has obviously happened before to Lee. And I clearly don't want to know the details.'
As Aeryn and Violin walked up to them, Lee commended, “If you two want to do this, why not do it in the women's restroom. You can get into trouble doing that in here.”
Aeryn gave Lee a mischievous smile, as she said, “Because it is not as kinky that way.”
Violin causally stated, “Don't worry. We will be more careful.”
Lee and Paciano stood out of the way, as the two women exited the room.
As the door closed, Lee turned to the mob boss, as he quietly said, “You could say that I am properly paranoid. And yes. I got that term from the TVtropes website. Also, keep in mind that these women have sharp hearing. So, try to calm down, and speak softly. But, you can ask your questions, now. I will answer you questions to the best of my ability.”
Paciano forced himself to calm down, as he softly mentioned, “This is like that screwy story I read off the web. It is the only time all those characters were in one place. And they all looked like the way those characters were in those stories. The only way this insanity fits is if they are from that story.”
Lee whispered, “Badasses Of the Multiverse?”
Paciano realized, as he quietly replied, “Yes... Oh my god. That strange message from a month ago. That was Scorpius... Damn, Scorpius is hot as a chick.”
Lee calmly answered, in a soft tone of voice, “Yes. On both counts. And that was her. Though, I don't think we are going to have to worry about her. I think she was just did that message as a favor to Violin. And we should count our blessing on that.” He mentally added, 'I guess he is a fan of my works.'
Paciano quietly stated, “Scorpius stated they wanted the writer. They probably meant the writer of those stories. But, who?...” Realization dawned in his eyes, as he looked directly at Lee, while accusing, in a quiet tone of voice, “You're the writer?”
Lee silently nodded once in confirmation.
Paciano softly asked, “How the hell did this happen?”
Lee quietly answered, “I guess world as myth theory is real. And I channeled too much genre savvy, too much badass, and too much multiverse technology, into one story, and it cracked reality itself. I wanted to push the limits of my imagination, while taking fanfiction format to the extreme, and I went too far.”
Paciano softly commented, “Well, you did the impossible. And you do realize this madness is only going to spread outwardly?”
Lee quietly admitted, “Yea. I know that. But, there is nothing either of us can do about it. Even if I turned myself in to them, it won't stop.”
Paciano softly agreed, “You are right. So, let's do with what we can. And let's start with the most important question. Are the Lovelace maids here?”
Lee whispered, “No. And neither are the others outside of Rock and Revy's small group. Annie is not here. Neither is Chang, the Serenity crew, nor any of Hotel Moscow.” He mental added, 'Except Melvin, but he is in hiding from Hotel Moscow, and there is no need to worry you further.'
Paciano let out a sigh of relief. He quietly commented, “I maybe a fan of the Bloodhound. But, I know better than to want to meet her in real life.”
Lee nodded, as he softly agreed, “You and me both.”
Paciano quietly inquired, “So, besides who I saw in the lobby, who else is here?”
Lee softly mentioned, “Eda and Yolanda are the blonds at that burger food truck.”
Paciano quietly commented, “I thought they looked familiar. Though, they cook good food.”
Lee softly replied, “Yes. They do. I am one of their regulars. Also, the teenagers are here.”
Paciano quietly questioned, “Which ones? I know better than to hope it is the Lowe siblings.”
Lee shrugged, as he softly responded, “Yea. Those two were nice to write about. Ah brotherly love. Anyway, I am talking about the Lagoon daughters, and the trio sisters being here. Not the Lowe brothers.”
Paciano quietly commented, “The trio sisters are not that bad, but the Lagoon daughters could be a problem.”
Lee nodded, as he softly responded, “I agree on both counts. Actually, it was Revy, with the Lagoon daughters that tore through the Rats Nest, a few nights ago.”
Paciano whispered, “I believe you. And I am glad you warned me. You steered us away from a minefield.”
Lee quietly said, “You're welcome.”
Paciano softly asked, “So, how screwed are we?”
Lee quietly answered, “Pretty screwed. As you know, your island is not on a map. Well, someone left me a business card for the Devil's Hotel, on the same day of the broadcast. He mentally added, 'I will leave out the Rats Nest flier and ring.'
Lee took a deep breath, and let out a breath. He then continued, in a soft tone of voice, “Someone lured me here. A reality traveler knows who I am. Knew where I lived. And their timing, for leaving their package in my mailbox, before I got home, on the day, was not coincidental. Though, I am guessing that the person who did this not one of those in the hotel.”
Paciano quietly inquired, “If you knew this was a trap. Why the hell did you come to this town, in the first place?
Lee softly stated, “Because, I had no other leads. And the fact of the matter was if I had stayed, the authorities of my country would have disappeared me.”
Paciano quietly said, “That would have likely happened to you.” He thought, 'Oh hell. There is a bigger game at foot here than I thought. And I am going to get caught up in it, if I don't do something soon. If I kill Lee, the women might go after me. If I try to turn over Lee, the women might still go after me. That is because these women are literally insane. I have only one other alternative.'
Lee softly commented, “I was able to get out of the country right before the hammer fell. And I would rather follow up on my only lead, and live off the grid, than get caught.”
Paciano whispered, “I can see your point of view. So, what is your angle? You don't act crazy enough to just want to be near those women. You clearly want something from them.”
Lee sadly said, in a quiet tone of voice, “I am trying to steal one of their reality devices, because I am dying. I got cancer. I am dead in less six months. We are talking full wasting away to living skeleton death. I have lost a lot of weight since I got here. And I got nothing to lose by trying to steal a device from them.”
Paciano softly said, in a sympathetic tone of voice, “Sorry to hear that.”
Lee quietly commented, “If I can get one of those devices. I can find a cure for myself, and escape them, at the same. I already have a few ideas on where to look for a cure for my cancer.”
Paciano softly replied, “I bet you do.”
Paciano thought, 'Though, your character, Bob, did not have much luck in finding a cure to Boris' cancer. And I doubt you want to use the vat process, which will also turn you into a woman. Though, that is not even mentioning, that you likely don't trust anyone with access to that technology. Because, they could use the vat process to brainwash you into their servant.'
'Still, I want to know how he plans to achieve his goals.'
Paciano quietly questioned, “Though, how do you plan to pull this off?”
Lee softly inquired, “Are you familiar with the Tvtropes website?”
Paciano quietly answered, “Yes. Your stories also covered that website. And I took a look at that website.”
Lee softly said, “Good. I am glad you remember that. It makes it more simpler to explain the situation to you.”
“Well, I met this guy when I first got here. Nice guy, and we are genuinely friends. But, I have been using him as a cover for the, those two guys, trope. And it has worked so far with the girls, because they are looking for one person. In the meantime, my overarching plan is a Kansas City Shuffle. But, I am still ironing out the details.”
Paciano quietly mentioned, “You need at least three person team to make that plan work right. The face. The one behind the scenes. And the distraction.”
Lee softly agreed, “Yes. But, only one of them has to know all the details. My friend and I are keep swapping roles between the face and the distraction, depending on the situation. He just doesn't know it. And it has fooled the girls, so far.”
“And I am working on finding the third person. The one that works behind the scenes. Want to be the volunteer for the guy behind the scenes?”
Paciano flatly, but quietly, replied, “No. I want to get through this alive. And I think it best if I go home, now.” He pulled out his keys, and handed them to Lee, as he requested, in a soft tone of voice, “Could you please drive me home. My nerves are shot.”
Lee took the keys in his right hand, as he smiled. He said, in a sincere, but quiet tone of voice, “I would be more than happy too. Though, I am sure you have a quicker way back to your home than the way you had me taken, both there, and back here. You took took a different routes to return here, to confuse me. And it worked.”
Paciano softly admitted, “You are correct. And I will show you the right way to get back to my home.”
Lee quietly replied, “Good. Now, let's get you home.”
Both men then calmly exited the men's restroom walked, out of the hotel lobby and into the parking lot, where they got into Paciano car. And Lee drove away from the Devil's Hotel parking lot, and down to road, to Paciano's home. With Paciano providing directions, as he sat in the front passenger seat of his car.
(_)
Twenty minutes later, Lee had returned Paciano back to his home, and given the mob boss back his keys.
Currently, Lee and Paciano stood outside of the mob boss's home, in the driveway, within the concrete fence.
Paciano had called in his men, that were within his residence, to meet and group together in the driveway, so he could speak to them, at once.
Paciano stood in front of his men, as he faced them on the driveway, with Lee quietly standing behind him.
Paciano stated, in a firm tone of voice, in english, for Lee's benefit, “I cannot give you the details just yet. I will do so tonight, when the rest of our group is here. But, I want you all to know, that this man.” He used his right thumb to point over his right should towards Lee, as he continued, “Just saved all of our lives. And we owe him much in doing so.”
Paciano then dropped his right hand back to his side.
Paciano went onto say, “Let it be known to all my subordinates, right here, and elsewhere. I have two orders. One, anything that happened last night, is to be let go. Lee, here is not to be harmed. And the women with him, from Devil Hotel's are to be left alone. And two, we will be meeting here, tonight. At seven PM. I will explain further, then. Now, I need someone to take Lee here, back to the Devil's Hotel.”
One of the men in the group took a step forward.
Paciano said, “Good.” He then turned around to looked at Lee, as he held out his right hand, towards Lee.
Paciano commented, “Good luck, Lee. And try not to get the world destroyed.”
Lee shook Paciano's hand, as he replied, “I will try my best to prevent that, Mister Del Soto. And good luck to you to.”
Both men shook hands, in a firm, though not tight, manner.
Lee thought, 'This firm handshake is a good sign that he is serious about leaving me alone.'
After they broke their handshake, Lee followed the man that stepped forward towards a black car in the driveway.
Less than a minute later, Lee was on the road back to the Devil's Hotel.
(_)
Around fifteen minutes later, Lee was dropped off at the Devil's Hotel, at the front entrance.
As Lee walked into the lobby, he saw Sam sitting in a nearby chair that was facing him.
Lee looked around, to see who else was in the room. He thought, 'I don't see any of the girls here.' He then turned his attention towards Sam, as he continued his thoughts, 'Just Sam. That is good. Now, I need speak to Sam.'
Lee walked over to his friend. As he did so, Sam looked up at Lee. He asked, “Where have you been?”
While Lee came to stop in front of Sam, Lee stated, “It is a long story. From last night, to right now. Let's get an early lunch at the hotel restaurant, I will tell you all about it.”
Sam stood up from chair, as he responded, “Sound good to me.”
Lee and Sam then walked towards the hotel restaurant, to get some lunch.
(_)
A few minutes later, Lee and Sam sat in stools, at the bar counter to get some some lunch. Since, it was early for lunch, none of the girls were there. Lee told Sam, and Melvin. Whom was had decided to start his shift early, because he had nothing better to do. With the bartender taking Lee and Sam's lunch orders.
And while Melvin had heard of last night's events from Lee, but not the mornings events, of what happened.
Lee stated that he had only talked to the mob boss, and brought him here, for him to see how dangerous the women were. He omitted the mob boss' name, and the conversation he had with Paciano in the men's restroom. Lee just stated that the mob boss saw reason and he went back to his home to talk to him some more. And then the mod boss had Lee returned back to the hotel.
By then, Melvin had served Lee and Sam their sandwich orders, with sodas. With Melvin standing behind the bar counter, across from the two sitting men, as he joined in on the conversation.
As they ate their lunch, Sam stated, “That was one hell of a tale, Lee. But, I don't see how the mob boss would just see reason from looking at Revy and the others.”
Lee thought, 'No. I can see your reasoning. But, I have a good statement prepared for that.' Lee played dumb, as he shrugged. He said, “He is a mob boss. He clearly had connections to other criminal organizations. Maybe he recognized them from somewhere. Let's be honest. Considering some of those women are very violent, someone has to have heard of them from somewhere.”
Melvin snorted, and then began laughing, as he thought, 'Or, maybe the guy was a Black Lagoon fan, and he realized who he was dealing. Now, that would be crazy. But, who am I to talk about that. My situation is even crazier. I lived the Black Lagoon anime series, and beyond. Then, when I got here, I actually saw the series a few times.'
As Melvin began to calm down, he mentally reflected, 'But, I better back Lee on this. Because the other, more likely explanation, is to hard to believe.'
Melvin stated, “That could be the case.”
Sam conceded, “Perhaps. But, let us all be happy that we got out of this one with our hides intact.”
Lee replied, “You got that right.”
Melvin said, “I fully agree.”
Sam and Lee then soon finished their meals, tipped Melvin, paid for their meals, and left to continue their ongoing poker game, at the Rats Nest, for the rest of the day.
And the rest of the day was uneventful for Lee, Sam, and Melvin.
(_)
The next morning, it was late in the morning as Lee and Sam were both dressed and ready to face they day. With both of them having gotten some breakfast at different locations. For Lee, it was the Last Resort Diner, and Lee did not know where Sam ate his breakfast at.
Currently, they met back inside the front lobby of the Devil's Hotel, in the mid-morning to start their daily poker game, as they waited for the Rats Nest to open at eleven AM.
They were sitting in two of the cushioned lobby chairs, in the hotel lobby, using the small table between them to hold their gambling pot, and the cash they had pulled out, to place bets.
Lee was facing the front entrance, and Sam was facing the check in desk.
Lee was not really paying attention to what was going on around him, but as the two men concluded another hand, which Lee won, Lee saw a mexican man, in a business suit walk into the hotel lobby, from the entrance, take a look around, and focus on Lee.
As the man walk towards Lee, Lee noticed him. Lee thought, 'Now, what does Mister Del Soto want with me? Though, it is best that I be polite. Being polite got me out of trouble yesterday. I am sure being polite will get me out of trouble today'
Lee turned to Sam, as he said, “Collect the cards, and your cash. We will have to table to the game for later.” Lee then picked up and pocketed his cash that he had on the table.
Sam quickly did the same. As he pocketed his cash and his cards, he looked over his left shoulder, at where Lee was looking, and the bearded man understood what was going on.
Lee and Sam both stood up, and turned to face the man in the business suit, as the third man came to a stop in front of him.
Lee stated, “Is there something I can do for you?”
Man politely said, in english, “Actually, there is something I can do for you. Please, come this way, outside.”
Lee replied, “Okay.”
Lee then walked beside the man, towards the front doors.
Sam decided to stay a few feet behind Lee and the third man, so he could quietly listen to their conversation.
After all three men entered the entryway, with the doors closing, they realized they had some privacy. And Sam realized that Lee and the other man in front of him has slowed their walking pay towards the outside door. Sam did the same.
Lee warned, “Be mindful that the people here have very sharp hearing.”
The man in the business suit cryptically said, in a soft tone of voice, “Thank you for the tip. My boss has decided to make a career change. And after last night, when he explained things to us. So, have we.”
Lee commented, “That is completely understandable. And given the circumstances, that is likely a wise thing to do.”
The man stated, “Still, the boss is very grateful for what you did, and he has a gift for you.”
The man reached into his pocket, as he pulled out something. The man then requested, “Please hold out you hand, Lee.”
As they continued walking, Lee held out his right, with the palm facing upwards. The man dropped something into Lee open palm of his right hand.
Lee looked at the object in his hand and saw it was a keyring with two keys on it.
The man then opened the right front door to the hotel for Lee, and Sam. With both Lee and Sam walking outside, and seeing what was in parked in front of the hotel, across the sidewalk, from the lobby entrance, by the curb.
Lee and Sam came to a stop outside, under the awning, of the sunny, cool day. They stood beside each other, in silence, with Lee to Sam's left side, as they looked at what was in front of them.
The man lead the right front door automatically close, as he walked up to join them.
The man said, “The gas tank is full. Oil was recently replaced. And she is in mint condition. And she is all yours, Lee.”
Sam's jaw dropped, due to looking at Lee's unexpected gift.
As Lee looked at his gift, his entire body shook with excitement. All that came from his mouth was, “Ahh. Aaaah. Ahhahaha...”
In front of them was a pink, two door, 1951 Cadillac Series 62 convertible, in perfect condition.
The car was cleaned and waxed to the point that paint job acted as a pink mirror. The hooded top and windows were rolled down, allowing Lee to see the white leather seats, of the car, in pristine condition.
The steering wheel was on the left side of the front seat and the car was facing with the right side seat beside the sidewalk curb.
Sam was the first one able to speak. He looked at the car, as he said, “Lee, have I mentioned to you that I swing both ways?”
Lee continued starting at his new car, as he stated, “No.”
Sam admitted, “I hope you are not offended, but... Well, cool, rare, beautiful things are a turn on for me. And sleeping with someone in the back seat, of a classic, american convertible car, is on a list of things I would like to do in my life. Man, or woman. I don't care. And I was just making the offer to you first. I promise to give you the time of your life.”
Lee looked at the car, as he answered, “I am not offended. But, I don't swing that way. Still, I don't plan on being here for long. I am more than happy to leave this car to you. And you can find someone else to have your fantasy with. I don't mind.”
Sam smiled, as he happily replied, “Thanks, Lee. You're the best.”
(_)
At that moment, inside the lobby, Rock and Revy were walking out of the hotel restaurant and through the lobby, when they came to a stop, at what they saw through the front doors, Lee, Sam, and a man, standing by a pink convertible, with the top and windows down.
Both of them were in this usual clothing, with Revy having her pistols in her shoulder holsters.
Rock asked, “Is that Sam, and Lee?”
Revy answered, “Yea. And they are right by a very nice car. Let's go see what it going on.”
Rock replied, “Good idea.”
Both of them then headed for the front doors.
(_)
Meanwhile, outside, Lee was slowly walking around the car, counterclockwise, as he gripped the keys to it in his right hand. He ran his left hand right over the car as he slowly walked around it. He was tempted touch the paint job, but did not want to smug the wax coating.
As Lee walked around, he noticed, from the location of the gear being by the steering wheel, on the steering column, that the car had automatic transmission,.
The only real difference Lee noticed, between this Cadillac and the original version of this Cadillac, was this one had seat belts. Four, three point seat belts, installed in the four outer cushioned seats of the car. Two for the front seat, and two for the back seats. And two, two point seat belts for the front and back, center seats.
Lee thought, 'I will give Mister Del Soto credit for having sense to add some safety options to this car. And this is one hell of a gift. If I ever see him again, I will have to thank him for this gift.'
When he reached the back, he noticed the license plate on the back stated, BCKLAGN.
Lee thought, 'Damn. Mister Del Soto may be a bigger Black Lagoon fan than me. Still, this is not a legal license plate. They don't have vanity plates here. I checked. Though, he is a mob boss, so why would he care about the law. And there is nothing I can do about it. I hope the others don't notice.'
Lee continued walked around the car, looked at his vehicle, he had just made it to the back right side of the vehicle, with him walking onto the sidewalk, when he heard, towards the hotel entrance, Revy's voice say, “Whoa. Now, that is a classic.”
Lee stopped, as he looked up, and turned towards the hotel entrance, to see Revy and Rock standing by Sam and the mexican man in the business suit.
From Lee's left to right, stood Rock, Revy, Sam, and the mexican man.
Lee turned to Rock and Revy, as he stated, “That is an understatement. This car is over half a century old, and it looks brand new.”
Lee thought, with amusement, 'It is true. Cool cars do attract hot women. Not that I want to do anything with, Revy. Though she is hot, she is also crazy. And crazy is a turn off for me, because I would like to remain breathing, with all my parts intact, when I wake up the next morning. As far as I am concerned, Rock can have her. And though Rock is now a hot woman as well, though she's also crazy.'
Revy said, “No kidding, Though Lee, I really don't see how a man could be happy with having a pink car.”
Lee smirked, as he stated, “Revy, there are three things in life that a man can have in pink. Cars, shirts, and women. And this is a cool, classic, pink Cadillac. Elvis drove cars like this. Rock songs are written about cars like this, as if they were women. This car. No, this Cadillac is the embodiment of a manly, american car.”
Revy conceded, “You got me there.” She then joked, “So, are you going to take her on a date.”
Lee retorted, “No. I was thinking of taking her for a spin. This is a high maintenance chick. And gasoline is not cheap. So, I will not be able to take her out often.”
Sam commented, “Mores the pity.”
Lee then realized, as he stated, “Oh no. Where am I going to park this. It will get stolen the moment I turn my head away from it.”
The man in the business suit stated, “Don't worry. The locals here know better than to steal from the tourists. That includes the car thieves. It hurts long term business here, and my boss has been know to hurt them for hurting business.”
Rock over heard the man's comment, as she asked, “What boss?”
Lee turned to her, as he thought, 'Oh crap. How do I explain what I did? Oh, I know.' He answered, “Rock, the people we were chased by, two nights ago, belonged to an organization that wanted to talk to me, yesterday morning. I thought Revy would tell you.”
Rock's eyes went wide, as she understood what type of organization Lee was talking about. She then turned to look at Revy.
Revy looked at Rock. She shrugged, as she replied, “It slipped my mind.”
Rock then turned to Lee, as she asked, “Should we be worried.”
Lee stated, “Relax. It's taken care of. I explained to him the situation. That being, I saw Revy and some of the others, commit the Rats Nest massacre. And the boss' drunk employees were about to get themselves killed by approaching you women, while everyone was drunk.”
The mexican man by them backed Lee up, as he said, “Exactly. We do appreciate when people save our lives. And Lee here did save the lives of some of my friends.”
Revy commented, “Whoa. I have spoken mob bosses before. But, I never got a car out of the deal.”
Lee lied, “Well, I don't know about them. But, I have found the people here to be very reasonable, when one is polite, and knows their manners.”
Rock said, “I have said that manners do matter, Revy.”
Revy snorted, as she replied, “Fine, Rock. After this, I see your point.”
Lee held back a laugh. Lee turned to the mexican man, as he stated, “By the way. Tell your employer, thank you for the gift. I am very grateful to him, for such a gift.”
The man said, “I will. And I have to go, now. My organization is leaving.” He then held up his right. A few seconds later, a four door, black car, with tinted windows, then pulled up to a stop beside the pink Cadillac, and the man got into front passenger side of the black car, which was facing the sidewalk.
The car moved to where the passenger side was clear of the Cadillac, the car stopped, and the man rolled down his electric car door, tinted window. He looked over at Sam, Rock, Revy, and Lee, as he said, in english, “I hope you don't take this the wrong way. But, I hope I never see you again, Two-hands.”
The car stayed parked just long enough to for the man to see the shocked expressions on both Revy and Rock's faces, before the driver floored the car, and it sped away from them, out of the parking lot, and down the road.
A second later, Revy started laughing.
Rock joined her lover in laughing, as she thought, 'The local mob recognized us, and they ran. I find that both flattering, and humorous. And from the reaction Revy is having, so does she.'
Meanwhile, Lee forced himself to keep his emotions in check, as he thought, 'Crap! I just thanked him. And he had to drop Revy's nickname like grenade right into my lap. I have to think fast. And if I look at Revy, or Rock, when I ask, I will give myself away.'
As Rock and Revy quieted down, Lee asked, while he was looking at his car, “What did he mean by, Two-hands?”
Revy answered, “You wouldn't know. But, it is a nickname I have because I use my two cutlasses at once when I fight.”
Lee thought, 'Now, to further the con.' Lee turned to face Sam, Rock, and Revy, as he asked, “Like Antonio Banderas in the movie, Desperado?”
Revy smirked, as she answered, “Yea. Exactly. I even know someone who can do that pop up pistol trick with mini-shotguns.”
Lee thought, 'Yes. I know. Fabiola.' He said, “I get the feeling I don't want to know.”
Rock commented, “No. You don't.”
Lee mentally reflected, 'Okay. That helps. But, I got to get them to think about something else, before it occurs to them, to ask if the Mister Del Soto talked to me about what he knew... That should work.' He offered, “So, do you guys want to take ride in this beauty?”
Sam answered, “Of course.”
Rock replied, “Sure.”
Revy smirked, as she said, “I though you would never ask.”
Lee commented, “If you don't mind. I will drive. Sam will sit beside me. And you two can be in back.”
Revy said, “I don't mind.”
Rock responded, “I am fine, as long as you don't drive like a maniac.”
Revy snorted at Rock's comment.
Lee said, “I don't plan too. Though, I would like everyone to wear their seat belts while in this car. And Revy, if you don't mind, I plan to have the top down, as I drive. So, could you please leave your pistols here, at the hotel.”
Revy replied, “I understand. I will be right back.” She turned to Rock, as she said, “I will leave my cutlasses in our room. And I will leave a message at the front desk, with our girls.”
Rock commented, “I think they are in the hotel gym.”
Revy replied, “Thanks.” She then rushed back into the hotel.
(_)
Thirty minutes later, Lee was driving his new convertible Cadillac, with the hood top and windows down. Lee was driving. Sam sat beside him in the right front passenger seat. Rock sat behind Lee, and Revy sat behind Sam. With all of them wearing their three point seat belts.
Lee had just been driving them around the highways of the island, for around the last twenty-five minutes. According to his wrist watch. And he was heading nowhere in particular. As he did so, he had the radio on, and set to an American eighties rock and roll station, which no one seems to mind listening to.
Fortunately, the roads they had driven through, had been empty, for the most part. And Lee had found that the roads on the island, were in good condition, with only a few cracks and potholes.
As Lee drove, everyone was having a good time, just enjoying the ride.
Suddenly, Lee saw, in the rearview mirrors, a police car pull up behind them, very close. The police car had not did have its lights turned on yet, but he could tell that it was about to.
Lee turned off the radio, as he stated, “Looks like the party is over.” He mentally added, 'And I don't have my license. Oh well. Let's see if I can talk my way out of trouble.'
Lee drove the car to the right side of the road, and onto the grass. The police car parked behind him.
Lee put the car in park, and turned off the engine. Though, he left his keys in the ignition.
Lee stated, “Let me do the talking. Worst case, they arrest me. But, you should be fine.”
Revy stated, “I can take them, even without my cutlasses.”
Lee pointed out, “But, can you take care of their friends, as well? Let's see if we can do this civilly.”
Revy replied, in a disappointed tone of voice, “Fine.” She thought, 'Lee is almost as bad as Rock use to be.'
Rock stated, “Good luck, Lee.”
Sam said, “Yea. Good luck.”
Lee then watched from the rearview mirrors, as the police officer got out of his car.
The police office wore his police uniform. He was an average height mexican man.
A few seconds later, the man walked up to beside the left driver's side door of the car. He looked down at Lee, as he asked, in english, “Are you the man known, Lee?”
Lee looked up at the man, as he answered, “Yes, officer. Is there something that I can do for you?”
The officer calmly inquired, “Yes. First, why are you driving Mister Del Soto's car?”
Lee pulled out the key from the ignition, as he stated, “He gave it to me.”
The officer stated, “We heard about that. We just wanted to confirm that.”
Lee thought, 'I guess word travels fast in this city.'
The officer then requested, “The chief of police would like to speak with you, Lee. Do you know where the police station is?”
Lee thought, 'I found out where the police station was by the end of the first week I was here.'
Lee answered, “Yes. I do. And I would be more than happy to meet with the police chief, right after I drop my passengers off at the hotel they are staying. If that is alright with you?”
The police officer replied, “You are not under arrest. So, I see no reason to prevent you from doing so. And thank you, for your time.”
The officer then turned around, and walked back to his car. He soon drove off, passed them, down the highway.”
Revy mentioned, “Melvin mentioned that the cops here were reasonable. I didn't really believe him, until now.”
Lee turned his head to look at Revy, as he stated, “Let's count our blessings, and be happy none of us are under arrest.”
Revy replied, “You are preaching to the choir.” She thought, 'Now, I am glad I left my cutlasses at home. That could have gotten us all in trouble with that officer.'
Lee then turned back around to face the front of the car. He inserted the key, and started the ignition.
Lee then politely requested, “Could you guys please roll up your windows. I am going to put the hood up.”
Sam said, “Sure.”
Revy replied, “Okay.”
Rock responded, “No problem”
The four adults then rolled up the manual car door windows, as Lee also set the car to bring up the top up.
As soon as the windows were rolled up, and the top was up, as well, Lee put the car in drive, and checked to make sure he was clear.
When he was sure he was clear, he pressed the gas pedal, and re-entered the highway.
He soon turned onto another road, towards the Devil's Hotel.
(_)
Five minutes later, Lee stopped in front of the Devil's Hotel lobby entrance.
Lee put the car in park, as he let it idle, he turned to his passengers, as he said, “I hope you guys had fun.”
Sam stated, “I had fun.”
Rock replied, “It was interesting.”
Revy said, “It is always nice to ride in a classic.”
Lee smiled, as he responded, “I am glad you feel that way.” He then looked over at Sam, as he stated, “I will see you later tonight, for dinner, Sam. Say around six, I will meet you in the lobby?”
Sam teased, “It's a date.”
Lee chuckled. He then watched as his three passengers get out. Sam pulled down his front seat for the two women. With Revy and Rock exiting the back, from the passenger side door. Sam then pulled up the sit, and shut the door. The three adults then walked into the hotel lobby.
After they entered the lobby, Lee turned to look in front of him, as he put the car in drive, and drove towards the De La Plata Podrido police station.
(_)
Twenty-five minutes later, Lee made it to the police station. He parked his car in a parking lot across the two lane street from the front of the police station.
After Lee made sure both doors of his car were locked, he left it, and headed inside the police station.
When he walked inside, he saw that it was an average looking police station. With officers coming and going. And a few other people were there, as well. There was a check in desk about twenty feet in front of him, from the front doors.
Lee noticed that the walls of the building were concrete block, with likely steel rod, reinforcement. A cheap, but effective style of construction.
Lee height allowed him to looked over the partitioned panel walls to see that he was in a large room, and that passed the check in desk were several desks for the police officers.
The flooring used off-white linoleum tiles.
The ceiling was a drop down ceiling, with ceiling tiles. And the ceiling was eight feet above the floor.
The lighting was done by soft florescent ceiling lights.
Lee also saw security cameras, placed at various places, on the high parts of the walls. With the cameras being pointed at different angles, looking into the room.
Lee was careful not to look directly at any of the cameras he saw.
Lee then noticed that the officer standing behind check in desk was not busy. He walked up to the officer, and came to a stop in front of the officer.
Lee stated, “Hello. My name is, Lee. I was told to come here, to meet with the police chief.”
The officer looked at Lee, as he replied, in english, “Ah yes. Please have a seat, the chief will see you in a little bit.”
Lee turned around and walked to where there were few empty seats, set against the outer wall, to the right of the front door.
Lee then sat down, and quietly waited to be called back to see the police chief.
Around ten minutes later, another officer escorted Lee through the station, to the police chief's office.
As Lee walked into the office, the officer walked away.
Lee stood just inside the door way to the office, as he looked around the room.
It was a small office, about twenty feet in depth, by twenty feet wide, by eight in height. There were no windows in the room, so Lee was not sure if one of the office walls was an outside wall of the building.
The walls were a light brown, painted color, over concrete. With linoleum tiles being the same off-white tiles as what he had seen in the rest of the station. Along with the ceiling be a drop down ceiling.
And the lighting was done by the same type of soft florescent ceiling lights, as outside the police chief's office.
Lee also saw not security cameras in the room.
Lee thought, 'I guess I am not being recorded in this room, and it is okay to talk in here. That makes sense, considering this is the police chief's office.'
Lee noted that door to the office swung from the inside, to his right.
To his left was a coat hook on the wall, with brown long coat handing on it.
To Lee's left, there was a wooden baseball bat leaning against the corner of the wall with the door, and the wall with the coat hook on it.
In front of Lee were two wooden armchairs, with cushioned seats. In front of the chairs was a brown, wooden desk of moderate size.
On the desk, to Lee's right was a computer set up, with a tower computer on the end of the side of the desk. Beside the tower was thing screen monitor, and a portable phone, hooked its base. The tower, the monitor, and phone, faced away from Lee. Behind the monitor was a keyboard, and computer mouse. Lee could see from the back of the tower, that it was a wireless network adapter plugged into the computer. Which meant that it was likely hooked up to the internet through a wireless hub router.
Behind the desk, to Lee's right, against the far right corner, was a set of shelves that went up near the height of the ceiling. The shelves were three feet wide, and a foot in depth. The shelves were facing Lee's left.
There were books, video boxes, and even a few comics on the shelves.
Lee thought, 'So, the chief has hobbies. Good.'
To Lee's left, in the far left corner, was a sit of filing cabinets. The doors to the cabinets faced Lee.
Beside the deck itself was nice wooden arm chair, with cushioned seat and back. And there was a man sitting behind the desk.
That man was looking at Lee, with a pleasant look on his face.
Lee saw that the man looked to be mexican in origin. He was in his forties. He was clean shaven, with short black hair. And he looked to be in good physical shape for his age.
Lee thought, 'So, this is the police chief. And he clearly is not of the donut eating variety of police officers.'
Lee continued to look at the police chief. He saw that the man wore a white long sleeve buttoned up shirt, over what Lee guessed was a bulletproof vest. The police chief had on a brown tie.
Lee also noticed the police chief had on a shoulder holster, with a pistol under his left armpit. Meaning the chief was likely right handed.
The butt of the pistol showed that it was an ammo clip, meaning the pistol in the holster was a semi-automatic of some kind.
And though Lee could not see what was below the man's wrist, but he saw a brown long coat hanging on a hook on the wall, so he guessed the man wore brown pants, and with his job, he likely wore nice dress shoes.
The police chief said, in english, “You must be, Lee.”
Lee remained calm, as he answered, “Yes. I am, Lee.”
The police chief requested, “Please, shut the door, and sit down, Lee. We have much to discuss.”
Lee gently shut the brown wooden door. He then walked over, and sat in the left chair, in front of the desk, so he could more easily see the police chief.
The police chief stated, “I heard from my brother that he gave you a gift.”
Lee realized, as he asked, “You are Mister Del Soto's brother?”
The police chief answered, “Yes. I am the older brother. By a few years. My name is, Pedro Del Soto.”
Lee thought, 'Oh man. Now, this is interesting. One brother controls the crooks, the other brother controls the cops. And they are clearly friends. No wonder Mister Paniano Del Soto said they joked about their city here, De La Plata Podrido, was like Roanapur, only nicer, with them both in charge.... Oh boy did I screw things up for this town. I just hope Chief Del Soto doesn't blame me.'
Lee said, “It is nice to meet you, Chief Del Soto.”
Pedro stated, “Yesterday, my brother called me to inform me that he was leaving town on short notice. Though, he did not give me many details. And he left town, before I could ask him questions on the matter. So instead, I have questions for you.”
Lee requested, “I will tell you what I can, Chief Del Soto. Perhaps you should start from the beginning, so I don't have to waste your time, retreading what you already know.”
Pedro thought, 'Hey. That is my line. This guy smooth. But, he is clearly willing to give me answers. And I need answers.'
Pedro responded, “I want to know why, late last night, my brother called me, at my home, in my bed. He told me that this morning he would be leaving town, and joining the priesthood. Also, he was in the process of giving almost all his wealth to charity.”
“He even gave me his beach home. And I don't need that home. I have my own home. Places like that only attract trouble.”
“The only clue to his mysterious actions is that he mentioned your name, Lee. That he gave you one of his favorite cars. He told me which car, and I was sure you would be taking it for a drive today. So, having my boys track you down was not so hard.”
“Still, he stated that you saved his life, so that is why I didn't have you arrested on the spot. But, he refused to tell me how you saved his life. All he said if he answered my question, that I would either think he was insane, or get myself killed. That the situation was just too much badass for either of us to handle. Care to explain?”
Lee thought, with amazement, 'Wow. I must have made a real impression on Mister Del Soto, for him to join the priesthood on short notice. And from what that mexican man said this morning. I think Mister Del Soto also closed down his organization. That is understandable, given the situation.'
'And I guess I screwed up things more than I thought. I just know that Paciano Del Soto leaving is going to leave a power vacuum in this city. And I am not sure who is going to fill power vacuum. But, none of the options are good. And I am sure his brother here also realizes this fact... Still, I need something to use, to help me with the situation.'
Lee took a look around, and he then on as set of shelves, near the top of the shelving unit, by the desk, the stack of the Black Lagoon Blue-Ray boxes, and the Black Lagoon manga volumes, stacked beside each other, on their bottom sides.
Lee thought, 'I can use his hobbies to my advantage, like I did his brother.'
Lee turned back to look at Police Chief Del Soto, as he admitted, “Chief Del Soto, this is going to take some explaining. And we are going to have to do the same things. As what I did with your brother. You need to come to the Devil's Hotel, and see the answers for yourself.”
Pedro asked, “What is at the Devil's Hotel that I need to see?”
Lee answered, “Women. Dangerous women. And when we do this, we have to keep quiet, and make sure they do not know that we know about them, or we are both dead. Or worse.”
Pedro raised an eyebrow, as he inquired, “What dangerous game are you playing at, Mister Lee?”
Lee answered, “A game of shadows. Where the stakes are life and death. But, I do have a question for you. I see that you are a fan of the Black Lagoon series.”
Pedro answered, “Yes. I even find it funny that my name, Pedro, translates to, Rock. My full name translates to, rock of the grove. While Paciano translates to, peace. As in, peace of the grove.”
Lee said, “That is interesting. And I was wondering, what other series are you a fan of?”
Pedro cracked a grin, as he said, “You name it, I have probably seen, or read, it. Except for the pornographic stuff. I do not need porn. I can get plenty of tail, if I want it. So, there is no problem there. And, as it is, it can get boring here, and I have to do something to kill time.”
Lee thought, 'Well, your boredom is about to end. And I think I just found my person behind the scenes. You just don't know it, yet.'
Lee commented, “I can see your point. Still, given the situation we are all in, I want to be on the best foot with you, from the beginning. All I ask is that you please don't betray my trust in you.”
Pedro flatly replied, “I won't.”
Lee mentioned, “Good. Your brother mentioned that he had strange tastes in fiction on the web. Have you heard of the series, Badasses Of the Multiverse?”
Pedro answered, “Yes. It is a really twisted story. Though, I found it very funny, with a lot of good action it in.”
Lee could not help but smirk, as he said, “Thank you. That is what I was going for.”
Pedro inquired, “You wrote it?”
Lee replied, “Yes.”
Pedro commented, “You are one sick man.”
Lee admitted, “I know. And because I wrote that story, you could say that I am the Keyser Soze of this situation. It is just that, while those after me, don't know they are after me. I am being honest with you about being Soze.”
Pedro wondered, as he asked, “How does that work? Keyser Soze was a brilliant liar in the movie, The Usual Suspects.”
Lee agreed, “I know. Kevin Spacey should have earned an Oscar for that performance. And the movie had a great ending.”
Pedro questioned, “No arguments there. So, how is knowing about, the Badasses Of the Multiverse story, important?”
Lee thought, 'Now, to see if he can pass my test. I need someone with courage, and who understands the depths of the situation.'
Lee commented, “Oh it is. It will all make sense, soon enough. I showed your brother yesterday, and in response, he immediately folded his organization, and ran out of town, less than a day later. I am hoping you are made of sterner stuff.”
Pedro raised an eyebrow, as he inquired, “Are you quoting Optimus Prime?”
Lee thought, 'Oh my. He did get the reference. He passed my test.' He answered, “Yes. And as I told your brother, Mister Del Soto, there are three things you need to do, when we arrive at the hotel. And it will have to be just the to of us.”
Pedro cautioned, “If to get me alone, to lay a trap. I warn you, I have faced worse than you, and lived.”
Lee responded, “I am sure. And your brother wondered if this is a trap. Which it is not.”
“Anyway, first, when we get over there, you have stay quiet. You cannot talk. The women have ultra sharp hearing. If the women get wind we know anything. Then, we will both be killed, or worse. Second, we will only be spending a few minutes, until we see some of the women there. I nearly made the mistake of staying too long with your brother, and the situation almost blew up in our faces. Third, you cannot freakout. Your brother almost did. That would have screwed both of us.”
Pedro said, in a skeptical tone of voice, “I find that hard to believe. My brother is one of the bravest men I know. For him to be scared, states something bad happened. Very bad. Possible world ending bad. Because, he one time told me that he would only leave this town, permanently, if the nukes started flying. And I believe him.”
Lee conceded, “It is not that bad. But, it could get that bad, if we are not careful.”
Pedro said, “Interesting. And who are these women? I don't know any women on this planet that could scare Paciano like that.”
Lee though, 'Emphasis on, this planet.' He stated, “Like I said to your brother. You will know them, when you see them. Now, if they do talk to us, let me do the talking. Once you see them, you will understand that your authority means nothing to them. To be honest, it might make you a target.”
Pedro responded, in a more serious tone of voice, “Okay, Lee. You have me concerned, now. I will play your game. Just don't waste my time.”
Lee replied, “I promise, I won't. And after this, I will even treat you to some lunch, at the Last Resort Diner. So, either way, you are looking at a free lunch.”
Pedro commented, “There is no such thing as a free lunch.”
Lee smirked, as he responded, “Exactly. Now, let's head over there. And we can take my car. I will be driving.”
Pedro said, “Okay.” Both men stood up. Pedro got his coat, while Lee opened the door.
Both men then walked out of Pedro's office.
A minute later, they were out of the station, and sitting in Lee's new car.
Lee was behind the wheel, with Pedro beside him. And both of them had their seat belts on.
Lee then started the car, and took Pedro to the Devil's Hotel, to sitting him down in the hotel lobby, to watch for the people there.
(_)
Around twenty-five minutes later, they came to the Devil's Hotel parking lot, out front.
Lee parked his car in the middle of the parking lot. He made sure that the sight of his new pink car was blocked by the other cars, from the windows looking in the hotel lobby, and from the road.
As Lee turned off the ignition, with both him and Pedro undoing their seat belts, Lee thought, 'I am taking a big risk doing this twice. Two days in a row. But, I got no choice. Though, I will do this in the left, front corner lobby couch this time.
Lee looked over at Pedro, as he stated, “The plan is this. You follow me. We walk into the front lobby, and sit down in the left, front corner couch. If it is empty. If not, I will find another place for us to sit. Once we sit down, we will just silently watch people walk by. And whatever you do, you must remain silent, unless I ask you something. And you must not freakout. You freakout and we both die.”
Pedro looked at Lee, as he calmly replied, “I understand.”
Lee thought, 'No, you don't. But, you soon will.'
Both men then got up, opened their doors, stepped out of the car, and locked the car doors behind them.
A few minutes later, they made into the hotel lobby, and Lee lead Pedro to the couch against the window to the left side of the lobby. This was opposite to the location he took Paciano yesterday morning.
As they entered the front lobby, the speakers changed music, to the nineteen seventies song, Straight On, by the band, Heart.
Though, both men were so focused on the situation, they did not pay much to the song playing.
Lee found that the couches to the left side of the lobby were empty, and he and Pedro sat in the left, front couch, set against the window. With Lee sitting to Pedro's left side.
They then silently watched the people walk by, in the front lobby.
As luck would have it, the two men only had to sit there for a few minutes, until Revy, Shenhua, and Sawyer walked by, in their usual clothing, as they were heading from the hotel bar, to the elevator bay.
As soon as the three women were out of sight, Lee turned to Pedro, and from the look at Pedro face, Lee thought, 'I guess he recognized them. Good.'
Lee whispered, “Now, do you understand?”
Pedro turned to Lee, as his face paled. He quietly requested, “Oh god, yes. Get us out of here.”
Lee softly replied, “With pleasure.” He mentally added, 'And none to soon. The sooner we are out of here, the better for both of us.'
Both men then stood up, and walked out of the hotel lobby through the front doors.
Four minutes later, they were both in Lee's in the car, with Pedro in the front passenger seat, as Lee was driving down the road, towards the Last Resort Diner, which was only a few minutes away by car.”
While Lee drove, the two men road in silence, all the way to the diner.
(_)
Three minutes later, Lee already parked his car out from of the Last Resort Diner, with him and Pedro then walking into the diner.
Presently, the two men were seated in the back, right corner booth, of the Last Resort Diner.
Lee was facing the front of the diner, so he could see the entrance. Pedro did not mind, because Lee was paying for lunch.
Both of them had already given Mary, their young redheaded waitress, both their drink and lunch orders.
Mary had just set down their two cups of coffee, and two bottles of chilled water, on the table between the two men. She then went to take care of her other customers, which were not near the booth that Lee and Pedro were sitting in.
While Lee took a sip of coffee form his own cup of coffee, he could see that Pedro's nerves were shot for the moment, as the cup in Pedro's hands were slightly shaking, as he sipped his office.
Lee sat down his cup on the table between him, and looked at Pedro, as he thought, 'This is a normal reaction for the given situation. But, I need to let him talk, first. For him to have the reactions I want him to have, towards me. Still, I will watch what I say. I will omit that I have cancer, and that my plans are a Kansas City Shuffle, that he will unknowingly be a part of.'
Lee stayed quiet, as Pedro slowly collected himself.
A minute later, after Pedro took another sip of coffee, he set down his cup of coffee, on the table, between them.
Pedro then looked Lee, in Lee's face, as the first words from Pedro's mouth were, “I have a request.”
Lee inquired, “What is it?”
Pedro stated, “You know how I said that Pedro translated to meaning, Rock. Please... Please, keep that to yourself. And don't let those women at the hotel know.”
Lee replied, “My lips are sealed.”
Pedro said, “Thank you. And I know this is impossible. But, you some how cracked reality, with what I guess is your imagination. No wonder my brother skipped town at the first opportunity, after learning of them. He was right. They are too badass for us. And considering that you mentioned your story, I can guess that these women are not just from their own various series, but from your stories, as well.”
“And they found out about your stories. And how your stories effected their lives. And now they want your ass for what you did to him.”
Lee thought, 'It is so nice to be able to casually talk to someone that can keep up with my line of reasoning.' He responded, “Yes. That sums up the situation. And I see why you are the police chief.”
Pedro replied, “Thank you. I had to earn my job.”
Lee thought, 'I bet you did. Still, I need to know what your plans are.' He asked, “So, what are you going to do, now? Skip town, like your brother?”
Pedro answered, in a firm tone of voice, “No. Unlike my brother, Paciano, I cannot just leave. I am the guy that keeps this city in one piece. There are no elected officials here. No mayor. No councilmen. Nothing. I am it. Except for the firefighters at the island's fire department, and the doctors and nurses at the local hospital. But, those are whole other issues.”
“Still, because of this, I have to set an example. And I cannot leave without a damn good reason. And even those women at the Devil's Hotel, is not a good enough reason to leave. Even though they scare me.”
Lee said, in a comforting tone of voice, “Don't feel bad. That is the natural reaction by anyone who knows what these women are capable of. The fear will pass, for the most part, in a few hours.”
Pedro took a deep breath, he then slowly let it out. After which, he inquired, “I know. I have been in bad situations before. I should get a mental handle on this, by the time we finish lunch. So, how did you come to this city in the first place?”
Lee answered, “I was lured here. Someone dropped off a business card to the Devil's Hotel, in my mailbox, on the same day as Scorpius' broadcast.” He thought, 'I think it is best if I don't mention the Rats Nest flyer, or the small ring. That would bring to much attention to the bartender there, and I already owe her my life, for stopping that group, a few nights ago. And the ring is not important to our current situation.'
Pedro said, “So, that is who that was. The message makes sense now. And dare I ask who else, is here, in town? Besides, Revy, Shenhua, and Sawyer.”
Lee stated, “Rock and Lotton. Both as a women. The five Lagoon daughters, as older teenagers. Ranma, Akira, Natsuru, and their three older teenage daughters. Aeryn and Violin. Also, even though they are not with the group, Eda and Yolanda are here, as well. They are the blond babes that run that burger food truck, by the beach.”
Pedro commented, “So, that is where I saw those two women from. There are so many business that keep popping up here, it is hard to keep track of who is here just to live their life, and who is here for other reasons.”
“Still, Yolanda looks as hot as she did in that the youth omake. I am so glad I ripped those fansubs off the web, of those omakes, and watched them with my friends.”
Pedro thought, 'And I don't dig to deep, because I don't have time to track down every person that comes to town. Besides, more business usually brings more money. And I have been slacking on paying attention to the north quarter of the island, including the Devil's Hotel.
'I haven't be out this way in a year. And places like this just seem to pop up over night. Or, in the case of this diner. It just changes hands every few years. Though, it seems the people that own it now, seemed to do a good job remodeling. And I like they new name. Their name likely means they have a wicked sense of humor.'
'But, those are matters for later. Right now, I need to keep this conversation moving forwards, so I can figure out what I can do about this immediate crisis.'
'I wonder if Lee gets the joke. I doubt it, with everything else on his mind. Still, it is best not to distraction, considering he is giving me a lot of good information that I need to deal with this situation.'
Meanwhile, Lee thought, 'So, others know about the Black Lagoon series here. That is not surprising. That former mob member already dropped, the Two-hands, comment towards Revy.'
'Though, I do not have Police Chief Del Soto's trust, yet. So, I cannot ask who they are, just yet.'
Lee commented, “Yes. I made Yolanda younger and hotter due the super-soldier serum. I also replaced her lost right eye with a cybernetic eye that looks just like her left eye, and works just as well as her left eye. So, I think Yolanda is one of the few of those badass women that we don't have to worry about. Eda... I am not so sure.”
Pedro said, “While I agree with you that Yolanda is probably not pissed off at you, along with a few others. That doesn't made that they won't turn you over to their friends that do want your ass.”
Lee admitted, “You have a point there.”
Pedro begged, “And please, don't remind me about that damn super-soldier serum. You actually upgraded their badass abilities. Which is even more bad news for us.”
Lee replied, “You are preaching to the choir.”
Pedro looked down, as he quietly said, “I cannot believe my brother and I was so stupid tempt fate by joking that our home town was like Roanapur. We should have known better. Now, those women are here. And they brought their friends.”
Lee asked, “I feel for you. And I take it you are also well versed with Tvtropes website?”
Pedro looked up at Lee, as he answered, “Yes. And I guess we are going need that knowledge to survive this storm.”
Lee thought, 'Now, he is ready for my pitch.'
Lee stated, “I would think so. Now, I have plan. And I need your help. I am not asking that you put yourself, nor your men, in harms way. All you have to do is three things. Give me information, in exchange I will give you information. Keep the cops, and the crooks, away from these women. And I might need an alibi from time to time.
Pedro agreed, “Yes. Of course. I will order my boys to leave those women alone, and you alone. I don't want them to die. And I will have my boys impressed upon on the crooks to stay away, that it is in their best interest to stay away from those women and the Devil's Hotel.”
“Honesty, we may joke about it, but this town is not like Roanapur. It is not corrupt to the core. It use to be, until my brother and I cleaned it up from both sides of the law. But, it is not anymore. And the crooks that survive here know when to back off and not make waves.”
Lee said, “Good. That will solve a lot of problems. And prevent a number other problems for us.” He thought, 'Okay. He is on board. Though, it just occurred to me. It is so easy to use tropes for evil. I wonder if tropes are the dark side of genre savvy. I hope not.'
Pedro commented, “Also, a high body count might cause outside authorities to take notice of the situation. That is not something any of us one want happen.”
Lee replied, “You got that right.”
Pedro stated, “On information. Let's meet here at night, say around seven PM, every night, where we compare notes. It is clear enough to the Devil's Hotel, that you can drive here, without being suspicious. And those women don't know about me, yet. So, I am in the clear, at the moment.”
Lee said, “That is fine. If there is a problem. One of use will call the other ahead of time. You can leave a message at the front desk. Just use your first name, Pedro. I will call you from the police station, and talk to you. Or, leave a message with your men.”
Pedro responded, “That will work. The only problem I see with us meeting is if the women there come here.”
Lee commented, “Relax. I have not seen any of the women come in here to eat. They probably think this place is to low class, now that they have been rich for decades.”
Pedro chuckled. He then said, “Probably. And you made them rich, and they are still after your ass.”
Lee commented, “Yea. I know. They are being ungrateful bitches, on the matter. And even my friend, Sam, who doesn't know what is going on, prefers not to come here. He says the people that work here rub him the wrong way.”
Pedro said, “That works for both of us. The less people that know we are working together, the better.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. You got that right.”
Pedro inquired, “So, what does Sam look like?”
Lee stated, “He is the guy with the full groomed beard and ponytail, that is around me a lot.”
Pedro said, “Okay. I will also have my boys leave him alone, as well. Though, where do you two usually go during the day?
Lee answered, “Most of the time, either the Devil's Hotel, or the Rats Nest. Though, I come here, and the burger food truck, to eat.”
Pedro stated, “We will leave these places alone.”
Lee asked, “Good. By the way, what do you know about the Rats Nest bartender?”
Pedro admitted, “Not much, besides she hot, and she keeps to herself. She had been cooperative with me in a number of ways... And yes, she is great in bed.”
“The only thing she won't tell me, is her name. And I don't mind. The city is full of secrets. What is one more? Also, I allow her a lot of leeway at her bar, because some of the more foolish criminals in the city get themselves killed there. And it is not because of any assassinations. They just pissed off the wrong people. And the bartender cleans up the mess. Unless it is a large mess, then she calls us to help dispose of the body.”
Lee thought, 'So, he slept with the bartender. I don't blame her. And bartender is very clever. She used her her body to seduce both Del Soto brothers into leaving her alone. That is sharp. I will have to be more mindful of my actions, when I am around her. But, she likes me, and she already used a gun to defend me, so I am not worried that much about her.'
'Also, the cops are the body disposal service in this town. Who needs cleaners like Sawyer, when the cops are more than willing to do it for you, without arresting you. This city clearly works on the blue and orange morality scale. Still...'
Lee said, “I have seen that stupidity first hand, when some of the men at the bar got fresh with these women. Only, Sam, the bartender, and I were the only ones to walk away alive from the wrath of these women.”
Pedro inquired, “I heard a rumor that you were there, at the Rats Nest, during the massacre. What were the details of that massacre? The bartender did not give many details, herself, except that it was some women that did it. And she was clearly afraid of those women. And I have only seen that women afraid, a few times. And I am guessing that it was the women from the hotel that did the killing.”
Lee answered, “You are correct. The short answer is that Revy decided to take the five Lagoon daughters on a girls night out, and it got messy.”
Pedro nodded once, as he replied, “I bet. And why did you reincarnate Ginji, Yukio, Torch, and the vampire twins into a badass family, with Revy, Rock, Benny, Dutch, and Janet? That is insane.”
Lee shrugged, as he commented, “Come on. From an entertainment standpoint, it is cool idea.”
Pedro conceded, “Okay. You are right about that. Also, I will also keep an ear out anyone else that comes.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. That is a good idea. And that means I won't have to worry about that.”
Pedro pointed out, “Now, onto one of the more important matters of this situation. We both know, once the doors to the multiverse are opened. They cannot be closed.”
Lee commented, “That is true. In a general sense. There is not much we can do about that, now. This genie is not going back into her bottle.”
Pedro said, “You are probably right. Also, if you have problems, and you need an alibi. Me giving you an alibi would not be a problem. Just give me about two hours notice, and let me know when and where you want the alibi to be. And what you want the people near there to say you were at.”
Lee replied, “Thanks. I am happy with just about any alibi. Just as long as it is not arresting me.”
Pedro pointed out, “I wouldn't do that to you. You are too fucking hot at target. You are practically radioactive. If I arrested you, it would be a great set up for a massive jail break in, by the women, to get to you. With them killing my boys and me.”
Lee complimented, “You are clearly a very savvy man.”
Pedro responded, “Thank you. That is why I am still alive. Speaking of which. How the hell are you still alive? Those are insanely violent women. And you have been around them for weeks. It is like living beside tigers and lions.”
Lee inquired, “That is true, Chief Del Soto. And I will freely admit that I harbor no illusions about how dangerous these women are. Yet, have you seen the nineteen ninety-six action film, The Rock?”
Pedro answered, “Yes. Why?”
Lee explained, “The key to my continued survival is found in what the character, Stanley Goodspeed, said in that film about nerve gas. His comment can be applied to these women, as well.”
“The second you don't respect these women, they'll kill you. If you remember that, and follow that one rule, you will stay alive. Keep in mind. Yes. These women are dangerous, and crazy. But, none of them are wildly destructive without reason. As long as they are not paid to kill you, you don't get in their way, nor piss them off, you will be fine.”
Pedro complimented, “You make several good points.”
Lee responded, “Thank you. Though, a problem you briefly mentioned, that we need to keep in mind. If we are not careful, I could doom the planet.”
Pedro asked, “How so?”
Lee answered, “If I die before these women get their chance at vengeance, they might call in their friends to glass the planet. They do have friends with access to Star Destroyers and Command Carriers.” He mentally added, 'And with the cancer alone, that might happen.'
Pedro slightly paled, as he admitted, “You do have a point there. I will keep you being here a secret. I won't even tell my superiors on the mainland.”
Lee continued, “Good. Because, it gets worse. If the authorities get wind I am here, they will try to kidnap me. Learn everything they can from me. And then try to use me as a bargaining chip for reality traveling technology. And except for Rock, Violin, and a couple of others, these are not the type of women that negotiate. And they have the leverage to get their way.”
“If that happens, not only will I be screwed, but this could escalate to the point where the entire planet would be screwed.”
Pedro reign in his emotions, as he thought, 'I have learned a lot about you, Lee. But, I need to find out exactly what you are after.' He flatly inquired, “What is your end game?”
Lee answered, “Get a reality device and escape. If we play our cards right, in getting me a reality device, we will not only save this city, but our world. Because, if I leave. You can clandestinely leak to them, that I am the writer. And they will head into the multiverse, to follow me.”
Pedro pointed out, “That is not a bad idea. And good luck with that. But, I read your stories. Running rarely worked. You made those women very skilled trackers... Well, more so than they already were. And running didn't work for a number of people you wrote about. Such as Bao.”
“The only person I can think of that running did work for was Shane Caxton. And if they know about you, they probably read your stories, to learn exactly what you did to them, after the fact.”
“And they would also know about Shane, now.”
“Fortunately, I think Shane is fine because of the way the Black Lagoon anime ended, he was helping the Lovelace family. So, the he and Lovelace family worked out their differences, and the others could care less about him.”
Lee responded, “I agree. Shane and his family should be fine. I also understand that running will be a challenge. But, I got a very wicked plan to lose them. And it is still the best option we have. If I escape, they will likely follow me, with none of us likely ever coming back to this reality.”
“Let's be honest, the only thing that interests them about this reality is me. If I am gone, logic dictates that those women will follow me.”
Pedro flatly commented, “As I said, your plan is not a bad idea. But, experience has taught me that women and logic rarely mix.”
Lee questioned, in an annoyed tone of voice, “You got a better idea?”
Pedro admitted, “No.”
Lee stated, “Then, we will work with my plan. And plans, my friend, are something I have come to realize, that I am very good at.”
Pedro though, 'The way Lee is talking, concerns me. He voice and mannerisms have a hint of recklessness about him. But, he reasoning is sound. I agree with him assessment. We have to get him to another reality, for this storm to pass.' He responded, “Okay. Still, it is like we stuck in the Neverending Story from hell.”
Lee sarcastically replied, “Well, Bastian. We are not completely screwed to the wall, yet. But, we are close to it. Like I said. We have to be careful.”
Pedro agreed, “That is true. And are you doing a Neverending Story injoke with me?”
Lee complimented, “Yes. That was a good movie. And book. Your excellent taste in fiction continues to surprise me.”
Pedro said, “Thank you.”
Lee said, “I have a minor request.”
Pedro asked, “What is it?”
Lee stated, “That car your brother gave me is not exactly legal. It has only a vanity plate, and no any tags that I know of. I don't want to get into any trouble for driving it. That car is my only means of transportation on the island.”
Pedro said, “Don't worry about it. My brother gave it to you, so I am going to let you use it. I will speak to my officers, and they will leave you be, as long as you obey that normal traffic laws. You should be fine on the island. If you have any problems. Let me know.”
Lee replied, “Thank you. And I will. So, are there any really good men's clothing shops in town. I am talking for reasonably price nice men's clothing, and shoes.”
Pedro answered, “Sure. I know a few shops like that.” Pedro then told Lee about some men's clothing and shoe shops in town, and where they were located.
(_)
A few minutes later, Mary brought Lee and Pedro their lunches, and the two men ate, as they talked about more lighthearted matters. Like their tastes in fiction. And other interests.
By the time they finished their meals, they were quickly becoming friends.
They then got up, and Lee went to pay for their meals, and to tip Mary. Afterward, Lee used his car to take Pedro back to the Police Station.
When they got there, they headed into Pedro's office without a problem.
They then exchanged phone numbers and addresses. Lee gave Pedro his hotel room number, and phone number to the Devil's Hotel. And Pedro gave Lee the station's personal phone number, that he could be reached at, or Lee could leave a message from, if Lee needed to get in touch with him. With Pedro likely getting the message, as long as Lee called before six-thirty at night, when he left work for the day.
Though, if that was the case, they would likely see each other at the Last Resort Diner, at seven PM, for their meeting.
After Pedro and Lee were finished with their meeting, Lee left the police station, and got into his Cadillac.
Lee then drove his pink car back to the Devil's Hotel. After he parked his car, he walked into the hotel, and headed to his suite. Lee planned to spend the next few hours in his suite, resting, as he watched some TV. While he thought about how he could use Pedro in his plans. Also, Lee planned on checking out the clothing shops Pedro told him about.
When it reached six PM, he left his suite, and went down to the lobby, where he met Sam.
The two them went to the hotel restaurant to get some dinner. After everything Lee had been through, in the last few days, he was no longer that worried about the women, and he felt he could eat in the same room, as they were in, without them killing him by accident.
Sam and Lee then had a pleasant dinner at the bar counter. Though, Lee refused to tell Sam, nor anyone else what he had to talk to the police chief about. All he said, was it was a matter of formality on some questions concerning what happened on the night of the car chase he was in.
Fortunately, Sam, nor anyone else that asked, press the matter.
Lee and Sam then spent the rest of the evening watching several of the customers, including some of the badass women, do some karaoke, until it got late. Both of them then paid their bills, left some tips, and headed out of the hotel restaurant, and to their suites, to turn in for the night.
(_)
The next morning, after Lee met with Pedro, it was around ten AM, on a partly cloudy, cool day.
Along one of the interior roads of the island of De La Plata Podrido, a red, 1965 Pontiac GTO drove up into the parking lot of a local auto-repair shop in Plata Podrido. The windows of the car were rolled down, so the two women inside could enjoy the nice cool, autumn weather, as they had drove. Now, that they were where they wanted to be, the driver stopped the car, turned off the ignition, with each woman opening a car door, on opposite sides of the vehicle, with them both getting out of the car.
Rock got out of the driver's side, while Revy got out of the passenger side. Fortunately, Rock talked her lover out of bringing her pistols.
Revy was wearing her usual clothing, without her shoulder holsters and weapons. While Rock felt like doing something different. Rock was wearing a white blouse, and a light brown skirt.
After both women shut their car doors, Revy turned to looked at Rock from across the hood of the car, as she said, “I still don't see why we have to do this. The car runs fine. And you got to admit that chase a few nights ago was fun.”
Rock looked over at Revy, from across the car, as pockets her keys in a hidden pocket, in the folds of the left side of her skirt.
Rock then admitted, “Yes. It was. But, I don't want Benny, nor Dutch finding out about what happened. They both like working on this car. You do remember the bad moods that both Dutch and Benny were in right after Bob wrecked this car into the Yellowflag, all the way until it was fully repaired, a week later?”
Revy replied, “Yea. That was when, one of the few times in my life, Dutch gave me a look that honestly scared me.”
Rock responded, “Exactly. And that is why we need to make sure the car is fine. Melvin at the hotel said this guy is a good mechanic, and his rates are fair. Melvin also strongly warned us not to threaten him, nor his family.”
Revy promised, “I will be on my best behavior. So, what is this guy's name?”
Rock answered, “Hernan Pena. Now, let's get this over with.”
The two women then looked at the repair shop in front of them. They saw that the two door garage was completely open. There was also an interior section of the building attached to the left side of the left bay of the garage. There was even a door going into the interior part of the building.
The right bay was empty, while the left bay had a vehicle in it. The front of the car faced the two women. The hood of the car was up, with the engine showing.
They women sat that there was a man working on the engine, from the top of the engine.
The two women only saw the back of the man. But, they noted that the man was wearing blue coveralls. They did not see anyone else around.
Rock reached into her car and hocked the horn once, to get the man's attention.
Revy saw and heard this. And she giggled a little at her lover action.
In response, the man still had his back turned, as he said, in spanish, “Solo un minunte.”
Revy turned to Rock. Rock noticed this, she turned turned to look at Revy.
Rock answered Revy's unspoken question, “He said. In a minute.”
Revy replied, “Oh...”
Both women then turned to look back at the mechanic.
A few seconds later, the man leaned up, and used a rag by him to wipe his hands. He then grabbed some sunglasses, set in front him, on the left side of the car, and he put them on.
Finally, the man turned around, and faced the two women.
Rock and Revy could see he was a black haired hispanic man, with a full head of black hair that was cut short, but not too short. He was in his forties, and he was in good physical shape. He was average height for a man of his ethnicity, and he had a full, well groomed black beard, which was cut short.
He looked at the two women, then at the GTO between the women, then he focus back at the women.
The man looked upwards, and said in spanish, “Gracias.”
The man then looked back at Rock and Revy.
Rock politely requested, in english, “Excuse me, but do you speak english.” He thought, Melvin said this man spoke english, so that should not be a problem.”
The mechanic happily answered, in english, “Yes. It is practically a second language here in Plata Podrido. So, what can I do for you two fine ladies, on this lovely morning?”
Rock stated, “We are hear to discuss business.”
The man replied, “Of course.”
Revy bluntly asked, “Are you, Hernan Pena?”
The man kindly answered, “Yes. My name is Hernan Pena. It is nice to meet you both. If you would please follow me to my office. We can discuss business, there.”
Hernan turned, and walked into the interior section building, on the left side of the left open garage. Rock and Revy followed him into the building.
As Rock and Revy entered the building, through an open door, from the garage bay, they saw a hallway in front of them. The hallway run from their left to their right. They also noticed that the door to the outside, behind to their left, and on the other side of the hallway, was entrance to Hernan's office. Which had the door open.
Though, before entering the office, the two women looked to their right, and they saw down the hallway, there were closed door leading to other rooms. Including a door, on the left side of the hallway, that had a unisex restroom side on it, meaning it was the restroom. And all the down the right side of the hallway, was another door, that left to the back exit of the building.
The two women then walked into Hernan's office.
After they did so, they saw that Hernan was sitting behind his desk, in his black leather, cushioned, swivel armchair.
Meanwhile, even though there were two simpler, plastic chairs, with steel frames and without armrests, in front of the desk, Revy and Rock chose instead to remain standing. With Rock standing to Revy's right side.
Rock looked around Hernan's office.
The walls were painted white, the ceiling used a dropped down white tiles, and the floor was light brown tile linoleum.
To Rocks left side was a wall with a window, with the metal blinds closed, and a small table under the window. The wall, behind her had a closed window on the top part of the wall. The window was three feet by three feet, with the closed metal blinds, blocking the sunlight from getting into the room.
Though, the ambient sunlight that did make it through the blinds of the window provided enough light to see with.
The other three walls in front, and behind her, were just flat, plain white painted walls.
The desk was just a simple wooden top with metal legs and shelves. There was a wireless phone, on its base. And a computer, with monitor, keyboard and computer mouse, on top of the desk. There were wires going down into holes in the desk, where Rock guessed the computer tower was located.
There was also a bundle of cables, coming out the bottom side of the desk, to Rock's right side, with the cables going into in a set of wall sockets on the wall to her left. There were phone, power, and ethernet cables.
On the wall to Rock's right, there was a set of filing cabinet by the desk, set against the right wall, that faced the desk, which was right behind the cords that went into the wall sockets.
Though, what drew Rock's attention, about the room, was the table, under the window facing the outside wall, to Rock's left side. Rock noticed three pictures on the table.
The smallest picture showed Hernan, without his sunglasses. Along with this, the picture showed him standing, with him with the same groomed beard he had now, but the picture also showed that he had blue eyes. Beside Hernan, in the picture, sitting in a chair, was a pretty, much younger woman, whom was standing by Hernan. There were three small children, two boys and a girl in front of the two adults.
Rock thought, 'This must be his family.'
Rock took a closer look at Hernan's wife. She was beautiful, and slender. She had fair skin, long blond hair that loose, and went down to her waistline, brown eyes, and she looked to be at least fifteen years younger than Hernan was in the picture, with the woman appearing to be in her late twenties to early thirties.
Something in the back of Rock's mind was screaming to her, but she could not recall what it was. So, she moved onto the next picture.
The next larger picture looked like a cookout with Hernan's family, and other families. There were also some police offices, in uniform, in the picture. Everyone in the picture looked like they were having a great time.
The last picture, and largest picture, troubled her. It was a picture of several men, and a few women, all in combat fatigues, in two rows, in a jungle backdrop. One row as crouching down, the other was standing behind the first row.
The picture was faded with age. And it was clear that at one point, the picture had been folded up to be small enough to likely had once been kept in someone's pocket.
Rock did not see Hernan in the picture, as she thought, 'I cannot tell which of the men in the photo is Hernan, due to his full beard.'
She then noticed that all of those in the picture were wearing then yellow, blue, and red stripped armbands on their left upper arms.
Rock thought, with worry, 'Only one group wears armbands like that.'
Rock turned to Hernan, as she accused, “You are not mexican? Are you?”
Hernan had noticed Rock looking at the pictures. He looked her in her eyes, as he casually admitted, “No. I am from Venezuela. I have a somewhat checkered past.”
Revy picked up on the man's comment, as she asked, “What do you mean?”
Hernan calmly stated, “I was a former FARC member.”
Rock visibly tensed, as she thought, 'The only FARC member I have know is Roberta. This guy could be trouble. No wonder Melvin warned us about him.'
Rock to a quick glance at her lover, to see that Revy immediately look like she was getting ready for a fight. Rock then turned back to Hernan.
Hernan noticed the changes in demeanor in the women. He said, “Relax. I ditched that organization over two decades ago.”
Hernan saw both women begin to relax.
Rock asked, “Are you a communist?”
Hernan answered, “Not really. When I was a young man, in Venezuela, my friends and I were tired of getting nothing for our work, and our families work. While, the government and their rich allies got wealthier off of our hard labor. So, we joined FARC. What can I say? We were young, stupid, and foolish.”
Revy requested, with slight bluntness in her told of voice, “Care to explain how you ended up here?”
Hernan responded, “Not much to tell. In the late 1980's, my friends and I, were either fighting, or mostly just living in the jungle. During that time, we learned that our superiors were getting more and more deeply in bed with the drug cartels. The same drug cartels that were also making live harder for our families, through both FARC and their corrupt officials in governments of the region.”
“Then, one day, in the early 1990's, we learned we were being assigned to guard coca fields. And that was the final straw. We joined FARC to make a better lives for our families and ourselves. Not, to make things worse for our families.”
Rock thought, 'That is basically the same reason that Roberta quit FARC.'
Hernan looked upwards, with him not wanting to look them in their eyes as he recalled his past, “Given we were just grunts, our superiors were not that motivated to catch us. Though, if they did get us, they would have executed us for desertion.”
“Once we made it to Panama, we were in the clear. We split up from there, and I made my way here. And I have lived here ever since. I am now happily married to a wonderful woman named Maria, whom gave me three wonderful children.”
Hernan then looked directing at Rock and Revy, as he flatly finished his tale, “Still, I won't lie to you about the fact that during my time in the FARC, we did horrible things. But, we got out before things got a whole worse for that organization.”
Revy shrugged, as she replied, “I have heard worse.” She looked over to Rock, whom looked at her, and nodded once in agreement.
Revy and Rock then turned back to Hernan.
Rock thought, 'There is one question I still need to ask.'
Rock questioned, “Do the police know about your past? I do not want the police to impound you business, while our car is here.”
Hernan stated, “That is completely understandable. Yes. They know. Actually, I do much of the maintenance on their vehicles. I have a nice contract with the police. I am even friends with the police chief.”
“He and his brother even got me out of rough spot once, a number of years ago. I owe them big.”
“The police chief even invites me to his movie nights. Depending on what he shows, I sometimes get a little ribbing.”
“Anyway, if you stay here long enough, you find a lot people here have similar pasts. We have people from all around the world taking refuge here. We even have a former Somalian pirate turned priest, at a local church.”
Hernan overheard Revy mutter under her breath, “I am liking this town, more and more, by the minute.”
Rock stated, “That is all nice to know. Now to business at hand. We need you to just do a check on the engine, and maybe realign the tires and steering, if the car needs it. We treated the car kind of rough a few days ago, and we want to make sure it was okay.”
Hernan opened a drawer, in the middle of his desk. He pulled out a calculator, pen and paper. He then closed the drawer, and he started doing the figures.
Hernan worked on the what the cost would be for working on Rock and Revy's GTO, he said, “No problem. Let me guess, you are the ones that got into that chase, a few nights ago?”
Revy replied, “You heard about that.”
Hernan continued looked working on the figures, as he stated, “Of course. This is a small town. Word travels fast.”
Rock thought, 'I got to keep that mind. I need to tell the girls that we need to be more careful, or we could expose ourselves to more unwanted attention.'
Rock inquired, “So, do you accept U.S. cash?”
Hernan wrote something on a small piece of paper, and he hand it to Rock. He said, “Sure. I figure this is how much it will cost. And it should take a few days, to maybe a week. Leave me a phone number and contact information, and I will get back to you, when your car is ready.”
Rock looked that price. She then stated, “This seems fair.” She the pocketed the piece of paper, in the hidden pocket, in the folds of the right side of her skirt.
Rock then pulled out a pen and paper, from a hidden pocket in the folds of the left side of her skirt. The she wrote down the Devil's Hotel phone number, and their room. Next, she put away her pen, back into that pocket.
Rock pulled the keys to the GTO, from the pocket in hidden on the folds of the left side of her skirt. She then set both items on Hernan's desk, as she said, “We are staying at the Devil's Hotel. This is our hotel's phone number, and room number. Just leave message with the front desk, and they contact us.”
Hernan picked up the paper and read it. The text was in english. He then set the piece of paper back down on his desk. He look at the keys. Next, he turned to look at Rock, as he requested, “Thanks. By the way, I never got your names.”
Rock stated, “I am Rock. The women next to me, is Revy.”
Hernan leaned back in his chair, as he commented, “Rock, and Revy... Such odd names...”
For second Rock and Revy thought they had been found out, until Hernan continued, “To be honest with names like yours, it sound like a science experiment dealing with potential energy and kinetic energy.”
Rock thought over Hernan's comment, 'Of course. Our names now make complete sense to me. I am the Rock, the potential energy waiting to be released, by Revy, the kinetic energy. It is like I said to Revy years ago. I am the bullet. She is the gun. I will have to explain this to Revy, later.'
Rock smiled, as she commented, “Yea. You're right. I never thought about it that way. Thanks.”
Hernan replied, “You are welcome. Still, those are odd names for such two beautiful women.”
Revy scoffed, as she said, “I thought you were married.”
Hernan smirked, as he commented, “I am happily married. It just don't mean I cannot look. Just as long I don't touch.”
Revy replied, “Humph.”
Rock requested, “Can we use your phone to call for a ride?”
Hernan replied, “Sure.” He pulled the wireless phone off its base, and handed it to Rock.
Rock took the phone and dialed a number. As soon as the other end of the line picked up, she said, “Yea. We are finish here. We need to be picked up... Yes. It is where I told you it would me... Thanks. See you in a few minutes.”
Rock hung up the phone, and she handed it to Hernan.
Hernan put the phone back on its base, to recharge.
Revy commented, “Come on, Rock. Let's wait outside.”
Rock replied, “Sure.”
Hernan then silently watched the the two women in front of him, walked out of his office, through the hallway, into the garage bay, where they turned to their right, to head outside, and onto the parking lot.
(_)
Five minute later, Rock and Revy were standing outside in the parking lot, as they faced the road.
From his office, Hernan stood by his office window, that faced outside, as he crack open the metal blinds. He used his right index finger to opened one of the metal pieces of the blinds just wide enough to see out of them, without them seeing him.
Hernan watched as a blue seventies model, four door car, pick the two women up.
As Rock and Revy got into the backseat, Hernan saw a black haired asian woman in the front passenger seat. In the driver's seat was a smaller white haired fair skin woman. And in the back, by Revy and Rock, was a petite black haired fair skin woman.
After the women drove away, down the road, Hernan let go of the metal blinds. He looked back at his office, as he though about the women he had just met, and those he had just seen.
He then said to himself, “Nah.”
A second later, another thought occurred to him. He turned back to the window, and he cracked open the blinds, to look the red GTO sitting in his parking lot.
He said to himself, “Maybe.”
He went to his desk, sat down in his chair. Next, he picked up his phone.
He dialed a number. A few seconds later, the other end of the line picked up.
Hernan said into the phone, in spanish, “This is Hernan. I need to speak to Chief Del Soto... Good morning Pedro. It is Hernan. How are you this morning?... Good. Do you have a minute?...”
“Good. I had a couple of strange customers come into this shop this morning. They just left. It was a black haired, fair skinned japanese woman, and a tanned skin, asian redhead... Yea. Well, they dropped off their red 1965 Pontiac GTO, for some basic maintenance...”
“Yes. I am going to work on their car. Their money is as good as anyone else. Anyway, they said their names were Rock and Revy... Yea, from the number they gave me, they are staying at the Devil's Hotel, which is kinda fitting if they are who I think they are...”
“Yes, Revy looks exactly like the Revy from the series you showed us. Now, that was a cool series. Only her voice was different. And Rock looked like the Rock from the omake you showed us. And that omake was funny. Really funny to watch while slightly buzzed from the good beer you provided. Anyway, I just wanted to ask if you knew anything about these two women?...”
“So, they really are them. I don't see how that is possible... Yea. I read those strange stories on the web, you told me about. The wife looked funny at me when I mentioned those stories to her. Still, they were funny. But, why are they here?... So, he is in town, and they are after them. Better him, than us...”
“We better hope the maids don't show up. If that purple haired maid, Roberta, shows up, and she is anything like those I met in the intelligence units, we could be in some real trouble... Yes. I will keep quiet about this...”
“So, are we still on for movie night at you house tomorrow night?... Good. I'll see you there. And good luck.”
Hernan hung up the phone connection, and he placed the wireless phone back on its base.
Hernan leaned back as he though, 'This place is about to get a lot more exciting. I better tell Maria to keep a closer eye on our kids, and for her to be more careful when she is out, running errands.'
(_)
Less than a week later, Hernan, while working on other vehicles, found the time to finish his work on the GTO. He called up the Devil's Hotel, and he left a message at the front desk for Rock and Revy.
A few hours later, Rock and Revy showed up at Hernan's garage. They got the keys for the GTO from Hernan. They told him they were happy with his work. They paid him. And they left his auto-repair shop, in the GTO, without any trouble for anyone involved.
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 1: “De La Plata Podrido.”
Chapter 04: “Cooking With Insanity.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
It was eleven ten AM, during a cool sunny morning, on a weekday, just after the Rats Nest has opened for the day. It has been a few days after Rock and Revy had picked up their GTO, from Hernan's garage.
It was a sunny day, which could be seen from the large windows of the Rats Nest.
It was late morning, as Sam and Lee were playing cards at their usual left, back corner table inside the Rats Nest. With them sitting in chairs, in their usual places. With Sam sitting with his back to the left, back, corner, and Lee sitting on the right side of the table, as they faced each other.
Lee and Sam were both dressed in their variations of their usual casual, masculine clothing. With Sam in his black cowboy boots. And Lee in his blue cloth jacket, glasses, and blue baseball cap.
Besides the two men, the only other person in the bar at that time of day was the beautiful bartender of the Rats Nests.
The bartender was standing behind the bar counter. She was wearing, among other things, a blue short sleeved shirt, red pants, blue plastic belt around the waistline of her pants, white socks, and blue tennis shoes. And while the clothing did not really do the bartender's figure, justice. The simple clothing did look nice on her.
The current card hand, between Lee and Sam, had been going on for the last ten minutes, because the conversation they were having, had become too interesting for each other, for them to continue the game, for the moment.
Their usual discussion during their games widely varied. From topics of politics, religion, and history. To fiction and non-fiction related subjects. Though, Lee was very careful not to let slip that he was a anime and sci-fi fan. As far as everyone knew, he stuck to action movies.
Presently, Sam had brought up the topic of piracy on the high seas, centuries ago.
Sam stated, “What I don't understand most of all is how women back then could become pirates?”
Lee thought, 'This is a very dangerous topic to talk about, considering who we are living with at the hotel. I have to kill the discussion in a rational manner, by leading it to its logical conclusion.'
Lee explained, “Well, I can understand why women back then found an appeal to be pirates. Back then, there are not many opportunities for women outside of the home. And the thrill of being an outlaw probably appealed to them.”
“Human nature has not changed much in the last millennium, and some people, of any gender, have a rebellious streak. And historically, those women that were not sold into slavery, or rape and killed, that were able to make it as pirates, were usually more dangerous than the men.”
“To top even that, pirate women that were caught by the English common law found a loophole that bought them time to escape the hangman's noose.”
Sam asked, with interested in his tone of voice, “What was the loophole?”
Lee answered, “Well, at the time, English common law was based on Christianity. And the laws at the time forbid executing women that have become pregnant, until they gave birth. Though, it usually didn't save these women for long.”
Sam chuckled. He then inquired, “Well score one for pro-life. What are the details?”
Lee stated, “The technical term is called, pleading the belly. Not joking here. That is what it is called. To most famous examples of this defense were the pirate women, Anne Bonny, and Mary Read. And while this only delayed their execution, it bought them time.”
“Anne was able to escape, with her father's help. Though, Mary later died after giving birth to her child.”
“It should be noted that those two women were good friends of Jack Rackham, as in Calico Jack. And that it is likely their children were Jack's. And for Anne, this would have been Anne's second child with Jack. Their first was named, Cunningham, which she gave birth to in Cuba.”
Sam said, “I knew about Calico Jack. But, I didn't know all the details, as you mentioned them. I got to give Calico credit. He could not save himself from hanging, but he made damn sure to do his best to see his girlfriends escape the hangman's noose.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. It gets better. Anne ended up in Charleston, South Carolina, where she gave birth to hers and Jack's second child. She then married another man, and gave birth to another ten children. Anne even live to be eighty years old. And that was over two and a half centuries ago. So, on top of everything else, many of the people in the deep south of Dixie, have some badass pirate blood flowing in their veins.”
Sam replied, “That is interesting. You know a lot about the southeastern United States of America?”
Lee admitted, “Of course. It is my homeland.” He placed some money in the pot, as he stated, “Call.”
Both men showed their cards, and Lee lost.
Sam collected the pot and cards, as he asked, “So, there is pirate history in the U.S.?”
Lee thought, 'It won't hurt to answer this question. And Sam has earned my trust... To a degree.'
As Lee handed his cards over to Sam, he answered, “Yes. During the colonial period, there were pirate hangouts all along the golden isles and other island chains along the southeastern coast of what is now the U.S.”
“A couple of these pirate hangouts still exist. Such as the Pirates House in Savannah, Georgia. It is still a bar and restaurant. They even have a trapdoor, that centuries ago, pirates use to get their victims drunk and shanghaied them, as a tourist attraction.”
“Though, that trapdoor is not used anymore. And they make a good key lime pie, there.”
Sam collected the cards and he started shuffling, as he questioned, “Interesting. So, you have been there.”
Lee stated, “Yes. And Savannah is an interesting city to visit. The people there are nice. Though, a bit... Off.” Lee then mentally reflected, in sadness, 'Except I will likely never see that place, any other other part of my homeland, again.'
Just then, one of the cards Sam was shuffling slipped out, glided slightly in the air, under the table, to land by Lee right foot.
Lee said, “I got it.”
Sam replied, “Thank you.”
Lee reached down, and he picked the card up off the floor.
When Lee came up, he handed the card to Sam.
Sam quickly finished shuffling, and dealt each of them five cards.
Lee picked up his cards to see what he had. He thought, 'This is a pretty good hand.'
As Sam picked up his five cards, he noticed something around Lee's neck.
Sam asked, “What is that?” Sam the put his cards in his left hand, as he used his right index finger to point at the middle of Lee's chest.
Lee looked down, and he saw that the mysterious small ring, that had come with the Devil's Hotel business card, and Rats Nest flier. He had put the ring on a string to make into a necklace, which had come out from under his shirt.
Lee stated, “I got this ring a while back. I don't know much about it. It is a total mystery.”
Sam held out his right hand, as he requested, “Can I see it?”
Lee thought, 'There is no harm in doing so. And he might know the ring's origins.' He replied, “Sure.”
Lee took off the ring necklace, and handed it to Sam.
Sam set his cards face down. He took the necklace from across the table.
Lee was silent, as Sam looked at the ring in his hand for the next several seconds.
Sam then handed the ring necklace back to Lee.
Lee took the ring back. He put the string back around his neck, with the ring on his front side, as he asked, “You wouldn't happen to know the origin of that ring?”
Sam answered, “It is chinese in origin. There are four symbols lightly engraved on the inside of the ring. The four symbols translate to four things. Which is fitness, health, longevity, and lock. And I think the ring was meant as a good luck charm for a child. Because only a child could wear that ring. Still, the ring is real. That is real gold, and those jewels are real. Be careful, someone might try to steal it from you.”
Lee dropped the ring necklace back under his shirt, he thought, 'Pay dirt. Now, to just figure out how that fits into this situation. And Sam knows chinese. Interesting.' He said, “Thanks for the warning. And I did not realize you knew chinese?”
Lee could see that his question caught Sam off guard, as Sam quickly picked up his hand of cards.
Sam shuffled his cards, in his hands. He then looked at Lee, as he stated, “Yes. I know some chinese. And, by the way, I overheard yesterday that those crazy women were planning on leaving the island.”
Sam's commented got Lee's attention, as he thought, 'Now, that is a skillful way to change the subject. And it shows that Sam knows I am interested in the women, he probably just doesn't know why. Also, the matter of their leaving is more important, than learning how and why Sam knows chinese.'
'Sam just played me. And we both know it. If I try to ask any more about him knowing chinese, he is going to ask me while I am interested in the women, I warned him to stay away from. That would blow up in my face, and likely ruin the one genuine friendship I have ever had in my life. So, I will just let the matter drop, and move onto the more important matter.'
Lee inquired, “Why?”
Sam looked at his cards, as he answered, “It seems they are unable to find the person they are after, and they are starting to think he may have left town.”
Lee thought, 'Oh no. Keeping those women here is very important to my plans. I am screwed if they leave. I got to do something quickly to keep them in town, but what?... If I do anything direct, I will likely give myself away to them, as they writer.'
'So, I have to do something indirect. It has to be simple message that proves I am here, but untraceable to me... That is so crazy, it might just work. The question is, will she go for it?'
Lee put his cards face down, as he turned to Sam. He asked, “Sam, where is the nearest location of a person that sells burner phones?”
Sam looked up at Lee. He set his cards down. Next, he used his right hand to pull out a cellphone from his pocket. He stated, “No need. I have one right here. I have yet to use it. And you can keep it. They are fairly cheap. If you know where to get them from.”
Sam handed the phone to Lee. As Lee took the phone, he replied, “Thank you. Also, I will be one moment.”
Lee held the cellphone in his left hand, as he used his right hand to pull out a fifty dollar bill from his money, on the table.
Lee got up, with the untraceable, and fifty dollar bill, in his hands.
Lee turned around, and walked over bartender, whom was near the back end of the bar counter.
As the bartender turned to face him, Lee smiled at her. He held up the fifty dollar bill, while he offered, “Would you like to make a quick fifty dollars, and get a small measure of revenge on the women that wrecked your bar, a while ago?”
The woman cracked a grin, as she answered, “Sure. What do you have in mind?”
Lee started, “Okay. Here is what I need you to do, after I dial the number for you.”
Five minutes later, the woman held the cellphone in her right hand, against the right side of her face. She finished her conversation, “Yes. That is the word. And it is spelled exactly like that. And give that message to Rock and Revy. Thank you.”
After the woman hung up the cellphone, Lee handed her the fifty dollars, which she took in her left hand. Lee smiled at the bartender, as he complimented her, “Beautiful, my dear. Absolutely beautiful. Now, I need the cellphone back.”
The woman handed Lee the cellphone, as she stated, “A pleasure doing business with you.”
Right after Lee had the cellphone in his hand, he quickly took out the sim card in the phone. He broke it in half. He then threw both the phone and the sim card pieces into a nearby trash can, by the back end of the bar counter.
Lee then walked back over to the bartender. He stood across the counter from her, as he said, “My dear, it is unfortunate that I cannot give you the punch line to this joke. But, I assure you that we just rolled those women hard.”
The woman pocketed the cash, as she replied, “It can live with that. And with this.”
The woman lightly put her hands in Lee's cheeks. She leaned over the bar counter, and quickly kissed him on the lips.
As second later, after she broke the kiss, Lee was slightly shocked by what just happened to him.
All Lee could find the words to say was, “Thank you.”
The woman pulled out a cold beer bottled, from a small refrigerator below the counter. She set the bottle on the bar table, as she smiled at Lee. She replied, “No problem. And here is a free bottle of beer.”
Lee returned her smile, as he took the bottle back with him.
Lee then turned around, and returned to the table he was shared with Sam.
As Lee approached the table, he saw Sam chuckling.
After Lee sat down, at his usual chair, he said, “Laugh it up. I just got a free bottle of beer, and kiss from a pretty girl. I think my day is looking up.”
By then, Sam had calmed down. Sam commented, “That is not what I am laughing about. I know you just did something stupid in dealing with the very that women you warned me about.”
Lee picked up his cards, as he smirked. He stated, “It is all in what you know, and how you play your hand.”
Lee mentally reflected, 'And boy did I just lay down a major bet in the pot, of the proverbial poker game I am playing with those women. Still, it might be best if I think about something else. How about I think about what I will get for lunch? And when? I believe I will go to the burger food truck in an hour? Or so? I feel like I could eat a hamburger and some fries.'
The two friends then continued their poker game, with Lee winning the current hand.
(_)
An hour later, at the Devil's Hotel front lobby, Rock and Revy had returned to the hotel lobby, from an errand they had just ran.
As they passed by the check in desk, one of the clerks on duty said, in english, “Madams, you have a message.”
The clerk's comment caught Rock and Revy's attention, as they stopped, and turned towards the check in desk. They then walked to the check in desk.
As the two women stood side by side, in front of the check in desk, with Rock to Revy's left side, they looked at the female clerk that spoke to them.
Rock asked, “What was the message? And by who?”
The female clerk pulled out folded piece of paper, as she stated, “A woman called an hour ago. And the message she gave for you both is written here.”
She handed Rock the envelope.
And Rock opened the piece of paper, and read it.
Revy asked, “What is it?”
Rock looked at the paper, as she answered, “One word.”
Revy requested, “Let me see.”
Rock turned to Revy, as she handed Revy the paper.
Revy took the paper and read it. She then turned to looked at Rock, as she asked, “Huh?”
Rock shrugged, as she responded, “You got me. I will go upstairs, get on the internet, from our laptop, and find out the meaning to this word. I will join you in a little while, at the hotel bar, for some lunch.”
Revy replied, “Okay. Here is the piece of paper back.” She handed the piece of paper back.
Rock took the piece of paper, as she said, “Thanks.”
Revy responded, “See you at lunch.” She then walked passed Rock, and towards the left side of the lobby, which let to the hallway, where the entrance to the hotel restaurant and bar was located at.
Meanwhile, Rock held the piece of paper in her hand. She she then headed for the elevator bay, on the right side of the hotel lobby.
Three minutes later, Rock was in the hotel room she shared with Revy.
Rock was sitting at the table in their room, with her laptop booted up. The piece of paper was sitting on the table, to her right side, by the laptop.
A minute later, Rock logged onto her account, and then onto the internet. She then began her search.
Most of the results were on food.
Rock muttered to herself, “I know I am not looking for food. So, what else is that name attached to?”
It was then that Rock stumbled upon a website with several pictures on it.
Her jaw dropped at what she saw.
But, as she continued looking, she began to like what she saw.
Rock made a lecherous smile, as she said to herself, “You know what. These pictures are not half bad.”
(_)
Meanwhile, at the hotel restaurant and bar, Revy walked up the bar counter to get some rum, when she passed by Akira and Natsuru.
Akira and Natsuru were sitting in chairs, beside each other, while having a quiet meal and drink at the bar counter, as well. With Akira sitting to Natsuru's right side, as the two faced the counter.
Revy also noticed that Melvin was on the far side of the bar counter, taking another customer's order.
Natsuru and Akira turned to Revy, as Natsuru greeted her, “Hi Revy. How are you doing today?”
Revy turned to the two women, as she said, “Fine. How are you two?”
Natsuru answerer, “We are doing well.”
Revy asked, “Where is Ranma? You three are almost never separated.”
Akira stated, “We're not that bad. Though, she and Shenhua wanted to spar a little, right now. And we wanted some lunch.”
Revy commented, “Well, that figures.”
Akira asked, “Any leads on the target?”
Revy answered, “Unfortunately, no. Rock, I, and a few others, are thinking that if no leads turn up, it might be best if we leave in a few days.”
Akira shrugged, as she halfheartedly responded, “Oh well. It was a long shot, anyway. The target likely just sent the message, and then ran, in an attempt to send us on a wild goose chase.”
Revy admitted, “That is possible. Still, I wonder what the message we got a few minutes means?”
Akira inquired, “What message?”
Revy said, “A woman called the front desk, and she left a one word message that means nothing to me, and Rock. Rock went to our room to look it up on the internet. The word is, Tex-Mex.”
Akira and Natsuru's eyes bulged at the word.
Revy noticed this, as she asked, “What is it?”
Akira answered, “It's your lead. We have to get to Rock, and talk to you both about this.”
(_)
Four minutes, after paying for their meals, and leaving a tip, they headed for the elevators, and arrived at the floor of the suite that Revy and Rock were staying at, the three women reached Revy and Rock's room.
Revy used her key to unlock the door. Akira then quietly opened the door, as Revy pocketed her key.
As they entered the suite, they found the lights were off. The curtains were drawn, leaving the main room of the suite almost completely dark, except for the lights coming from the hallway.
They then noticed the one light was coming from on top of the table across the room. The light was from Rock and Revy's laptop, with Rock's silhouette right in front of the laptop monitor.
Akira quickly shut the door to the hallway, as they slowing made their way further into the suite.
As they approached the source of the light, the three women heard Rock make slight moaning sounds.
Due to the light from the laptop, and the angle she was at to them, the three women could see that her right hand was on the mouse attached to the laptop, while her left hand was buried deep between her legs, inside the top, middle part of her pants.
Revy shouted, “Rock!” She continued his a more normal tone of voice, “I thought we agreed we would only do that together.”
Rock immediately froze.
Akira then walked over, by the hallway door, and flipped on the ceiling lights, as Revy approached her lover.
Rock quickly pulled her left hand out of her pants, and began wiping it on the cloth of her left pants legging.
Revy looked down at Rock, as Rock turned to her right, to look at Revy's face.
Revy noted that Rock's face was beat red.
The smell alone told Revy what Rock had been doing.
Revy stated, “Go get yourself cleaned up. We will talk about this, later.”
Just as Rock was about to get up, Revy saw what was on the computer scene, and her eyes widened at the manga style picture she saw. She asked, “Is that me? I have never done that before, but I am now tempted to try.”
Akira walked up beside Revy. She looked down at Rock, as she commented, “Don't feel bad about it. We have all done it before.”
Natsuru was right behind her. She looked at the computer screen, as she complimented, “Nice find Rock. That is one of his better pieces of art.”
Rock turned to Akira and Natsuru, as she inquired, with surprised in her tone of voice, “You two know about this?”
Akira answered, “Yes.”
Natsuru explained, “Actually, this situation is kinda twisted on several levels. Tex-Mex is an alias by the same person that created the Black Lagoon series. As Tex-Mex, he produced pornographic manga. Including, porn about some of the people from the Black Lagoon realities. Especially the babes. As Revy is finding out now. In other words, you have been pleasuring yourself to pictures drawn by your very own creator about your lover, and your friends.”
Rock looked away from the other three adults, and the laptop screen, as she said, with embarrassment, “I think I will take that shower, now.”
Revy looked over at Rock, as she stated, “While you do that, I am calling the girls. This is just too insane not to share.”
Rock begged, “Revy, please leave my indiscretion out of it.”
Revy smiled, as she replied,“Don't worry. I will.”
Revy then looked back at the computer screen. She walked closer to the laptop, as she used the laptop mouse, to look through some of the pictures, and other information that Rock had pulled up, on various windows, on the computer screen.
As Rock headed for the bathroom to take a shower, she overheard Revy state, “Wait a minute. Here is a list of those with breast sizes dealing with me, and the other original girls. And it is translated into english.”
“Okay, I will give Janet her due. She does have a nice pair of breasts. I have seen them first hand, in the nude... Hold on. Eda has bigger breasts than me? By two cup sizes?! Come on! Even Tex-Mex admits right here in the list that I would be pissed when I found that out. So, why did he give me a smaller breast size than her, in the first place?”
Revy thought, 'Well, to be honest, one cup size. The pregnancy did up my cup sizes, on both breasts by one. But, this is still annoying.'
Rock inwardly chuckled at Revy's comment. As she entered the bathroom, and turned on the bathroom lighting, she thought, 'And who says that God does not have a sense of humor. At least now I know my creator does. I found that list a minute ago. I was going to tell Revy about it. But, her finding out this way is much more fun.'
'Still, the one thing I have wisely never talked to Revy about my breasts being larger than hers. They still are, even after I had the breast reduction surgery. This is because I know better than to remind Revy about such things.'
(_)
Twenty minutes later, Rock had finished her shower, and she was wearing a bathrobe, as she sat in a chair, in the bedroom of her suite, as Revy helped her blow dry her hair.
Natsuru was on the phone, talking to those at the check in desk, on information about the phone number used to call in the message.
Meanwhile, they had rounded up the heads of their group to come to their room, and look at what they found.
Those that had arrived were Ranma, Violin, Aeryn, Shenhua, Sawyer, and Lotton.
As each of them looked at the pictures, they had a different response to viewing the pictures.
Ranma flatly commented, “I have seen better drawn nude porn of myself in both forms.”
Shenhua said, “Oh my. Even I didn't know that position was humanly possible. And to see my counterpart do that is a real treat.”
Sawyer blushed, as she said, “I wish I had such good taste in clothing as my counterpart does.”
Lotton asked, “Can I have copies?”
In response to Lotton's comment, Sawyer lightly elbowed Lotton in the left side of her chest.
Violin admitted, “I think I may have seen some of these.”
Aeryn, Violin's wife, warned, “I hope not.”
Violin apologized, “Sorry honey. It was before I remembered who I was. At the time, I was a really horny, teenage fangirl with access to the internet. Though, to be honest, these pictures are tame compared to some of the pictures I have seen when I was a teenager, both times.”
Aeryn said, in a firm tone of voice, “Then, we have much to discuss, later this evening.”
Violin winched, as she replied, “Yes, dear.” Violin then turned to address the group, “Well, it looks like our target is here. Only, I am surprised that our target would yank our chains like this.”
Natsuru said, “We really need to take this guy down.”
Rock questioned, “Are we sure it is a guy? The front desk said it was a woman's voice on the other end of the phone. Could the writer be a woman?”
Revy said, “That is doubtful. No woman is that twisted.” She then noticed the rest of the group was looking at her. Revy quickly added, “At creating fiction.”
Ranma pointed out, “Don't be so sure. Keep in mind that it was a woman that created my series.”
Akira said, “I have been affected longest by our target. My gut says the writer is a guy, not a girl.”
Rock noticed that Natsuru had just gotten off the phone. She asked the blue haired woman, “Any luck on the phone number?”
All eyes turned Natsuru, as Natsuru looked back at the others. Natsuru responded, “The phone number is no good. The number was a cellphone. And from what those at the front desk told me, the caller ID on it meant that it was unregistered.”
Lotton commented, “Untraceable number, and a third party voice. This guy is smooth. If I was back in my old life. And we were not after him. I would consider hiring him.”
The other women frowned at her.
Lotton defended herself, “Think about this, ladies. He originally baited us to come here in the first place. And the moment we talk about pulling up stakes, he baits us, again. For some reason, he wants us close to him. And he wants us to knows that we know he is still here.”
Aeryn said, “But, how did he know we are planning on leaving? From what I understand, we only talked about leaving in the privacy of our room.”
Shenhua agreed, “That is a good point, Aeryn.”
Sawyer suggested, “Could our target be a telepath?”
Violin answered, “No. Trust me on this.”
Inside Violin's soul, Harvey said her, 'That is correct, Violin. I have sense no one trying to deeply scan our mind since we arrived here. And might I add what you and Aeryn did last night was fantastic.'
Violin mentally asked, 'Harvey, cut the small talk for right now. We will discuss such subjects after this meeting is over. So, what about surface scans?'
Harvey mentally stated, 'Well Violin, it is possible for me to not detect a surface scan. But, they would have to be a profession for me to not notice. And our target has no access to such training. So, I can assure you that there are no telepaths after us. It is likely someone overheard us the old fashioned way. Through gossip.'
Violin questioned, towards the group, “Is it possible for one of us to have mentioned to the kids that we were planning on leaving soon? Let's be honest, teenagers are not known to keep secrets. They could have just mentioned it in the bar, and someone overheard them.”
Revy cursed, “Damn. I did say something to our kids that they might think about getting packed. Someone could have put the pieces together from them talking about that in the open.”
Akira commented, “It was an innocent mistake. Anyone could make it. We just have to be more careful.”
Natsuru said, “Girls, look on the bight side. Our target is here. Our target wants us to know he is here. If we are patient, our target might slip up, and reveal himself. Until then, we will continue the search for him.”
Rock complimented, “Good plan.”
The rest of the women just nodded in agreement.
(_)
At that moment across town, Lee was walking down the sidewalk, towards the burger food truck, that Eda and Yolanda ran.
The two blond women had set up the food truck to catch Lee. Though, the two women did not know that Lee was on to them. And instead, he was able to keep his identity secret to them, while enjoying their good cooking.
About fifteen minutes ago, at the Rats Nest, when Lee invited Sam to come eat with him, Sam had decline. Sam told Lee that he did not go with Lee to the burger truck, because he was in the mood for some Italian food.
Though, Sam did wish Lee a good lunch. And Lee did the same.
Though, Sam had gone to the burger food truck with Lee a few times. But, Sam stated that fried american food was not his thing. Lee respected his wishes. With the two men agreeing to meet back up at the Rats Nest in an hour.
Lee turned the corner, on the sidewalk, and was now on the beach sidewalk, right in front of the burger fan.
The food truck itself was standard food truck one would find in a large city. The type of food that parked near construction sight.
In this case, the truck was parked across the street, from the beach. With the truck order window facing the sidewalk, which was twenty feet in depth, before the sidewalk ended in front of store shops and a few homes. The wide sidewalk ran for several blocks along side the two lane beach road, with the only gaps being for the roads that connective to the beach road.
The food truck had an awning that was raised up, over the sidewalk in front of it. The awning revealed the side order window of the truck, and to provide shade for the customers.
There were metal tables, metal chairs. With large umbrellas set up over the tables, to provide shade for those that set in the chairs, at the tables.
The two blond women parked their food truck in same place every day.
They parked there around ten AM and left around six PM.
Lee did not know where Eda and Yolanda took their food truck during the night, nor did he know where they were staying. All Lee was sure about was they were not staying at the Devil's Hotel, with the other women.
And its location was not very far from the Rats Nest, nor Devil's Hotel.
The food truck served a variety of bottled sodas, bottled water, french fries, various potato chips, along with hamburgers and sandwiches of different types.
As Lee approach the food truck, he saw that there was a small line in front of the order window, which Eda was manning the window. With the two blonds taking turns manning the window and cooking the food.
Lee thought, 'Given it is lunch time, I am surprised the line is this short. Not that I am complaining. Still, I have found that Eda and Yolanda's food truck was fairly popular. And no one had gotten sick from eating their food.'
'I know for a fact that the Eda and Yolanda run a first rate operation here. If they ran the Ripoff Church in Roanapur with the level of professionalism, no wonder they were a major players in that badass city.'
'Their food is good, their prices are fair, the service is decent, and they keep their food truck clean on the inside, and outside. They followed very strict hygiene standards in preparing their food. And all it all these things keep me coming back for more of their food. Even though they set this food truck up as a trap to catch me.'
'Still, I am honestly surprised that I have never seen any of Revy's group there... Of course, Revy and Eda's two operations are working in tandem with each other. If Revy's group shows up here, they think they may blow both their cover, and Eda and Yolanda's cover. Oh the irony. They already blew their cover. Not that I care. I am still going to eat here when I feel like it. I will just be careful in what I say to them, when I eat here.'
'On that thought, I have to remember that I don't officially know the names of these two women. Though, I never gave them my name. So, I just have to be careful on that point. If I am not, I will give myself away.'
Lee then quietly stood in the back of the short line, as he waited his turn to make his meal order.
(_)
Meanwhile, on the inside of the order window, Eda manned the cash register at the order window, where she took the orders, and Yolanda did the cooking.
They were both dressed in light brown long skirts, light brown long sleeve button up blouses, and black, flat sole slippers. Also, did not have her shades on. Without her shades on, her customers saw her blue eyes, which gave them a more personal feeling when meeting her, and thus improving their business.
Yolanda had a similar effect on customers, with her blue eyes, when she manned the order window.
While this was not the flashiest clothing there was, neither woman minded the clothing they decided on, because their clothing looked a lot better on them than a nun's habit. And their clothing looked casual enough, that they did not have to immediately change clothes after work. While their clothing still retained enough of a professional look, to work as a restaurant uniform.
With the heater in the van, they were warm. And the long sleeves protected Yolanda's arms as she cooked.
Yolanda wore a hairnet of her should blond hair, when she was cooking. And Eda did the same, over her long blond hair, when she did the cooking, on the few times that Yolanda felt like swapping places.
And both women were fluent in spanish. They both spoke it almost as well as they did english.
Still, Eda was dealing with a problem that day, which was, for lack of a better term, being that she was horny.
As Eda took her current order, in spanish, from the mexican man she was look at, she thought, with annoyance, 'I would kill to a find a decent man in this town that I like. My tastes in latin american, in that way, died a long time ago, after an operation that turn rotten for me.'
'And though I am bi, I am more of the bi, in the way that women are okay women being with other women, but I still prefer to be with a man.'
'And even if I wanted to sleep with someone, it would not be anyone latin american. Neither male, nor female.'
'And it would not be Revy, nor none of her group at the hotel. For a few very important reasons. Including, the fact I actually once did a threesome with Revy and Rock, a few years ago. Never again. I though I was wild in bed. I am not.'
'On the other, Revy is a tigress in bed. And Rock is a close second. Throw in that instant man powder, and given the things we did, it is was a minor miracle that none of us got pregnant from that night. And none of them involved sleep. That night I realized they were too crazy for me, and the rest of their group are crazier than they are.'
'Though, I will never tell her to her face. And even with Yolanda young again, with her right eye restored. When I look at her, I see the old hag she was when I first worked with her. And she told me she doesn't find me that attractive either. She knows me too well.'
'Also, given we are both young, slender, fair skinned, blond babes, some of the fools here have actually mistaken Yolanda and I for sisters. Yolanda find its funny. I find it annoying.'
'Still, I have got to find a man, before I get too desperate. I would settle for a half decent piece of male ass, right now.'
Eda then noticed Lee in line, as she mentally continued, 'There is that guy again.'
Eda took a good hard look at Lee. She licked her lips, as she thought, 'He has a lean body. And he seems to be losing weight. He is decent looking. He is always clean. He has always has been polite to me, and Yolanda. And he tips well. He'll do.'
(_)
A few minutes later, Lee reached the front of the line.
As Lee came to a stop in front of the order window, he looked act Eda. He calmly said, “Good afternoon.”
Eda responded, “Good afternoon to you.”
Lee gave his order, as he stated, “I will have hamburger, french fries, and a bottle of cola”
Eda inquired, “Your usual then?”
Lee replied, “Yes.”
Eda quickly rang him up, on the cash register. She then looked at him in his eyes, as she asked, “I was wondering. Are you a busy man?”
Lee thought, 'I wonder what she is getting at? Still, I might as well be honest on this one point.' He answered, “Not really. I am more of a laid back person. I try not to stress out from my problems.'” He mentally added, 'That is probably the only reason I am not completely insane, right now.'
While slightly smiling, Eda asked, “Ah, good. I was wondering. If you are not busy, I would to spend some time with you, after I get off work at six?”
Lee mentally realized, 'Is Eda asking me out on a date? I think she is asking me out on a date. Sure, she is almost crazy as the rest, and she is after me. But, she is hot, she is showing interest in me, and I am dying. So, why not? But, I need to get one thing out of the way first.'
Lee stated, “Well, I would love too. But, first I need to know your name?”
Eda replied, “Oh. Well, I am Eda. And my friend in back is, Yolanda.”
Lee complimented, “Those are lovely names. By the way, I am, Lee.”
Eda interrupted him, “Lee? As in the Lee in that car chase a few nights ago?”
Lee thought, 'Interesting. Revy, or one of the others at the hotel must have told her about that. I can use this to my advantage.' He inquired, “Do you know the women at the hotel? I don't see how else you would know my name, in relation to that incident.”
Eda thought, 'Crap. I just gave myself away. Still, there is no point in denying it.' She answered, “Revy was the one that told me. She has a big mouth on such matters.” She mentally added, 'Which is true. Still, anyone crazy enough to drive like that must be at least decent in the sack. I think I will sleep with him.'
Lee thought, 'Good. Now, if I slip in mentioning Revy and the others to her, she will think that she slipped up. Now, for the date offer.' He replied, “Okay. Anyway, I know a good american steak house, nearby.”
Eda thought, 'I have eaten at the place he is talking about. It is good place to go in this town. But, I don't want him to know how much I like that place.' She casually answered, “That will do. Now, what about transportation?”
Lee answered, “I have car.”
Eda responded, “Nice.”
Lee inquired, “So, what time can I pick you up, Eda? I know you are getting off a six. But, I am sure you need a little time to get ready.”
Eda thought, 'And he is patient. Nice.' She said, “You are correct. Meet me here at six thirty.”
Lee replied, “Okay.”
Lee then paid for his meal, got his order ticket, he walked over to a nearby empty table, and he waited for his order.
Five minutes later, Eda called, Lee got his meal. He retrieved his meal, thanked Eda, and he walked back to his table, where he ate his lunch.
After Lee finished his lunch, he threw away his bag and trash, in the trash can near the burger van. Lee then walked over to Eda, just as she finished taking the last person's order that was currently in line.
Lee said, “Eda, please let Yolanda know that was a wonder burger and fries.”
Eda turned her head to the back of the food truck, as she stated, “Yo, Yolanda, a man here stated you fixed a good hamburger and fries.”
Lee overheard Yolanda said, in a very unique tone of voice, “Such a polite man.”
If Eda as been looking at Lee, at that moment, she would have noticed him tense up for a split second from Yolanda tone of voice being the same tone as she said, when complimenting someone she had an interest in, from a business sense.
But, Eda did not notice this. And Lee forced himself to relax a second later.
Lee thought, 'That was too close.'
Eda then turned back to Lee, as she said, “See you tonight.”
Lee cracked a grin, as he said, “I won't miss it for the world.”
Lee then turned, and walked away.
(_)
Twenty minutes later, Lee made it back to the Rats Nest.
As Lee walked inside, he saw that there were only other two people in the bar.
There was Sam, and the beautiful bartender of the Rats Nest.
Sam was sitting on the long end of the bar counter, that was across from the left side windows.
The bartender was standing behind the bar counter across from Sam. The bartender was drinking a glass of water. There was a half full, bottle of water, that was capped, sitting on the bar counter, which Lee guessed was were she got the water from, for her glass.
As Lee approached them, the two other adults in the room turned to look at him.
Lee continued walking at a casual pace, as he he asked, “So, how were your lunches?”
The bartender answered, “Fine.”
Sam said, “Good.”
Lee came to a stop in front of them, as he thought, 'I might as well give them the good news.'
Lee stated, “Well Sam, I have to apologize to you. At lunch, I just got a date with a hot woman tonight. And I have to get ready for it. And I better start now. So, I am going to have to cancel our usual plans.”
Sam smiled, as he responded, “No problem. Still, please let me know how it goes.”
Lee replied, “I will.”
The bartender took a drink from her glass. She then asked, “So, who do you got a date with, Lee?”
Lee thought, 'Oh hell. Why not I just tell them? It is not like they know who I am talking about.' He answered, “The hot woman with the long blond hair, not the one with the short blond hair, at the american food truck by the beach. She was interested in me. Her name is, Eda.”
The bartender immediately dropped her glass onto the bar counter. The glass did not break, but the water did spill on the counter.
The bartender stated, “A woman that hot is way out of your league.”
Lee could see Sam holding back a snicker.
Lee agreed, “No arguments about that. But, I am still going to give it the good old fashioned college try.”
Sam said, “Good luck.”
The bartender grabbed a rage from under the bar counter. She then began to clean up the water off the counter, as she commented, “For women like that, you are going to need it.”
Lee said, “I know. See you two, later. I have a lot to do to prepare for this date. And not a lot of time to do it in.”
Lee then turned around. He then calmly walked out of the bar, and towards the Devil's Hotel.
(_)
Forty-three minutes later, Lee made it to his hotel suite, in the Devil's Hotel.
Lee shut the door behind him, as he turned on the ceiling light, and headed for the phone, on the nightstand, by the bed. He thought, 'I have a lot to do to get ready tonight, and I have little time to do it in.
When Lee reached the phone, he picked it up, and dialed the number that Pedro had given him.
Three seconds after he dialed the number, the phone rang once, and then someone on the other hand picked up the phone on their end. Lee said, “Hello.”
The man voice on the other end replied in spanish.
Lee responded, “I apologize. I do not speak spanish. I had a poor education as a child. Still, can you please transfer me to Cheif Del Soto's office. Tell him, Lee is calling.”
A few seconds later, Lee heard a, click, on the line, which signaled he was being transferred to Pedro's office.
A second later, Pedro picked up on his end, and Lee recognized Pedro's voice, even though he said something in spanish.
Lee thought, 'It must be a greeting. I hope.' He said, “Hello Chief Del Soto.”
Pedro responded, in english, “Hi Lee. What can I do for you, Lee?”
Lee stated, “I cannot go into the details, yet. But, I will not make are nightly meeting tonight. It is nothing serious. Quite the opposite, in fact. I will swing by your office in the morning, to tell you. So, you don't hear it from someone else.”
Pedro replied, “Sounds interesting. I look forward to finding out what it is, tomorrow. See you then.”
Lee said, “You too.”
Both men then hung up their phones.
Lee then headed back out of his hotel suite, and down to the front parking lot of the hotel.
(_)
Two minutes later, Lee was in the front hotel parking lot.
Less than a minute later, Lee was in his car, and driving out of the parking lot.
The first place Lee went to was a nice men's clothing store that Pedro had told him about.
When Lee got there, he bought some ties, and two nice, but reasonable priced men's business suits, that fit him. The suits came complete with matching short brimmed, fedora hats, with gutter-dent, and side-dented crow, which also fit him.
One suit as gray, the other suit was black.
Lee also bought a nice black leather belt, and couple of sets of socks. Each set of socks was either a solid gray, or a solid black color, that matched the colors of the suits he bought. Along with this, he bought some simple white t-shirts, to go under his white, long sleeved, button up shirts, that came with his new suits.
Unfortunately, it took an hour to find suits that would fit him, He one concern was that he was losing more weight, from the cancer, faster than he had expected. He almost had no stomach, and his rib bones were staring to slightly show.
Also, the suits, and other clothing, together in price, set him back a few hundred dollars. But, Lee felt it was worth it. Lee had been doing well at the poker games, so he had enough money to afford the clothing, without it cutting into his live expenses.
The next place Lee went to was a men's shoe store that Pedro told him about.
There, Lee found some nice black dress shoes that fit him. He bought them for just over half the amount of the cost one of the suits that he had bought. He also brought a rag, big and small shoe brushes, and black shoe polish cream for his shoes. To keep them nice, and prevent the leather of his new shoes from cracking.
Lee then went to was a local grocery store, where he had previous bought snacks and bottles of water and cola at, for his hotel room. When Lee got there, he bought a small box of regular sized condoms.
After Lee got back into his car, Lee put on a few of the condoms into his wallet. As he did so, he thought, 'It never hurts to be prepared.'
Lee then drove his car back to the salon that he went to before, and got the same type of hair cut before, along with them dying his hair black again, to make his hair roots disappear.
Also, he had the barber also do a professional shave of his face. Which gave him a slightly smoother face than when he used his disposable razor.
After which, Lee stopped by a car wash, where he got his new car washed, and polished with wax.
When Lee was finished, he drove back to the hotel.
Lee walked into the lobby, with this large clothing bag in his right hand. He had put everything he had bought into that bag.
As Lee was crossing through the lobby, he ran across Nodoka, Yurika, and Mikoto, whom were heading for another part of the hotel.
The three sisters stopped and turned to Lee.
Nodoka asked, “What is in the bag, Lee?”
Lee heard Nodoka question. He stopped and turned to the three sisters, as he thought, 'A straight answer, without staying why, might be the best solution to this situation.'
Lee held up the bag in his right hand, as he answered, “Clothing. I was shopping for clothes. Even guys have to do it.” He then dropped the bag back to his side.
Nodoka agreed, “True.”
Lee said, “Have a nice day, ladies.”
Nodoka replied, “You too.”
Lee then walked by the sisters, and to the elevator bay.
Lee soon reached his hotel suite, and he dropped his clothing in his room. He set the suits on hangers, on his room's coat rod. He then put on the ties into his left side jacked pocket, as he thought, 'I hate to ask this, but I need to talk to someone about it. And he is the only person I am sure of that knows how, that I can ask on short notice. Though, it is embarrassing to so.'
Lee left his hotel room.
(_)
A few minutes later, Lee walked into the hotel restaurant. He saw Melvin was behind the bar counter. The other people Lee saw were some customers whom were already eating their meals, at the various tables in the room, away from the bar counter.
Lee thought, 'I don't see any of the girls. And not one is near, Melvin. So, I have some privacy. Though, I better get this out of the way, before of the girls show up.'
Lee walked over to Melvin, as he came to a stop, across the bar counter from Melvin.
Melvin looked over at Lee, from across the bar counter, as he greeted him, “Hi Lee.”
Lee replied, “Hi Melvin. I have a small favor to ask. And since you are not busy. I was wondering if you could help me with something.”
Melvin asked, “What is it?”
Lee said, “Long story short. I have a date tonight.”
Melvin said, with worry in his tone of voice, “Not with one of the women here, I hope.”
Lee quickly responded, “Oh no. No. No. No.” He mentally added, 'Well, yes.' He continued, “A woman I met in town. And as embarrassing as it is to say, I don't know how to tie a tie. And I need someone to show me how.”
Melvin shrugged, as he replied, “Don't feel bad at about it. I will show you how.”
Lee smiled, as he said, “Thanks.”
Melvin inquired, “Do you have a tie on you?”
Lee answered, “Yes. It is in a pocket.”
Melvin replied, “Good. Just follow me into the men's restroom, and I will show you how, using the mirror in there.”
Melvin then turned to his right, and walked towards the front of the bar counter, were the exit to the back side of the counter was. Lee turned to his left, and followed him, from the other side of the bar counter.
When the reached the end of the bar counter, which was open, they then turned to their right, and into the hallway where the restaurant restrooms were located.
They soon entered the men's restroom together.
Ten minutes later, both men exit the men's restroom.
Lee's tie was back in his jacket pocket. He turned to Melvin, as he said, “Thanks.”
Melvin replied, “You're welcome.”
Lee said, “Have a great day.”
Melvin responded, “You too.”
Melvin then headed back to the bar counter, as Lee went in the opposite direction, for the exit to the hotel restaurant, as he headed for the elevator bay across the hotel, and to his hotel room.
A few minutes later, when Lee reached his hotel room. He closed the hallway door to his suite behind him. He then turned on the lights in his suite, and he cleaned up his room, just in case. Next, he took a shower, and got ready for his date that evening.
(_)
An hour later, it was six thirty PM, Eda and Yolanda had already closed up their food truck, and cleaned it up for the night.
Yolanda sat in the driver's seat of the food truck, watching, as Eda stood, as her blond friend stood across the street, waiting for Lee to show up.
Yolanda thought, 'I hope this young man shows up. Because, if he stands up Eda, he is literally going to suffer for it.'
(_)
Across the street, from the food truck, Eda stood in her work clothes, as she waited for Lee to show up.
Eda looked at her wrist watch, and she saw that it was six-thirty PM.
Eda thought, 'Lee has better not have stood me up. Or, he will know the meaning of pain.'
A second later, Eda watched as a car turned onto the beach road, to her left side.
As the car got closed, Eda could see, in the daylight, that it was a pristine classic, pink convertible, with the top down, and side windows lowered.
The car then drove up to a stop, by the curb, beside her, with the passenger side facing her.
Eda looked at the driver, who did not wear a seatbelt, she saw that the driver was man whom clean was shaved. He wore a nice gray business suit, a white button up shirt under his open gray coat, with a brown and black stripped tie, along with a nice gray, short brimmed fedora hat. He even had on some nice shades over his eyes.
It took Eda a few seconds until she realized who it was, as she asked, in a confused tone of voice, “Lee?”
Lee smiled, as he looked up at her. He inquired, in a smooth tone of voice, “Going my way?”
Eda had a dumbfounded look on her face, as she clearly did not expect Lee to return like this, in a car like that.
Eda simply said, “Yea.”
Eda thought, in astonishment, 'I will give Lee credit. He is going all out for me. I love it when a man does that for me. What a minute...'
Eda questioned, “I thought you said you had limited funds. Where did you get the car from?”
Lee answered, “It was a gift. Long story. Don't want to talk about. And your door is unlocked.”
Eda shrugged, as she replied, “I have quite a few of those stories myself.”
Eda opened her door, got in front passenger seat, and shut the door behind her.
Lee looked over at Eda, as she stated, “We should be at the restaurant in a few minutes.”
Eda turned to Lee, as she replied, “Good. I am the mood a streak.” She licked her lips, as she continued to look at Lee, while she thought, 'Among other things.'
Lee saw Eda lick her lips, he smiled, as he turned to look in front of them.
Lee then drove off, with Eda towards the american steak house restaurant
(_)
Yolanda watched all this, as she thought, 'And here I thought that Lee would just show up in a rental car, wearing some casual clothing. Instead, this Lee shows up as a gentleman should for his date. Thoroughness like this needs to be commended. And I honestly thought such manners had become a lost art in the more recent generations. I am happy to see I have been proven wrong.'
'And I will have to ask Eda how her date went, later. Now, to get home, and have a nice, deserved soak in the tub.'
Yolanda then started up her food truck, and headed for the nice home that she and Eda shared.
(_)
When Eda and LEe reached the steak house restaurant, Lee let Eda out at the front of the restaurant. With her side of the car facing the doors.
Eda got out, closed her door, and stood by the front entrance, while Lee parked his car.
As Lee then walked towards Eda, she could see he also had nice gray pants, black leather belt, and nice black dress shoes.
When Lee reached Eda, he asked, “So, where do you want to sit. A booth, or a table?”
Eda answered, “Booth.” She mentally added, 'Because it is more conformable.'
They then walked to the entrance, with Lee holding the right door open for Eda.
Two two adults soon were seated at a booth table, by the wall, with a window.
They sat across from each other, as the waiter brought them there menus.
Lee's right side to the window, while Eda's left side was to the window.
After the waiter left, to give the two adults some time to think about their drink and meal orders, Lee suggested, “Why not you ordered for the both of us. Though please, nothing spicy for me.”
Eda cracked a grin, as she commented, “You really are going all the way on this date, Lee.”
Lee calmly answered, “It is was a gentleman does.”
Eda complimented, “Yes. It is. And I like it. So, where are you from?”
Lee broadly answered, “The southeastern United States. You?”
Eda coyly answered, “Around?”
Lee casually commented, “I guess neither of us are going to answer that question.”
Eda responded, “No. Still, why are you here?”
Lee lied, in a relaxed tone of voice, “The short answer is that I got screwed on my taxes, and I had to get out of the county fast.”
Eda said, “Ouch.”
Lee deadpanned, “Yea. So, why are you here?”
Eda lied, “I always wanted to see if I could run a food operation. I have done just about everything, else.”
Lee complimented, “Well, you are doing a good job of it.”
Eda inquired, “Thank you. Do two nine ounce sirloin cuts, medium cooked, with baked potatoes, sound find with you?”
Lee answered, “Yes.”
Eda said, “And I think I might have a glass of wine.”
Lee commented, “I think I will have a soda. I am driving after all.”
Eda agreed, “That is a good idea.”
While the two adults continued their conversation, the waiter soon returned, and Eda gave the waiter their drinks and meals orders, for the both of them.
As the waiter left, the two adults continued their discussion.
Their conversation dealt with just casual things, such as the nice weather, and some of the more interesting places they found in De La Plata Podrido.
All the while, both were careful not to reveal their secrets to the other.
When their drinks were served, but before meals were served, their conversation veered towards religion. Which both of them felt was a save topic to discuss.
Lee took a sip of his cold, iced soda, in it's glass. Next, he set his glass gently on the table. He then said, “I only remember a few things of church, as a child. Such as I remember a verse from the bible that went something like that a person had to become like a child to enter heaven.”
Eda asked, “Do you remember anything else about your time in church?”
Lee answered, “I remember, when I was a four year old child, being slashed the back, by another child, with a razor, in church pre-school.”
Lee grimly thought, 'I was effectively stabbed in the back, between my shoulder blades, when I was four years old. The boy did it out of sadist fun. And he was not punished. And the adults assigned to look after us covered up my attack. They got me a new shirt, to match the one I had on, which was cut, and had blood on it.'
'And when I told others about it. I was the one that was punished for being the victim. Because no one believed me. And they accused me of lying about the boy that attacked me.'
Lee forced himself to quickly calm down, as he continued his thoughts, 'But, I better not told about this. Because, I do not want to ruin this date.'
Lee continued, “But, I prefer to talk about more positive things, than my life.”
Eda thought, 'So, he has a few issues with his past, as well. But, he is being polite. So, I will keep this conversation moving forward. And I think I know the verse he is talking about.'
Eda inquired, “I understand. About that bible verse. Do you mean Matthew, eighteen, three? And said. Truly, I say to you, unless you turn and become like children, you will never enter the kingdom of heaven.”
Lee answered, “That is the passage I am talking about. I mean think about it. You have to become like a child to enter heaven. If that is true then heaven is a G rated place. With most fun found while being adults. What a ripoff.”
Eda giggled, as she thought, 'I will give Lee that one. It is a good point.' She stated, “I can see your point.” She mentally added, 'This guy is going all the way with me. And he is polite and intelligent. I had almost forgotten what it was like to have a date with a genuinely nice guy, that treated me like a person, and not just someone they wanted to fuck. I think I will reward him.'
Eda requested, “After we finish here, I wonder if I could join you at your place?”
Lee held back a smile, as he thought, 'She is making her move. Yes!' He calmly answered, “Sure. I am staying at the Devil's Hotel. Third floor. Not much of a view, but the room is clean, and the bed is conformable.”
Eda thought, 'That is all I need. What a minute, Revy and the girls are staying there. If they see us, they will ruin this night for me. Fortunately, I can ask Lee about Revy, because I told him that we know each other.'
Eda inquired, “Lee, isn't the Revy, and her group, staying at the Devil's Hotel, as well. I think it might be best if we avoid them, as we head for your room.”
Lee though, 'Yes. I bet that you, Eda, are thinking the same thing as I. That Revy and her friends would ruin this for the both of us. But, not to worry. I have a plan.'
Lee stated, “Not a problem. By the time we get finished with our meal, and back there, they will all likely be in the Hotel restaurant, usually singing karaoke, getting drunk, until late at night.”
Eda suppressed a laugh, as she said, “That I would like to see... Though, that is for another time.”
Lee admitted, “Yes. It is something else to watch. Especially, after they have had a few drinks. I and a friend, watch them perform as our evenings entertainment.”
Eda wondered, as she inquired, “Do they get violent?”
Lee answered, “No. From what I understand, the bartender there got things under control with them on their first night here.”
Lee thought, 'I got a laugh out of that, when Melvin told me about that night, in private, when it was just the two of us in the bar, at midnight. Though, he did leave out where Revy, her friends, and himself, were from. Not that I minded. Since, I already knew that.'
Eda thought, 'I will have to ask Revy about that.' She commented, with admiration in her tone of voice, “Some bartender.”
Lee replied, “Yea. And he is a nice guy, as well.” He mentally added, 'And you would probably fall over laughing if you knew Melvin was former Hotel Moscow. But, if I did that, I would out myself, and Melvin. Besides, he is in hiding too. And he is a nice guy. So nice, that he taught me how to tie a tie.'
Eda said, “It is good having nice people around. I sometimes forget such people even exist.”
Lee though, 'You are not the only one.' He agreed, “Yes. It is nice.”
The waiter then served their cooked steaks, and baked potatoes, with condiments before both.
Eda and Lee both found their food to be well prepared, and tasty.
Lee and Eda then continued their conversation as they ate. With their conversation remaining casual and pleasant during dinner.
Eda only drank two glasses of wine during the dinner. And with her enhanced metabolism, she was still sober.
When they were finished, Lee paid for the meal, tipped the waiter, asked the waiter to compliment the cook, and he then drove Eda back to the Devil's Hotel.
(_)
By the time they reached the Devil's Hotel, it was dark.
After parking the car, Eda and Lee made it to the front entrance of the Devil's Hotel.
Lee held the door for Eda twice, an outside door, and then the interior door between the entryway, and the lobby.
As they entered the lobby, both of them saw that there was no one in the lobby.
It was then, that both adults noticed that the music for the lobby had changed.
Both adult immediately recognized the song.
Lee thought, 'I have to admit, this lobby has great taste in music. I could not think of a more fitting song for a situation like this.'
Eda asked, “What is with the music?”
Lee answered, “I am not sure myself. Let's just enjoy the song.”
Eda replied, “Okay.”
Lee said, “This way to the elevators.”
Lee lead Eda to elevators, as the lobby continued playing the song, She's A Lady, sung by Tom Jones.
(_)
A minute later, they were on the third floor.
As they made it to the door to Lee's suite, Lee pulled out his keys, unlocked the door, and opened it for Eda.
Eda stepped into the darken room. Though, the light from the hallway provided enough illumination to see the room.
Lee then step into the room, and turned on the ceiling light.
Eda saw that while the hotel suite was small, it was clean, with the heavy curtains on the other side of the bedroom, being closed. There was also a pair of tennis shoes place against the curtains.
Eda thought, 'Lee kept his word on this place being clean.' She came to a stop, by the chest of drawers.
Lee walked passed Eda and turned on the lamp light. He then walked back over to Eda, and he closed the door, as he turned off the ceiling light.
After making sure the door's deadbolt was locked. he then walked over to Eda, him being in arms reach of the chest of drawers, which was to his right side.
Eda and Lee stood a few feet, with Eda turning around to face Lee.
Due to their height differences, Eda had to look up, and Lee had to look down, for them to look at each other's face.
Lee casually said, “It is not much, but it is home for me.”
Eda smiled. She took a step closer to the taller man, as she said, “This will do.”
Their faces were inches apart, as Lee kept a calm expression, while he casually asked, “So, how do you want to do this?
Eda replied, “Let's keep it simple?”
Lee grinned, as he said, “That works for me. Mind if I use a condom?”
Eda answered, “I would prefer if you did.”
Lee requested, “And I would like to keep my shirt on.” He mentally, 'Because I don't want you to see how skinny I have become. Which would cause you to ask questions.'
Eda stated, “I don't care. It is what below the waist that I am interested in.” She then gently used her right hand to cup Lee's crotch.
Lee smile got slightly wider, while he thought, 'This is going to be so much fun.'
As Lee continued to look Eda in her eyes, he used his right hand to open the top chest of drawers by him. He then pulled out a single condom. Next, he used the back of his left hand to push the drawer closed. After which, he tossed condom onto the bed, without even looking.
Both adults then began slowly dressing each other.
Eda began by taking off Lee's hat, glasses, and tie, and tossing them to the floor, away from them, and towards the back of the bedroom.
Meanwhile, Lee carefully undid Eda's skirt.
A few minutes later, they were down to their their underwear, with Eda still having her bra on, and Lee having his white t-shirt on.
Lee tried to undo the back hooks to Eda's bra, without looking luck. After a few seconds of trying, he softly said, “I apologize, but I cannot unhook your bra.”
Eda responded, “It is okay.” She then reached behind her back with her right hand and unhooked her own bra.
Eda then took off her bra, let it drop to the floor, allowing Lee to see Eda breasts.
Lee just quietly stared at Eda's breasts for a few seconds.
Eda casually joke, “Never scene breasts before?”
Lee complimented, “Nah. I'm just admiring the fine pair you have.”
Eda giggled, as she thought, 'Now, that is a comeback.' She then said, “Now, let's get this party started.” She then took off her panties.
Lee agreed, “Yes. Let's.” He then took of his underwear.
The two adults then walked over, and fell over, onto their sides, on top of the bed.
Lee was on the right side of the bed. With Eda on the left side.
Lee then leaned on his back, as used his left hand to feel, and find the condom he had tossed onto the bed, as he used his right hand to reach over and turned off the lamp light, causing the room to be shrouded in darkness.
Lee then had one of the best nights of his life.
(_)
The next morning, Lee was the first to wake up, as he made gently made his way off his bed, without waking Eda. He saw that from the digital LED clock on the nightstand, that it was nine AM.
Lee also saw that there was enough ambient sunlight coming from around the heavy curtains, that he clearly see his way around his bedroom.
Lee then softly walked over to his chest of drawers, and he quietly slid open the drawers to pull together a set of clothes. Once he had what he needed, along with his blue cloth jacket, large glasses, and blue baseball cap, and tennis shoes, from the floor, he checked the bed to find that Eda was still asleep. He then quietly closed the drawers, and walked to his bathroom, with his clothes in hand, to get cleaned up, shave, and take a shower.
When he got into the bathroom, he gently shut the door, while twisting the knob, and slowly releasing the knob after he closed the door, so closing the door would not make a sound. He then switched on a light, locked the door, and did a little dance. Though, Lee danced softly on his feet.
Lee danced, as he wildly smiled. He thought, 'I just slept with a hot blond. That is a feather in any man's cap. Even though it is Eda. But, who cares? Still, if she finds out the truth about me, she is going to kill me. And after last night, likely, she will do so in painfully manner. Still, there is no identification in my room. So, if she does search it, she will find nothing. Now, to get a cleaned up and dressed.'
Half and hour later, after Lee, among other things, shaved, shower, dried off, comb his hair, and dressed, he exited the bathroom.
When he quietly opened the bathroom door, and walked into the bedroom of the suite, he found the lamp light was on.
Lee walked futher into the room, where he could fully see the bed. He came to a stop, and he turned to see that Eda was awake, and she was sitting up in bed, while not doing anything to cover her upper body from Lee's view.
Lee said, in a polite tone of voice, “Good morning.”
Eda stretched her arms, as she replied, “Morning.” She then turned to look at Lee.
Lee said, “I hope you had as good time last night as I did.”
Eda started to let him down easily, “It was okay, but...”
Lee interrupted her, “But, this is a one night stand, and you are not looking for a long term relationship. That is okay. I am not looking for a long term commitment, either. But, I would like to remain your friend.”
Eda smiled, as she commented, “Sure. And I am glad we are on the same page.”
Lee suggested, “Yes. That is nice. Now, you don't have to join me, but I am going to head to the Last Resort Diner for some breakfast. I would be more than happy for you to join me. But, as a friend. And not as a date.”
Eda look at the clock on the nightstand, by the bed. She turned back to Lee, as she stated, “Tempting. But, I don't have time. I have to be at work in an hour. Yolanda can be a real slave driver.”
Lee offered, “I can drive you.”
Eda replied, “Nah. I will just call Yolanda to come pick me up.”
Lee said, “Okay, Eda. I am heading downstairs. Get what you need done, and I will see you, later.”
Eda replied, “You too, Lee.”
Lee then walked to the door to the hallway. He undid the deadbolt, opened the door the hotel hallway, from the his suite, and exited his room, with him gently closing the door behind him.
(_)
A minute and a half later, Lee exited an elevator into the lobby, he found, from the reflection on the polish metal control panel on the elevator, that he had a smirk on his face that, no matter how good his poker face skills, he was currently unable to remove.
Lee thought, 'I guess that cliche is true. I cannot hide what I did. Still, either way, this is going to be a fun day.'
Lee continued smiling, as he walked into the lobby. He looked around, and he saw Sam sitting in a chair.
Lee thought, 'It is a bit early for me to meet him. On most morning, I am usually the first one here, and him coming to meet me here. But, I did say I would talk to him about the date.'
Lee then walked over to Sam, and sat in the chair, across a small table, from where Sam was sitting at.
Lee said to the bearded man with a ponytail, “Good morning.”
Sam looked up at Lee, as he responded, “Morning.” He then noticed Lee's smile. He accused, “You slept with someone? Didn't you? It was her? Wasn't it?”
Lee smile became a little wider, as he happily commented, “And it was good.”
Sam returned Lee's smile, as he replied, “Nice.”
Meanwhile, Revy and Rock were walking by and over heard Sam's accusation, and Lee admission.
The two women came to a stop, with the to men noticing them. With the four adults turning to look at each other.
Before Lee could respond, Revy turned to Lee. She grinned wickedly, as she requested, “So Lee, who is the lucky girl?”
While still smiling, Lee looked up at Revy, as he calmly stated, “A gentleman does not talk about such indiscretions.”
Just then Eda was trying to walk by them, while being unnoticed. She was wearing her clothing from last night, which was a bit wrinkled.
Lee noticed her, as he thought, 'Damn. She can get ready real fast. It must be her military training.'
Rock noticed Eda. She turned her head in the direction of the long haired blond, as she asked, “Eda, what are you doing here?”
Suddenly, all eyes among the four other adults turned to look at Eda.
Revy looked as her, then back at Lee, whose smile had gotten wider, then back at her, as she exclaimed, while pointed with her right hand, at Lee, “Him?!”
At the same time, Sam used his right hand to point at Eda, while inquiring, “Her?! You got good taste, man.”
Lee turned to Sam, as he replied, “Thanks.”
Rock just said, “Huh?” That the sheer improbability of those two very different adults hooking up was too much for her to imagine.
Lee thought, with mischievous, 'Now to stir the pot. And I cannot help myself, in this situation. It is just too tempting. Among other things, I used writing to keep my mischievous side under control. Without writing, I have to find a different outlet. Also, this will allow me get them to admit some more information on themselves, out into the open.'
Revy said, to Eda, “How could you, with him?”
Lee turned to Eda and Revy, as he innocently asked, “Eda, Revy, how well do you know each other?”
Eda turned to Lee, as she stated, “Very well.”
Eda thought, 'At this point, there is no point in denying it.' Eda turned to Revy, as she continued her thoughts, 'Though, I am going to have to do some damage control.'
Eda said, “Revy, this was just a one night stand. Nothing more.”
Revy said, “Okay. Still, this is just too juicy to keep to ourselves.”
Eda warned, “You wouldn't dare.”
Revy teased, “Try me.”
Their conversation quickly devolved into an argument.
As Rock, Lee, and Sam watched Revy and Eda argue, Lee suggested, “It looks like those two are going to be... talking for a while. I am heading to the Last Resort Diner. I don't want to be here when Revy tells the others about Eda and my fun last night.”
Sam agreed, “That is a wise idea.”
Rock said, “I agree. I am going to the breakfast buffet.”
Sam replied, “Same here.” He turned to Lee, as he continued, “See you later, Lee”
Lee turned to Sam, as he responded, “See you two later, as well. And have a nice breakfast.”
Rock looked over at Lee, as she replied, “You too.”
Sam and Lee got up from their chairs. Sam went with Rock to the hotel restaurant, while Lee walked towards the front entrance of the lobby, to the parking lot, and his car.
(_)
After Lee got into his car, he drove to the Last Resort Diner for some breakfast.
As soon as Lee entered the diner, Lori, Mary, and George, all asked him why he was still grinning. Lee refused to answer. He only said that it was a personal matter.
Lee then spent half an hour, getting some breakfast, at the Last Resort Diner. When Lee was done, he thanked the cook, paid the bill, and left a tip. After which, Lee heading outside of the diner, and get into his car.
Next, Lee drove to the Police Station of De La Plata Podrido. He parked his car in a parking lot, across the from the front of the police station. He then raised the top of the vehicle, raised the windows, and locked the car.
By then, Lee noticed in the mirrors of the car, that he finally dropped his grinning.
After looking both ways on the two lane street, Lee walked across the street, and into the police station.
A few minutes later, Lee was inside the police station, and being escorted, by an officer, into Chief Del Soto's office.
As Lee entered the Pedro's office, Pedro looked up at Lee, while sitting in his office chair, behind his desk. He greeted, Lee, in english, “Good morning, Lee.”
Lee responded, “Good morning, Chief Del Soto.”
The officer then left.
As soon as the officer was out of earshot, Pedro inquired, “So, are you going to tell me what happened yesterday?”
Lee gently shut the door to Pedro's office.
Pedro saw a grin curl on Lee's lips, as he walked over and sat down on the chair to Pedro's right.
After Lee sat down, Pedro guessed, “You had a date last night?”
Lee got comfortable in the chair. He then turned to Pedro, as he answered, “Yes. I had a date last night.”
Pedro asked, “With who?” He mentally added, 'He could be crazy enough to have dated one of those girls.'
Lee stated, “Eda. Yes. That Eda. And after dinner, we went back to my place, and slept together.”
Pedro thought, with a mild of shock and amusement, 'Lee is that crazy.' He asked, “What happened? And I am not talking after you turned off the lights.”
Lee said, “Yesterday, I went to the food truck, and out of the blue Eda asked me out on a date. I guess she was horny, and she didn't feel like sleeping with a hispanic person. No offense.”
Pedro replied, “None taken. Please, continue.”
Lee went onto say, “And after our dinner date, ended up in my hotel suite, having a one night stand. And the girls found out this morning.”
Pedro stated, “It is tempting to berate you for doing this. But, I am not going to. Eda is hot, and she is one of the saner women of that group. Though, she is just as dangerous as the rest. But, she is mostly sane.”
Lee commented, “I know. And I wasn't going to complain about her asking me out. Not to sound cliche, but the look she was giving me when she asked, she was clearly in need of a man. She clearly wasn't interested in latin american men. And though she is bi, she wasn't in the mood for a woman. If she had been, she would have likely contacted one of her friends at the hotel.”
“Also, let's be honest. How do you say, no, to a hot, physically young, long haired, blond woman who asked you out on a date, without raising suspicion from someone? Especially, given it was the woman whom requested the date in the first place?”
Pedro cracked a grin, as he inquired, “Point taken. So, how good was it?”
Lee answered, “Sorry to say. But, I don't have enough experience in that area to truly rate the experience. But, it was good.”
Pedro asked, “Anything weird?”
Lee replied, “Besides having sex with a hot blond woman from a fictional reality? Nope. Just straight heterosexual intercourse, and kissing. And I did use a condom.”
Pedro complimented, “It was smart thinking one using a condom. You don't know where she has been.”
Lee said, “I agree. She is hot, but I know she has been around.”
Pedro commented, “And it is interesting that she just wanted straight forward sex with you. I always thought she might have been one of the more kinkier ones.”
Lee explained, “I doubt that she is that kinky. Think about it. Most of the time, in the series, she was undercover. Yet. Sometimes she took off that nuns habit, to blow off stream, and act immature. And when she did so, she was always straight forward.”
“She teased Revy and Rock, but she did so directly. And when Eda was like that, it was a case of, what you see it what you get. I honestly think, when she was in her street clothing, that personality is her real personality. You can see this went things start to not go her way. She starts acting more immature. That is a sign of her mask starting to slip. Though, she can be deadly professional when she wants to.”
Pedro replied, “I see where you are going.”
Pedro thought, 'And I am thinking you might be the same way as Eda. I am starting to wonder which one of you two morally screwed the other last night. Eda may have wanted it, but clearly so did you.'
'And Eda was from a point of view that she was undercover and having a cheap thrill. You on the other hand were of the point of view that, you were hiding and one of those hunting you, whom did not know you were the one she was hunting, showed interest in you.'
'And you must have got a thrill from screwing one of the women that were hunting you. I need more details.'
Pedro inquired, “So, what are the details of the date itself?”
Lee thought, 'I will leave out a few of the details. But, the rest of the details are fine.'
Lee answered, “Well yesterday afternoon, after Eda and I settled on the details of our date, I went to some of the places you recommended. I bought some nice clothing, a suit, hat, and shoes. I went to the salon, which had a barber, where I got a haircut and professional shave.”
Pedro complimented, “Nice touch with the shave. Some men forget that detail. And it pays to do some things done, beforehand. Also, let me guess. You picked her up in my brother's pink Cadillac?”
Lee happily answered, “Yes. I could not think of a more fitting situation in using that car.”
Pedro smiled, as he replied, “Oh, I fully agree. So, what happened next?”
Lee stated, “I took her to an american steak house on the island. We talked. Casual stuff. Then, after dinner, I took her to the Devil's Hotel.”
Pedro asked, “Did any of the other women see you last night?”
Lee stated, “No. By about six twenty PM they all head for the hotel bar for supper, and entertainment, in the form of drinking and karaoke. They also did not see me leave in my nice suit, nor coming back with Eda.”
Pedro inquired, “So, how did they find out? You said they found out earlier this morning.”
Lee said, “Even with my poker face, I could not hide my smirk, this morning. I get to the hotel lobby, and Sam realized I slept with someone. Rock and Revy were walking by, and they overheard him. Then, Eda comes down to the hotel lobby, and walks by us, with the three of them putting two and two together.”
Pedro commented, “Don't feel bad. You would have to be without emotion to not have a smile after something like that happening to you. So, do you plan to do this again?”
Lee answered, “Nope. I know how thinking below the waist can get a person in trouble. I have seen it happen first hand, to both men and women, whom I personally know.”
Pedro responded, “Good. That will save us both a lot of grieve. And if you get lonely, I know some decent whorehouses in town. Where the women there are regularly tested for STDs and their prices are decent. And they have a policy of using condoms, and not just for the male customers, but female customers as well. Those women are really on top of things, in so many ways.”
Lee said, “Coming from the Chief of Police, that is a high compliment.” He thought, 'I must really be in the Twilight Zone, when the police chief is recommending whore houses to me.'
Pedro grinned wickedly, as he stated, “I know.”
Lee commented, “You know. This is wonderful alibi for me not being the writer. Because, no one would think that someone would sleep with such a woman as Eda, while knowing who she is, and how dangerous she is, beforehand. Let alone the person that said woman and her friends are hunting. They would think no one would be that crazy.”
Pedro stated, “More like you being crazy as a fox. And you are probably right about that being crazy enough to work. Speaking of which. You know. Even though that was a one night stand. A man would have to be crazy to want to date a violent, crazy chick.”
Lee agreed, “True. Among said men, I wonder who would be the craziest in that category?”
Both men were silent for a few seconds. They then looked at each other. Each of them saw realization dawn in the others eyes. They both grinned wickedly, as they stated, in unison, “Garcia.”
Pedro said, “Yea. Garcia saw Roberta at her worst, most insane, and he still went for the kiss.”
Lee pointed out, “Well, it worked. And he snapped her out of her madness.”
Pedro agreed, “True. And for a series like that, that was real gamble. She could have just as well as killed him. She had just shot him.”
Lee said, “Yea. And I made sure in my stories, Garcia fully recovered for those wounds. Still, even after being shot, he went for the kiss. That takes guts, and courage.”
Pedro commented, “I agree. I hope that you making sure Garcia recovered, in your stories, helps keep you off of the maids shit list.”
Lee stated, “I do too. And it is a good sign that they are no here. And long before they came after me. This was one of the reasons I both like writing about those characters, and I was so careful in doing so. They don't play by the, good versus evil, rule book. They play by their own rules.”
Pedro replied, “Exactly. And that is something we should never forget.”
Lee inquired, “Quite right. So, I take it we won't be meeting tonight?”
Pedro answered, “No. This, meeting, this morning, will count for that. We will start back on our usual schedule tomorrow night, at seven PM, at the Last Resort Diner.”
Lee replied, “That works for me.”
Lee and Pedro then continued talking about a few subjects for the next ten minutes. When they were finished, Lee left Pedro's office, exited the police station, and walked across the street to the parking lot that had his car in it.
When Lee got to the parking lot, he got into his car, and drove back to the Devil's Hotel.
(_)
Ten minutes later, at the Devil's Hotel, it was ten twenty AM.
Inside their one bed suite, in the Devil's Hotel, Violin and Aeryn were talking about what they had learned that morning.
Violin sat on their large bed, facing her wife.
Aeryn sat in a chair, by the table in the room, as she faced her spouse.
Aeryn said, with disbelief in her tone of voice, “I cannot believe Eda would sleep with Lee.”
Violin casually commented, “As they say. Any port in the storm. I guess with this event, we can eliminate Lee being the writer. The writer would never sleep with one of us. Especially, with the writer knowing we are after him. No one is that crazy. No even me.”
Aeryn shrugged, as she responded, with a bit of skepticism in her tone of voice, “Perhaps. But, I am still pissed off at the writer for killing you in the first place, and then reincarnating you in a girl that looks half my age.”
Violin quipped, “At least I look old enough to drink. And I am still the same person, upstairs.”
Aeryn stated, “Which is the only reason I am doing this Rock's way, and not mine.”
Violin inquired, “Honey, I am glad you listened to reason. Still, did you ever finish reading the epilogue of that forth story?”
Aeryn answered, “Yes. Barely. It was painful reading the fourth part of that story.”
Violin said, “Think about it from my point of view. I lived it, and then I read it. Granted. I can see the logic the writer pointed out at the end of the story. The scary thing is I am sure that Scorpy was probably already cooking up a plan to extended my lifespan in some way, long before the writer wrote that story. Because, the reasons the writer gave for keeping me alive by killing me, as crazy as that sounds, is clearly right up Scorpy's alley.”
Aeryn conceded, “You are right about that. Still, that does not excuse the writer from causing you and Scorpius to have sex together. Be happy that I am chalking that up to mind control of both you, and Scorpius. But, what really upset me is that you did not tell me of that event. And I found out from someone else.”
Violin admitted, “Okay. I should have told you. But, I couldn't figure out how to. Though, as a woman, Scorpy is hot. But, not as hot as you, Aeryn.”
Aeryn cracked a smile, at her lover's compliment. She teased, “How would you rate yourself to her?...” Aeryn's smile turned positively wicked, as she continued, “And to me?”
Violin flatly replied, “Not going there. Those types of questions never lead to good things.” She then continued, in a warmer tone of voice, “And I will still say you are me beautiful than me.”
Aeryn smiled turned warm, as she happily replied, “Thank you.”
Violin mentioned, “Still, the sex with Scorpy was that good. She is a genius in all areas.”
Aeryn responded, “And that is what scares me about her. The writer removed Scorpius' limitations. And that worries me greatly.”
Violin counter, “But, Scorpy is in a better mood. The writer seemed to tone down her anger. And she hasn't come after us.”
Aeryn pointed out, “Yes. But, we have to had to have a long talk to her about that hyperspace gate technology she tricked us into thinking was destroyed. And to convince her we knew what she did, we had to show her the stories.”
Violin said, “You got to admit, she took the news well. Actually, I think she is happy how she turned out. She is healthy, free of her Scarran heritage, and leader of the Peacekeepers. Hell, I think she would thank the writer for all he has done for her.”
Aeryn stated, with concern in her tone of voice, “While, I agree with you. She is probably happy about what happened. When she did learn about the stories, she laughed like a lunatic for a solid minute.”
Violin explained, “That is only because she saw the humor of the situation. She covered every base imaginable. She planned for every single contingency. She is dangerously genre savvy. And still, she had no way to prevent us from learning of her plans that way. Though, let's be happy she scaled back that technology research for the time being.”
Aeryn admitted, “Yes. For the moment. Though, I find it hilarious what happened to Braca, or should I say Meka.”
Violin responded, “Yes. And that rescue mission was an epic failure. I think the writer was trying to see how many ways a rescue mission could be screwed up without actually anyone being killed.”
Aeryn replied, “I think so. Though, on another note, are you really that tempted, concerning Dargo's tongue?”
Violin accused, “Like you haven't thought about it.”
Aeryn shrugged, as she admitted, “True.”
Violin pointed out, “Still, I saved the galaxy by doing what I did. As Dargo once said, I had to take one for the team. And that wasn't the first time that happened to me.”
Aeryn flatly replied, “I know.”
Violin said, “And look on the bright side. Our son still loves, and accepts me. My lifespan has increased incredibly. And you no longer had to worry about breaking me in bed.”
Aeryn conceded, “True. Still, the fact he gave you back Harvey, I find annoying.”
Violin commented, “This Harvey has changed. He has shown me a lot about my pass lives. I have learned a lot. Such as what I did with you last night. I have never heard you scream that passionately before.”
Aeryn blushed, as she looked away from Violin, with a slight smile on her lips. She then dropped her smiled, as she turned back to Violin. She decided to change the subject, as she stated, “Now, we can still make sure that Lee is not the writer, by testing him with the plan we came up with to flush the writer out.”
Violin said, “Okay. I could use some entertainment. Now, let's get downstairs. Any minute now, Lee will come back here to meet with Sam. We can probably still catch them, before they leave for the morning.”
The married spouses then stood up, briskly exited their hotel suite, and they headed for the elevator bay, down the hallway of their floor.
(_)
At that moment, after Lee parked his car in the hotel parking lot, he walked into the front lobby of the Devil's Hotel, from the outside entrance.
Lee came to a stop, and looked around the lobby, for Sam, he thought, 'That meeting with Chief Del Soto went well. And I don't have to talk to him, until tomorrow night. Now, to find out how much damage control, from the girls finding out that I slept with Eda, that I have to do. Along with finding out where Sam is the key to getting these answers. He did go to breakfast in the hotel restaurant, at the same time Rock did. So, he likely overheard some of what the women said on the matter. Now, where is, Sam?'
Lee look around, and he soon saw Sam sitting in a chair to his right side, waiting for him. Lee saw that Sam was facing towards him, as Sam look at him.
Lee thought, 'There he is.' He then walked up to Sam
As Sam saw him Lee approach him, he stood up. Next, he turned to face Lee.
As Lee came to a stop, a six feet in front of Sam, Lee asked, “So, how did they react?”
Sam answered, “Mostly surprise. Some of them were indifferent. I think you are in the clear.”
Lee thought, 'Good. That should save me a lot of trouble for today.' He said, “That is a relief. Did Eda make it out of here, fine?”
Sam stated, “Yea. I overheard Revy tell Rock that Eda's friend, Yolanda, picked her up from the front entrance, in a car, a few minutes after you left.”
Lee thought, 'So, she called Yolanda from my room. And the two of them also have other transportation, besides that food van. That makes sense.'
Lee inquired, “So, I take it that Revy was the one to tell everyone here?
Sam lightly chuckled. He smiled, as he commented, “Yes. While she was inside the hotel bar, she said what happened, quite loudly. And I might add, while you are in clear, I can say that you are likely going to be the talk of the hotel for a next few days.”
Lee shrugged, as he responded, “I have handled worse gossip before. Let's head for the Rats Nest and tell the bartender there, before word gets to her.”
Sam replied, “Okay.”
(_)
Nearby, Aeryn and Violin had exited the elevator bay, and into the lobby.
Violin saw the Sam and Lee, first.
Violin used her right hand to point at the two men, as she said, “There they are.” She then dropped her right hand to her side.
Aeryn turned in the directions of the front doors to the lobby, to see that Lee and Sam were just started walking towards the lobby exit. She stated, “Good. Let's go get them.”
(_)
As Lee and Sam came within a few steps of the front doors, they heard a woman's voice, from behind, and to their left, say, “Lee, Sam, hold up a minute.”
Both men stopped, as they turned around, to their left, to see Violin and Aeryn walking towards them.
Lee thought, 'Now, what?'
After the two women stopped in front of the two men, Lee smiled, as he politely said, “Good morning, ladies. What can I do for you?”
Violin stated, “Well, we wanted to invite you two to watch some videos we were going to have shown the hotel theater play. We specifically would like you to come with us, Lee. But, we wouldn't mind you coming as well, Sam.”
Violin thought, 'To birds with one stone approach is not a bad idea. If Lee is not the writer. Sam might be. Either way, with both of them there, it will help cut down the time in finding out if either of them is the writer, or not.'
Lee mentally wondered, 'Which videos?' Lee inquired, “Okay. When? And which videos?”
Violin commented, “Right now. And I would like you to watch three anime OVAs. The first three episodes of a OVA anime series titled, Bubblegum Crisis.”
Lee did not show any outward expression, as he thought, with worry, 'Oh crap. They are testing me. I wrote about the Bubblegum Crisis reality. And given what I did to the characters in that series, I hope they never find out about my stories. Because what they would do to me, if they caught me, might be worse than what these women would do to me, if they catch me.'
'And I guess my plan I came up with this morning, dealing with sleeping with Eda, has backfired. I am crazy as a fox. Such as, crazy as a fox, caught in the hen house.'
'Given the situation, I cannot say, no, to them, without causing more problems for me. Also, I can make this work for me. I just have to play along, and be careful. Though, Aeryn is good at spotting liars. I just have to not actually lie to her. That is not hard to do. One just has to be a little tricky in how one speaks.'
Lee replied, “Okay.”
Aeryn stated, with a hint of force in her tone of voice, “Good. As Violin said. We would like you to come with us.”
Lee thought, 'I see that Aeryn is still suspicious of me. She always has been a good judge of character. But, given Violin demeanor, she is probably borderline. John never could keep up a good poker face, for long. And it appears that neither can Violin. As long as I convince one of them, the other will go along with their spouse. But, I could use some back up.'
Lee turned to Sam, as he requested, “Sam? You want to come with us?”
Sam looked over at Lee, as he responded, “No. I am not interested. Anyway, I got some things I would like to do today, that I need to do alone. So, I will see you tomorrow morning, Lee. Here, in the hotel lobby, at the usual time.”
Violin thought, 'Oh well. Lee was the primary target, anyway. We will check on Sam, later.'
Lee thought, 'Damn. But, there is nothing I can do about this, now.' He said, “Okay. See you later, Sam.”
Sam replied, “You to Lee.”
Lee then turned back to face the women, as he requested, “Lead the way, ladies.”
Sam then headed in one direction of the three adults, as he watched Lee, Aeryn, and Violin headed in another direction, further into the hotel.
When the three adults entered a hallway, on the left side of the lobby, and they walked out of sight, Sam turned around, and exited the front doors of the hotel lobby, and into the hotel parking lot.
(_)
A few minutes later, Lee, Violin, and Aeryn made it to the Devil's Hotel theater room.
While Lee had been in the theater a few times. This was the first time he went into the theater, with someone besides Sam.
Lee even requested a few movies to watch. Though, even before Revy and her group had come to Devil's Hotel, Lee was careful only to ask for action movies, in case there was a record of requests. With those after him possibly looking into those records, for hints on who the writer was.
After Aeryn, Violin, and then Lee walked inside the room, Lee saw that the theater room inside the Devil's Hotel was fairly small. The door to the room was located in the middle of the back wall. It was a simple, wooden door that swung inwardly.
There were canned ceiling lights that illuminated the room.
There was an electric clock, mounted on the back wall, to the right of the door, when looking at the door, from inside of the room.
The theater was a classic, movie theater projection system, with the projector at a second story, above and behind the seating area.
There were speakers on the top of the walls, in the corners. There was also a speaker on each of the side walls, in the top middle of the side walls. With the room having six speakers in all.
The seating room sloped down, at a forty degree angle. There were fifty seat in all.
These seat were divided into five, ten seat, rows, going down.
Each seats was a simple, slightly large, cushioned, slightly reclined, straight back chairs, that did not slope with the room, but was parallel with the floors outside the room.
There was plenty of leg room between the rows of seats.
There were three pathway down to the rows of seating. Two of the sides of the room, and the middle, device the each ten row seats into five row seats.
Lee noted that there were only three people in the room. Violin, Aeryn, and himself.
As Lee sat down, he found himself seated on the four to back row, in the middle of right side set of seats. The women sat beside him. To his right side was Aeryn. And Violin was to his left side.
Lee thought, 'They really are going to try to flush me out, not just by my words, but by watching my facial reactions. Two, or in this case, three can play at this game.'
Lee asked, “So, when will these videos start?”
Violin answered, “According to the clock on the wall, any minute now. So Lee, what do you know of anime?”
Lee thought, 'Talk about hitting the ground running.' He lied, “Not much. So, what can I expect from this this series?”
Violin answered, “Babes in powerarmor fighting killing machines.”
Lee thought, 'Now, let us see if we can get your fangirl side to distract you and your wife.' Lee commented, “So, basically a female ironman group, versus terminators?”
Violin answered, “Something like that. So, you are a comic book and sci-fi fan?”
Lee lied again, “More of action movie fan. I must say the Ironman movies, and the Avenger movie, starting Robert Downey Junior, are very good action movies.”
Violin inquired, while barely hiding her excitement in her voice, “They made a live action Ironman movie, and an Avengers movie?”
Lee thought, 'And there we have Violin's fangirl side show. I don't want to come out to much. Just enough to distract her.' He stated, “Yes. Three Ironman movies so far, and an Avenger movie. Another other Marvel movie tie ins. With the Avengers movie between Ironman movie two and three. All of the movies are good.”
By then, Violin realized how excited she had become, and forced herself to calm down. She said, with interesting still in he tone of voice, “I am so going to have to see them.”
Lee honestly said, “You will likely enjoy them.” He then thought, 'Now, to catch them off guard.' He inquired, “So, what movies do you two enjoy?”
Violin quickly answered, “Just about everything.”
Aeryn turned to look at Lee's face, as she admitted, “Romantic comedies.”
As Lee continued looking at the blank screen, from the corner of his right eye, he saw Aeryn turned to face him. Lee showed no facial reaction to Aeryn's comment, as he thought, 'Smooth, Aeryn. Real smooth. If I show a reaction, you would have nailed me right there. Still, it makes sense. You have lead a life of action. Watching a romantic comedy would just be a form of mindless, lighthearted fun for you'
Lee turned to Aeryn, as he said, “There are some decent romantic comedies out there.”
Just then, the lights in the theater dimmed, and the first episode, Tinsel City, of the Bubblegum Crisis OVA started.
All three adults turned to watch the film, in silence.
Lee just gave a casual expression, of mild interest, while watching the intro, showing Genom Tower, and the panning shots of MegaTokyo. That was the type of expression one would have for something they are okay with watching for the first time, but not really interested in it.
As Priss on screen began singing the song, Kon'ya Wa Hurricane, in english, Lee noticed that the episode did not have subtitles, and it used the U.S. english dub track, which he was fine with.
Lee thought, 'Violin must think that I won't be interested in the anime episodes if they used the japanese dialogue track, with english subtitles. I was never a traditionalist anime fan. I prefer the english dubs.'
Later, the first episode ended and when to credit, with the song Mister Dandy playing, and the credits showing a slow, map style, single panning shot of Megatokyo, from above, ending with a sideways shot of Genom Tower in the distances.
As the episode ended, Lee thought, 'So, this place has the remaster copy versions of the BGC OVA series, with the episode one ending titles panning shot. Still, I have to react in some way. So, why not this way?'
Lee looked at the screen, as he calmly said, “Interesting episode. I will have to say those boomers are like terminators, with the action being good, and the music being nice.”
Violin looked over towards Lee, as she agreed, “Yes. It is a good episode for its time.”
While only showing any reaction from his emotional mask, on the outside, Lee thought, with inward annoyance, 'No. It is a anime classic, that has aged well. And I would love to say that. But, if I did, it would give me away.'
Aeryn flatly said, “It is watchable.”
Lee then realized, as he thought, 'Oh. They might be trying to bait me.'
The second episode, Mad Machine, started playing, with the intro of the episode playing the song, Mad Machine.
Lee thought, 'Ah. The Mad Machine song. One of my all time favorite anime songs. In both english, and japanese. Still, I am going to have to show reaction to two key scenes. One in this episode. And another in the next episode. Or, these two women will suspect something with me.'
Towards the end of the episode, when Irene was stabbed by the assassin boomer, died, Lee faked a visible winch of his face. From the corner of his eyes, even in the dim light from the screen, Lee noted that both women saw his facial expression.
After the credits, Lee lied, “I was not expecting that woman to die.”
Violin commented, “That is the fun thing about anime like this. It does the unexpected.”
Lee thought, 'And that is exactly why I like the anime format.'
After the credits to the second OVA ending, the third episode, Blow Up, began.
Near the beginning of the episode, Lee winched his face again, as he watch an unnamed AD Police Officer being literally shredded by gunfire from that battle boomer.
Right after that gruesome scene, Lee stated, “That poor officer.”
Violin said, “That is not a pretty way to go.”
Aeryn agreed, “No. It isn't.”
Twenty five minutes later, the credits for episode three ended, and the ceiling lights came on.
Without looking at the clock on the back of the wall, Lee knew around an hour and forty-five minutes had passed. Because the first episode was forty-six minutes long. And the second and third episodes just under thirty minutes each.
Lee suggested, “Let's talk in the hallway. This place is a little cramped.”
Aeryn agreed, “Good idea.”
All three adults stood up, and made their way to the door.
As they entered the hotel hallway, outside the theater room, the three adults stood, in a circle facing each other. With Aeryn and Violins standing near each other, and Lee facing them, about six feet away.
There was no one else around them, in the hallway.
Lee thought, 'This is such a nice theater. I enjoy going there. I will have to come back her, sometime.' He looked at Aeryn and Violin, with Aeryn to his left, and Violin to his right, as he continued his thoughts, 'Now, to navigate the after viewing minefield.'
Violin asked, “So, what do you think of anime, now?”
Lee thought, 'I am going to have to outright lie about her question.' He lied, “I didn't know that anime was this good. I always thought that it was just foreign kids cartoons. I might have to look into this format some more.” He mentally added, 'Now, to bait them.' He questioned, “I was wondered if you could give me some suggestions?”
Violin responded, “Sure. What do you like?”
Lee did not show his emotions outwardly, as he thought, with amusement, 'Now, for the fun part.' He answered, “As I stated. I like actions movies. To be honest, I like lots of action, gunplay, hot women, and for the story to be a little dark, but not too dark. As you said. Something unexpected.”
Violin began, “Well, I would suggest, Black...” She immediately stopped herself, from saying Black Lagoon.
Lee maintained his calm facade, but he was laughing on the inside, at Violin almost spilling the beans, as it were.
Violin then began again, “Well, I think the anime series, Cowboy Bebop, would be up your alley. It even has a good english dub track.”
Lee thought, “I know this reply is risky, but I have to have seen something in my youth. Revy's group was never close to the Bebop Crew. They were not even at the bikini parties. Well, except for Ed. But, she was with Lori, and later her entire family, after her children had their gender bending genes activated. So, this is a very small risk. And if I pull this off, by mentioning it, this will decrease their belief that I am the writer.'
Lee stated, “Cowboy Bebop? That cartoon from the Adult Swim line up, on Cartoon Network?”
Aeryn raised an eyebrow, as she inquired, “You know the series?”
Lee said, “If it is the ones about that space bounty hunters. The characters name are Spike, Jet, Faye, Ed, and the dog Ein. Then, yes. I have seen it.”
Violin commented, “That is the one. Where did you see if from? You mentioned a TV channel?”
Lee lied, “Well, I thought that series was a cartoon.” He then continued, with him mixing lies with the truth, “Anyway, it first came on a TV channel, Cartoon Network, at twelve, over a decade ago. I watched some of it, while I was at college. It was only twenty-six episodes, and an animated movie. But, it was so good, that Cartoon Network has aired the series, off and on, over the years. Though, it is sad what happened to Spike at the end. But, that, bang, at the end was a nice touch.”
Violin nodded once, as she agreed, “No argument there.”
Lee thought, 'Now, for the icing on the cake.' He cracked a grin, as he commented, “Also, I have to say that character, Faye Valentine is hot. But, not as hot as you two are.”
The two women smiled at Lee.
Aeryn said, “Thank you.”
Violin replied, “Thanks.”
Lee said, “You're both welcome.”
Violin inquired, “Given you stated that you were in college a decade ago, I take it you are in your thirties?”
Lee answered, “Yep.”
Violin further asked, “So, you must have been a child in the nineteen eighties? That time was when some interesting fiction and music come out.”
Lee thought, 'Violin is too sharp to lie to about this. I may as well just tell her.' Lee admitted, “Yep. I am a child of the nineteen eighties. And grown up in the era had its moments. Such, as Reagan’s, 'Tear down this wall', speech. That was a greatest speech by a politician, held directly against the tyranny next door.”
Violin agreed, “Very true.”
Lee went onto say, “I also saw the usual american cartoons that came on at that time. Transformers, GI Joe, He-man, Go-bots, both Ghostbuster cartoons... And Jem.”
Violin giggled at little. She then joked, “Truly outrageous.”
Lee and Violin then laughed at Violin's joke, for a few seconds.
Aeryn remained slight, as she did not get the joke.
As the two adults calmed down, Lee thought, 'You want to have fun with me, Violin. Let's have fun with you.'
Lee casually said, “Violin, you don't look old enough to get that joke.”
Violin swiftly lied, “I raided my parents video disc collection when I was younger.”
Lee complimented, in thought, 'That is a nice lie. Most people would believe it, if they didn't know the truth about you. Let's up the stakes.'
Lee commented, “And I cannot place your accent.”
Violin honestly stated, “I was raised for part of my childhood in Brevard County, Florida. And the other part in Tokyo, Japan.”
Lee thought, 'Yes. You had two childhoods. And oh, the fun I am about to have with your comment.'
Lee said, “So, you are an asian redneck. You guys are crazier than white rednecks. I should know. I am a white redneck.”
Lee mentally reflected, 'Actually Violin, you are is part alien. So, you are technically, an alien redneck. Now, that is a scary thought. And I think you may be the first genuine alien redneck with culture roots from the Deep South.'
Violin smiled wickedly, as she responded, “Yep. And proud of it. And I heard about your chase. Rock did state you called yourself a redneck. Nice to have a fellow redneck here.”
Lee returned Violin's smile, as he genuinely replied, “I agree.”
Aeryn inquired, “What is a redneck?”
Lee looked at Violin, and then over at Aeryn. Lee thought, 'I cannot believe that after all this time, Violin, as either John, or Violin, never explained to Aeryn what a redneck is. I guess I am going to have to just answer Aeryn's question, myself. Still, that does not mean I cannot have a little fun. As long as I am careful.'
Lee stated, “You two are together, and Violin did not tell know what a redneck is? Well Aeryn, a redneck is a term that can be both considered an insult, and a compliment. The modern term for redneck, is a redneck is both stupid and brilliant at the same time, while always hilarious. You see, a redneck is the type of person that would create a homemade engine that runs on alcohol. There is the brilliant part. Then, that person will test that engine, personally, with that engine likely exploding. There is the stupid part. And the funny part is all of it.”
“A word of advice. When a redneck says, 'hey, watch this', or something to that effect, run away, as fast as you can. Because that redneck is about to do something incredibly stupid, and likely very destructive.'
Aeryn looked over at Violin, with a slight look of annoyance, as she stated, “I wish I had known that years ago. It would saved us a whole lot of trouble.”
Both Violin and Lee laughed at her reaction, while Aeryn's look of annoyance turned into a smile at their jovial response.
Aeryn then turned back to Lee, as she stated, “Still, thank you for explaining that, Lee. It answers a lot of questions that I still have for, Violin. For quite some time.”
Lee replied, “No problem.” He mentally added, 'Now, is a good opportunity to excuse myself, before I slip up.' He said, “Well, ladies. It was fun. But, I am going to get some lunch. So, see you later.”
Lee then turned, and walked down the hallway, towards the hotel restaurant.
As Lee walked towards the hotel restaurant, he thought, 'That was close. I had to give them something. But, if they find out that Black Lagoon had been coming on Adult Swim's version of Toonami, more recently than Cowboy Bebop, then I am had.'
'It is a risk. But, then gamblers are suppose to deal with each. And I will just have to way and hope my minor gambit pays off.'
'Though, with Aeryn and Violin, I am not that worried. They are not the type to run background checks on information given to them. If they did that, then they would have avoided about a quarter of the problems they had in the Farscape series.'
'Like finding a third party to vouch for a would be passenger on Moya. Or, learning the local customs, and government, before kissing the locals. And especially, knowing who the local leaders are, before kissing said people. Such as a princess. Still, the Farscape, Look at the Princess, trilogy was a good set of episode.'
'That being said, when the folks that run Toonami announced they were going to air Black Lagoon, on the animation block, the news honestly caught me off guard. But, it was a pleasant surprise. And I do have the boxsets, so it was more of a novelty thing to watch that series on that channel. But, my copies are back home, for so many reasons... Oh well...'
'Also, with Sam busy today, it is likely going to be a boring day for me, until tonight. Not, that I am complaining. Boring means I am likely going to live to see another day.'
'I wonder if Bret, from the Maverick movie had a similar point of view on life and boredom. Not that it really matters.'
'Now, I need to get some lunch, and something to drink.'
Lee then continued walking down the hallway, towards the hotel restaurant, and something to eat and drink, for lunch.
(_)
Meanwhile, Aeryn and Violin watched Lee walk away.
As soon as Lee was out of earshot, Violin commented, “Lee is either one hell of an actor. Or, he is not the guy we are looking for.”
Aeryn conceded, “I am not sure, myself. I am usually good at spotting lies. But, with him, I get the sense he was slight lying. But, I am not sure what part of our conversations he was lying about.”
Violin stated, “The best type of liar, is a liar that hides a lie in a truth.”
Aeryn lamented, “Exactly. If only we had a empath, or a telepath, to help us. Then, this search would likely be over by now. But, Annie refused to help. And we could not find River, to ask her in private, to help us.”
Violin commented, “Yea. We did not mention to Rock and the others, that we did go look for River. Because, we did not want to cause problems with Rock. Though, I was hoping to find River, because she can keep a secret. And she would likely help us, by used her abilities to find the writer, and then informing us the two of us who the writer is. Then, we will take things from there.”
Aeryn stated, “Yes. I am not sure the others would overreact at finding the writer. And the two of us can handle matter more discreetly.”
Violin inquired, “Exactly. Still, we will just have to make due without them. On other topic. I think Lee had the right idea. What do you want to do now, for lunch?”
Aeryn suggested, “Fortunately, I have come to enjoy Earth food. How about we take our car, and go get some pizza at that nice pizza restaurant, we found in town.”
Violin replied, “That works for me.”
The two lovers the walked down the hallway, towards the front lobby, and to the outside parking lot, where their car was parked. So, they could take their car, to get some pizza, at a nearby restaurant.
(_)
A few hours later, in the hotel lobby, Lee sat in chair, on the right side of the lobby, facing the front doors of the lobby.
Lee has his personal deck of playing cards with him. And he was using the small table in front of him to play a came of solitary, as he listened to the pleasant rock music in the background, that was playing from lobby speakers.
(_)
Across the room, two women were watching him, from a couch, on the left side of the lobby, with their backs facing the windows on the left front side of the lobby.
It was then that Lotton returned, while wearing her white maid's uniform, with three bottles of beer.
Sawyer and Shenhua looked over at Lotton.
Lotton handed Sawyer and Shenhua, each a bottle. She opened the third, as she sat down between them. With Sawyer to her left side, and Shenhua to her right side.
Lotton then took the open the cap of her bottle, and places it on the large, low laying, square table, that was in front of the couch. With an empty couch on the other three sides of the table.
Lotton then took a drink of her bottle of beer.
Sawyer turned to Lotton, as she said, “Thank you.”
Lotton looked over at Sawyer, as she replied, “You're welcome.”
Meanwhile, Shenhua continued to look at Lee, from across the room, as she stated, “I cannot believe that Lee actually convinced Eda to sleep with him.”
In response, Sawyer and Lotton looked over at Lee.
Lotton said, “I ended up with you two, so I am not going to say another word about it.”
Sawyer commented, “How do we know that it was Lee that did the convincing. When Eda wants a man, she is going to find one.”
Shenhua said, “Well, either way. I am not sure what to think. We still haven't eliminated half the men in this hotel from being the writer. Lee, included.”
Sawyer stated, “True. But, if he was the writer, would he really be that crazy to sleep with Eda, while knowing her background, and that she was after him.”
Lotton commented, “It would be the perfect cover.”
Sawyer said, “It would also mean he is a lot more intelligent than we gave him credit for.”
Shenhua stated, “After that Tex-Mex incident, I would have to say that the writer at least has some intelligence. Still, the most direct way is the best. I say we take Lee out back, and beat him up until he confesses, or we are sure he isn't the writer.”
Lotton pointed out, “That would be counterproductive. Remember girls, we are not in Roanapur anymore. The cops here are not in our pockets. Except for the writer, no one knows about us. And we want to keep it that way.”
“If we start trouble, it will likely backfire in a several ways. First being, if Lee is not the writer, the real writer will hear about what happened to Lee, and likely run. For right now, at least we know he is in the hotel. So, he is nearby. We just haven't figured out who he is, just yet.”
Sawyer said, “I see your pointed.”
Shenhua frowned, as she conceded, “So, do I.” She then opened her bottle, and took a sip of her beer.
Lotton commented, “But, there may be another way. Let me see if I can appeal to his intellectual side. The writer likes to write, if Lee is writer, I wonder what his favorite author is.”
Lotton set down her beer bottle on the table in front of her, and got up from the couch.
Shenhua and Sawyer turned to watch as Lotton walked over to Lee.
The two women saw Lee stop playing his card game, set his cards onto the small table I front of him, and turn to his right, to look up at Lotton, as the white haired woman came to a stop, beside Lee.
Lotton and Lee then talked for a couple of minutes.
The two women noticed Lotton's face becoming paler as the conversation went on.
Soon after, Lotton walked back to join Sawyer and Shenhua. She sat back down between them.
The women could tell that Lotton was scared for some reason.
Lotton flatly stated, “Lee is not the writer. He is a fan of Lovecraft.”
Sawyer replied, “So, he is a little kinky. That would explain a lot of his writings. Not that I am complaining. He preferred to be vague with those scenes, allowing us to do what we wanted. And those were some fun times.”
Shenhua leered at Sawyer and Lotton, as she stated, “And we have had such wonderful times together.”
Lotton looked in front of her, as she quietly pointed out, “Not that kind of lovecraft. I am talking about H.P. Lovecraft. I even quizzed Lee about some of the stories, plots, and characters, by that author. He knows Mister Lovecraft's works well.”
Shenhua inquired, “Who is that?”
Lotton kept her eyes forward, as she explained, “H.P. Lovecraft is the grandfather of modern horror fiction. He is the guy that came up with the really weird, scary stuff. I highly suggest you just take my word on this. I don't want you to read his stories, because then you would realize that such horrors exist in the multiverse, and it might be years until you have another pleasant night's sleep.”
Shenhua asked, “How scary are we talking about?
Lotton swallowed, as she continued to look in front of her. She then answered, in a sober tone of voice, “We are talking horrors beyond human perception. The type of things that would scare Roberta to her core. Honestly, now that I think about, I realize how lucky we really are. Sure, I got turned into a chick, and my mind is enslaved to you two. But, you two have been good to me. You even have shared your bed with me. But, we are all happy, healthy, and actually a bit saner for what the writer did to us. The writer even fixed your scars, and restored you voice, Sawyer. And you have such a lovely voice.”
Sawyer smiled at Lotton, as she said, “Thank you, Lotton.”
Lotton looked in front of herself, as she went onto say, in a calm, though shaky tone of voice, “If those creatures in Mister Lovecraft's works had been introduced into our lives, things would have been far, far worse for all us. Likely including the writer, himself.”
Shenhua conceded, “You have a point there.”
Sawyer gently put her right hand on Lotton's shoulder right, as she said to her other lover, “As a way to cheer you up, how about tonight you decide which positions, and roles we take first take in bed.”
Lotton over at Shenhua, the chinese women replied, “That is fine with me.”
Lotton looked back at Sawyer, as she responded, with a slight smile on her lips, “Thanks, you two.
(_)
Across the room, Lee was watching the three women with the corner of his right eye.
While not showing it on the outside, Lee thought, with amusement, 'Nice try, Lotton. And honestly, H.P. Lovecraft is one of my favorite authors. Though, I am so happy I did not include anything from his writings. The thought of being confronted by those beings is terrifying. By not including them in my stories, I didn't dodge a bullet. I dodged a nuke!'
'I would be dancing in the street right now, happy that Lotton reminded me of that, if it would not cause people to ask questions about me. I guess the rule, out of mind, out of sight, applies here. And I am very happy about that.'
'Now, I just need to figure out what I am going to do for the rest of the day. Because this game of solitary was boring to begin with. And it is boring now. I think I will play a game of pool, by myself.
Lee then collected his card, put them into the small box they were in, and he pocketed them. Next, Lee got up, and headed for the hotel game room, to shoot a few rounds of pool, by himself.
(_)
A few hours later, is six twenty PM.
In the hotel restaurant, Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru were sitting that their usual table, near the stage, in the back right corner of the room.
The three women were wearing casual clothing.
Their three teenage daughters has already left with the Lagoon teenagers, to find some entertainment, elsewhere in town. Though, Rock and Revy had volunteered to be their chaperons for the night.
The three lovers were wearing casual clothing.
Aeryn, Violin, Shenhua, Sawyer, and Lotton were eat their dinner together, at another table.
The three women had overheard them talking about maybe catching a movie later that night, with Yolanda and Eda.
Currently, the three lovers had finished eating their dinner, and they currently watching Lee eating at the bar counter, with his back turned to them, as he faced the left wall of the room.
While Lee sat in his stool, at the bar counter, the three women saw that he had not noticed them staring at him.
Natsuru stated, “I cannot believe he slept with Eda.”
Akira admitted, “I am kinda of jealous.” Akira noticed her two lovers turned to look at her. She added, “Come on. Like you haven't thought about it. Being a hot blond is one thing. Sleeping with a hot blond is another.”
Both her lover shrugged, in response.
Ranma said, “But, why would Eda sleep with Lee? I can understand from Lee's point of view. But, not Eda's.”
Natsuru commented, “For her, it was likely just a cheap thrill. A one night stand. That was all. Have personally met Eda, from the bikini parties, she always struck me as someone not looking for a long term relationship.”
Natsuru thought, 'I wonder what our friends in the other table might find out, if they go to the movies with Yolanda and Eda, tonight. I will have to ask them later about that. Maybe tomorrow afternoon.'
Ranma stated, “Very possible. And given the way Lee has not reacted about it. Such as not acting all day, like he is on cloud nine, I would guess that he understands that it was just a one night stand.”
Akira said, “That is likely. Though, I would like to know how his mind ticks.”
Natsuru agreed, “So, would I.”
Ranma smirked, as she said, “I know a way to do that. All we have to do is apply our feminine charms.”
Akira and Natsuru looked over at Ranma, and Ranma looked back at them.
Akira asked, “What do you have in mind?
Ranma stated her plan
After Ranma finished, Natsuru said, “That might work. Of course, that could blow up in our faces, if he becomes violent.”
Ranma commented, “I am not worried about that. Any one of us can handle, Lee. By the way he walks, he clearly has not been trained to fight.”
Natsuru pointed out, “True. But, after that chase, I am concerned that he might be crazy. Rock stated that Lee showed no fear in that game of chicken. And we know first hand out unpredictable crazy people can be.”
Akira stated, “Perhaps. But, Ranma's right. He might even cry for his mother by the end of the night. Yet. If things go sour on us, we will be gentle with him.”
Ranma said, “That is my thought, exactly.”
Natsuru pointed out, “Still, he thinks we are just lesbians. He will be suspicious of us.”
Ranma replied, “So? Some men find that to be a turn on.”
Natsuru conceded, “True. And he has been nothing but polite to us. So, either way, he will give us the time we ask for.”
Akira said, “Yes. Well, no time like the present. Let's go ask him.”
Natsuru and Ranma nodded, in agreement.
All three women got up from their seats and walked over to where Lee was eating at the bar counter.
(_)
Less than a minute later, at the bar counter.
With Sam absent, Lee was quietly eating his meal alone, at the bar counter.
Lee then heard a voice, to his left, back side, say, “Lee. Could we have a word with you?”
Lee turned to his left, to see Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru, standing nearing him, while facing him.
The fact that all three women were grinning at him, in an innocent girl type smile, set him on edge. Though, he did not show his reaction on the outside.
Lee thought, 'I wonder what they want? Still, these three gender benders are likely the sanest, and nicest among their group. So, I will be as polite as possible.' He inquired, “Good evening, ladies. What can I do for you?”
Natsuru requested, in a slightly sweet, polite tone of voice, “Would you like to join us for drinks, here in the bar, tonight, after everyone leaves?”
Lee thought, 'Talk about such an outright trap. Three hot babes trying to get me drunk. But, if I saw, no, they will question my response. But, if I say, yes. All I got to do is watch the amount of I drink, compared to them. Two of the three of them will eventually get drunk before me, by the very fact I outweigh them, and they don't have the super-soldier serum serums there veins.'
'I know for a fact that Ranma is a light weight, in her female form. when it comes to alcohol. In the Romeo and Juliet play adventure she had in her series, she got real drunk from some sake, real quickly. She probably has not built up that much more of a tolerance to alcohol in her adulthood. Though, it was later showed that Ranma sobered up quickly, after she changed into her male form.'
'Perhaps changing genders broke down the alcohol in Ranma's body, and sobered Ranma up. Though, that is something to look into, at another time. Maybe it works the same way with poisons. It is worth checking out, later.'
'Still, back to the matter at hand. I never made Ranma a drinker in my stories. Akira has had a few beers and some rum, but she was never shown drinking in her original series. And she did not drink that much in my series.'
'Though, while Natsuru is not a drink either, her kampfer form likely makes her tolerate alcohol than even I can. I just won't get suckered into a drinking contest. And I should be fine.'
'Though, this plan will not work if I am drinking beer. They will see through that. I will just have something stronger that I like. Such as vodka.'
'And while Natsuru enhanced abilities will probably protects her from getting drunk as a woman. I can patiently wait for Ranma and Akira to get drunk, and wasted. As I just sip my drink. Then, Natsuru will excuse all three of them, and I am in the clear.'
Lee answered, “Sure. What time?”
Natsuru answered, “Eleven tonight, Sound fine.?
Lee thought, 'Best to get this out of the way, as soon as possible.' He replied, “Yea. That is good for me.”
Natsuru said, “See you then.”
After three women then turned, and walked away from the bar counter.
Meanwhile, Melvin had been behind the bar counter, and he had overheard the conversation. He walked up to Lee, from behind the bar counter. He stated, “You know they are just looking for trouble.”
Lee turned to face Melvin, as he responded, “I know. But, what else could I have done?”
Melvin conceded, “You have a point there.”
Lee pointed out, “Also, you will be here. And from what I heard, you already reigned them once. I am sure you can do so again.” He mentally added, 'I never would I have thought that someday I might be happy to have a member of Hotel Moscow near by.'
Melvin smirked, “You got that right.”
Lee commented, in a soft voice, so only Melvin heard, “Though, I do have a request. At eleven, when I return here. I will order some vodka. Give me a lower proof than normal.”
Melvin quietly responded, “I get where you are going. Turn the tables on them. But, that could also get you in trouble.”
Lee stated, in a soft tone of voice, “Only if I take them to bed with me. When they are drunk, I am leaving this bar, by myself.”
Melvin replied, “That will be fine.” He then walked away, to check on his other customers at the bar counter, as the waitresses handled those at the tables.
Lee then went back to eating his meal. As Lee took a drink from his soda, he thought, 'I don't think I will go out of my way for the meeting with those women. This isn't a romantic meeting. It is a duel of wits. So, I will go casual.'
When Lee was finished his dinner, he paid for his meal, tipped Melvin for the meal, and left for his suite, to watch some TV, before meeting with three loves later, for drinks.
(_)
At Eleven PM, Lee walked back into the hotel restaurant. He hadn't done anything special for meeting the women.
As Lee walked into the restaurant, he took a look around. He noted the room was clear, except for Natsuru, Ranma, and Akira, at their usual table, near the stage in back. In the same clothing they had on earlier that evening.
And across the room, Melvin was behind the bar counter, doing early clean up on some glasses and the bar counter itself.
Lee thought, 'I don't see anyone else here, besides the girls, and Melvin. I wonder if they cleared out the room. Probably not. These three are fairly nice. And this place pretty much clears itself out around this time of night.'
While Lee walked over to the table, where the girls were at, he saw that the table had four chairs around, for the moment. With three of the chairs occupied.
In the chairs, from left to right, was Natsuru, Akira, and Ranma. With Natsuru and Ranma facing each other. And Akira facing the empty chair for Lee.
Ranma was the first to noticed Lee, as she kindly said to him, “Hi Lee. Come on over. We have been waiting for you.”
Akira and Natsuru then looked up at Lee.
Natsuru looked at her wrist watch, and then back up at Lee. She complimented, “You punctuality is commendable.”
Akira offered, “Have a seat.”
As Lee came nearer to them, he said, “Sure. Let me get my drink.”
Before Lee turned towards the bar counter, he noted what all three women were drinking. And while Lee started to make his way to the bar counter, he thought, 'Well, at least the girls are serious about drinking. They each have a bottle, and are drinking from a glass. And what they are drinking makes sense.'
'Akira is drinking rum. She got a taste for rum from Revy. I know, because I wrote her that way. Ranma is drinking sake. She probably got a taste for it from her father. And Natsuru is drinking some red wine. For her, I guess it is a case of personal taste.'
'Still, rum and sake are fairly alcoholic. The rum might actually have more alcohol then the vodka I am going to get. Given I already requested Melvin to not give me something with a lot of alcohol in it. So, if I drink slowly, Akira and Ranma will likely get drunk faster than me.'
When Lee reached the bar counter, Melvin looked up at him.
Lee quietly ordered, “Melvin. I would like a bottle of Vodka. Moderate alcohol content. With a glass.”
Melvin said, “Coming right up.”
Melvin the turned around and pulled out a bottle Vodka, from the shelves set on the wall, behind the bar counter, and he set the bottle in front of Lee. He then pulled out a clean glass for Lee.
Melvin then looked at Lee, as he softly stated, “I know these women have something planned for you. And you asking for a lower proof earlier shows you suspect something as well. Anyway, this is seventy proof.”
Lee thought, 'Thirty five percent alcohol.'
Melvin quickly continued, “With your size, if you drink it slowly, you will out last them. I have watch the redhead and blond get drunk a few times. Though, both of them are nice drunks. Still, the blue one does not get drunk.'
Lee thought, 'That is what I suspected.'
Melvin went onto say, in a soft tone of voice, “Anyway, if you are careful, you will be fine.”
Lee looked Melvin in Melvin's eyes, as he said, “Thanks man.”
Melvin just smiled.
Less than a minute later, Lee paid for the bottle. He then carried the bottle and glass, back with him, to the table with the three hot women.
When he reached their table, he sat the bottle and the glass in front of where he was going to see down.
As Lee sat down, he saw that he was in front of Akira. Ranma was to his right. And Natsuru was to his left. With him in the chair facing the right wall, near the empty buffet cart on the wall.
Lee then opened the bottle of Vodka. He pour a little bit into his glass, set the bottle gently down on the table, and he then took a sip of the vodka. And he found the taste to his likely.
Lee thought, 'It has been while since I was introduced to drink vodka. But, I found it to be okay. And that is a story for another time.'
When Lee finished his sip, he set the glass back down, as he asked, “So, what do you ladies want to talk about first?”
Ranma asked, “How much do you know about martial arts?”
Lee lied, “Only what I have seen in actions movies.” He mentally added, 'I have also read about on the fighting arts. Now Ranma, how much are you willing to admit to know? Given your pride. Probably everything short of your name, and gender bending abilities.' He inquired, “How about you?”
Ranma smirked, as she commented, “Oh. So. So much more.”
The four adults then began their cat and mouse game of conversation, which both sides being careful with their answers and questions. While everyone at the table also attempted to keep the conversation casual.
(_)
After thirty minutes of casual talking, evading, and deflection, without the girls showing any notice of Lee's conversational tactics. And them masterfully avoid Lee's questions as well. Lee noticed that his bladder was full.
Lee finished off what was left of the little bit of Vodka in his glass. He then said, “If you will excuse me, ladies. I will be right back.”
Lee then got up, and walked across the room, over to the hallway, by the bar counter, near the entrance, where the restrooms were located.
Ranma also noticed that Melvin had also turn his back on them.
Ranma quietly said, “Okay. We are good. Akira keep and eye out for Lee. Natsuru, keep you eyes on Melvin. If either of them sees this, and the jig is up.”
Her to lovers did as instructed.
Ranma then reached into one of her pants pockets and pulled out a small vial of liquid.
Natsuru saw the vial, from the corner of left her eye, as she softly asked, “What is that?”
Ranma quietly answered, “It is a Mickey Finn. This will simulate the effects of being drunk. I made sure that the chemicals I am using won't hurt him. It will just get us the drunk effect we want for him. And he should be fine tomorrow morning.”
Natsuru softly inquired, “Well he taste it?”
Ranma popped off the cap to the vial, and set it down on the table, as she quickly reached over and picket up the open bottle Vodka.
Lee's bottle of Vodka was about ninety percent still full.
While she poured the liquid in the vial, into the bottle, she quietly answered, “Not if I put it bottle. This chemicals in the vial are to strong to put directly into his glass. And the vodka smell will also hide any scent it has.”
Ranma then put her right thumb on the top of the Vodka bottle, as she shook it gentle, to mix the chemicals into the bottle. She then set the bottle back where it was. Picked up the cap for the vial. Placed the cap back on the empty vial, and she put the vial back into the pants pocket she originally had it in.
Akira kept her eyes on the hallway that left to the restrooms, as she softly asked, “How long till the stuff kicks in?”
Ranma quietly stated, “Ten to fifteen minutes. Though, it depends on how much he consumes, to his body mass. But, at the rate he has been drinks. That is how long I think it will take.”
Akira softly said, “I wonder if he will start sobbing like a child.”
Natsuru kept his eye on Melvin, as she quietly commented, “I wonder what he will be like to.”
Akira continued to look at the hotel restaurant hallway, on the left side of the room, leading to the restrooms, she saw Lee start to walk out.
Akira said, “Well, we are about to find out, because here he comes.”
Ranma inquired, “Did Melvin see anything?”
Natsuru replied, “No. He had his back turned the whole time.”
Ranma said, “Good.”
The three women then watched Lee walked across the room, towards them.
When Lee reach the three women, he then sat back down in his chair.
Lee look at the three lovers, as he calmly asked, “Did I miss anything?”
Akira casually lied, “No. Nothing.”
Lee then picked up the Vodka bottle, and pour himself another drink into his glass.
(_)
Twelve minutes later, the three women could tell the spiked drink was starting to kick in.
Lee was slurring his speech a little, and it took him several seconds to pour himself another glass of vodka from his bottle on the table.
And like any person with no experience at being drunk, Lee did not realize he was drunk.
Akira thought, 'Now, let us see what makes you really tick. And I think the most direct approach, is the best approach with a drunk. Drunks have no sense of subtlety. I learned that from going out drinking with Revy.' She asked, “I was wondering, Lee. What are you really like?”
Lee set his bottle of vodka back on the table, in a slightly harder manner than usual.
Lee looked over at Akira, as he swayed his head side to side. He then stopped moving his head. He slightly slurred his speech, as he replied, “What am I really like? What are any of us really like in this epically screwed up world?”
Ranma commented, “This world doesn't seem that bad.”
Lee chuckled. He then said, in a less slurred, more direct tone of voice, “I guess is wouldn't if you don't look too closely. Oh and how closely can you look? Such into the eyes of children, and into the reflections of their screwed up childhoods.”
Natsuru asked, “You think children are screwed up?”
Lee responded, “Ha! Oh yea. There is not one person that I personally know of that didn't have a screwed up childhood.”
Ranma smirked, as she teased, “Yourself include? Were you beaten as a children?”
Lee answered, “No. I wasn't beaten. But, I can see why you would think that. Everyone focuses on the classical abuses. The simple stuff. The straight forward events, where there is still calm between the events. The ones where there is a monster that can easily be pointed to. Let's see...”
Lee looked at his right hand for a second. He then used his left hand to roll up the blue cloth jacket sleeve on his right forearm, up to the elbow.
Lee then got out of his chair.
Without warning, he tipped over a table nearby them, to Lee's right side, as he yelled, “The beatings!”
Lee then used his right hand to pick up the back of a chair, by the tipped over table, and throw a chair, across the room, between the stage and the bar counter, in the left, back corner of the room, as he screamed, “The whippings!”
Lee then walked back over to his chair and picked up his bottle off the table with his left hand, by the neck of the bottle.
He took a swallow from the bottle.
Lee then reversed the way he was holding the bottle by the neck. Vodka began to pour out of the bottle, as Lee quickly slammed the bottle onto their table, as he yelled, “The rapes!”
The bottle shattered, spilling glass and vodka onto the table top and floor, though, not on Lee's chair. All that was left of the bottle in his hand was the neck of the bottle attached to some rough, sharp glass edges.
Lee looked at the sharp edges of the broken bottle, as he started laughing.
The three women near him were becoming very worried if Lee was a having a bad reaction to the drug.
Meanwhile, Melvin had begun to noticed what was happening. Though, he just silently watched things play out, as he stood behind the bar counter.
Over the next few seconds, Lee slowly stopped laughing, until he was quiet again.
Lee then looked down at his chair. He saw no glass in it. Next, he sat back down in his chair, as he firmly held broken bottle by its neck with his left hand.
Lee looked towards the right wall, away from everyone, with a far off look in his eyes, behind his glasses, as he said, in a voice that was far to calm for the situation, “No one ever thinks about the tough abuses. The ones with no clear monsters. The death by a thousand paper cuts.” He continued, in a slightly lower, sadder tone of voice, “The types of abuses that leave the victim a damned, hated monster, bound for Hell.”
While careful to avoid the broken glass on the table, Lee held out his right arm onto the table, with the palm of his right hand flat onto the table, with the outside of his right forearm facing up.
He reversed his hold of the bottle neck with in left hand to where the sharp edges were pointed downwards.
Lee then looked in front of him, towards Akira. He looked into Akira's eyes, as he used the longest sharp pointed in end of his broken bottle, which his left hand, to cut a shallow cut across on the outer side of his right forearm, right below the elbow. He coldly stated, with venom in his tone of voice, “The distrust from others. And disagreements for the sake of disagreeing.”
Without looking, while always keeping his eyes on Akira's eyes, he then make another shallow cut right below the first cut, going towards his right wrist, as he stated in the same cold, venomous tone of voice, “The disrespect by others. And denial of rightful recognition of one achievements.”
Lee make another shallow cut below the first two cuts, as he stated, “The deceit and lies from others.”
And shallow cut below the previous three cuts, while in a similar tone, “The looks of disgust, scorn, and hatred.”
And another shallow cut, “Never being given the benefit of the doubt.”
And another shallow cut, “The disappointment over actions and events beyond the child's control.”
And another shallow cut, “The insults.”
And another shallow cut, “The rumors.”
And another shallow cut, “The hypocrisy set against the child.”
And another shallow cut, “The strikes from behind.”
And another shallow cut, “The denied opportunities.”
And another shallow cut, “The discouragement to have opinions, show emotions, set and achieve goals in life.”
And another shallow cut, “Being punished by authorities, based on lies, and false accusations, from nameless, faceless cowards.”
And another shallow cut, “The complete negligence, and absence of empathy from others.”
And another shallow cut, “Get a bruise. Just ignore it.”
And another shallow cut, “Get a cut. Let it bleed.”
And another shallow cut, “Get a sprain. Walk it off.”
And another shallow cut, “Just ignore the pain because acknowledging that the child is in pain would be the same as acknowledging the child is a human being.”
By then, Lee has reached the top of his right wrist, with shallow cuts becoming red, with some of the cuts slightly bleeding.
Though, as Lee did this, his eyes never left Akira's eyes.
But, Akira's eyes did sometimes move to the look at the cuts on Lee's arm, and then back at Lee's eyes.
Akira saw the cuts were shallow. And just deep enough to draw blood, and be painful, but the woulds would likely leave no lasting scars.
Akira could clearly see, passed the large glasses on Lee's face, that Lee's eyes never registered the pain of those cuts.
Akira thought, with worry, 'Lee is either in a lot of pain, and that pain is masking the pain of those cuts, or he has gone completely dead inside. I have seen people in both situations, first hand. I don't know which would be worse for him.'
Yet, Akira saw that Lee eyes were empty eyes. Eyes she had only seen from Revy, and a few others, when they got a too drunk, and became very unpredictable.
The worst part was that Akira could guess what was going through Lee's mind. In Lee's mind he was not cutting on his right arm, he was cutting on her.
Akira thought, with even more worry, and some slight fear for everyone involved, 'Oh crap. We have awaken a beast, and I am not sure what to do.'
Akira risked a glance, to her sides, towards Ranma and then Natsuru. She could see both from the expressions on her lovers' faces, that they shared her worries. Akira then looked back into Lee's cold, dead like eyes.
Lee stopped cutting on himself, as he coldly stated, with malice in his voice, “I guess the line forms to the left, for him. And because it is only a cut here, and an insult there. No one person has done anything to warrant punishment. But, unlike those that have been beaten, assaulted, or raped, he doesn't get to point out those that harm him for just vengeance, because it was everyone that had harmed him. And if he attempts to seek justice, it is he who is punished. For unlike those others, he are not allowed his REVENGE!”
Akira then saw fury ignite in Lee's eyes, as he used his right hand on the table, for leverage, as he bolt over the table at her, while slamming the edges of the broken bottle in his left hand, into the table right in front of Akira.
As Lee came to a sudden stop, he used his right hand, and arm. to steady himself, while blood dripped from his right arm, and onto the table.
At the same time, Akira was now face to face with Lee, with mere inches between them, as Lee was giving her a slasher smile that would make Roberta proud.
To Akira's credit, she did not show any fear. Similar experiences with Revy, and the others, had taught her to not show fear in such situations.
Though, Lee's abrupt action did not go unnoticed by Natsuru and Ranma.
Natsuru immediately grabbed Lee by his left wrist and arm, while Ranma jump on top of Lee, and put him in a headlock.
Ranma warned, with worry in her tone of voice, “Lee, get a hold of yourself.”
Lee began to wickedly laugh, as he let go of the broke bottle, while he dropped his crazed smile.
Lee's laughter slowly died down. But, while he still giggling, he said, “You're right, Ranma.”
Everyone relaxed. Natsuru let go of Lee, while Ranma released Lee from her headlock. She moved back to her chair, as Lee moved back to his.
Lee was quiet again for a few seconds.
The girls remained silent at, as well. Because they did not want to set him off again, and risk seriously harming him, to prevent him from doing harm to them. Given, they were the ones that put him in this crazed stated of mind in the first place, they did not want to see Lee harmed.
Lee and Akira were still looked at each other in their eyes, and Akira saw Lee's eyes turn sad.
Lee stated, with neither warmth, nor coldness in his voice, “This is no justice in this world, or the next. God is an evil fuck, just like the rest.”
“In this world, there is no good. There is only evil. People who hurt other people are rewarded. And people that are hurt by other people are punished. Because this is a Hell masquerading as Earth.”
Akira then saw Lee's eyes water, as he shed a few tears, while he went onto say, with venom, and sadness in his tone of voice, “And you know what. I hate beautiful people like you. So damn healthy. So damn many opportunities. So damn happy. So surrounded by those whom are supportive, and care for you. You get to do anything you want. While I am not allow to do anything, but suffer.”
Akira mentally realized, 'He is not dead inside. He is just in a whole lot of pain. The healthy remark probably means it is more than just emotional pain. There is some physical pain attached to it, as well. At least, he is not dead inside.'
Lee then looked over at his glass of vodka. He picked it up, and made a motion like he was about to drink it. But, before the glass rim reached his lips, he said, “When I am buzzed, I am happy. But, clearly when I am drunk, I tap into my dark side. I don't like being like this. I think I will sleep this off... Oh, and you wanted to know the real me. Well, it looks like you got your answer.”
Instead of finishing the vodka, he poured it on the cuts of his right arm, to sterilize the injuries, and prevent infection.
Lee hissed in pain from the alcohol stinging wounds, as he used his left hand to rub the vodka into his cuts. Next, he rolled down the right sleeve of his jacket, down his right arm, to hid the cuts on his right forearm.
Lee then silently got up. He stumbled out of the hotel bar, into the hallway, towards the elevators, and his hotel room.
After Lee left the room, the three women looked at the entrance to the hotel hallway, that Lee exited into, as Natsuru asked, with concern in her tone of voice, “Is Lee going to remember any of this?”
Ranma answered, in a sober tone of voice, “Likely not. Though, he will likely wonder where those cuts on his arm came from. But, they look shallow enough to heal quickly, and leave no lasting scars. And I am regretting what we did to him. I just wanted to get some insight into his mind. I didn't realized he was that screwed up.”
Akira stated, with worry in her tone of voice, “Yea. And I thought Revy was messed up. And some of the others are not that far behind her. But, this guy brings an entirely different point of view to being messed up. Unlike Revy, and the others, when they are like this, they get violent. Lee was holding back, not for his sake, but ours. He is in a lot of pain, but he doesn't want to take it out on anyone. I admire that about him.”
Natsuru commented, “So, do I. And Lee called the time of his messed up childhood, a death by a thousand paper cuts. Like the old chinese torture. I do not want to know what this guy has been through. But, it was clearly not pleasant, and it went off continuously, for a very long time.”
Akira stated, “That healthy comment also makes me think he is in some physical pain. I saw his eyes when he was cutting himself. He was not registering the pain. You don't do that unless you are already hurting a lot on the inside. Or, dead inside. And I am leaning towards him hurting on the inside. He is too nice to be dead on the inside.”
Ranma said, “And so, that is what he is really like. Yet. He is so nice to everyone. And Akira, you are right about him willfully holding back. I don't want to think about how much self-control that man has built up over the years.”
Natsuru suggested, “Well, let us be nicer to him from now on. He tries to be nice to us. And I don't think it is just because he finds us hot.”
Akira replied, “Agreed. Let's be nicer to him.”
Ranma said, “That is a good idea, Natsuru.”
Natsuru asked, “Should we make sure he gets to his room okay?”
Akira responded, “We will do so in a few minutes. Our room is right beside his. It is best if he is in his room, when we return to ours. If we have to help him, it could cause problems for all of us. But, even if that is the case, we will still help him, because we put him in this situation, in the first place.”
Natsuru and Ranma nodded in agreement.
The women then heard Melvin say, from across the room, behind the bar counter, “Ladies.”
The women turned to look at Melvin, as they realized that Melvin has seen the entire event, and he had overheard the conversation they just had.
Melvin cautioned, with slight anger evident in his tone of voice, “Whatever you guys slipped, Lee. Do not do that again to him.”
Ranma said, “Don't worry. We won't do that again.”
Melvin replied, “Good. Because that man is one of my nicest customers I have. And I don't want to lose him. Now, I am going to close this place early, in a few minutes. So, finish what you are drinking, and please leave, for the night.”
Akira stated, “We will. Do you wish for us to pay for repairs?”
Melvin answered, “No. I don't see anything too serious. And I will keep this between us.”
Natsuru said, “Thank you. We will remember that.”
A few minutes later, the girls finished their drinks, paid their bill, left a nice tip for Melvin, and left for their hotel suite.
When the three lovers reached the hallway door to their hotel suite, they did not see Lee anywhere on the path they took, from the front lobby, to the front elevator bay, to in the hallway, on the third floor.
The three women then used a key to open their door, and they quietly closed the door behind them. After which, instead of making love to each other, then decided, for Lee's sake, since it was later than usual, when they turned. And after what they did to Lee, they would not do anything to disturb his rest for that night.
So instead, the three women quietly got ready for bed, and they went to sleep on the large bed they shared in their hotel bedroom.
(_)
The next morning, Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma, saw the hotel restaurant was back to the way it normally was, and Lee, was at his usual placed, at the bar counter, eating breakfast, from the buffet, with Sam, as if nothing had happened the previous night.
During the rest of the day, Lee had not approach Akira, Ranma, nor Natsuru. And Melvin had kept his mouth shut about the events of the previous night.
And even though, the three women did decide, when they did have a chance to talk to Lee, they would be nicer to him. While, Lee would likely have no clue as to why the three of them were being nicer to him. As far as the three lovers were concerned, they were in the clear.
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 1: “De La Plata Podrido.”
Chapter 05: “Day of the Dead: Part One: Day of the Little Angels.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
Around a week later, after Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru has drugged Lee, it was November first. On that day, was the Latin American holiday, Day of the Little Angels.
This was the second day, of a three day holiday. The first part was All Hallows Eve, or Halloween. The second part, which was currently happening, was Day of the Little Angels. The third part of the holiday was, the Day of the Dead, on November second.
It was the late morning, in De La Plata Podrido. It was a sunny, cool day.
Given that city of De La Plata Podrido was a tourist city, the city's citizens held a festival in the heart of the city, for the three day holiday.
There were trinket booths, game booths, and other types of booths, various types of food vendors scattered throughout the festival.
On that day, the festival was fairly crowded, with families and tourists, just wanting to having some harmless fun.
Rock and Revy were enjoying festival, together.
Both of them were wearing their usual clothing. And Revy had on her cutlasses, which were holstered under her armpits. Though, given Pedro orders for his men, the police left Revy, Rock, and their friends alone, as long as they did not cause trouble.
As Revy and Rock walked side by side, thought the festival, Revy looked around at the skulls and death motif the booths of festival had. Revy said, “So, this is the festival that Fabiola mentioned.”
Rock looked around, as she stated, “Yes. Yesterday was All Hallows Eve, or Halloween. This is the Day of the Little Angels. Tomorrow is the day of the dead.”
Revy commented, “Interesting. A day for purgatory. A day for heaven. And a day for hell. I like it.”
Rock thought, 'Not exactly. But, it is best not to ruin her mood.' She said, “Something like that.”
Revy responded, “And as small town festivals go, this is not bad.”
Revy then spotted a booth with an older mexican woman, wearing casual clothing, sitting in a comfortable chair, under a large umbrella. The upright sign by the woman, on the ground, to the woman's right side, stated something in spanish, along with listing the price in pesos. And below the spanish text, was english, stating, “Fortunetelling. Five U.S. dollars.”
Revy turned to Rock, as she commented, “Want to get our fortunes read? The sign is in english, as well. So, she likely knows english.”
Rock casually said, “If you want to. I mean looked at our lives. Someone reading the future is kind of tame by comparison.”
Revy agreed, “True. If she is legit. But, I am willing to risk five dollars to find out.”
Rock replied, “Alright. Let's do this.”
The two women then walked over to fortuneteller.
When they reached the fortuneteller, Revy stood to Rock's right side, as the seated woman looked up at the two women. She calmly said, in english, “First, five U.S. dollars, please.”
Revy pulled out some cash, from one of the pockets of her cut-off shorts, and she handed the woman the U.S. five dollars.
After the woman pocketed the money, she requested, “One of you hands, please.”
Revy inquired, “So, you're a palm reader?”
The woman flatly replied, “No. I have to have something to feel for this to work. And I don't do feet. Too smelly. Also, I don't do faces. I cannot stand bad breath.”
The woman's comment, caught Rock by surprised. She thought, 'Now, that is an odd reply. If she was a fake, she would have just said, yes.'
The woman said, “From your weapons, and the demeanor, that you, and your lover, beside you, have, I can tell you both have lead interesting lives. So, let us dispense with that old cliche and move forward. I can guess you want to know about your future?”
Rock asked, “How did you know I was her lover?”
The woman coyly answered, “I am not paid to say how I know what I know. I am paid to tell what I know.”
Revy smirked, as she said, “You got me interested, lady. Let's see what you can do.” Revy held out her right hand. Her hand was open, with her palm facing downward.
The woman used both hands to gently grip Revy's right hand.
The woman then closed her eyes, as she began to gently rub Revy's right hand.
A few seconds later, the woman calmly said, “You are foreigners. More foreign than must would perceive. And you are here for someone. You looking for that someone, because he has wronged you.”
Revy thought, 'Oh, this woman is the read deal. With her help, we might be able to find the writer today. Though, I have to keep my questions vague with her.' She asked, “What can you tell me of the one we are after?”
The fortuneteller kept her eyes closed, as she answered, in a direct tone of voice, “Who you are after, is connected to your near future, and your distant past. You are the broken sparrow that hunts the dead man, whom walks among the living. You hunt a ghost. A shadow of someone whom never was. And as a strong sparrow, you will someday realize that your broken wings will not break your spirit. And should your wings ever fully mend, you will leave the nest, and lose all you have.”
Revy thought, 'Talk about a twisted reading... Oh. Ask a vague question. Get a vague answered.' She inquired, “What does that mean?”
The woman opened her eyes, and looked into Revy's eyes. She let got of Revy's right hand, with Revy letting her right hand drop to her side.
The woman smirked, as she flatly stated, “You know as little about yourself, as you do about the one you hunt. In other words, do some soul searching. When you do, you will soon find the one you hunt.”
Revy thought, 'Now, that is a much better, and more easily understood answer.'
Revy replied, “I just might do that.” She turned to Rock, as she asked, “You want her to read you next?”
Rock thought, 'I think this woman is for real shock. Such as... On second thought, I better not have her do this.' She responded, “Nah. I don't want her to lose her mind.”
The woman said, “That is alright. I appreciated your concern. May you both have a wonderful day.”
Revy said, “You too.”
Rock replied, “Thank you.”
The two loves then walked away from the fortuneteller.
(_)
Elsewhere, at that moment, in another park of the town Plata Podrido, Lee and Sam were walking on the sidewalk, along side of the road, on the sidewalk, with the road to their left side, with Sam to Lee's left side.
The two men were heading from the Devil's Hotel, to the Rats Nest, which was due to open in a little while. They had just entered the outskirts of the town of Plata Podrido, itself. With the Rats Nest bar still a ways off by foot.
While they walked, Lee thought, 'I am glad those cuts on my right forearm have fully healed. There are not even any scabs left. I don't know where those cut came from. Maybe I scratched my arm really bad. But, since I am have no been captured by anyone, I am just chalking up to one more mystery about my life. While, I am thankful I am okay.'
'Still, it is unfortunate that some of the places I usually eat are going to be closed for the next two days, due to the local, Latin American holidays.'
'Lori told me that the Last Resort would be closed for next two days for the holiday. Also, did Eda told me the same thing. That she and Yolanda were going to take a few days off to enjoy the festival.'
'Though, they did say open for October thirty-first, All Hallows Eve. And I am sure both businesses raked in some cash, before they went on break, to enjoy the holidays themselves. So, they will be fine.'
'And I will admit that all of them could use a break. At least Eda and Yolanda will not be looking for me, if they are enjoying the festival.'
'Though, I am happy that the Rats Nest, and Devil's Hotel Restaurant will still be open for the next two days.'
'Speaking of which. The look on the Rats Nest bartender's face, when I told her I had slept with Eda was priceless. She laughed for a solid minute. She then gave Sam and I, each a cold bottle of beer on the house.'
'Also, Chief Del Soto told me last night, that I did not have to meet with him for the next two days, which was fine with, me. Fortunately, it had been a quite week.'
'Yet. I am still trying to still figure out how to approach the girls in a manner that I could steal one of their reality devices. I am continue draw a blank. Every plan I come up with ends up with me dead, or worse.'
'I might as well think about something else. Like Sam's plans for the next two days. And I would like to go to that festival. While it was Halloween yesterday, that was more of a children's holiday. And I just did my usual schedule yesterday. From what I read, today and tomorrow being more adult oriented holidays.'
'I am glad I researched these holidays on the web, after I read in the Black Lagoon mange, of Fabiola mentioned the Festival of the Dead. And I learned saw her mention the same festival in the Black Lagoon anime, at the beginning of episode twenty-nine, Codename Paradise, Status MIA.'
'And speaking of the festival. I would like to go to the one in town, today. Now, to ask if Sam wants to join me.'
The two men continued walking, side by side. Lee turned to Sam, as he casually asked, “Sam, do you feel like going to the festival, today?
Sam turned to Lee, as he answered, “Unfortunately, I cannot. And I have plans for both today, and tomorrow.”
Lee inquired, “Really?”
Sam responded, “Yea. Sorry to bring this up on you, on short notice. But today, my girlfriend came to town. And I am going to visit her for a few hours, after lunch. And tomorrow, I am spending the day with her. I will be with you for breakfast. Then, you are on you own for that day.”
Lee replied, “That is alright. I hope you have fun.”
Lee mentally reflected, 'Sam, and I have come to an understanding. I don't dig into his life. He doesn't dig into mine. And by not doing so, Sam unknowingly offers me an alibi, and cover from the women after me. And I enjoy his company. But, if he wants some private time with his girlfriend. That is find with me. I will not even ask to meet his girlfriend, because I respect his privacy. Like he does mine.'
Sam said, “Thank you. I hope you have fun today, and tomorrow, as well.”
Lee and Sam then saw two people turned the corner of a building, to their right side, and start walking down the sidewalk they were on, towards them.
At the moment, the two people were six feet away from Lee and Sam.
As the two other people got closer, Lee and Sam saw that the two people were two younger girls. One was a hispanic girl in her late teens, whom had fair skin and short blond hair. The other person was a six year old caucasian girl with short brown hair. The brown haired girl was slightly staggering, as she and the blond haired girl were walking together, side by side. The brown haired girl was to blond haired girl's left side, with the street to blond haired girl's right side.
The teenage girl was to the six year old girl's right side.
When the two girls came within thirty feet from the two men, both men overheard the conversation between the two girls, which was in english.
The blond girl said, “Listen. you're drunk. Let us go back to our hotel room, so you can work this out of your system.”
The younger girl slurred her speak, as she stated, “Nah. I am fine. Besides, what does it matter. I cannot go home like this.”
The blond tried to comfort her friend, as she commented, “Trust me. We will figure something out. But first, we need to get you sober.”
As the two groups got within got within twenty feet of each other, the young girl's eyes and Lee's eyes met. The girl immediately went berserk, as she scream, “It's you!”
Before Lee could react, the girl suddenly charged at Lee. With the girl bridging the gap between them with frightening speed. When she reached Lee, she punched him in the groin. Next, she did a spinning kick to the back of his knees, dropping him to the concrete sidewalk. Finally, she did a single stomp on his stomach before Sam could grab her from behind, around her waist, and lift her away from Lee.
Lee was in so much pain that his vision was fading in and out, but he could still hear what was going on, and he could still reason and think fine.
Lee heard Sam strongly stated, in a firm, even tone of voice, “That is enough.”
The younger girl screamed, “Let me go! Let me go!”
By then, Lee could not clearly see with his eye, his vision had returned to the point he could see, and make out shapes, and colors.
Lee saw that Sam had picked up the girl by her waist, and held her in the air.
As Lee's vision when started to fade for a few seconds, he saw, whom he guessed was the teenage blond girl, who was just a yellow blur to his eyes at the moment, approach Sam, and the younger girl. Both of whom were also blurs to him.
Lee's vision came back a little, with things being blurry, but he could make out shapes again, He saw that Sam let the girl down on the ground, as the blond girl immediately grabbed the young girl's right wrist, with her left hand and the teenager dragged the girl away from Sam, and himself.
When the blond teenage was ten feet away, with the younger girl, she stopped walking. She turned and looked down at the to the younger girl. She sternly said, like a mother speaking to her child, “Stop this right now. Given our situation, do you really want to get the police's attention?”
The younger girl immediately stopped struggling, as she weakly said, “No.”
The blond replied, “Good.”
The blond girl turned to Sam and Lee, as she apologized, “I am apologize about all this. Usually, she is very nice. But, she misread a bottle of alcohol, we bought, thinking it was fruit juice. And she drank some of it. To be fair, the drink did taste like fruit juice. And given her size, she became easily drunk.”
Sam said, “Things like this happen. Just, please get her out of here.”
The blond girl quickly lead the younger girl away from the men, by the younger girl's wrist. With the two girls soon turned back around the corner, they had came from.
By then, Lee's vision had almost fully returned, but he was still in a lot of pain.
Lee sat up, as he groaned, “Did I just get my ass kicked by a drunk, six year old girl?”
Sam held back a snicker, as he answered, “It appears so.”
Lee commented, “The hard part about this to admit that she looked so cute when she did it.”
Sam could no longer hold in his mirth any longer, as he laughed.
Lee requested, “Sam, please help me up, and me back to the hotel.”
Sam made himself stop laughing, as he replied, “Sure.”
Sam then helped Lee stand up. Then, as they stood side by side, with Lee to Sam's right side, Sam put his right arm under Lee's right armpit, as he helped him up. Next, Lee put his left arm over Sam's left shoulder to steady himself.
Lee all but begged, in a pleading tone of voice, “And Sam, please don't tell the girls about this. If they learn about this, I would never live it down.”
Sam replied, “Don't worry, buddy. I won't.”
Lee thought, with joy, 'He called me buddy. He really does consider me his friend.'
As the men began their walk to the Devil's Hotel, Lee commented, in a slight groan, due to the physical pain he was still feeling, “My instincts tell me that I probably deserved that. But, I cannot place who they are, or why they would be upset with me. It is really sad when a person has done so many horrible things that they have forgotten a number of them. Even if that person didn't realize they were horrible when he committed them.”
Sam responded, in a comforting tone of voice, “You are not a horrible person, Lee. Just a person that has clearly made a few mistakes.”
Lee replied, “Thanks for the vote of confidence.”
Sam commented, “Look on the bright side. We are still not that far from the Devil Hotel. We will be there, before you know it. Then, you can rest.”
Lee joked, “That is why I am not asking you to carry me.”
Sam chuckled a little at Lee's joke, as he continued to help his friend to the hotel they were staying at.
(_)
Ten minutes later, Sam and Lee reached the Devil's Hotel.
As they entered the hotel, from the front entrance, with Lee hobbling through the front lobby, heading for the elevators. They passed by Aeryn and Violin. With Aeryn heading for the game room of the hotel. While, Violin was heading to do their laundry.
Both women were wearing casual clothing.
As the two women stopped to look at the two men, Violin commented, “Damn, boy. What happened to you?”
Sam and Lee stopped in their tracks, as they looked at the two women.
Lee omitted the age, and the gender, of his attacker, as he honestly answered, “I got jumped by an angry drunk that likes to fight dirty. But, I will be fine.”
Sam and Lee then turned and walked toward away from Aeryn and Violin, and towards the front elevator bays, to the right side of the front lobby.
Meanwhile, Aeryn and Violin turned, and continued on their way.
The two men soon made it to the elevator bay. Three minutes afterward that, they made it to Lee's hotel suite, on the third floor.
Lee unlocked the door, and Sam helped Lee to his bed.
As Lee laid down on his bed, on his back, in the darkness, with the only lighting coming from the ambient daylight light from another the curtains of the room. Sam looked down at him.
Sam asked, “Are you going to be alright?”
Lee groaned, “Now, that I am in my room. I will be fine. I should be up, and moving around, in a few hours.”
Sam stated, “Good. I got other things I can do today. I will see you around, Lee.”
Lee said, “You to, Sam. And thanks for the help.”
Sam commented, “That is what friends are for.”
Lee stated, “Yea. And you would the first I had ever had.”
Sam was quiet for a few seconds, before he responded, “Well, I am honored to be your first then.”
Lee said, “I appreciate that. And see you.”
Sam replied, “You as well.”
Sam then turned around and left Lee's room. He shut the door behind him. With the knob lock on the door automatically locking behind Sam.
Meanwhile, Lee just laid in bed, as he rested and recovered from his attack.
(_)
An hour and a half later, in one of the ground floor hallways, in the back of the hotel, nearby the beach, on the restaurant side of the hotel, Violin was walking towards the hotel restaurant. The location was by the auxiliary elevator bay, in the left, back corner of the hotel.
Aeryn and Violin's hotel room, was on that side of the building, facing the beach, with them on the tenth floor. Though, they used the lobby elevators more often than the auxiliary elevators.
Violin had just come from that elevator bay, as she headed down the hallway, towards the hotel restaurant.
This week, it was Violin's turn to do the laundry for Aeryn, and herself. After breakfast, and a little fun, Violin headed to do the get their dirty clothes from their suite, while Aeryn entertainment herself.
Violin then took their clothes, in a small basket, to the hotel laundromat. When Violin was finished, she took back up to their suite, separated them, folded them, and put away their clothing in their suites chest of drawer.
When Violin had finished, she saw on digital clock, by their bed, that it was about time to meet Aeryn for lunch at the hotel restaurant.
Violin had decided to take the back way to the hotel restaurant, and she rode an elevator from the auxiliary elevator down to the ground floor.
Violin was wearing casual clothing, which consisted of pants, a shirt, tennis shoes, among other things.
When Violin came within sight of the door the hotel restaurant, she saw that the five Lagoon sisters, and the three trio sisters were approaching her, from the direction of the restaurant entrance.
The eight women did not have their weapons on them, and they were dressed in their casual clothing.
Violin also noted there was no one else around.
Violin grimly thought, 'This cannot be good.'
Violin and eight teenage women, came to a stop ten feet from each other.
Violin then took a good hard look at them. The Lagoon sisters were standing to her left, with the trio sisters to her right.
Violin remained silent, as she thought, 'From their body language and facial expressions, they are clearly spoiling for a fight. They might take offense at anything I say. So, I will remain silent. Yet. They know how powerful I am. I could take them all on, and likely win. Not that I want to fight them, to begin with.'
As the teenage girls look at Violin, Rebecca stated, in an immature tone of voice, “Well, what do we have here?”
Kristina said, in an insincere tone of voice, “Looks like a, little girl lost, situation, to me.”
Violin thought, 'Just as I thought. They are baiting me. Let's get this over with.' She said, in a firm tone of voice, “I am not in the mood for this, girls.”
Molly flatly stated, “Well, tough. Because we are going to have a talk with you, about a few things.”
Violin inquired, “About what?”
Mikoto answered, for their group, “Well, our main problem is that you think your old enough to sit with the adults, at the big table.”
Violin thought, 'This is not good. They are likely trying to goad me into a fight, to have Aeryn, and I thrown out of our team. But, this won't work. Still, I have to try to defuse this situation.' She commented, “Given what most of us have been through. I think age is a subjective term.”
Sarah calmly said, “No. It isn't. There is a pecking order in such matters. And you broke through the line, and cut your way to the front.”
Violin thought, 'Oh. I know, now. They're jealous of me. I don't believe this. And not just the Lagoon sisters.'
Violin turned to the trio sisters, as she stated, “I could expect from the Lagoon sisters, but Mikoto, I thought you, Nodoka, and Yurika had more self-respect than to try something like this.”
Nodoka commented, “Maybe you do not know us as well as you think.”
Violin admitted, “Probably. So, what is the problem?”
Yukio said, “The problem is the way you act?”
Violin inquired, “How so?”
Yurika stated, “You act like an adult. And they treat you like an adult.”
Violin pointed out, “That is because I am an adult. And so are you. You are all at least eighteen, and adults, as well.”
Kristina said, “That is now what we are talking about. Somehow you have gained the respect of our parents. That we find annoying.”
Violin stated, “That is because I am not their kid. I am able to prove my worth to them, And I remember the experiences of my previous life.”
Molly replied, “My sisters, and I, are also reincarnated.”
Violin flatly responded, “I have not forgotten that fact.”
Molly commented, “Even so, we also remember our previous lives... Well, except for Yukio and Rebecca, for understandable reasons.”
Violin thought, 'I am not going to touch those two previous lives with a ten foot pole. Though, the others are fair game.' She said, “Yes. I realize this, as well.”
Nodoka whisper to her two sisters, “I am so happy we don't have to remember, and deal with previous lives.”
Mikoto and Yurika nodded in agreement.
A second later, while not looking in trio sisters direction, Violin said, “We heard that.”
Molly commented, “Yes. We heard that.”
This caused Nodoka, Mikoto, and Yurika to tense up for a few seconds.
Violin thought, 'I think we made our point. And I need to keep this conversation moving.' She turned to the Lagoon sisters, as she stated, “I know about your previous lives. And if you want to play this game. Fine. I was never a lunatic killer.”
Molly retorted, “No. Instead, you threatened to destroy an entire reality, over the welfare of your wife and child, whom you loved. When it comes to crime, we are amateurs compared to you, John.”
Violin casually admitted, “You have me there. Still, it is nice that we are not held responsible for the actions of our previous lives.”
The Lagoon girls nodded in agreement.
Molly agreed, “True.”
Sarah stated, “But, you went back to your old life, Violin.”
Violin said, “Yes. I did.”
Kristina asked, “Why?”
Violin answered, “Because, I had the opportunity to continue that life, which I happened to enjoy. And I did not want to tell you guys this, but I guess I am going to have to. While it was only several months for you Lagoon girls, living in another reality...”
Violin then turned to the trio, as she continued, “And only a few months for you three, as you travel the realities with your parents. Since you all chased Stan and Lewis across the multiverse.”
Violin looked back at the Lagoon sisters, as she went onto say, “It has been a lot longer for some of me, and both my families. I only look a few years older. But in truth, it has been twenty-two years since the last time you saw me. And it is my Ixioran Altairian alien heritage that has kept me young. Aeryn does not show that much age either, because she is Sebacean, and they age very slowly, as well.”
“I was with Aeryn, as we helped raise our son, Little D, to adulthood. I also helped my mother and step-father raise my half-brother, Yuuichi, to adulthood, as well. Both my son and brother are good friends, and they have started a thriving business together. We are all very proud of both of them. So, I am adult, many years older than any of you, in anyway you can think of.”
“As such, I deserve to have a seat at the big table.”
Violin turned her voice chilly, as she warned, “And I do not think you want to become violent with me. You know how powerful my mother, Birdy is. Well, I am almost as strong, as fast, as tough, and enduring in stamina, as my mother is. And if even you beat me. You will have to face my wife. And that is not counting the rest of my family. And I can assure you, when Aeryn is on the warpath, she makes Roberta look tame in comparison.”
“So, if you don't like me. Fine. This is not a teenage drama. We can simply agree not to have anything to do with each other. Like adults should do. Now, I am going to meet my wife for lunch. Good day, ladies.”
Violin's speech stunned the teenagers.
Violin used the opportunity to walk passed them, and down the hallway.
The teenagers turn to looked at Violin. They soon as the dark blue haired woman walk into the hotel restaurant, to join her wife for something to eat.
The teenagers then looked back at each other.
Sarah asked, “So, what do we do now?”
Molly inquired, “I was wondering. Do any of you feel like baking?”
Nodoka asked, “What do you mean?”
Molly used her right hand to pull out a clear plastic bag from her right side pants pocket. The bag was full of weed. She stated, “Pot brownies. I got the weed from a quality supplier I personally know in another reality, where it is legal.”
Yukio questioned, “What is the occasion?”
Molly smirked, as she answered, “Didn't you hear? It is a holiday, today. So, you guys want to help?
The other six teenage girl nodded, or shrugged, in agreement.
Rebecca suggested, “And we can share them with the others in the hotel bar.”
Molly complimented, “Great idea.”
Kristina inquired, “But, should we tell the others what we are serving them?”
The other seven teenagers look at each other. Then, the other seven said, almost in unison, “Nah.”
Sarah asked, “Now, where do we find a place to bake this stuff?”
With her left hand, Molly pulled out her reality device from her left side pants pocket. She stated, “We will cook these things back home. We will head over there, about an hour after we first left the island, to come to this reality. It will take about an hour and a half to prepare and bake the brownies. And another hour and a half for the brownies to properly cool. But, for those here, we will only be gone for a few minutes.”
Kristina said, “Sounds. I like great idea. And we will make sure we leave everything turned off when we are done. Now, let's find a quiet place to travel back home, in private.”
Yurika suggested, “How about we head up to one of our suites, and jump there?”
Molly complimented, “Intelligent thinking, Yurika. Now, let's go have some fun.”
The eight girls smiled, as they headed for the auxiliary elevator bays, and up a few floors, to where their rooms were located beside each other.
(_)
Thirty minutes later, the eight teenager girls, walked into the Devil's Hotel restaurant. Molly and Sarah were each holding up to silver platter, with a silver, dome shaped lids on top of their platters.
The teenagers looked around, and saw that their parents, and friends, were sitting in two, six chair tables, in the back right side of the room, in front of the stage.
There were other customers near the front of the bar, and at the bar counter.
At one table sat, Rock, Revy, Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma. In the other table sat, Violin, Aeryn, Lotton, Sawyer, and Shenhua.
The two tables were beside each other, and from the direction of those in the chairs the women were sitting in, the teenagers could tell that all ten adult women were talking to each other.
And from their empty plates and nearly empty glasses, and bottles, by the women, they could women had just finished their lunches.
Molly thought, 'Perfect. They have finished lunch. And they are ready for our desert. We will even let Violin and Aeryn have some, as a peace offering. After thinking about what Violin said. She is right. This is not a teenage drama. We are all adults. And we should let bygones be bygones.'
Molly said, “Let Sarah, and I take lead.”
The other girls did as requested.
Molly and Sarah took lead, as the eight teenagers walked across the room, to meet with their friends and family.
While the teenagers were walking towards the group, the overhead Revy say, “That festival they have here was okay. With some interesting people manning the booths...”
As they reached the ten sitting women, the women stopped talking, and turned to look at the teenagers gathered in front of them, opposite to the stage, on the other side of their tables.
Rock asked, “What do you have there, girls?”
Molly said, “We thought you might care for some desert.”
Molly set her platter in the center of the table where Rock, Revy, Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru were seated at. Sarah placed her platter in the center of the table where Violin, Aeryn, Lotton, Sawyer, and Shenhua were sitting at.
Molly and Sarah both lifted the silver, dome shaped, lids from their platter to reveal that each of the platters had pre-cut, square brownies, stacked on top of each other, like a pyramid. Each brownie was square shaped, and was two inches wide and long, and an inch thick.
Molly and Sarah then set the silver lids onto a nearby, empty table.
Revy was the first to pick up one of the brownies. She took a small bite, to taste it. After she chewed, and swallowed her bite, she smiled. She looked up at Molly and the other teenagers, as she asked, “Hmm. This is good. It's Dutch's recipe. So, I take it there is weed in this?”
Molly didn't even bother denying that fact, as she answered, “Yes. After eating a few of these, you will be stoned in a little while.”
Revy continued to smile, as she said, “I could use some relaxation.” She then took another larger bite of her brownies, and swallowed it.
Over on the other table, Lotton took one of the brownies, as she said, “I actually remember eating some of these brownies at a bikini party. They were good. And the after effects were good, as well.”
Sawyer took one as well, while she agreed, “You are right about that.”
Shenhua grabbed one, as she said, “When I get stoned, I think of Leigharch.”
Lotton commented, “Yea. We never did find out what happened to him. He just disappeared, after he escaped from that insane asylum. If we had found him, he, or she, might be with us, right now.”
Shenhua replied, “True. But, at least we know he came back from Mars.” She then giggled a little.
Sawyer took her first bite, and swallowed. She then theorized, “May he hooked up with someone, and is jumping realities. And we might someday run into him.” Lotton and Shenhua looked over at her. She shrugged, as she replied, “We can always hope.”
At the other table, Ranma then picked up a brownie, as she stated, “I could use a laugh.”
Akira did so as well, while she commented, “So, could I.”
Natsuru grabbed a brownie, as she joked, “Well here is to peer pressure.”
Nearby, Violin and Aeryn did not touch the brownies, as they turned to look at the teenage girls. Violin commented, “I don't see you girls grabbing any of them.”
Molly leaned over and picked on up, at the table Rock and Revy were at. She then took a bite up it, chewed it, and swallow it. She said, “See... And sorry about earlier. Think of this as a peace offering.”
Violin cracked a grin, as she replied, “Apology accepted.”
Aeryn just shrugged.
Both women then turned their attention back to the brownies on the table.
Meanwhile, Rock thought, 'What a minute, Aeryn is an alien, and Violin is part alien.' Rock turned to the other table, as she inquired, “Aeryn, Violin, is it safe for you two to eat this food, given your... Unique physiology?”
Aeryn and Violin turned to look at Rock. Aeryn answered, “Yes. I have had these... Chemicals before. They effect me in the same way as they do you.”
Violin commented, “Same here. We will be fine.”
The spouses then turned to the brownies at their table, and they each grabbed a brownie.
As Revy reached for her second brownie, she noticed that her children, and their friends were just standing there. She turned to the teenager adults, as she said, “Well girls, get yourselves a couple of these sweets. You made them. You should have some of them.”
Rebecca said, “Thanks mom.”
Except for Molly, whom had a browning, the other seven teenagers each got a brownie. After which, they sat down in a couple of tables nearby where the other women were sitting. With them turning their chairs to face the ten other women.
After the teenagers sat down, Revy turned back to the others, as her table, as she continued what she was saying, before the girls came into the room. She stated, “Alright. At I was saying. The festival in town was not that bad. Rock and I have been to better, but it okay.”
Rock agreed, “Revy is right about that.”
Revy commented, “Now, I will tell you about this interesting, no nonsense fortuneteller, we met at the festival. And I think she was legit...”
Revy then continued her story about the prophesy that the fortuneteller gave her.
(_)
At the bar counter, one of the waitresses walked up to Melvin, whom was standing behind the counter. She was the to ask Melvin about the women by the stage.
The waitress saw that Melvin was looking at the women by the stage. She asked, “Do you want us to do something about this? They are bringing in food, and I think they are pot brownies.”
Melvin continued to look at the group of women by the stated, as he answered, in a serious tone of voice, “No. That group is just walking trouble. And it is a holiday, yesterday, today, and tomorrow, which is an excuse to make trouble. If they want to get stoned. Let them. I will keep them out of trouble, and they will likely order more food from us. And I will take the heat if there is a problem.”
The waitress said, “I will let the other waitresses know.”
Melvin turned to the waitress, as he replied, “Thank you.”
The waitress walked turned and walked away, to deal with her more same customers, whom were closer to the entrance of the hotel restaurant, and away from the women having the open pot brownie party.
Meanwhile, when back to serving his customers at the bar counter, while he kept an occasionally eye on what Revy, Rock, and their group were doing.
(_)
Ten minutes later, Lee walked into the hotel restaurant.
Lee was walking normally, as he made his way to the bar counter. He thought, 'Well, I seem to have mostly recovered from that pint-sized pounding. I am a little sore, but I will be fine in a few hours. I don't even have any bruising. I will just count myself lucky. Now, to get some lunch.'
While he continued towards the bar counter, he saw that the Revy and Rock's crew were all assembled in the back of the restaurant, having some sort of party.
Lee thought, 'It makes sense, considering it is a holiday, after all. I hope they have fun. Because, I am not in the mood to play mind games, right now.'
Lee then made it to the bar counter, near the entrance to the hotel restaurant.
As Lee sat down in a stool, Melvin walked over to him.
Lee looked up at the bartender, as he said, “Give me a few minutes to think about what I want.”
Melvin replied, “Okay.” He then went to check on his other customers.
(_)
Across the room by the stage, Violin was the first to notice that Lee, had walked into the restaurant and sat at the bar counter. She said, “Lee is back on his feet.”
Aeryn looked over at Lee, as she commented, “That was quick.”
Rock asked, “What happened?”
Aeryn stated, “He was attacked by a drunk. Sam had to help him back to the hotel.”
Revy commented, “That is always a risk when you got to a bar.”
Molly thought, 'Ever sense that night at the Rats Nest, Lee has shown to have some intelligence. And the fact that he slept with Eda shows he has a cunning side. In getting a beautiful woman like that to sleep with him. So, I want to see what he is like, when he is relaxed.'
Molly then got up from her seat.
Kristina turned to Molly, as she asked, “Where are you going?”
Molly turned to her sister, as she answered, “I am going to walk over to Lee, and invite him over. And offer him some of my brownies. Is that okay with you?”
Kristina replied, “Sure.”
Molly looked over at her parents, and their friends, as she inquired, “Are you okay with this?”
Revy shrugged, as she replied, “That is fine with me.”
Rock stated, “Lee knows his manners.”
Lotton, Shenhua, and Sawyer nodded in agreement.
Sawyer said, “The last time we got involved with him was very entertaining. So, sure. Bring him over.”
Aeryn stated, “I see no problem with that.”
Violin commented, “As long as he behaves, I could care less, either way.”
Molly noticed that Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru was suspiciously quiet, as they looked at her.
Ranma asked, “But, should we let him eat some of the brownies?”
Molly thought, 'I wonder why you are asking? Still, I have a nice reply for you.' Molly pointed out, “If we don't, he would ask questions. He would likely be offended. And he has been polite to us. Besides, he is so uptight, that he needs to relax some.”
She mentally reflected, 'Try to beat that, Ranma.'
Ranma thought, 'After Lee's psychotic break last week, I am not sure it is wise to get him stoned. Still, he has had a rough day. And he is so uptight, that mellowing him out would be a good thing. And we can restraint him, if need be.'
Ranma conceded, “True. We will just have to watch him. In case he has a bad reaction.”
Natsuru commented, “We will just have to be watchful of the situation.” She thought, 'If we have a repeat situation with Lee. We will just keep him from harming himself, or others.'
Akira said, “Yes. We will just have to be careful.” She mentally added, 'With Lee.'
Ranma stated, “And if Lee has a bad reaction, we will just restrain him. But, not harm him. And we won't hold what he does while stoned, against him.”
Molly agreed, “That is fine with me. And let's not tell Lee what is in the brownies. Is will be more fun when he finds out on his own.”
Ranma shrugged, as she replied, “Okay.” She thought, 'If he did know they are pot brownies, he will likely not eat them. And Molly is right. He does need to relax some.'
Most of the other women nodded, or shrugged, in agreement.
Molly then turned, and walked over to the bar counter.
(_)
A few seconds later, at the bar counter, Lee was about to give his Melvin his lunch order, from across the bar counter, when he heard a women's voice say, “Hello Lee.”
Melvin looked over Lee's shoulder, from where the voice came from. As Lee turned towards the female voice, as well.
Lee and Melvin saw that it was Molly.
Molly said, “We are having a party, and we would like to invite you to come over and join us.”
Lee thought, 'Oh great. I got no choice but to say, yes. Saying, no, to that many pretty women, especially dangerous, crazy women, is too risky. Tragically, this is the first time a girl has ever invited me to a party. I would have come with her, anyway. But, Melvin has been here the entire time. I want to see what he has to say before I go over there.'
Lee looked over at Melvin, while raising an eyebrow.
Melvin noticed Lee looking at him. Melvin thought, 'If I warn him about the pot brownies, it will pissed off the girls. But, as it is. He always is on his toes. So, he should be fine.”
Melvin cryptically said, “Go over there. They are not in any mood to harm anyone.”
Lee nodded. He then turned around to face Molly, as he answered, “Sure.”
Molly thought, 'Lee is more intelligent than I gave him credit for. He looked over at Melvin first, whom has been here, to gauge the situation. Then, he answered me. Very shrewd.'
Lee then got up from his seat, and walk with Molly, over towards the stage, and where the girls were sitting down.
After they approached the women, Molly sat down in her seat.
Lee noticed Akira offer a seat between her and Revy.
Lee thought, 'The pride wants to be playful. I might as well play. Upsetting them would be the last thing I want.'
Lee then sat down between Akira and Revy.
Violin turned to Lee, as she asked, “So, how are you doing?”
Lee turned to Violin and Aery, as he answered, “Better than I was earlier.”
Aeryn commented, “You were definitely not feeling well, earlier.”
Lee replied, “And I recovered.”
Revy asked, “Where is Sam?”
Lee looked over at Revy, as she stated, “He said he had errands to run. And I didn't ask any questions.”
Revy complimented, “Smart man.”
Molly suggested, “Have a brownie, Lee. They are homemade.”
Lee saw that all of the women were eating the brownies. He mentally guessed, 'Well, the girls are eating them. So, I guess they are safe.'
Lee then reached over and picked up one of the brownies in the silver platter in the middle of the table he was sitting at, and he picked up brownie in his right hand.
The women then watched take a small bite, chews and taste the brownie for a few seconds. He then swollowed a the piece of brownie in his mouth.
The woman all knew better than to react to Lee eating the brownie, and instead they acted casually.
Lee thought, 'These are pretty good. I have never had brownies that tasted like this before. I think after I finish this one, I will have more. I better compliment them.'
Lee said, “This are pretty good brownies.”
Molly happily replied, “Thank you.”
The women then continued their party, with Lee in attendance.
(_)
Across the room, Melvin watched Lee eat one of the brownies. He thought, 'Chances are Lee probably has never had pot before. And he does know how to recognize it. Well, what is done, is done. I just have to hope he doesn't get himself killed. Though, given it is a pot parties, in a little a while, none of them will be in the mood for violence. So, Lee should be fine.'
Melvin then went back to serving his customers, at the bar counter, and fixing mixed drinks, for the customers in the room.
(_)
Two hours later, Sam had finished visiting his girlfriend, and he felt he needed to go check on Lee. And he guessed that Lee was still at the hotel, recovering from his earlier attack.
Sam hadn't had lunch yet, so he felt going back to the Devil's Hotel was a good excuse to do both.
As Sam walked into the Devil's Hotel Restaurant, he saw something that he thought he would never see in his entire life.
Lee was sitting at a table, in the back of the room, facing the front wall of the restaurant, with his feet propped up on the table, giggling. He did this while sitting beside, Revy and Akira, in the middle of the other women around him. And all of them were happy for some reason.
Sam thought, with concern, 'Did hell freeze over while I was gone? Because there is something is seriously wrong with this situation.'
Sam looked over at Melvin, whom was looking at Sam.
Melvin just shrugged his shoulders.
Sam turned back to the group, as he thought, 'I see that Melvin is not going to be any help in this situation. Not that I blame him. He is sane. He knows better than to create problems with those women.'
Then, Sam heard what Lee was saying something, which was part of conversation that he had just walked into.
Lee explained, “Girls, it is like what is stated in the ancient writings found in sanskrit. The word, I, denotes just the soul. While the word, me, denotes the mind, body, and soul, as one unit. That is the difference.”
“Then, there is Plato's Parable of the Cave. Truly groundbreaking in its concept. Next, there is Zhuang's concept of the man and the butterfly. With him using dreams as a medium in the concept of transformation. It was brilliant. Finally, Archimedes stated that with a large enough fulcrum, he could move the world. And what greater fulcrum is there than one's imagination.”
Sam's jaw dropped, as he thought, 'I didn't know that Lee was a philosopher. But, the question is why is he acting this way? I need to find out. And I need to do so, now.'
Sam collective himself, as he walked over to the women.
When Sam reached Lee and the women, he was standing by the table Lee was sitting him. All four of the tables other women stopped their conversations, as they turned to look at Sam.
Lee then looked up at Sam. Lee smiled, as he casually said, “Hi Sam. I hope you had fun on your... Ah... Errands.”
Sam maintained a relaxed stance, as he looked at Lee. He said, in a calm tone of voice, “As much as could be expected. So, what is going on here?” He mentally added, 'Thank you, Lee. For still having enough sense to not mention I have a girlfriend, in front of these lunatics.'
Lee replied, while grinning ear to ear, “Just having some fun with some pretty women.”
The women all laughed at Lee's commented.
As the laughter died down, Sam saw Sarah stand up from her chair, by her sisters. She then walked over to the table that Lee was sitting at. She leaned over, and picked one of a handful of brownies still left on that platter.
Sarah then walked over to Sam with the brownies.
While smiling, Sarah said, in sickeningly sweet tone of voice, that did not fool Sam in the least, “Here. Have one.”
Sam took the brownie in his right hand. After which, Sarah walked back over to the chair she had been sitting in. She then sat back down into that chair.
Sam looked at the brownie in his right hand, for a few seconds. He then pinched off a bit of the browning with his left thumb and index finger, and put that small piece in his mouth.
Sam then tasted the brownie for a few seconds.
Sam immediately realized, as he thought, 'Weed... these are pot brownies.'
Sam spit out the piece of brownie that was in his mouth, and onto the floor, while he set the rest of the brownie on the table that Lee was at.
Sam then took a hard look at Lee, and the twenty-one women he was with.
Sam mentally realized, 'They are all stoned. I need to get Lee out of here, before he gets himself into trouble. The women are just too dangerous and unpredictable to leave Lee alone with.'
Sam turned to Lee, as he firmly ordered, “Lee, we are getting out of here.”
Revy said, “Ah, come on, Sam. Stay, and join the party.”
Sam looked over at Revy, as he said, “I have been to parties like this. They never go anywhere. Just a lot of laughter, but nothing else. It is a pure tease.”
Rock looked over at Revy, as she said, “He has got you there, Revy.”
Fortunately, Revy was not in the mood to get upset. She looked over at Rock, and she just shrugged her shoulders.
Lee looked up at Sam, while he smile. He flatly asked, “Why should I leave, when I am having so much fun?”
Sam thought, 'I need to see how much he knows about pot.' He inquired, “Lee, have you ever done weed before? Pot before?”
Lee answered, “No. Why?”
Sam responded, “Because, you just did. You are stoned, Lee. Very stoned.”
Lee replied, with denial in his tone of voice, “I am not stoned.”
The women laughed, for a few seconds. Ranma then turned to Lee, as she stated, “Yes, Lee. You are stoned. We are all stoned.”
Everyone then went quiet for a few seconds. As they waited to see how Lee would react.
Lee look then look at those around him, as he said, “I should be angry for all of you drugging me. But, I am just to damn happy to be angry. Cheech and Chong were right. I can see that being stoned truly is a way of life.”
In response to Lee's comment, the women laughed again, for a few seconds.
As everyone settled back down, Sam said, to Lee, “Come on, Lee. I will take you to your suite, and stay with you. This stuff should wear off in a few hours. Until then, we will watch some TV.”
Lee quietly said, “Okay.”
Lee set his feet off the table, and onto the floor. He then got up from the chair he was sitting in. And he walked behind Akira, and around the table, over to Sam, with Sam to Lee's right side.
Sam did not say anything to the women, as he put his left arm over Lee's right shoulder.
Sam then turned Lee around, to where Lee was facing the entrance of the room, with Lee's back to the women. While Sam was to Lee's left side. After which, Sam escorted his stoned friend out of the hotel restaurant, and to Lee's suite.
(_)
Around four hours later, in Lee's suite, the bedroom lamp on the nightstand by the bed, and TV, were on, with the curtains closed, as Sam sat with Lee, while the pot slowly worked out of Lee's system.
Lee has been sitting on his bed, as Sam had quietly sat in a chair at the table in Lee's room, as they watched TV.
While Lee was not completely sober, yet. He was sober enough to be lucid and realize what had happened.
And Lee was pissed off.
Lee sat on the bed, looking at the TV, which he really wasn't paying any attention to, as he thought, in anger more at himself, than the women whom tricked him, 'Damn it! I missed such a wonderful opportunity. If I had known they were pot brownies, I would have eaten very little. Also, I might have gotten one of them alone, and stolen their reality device. And I would be gone by now.”
“And the worst thing is I cannot do a damn thing about this situation of them tricking me. I don't dare think of getting back at them. Because all those women are badasses. Even though I am bigger and taller than them, I am sure any one of them could break me as easy as they could look at me. I am literally going to have to let this go.'
'Instead, I need to focus on my goals, and look at the bigger picture of not getting caught. And to happy that I was not caught in a such compromising position, while I figure out how to get one of their reality devices.'
Sam looked over at Lee, as he sat on his bed. Sam could tell from Lee's facial expressions, that he was not happy. Sam asked, with concern in his tone of voice, “Are you going to be okay, Lee?”
Lee looked over at Sam. Sam's concern caused Lee to immediately calm down. Lee thought, 'At least, I remember what happened. And Sam saved me. I owe him big for this. He is my one and only true friend. And I will some day make this up to him. It just won't be today. Though, I can still thank him.'
Lee answered, in a calm, though tired tone of voice, “Yea, Sam. I should be fine. And thanks for saving me.”
Sam smiled, as he replied, “This is what friends do.”
Lee commented, “I know. And I appreciate that. Still, the worst part of this whole situation, is that I never got any lunch. And I am starving.”
“I would like to get something to eat. But, I am still too stoned to leave the hotel. And I don't dare show my face today in the hotel restaurant. I don't even want to leave this room for the rest of the day, because I am so embarrassed with myself.”
Sam said, in a comforting tone of voice, “There is nothing to be embarrassed about, Lee. You did not do anything wrong. You just got played. It happens. Now, you just have to swallow your pride and move on.”
Lee admitted, “You're right. That is what I am trying to do, right now.”
Sam suggested, “Good. Sill, we can dine in and order room service to bring up something up to eat from the hotel restaurant, to this suite. I will even eat with you. Hell, I will pay for our meals.”
Lee smiled at Sam, as he complimented, “Thanks, Sam. I would like that. You are a true friend.”
While still slightly grinning, Sam calmly responded, “That is what I try to be.”
Sam and Lee then ordered some meals, and cold bottled sodas, from the hotel restaurant. Half an hour later, they were delivered to Lee's room.
After Lee and Sam finished eating. They played cards for a while, as they sat in chairs, across the table from each other, in Lee's suite. Only this time, they did not bet any money. They were just playing for fun.
Sam considered it wrong to bet money with Lee, given Lee was still slightly stoned. And Lee appreciated his friend's concern for his welfare.
A few hours later, Sam left for the night. And even though it was early in the evening, Lee decided it was time to get some rest, and sleep off the rest of the effects of the pot. Lee got ready for bed. After which, Lee turned off the TV, lamp light, and he went to bed early, to get some sleep.
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 1: “De La Plata Podrido.”
Chapter 06: “Day of the Dead: Part Two: The First Few Times Around.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
Lee's Reality. Location, De La Plata Podrido, Mexico. Date, November Second, Day of the Dead holiday. Place, Devil's Hotel and Resort. Time, Five AM.
Inside Lee's third story hotel suite, Lee opened his eyes to the darkness around him.
Lee felt as if he slept a good, sound sleep.
Lee thought, 'I guess that pot also helps with sleep. I feel good. Well rested. And I feel sober.'
Lee then turned to look at the digital clock in his bed room nightstand, by his bed, read in red LED numbers, Five AM sharp.
Lee laid back on his pillow, as he thought, 'Ah hell. It is only Five AM. Not even the hotel restaurant is open yet for breakfast. I think I will get a few more hours sleep.'
Lee then turned over and went back to sleep.
(_)
Three and a half hours later, Lee woke up again. He turned to see the clock state it was Eight thirty AM sharp.
The only light in the room was find the outside daylight coming in from around the curtains.
Lee thought, 'This is more like it. Time to get out of bed, get ready for the day, and then get something to eat. It is November second after all. The Day of the Dead. And I am likely soon to join the dead. So, I might as well enjoy today.'
Lee got up from his bed, he turned on his lamp light, as he began to face the day.
Soon after, Lee finished getting cleaned up, shaved, showered, dried, and dressed.
He then left his room for the elevator.
When Lee reached the ground floor, he exited the elevator, and walked towards the lobby.
A few seconds later, an elevator on the opposite side of the bay opened, with Rock and Revy on it. Whom were wearing casual clothing.
Revy and Rock briskly walked out of the elevator. With Revy to Lee's right side, and Rock to Lee's left side.
As the two women passed by Lee, Revy shoved Lee out of the way, as she harshly stated, “Out of my way.”
Revy's push did not knock Lee down, but he did wonder what was going on, as he looked at the two women.
Rock continued walking, as turned around, to walk backwards, so she could looked at Lee.
Lee then saw Rock rolled her eyes. She then looked back at Lee, turned back around, and walked away with Revy, away from Lee.
Lee thought, 'I don't want to know. Though, I would think after yesterday, Revy would be in a good mood. Now, let's meet Sam, and get some breakfast.'
As Lee walked into to the front lobby, from the elevator bay, he quickly saw where Sam was sitting in a chair, facing the entrance to the elevator bay, waiting for him.
Lee walked over to Sam, and he saw Sam turn in his direction to see him.
Lee then approached Sam. When he reached Sam, he smiled, as he looked down at Sam, in his chair. Lee asked, “Do you feel like getting some breakfast?”
Sam returned Lee smiled, as he replied, “Sure. Where too?”
Lee thought, 'Oh hell. Why not?' He said, “How about the hotel buffet. After girls actions yesterday, I doubt they will do anything to us today.”
Sam replied, “I agree.”
Sam then stood up, and both men headed for the hotel restaurant.
(_)
Twenty minutes later, Sam and Lee were sitting down at the bar counter, to the left middle side of the room. They sat in stools, side by side, with Lee to Sam's right side, as they each ate their meals, and drank their drinks, from the restaurant breakfast buffet. Each man had already paid for their own meal.
Meanwhile, Revy, Rock, and their crew were eating breakfast at the tables near the stage in back, right side of the hotel restaurant.
Both of Sam and Lee's meals, were half eaten, as they continued their conversation.
Lee asked, “I forget to ask. How was you time with you girlfriend, yesterday?”
Sam said, “Our meeting when fine. Though, she did talk about a few things which I was not expecting from her.'
Lee thought, 'She was probably asking Sam about more commitment to their relationship. Well, he has been here with me for the last few months. She is likely just pulled in her lease. And I am not jealous over the matter. Still, I do have to ask something, that I remember from yesterday. You never know. His plans may have changed for the better for me.
Lee inquired, “So, you said yesterday that were were going to see your girlfriend both that day, and today?”
Sam replied, “Yes.”
Lee thought, with slight disappointment, 'No dice. Though, I wonder.' Lee questioned, “While I respect your privacy. And I am not asking to meet her. I was wondering. Is she staying at this hotel?”
Sam stated, “I appreciate you respecting my privacy. And no. She is staying at a hotel across town. I told she wanted to avoid this hotel. And she listened to me. Though, I didn't tell her why.”
Lee complimented, “That is wise move on several levels. You don't want your loved ones near Revy and her lunatic band. Also, it is wise not to mention Revy, and the others, given they are hot women, your girlfriend may become jealous.”
Sam turned to look over at Revy's group. He then looked back at Lee, as he chuckled a little, for a few seconds.
As Sam calmed down, he responded, “Trust me. I have nothing to worry about, when it comes to my girlfriend being jealous of Revy and those with her. Still, you make some good points. Anyway, I might as well tell you want is going on. My girlfriend got in yesterday. And I saw her for a little while.”
“She has some good news. Her, and our friends, had a big payday at work. And I told her where I was, and she came her to celebrate. I am going to meet her in town, and we are going to spend the day enjoying the festival... And each other.”
Lee offered, “I know you don't drive. So, I can offer you a ride. It would save you cab fare.”
Sam teased. “Actually, I think I will just call a cab. I feel that it is safe.”
Lee realized that Sam was joking, as he mocked offense, as he stated, “Come on. You have ridden in my car with me, before, with me driving. I am a fairly safe driver.”
Sam playfully replied, “Not according to Rock.”
Lee halfheartedly commented, “You get into one game of chicken, and you never live it down.”
Sam cracked a grin, as he said, “That is the way things work”
Lee responded, “Anyway, I hope your girlfriend is nice.”
Lee saw Sam's slight grin turn into a full smile, as Sam stated, “She is. And she is a lot more well mannered than some of the women we know.”
Both men lightly chuckled, for a few seconds.
As both men calmed down, Sam continued,, “Also, she has a great sense of humor. And she can be surprisingly unpredictable. But, she is extremely sharp, and skilled at what she does.”
Lee said, “Let me guess. Asking what she does is one of those questions that you would have to kill me, if you told me the answer.”
Sam smirked, “Yes. Exactly.”
Lee replied, “No problem. And have fun.”
Sam said, “You too.”
Sam and Lee then continued their conversation on more casual matters.
Around ten minutes later, both men finished their meals, left their tips, and said goodbye to each other for the day.
After Lee and Sam left the hotel restaurant, Lee slowed down his pace, as he hung back in the hallway, while he watched Sam walked away, towards the lobby.
Lee thought, 'I really do hope that Sam has a great time with his girlfriend. Well, I might as well figure out what I am going to do today. I think I will go to the festival. Yesterday, gave me some weird detours. Even for this situation. But, there is no time like the present to head over that.”
Lee looked at his wrist watch. He then continued his thoughts, 'And given it is around nine thirty, the booths are already open. And I think I will take my Cadillac.'
Lee then walked down the hallway, through the front lobby, and out the front entrance.
As Lee walled outside, he saw that it was a sunny, comfortable day.
Lee soon made it to his pink car, and drove away to the festival.
For Lee, the rest of the day was interesting and fun, as he attended the festival. He even watched a street performance of a mariachi band. He put some money in a hat in front of them, when they were finished. And they were grateful.
By the time Lee returned to the hotel, it was already around seven thirty PM, and night had almost taken complete hold on the island.
Lee had already gotten supper at the festival.
As Lee walked into the lobby, he saw Lotton and Ranma walking together across the lobby, towards the hotel restaurant. They were both wearing nice dresses that flattered their figures.
Lee walked over to them, as he asked, “What is going?”
The two women stopped walking and turned towards him.
Lotton inquired, “You didn't hear, Lee?”
Lee answered, “No.”
Lotton stated, “The hotel staff this afternoon converted the hotel bar into a dance hall, for a dance party. Though, it was kind of short notice. So, it is understandable that you did not hear about it.”
Lee immediately smiled, as he said, with excitement in his tone of voice, “Cool.”
Ranma stated, in a sad tone of voice, “Unfortunately, it is couples only. The hotel even has a bouncer at the bar entrance, whom is enforcing that rule.”
Lotton commented, “Shenhua already entered with Sawyer. And Akira already went in with Natsuru. Me and Ranma are pairing up to get in, as well.”
Lee swiftly dropped his smile, as Ranma and Lotton gave him sympathizing looks on their faces.
Lee stated, in a more sedate tone of voice, “Well, have fun ladies. And see you later.”
Ranma said, in a comforting tone of voice, “We will. And don't worry, Lee. We have been there. I promise you, you will get your chance someday.”
Lee replied, “Thanks, Ranma.”
Ranma nodded once in response.
Both women then turned, and walked away from Lee. As soon as Ranma and Lotton turned down the hallway to the hotel restaurant, Lee walked over to the hallway leading to the hotel restaurant, as well.
Lee looked around the corner to see that Lotton and Ranma reach open door to the bar. Lee could hear the rock music coming from door. They were met by a large man, in a business suit, beside the door, whom Lee guessed was the bouncer. Lee then saw the two women enter.
Lee sadly thought, 'What a rotten way to end a nice day. Still, it is not the first party I didn't learn about until it started. And not the first party I was not able to go to. Honesty, I have never been to any dance parties... Oh well. It is not important. I will be dead soon enough... I might as well turn in early.'
Lee then turned around, and walked towards the elevator bay, to go to his suite, and get some sleep.
Thirty minutes later, Lee was ready for bed, and he went to sleep.
(_)
Inside Lee's suite, Lee opened his eyes in the darkness.
He felt rested, as he turned over to see that the clock by his stated, five AM sharp.
Lee thought, 'Five AM, again. I might as well just get some more sleep.'
Lee then went back to sleep.
The next time Lee open his eyes, he could see from the daylight peeking out in the morning, he turned over to see that it was eight thirty AM, sharp.
Lee thought, 'Eight thirty on the dot, again? Okay, this is odd. But, nothing to strange. I just need to get up, and get something to eat.'
Lee then got up, and he got ready for the day. He even dressed in the same clothing as he did the previous day. Including, what he always kept on. His glasses, baseball cap, and blue cloth jacket.
A little while later, he reaches the ground floor.
As soon as he exited elevator, he thought, 'I wonder.' He then decided to hang back in the elevator bay. With his back was less than a foot from the elevator doors that he had just walked through, as that elevator doors behind him harmlessly closed.
A few seconds later, Lee watched another elevator in front of him open, with Revy and Rock walking out. With Revy to Lee's right side, and Rock to Lee's left side. In the same casual clothing as the previous day.
The two women then briskly walked out of the elevator.
Revy looked over at him, and she gave him a scowl, but she then turned and walked away from him, and towards the lobby.
At the same time, Lee also saw Rock look over at him. She shrugged her shoulders, turned, and continued walking beside her lover, into the lobby.
Lee continued looking at them, as he thought, with interest, 'Okay. This is getting weird. Even for my situation. Except for their reaction, they look exactly as they did, yesterday. On November second... I need to check what the date is today. And the clerks here would be more than happy to tell me.'
Lee then walked passed Sam in the lobby, as he went straight to the check in desk.
One of the clerks on duty looked up at him, as he stated, in english, “Good morning. How may we be of help, sir?”
Lee calmly asked, “What is the date today?”
The clerk answered, “It is November second.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
Lee turned away from the clerk. He thought, with wonder, 'Being a pro-cog, I have previously experienced, several times, in having knowledge of the future. And remembering the future events in sections of a few seconds, to a few minutes, in advance, once the events start. Usually, my precognition gives me only a few seconds of insight. Not that I am complaining. The right few seconds can mean a matter of life, or death.'
'Though, I have had an experience that let me remember up to five minutes into the future, before.'
'But, never this long. Maybe my precognition is on the fritz. Still, that just means I can enjoy this nice day again. Who am I to complain? It is a rare treat to relive a nice day over again. And the first time was pretty good, except for the last part, which is easily avoidable. Now, to talk to Sam, and have breakfast with him.'
Lee turned to Sam, and walked over to Sam. Lee then did the same thing he did with Sam the previous day, as they had their breakfast. Though, the conversation dealt with slightly different topics. But, the meal ended the same pleasant way it did yesterday, with both of them leaving to do their own things for the day.
When Lee exited the hotel, he saw the weather was the same as the previous day.
Lee then got into his car and went to the festival. This time, he explored part of the festival he like the first time around, and a few of the areas he didn't have time to check out the first time.
Lee even came back around the same time, to the hotel, to see Lotton and Ranma walking by him, in the front lobby.
As Lee passed by the two, well dressed women, he turn to them. He complimented, “Looking good. Have a great time at the party.”
Both women turned, and smiled at Lee, as they passed by him.
Ranma said, “Thanks.”
Lotton commented, “We appreciate that.”
Lee continued to walk, as he faced them. He replied, “You're welcome.” He then turned back around, as he made his way to the front elevator bay.
Lee then went to his hotel suite, and he went to bed.
(_)
Lee woke up, feeling rested.
He turned over to see the clock stated, Five AM, exactly.
Lee immediately sat up, as he said out loud, “You have got to be kidding me.” He mentally added, 'It could not be the same day again. Could it? If so, it is time to do something different.'
Lee turn on the lamp light, and got ready for the day, at Five AM.
Given how early it was, Lee took his time getting ready. He took a long hot shower, which he found was nice. And he did everything else he needed to do to face the day. From shaving to drying, to getting dressed.
Though, he got dressed in some different clothing. But, he kept on his glasses, baseball hat, and blue cloth jacket.
According to Lee's wrist watch, it was around five thirty-five AM when he took an elevator down to the ground floor.
Lee then exited the elevator and walked into the lobby, and up to the check in desk.
As Lee did so, Lee saw that there was no one else around, except for him, and the two clerks at the desk.
As he reached the check in desk, Lee saw that the clerks on duty was a different clerks than the one Lee had met in the previous to time.
Lee thought, 'That can just mean there is a shift change between now and nine in the morning.'
One of the clerks, a woman, looked up Lee, as she asked, in english, “Good morning. How may I be of help, sir?”
Lee thought, 'The same response as the other clerk. That is likely just a line they are trained to ask. Though, it is a polite question to make. And in response, I might as well, be polite.'
Lee politely requested, “Excuse me, ma'am. But, could you tell me the date?”
The woman said, “Sure. It is November Second. The Day of the Dead.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
Lee then turned around and walked to one of the nearby cushioned chairs, on the right side of the lobby, with the chair he picked out, facing the front doors to the entrance.
After Lee sat down down in the chair. He got comfortable, as he collected his thought.
Lee calmly thought, 'The strangeness level of my life just went up a few notches. I am in a time loop. But, this could be good, or bad, depending on the rules of the loop. Though, before I do anything to off the wall. I need to know if this loop resets at sleep, or at a given time. In the meantime, I can have another nice day.”
Lee got up from the chair he was sitting in, and he headed back to his room. While inside his suite, Lee watched some TV, until it was the exact time he had left to meet Sam for breakfast, for the previous the last two times.
Lee was careful to avoid Revy and Rock.
Lee then met with Sam in the lobby, and he did the same things he had done in the previous two days. Given him another nice day. Though, there was one major difference, with this repeat, then the last to days, concerning what Lee did when he returned to the hotel, at nightfall.
Lee went to his suite, but he did not go to bed. He just went to his suite, turned on his lamp light, and his TV.
Lee then turned one of the chairs, by the table, in his room, towards the TV. He then grabbed the TV remote, and sat in the chair he had turned to face the TV.
Lee then used the remote to find something to watch on TV, on one of the english channels, that kept his interested.
He spent the next few hours just watching TV, and occasionally using his personal deck of playing cards to play solitaire.
Suddenly, he precognitive sense told him to look at his digital wrist watch, right then.
Lee saw his wrist watch state.
11:59:57 PM
11:59:58 PM
11:59:59 PM
12:00:00 AM
The next thing Lee knew, everything went dark, and he open his eyes were suddenly closed.
As Lee opened his eyes, he still saw darkness, but his sense of touch told him what was going on around himself.
He was laying in his bed, wearing his sleeping clothes.
He turned to look at the clock, and it stated, five AM sharp.
Lee reached over and turned on the lamp light, by his bed.
Lee then sat up in his bed. As he looked around his room, he thought, 'So, this time loop does reset right at twelve midnight, local time. I am glad I kept my wrist watch properly set. So, I don't have to readjust it every time I do this reset. And I am glad that I cleaned my clothes the Halloween, the day before I was jumped, and then tricked into getting stoned. So, I don't have any immediate chores to think about.'
'Still, I don't know what I am going to do now.'
'I am caught in a time loop. I do not know how? Why? Nor, for how long? And it looks like the Ground Hogs day rules apply. Except for the loop resetting itself at midnight, local time. Also, no one remembers the time loop, except for myself. Or, else they would have reacted differently. Though, the only different reactions from people in these time loops so far, has been due my different actions, with their reactions responding in kind.'
Lee then cracked a grin, as a thought occurred to him. He mentally reflected, 'This means, if I get the timing right, I am pull some really insane shit, right before midnight, by mere seconds, and get away with it.'
'Speaking of which. This also means I have no worries about the consequences. Even if the time loop stops, except for that day. Though, I do not want to test to see if dying will not break the loop. And though the cancer has eaten some of my weight, I am still in fairly good shape, and healthy.'
'And all this together means that it looks like I am going to live for the foreseeable future. Along with that, I have plenty of money to burn. So, money is not issue for the moment.'
'So, what am I going to do first, to have some fun. I will not be evil. That is too cliche. But, I can be mischievous. My writings prove that. And I have always wanted to pull some pranks on people. But, I could never get away with it.'
'And the girls did trick me into getting stoned, yesterday. Or, three days ago. Depending on how one wants to look at it. And if I time these loops right, and I am careful, I don't have to worry payback from any of them.'
'Still, I won't intentionally do anything horrible to them. And best of all, I now have all the time in the world to master pranking, and everything else I am interested in.'
Lee slight grin turned into a full blow smile, as he continued his thoughts, 'So much to do. So much more time to do it in.'
'So, what prank will I do first?... Of course, that one. A good opening prank, where no one gets hurt. And it will let me cut my teeth on the concept of pranking. Besides, it is a classic.'
'Though, right now, I think I will just watch some TV, and try to figure out, when, and where, I am going to pull that prank off.'
(_)
Later, during the early afternoon of that day, Lee returned to the hotel lobby.
As Lee walked through to lobby, he saw, from the corner of his eye, to his left, Ranma, Natsuru, Akira, and Lotton sitting in a couch.
While Lee passed by, he overheard Lotton say, “Did you hear? There is going to be a dance in the hotel bar, tonight.”
Ranma stated, “Yea. But, it is couples only. And we have been trying to decide which of us is going to miss the party.”
Lotton said, “No problem. I will go with one of you. And that way, all four of us, plus Shenhua and Sawyer, can go.”
Ranma complimented, “Great idea. Now, we just need something to wear.”
Lotton said, “I am willing to help.”
Lee thought, 'So, this is when, and where, they got the idea to go together, to that party. I will have to make a mental note of looking further into this dance party. Because, no other types of notes are going to stick in this time loop.'
Lee focus on what was in front of him, as he continued his thoughts, 'But first, I have some other fun to do.'
Lee soon approached the restroom doors for the hotel lobby, on the left side of the check in desk area.
The men's and women's restrooms were side by side. With the men's door on the right side, and the women's door on the left side.
Lee then entered the men's restroom.
When he got inside, he checked to make sure that there was no one else there. He even checked the stalls.
After Lee found himself alone, he pulled out two things from his pickets.
In his left hand was his disposable lighter. In his right hand was a cherry bomb.
Lee had bought the cherry bomb from a vendor at the festival, whom he ran across, that was selling fireworks.
Lee thought, 'I told the vendor what I wanted to do. And the vendor promised that this cherry bomb would do the trick.'
'And I am not worried about the vendor call Pedro and the police on me. Because by midnight to night, there will be another repeat, and no one will not I even did this. Nor, will there be any damage to prove that something happen.'
'I think I am coming to love temporal loops. Now, to have some fun.'
Lee then walked over to handicap stall, at the very end of the room.
He opened the door, and walked in the stall.
As he stood over the western style toilet, with the seat down, he said, out loud, “I freely admit this is extremely childish. But, it is a classic. I always want to do this. And it is a great way to start this adventure.”
Lee then lit the wick of the cherry bomb. As he pocketed the lighter with his left hand, he dropped the cherry bomb into the toilet bowl with his right hand.
Lee then flushed the toilet. Next, he back away, out of the stall, and against the far wall.
A few seconds later, Lee watched as all the toilets in the room erupted with water.
Lee thought, with amusement, and childish glee, 'That was so cool. Maybe, I will do that again.'
Suddenly, from the other side of the wall in front of him, Lee heard a woman scream.
Lee said, with worry in his tone of voice, “Ah oh.”
Lee mentally lamented, 'On second thought, maybe not. Of course. Now that I think about it. The plumping is tied together with the women's restroom next door. And one of the women was sitting down on the toilet, when it erupted. I have to get out of here, because chances are, it is one of the girls. And I am in for a literal world of hurt if they find me here.'
Lee turned and started walking towards the exit, to the restroom, but by the time he reached the sinks in the room, a woman walked in, and shut the door behind her, with Lee cut off for escaping. And Lee immediately recognized who the woman was.
Lee gulped, as he saw that Shenhua, in her white robes, was soaking wet. And she was holding both her kukri long knives in her hands.
Also, from the look on Shenhua's face promised murder in the bloodiest fashion possible.
As the two adults looked at each other, Lee commented, with concern in his tone of voice, “This is going to hurt? Isn't it?”
Shenhua grinned a slasher smile, as she answered, “Oh yes.”
Shenhua then charged at Lee, with her long knives.
The next thing Lee knew, he bolted up from his bed, in the darkness, as he said, “Ouch.”
A second later, he snickered a little bit. He then smirked, as he said out loud, “Still worth it.”
Then, a thought occurred to Lee, as he mentally wondered, 'Am I hurt? Or, was that just a reflex action from such a horrible death?'
Lee turned to the nightstand. As he saw the time was five AM sharp on the clock, he reached over and turned on the lamp light.
As soon as the light came on, Lee quickly check himself for injuries. A minute later, he found no signs of harm on his body. Also, as before, he was wearing his sleeping clothing, not the clothing he had on when he went out in public.
Lee then turned off the lamp light, as he laid back onto his pillow.
Lee happily thought, 'Good. It was just a reflex action. Though, her slices did hurt for a few seconds before I was killed. I was dead soon after. I wasn't really in pain when I woke up. I was just slightly confused. And I guess I no longer worry about accidentally dying. This does open up new territory for me.'
'Still, I need to keep my pranks simple, and work my way up. Also, I need to be more careful. And plan around where people might be. And how the plumbing in connected.'
'Though, I think I will first rest for a little while. As I collect my thoughts, and make my plans.'
While Lee did not go back to sleep, he laid in his bed, in the darkness, as he planned out the coming day for himself.
An hour and ten minutes later, Lee looked at the clock on his nightstand. It stated it was six ten AM.
Lee thought, 'I might as well get up. I have a some ideas for today. And I need to start early to do them. And if I pull this prank off just right, it will be hilarious to watch.'
Lee then sat up, turned on the lamp light, and get ready to face the day. Though, Lee took his time in doing so.
Lee was dress and ready by six fifty-fifty AM. He then headed down stairs, and to his car.
He then drove to a local a grocery store that opened at seven AM. He reached the store, just after it open. He then did some shopping, for a few items that he needed, to pull off his next prank.'
After which, he returned to the Devil's Hotel, to implement his plan.
During his stay at the Devil's Hotel. Lee occasionally gotten up earlier than normal for him, and he had learned the usual morning routines for the various members of Revy and Rock's group. Though, he did not know their full daily routines. This was because, Lee could sit in a chair, in the lobby, and watch them come down in the morning. And Lee found that the women did not usual vary their morning routines.
So, Lee had a good grip on who would came down for breakfast and when.
A little over an hour later, Lee then came into the breakfast buffet five minutes before Akira, and her family was be coming down. He paid for his meal, and got himself a plate and drink.
As Lee made his plate, and when he noticed no one was looking, Lee pulled out a small jar, from his right outside jacket pocket. Lee then spiked the re-fried beans portion of the breakfast buffet with a small jar of ferment soybeans. After which, he used the large spoon for the re-fried beans to stir the ferment soybeans.
After which, pocketed the empty jar, and Lee got finished his plate, got a glass of orange juice. He then saw in the front right corner table, that he and Sam occasionally sat in for dinner.
Lee then sat in a chair, with his back to the front right corner, which could get him a front row seat to what was about to happen next, without anyone noticing that Lee was looking at them.
A few minutes later, Akira and her family came down for breakfast. And Akira at some of the spike re-fried beans. Akira and her family then sat in their usual seats, on the back right corner of the room. Far away from Lee.
For Akira, twenty minutes later, in the restaurant, that morning, she had a case of blazing saddles, with a side order of pheromones.
Lee was careful to prevent himself from laughing, or showing any outward expression, as he quietly watched, from the bar counter, as many of the men, and some women, keep coming on to Akira, at the table she and her family were sitting at.
No one got hurt, but it was an embarrassing situation for everyone involved, except for Lee, himself.
Also, Lee was far enough away for Akira to not be affected by her pheromones.
Meanwhile, as the prank progressed, it took almost all of Lee's willpower not to burst out laughing at the scene in front of him.
Lee thought, 'Unfortunately, Mikoto and Yurika will only be effected by this in their male forms, which I have not seen them in. Still. All in all. This was a successful prank. Now, what shall I pull on them, next? And who will I pulled it on?'
'Though, it would be wise to learn more about what they do during the day, before I get to crazy with them. I don't want to make the same mistake as I did with Shenhua. That was literally a painful lesson to learn.'
A few minutes later, Akira got upset at the situation, and stormed out of the room, with the rest of her family following behind her, to comfort her. And even thought some of those in the room were still influenced by the pheromones, everyone knew better than to follow her.
(_)
Lee spent the next few hours just walking around the hotel, starting to learn where the women prefer to be, when they were in the hotel. Though, by lunch he decided to call it quits for the day, get something to eat, and have some fun.
That night, Lee was laying on his bed, wide awake. The lamp light as on, as he looked over at his clock to see that it was eleven fifty-seven PM.
Lee thought, 'As fun as these pranks are, I need to think about other things to keep me busy, or I will start getting temporal cabin fever crazy. Like Mister Murray in Groundhogs Day film, when his character slowly gets so depressed, that he suffers a suicide death montage. As he just wants to end it.'
'And things have finally started to get so interesting in my life, that suicide is the last thought on my mine. And that is the way I want things to stay. At least, for a while.'
'Well, one of the first things I can do is buy a laptop computer. I have the money, and this hotel does have free high-speed internet access for their customers.'
'Since there is the reset, I don't have to worry to much about being traced. This means I don't have to worry about what I download, or if the girls catch me doing so. I can download and watch movies to my heart's content. I already know all the free places and programs I need to do so.'
'Though, I might bribe the projector operator, whom is controlling the hotel theater, to play a few movies that I like. The type of movies that are better seen on the big screen. I might even call my family to talk to them.'
'It will be annoying always have to buy that laptop every morning, and loading the programs I need to do what I want to do. But, that cannot be helped. And it will likely only take an hour to do all that, leaving the rest of the day for me to have fun on the internet. I might even play a few computer games.'
'Though, I cannot do crap on an MMO, given that it takes days to level a character to where the game starts to get really interesting. But, I do know some old first person shooting games that are fairly fun, and I know the cheat codes to jump ahead to the fun parts. I can download those games from the internet.'
'Still, now that I think about the Groundhogs Day film, there is something important that I need call Pedro about, before the reset.'
Lee shifted his body around on his bed, so he could pick up the phone receiver on his nightstand, with his right hand.
Lee dialed Pedro's home phone number, he thought, 'I am glad that Pedro eventually gave me his home phone number, in case of an emergencies, after he got off of work. Still, he is going to be pissed I called him this late. Though, this is the best time to call him on this matter.'
After two rings, Pedro picked up the phone from his end. He answered, in english, “This better be important, Lee. You just woke me up.”
Lee thought, 'He must have caller ID.' He inquired, “Yes, Pedro. This is Lee. And I have an important question for you. Were there any reports of serious injuries, or deaths, on the island today?”
Pedro flatly answered, “No. It has actually been very quiet today. I even checked with them, half an hour ago, right before I went to bed.”
Lee said, “That is good to hear.”
Pedro commented, “Let me guess. We are trapped in a time loop, and you are the only one that remembers?
Lee asked, with surprise evident in his tone of voice, “How did you know? Do you remember the loops?
Pedro answered, “No. I don't. Still, being stuck in a time loop would be the only reason you would ask me this question, at this time of night. I would guess the reset is at twelve?... In a few minutes?”
Lee said, “Yes.”
Pedro requested, “Well, don't do anything too crazy.”
Lee replied, “I won't. And I don't plan to do.”
Pedro responded, “Good. If you need someone to talk to about this. Look me up. I don't want you going crazy. Considering what you have done while sober, I don't want to find out what you are capable of, when you become mentally unstable... Well, more so, than you already are.”
Lee replied, “You and me both.”
Pedro stated, “I am glad we both agree. Anyway, I know plenty of things to do on this island, and plenty of place to go, to keep you from going insane, for years on end. And have a great time.”
Lee said, “I will. Thank you. And see you later.”
Pedro replied, “Good night.” Pedro then hung up his end of line.
As Lee hung up his phone, he thought, 'At least this means I don't have to worry about rescuing anyone. This also means that I can just focus on having fun. And for once, living.'
Lee then looked at the clock, just as he watched the clock strike twelve midnight, and the reset happened.
The next thing Lee knew, he was laying in his bed, in darkness.
Lee opened his eyes, and turned to see that that the clock stated that it was five AM sharp.
Lee cracked a grin, as he asked himself, while he thought, 'Now, what am I going to do today?... I know.' He grin turned mischievous, as he continued his thoughts, 'Have fun.'
(_)
Over the course of the next two weeks, Lee kept upping the ante, with third party pranks on the girls, where Lee was not present went the pranks happen. He only set the trap, and watched the after effects, elsewhere, or from a distance.
Still, Lee did nothing horrible, only a little of this and that.
Though, Lee wisely did some reconnaissance before he got to serious with his pranking. He spent a few days learning the girls daily routines. So, he knew were everyone was, and he couple plan his pranks around them.
Afterward, he used their routines against them.
For example, Lee found out that most of them learned of the dance party at lunch. And during the afternoon, most of them washed the dresses they were planning to wear to the dance.
At noon, while everyone was at lunch, Lee spiked the liquid detergent everyone in the hotel used to clean their clothing at the laundry with some dye.
Lee had already also used the resets to learn more about the town, as well. With his car, he was no longer bound to learn about the town on foot. Like he was, when he first can to the island. And he learned where to get things, even on a holiday.
Getting the dye was not difficult for him.
And Lee picked out a dye that did not go well with any of the girl's hairs color, gray.
That night, Lee sat on a couch, that was set against the left, front side of the lobby windows.
As the women walked by, in pairs, and groups, Lee note that some of the women, as they passed by, were wearing casual clothing.
Lee thought, 'I guess they only brought one dress with them. Or, bought one dress. And with me ruining their dresses, they are going to have to go casual tonight.'
As soon as the last of the women Lee knew were heading to the party, were at the party, and there was no one else in the front lobby, but the two clerks at the check in desk, across the room. With the two clerks attention to some paperwork. Lee chuckled at his latest prank, which he got away with.
Speaking of the dance party in the Devil's Hotel restaurant and bar. Given Lee did not know how to dance, he was not that crazy about going to that party. That, and the fact of trying to finding a date was difficult for him.
Lee found the trick that Bill Murray played in Groundhogs day film, learning about a woman's likes, and past, in one reset, and then using that information in the next reset, to try to score a date with that woman, did not work in real life. It just made women suspicious of him. And after attempting this on three different single women that he know of. With none of the said women belonging to Revy and Rock's crew. Lee gave up attempting getting a date that way.
So, Lee instead focused on his pranking.
Though, through all this, Lee was careful never to laugh in the presence of those he pranked. He even sometimes feign sympathy for his victims, while being in their presence.
And due to Lee's cautiousness, and careful planning, except for the cherry bomb indecent, Lee was never caught.
(_)
After a couple of weeks more of pranking, during one night, Lee was in his hotel suite, sitting on his bed, as he thought about what he was doing to do next.
Lee thought, 'I have not used the timing issues of these resets in my pranks, yet. Still, how should I go about it... Oh, that might work... It is very risky. It could get me into a whole lot of pain... But, the pay off would be work the risk.'
'Still, I am going to have to measure this by seconds... Now first, I need to find out how long, in seconds, that scene is. And what I want to show of that scene. And the exact number of seconds from the section I am showing. After that, it is simple bribery. And timing. I will also make sure the watch the person I am bribing is sync to mine.'
'And it will take around a week to figure out the logistics of this prank. But, it will be worth it.'
(_)
A week of resets later, it was nearly midnight, as Lee quietly entered in the Devil's Hotel theater.
Lee then quietly sat down, in the chair, behind where Revy and Rock were sitting, as they watched the movie on the screen. With Rock to Lee's left side, and Revy to Lee's right side.
Lee thought, 'The one thing I found interesting about Rock and Revy, is that their routines occasionally change. At first I thought they remembered, then I realized that it was a case of my actions causing a rippling effect in their actions.”
“I am not sure how that works, with them, because I have had nothing to do wit them. But, it is not serious. And what I do know is they don't stay all night at the party. They go to a movie. Then, they go to the dance party. Then, they decide to watch a movie until midnight, when everything resets.'
'On that note, the movies always seem to be changing, as well, in the hotel theater. Not, that I am complaining.'
'Still, I can use all this in my prank. And this is going to be a good one. Now, what time exactly is it. Timing has to be perfect for this to work.'
Lee then checked his digital watch. His watch stated it was exactly one minute to midnight, and the temporal reset.
Lee mentally reflected, 'Yes. As I thought. I got exactly one minute until reset. It took me almost a week to work out the details to this prank. But, now I am ready to pull the trigger on it. The first two parts were easy enough. I just borrowed a copy of the episode from the Chief Del Soto had. And bribing the projector operator was just a matter of handing him the cash for this loop. I will get that money back when the reset occurs.'
'Also, I made sure the projector's watch was sync to my own watch. So, he does exactly what I want to happen, when I want it to happen, without any mistakes.'
'This is all due to that fact that timing is everything on this prank. Too early invites painful reprisal. Too late prevents delivery. At exactly thirty seconds till reset, the trigger will be pulled.'
At exactly thirty seconds to midnight, the movie suddenly stopped, and immediately switch to a scene, from the Black Lagoon anime, episode seven, Calm Down Two Men, where Balalaika was editing porn, with Revy and Rock behind her, on screen.
Revy on the screen asked, “Hold on a sec. Is she taking it up the ass?”
Balalaika on the screen replied, “Sure is.”
Lee thought, 'Good, This is a exact scene, and second on the episode, I wanted to appear. Now, for the reaction.'
20 seconds.
In the seat, right in front of Lee, Revy yelled, in surprise, “What the hell?!”
15 seconds.
Lee mentally reflected, 'Now, for the joke.'
Lee calmly spoke up, “Revy, Rock, I have a question I always wanted to ask you two lovebirds.”
Revy and Rock swiftly turned around to face him.
10 seconds
The two women could see that Lee had a wicked grin on his lips, and a purely lecherous look to his face.
Lee casually asked, “Revy, how many times have you used packets of instant spring of drown man to plow Rock in the ass?”
5 seconds.
The priceless looks on both Revy and Rock's faces showed that the answer to Lee's question was, a lot.
3, 2, 1...
Reset.
Inside Lee's hotel room, at five AM sharp, Lee bolted up right, in the darkness, as he laughed himself silly over the looks on Revy and Rock's faces.
After a couple of minutes of laughing, Lee began to calm down enough to stated, out loud, “The looks on their faces were priceless. I think I will do that again tonight. And maybe a few nights after that.” Lee's lip curled into a mischievous grin, as he continued, “But, what will I do in the meantime?”
(_)
Around a week later, just after a reset, in bed, at five AM, Lee thought, 'Okay. That joke is getting old. Now, what am I going to do?'
A few seconds later, Lee mentally realized, 'Well, with this time issue working, I can do all sort so fun. And I have always wanted to kiss pretty women. And here is my chance. I think I will start with the crazy ones first. I will kiss the craziest one first. And the craziest one is not Revy, it is Rock. Those that would say that Revy is the craziest don't understand the concept of crazy. Being crazy is one thing. Chasing after crazy is a whole other level of crazy.'
'And I don't care if Rock was once a man, she is a hot woman, now.'
(_)
That night, by his wrist watch, it was less than a minute before midnight, from the hallway, near the entrance to the theater.
Lee had bribed the projectionist to stop the movie, a few minutes before midnight. Forcing everyone to leave the theater, in search of something else to do.
Lee watched the people of the theater finally walk out.
Lee thought, 'Damn, I bribe the projection operator to stop the movie over a minute ago. I am surprised it took this long for the people start to leave. Now, where are they?'
Lee then spotted Revy and Rock walking out. He thought, 'There they are. Still, I wonder why Revy has been in such a bad mood in these loops. Not that it really matters to me. Now, to do this, before I run out of time.'
Lee then walked up to Rock and Revy.
As Lee approach them, Rock and Revy looked over at Lee.
Lee then walked up close to Rock. To close for either Rock, nor Revy's comfort.
Rock looked up at Lee, as she asked, “Is there something I can do for you, Lee?”
Lee smirked, as he answered, “Yes. There is?”
With only five seconds on the clock, Lee swiftly dipped her back with his arms, while planting a kiss on Rock's lips.
Rock was too stunned to react. While from the corner of his eye, Lee could see Revy's eyes went while with surprise.
A second later, the reset happened, and Lee found himself in the darkness of his room, in his bed.
Lee just laid in his bed, with his eyes opening in the darkness. He thought, “That went better than I expected. Now, for Revy. And then, the others.'
(_)
That night, less than a minute before midnight, Lee did the same thing he did the previous night, in bribing the projection operator.
Lee stood in hallway, outside of the hotel theater.
Lee watched at Rock and Revy exited the theater.
This time, Lee approached Revy.
Revy looked up at Lee, as she growled, “What do you want?”
Lee swiftly used his arms to dip Revy, as he kissed her.
From the corner of his eye, he saw Rock's jaw drop in surprise.
Revy had just enough time to place both of her hands on the sides of Lee's face.
Then, the reset happened.
In his bed, in the darkness of his suite, Lee thought, “Revy was probably going to snap my neck. Still, it doesn't matter. Now, that I have kissed those two. Who will be next?... How about Violin and Aeryn?... Fortunately, I can arrange for the others to leave the party. By having the front desk call them out. So, that will not be a problem.”
(_)
Violin was not hard. Lee just dipped her, and kissed her.
Aeryn was a little more trickery. Being a train soldier, trying the simple dip her would only get his arms broken. So, instead Lee just distracted her, with the, oh my god, what is that?, distraction. With Lee pointing behind them.
This made both Aeryn and Violin look away. When the two women looked back at Lee, Lee just pecked Aeryn on her lips, two seconds before the reset.
Aeryn did not have time to react, before the reset.
After those two time loops, it was early morning, as Lee laid in his bed.
Lee thought, 'Okay. Let's kiss Natsuru, Ranma, and Akira today, and the next two loops. Though, kissing them will take a little preparation. But, not too much. On second thought, this will probably take a few loops to test out my plans. But, that will not be a problem.'
Near midnight, on the current loop, and for the next two loops, Lee set his sights on Natsuru, Ranma, and Akira. In that order.
Along with their skills and unpredictability, these women were experienced in dealing with awkward situations.
Lee knew beforehand, given their history, these women would not have a, deer caught in headlights situation, like the others. Given they had all been unexpectedly kissed before.
So, as to not have the other two lovers attack him, while he kissed the third lover on her lips, Lee made sure to give an excuse to separate the women in the trio that he was after.
Lee then lead that woman to the game room of the hotel, where there was no one else that night, and he kiss that woman there right before midnight.
The excuse was simple. He said he knew someone that was a master pool shark, in the game room, that would like to meet the specific woman Lee was targeting. With the game room usually being empty at that time of night, during the time loops.
Which was only half a lie. Lee did know a real master at pool, Sam. But, Sam was not currently in the game room.
Over the next three nights of resets, Lee testing this excuse on each of the three lovers. He found that he was able to separate the one he was interested in, and get them to the game room. And he timed things so they would get to the game room just as the reset hit.
With that part of his plan confirmed, Lee adjusted his plan by about a minute, to get the kiss he wanted before the reset.
Lee was able to do the dip and kiss trick on Natsuru, without a problem.
Lee knew better than to try that with Ranma. But, Lee came up with a much simpler approach to getting a kiss from Ranma.
(_)
In the game room, a minute before midnight, Ranma and Lee were standing a few feet apart, as they faced each other.
Ranma asked, “I don't see any pool shark here. What is going on here?”
Lee stated, “I am sorry. There is no pool shark here.”
Lee lied, “Instead, Sam dared me, if I could kiss a pretty woman before midnight. It is a few minutes to midnight. And I am getting kind of desperate. And I did not want to ask this in front of your two lovers. But, Ranma. You are not only a smoking hot redhead, you are the most laid back, practical woman I know of. So, can I please just get a perk on your lips to win this bet?”
Ranma giggled for a few seconds. She then shrugged, as she said, “Sure. Because you asked so nicely. Now, come here.”
Lee walked up to Ranma, and he lead down.
Ranma then lifted her feet onto her tip toes, to reach Lee's face, as she peck Lee on the lips, with own her lips.
As Ranma lowered herself back down, Lee leaned up, and took a few steps back.
Lee said, “Thank you.
Ranma smiled, as she said, “You're welcome.”
Then, the reset hit.
(_)
The next was Akira. As Lee kissed Akira, Lee could tell that Akira was into it.
After the reset, in his bed, Lee thought, 'I wonder... I think I will kiss Akira again.'
(_)
Close to midnight, that night, Lee allotted a full minute more, in the game room.
This time, as he kissed Akira, he noted that Akira wanted to do some tongue, and Lee obliged.
With mere seconds before the reset, Lee broke their kiss.
Lee back away far enough to see Akira's face.
Lee saw Akira was smirking.
While Akira smirked, she complimented, “Nice kiss. Though, the tongue needs work.”
Lee replied, “I will keep that in mind.”
The reset then occurred.
(_)
As Lee kissed other women, one night after another, to his surprise, he found that Sawyer was into kissing him, as well.
And Lee kissed Sawyer a few times, during the next few time loops.
Lee found that getting a kiss from Shenhua was surprisingly easy.
Lotton took work. She saw the trick a mile away. Making Lee wonder if she had done this trick before, herself.
After a few attempts, Lee just did the simple thing. He paid her thousand dollars for a simple kiss, right before midnight. And Lotton was more than happy to give that kiss, for a grand.
Kissing the eight teenager women, of Rock and Revy's crew, was a real challenge. Dealing with timing, guile, and skill. And in some cases, it required a few time loops to kiss one of the teenagers.
But, after almost two weeks of attempts, Lee was able to say that he has kissed all of the teenager women on their lips.
(_)
During the morning, a few minutes after the reset, of the last kiss Lee did towards a woman, Lee was in his suite, sitting in his bed, in the darkness, as he thought, 'Well, that's it. With all twenty-one girls women kiss, now what? I could try to kiss the Rats Nest bartender, or Yolanda. Already kissed Eda when we slept together. But, I won't. They had nothing to do with getting me stoned. And it would be wrong for me to do so.'
'Still, the question remains. What am I going to do now? I am not going to take Pedro up on his offer for his list of entertainment places and events, until I start to run out of ideas. Which is going to be a while. If ever.'
'Though, I should start to figure out how I should end these pranks. I do need to start to wind them down, and move on.'
'Well, I think I might go to the roof, in a few hours, and take a look around town, in the morning sunlight. That may clear my head, and give me ideas on what I am going to do next.'
(_)
It was around eight thirty AM, as Lee made it up to the top of the stairwell, and to the door to the roof. He found that the door unlocked.
Lee opened the door, and walked outside, onto the large flat concrete roof, surrounded by a meter high concrete brick parapet along the outer walls. There were metal grates place throughout the floor of the roof to collect and transfer water through pipes down the building and into the sewers beneath the hotel building and nearby parking lot.
Lee came to a stop just outside the roof doorway, with the roof door still open. What Lee saw happening on the roof surprised him.
As the sun showed down in the cool, sunny morning day, Lee saw Melvin in t-shirt, sweat pants, and shoe. Melvin was holding a combat knife in his right hand, while doing exercises.
Melvin was about thirty feet from Lee, closer to the middle of the roof. And Melvin had his back turned to Lee.
As such, Lee quickly realized that Melvin did not yet see him.
Lee spent the next few minutes watching Melvin practice what were clearly hand to hand, and melee combat techniques, that Melvin had learned, and mastered, for years.
While the exercises were slightly ridged, with minor jerks, due to the age of Melvin's muscles and joints. Lee could tell the fluidity and precision that Melvin had in his exercisers.
Lee thought, 'Any doubts that Melvin is a badass has finally been put to risk. It takes years of training and experience, to do exercise like that, so well. I am so happy I can call him a friend. Because, I would not want him as an enemy.'
Suddenly, Melvin turned and he saw Lee. He immediately stopped what he was doing. He calmly asked, “Lee, what are you doing here?”
Lee honestly answered, “I came up here to clear my head, as I looked out on the cityscape of the island.”
Melvin responded, “Those are good reasons. I come up here to do the same thing.”
Lee inquired, “So Melvin, what are you doing up here?”
Melvin stated, “I come here to exercise, almost every morning.”
Lee complimented, “And it shows.”
Melvin cracked a grin, as he said, “Thank you.”
Lee asked, “You're welcome. So, what is with the knife?”
Melvin sheathed his blade, in the sheath hidden under his shirt, attached to a strap around his waist, behind his lower back. He then stated, “Long story. But, let's just say that my former captain nicknamed me, The Blade. And with good reason.”
Lee smiled, as he said, in a casual tone of voice, “Did Balalaika give you that name, while you were in Hotel Moscow? Or, did that happen all the way back in Afghanistan?”
Melvin eyes went wide, as he inquired, “How did you know?”
Lee flatly answered, “I have seen the Black Lagoon series. And the Black Lagoon omakes. After seeing Revy and Rock show up. It was not hard to realize what your, trading hotel for another hotel, comment meant.”
Melvin complimented, “That is very insightful of you. And I was given that title, by Balalaika, while serving in Afghanistan.”
Lee replied, “Interesting. Well, I am in hiding, as well. So, I can sympathize with your situation.”
Melvin said, “I appreciate that.”
Lee mentioned, “Also, cracking jokes while in hiding is not a wise idea. Leaving clues for someone, about one's life, is a very bad idea.”
Melvin conceded, “You are correct. And please keep this to yourself.”
Lee replied, “I will.” He mentally added, 'And you won't remember this after the time loop resets.'
Melvin said, “It is nice to have someone to finally talk to about this. Come by the bar in a few of hours, after Revy and her crew leave. And we will talk.
Lee smiled, as he replied, “Sure. And I will be there.” He then turned around, and walked back inside, as Melvin went back to his exercises.
(_)
Two hours later, Lee came by the hotel restaurant, and sat in a stool, at the bar counter. He looked around, and he saw that there was no one else there, except for him and Melvin. Given it was an off hour, the lack of customers and staff was not surprising.
Melvin then walked up to Lee, from across the bar counter, and they had a nice conversation. With Melvin telling Lee some of about his past. And Lee happily listened to Melvin talk for the next hour. Until people started coming in for lunch.
At the end of the conversation, Lee stated, “Well Melvin, thank you for telling me your life's story.”
Melvin happily responded, “No problem. Maybe someday, you will tell me some of your life.”
Lee cracked a grin, as he said, “Maybe.” Lee then got off his bar stool, and exited the restaurant.
(_)
That night, in his suited, Lee was watching TV, as he sat at a chair, at his table. He was also playing solitary with his playing cards.
Lee thought, 'It is interesting that I did not create Melvin, but he has lead such an interesting life story. He even told me some of what happened while Hotel Moscow worked Roanapur, then with Hotel Moscow work for Chang, at her tower, and what Hotel Moscow did after Chang's Tower fell.'
'And if it won't get me in trouble, and he would remember it. I would gladly tell Melvin my life's story. But, I don't like to repeat myself. Which is ironic, considering we are all stuck in a time loop, that only I remember.'
'Though, if this time loop ever does end, maybe I will tell him who I am. But, that is for later.'
Now, I need to probably start wrapping up these pranks and move on to maybe focusing on learning some things.'
'The questions are. How do I wrap up these pranks? Answer. One awesome prank.'
'Then, what do I do? Start learning things from people. It is time I stop having some much children fun. And for me to finally fully grow up and start working towards making myself a better person.'
'And how do I learn convince people to teach me what I want to learn? Simple. I appeal to their greed. And it will be so simple to do. I will use money, and an excuse, in the same way Mister Murray's character, Phil Connors, did it in the Groundhogs Day film. Which I have enjoyed occasionally watching, in the hotel theater.'
'I even made a drinking game out of watching that film. Given the similarities I have with Phil, right now. I was just never a jackass, like Phil use to be, before his time loop experiences.'
'Though, back on track. When it comes to learning these skilled, I will just learn a few hours every day. I do not want to burn myself out. And I have all the time I could ever need. And eventually, I will master what I am learning. And move on to learning something else.'
'Also, given I have enough money to do so. I can learn multiple things during the same day. Without stealing the cash I need. And when I am not taking instructions from someone, I can read.'
'I know this town has a library. I just hope they have english books. At least until I learn to speak, read, and write, spanish. On that note, I need to find someone that knows spanish, whom can teach me. Not, Pedro, nor Melvin, nor the Rats Nest bartender. All three of them are busy.'
'Perhaps, Sam knows spanish. I think I have heard him speak spanish a few times, while I was around him. When I reach the point where I need to learn spanish, I will just ask him. If he does. I will ask him to teach me. Or, even pay him to do so. Even with him girlfriend in town. I can probably convince him to do so. And if he does not know spanish, I will find someone else to learn from. Even if I have to pay them.'
'And paying people really doesn't matter, because after the reset, I get my money back. So, that is a small matter.'
'Though, that will come later. First, I want to learn how to fight some. I have a badass crew in this hotel that could, in theory, teach me a lot. Even though they are after me. Though, they don't know it is me they are after. It is just a matter figuring exactly how to convince them to teach me, without them learning who I am, during one of these time loops.'
'And what I want to learn first.'
Lee then looked down at the cards he is using to play solitary, as he decided what he wanted to learn first. He thought, 'Given the anti-weapons laws in this nation. And with people after me. I need a weapon. And I know just what to make into my weapon. It will will even fit my gambler motif, that I have going.'
' But first, I need to deal with ending this pranking, on a good note, for me. And I know how to end this, on a strong note. Plus, I will meaning to test out a very wild theory I have on the theories of the multiverse.'
(_)
The next morning, Lee got up, got ready, and waited until his usual time to get some breakfast at the hotel breakfast buffet, with Sam.
And even though it was a time loop, and Sam did not remember a thing after each reset, Lee did enjoy spending time with Sam.
After Lee got finished with breakfast with Sam, Lee turned to Sam, as he said, “Sam, good luck with girlfriend today?”
Sam turned to Lee, as he asked, “Thanks. So, what are you doing today?”
Lee honest answered, “I think I will stick around the hotel today.”
Sam replied, “Okay. See you.”
Sam left a small tip on the table. He then got out of his stool, and left for the exit to the hotel hallway.
After Lee saw Sam exit the room, he turned towards where the women were sitting at, in the back right part of the restaurant.
Lee saw that Rock, Revy and the others were at their tables, by the stage.
Lee thought, 'Now, to implement my plan.'
Lee got up from the bar counter, and walked over to women.
As Lee did so, he thought, 'This will also be a good test case for my future plans. And the girls would never think the writer would be crazy enough to hire them to do this. But, I got to maintain my poker face, as I do this. Still, this is going to be the ultimate prank, on so many levels, and it is hard to keep a straight face when I think about. Though, I will have to strive to do so.'
'And if I am right. I already know which one of them is going to take the bait.'
Lee maintained his calm poker mask, as he approached the women.
When he came within ten feet of Revy and Rock's group, the women looked up at him.
As Lee came to a stop, six feet from the nearest table of women, he looked over at them. Though, Lee was careful not to look at Rock, as he asked, “Good morning ladies. I was wondering. Are any of you good with english. Text wise that is?”
Rock spoke up, “I am.”
Lee looked over at Rock, as he thought, 'Just as I guess. Rock would be the volunteer for this prank. As I had hoped she would be.'
Lee used his left hand to pull a roll of hundred dollars bills from his left pants pocket. He held the roll of money in his left hand, as he stated, “I need someone to proofread something. I should be finished with it by tonight. And I am willing to pay for a quick job of looking at what I am working on. I need you to read it, then proof it. The payment is two grand. Half now. Half after the person has looked at my work.”
Revy inquired, “And what are you working on?”
Lee turned to Revy, as he calmly answered, “Just a short story that has been rattling around in my head for a while.”
Suddenly, all the women tensed up.
Lee casually inquired, in an innocent tone of voice, “What is something I said?”
Rock lied, “No. But, I can look at your writings, if you want?”
Lee walked over to the table that Rock and Revy were at. He placed the money on the table. He looked at Rock, as he stated, “I will see you in the lobby, tonight around eleven forty PM. Please, do not be late.”
Lee thought, 'If my timing is correct. Then, this is just enough time to pull this prank, without any chance for them to respond.'
Rock said, “I will be there.”
Lee replied, “Thank you, Rock.”
Lee then turned and walked away. He headed towards the exit to the hotel restaurant.
Meanwhile, Akira spoke up, “Okay. I am going to say what everyone here is thinking. Could Lee actually be the writer? And, if so, he has been under our nose the entire time.”
Revy admitted, “It is possible.”
Ranma pointed out, “But, would the writer be crazy enough to ask us, whom he knows is hunting him, to proofread his own work?”
Natsuru said, “Ranma, does have a point. That would be whole new level of insanity.”
Lotton commented, “Natsuru and Ranma both make good point. Either Lee is not the writer, or he is vastly more insane, and intelligent, than we thought. Because only a lunatic would attempt this. And only a genius would get away with it. That would make Lee, literally a mad genius.”
Aeryn joked, “Or, a redneck.”
Violin just looked over at her wife, and she playfully stuck out her tongue, at Aeryn.
In response, Aeryn gave Violin a casual glance towards her.
Rock stated, “Ranma is right. The writer would never do this. He is not that stupid. Let alone that crazy. And it is a good way for me to make a quick buck.”
(_)
Meanwhile, Lee soon exited the hotel restaurant. He head for the lobby, and the front parking lot.
He then got into his pink car, and drove off to an electronics store that he knew was open.
At the electronics store, Lee bought a laptop computer, computer mouse, and an ergonomic keyboard.
Lee soon brought these items, in a large bag, to his suite.
When he got to his bedroom, Lee closed and locked the deadbolt to door, behind him.
Lee then pulled out the boxes the items were in, from the bag, and he put them on his bed.
After he opened all the items, he set them on the table in his room.
Next, Lee opened the laptop computer. And he hooked the keyboard and mouse to it. Finally, he booted up the laptop, and logged onto the premade account on the laptop.
It took Lee only a couple of minutes to both boot up the computer, and access the internet.
Given, during the time loops, Lee had bought a laptop computer and hooked it to the hotel internet before, this did not take him long to do.
It was another half hour before he downloaded and loaded the web browser, video-audio codec player, torrent program, and the word processing program, he enjoyed using.
Once he was done getting everything ready. He loaded up the word processor, while downloading some music he liked.
He created a file name for what he was about to work on.
While Lee continued his work, he thought, “Fortunately, I have all day, so I have plenty of time to do this. Unfortunately, it will be erased in the next reset. So, I think will limit how much I type on this story. Ten pages should be enough. Though, this story does deserve more like twenty pages. But, I just don't have the time, and I cannot save my work in the next loop.'
'Anyway, the music I like to play, in a single track loop, will be fully downloaded in a few minutes. I will then start playing the music, and I get a bottle of water, from my fridge. After which, I will start my typing magic. And in doing so, test out a theory, as well.'
Outside of getting something to eat, and bathroom breaks, Lee spent the day doing the one things he loved to do most in the world, writing stories.
(_)
It was eleven forty at night, as Lee sat at in cushioned chair, in the hotel lobby. The chair face the check in desk, allowing him to see the hallways of the hotel. In front of the chair was a low laying square table. And directly in front of Lee, across the table, was another cushioned chair that was facing him.
Lee had his laptop computer set on the low table in front of him. The laptop was open, with the story ready to be read from the top of the screen, downward.
Lee thought, 'My one regret is I cannot save this story for the next loop. Now, the question is, will Rock show up. If she doesn't, I am going to be upset, with all this hard work being wasted.'
A few seconds later, Lee saw Rock walked into the lobby with Revy.
Lee thought, 'Good. She came. And she brought Revy with her. Not that is matters.'
As they came closer, Lee waved at them, with his right hand, as he said, “Over here.”
The two women looked over at him.
Revy turned to Rock, as she said, “I am heading to bed.”
Rock looked over at her love, as she replied, “Good night.”
Revy smiled at her love, and then headed for the elevators.
Lee thought, 'This is even better. Which Revy not here, and so close. I decrease my chances of being hurt. Though, there is still a chance of me being hurt. Given, who is here.'
Lee then looked around the lobby, to see some of the rest of Rock and Revy's group sitting in various chairs and couches, in their dresses. As they had just come from the party. And they were not resting, before they headed to bed.
Meanwhile, Rock walked over to Lee, and she sat down in the cushioned chair sitting across the table from the chair Lee was sitting in.
Rock got comfortable in her chair, as she said, “Now, let's see what you have been up to, Lee.”
Lee looked over at Rock, as he honestly stated, “I consider this my finest work in the last few months.” He then leaned forward, used his hands to turn the open laptop around, and push it to the other side of table, so Rock could looked a the story.
Lee then leaned back in his chair, as he added, “Just press the down arrow key to keep reading. It is around ten pages long.
Rock replied, “Okay.” She then began reading the story.
As Rock began reading the story, her jaw dropped at what it was about.
Though, Rock could not stop herself from paging down, as she slowly read the entire story. She read slowly, because she wanted to read every single detail of the story. Because, she felt that she should dare not skim any of the story.
And the story was shocking for her on several levels.
The story was about the first time that Stan and Lewis Lowe went to one of the Lagoon bikini party. How, a few days of staying girls had caused them two go a little crazy, and they tried turned the Lagoon PT boat into a giant, walking robot.
The sisters were caught before they could accomplish their goal. Included, in the story, was the aftermath of the Lowe siblings being caught. Of how no one was harmed, but it was mildly funny. And it came out that if those two stayed girls for three, or more days, they become mad geniuses, like their mother use to be. Instead of them just being sane geniuses in their male forms.
With that being why the Lowe siblings were not punished by Dutch, nor anyone else, for messing with the Lagoon.
Stan and Lowe even helped fix what they did to the Lagoon, and soon the PT boat was back to the way it was.
Also, the brothers, and the parents agreed they would look into medication for this temporary insanity, if it became a problem.
For Rock, as she read the story, the most insane part of the situation was that these events, detailed in the story, actually happened to her, and her friends.
And on a brief mention of those events at the very end of Badasses Of the Multiverse Book Four. With those statements being nowhere near as detailed as this story.
It is eleven fifty-eight PM, when Rock finished reading the story.
As Rock finished reading the story, she looked up to see Lee looking back at her, with a smirk on his face.
While smiling, Lee casually asked, “So, what do you think?”
Rock thought with both fear and fascination of the situation before her, 'Lee is the writer! And he is that insane! Still, how did he know what happened to us, after the fact!? In this situation, the most important question isn't that he is the writer. That is a forgone conclusion. The question is, how he knew all of this after the fact? So, I first have to ask...
Rock demanded, “How did you know that all happened so precisely?”
Lee intentionally stuttered, “D... D... Delirious.”
Rock got the John Candy movie reference. Her eyes widened, as she thought, 'He wrote it. And he likely did so, today, right now, in the present. Not in the past, before we came to this reality. And by doing so, he made it happen. Oh god! The implications of this!' She then accused, “You wrote this story! And by doing so, you made it happen in the past! And you wrote it right now, in the present! You're the writer!”
Lee grin became a little wider, as he responded, “Guilty as charged.”
Rock looked around and she saw a few of her friends walking through the lobby. She turned to them, as she yelled, “Girls! It's him! Lee's the writer! Get him!”
The women looked over at Rock, and then at Lee.
A second later, the women charged at Lee. Though, Rock remained her seat, as she was still to stunned by what she had just experience, to physically confront the writer.
As Lee watched as the girls charge at him, he risked a glance at his wrist watch.
Just as the women were about to reach him, Lee continued to look at his watch, as he said out loud, “Three. Two. One.”
Suddenly, Lee woke up in his bed again, in the darkness of his room.
Lee opens his eyes, as he chuckled. He happily thought, 'Now, that is how you do a prank. Looks like my theory was correct. A person can effect another reality, by writing about it in a separate reality. Even if it deals with the past, present, or future, part of that reality, and it does not effect what is current happening in one's own reality. Or, what is already written about of that reality.'
'I wonder if conflicting writings about one reality is one of the ways a reality branches out into parallel realities. It would explain how such conflicting writing do not create a paradox. And I was careful about that short story I wrote. To make sure it fit with the rest of the stories I wrote about Rock, Revy, and their family and friends.'
'Though, all of this is actually very scary when I think about it. Still, I need one more day. I want to test out if this reality bending with writing works in this reality. Though, I doubt it.'
Later that morning, after Lee got ready for the day, and then got some breakfast with Sam. After he and Sam parted ways for the day, Lee took his car, and he bought a computer, along with a few items for the computer. He brought the items to his room. Next, Lee set up everything on his table, as he did the day before. He booted up the laptop computer, loaded the programs, and he tested the theory, by writing that it would lightly rain in the middle of that afternoon.
Instead, that afternoon, the weather was sunny, and cool, like it was during every time loop on the island.
Though, Lee did hope out a little hope, as he patiently waited for it to rain. Or, at least sprinkle a little.
That night, right after sunset, Lee realized it was not going to rain, as he sat in one of his chairs, at the table in the room, as he faced the glass door to his suite's balcony. With the curtains open.
Lee thought, 'I guess a person can only use their imagination and creative abilities, such as writing, to bend other realities. Not their own reality that person is currently existing in. Though, I can see the reasons for preventing this. If one could been their own realities with their imagination and creative abilities, reality would likely collapse from everyone doing so.'
'Still, this is a major revelation, that could be seriously abuse, on levels never conceived before.'
And as such, this will be one secret that I will need to take to my grave.'
'Now, I need to move onto doing other more productive matters. Starting tomorrow morning. Or, today, after the reset. I still don't know the proper terminology for this situation.'
Lee chuckled a little, as he continued his thoughts, 'But, that is for later. I think I will turn in early. Maybe catch a dream or two, before the rest. I really do miss dreaming a lot. Due to these reset. Still, that cannot be helped. And it a small price for everything I can do, without worry. And there is so much that I can now do, that I don't know when I am going to stop. Or, if I am ever going to stop.'
Lee then got up from the chair he was sitting in. Next, he closed the curtains and got ready for bed.
Soon, Lee turned off the lights and TV in his room, and he went to sleep on his bed. With him having a few dreams, before the reset took effect.
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 1: “De La Plata Podrido.”
Chapter 07: “Day of the Dead: Part Three: Learning The Ropes.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
At the Devil's Hotel, November second, the Day of the Dead, during the next morning of the time loop, after Lee's failed attempt to change his home reality by writing about his home reality, inside Lee's suite, Lee woke up at five AM, and his first thought were. 'Now, onto my lessons.'
Lee then got up, and got dressed to face the day.
Around nine AM, Lee finished his breakfast at the Devil's Hotel restaurant, and Sam had left to be with his girlfriend.
As Lee sat at his usual place at the bar counter of the Devil's Hotel restaurant, he occasionally looked over his right shoulder to see Revy, Rock, and their group, sitting in their usual places in the back of the room.
When Lee saw all of them sitting down, he waited a few minutes.
Lee then got up, and he calmly walked over to the group of twenty-one women.
The women were having their breakfast and talking to each other. Though, some of them had already come in earlier and eaten, with those women just staying to talk to their friends and family.
As Lee approached the group of badass women, he thought, 'I just have to remember that they don't recall a thing from these loops. So, for them, this would be the first time I approach them. And I can pull a variation of that trick I did with Rock, on most of them, that I did to Rock two loops ago. Though, I am sure one or two of them could wise up to where I am doing during a single loop. So, I will still have to be careful.'
'Also, I have to remain calm to sell this trick.'
When Lee reached the tables that the women were sitting at, he came to a stop, a few feet from the tables.
In response, the women looked up at him.
Ranma was the first to speak to Lee, “Morning Lee. What can we do for you?”
Lee was careful not to look at Shenhua, as he calmly requested, “I saw something on TV list night, that I want to approach you ladies about. This person on TV was throwing knives. And I was wondering... Given your group's... Diverse range of skills, if there are any knife throwers in your group… And I am willing to pay for a two hour lesson today.”
Shenhua asked, “I am skilled with knives. How much money are we talking about?”
Lee pulled out a roll of hundred dollar bills in his right hand, from his front left pants pocket. He offered, “Shenhua, I will pay you two grand for two hours of your life. With you teaching me the basics of knife throwing. Half now. Have at the completion of your lessons.”
Shenhua stated, “You have a deal, Lee.”
Lee inquired, “Now, when, and where do you want to meet?”
Shenhua turned to Akira, as she asked, “Is there a dart board in the game room?”
Akira turned to Shenhua, as she answered, “Yes.”
Shenhua turn to Lee, as she said, “Meet me in the game room in one hour.”
Lee looked at his wrist watch, to check the time. It was nine five AM.
Lee turned to look at Shenhua, as he said, “I will see you in the game room at ten o'clock.”
Shenhua replied, “That will be fine.”
Lee said, “And here is the first thousand.” He thought, 'While the the game room will likely be empty then. If someone is there. I will just slip them a fifty dollar bill to leave. That will not cause any problems.'
Lee walked over to the table Shenhua was at. He set the rolled of hundred dollar bills in front of Shenhua. Lee then took a few steps back, as he continued to look at Shenhua.
Shenhua picked up the roll of money, and opened it. She quickly counter ten hundred dollar bills. As she pocketed the money, she looked up at Lee, and gave him a sweet, innocent smile. She said, “Pleasure doing business with you, Lee.”
Lee simply nodded, turned around, and began to walking towards the exit to the hotel restaurant.
With his back turned to the women, Lee thought, with mild amusement, 'That was too easy. Just rinse, and repeat. And I can do this for as long as the time loops continue. I got plenty of money to do a few lessons each day with the girls. But, I am going to start with one lesson a day, and see how that goes.'
Meanwhile, at the tables in the back of the restaurant, where the women were sitting, Sawyer asked, “Are you really going to teach him, Shenhua?”
Shenhua shrugged, “Sure. He is polite, and he is willing to pay good money for a lesson. I will just let him practice with my kunai on the dart board in the game room. I am not exerting myself, and I get to show off my own skills to someone else that shows interest in them. It is a win, win for me.”
Sawyer agreed, “I can see point on that.”
The women then went back to having their breakfast, and talking to each other.
(_)
An hour later, Lee was in the hotel game room in the back left side of the hotel building, as Shenhua walked inside the room.
Lee heard her foot steps, and he turned to face her. Lee thought, 'There were two people in the room, when I got here a few minutes ago. And I had to slip them each fifty dollars each. Both fortunately, both were more than happy to leave, after I paid them the money to do so.'
Meanwhile, Shenhua saw that Lee was the only other person in the room.
As Shenhua approached Lee, she complimented, “I do admire punctuality.”
Lee replied, “Thank you, Shenhua.”
When Shenhua can to a stop in front of Lee, and a few feet away from him, she looked over to her left side, and she saw they were roughly thirty feet from the dart board by the nearby wall. With nothing between her and the dart board.
Lee noticed this, as he commented, “Is thirty feet fine? Or, do you want to be further away? Or, closer?”
Shenhua thought, 'He is thinking ahead. Nice.' She continued to look at the dart board, with her also being able to see Lee, in the right side of her peripheral vision, as she said, “This will be fine.”
Shenhua then used her right hand, as she reached down to his right upper thigh, to pulled out one of her small kunai throwing knives from her right garter belt. Shenhua skillful used her right index finger and middle finger to pulled out the knife, without harming herself.
Lee wisely kept his eyes above Shenhua's neckline. This did not go unnoticed by Shenhua, as she cracked a grin.
Shenhua then held up her right hand, as she held her small throwing knife between her right index and middle fingers, with the blade pointing outward from her hand, for Lee to see, in front of him.
Shenhua continued to look at the dart board, as she held the throwing knife in place. stated, “This is a kunai. A japanese throwing knife. Note how I am holding it.”
Shenhua noticed the Lee was looked very intensely at her right hand, as he studied the position and angle at in how she was holding her knife.
Shenhua added, “Now, watch as I throw this.”
Lee then watched as Shenhua threw her knife at the dart board.
The tip of the blade hit the dead center of the dart board, in the bull's eye.
Shenhua then pulled out another throwing knife, between her fingers.
Though, this time, Lee noted that the angle of how she held the kunai was opposite to how it was before. With her holding the pointed end, with the end of the hilt facing him.
Shenhua turned around to face Lee, as she held the knife blade between her fingers. She said, “Here. You try.”
Lee thought, 'If I accidentally cut her, she will probably kill me. Though, she using proper knife safety. If one hands someone a open bladed knife, they are to have the bottom of the hilt pointed towards the person that he or she is giving the knife to.'
Lee gently gripped small hilt of the blade between his right index and thumb. He did not pulled on the throwing knife. Instead, he waited for Shenhua to let go of the knife.
As Shenhua let go of the knife, she thought, 'Good. As I hoped. Lee knows basic knife safety. That saves me from explaining that to him. And hurting him, if he accidentally cut me.'
Lee carefully used both of his hands to positioned the blade between his right index and middle fingers on the small hilt, using the same the angle the blade, as when the previous knife was in Shenhua's right hand.
Lee then attempted to imitate Shenhua's throw, and he hit the outer edge of the dart board, but the knife bounced off, and landed on the floor.
Shenhua complimented, “Not bad for the first time. Though, I noticed that you were holding the knife at a slightly wrong angle, you let go a bit to soon, and you did not apply enough force.”
She then pulled out another knife, and handed it to him.
Lee was just as careful with retrieving the second knife he was given, as he did with the first knife he had been given.
After Lee positioned the knife between his right fingers, he held his right hand help to Shenhua, as he asked, “Is this the proper position, and angle?
Shenhua looked at Lee's hand, she answered, “Push the blade slightly further away from you.”
Lee used his left fingers to do as he was instructed, in changing the angle of the blade between his right fingers.
Shenhua looked at his hand again, as she said, “That is fine. Now, remember what I said. Let go a split second longer than last time, and use a little more force in your thrown. But not too much force.”
Lee looked over at the dart board, and he did at Shenhua told him to, as took aim, and he threw the throwing knife.
This time, the blade of the knife embedded itself in the wall, right beside the left part of the dart board.
Shenhua stated, “Well, that is an improvement. Now, we just have to work on your aim.”
Shenhua then spent the next two hours introducing Lee on how to throw knives. With Lee carefully collecting the blades, now and then.
Shenhua found Lee to be a good student, whom was polite, and open to what she had to tell him.
And at the end of the first lesson, both of them had told the other that they had a good time with the lessons. Lee then paid Shenhua the other thousand dollars, in ten hundred dollars bills, and the two adults then peacefully parted ways for the rest of the day.
On the next day of the time loop, Lee repeated what he did the first day, with getting Shenhua to teach him how to throw knives.
And Lee continued to do this, day after day.
As Lee improved in his skill, his changed his excuse to that he use to knife thrower when he was younger, and he would like to have someone help him brush up on his skills.
(_)
Three months of time loops later, it was the middle of the afternoon, in the hotel lobby, as Lee has set up two dart boards on the left, lower wall of the lobby, near the windows.
Lee stood thirty feet away from the dart boards, which was about halfway between the entryway side windows, and the wall with the dart boards.
Lee has two small pedestal tables to both his sides, at waist level. He has a stack of a hundred and eight playing cards on each pedestal table.
And Lee was literally using each of his hands to swipe a card from the top of each deck on the two pedestal tables, with out disturbing the cards below the top cards he pulled from the decks.
He then had a card in the index and middle fingers of both his hands, as he throw a card at each of the dart boards, at the same time.
Both cards embedded themselves in the bull of each dart board.
A second later, Lee repeated the process, with the two new cards into the bulls of the board, slicing throw the two cards that had previously been there.
Lee then did it again, over and over, as he was dual wielding his playing cards, by throwing them at the same time.
Lee showed flawless skill in his throwing, as almost all the cards hit the bulls of the board, and either cut into the previous cards, or bounced off, onto the floor.
Though, Lee was also using his precognition to help make sure the cards hit their targets.
Due to all this, Lee was able to mix it to where he could swap out his targets, so instead of throwing the cards in his left hand at the left board, and the cards in his right hand, at the right board, he switched. And Lee started throwing the right cards at the left dart board, and the left cards at the right dart board.
As Lee did this, Lee was still able to constantly hit both bulls at once, with the cards either slicing through the previous cards, and embedding into the dart boards, or bouncing off.
Lee could also throw cards while moving around, with him being able to hit moving targets, as he moved around.
Though, the card throwing form that Lee found was easiest for him, was for him to use his left hand hold the deck of cards, with his left thumb on top sliding the top card, to be pulled next, while throwing one card at a time, with his right index, and middle fingers.
Most of the people in the front lobby silently watched as Lee did this. The other people in the lobby briskly left to get their friends, and bring them back to the front lobby to see the spectacle that Lee was put on.
By the time Lee finished, he looked to his right, to see the room was crowded. With almost all the crowd looking at him, with happy expressions on their faces.
As the people realized that Lee had run out of cards, and was finished with his trick, they all started clapping in applause for the skills Lee had just demonstrated.
While Lee looked around, he thought, with amazement, 'Wow. I can really put on a show. And I do enjoy the applause.'
'Also, a card thrower is sometimes call a death dealer. Pun intended. I have literally become a dual wielding death dealer. Cool. The only down side to throwing with playing cards is that I can only throw one card at a time, per hand. This is because the angle has to be perfect with the throw, or the card will go sideways and fall harmlessly onto the ground, or it would just bounce off what it hit.'
'Though, Shenhua did teach me how to properly throw multiple knives at one, in one hand. And I can do it with both hands at the same time.'
'Still, a deck of cards will make a nice, hidden weapon to have. And it will not run afoul of this nations anti-weapons laws.'
Lee then noticed Revy, Rock, Shenhua, and their group, including the teenagers, standing together, as they watching.
From the looks on their faces, and from the other faces, he saw they were all truly impressed with his skills.
Shenhua asked, “Who taught you how to throw cards like that?”
Lee did not show any outward emotion, as he laughed on the inside. Lee casually stated, “Just an asian lady I know.”
Shenhua replied, “Okay.”
Ranma complimented, “Nice circus trick.”
Lee said, “Thank you.”
Revy smirked, as she stated, “Not bad.”
Lee replied, “Thank you for the compliment.” Lee thought, 'Given her attitude, that is probably the best I am going to get out of her. But, it is clear everyone else is impressed. Now, I wonder how easily it will be to get Shenhua to teach me to fight with long knives.'
(_)
A few time loops later, it was morning, as Lee was having breakfast with Sam, at the bar counter, in the hotel restaurant. In their usual seats, side by side, with Lee to Sam's right side.
As Lee ate his meal, he was thinking about his current problems. Lee thought, 'Since I have having such a wonderful time learning Shenhua, on how to throw knives, I did not realize I would have problems learning from her, on how to fight with long knives.'
'Unfortunately, every time I convinced her to teach me, she became suspicious. So, learning from her, on that, is out. Still, I feel I will still be able to likely convince her to teach me how to read, writer, and speak, chinese, at some point in these time loops.'
'Still, I need to find someone to teach me at least the basics in how to fight.'
Lee then looked over, to his left side, at Sam, as he continued his thoughts, 'I have seen Sam in a few fights with drunks at the Rats Nests. He can hold his own in a fight. And I can at least learn the basics from him. Now, if I could just convince him to help me.'
Lee said, “Sam?”
Sam looked over at Lee.
Lee calmly said, “Sam, I know you are busy with your girlfriend, today. But, I have a favor to ask of you.”
Sam inquired, “What is it, Lee?”
Lee let out a breath. He then requested, in a polite tone of voice, “I know you know how to fight. I was wondering if you could give me a few lessons, before you join with your girlfriend, today.”
Sam asked, “How much you willing to pay?”
Lee wondered, 'How did he know I was going to offer money for these lessons?... Wait a minute. He might be guessing, or joking. Either way, he is clearly interested.'
Lee answered, “Two grand, U.S. cash.”
Sam took a very hard look into Lee's eyes for a few seconds. Sam then relaxed his expression, as he kindly offered, “I will do it for free.”
Lee happily replied, “Thank you, Sam.”
Sam stated, “Still, I got to call my girlfriend about not meeting her. But, I think she will understand my reasons.”
Lee inquired, “Okay. So, when, and where, do you want to do this?”
Sam calmly answered, “There are some mats in the hotel gym. We will do start about thirty minutes after breakfast. I have found it is best to let one's food settle, before sparing. And what you have on will be fine to be trained in. Though, I suggest losing the hat, glasses, and jacket.”
Lee thought, 'Sam, you are not going to remember this after the reset, so this will not be a problem.' He said, “That is fine with me.”
Sam replied, “Good.”
The two men then went back to eating their breakfast.
(_)
An hour later, in the hotel gym, there were only a few people in he gym at the time.
On the matted floor, Lee found himself thrown on his back, by Sam, for a third time.
Sam looked down at Lee, as he offered Lee a hand up, with his right hand, for a third time.
Lee took Sam's right hand, for a third time, as he said, “Thanks.”
While Lee stood up, Sam stated, “I take it no one ever taught you how to defend yourself.”
As Lee found his footing, he let go of Sam's right hand. He admitted, “No one has ever trusted me enough to do so.”
Sam had a sorrowful look in his eyes, as he stated, in a sad tone of voice, “That is unfortunate. But, if you are willing to learn, I will teach you. No matter how long it takes.”
Lee replied, “I am willing to learn.”
Sam stated, “Good. But, I am going to need commitment from you.”
Lee promised, “You will have it.”
Sam commented, “Also, given you are not in great shape, you will have to overcome that limitation.”
Lee responded, “I seem to thrive on adversity.”
Sam smiled, as he said, “Good. Very good. Now, let me show you how to properly throw a punch.”
(_)
Two months of time loops later, in the hotel gym, for the first time in his life, Lee had learned enough, that he was able to thrown Sam onto his back. Lee didn't even use his precognitive abilities. It was purely because he had become so skilled, that he was able to do that move against Sam.
Lee offer Sam a hand up, with his right hand, as he gave Sam a warm smile.
Lee thought, 'Now, this is a nice turned around, to the usual time of Sam offering me a hand up.'
Sam returned Lee's warm smile, as he took Lee's right hand.
As Sam stood up, he stated, “Well, after this first sparing match, I can say that you clearly have some skill. But, I think I can teach you to improve on what you know.” Sam then found his footing, and he let go of Lee's right hand.
Lee grinned, as he replied, “That is why I am learning from you.”
(_)
Months of loops later, Lee was able to fight Sam to a standstill.
And after a few hours of sparing, two men quit their sparring session for the day.
Lee and Sam stood on the mats, as looked at each other, while they let their bodies calm down from the physical exertion they just put on their bodies.
Sam commented, “I honestly don't think there is anything I can teach you, that you don't already know.”
Lee smiled, as he responded, “Good. That just means this match was a good way to gauge my abilities. Now, how about I also treat you to lunch in a little while.”
Sam returned Lee's smile, as he replied, “Sounds great.”
As both men walked out of the gym, Lee asked, “Sam. Do you know spanish, as well?”
Sam answered, “Yes. I can speak, read, and write, it.”
Lee politely requested, “Could you please teach me some spanish?”
Sam stated, “Sure. We will start this afternoon, after lunch. I will call my girlfriend, to let her know I got held up. We will just have to settle for supper, and an evening together, for today.”
Lee replied, “Thank you, Sam.” He mentally added, 'Okay. I am good with one lesson. Let's see if I can do more than one lesson, during each reset. And if I budget my time, and money, wisely, I can afford a few lessons at the same time, every day. This will cut down the time I will need to learn everything I am interested in learning.'
Lee then had a pleasant lunch with Sam, and an enjoy introductory lesson from Sam, on learning the spanish language.
(_)
A few years of time loops later, it was eleven fifty-three PM, in the Devil's Hotel. Violin and Aeryn decided to leave the dance party and head for their rooms.
As they walked through the front lobby, Violin noticed someone doing something she thought was off.
Violin turned to her spouse, as she said, “I will join you up in the suite in a minute.”
Aeryn replied, “Okay.” Aeryn turned and walked to the elevators.
Meanwhile, Violin walked over to who she saw.
Violin soon came to a stop in front of the person she watched to confront.
Violin stood in front of Lee, as she looked down at what Lee was doing. She saw that Lee was sitting down a lobby chair, in front of a table. On the table, he had a laptop computer he was looking at, while he used earphones to listen to what was on the computer.
Violin saw that Lee was watching a live action TV show.
Lee noticed Violin standing over him. He took off the earphones, as he looked up at her.
Violin inquired, “I thought you didn't like computers?”
Lee smirked, as he casually admitted, “I lied.”
Violin inquired, “What are you watching?”
Lee answered, “Well for today, I decided to take a day off. I have been downloading, and watching the Babylon 5 series, from the beginnings, with the pilot episode. I am over half way through season one. You are the first person to call me on this lie I made.”
“It is not surprising, given everyone is busy today with their own fun, they would not noticed me doing a few things off.'
'Though, given my situation, I do find it ironic that I am currently watching the episode, Babylon Squared. Not one of my favorite episodes. But, it has a nice tie in with the entire series, two seasons later, with the two part episode, War Without End.”
Violin though, 'This episodes dealt with time travel. I don't like where the conversation is going. I need to find out more.' She asked, “What situation?”
Lee casual said, “This time loop situation.”
Violin asked, “You are in a time loop?”
Lee corrected, “No. We are in a time loop. For your next question, as far as I can guess it is a real time loop, and reset. Not alternate reality traveling, with everyone else branching out along the multiverse.”
Violin thought, 'Oh hell. He is talking very casually about the multiverse. Like he has been at this for a while.”
Violin questioned, “How long has we been stuck in the time loop?”
Lee answered, “I lost track of time a while back. Given there is no way to for me to mark time in this temporal loop, I would guess a number of years.”
Violin inquired, “How does this time loop work? What are the rules?”
Lee stated, “When it comes to rules. The best I can figure, the rules of this time loops are a cross between Groundhog's Day rules, and Stargate SG1 Window of Opportunity rules. If nothing happens, everything resets at twelve midnight. Which is...”
Lee checked his wrist watch. He looked back up at Violin, as he continued, “Five and a half minutes, with change. If I die, or someone leaves this reality, it resets. And when it resets, I wake up, unharmed, and well rested, before dawn. And everything, and everyone, is back they way they were this morning. With no memory of the previous events.”
Violin responded, “We have less than six minutes before the time loop resets?... Wait a minute, you know about reality travel?”
Lee smirked, “That's right, Johnny-girl. At least this time loop is a lot better than when you got stuck in that crappy temporal loop, over that singularity on Moya. Before the rest of the crew were your friends.”
Violin asked, with worry in her tone of voice, “How do you know who I really am?... You're the writer?”
Lee continued smiling, as he said, “Yep. It is so refreshing to not have to hide, or lie, at the moment. I loath doing, either. And there no point in you hurting me. I am answering all your questions. And you are not going to recall this in less than five and a half minutes. Along with everyone else, but me. Though, I think somewhere, deep down in yourself, you will remember these answers. So, let's keep this civil.”
Violin inquired, “Okay. Let's get the rest of the important questions out of the way. Did you cause this time loop?”
Lee answered, “No. Also, do not I know how it started. Nor, do I know who, or what started it.”
Violin questioned, “Are you planning to stop it?”
Lee replied, “Sorry, Violin. But no. I have no plans to stop the time loops for many reasons. One of the main reason is that I am dying of cancer. This is probably my last chance to live a little, before I finally die. One way, or another.”
“And look at the situation I am in. We are in a city of adventure. Living in a hotel resort, by the beach. Okay, it is too cold to go swimming. But, everything else is cool about this place, and situation. I am surround by badass babes. This loop is happening during a day when the entire city is throwing a festival. And there are no consequences for my actions.”
Violin blurted out, “Good lord. This must be like heaven for you.”
Lee shrugged, as he replied, “I figure this is about as close as I am every going to get to heaven.” He then smirked, happily commented, “My own personal Valhalla.”
Violin realized, as she responded, “Hold on. No consequences? What have you already done to us?”
Lee answered, “Nothing to bad. I pulled a couple of wicked pranks with you and your friends, for getting me stoned. But, for the most part, all I have done is steal a few kisses from you women. And I don't plan on doing anything horrible. If you noticed, I never went that route with my writings.”
Violin let out a sigh of relief. She agreed, “No. You didn't.”
Lee commented, “Besides. You shouldn't be complaining. From what I understand, during the time loop, every day you are having four hours of good loving with your wife.”
Violin conceded, “That is true. So, what are you currently up to in these loops?”
Lee stated, “Well, except for the occasional off day, like today, I keep myself pretty busy. If I am going to be stuck in a time loop, I am going to learn some things. And my current schedule is this. In late the morning, I spend two hours learning how to formally dance, from Sawyer.”
Violin commented, “Yea. She is a pretty good dancer.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. I overheard that in one of these loops, from Lotton talking to Ranma, that Sawyer is not only now a skilled singer, but she is an excellent formal dancer. And she is. I am glad Sawyer is learning, and improving herself, beyond violent means.”
Violin agreed, “So, am I. It shows there is an actual human being under that chainsaw wielding maniac.”
Lee commented, “I already know that, from her interactions with Lotton and Shenhua. And when I am finished learning dancing from her, I plan for her to teach me how to sing.”
Violin inquired, “So, are you going to learn singing from Sawyer? Or Ranma? Or both?”
Lee complimented, “You are a sharp as ever. I am going from Sawyer. From the karaoke nights, I have heard both of them singing plenty of times. And I feel that Sawyer has a firmer grasp of the mechanics and fluidity of singing, than Ranma.”
“Ranma is more of the hard rocking singer, while Sawyer has slightly better understanding of pitch control. And that is why I choose Sawyer, over Ranma, on the issue of singing, as my teacher.”
“Though, Ranma has some real skills at singing, as well. So, after I finish learning to sing from Sawyer, I may take a few rock and roll singing lessons from Ranma.”
Violin inquired, “Okay. That is the morning. What about the afternoon?”
Lee answered, “Well, after lunch, I spent two hours learning how to speak, read, and write chinese, from Shenhua. I figure if I am going to learn a language, I should learn it from someone whose native in that language, from one who knows my native language.”
Violin said, “I am surprised you did not learn about knives from her.”
Lee stated, “Actually, I did. I learned how to throw knives from her. And I am so good, I am not only deathly with throwing knives, but playing cards, as well. But, she kept becoming to suspicious of me when I tried to learn how to fight with long knives. So, I dropped that line of approach.”
Violin asked, “That is understandable. So, where do you go next, during your schedule?”
Lee responded, “I spend an hour learning to play the piano, from a skilled piano teacher I found in town. Then, I have the rest of the day and night free. I am doing well with all three of these lessons. And when I am finished learning the piano, I plan to move to learn the saxophone, and a few other instruments. Though, I am not sure what I am going to get you girls to teach me next.”
Violin said, “It sounds like you are getting the college experience.”
Lee said, “I really wouldn't know. I didn't really go to college. But, I guess this could be viewed as the case. And at least I don't have homework, nor tests to do.”
Violin let out a smile giggle. She then inquired, “True. Well, as John, I did go to college. And it sounds like that is the case. So, how much are you paying for these lessons? I know the girls don't work on the cheap.”
Lee stated, “You are right about that. The standard rate for any of your girls is two thousand, U.S. for two hours of your time. Half before the lesson begins and half after the lesson is concluded.”
Violin asked, “How much do you have on hand?”
Lee answered, “Before the time loop started, I had amassed just over seven grand. Which I have on hand. I have become very good at the poker. My poker face, and skills at reading people's faces have become incredible, even before the time loop start.”
“I don't even need my precognitive abilities to clean someone out. Though, such abilities can help in doing so.”
“I spent two for a lesson with Sawyer, two for a lesson with Shenhua. I spent on grand for the piano lessons. And I spent five hundred for the laptop and equipment. Also, I hold back fifteen hundred, in case the loop stops. That way I will still be okay, money wise.”
Violin responded, “That is a wise precaution.”
Lee replied, “I know. And thank you.”
Violin replied, “You're welcome.” She then realized something, as she stated, “Hold up. With the time loop, the money goes back into your pocket, and they never actually get paid. Like Phil in Groundhogs Day.”
Lee's smiled, as he responded, “Exactly. It is the perfect con. I appeal to your greed, and none of you realized, until now, that you never actually get paid. Though, I would like your opinion, on that matter.”
“Which do you think would hurt the women more, in their pride, more? Realizing that I, the person they hunted, cheated them out of their money? Or, realizing that I tricked them into teaching me how to do a number of things? Including, them helping me take a few levels in badass. Though, only a few, not a lot.”
Violin pointed out, “Hard call. But, I can tell you this. While I am not that upset, if the others learn how you have been conning them, they are literally going to tear you apart, limb from limb.”
Lee continued to smile, as he casually said, “Oh. I know. Though, I doubt you are going to mention this to them, even if you remember it, because you are such a nice person.”
Violin conceded, “True. I don't think you deserve that type of fate.”
Lee said, “I am glad you feel that way. Still, I do have back up plans if the reset does not happen, and unexpectedly stops. I will still have enough money to live on for the foreseeable future, and any lessons I was taught, for the previous day, could be excused for just a personal, one time interest, in brushing up my skills. With me being coy about my abilities, out of pretending to be humble.”
Violin admitted, “That is smooth. I am surprised that you never conned me into teaching you physics.”
Lee shamelessly replied, “I did con you. You taught me for six months, from basic algebra and physics, and you taught me another six month, up to advanced astrophysics. I know know the basics to understanding wormholes, and reality travel formulas.”
“Also, during that time, I learned to play the guitar and read sheet music. And Sam taught me how to speak, read, and write spanish. I am now fluent in that language. Earlier than that, Sam also taught how to fight. I could now probably fight Akira to a standstill, in a hand to hand fight. Though, I could not hold a candle to you, Revy, Aeryn, Shenhua, Natsuru, and Ranma.”
Violin commented, “I am glad you realize that.”
Lee stated, “Of course. Speaking of which, I eventually plan to start convincing Akira and Natsuru to teach me how improve my firearm skills. Revy is just too much of a handful to approach, when is comes to loaded weapons.”
Violin shook her head for a couple of seconds, as she commented, “You got that right. And I shouldn't be surprised that you conned me, or Aeryn, as well. Though, I am surprised that you didn't trick me into teaching you engineering.”
Lee shrugged, “I discounted Aeryn because she is not familiar with Earth weaponry. And when it comes to you. Well, I would have had you teach me engineering, but I never could figure out how to get the equipment for it here, on short notice. Still, I did also spent another month of you teaching me how to take care, take apart, and properly put back together, my pink Cadillac.”
Violin cracked a smile, as she said, “Let me guess, I showed off my super-strength by picking up the engine block?”
Lee let out a laugh. He commented, “Yes. And you even picked up the car a few times. I have found that you really like to show off when you want too, and when you can get away with it.”
Violin replied, “Yep”
Lee commented, “I am probably one of the few people whom realize how powerful you truly are. If you were properly trained, and kept the fighting on the ground, you could probably take down Ironman, and hold your own against Thor.”
Violin smiled, as she teased, “And I am such a nice girl, too.”
Lee said, “Yes. You are. I made sure of that. Including giving you a good second childhood. But, I really didn't change your personality too much. I just kept the same basic personality you had as John, only as a girl.”
Violin conceded, “I will give you that one. But, what is with the fangirl mode? I admit it is fun to experience. But, it is also embarrassing.”
Lee pointed out, “Let's be honest, Violin. When you were John, you were a diehard fanboy. The only reason you survived in the Uncharted Territories for those first few months was due to your genre savviness from being a fanboy.”
Violin admitted, “You got me there. But, you still turned me into my own biggest fan. Do you have any idea of the type of sexual fantasies I had as Violin, about my time at John, before I remembered I was John?”
Lee surmised, “I would guess, several. That is why I even wrote the personality merger in a sexual way. And given the twisted nature of the Farscape series itself, I could not think of a more twisted, yet unique way, to bring you back from the dead. You have already come back in almost all the other ways there are.”
Violin responded, “You are right about that.”
Lee said, “Any other way would have left the read rolling their eyes in such cliches. And I loath cliches.”
Violin stated, “So, do I. And honestly, that death you gave me what not the worst. And you did give me a good second childhood.”
Lee said, “I know. And I always respected you, Violin.”
Violin replied, “Thank you, Lee.”
Lee commented, “You're welcome. You know, Violin. You are also probably the multiverse's first redneck, alien asian.”
Violin let out a laugh. She then stated, “You know what? I probably am. I seem to be a first for a number of things.”
Lee inquired, “True. By the way, how are Dargo, Chiana, Little D, Pilot, and Moya?”
Violin answered, “All are fine. With Dargo and Chiana enjoying their marriage.”
Lee replied, “Good. Also, about that joke I left open with you, and their wedding. Were you the best man? Or, the bridesmaid?”
Violin smiled, as she stated, “I used a reality device to be both. First, I wore a tux that fit my new form, and I was Dargo's bestman. After the wedding itself, I went back in time, and wore a gown, to be a bridesmaid for Chiana, with my wife. Then, Aeryn and I danced in our gowns at the after party.”
Lee responded, “Nice. With the imagination and inventiveness I would expect from you.”
Violin continued to smile, as she happily replied, “Thanks.”
Lee inquired, “Though, now that I think about it. I wonder, does Harvey remember the time loops? When I brought him back, I gave him a pretty strong memory.”
Inside Violin's mind, Harvey mentally said, 'I remember.'
Violin realized the implications of Harvey keeping this secret from her, as she growled, more towards Harvey, than Lee, “He does.”
Lee cursed, “Damn. That could cause problem... Wait. Harvey, I will make a deal with you. You have obviously been quiet about these time loops, so far. And since we are both in really good situations that we both like, I will be nice to Violin and Aeryn, in exchange for your continued silence.”
Harvey mentally responded, 'Deal.'
Violin frowned.
Lee commented, “From your face expression, Violin, I am going to take it that Harvey said, yes.”
Lee thought, with relief, 'That is another bullet I dodged. Also, with a second person remembering the time loops, this proves this is a temporal reset, instead of me creating an alternate reality every time there is a reset.'
Meanwhile, inside Violin's mind, Violin mentally yelled, 'Harvey?! Why didn't you tell me?!'
Harvey mentally explained, in a calm manner, 'Because the sex during with Aeryn, during these time loops, have been awesome. Hell, the entire day has been awesome. Having a wonderful day on the town. Come home, have four hours of great sex. Then, cap off the evening with dancing, and partying.'
Harvey then continued, with a sense of wildness in his tone of voice, 'I say, let the good times roll!'
Violin realized, in thought, 'That is why you have been suggesting a few things during the day, and while we were in bed?'
Harvey mentally replied, 'Yes. That is why I did so. I did want to keep things from being boring. By the way, you might one to ask him how long we have left until the reset.'
Violin asked, “How long do we have?”
Lee looked at his watched, as stated, “Less than ten seconds. 7... 6... 5... 4...” He looked up at Violin, as he added, in a happy tone of voice, “By the way, have a great time, Harvey.”
While Lee could not hear Harvey's response.
Inside Violin's mind, Harvey smiled, as he mentally said, 'Thank you.'
The next thing Lee knew, he was back in his bed, in the darkness of the early morning.
Lee smiled, as he thought, 'That was an interesting time loop. I need to remember that Harvey remembers, as well. Still, as long as he is happy with Violin's situation, and by extension, Aeryn's situation, I have nothing to worry about from Harvey, Violin, nor Aeryn.'
'And as long as I leave Violin and Aeryn alone, for the most part. I might even want to talk to Harvey, through Violin, if I one day get desperate enough to talk to someone that remembers. Though, I doubt that will happen. I have always been a bit of a loner. Yet, most times, it was not by choice.'
Lee the got up to face the same day, that offered him different challenges, that he chose.
(_)
A year of time loops later, Lee got around to learning more about using, and firing, firearms.
When it came to firearm experts, among Revy and Rock's group, there were four women present that were masters in such crafts. They were, Aeryn, Revy, Akira, and Natsuru.
While it was tempting to have Aeryn teach him, Lee knew beforehand that the alien woman was way to strict a teacher. And as Lee had once told Violin, Aeryn was not familiar with Earth base weaponry. Which was the only type of weaponry that Lee had access too.
And while Revy was a firearms expert, Lee discounted Revy due to her constant bad mood.
So, that left Akira, and Natsuru. Lee paid both of them a thousand a piece for their time. And they were more than happy to teach Lee, together, to use firearms.
They even let Lee practice with their own weapons and ammo. Which consisted mostly of Akira's pistols and ammo.
Along with this, there were a number of times, in which Lee was able to talk Pedro into loaning him a few rifles, semi-automatic pistols, sub-machine guns, machine guns and the ammo for those weapons.
It was not hard to convince Pedro to loan Lee said equipment, once Pedro swiftly realized that they are in a time loop, and Pedro would get these items back in the next reset.
Pedro even told Lee, that Pedro justified giving Lee access to these weapons, because if Lee became a badass, himself, it would increase Lee's chances of stealing one of the reality devices that belonged to Rock and Revy's group. With Lee then escaping into the multiverse, and those badass women following Lee, and leaving Plata Podrido for good.
After Lee had the weapons and ammo packed in the trunk of his car, he then went back to the Devil's hotel to pick Akira and Natsuru up, and to head off to where they would teach Lee to use firearms.
The place they went to a secluded part of the island, by the beach, where Lee practiced in front of the sand berms in that location, while using soap boxes to set cans, tree limbs, and other items, to shoot at from a distance.
Akira focused on teaching Lee how to use pistols. And Natsuru taught Lee how to use rifles, sub-machine guns, and machine guns.
Also, the two women were nice enough to teach Lee gun safety, how to take proper care, and how to clean firearms. They also taught him how take apart and put back together the firearms they taught him to use.
They even taught Lee how to safely spin pistols around in his fingers, by the pistol guards, without shooting himself. Though, Lee had yet to shot himself in a time loop. And he had not intention of finding out what that felt like.
While Lee never got the hang of dual wielding pistols, he was now dangerous with a single pistol in his right hand. And he was a fair shot with his left hand. He was just not that good, when he had to divide his attention between to weapon. Except when he used his precognitive. But, he considered using his precognitive abilities to be unreliable in combat situations, unless it was an absolute emergency.
Lee even found Akira and Natsuru to be as nice as he expected them to be. And he did enjoy their company, as they taught him. Along with Ranma coming along, to keep her two lovers company, on the few times Lee asked that their lover, Ranma could come with them. And during those times, Akira and Ranma even gave Lee some basic lessons on how to fight with long knives, and how to fight, in hand to hand combat, against someone with long knife, other melee weapons, or when the opponent was using two melee weapons at once.
Lee even paid Ranma for a few of these lessons.
Also, Lee was also polite. And at the end of each lesson, as he paid them, he thanked Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma, for the lessons they gave him.
Eventually, there reached a point that Akira and Natsuru told Lee that there was nothing left they could teach him. And soon after, Lee felt he was skilled enough to try to make a bet with Revy, that he had wanted to do for years, while in the time loop.
(_)
A few time loops later, after Akira and Natsuru concluded their lessons with Lee, it was morning, as Lee approached Revy and Rock's group, again, in the hotel restaurant, at the tables, by the stage, where the group of women were having their breakfast.
As Lee approached the women's tables, he thought, 'This is the third time I have tried this. Even with my precognition, it is difficult to do this. But, I really want to know that answer to that question. And given Revy's mood, this is the only way I can get a straight answer from her, without getting hurt.'
When Lee came to a stop, in front of their tables, the women turned to look at Lee.
Lee said, “Good morning, ladies. Revy, I was wondering, when you are finished with breakfast, if you would be willing to wager a little, harmless bet?”
And for the third time, Revy said the same exact sentence, “Depends on what it is.”
Lee pulled out the cash, as he said, “The bet is five hundred american dollars that I can use one of your pistols to shoot a can three times, in the air, before it hits the ground. If I lose, you get the money. If I win, you answer a question for me. And it is not an embarrassing question. You game?”
Revy smirked, as she stated, “Sure. I have never seen you shoot a gun while here. This will be the quickest five hundred I have made in a while.”
Lee said, “I will see you in an hour, in the lobby.”
Revy replied, “Fine with me.”
Lee then turned, and walked away from the group of women.
(_)
An hour later, Lee met with Revy in the hotel lobby.
Both adults then exited the building for the parking lot.
So, Lee was driving Revy down the road, in his pink Cadillac, with the top and windows of the car being down.
A few minutes later, Lee drove them to a deserted part of the beach. The same part of the beach that Akira and Natsuru had train Lee in the use of firearms.
They got out, and Lee pulled out a can of cola that he had previously finished, and he had put in the care, earlier that day.
As Revy got out of the car, Lee walked over to a nearby rock, and placed the can on top of the rock.
The rock was about twenty feet from the car.
Lee then walked back to the car, and towards Revy.
When Lee reached Revy, the redheaded woman pulled out one of her semi-automatic pistols, and handed it to Lee.
Revy then stood back, and quietly watched.
Lee checked to make sure the safety to the gun was turned off. He then pulled back the slide, to seat the first bullet in the chamber. Because he knew, as a rule, from watching the Black Lagoon anime, as a precaution, Revy preferred to keep the chambers of her pistols empty, when she was not using her weapons.
Next, Lee turned towards the empty can. He pointed the gun at the can, he took aim, and he fired at an angle that sent the can spinning upward. He then shot it again, keeping it in the air, and going up.
The next shot started to send the can going away from them, but Lee quickly, shot and hit the can, one last time, before it hit the ground.
Lee thought, 'That last shot just kept giving me trouble.'
Lee put the safety back on the pistol, as he turned around. He checked the grip he had on the pistol. After which, he handed pistol back to Revy, by the barrel, so she could grab the grip.
Revy took the pistol, and holstered it. She said, “Not bad. So, what is your question?”
Lee asked, “Is that red hair your natural hair color?”
Revy cracked a grin, as she answered, “Sure is.”
Lee responded, “Thank you. So, is there anywhere I can drop you off? Or, do you want to go back to the hotel?”
Revy continued to smile, as she responded, “Back to the hotel is fine.”
Both of them got back into the car, with Lee in the driver's seat, and Revy in the front passenger’s seat.
As Lee started the car, he mentally reflected, 'Just as I thought. Even with a bad mood. Winning money, or seeing something that interests her, will put Revy in a good mood for a while. Now, with the firearms taken care of, I want to see if I can learn japanese.'
'I found spanish and chinese were not that hard to learn. So, I doubt japanese will be that difficult for me. The only question is if I can fool my teachers, long enough to learn it.'
'Even towards the end, with both Sam, on learning spanish, and Shenhua, on learning chinese, they were getting suspicious on my language skills. But, I am now fluent in those languages, and that it what matters.'
'Still, I need to work on a plan to deal with these language issues, if it suddenly becomes a problem, should these time loops end.'
Lee then drove Revy back to the hotel.
(_)
During the next few months of time loops, Lee found it difficult to learn japanese. But, not due to the language itself, but from those that could teach him it.
Being practical, Lee first approach Rock on learning japanese. Lee figures, since Rock at one point worked as a translator, between japanese and english speakers, that she would be the best choice to learn to speak, read, and write, japanese from.
Lee made the same basic money offer and basic pitch line, to Rock, that he had used countless times before on the members of her various group.
And the money offer and the line worked. Unfortunately, after a month, Rock became suspicious of Lee sudden development in learning japanese.
Due to this, Lee went with plan, B, on the issue. And he was able to convince, Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma, to teach him japanese, for a fee.
Unfortunately, they soon became suspicious as well, of Lee knowledge of the japanese language.
So, since Lee didn't know anyone else on the island, that knew japanese, Lee had to table learning japanese for the moment.
Though, Lee did promise himself, that he would find someone on the island, to learn japanese from, sometime during these time loops.
Still, at the same time, Lee was learning other skills, as well.
One such skill came from Melvin.
It was no secret that Melvin had military experience, and Lee used that general knowledge, to his advantage.
After finding someone in the island with the equipment Lee was looking for, Lee met with Melvin one afternoon.
Lee made the same deal with Melvin, in cash, as he did the women. And it worked.
And so, that afternoon, Melvin taught Lee how to rappel down down a building. In this case, the thirty story Devil's Hotel building, with the rappelling gear Lee bought. With Lee and Melvin having a great time doing so.
And over the course of the loops, through the years, Lee learned many more things, from many people.
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 1: “De La Plata Podrido.”
Chapter 08: “Day of the Dead: Part Four: Party Until The End.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
Lee's home reality, Earth, Mexico, De La Plata Podrido. During November second, the Day of the Dead.
Over the years of time loops, Lee watched a lot of sunrises on the beach, and sunsets over the land. He even painted a few of them, after he learned how to draw.
Lee had learned that sometimes, the small things can make life worth living.
During this time, Lee became a person of many talents. He even learned how to read lips. Though, it was only for reading the lips of those speaking english.
But, that did not mean that Lee didn't have fun, now and again. And harmless fun at that.
One time, Lee piped into the speakers of the Devil's Hotel front lobby, some wonderful music that he was sure no one there, let alone Revy and Rock's crew, had likely ever heard of, nor listen to.
And for that day, the front lobby speakers played some of Lee's favorite musical tracks by the group know as, Two Steps From Hell. And it seems that most of the people that listened to those music pieces, enjoyed them.
In Lee's journey through the near endless loops, Lee strived to become a renaissance man.
Lee found that with his writing skills, he was also a natural poet. And he did write a few short stories, as well. Even though, the time loops erased his works.
Lee even became a skilled painter.
On two separate occasions, Lee had draw picture of groups of nude women. One time was Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru, in the nude, as women. The other time, was Shenhua, Sawyer, and Lotton, in the nude, as women.
Both sets of women were pleased with Lee's work, in both detail and the colors he used on his canvas.
Lee deeply regretted that he could not have save his works art, due to the resets.
And he did not have to pay the women for their time. All he did was in the morning of the time loop in questions, Lee went into the hotel restaurant, at breakfast, with a pencil and paper, on a clipboard.
Then, as the women sat at the table, he drew them. And before they left, he walked over to them, and showed them his skill. They were impressed with his work, and they asked for paintings to be done of them. And Lee was more than happy to oblige them.
Lee also became a skilled cook, and a fairly good caterer. And though he could not stomach mexican food, he did enjoy the taste of it, and a number of other types of food.
So, Lee timed it, where that he would eat mexican food, or other types of food he liked, but his stomach did not, at fifteen minutes before midnight, so that he could enjoy the meal, without having later stomach problems.
Also, Lee learned how to carve wood with a chainsaw, into wonderful sculptures. Lee learned this skill from Sawyer. Whom Lee was not surprised to find that the petite black haired woman was an artist with her chainsaw.
Lee found Sawyer was not only a wonderful singing and dance instructor, but she was a wonderful teacher to learn from in the art of the chainsaw. Though, they only chainsawed wooden objects.
Lee finally did find someone in town to teach him how to speak, read, and write, japanese.
Lee was tempted to con Melvin into teaching him how to speak and read russian, but considering how nice Melvin had been to him, Lee decided not to. And as such, Lee could not find anyone else he knew of that could teach him russian. But, that was minor problem.
Lee read almost every non-fiction book in the local library. And not just the english and spanish books. But, books in there that were of other languages.
Also, the local library had a music room, with a piano, and other instruments, which he knew how to play, allowing for Lee to practice his musical skills in private, when he wished to do so.
Lee even tried his hand at composing music. But, he found he lacked the talent for it. Which was okay with him. He was happy with being able to write and paint.
Lee learned some medical knowledge, from diseases, and basic surgery. His interest was started what he wanted to learn more about his cancer. And he did. And the treatments were not good. Still, from there, he learned some in that field. But, Lee never pretended to be a doctor, nor nurse. Nor, did he do attempt surgery on a living being. He did not want to risk intentionally harming someone.
And through his journey, Lee found a great way to blow off steam, he would take his pink Cadillac, with a full tank, at night, after ten PM, and drive high speed through the streets of town.
Lee was careful only to drive on the deserted streets of the city, at that time of night. And he never hit anyone once during those times.
Though, Lee did get into a few car chases with the police over those high speed burns, but they never caught him before midnight. And Lee found that he had become quite skilled in driving in car chases, at highspeed.
Lee would have taken the time to learn how to fly a helicopter and plane. But, he didn't anyone on the island with access to either a plane, or helicopter. Still, Lee did learn how to drive a motorcycle, and a semi-tractor trailer truck. Along with how to maintain and repair those vehicles.
In addition, Lee brushed up on his skills in general, concerning driving vehicles with manual transmissions.
Lee also learned how to drive, and maintain highspeed boats. He even took trips to Texas, and from there he found out the temporal resets effected the entire planet.
Somehow, finding that out, made Lee feel special. That except for Harvey. He was the only person he knew of on the planet that remember the time loops. But, he was careful to prevent that thought from going to his head.
Still, finding out the entire planet was effected by the time loops also gave Lee the opportunity to call his family and talk to them, without worrying that he would be traced back, nor having the years pass for his family, while Lee was stuck in the time loop.
Knowing that his family was okay, and unchanged due to the time loop put Lee's mind at ease towards his family.
And Lee got to talk to his family, with Lee enjoying hearing from them. Though, it was unfortunate that only he would remember their conversations.
Lee even found that he enjoyed performing in front of people.
For Lee, stage fright and shyness went out them window, when he realized that no one would remember his actions the next day.
When he felt like singing in front of people, Lee went to the hotel restaurant at lunch, and convinced Melvin to let him used the karaoke equipment to sing for everyone at lunch, on the stage in the room.
This was not hard. All Lee did was simply ask Melvin for permission to do so, and Melvin easily gave Lee permission to do so. At which point, Lee realized that asking permission was basically only being a formality to Lee, for performing on the restaurant stage.
Lee sang songs that worked for his masculine voice. He was partial to singing songs by Meatloaf, Elton John, and few songs by Nightwish. Though, he did sing other songs, depending on his mood.
Lee has become such a good singer, that depending on the song, and how well he sang said song, he got clapping from the crowd, to sometimes he even achieved standing ovations from those present in the restaurant.
And these acknowledgments of his skills helped Lee feel better, when he needed to something to boost his self-esteem.
As the years passed, while Lee was able to stave off full blown depression, he did sometimes feel melancholy. But, he found that by focusing on a slight interest, and or creating a humor situation, he was able to beat back his sadness.
It reached a point in the time loops, where during the morning of the time loops, Lee usually dressed in socks, underwear, white t-shirt, blue jeans, tennis shoes, black leather belt, his ring necklace, blue cloth jacket, and blue baseball cap.
The only difference was that he would be wearing his sunglasses, instead of his large glasses.
Then, after breakfast, he would leave the hotel, and head out in his car.
He then went to a couple of stores, where he bought a plain, light brown, sombrero, and a guitar.
Next, Lee went to the festival. He look off his baseball cap and cloth jacket in his car. He then put on the sombrero.
Fortunately, even though it was cool outside, as long as Lee walked around, even with the sea breeze, it was warm enough to walk around without a jacket.
Lee then just walked around the festival a few hours, playing relaxing pieces of music, with his guitar.
The one piece of music, which he found humorous, but was fun to play and made him, along with those around him, feel more comfortable was a piece of music from the Black Lagoon sound track. The piece of music was El Sol se Recuesta. Which translated to, Lay Down in the Sun, and the track was Roberta's Theme, from the Black Lagoon anime.
Lee could play that piece of music, while walking around, without missing a note. Lee also found that, El Sol se Recuesta, was the perfect piece of music to work through one's melancholy.
And not once did anyone call him on playing that tune.
As Lee played the El Sol se Recuesta, he passed by a family of five. A man, a younger woman, and three young children.
The hispanic man looked to be in his forties. He had a well groom black beard, with a full hard of hair, that was trimmed short. He wore sunglasses over his eyes.
The woman looked to be around fifteen years younger than her husband, and she appeared to be in her early thirties. She had fair skin, long blond hair, with brown eyes.
Their the young children looked to be a mix of their parents appearances.
Something in the back of Lee's head told them that they look familiar, but since they paying him no mind, he returned the favor.
(_)
After the Pena family passed by man with guitar, wearing a simple, sombrero hat, it took a few seconds for Hernan to recognize the tone the man was playing.
Hernan stopped in his tracks, and a second later, so did his family.
Hernan looked at the man with the guitar, whom has back turned to him. He though, 'Nah. He could not be playing that. Then, again.... With those women here...'
Hernan's wife, Maria noticed that her husband was looking behind them, at the man playing the guitar. She inquired, in spanish, “What is it, honey?”
Hernan heard his wife, as he thought, 'It is best that I leave this be. Nothing good can come of me, nor my family, by getting involved in such madness.' He then looked over, to his wife, as he replied, in spanish, “Nothing dear.”
Maria commented, “Still, that piece of music that man is playing is very relaxing.”
Hernan said, “Yes. It is a very relaxing piece music.” He mentally added, 'That is very paradoxical to whom the piece of music is a theme for. Best to get Maria to drop the subject.' He then suggested, “Though, perhaps it is best we leave that man be.”
Maria responded, “I agree. If we disturb him, he might quit playing such a lovely tone, for everyone to hear.”
Hernan replied, “Of course.”
Maria stated, “Good. Now, let us continue our fun for today.”
Hernan happily said, “I fully agree, my rebel flower. My Maria Flores.”
Maria giggled, as she and her husband, Hernan, directed their three children towards some of the booths of the festival.
The Pena family then went back to having fun at the festival.
(_)
A few months later of time loops, it was evening, as Lee finally worked up the nerve to start searching the rooms of Revy and Rock's group.
Currently, Lee was using his lock picking tools, he had bought earlier that day, to get into the suite, next to his. The suite belonging to Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru.
Lee was kneeling down, at the lock, while he work on it.
While Lee picked the lock, he thought, 'When these time loops end, I will have to get a set of these tools for person. And I have to thank Ranma for teaching me how to pick a lock.'
'Also, it is only fitting, that since Ranma taught me this usual skill set, that I break into her suite next. And since I know where everyone is, I do not have to worry about them walking in one me. That and the face that their suite is right next to my. To the right of the door to my suite.'
'So, if some sees me standing in the hallway. As long as I don't have my lock picking tools out, they will think I am just heading to my own suite. And think nothing else on the matter. This made their room the perfect test case for me breaking into the suites of those after me.'
'And after I am done with Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru's suite, I will break into another one of the girl's suites, on the next time loop.'
'On that matter, I think I will break into Revy and Rock's suite, last. I will go through the other suites of their members, first.'
Lee then felt the lock release, and he let go of the backwards tension on the lock, with his tools.
Lee thought, 'There. I am so happy this hotel uses older locks.'
As Lee stood up, he pocketed his tools, and he then opened the door, and walked inside.
Lee turned on the light, as he thought, 'I need to be subtle, but quick, in my search.'
Lee shut the door behind him, as he looked at the state of the room.
He then saw the bedroom was a mess.
As he stepped carefully through the mess, he thought, 'I guess some traits don't improve with a change of gender. But, then again, I know Revy, and a few of the others born as women, are just as messy as these three are. So, having a messy room, is kind of a gender neutral issue. And if this is their bedroom, I am not stepping into their bathroom.'
'Also, while it is tempting to look for their reality device, I know that a reality device is not going to work in this time loop.'
'I already lucked out in finding one in a previous loop. But, when I used it, I just had a reset the time loop, back to me in my bedroom at five AM, this morning.'
'Besides, I know they keep their reality devices on their person. So, searching for one of those devices here, is useless. But, I am sure this room, belonging to those adventurers, has other interesting items to look at, to help me deal with my boredom.'
'Still, when I am done, I will leave this room as I found it. Minus the item, or two, I take back to my own room.'
Lee then searched the room. He found three groups of items of note. The first two were not interesting to Lee.
Those items were Ranma's magical golden bracers, and a few sex toys the trio had.
But, the third item interested Lee greatly It was the book that Lee has wrote about Natsuru writing about. It was Natsuru's book on gender bending. It was titled, “The Gender Bender's Guide to Relationships And Life. By Natsuru Senou.”
Lee immediately picked up the book, and found that it was the english version of the book
Lee paged through it, and found the binder was wore.
Lee though, 'I just as I thought, this book was probably lent to most of their group here. And given most of their group here doesn't know japanese, they would bring the english version of their book. This just means that the book will be more easier for me to read.'
'I don't think they will miss the book for a few hours. And I always wondered what was in it. Now, I am about to find out. Still, I need to cover my tracks, and get out of here. I don't think they show up here for another hour. But, I don't want to take any chances.'
Lee swiftly, for lack of a better term, clean up after himself, and left their suite, for his suite, next door.
Lee turned off the room light, then closed his neighbors' suite door behind him.
Next, he quickly walked over to his door, which was only a few feet away. He pulled out his keys and unlocked the door to his suite. He then walked inside, shutting and locking the door behind him.
Lee walked in the dark, to his bed, and turned on the lamp light on the nightstand, by his bed.
Lee then walked over to the table in the room, and sat in one of the chairs at the table.
He sat the book on the table, and opened it to the first page.
While, looking down at the book, Lee thought, 'When I wrote my stories, I created this book, in passing. I only simply mentioned the book was created. I did not give details. But, that was enough to create this book in full. And now I get to read it.'
Lee then started reading the gender bending guide.
It took Lee three hours to completely read the title, 'The Gender Bender's Guide to Relationships And Life. By Natsuru Senou'.
As Lee read the book, he found the guide was a well made book, along with being a fascinating, and fantastic, read, on several levels.
The content itself was very clean, but dealt with almost all the issues of gender bending, one could think of. The guide answered questions from both male, and female, perspectives.
Among other things, the book was filled with information, text, diagrams, pictures, and source references, on the subject of gender bending.
The first part explained the difference between gender benders, intersex people, transgendered, and transsexuals.
The male anatomy and the female anatomy. And what the basic differences are. What hat one person from one gender should expect in the other gender, after they change.
The next section dealt with tips on how to help a person that just gained gender bending abilities can deal with the change.
Such as finding out what type of gender bender the person is. What their triggers are. What they should expect now that they can change. Being forewarned of the hazards in finding a cure to one's condition.
Tips on how to hide one's gender bending abilities from others.
How an inexperienced gender bender should be careful on how much time should be spent in their new gender. And the dangers of their gender bending being made public.
What personality traits will likely change, given person will be able to play both sides of the gender fence.
Tips on how the person can tell friends, family, and perspective partners, that that he or she is a gender bender. And when to tell.
There was even a section on how to handle the situation, if the change happens in the middle of a romantic situation. In such a case, the gender bending change happens out of the blue, with no expectation for it, the person should immediately tell their partner what happened, instead of hide it. Especially, if the change was not by their choice.
There was a section on situations of the gender bending ability being inherited, but dormant in childhood, or dormant for the most part. And how a parent should approach a child on the issue.
There was another section on how to help a child that is born with gender bending abilities.
The book even dealt with a gender bender's biological needs and care.
How to deal if the gender change also effects age, size, or radical differences of appearance between gender forms.
What can be done if the gender change becomes painful. Or, if the change became too pleasurable.
Options for locking one's gender in either gender form.
Sensitive parts of the male anatomy, and sedative parts of the female anatomy.
How to sit as a man, and other tricks to avoid harming male genitalia when moving around.
How to measure one's breasts and chest for a bra in their female form. How to put on, and take off a bra. For both the wearer, and someone helping the wearer.
Basic information on clothing, clothing styles, and clothing terms, for both genders.
How to prevent harming one's female breasts.
Proper hygiene for both genders.
How to pee as a male for the first time. Basic hygiene for men.
How to pee as a female for the first time. Basic hygiene for women.
How breast implants, and other implants, do not disappeared when changing from female to male, and the surgical options, and time for recovery, in getting them removed.
How breast reduction surgery on female breasts do not effect the male chest. Along, with the surgical options, and time for recovery, for such surgeries.
How to prevent, avoid, tell, and if need be, treat infections concerning female genitalia.
That was even a notation on the dangers of male circumcision on the equivalent female genitalia, and in general. And what the surgical options were for repair of the genitalia, in both genders. And how that repair effects the equivalent genitalia in the other gender form.
There was a note that transsexuals, whom had already had sexual reassignment surgery, in either gender, and how they will likely, with a magical gender bending change, have a full set of reproductive organs, and genitalia, of the gender they were trying to become beforehand.
The next part of that section of the book dealt with how to tell if the gender bender has to worry about female monthly menstrual periods.
And if so, what to expect, and how to deal with a monthly period for the first time. Including, diagrams and descriptions of a woman's month hormonal cycle. With what emotional and physical changes to expect during each part of their monthly cycle. And how a gender benders change between female to male, and back to female, can effect the timing of their month cycles.
The same section of the book also gave detail explanations on how to mentally, and physically, handle pregnancy, birth, and motherhood from someone that was originally born male.
There were notes on dealing with a pregnant partner, while being the father.
Also, how to deal with, and what to expect, if both the person and their partner get pregnant at the same time.
The next section of the book dealt with sex.
Masturbation as a female, and masturbation as a male.
What not to do, and what will cause harm, in the person's sexual experimentation in dealing with their body.
How to achieve an orgasm in either gender.
What to expect with sexual intercourse.
What level of pain to expect in having a hymen broken.
The dangers of sexual transmitted diseases, knowledge and use of birth control. Included, was a note that birth control pills do not work for gender benders, and it is unwise to use a diaphragm, and creams inside the vaginal cavity, due to the risk that the diaphragm may became stuck in the body, if there is a sudden change. And the risk of having the chemicals suddenly dump into the bloodstream, due to a sudden change.
The section noted that the safest birth control for a gender bender was a condom. Because if the change was from male to female, the condom would fall off. And the change was from female to male, the condom would be pushed out with the penis.
The section also noted the dangers of sexual intercourse, from both a male, and a female perspective, if the partner change gender during sex.
This including a list of dangers in using bondage equipment for a gender bender.
The next part was the section concerning sex for gender benders, and dealing with sexual positions between partners, whom could change gender.
There were pictures and descriptions of sexual positions for every gender combination. From male and female, female and female, male and male. And even a number pages on gender benders have more than one partner. Suggestions on how roles could be determined. And what positions that all those involved might enjoy trying.
There was section on what intersex people can expect went using these temporary gender bending options. With a note that the best options for the intersexed are the magical products that will either specifically change the person to female, or male.
The last section of the book deal with temporary gender bending options for the gender bender's partner, or partners, and how to help these parnters enjoy their temporary change.
On the final page of the book was a list of aliases by those that helped Natsuru create the book.
While the names were aliases, from the alias names, and his own knowledge of Natsuru's friends, Lee could guess who the aliases were of.
As Lee closed the book, he thought, 'This is a book that I will remember for a very long time. Or, at least as long as I live. And I got to give Natsuru credit for having the courage to put her real name on her book. I did not mention that in my story. And that was her choice. Now, I think I will look into Aeryn and Violin's room tomorrow night.'
(_)
During the evening of the next loop, Lee broke into Aeryn and Violin's room. The room was nice and neat.
Of the things Lee found there, was a small version of a pulse rifle in the bottom drawer, of the chest of drawers, in their bedroom. There were also some sex toys. A family photo album, that Lee did not open, out of, paradoxically, his respect for their privacy.
For Lee, searching the room was fine, but he was not going to dig into their personal history. And there was nothing else of note in their room.
(_)
The next evening, Lee broke into Shenhua, Sawyer, and Lotton's suite.
Lee was honestly shocked at how mundane the room that Shenhua, Sawyer, and Lotton shared, was. There was no bondage equipment. No sex toys. No weird magazines, nor strange items. And minimum lingerie.
There was nothing of note in their room, that would draw his interest, except for six items. A box of ammo, for what Lee guessed was for Lotton's pistols, Sawyer's chainsaw, a tool kit for what Lee guessed was for Sawyer's chainsaw, a gun cleaning kit for Lotton's pistols, and a knife polishing kit, including a sharpening stone, for Shenhua's knives.
After Lee finished searching their room, Lee wondered if, as paradoxical as it could be, considering what Lee had seen in the Black Lagoon series, and what he wrote, that Shenhua, Sawyer, and Lotton might be the most sane members of Rock and Revy's group.
To that end, Lee wondered if there was a concept of, being in the closet to hide one's sanity.
Before Lee left the suite, Lee quickly cleaned up and put everything back the way it was before he entered the room. He then swiftly made his way out of the suite, while gently shutting the hallway door behind him. Next, he headed fro the elevator bays, so he could go back to his bedroom, to get some sleep.
(_)
During the next few time loops, Lee was careful in searching the four rooms the eight teenage girls shared. And it took him four time loops to do so. But, he was not caught, in any of those loops.
The only things of interest that Lee found in the four rooms that the teenagers shared, Lee could not mention in polite company.
(_)
Then, came the night of the time loops, when Lee broken into Rock and Revy's room.
After Lee used his lock picking tools to unlock the door. He opened the door, and walked into the bedroom of Rock and Revy's suite. He turned on the light, locked and closed the door behind him.
Lee saw that the room was very clean, and tidy.
Lee thought, “I guess Rock's cleanliness overruled Revy's messiness. Now, to search the room.'
As Lee searched the room, the only things of note in the room he had found, so far, were some sex toys, along with boxes of ammo, and a gun cleaning kit, for Revy's pistols.
Lee looked over at the laptop computer on their table, as he thought, 'It seems that all of the group has are laptop computers. I have seen a few of them in their room. And it makes sense for those that are traveling light. Though, not as light as me.'
Lee then turned to the bottom chest of drawers, which he had not yet opened. He thought, 'Now, what is in this drawer?'
Lee bent down, and pulled it open. What he saw in the drawer made him think, 'Jackpot.'
In the bottom drawer, beside the large box of condoms, were two separate piles of small packets.
One pile had dozens of packets, the other, smaller, pile had only five packets.
Lee immediately recognized them. The packets were from Jusenkyo.
Lee read the chinese on the packets.
The large pile were packets of instant spring of drown man. The small pile of packets were instant spring of drowned girl.
Lee thought, 'Okay. I can understand them have dozens of packets of the spring of drowned man. Revy and Rock have a very active sex life. But, I don't know why they would have a few packets of spring of drowned girl... Unless, Revy is planning to get an early start on her revenge against me. Should they catch me. Honestly, I don't want to know.'
'Still, this is too great an opportunity to pass up. And my curiosity is just killing me on the inside. Though, if I am going to get the most of of these instant girl packets, I need to steal them in the morning. Not at night. Fortunately, I know exactly when they leave for breakfast in the morning. I will just wait until then. And I will take all the instant girl packets, in case I want to change back and forth, between genders.'
Lee then closed the bottom drawer, cleaned up after himself, and left Revy and Rock's room the same way, as before he had entered it. With him closing the door behind him.
During the morning of the next time loop, Lee was in the lobby, until he watched Rock and Revy pass by. He then took the elevator to the floor their room was one, approached the door to their suite.
As Lee stood in front of Revy and Rock's suite, Lee pulled out the lock picking tools he had bought earlier that morning.
Within one minute, Lee had picked the lock, very quickly, opened the door, turned on the light, went to the bottom drawer, got the five packets of instant girl, stuffed the packets into the outside pockets his cloth jacket, closed the drawer, turned off the light, locked the door, and closed the door.
Lee then swiftly made it to the elevator bay, and used an elevator to make it back to the third floor.
A minute later, Lee was inside his own suite.
He switched on the top light of his bedroom, as he shut the door, and locked the deadbolt to the door, behind him.
Lee then walked over to the able, across the room. Next, he pulled out the five packets from the pocket he had them in, and he put them on the table, in his room.
Lee then picked up a single packet from the table, and he looked at it. He thought, 'So close, yet so far. I wrote about gender bending, but to actually experiment with it, in person, is a completely different concept. I need to know something about this. It might be an option, for another problem I have. But, there is one thing I need to do first.'
Lee set the packet down, and walked over to his phone, on his nightstand. He then dialed the check in desk.
After the other end of the line picked up, with the clerk answering, in spanish, “Good morning. This is the front desk. How may we be of help with you?”
Lee stated, in english, “Hello. Good morning. This is J.D. Lee. I will be dining in today with a female friend I plan to have over. So, if you get a call, or have the door answered by a woman, that will just be my friend, ordering for the both of us. Thank you for being so understanding.'
The clerk responded, in english, “We will keep that in mind, Mister Lee.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.” He then hung up the phone.
Lee swiftly stripped down down nothing, allowing his clothing to fall to the floor. When he took off his ring necklace, he set it on his bed.
He picked up one of the packets. And as he walked towards the bathroom, he picked up a coffee cup he had.
As he entered the bathroom, he turned on the light.
He then looked at his nude self in the mirror above the sink.
Next, he set the cup and the packet onto the bathroom sink.
Lee pulled out a towel, unfolded it, and laid it on the floor, in front of the sink.
Lee thought, 'I don't want to slip and fall.'
He then stood in front of the mirror, over the towel. He filled the cup with cold water, and opened the packet of instant spring of drowned girl. He put the powder into the cup of water, and discarded the empty packet in the trash can in the bathroom.
Lee held the cup in his right hand, as he looked at it.
Lee thought, 'Well, here it goes.' Lee then looked at the mirror of himself, as he poured the magical water over his head.
While Lee did not feeling anything, Lee watched an as his body changed from male to female.
As Lee looked at her female form, for several seconds, in silence, she was shocked at many of changed, besides the obvious ones.
First, she looked like her own much younger sister.
Her hair was black, both on the top of her head, and on the patch between her legs. The hair on her head as also a little longer. Also, she had deaged to around eighteen years of age. And most importantly of all, her body seemed much, much more healthier.
Her skin tone was more healthier. She did not look like a skeleton, as she was starting to in her male from. And she felt so much physically better, and more energetic.
Her face was much more feminine. She was also a little shorter in height, then in her male form, and her physical figure was slender. Her breasts were a respectable size, but not too large. Also, her muscle tone was incredible, and her figure was sexy. She had no body hair, the only hair she had was on her head, and on her groin.
As she looked at herself further in the mirror, she used her hands to touch her face first, as her first thoughts as a woman were mixed with bittersweet feelings, 'I am healthy. Really healthy... At least for the moment... Still, I can enjoy the moment...'
'I wonder why my hair is black, and is a little longer. That is probably because magic is involved. And the deaging is simple, this is instant spring of drowned girl. Not, spring of drowned woman. This could be a problem, if the main girl spring is like this, but more potent.'
'Still, once I get out of the time loop, and a reality device, I could use the real spring of drowned girl as an option for a cure to my cancer. Then, I would just have to find a way to lock myself in my female form. Which given there are options in doing so, would not a problem.'
'Now, about a more immediate problem. I still look to much like my male self. Given their experience with gender bending, if I walk of of this room, Revy, Rock, and the others, will know it is me, even with the gender change.'
'And they will ask questions, in very painful ways... And there is nowhere I can really safely change genders and clothing, outside the room, away from the hotel... I think I might look into that problem, later.'
'Though, I can have a lot of fun in this room. Given the time loops, there is no rush. Also, I wonder about something else. Fortunately, I am not that wet on my head, and shoulders, and it won't take me long to dry.'
Lee then grabbed another nearby towel, and dried herself. She then walked out of the bathroom, as she headed over to her bed.
When Lee reached her bed, she held picked up the ring. Next, she swiftly broke the string, and took the string off her small ring.
She then head the ring in her left index and left thumb, by outside itself sides, as she looked the interior of the loop, and the chinese symbols on interior sides of the ring.
Lee thought, 'One of the symbols on the inside of this ring is, lock. I wonder if that means gender lock. If it does, then I might have just solved finding a way to lock this female form.
She then tried to slide the ring on her right fourth finger, but she found that the ring was too small, even for her pinky fingers.
Lee looked at the ring, as she thought, 'I guess this really is a child's ring.' She then set the ring on the table, near the other packets of instant spring of drowned girl.
Next, Lee walked over to her bed, and sat down, as she thought, 'Now, what am I going to do first?'
Her stomach then growled. She mentally reflected, 'Food it is.'
Lee then moved her position on her bed, over to the nightstand, where the phone was.
She picked up the phone, and dialed the front desk.
After the other end of the line picked up, she stated, in her female voice, in english, “This Mister Lee's suite. I would like to order some breakfast for my boyfriend, Lee, and myself.” She then gave her breakfast order, as she happily thought, 'Damn. This form has a nice, smooth, feminine voice. I like it.'
As she hung up the phone, she asked, out loud, in her new female voice, “Now, what to do, while I wait for breakfast?”
She then look down at her nude self.
She used her right hand to cup her left breast, as she used her left hand to reach down, to play with her genitalia between her, and inside her body.
Lee involuntarily giggled from the pleasant sensations she was feeling from her new female form.
Lee thought, with excitement, 'It looks like I am going to make good use of what I learned from Natsuru' book. Now, I just got to figure out how to get myself wet down there, so I can have some fun. I will probably have to break my new hymen to really get going. But, a small amount of pain is worth a whole lot of pleasure.'
Lee then began have some naughty fun.
(_)
Thirty minutes later, in the third floor hallway, the young, male bellhop, in his uniform, was pushing his cart up to the door, that belong to Mister Lee. The bellhop had been informed that Mister Lee spoke english, not spanish. And he was entertaining a lady friend. This was not the first time the bellhop had done this, in such situations.
As the bellhop reached the door to Mister Lee's suite, he overheard loud feminine moaning, and then a female scream. But, the bellhop had enough experience to know a scream could mean many things. Some of them being good.
The bellhop patiently waited several seconds, until the sounds quieted down. He then knocked on the door, as he stated, in english, “Room service.”
A few seconds later, a female voice loudly said, from the other side of the door, in english, “One minute, please.”
Half a minute later, the bellhop heard the deadbolt of the door in front of him being unlocked. Then, a young, attractive, black haired, fair skinned woman, answered the door. She wore an oversized shirt and pants, while barefoot. And she smelled of sex.
The bellhop looked down at the woman's chest, as he asked, “Where is Mister Lee?”
Lee notice where the bellhop was looking, as she thought, 'I honestly find it flattering that the first person I just met in this female form, is looking at my breasts, and he finds me attractive. Still, I need to come up with an excuse for my supposed absence. I will just keep it simple.'
She lied, “He went out to get some ice.”
The bellhop replied, “Okay.”
Lee opened the door all the way, and stepped to the side, as the bellhop walked into the room, while wheeling in a cart with a covered platter and a large glass of orange, cloth napkins, and utensils on top of it.
When the bellhop made it completely into the room, he reached over and removed the cover to the platter of breakfasts. He set the cover on a lower tier of the cart.
He asked, “Is this the meal you ordered?”
Lee looked over at the breakfast on the top of the cart.
She thought, 'This is exactly what I ordered.'
On top of the cart were three scrambled eggs, crispy bacon, toast, hash-browns, and a large glass of orange juice.
Lee looked over at the bellhop. She answered, “Yes. It is. And here is something for your trouble.” Lee then pulled out her male wallet, from her pants, and she pulled out a fifty dollar bill.
As she put away the wallet, with her right hand, she handed the fifty dollar bill to the bellhop, as a tip, with her left hand.
The bellhop gripped the fifty dollar bill. As he put it away in his pocket, he smiled. He looked Lee in her face, as he said, “Thank you, ma'ma. And let us know when you are finished, and we will come to pick up the cart and dishes.”
Lee looked the bellhop in his eyes, as she calmly said, “I will. Also, Mister Lee, and I, will be ordering lunch, dinner, and likely snacks, as well. But, we do value our privacy.”
He said, “I understand.” He then turned and walked out of the room, and into the hallway.
Lee then walked over. She then shut, and locked the deadbolt to her door to the hallway.
Next, Lee turned around and looked at the food on top of the cart.
She thought, 'Given my female body is much healthier, I can probably eat mexican food, and other types of spicy food, and not have an upset stomach, as a woman.'
Suddenly, Lee felt pressure coming from her bladder.
She thought, 'I got to take a piss. I guess it is a good time, as any, to find out what it is like to pee as a woman.'
She stripped back down to nothing, and went into the bathroom. A minute, and a half later, she exited the bathroom, just after washing and drying her hands.
She then are her breakfast.
After breakfast, she resumed her sexual experimentation, and other forms of fun, with her new, healthy, younger, female form.
Lee found that she did not tire easily, and that she enjoyed the benefits of having multiple female orgasms. And with the resets, Lee did not have to worry about anyone finding out what she was doing in the privacy of her own hotel suite.
(_)
Lee then spent the next solid week of time loops, breaking into Revy and Rock's suite in the morning, after they left for breakfast, and enjoyed the day, have find with her new female form, all the way until midnight, and the reset.
Lee also found out that in her female form, she could eat all the spicy food she liked, without a problem.
But, like all things, Lee eventually had to move on, and go about doing something else, to keep his, or her, interest in life, and in living.
(_)
After a few more loops, during a lunch, in the Devil's Hotel restaurant, Lee was on stage, with the karaoke machine, Lee was finishing singing an Elton John song. He did such a fine performance, that when he finished, the lunch crowd gave him a standing ovation.
In response, Lee took a bow, before the crowd.
Lee then put down the microphone, and walked off stage, down the steps on the open side of the stage, to the crowd's left.
When Lee reached the floor, he turned to his left and started walking towards the bar counter. He thought, 'Standing ovations never get old. And I think I could use a beer to celebrate.'
When Lee reached the bar counter, he sat down, and waiting for Melvin to come over, to take his order.
When Melvin stopped in front of him, across the bar counter, Lee casually ordered, “Just please get me a decent, cold bottle of beer to drink.”
After Melvin walk over and pulled a bottle of beer from a nearby cooler under the bar, he walked back over and set the bottle of beer by Lee.
As Lee opened up the beer bottle, and took a drink, Melvin commented, “You know you are pretty good.”
Lee set the bottle of beer on the counter. He smirked, as he said, “I am a man of many talents.”
Melvin inquired, “Where did you learn to sing like that?”
Lee replied, “You wouldn't believe me.”
Melvin responded, “Even so. How would you like to sing for a dance party tonight?”
Lee immediately tensed up, as he took a good hard look at Melvin. As second later, he forced himself to relax, as he thought, 'This is the first time, in any time loop, that Melvin has asked me to sing for the dance party that happens later tonight, in this room.'
'Though, I long since learned that Melvin was the person put in charge of catering the dance party.'
'I even got the chance to go to the party, a few times. By asking out a few single women, in town, whom felt like going. But, just dancing the night away with someone you are not interested in gets old. Though, I seem to have come to enjoy performing, and I have yet to perform during a dance. So...'
Lee stated, “Sure. Why not? So, you are the guy in charge of the party tonight?”
Melvin said, “Yes. The manager put me in charge.”
Lee commented, “Interesting. Still, just to let you know. I am skilled at singing. But, I don't have the strength in my vocal cords to sing all night.” He thought, 'I tried to sing for four hours straight. And after those four hours, I soon lost my voice for the rest of the day of that time loop. Fortunately, like everything else, my voice returned to normal, after the reset.'
Melvin stated, “No problem. After you finish your set, you can join the party.”
Lee thought, 'Now, that is an incentive. I don't have to look for a date, and I can still enjoy the party. But, there is one matter, if I am going to sing for an official event.'
Lee commented, “Thanks. Still, I don't think that a karaoke machine is going to cut it.”
Melvin agreed, “Neither do I. We were just going to play recorded music for the dance. But, with your singing skills, I am rethinking that.”
Lee said, “I appreciate that.”
Melvin asked, “Can you play instruments, as well?”
Lee cracked a grin, as he answered, “Yea. I can play the piano, guitar, saxophone, and a number of other instruments. Not only that, I can play, and sing songs from memory, while not missing a beat.”
Melvin commented, “We have a piano, and other instruments in back. And they are tuned. And I can get some people to move them here, on stage, for us. So, that will be a problem. But, I need to know what songs are you good at playing and singing?”
Lee stated, “I can play and sing a number of musical pieces. But, given my voice, I lean mostly towards Meatloaf and Elton John.” He mentally added, 'Melvin likely does not know who the Nightwish band is. But, I am sure he knows about Meatloaf and Elton John. They are classic rock legends.'
Melvin complimented, “Good taste, Lee.”
Lee thought, 'I wonder. I never did get around to asking this question.' He asked, “Thank you. And Melvin, since you are in charge in this party. What is with that, only couples, rule for the party?”
Melvin inquired, “How did you know about that rule?”
Lee lied, “I have my ear to the ground. And I hear things.” He mentally added, 'It is sad that I have gotten so good at lying, and keeping track of my lies.'
Melvin replied, “Good ear, then. Though, the manager wanted that rule. Not me. And he didn't tell me why.”
Lee thought, 'That answers an old question for me. And I have never been able to find the manager of the this hotel, nor his office, when I looked for him. Also, given all the strangeness in my life, even before the time loop, and the name of this hotel, the Devil's Hotel and Resort, I did not want to push my luck. Still, that is a small matter, for another time.'
'Now, onto the logistics of this performance.'
Lee inquired, “Okay. When do you think you will have the piano set up on stage?”
Melvin answered, “A couple of hours.”
Lee stated, “I will be back, by then. We will check to see if it is tuned. Then, I will play a few songs, and see if you like my performance. If you approve of my skills. We will talk about what songs that I know, that you would like me to play. And in what order.”
Melvin said, “Works for me, Lee.” He then extended his hand.
Lee shook Melvin's hand, as he said, “To a good a good business relationship.”
Melvin responded, “Yes. To a good business relationship.”
They then broke then handshake, with Lee going back to drinking his beer, and Melvin went back to attending to his other customers.
A few hours later, the piano was put on stage, and Lee met with Melvin at the stage.
Lee found that the piano was properly tuned. And Melvin was impressed that Lee knew how to do that.
Lee then started playing some rock songs on the piano, as he sang the songs.
After playing the piano, and singing a few songs, Melvin approved of Lee's skill. They the worked out what songs Lee would sing, and in what order.
That night, Lee performed for the dance party, and he did a great job of it.
And Lee found that enjoyed performing at the dance so well, that he arranged the same situation again, and again, to happen at lunch. He did this for each time loop. All so he could perform for the dance, over and over again.
Though, Lee varied his musical selection. But, the dances and party goers always seemed to enjoy his performances.
And as time passed by for Lee, even in the time loop, Lee found himself taking over the dance party, little, by little. To where he was eventually in control of setting up of the hotel dance party. And Lee enjoying every minute of it.
(_)
Several years of time loops later, it was evening as Rock and Revy walked out of the hotel theater.
They were already wearing dresses for the dance, and they decided to watch a movie, first.
The movie that was playing, which Rock suspected no one in the audience had ask for, was the classing time looping comedy, Groundhog's Days.
As Rock and Revy made their to the hotel restaurant entrance, and the dance, Rock thought, 'Somehow, I feel I could sympathize with Phil, in that is seems like this day does not want to end.'
As they approach the door to the hotel restaurant, they noticed the door was open, there was no one beside it, and they could here classic rock music coming from inside.
When they walked inside the room, they came to a stop just inside the entrance. They looked around, and they noticed a room was lit by disco balls hanging from the middle of the ceiling. And nearly everyone inside was dancing to the rock music, while having a good time.
Even Melvin was dancing with a woman, on the dance floor.
Revy whistled in astonishment. She then looked over at her lover, as she commented, “Somebody knows how to throw party.”
Rock continued looking at the party in front of them, as she agreed, “You're right, Revy. I am glad we came.”
Revy looked back at the party, as she replied, “I am to.” She then noticed the back of the room, and the person on stage, playing the piano. She stated, “Whoa. Check out the piano player on stage.”
Rock looked across the room, to see the piano player, whom was sitting at a bench, in front of the piano keys. He was playing the piano, as he was singing into the microphone set onto top of the piano, in front of him. And he was doing both very well.
But, what surprised Rock the most was what the piano player was wearing. The piano player was a man whom was flamboyantly dressed. He wore a pink tuxedo, pink feather boa around his neck, pink sunglasses, a pink top hat on his head, and black dress shoes.
Rock said, “Even as a woman, I would not wear something that flamboyant.”
Revy commented, “And I have better standards.”
Rock looked at her lover. She then just rolled her eyes for a few seconds, at the irony of Revy's statement.
Rock then turned back to look at the crowd.
Rock then spotted someone she wanted to talk too. To their right side, by the entrance wall, Rock saw someone she wanted to talk to. She heard saw the person look at her, as the person said, “Hey guys.”
Rock kept looking at the person, as she requested, “Revy. Please, follow me.”
Revy turned to Rock, as she replied, “Okay.:
Rock then turned to her right, and started walking, with Revy following right behind her.
(_)
Among those not dancing, was Akira, whom was wearing a nice, yellow gown that matched her hair, while she leaned her back against the entrance wall, near the right corner of the wall.
Akira was waiting her turn to dance with Natsuru, or Ranma, depending on which one of them of them wanted to sit the next song out. The trio has been trading of with each other, after each song, considering it was difficult to dance closely as a trio. And doing had not been a problem for them, so far.
Akira turned her left and she saw Rock and Revy had just entered the room, as the two women were standing by the entrance.
Akira leaned up from the wall, as she thought, 'So, those to finally showed up. I might as well go over, and talk to them.'
Akira walked over to the two women, as she said, “Hey guys.”
The two women had heard her, as they also walked over to meet her.
As Akira came a stop, six feet from Rock and Revy, all three women looked at each other.
Rock replied, “Hi Akira.”
Revy complimented, “Looking good, Akira.”
Akira said, “Thanks. So, who knew that Lee could play like that?”
Revy pointed at the piano performer on stage, with her right hand, as she asked, “That is Lee?” She then dropped her right hand back to her side.
Akira answered, with excitement in her voice, “Yes. You weren't here earlier. He practically rocked the house. He started on the dance floor, playing a great rendition of, The Devil Came Down To Georgia. His skills with a fiddle, and singing are incredible. Then, he played some rock music with a saxophone, while dancing with a couple of women. Next, he moved to the piano on the stage, and we have since been rocking on.”
Rock inquired, “Where did Lee learn to play, and sing, like that?”
Akira said, “I don't know, but he is great at it. He seems to be instantly great at everything.”
Rock asked, “What do you mean?”
Akira stated, “Well this morning, after breakfast, I watched him have a large log, of a tree truck, brought right outside the hotel parking lot. Then we, Ranma, Natsuru, Shenhua, Lotton, Sawyer, and I, watched as Lee used a chainsaw to sculpt a life sized statue of Sawyer. And the statue was a pretty good imitation of Sawyer. Even Sawyer was impressed.”
“Then, after lunch, Lee somehow convinced Melvin to let him take over the catering for the party, so Melvin could enjoy the party himself.”
“At supper, after you left, Lee spent a few minutes showing his skills with both the flute and trumpet. Then, Ranma, Natsuru, and I got to talking to Lee. And we found out he is the one managing the hotel employees to set up for the party.”
“And the way he managed it was incredible. He clearly knew what he was doing. He was telling people to do, like it was second nature to him. We even listened, as he warned the employees of possible problems, as they set up the food, and other items.”
“Also, Lee told us he changed a few things, from the original plan. He arranged for the wife of Jeff, the bouncer, to come to the dance, and for them to have some fun, as well. Lee told me that he said to Jeff that he would take the heat, if something went wrong. And Lee then got rid the, only couples, rule for the dance.”
“Honestly, it is like Lee knows all the right things to say, all the right things to do, at all the right times, to get what he wants done.”
Akira commented hit Rock mentally like a ton of bricks. Rock thought, 'We are stuck in a time loop, and Lee clearly remembers what is happened from time loop to time loop. He is at the center of the time loop. Like Phil in Groundhog's Day film. I need to talk to him. I need to know how long we have been stuck here. But, before I do so, I need to learn more about the situation. And learning what songs he is singing will offer me insight into what he is thinking.'
'Also, this is why it feels like this day has not ended. And it feels like we are repeating events. That is because we are repeating events.'
'Still, there is no immediate rush. If there is a time loop, Lee will not allow for the time loop to end in the middle of his performance. He put to much work in this party. So, I will just wait for him to finish his set. Then, I will confront him. In the meantime, I will just enjoy the party.'
Rock looked over at Revy, as she invited, “Care to dance?”
Revy looked over her lover, as she said, in a demure tone of voice, “I though you would never ask.”
The two lovers than walked out onto the dance floor, and began to dance together.
As they danced, Rock occasionally took a glance at Lee on stage. And she paid attention to the songs and lyrics that Lee was sing.
Lee had just wrapped up, Elton John's Saturday Night's Alright For Fight, and he moved on to a piano rendition of Meatloaf's The Monster Is Loose. When he finished that song, without missing a beat, Lee starting playing Elton John's All the Girls Love Alice.
While Rock, danced with Revy, she thought, 'I have to admit that Lee has not missed a beat on his piano playing, and he can really sing these songs. And I don't want to know how many times of practice he had to do to get this good at rocking.'
The next song Lee played was Elton John's Goodbye Yellow Brick Road.
Rock thought, 'If ever there was a song for being trapped in a time loop. That is the one.'
Then, it was the two songs that let Rock put the final pieces together. The first, of the last two songs was David Bowie's Life on Mars, then Lee concluded his set with Elton John's I've Seen That Movie Too.
Both were slow dance songs. And like everyone else on the dance floor Rock, and Revy, slowed down their dancing to the beat of the music.
Rock listened to the lyric of the song Lee was currently singing. Which was Elton John's I've Seen That Movie Too. She realized, as she thought, 'Oh crap. Lee is not only the center of this time loop, he is also the writer. And worst of all, I won't remember this after the reset. Though, even if I don't remember this day, and that Lee is the writer, I still have to try to convince him to stop these time loops.'
'Yet, if I tell Revy, she will go berserk, and ruin the party for everyone. Besides, we are still in the time loop, when things reset, only Lee will remember, and he will be less willing to talk to me, after I had sicced Revy on him.'
'Still, he is clearly finished, I will just approach him, and we will talk. Since I won't remember this, as long as I am nice, he will probably be open to talking to me.
As Lee stopped playing, everyone stopped dancing, and looked up on stage at him.
Everyone was silent, as they saw Lee take off his hat, his feather boa, and finally his sunglasses, all of which he placed on top of the piano.
Next, they watched as Lee took few deep breaths, while pinching the bridge of his nose with his right index finger and thumb, for a few seconds.
Lee then get go of his nose, and he put the pink sunglasses back on. Next, he stood up from the bench. And he turned to face the crowd.
Most of those in the crowd starting clapping, including Revy and Rock.
Lee bowed.
Lee reached over picked up on the microphone on top of the piano. As he looked over the crowd, he waited for the clapping to end.
A few seconds later, as the clapping ended, Lee calmly spoke into microphone, “Thank you everyone for the applause. I am setting the speaker system to play some more music. But, I just don't have any more energy in me to keep doing this tonight. Though, it was fun. Anyway, everyone have a great night.”
The crowd gave Lee another applause, as Lee set down the microphone, back onto the piano.
He then walked over to the karaoke machine, and he set it to start playing some music, he had preset it to, earlier that day.
As soon as the music started, the dancers started dancing to the beat of the music, except for Rock, and Revy.
Revy noticed Rock body language was off, as her lover was looking at Lee. Revy asked, “What is it, Rock?”
Rock continued to watch Lee leave the stage, by walking down the side steps of the stage, and head for back side the bar counter, near the back of the room. Rock turned to Revy, as she stated, “I need to speak to Lee for a few minutes, alone.”
Revy could tell Rock was serious. And she trusted her lover enough to not ask Rock any questions. She replied, “Okay. I will be by the door, when you are finished.”
Rock said, “Thank you.” She then turned and started walking over to Lee, by the bar counter. While, Revy headed to stand by the door, to the hallway entrance to the room.
It took Rock several seconds to walk around the dancing couples, but she finally made it to standing beside where Lee was standing at the bar counter.
As Rock approached Lee, she saw that Lee had noticed her coming towards him. When she reached him, she was standing to Lee's right side, with her back to the crowd.
Rock saw that Lee turn to face her, while he was smiling ear to ear.
Lee literally looked down at Rock, due to their height differences, while he said, in a happy tone of voice, “Hi Rock. I saw you and Revy on the dance floor, a few minutes ago. I hope you enjoyed the performance?”
Lee thought, 'A rare treat, but not unheard of for them to show up at the dance parties, while I am performing.'
Rock honestly replied, “I did. And I need to speak to you about something.”
Lee inquired, “Sure. What can I do for you Rock?”
Rock thought, 'Let's start this with a simple question.' She asked, “What are you planning on do now, Lee?”
Lee glanced as his wrist watch. It was ten fifty-five PM. Lee then looked back at Rock. He then used his right hand to pointed over, behind Rock. He said, “Do you see those two hot women on the other end of the bar?” A few seconds later, he dropped right hand back to his side.
Rock turned around and she saw two young, identical twin women, whom were slender mexicans, with tanned skin and long black hair. They were standing together, on the other end of the bar. They were dressed in matching dresses, and both were looking at Lee with interest in their eyes.
Rock looked back at Lee, to see the man was looking back at her, and not the twins.
Lee stated, “Well, I am going to walk over to those two identical sisters, and within fifteen minutes, or so, we will be back in my hotel suite, where I will be screwing both of them silly, for a fourth night in a row.”
Rock thought, 'I would dare to call Lee a lucky bastard over bedding those twins. But, then when I think about how long it takes to learn all the skills Akira stated he does so well. It probably took him a while to figure out how to convince those women to sleep with him. And he has only been doing it for three nights, so far. So, he has probably only got little on the investment of his time and efforts... Now, to drop the bombshell.'
Rock inquired, 'So, after doing all this, what you plan to do next in this time loop?'
Lee immediately dropped his grin, as he said, in a stern tone of voice, “I guess those twins will have to wait. So Rock, how did you figure it out?”
Lee thought, 'This is not the first time someone figured out the time loops. But, I still need to hear her out, so I know how to avoid this conversation for the next time loop.'
Rock admitted, “Because, even though I don't remember these time loops, on a conscious level, it literally feels like I have repeated this day over and over again. It is like I can sense what events that are going to happen. I do not think the others realize this, but I am sure they will soon...”
Rock thought, 'I wonder.' She inquired, “Lee, is this what it is like to be precognitive?”
Lee answered, “Yes.” He mentally added, 'This is bad, on so many levels. Looks I cannot just let the time loops repeat, and just forget about this meeting.'
Rock responded, “Cool. I can see how this ability can be useful. Still, you have to find a way to stop these time loops. We cannot keep reliving this day over and over again, forever.”
Lee thought, with sadness, 'Looks like the party is over, and I now have to figure out how to stop the time loops, before everyone here starts to remember the times loops at a conscious level.'
Lee responded, “I agree. I will find a way to end these loops, and get the space-time continuum back on track. Damn. I never thought I would ever state that in real life, and mean it.”
Lee mentally reflected, 'I was only letting this loop continue because of my cancer, and I was the only one remembering. But, people starting to remember the time loops changes everything.'
'I guess the music has to stop some time. With you, Rock, starting to remember, at an instinctual level, that means you and others will start to remember more and more. Eventually, I will be found out, unless I end the time loop, after this next reset, or so.'
Rock said, “I know what you mean. So, how long has the loops been going on?”
Lee casually admitted, “Well, there is no way I can mark time in these loops. So, I am not sure myself. I would guess, from the number of skills I have learned, several years. At least a decade, or so.”
Rock thought, in shock, 'Really?!' Rock blurted out, “You're saying that I have be having my period continuously, for over a decade?”
Rock openness caught Lee flatfooted, as she saw his expression change to mild shock.
Though, Lee quickly collected himself, as he responded, “Oh... I honestly did not know that.”
Lee thought, 'Given the closeness Rock has with Revy, it is likely that Revy has been having her period all this time, in the time loops as well. And that would goes a long way towards explaining her attitude. Also, that would explain how they haven't been doing the same exact things in every loop. Their irritability makes them a little more random in their actions, and decisions. As sick as the concept is. I think this is the first time that a person's menstrual cycle has directly bent the laws of reality.'
Rock stated, “I understand. There was no way you could have known. I will admit that Revy can be... a pain. And I am try not to act that way during this time of the month. And you are too polite to ask about it.”
Lee replied, “You are correct on all three points. And if I had known, I would have likely found a way to stop these time loops sooner.”
Rock asked, “I think you would have. So, how do you plan stop the time loop?”
Lee answered, “I honestly don't know how it began in the first place. But, I will start looking into it. If I cannot find at least the cause of the time loop within a month, I will start looking for help. I know Police Chief Del Soto personally. And whenever I talk to him, he soon realizes we are in a time loop. That means I have access to the entire police force of this city, to help search the island for the cause.”
“Also, Violin and Aeryn have experience with time loops, and other temporal effects. If nothing else, those two could work out the math to the situation. With me carrying the information from reset to reset, until we all figure out what is going on.”
Rock complimented, “That is a good start. And good luck. Still, how long until the reset?”
Lee questioned, “That reset is always at twelve, unless I am killed, or someone reality jumps. You got just over an hour. Why do you ask, since you are not going to remember this, after the reset?”
Rock stated, “Because I have likely not made love to Revy in years. And I am going to have sex with my lover, even if we are having our periods. And an hour is plenty of time to have some fun, as long as we do not take things too slowly.”
Lee thought, 'Well, that confirms that issue in dealing with Revy having her period. Still, on that matter, I wonder... This is the perfect opportunity to ask that question.'
Lee requested, “Okay. But, before you leave, could I ask a personal question?”
Rock replied, “Sure.”
Lee inquired, “The fun thing about these temporal loops is since no one remembers after the reset, except me. I can ask some pretty embarrassing questions without worrying. So, I do have one such question for you. I read about sex does help the cramping for that time of the month. Is that true?”
Rock shook her head, as she answered, “Yes. Why do you ask?”
Lee replied, “It is one of those questions a guy cannot ask. But, it is also one of those pieces of information that could come in handy if said guy ever had a girlfriend.”
Rock realized where Lee was coming from, as she happily agreed, “That is very true. I did not even know that was the case until after you turned me into a woman. I wish I did. It would have made my relationship with Revy go a lot more smoothly.”
Lee responded, “Yea. I know... Well, have fun, Rock?”
Rock replied, “Thank you. You too, Lee.”
Lee cracked a grin, as he commented, “Hey. If I am going to be stuck in a time loop, I am going to have the time of my life.”
Rock returned Lee's smile, as she complimented, “That is a good outlook to have.”
Lee replied, “I know.” Suddenly, Lee dropped his smile, as he looked behind Rock, and across the room.
Rock noticed change in Lee demeanor. She dropped her own smile, as she asked, “What is it?”
While still looking across the room, Lee answered, “Someone is looking at us. Someone, I do not recognize. And I have had the chance to learn who everyone in this room is.”
Rock immediately realized that importance of Lee comment, as she looked behind her. She looked at the crowd, and across the room, for someone she didn't recognize, as well.
And Rock eyes veered towards an older man in a business suit.
A man that Rock felt was looking at her, also, as the older man suddenly, wave his right hand, towards Lee and herself.
Rock looked back at Lee, as she inquired, “Who is that?”
Lee turned to Rock, as he answered, “I think that is the manager of this hotel.”
Rock questioned, “How do you know?”
Lee cryptically answered, “As cliche as it sounds. I just know. And I think I need to speak to the man in charge.”
Rock said, “Good luck.”
Lee replied, “Thank you. And I suggest you hurry. I have a feeling that the reset may happen sooner this time.”
Rock replied, “Thanks for the warning, Lee.”
Both adults walked away from the bar counter, heading in two different directions.
Rock soon joined back up with Revy, with both of them soon heading out the door, and to their suite, where they planned to have some intimate fun.
Meanwhile, as Lee passed by many dancers, and other people, towards the older man, he thought, 'I have heard the concept that there are just some things a person automatically knows. I have never believed that concept was real until this moment. That man is the manager of this hotel and resort. I know almost every employee, and resident, in this hotel by first name. That is quiet a feat, considering I am bad with names.'
'Still, after so many time loops, I recognize, and know, every person in this room, except that man. And in all my years of doing time loops, this is the first time I have ever seen that man. And I have never met the manager of this hotel. Nor, do I even know his name.'
'On and off again, during the time loops, I have looked for the manager, and his office, with no success.'
'And right now, my instincts tell me that I probably do not want to know the answers to those questions.'
'I guess, while I never found the manager, it looks like the manager finally found me.'
'And I think it is best, I take off my glasses, when I meet this man.'
Lee then took off his glasses, and put them in one of his coat pockets, as he continued to approach the older man.
When Lee reached the man, he stood five feet from the older man.
At the moment, from the corner of his right eye, Lee saw Rock and Revy leave the room, through the exit, and towards the hallway.
Lee thought, 'I hope those two have some fun before the reset.' He then turned his full attention towards the man whom stood in front of him, as he mentally added, 'Now, to turn my full attention to the matter at hand.'
Both men took a look at the other man, while getting the full measure of the other man.
As their eyes met, the older man kindly said, “Hello Mister Lee. I am the manager of this hotel. I believe we need to talk.”
Lee calmly responded, “I fully agree.”
The manager requested, “If you will come this way, we will talk in my office.”
Lee replied, “I would prefer that, as well.”
Lee then followed the manager of the hotel out of the hotel restaurant, and towards the manager's office.
A few minutes later, they reach a door in one of the hallways of the ground floor, of the Devil's Hotel and Resort.
The manager used a key to unlock the door.
As the manager opened the door, he said, “This is my office. Please, come inside.”
The manager then walked in first, into his office, and straight in front of him was his desk. He then walked around his desk, and he said in the chair behind his desk.
The manager then faced Lee, as the younger man walked inside.
As Lee walked into the office, he saw that the only light in the room was a lamp light on the manager's desk.
The manager said, “Please, shut the door, and have a seat, Mister Lee. I think there is still time for us to have a conversation with each other.”
Lee gently shut the door, and walked to the chair in front of the desk. He then sat down in the chair.
Meanwhile, the manager pulled out a bottle of brandy, and small glass, from a drawer, in the desk, to his right side. He poured himself a drink. Next, he set the open bottle on his desk. And he took a sip of his glass. He then said, “So, what do you think of my office? Please. Be honest.”
Lee looked around, and what he saw on the side walls shocked him to his core.
On the wall to his left was the nude portrait he had done Shenhua, Sawyer, and Lotton.
On the wall to his right was the nude portrait he had done of Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru.
When Lee looked back at the manager, he saw that the manager was mischievously smiling at him.
The manager continued to smile, as he casually said, “Mister Lee, you do not think I was not going to get something out of all this work. I have to say Mister Lee, that you are quite the talented person. And I have saved a number of your works. Such as you poetry and paintings. I even had a copy of that story you wrote, about the Lowe siblings at Lagoon island. It was a short, though entertaining story. And that was a brilliant joke you pulled on Rock.”
Lee thought, 'He is the one behind the time loops.'
The manager calmly stated, “Yes. I am.”
Lee said, “You are reading my mind.”
The manager stated, “Of course. Along with the others. I can even read emotions. And I must say you have brought some of the most interesting people I had ever personally met, to my fine hotel. That is a rare feat indeed. One that should be rewarded.”
Lee did not bother to think, considering he knew his mind was being read. Instead, he played it by ear. He said, “I am glad to have entertained you. I seem to enjoy entertaining people. I take it that you own this hotel?”
The manager coyly answered, “In a manner of speaking.”
Lee inquired, “So, what was the reason for these time loops?”
The manager took a sip of his brandy. He then calmly answered, “Actually, there were two reasons.”
“One reason is that I know you are dying, Mister Lee. I will give you credit that you got some good plans on how to save yourself. Still, given the time limits on your cancer killing you, you would likely not be here for much longer. And it has been so much fun watching you and those women play against each other. So, I made it so that you would, for a while, not have to worry about those time limits.”
“I wanted to see what you could do with a clean canvas, and no consequences. And you did not disappoint me. You even proven that some people. When given the chance for hedonism, or self-improvement. That they would choose self-improvement. And I admire that about you.”
“The second reason is that you have had a really rotten life, and you have been preparing for death with such dignity. Most people in your position would be violent, insane, or both. But, not you. You are willing to face the bullet with more calmness, and reservation, than one in your position should have.”
“Given you have had such a less than pleasant life, you had instead prepared for death. With you seeing death as a beginning, and not an ending. I found that understandable, but unjust. Everyone should have a chance to learn to appreciate life. And so, I cut you a break, so you could learn to enjoy life.”
Lee said, “Well, your plan worked. I no longer want to die. The problem is that the cancer is not going to give me much choice in the matter.”
The manager cryptically responded, “Mister Lee, you need to learn, there are many ways to live. There are even ways to live, in death. It is all a matter of frame of mind, and perspective.”
Lee replied, “I will keep that in mind.”
The manager said, “As you should. Also, I feel that with these time loops, we have both sowed the seeds for much more excitement on this island. And unlike others, I do enjoy competition, in so many ways. I would not be playing this game if I did not. And before you came, this island was starting to get a little boring.”
Lee stated, “Your comment does not bring me much comfort.”
The manager cracked a grin, as he responded, “It should. Mister Lee, you will likely reap many rewards from the events, and actions, you have taken in this repeating day. But, be warned, your life is about to become like a roulette wheel. Do not focus on the numbers. Focus on the colors. Red and black are your colors of interest. But, of interest, at first. Not of trust. But, not the red and black of my hotel, but of outside of my hotel.”
Lee conceded, “Maybe the gambler motif was not the wisest of masks to wear.”
The manager commented, “No. Your mask has served you well. And speaking of masks, besides the ownership question, I am surprised you have not ask me any questions about myself, nor this hotel.”
Lee honestly said, “I respect your privacy. I am sure you have reasons for why this hotel is named the way it is, and why it is run the way it is run.”
The manager complimented, “The is very wise of you. Also, in the future, if you need to speak to someone, I am hear to talk to you.”
Lee replied, “Thank you for the offer. But, if I can, I try to avoid the major players. And you clearly are playing a much larger game than even I.”
The manager responded, “That is the type of wisdom that will keep you alive.”
Lee said, “And I will keep what you have said to me, tonight, a secret.”
The manager took another sip of his drink. He then smiled, as he stated, “I know you will, Mister Lee. You are good at keeping secrets. Though, others around you are as good at keeping secrets, as well. And of your personal secrets, I am likely only one of two people that truly know the real you.”
Lee eyes widened for a few seconds. Lee then forced himself to calm down, as his eyes returned to normal.
The manager commented, “Ah, you have such potential, Mister Lee. And so much of it was willfully denied to you, by others. I am glad you came here, and allowed me to help you bring your potential to bloom.”
Lee said, “I appropriate that. Though, I do have one more question for you. How long has this time loop being going on?”
The manager conceded, “A fair question. This time loop has been going on for just over twenty Earth years.”
Lee responded, “Then, thank you for giving me another twenty years of life.”
The manager replied, “You are welcome.”
Lee said, “Now, to the heart of the discussion. Rock is starting to remember.”
The manager agreed, “Yes. Rock, and number of the others, are starting to sense the repeat. And so, we need to decide how to end this loop. Since, you are the lead in this adventure. How would you like to end this chapter?”
Lee suggested, “Let us keep it simple. One more reset. With tomorrow being the last day of time loop. With the next day after being tomorrow, November third, and not part of the time loop. With time then continuing forward, as it was, before the time loop.”
“I will have a casual day. Still, I will not be able to get a date, so I cannot go to the dance that night. Because, as I am sure you know, even though I got a few women to go with me, on a date to the dance, it was more luck, than anything else. And I had to impress them with my skills, to do so.”
“And the only real way I was able to get in there, was to become the life of the party. And I cannot do that, if people remember my actions, later. If I do so, the women will realize who I am. And they will capture me.”
The manager stated, “That is quite true. Still, your suggestion works on several levels. Also, I think you have earned a genuine date, with a woman. And I know of someone that would be willing to go out on a date with you. There is a woman you know, whom has worked through all these time loops. She could use a day off, and you are the perfect person to take a day off with.”
Lee thought about who the manager was talking about. As he recalled who it would be, he saw the manager's smile widened.
Lee said, “Thank you.”
The manager finished the rest of his drink. He then set the glass down on his desk. He commented, “Now, there is no time like the present to get the ball rolling, for this final reset.”
Lee looked at his wrist watch and saw that it was only eleven twenty-one PM. He then looked back up at the manager, as he said, “But, it is not twelve o'clock, yet.”
The manager joked, “It is. As the old saying goes. If it is always five o'clock somewhere, it is midnight somewhere, as well. Now, see you later, Cinderella.”
The next thing Lee knew, he awoke in his bed, in his hotel suite, in the darkness of the earlier morning.
Lee opened his eyes, and looked over at his clock. He saw that it was five AM sharp, again.
He then leaned back in his bed, as he thought, 'One more time. And this time, there are consequences. So, what I plan for today must be tame. Still, it will be nice to move on with life. And the manager of this place pointed me in the right direction to getting a date, tonight, for the dance. And the way he phrased his comments, made me think, I could turn this into a date for all day. I believe he is right. And I will do that.'
'Also, over the course of the next week, I will discreetly purchase a few tools in town, that I have become good at, which I can keep on my person. Such as some simple lock picking tools. I know where to buy them, without anyone asking any questions. The type of people whom accept cash, and prefer to keep their mouths shut over such matters.'
'Also, I think I will by a few more decks of cards later. I will keep them in the hotel suite. It is known I am a gambler. Have a few decks of cards, will not raise any suspicions, and having them on hand will be useful, after I escape... If I am able to escape. Though, that is looking more possible by the day.'
'I have long since learn the tales, and how to manipulate all the women currently in this town, whom are after me. Now, I just need to wait for the proper opportunity to occur.'
'On another matter, now that I think about it. I vaguely recall meeting with Pedro, everyday. As we discussed, with each other, the days events, including what is going on with the Revy, Rock, and their crew.'
'Though, it has been so many years, for me. That I don't really recall the time and place.'
'Well, that problem is easily solved. Before I leave the hotel this morning. I will call Pedro and ask.'
'Given this is the last day of the time loop, it is better I call him today. If I call tomorrow is might raise suspicions. Now, to get up and face the coming day.'
Lee then got ready to face the day
(_)
Around nine thirty AM that morning, after Lee and Sam had breakfast at the hotel buffet. With the two friends then parting ways. Lee headed back up this his suite.
When Lee reached his suite, he went over to the phone and dialed a number.
As Lee held the receiver to his left ear. As he heard the phone ring, he thought, 'I have to keep reminding myself, that I am no longer in the time loop. And while I know spanish, and a lot of other things, I do not want other people to know that I know these things. Because, in doing so, I have a huge advantage, in a number of ways.'
The other end of the line soon picked up. The person on the other end of the line said, in spanish, “Good morning. De La Plata Podrido Police Department. How may we help you?”
Lee stated, in english, “This is Lee. Please, transfer me to Pedro's office.”
The police offer replied, “One moment.”
Lee then heard the click, that signaled the transfer of the communications connection over the phone.
As Lee waiting for Pedro to pick up, he thought, 'Maybe I was starting to call to often, before the time loop. If the officers are this willing to immediately transfer me to Pedro's office. Or, Pedro ordered them to do so. I honestly don't remember.'
'Though either way, if I want to avoid the talk of the police station, which can be a rumor mill itself. With those rumors of me and Pedro knowing each other, reaching Revy and the girls. I probably need to lay off of calling him, unless I need too.'
A second later, the phone rung once, and then Pedro picked it up. Pedro stated, in english, “Good morning, Lee.”
Lee replied, “Good morning, Pedro.”
Pedro inquired, “So, what can I do for you, Lee.”
Lee honestly responded, “It has been long holiday for me. And I was wondering. Are we meeting tomorrow, like usual?”
Pedro answered, “Yes. Tomorrow, we are meeting at the Last Resort Diner, at seven PM, like usual. Though, we are not meeting today. Honestly, I have enough to worry about today, with it being a holiday.”
Lee thought, 'Good. With that simple, subtle question, you told me the time and place of our meeting, without my directing asking you for that information.'
Lee said, “Thank you. And I understand. I was just checking.”
Pedro replied, “No problem.”
Lee stated, “See you there.” He then hung up the phone.
Lee then turned and looking around his room, which had enough light coming from around the curtains to see. As he he did, he thought, 'Okay. One problem down. Now, to wait until I can talk to the woman that the manager told me would go out on a date with me.'
Lee cracked a grin, as he continued his thought, 'And I know the who, the time, and the place, to do it.'
(_)
Later that morning, the owner and operate of the Rats Nest, got out of her car, which was part in her bar's parking lot. She then walked to the back entrance of the Rats Nest.
Besides her sock, and undergarments, the woman work a shirt, pants, belt, and comfortable shoes. As she held the key to open the back door of the bar, in her hand, and reached for the lock, she heard a male voice behind her casually say, “Do you know what I admire most about you?”
The Rats Nest bartender look behind her to see Lee, dressed in his usual attire.
Lee continued his compliment, “Your diligence. You are the type of person that would likely weather a hurricane without breaking a sweat.”
The woman turned her fully body to face Lee, as she replied, “Thank you.”
Lee commented, “That being said. I think you deserve a day off. And I can assure you that this is a wonderful day to take off. The weather is perfect. It is a holiday. And there is a festival going on downtown. I have my car parked in the parking lot, across the street. That is why you did not see it. All you have to do is say, yes. And I promise you a wonderful day.”
The bartender complimented, “That is the best pick up line I have heard in months. Are you trying to get into my pants?”
Lee honesty stated, “No. I just want to take you to dance party at the Devil's Hotel, later this evening. And before then, I wish to treat you to a day at the festival. I have been there, yesterday. And I know all the great places to go. Including, the best places for food, and music. I will pay for everything. My treat.”
The woman said, “Tempting. But, neither of us are dressed for a formal dance.”
Lee responded, “Before the dance, we will swing by your place, so you can change into something more formal. While I change, as well.' He mentally added, 'I have my nice gray suit, polish black dress shoes, nice gray hat, black and brown striped tie, and cool shades, neatly placed in the car's trunk.'
Lee requested, “So, would you like to come?”
The bartender said, “If it wasn't for the fact that I know you are such a polite man, I would not believe you were so sincere in your offer. But, you are being sincere. So, yes. I will go with you. And I now realize why Eda slept with you. But, I just have one question. Do you know how to dance?”
Lee replied, “Yes. Now, I have a question for you. Do you know how to tango?”
The woman smirked, as she playfully turned Lee's question on him, “Argentine? Or, ballroom?”
Lee returned the bartender's smile, as he responded, “That is up to you, because by the end of tonight, I want those troublesome girls, back at the Devil's Hotel, to envy you, on the dance floor.”
The women's smile became even wider, as she said, with glee, “Now, that I would like to see. So, what is your plan?”
Lee answered, “We walk in like a storm, and leave them speechless, in style, before they can react.”
The woman commented, “I like it on so many levels, that I am literally wet with anticipation. I will take my car back to my home, you can follow me in your car. Then, you can take me on a date, out on the town.”
Lee replied, “That is fine with me.”
(_)
The bartender then closed up her bar, and drove her car back to her home, with Lee following her in his car. When they reached her open, she locked her car, and get into the front passenger seat in Lee's pink Cadillac.
Lee then drove them to the festival in downtown Plata Podrido, where they wonderful time at the festival, both Lee, and the bartender.
After they finished at the festival, they went to the salon Lee used. The bartender got her hair formally washed by a stylist, and then she had her hair lightly trimmed, to remove any split ends. Meanwhile, Lee has the barter give him a professional shave of his face.
When the two were done, they had some supper, paid for by Lee, and then the two of them headed back to the bartender's home, to get rest, before the dance. And to change clothing. The bartender when to her bedroom, to find a dress in her closet, change clothes, and get ready.
Lee took his clothing from the trunk of his car. And he used the bartenders spare bedroom to change his clothing, and get ready. Lee then put the clothing that he took off, in the trunk of his car.
Lee also raised the hood and windows of his car, to offer them both privacy, when he later drove them to the Devil's Hotel.
(_)
It was seven thirty PM, at the Devil's Hotel, as Lee and the bartender, walked pass Jeff, the bouncer, and into the hotel restaurant, turned dance room.
The bartender wore a black and white silk, ao dai, dress. With the outer layer of the gown being black, but the interior layer, and the pants underneath, being white. Along with this, she wore white, flat sole slippers.
Lee wore his gray suit, with gray hat, black and brown stripped tie, his cool sunglasses, and his black dress shoes.
As the two adults made their way towards the dance floor, from the looks people were giving them, it was clear that no one recognized.
Lee thought, 'This is good. Now, I just hope Melvin come through on his end.'
Just as the two of them made it to the middle of the dance floor, the rock song ending, and the next musical piece was a tango piece of music. Lee took lead, with the bartender following in lock step.
Lee thought, with amusement, 'I still got it. That is perfect timing. And getting Melvin to play a few tracks of tango music, at the proper time, was not hard. I just called him up, while my date was in the women's restroom, right after I treated her to tasty lunch, at a nice restaurant downtown, while we were at the festival.'
'I politely asked him to do so. I even told him, that I had a date. And given the party was a couples party, he saw not problem in doing what I request, so he could help me with my date...'
'And Melvin is such a good friend. He was even nice enough to set the timing the way I wanted. With him changing the type of tango music, a few minutes after we have arrived at seven thirty. And different tango music piece should keep playing for half an hour, with the last music piece, which I requested, at the end, being a slow dance music that I like.'
'And I am so happy that I found out, in the time loops, that my dress shoes are so comfortable, that they are great for dancing.'
'Now, to show the everyone here how to really dance.'
Without saying a word, Lee and the bartender started to dance the tango.
The crowd of dancers quickly moved out of the way, Lee and the bartender monopolized the dance floor, with their tango.
Though, Lee was careful to keep his hat and glass on, as he dance. But, for a man of his talents, that was not a problem.
Everyone then watched Lee and the bartender showed how expertly both were skilled at the tango. With Lee and the bartender skillfully swapping the tango styles, they danced to, in parallel, every few tango music tracks.
(_)
Nearby, among their group, both Revy, and Rock were watching the two adults dance the tango. They had been planed to see a movie soon, and then come back to the party, but this was more interesting to watch.
Rock said, “I did not know the bartender could dance that well?”
Revy replied, “Neither did I. They don't teach people to dance like that anymore.”
Rock agreed, “I know. To see such a performance, in person, is a rare treat.”
Revy inquired, “So, who do you think this mister dance is, with the bartender? Because, I don't recognize him.”
Rock answered, “I don't either. But, they are both are good at doing the tango.”
Revy said, “That's for sure. Want to learn to do the tango some time?”
Rock stated, “I wouldn't mind. But, which one of us would you like to lead?
Revy offered, “We will flip a coin before every tango.”
Rock shrugged, as she replied, “That works for me.”
Revy commented, “It is to bad that Eda and Yolanda are not here. Though, it will be fun telling them about seeing these two dancing.”
Rock said, “I agree. Anyway, they said they had other plans. I am sure they are having plenty of fun elsewhere. And they said that they felt it would be to embarrassing to go to this dance as a couple.”
Revy agreed, “Yea. The jokes just write themselves on that issue. Still, let's see how long these two can last.”
Revy and Rock then turned their attention to the two adults dancing the tango.
(_)
For the next half hour, the music tracks switch from one piece of tango music, to another, as the bartender, and Lee, showed no signs of slowing down.
Then, as the music switched to a slow dance song, Lee and the bartender slowed down dancing, until they came to a stop. With the slow dancing allow their bodies to slow down, making it easier for them to do with the exertion of such physical activities, instead of coming to a sudden stop.
As the two adult stopped dancing, they were breathing heavily, while they saw those around them clap in response to the skill they had just demonstrated.
Lee thought, 'Now, to get out of here, before questions are asked.'
Lee and the bartender smiled at the crowd, as they then briskly walked of the room, through the hallway, out of the front lobby, and back to the parking lot.
When the reached Lee's car, they got into vehicle. With Lee in the driver's seat, and the bartender sitting in the right passenger seat. Lee then drove them back to the bartender's home.
(_)
Ten minutes later, Lee parked his car on the side of road, by the bartender's home, with the passenger door facing the bartender's home.
Lee set the car to park, as he let the engine idle.
Both adults took at their seat belts, as they turned to look at each other.
The bartender smirked, as she asked, “Did you see the look on their faces? Especially, Revy and Rock's faces?”
Lee returned the bartender's smile, as he answered, “Yes. It seems my plan worked.”
The bartender agreed, “Yes. It did. And that was masterfully done.”
Lee responded, “I could not have done it without you. And I hope you had a good time.”
The bartender said, “I had a great time, today.”
Both adults leaned towards each other, as they kissed each other deeply on the lips, for several seconds.
They eventually broke their passionate kiss, and leaned back up. Then, the bartender stated, “Still, through all this. I have yet to give you my name.”
Lee commented, “You don't have to. Actually, I would prefer if you not tell me your name. I would like you to keep your name a secret. I like a little mystery in my life.”
The woman replied, “And that is why I like you, Lee. Your mix of manners and coyness are truly endearing. And it is clear that the others did not recognize you. So, I won't tell them it was you, just to annoy them.”
Lee smirked, as he replied, “That's my girl.”
The woman laughed for a few seconds.
As the woman calmed down, the woman said, “See you tomorrow, at the bar.”
Lee replied, “I hope so. And sleep well.”
The woman stated, “I will. It is tempting to offer to sleep with you, but I have a feeling that doing so would just complicate things between us.”
Lee said, “I agree. And as I stated this morning. I was not after getting into your pants. I just wanted a date with you. And enjoy your company for today.”
The woman complimented, “You are a man of your word, Lee. That is rare trait. I hope you some day find that special woman in your life.”
Lee sadly said, “I don't think that woman exists in this world.”
The coyly woman replied, “Then, I hope you find her, wherever she is from. Good night.”
The woman got out of the car. She shut the passenger door behind her.
Lee silently watched her, until he saw her unlock her front door, and enter her home.
Lee then looked in front of the car, as put his car in drive, and drove back to the hotel.
When Lee got back to the hotel, he carried his spare clothing, that he had changed out of earlier, with him, as he entered the lobby of the hotel.
Except for the two clerks, at the check in desk, whom paid him no mind, Lee found that everyone was still in the hotel restaurant, at the dance, and they missed him, as Lee quickly made it way to the elevator bay, to the third floor, and finally to his suite.
Lee closed and locked the door of his suite behind him. Then, in the darkness of his bedroom, he slowly let out a breath, that he did not realize he had been hold in.
Lee thought, 'Now, that was a date.' He then yawned, as he continued his thoughts, “It is still over three hours until twelve, and after that fun filled day with the bartender, and that dance, I am to tired to stay up. I will just have to hope the reset does not happen. At least, if it does, I know where to go to speak to the manager of this place. On the matter. So, I still have a plan B, before people do start to remember.'
'But, for one. I am going to hope for the best. And I will not worry about such things, for tonight, as I get ready and go to bed.
Lee then walking in the darkness of his room, to where his lamp was, on the nightstand, by his bed. He turned it on.
He then place his clothing that was in his hands, including his blue cloth jacket, blue baseball cap, and large glasses, on the table, by his bed.
Next, Lee took off his cool shades, and he placed his sunglasses on the table, as well.
After which, became to disrobe, as he got ready for bed.
Ten minutes later, Lee was ready for bed, wearing different sleeping clothing that he did that morning, and the previous twenty years of loops.
Lee laid down in his bed. He then reached over and turned off his lamp light. The room then shrouded itself in darkness, while Lee put his head on his pillow, and he quickly drifted to sleep.
(_)
The next morning, Lee woke up.
The first thing was open his eyes, he did was sit up, and look at his clock. What he saw brought a smile to his face.
The clock stated it was seven thirty-three AM. And Lee could see daylight peeking around the curtains of his room.
He then turned on the lamp light, and he looked down at himself, to see that the sleeping clothing he wore was the same he had wore last night, and not the clothing he kept waking up in the time loop.
Lee also turned to the table, and he sat the clothing he left on the table, last night. With the clothing not where it always was, during the time loop.
Lee thought, 'Let's do one more test.'
Lee quickly got out of bed, and he walked to the slide door window that opened up to his balcony. He pulled the curtains open, and he could see that it was somewhere cloudy that morning. Meaning that it is a new day. That is it November third.
As Lee looked outside his window, he thought, 'I have never been so happy to see such a gloomy sky. I am free of that time loop. The world is free of that time loop. Finally. Though, this means I am now back on my march to death. But, it also means that I can continue on with my life. And no one is suck in the time loop anymore.'
'Though, I have to now remember to be careful in my secrets. And my life. No reset button anymore, if I die. But, that will not be too hard. If I want to, I can now pull the strings of the girls. And if things go sideways, I have a whole badass skill set to fall back on, that no one knows about, but I. No even those that taught me.'
'Now, to get ready to face this new day.'
Lee closed the curtains, and he walked towards his suite's bathroom, to get cleaned up, ready, and dressed, in his usual clothing, to face the day,
(_)
A few hours later, in the hotel restaurant bar, Revy and Rock's group had gathered at their usual tables for breakfast, and they were all talking about the dance party last night.
Include in their conversation, what they were asking each other who they thought the mysterious mister dance was, whom was with the Rats Nest bartender, last night, at the hotel dance party. And how was able to do the tango so well with the Rats Nest bartender.
Sawyer stated, “Well, whom ever this mister dance is, he is skilled.”
Aeryn spoke up, “And so was the bartender.”
Sawyer agreed, “True.”
Revy inquired, “But, who is he?”
Lotton suggested, “We could just ask the Rats Nest bartender.”
Rock commented, “I doubt that will work. She strikes me as the type of woman who likes to keep her secrets.”
Molly sarcastically replied, “I think the fact that she refuses to tell anyone her real name make that an obvious fact.”
Natsuru said, “Could it be someone we know.”
Yurika looked over at the bar counter, where Lee and Sam were having their breakfast, at their usual places at the bar counter. With Lee sitting to Sam's right side.
Yurika inquired, “Could it be, Lee?”
The group of women suddenly stopped talking between each other, as they all looked over at Lee and Sam, whom both had their backs turned to the women.
A few seconds later, the group of badass women looked back towards each other. They said, in unison, “Nah.”
Revy commented, “Well, it is not Sam either. Because, this guy did not have a beard.”
Violin stated, “This will get us nowhere. Instead, let's focus on finding the writer.”
Kristina agreed, “That is a great idea.”
Rock said, “I agree, as well. Besides, someone that flamboyant will turn up eventually.”
(_)
At that moment, across the room, at the bar counter, Lee and Sam were just finishing up their breakfast.
They faced each other, as they talked.
Lee inquired, “So Sam, how was your day with your girlfriend?”
Sam stated, “It went great. It could not have been better. How was your day, yesterday?”
Lee coyly smiled, as he replied, “For me, it was a long day. But, a good day.”
Sam suggested, “So, are you on for our usual game of poker, at the Rats Nest?”
Lee continued smiling, as he honestly replied, “Buddy, I wouldn't miss it for the world.”
The two friends then got up, and headed to the lobby, to play a few hands of cards, until the Rats Nest opened up for the day. Then, Lee would drive them, in his pink Cadillac, to the bar, where they could continue their ongoing game of poker.
Fold'em.
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 1: “De La Plata Podrido.”
Chapter 09: “As Time Moves Forward, The Past Is Not Left Behind.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
In De La Plata Podrido, Mexico, Lee found the next few days, after the time loop ended, to be very pleasant, as he got use to time moving forward, as usual, and he got back into his previous routine, before time started resetting.
This routine was mainly keeping his identity a secret, while trying to figure out how to get a reality device. And all the while, Lee would have his continuous poker game with Sam, in the morning at the hotel lobby, then in late morning at the Rats Nest. Then, they break for lunch. After which, they continue in the Rats Nest, from the afternoon, until it was close to five fifty PM, which was when they would leave the Rats Nest, and head back to the hotel restaurant.
When they reached the hotel restaurant, they would have dinner, and enjoy watching some karaoke performances, from six-thirty, when the karaoke opened for the night, to six-fifty PM, when Lee would excuse himself from Sam, for about half an hour, and he left the hotel restaurant, for his car, in the parking lot.
Lee then drove to the Last Resort Diner, to meet with Pedro, and talk to him, for their day update with each other, one what was going on, while trying to figure out how to steal one of the reality devices that those after Lee, had on them.
The two of them were both mature enough adults to admit they had reached a brick wall with that plan.
Their meetings usually lasted between twenty to thirty minutes.
After that, Lee and Pedro parted ways for the night, and Lee returned to the hotel restaurant, to meet back with Sam, as they watched the women in Revy's group, take turns sings karaoke, while slowly getting drunk from their drinks.
Lee and Sam found that fun to watch, as they slowly drank beers.
While in the hotel restaurant, other customers, including Lee and Sam, sometimes also went on the karaoke stage. Though, Lee had to remember to pretend that he wasn't that good a singer, when he was on stage. Or, questions would be asked, given the women had heard him sing before the time loop, and at that time, he wasn't that good at singing.
Along with this, Lee and Sam were careful not to get drunk. Though, they sometimes got buzzed by the time they left the hotel restaurant and bar, to get some sleep for the night.
Though, Lee did do one thing different, than from before the time loops, he convinced Sam to change where they sat during dinner and karaoke. He moved them both over to the right back corner table, where the wall right wall, meet the front entrance wall.
They had already occasionally sat there, from time to time. So, Sam did not think much of Lee's request on changing where they sat when they were together, in the hotel restaurant.
Lee and Sam were the only ones that sat in that table, and they sat beside each other, in the corner. With Lee sitting to Sam's right side.
The main reasons Lee had them change their seating location was that it offer Lee a vantage point to see from the entrance, to the back tables, by the stage, where the girls sat, to the stage itself, without most people looking in Lee and Sam's directions.
And even though Lee was no closer to escaping his home reality, and those after him, he was still have a great time with the only good friend he had ever had, whom he considered his best friend, Sam.
On the matter of the time loops, Lee decide to omit the whole time loop incident. He kept what happened secret. He did not tell anyone because he really didn't want to complicate matters with anyone. He did not even tell Pedro, nor Sam. And he decided it was best to hide his the well practice abilities, which he learned in the time loop.
Still, this morning was slightly different that Lee's usual day. During the previous evening, at dinner, Sam had told Lee that he would be spending later night with his girlfriend, on the hotel she was staying at, on the other side of the island. And Sam said that he would meet with Lee late tomorrow morning at the Rats Nest.
Lee's responded, by telling Sam fine with the situation, and he wished Sam a good time with his girlfriend. Though, Lee wisely did not ask any questions on the matter.
So, after dinner, Lee said good night to Sam. He then headed to the Last Resort Diner, where he met with Pedro. After which, he returned to the hotel, and to his suite, where he retired early, for the night.
(_)
The next morning was a cool, slightly windy, partly cloudy day.
Around eleven thirty AM, the next morning, Lee's pink car was parked in the parking lot of the Rats Nest, to the left of the building.
While inside the Rats Nest, Lee sat in a stool, at the bar counter, with his back to the far left windows of the bar, as he patiently waited for Sam.
Lee was dressed in his usual t-shirt, pants, leather belt, socks, underwear, tennis shoes, blue cloth jacket, blue baseball cap, and large glasses.
The bartender was dressed in her casual wear, as well.
Besides the bartender, Lee was the only other person in the room.
As Lee sipped on his bottle of beer, the bartender walked up to Lee, from the other side of the bar counter.
While the bartender stood across the bar counter from Lee, she asked, “So, where is your friend, Sam?”
Lee set his half over full bottle of beer on the table. He looked up at the bartender, as he answered, “He spent the night with his girlfriend. He said that he was going to meet with me here, this morning.”
The bartender replied, “I did not know he had a girlfriend. What is she like?”
Lee honestly admitted, “I don't know. I have never met the woman. Me and Sam have an arrangement. I don't ask questions about his personal life. He doesn't ask questions about my personal life.”
Lee thought, 'Speaking of which. I am happy you have kept your mouth shut about our date. Even to me, for the most part. Unless we are alone, like now. Though, you do smile towards me more, so I know you enjoyed our date and the dance. And I return the smile.'
The bartender replied, without even a hint of sarcasm, “Nice arrangement. I think I would find such an arrangement interesting. Though, speaking of question. The girls are still bugging me about that dance.”
Lee cracked a smile, as he said, “I told you we would bring down that house. And they would be envious of you.
The bartender returned Lee smile, as she responded, “I know. And we accomplished both feats, very well. Also, I love the feeling I get when I refuse to tell them who I danced with that night.”
Lee commented, “I am glad you are having fun with that information.”
The bartender admitted, “Yea. I am. And your secret is safe with me. Also, Let me know where you need another beer. Or, when Sam gets here, so I can get him one.”
Lee replied, “I will.”
The bartender then walked to another part of the bar counter. From the corner of Lee's left eye, he saw her use a white rag, as she picked up on bottle of alcohol from under the bar counter, and wipe it down with the rag, then she move on to the next bottle.
Lee then looked at himself in the mirror, on the right wall, directly behind the bar counter from him, for a few seconds. He then looked down at his bottle of beer sitting in front of him, as he thought, 'I find it deeply ironic that, even after twenty years worth of time loops, countless skills learned, numerous schemes successfully pulled off, I have yet to create a workable plan to steal one of the reality devices from Rock and Revy's group.'
'And even with my skills, it would be suicide to directly try steal on from them. Besides, I know that not all of them have reality devices, and they alternate who has the reality device, among their sub-groups.'
'So, it is a gamble as to which one has reality device. With it literally depending on the day. And if I pick the wrong person, it is game over. And even if I do get the right one, any of those girls alone would be a handful for me in a fight. Even one on one, the odds of my success are not good. And none of them travel around alone.'
Lee groaned, as he continued his thoughts, in annoyance, 'Damn. Looking at this from an outside point of view, someone might assume I am a creepy stalked interested in these women's bodies. I don't give a damn about their bodies. All I want is one of their reality devices'.
Lee forced himself to calm down, as he went onto think, in a more neutral state of mind, 'I am starting to think, I may have to play this by ear. Or, do I ask for help? Though, the question is, who I can ask? Pedro and his men wisely won't come within literally a mile of those women, unless they needs too. And Sam doesn't know what is going on.'
'And after so many months with him, outside the time loop, if I fess up to him now, I am practically flushing the only good friendship I have had in my entire life.'
Lee looked up, at the brown wooding paneling ceiling, with the ventilation ducts, and the ceiling lights, with fans attached to them, set through the ceiling.
While the fan lights were off, with the windows providing plenty of light for the room. The fans were left turned on, so the fans could circulate the air in the room.
Lee continued to look at the ceiling, as he let out of a deep breath. He thought, 'At this point, I just don't know what to do.'
Suddenly, to Lee's right side, he heard the entrance door the bar open.
Lee thought, 'I hope that is Sam. I could really use his company, right now.' He then turned towards the entrance. And while he did not show it out the outside, he was surprised at him he saw.
The person was Bob, in his later twenties, in his badass cowboy outfit, brown long coat, and cowboy hat. Given he was in the process of growing his bushy beard, and he wore a satchel over his left shoulder, that sat against his right hip, Bob was from the time when he was searching for a cure for Boris' cancer, in book three of Badasses Of the Multiverse.
Lee quickly looked back down at his beer.
Bob calmly walked up to the bar counter, and he sat down in a stool, right beside Lee, to Lee's left.
Lee did not dare look in Bob's direction, nor into the mirror. Still, Lee felt both surprise, and wonder, as he thought, 'And I thought the time loop was screwy. I am literally sitting beside someone that was created from my very imagination. That is mind blowing. I would be tempted to talk to him, if I didn't know that it would likely create a paradox.'
'Still, with Revy and the others here, it is not surprising that Bob would show up, at this point in his life. I wrote with broad strokes, as I had him travel the multiverse. So, why not ironically sit down beside his creator. Without him realizing whom I am. It is tempting to think about that from a religious standpoint, but I am not that arrogant.'
'Also, on a side note, I am regretting making it so hard to find a cure for cancer in my stories, because I am now in the same boat, and my own actions have limited my options. Talk about biting oneself in the ass. I think Bob, and even Boris, or now B, would find my situation funny.'
'Still, Bob likes to keep to himself, when his travels alone. So, this should not be a problem. He will come in, have a beer, pay for it, exit the bar, find an alleyway, and leave this reality. So, this should not be a problem. I just got to wait out the situation. And if there is a problem, I will handle things for him. With me playing the charitable stranger. I will even pay for his beer, if I have too.'
Bob pulled out a small bar of gold, and placed it on the table of the bar counter. He then spoke, with a firm tone of voiced, in english, “Bartender, a cold bottle of beer, please.”
From the corner of Lee's left eye, he saw the bartender looked up at the man. She set down her white rag, and bottle, back where they went. She then quietly looked over at Bob.
The bartender remained quiet for a few seconds. She then walked over to Bob, and she looked down at the gold bar.
She picked up the bar, and studied the bar for a seconds. After which, she pocketed the gold bar, as she leaned down, and pulled out a cold bottle of beer for Bob, from a nearby fridge.
As she placed the cold bottle of beer in front of Bob, Lee saw, from the corner of his left eye, that it was a high price, very tasty brand of beer, that Lee only sampled a few times, when it was a special occasion.
Lee thought, “I am happy she knows how valuable gold is. Still, she is awfully quiet. I have never seen her this quiet. And this is from a woman, whom I one time watched back talk Revy, a week after the Rats Nest massacre. Though, considering my quietness. I am ironically, not one to talk on such manners.'
'Also, I am glad when I sit at bar counter, I intentionally sit right here. Because, this seat is right in front of the fridge. And it makes the bartender’s job easier for her, when she is dealing with me.
A few seconds later, the three adults heard the bar door open again.
They turned to look at who it was.
Lee remained calm, as he saw a much more sickly, paled skinned, male, Rock, with short black hair, walk into the room. He was dressed in a black business suit, and he was using a cane in his right hand, though he did not really put any weight onto the cane.
Given Lee was in front of both Bob and the bartender, Lee missed Bob and the bartender doing a double-take at looking at this Rock of the past.
Also, given Bob and the bartender were beside each other, they missed seeing the other do a double-take.
All three adults then quickly turned back to what they were doing. Lee and Bob turned, and looked down at their beer bottles. The bartender looked down at the bar counter, as well.
Lee thought, with worry, 'Okay. This is getting bad on several levels. Though, the situation is not that bad, yet. From what I see, Rock is not leaning too heavily on that cane. So, he is not very ill, just yet. And from that, and the way he is dressed, this Rock is from book two timeline, before Rock reunited with Akira, and he met Ranma and Natsuru.'
'And given he is here and not in the U.S., he likely just wants a beer, and he not yet looking to meet with government officials of various realities. This is good for all of us, on so many levels.'
'Also, the only reality travel option Rock had at the time was... Oh crap. That means Rock's crew is in town. Fabiola, Annie, and... Megatron. If Megatron stays in this reality for long, he will search the internet and find my stories. And then I, along with this planet, are royally screwed!'
'I need to calm down. It is not that bad... Yet.”
'Fortunately, I remember what I wrote, and Megatron showed absolutely no hint of knowing about my stories. If he did, this planet would already be an ash heap.'
'My best bet, to keep everything together, is to just make sure nothing goes wrong... Ha! Good luck with that... I need to remember that for Bob, this is before he learned how dangerous paradoxes are. But, he should already be genre savvy enough to realize that this is Rock of the past, and he should keep his mouth shut.'
'The bartender does not know a damn thing, and she likes me, so I can probably keep it all together. And if there is a conversation, I just need to keep steering it in sane, constructive directions.'
A few seconds later, Past Rock up to the bar counter, and he sat down in a stool, beside Lee, to Lee's right side.
Rock set his cane beside him, to his right side. He then pulled out five dollar bill in U.S. currency, and he set it on the bar counter in front of him. He looked over, towards the bartender, as he requested, in english, “A shot of rum, please.”
The bartender looked over at Rock. She quietly pulled out a small glass, and a bottle of rum. She then set the bottle and the glass beside Rock. Next, she pocketed the five dollar bill, and headed for the cash register, at the back of the room, to ring up her sale.
Lee thought, 'Now, here comes the fun parts.'
Rock pour himself a shot of rum, as Bob opened his bottle of beer.
The three men then quietly drank their alcoholic beverages for the next couple of minutes, in silence. All four adults in the room were silent, as they all deeply thought on the matters they faced in their lives.
Lee then mentally realized, 'If these two men beside me get to introspective, they might spill the beans and create a reality breaking paradox. So, I guess I am going to have to get the ball rolling.'
Lee continued to look down at his nearly finished bottle of beer, as he quietly commented, “So, let me guess. Problems with women?”
The other two men looked down at their drinks.
Bob said, in in a halfhearted tone of voice, in english, “You have no idea.”
Rock stated, in a tired tone of voice, in english, “That things I could tell you.”
Lee thought, 'On the contrary. I likely know more about your situations, than you do. Still, let us keep this conversation moving.' He inquired, “So, are we talking women in general? Or, a specific woman? I can sympathize either way.”
Bob answered, “Just three women. Well four, but that one is not around.”
Rock replied, “Four women. You have the same number of problematic women as I do.”
Lee asked, “So, what do these women looked like?”
Bob answered, “Well their leader is the worst. A very violent, redheaded asian chick.”
Rock chuckled, as he said, “Sounds like my girlfriend.”
Lee heard Revy's voice outside, and she sounded like she was talking to herself.
Lee turned around, behind the other two men, and he saw from the windows to the far left, front corner of the building, two Revys talking to each other, from across the the street. One was dressed as usual, the other was in a red leather outfit.
Lee thought, 'Oh crap. Both of these two past Revys are right outside. And even if they have not found these two. They will likely plan to come to their bar, and have a drink.'
Lee continued to look at the two women, and he noticed, as he thought, 'Though, they haven't looked into the bar windows yet. There is still time to avert a catastrophe.'
Lee kept his eyes on the women, as he quickly told them, “I think I see a couple of redheaded asians across the street. I suggest hiding behind the bar counter. I will take care of this. Because it looked like they are about to come with way.”
Neither of the men had no time to argue, as Rock grabbed his cane, while he and Bob, both climbed over the bar, to hide.
Lee then saw the two women turned, and walked towards the entrance. Lee thought, 'I hate it went I am right. And I have to play this just right, or we are all screwed to the wall.'
Lee turned around, and looked at the bartender. He requested, “Please, play it cool.”
The woman looked out the windows, and sat the two Revys coming their way. She then turned to Lee, as she replied, “Trust me. After some of the nights I have had, I have no love for them.”
Next, the bartender quickly grabbed Bob's bottle of beer, Rock's glass, and the closed bottle of rum. She tossed the bottle in the trash, until the counter, put the bottle up, and carried the glass over to the sink, under the bar counter.
Though, she was careful to walk around where Bob and Rock were hiding. The two men were quietly sitting on the floor, with their back to the bar counter. The two men sat beside each other. With Bob to Rock's left side. Bob was sitting with his back to the fridge, while Rock was sitting with his back to a set of shelves.
Lee went back to looking down at his beer bottle, as the bartender began washing the glass, with both of them pretending as if nothing had happened.
Several seconds later, Lee and the bartender heard the door open, with the two Revys came walking inside. Lee and the bartender then heard the door shut.
Lee and the bartender casually turned, and looked towards the two redheaded women.
One Revy was wearing her usual clothing, while the other Revy was wearing a red leather outfit, with her jacket unzipped to show a white t-shirt underneath.
Lee and the bartender could see that both Revys had their weapons in their shoulder holsters.
Both Revys turned to look at Lee and the bartender.
The Revy in red leather outfit calmly asked, “Have you seen a couple of men we are looking for?”
Lee thought, with annoyance, 'Great. The brainwashed and crazy one is doing the talking... Well, brainwashed anyway. She was always crazy.'
Lee requested, “Please, explain whom these men look like, so we may be better help you.”
As the Revy's did so, from behind the bar, Bob realized he was next to Rock of his past. But, he kept himself calm, realizing he did not want alert Rock.
Back on the other side of the bar counter, the Revy in the red leather stated, “I am after a japanese man, in a black business suit, whom walks with a cane.”
The Revy in her usual clothing said, “I am after a caucasian man, in a cowboy outfit. Have you seen either of them?”
Lee calmly stated, without a hint of fear in his tone of voice, “Yes. I saw both of them a few minutes ago. They just left out the back door. If you leave now, you might be able to catch them.”
The two Revys did not verbally respond. Instead, the Revys started towards the back of the bar.
As they did so, Lee continued to turn in his stool, as he did not take his eyes off of them.
The soon reached the back of the room, with Lee have his back to the front door.
Suddenly, Lee heard the front door open again, as he heard a very familiar voice say from behind him, and the two Revys, from the front of the bar, “Barkeep, I need a drink. The hotel bar is out of rum. So, I came here.”
Lee silently prayed, 'God, I know I am on your shit list. But, please don't let that be who I think it is.'
The two Revys suddenly stopped in their tracks, as they and Lee turned around to see third Revy walked into the bar, whom was in her usual clothing, looking back at them.
The third Revy had her weapon her shoulder holsters. And Lee just instinctively knew this was the present Revy.
Lee sarcastically thought, 'Thank you, God, for the constant reminders that what I think of you is true.” Lee then reigned in his emotions, as he mentally realized, 'We are on the threshold of a multiversal paradox collapse. And there is only one way to defuse the situation. With a simple question.'
Lee turned to the present Revy, whom he knew, as he asked, while faking excitement in his tone of voice, “Revy, why didn't you tell me you had two identical sisters?”
Not wanting to let a stranger know their secrets, all three Revys realized this was their out, and they went it.
The Revy in red leather asked, “Yea... Revy... who is your friend?”
The Revy in the present answered, “Just some fool that lives here. Pay him no mind.”
The Revy after Bob asked, “You won't happened to remember where the people we are after are.”
Revy from the present answered, “I wish. You know my memory isn't that good. I remember where they will be, someday. But, not when you are looking for them. And the rules stated I cannot tell you.”
The Revy in red leather replied, “Yes. I have seen enough sci-fi movies to guess why. Well, girls it looks like we will just have to leave on our own ways.”
The other two Revys nodded in agreement.
Lee thought, 'Given the Revy in red leather, is after the Rock of the far distance past, before the, Those You Meet Along The Way, chapters. And those were really complicated chapters to make. Still, it is likely this Revy so far back in the past that she has not seen a near paradox before. But, she still understands the concept. And she is willing to accept the situation.'
Lee then quickly realized, as he thought, 'Though, that is not the main problem here. Revy from the present will certainly say something about this to Rock and the girls later.'
'If I didn't mention meeting the Revys to the them, likely before Revy does, it will raise suspicious from them, towards me. But, how can I do that without it seemingly awkward on my part? Or, making them suspicious in me in another way?...'
'What a minute. It is certainly ballsy enough to try. The question is can I get the three Revys to do it. Though, they are vain enough to say, yes, to my request.'
Lee looked around the room, at all three Revys, as he requested, “Girls. If I could have one moment of your time.”
The three Revys turned to Lee, as they asked, in annoyed tone of voice, in unison, “What?”
Lee calmly continued with his request, “I just wanted to take a picture of you three together. So, people would believe me when I tell them about you three. I mean, it is a very rare treat when a man gets to meet three identical hot redheaded women at the same time.”
The two past Revy's said, in unison, “Sure.”
Present Revy said, “I don't see a problem with doing so.”
Lee mentally realized, 'Just as I thought. I am appealing to their egos, and they said, yes. Oh the fun I am going to have with this picture.'
Lee turned to the bartender, as he simply requested, “Camera.”
The bartender replied, “Coming right up.” She then rush into the back of the building.
Ten seconds later, the bartender came back with a polaroid camera. Meanwhile, the three Revys walked up close to each other, near the middle of the room.
She walked up to Lee, and handed it to him. She said, “It has plenty of film in it.” She then took a few steps back from Lee.
Lee looked at the polariod camera, as he thought, 'I have not handled one of these types of cameras in over a decade. Talk about old fashioned. Still, it will work.' He looked up at the three Revys, as he requested, “Now, ladies, for symmetry, could the one with in the red leather be in the center, and we will get started.”
The three Revys grouped up, with the Revy in red leather being in the center of the group.
Lee opened up the lens and flash section of the polariod camera. He looked through the eyepiece, as he requested, “Now, smile ladies.”
The three Revy's smiled, as Lee swiftly took eight photos. One for each Revy. One for the bartender. And three for himself.
Lee looked behind him, at the bartender, and then back at the three Revys, as he complimented all four women, “Thanks girls.”
Lee then handed a photo to each of them, and he pocketed four of the other photos. And when he got to the bartender, he also returned her camera to her, and one of the photos.
Revy after the Bob said, “Thanks for the photo.”
The Revy in red leather stated, “See you guys later.”
The two Revys from the past walk from through the front entrance, and down the road.
Lee noticed this, as he thought, 'They must have realized that the trail at gone cold now. Good.'
The bartender swiftly walked around the bar counter, and with her free hand, pulled out a bottle of rum, from under the counter, right beside Bob and Rock, to Rock's right side, on a shelve, by him.
She leaned up, and placed the bottle of rum top of the counter, as she said, “Here is you bottle of rum, Revy. You can have it for free, if you just drink it somewhere else.”
Revy shrugged, as she replied, “Sure.”
Revy walked over to the bar counter, grabbed the neck of the bottle with her left hand. She then left out the front door to the bar. As soon as Lee and the bartender saw Revy leave sight of the front windows, Lee said, “The coast is clear.”
Both men from behind the bar stood up, and walked out from behind it.
As they approached Lee, Bob said, “Thanks.”
Rock complimented, “Not bad. And your timing was good.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.” He thought, “I might as well ask them. And I am guess I am that arrogant to.” Lee requested, “Before you two leave, I would like to take some photos of us together. With us signing our names on the back. I would like to remember the guys that brought such an interesting set of beauties to my eyes.”
Rock said, “No problem.”
Bob replied, “If that is what you want.” He thought, 'That is a small price to pay for saving our butts.'
Lee turned to the bartender, as he requested, “Could you please take four photos of us.”
The barkeep held up her camera, as she answered, “Sure.”
The bartender took a four photos of Rock, Lee, and Bob.
Rock was on the right of the picture. Lee was in the middle. And Bob on the left.
All three were smiling, as Lee held up a two finger victory symbol with his right hand, in front of his chest, with his palm facing outward.
The bartender then pulled out a pen from under the counter, and she handed it to them.
All three men signed their first names on the back of the four copies. With their names right behind their image in the pictures.
After each adult received a picture of the three men, Lee pocketed the picture. Then, from another pocket, Lee pulled out two more photos. He said, “Here.”
Lee then handed Rock and Bob each a photo.
Bob said, “Thanks.” He then pocketed his to new pictures.
Rock commented, “I appreciate this.” He put his two new pictures in one of his pockets.
Meanwhile, the bartender set her pictures of the men, beside the photos of Revy, and the polaroid camera, on the bar counter, to be put up later.
Rock said, “I guess I should leave. Before more trouble comes for my friends, and I.”
Bob stated, “Same here. I feel I have stayed too long, as well.”
Lee and the bartender then watched as Bob and Rock left the bar through the front entrance. Bob turned to Lee's right, after exiting the bar, as Rock turned to Lee's left, after exiting the bar.
Lee thought, 'Now, to get out of here, and back to the hotel, before Revy does. While I am sure Revy took on of the cars her group has. Knowing her, she will likely run a few errands first, and then come back to the hotel. So, I have time. I will just take my time, and beat her there.'
'Still, I did enjoy that photo of use being taken. And the way I did the two finger victory sign in front of my chest was exactly as imagined Guy doing it. When Guy, Akira, Natsuru, Ranma, Birdy, and Futaba, took the photo of them together, with all of them in their male from, in beach wear, on the beach, at the end of the first book of my Badasses Of the Multiverse stories.'
'Though, given how Rock is good friends with Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma, she may have seen those photos before. But, likely only in passing. And she would not remember it. So, it is a small risk.'
Suddenly, the bartender faked a cough to get Lee's attention.
Lee turned to the bartender.
The bartender calmly said, “I don't know what your game is, Lee. I am not sure I want to know. But, I know that you are playing a very dangerous game, and you play it like pro.”
Lee mentally reflected, 'That was not meant as a compliment. Still, I have to ask her a question.' He inquired, “Will that effect our friendship?”
The bartender responded, “No. But, just be careful.”
Lee stated, “I always am. Also, if Sam comes by, please tell that I had to take care of things, and I will meets him later, at the usual time, as the hotel restaurant for dinner.”
The bartender said, “I will.”
Lee replied, “Thanks.”
Lee then turned, and briskly walked out the front door of the bar. He then headed to his car.
Within less than a minute, Lee was on the road, driving to the Devil's Hotel.
(_)
Five minutes later, Lee has parked his car, in the Devil's Hotel parking lot. He then casually walked into the front lobby of the Devil's Hotel.
Lee thought, 'I have to remain calm to begin with. Then, act excited. If I do not, I will not be able to pull this off. Now, to find Rock.'
Lee turned to his left to see that sitting on a set of encircled couches was, clockwise Rock, Violin, Aeryn. The next couch had Natsuru, Akira, and Ranma. The next couch, facing Rock's couch, sat Shenhua, Sawyer, and Lotton. And on the couch facing Natsuru's couch, was Yurika, Mikoto, and Nodoka.
Revy, nor the Lagoon sisters, were anywhere to be seen.
Lee thought, 'That was simple. And it looked like Revy is not here yet. Now, let's get this over well.'
Lee casually approach the woman. He walked up to where the corner entrance to the couches, between Rock's couch, and Natsuru's couch.
The women turned to look up at Lee, as Violin said, “Hi Lee.”
Lee casually replied,, “Hello ladies.” Lee then turned to Rock, as he asked, while feigning a little bit of excitement in his voice, “Rock, why didn't you tell me that Revy had two identical twin sisters?”
The women all just laughed.
Rock smiled, as she said, “What makes you think that? Revy does not have any sisters that I know of.”
Lee was careful to pick the right pocket, as he pulled out one of his copies of three Revys, while being careful not to pull out the other two. He handed the picture over to to Rock, as he said, “I beg to differ.”
Rock looked at the picture, and her eyes widened in surprised. She then passed the picture over to Violin, whom just let out a laugh.
Violin then passed the picture to Aeryn.
As the women passed the picture around, and Lee inwardly smiled, as he watched most of the women's eyes widen. He thought, 'I will let them keep that copy. I still have the other one.'
Lee explained, “These two walked in to the Rats Nest today. Then, Revy showed up.”
Lee could tell the women were becoming even more surprised.
Lee could tell that Rock was forcing herself to remain calm down, as she hesitantly asked, “Did anyone else show up at the bar before them?”
Lee answered, in a matter of fact tone of voice, “Now, that you mention it. Yea. Two men. First, was this bearded man in a cowboy outfit. The second man was sickly fellow in a black suit, using a cane to walk. Though, they left before the girls arrived.”
Lee noticed that his comment made all the women visibly tense up.
All the women had similar trains of thought, as Rock did.
Rock thought, 'Oh lord, Lee just had a multiversal temporal event involving my past self. Bob's past self. And three Revys. Although, he doesn't seem realize it. And we cannot tell him without also having to answer several, much more difficult, questions. That fool has a real knack from getting into these situations.'
Lee calmly inquired, while faking obliviousness, “What is the matter?”
The women immediately calm down, as a number of them quickly said, in unison, “Nothing.”
Lee shrugged, as he replied, “Okay. Keep the photo. And have a nice day.” He mentally added, 'And I still have one to spare.'
Lee then headed turned around, and headed for the elevator bay, to take him to his suite on the third floor.
A few minutes later, when Lee reached the privacy of his suite, he laughed his ass off, while he thought, 'I just pulled off another impossible prank, and I did not even need the time loop to do it. Damn, I am good... And I think I will get some lunch, in a little while. After everything cools down with the girls, downstairs.'
As Lee calmed down, he took his two pictures out of his pockets, and put both photos in a safe place, in his bedroom. So, he would not lose them, nor would they be discovered by the others. He then relaxed on his bed, as he watched some TV.
(_)
Meanwhile, a few minutes after Lee left the lobby, Rock the suddenly remembered something. She looked around, at her friends, as she said, “I will be back later.”
Rock then got up, and she headed for the elevator bay. She took a separate elevator to her the floor where her suite was located.
When she entered her suite, she quickly walked over to her suit case, by the wall, and opened it.
She then unzipped a hidden lining in the suit case top, and pulled out a photo album that she and Revy had.
After a few seconds of paging through the photo album, she found the pictures she was looking for.
There were two photos. Both photos was faded from years of age. The first photo was of the three Revys. But, the second photo was of herself, as a man, Bob, as a man, and Lee.
She took the second picture out of the album. She flipped the photo flipped, and she saw the back had their names on it.
She flipped it back to the picture side, as she thought, 'Damn, it was so long ago, I barely remember it. And I had completely forget about the names, and Lee himself.'
'Still, my gut tells me that Lee's story does not add up. I look like my own sister. My male self looks like me enough, that he should have asked me why my male side used the name, Rock, just as I do. Also, he met my male self once. I am not sure he remembers, because he was drunk at the time.'
'In addition, that victory symbol looks familiar, but I cannot place it. It is not from any series I have seen. I just cannot remember where recall it right now.'
'Though, this all means there is more to Lee than I realized. I will have to watch him more closely.'
'Also, there is no point in asking Revy about these photos. She told me ones, she did not even remember when the photo of the three versions of her, together, was taken. And she had already done that twice. Though, she will likely talk about it today. Still, I doubt I will get much from the conversation.'
'But, for right now. I will just head back downstairs to join my friends. And while we relax, and have fun, as we look for the writer.'
Rock then put the photo back into her album, with the picture facing upwards. Next, she put the album back into her the hidden section of the lining. After which, she zipped up the lining, closed her suit case, and set the suitcase back by the wall, where it had been.
Rock then stood up and headed for the exit to her suite.
A few seconds later, Rock locked and closed the door to her suite behind her.
While she walked down the hallway, towards the elevator bay, and back to her friends in the lobby, she thought, 'I am sure when Revy shows up, she will mention what happened to her at the Rats Nest. The problem is, I doubt she will have any answers to my questions about Lee. And she is to blunt to mention the photo of me, Lee, and Bob too. She would just match into Lee's suite, and demand an answer. And this situation, calls for much more subtlety.'
Rock soon reached elevator bay, and a few minutes later, she rejoined her friends on the couches the front lobby, as they talked about various things. Including, the photo of the three Revys, that Lee has given them.
A little while later, Revy returned to the Devil's hotel. She came into the front lobby, and she her friends, and lover, what happened at the Rats Nest. And while she was a little annoyed that Lee has spilled the beans. She still told them was happened.
And Rock found that she was correct. Revy had nothing to really add on the matter, that Lee had not already informed them of.
(_)
It was one thirty PM in the afternoon in the hotel restaurant, as Lee has finally came down for lunch.
Except for Melvin, Lee was the only one there.
Lee had decided to have lunch at the bar that day. He had a bottle of beer with a club sandwich, along with nachos and cheese.
Lee had already drank most of his bottle of beer, and ate his sandwich, and half of his small plate of nachos and cheese. And he was beginning to get full.
Given the those after him, rarely came to the hotel bar between one to three PM, this was one of the rare times that Lee had allowed himself to relax, and get caught up in his own little world for a long while.
Currently, he was watching the TV, located on the far wall, behind side of the bar, near the back of the room.
Melvin even allowed Lee to select what channel to watch.
Given Revy, Rock and the others in the hotel, Lee felt that he needed to pick a channel that if they caught him watching, they would not suspicious.
So, Lee picked the Travel Channel, which was currently airing a repeat of the show, Bizarre Foods, which was in english.
As Lee set down his bottle on the bar counter, after taking a swallow of beer, he heard a sweet, feminine voice, to his left side, whom Lee did feel like recalling who it was, say, “What are you watching?”
Lee don't bother to look over his left shoulder at the person, as he answered, “I am watching the Travel Channel. They are showing a repeat of Bizarre Foods featuring Thailand. Did you know they eat boiled, and fried, silkworm grubs, there?”
The woman casually answered, “No, I did not. And considering I spent a number of years there, I am mildly surprised that I did not know that.”
The comment caught Lee's attention, as he slowly turned to his left, to looked over at the woman. Lee turned his head slowly, as to not raise in suspicions.
Lee showed no outward expression that would give away he knew who she was, as he looked at the small, petite body of Sawyer, whom was wearing a light pink blouse, red long skirt, with some red tennis shoes.
Sawyer continued, “I use to have a very messy job there. I am happy I am not longer doing that.”
Lee thought, 'Frederica Sawyer, the former cleaner of Roanapur. Calling her previous job, messy, would be an understatement.'
'She maybe only a hundred pounds when wet, but she is a dangerous as any of the other women in her group. Honestly, in some ways she is likely more dangerous than Revy normally is. This woman literally knows the human anatomy inside and out. Revy does not. Sawyer could being the pain, if she really wanted to.'
'Still, is she after my head?... Maybe not. Though, I had her brainwashed, I did do a lot of good things for her. The super-soldier serum she has keeps her healthy and young. I helped her gain a nice set of close friends. I had Lotton treat her like a lady. And I later restored her voice, and fixed her scars.'
'She is now an unquestionable beautiful woman, that gives off no creepy vibes when looking at her, except when she wears her goth clothing. But, that is her choice.'
'Though, she is not wearing goth clothing, right now. And she is actually quite cute. I guess she decided to do something different today.'
'And I honestly didn't pay attention to her just now. That could have been a fatal mistake. But, I am still in the clear. Given even my precognition is not giving me any warning sensations. Though, I guess I need to be on my toes.'
Sawyer commented, “Learn something new every day.”
Lee agreed, “Always nice to broaden one's horizons. Would you like some nachos and cheese? I have only eaten half of it. And I am not very hungry.”
Sawyer gave Lee a genuine smile, as she replied, “Sure.”
Lee handed her his half full plate of nachos and cheese.
Meanwhile, Melvin watched all this, as he thought, 'I wonder how nice Lee would be if he knew who Sawyer really was.'
Sawyer took the plate. She turned to Melvin, as she stated, “Beer please. I will pay you after I eat.”
Melvin replied, “That will be fine.” He then leaned down, and pulled a nice decent, cold bottle of beer from the fridge.
Melvin then handed the bottle of Sawyer.
As Sawyer took the bottle in her left hand, she held the plate of nachos and cheese in her right hand.
Sawyer turned to Lee, as she commented, “By the way. That photo this morning was interesting.”
Lee looked at Sawyer, as he replied, “Yes, it was.”
Sawyer then turned and walked away, and towards a table near the stage, across the room. She sat down in a chair. She open her bottle of beer. And she drank her beer, as she to ate the food that Lee had given her.
Melvin overheard Sawyer comment. He walked towards Lee, from behind the bar counter, as he asked, “What photo?”
Lee turned around to face Melvin. He pulled out another copy of the three Revys. And he handed it to Melvin.
Lee watched as Melvin looked at it, with Melvin's eyes going wide.
Lee held back a laugh.
Melvin forced himself to calm down, as he handed Lee back the photo.
Lee gently took the photo, and he pocketed the picture.
Melvin continued to collect himself, has he thought, 'It is possible that is Revy, from three different timelines, or realities. I doubt that is Revy from multiple realities. Still, I have to ask.' He inquired, “What sick reality would create three versions of that lunatic?”
Lee casually replied, “I guess this one.”
Both men then overheard Sawyer suddenly laugh for a few seconds.
Melvin questioned, “Did she just hear us from all the way over there?”
Lee coyly replied, “That appears to be the case.”
Melvin mentally realized, 'The super-soldier serum. I heard that it enhanced senses, and she was exposed it. I got to watch what I say. I almost let the cat out of the bag.'
Melvin inquired, “Care to tell me the back story on that picture?”
Lee answered, “No. Dealing with one Revy is enough. Three is not something I want to even think about.”
Both men overheard Sawyer laugh again, for a few seconds, from across the room.
Melvin then stated, “I fully understand.”
Lee thought, 'Yes. You do. On other note, I need to go do some laundry.'
Lee pulled out some money, as he said, “This should cover the meal, with a little extra for the tip.”
Melvin picked up the money, as he stated, “Thanks.”
Lee stood up, as he said, “See you later, Melvin.”
Melvin replied, “You to, Lee.”
Lee then turned, and walked out of restaurant.
Melvin then watched as Lee left the room.
Melvin then turned his attention to Sawyer, whom was still sitting across the room, as he thought, 'I wonder how good the hearing is with those whom had the super-soldier serum. Let's test that.' He turned in Sawyer's direction, as he asked, in a soft tone of voice, “Do you want another cold bottle of beer, Sawyer? It is on the house.”
From across the room, Sawyer turned to Melvin. She smirked, as she loudly stated, “Sure.”
Melvin thought, 'That answers my question. And it was worth a bottle of beer to learn.' He then walked pulled out an unopened, cold bottle of beer from under the bar counter, and walked towards Sawyer, to get it to her.
Soon after Sawyer finished her snack, and the first bottle of beer. She then took the unopened bottle of beer with her, as she went to the bar counter, paid Melvin for the first bottle of beer, and left a tip. She then carried free the bottle of beer with her, in her right hand, as she headed out of the room, to find something else to do, to entertain herself.
(_)
Fifteen minutes later, Lee had collected his dirty clothes into his gym bag. He then took the bag of dirty clothes to the laundromat, on the ground floor of the hotel.
Lee had the strap of his gym back slung over his right shoulder, as he entered the laundry mat. When he was inside the room, saw Akira sitting on a bench, against the wall, reading a book, as one of the washers by her was operating.
Also, Lee noticed that except for himself, Akira was the only person in the room.
Lee thought, 'I guess it is her turn to wash hers, Natsuru's, and Ranma's clothing. Also, even though Akira is sharp and savvy, she is also very nice. I don't mind spending time with her. In the time loops, she was one of the few women in Revy's group that I could talk to as a person, without worrying about saying the wrong thing and being hurt. Except for being the writer.'
Akira then looked up and saw Lee. She greeted him, 'Hi Lee. That was a nice photo you did today. Revy came by and confirmed what happened. That must have been a shocking experience for you.”
Lee walked over to Akira, with his gym bag.
Lee turned to Akira, as he joked, “It was easy enough on my eyes, that I should recover.”
Akira giggled. She then said, “Yea. I have to agree with you on that. Revy is nice to look at.”
Lee walked over to an unused washing machine, by the one Akira was using. He unzipped his gym back.
As Lee put his dirty clothing into the machine, he agreed, “Yep. And a tornado is nice to look at, but that doesn't mean you want to get close to it.”
Akira then let out laugh. She then stated, “Exactly. That is what I miss most about you southerners. You are both polite, and have a nice sense of humor.”
Lee said, “Thank you.”
Akira offered, “You're welcome. And you can sit down beside me.”
Lee replied, “I think I will.”
Lee reached down, on the open detergent box, and picked up a scoop of hotel detergent. He put the detergent in machine. He then set the scoop back in the open detergent box, on the floor. After which he close the lid to the machine, set the machine to wash, and turned it on.
Lee thought, 'I am glad the hotel has complimentary washing machines and detergent, that we guests don't have to pay for.' He turned to Akira, as he continued his thoughts, 'Now, I think I will join Akira, for a nice conversation.'
While Lee walked over to the bench, he a thought occurred to him, 'I wonder how much of the culture of the southeastern United States she remembers, from book one. I was kind of broad in my description of her time in Atlanta. While she was in college.'
Lee then sat down on beside Akira, to Akira's left, on the bench. But, as an act of tact, he spaced himself three feet from her.
Lee then turned his head to face Akira, to his right.
Meanwhile, Akira shift her entire body to face Lee. With her left foot on the bench between them, and her right foot on the floor. She placed her book in her lap.
While already knowing the answer, Lee inquired, “So, you have been to the southeastern United States, Akira.”
Akira answered, “Yea. Atlanta to be exact.”
Lee responded, “Interesting. Atlanta is kind of a basket case. The center is not that nice. But, outside the center of downtown is pretty nice.”
Akira replied, “I agree. So, you have been there?”
Lee thought, 'Oh crap. I have said too much. But, then again, I can still pass this off.' He answered, “A couple of times. Have you been by the Coca-Cola museum?”
Akira let out a laugh. She said, “Yes. That was an interesting tour. Have you been by the Georgia Aquarium?”
Lee said, “Sadly. No.”
Akira commented, “You missed out a lot not going there. And I did find some my time in Atlanta to be wonderful, for most part. And your nation had one thing that my homeland of Japan did not.”
Lee inquired, “And that would be?”
Akira answered, “While, my homeland of Japan has stuff like that. The one thing I found that you culture had over my culture was your culture appreciation for guns.”
Lee admitted, “Yes. My people's fascination of firearm borders on religious fervor. So, what got you original interested in guns?” He mentally added, 'I honestly wonder that. I know I made you a Black Lagoon fan. But, I have a feeling the answer was deeper and more distant in you past, than that. And except for being a Black Lagoon fan, I never really did give a reason for your interest in guns. So, I would like that answer to that question.'
Akira stated, “Well, when I was a young child, I saw the original Star Wars films. And well, some people are a Luke fan. Some are a Vader fan. And even some are a Leia fan. But, I was a fan of Han Solo. I even later bought a costume of that character.”
Lee thought, 'Yes. I remember reading that in your Gacha Gacha Secret manga. You did it to impress your love interest at the time, Yurika, whom one of your daughters is named after. And it backfired wildly on you. That was a funny scene, and an epic failure on your part. Still, I admire your attempt.'
Akira continued, “But, given Japanese strict anti-gun laws, I could do nothing about my interest. Though, I could still watch action movies, and anime about gunplay.”
Lee thought, 'So, that is what first drew you to watching the Black Lagoon series. That is interesting.'
Akira went onto say, “Then, soon after I came to America to study, I checked into my interest on firearms, and I found that I could practice with a pistol if I wanted to. And with my green card, and no criminal record, I could even own a shotgun there.”
Lee confirmed, “Yes. You could own a long gun there. Unlike what some people believe, we are very supportive and welcoming of legal immigrates. It is just those that break the law that we don't care for.”
Akira said, “Yes. I can understand that. Also, most of your people were very nice to me. Anyway, when I was not studying, or working, I went to a local gun range, and I learned how to shot skeet. I got so good at it, that the owners allowed me to practice shooting with two pistols at once. I got the idea from an anime.”
Lee thought, 'Yep. From Black Lagoon.'
Akira commented, “Anyway, I got so good that even Revy admires my skill. That is no small feat.”
Lee replied, “Given that she carries those pistols around with her. I guess she knows how to use them.”
Akira commented, “Oh yes. She does. She is expect in several types of firearms. Such as she has a marksmen level, or higher, when it comes to using a rifle.”
Lee said, “I will keep that in mind.” He thought, 'And it is a good reminder. Even though I already knew that.'
There was an awkward silence for a few seconds. Akira then said, “Well, it looks like we are going to be here for a while. Do you want to talk about something?”
Lee thought, 'As long as I avoid the dangerous subject. Such as my taste in fiction, my knowledge of computers, and the internet, along with me being the writer, I should be fine.' He answered, “Sure. Want to talk about the good restaurants in this town?”
Akira complimented, “Now, that is a good topic to have. And there happens to be a few in this town.”
Lee replied, “I know. What are your favorites?”
Akira answered, “Well, there is this nice Italian restaurant downtown. And I swear, I think the people whom run it may have use to be part of the mafia. I would know, I have met a few of them.”
Lee thought, 'Pedro did mention at one of our meetings that this island attracts badasses whom are looking for a quiet life. Also, I think I know which restaurant she is talking about. And they do fix good Italian food. And not just spaghetti. And their wine select is great, at a good price.'
Lee said, “They could be. But, that is not important. What is important is the customers service, and how good the food is.”
Akira agreed, “You got that right. And the people restaurant had both in excess. My family cannot get enough of the place.”
Lee stated, “It is always nice to find a good place to eat.”
Akira inquired, “Yes. So, where do you go to eat?”
Lee thought, 'I will omit the Last Resort, because I meet with Pedro there, were we talk shop, about them. As I don't any of them to start going there. And I really don't have any other regular places, except the Hotel Restaurant and the...' He answered, “Well, either here, at the hotel, or the burger food truck.”
Akira snorted. She replied, “Well, that figures.”
Lee conceded, “Okay. I slept with Eda. But, it was a one night stand. And the reason I go there is they fix good American style burgers and fries. It helps me with my homesickness.” Lee sadly thought, 'Which is true.'
Akira asked, “So, why are you here in the first place, Lee?”
Lee thought, 'I might as well use the cover story, I came up for this question. Or, at least a part of it.' Lee lied, “Long story shot. I had to flee the country over a matter of taxes.”
Akira inquire, “You cheated on your taxes?”
Lee continued his lie, “More like I got cheated, and me left holding the bag. You probably noticed that I am not much of a spender. If I had embezzled money, I would likely be somewhere else, with better clothing, in a warmer climate. Still, I had to flee on a budget. And I ended up here. I am not hurting for money at the moment. But, I am not making any long term plans either.”
Akira replied, “I will keep that in mind.”
Lee thought, 'Yes. You will. And it looks like you believe me. So, you will likely tell the others, and that simple cover story will help prevent your group from finding out I am the writer.'
Lee and Akira then continued their pleasant conversation. Their conversation continued for around an hour and forty five minutes, and it ended after Akira finished with washing, drying, and folding her clothing. Soon after, Lee finished cleaning and drying his clothing. He folded his clothing, put the items in his gym bag, and he took his clothing back to his suite, on the third floor of the hotel.
(_)
A few minutes later, it was around three fifty PM, when Lee came back down to the hotel lobby.
As Lee walked through the lobby, he saw Violin and Aeryn approaching him.
Lee thought, 'I wonder what they want?'
A few seconds later, the couple can to a stop in front of Lee.
Lee asked, “Hello ladies. Is there something I can do for you?”
Violin commented, “Nothing really. And this is not about that photo from earlier?”
Lee inquired, “Okay. Then, what do you want to talk about?”
Aeryn said, “We would like to talk to you about some movies.”
Lee thought, 'This is going to be an interesting conversation to navigate.' He requested, “What do you two want to know?”
Violin asked, “Lee, I was wondering, what new sci-fi movies, in the last few years, have you seen, that are worth watching?”
Lee lied, “Well, as you know, I prefer action movies, but there are two sci-fi movies that might be worth watching. The first the two thousand nine remake of original Star Trek cast, and the sequel.”
Violin replied, “Really?”
Lee answered, “Yes. Good movies. Good music scores. Good scripts. Good casting, and directing, with skilled actors. If you are a sci-fi fan, it is worth a watch. The first movie even shows how Kirk beat the Kobayashi Maru. And yes, he is as much of a ham about it as someone would expect him to be. The sequel is also good. Though, I will not spoil that movie.'
Violin said, “I will have to request those movie for the hotel theater, later. Any the other movie?”
Lee stated, “Tron Legacy. A sequel to the original Tron movie.”
Violin quickly asked, with anxiousness in her voice, “They made another Tron movie?”
Lee calmly said, “Yes. A sequel. It is also pretty good. Start to finish, with a good soundtrack by Daft Punk.” He mentally added, 'I even use the soundtrack to that movie, the original movie, and the animated series, as part of the musical inspirational material when I wrote my stories. For example, I wrote most of the first chase scene in book two while listening to the Tron Uprising track, Lightbike Battle.'
Lee could tell that Violin was becoming visibly excited, as she inquired, “The harder, better, faster, stronger crew?”
Lee replied, “Yep.”
Violin stated, with glee evident in her voice, “Oh god, I cannot wait. I got to see this now. And so do the other girls.”
Lee thought with horror, 'Oh crap, I just set her off into fangirl mode.'
Lee noticed Aeryn simply rolling her eyes, for a few seconds, at her spouses sudden change in mood. She then looked back at Violin.
Lee mentally added, 'I feel for you, Aeryn. Still, I am getting out of the room, before it is too late.'
Lee immediately try to turn and walk away, but Violin quickly gripped him by his left forearm, with her right hand.
The grip was firm, but not painful. Still, given Violin's alien side, her grip was far too strong for Lee to break.
Lee grimly thought, 'Too late. Oh well. At least Violin is nice. And her fan girl most is just energetic, not violent. So, I don't have to much to worry about.'
Violin stated, “You're coming with me, as I tell the girls.”
Violin dragged him off with her, toward the part of the lobby, where Lee saw the other members of Rock, and Revy's group were sitting. Aeryn quietly followed behind.
As Lee was forced to walk with the two women, he thought, 'At least it is a few hours till I meet with same, for dinner, a the hotel restaurant, around six o'clock. So, I have time.'
Lee stated, “I take it that you want to watch the movie, after you talk to them.?”
While continuing to walk, Violin did not look Lee, as she answered, “Yes. And I plan to invite the others to watch, as well.”
Lee thought, with worry, 'That could be a problem.'
(_)
Ten minutes later, Lee, Revy, Rock, Violin, Aeryn, Akira, Natsuru, Ranma, their three daughters, the Lagoon daughters, Lotton, Sawyer, Shenhua, and a few others, were sitting in the hotel theater, waiting for the movie to start.
Fortunately, the theater was empty at the time, so requesting a movie, and having the room to themselves, was not a problem.
The Lagoon sisters and the trio sisters sat in the right half section of the seats.
The other sat in the left half section. Lee was told to sit in the center of the left half section of the seats. The third row, on the third seat in.
And he was surrounded. On the third row, to Lee's left was Violin, then Aeryn. To Lee's right, on the third row, was Revy, and then Rock.
In the second row, in the middle third seat, was Lotton. To Lotton's left was Shenhua, and to Lotton's right was Sawyer.
Behind Lee, in the forth row, in the middle third seat, was Akira. To Akira's left was Ranma, and to Akira's right was Natsuru.
And as they had entered the theater, Lee saw that Revy, and Shenhua, a had their weapons on their person.
Even with his built up experience with the time loop, Lee poker face skills were strained to the maximum of his abilities. And the woman could tell he was nervous.
Lee prayed, in thought, 'Please lord. I know you hate me. But, if they figure out that I am the writer from watching this movie, let me die quick. I know you are planning to send me to Hell, no matter what. But, I think that would be more merciful that what they have in mind to do to me.'
Lee then stopped praying, as he continued his thoughts, 'Still, I am glad this theater was empty we we got here. And I am not sure how Violin convinced the theater projectionist to work on starting this movie so quickly. Even with bribery in the time loops, I has to give advanced notice.'
'Though, I am happy that Violin let me stop by the men's restroom. This is a two hour long movie. And I don't now want to have to risk disturbing any of these women during the movie.'
Violin noticed the sober looked on Lee's face. She turned to him, as she said, “Come on, Lee. It is not going to be that bad.”
Lee continued looking forward at the blank movie scene, as he replied, “I have a feeling that most of you women do not prefer sci-fi movies. And I have seen what some of you women can do, first hand, when you are upset in any way, shape, or form.”
Revy turned to Lee, as she warned, “You got that right, Lee. If this movie is a disappointment, you are going to find out exactly how upset I can be.”
Lee heard Revy's comment, as he thought, 'Okay. That is just salt in the wound.' He turned to Revy, as he said, “Actually Revy, most of the action on the good guys side, of this movie, is done by a woman. And she lives through the movie.”
Revy replied, with interest in her tone of voice, “Really? Then, I think you won't have much to worry about.”
Lee let himself relax a little, after hearing Revy's comment.
Suddenly, the lights dimmed, and the movie started.
Lee thought, 'This may mark down the most insane situation in my life. I am in my home reality, surrounded by fictional characters. Whom are after me, for writing about them, but they do not know it is me they are after. And we watching a movie, about a guy getting sucked into a reality, with a world and characters that were created from his own home reality. And the women are likely about to MST this movie. The surrealism of it all is beyond contemplation.'
'And I just realized something else. Violin was a big sci-fi fan in as both John and Violin. If she has not heard of Tron Legacy. The movie may not exist in any of their realities. Because Violin would seek out such movies from other realities. And I did not mention the Tron Legacy movie, directly. Or, the movie might not have come out in those realities, during the times Violin visited.'
'This movie has been out a few years. But, it has not been that long.'
'Though, this means this situation is going to be more interesting for everyone involved, than I first realized.'
The movie then started the titles, and Kevin Flynn began his speed on, the grid.
Towards the end of the speech, just before the scene cut to Kevin Flynn and young Sam Flynn, in Sam's bedroom, Violin said, “I think Kevin Flynn could understand us.”
Aeryn immediately used her right arm to elbow Violin lightly in the left side of her chest.
Violin turned to Aeryn to see her wife frowning at her. She sheepishly said, “Oh... Right..”
Lee kept his eyes on the screen, as he heard Violin's comment. Lee thought, 'I have a feeling these women are going to talk all through the movie. I just hope they don't spill any secrets in front of me. That could turn this situation very ugly for me. Even if they don't realize I am the writer, by the end of the movie.'
Soon after, the scenes changed to a much older Sam Flynn, getting into a motorcycle chase with a cop, and losing the cop.
Revy commented, “The scene that shows the main character is a rebel.”
Then, the film moved to Sam breaking to the ENCOM building, and hacking into ENCOM's computers.
Rock said, “And the breaking in and hacking shows how intelligent and resourceful he is.”
Then, there was the chase to the roof top. Sam then did base jumped, and parachuted to the street, when his parachute got hung up into a poll. As Sam released his straps, he found himself car surfing, with Sam having a good time doing so.
Ranma said, “And that shows he is a thrill seeking junkie.”
Revy casually stated, “All the traits show that he is a capable adventurer. Now, let's get to the meat of the movie.”
Next, the scene showed Sam getting arrested.
The scene then showed Sam getting arrested, as a police helicopter light is showing down on him, from above.
But, the next scene showed Sam walking out of jail.
Shenhua asked, “Why isn't that man still in jail?”
Aeryn commented, “Because, he probably owns the company. That is clearly the child, all grown up. And he stated as such to the security guard. He just doesn't feel like running it. Which I find is childish of him.”
Violin said, “I think that is the point.”
The scene showed Sam walking around the street to the impound lot. Where is talk to the impound officer.
On scene, Sam said, “Hey Karl.”
On scene, Karl replied, “Hey Sam. How are you doing?”
Revy stated, with surprised, “Sam and the impound officer even know each other by first name?”
Lee could not help himself, as he replied, “That is what you get for repeat business.”
The women erupted in laughter.
As they calmed down, and as the scene show Sam driving onto a dirt road, Lotton explained, “For those of you whom didn't see the first movie. Kevin Flynn ended up owning ENCOM at then end of the first movie. It stands to reason that his son would inherit his father's wealth. Users are humans that are from the real world, for lack of a better term. And programs are the people inside the computers.”
The movie then showed the garage that Sam lived in, as Lotton stated, “Or, at least the control in the company that his father had.”
Then, came the scene of Alan talking to Sam, with Alan giving Sam the keys to Flynn's arcade.
The scene cut to Sam walked into Flynn's arcade.
As Sam turned on the power, the song, Separate Ways, by Journey, began playing.
Revy commented, “Now, that is a meaningful song for the situation.”
Then, as Sam left the room, and headed down into the tunnel he found, the music switched to, Sweet Dreams Are Made Of This, by the Eurythmics.
Revy said, “And that one is meaningful song, as well.”
Soon, they came to the scene where Sam was suddenly transferred to the grid.
Lotton commented, “Well, that was a lot more seamless, than the cubit system in the first movie.”
Violin agreed, “You got that right.”
Then, Sam walked outside, only for him to see a spotlight shine down on him.
Lotton quietly commented, “That is no helicopter spotlight.”
Then, the recognizer, a flying ship, landed behind Sam, and he turned around to face the programs in armor that were a few feet from him.
The programs then arrested Sam, and he was taken up into the air, bye the recognizer.
Then, there was the scene of Sam being flew over the cityscape of the grid, and he was enjoying the view, with a wonderful piece of music playing during that scene.
Violin stated, “Now, that is how one does a panning shot of a cityscape. And the music does a very good job of setting the mood.”
Lee thought, 'I am glad you think so, Violin.'
After Sam landed, the programs selected Sam and others for the games.
Revy asked, “What is so bad about games?”
Lee answered, “They are gladiatorial games. As in those whom are made to fight, keep fighting until they are killed. Or, in this case, derezzed.”
Revy replied, “Oh.”
Sam was then taken to get suited up, and an identity disc.
Then game the fight scenes, without the clear boxes.
During the fight scene, as Sam used his identity disc to cut into the floor, Lee overheard Sawyer say, “I wish my chainsaw cut as well as his disc.”
The scene also show a masked man, sitting down, in a room, nearby, watching the games.
Next, Sam faced Rinzler in the large clear box, with Rinzler was wielding two identity discs.
Akira sarcastically commented, “Is it me? Or, does it seem everyone is dual wielding nowadays?”
The other women laugh at Akira's joke, for a few seconds.
Lee stated quiet, as he used his left hand to brush against his lower, left jacket pocket, where he kept his cardboard box of playing cards.
From the corner of his eye, Lee could see that across the room, from the light of the screen, that the eight teenage girls were being just as rowdy as the group he was in the middle of.
Lee then turned his attention back towards the movie screen.
Soon, Sam was defeated and brought to Clu.
As Clu showed his face, Ranma asked, “Is that Sam's father.”
Akira stated, “No. That is not Flynn. The face is to... clean.”
Lotton said, “Uncanny valley.”
Akira replied, “Exactly.”
The Clu scene Sam to the games, in the coliseum field.
And Sam was handed a stick for a lightcycle, by Jarvis, and Sam mistook the stick for a lightsaber.
On screen, Sam held the stick like it was a lightsaber, as he asked, “What's this? What do I do with this?
On screen, Jarvis sarcastically joked, “I'll give you a hint. Not that.”
All the women in the room erupted with laughter, for a few seconds.
Even Lee could not help but join in a chuckle a little at the scene. Even though he had seen the movie a few times.
Then, came the lightcycle battle, with the light walls.
In the end, Sam was the only one left alive, and without a lightcycle.
Then the four wheel vehicle literally drove into the arena.
Revy commented, “That is one way to make an entrance.”
The vehicle then picked up Sam, and the mask driver then escaped, using missiles two to blow a hole into the stadium all.
Natsuru complimented, “Now, that is how one makes an exit.”
The driver had her vehicle jumped off a cliff. In mid-flight, before landing, the driver converts the vehicle to four wheel drive mode.
Shenhua commented, “What is with americans, and four wheel drive mode vehicles?”
Lee was the first to answer, as he stated, “We like to be prepared to go anywhere, at any time.”
Violin, Revy, Sawyer giggled at Lee's answer.
The next scene show Quorra collapsing her helmet, showing her face, and introducing herself.
Revy inquired, “So, that is the female lead on the good guys side?”
Lee looked over at Revy, as he answered, “Yep. She is the driver of the group. And she is one hell of a driver. But, she is also a far better pilot. You'll see.”
Lee saw Revy shrug. He then turned back to watch the movie.
Soon after there was the touching union between Flynn and Sam.
Violin commented, “Nice reunion.”
Next, Quorra show Sam the book collection that Flynn had, and that she has read. She then told Sam that her favorite author was Jules Verne.
Natsuru commented, “Is it possible for a character to become a fangirl towards the real world?”
Violin stated, “That would be an interesting flip. Usually, it is the people of the real world that become fans of the characters. Not the other way around.”
Akira said, with glee, “I am liking this girl already.”
Then, came the scene were Sam took off in Flynn's white lightcycle.
Sam was met by Siren.
Siren took Sam to Castor's nightclub, The End of Line Club.
As they walked into the night club, Violin noticed the DJ's they passed by. She asked, “Lee, is that Daft Punk.”
Lee continued to watched the movie, as he replied, “Yep. They is their cameo in the movie.”
Violin commented, “The scary part is they look like they belong on the grid.”
Lee replied, “Perhaps.”
Lee mentally wondered, 'Wait a minute... What if they really are Daft Punk? They were first inside the Tron Legacy movie realities, they later traveled to this reality, to place themselves in the Tron Legacy movie. And they really are reality travelers?... French reality travelers.'
'In fiction, it is not unheard of for aliens, time travelers, and reality travelers, to pass off their personality oddities by claiming to be french... It would explain so much about them. I mean, they never show their faces in public. They only show their helmets. Always their helmets.'
'Also, there music is very unique and diverse. Each album is different from each other. And the Interstella 5555 musical film animation had an interesting plot of an alien rescuing other aliens from people on Earth.'
'And during the rare times they do take their helmets off, those could be hired stand-ins.'
'Oh my, it is probably true.'
'Still, I got to calm down, before the others notice me.'
Lee forced himself to calm down, as turned his attention back to the movie screen.
Lee, along with the women, then saw Castor make his entrance. And what an entrance.
Aeryn stated, “My, he is hammier than you, honey.”
Violin agreed, “I know. He could give Captain Kirk lessons on being a ham.”
Rock, Akira, Natsuru, Lotton, and even Lee lightly laughed at Violin's comment.
Violin added, “The ham is strong with this one.”
Lee forced himself not to tense up at Violin's comment, as he did not react anyway to what Violin had said.
Lee thought, 'Given in Book Two, Chapter Seven, I had you think that line, as John, when thinking towards Chang of the past. And if I had reacted any way to your comment, I would have likely given myself away as the writer. Still, I think that was a very funny line.'
Then, came the bar fight at the nightclub.
Revy complimented, “Quorra, does know how to fight.”
The Flynn stepped onto the scene.
Rock stated, “Now, that is how you make an entrance.”
Then, there was the escape, and the solar sailer.
Violin commented, “That solar sailer looks a lot cooler than than it did in the original movie.”
Eventually, they came to the scene where Clu was amassing his army. And the movie answered where he is getting his army from.
Rock thought, 'So, Clu is kidnapping, and brainwashing programs, to be turned into soldiers. Did Chang get his idea from this movie? Or, did the writer come up with that idea by watching this movie? I have not heard of this movie in my home reality. But, then, this movie might not have come out there, yet. Though, brainwashing people to become servants and soldiers is an old idea, so it could be consequence.'
On screen, came Quorra's capture, and Clu big speech.
Violin commented, “So, Clu's master plan is to invade the real world, and take it over.” Lee then heard Violin said, under her breath, “That is little to close to home.”
Lee thought, 'You and me both.'
Then, came the scene came Sam's rescue of Quorra and Flynn's disc. As this happened, the scene cut to Flynn steal a lightjet in a very funny way, which caused the entire audience, including Lee, to lightly laugh.
The scene then went back to Sam and Quorra.
Soon after, came the lightjet battle.
Violin commented, “The lightcycle battle was cool, but this is better. Lightwalls on a three dimensional format is so much cooler.”
Revy said, “Yea. Quorra is one hell of a pilot.”
Then came the end of the lightjet battle, where Rinzler's identity was revealed.
Lotton said, “So, Tron was Rinzler.”
Lee thought, 'Or Beck is, from the Tron Uprising animated series. Though, that depends on whom you ask.'
Then, came the bittersweet, but uplifting ending.
As the credits started, with the music taking a more upbeat tempo, everyone began to get up from their seats.
Revy turned to Lee, as she said, “I liked the movie, Lee. And you were right about Quorra.”
While Rock stood, she leaned to the side of Revy, so Lee could see her, as she stated, “Lee, I found the movie engrossing. And well worth my time.”
Lee turned his head towards Rock and Revy. He then nodded once, an acknowledgment towards Rock and Revy, so they knew he had heard both of them.
Next, Lee looked around, and he saw that from the faces of the women, they had all enjoyed the movie.
Lee thought, with relief, 'Looks like I dodged another bullet.'
Revy then exited the third row, after Rock moved out of the way.
Violin said, “Lee.” Lee turned to face her, as she continued, “Thanks for recommending the movie.”
Lee replied, “You're welcome.”
Violin inquired, “Any other movies you would like to recommend?”
Lee turned to Violin. He shrugged, as he replied, “Not today.” He thought, 'My first mistake was recommending any movie to ya'll in the first place.'
Violin giggled. She then replied, “I fully understand.”
Lee looked at his wrist watch. He saw that it was five fifty-five PM. He turned to Violin, as he commented, “Besides, I have to meet Sam, right now, for dinner.”
Lee then saw Aeryn turned towards Violin. She lightly placed her right hand on Violin's left shoulder, to get her spouse attention. As Violin turned to look at her wife, Aeryn stated, “Lee has the right idea. Let us get some dinner.”
As Aeryn and Violin exited the third row, in the forth row, Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma overheard the conversation. Akira looked over at Lee, as she said, “Lee.”
Lee turned to face Akira.
Akira inquired, “Though, I am not one to judge, but you and Sam seem together, all the time. Are you two dating? I mean, except for that one time with Eda, you have not shown any real romantic interest in any of us. And we are hot women.”
Lee calmly responded, “Sam and I are not dating. Still...” He then motioned with his right hand for Akira to step close to him. Akira did so, and Lee lean down to Akira's head, as he whispered into her right ear, “It is just that I find sanity to be attractive in women.”
As Lee leaned back up, Akira burst out laughing.
Natsuru inquired, “What is it, Akira?”
Ranma requested, “Yea. Don't keep us in suspense.”
Akira laughter became a light giggle, as she said, “I will tell you guys, later.”
A minute later, Lee got in line with the women women, and he soon made it through way through the door as well.
Lee then headed for the hotel restaurant, as did a number of the women. But, not all of them.
(_)
While the theater crowd let out, the eight teenage girls stayed behind, as they talked.
Sarah mentioned, “Did anyone else notice that Lee barely laughed at all?”
Molly replied, “I did.”
Kristina commented, “But, Violin stated that he was the one that made the recommendation. He has probably seen that move at least a dozen times.”
Nodoka stated, “I could see him doing that.”
Yurika agreed, “Yes. It is a good movie.”
Yukio commented, “It is possible he was intimidated by being surrounded by our parents and friends.”
Rebecca responded, “Possible. He could have been scared of us.”
Mikoto questioned, “What sane man isn't scared of our little group?”
Rebecca conceded, “Point taken.”
Molly said, “Well, it really don't matter either way. Let's go get something to eat. Any ideas?”
Kristina suggested, “Pizza.”
Molly saw Sarah and Yukio shrugged. Rebecca and Nodoka nodded. Mikoto rolled her eyes, meaning she really didn't want to go, but she would eat there.
Mikoto then looked back at the group.
Rebecca noticed the reactions of her sisters, and friends. She stated, “Works for me.”
Molly said, “The, pizza it is. We will go to the pizza joint we like to eat at. They have a good buffet that is reasonably priced.”
Kristina commented, “That works for me. And I will drive.” She then pulled out the keys to her car,
A moment later, Yurika also pulled out the keys to her car, as she stated, “I will drive, as well.”
The eight teenage women then headed out of the theater, and towards the hotel parking lot, to get into their cars.
A few minutes later, they reached their cars. There were four teenager in each car, with them head to a local pizza place they like.
(_)
A few minutes later, Lee walked into the hotel restaurant, and he saw Sam sitting at their corner table, in the front right corner of the room. And given that the table was empty, Lee could see that Sam had not even ordered his drink yet.
As Lee approached Sam, the bearded man, with a ponytail, turned, and saw Lee.
Sam said, “Hi Lee.”
While walking towards Sam, Lee replied, “Hi Sam.”
A few seconds later, Lee reach the corner table. He walked around the table, to his left side. With him sitting down in a chair, by Sam, to Sam's right side, with his back to the corner.
This allowed Lee to see around the room.
Both men turned to look at each other.
Sam was the first to speak, as he asked, “So, how was your day, Lee?”
Lee coyly answered, “Busy. You?”
Sam stated, in a slightly depressed tone of voice, “I found out my girlfriend plans to move here. To the island. She liked her visit to this town, and she decided she wanted to stay. And I spent the afternoon trying to talk her out of doing so.”
Lee said, “Then, I look forward to meeting her.”
Sam retorted, “No, you won't.”
Lee guessed, “Is she a real hell raiser?”
Sam replied, “That would be an understatement. She can be as bad as Revy.”
Lee raised an eyebrow, as he inquired, “Then, why are you with her?”
Sam stated, “That sex is awesome, and she is great to be with, when she is not on a rampage. And she rarely goes on a rampage.”
Lee shrugged, as he said, “Well, I will take your word on that.”
The two men then had a more casual conversation. With a waitress soon coming by to take their orders.
Several minutes later, they had their drinks and their meals, as they ate dinner together.
Though, both men did notice that the other man had avoided telling the other what they had been doing that day.
Still, they were having so much fun talking to each other, that they did not care.
And around six fifty PM, Lee excused himself, for around half an hour, so he could head out. As he secretly headed to the Last Resort Diner, to have his daily meeting with Police Chief Pedro Del Soto.
(_)
Lee drove to the Last Resort Diner, to meet with Pedro, with him arriving at the diner at Seven PM.
After walking into the restaurant, Lee saw Pedro sitting at their usual corner booth, to his right side. But, Lee noticed that Pedro was sitting with his back to the wall, looking towards the entrance to the restaurant.
Lee also noticed that besides the two waitresses and the cook, there were a few customers in the room, as well. Though, they were mostly on the left side of the restaurant. And none of the customers were near where Pedro was sitting.
Lee saw that Pedro noticed him, by the mexican police chief turned towards Lee, and nodding once in his direction.
As Lee walked towards him, he thought, 'The one problem with us both being so genre savvy, is with don't like to have our backs to the entrance. So, we take turns. Also, I see the customers in the diner right now, are regulars. They know who Pedro is, and they knew to avoid him, and to keep their mouths shut about anything we talk about here.'
Pedro waited for Lee to sit down the booth, across the table from him, before he spoke.
As Lee seated himself, Pedro inquired, in english, “How was your day?”
Lee answered, “You are not going to believe the day I have had. But, before I tell you about the day I had, how was yours?”
Pedro casually replied, “Just another day at the office.”
Lee thought, 'I think I will omit my run in with Sawyer at lunch, and my conversation with Akira, at the laundry mat. The rest is too juicy not to talk about.'
Lee explained, “Well, it all began late this morning. I was in the Rats Nest waiting for Sam, when two men came into the bar. About a minute apart. And I am not kidding when I saw this. The first man was Bob, from book three, during his time looking for Boris' cure. And the next one is Rock, from book two, between the events of book one and two, before he reunited with Akira. He is using the cane, but not much. Also, Bob clearly knew to keep his mouth shut.”
Pedro stated, “But, then one of the Revys looking for them showed up?”
Lee stated, “Actually, both of them showed up at the same time. It looks like they met each across the street from the bar. Revy in red leather, and Revy in her usual outfit.”
“Fortunately, when I saw them coming towards us, I am able to get Bob and Rock to dive behind the counter, and the bartender was cool with backing me up.”
Pedro commented, “Yes. She is quick on the uptake.”
Lee responded, “I agree. And we lucked out. I got those two men out of side, before the two redheads saw them through the windows of the bar.”
Pedro replied, “Good. What happened next?”
Lee inquired, “The two Revys walk in, and I just convinced them that both their targets had left through the backdoor, when guess who walked through the front door?
Pedro answered, “Our Revy.”
Lee said, “Exactly. Our present Revy came in for a bottle of rum. And here I was. Facing a completely FUBAR paradox. And how do I get out of this jam? Which a single question, directed at present Revy. That question be, Revy, why didn't you tell me you had two identical sisters?”
Pedro began laughing.
Lee went onto say, “Anyway, considering all three Revys want to keep their secret, they went with my question. But, I was in another jam. We both know Revy has a big mouth went is comes to stroking her ego. And she would tell Rock about her meeting herself, eventually. And that I was there. The other women would find it suspicious, if I did not mention the meeting to them, first.”
By then, Pedro has calmed down, as he asked, “How did you handle that?”
Lee smirked, as he stated, “I used her own ego against her. And I convinced them to let me take pictures of the three of them together. Fortunately, the bartender has an old polariod camera with her. Afterward, as each of them had a photo, the two past Revys left through the backdoor, and present Revy left through the front door, after the bartender gave Revy a Revy a bottle of rum for free.”
Lee thought, 'I think I will omit the photos I had taken of me, Rock, and Bob. Pedro would probably be upset with me about that.'
Pedro commented, “That bartender knows when to cut her losses.”
Lee said, “Yes. She does. After the three Revys left, I informed Bob and Rock, that all is clear, and they leave. Then, I immediately took my car back to the Devil's Hotel, to tell the girls. Because, if Revy would likely tell her friends what happened. And if I did not tell them first, and control the situation, they might wonder more about me. With them beginning to take a closer look at me.”
Pedro questioned, True. How do you handle that?”
Lee stated, “I show the women the picture, as innocently asked why they did not tell me that Revy had two sisters. And I could see the discomfort they had on their faces, as they could not tell me the trust. Then, I told them, they could keep the photo. Next, I hurry to my suite, and in the privacy of my suite, I laughed my ass off.”
Pedro requested, “I bet. So, do you still have one of these pictures?”
Lee answered, “Yes. But, not on me. And so does the bartender. You can ask her to show you her copy, after I leave town.”
Pedro stated, “Okay. I can wait. So, what happened next?”
Lee said, “Later that afternoon, I was approached by Aeryn and Violin. And I got into a conversation with them. They wanted to know if I knew of any new sci-fi movies that were worth watching, that had coming out in the last few years.”
Pedro commented, “Now, that is a dangerous subject.”
Lee agreed, “I know. But, I had to give them something. So, I listed a few movies. And when I mentioned the Tron Legacy movie, I accidentally triggered Violin's fangirl mode.”
Pedro smirked, “That must have been an interesting experience.”
Lee replied, with sarcasm in his tone of voice, “Yea.” Lee then continued, in a more serious tone of voice, “That nearly got me caught, because Violin decided she wanted to watched that movie, right then, and there, in the hotel theater. And she not only wanted to watch is with Aeryn, and I. She convinced her friends to join us. The entire gang came into the theater. Including the teenagers. And we went got to the theater, we were the only ones in there. The teenagers are in the right side of the seats. And I am stuck literally in the middle of the adults, on the left side of the seats.”
“I then spent the next two hours, surrounded by them, as I had a front row seat to them MTSing the Tron Legacy movie. The interesting part is, they did a good job MSTing that movie. And it is a good move.”
Pedro inquired, “Yes. It is a good move. So, do you mean, Mystery Science Theater, MSTing?”
Lee replied, “Yep.
Pedro let out a laugh. He then said, “Damn. That is old school.”
Lee commented, “Yea. It is. And I was right there in the middle of things.”
Pedro accused, “Like usual. And it is not like you didn't thrown in a comment, or two, as well.”
Lee admitted, “Okay. I did thrown in a my two cents, now and again. Still, I am just damn lucky that they liked the movie, or we would likely not be talking right now. When the movie was done, I met up with Sam, to have some dinner. And here I am.”
Pedro commented, “Well, of all the movies to be forced to watch with the them. It had to be that one.” He then started chuckling.
Lee replied, “Yes. I know. Also, it seems that none of them had seen that movies before.”
Pedro stopped chuckling. He then sarcastically stated, “Oh that is just create. Like they are not dangerous enough. Let's give them more ideas.”
Lee flatly said, “Yes. I get it.”
Pedro requested, “Good. No more movie recommendations for them, from you.”
Lee stated, “I will try not too.”
Pedro thought, 'I guess I will have to settle for that.'
Pedro replied, “Okay.”
Lee commented, “Though, in some ways, we are the what if to that movie.”
Pedro asked, “What do you mean?”
Lee stated, “Thought, we are not facing a military invasion, like in that movie. We are pretty much users, and they are the programs that have found a way into our world.”
Pedro commented, “Then, let's just hope they are visiting, and they will follow your ass out of this reality, when you finally find a way to escape this reality.”
Lee replied, “Agreed.”
Pedro inquired, “Any luck on that?”
Lee admitted, “Nope.”
Pedro complimented, “Well, you are definitely clever enough. I just guess the opportunity has yet to present itself.”
Lee inquired, “Exactly. So Pedro, what do you do, when you are not busy?”
Lee thought, 'While, I already know the answer, from talking to Pedro in the time loops. It is best that I just ask the question and get it out of the way. So, if I mention that I know what he does on his off hours, it will not raise any suspicions with me.'
Pedro thought, 'It is interesting, that Lee not longer calls me Chief Del Soto, and instead he calls me Pedro. Not that I am going to say anything about it. There is to much on the line to wreck the partnership. Besides, that is a question for a later date. Now, to answer his current question. Which, while is a personal question. It is no secret I do on my off time.'
Pedro answered, “Well, on my off time, I have my friends over to my home, in the evening, and we have some beers, as we watch some of my video collection. Anything from Black Lagoon, to the Star Wars movies.”
Lee said, with envy evident in his tone of voice, “That is nice. What else?”
Pedro stated, “I practice my firearm skills, and spar, on gym mats, with a few other my officers. To be far, they sometimes beat me. And if they do so, in a fair, honorable way, I give them a day off, with pay, later that week.”
Lee complimented, “Now, that is the type of leadership I admire.”
Pedro replied, “Thank you. Anyway, I even sometimes go to the older gunsmith I know, and we chat about things. The guy is a real gun-nut. But, he is a first rate gunsmith, whom works on the force's weapons, and he does a great job in doing so.”
“He is also a crack shot with just about any firearm you can name. And I let him keep his firearm collection, and have a small firearm business on the side, because I have the feeling that I might someday need more backup than my force can handle.”
Pedro mentally added, 'And I keep a few players hidden in town, just for that occasional. And with those women here, I feel my concerns are definitely warranted.'
Lee thought, 'That I did not know. I want to know more about this gunsmith.' He asked, “No arguments there. And it is nice to be prepared. So, what is this guy's name?”
Pedro said, “I only know this guy's first name. Which is, Burt. Still, he is great guy, and I helped teach him spanish, when he first showed up, five years ago.”
Lee thought, 'That is around the same time that Melvin stated when he came here. Wait a minute... Burt?... Could he be?...' He inquired, “This Burt, is he a caucasian american, gray hair, claims to be from Nevada, and he sometimes wears a white, Atlanta Hawks baseball cap?”
Pedro questioned, “Yes. How did you know?”
Lee casually commented, “That is Burt Gummer, from the Tremors movies.”
Pedro replied, in a skeptical tone of voice, “Nah. He could not be.”
Lee stated, “He is. Remember, in my stories, he retrieved a reality device. He then eventually wound up in Roanapur, in the past, because the respected gunsmith for both Hotel Moscow, and Triad. Remember, he even made Akira's and Bob's custom six round, three fifty seven magnum, double-action, top-break, Peacemaker revolvers.”
“And Burt has enough sense to know when to leave a place before things go to hell. He just probably ended up here, liked the town, and stayed.”
Pedro just look down at the table, as he quietly asked, “How many reality travelers do I know, that I don't know are reality travelers?”
Lee stated, “Likely too many to be healthy.”
Pedro continued to look at the table, as he softly commented, “Sometimes I think one, is one too many.”
Lee said, in a calm tone of voice, “I disagree. There are some really nice reality travelers in this town.”
Pedro looked up at Lee, as he realized, while he inquired, “You know other reality traveler, besides the girls, in this town, and you didn't tell me?”
Lee admitted, “Yes. Because I have their trust. Think about it. If I betrayed their trust, you could not trust me.”
Pedro conceded, “You have a point there.”
Lee stated, “Anyway. The one reality traveler I know of is on the run from Hotel Moscow.”
Pedro winched, a he replied, “Ouch.”
Lee said, “I know.”
Pedro thought about Lee's clue for a few seconds. He then guessed, “It's Melvin? Isn't it?”
Lee inquired, “How did you know?”
Pedro answered, “He always had problems watching the scenes where Hotel Moscow members got hurt. Now, I understand why.”
Lee commented, “That makes sense... So, you showed him the Black Lagoon series?”
Pedro stated, “Yes. He has been my friend for the last five years. I helped him get that job as the hotel bartender. Now, I know where he came from.”
Lee said, “I take it that you are not going to tell him that you know about him.”
Pedro shook his head once. He then stated, “Nah. If Hotel Moscow comes after him, there is nothing I can do to protect him. And telling him would only cause him more pressure.”
Lee complimented, “That is kind of you.” He thought, 'You likely feel the same way towards me. You will only provide help, when your ass, and those of your men, are not directly in line of fire. Though, given who were are facing. I am not going to hold that against you.'
Pedro replied, “Thank you.”
Lee commented, “And look on the bright side, in dealing with Burt. You likely have one of the best gunsmiths in the multiverse working for you.”
Pedro stated, “You got that right. Speaking of Burt. I don't remember it being stated in the Tremors' franchise that Burt is a gunsmith.”
Lee pointed out, “Think about it. At the beginning of the first Tremors movie, Burt, and his wife, Heather, were preparing for world war three. If the civilization collapsed, a person will need those skills to be able to do such things on their own.”
“As such, he is already shown to be both a master survivalist, and an explosives expert. He also is an expert in all thing dealing with firearms. And his gun safety skills are top notch. Also, considering he is an expert in just about every other skill dealing with firearms, that it would make absolute sense that he not only knows how to built, customize, and repair firearms, but he is an expert at such skills.”
Pedro smiled at Lee, as he agreed, “I guess you are right. That does make sense. And so Burt Gummer is the Hattori Hanzo of firearms. Cool.”
Lee returned his friend's smile, as he stated, “Yes. That is cool. Also, that is a high, and worthy, compliment of Burt's skills.”
Pedro cracked a grin, as he said, “I know.”
The two men then continued their conversation for a few more minutes, before Lee and Pedro got up, pays their bills, left a tip, and parts ways.
Lee then drove back to the Devil's Hotel, so he could rejoin Sam, to watch karaoke back in the hotel restaurant.
A few hours later, Lee and Sam called it a night, and they headed to their hotel rooms to get some sleep.
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 1: “De La Plata Podrido.”
Chapter 10: “The Trucker And The Blade.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
A few days later, after the day that Lee met three Revys at once, it was late morning as Lee was walking back to the Devil's Hotel. Lee had decided he needed some exercise, and so he walked to the Rats Nest, that day. With him planning to walk back to the Devil's Hotel, later that afternoon.
Earlier that morning, Lee had missed Sam at the hotel lobby that morning, and he thought that Sam had gone ahead of him, to the Rats Nest. But, when Lee got to the bar, he found out, from the bartender, that Sam had left a message.
The message being that something had come up, and he would be busy for that day. So, as hot as the Rats Nest bartender was, there was real no point in staying at the Rats Nest. And Lee started walking back to the Rats Nest, so he could get to his car, and look for something else to do for that day.
As Lee walked down the sidewalk, with the two lane road to his right side, he grimly thought, 'This is becoming a bad habit with, Sam. And Sam never struck me as the type of guy that would let a woman pussy-whip him. I guess I was wrong... I may have to adjust my plans for a possible situation of Sam no longer providing me cover... Though, I have to admit the, those two guys, shtick is starting to wear thin on everyone, including myself.'
While Lee continued walking, a large semi-tractor trailer truck, carrying a cargo trailer behind it, pulled up beside him, against the curb, with the left driver's side of the truck by Lee.
Lee stopped walking at he turned to the truck. He thought, 'This truck parked on the wrong side of the road, by me. The driver must want something from me. And I am just bored enough to find out what that is.'
Lee then heard a woman's voice say from above him, and to his right side, in english, “Hey you! I am looking for directions!”
Lee looked up, and he saw that it was middle-aged, fair skinned woman, with short blond hair. He inquired, “Okay. Where do you need to go?”
The woman answered, “The Devil's Hotel and Resort.”
Lee thought, 'I believe I have had enough exercise for today. I did not plan on walking so much, this morning. But instead, walk them morning and then later this afternoon. Maybe, I can get her to give me a lift, in exchange for direction.'
Lee offered, “I am heading there myself. Give me a lift, and I will show you where to go.”
The woman replied, “Sure.”
After Lee walked around to the passenger side. He opened the passenger side door, and climb into the passenger side. He then sat down in the seat, and closed the door. After which, Lee turned to his left to what woman trucker looked like.
Lee saw that the woman was a strong woman, in her mid-thirties. Though, strong in the muscular, heavy set way. Lee did not see any fat on her, at all.
The woman wore a red jacket over a green bodice. Under the bodice was black shirt, blue pants, and brown boots. Over the bodice, but under the jacket, she wore a black belt around her waist, and a black coat with red trimmings.
The woman also wore a black newsboy cap on the top of her head, and a necklace, with a small purple pendent around her throat.
Lee thought, 'She looks familiar, but I cannot place her.'
Lee introduced himself, “Hello. I am J.D. Lee.”
The woman replied, “Name's V.T.”
Though he did not show any reaction outward, as he screamed in his mind, 'V.T. As in Victoria Terpsichore. As in Cowboy Bebop V.T.?! How?! Oh yea. Reality Express at the beginning of book three of my stories.'
Lee forced himself to calm down, as he mentally reflected, 'If I remember correctly, I left it to where she would join that organization of reality traveling freight service, that was started by Little Dargo Crichton and Yuuichi Shinmyou, after the two of them reached adulthood.'
'At least V.T. is sane. And I have a woman to talk to that will not bite my head off, unless I deserve it. Also, she does not look that much older. She likely only has been working at her new job for a few years after what I wrote of her, in book three of my stories. Unlike most of those that are after me, whom don't look it. And in many cases don't act like it. But, whom are decades older than V.T.'
'Though, if I was counting time loop, I am kind of getting up there in years myself. And I don't exactly act, or look like a many in my fifties.'
Lee then realized something, as he continued his thoughts, 'Wait a minute, how and why is the hotel getting reality delivery service? Maybe the hotel really is the Devil's Hotel. And that manager might be...'
Lee then realized what he was thinking, as he caught himself in thought, 'Best not to think in that direction, especially since the manager can read thoughts and emotions. And he has at least some control of time, space, and reality.'
'And speaking of directions. I need to give V.T. some.'
Lee turned in front of him. He quickly got his bearings, as he stated, “To get to the hotel, you need to take this road for another block, then take a left. Then, there are a few more turns, then, you meet one of the main north-south roads of the island. All in all, it is a few miles from here. We should be there in a few minutes.”
V.T. replied, “Thanks.” She then started up her rig, and drove down the street, with her immediately directing her truck back onto the right side of the road.
Meanwhile, Lee took another look at V.T. as he thought, 'To be honest, V.T. is gruff around the edges, but she is nice, as long as one is nice to her. So, it could not hurt to ask.'
Lee offered, “Say, V.T. Have you been to the island before?”
V.T. kept her eyes on the road, as she answered, “No.”
Lee stated, “Well, the restaurant in the hotel we are heading to makes a good lunch. And I was would you like some lunch. My treat.”
At the moment, they came to a stop sign, as V.T. brought her truck to a halt, she looked over at Lee, and sized him up.
As she looked back at the road in front of her, and started her truck back up into gear. She cracked a smile, as she said, “Sure. I could use some lunch. After I get my cargo unloaded.”
Lee looked at the road in front of them, as he replied, “I can wait.”
V.T. happily complimented, “I admire a patient men, J.D.”
Lee kindly said, “Thank you, V.T. And I prefer to go by Lee.”
V.T. responded, “Well, you're welcome, Lee.”
They then continued down the road.
(_)
Forty minutes later, it was not yet noon, as V.T. finished delivering her cargo. Lee even had the opportunity to see the back rooms of the hotel, as V.T. did so. Though, these were parts of the hotel that Lee did explored during the time loop, because he could access them easily, without any lock picking. But, it was still an interesting experience, as he watched a professional trucker driver deliver her cargo, and learned how she did so.
When they were finished, V.T and Lee got back into V.T.'s truck, and she drove them to another area of the outer parking lot.
After parking, V.T. left the truck to idle, and Lee lead them into the front door to the lobby.
As they passed through the lobby, Lee noted that Revy, Rock, and the others were nowhere in sight.
Lee thought, 'Good. They are not here. Maybe they are watching a movie. Or, even screwing each other. I don't care at the moment. Also, it is to early for them to be going to lunch. So, I should not have much to worry about them showing up.'
Lee turned to V.T., as he stated, “This way to the restaurant hotel.”
Less than a minute later, Lee lead V.T. into the hotel restaurant. Given it was not yet lunch rush, Lee saw that, along with V.T. and himself, the only people in the room were Melvin, two waitresses, and a few other customers.
Lee then lead V.T. table, in the center of the room, to a small, round, four chair table, which was away from the rest of the customers.
A few seconds, after they sat down in chairs, across from each other, at the small table, Melvin personal came to take their orders.
The two sitting adults looked up at Melvin. V.T. faced the entrance doors, with Melvin to her right side. While Lee's back was to the entrance doors, with Melvin to his left side.
Lee said, “Hi Melvin.
Melvin replied, “Hi Lee.”
Lee stated, “This lady beside me is, V.T.”
Melvin turned to V.T., as he said, “Nice to meet you, V.T.”
V.T. replied, “Likewise, Melvin.”
Melvin then handed them their menus. Lee and V.T. took their menus.
Melvin then inquired, “So, what can I get you two to eat for lunch?”
Lee stayed quiet, as he held his menu closed. He was silent for several seconds, as V.T. opened her menu and looked threw it.
V.T. then looked up at Melvin, as she ordered, “I will take a glass of lemonade, and a club sandwich, with chips.”
Lee stated, “I will take a cold bottle of beer, and a house salad, with ranch dressing.”
Melvin wrote down their orders, on a pad of paper and pen, in his hands. The two sitting adults then handed Melvin back the two menus, and Melvin then turned and walked away, towards the kitchen, to deliver their orders.
As Melvin walked away, V.T. and Lee turned to each other.
V.T. commented, “So Melvin, knows your name.”
Lee stated, “I believe in complimenting the help, when they deserve it. And the service at this hotel has been top notch. In exchange, they are nice to me.”
V.T. commented, “That good to know. So many people forget to treat the help with respect.”
Lee agreed, “It is sad that many people are not taught basics of manners, and civility.”
V.T. replied, “I hear that. You strike me was a man who has lived in this town for a while.”
Lee thought, 'Counting the time loop, that is an understatement.' He admitted, “Yes. I have been here a while. And you strike me as a woman that can take care of herself. And you have obviously done well for yourself.”
V.T. grinned, as she responded, “Thank you. And you are correct. Also, while you obviously know that this is not going anywhere, you are still polite and cordial.”
Lee calmly said, “Yes. I understand that. Though, I am spending lunch with a beautiful lady. And that brightens my day.”
V.T. retorted, “I am not that pretty.”
Lee stated, “I completely disagree. I admit that neither of us are spring chickens. But, beauty can also age gracefully. And you have done so, V.T.”
“Beauty comes in many forms. It is how one carries oneself. How one presents one's own positive traits. Just because you are not young and skinny, doesn't mean you are not beautiful, V.T. Personally, I like a woman with a little meat on her bones.”
“Though, what most people of my generation, and young generations, were not taught, but I learned on my own, was that the final determining factor is personality.”
“You have to be able to live with, and get along with the person you are with. And there are some women in this very hotel, that I am on a first name basis, that are hot, young women. But, I would not date them, even if you put a gun to my head. Because, they are insane and violent.”
“While you, V.T., carry yourself as a lady. Not just a woman. But, a lady whom has far greater inner strength than your outer strength. And you look very physically strong.”
V.T. smile widened, as she responded, with happiness in her tone of voice, “That is the nicest compliment I have heard about my looks, and my strength, all year.”
Lee returned V.T. smile, as he responded, “You're welcome, V.T.”
V.T. commented, “Well Lee, I think when you find that special woman, she is going to want to keep you.”
Lee joked, “I got to find her first.”
V.T. chuckled, for a few seconds.
As V.T. calmed down, Melvin returned to their drinks.
A glass of lemonade for V.T. and a cold bottle of beer for Lee.
V.T. took a sip of her drink, as Lee opened the cap from his bottle of beer, and took a sip of his own drink, as well.
A second later, both adults set their drinks down on the table.
Lee then noticed V.T.'s expression change to to slight sadness, as she let out a sigh, while she looked down at her drink, on the table.
Lee asked, with concern in his tone of voice, “What is the matter, V.T.?”
V.T. looked up at Lee. She answered, “It is my workload. It is due to both my bosses going into trouble with their families. And I am doing backlog. But, if gives double pay. In gold and riches. So, I don't really mind. Anyway, long story short, it involves something they did in their youth, involving bikini beach parties.”
Lee thought, 'She must be talking about Little D and Yuuichi. What a minute. Oh my, she is talking about when they were teenagers and snuck into the bikini beach parties. I only mentioned that at the beginning of book three...'
'Of course. The girls would learn this if they read my story. Also, it sounds like this happened recently. It is possible, she is from the past, when compared to Revy and her group, whom are here, on the island. Still, I need to know what happened to them.'
Lee calmly inquired, “Dare I ask what happened to them?”
V.T. stated, “I didn't get the full story. But, my bosses caught wind that their family and friends had learned what they did. So first, their family and friends had to catch them. Which was no easy feat.”
“And when they did finally catch them, their punishment was something about packets of something girl, and bikinis. And they were told that if they did, whatever they did, again, the family and friends said they would use the real stuff on them. Whatever that is. I have have feeling that I don't want to know.”
Lee remained calm on the outside, as he mentally translated, as he inwardly winched, 'No. You don't want to know. They used instant packets of spring of drowned girl to temporally turn the two men into women, and they then them made dress up in bikinis. Finally, they warned them if they ever did something like that again, they would use the real water from the spring of drowned girl to permanently curse them to turn into girls with cold water.'
'And if this is what they do to their own family, and friends, as revenge, I don't even want to think about what they have planned for me.'
Lee agreed, “I think you are right. I don't want to know, either.”
Just then, Melvin delivered their meals. Melvin also set down some metal utensils, wrapped in paper napkins, on the table, for them.
Lee looked up at Melvin, as he said, “Thanks, Melvin.”
Melvin replied, “No problem, Lee.” He then turned, and walked away, to attend to his other customers.
Lee looked over at V.T., as he thought, 'I have a question, on what her opinion is, on a matter dealing with her current job.' He asked, “So, why did you take this job?”
V.T. wall looking at her club sandwich and chips. Which she liked. Though, she heard what Lee had asked her. V.T. turned to Lee, as she answered, “The pay and benefits are good. The scenery changes. And my employers respect my tastes in music.”
Lee chuckled, as he nodded. He then replied, “Those are some good reasons to stay on.”
V.T. smiled, as she replied, “You got that right.”
Lee inquired, “By the way, what were you delivering?”
V.T. flatly answered, “Food.” She then picked up her club sandwich, and she took a bite of it.
Lee silently looked down at his food, as he thought, 'I am dying of cancer, anyway. There is no point in worrying.'
Lee pulled unrolled his paper napkin, to separate his metal utensils. He then picked up his fork from the top of the table, and he began eating his salad.
The two adults them continued their conversation, as they ate, and drank their drinks.
(_)
Twenty minutes later, as Lee and V.T. were finishing their lunches, Rock walked into the restaurant, as she thought, 'I might as well make sure our tables are clear, before the rest of the crew gets here in about five to ten minutes.'
Rock took came to a stop, near he front of the room, as she then saw Lee eating lunch with V.T. She could not believe her eyes, as she thought, 'That is V.T. Why the hell is she here?... Oh yea. She works for Reality Express. But, then who is she here for?... Of course, this hotel. And I have a feeling I do not want to know, why or how this hotel is ordering goods from across the multiverse.'
'Still, why is Lee with her?... Well, he is polite. Though, I will question him on the matter, in a minute, after V.T. leaves. Also, I have not met V.T. in person. So, I have no idea if she has heard of me. It is best to play it safe, and wait till she has left, before confronting Lee.'
Rock then turned to her left, and walked over to the hallway, that lead to the restaurant restrooms, where she hid, with her back to the hallway opposite to the outer all. She then focus on Lee's voice, as she used her enhanced hearing to recognize V.T. voice, while she listen in on their discussion.
(_)
At that moment, in the middle of the restaurant, at the table, where V.T. and Lee were sitting, both adults had finished their meals.
They looked up at each other, as V.T. stated, “Well, it looks like we are done.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. It does. It was nice meeting you, V.T. I hope you have a pleasant day.”
V.T. smiled, as she said, “You too, Lee. I wish all my meetings with men were as pleasant as this. If I come back here, I might look you up.”
Lee stated, “Well, if I am still around, I would be more than happy to have another meal with you, again.”
Lee saw V.T.'s smile widen a little bit, as she got up from their table. She then walked passed Lee, to his left side, as she calming walked towards the exit of the restaurant.
Lee turned his head and body, in his chair, as he silently watched V.T. leave the restaurant.
Lee thought, 'That was probably most pleasant, mature, adult meeting I have had with a woman... Ever... Now, I guess it is time to pay the bill.'
Lee got up, and walked over the bar counter.
Melvin saw him coming, as waited for him, from behind the bar counter.
When Lee got to the bar counter, across from Melvin, he pulled out a U.S. twenty dollar bill. He handed the money to Melvin, as he stated, “I think this should cover the lunch, plus the tip.”
Melvin took the money and looked at the twenty dollar bill in his right hand. He then looked up at Lee, as he said, “Yes. This should cover everything.” Melvin then walked over to the cash register, to ring up the sale.
As Lee turned to his left, to walk out of the restaurant himself, he saw Rock approaching him from the front of the room.
Lee thought, with annoyance, 'What does she want? Still, if she is here, Revy, and the others are not far behind. I think I will go to my suite, and watch some TV.'
When Rock reached Lee, both of them came to a stop, four feet from each other. Given their height difference, Rock looked up at Lee's face, while Lee looked down at Rock's face.
Rock could see that Lee's face was unreadable, as he remained silent.
Rock demanded, in a stern tone of voice, “What were you doing with woman just now?”
Lee did not show his anger on the outside, but he was furious on the inside, as he thought, 'I am not going to let anyone question my character of a such pleasant experience, as I just had. Now, even Rock, Revy, or anyone else.'
Rock noticed that Lee's body language has suddenly changed. Instead of Lee being relaxed, his body became imposing, as he looked down at her.
Lee spoke in, a polite tone of voice, which had a subtle hint of malice in his tone of voice, that Rock picked up on, “Rock, if you are wondering, I find strong, independent, sane, heterosexual women to be attractive. And V.T. is even in my age bracket. Nothing happened. I just met her coming back here to hotel. And she gave me a ride back to the hotel, in exchange for directions here. During our brief trip here, we introduced ourselves to each other, and I was able to convince her to have a nice lunch with me.”
Lee continued, with more anger evident in his tone of voice, “Is there a problem with that?”
Rock thought, 'I must have hit a nerve. And he clearly knows nothing.'
Rock stated, “No. I actually respect your tastes in women.”
Lee visibly relaxed, as Rock saw the man force himself to calm down.
Lee then replied, in a more relaxed tone of voice, “Good.”
Lee then walked passed Rock, to Rock's right side, with Lee soon exiting out of the hotel restaurant. He then headed for the front elevators bays. A few seconds later, the elevator opened.
Just as his elevator closed on the ground floor, across from the elevator he was in, two other elevators opened on the ground floor, to reveal Revy and the rest of her group exiting the elevators, as they walked toward the restaurant, to get some lunch.
Meanwhile, Lee soon made it to his suite, and watched TV for the rest of the day, as he tried to continue to come up with a plan to steal one of the small reality traveling devices from some of the more badass women in the multiverse, without getting caught.
At dinner, Lee found Sam was no where at sight, in the hotel restaurant. So, Lee ate alone, at the front right corner table of the restaurant. Soon after, it was time to meet Pedro at the Last Resort Diner.
Lee paid the bill, left a tip and headed outside to his pink car, to drive to the diner.
When Lee reached the diner and he met with Pedro, Lee did not tell Pedro anything about his meeting with V.T.
Given neither man has much to talk to about anything that happened that day. Their meeting was brief and they soon parted ways for the evening.
Lee then returned to the Devil's Hotel, headed to his suite, and turned in early, to get some good sleep.
(_)
The next morning, Lee was having breakfast alone in the hotel restaurant, at the bar counter, when he and Sam sometimes ate their meals.
While Lee now preferred to sit at the front, right corner table, he sometimes still went back to the bar counter, to set in the stool, where he sometimes sat at, as a way to break the monotony of his situation.
Unfortunately, Sam had not showed up that morning. And Sam has not given him any messages at the front desk.
Lee held his glass of orange juice in his right hand, as he took a swallow of orange juice, to wash down the food he ate from the restaurant, breakfast buffet.
Lee thought, with concern, and a bit of sadness, 'I am beginning to think that I may have to write Sam off. To think, at one point, I considered Sam a friend. A friend leaves a message. A friend gives an explanation before leaving. I should stop being so foolish. I long since learned that God made sure I would never have any friends...'
Lee then gently set his glass down on the counter, in front of him, to the right side of his plate, as he continued his thoughts, with more calmness than before, 'Still, I will do the one thing for Sam, that those in my homeland never did for me. I will give him the benefit of the doubt.'
As Lee got finished with his breakfast, from the corner of his eye, he saw Ranma, Rock, and Revy, walk by him. While they did passed by him, he overheard the part of their conversation, as Revy stated, “Take Lee for example. He is a schmuck.”
With his back turned to them, Lee lost control of his poker face, as he scowled for a full second, before he regained control of his emotions, and his face turned to a more relaxed expression.
Still, Lee's thoughts were full of anger, as he thought, 'That tears it. I know Revy is stating that insult out of ignorance. And it would be worth being shoot by her, to inform her over the truth.'
Fortunately, Lee had already paid for his buffet, and since it was self-serve, there was no point in leaving a tip for the meal.
Lee then stood up, as he turned around to face them.
Lee was less than six feet away from the badass women. And Lee could see that Revy had her cutlasses in their shoulder holsters.
The three women noticed this action by Lee, as they stopped walking. They went silent, as they turned to face Lee.
Lee inquired, in a calm, though firm tone of voice, “Revy. Do you know the real meaning to the word, schmuck?”
Revy replied, “It means, idiot. Which is what you are, sometimes.”
Lee shook his head one, as he responded, “No. The origins of the word, schmuck, is yiddish. Meaning jewish. A schmuck is the discarded penile foreskin that is removed during male jewish circumcision. To call a man, a schmuck, is a major insult to that man.”
“That insult is considered to mean, to be regarded as so vulgar as to be taboo. That is why a few, certainly not most, jewish men call non-jewish men schmucks. As a way to insult them in a major way, without the non-jewish men realizing it, since most non-jews don't know what the insult means.”
“The closest female comparison I can think of for the insult, schmuck, is the insult is the male equivalent to the female insult, cunt.”
Revy replied, with interest in her voice, “Really?”
Lee said, “Yes.”
Revy smiled, as she stated, “That is nice to nice to know. Now, I can really use that insult the way it is intended. Thanks.”
Lee replied, “You're welcome.”
As Rock and Ranma heard Revy and Lee's conversation, Rock thought, 'I wonder.' She inquired, “Lee, how did you find that out? I am fairly sure you are not jewish.”
Lee responded, “No. I am not jewish. But, I am a fan of jewish comedians. I am a Mel Brooks fan. And I still am. Anyway, he used that insult in some of his movies, and I wanted to know what the insult meant. I looked it up, and I surprised that Mister Books has such a filthy mouth. The man is the master, comedic, bullshit artist of his generation.”
Rock agreed, “Very true.”
Revy inquired, “Well, Lee. Since you are so knowledgeable about insults. I was wondering. What is the male equivalent to, bitch?”
Lee thought, with amusement, and a bit of arrogance, 'Oh well. I might as well play this game.' He casually answered, “The accepted male insult is, bastard.”
Revy, “What about, cougar?”
Lee, “That would be, sugar-daddy.”
Revy, “Babe.”
Lee, “That's an easy one. Dude.”
Revy, “Gold-digger?”
Lee, “Gigolo.”
Revy, “Slut?”
Lee, “Dickhead.”
Revy, “Dyke?”
Lee, “Fairy.”
Revy, “Motherfucker?”
Lee responded, “That insult is unisex. Think about it.”
Revy let out a laugh. She then agreed, “You're right. How do you know all this?”
Lee answered, “Among the lessons I was taught by my mother and father, to become a southern gentleman, I was taught to know insults. So, I knew when I was insulted. Though, I prefer not to use insults. Except for occasionally calling yankees, damn yankees. But, that is a culture thing. And yankees sometimes call southerners, hicks. So, it is a give and take situation.”
Lee thought, 'And that cover story, and the face did not use insults in my stories, should keep them from suspecting I am the writer. Even after this conversation.'
Revy replied, “Yep. You are right about that. Thanks again for the information. It is always fun learn how to insult people in new, and interesting, ways.”
Lee thought, 'Now, that I think about it. I better excuse myself, before I get myself into some trouble.' He calmly said, “Again, you are welcome. See you later, ladies.”
Lee then turned around, to face the front of the room. He then walked away from them, and towards the exit of the restaurant.
As the three women watched Lee walk though the exit, Ranma thought, 'That man just got into a conversation with Revy, on insults, and he walked away unharmed. He is no idiot. Though, this might mean.'
Ranma turned to Revy and Rock, as she questioned, “Given we just learned Lee's knowledge of insults, does this mean he might be the writer?”
Revy and Rock thought over Ranma's question for a few seconds.
Revy was the first to answer, as she stated, “No. Lee is not the writer. I know insults. And of the literal thousands of pages that the writer wrote about us, the writer only use insults a handful of times in his stories. Also, Lee gave a good reason why he knows the insults.”
Revy thought, 'I would have known something was up, when during that time, I didn't insult people that much with curse word. But, oh well. Cleaning my vocabulary, was probably one of the nicer things he did for me.'
Rock heard what Revy had said. She thought, with pride and love, towards her lover, 'That is one of the many reasons I love you, Revy. When you actually stop and think for a moment, you show how intelligent you really are. And I agree with you assessment of the situation.'
Rock stated, “I agree with Revy on this.'
Ranma thought about what Revy and Rock said, 'They are likely right. I have seen Lee curse in real life before, a few times. Including, right now. And even when we gave him that Mickey Finn. And all three of us regret doing that to him.'
'Still, the writer would likely not have such a dirty mouth, as Lee's in real life. Though, speaking of which. We really need do to start looking more intensely for the writer. I am sure the writer is still around. With him likely being somewhere in the hotel. We just need to find him. I will talk to Natsuru and Akira, about this, later, in private.'
Ranma replied, “Okay”
Revy looked over at Rock and Ranma, as she asked, “So, what are you guys planning to do today?”
Rock stated, “I was going to go meet with Eda and Yolanda, to see if they have gotten any leads on the writer.”
Revy looked over at Rock, as she complimented, “Good idea. I think I will join you.” She turned to Ranma, as she asked, “What about you, Ranma?”
Ranma stated, “This afternoon, I am planning to go with my lovers, and our daughters, to do some window shop around the better parts of this town.”
Revy said, “Have fun.”
Ranma replied, “Thank you.”
The three women then turned and headed for the breakfast buffet, to get something to eat and drink. Given, they had already paid for their meals, before the met Lee that morning.
(_)
At the moment, on the roof of the Devil's Hotel, Melvin was in his sweatsuit, and white tennis shoes, as he exercised, using combat techniques he had learned decades beforehand, with his combat knife firmly gripped in his right hand.
Melvin was enjoying the cool sea breeze, and the partly cloudy sky, as he exercised.
While Melvin did so, he thought back on his past. About how he wound up here, in this reality, as a bartender.
And Melvin's real adventure started, on a very interesting night, decades ago, in another reality, on a long forgotten battlefield.
(_)
In the Black Lagoon reality, during early nineteen eighties, in a mountainous region in Afghanistan, during the Soviet-Afghanistan war.
At the time, Melvin. Or more aptly, Yurick. With Yurick being his real family name. Was a Russian paratrooper, and a member of the special forces of the vozdushno-desantnye voyska.
At age twenty-two, private Yurick was one of the younger members of his military company, but he had earn his position in the special forces.
Even though Yurick had been drafted into the Soviet military, at age eighteen, he soon displayed in his natural skills and potential, in his basic training. Skills and potential, that his military superiors took notice of.
Yurick's skills were impressive. In basic training, he showed he had a natural gift for firearms, both pistol and long guns. He potential in hand to hand combat, and combat with a knife was nothing short, but incredible.
And his instructors realized that he had no fear of heights, after his first time learning how to repelled down with a rope.
During his first tour in war as a grunt, in Afghanistan, he had achieved over forty-two confirmed kills of enemy combatants. While he show unquestionable duty to his squad, and his superior officers.
Yet. Yurick showed no bloodthirsty traits. To him, it was a job, and only a job. He was just really good at killing.
The one draw back was that he was clearly a follower, in most cases. He would take orders, but he was not a natural leader.
Still, he superiors felt that he would be wasted as just grunt. And given he had no fear of heights, he was transferred from infantry to airborne.
Such transfers were rare, but not unheard of.
And after he finished his advanced training, he was reassigned to the vozdushno-desantnye voyska company, under the command of the captain, whom her men had nickname, Balalaika, for her skills as a sharpshooter, with the Dragunov snipe rifle.
As the Dragunov sniper rifle was sometimes being called, Balalaika.
Currently, it was a clear night, during a hunter moons. And almost everything that could go wrong, for their company, did go wrong that night.
First, they were ordered to parachute in during a clear night when it was a full moon. Next, they were all suppose to land in an elevated rise, near the bottom of the valley. But, the constantly shifting winds of the mountains and valleys behind them, caused their company to be scattered, and land across the mountains and valley near their landing location.
Also, the intelligence they were given was bad. They parachuted around a large group of Afgan rebels, whom were on the move, using the night as cover for themselves.
And, worst of all, given the hunters moon, for the most part, allowed everyone to see each other, with the Afgan rebels having the high ground, part way up a large hill, behind some large rocks.
The Afgan rebels had pinned down most of the Russian paratrooper, whom were trapped on the valley floor, with no way to getting at the rebels.
Given the Russians had yet to get a good look at the terrain, they could not simply use mortars to get at the rebels, because there was a very real chance of an explosion creating a rock slide that would bury them in dirt and rubble.
And their Captain, whom was on the valley floor, with most of her men, preferred dealing with incoming gunfire, than having her men, and herself, buried alive.
Meanwhile, Yurick was on of the few fortunate paratroopers to get blow up the mountain the rebels were on, with him being higher than than the rebels.
After removing his parachute, Yurick was quietly making his way down the mountain, when he saw most of his company had landed, when he saw the muzzle flashes, and heard the gunfire erupting from both the side of the mountain and the valley.
From his hand held radio, strapped to his belt, he heard what was going on, and he realized that he was right above, and behind the main rebel position.
Yurick knew it was up to him to save his comrades. He turned off his radio, and quietly made his way down the mountain to where he was behind the rebels.
As Yurick crept along the mountain, towards the rebels, he saw that he standing beside outcropping of the mountain, that offered cover from above, for the Afgan rebels. While there were rocks, and a natural, small dirt berm overlooking the valley, right below the edge of the outcropping above the berm. This offered the rebels a natural pill box to shoot down at his comrades on the valley floor.
But, Yurick was standing in the back entrance of the outcropping, on the right side of the rebels. And the rebels had not seen him, as they were clearly all focused on firing at the valley below, while no guarding their flanks.
Yurick counted sixteen rebels. And he was ten feet from the closest rebels. With the rebels tightly closed together.
Yurick given the closeness of the situations, he would need to move in quick, and skillfully.
Still, as much as he wanted to, he could not just toss in a few grenades, and then move in for the kill. Much like his captain realized, he knew he could not risk using grenades, because the explosions could cause a landslide, that could bury his comrades.
He set the selector switch to his AK seventy-four to full automatic.
He also made sure this his sheathed combat knife and, holstered TT thirty-three Tokarev semi-automatic pistol, were ready for when he needed them.
Yurick the took a deep breath and let it out. Right after which, he rushed in, he was about to killed eight of the rebels, with his spray bullets from his AK seventy-four automatic rifle.
Fortunately for Yurick, the gunfire created by the rebels masked the sounds of his own gunfire, with many of the surviving rebels not realizing they were under attack, nor so close to their attacker. This allowed Yurick a few precious seconds to press his attack.
As Yurick rushed at them, he dropped his rifle, and he swiftly pulled out his pistol, in his right hand, and combat knife in his left hand.
By then, some of the rebels saw him. But, as they turned to fire one him, it was too late, as he was within melee range, as he used a combination of small arms fire, and hand to hand combat knife techniques to swiftly kill six of the eight men.
When he ran out of bullets for his pistol, he discards it. He then swapped hands with his combat knife, with his knife in his right hand, as he made short work of the last two men.
Less than a minute later, after Yurick made sure that all the rebels were dead, and there was no one else hiding. He sheathed his knife, and unhooked his radio. He then turned on his hand held radio.
Yurick stated, into his radio, in russian, “Captain Balalaika. This private Yurick. The main group of hostiles pinning you down has been dealt with.”
The Captain radioed back, “Good work, private. Hold your position. We will meet up with you after we had dealt with the rest of them.”
Yurick replied, “Yes, sir.”
Yurick them clipped his radio back to his belt. After which, he collected his pistol and rifle. Which he found were in good condition. He reloaded both weapons, holstered his pistol, and held his rifle at the ready.
An hour later, after the rest of rebels had been dealt with, Captain Balalaika, her second in command, a lieutenant, and a handful of company members escorting the both of them, entered the pill box, and the saw what private Yurick had done.
As Yurick saw his blond captain approach him, to survey the carnage, he clicked on the safety of his weapon, and held the barrel pointed upwards, in his left hand, as he stood at attention, while he saluted her with his right hand.
Balalaika came to a stop ten feet from Yurick. She smirked at the scene before her. Of a lone private, standing at attention, while be surrounded by the corpses he had just killed.
Balalaika stated, “At ease private.”
Yurick relaxed.
Balalaika calmly asked, “Private Yurick, did you did all this?”
Yurick answered, “Yes, captain.”
Balalaika complimented, “Well, it looks like we have a real blade on our hands. Good work.”
In response, Yurick just smiled.
Later, after a head count, they found that they lost three men of their company that night. But, it could have been far worse, if not for Yurick's heroic actions. And from then on, his comrades sometimes referred to private Yurick as, Yurick the Blade.
(_)
In the present, in Lee's reality, on the roof of the Devil's Hotel, Melvin stopped practicing his exercises, and he sheathed his blade, in the scabbard he kept unhidden in the back of his pants, under his shirt. He then walked back inside, to get to his suite, clean up, and professionally dress for his current, more peaceful profession. So, he could continue his bartender job later that morning.
(_)
Five minutes later, outside the entrance to the lobby of the Devil's Hotel, three fair skinned, beautiful, young women, in their mid-twenties, walked under the awning, and stood there. They looked at each other, as they talked.
All three women were slender in build, and average height for women of their ethnicity. Two of then had black hair, the other had brown hair.
One of the black haired woman wore a women's gray pantsuit, with black dress shoes. The other black haired woman wore white t-shirt, blue jeans, black leather belt, and white tennis shoes.
The brown haired woman wore a tanned colored, short sleeved blouse, with a long brown skirt, and black flat soled slippers.
The woman in the long skirt had long hair to her shoulders, while the other two women had short, feminine style hair cuts.
The woman in the blue jeans turned to the woman in the pantsuit, as she asked, in russian, “Grisha, I still don't see why I am here?”
Grisha turned to the woman in the blue jeans, as she responded, in russian, “Because, Timur, you were the one that shot the reality device in Yurick's hands, causing him to disappear into the multiverse. And the way he did so prevented us from tracking him. We are just fortunate that it took us only a year to narrow the search down to this reality, location, and time. The captain does not like it when her men... Err, soldiers go awol.”
The woman in the long skirt commented, “I don't understand is why he didn't join us. I mean we got a lot out of this.”
Grisha turned the brown haired woman, as she stated, “The reason is simple, Desya. Outside of taking orders, Yurick has always been stubborn. I guess when it came down to himself, or orders, he chose himself. Still, I don't know why you are wearing that.” She then used her right hand to put at Desya's clothing for a few seconds. She then dropped her right hand back to her side.
Desya shrugged, as she responded, “Hey, I am just enjoying the opportunity to wear a skirt. You should give it a try. It is quite comfortable to wear. My legs don't feel so constrained and overheated like one sometimes feels when wearing pants.”
Grisha replied, “I will take your word for that.”
Timur mentioned, “I heard from Lotton that she, along with Revy, Rock, Shenhua, Sawyer, and a number of the others in their group, are staying in this hotel.”
Desya said, “I am surprised you are still talking to Lotton, after the events of the tower.”
Timur turned to Desya, as she explained, “Well, back at the tower, Lotton hosted some of the best party nights I know of. Full of games, music, and fun. Lotton was always been respectful towards us. And given her gender change, and the fact she was forced to play maid, for years, towards that knife nut and the cleaner, I am going to cut her some slack.”
Grisha lightly chuckled, for a few seconds. She then agreed, “True. So, why are they here?”
Timur stated, “Lotton said they were after someone. I am sure it is not, Yurick. But, someone else. Though, she did not say, who, or why. Though, she did say this town was entertaining for those that enjoyed living Roanapur. That this town was like Roanapur, only if Roanapur had cleaned up years ago. And the badasses that live here, prefer to live quiet lives.”
Grisha responded, “Good job, Timur. That means we won't start any trouble, and we won't have to worry about those lunatics, either.”
Desya inquired, “Should we ask Two-hands, Rock, or Lotton, for help?”
Grisha stated, “No. While the captain and sergeant trust them. I do not trust those lunatics. And I will be honest. Before we all had our young restored, at the price of being turned into women, I use to think, baring a few exceptions, like the captain, that almost all women were born insane. Since being becoming a woman, I have come to realize that is not the case. And their insanity is a learned trait on their part.”
Timur and Desya chuckled at Grisha's comment.
Grisha continued, “Also, if we introduce ourselves to them, it will raise questions. I do not think the captain informed them of what is going on, concerning the changes to us. And it could cause trouble for the captain and the sergeant. By the way, does Lotton know about our gender changes?”
Timur answered, “No. We just electronically text messages to each other, using dummy accounts, in our home reality. We both check it within days of each other, local time. And they do not know about Yurick.”
Timur went onto state, in annoyed tone of voice, “Still, I don't like the fact that we are going to just have to walk around, asking people, if they have seen a man named Yurick. While showing them the only photo have of him. The only photo of Yurick we could find. And an old photo at that.”
Grisha responded, in a sympathetic tone of voice, “I know it is tedious, but there is no other alternative. We are just going to have to do this the hard way. Still, them not knowing will make things easier for us. Just a case of two ships sailing pass each other, at night. We mind our business, and they mind theirs.”
Timur said, “My thoughts, as well.” Timur grumbled, “Though, I wish we could have at least brought out guns with us.”
Grisha pointed out, “If we had taken our firearms with us, it would have likely caused questions to be ask. We are not in Roanapur. The cops are not bought off. Anyway, we can still handle ourselves in a fight, more than ever. And we each have a reality device, in case we need to make a quick escape.”
Desya stated, “Grisha is right. This is covert. We go in guns blazing, we will not find Yurick. We have to do this subtly. And he might not recognize us.”
Timur commented, “Oh. Yurick will still recognize us. He has always been sharp like that. And we look like our own younger sisters.”
Desya conceded, “I guess you might be right about that.”
Grisha stated, “Alright. Let us play this cool. We have all seen the Black Lagoon series. The captain, and the sergeant showed us the series soon after we got out of those vats. And we all found the situation quite funny. We already were traveling for years, across fictional realities. So, it only made sense that our reality was a work of fiction, as well.”
“Anyway, we are going to use that information to our advantage and prevent this from becoming a tragedy. Yurick already has a scary nickname, the Blade. And Yurick ran for us for logical reasons. And this entire situation is running way is too close in parallel with origins of the Bloodhound for me to be conformable with.”
“We do not want to create another Bloodhound. So, should we confront Yurick. We need to explain to Yurick, that yes we are capturing him. Yes. We are going to turn him a woman. But, we are not going to torture him, nor make him a slave, nor kill him. And in the end, after all is said and done, she will likely thank us for all we did for her.”
Desya said, “They say hindsight is twenty-twenty. And, if things to go to hell, at least we tried to prevent the worst case scenario.”
Grisha replied, “Exactly.”
Timur stated, “And that is why the captain put you in charge of this operation, Grisha. She understood that you are levelheaded, and you have the savviness to handle situation, while preventing things from getting worse.”
Grisha smiled, as she replied, “I know. And then there is the fact we are all VDV members, and with the super-soldier serum, we can take Yurick in a fight, without seriously harming ourselves, nor him. Now, let us go do our job. And remember, we have to speak english. Most people here do not speak russian. We do not speak spanish, which is the primary language here. And Lotton mentioned most of the people here also speak english, So, english seems it should work in this situation.”
Timur and Desya nodded in acknowledgment. Then, all three women entered the entryway into the lobby.
(_)
Meanwhile, at the moment, inside the lobby, Lee was sitting down in a couch, behind himself. The couch was against the right wall of the lobby, by the entrance to the elevator bay. This allowed him to see those coming into the hotel from the outside, and those coming into the lobby from the hotel restaurant.
Lee leaned his back again the cushions, as he thought, 'What should I do for today? With Sam nowhere to be seen, my schedule is pretty much open. If this was the time loop, I might be tempted to mindscrew Revy and the girls. But, given there are no more resets, that is not an option.'
Lee then noticed three young, beautiful, slender, fair skinned women walk into the lobby, from the entrance.
Suddenly, the music in the lobby changed. And after a few notes, Lee immediately recognized the music, as he thought, 'That is, the Hymn To Red October. From the movie, The Hunt for Red October. A very cold war movie. And a good movie. Though, I found the book to be too detailed for my reading tastes. And from the timing, the song change is dealing with those three women. Still, why would that song be playing? The song is pretty much the theme for the Soviets in that movie...'
Lee then realized, as he continued his thought, 'No. It could not be. I need to be sure that they are not whom I think that they are.'
Lee then quietly watched at the three women walked up to the front desk. The one in the pantsuit pulled out a small photo. They presented the photo to the two clerks at the desk.
Though, Lee's hearing was not that great, he could read lips, a skill he learned in the time loop. Though, he could only read lips well, when those in question were speaking english. Which, Lee found was fortunately the case.
The black hair woman in the pantsuit was speaking english. And she was asking if they had seen an older man named, Yurick.
Lee thought, with mild amusement, 'Yep. Those women are from Hotel Moscow. They are after Melvin, whose real name is Yurick. And I have to give this hotel lobby credit. It has taste in playing the right music, for the right situation.'
Lee then saw the clerks answer, no, in english. As they shook their heads. The women then turned to their left, walk away from the check in desk, and towards the left side of the room.
As Lee continued watching the three russian women, he noticed that the women intentionally walked around Shenhua, Sawyer, and Lotton, whom were sitting beside each other, on a couch, on the other side of the room.
Though, Shenhua, Sawyer, and Lotton paid them no mind, as the three russian women then asked a few people sitting in a nearby couch, while showing them the photo.
Lee thought, 'Okay. There is some good news. The members of Hotel Moscow know about Shenhua, Sawyer, and likely Lotton. But, Shenhua, Sawyer, and Lotton do not know those three are members of Hotel Moscow. Balalaika and B likely never told Revy, Rock, and the others, that they gave their soldiers the gender bending, super-soldier, vat treatment.'
'Though, I can understand Balalaika's logic. She has a badass commander, whose loyal subordinates were growing old. She wanted to keep her army together. So, she took drastic action. Still, as juicy as this information is, I would never, ever consider using that as blackmail material, against anyone involved in this mess. They are all far to dangerous to do so.'
'But, I can use this information in other ways. First, these Hotel Moscow members are being low key. They are taking a simple, and effective approach. I admire that. And they do not want Rock and the others to learn it is them. Nor, do they want to learn whom they are after. Because, doing so would raise questions that would let the cat about of the back, about Hotel Moscow change of gender ratio, concerning their membership.'
'Also, the russians did not check into the Devil's Hotel. That means, they will likely ask a lot of people, and if they do not find Melvin, they will simply leave, by the end of the day'
'If they do find Melvin... Well, I don't want to be there, if it happens. As much as I respect Melvin. I will take a page from Pedro, and not get involed. I do not want to get caught in a two, or three way battle, between Melvin, Hotel Moscow, and maybe Revy's crew. Melvin will just have to worry about this, on his own.'
'So now, what should I do? I have enough problems, as is. I do not want to get this tragedy waiting to happen. So, I should be trying to avoid the entire situation, and not get caught up in it. In which case, my hotel suite would be the safest place to be. I will just go up there, lock the deadbolt behind me, watch TV, and dine in for today. This should blow over, one way, or another, by tomorrow morning.'
A second later, Lee quietly got up from his seat, walked a few feet to his right, into the elevator bay, and he swiftly got into an elevator, as he head for the third floor, and his suite.
A few minutes later, Lee locked himself into the safety of his bedroom suite. And he soon sat on his bed, as he used his remote to watch some TV, while he patiently waited for this current storm to pass.
(_)
Half an hour later, on the second floor, Melvin walked out of his hotel suite. His the door automatically locked behind him. And he used his key to lock the deadbolt about above the knob.
Melvin was dressed in his usual clothing, newsboy cap, and black dress shoes. He combat knife was in its sheath, and it was hidden under the back of his green sweater, by his Tokarev pistol.
While Melvin walked down the hallway, he walked by one of the chambermaids he knew, pushing her cleaning cart.
The chambermaid stopped walking, as she turned to Melvin. She said, in spanish, “Good morning, Melvin.”
Melvin stopped. He then turned around to face the woman, as he replied, in spanish, “Good morning, Melissa.”
Melissa inquired, “Did you here about those women this morning?”
Melvin asked, “Which women?” He mentally added, 'I hope Revy, nor the others in her group, have trashed the restaurant before I even start work today. If so, I am getting help to clean it up. And they will be barred from the restaurant, until they pay for the clean up and any damages.'
Melissa said, “Three russian women. You can tell from their accents. Though, they spoke good english.”
Melissa's comment caught Melvin completely off guard. Melvin asked, “What do they want?”
Melissa answered, “They are looking for someone named, Yurick.”
Melvin responded, “Thank you, Melissa.”
Melvin then continued passed Melissa, as he walked towards the elevator bay.
While Melvin walked, he thought, with worry, 'They have finally found me... Well, not found me, found me. But, they know I am in the hotel. What do I do? I cannot run. That will tip them off as to who I am. I could play it cool. But, I need help. I need advice, and there is only one person I know that seems to have a handle on such situations.'
'I am so happy I looked up which floor, and room number, he is staying in.'
'And while he may not know what is going on. He has enough sense, that if he realizes there is danger. And if he is as good as I suspect. Which given his experience with Revy and the others, is very likely. When he learned of these new mysterious women showing up, he will have already headed back in his hotel suite, to wait out the situation.'
Melvin soon reach the elevators, and he swiftly made his way to the third floor.
(_)
A few minutes later, Lee was inside the bedroom of his suite, watching TV, while sitting on his bed.
There was a knock on Lee's door. Lee used the TV remote to turn off the TV. He then stood up on the floor, and tossed the remote onto his bed, as he made his way to the door.
Lee walked over to the door, and looked through the peephole.
He saw Melvin standing outside his door.
Lee sarcastically thought, 'I honestly forgot the call knows where I live.' He mentally added, while in a more serious mood, 'If do not answer the door, and he walks away, I will be pretty much burning my bridges with him. Which is something I do not want to do. So, I might as well face the music, play dumb, and help him where I can.'
Lee unlocked the deadbolt. He then twisted the knob to opened the door.
As the door opened, Melvin made his way into the room, forcing the door to move, and Lee to step to the side.
As soon as Melvin was all the way inside, Lee shut the door, as he sarcastically stated, “Make yourself at home, Melvin.”
Melvin turned to Lee, as he apologized, in a sincere tone of voice, in english, “I am sorry, Lee, for literally barging in here. But, this is too important to discuss in the hallway.”
Lee asked, “Okay, what is it?” He mentally added, 'And I can already guess what it is.'
Melvin stated, “They are after me.”
Lee thought, 'The problem with both of us in hiding, is I cannot reveal to Melvin, what I know, without revealing myself to him. And he cannot tell me the truth about himself, without revealing himself to me. Though, I already know who his is. So, I have to play this carefully.'
Lee calmly inquired, “Okay. Who is after you?”
Melvin thought, 'Let us keep this simple. I can state the truth, without revealing too much of the truth.' He stated, “From what I understand, three women from the organization that I escaped from, have tracked me to this hotel.”
Lee thought, 'Even though I already knew that. Now, that you told me, maybe we can do something about covering your ass, without exposing mine. Because if these Hotel Moscow members learn about me, and my stories, then the entire Hotel Moscow organization would likely set up shop in this hotel by nightfall.'
'And given how Revy, Rock, and their crew seem to love mess with me, if I suddenly leave, right after Hotel Moscow shows up, I will give myself away as the writer. That is, if I had a place to run too. Which I don't.'
'Though, if I stay, with that many more people looking for me, in such a confined place as this hotel, they will find me, soon enough.'
'In such a case, I might as well surrender. Though, I might convince Pedro to deliver a message that I am willing to surrender... Who am I kidding. Barring the maids, if Hotel Moscow showed up, Pedro would likely flee the island, within the hour of those badass russians arriving here.'
'The irony is, except for B, I had nothing to do with their gender change. That was their choice. Still, they would be after my head. Also, unlike Revy, Rock, and the others of their crew, those of Hotel Moscow are professionals. And I do not think I could fool Balalaika, B, nor their subordinates, for long.'
'As such, I have to get them out of here as quickly as possible. And I have an idea on how to do so. But, that will have to wait for a few more questions and answers, before I tell Melvin my plan of action.'
Lee questioned, “Who are these women? What do they look like?”
Melvin answered, “They are russian. I honestly don't know what they look like, considering I have been avoiding them.”
Lee thought, 'That is the truth. They were changed into women after you left. Now, they next question.' He inquired, 'Do they know it is you they are are after? Do they know what you look like, right now? Or, the name you use? If you are on the run, you are likely using an alias.” Lee mentally added, 'Like me.'
Melvin stated, “I agree. And no, on both counts. They clearly don't know what I look like. Nor, my name. They just know that I am in the hotel.”
Lee thought, 'Now, to allay his fears.'
Lee grinned, as he pointed out, “Good. That works for us. Keep in mind, you don't really have an accent. Meaning, if you remain calm, you will likely be fine. Still, how are they searching the building for you?”
Melvin said, “From what I understand, they are asking people about me.”
Lee grin widened a bit, as he thought, 'And here is my solution.' He stated, “That is even better. Eventually, they will run out of people to ask. Or, if they approach you, after we convince them that you are no the one they are after. As one of the hotel employees, you can tell them to stop harassing the hotel patrons. Or, you will call the police on them. That will likely get them to leave.”
Melvin complimented, “That is brilliant. I am glad I came to you for help.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
Melvin commented, “It is very clear you are hiding from someone, or something. But, the way you handle Revy and the others is nothing short of genius. You are skilled at manipulating people. But, you do so in very subtle ways.”
“Though, you only do so to deflect attention from you. You don't take advantage of people, just to sleep with them. You only do so out of survival. I admire that about you. And I know enough about Eda to state that she was likely was the aggressor in your little one night stand.”
Lee stated, “Actually, Eda was quite pleasant in bed.”
Melvin snorted, “Really? I, and the others, always thought she was more of a hellcat in bed.”
Lee replied, “No. She was not rough. But, she preferred to be on top. Not that I was going to argue with her.”
Melvin smirked, “Wise decision... Hey, wait a minute, why are you not surprised that I know Eda?”
Lee thought, 'Now, to play one of my cards.' He casually answered, “You stated that you know Revy. Eda told me that she and Revy know each other. I had a front row seat of a meeting between the two of them. They clearly have known each other for a while. It is an academic guess that you knew Eda, in some way. Though, I am not asking for details.”
Melvin nodded once, as he stated, “And this is why I like having someone like you on my side. You know exactly how to push the situation to your advantage.”
Lee thought, 'Oh boy. He can tell that about me. Not surprising, considering he is a professional. But, if the girls figure this out, that will blow my cover right there.'
Lee requested, “Okay. But, please keep that to yourself”
Melvin stated, “I will.”
Lee commented, “Now, we need to make things appear as normal as possible. Are you considered late for work, yet?”
Melvin answered, “No. I usually come into work around ten minutes early.”
Lee explained, “Good. Now, here is what we are going to do. You will go down to the restaurant, right now. I will join you in a few minutes. If we walk together, doing so will draw suspicion. And I will stick around the bar counter. All day, if need be. If they approached us, I will help give you cover. Just follow my lead.”
Melvin replied, “Okay. I will. Also, good plan. And thank you.”
Lee pointed out, “Do not thank me just yet. If this goes south. I will be the first one out the door, saving my own ass.”
Melvin agreed, “Given whom we are facing. If things start to go back. I recommend you do just that.”
Lee responded, “I appreciate that. On another note, if they approached you at the bar counter. Do not. I repeat, do not place one of you hands under the bar, in preparation to draw your pistol. And your long knife. Yes. I know about that pistol. That will tip them off immediately that it is you.”
Melvin realized, as he thought, 'He is right. And if he has the eye for detail, that I guess he has. I am not surprised he knows I am armed.'
Melvin said, “Thanks for the warning. See you downstairs in a few minutes.” He then turned around, opened the door. And after he exited the room, into the hallway, he gently closed the door behind him.
After the door completely shut, Lee calmly walked to his bed, and he sat down, at the foot of the bed, with him letting his feet touch the floor.
Lee then let out a deep sigh, as he thought, 'How do I get myself into these situations?'
Lee then spent the next few minutes, in his room, enjoying the silent peace that he had come to enjoy from his room. He then got up from his bed, turned off the lamp light, walked to his door, open it, walked into the hallway, locked the knob, gently shut the door, and he made his way to the elevator bay, to head to the ground floor.
(_)
Meanwhile, Melvin reached the hotel restaurant. As he walked behind the bar counter. And as he saw not one was looking at him, he pulled out his got to the bar counter, he placed his Tokarev, hidden under the back of his sweater, and he placed it in the hostler under the bar counter.
(_)
A few minutes later, after Lee left his hotel room, Lee made it to the ground floor, elevator bay. As he walked into front hotel lobby, he saw Revy approaching him. And she was armed with her semi-automatic pistols in her holsters.
Lee took a quick look around the lobby, as Revy got closer.
Lee thought, 'I don't see any other members of her crew in the lobby. Nor, do I see those three russian woman. Still, I might as well be polite to her.'
When Revy came to a stop, a few feet from Lee, Lee politely greeted her, “Hello Revy. How are you?”
Revy grinned, as she said, “I am fine. Anyway, I enjoyed our conversation this morning. And as a reward, I am going to give you a close up looked at my cutlasses.”
Lee thought, 'Nice.'
Revy pulled out her custom semi-automatic pistols, from her shoulder holsters. She held them, in an open palm manner, before Lee. In a manner in which the barrels were pointed to the sides, away from Lee, Revy, and anyone else that was present.
Lee looked down at the pistols for a few seconds, as he though, 'Now, this is a reward. And it is a rarity for a fan to see such famous weapons personally, in such a direct, yet nonthreatening manner. Also, even thought, I have personally fired her pistols in the time loop, it is always nice to look at such fine, and dangerous works of art.'
Lee then looked back at Revy's face.
Revy continued grinning, as she questioned, “Have you ever seen such nice firearms in you life? Let alone held, and fired something as powerful as these beauties?”
Lee thought about his past, as a child. One of his better childhood memories.
(_)
Decade ago, somewhere in the southeastern United States, it was a sunny day, on an outdoor shooting range, an eight year old Lee was being instructed on firearms, under his father's parental supervision
Lee held in his hands, and fired his father's fully legal, fully automatic, with suppressor attachment, with the collapsible stock extended, forty-five caliber, Mac ten, with a thirty-round ammo clip attached to the weapon.
Lee was aiming at the human paper target, set in front of a large, high, dirt berm, which was thirty feet away.
Lee had his right hand on the weapon's grip, and his left hand on the soft foam suppressor barrel. At the same time, he had the stock placed against the front of his right shoulder, as he used the Mac ten iron sights to fire at the target.
Lee was practicing accurate firing with the Mac ten in single shot mode, full auto, and how to tap the trigger in full auto, to fire a few rounds each time. And in all three ways, he kept hitting the paper target dead center in the chest more often than not.
Even though the weapon had a kick, Lee enjoyed how quiet the weapon was.
Along with this, his father taught him proper firearm safety.
That day Lee learned something, and no one was hurt.
All in all, it was pleasant day for Lee. A rarity in Lee's life. And a day that Lee smiled, when he recalled the memory of that event.
(_)
Back in the present, Lee grinned, as he lied, “No. I have not. And they are very nice pistols. And thank you for showing them to me.”
Revy said, “No problem.” She then holstered her pistols, and walked away.
Meanwhile, Lee headed to the hotel restaurant, in the hopes of helping Melvin out of his own mess.
(_)
A minute later, Lee walked into the hotel restaurant. As he walked towards the bar counter, to his usual seat, he looked around the room. He saw a Melvin behind the bar counter, and Melvin was looking back at him, with a smile on his face.
Lee also saw that besides Melvin, there was no one else at the bar counter.
Lee thought, 'I am glad he is happy.' He then look around some more, he saw a few customers, and a waitress. But, considering it was not yet noon, there was not many people yet there for lunch.
But, Lee did see Ranma, Natsuru, and Akira, were having an early lunch, at one of the tables, in the back of the room, by the stage. Though, Lee did not see their daughters, nor did he see any of the others among Revy's group.
And Lee did not see any of the russian women, he saw earlier that day, in the hotel lobby.
Lee turned back to the bar counter, as he thought about Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru, 'Those three probably are planning to do something later, and they are getting something to eat while they can.'
Lee then made it to the bar, and he sat down on his usual cushioned stool, as he faced the bar counter, and the left wall of the room.
As he did so, Melvin walked up to him.
Lee looked around the bar counter, to the russian, as he inquired, “Have they shown up, yet?”
Melvin said, “No.”
Lee commented, “Well, give Murphy's Law, they will. And likely soon. Just stay calm, act like you usually do, and this will all soon be over, with you not being caught.”
Melvin nodded, as he replied, “Okay. Here. This for you advice.” He pulled out a cold beer, and set it in front of Lee.
Lee said, “Thanks.” He then opened the beer, and sipped it.
Melvin then walked around to exit the bar counter, as he when check on his other customer, whom were located through out the room.
(_)
A minute later, Lee saw from the corner of his left eye, as the three russian women walked into the room.
Lee thought, 'Sometimes, I hate being right.'
Lee then noticed the three women had stopped near the entrance to the restaurant, as they began talking to one another.
Lee thought, 'They are speaking russian, so I cannot read their lips. But, I always wondered, in those bar scenes, in movies, and such, when the main characters walked just inside the bar and talked. I wondered if others noticed their odd behavior? I guess now that the is clearly a, yes, to that question. Others did notice them.'
Lee then saw that Melvin had returned to behind the bar counter, and he was standing near him.
Lee thought, 'I guess, from a few days ago, with Sawyer, I believe Melvin put together that the super-soldier serum gives them enhanced hearing. So, we both know we cannot talk to each other, without them risking overhearing us. We just go to hope we know each other enough, to play off of each other by ear. Fortunately, I think we do know each other about each other to pull it off.'
Melvin and Lee then quietly waited for the three russian women to enviably come to them.
(_)
At that moment, across the room, near the entrance to the room, the three russian women had just walked into the restaurant.
They turned to look at one another, as Desya asked, in russian, “I wonder what was with that music in the hotel lobby?”
Timur stated, in russian, “Lotton stated, from what she learned, by talking to some of the hotel employees, there was something magical about this hotel. And inside the front lobby, of this hotel, the music changes themes based on those whom just entered the hotel for the first time. Or, the person enters with a group for the first time. And the music that starts playing given clues to what one's fate will be while on the island.”
Grisha commended, in russian, “Interesting. Still, it is best not to ask questions towards answers you don't want to know.”
Desya replied, “I agree. Though, I am worried that the lobby music, which was clearly meant for us, may have tipped off Yurick to our presence.”
Grisha stated, “I doubt it. He clearly wasn't in the lobby when it first played. So, that that is a small risk... Now, who should we talk to first?”
Desya looked around the room, and she saw Akira sitting at a table, in the back of the room, by a stage. She was sitting with a redhead and a blue haired women. All three of them were having their lunch.
Desya asked, “Is that Akira?”
The other two women looked in the direction that Desya was looking. And they saw Akira, as well. With Akira being with two other women.
Timur answered, “Likely so. Now, that I think about it, Lotton mentioned that Akira has two lovers, a redheaded woman and a blue haired woman, whom could change their genders, as well. Like Akira can. Those two women are probably them.”
Deysa suggested, “I know you don't want us anywhere near Rock and Revy. And their family. But, Akira was always a straight shooter in a number of ways. Including, her being very sharp about her surroundings. And she won't recognize us. So, why not ask her, and her two friends.”
Grisha asked, “Timur. Before I answer that question. I have to ask. Is there anyone else here that could be with Revy's group?”
Timur looked around. She then answered, “No. I don't see anyone. And it is nice to not have to use glasses anymore, due to us getting older. With us now being younger.”
Grisha stated, “I agree, Timur. And I think it is worth the risk to ask Akira. For us to input from their group, from a source we know, but we are sure won't recognized us.” She mentally added, 'Given Akira's personality, mentioning, Yurick's nickname might help her memory.'
The other two women nodded in agreement.
Then, the three women turned towards the back of the room, as they began walking over to the back of the room, where Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma were sitting.
(_)
Meanwhile, about a minute before the russians came into the restaurant, Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma were sitting in chairs, at their table, as they ate lunch. They faced each other, around their table.
Akira complimented, in japanese, “Thank you, Ranma for suggesting we get lunch early. Considering we might have a busy day today, with our children.”
Ranma replied, in japanese, “No problem. I figured we might want to get something to eat before we met with our kids. With us all going shopping around town.”
Natsuru commented, in japanese, “Yes. And it is good we did so. Still, speaking of our daughters, I am kind of worried about the influence those Lagoon sisters have on our daughters.”
Ranma stated, “You are not the only one.”
Akira said, “We all agree with you, Natsuru. Sadly, those Lagoon sisters are one of the few people they can relate to.”
Natsuru pointed out, “What about the Lowe siblings? They have always been nice enough.”
Akira stated, “Well, all things considered, they are on good terms with each other. But, they different interests are just too great.”
Ranma said, “You got that right. Still, it is not so much influence that worries me, as much as how... Loose the Lagoon sisters are.”
Akira countered, “But, what can we do? If we try to get involved, it will likely backfire. We of all people know how badly relationships can go.”
Akira saw Natsuru nodding, while Ranma shrugged, in agreement.
Natsuru commented, “Well, the important part is we need to make sure they don't get pregnant, nor get someone pregnant, before everyone involved is ready for such responsibilities.”
Akira replied, “Agreed.”
Ranma responded, “Yea. That is something we need to help them avoid, until they are ready.”
Akira mentioned, “I am glad we waited.”
Natsuru agreed, “Yes.”
Ranma said, “Same here.”
There was an awkward silence for a few seconds.
Akira then asked, “So, any leads on the writer?”
Ranma answered, “None.”
Natsuru commented, “I might have one.”
Ranma and Akira turned their attention towards Natsuru.
Natsuru noticed this, as she explained, “I haven't said anything, because I want to first make sure. You know how Revy and the others can be. The slightest hint of something, and they will jump first without looking. And if I am wrong, then an innocent man could get hurt, or killed.”
Akira said, “I understand. So, who do you think the writer is?”
Natsuru answered, “Melvin.”
Ranma responded, “Melvin. I highly doubt that. He is a retired soldier. Also, he was crazy enough to snatch Revy's pistols from her hands. He is not the writer.”
Natsuru explained, “I to thought that, at first. Then, I got to thinking about him, and what we know about him. Something about him rubs me the wrong way. And that story he gave us does not add up. Don't get me wrong. He is a badass. And if I say something to the others, it is likely someone would be killed in the ensuing fight. Including, our friends, and maybe even our children.”
Ranma agreed, “Yes. We need to be careful whom we talk to about him. We don't want anyone hurt, whom does not deserve it.”
Akira pointed out, “I agree. Though, I asked around. The man has been here for years.”
Natsuru stated, “Yes. But, he could have wrote the story while here. Also, this is the perfect cover. Being a bartender gives him an open ear on the situation. And with us here much of the time, he can keep an eye on us. If he suspects we know, he can bolt before we can act.”
Akira conceded, “I have to admit that your logic does have so merit.”
Natsuru smiled, as she said, “That is one of the perks to all that police training I did.”
Ranma pointed out, “True. And to be honest. I am not that upset with the writer. That is one of the things he gave us. And we owe him a lot.”
Akira shrugged, “There are a couple of things I want to have a word with him about. But, all in all, yes. I can agree with you, Ranma.”
Natsuru agreed, “Yes. Because of him, we all met each other. And my life wasn't that pleasant before I met you two. And my life has been great since being with the two you, and the others.”
Ranma responded, “Same here. And he was not the person that made us gender benders, in the first place. He just pointed out that we are not alone.”
Natsuru replied, “Exactly. And I am thankful for him doing so.”
Akira said, “I guess I make three on this matter.”
Natsuru commented, “And I don't mind living as a woman most of the time. Before I even met you, I was already doing that.”
Ranma said, “And I have had points in my life, in my original series, where I lived as a girl for extended amounts of time. And it was not much different than living as a guy, in most respects.”
Akira stated, “I also reached a point a few times in my double-life, as a teenage gender bender, where I was no longer sure if I was still a boy that could change into a girl. Or, a girl that could change into a boy.”
Natsuru said, “We have all been there.”
Ranma stated, “You're right about that.”
Akira commented, “Also, I can overlook the pain of childbirth. To be honest, our three pregnancies, at the same time, was an interesting shared experience for the three of us. And our children turned out great. And we love them. And they love us.”
Natsuru said, “Yes.”
Ranma asked, “Absolutely. And since this is the case, we have no real ill will towards the writer. So, what are we going to do, when we find the writer?”
Natsuru admitted, “Good question. We, and our daughters, just came along for the ride, to make sure Revy and the others do not go on a rampage.”
Akira suggested, “Exactly. I say when we catch the writer, we let the others have their revenge, but we prevent them from going too far. Perhaps, have the writer suffer some. But, with him not being killed, nor severely crippled. And he will just be able to recover from his wounds.”
Ranma replied, “Agreed.”
Natsuru said, “I can live with that.”
Ranma suggested, “Also, we can learn the truth one way, or another, later this evening. After we getting finish with are day trip with our girls, we will come, have a quick dinner. Then, while everyone else is still at supper, we will break into his room, and search it.”
Natsuru said, “Fine. I even know where his room is. It is on the second floor.”
Akira commented, “Good. But, we need to do it subtly. We search it, but we don't tear the place apart. And we then put everything back the way it was when we are finished. So, that he never knows that we were there.”
Natsuru said, “That would be for the best.”
Ranma replied, “Exactly.”
Just then, the three lovers noticed three young, fair skinned women, walking up to their table.
As the three women came to a stop in front of the table with the three lovers, the three women sitting the table, turned to look at the three women standing before them.
The three lovers say that one of the black haired woman was wearing a gray pantsuit. The other black haired woman was wearing a t-shirt and jeans. The third woman had brown hair, and she was wearing a blouse and long skirt.
The two groups of three women looked at each other for a few seconds.
Then, the woman in the pantsuit asked, in english, with a russian accent, “Hello. I was wondering if you might give us a moment of your time?”
Natsuru replied, in english, “Sure.”
The woman in the pantsuit pulled out a small picture from one of her pants pocket and she handed the photo to Natsuru.
After Natsuru took the photo, she looked at it.
Natsuru then passed the picture around to Akira, and Akira to Ranma.
While the three lovers passed the photo around, the woman in the gray pantsuit said, “We are looking for this man. His name is, Yurick. He is nicknamed, The Blade. Have you seen this man?”
Ranma handed Natsuru back the picture. Natsuru then turned to the woman in the gray pantsuit, as she gave the picture back to the black haired woman in question.
Natsuru answered, “Nope. I have never seen him.”
Akira responded, in english, “He looks vaguely familiar. Like I met him once, a long time ago. But, I cannot place him.”
Ranma replied, in english, “Sorry. Never met the dude.”
The woman in the gray pantsuits pocket the picture, as she said, “Thank you for your time.”
The three women then turned to their left side, and left the table where Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma, were sitting.
Natsuru asked, in japanese, “I wonder what is up with them?”
Ranma stated, in japapese, “I do not know. Still, it doesn't matter. We have other matters to take care of today.”
Akira agreed, in japanese, “Yes. We do.”
Just then, their waitress came by, to give them the check for their lunch. They then gave the waitress her the money for the bill, and her tip. And they waited for their receipt, so they could leave.
(_)
Meanwhile, as the three russian woman walked away from the three japanese lovers, Desya said, in russian, “I think Akira remembers Yurick, from a long time ago.”
Timur replied, in russian, “Even so, that doesn't help us now. But, it is clear she didn't recognize us. So, no harm, no fowl.”
Desya pointed out, “Still, we are running out of people to ask in this hotel.”
Grisha looked to her right side, and she sat a black haired, fair skin man sitting at the bar counter, with the older, blond, male fair skin bartender standing right beside him, from across the bar.
Grisha suggested, in russian, “True. Now, let us talk to the bartender, and the man beside him, before we leave this room.”
The other two russians just followed their leader, as they turned, and headed for the bar counter.
(_)
As the three russian woman approached the bar counter, Lee turned around in his stool, as he and Melvin watched the three russian women approach them.
Lee continued to look at the women, as he thought, 'I hope Melvin can keep it together.'
Melvin looked at the women, as he thought, while maintaining a mask of calmness, 'Grisha, Timur, and Desya. And they look like their own younger sisters. Balalaika must really want my head to send three of my former friends after me.'
As the women came to a stop in front, three from Lee, and six feet from Melvin, Grisha said, in english, “Hello. I was wondering if you two could help us.”
Grisha pulled out a picture, and she handed it to Lee, as she asked, “We are looking for a man named, Yurick. Have you seen him?”
It took almost all of Melvin's willpower not to respond to his real name, but he was able to will himself not to react.
Lee looked at the picture. It was a picture of a young Melvin, in his mid-thirties, with short brown hair. And he looked nothing like he did presently.
While not showing his reaction on the outside, Lee was impressed, as he thought, 'Damn. This is an old picture. And Melvin really knows how to put on a disguise. I knew he bleached his hair blond. I could take notes from this man. Still, I need to get Melvin out of this mess. And I know just the right words to do so.'
Lee handed the picture to Melvin.
Melvin looked at the photo for a few seconds. He did not show any reaction on the outside, as he thought, 'This is the only picture they could find of me? Somehow, I find that insulting. I know I took my personal collection of pictures with me. But, I would think they one of them would have another picture besides this. Or, I still had some friends in the organization, that still believe I should have a choice. And they did not give Balalaika some of my more recent pictures. Which I know were taken from.'
'I hope I still do have friends there. It will offer me other options, in case I am discovered. But, that is a worst case scenario. I need to focus on the matter at hand, to prevent that from happening. And I hope Lee's plan works. I think I will let him speak first, and follow his lead.'
Melvin then handed the picture back to Lee, whom handed the picture to Grisha.
After Lee watched Grisha pocket the picture, he casually stated, “I think I met this Yurick before. I saw him here a month ago. But, he soon disappeared. I haven't see him since then.” He mentally added, 'Sam did something similar for me. I see no reason why this type of alibi will not work for Melvin.'
Then, Lee saw Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru walked by, and behind the russian women. They saw nothing, as they continued towards the exit. Though, he kept his focus on the three russians.
Lee did not show any reaction on the outside, as he thought, with relief, 'That was close.'
Grisha thought, 'This could be a lead. But, something does not feel right about these two. Something tells me to dig a bit deeper with these two.'
The russians and Lee continued their discussion, as Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru exited the room.
(_)
When the lovers reached the hallway, outside the restaurant, Akira inquired, “Did you two hear what Lee just said?”
Ranma said, “Yea. I don't remember seeing Lee talking to any russians in the hotel. Let alone someone that looks like this Yurick.”
Natsuru asked, “True. We have not seen anyone that looks like that Yurick, in the photo, at the hotel. Let alone someone that Lee has associated with. So, why would Lee lie liked that? ”
Akira stated, “Good question.”
Ranma commented, “Who knows. I am sure Lee has his reasons for doing so.”
Akira said, “Well, either way, we have other things to focus on. Like meeting our daughters, and then later, finding out more about Melvin, this evening.”
The three lovers then heads to their suite, to get ready for the afternoon shopping, with their adult daughters.
(_)
A few seconds ago, back at the bar counter, Grisha thought, 'This could be a lead. But, something does not feel right about these two. Something tells me to dig a bit deeper with these two.'
Grisha asked, “By the way, what are your names?”
Lee thought, 'If we don't answer her question, it will raise their suspicions.' He answered, “Lee.”
Melvin replied, “Melvin.”
Grisha inquired, “So, you are Melvin?”
Melvin thought, 'Where did she learn my alias from?' He calmly said, “Yes. Have you heard of me?”
Grisha commented, “Those women at the table, near the stage, were just talking about you.” She mentally added, 'Though, we only heard your name. Considering, we don't know japanese... Oh well.'
Lee jumped into the conversation, “What customer does not talk about their bartender?”
Grisha looked over at Lee, and grimaced. Lee notice her reaction, they he did not even flinch.
Grisha thought, 'This guy is either a fool, or he is covering for Melvin. I am not sure which. But, frowning will not help matters.' She then relaxed her facial expression.
Lee inquired, “Anyway, is there something else we can do for you ladies?”
Grisha stated, “Not really.”
Melvin thought, 'Now, to put Lee's plan into action.'
Melvin gave the three women a stern look on his face, as he firmly stated, “Then, perhaps it is time for you to leave. I have been talking to the staff. You have been harassing them, and the tenants, of this hotel. If you do not leave the hotel, I will call the police, and I have you escorted off the premise.”
Melvin maintained his stern expression, as he mentally lamented, 'Too bad I cannot tell them that I personally know Pedro. But, I don't want Lee to know that. Given his manipulative nature, I want to have at least one card to play against him, if I need too.'
Grisha looked at the stern look on Melvin's face. She realized, as she thought, 'He is not bluffing. And it not worth getting into a fight over this. It is clear we are not going to fight with them. Especially, with Revy's group being here. We do not need their attention directed towards us.'
Grisha calmly stated, “You are correct. We have overstayed our welcome. We will leave. Good day.”
The three russians then turned to their left, and walked out of the restaurant for the hallway.
Melvin, nor Lee, took their eyes off the women, until they had left the room, and were in the hallway.
(_)
In the hallway, outside the restaurant, as the three russian women walked towards the front doors to the lobby, so they could leave.
While they walked, Timur said, in russian, “I guess this is a bust.”
Desya agreed, in russian, “Yes. Talk about a waste time.”
Grisha stated, in russian, “Not really. We can confirm that Yurick was here. But, he is gone.”
Timur suggested, “Do you want go to back in time and get him, then?”
Grisha firmly answered, “No. I don't want to play time games. That can lead to paradoxes. Which none of us want. We need to continue moving forward. I am sure we will eventually catch up with Yurick. And at least we have good news to report to the captain, and the sergeant.”
The women the soon made it out of the lobby, and to the outside. They then found a small corner of the building, where Grisha used her reality device to return to the proper reality, place, and time, that the current headquarters of Hotel Moscow were located, in the multiverse. Where they soon reported back to Balalaika, and B, on what they had found out.
(_)
Meanwhile, back in the Devil's Hotel restaurant, Melvin and Lee looked at each, in silence.
They had remain silent for a full minute, before Melvin was finally sure his former comrades were gone.
Still, so as to not take any chance, Melvin leaned over the counter, and whispered into Lee's ear, “Thank you, Lee. I think we pulled it off, with your help.”
As Melvin leaned back up straight, Lee replied, “You're welcome. I am glad to be of help.”
Melvin stated, “You got that right. And to show my appreciation, lunch is on me.”
Lee smiled, as he responded, “Thank you, Melvin. And I accept your offer. Though, I promise not to order anything expensive.”
Melvin returned the smile, as he replied, “I know you won't, Lee. You clearly know better than to abuse such privileges.”
Lee commented, “And I already know what I want for lunch.”
Melvin replied, “Good.”
Melvin then took Lee's lunch order. And it was not an expensive order.
A few minutes later, Lee had lunch, and drink, on the house.
(_)
Later that afternoon, Ranma, Natsuru, and Akira, joined their daughters, Nodoka, Mikoto, and Yurika. Where they took two cars, to do for some window shopping, in the various shopping outlets in the city.
The six women had a great time together. They returned to the hotel later that evening, to have some dinner.
The three lovers finished their meals early, and level the hotel restaurant, while everyone else was at dinner. They then headed the second floor of the Devil's Hotel, where they learned Melvin's suite was.
Akira and Natsuru stood behind Ranma, as Ranma used her lock picking tools to break into Melvin's suite. With Akira and Natsuru also providing look out for their redheaded lover.
Fortunately, given it was dinner time, no one had come back, to catch them at what they were doing.
Presently, Ranma had already picked the knob, only to find the deadbolt, above the knob was locked. So, she had to unlock the deadbolt, as well.
The three lovers guess that given Melvin was a member of the staff, that lived in the hotel, the hotel staff provided him with keys to both his knob lock and his deadlock.
Ranma was standing, as she worked on the deadbolt lock.
Suddenly, Ranma felt the release of the deadbolt lock. She then turned the knob, and gently pushed open the door.
Ranma then pocketed her lock pick tools, and walked into the suite, with Natsuru, and then Akira following behind.
As soon as all three of them were in side, Ranma, locked and shut the door. She then turned on the ceiling light, from the switch, on the wall, by the door.
After the ceiling light came on, the three women saw that the bedroom was very neatly kept. There was no dust on anything. And the bed sheets even made, military style.
Natsuru commented, in japanese, “For a bachelor, Melvin sure like to keep things clean.”
Akira admitted, in japanese, “Honestly. I am envious of his tidiness.”
Ranma walked further into the suite, as she said, in japanese, “So do I. Now, come on ladies. Let's find what we are looking for.”
As the three lovers walked further into the room, Akira used her right hand to point at the table, on the other side of the room, by the closed sliding glass door, that lead to the balcony. With the curtains on the sliding glass door being closed.
Akira stated, “At least he has access to the internet, and word processor programs.” She then dropped her right hand back to her side.
Ranma and Natsuru looked at the table and they saw a close laptop computer, with a computer mouse attached to the computer.
Natsuru commented, “That means nothing. Many people have computers in this technological era. Though, let us see what else we can find about, Melvin.”
At they looked around, Ranma turned to her left side, and she noticed that Melvin's room had a armoire set against the wall, on the bedroom side, beside the bed, of the wall bordering the bedroom with the bathroom.
Ranma looked into it, as Natsuru searched the chest of drawers. Meanwhile, Akira just looked around the room, for anything that was in plain sight.
As Ranma searched the armoire, he found a hung up pair of combat fatigues, some nice suits, and then, in a back corner, she found something that surprised her.
Ranma quietly said, “What the hell?”
Ranma carefully pulled out the item, by the middle of its barrel, with her right hand.
Ranma held the firearm, with the end of the barrel pointed upwards, as she stated, “Hey, guys. Take a look at this.”
Natsuru turned, around, while having a piece of paper in her right hand, that she found in the chest of drawers.
As Akira turned around, she immediately recognized firearm. She stated, “That is an AK seventy-four. It is soviet military rifle.”
Ranma continued to hold the weapon in place, as she stated, “I think it is safe to say that Melvin is not just a bartender. And how the hell did he get this weapon?”
Meanwhile, Natsuru was taking a clear look at the picture had found, which was currently in her right hand. She said, “You two think that is something, you need to check this out.”
Akira walked over to Natsuru.
Ranma set the automatic rifle back into armoire, where she had found. And in the way she had found it. Next, she gently shut the doors to the armoire. After which, she walked over to join her two lovers.
The three women stood side by side, with Ranma to Natsuru's right side, and Akira to Natsuru's left side.
The three women look at the picture in Natsuru's right hand. The photo was old, faded, and it had crease lines from being folded, but they still could see what was on the photo.
It was a picture of a large group of soldiers, in their combat uniforms, grouped together for the picture. Some where standing, some were kneeling in front of those whom were standing.
But, in the center of the picture, standing, with no one in front of the person, was a very familiar, female face, surrounded by men. A face that was very heard to forget. Though, she lacked any scars, and her blond hair was cut short.
Akira stated, “That is Balalaika, when she was younger. Before she left her hair grow out. And from the lack of scars, this photograph was probably taken either before, or during the Soviet-Afghanistan war.”
Ranma asked, “What is Melvin doing with a picture of Balalaika, and members of Hotel Moscow?”
Natsuru thought, 'Oh crap.' She stated, “Guys. We got it all wrong. Melvin isn't the writer. He is a member of Hotel Moscow.”
The three women kept looking at the picture, as Ranma inquired, “If so, then how did he end up here. And years before we came here? He might have come here years before the stories were even created here.”
Natsuru agreed, “That is a good point, Ranma. Still, I do not recognize Melvin from any of the faces here.”
Akira noticed to other people in the picture, standing near each other. She stated, “Melvin is Yurick, the Blade. See the man that is by Boris, on the left side of the picture. That looks like Yurick.”
“So, those women were working for Hotel Moscow, to find Yurick. Whom they tracked to this hotel. And since I do not see anyone that looks like Melvin. And with this equipment here, Melvin is clearly a member, or former member of Hotel Moscow. It makes since that Melvin is Yurick.”
Natsuru said, “Akira, you may have a point there. Also, looking at this picture, I sometimes forget how much of a hunk Boris is as a guy.”
Ranma commented, “Natsuru, try to keep you head in the game. Still, Melvin's story now makes sense. He is an Afghanistan veteran. Just a Russian one, instead of an American one. He hid the lie within the truth. And we all saw a taste of why he is called, the Blade, when he confronted Revy, during the first night we came here. Damn. This city is just full of secrets.”
Natsuru questioned, “Yes. But, who were those women after them? As Akira here pointed out. If they were after him, they must be connected to Hotel Moscow in some way. And they working for Hotel Moscow.”
Ranma realized something else, as she stated, “Also, Lee lied to those women for Melvin. How is he connected to this mystery?”
Akira said, “Well, we know someone who has many of the answers we are looking for. Let us go talk to Melvin.”
Ranma stated, “Good idea. But, let's do it at closing. When we can confront him alone. That way, if things go bad, we will not have to worry about others getting hurt.”
Natsuru agreed, “I agree.”
Akira stated, “So do I. We will have a word with Melvin, later tonight. Now, let's put everything back the way we found it, and leave. We should go downstairs to rejoin our daughters, and the rest of the gang.”
Ranma replied, “That sounds like a great idea.”
Natsuru said, “I agree. Also, karaoke is always fun both to perform and to watch.”
Ranma commented, “Also, since we are confronting Melvin, there is no point in locking the top lock.”
Ranma thought, 'I would either have to pick it from the outside. If, I locked it on the inside, and jumped from the balcony. Given the way the lock on the sliding glass door is made, I cannot close the lock to sliding glass door from the outside. And someone outside my see me jump down to the ground. And they would raise to many questions for all of us.'
Akira said, “Okay”
Natsuru commented, “That will be fine.”
Natsuru then put the picture back where she had found it in the chest of drawers, before closing the drawers.
Meanwhile, Ranma went back to the armoire, and she made sure that the AK-74 was back the way she had found it, with the hung suits were also back the way they originally were.
At the same time, Akira took a look around, to make sure nothing was amiss.
A few minutes later, all three women each confirmed that the room was back to the way they had found it.
As they walked out into the hallways, Akira was the last one out. She turned off the ceiling light, and she gently shut the door, to the hallway, behind her. The knob automatically locked behind her.
Then, the three lovers headed down stairs to spend some time with their family, and friends. As they patiently waited for the proper time to confront Melvin about the questions they had for him.
(_)
Later that night, at midnight, from behind the bar counter, Melvin watched as one of his customers left for the night.
As he looked around, all he saw was Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru, sitting at their usual table by the stage.
A few seconds later, Melvin noticed the three women get up, and walked towards him.
Melvin mentally wondered, with concern, 'Why do I have a bad feeling about this?'
When the three women stopped in front of the bar counter, across from Melvin, he asked, “Is there something I can do for you ladies? I hope the drinks, food, and service, has been good for you, tonight.”
Akira stated, “It has all been fine. Actually, we wanted to talk to you, personally, Melvin. And we waited until the room cleared, before we had this private conversation.”
Melvin thought, 'Like Lee told me. I just have to play it cool, and I should be fine. Just like this morning.'
Melvin casually responded, “Okay. I appreciate that. So, what do you want to talk to me about?”
Ranma stated, “It is about your past, Melvin. Or, should we say, Yurick, the Blade?”
The trio then watch as Melvin did the last thing they expected. He sighed.
Melvin look at the three women, as he asked, “So, how did you find out? I have gone to a lot of trouble in hiding out here.” He mentally added, 'The only good news is that Akira and Balalaika were never on social terms. So, I might be able to salvage this situation.'
Ranma casually admitted, “We searched your room. And we found that picture of your group, with Balalaika. That, the fact we saw, from that picture those women had, of Yurick, was in the picture. But, you were not the photo. Along with the AK seventy-four rifle in your closet. It was not hard to piece together that you are Yurick.”
Melvin responded, with slight hardness his tone of voice, “I see you have no respect for privacy.”
Melvin thought, 'I underestimated these women, and it cost me. I am starting to understand why Lee is so secretly manipulative towards these women. He clearly understands what these women are capable of. I heard about the Rats Nest massacre. With him and Sam being present for that bloodbath. Because of this, Lee wisely plays it close to his chest with these women.'
Natsuru commented, “It depends on the situation. We thought you were someone else we are after. We were wrong. Though, we left you room the way we found it. And I wish our room was that neat.”
Melvin accepted Natsuru's compliment. He calmed down, as he replied, “Thank you.”
Akira requested, “Still, we would like an explanation of why a member of Hotel Moscow is hiding out in another reality, as a bartender, for an island resort hotel.”
Melvin said, “Where to begin? Well Akira. And yes. I remember seeing you around town, back then, in Roanapur. Though, at the time, we of Hotel Moscow just thought the gender bending abilities you had were rumors. We don't realize the truth until a few days before the Tower fell. When we found out what Chang was doing.”
Akira thought, 'So, just like in book two, they really didn't know what Chang was doing. And when they did, they turned on Chang.'
Akira asked, “That answers a few questions, for us. So, what are you doing here?”
Melvin smiled, as he casually replied, “Enjoying life.”
Natsuru inquired, “What she means is, why are you not still with Hotel Moscow?”
Melvin said, “I got old. And let us just say the captain's personal tastes finally got the better of her.”
Melvin saw confused looked on the three women's faces.
Melvin rolled his eyes, as he sighed, for a few seconds. He then looked back at the women. He said, “For people with your abilities, you can be slow on the uptake. Do you remember the three women that came in this morning, and talked to you three?”
The three replied, in unison, “Uh huh.”
Natsuru was the first to understand, as she stated, “Oh my. They were russian...”
Akira picked up on where Natsuru was going with her logic, as she began to inquire, “Are you saying?...”
Melvin dropped his smile, as he stated, “Yes. Balalaika turned them all into women. Except for me. And I owe Lee big for helping me today.”
Ranma asked, “Does he know who you are?”
Melvin answered, “No. He is just a great guy who clearly saw I was in trouble, and he helped me out, due the kindness of his heart.” He thought, 'That is close enough to the truth, for these women. Lee covered for me. So, I am going to cover for him.'
Ranma asked, “So, why did the men of Hotel Moscow decide to become women? That is not exactly a choice most men would make.”
Melvin responded, “The answer is simple. We got older. The rest of my comrades wanted more life, and Balalaika made us all an offer. An offer that I soon realized was more like an order. So, I escaped, because I preferred to age gracefully, and remain a man. I was more than willing to give my life as a soldier. But, my manhood is a completely other matter.”
In response to Melvin's comment, Ranma remembered something in her distant past. Soon after she was first cursed to turn into female version of herself. She then started laughing, for a few seconds.
The others adults around Ranma remained silent, as she laughed.
As Ranma calmed down, she said, “I completely understand.”
Melvin smiled, as he said, “I am glad to hear you say that.” He thought, 'It looks like I might be able to salvage this situation.'
Akira thought, 'As crazy as it sounds, I am not surprised that Balalaika pulled that stunt. But, I need to know what we are facing.' She asked, “What exactly was the offer?”
Melvin answered, “It was for that vat process, complete with the gender change, youth restoration, and the super-soldier serum. So, Balalaika now, not only has a badass army. She as a super-soldier badass army.”
Melvin watched as the trio's eyes go wide.
Melvin thought, 'At least they understand the seriousness of the situation.'
While the women forced themselves to calm down, Ranma thought, 'So, Hotel Moscow is now full of super-soldiers. With their skills, equipment, experience, and enhanced physical abilities, they would be a handful for even us.'
'I should know. I sparred with Balalaika a few times, during those bikini parties at Lagoon island. She can hold her own against me, due to her training and the super-soldier serum. Which, is honestly, scary, given the kind of woman she is, and how dangerous she is, before she got the super-soldier serum.'
Ranma said, “So, you have been in hiding from them since you escaped, because you do not want to be killed? Nor, captured, and turned into a woman?”
Melvin answered, “Yes. And I know that all three of you have gender changing abilities. We learned some things about you three, soon after the fall of the Tower. And given the fact that you three can change genders, I still hope you can understand why I wish to remain a man.”
Natsuru stated, “We respect your choice. We do not believe that someone should be forced to live as one gender, nor the other.”
Melvin thought, 'I have a feeling that they are not so much against me being changed into a woman, as they are against someone being forced to be one gender, or the other. But, I will take what I can get. Now, to ask them for this silence.'
Melvin calmly requested, “If you do not mind, I would prefer you to keep these secret from your, friends. Especially Balalaika and Hotel Moscow. I am sure that two-hands and Balalaika still talk with each.”
Akira confirmed, as she stated, “Oh they do regularly talk to each other. So, your concerns are warranted.”
Melvin stated, “As I thought. So, please keep in mind that if word got out among to the rest of your friends of who really am, word will get back to Balalaika, and my former military company members. They will come back for me. And as you already guessed, this will either end with me dead, or captured, brainwashed, to make sure I stay with them. Along with them turning me into a woman.”
Melvin could see that the three women had a sympathetic look towards him.
Akira thought, 'While he likely doesn't know that Yurika, Nodoka, and Mikoto are our daughters. I will speak to Ranma and Natsuru, in our suite, in a little while. And ask them to keep this from our daughters, as well. I believe that will not be an unreasonable request. And they should go for it.'
'Still, we need to smooth things over with Melvin, before we leave here, tonight.'
Akira said, “It would be tempting to give the excuse that being a woman is not that bad. Which it isn't. But, relax Melvin, we will keep your secret.”
Ranma agreed, “Yes. We will.”
Natsuru stated, “You're secret is safe with us.”
The could see Melvin's body language relax a little, as Akira complimented, “Besides, you are a good bartender. And I admire you, in that you don't take crap from anyone. Not even from Revy. Much like Bao use to be.”
Melvin smiled, as he said, “Thank you.” He raised an eyebrow, as he asked, “By the way, whatever happened to Bao?”
Akira answered, “None of us have a clue.”
Melvin stated, “Well, I am starting to understand why Bao was the way he was. How he stayed sane with Revy as a regular customer, I do not know.”
The women giggled, for a few seconds, in response to Melvin's comment.
As the women stopped giggling, Ranma asked, “Anyway, how did you get the nickname, the Blade? I mean you did show some skill against Revy, on our first night here. But, I was wondering about the back story of your abilities.”
Melvin answered, “When I was much younger, and more idiotic, I was with with the Captain... I mean Balalaika, during the Russian-Afghanistan war. And I had to kill sixteen rebels on my own. I killed eight of them with my pistol and combat knife.”
Ranma commented, “Not bad.”
Akira inquired, “As Ranma pointed out. We already saw a sample of why are you called, the Blade. When you dealt with Revy. But, how good are you with a knife? Are we talking Shenhua level good?”
Melvin stated, “Yes. In my prime, which left me long ago. Have you ever seen the Vin Diesal, Riddick movies?”
The three women said, in unison, “Yes.”
Melvin smile turned into a smirk, as he stated, “I was that good in my prime. Now, about you women. I got to ask. Why did you bring this smile army here with you? This clearly isn't a vacation for any of you. Though, this island is a nice place for a vacation. But, you are definitely after someone. Someone you mistook me for. And whomever it is must have done something really bad to tick you women off.”
Akira though, 'We might as well tell him the truth.' She said, “We are after the writer. Someone whom literally wrote some stories about us. We plan to catch him, and have our revenge on him.”
Melvin was confused, as he questioned, “So, he wrote some stories about you. What of it?”
Natsuru explained, “When we said he wrote some stories. We mean that literally. In the sense that the stories he wrote really happened to us. Including you. And a lot of it was not pleasant. Though, us three are not that really that angry. He was nice towards us. But, he did pulled some serious stuff with those from Black Lagoon reality. Do you know what the Black Lagoon series?”
Melvin commented, “Yes. I have seen my home reality's series.”
Melvin thought, 'I will leave out that it was my friend, the police chief of this island, Pedro Del Soto, whom showed me that series. Also, by now, I am sure he knows these women are here at the hotel. And I am sure he has a plan, in case he needs to handle them. Though, I am also sure he does not want these women to know that he knows he they are.'
Natsuru responded, “Okay. That makes our explanation much simpler. Anyway those effected by the writer, from the Black Lagoon reality, are furious with him.”
“Still, it would be easier, if tonight, after you get off, for you to go to your room, and log onto the internet with the laptop we saw in your room. Look up the stories titled, Badasses Of the Multiverse, and start reading. You will soon understand why we are after him.”
Natsuru's voice gained a more serious tone, as she continued, “Be warned. It is a long read. So, it will likely take you a few days to read it. But afterward, I highly suggest that you keep what you learned to yourself. Though, I am sure you are going to chuckle and smile when you see the girls, after reading those stories. But, if you value your life, you will not let them catch you doing so.”
Melvin thought, 'Now, that is a wild concept. I will have to check out that story in a little while. Still, their discretion needs to be rewarded.' He replied, “I will keep that mind. And here.”
Melvin pulled out three bottles of decent, cold beer, and set them on the bar counter, in front of the women.
Each woman took a cold bottle of a good tasting brand of beer.
After all three women had a beer in one of their hands, Ranma looked at Melvin, as she happily stated, “Thanks.”
Melvin turned to Ranma, as he said, “No problem. Now, I am going to close up. So, take the bottles with you. And have good night.”
Natsuru said, “Good night to you to, Melvin.”
Ranma commented, “See you tomorrow.”
Akira said, “Have a pleasant night.”
Melvin then watched the three women turned, and leave the restaurant.
As soon as they were gone from his sight, Melvin then let out a deep breath.
Melvin thought, in relief, 'Now, that is how to dodge a bullet. They know, but they will keep it quiet about my secret. So, I am fine for right now. As Lee stated, I need to play it cool. Though, now I am starting to wonder what is cooking under that mask of coolness that Lee puts on. Also, I need to check out those stories, as soon as possible.'
Melvin then began closing up the restaurant.
(_)
A few minutes later, after Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru, made it to their suites. Akira closed the hallway door, and turned on the lights.
The three women had the bottles of beers in their hands, as Akira looked at Ranma and Natsuru.
Akira said, in japapnese, “Guys. I have a request for you.”
Natsuru and Ranma turned to face Akira.
Natsuru inquired, “Sure. What is it?
Akira stated, “I don't like asking this. But, given how close our daughters our with the Lagoon sisters. We need to keep Melvin's identity a secret from our daughters.”
Natsuru said, in japanese, “I agree. I don't like it. But, experience has taught me that teenage girls are gossips. And while I am sure that our children would not intentionally tell the Lagoon sisters. But, they might. Then, Melvin will be had.”
Ranma commented, in japanese, “I don't like it as well. But, we made a promise. And I see the logic in what you are saying. So, I will keep quiet, as well.”
Akira smiled at her two lovers, as she responded, “Thank you. Now, since it is to late to have some fun tonight. Let's get ready for bed, and get some sleep.” Her smile turned mischievous, as she continued, “Though, we can have fun tomorrow morning.”
Ranma stated, “That sounds like a good idea.”
Natsuru replied, “I like it. We will do something tomorrow morning.”
Akira said, “Good. We then have much to look forward too, when we wake up.”
The three lovers then put there unopened bottles of beer in the fridge, in their suite. They then got ready for bed. After which, they went to sleep on the large bed the three of them shared.
(_)
Twenty minutes later, in the hotel restaurant, Melvin had finished closing up for the night. He then pulled out his pistol from under the bar counter, and tucked it in the back of his pants, under his sweater, by his sheathed combat knife.
He then turned off the lights to the restaurant.
After Melvin walked into the hallway, he turned and used his keys to lock the main hallway doors to the restaurant, behind him. Next, he head to the elevator bay across the lobby.
While Melvin made his way to the elevator bay, he thought, 'Now, to find out what this story is about. With a title of, Badasses Of the Multiverse, this better be interesting.'
(_)
A few minutes later, Melvin made it to his hotel suite.
After entered his bedroom, he turned on a lamp light. He then did a quick check to find that nothing in his room was missing. And that the three women had left his room the way they had found it.
Melvin then sat down in a chair by the table, near the closed curtains, as he opened up his laptop computer, and booted it up.
After Melvin had logged onto his computer account, and typed in his password, he then quickly accessed the hotel wireless internet system.
Next, Melvin used his computer mouse to select his internet browser of choice, to access a search engine. Next, he did search for the story, with him using the laptop's keyboard to type in the phrased, “badasses of the multiverse”.
Melvin soon found the stories. And he began reading the first chapter of book one.
As Melvin did so, he thought, 'So, this story is about Akira. And Akira was inspired to learn to dual wield pistols from watching Revy in the Black Lagoon anime. That makes so much since that is it funny.'
'Also, from what Natsuru said, this actually happened to them. Honestly, this is just one more level of strangeness, to an already crazy life. It is like that old Ricky Martin song, Livin the Crazy Life. Still, this story is kind of funny. Actually, it seems to be very funny.'
Melvin began chuckling, that soon became full laughter, as he nearly laughed his ass off, as he continued reading the stories for the next few hours. Any questions for series that he did not know about, were quickly answered by quick internet searches, and reading the fan sites for those series.
Though, Melvin soon had to go to bed, so he could get up, and resume his daily schedule, and bartending job.
Because of Melvin’s job, it took him five day to finish reading the stories. Off an on, when he was not at work. During his breaks, and when he closed up at night. Though, given those nights were not busy. So, he closed up early those nights. Giving him a few extra hours to read the stories.
But, Melvin only read the stories in the privacy of his own suite. And he logged out of those stories, and shut down his computer, when he left his suite. In case one of the other women of Revy's crew broken in. He did not want them to find out that he knew about the stories.
And while Melvin was still about to make himself keep calm, as Melvin read more and more of the stories, he found it more difficult keeping a straight face in the presence of Revy's crew. Until finally, when he had finished reading all four books, he had to force himself not to laugh out loud, nor smile like a madman, when he saw one, or more of the members of Revy's crew.
But, the stories put Melvin in a good mood. Especially, when he found out that B was Boris.
Presently, it was during the second morning, after Melvin finished reading the Badasses Of the Multiverse stories, it was a sunny morning, as Melvin got finished with his exercises, and he left the roof, to head to his suite.
While Melvin walked down the stairs, in the stairwell, to the top interior floor entrance, he thought, 'After reading those book. I guess it is true. Nobody truly leaves. It is like the song Hotel California. You can check out any time you like. But, you cannot never leave. Though, I guess you can run, like I did. Bwahahahaha!...'
'Still, Boris really does make a hot chick. I never put two and two together, with the Black Lagoon omakes that Pedro showed me. And damn they were all funny. But, it makes so much sense that B and Boris are the same personal. Also, that other omakes, The Melancholy, and Ghost Story, really had me laughing whenever I see them. Watching Balalaika like that is just so funny.'
'No wonder Balalaika ordered us not to watch the Black Lagoon series and omakes. Or, anything related to Black Lagoon. We would have found out that she dating our former sergeant. I may have not put two and two together, but one of us would have.'
'It would have embarrassed her. But, I guess, with the rest of them now women, Balalaika and B already told them who B was. They had probably even seen the series now. Though, I doubt they had seen the omakes.'
'Still, there were other things from the Black Lagoon series that I did not know when they actually happened to us.'
Melvin then made his way out of the stairwell, and through an entrance to hallway of the top floor. He had to use a key to enter the hallway. But, he had one.
As Melvin headed for nearest the elevator bay, he continued his thoughts, 'And at the time, we all thought Balalaika got a temp to do the editing for the porn Hotel Moscow produced. Not that we would have really cared one way, or the other, on the matter. Balalaika is a badass, and a good leader to us. As such, we all respected her. Even if she is a lesbian.'
'Still, it would have been nice to know that B was Boris at the time, so we could have talked to her about past missions and adventures. And about what the hell she was up to while she was gone. Even these stories gloss over a lot of her life, while she was gone.'
'Also, except for Boris, the writer made no indication of taking the manhoods of Hotel Moscow. That is clearly Balalaika's responsibility.'
'And the most important part that everyone seems to be missing is the path we were all on before the stories of these four books started.'
'I will admit, the path we were on in Roanapur would have likely ended badly for most, if not all of us. No matter what. At least this way, my friends and I are still alive.'
'And I have to thank the writer for that.'
'Though, the women, and men to turned women, really don't get it. Sure, the writer put them through hell, but he also gave them a lot back in return for their troubles.'
'And because of all this, I wonder who the writer is? I wonder if I know him? Maybe someday I will find out.'
Melvin then made it to the elevators bay on the top floor, and he hit the down arrow, to take an elevator to the second floor, and his suite, so he could get cleaned up, and dressed, to face the day.
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 1: “De La Plata Podrido.”
Chapter 11: “The Sharp, The Deadly, And The Beautiful.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
It was a late, sunny, cool morning, three days after Melvin has finished reading the stories, three nights ago. As Melvin finally made it to work in the hotel restaurant, outside, a large passenger bus drove up to the far right side of the Devil's hotel building, with the passenger side by the sidewalk. Though, the bus parked away from the lobby windows, so they were not seen.
Inside the bus were twelve heavily armed, mexican men, including the driver. Their ages ranged from eighteen to thirty-five. They were all dressed in casual clothing for their gender and culture.
One of the men walked up to the driver, as he asked, in spanish, “Is everything set?”
The driver put the vehicle into park, as he let it idle, with the keys in the ignition. He go up from his seat, and turned to man standing by him. He answered, in spanish, “Yes. We have covers all our bases.”
The other man inquired, “Are you sure? Do we have enough plastic handcuffs?”
The driver replied, “Plenty.”
The man questioned, “What about the local cartel?”
The driver said, “No problem there. Weeks ago, they left the island one night, with no reason given. Best I can guess, someone, or something spooked them.”
The man asked, “What about about the police?”
The driver responded, “We are fine there, as well. We cased this place for the last week. For some reason, the police do not come around here.”
The man inquired, “And how many women are we taking? And for how much for each one?”
The driver answered, “Twenty-one women in all. And if they are as hot, young, and exotic, as what has been reported, we could get as much as twenty-five grand apiece, U.S. cash. After expenses, that is over forty-three thousand apiece.”
The man agreed, “I know. Not bad for four hours of work, at most. An hour and a half to get here. Twenty minutes to get them into the buses. And then two hours to get them to buyers. After which, we are paid, and we celebrate.”
The driver said, “You got that right.”
The man commented, “Though, I wonder if any of these women will give us trouble.”
The driver stated, “Well then, these bitches should be made to know their place.”
The man joked, “Which is the missionary position?”
The driver agreed, “Exactly.”
Both men then laughed for a few seconds.
After they finished laughing, the driver picked up his assault rifle. He turned to his men, as he ordered, “Okay, guys. We are heading in there, in two minutes.”
(_)
Two minutes later, Rock, Revy, and the rest of their twenty-one women group, were sitting around the front lobby couches and chairs.
The other tenants seem to avoid the lobby when the women groups together like that. Though, the clerks knew better than to say anything on the matter, towards the women in question.
Shenhua, Revy, Lotton, Aeryn, Violin, and a few others, had their weapons on them. Though, they were hidden in their clothing, except for Revy, whom did not feel the need to high her cutlasses from the work.
Revy turned to Rock, as she asked, “So, what do you want to do today?”
Rock answered, “Not a clue. We could search for the writer, but all we can be sure of is that he is here, and he is nearby.”
Revy stated, with annoyance in her voice, “All this cloak and dagger bullshit is boring the hell out of me. I would literally kill for some action.”
Suddenly, twenty armed mexican gang members stormed into the lobby, from the outside.
As they pointed their weapons in all directions, the two clerks at the check in desk, ducked down under their desks.
A second later, one of the men barked, in english, in a heavy spanish accent, “Alright bitches! Hands up! You are coming with us! And into the back of our bus! Anyone who does not comply, is going to die!”
The women just looked at each other for a seconds, they then looked back at the mexican gang with feral grins that set the all twelve armed men on edge.
Through her feral grin, Revy stated, in an excited tone of voice, “Ask, and ye shall receive!”
The women pounced on the men before they knew what happened.
(_)
A minute beforehand, in the hotel bar restaurant, Lee and Sam decided to stay at the hotel, for the morning, and get an early lunch, as they had a heart to heart conversation about their friendship.
The reason they had not yet gone to the Rats Nest bar, was that Lee felt that even with Revy and her crew in the hotel, that hotel offered a better atmosphere, than going to the Rats Nest.
This was the first day, in the last few days that Sam had finally showed up with Lee. And Lee was making the most of his time with Sam.
Though, Lee was also working up the nerve to ask the most important question towards Sam. What was going on with Sam?
At the moment, Lee and Sam were having an earlier lunch, while sitting at their usual places at the bar counter.
Meanwhile, Melvin was nearby, standing behind the bar counter, while taking care of a few things.
Lunch rush had yet to happen for the day, with only Melvin, Lee, and Sam, being the only ones presently in the room.
As they waited for their meal, Lee finally worked up the nerve to ask the important question, that had been on his mind. He turned to Sam, as he stated, “Sam, what is with you lately? You have gone for the last few days, without tell me what is going on.”
Sam turned to Lee, while he stated, in a sad tone of voice, “I am sorry, Lee, for not telling you my plans up front. It is my girlfriend. She is taking all my time...”
Lee spoke up, with a hint of sarcasm in his voice, “I hope your next words are not, with sex.”
Sam flatly answered, “No... Well, most of the time, no... As I told you, around a week ago. I am helping her move into town. She just seems to like it here. And since I could not talk her out of moving, I am helping her. As a way to direct her how she is moving here. So as to mitigate the situation. She is even on working on getting a place for herself.”
Lee conceded, “That is understandable. Just please, let me know ahead of time, if you are going to be busy for the next few days. I don't want to have to drive, or worse, walk to the Rats Nest, only to find you are not there.” He mentally added, 'Though, I did get to meet V.T. out of that incident. So, I am not to upset about it.'
Sam responded. “Don't worry. I will try to let you know ahead of time. But right now, everything is up in the air for me. Also, if you don't meet me in the hotel in the morning, always drive to the Rats Nest. So, you don't have to walk back to the hotel, if I am not that.”
Lee said, “I will admit that walking, without you present, was an oversight on my part.”
Sam mentioned, “Good. Anyway, I am free today.”
Lee smiled, as he replied, “I am glad to hear that.”
Sam returned Lee's smile, as he offered, “Let's go to the Rats Nest like we usually do.”
Lee responded, “As soon as we have lunch, we will do that. But, we will take my car. I will just order soda, instead of beer, when we go to the Rats Nest.”
Sam replied, “That is fine.”
Suddenly, the three men heard popping noises coming from outside the room.
All three men looked at each other.
Lee asked, in a serious tone of voice, “Are those gunshots?”
Sam and Melvin stated, in unison, “Yes.”
Melvin walked up to the bar counter, right across from them. He looked at Sam and Lee, as he calming stated, “Boys, if things go to hell. Just stay where you are, and stay calm. I will handle the problem.”
Lee replied, “I trust you, Melvin.”
Sam said, “Same here.”
Melvin responded, “Thank you.”
The three men turned to looked at the entrance to the restaurant, as they heard footsteps, coming closer, from outside.
A few seconds later, the four surviving members of mexican gang rushed into the restaurant, from the hallway entrance.
Each man was carrying automatic rifles, and their clothing was covered in the blood of their fallen comrades.
The men rushed into the middle of the room, in a single file line, with them facing Sam, Melvin and Lee.
The three men by the bar counter could see that the four other men had expressions of fear on their faces from what they had just seen.
All three men at the bar counter remained calm, as Lee thought, 'I could probably guess what just happened to those men. It is as I said to Pedro. The second you lose respect for these women, you die.'
Melvin moved to where he stood between Sam and Lee, while all three were looking at the four men.
Melvin calmly whispered, in english, so only his two friends could hear him, “Lee, Sam, don't move.” He then swiftly used his right hand to reach under the bar counter, right by them, and he pulled out his, Tokarev semi-automatic pistol, from the holster under the bar.
Melvin already had one of the rounds, from the eight round clip in the pistol, in the chamber.
While Melvin quickly pulled out his pistol, with his right hand, he used his left hand to pulled the hammer of the weapon back to full, before moving his left hand completely out of the way, as he took aim, before he pulled the trigger. A second later, with his left hand out of the way, Melvin fired shot all four gang members between the eyes, in a matter of three seconds.
The four men were dead before they even hit the ground.
As Melvin slid the pistol back into its holster, that was under the counter, as he said, “Gentlemen. As you can see, pressing matters have to come up. Though, I will check on your orders, in a minute.”
Lee and Sam turned to face Melvin, as Sam said, “No. We are fine. First, do what you need to do.”
Lee stated, “Take your time. And that was good shooing. Though, my ears are going to ring for a little while. But, I can live with that.”
Sam complimented, “Yes. That was good job.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. Very quick and smooth.” He mentally added, 'Everything I would expect from former member of Hotel Moscow.”
Melvin smiled at Sam and Lee, as he replied, “Thank you.”
Just then, several of the women in Rock and Revy's crew, including Rock and Revy as well, rushed into the room. The women had their weapons in their hands, but their weapons were not pointed at anyone.
Melvin noticed that he did not see Ranma, Akira, nor Natsuru. He thought, 'I hope they are alright.'
The women then looked over and then saw the dead gang members on the floor.
Meanwhile, Lee and Sam turned around to face the women, just as Revy asked, “What happened?”
Lee joked, “They caught a bad case of lead fever.”
It took a few seconds, to get Lee's joke. Though, as they did, everyone started laughing in response to Lee jokes, including Lee.
A few seconds later, as they calmed down, Revy complimented, “That is a good. I will have to remember that one.”
Sam inquired, with concern in his tone of voice, “Was anyone hurt?”
Rock answered, “No. Except for the attackers, whom are all dead. We got them, before they could even react.”
Sam replied, “That is good.”
Melvin mentally agreed, 'Yea. I am glad only these idiot scum bags are dead. And I can guess what they were planning to do to you women. And I am glad this is how the situation turned out.'
Rock inquired, “Melvin, you know this town the most. Do we have to worry about the police?”
Melvin answered, “No. This is likely a clear case of self-defense. The police have no respect for idiots that get themselves killed like this. They will sweep it under the rug. They will likely just come here, collect the bodies, and their weapons, but not your weapons, and then leave.”
Revy thought, 'I am just likely this city more and more.' She joked, “Now, that is what I call serving the people.”
Everyone lightly laughed at her comment.
Revy mentally wondered, 'Still, we need to know what those men had in mind. I think I know what it is. And I am sure that Rock does not want to bring up the subject. But, someone has to ask. And I don't fully trust, Melvin. I need to ask someone else here that might know what is going on. That will at least be the level with me, concerned this subject.'
Revy asked, “By the way, who the hell are they? And why did they come here in the first place.” She then turned to Lee, as she added, “Lee?”
Lee thought, 'Why am I not surprised she would ask me? I just need to be careful how I answer this, so I don't upset her, or the other women.' He calmly answered, “I may not be from mexico, but I do pay attention to things. I have questions, before I can answer your question. Did they come after you women first? And how many were there?”
Revy answered, “Yes. They were twelve of them in all. And they came specifically for us. One of them even addressed us as such. Is this what I think it is?”
Lee responded, “Very likely. And well, not to upset you, anymore than normal, but I would guess that these are mexican gang members that were planning on kidnapping you women, and selling you to into sex slave trade. It exists in this nation. And sadly in other parts of the world, including parts of the U.S. Though, it is just not talked about much.”
Lee then lied, “Though, I don't like computers, I suggest you go on the internet and check out the mexican gangs, and kidnappings by gangs. But, I do not think you are going to like what you find.”
Rock stated, “That is a good idea.”
Melvin thought, 'It might be best to do something to calm their nerves.' He offered, “Ladies, if you want, how about I give you all, and your friends outside, each a free bottle of cold beer.”
Revy turned to Melvin. She smirked, as she stated, in a happy tone of voice, “A bit of Action and cold, free beer. I am falling in love with this town.”
While Melvin did not show it on the outside. He thought, with concern 'Oh my. What have I done? Still, there is another matter to deal with.'
Melvin said, “I will get you a beer, in a minute, Revy. But, I have to first call the police. And everyone, it might be best if you stick around until after the police leave. In case they do ask questions.”
Revy replied, “I fully understand.”
Lee thought, 'I am glad I am not in any rush to leave. And though Melvin does not know it. I am ecstatic that both Melvin and I are friends with Pedro. I hope Pedro is intelligent enough to send police officers that don't know what is going on. That way, they will not act, or say something stupid about the Black Lagoon series, or other fictional series, in front of the women, which could get us all into trouble.'
Melvin then went over to the wireless phone behind the bar counter.
Melvin then picked up the phone from its base, and he dialed the number for the De La Plata Podrido police station.
(_)
An hour later, the police came and went. Pedro did not show up. They did not ask any questions. They just collected the gang members bodies, their weapons, and impounded the gang members' bus. With one of the officers driving the bus away.
After finishing their lunch, and the police leaving the hotel, Sam and Lee were finally able to head for the parking lot.
When the walked through the front lobby, they saw that the staff had already cleaned up any mess that had happened in the room. With the room appearing to be clean and undamaged, as usual.
But, as Sam and Lee were about to leave through the lobby exit, Rock and Revy walked up to the two men.
As the two women stopped in front of the two men, the two pairs of adults faced each other.
Rock requested, “Sam, could we speak to Lee alone, for a moment.”
Lee thought, 'This has to be important, for them to want some privacy.'
Sam said, “Sure.” He turned to Lee, as he stated, “I will wait right outside the front entrance.”
Lee turned to Sam, as he said, “I will likely only be a minute, or two.”
As Sam walked away, and into the lobby entryway, heading outside, Lee turned to face Revy and Rock. He stated, “Okay. Even thought I don't know what this is, I can tell this is important to you. So, how can I help you?”
Revy said, “Yes. It is important, Lee. First, I take it that you have lived in North America for your entire life?”
Lee embellished, “Yes. Except for the last several months, I have only lived in the southeastern U.S.. What do you want to know?”
Revy stated, “After this morning, We got to talking with each other. And we need to know about some of the mafias in this town, and nation.”
Rock picked up for her lover, as she said, “We are not from around here.”
Lee maintained a mask of calmness, as he sarcastically thought, 'That is the understatement of the week.'
Rock continued, “And as Revy said, we would like to know some information on so of the local mafias in this country. You are the only person we know that we can ask without drawing suspicion. Will you help us?”
Lee thought, 'If I don't help them, it could cause problems for all of us. So, I might as well.'
Lee responded, in a concerned tone of voice, “Okay, Revy and Rock, I will help you. I do not know much about the local mafias in mexico, but I do know some information. But, I am going to tell you right now. Don't mess with them. They will kill you, without hesitation, if you are lucky. Some of the worse ones, if you cross them, they will rape, torture, and then enslave you into the sex trade.”
“Also, do not expect any help from the cops down here. Barring a few exceptions, the cops down here are scared of the cartels. There is a saying down here that translates to, silver or lead. Meaning, the cops either accept the cartels' bribes, or the cartels will kill the cops. The mexican mafia's are not bluffing on this threat.”
Lee continued, in a more serious tone of voice, “Do we understand each other?”
Rock replied, “Yes.”
Revy said, “I understand.”
Lee stated, “Good. For simplicity sake, we will just talk about one of the most dangerous cartels that operated on the eastern half of this country. And they are one of the most dangerous criminal organizations in North America. They are called the Zetas.”
Revy inquired, “The who?”
Lee mentally realized, 'I should not be surprised they have do not know about them, given Black Lagoon was set in the mid-nineteen nineties, in their timeline. And the Zetas did not hit the scene until a few years later.'
Lee stated, “The Zetas. The U.S. government publicly considers the Zetas to be the most technologically advanced, sophisticated, and dangerous cartel operating in Mexico. And Uncle Sam only has itself to blame for their creation.”
Revy commented, “I bet this story is juicy.”
Lee said, “It is. In dealings between the Mexican and U.S. governments, the Zetas are one of the more embarrassing mistakes by Uncle Sam. Now, let us set the way back machine to the late nineteen nineties. At the time, Uncle Sam came up with the plan for the Mexican government to use mexican soldiers to directly confront and battle the drug mafias of Mexico. The Zetas were their solution. The Zetas were originally mexican special forces. Their training was paid for by Uncle Sam, with U.S. instructors sent down here to personally train the Zetas. So, you can imagine that the Zetas are all hardcore badasses.”
“But, after they were trained, and sent into the field, the members of the Zetas soon realized they could make more money with the drug trade, instead of fighting the black market. After the Zetas went AWOL, they took over a good chuck of the Mexican drug trade.”
“Also, to make matters worse, other dangerous groups have been created from The Zetas members whom have left the organization.”
Lee’s voice turned deadly serious, as he finished, “If you cross them, they will kill you, your family, your friends, and even your pets. They take everything from you, and burn down what they cannot take from you. When they are finished with you, you will not even be a memory. The cops will not find your corpses. At best, they will find pieces of you that are no even enough to identify you with. That is if you are lucky. Do. Not. Mess. With. Them.”
Lee then turned, and walked away from Rock and Revy, as he headed towards the lobby entryway.
As Lee walked away from the women, he overheard Rock stated, “It sounds like the Zetas are this reality's equivalent to Hotel Moscow.”
Revy said, “That is possible. We have what we wanted to know. I will warn the girls to steer clear of them.”
Rock agreed, “Good idea.”
By then, Lee had entered the entryway, by opening the left side door.
Lee let the door close on its own, as he continued walking towards the outside lobby exit to the hotel.
While Lee did so, he realized in thought, 'Hmm. Now, that I think about it, I guess Rock is right about the Zetas being this reality's version of Hotel Moscow. I guess that maybe this reality is but a work of fiction for another reality...'
'It would make sense on so many levels. And I am not just talking about my personal life with these girls. I am talking about the overall world politics, the names of the major players, and the general dark comedy mood of this reality...'
'If so, that is all the more reason to escape this reality before the girls catch me, or my cancer kills me.'
A second later, Lee reached the outside door. He opened the right door, and walk through it.
Lee then let the right door close behind him, as he saw Sam, met up with he met up with his bearded friend.
Within a minute later, Lee was driving Sam, in his pink convertible, to the Rats Nest.
(_)
Later that afternoon, at five thirty PM, three young women, appearing to be in their mid-twenties, in age, walked into the front lobby of the Devil's Hotel, from the outside doors, though the entryway, into the lobby itself.
Two of the women were in front, while the third carried their language, which was two suitcases, and a handbag, with the strap of handbag hung on the woman's right shoulder.
As they made their way into the lobby, they looked around, and all three smiled as they saw whom, that they were looking for.
Just then, the lobby started playing the song, People are People, by the band, Depeche Mode.
(_)
Meanwhile, on the left side of the lobby, Rock and Revy, were sitting on a couch, facing the windows, while their five daughters were also sitting on the three other encircled couches.
The other members of their group has plans for the days, and they were elsewhere.
Revy noticed the music has suddenly changed, and she looked to her left, and whom she saw made her grin from ear to ear. She stated, “Hey girls. Guess who just showed up?
Rock and the sisters turned to see who they were, and they all happily smiled, as well.
All seven women got up from the couches, and they walked towards the three people.
They saw the three women had stopped, while they were looking back at them, with smiles on their faces.
As they walked towards the three women, Kristina yelled, in excitement, “Mom! Aunts!”
The three women were Dutch, Janet, and Benny.
The tallest of the group was the dark skinned, brown haired, Dutch. Whom was a slender, yet muscular woman of average height.
Dutch was wearing pretty much the same outfit she wore when a man, excluding her sun glass. Her clothing included her green pants, shirt, flack jacket, and black boots, all made to fit her. With her hair in short brown dreadlocks.
The second to tallest women was tan skinned, blond, Janet, whom had was slender, but athletic physical build. She also had the largest breasts of the group.
Janet wore a red short sleeved blouse, a yellow long skirt, and black slippers. Her blond hair was cut short.
The shortest of the group was fair skinned, blond, Benny. Whom had a slender, but athletic physical build. Though, she was physical smaller than Janet.
Benny wore a white t-shirt, blue jeans, and white tennis shoes. Her blond hair was reached down to her shoulder-blades, and she tied her hair in a pony tail, with a scrunchy.
With Benny was being the person among them, carrying their luggage.
As the seven women approach, Dutch, Janet, and Benny, Dutch said, “Hi Kristina. Hi girls.”
Revy said, “Hi guys.”
As the seven women came to a stop, in front of the three newcomers to the hotel, the ten women stood around each other.
Molly was the first to speak, as she asked, “Why didn't you tell us you were coming?”
Janet said, “Daughter, if we did, then it would not have been a surprise.”
Molly complimented, “It is a good surprise, mom.”
Janet replied, “Thank you, sweetie.”
As the other women chatted, Rock looked over at Benny, and stopped herself from laughing.
Given Benny's smaller, more slender form, which was almost as short and petite as Lotton and Sawyer, it was hilarious how Benny was barely able to carry both suitcases, and the handbag.
Rock inquired, “Do you need a hand?”
Benny just rolled her eyes for a couple of seconds, before looking back at Rock. She answered, “Sure. These things are not heavy, just cumbersome.”
Benny then handed the suitcase, in her right hand, by the handled, to Rock.
Rock took the suitcase in her left hand.
Benny then stated, with mild annoyance in her voice, “You would think me being the smallest one, would let me out of carrying the luggage. But, no dice.”
Rock commented, “Yea. Some things never change.”
Benny mentioned, “At least, those two don't make me carry all the shopping bags, when we go shopping.”
Rock inquired, “True. So, how was the vacation in the Bahamas?”
Benny answered, “It was fun... Well, when we are not searching the internet for the writer.”
Rock inquired, “Any leads?”
Benny stated, “None.”
By then, the others had begun to overhear their conversation, and they realized the importance of the discussion. The other eight women turned their attention towards Benny and Rock.
Janet had been paying attention to the entire conversation. She stated, “We first tried the simple approach. The same as you. Use the writer's alias to track him with our reality devices. That did not work.”
Rock responded, “Yes. That interesting. We just ended up being sent to where the proxy internet servers he used for his VPN service It seems his alias is more tied to those servers, than his actual address.”
Benny stated, “And the man used proxy servers from all over the world.”
Dutch shrugged, “At least, we went to some interesting places during that wild goose chase.”
Janet agreed, “True. And then, when we decided take a more subtle approach, and we tried to trace the writer through the internet, we ran into some other problems...”
Benny continued for her wife, as she stated, “Rock, this reality has some insane levels of firewalls, anti-viruses, proxy servers, and spyware. I have never seen anything like it. Layer after layer of all four. We spend most of the time being careful not to let out efforts be traced back to us. Finally we got bored with it. And that is why we came over here. To get back into the action.”
Rock agreed, “Yea. This reality can be... paranoid... But, this town down not appear to be that dangerous.”
Benny questioned, “Really. Revy mentioned, in a message to us, that this place was full of badasses.”
Rock conceded, “True. But, this is the kind of place badasses go to live a quiet life.”
Benny snorted, as she inquired, “Isn't that a change. So, how has things been here? Revy sent a message to Janet that you actually had contact with the writer.”
Rock blushed slightly, as she coyly answered, “I would not call it contact. But, we know he is on this island. He may even be staying in this hotel.”
Rock thought, with concern, and mild embarrassment, 'I need to change the subject, before the children learn about my indiscretion. As embarrassing as it would be for Benny, Dutch, and Janet, to learn what happen. I might never live it down if our daughters learned what happen.'
Rock suggested, “Let us get you guys checked in. We will see if they have a room available near Revy and I.
Benny agreed, “That sounds like a great idea.”
Rock commented, “By the way, this hotel takes gold as payment. They even have an exchange system for gold and currencies.”
Benny smiled, as she responded, “Cool. And after that, we can talk about what has been going on, in our new room.”
Rock replied, “Okay. We will do that in a little while.”
The two women then headed for the check in desk, as the other women went back to talking to each other.
(_)
A few minutes later, as the Lagoon family reunited, outside Lee and Sam had just gotten back from the Rats Nest, with Lee parking his car in the Devil's Hotel parking lot.
As the two men approached the lobby, from the windows, Lee could see that Rock, Revy, Molly, Sarah, Kristina, Rebecca, and Yukio were talking to three other youthful women.
And from the physical builds, clothing, hair color, hair styles, and a skin tones, of the three new women, Lee could guess whom they were.
Lee stopped in his tracks. Though, he did his best to hide his fear from showing on his face, thus alerting Sam that something was wrong, as he thought, with worry, 'Oh crap. Dutch, Benny, and Janet are here... I am not dare going to come near those three, without a solid plan of action. Those three are some of the sharpest, most savvy, and intelligent people, I know of, in the multiverse. My usual tricks will not work on them. I need to get back to my suite, and think of a plan. I can just go around the building, can come in the hotel, from the back, and use the back elevator bay.'
'Also, I feel bad for Melvin. I just hope he can continue to play it cool. And I will have to tell Pedro what is going on, tomorrow night. I am not going to be able to make our meeting, given I am not going to risk accidentally bumping into those three.'
'I will call Pedro tomorrow, to tell him that something came up. And that I will meet with him, tomorrow evening, on schedule. We already planned for this situation. If one of us is delayed for twenty minutes. The one at the diner just leaves, and waits until tomorrow, to get some answers as to why the other person did not show up.'
Meanwhile, Sam had noticed that Lee stopped. He stopped a second after Lee stop. He then turned and look at Lee, as he wondered what was wrong.
A few seconds later, Sam asked, “What is it?”
Lee turned to Sam, as he thought, 'I also need to keep Sam out of the line of fire. At least for tonight. Until, I can come up with a plan in the morning. And I just know how to convince him to avoid the trouble in front of us.'
Lee forced himself to calm down, as he suggested, in a relaxed tone of voice, “Sam, let's go around back, take the back elevators to my suite, and spend the rest of the evening playing poker and watching TV in my room. We will even dine in. My treat.”
Sam firmly inquired, “Lee, what are you not telling me?”
Lee thought, 'Damn. Sam just had to ask me a question like that. Though, I can handle this.'
Lee turned to look at the hotel windows of the front lobby, as he calmly asked, “See Revy, Rock, and their... friends, with those three new women?”
Sam looked over at them, on the other side of the lobby windows, as he answered, “Yes.”
Lee stated, “They clearly know each other. And given Revy and those girls temperaments, do you really want to interrupt their happy reunion?”
Sam realized where Lee was coming from, as Sam calmly responded, “No. Not at all. I see your point. I believe I will take you up on your offer.”
Lee said, “Good. Now, let's go this way.”
Lee then lead the way Sam around the left side of the building, to one of the back entrances to the Devil's Hotel.
It took the two men a few minutes to walk to the left of the building, around back, to the door near the game room, and to back elevator bay.
Around four minutes later, that, they made it to the safety of Lee's hotel suite, on the third floor.
(_)
An hour later, as the sisters went to dinner in the hotel restaurant, the Lagoon parents retired to Dutch, Benny, and Janet's new hotel suite, to talk to each other in private, and catch up with one another.
The suite was a two bed suite, with a balcony, wa a few rooms down from Rock and Revy's suite.
With the hallway door close, and ceiling light of the bedroom of the suite turned on, Dutch and Revy sat in chairs, by the table, near curtains, and sliding glass door of the suite.
Rock sat on the bed near the table, close to the headboard, while she faced the other bed.
Janet and Benny sat together on the other bed, while they faced the other three women.
The headboards of the beds were places to the left side of the room, from the hallway entrance. Across from the beds were the chest of drawers, TV remote on top of the chest, wall mounted flat widescreen TV, and other furnishings.
Currently, the five women were just catching up with each other, as they talking about what they had seen in the current reality they were in.
Benny said, with mild surprise in her voice, “So, the police came to the hotel, collected the bodies and weapons, they left without asking you questions, and swept the whole under the rug?”
Revy smiled, as she stated, “Yes. This town is great. The police even look the other way about us having our weapons, without up bribing them. As long as we don't attack the locals, nor tourists. And there are things to do here. Besides the karaoke nights here, we have to take you to a local dive in town, that we found. The bar is called the Rats Nest. Think of it as being like the Yellowflag, only a hot babe runs it, and there is no whorehouse above the bar.”
Benny commented, “Sounds interesting.”
Dutch inquired, “Yes. It does. Now, how has your end of the investigation, on finding the writer, turned out, so far?”
Rock said, “We have had some suspects on who is the writer. But, they came up to being dead ends.”
Revy stated, “To be honest, I thought it might be Melvin. But, when we talked about it, yesterday, in private, with the other girls, Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru, swore up and down to us that it was not Melvin. Though, they refused to say why they don't think it is him.”
“Still, I trust them, so, I did not push the matter with them. Also, neither Sam, nor Lee. These two guys, whom stay at the hotel, that play poker all the time with each other. Are not the writer.”
Dutch inquired, “What about this Sam and Lee?”
Revy stated, “Sam stated that Lee has been with him for months.”
Janet pointed out, “But, we have only Sam's word on that.”
Revy shrugged, as she conceded, “You may have a point about that?”
Benny suggested, “What if there are two writers, with Sam and Lee being the writers?”
Rock stated, “I doubt it. Sam has disappeared a few times, and from the way Lee acted during those times, Lee clearly did not know where Sam went. And Lee is nothing but polite to us, while this writer has pulled a few stunts on us.”
Janet asked, “Like what?”
Revy let out a small chuckle. She then said, “We will tell you, later.”
Rock thought, 'This is a conversation for another time.' She commented, “Moving on. We still might want to do a background check on their names. I only have Sam's first name. But, I do have an idea of Lee's full name. Lee introduced himself to us as, J.D. Lee.”
Benny stated, “The names, Sam and Lee, are too broad to do a search. Even with Lee's initials.”
Rock said, “I can understand why you would have trouble with just looking into a man whom we only know as, Sam. But, we have an idea of Lee's full name. So, what is the problem?”
Benny commented, “That is if that name if Lee is his real name. Which I highly doubt. But, that is not all. There is something else you need to know, about the name, Lee.”
Rock asked, “And that would be?” She thought, 'I have a bad feeling about the answer to my question.'
Benny responded, “Rock, I am from Florida. Which is part of the southeastern United States. And I am sure it is the same here, as back in our home reality. So, I mean it, when I say you have no idea how many Lees there are in the southeast United States. It is a common name there for both caucasians, and asians.”
“Also, Lee, in the southeast U.S. is used as a given name, a middle name, and a family name. The name is used by both men and women. There are less Smiths there, than Lees. If that is his alias, he picked a good one.”
“Backtracking him will be next to impossible. Also, the name Lee has a hidden meaning in english. Lee, in old english, means, sheltered from the storm.”
Rock thought, 'Okay. That is some alias to use. With a poetic meaning, as well. But, that does not mean that Lee is the writer. And I don't want to accidentally condemn and innocent man, just by accusation.'
Rock replied, with interest in her voice, “Really. That is an interesting hidden meaning.”
Benny added, “Yes. And if this Lee is the one we are looking for, I want a word with him about messing with our lives.”
Dutch agreed, “So do I.” She chuckled a little, as she continued, “I guess for the writer, the line would form to the left.”
Janet pointed out, “I think you all are missing the bigger picture. Why, is just as important as, who. Why did our target want to bait us to come here? Why does he, or she, want to be near us? Logically, he, or she, would know better, and probably try to hide as far away as possible from us. Instead, this person baited us. There is something else going on here. An unknown factor that is not being accounted for, that we have no way of finding out about, right now.”
Revy complimented, “That is a good point, Janet.”
Benny suggested, “How about Janet, Dutch, and I, meet this guy?”
Dutch seconded Benny's idea, as she commented, “Great idea. The question is when, and where. I suggest we do so, when he is alone. I am sure that if that Sam fellow, whomever he is, is present, when we are, he will run interference for Lee. Like he may have already done, by giving Lee that alibi. So, we need to get Lee alone.”
Benny agreed, “I like that plan.”
Janet said, “Also, let us not just meet him. Let us do so while nicely dressed in some of our sexier clothing. If he is the writer, that will throw him off his game.”
Benny smirked, as she commented, “Even if he isn't the writer, seeing three sexy women, in sexy clothing, speaking to him, will thrown him off his game.”
Rock stated, “Well, if you want to confront Lee, I know where he will likely go for lunch. And from what I am told, Sam does not care for this place. As such, Lee will likely be alone.”
Rock then explained where and when would likely be best to confront Lee, when Lee was alone.
The Lagoon parents then formed their plans for the next day.
(_)
The next day, it was noon, on a sunny day, as Lee finished his lunch, as he sat in a chair, under a shaded, outdoor table by the burger van. The table had four chairs, with being the only one sitting in a chair, at the table.
Also, there was no one at the tables around Lee.
Lee was in a good mood that day. He had Sam met Sam for breakfast that morning, at the hotel restaurant, at the bar counter. And it was Lee's request they sat there.
Still, Lee was a little concerned that he did not see Revy, Rock, Benny, Janet, nor Dutch, in the hotel restaurant. The rest of Rock and Revy's family and friends were there. But, not them. Though, Lee was not going to complain about the matter.
After they finished breakfast, while they were still at the bar counter, Lee excused himself. Lee then headed to his suite. When he reached his suite, he dialed the number for the Plata Podrido police department.
Lee spoke only english during his conversation on the phone. And soon got in touch with Pedro. With the two of them both speaking english to each other.
While, Lee did not go into detail, because he was concerned that the phone lines might be table by someone after him. And Pedro and Lee had talked about this very possibility, a few times, at the Last Resort Diner. With them agreeing to keep their conversation vague, while talking over the phone.
Lee did not mention any names, places, times, nor appointments. Even the places they met at. Though, Lee did state he had good reasons for not talking to him, yesterday. But, he would talk to Pedro, later.
Pedro said that he was okay with the situation. He understood. And he looked forward to his explanation later. Meaning, when they met at the Last Resort Diner, at seven PM that evening. As usual.
Both men said their goodbyes, and Lee hung up the phone.
Lee then headed back downstairs, and rejoined Sam in the hotel restaurant. They then left for their usual chairs, across from each other, at a small table, on the right side of the front hotel lobby. They then played poker there, until it was time for the Rats Nest bar to open.
When it was time for the Rats Nest bar to open, Lee drove Sam and himself to the Rats Nest, in his pink car. When they reached the bar, they sat in their usual places, at the back left corner table, as they played poker for a little while. During this time, Sam had a beer, while Lee had a bottle of lemonade.
When it was lunch time, Sam felt like having some Italian food, while Lee felt a craving for a hamburger.
So, Lee drove same to a good, nearby Italian restaurant, where he dropped off Sam. Lee then drove to a parking lot near Eda and Yolanda's burger van. After Lee parked his car, he went to the food truck to have some lunch.
Presently, as Lee sat in his chair, at the table he had been at, he had just eaten his hamburger and french fries, while sipping through a straw, from his large styrofoam cup of soda.
Lee thought, 'These fountain drinks that Eda and Yolanda have are as good as the bottle stuff, and the two women offer free refills.'
Lee heard a woman's voice, a few feet behind him, calmly ask, “Hello. Are you, Lee?”
To Lee's credit, when he turned around to face the three, young women, he did not do a double-take. Instead, he maintained his calm poker face, as he looked at the three women.
Though, Lee instantly recognize the three women.
Janet was wearing a bikini top and skirt.
Dutch was wearing a bikini top and some black pants.
Benny was in a crop top shirt, and some shorts.
Lee maintained his calm facade, as inside his mind, Lee was screamed, 'Oh crap! It is those three! Dutch, Janet, and Benny! And the only reason they would pull a stunt like this, in those outfits, is they already suspect me as the writer.'
'I have been dreading meeting since these three since last night. Except for Rock and Violin, these three are part of top five sharpest people I know among their group. So, how did they know I was here?... Of course, Rock and Revy. Revy and Eda talk to each other, and it is no secret that I sometimes come here for lunch around noon.'
'Still, at least they let me finish my lunch, first. That was nice of them.'
'And Janet really does have a nice set of breasts. And so does Dutch, as a chick. Benny, not so much. But, that is Tex-Mex's fault...'
Lee was able to keep his emotional mask up, as he mentally caught himself, 'Oh lord, I have to stop thinking this way! The worst part about those three is that I know they are my type. Like V.T., they are intelligent, independent, nice women, that are easy on the eyes, and most importantly, they are sane.'
'If they figure this out, I will be eating out of their hands, and my cover will be blown, within minutes.'
'I have to remain strong, and not show any outward emotion, except indifference.'
Lee calmly said, to the three women, “Yes, I am Lee. How may I help you ladies?”
Janet smiled, as she continued her inquiry, “We were wondering if we could talk to you?”
Lee shrugged, as he replied, “Sure. Have a seat.”
The three women quickly seated themselves at the three other seats at Lee's table.
Dutch sat in across from Lee. Benny sat to Lee's left side. And Janet sat to Lee's right side.
Lee asked, “So, how do you know about me?”
Dutch answered, for the group, “Revy and Rock told us about you.” She thought, 'There is no point in denying that we know Revy and Rock. We did talk for a while in the hotel lobby last evening. He might have seen us there. Even though, I did not see him there.'
Lee rolled his eyes for a moment. He then looked back as them, as he responded, “A person can meet the most interesting of people in this town. So, you know my name. What are your names?”
Benny thought, 'If this guy is the writer, he playing the dumb act to the hilt. By asking us to introduce ourselves, there is no risk of later slipping up on how he would know our names. Still, we have to give him our names, to keep this conversation rolling.'
Benny answered, “Well, I am Benny. And these are my two girlfriends. The blond is Janet. And the sassy black woman is Dutch.”
Benny thought, 'Saying that Janet is really my wife would cause too many questions. And Janet and I have discussed. With us agreeing that saying in public, that she is my girlfriend would best. And Dutch really is our girlfriend.'
Benny continued her thoughts, with amusement, 'Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma, are not the only ones that enjoy being a threesome.'
Lee held back laugh, as he thought, 'Well that answers that group dynamic. I only teased at that in my stories, from comments. Though, to see it first hand. And to have it directly confirmed is a little awkward for me. Also, Benny called Dutch a sassy black woman. Honestly, I can see that.'
Lee commented, “Benny... Such an odd name for such a cute woman?”
Benny flatly replied, “It's a long story.”
Lee shook his head once, as he requested, “I do not want to know.”
Janet mentally wondered, 'The question is did you know the answer, beforehand? If you are the writer, you would know that you would not want to know, because the masquerade would be over.'
'If you were not the writer, you would not want to know, because you know asking questions from friends of Revy is dangerous. With you considering us to be as dangerous as her. And I cannot tell which is the case. Still, let us dig a little deeper.'
Janet requested, “So, tell us about yourself, Lee. How long have you been here? Where are you from?”
Lee thought, 'When three beautiful, sexy women, ask a man to talk about himself, that man has to answer their questions. If I don't, it will alert them to something being off about me. Now, let us see how good my cover story is. I only hinted at it before with Rock and Revy. I think I will start off with an honest statement. I will drop a hint about the time loop, that they will even realize. But, it will also help with my cover story.'
With a slight smile on his lips, Lee honestly answered, “It feels like I have been here for several years. And I have enjoyed much of the time I have spent here.”
Lee then preceded to lie his ass off, in a very casual, laid back manner.
Lee began his lie with, “Anyway, I am from, and grew up in Nashville, Tennessee.”
Dutch thought, 'Now, to trip him up.' She asked, “What high school did you attend?”
Lee thought, 'Nice try. But, I have a counter for that question.'
Lee answered, “None. I was home schooled. After that, I passed the test for a GED, I went to college, took a placement test, and I went on to study a trade skill. Carpentry, to be exact.”
Dutch thought, 'Nice way of dodging the question.'
Meanwhile, Janet thought, 'Let's see how much you know about that city.' She inquired, “Why don't you tell us about Nashville? I may want to visit there.”
Lee genuinely thought, 'This is going to be fun.' He responded, “Sure. It is an interesting place. But, it has gone down hill for the last few decades. It started going down hill when they torn down the local theme part, Opryland, and build a gaudy mall in its place. Of all the rides there, I miss the Old Mill Scream the most. It is like that line in song Big Yellow Taxi. They paved over paradise, and put up a parking lot. And in this case, they literally did that.”
“Of course, the flood did not help matters. But, there are still some nice places to visit there. Such as the Parthenon. A full scale replica of the Parthenon in Greece. It is a wonder to see. Then, there is the Grand Ole Opry music stage. Along with dozens of nice bars and restaurants, featuring a wide variety of live musical performances. Outside of the city is Rock City, Ruby Falls, Dollywood, and of course, the more romantic part of Tennessee. The majestic smokey mountains, themselves.”
Benny though, 'If this is a cover story. It is a good one. I know most of those places. And he has at least clearly spent some time in Nashville, and other parts of Tennessee. But, I won't want him to know how impressed I am with his answers.'
Benny halfheartedly commented, “Sounds like fun.”
Lee then turned the conversation back on them, as he casually requested, “So, please tell me about yourselves?”
Benny thought, 'Touche. But, I got this covered.' She answered, “While my two girlfriends prefer their privacy, I will answer your question. I am originally from Florida. I went to college at SCAA for a while, before I transferred back to a college in Florida.”
Benny thought, 'Given how young I look, I can leave my past at that. With me pretending to be a college student. Which I once was, so I know how to fake it.'
'And this makes for good bait. Only the writer would likely know I am older than I look. Along, with him knowing about the hacking incident with the mafia and FBI in Florida, and why I originally went on the run, in the first place.'
Lee thought, 'Unfortunately for you, Benny, I am not taking this obvious bait. Instead, I intend to go in a different direction with this conversation.'
Lee inquired, “So, you have been Savannah, Georgia. I heard good things about Savannah College of Art and Design. Though, I hear there are a lot of strange people in Savannah. But overall, I am told by others that it is a nice town.”
Janet silently realized, 'We are losing control of the conversation. I need to get us back on track.'
Janet commented, “So, the important question. Our friends mentioned that you are on the run. How did you end up here?”
Lee lied, in a sober tone of voice, “It is a sad tale of foolishness on my part. I didn't read the fine print of some contracts I signed. You know. I used to think fleeing to Mexico was cliché, but now I understand why it is not. Being a carpenter, I got into the house market, where I fell into some unsavory fellows. At the time, I thought I was signing into an LLC corporate partnership. Instead, it was a Sub-chapter S corporate partnership.
Dutch asked, “What is the difference between the two?”
Lee answered, “The different between the two are when profits are divided, and how taxes are paid. In an LLC, the profits are divided between the partners, and the partners directly pay the taxes. In a Sub-chapter S, the taxes are paid by the corporation, and then the profits are divided up. I am sure you are starting to see the big different between the two.”
From look of comprehension in their eyes, Lee could see he was correct. He continued, “Anyway, the company I joined turned out to just be a money laundering shell company. One night the other partners vanished, taking all the money in the company with them. Money that taxes were owed on. And they left me holding the bag. Filing for bankruptcy was not an option for me. And with me being the only partner the government could find, and the fact I did not have the money to pay for those taxes, the government started the process to charging me with tax evasion. When my lawyer told me I was screwed, I immediately ran for the border, and I eventually found myself here.”
Benny asked, “So, are you going to try to pay the money back?”
Lee stated, “Even though I am the victim, and should I was able to pay what is owed, the government still demands that I spend at least ten years in prison. So, no. As far as I am concerned, when it comes to me, they can try to squeeze water from a rock. I am just going to stay on the run until a better option comes along...”
Lee thought, 'Now, to pull an unexpected comment, that will allow me to gain control of the situation.'
Lee said, “Still... About this town, I will level with you ladies. It does not take a genius to figure out we in the twilight zone.”
Benny thought, 'That is an understate. But, where are you going with this, Lee?'
Lee continued, “And I know, that I am the poor fool on the run that gets it in the end, in most twilight zone episodes, during the plot twist. I am trying very hard to avoid that twist at the end.”
Dutch smiled, as she said, “Boy, you don't have a clue.”
Lee thought, 'Actually I do.' He begged, as he faked desperation, “Don't tell me. I don't want to know.”
Benny thought, 'That is a wonderful excuse for wanting to remain ignorant. Admit to the strangeness, but beg not to be a part of it. He is either putting up a wonderful act as the writer, or he is just some poor guy who fell into this situation, and he is trying to figure a way out, without the strangeness consuming him.'
Lee picked up his cup, and he took a sip of his sweet tea. Lee noticed that it was nearly empty. A thought occurred to him, as he mentally reflected, 'I may just have found a way to buy some time.'
Lee said, “Excuse me. I will be right back. I just need to get a refill.”
Lee stood up. After which, he balled up his trash. He picked up the trash in his left hand, and his drink in his right hand. He then started walking towards the food truck, as he dumped the trash in a trash can he passed.
Lee's intend was to a free refill of his drink from the burger van, while he bought time. That would allow him to think and implement a plan that get him out of his current mess.
(_)
As Lee walked away, Dutch asked, “Benny, you are the expert on the southeastern U.S. culture. Does he check out?”
Benny answered, “So far he does. Everything he has said seems to be on the level. Either that, or he is a very good liar.”
Janet commented, “His story is so mundane that it is believable.”
(_)
While Lee walked to the window counter, under the awning of the food truck, where Eda was, he saw that there was no out else at the window.
Lee walked, as he thought, 'I have got to get them off their A game, or they are soon going to find out about me. I need a plan... That might work... And all I need to do is smile.'
When Lee approached Eda, at the window, he smiled, as he looked at her.
When Eda turned her attention to him, Lee requested, “I need a refill.”
Eda took the drink and refilled it. As she handed it back to him, she noticed Lee's smile. She asked, “What are you smiling about?”
As Lee continued smiling, Lee shrugged. He said, in a relax, slightly flighty, tone of voice, “Well, I have three young, sexy women showing an interest in me by them deciding to sit with me at my table.”
Eda leaned out the window. She turned to head to her right, and whom she saw, over at the table that Lee usual saw at, cause her jaw dropped.
Lee continued to smile, as he forced himself not to laugh at Eda's reaction.
Eda leaned up, as she collected herself. She then turned her head towards the back of the vehicle, as she stated, “Yolanda, I will be a minute. I am going to say hi to Dutch, Benny, and Janet.”
From inside the vehicle, Lee could hear Yolanda calmly reply, in english, “Give them my best.”
Lee thought, 'Now, to get back to the table, before Eda reaches.'
Lee quickly turned, and returned to his seat at the table, where Benny, Dutch, and Janet, were sitting.
Less than five seconds after Lee sat down in his chair, at the table, Lee saw Eda, in her waitress uniform, walk up to the group of adults he was with.
As the three women noticed, and turned to look at her, Benny asked, “Eda, what are you doing here?”
Lee also turned to look at Eda, with a special type of smile on his face.
Eda came to a stop, to Lee's right side, and Janet's left side, as she looked down at the group, sitting before her. She retorted, “I could ask you three the same question.”
Meanwhile, Dutch noticed the way Lee was looking at Eda. With a slight lecherous smile on his face.
Dutch realized what Lee's smile could mean. She turned to Eda, as she questioned, with concern in her tone of voice, “Eda, did you sleep with this man?”
Eda just blushed, and Lee's smile became slightly widened. These two reactions answered Dutch question, with a confirmed, yes.
Lee thought, 'Now, to make my exit, while they are shocked at that revelation.'
Lee continued to smile, as he turned to look at the women sitting at the table with him. He said, “Well ladies, it has been fun. But, I have places to be. Nice meeting you, and have a great day.”
Lee then got up from the table, grabbed his drink, and walked away. He headed towards where he parked his pink car beside the room. So, he could head to an Italian restaurant that he dropped Sam off at, for his lunch, and then the two of them to go back to the Rats Nest, to play some more poker, together.
While the four women watched Lee walk away from them, Benny said, “No one who has seen our series would knowingly sleep with Eda. Unless he is crazy. And Lee does not look crazy to me.” She turned to Eda, as she continued, “No offense, Eda.”
Eda continued to look to Lee, as she casually replied, “None taken. I can be real dangerous. But, I am going to tell you. Lee is not our target. When we went out on a date one evening, and we later had sex that night. It was okay. Also, when we did it, I sensed no fear from him. Unless he has no fear of death, he is not the writer.”
Janet commented, “Still, if Lee is the writer, he might be trying to throw us off his scent.”
Dutch weighed both her lovers' positions. She said, “Either way is possible. But, we need more information about Lee, before we move forward.”
Eda then turned to look at the three women, as she thought, 'Now, to earn some pointed with these three.' She offered, “So, are you guys hungry? My treat.”
Benny and Janet said, in unison, “Sure.”
Dutch shrugged, as she stated, “I could use a burger.”
Eda then took their orders, and she went to get her friends something to eat, from her food truck.
(_)
Later, that evening, after Sam and Lee spent the afternoon at the Rats Nest, they returned to the Devil's Hotel restaurant.
Given how suspicious Janet, Dutch, and Benny, had been to him at lunch. Lee decided it was better for him and Sam, to eat at their usual place at the bar counter, instead of the right front corner table.
Lee did this because, given how sharp the three new women in his life were, if Lee sat their, on the first night, they would further suspect him as the writer. Because, he could sit with his back to the corner, and he would have a good view of the entire room. Which was exactly when Lee preferred to see at that table.
But, Lee realized, if he sat at the bar counter, with him facing the left wall of the room, and his back being to the women after him, including Dutch, Benny, and Janet, it would further allay suspicions towards him, as being the writer.
Convincing Sam to change where they were going to sit was not difficult.
So, the two men, had dinner, as they sat at the bar counter, at their usual places.
Also, Melvin was behind the bar counter, and he was more than happy to take the meal orders from his two friends. And there was no one else around the three men, at the bar counter.
Though, during Lee and Sam's meals, and after they finished eating, Lee had a feeling that he was being watched.
Actually, Lee was sure he was being watched.
And Lee could guess whom was watching him.
A few minutes after Lee finished his meal, Lee took a drink from his glass of iced lemonade.
Lee then sat down the glass, onto the bar counter, as he thought, 'As I developed my precognitive abilities. Especially, during the time loop. I have gained the ability to not only tell when I am being watch, but in what direction.'
'And the direction is behind me, and to my right side. That is the direction from where Revy's crew is sitting. And I can guess whom among them are occasionally looking at me.'
The women being, Dutch, Janet, Benny, and probably a few others. They are occasionally looking at me, as they talk about me. If I turn my head towards them, that will only draw more interest from them, towards myself. And I don't want that.'
'It looks like my little act at lunch didn't even buy me a full day, without their attention. But, it at least bought me a little time. And in this game, one can still win by inches.'
(_)
Meanwhile, at the tables by the stage, in the back of the room, Rock and Revy's group had to take up four tables, instead of their usual three, to make room for their additional company.
After everyone in their group had said, hello, to Dutch, Benny, and Janet. And visa versa. The three women sat with Revy and Rock.
Meanwhile, Yukio, Rebecca, Kristina, Sarah, and Molly sat at a table.
Also, Lotton, Shenhua, Sawyer, Aeryn, and Violin sat at a table.
And at the fourth table, Akira, Ranma, Natsuru, Yurika, Nodoka, and Mikoto sat together.
At Lagoon parents table, the five women were alternating between looking over at each other, and looking Lee, whom sitting at the bar counter, with his back turned, while he and Sam were finishing their dinner.
And their conversation, as they ate their own dinner, and drank their beers, was about, Lee.
Rock looked over at the other women at the table, as she inquired, “So, at lunch, Lee said he was here over tax evasion charges, due to being conned?”
Janet turned to Rock, as she answered, “Yes.”
Rock said, “I can actually see that.”
Revy shrugged, as she looked at Rock. She commented, “Well, not everyone on the run has a flashy back story. Most times it is simple, mundane reasons, for how they found themselves on the run. And I could see Lee being in that sort of trouble. It would explain why he likes to keep to himself, except for being with Sam.”
Rock said, “Yes. He is living off the grid.”
Benny turned to Rock, as she pointed out, “But, it does make for a likely cover story.”
Revy agreed, “True. Still, that means nothing.”
Janet inquired, “Are there any notable abilities that Lee has, that you have not yet told us.”
Revy stated, “He is a pre-cog.”
Dutch looked over at Revy, as she asked, “So, Lee is precognitive? Interesting. How good is he?”
Revy turned to Dutch, as she stated, “When we first got here, I personally watched him win at poker without looking at his cards.”
Dutch commented, “Now, that is a trick.”
Janet looked at Revy, as she questioned, “Do you think Lee could be using his pre-cog abilities to keep suspicion off of himself?”
Revy answered, “No. I don't think his abilities work that way. His abilities don't give him that much detail on the situation. He said his precognition worked on pure instinct. And I believe him. We have surprised him a number of times.”
Rock agreed, “Revy is right. I do not think he relies on that ability too much. I even talked to the Rats Nest bartender, she stated that Lee told her he does not even rely much on his precognition, when playing poker. He only does that trick when he and Sam are playing alone.”
Revy said, “Still, that is a nice trick to have. And I can think of a few ways we could profit from that trick. Along with his poker face.”
Janet asked, “He has a poker face?”
Revy stated, “Yes. It is a very good one. When he did that card trick, the girls had their weapons draw on him at point blank range. And this was after they massacred most of those in room, whom attacked us. Still, he didn't show any signs of stress.”
Benny whistled for a second. She then commented, “Now, that is a poker face. Writer, or not, those are nice skills to have.”
Dutch said, “The first rule of hiding is. Don't rock the boat. Don't draw attention to oneself. He clearly knows this. Being polite, and remaining calm, are good ways not to rock the boat. And to not draw attention to oneself.”
Rock mentioned, “Yes. And the only time I think I saw the real Lee, under his mask, was during a chase we were all part of, with him being the driver. Beforehand, we made the mistake of thinking that he was sane.”
The other four women at the table, looked over at Rock.
Dutch asked, “What do you mean, making the mistake he was sane? What happened?”
Rock explained, “One evening, we needed a designated driver. So, Revy, Shenhua, Sawyer, Lotton, and I could get drunk at a bar. None of the other girls would help us. So, when we learned that Lee knew how to drive, we forced him to do so for us. Though, he had one condition. We could not bring our weapons.”
Dutch commented, “That sounds like a sane request to me. The only reason I never made that request for Revy, when we went to the Yellowflag, was most of the time, when there was shoot out, Revy was needed to finish it, before it got so out of hand, that we got injured, or killed.”
Revy turned to Dutch, as she sarcastically replied, “Hardy, har, har.”
Rock went onto say, “Yes. And that was sane request from Lee. But, later that night, there was a fight at the bar, and we had to quickly leave. We ended up in a car chase, with Lee driving. He knows how to drive. And he found an interesting way to end it. He decided to play chicken, with two cars, on a dark street, with the headlights off, while flooring the gas pedal.”
Dutch said, “Okay. That is not so sane.”
Dutch thought, 'And maybe Lee is the writer, and he was crazy enough to sleep with Eda, without any fear of death. To play chicken like that, one has to have no fear of death. But, the question then becomes why he has no fear of death?'
'And if this is the case, that would make him very unpredictable, and dangerous. If we find out he is the writer, we will have to be careful in how we approach him, when we do capture him. Though afterward, we would punish him for what he has done to us.'
Revy grinned, as she pointed out, "Well, he won that game.”
Rock said, “True. But, he had an insane grin while he was being playing chicken. That worried me.”
Revy stated, “Oh, come on. I was proud he could make that grin. Lee is fun when he actually loosens up.”
Benny asked, with concern in her tone of voice, “And whose car was he driving during this chase?”
Revy turned to Benny, as she sheepishly said, “Ours. But afterward, we found a local guy to check the car out. And the car is fine.”
Revy thought, 'If we had damaged our car. That might have really upset Benny. And the one time I have ever seen Benny furious with me, to the point I was actually scared, was back in Roanapur, when I accidentally shot his computer. Dutch had to hold him in place, for five minutes, until he calmed down.'
'Also, I had to pay for his next computer. With the super-soldier serum, and the fact we all trained each other some in our fields. If I ever piss her off, she might be able to put up a fight with me. And I really don't want that.'
Benny stated, “Good. So, Lee might be crazy enough to knowingly sleep with Eda.”
Dutch looked at Benny, as she thought, 'Good. I am glad that Benny has picked up on this.' She then looked at the other faces at the table, as she continued her thoughts, 'And from the looks on Janet and Rock. I believe they also realize that Lee is perhaps crazier than we all previous thought.'
Revy shrugged, as she replied, “Maybe.”
Rock pointed out, “But, that doesn't make him the writer. Actually, a number of us had tested him to see if he was the writer. Lotton said he wasn't the writer. Aeryn and Violin stated he is not the writer. And one time, we got him stoned, and even then he didn't show any evidence of being the writer.”
Benny inquired, “Let me guess pot brownies, and he didn't realize what was in the brownies?”
Revy replied, “Yep.”
Benny commented, “Nice trick.”
Revy commented, “You can thank Molly and the girls for that one.”
Benny said, “I think I will. And this means we won't have to try that trick on him.”
Revy agreed, “True.”
Rock thought, 'After thinking about that incident. I believe that was a mistake to trick Lee into getting stoned. I believe he did not deserve that. Though, I am not going to say a word about it to the others. Also, I need to get this conversation back on track.'
Rock pointed out, “Be that, as it may. So far, we have not had to resort to violence, except for self-defense. And I would like it to stay that way.”
Rock mentally reflected, 'I am going to give Revy and our daughters the benefit of the doubt, on the Rats Nest massacre. That could have been self-defense.'
Dutch said, “Really. With this crew, that is a feat. Still, without resorting to violence, Lee is going to be a touch nut to crack. And if we want to make sure he is the writer, or not, we will have to crack him.
Janet stated, “Well, I have an idea.”
The other four women turned to Janet.
Revy asked, “What is it?”
Janet smirked, as she questioned, “What is the one thing, besides monthly periods, that a man never wants to hear women talk about?”
Revy replied, “What?”
Janet answered, “Women asking a man to compare them to each other, and other women. I say, right now, the five of us should just get up, walk over to him, and ask him who he thinks is the hottest among us.”
Benny looked over at Janet, as she said, “Honey, that is just plain evil... I like it. Let's do it.”
Janet turned to Benny, as she continued smile. She said, “I thought you would like it, sweetie.”
Dutch conceded, “It could work. It could crack him. And it would be a really quick way to do it, without things becoming messy.”
Rock said, “I think I will come along to make sure this doesn't get out of hand.”
Revy commented, “I am going to come, so I can watch.”
The five women then got up from their table, and walked towards Lee, at the bar counter.
(_)
A few seconds later, across the room, at the bar counter, Lee precognition began warning him of immense danger approaching him. He thought, 'My abilities only trigger like this when my life is in immediate danger. And my precognition does not always work to warn me of danger. But, it is doing so, right now.'
Lee heard Revy, say, from right behind him, “Hey Lee. Could we speak to you for a minute?”
Lee and Sam turned around to see the five Lagoon parents standing by them.
Melvin was across the bar counter, as he looked at the five women, as well. He thought, 'I am willing to guess, from their clothing and looks, along with what I read in those screwy stories, seeing the Black Lagoon series, and what I personally learned in the aftermath of the fall of Chang's Tower. That is Dutch, Benny, and of course Janet, with Rock and Revy. I should be fine, as long as I hang back. But, if I walk away, I could draw attention to myself.'
Meanwhile, Lee thought, 'If I remain calm, I should be fine.' He calmly asked, “Yes. What would you like to talk about, Revy?”
Janet jumped into the conversation, as she inquired, “We wanted to know which one of us you find to be the sexiest?”
Sam and Melvin's eyes went wide at Janet's request, while Lee remained calm.
Lee thought, from a logical standpoint, 'No good can come from answering a question like that. That is plain cruel question to ask a man. And it is clearly an attempt to get reaction from me. But, I have a plan for such an occasion.'
Lee said, “I find sexiness to be a factor in personality, as well as physical attributes. And I do not know any of you well enough to make such a determination. Also, this is not a judgment that should be made from just one man.”
Janet thought, with a mix of annoyance and amusement, 'Oh, he is good at this.'
Revy thought, 'That gives me an idea.' She said, “You know? You are right, Lee. We should have a contest on the matter?”
The women saw Lee's poker face slip for just a second.
Janet though, 'He clearly did not expect that comment from Revy.” She turned to Revy, as she continued her thoughts, 'Though, I didn't either. But, I want to know what Revy has in mind.'
By then, the others around Revy, had turned to look at her.
Dutch asked, “Contest with who, Revy?”
Revy looked over at Dutch, as she answered, “We have a contest among our crew. Us, our family, our friends. I will even call Eda, and Yolanda, as well. They are too hot not to get in on this action.”
Lee was barely able to maintain his poker face, as he thought, with concern and worry, 'Oh no. What I have I inspired here? I have got to try to stop this, now!' He quickly said, “That is not what I meant.”
Benny looked over at Lee, as she stated, “It doesn't matter. Once Revy is like this, well... There is a reason she is called, Revy. All we can do is hang on for the ride.”
A thought occurred to Lee, as he mentally reflected, 'On second thought. After thinking about it, for a few seconds. I do think that while Revy's idea will create problems, this might be a good chance to throw them off my scent. And I have one question that will allow me to take control of the situation. I just have to set the question up, just right.'
Lee said, “I have a question... Err. Benny, is it?”
Benny replied, “Yes. What is it?”
Lee asked, “How bad a loser can Revy and the others be?”
Benny thought, 'The writer would not ask that question. Or, would he? Lee is so hard to read. But, it is a fair question.' She answered, “Petty bad. Depending on what she loses.”
Lee said, “Then, I suggest you make the prize be very small.”
Rock overheard Benny and Lee's comments, as she stated, “That is a good point.”
As Melvin watched this madness unfold in front of him, he thought, 'This could go very badly if someone does not reign them in. And Lee has no way to do so. But, I do.'
Melvin said, “I will offer a six pack of a good brand of beer, as the first place prize. If that is okay?”
Revy said, “That works for me. And we will also do this for bragging rights.”
Janet replied, “I agree.”
Dutch commented, “Beer is an excellent choice, with this crowd.”
Benny said, “I am with Dutch on this one.”
Rock shrugged, as she said, “Who am I to argue with such logic?”
Melvin offered, “Also, this bar would be the perfect place to host your contest.”
Melvin thought, 'This is the only place in town, that I know of, for sure, that the walls, ceiling and bar counter, is armored. If things go bad, this room might be able to contain their choas, and decrease the chance of other people getting hurt.'
'Also, a battle in here likely will not destroy the rest of the hotel.'
'And if this place is wrecked, and I survive, I have been meaning to talk to the manager about some minor remodeling of this place. And that is a perfect excuse. While also having these women run out of town, as well. With me back to my peaceful life.'
Revy agreed, “Yea. You're right.”
Lee thought, 'I see Melvin is also helping me. Though, let us check to see if the others would want to do this. We might also be able to contain this contest to a small number of people. That will still allow me to thrown them off my scent, while decreasing the chance of a big battle erupting in the hotel.'
Lee calmly inquired, “Are you even sure your friends would want to have such a contest?”
Janet questioned, “Why do you ask?”
Lee stated, “I like this restaurant. I would like it to remain in one piece.”
Janet just rolled her eyes for a few seconds, while Rock, Dutch, and Benny chuckled.
Lee thought, 'Now, to cover why I believe all of their group is dangerous. I don't know if Rock and Revy told the other three about the Rats Nest massacre, and how Sam and I were there. But, I can use the event from this morning to give the excuse of how I know they are all dangerous.'
Lee commented, “And after yesterday morning, it does not take genius to figure out that you are all very dangerous.”
Janet immediately looked at Lee, as Dutch, Benny, and Rock, stopped laugh.
Dutch asked, in a serious tone of voice, “What are you talking about?”
Rock thought, 'Oh no. We get so caught up with our plans, we forgot to tell them what happen yesterday morning.” Rock turned to Dutch, as she said, “We will tell you the full details, later. But, there was a battle in the front lobby of this hotel. None of us were hurt. But, let's just say, that it is no longer a secret that all of us our badasses.”
Dutch replied, “Okay.”
Dutch thought, 'Though, I did not notice any damage in the front lobby. And Benny, Janet, and I, will find out later. Though, this means we cannot use the fact we are badasses as bait for the writer. Because everyone here already knows that. Still, that is a small matter.'
Dutch turned to Lee, as she continued her thoughts, 'Besides, we are already in the middle of laying a trap, right now.'
Though, before Dutch could comment. Revy stated, “Anyway. Back to the matter of the contest. That is a good question, Lee. We do need to ask them.”
Revy turned towards tables, by the stage, where the rest of her crew was sitting at. She yelled, “Hey girls! How would you like to do a talent contest?!”
Of the next few seconds, the other women at their tables, yelled back, either, “Yes!”, “Yea!”, “Sure!”, “Why not?”, and “Of course.”
As the other women finished answering, Revy turned back to face Lee. She said, “See, they want in on this, as well.”
Lee noticed all this, as he thought, with disappointment, 'It was worth a try. We will just have to arrange for this contest to have some rules to prevent fights from breaking out.'
Meanwhile, Janet thought, 'Now, to bait, Lee.' She said, “How about a bikini contest?”
Lee turned to Janet, as he thought, 'Nice try, Janet.' He casually said, “A bikini contest would be so cliché. Besides, it's not the proper season.”
Janet thought, 'Nice come back.'
Revy teased, “He has got you there, Janet.”
Rock inquired, “Still, what should the rules be for this contest?”
Janet said, 'There is one thing a contest needs. And with it, Lee is not slipping through our fingers.' She said, “There is one thing a contest is going to need, and that a judge. I think Lee here would make a good judge.”
Lee was looking at Janet, as she had made her suggestion.
Lee maintained his poker mask, as he sarcastically stated, “You really do want that answer? Don't you?”
Lee continued to remain calm, as he thought, 'Damn. She roped me into having a front row seat. I cannot say, no, to her suggestion, without risk of blowing my cover in front of everyone. And this will make maintaining my cover, very difficult for me. And I will have to be careful about my judging of each of them. Or, they might take violent offense, later on, with the scores I give them.'
'Also, I need to work out how we will score them exactly. I am not just going to score them evenly between hotness and talent. That would be unfair to some of them. But, I will figure those details, later tonight, and tomorrow.'
'I still have to survive this conversation, before I even have to worry about those minor issues.'
Janet smirked towards Lee, as she replied, “Yep.”
Meanwhile, Sam and Melvin were just laughing at Lee's predicament.
Melvin thought, with amusement, 'Oh my. This could turn into another Roanapur Bad Girl Bikini Contest. That was riot to watch. And the event was hilarious to read. I have to admit that the punch line at the end, dealing with Akira winning was solid comedy gold. And I am going to have a front row see to this mad capped contest.'
As Lee turned, in his stool, towards Sam and Melvin, as he saw them chuckling, at his misfortune.
Lee finally dropped his poker face, as he openly scowled.
The women noticed this.
Janet thought, 'So, Lee does have a few weak points in the mask he puts up in front of us. It is obvious these two men are his friends. And when one of his friends acts negatively towards him, his lets his mask slip.'
'While I do not know enough about these two men, to use this against Lee. This is nice to know, for future use, later.'
'And from what I am guess, based one what Rock and Revy told us today, and last night, these two men are Sam and Melvin. Sam is the bearded man sitting by Lee. And the bartender, whom is standing across the counter from us.'
Meanwhile, Lee was still scowling, as he bitterly thought, 'After everything I have done for you. And this is they want to react to my current predicament. Still, while I consider you both my friends. If this is the way you are both going to treat this situation. And since I cannot talk my way out of this one. I am going to take the approach, that if I am going down. I taking you two with me.'
Lee continued to look at Sam and Melvin, suggested, “How about we have three judges? Sam can be a judge, and so can Melvin.”
Revy smiled, as she said, “That will work.”
Sam and Melvin immediately stopped laughing, while they turned to look at Lee.
And Lee could not help but drop his scowl, as he crack a grin at Sam and Melvin's reaction to his suggestion.
Lee thought, with amusement, 'Now, the shoe is on the other foot.'
Though, to everyone's surprised, Sam calmly said, “Okay. I willing to be judge.”
Melvin thought, 'Okay. I admit it. I should not have laughed at Lee's unfortunate situation. Still, I am not going to score these lunatics in any way. But, I cannot turn Lee down... Ah, that should work.'
Melvin looked around the group of adults near him, as he stated, “I won't be a judge. But, I am more then willing to be the announcer. That way, if there is a problem with the sound system, on stage, I am nearby to fix it.”
Rock complimented, “Good idea.”
Lee thought, 'Okay. You have a point there, Melvin. Though, we need a third judge. That is just the classic dynamic to these types of contest. So, they question becomes. Who is crazy enough to judge these lunatics? The Rats Nest bartender knows better... But, how about?... Yea, he might do it, just to stroke his ego, in saying, after the fact, that he did it.'
Lee turned to the five women standing on front of Melvin, Sam, and himself, as he stated, “I believe I know where I can find a third judge. Because, we are going to need three judges, to help prevent a tie.”
Revy said, “Then, I will leave that to you.”
Rock stated, “Now, to the important parts. The rules, and how the contest will be structured.”
Revy looked at her family, as she said, “I am open to suggestions. Do any of you, have any ideas on the rules?”
Benny replied, “Good question.”
Dutch said, “I am not sure myself.”
Janet commented, “Now, that I think about it. Neither do I.”
By then, Lee was able to take back hold of his poker face. Though, on the inside, Lee thought, with mild sarcasm, mixed with seriousness, 'Great. They want a contest between violent, lunatic women, and they don't even have an idea on how to go about it. If I say something, I tip my hand slightly to being the writer. But, if I say nothing. I will be leaving them to set up the rules. And if they are playing by their rules, this hotel might not survive this contest. Let alone the people inside it. Including, myself, Sam, and Melvin.'
Lee mentally grumbled, 'The things I do for people.'
Lee faked a cough.
The women, along with Sam and Melvin turned to him.
Lee said, “I have some suggestions. If you are open to them?”
Revy replied, “Sure.”
Lee explained, “It would likely be best to keep this simple. A one time walk onto the stage for each woman. Also, there is the karaoke machine on the stage. The women can choose between a performing a talent, or just singing a song.”
“At the same time, the women can wear something nice. It does not have to be a fancy dress. Just something that looks nice. Especially, given it is likely a few of you know acrobatics and dancing. And a skirt does not really work that well for acrobatics. Also, there should be two rules while performing. No weapons. And no violence.”
Revy commented, “That sounds reasonable.”
Janet thought, 'That sounds like something similar to what the writer wrote for the bikini contest. Though, that contest was fun to both be in and read. Still, Revy is right. Those are reasonable suggestions.'
Revy said, “Now, we just need to figure out the time.”
Melvin thought, 'Lee needs back up on this.' He turned to the five women, as he said, “How about tomorrow evening, at seven? That will give you plenty of time to prepare.”
Revy stated, “Yes. That is a good time.”
Lee thought, 'Now, for the icing on the cake. To prevent future repercussions from this contest.'
Lee mentioned, “And remember, ladies. This is all for fun. So, no hard feelings, after the contest is over.”
Rock thought, 'Lee, I see you are also covering your ass. And protecting your friends, as well. That is a nice move on your part.'
Rock said, “I will make sure the others get the message. And we will have no problems on that end.”
Revy shrugged, as she replied, “I can live with that.” She thought, 'After all. We are only paying for some beer, and bragging rights.'
Lee warned, “Good. And if any of you try to approach us before, or during the contest, to alter your scores, or someone else's score, you will be disqualified.”
Benny said, “That is fully understandable.”
Lee stated, “Good. Now, I need to talk to the judges, in private. See you tomorrow night.”
Rock said, “See you there.”
Then, four of Lagoon parents turned to walk away, and return to their tables, so they could begin their plans for tomorrow evening. Though, Dutch stayed behind, as she took a hard look at Melvin.
Melvin noticed Dutch looking at him. He remained cool, as he thought, 'Damn. I think Dutch may remember me. Why did those three have to show up?'
Dutch asked, “Have we met before?”
Melvin lied, “No ma'am. I believe I would remember meeting you.”
Dutch just shrugged. She then turned around, and headed back to join her family.
The three men then turned to look at each other.
Given both Lee and Melvin knew of the sharp hearing of many of the women, Sam was the first to speak, “So, what do we do?”
Lee answered, “Simple. We do this fairly. We judge fairly. And we keep things calm.”
Melvin said, “That is a good plan.”
Sam stated, “I agree. So, who do you have in mind for the third judge?”
Lee grinned, as he said, “I would prefer that to remain a surprise.” He mentally added, 'Because I am not yet sure that he is going to say, yes.'
(_)
Nearby, as Dutch had overheard what Lee had said, when she left the three men. Dutch then made it back to her table. She sat back down in the chairs, at the table that she, Benny, Janet, Revy, and Rock had previously occupied, before they went to talk to Lee. With the four other women already sitting in their seats.
Dutch looked over at the four other adults, as she smiled. She thought, 'Lee still wants to do this fair. That is nice of him, considering the grief we put him through today. Maybe he is not the writer.'
Dutch continued to look around the table, as she asked, “Did any of you just overhear what Lee said?”
Revy said, “Yea.”
Rock said, “Yes.”
Benny commented, “That is nice of him to still want to do things fair.”
Janet stated, “Perhaps we misjudged him.”
Dutch replied, “Perhaps we did.”
The five adults talked to each other, and their family and friends nearby. With them enjoying some karaoke, as well. While they informed the others of the details to the contest.
(_)
A little while later, it was just after seven PM, that evening, Lee had finally made it to the Last Resort Diner. Given the interest that the Lagoon family had suddenly taken in him, Lee took a long way around to get to the diner, to make sure he was not followed. Which he wasn't.
Given Lee's experiences in the time loop. He had long sent learned how to spot someone tailing him. And he had used some skills, when he felt he needed too.
After Lee parked his pink car, he walked inside, and he saw Pedro also sitting at their booth in the back right of the diner. Pedro was facing in the entrance to the diner. He was having a glass of ice and water.
Lee also noticed that Pedro was calmly looking at him. Though, Lee did not visually response to Pedro's calm gaze.
As Lee passed by Mary. He came to a stop, as turned to the women. He requested, “Hi Mary. I will just have a sweet tea tonight.”
Mary stopped, as she looked over at Lee. She said, “Coming right up, Lee.” She then turned, and went to get Lee a glass of iced sweet tea.
As this went on, Lee turned to Pedro, and he started back to walking towards the police chief of the city.
After Lee sat down in the booth, across from Pedro, he calmly said, “I sincerely apologize for standing you up last night. But, there was no choose. I had to hide in my room, and Sam was with me, so I could not call you, without him knowing we were working together.”
Pedro asked, whom spoke in a tone of voice that was more out of curiosity, than annoyance, “Considering the people you deal with on a daily basis, what could make you run and hide for the night?”
Lee answered, “Dutch, Benny, and Janet showed up, yesterday evening. In the front lobby, just as Sam and I had returned from the Rats Nest, with my car.”
Pedro agreed, in a straightforward tone of voice, “That is a good reason.”
Lee stated, “Luckily, while Sam and I were still in the parking lot, I saw them through the windows, as they had their reunion with their family. And they did not see me, nor Sam. I then convinces Sam to change our plans for the evening. And he then followed me around back of the hotel. We took the back elevators to my suite. And we ate in my room. With Sam then soon retiring to his own room for the night.”
Pedro said, “Okay. That wasn't too bad.”
Lee responded, “I know. Unfortunately, given my luck. Things got worse today. The three of them confronted me at lunch. They already suspect I was the writer. But, I was able to throw them off my scent... For now.”
Pedro inquired, “That is good. But, I have a feeling that is more to your story?”
Lee mentioned, “Yes. There is. At supper, less than an hour ago, I got suckered into judging a talent contest, with their whole crew being the contestants.”
Pedro sternly stated, “If it is a bikini contest, and you are trying recreate your own rendition of what you wrote in book one, I am turning you over to those women, myself.”
Lee swiftly said, “First, it was Revy's idea. Second, I talked them out of having a bikini contest. It is now a talent and singing contest, with no weapons, and no violence.”
Pedro considered what Lee said for a few seconds. He then agreed, “That could work.”
Lee mentioned, “Still, I am knowingly crossing the line twice on this matter. And we need a third judge. Sam is the second judge. And Melvin wisely talked himself out of being a judge, and he is instead the announcer. So, for the third judge, I was thinking of you.”
Pedro sarcastically asked, “And why would I willingly want to put my hand in such a meat grinder?”
Lee explained, “Because, this is the perfect opportunity to introduce yourself to them. I will say, I called the police chief, you, to come judge, because you, as far as they know, are impartial. And it is a good way to prevent things from getting out of hand.”
“If there is a battle, at the contest. We have no way of knowing how things might settle out. They might wreck hotel, but still stay in town. With them scattering, as they find new lodgings around town. At least, at the moment. Except for Eda and Yolanda. We have them all staying in one place. That hotel.”
Pedro replied, “You have a point there. Please, go on.”
Lee thought, 'With pleasure.' Lee went onto say, “For you. The situation will give you a good excuse to get a good, close up, look at these women, and take a measure of each of them, on their character... And body. Without them suspecting a thing. While, at the same time, you can give them good scores, and work on getting into their good graces.”
Pedro conceded, “Hmm... I can see the logic in your madness. Still, if I go, it is likely we are all going to end up dead, by the end of the contest.”
Lee smiled, as he commented, “We are being asked to judge one of the most badass, and sexiest, collections of women in the multiverse. If things go bad, can you think of a more awesome way to go?”
Pedro could not hide his smirk, as he admitted, “No.”
Lee said, “The contest is at seven PM, at the Devil's Hotel restaurant and bar. I will meet you outside the front of the entrance to the Devil's Hotel lobby, at six forty-five PM. If you can make that.”
Pedro replied, “I can make that.”
Lee inquired, “Good. So, how was your day?”
Pedro answered, “Fine for the most part. Though, I am getting rumblings that some group has come into town, whom could cause trouble. Though, I got nothing concrete yet, on who that are.”
Lee politely requested, “That troubles me. Could you please keep me in the loop.”
Pedro asked, “I will. Also, I was wondering. While, I know Janet is hot. I want to know how hot Benny and Dutch are as women?”
Lee stated, “Pretty hot. Like in the Boys and Girls omake, but better. Dutch pulls off her hotness quiet well. And even Benny is sexy. She is not as flat chested as I thought she would be. I think her pregnancy may have added a cup size to each of her breasts. Though, you will find out all this tomorrow.”
Pedro smiled, as he said, “I look forward to it.”
By then, Mary had come to give Lee his glass of sweet, iced tea. She then walked away, to serve her other customers.
Lee and Pedro then continued to have a casual conversation for the next half hour, before they said their goodbyes, paid for their drinks, including their tips, and then left for the evening.
Though, there was a little twilight left in the day, before dark.
(_)
As Lee and Pedro exited the Last Resort Diner, and they entered the parking lot of the diner, they split up, with both of them walking to their cars, and getting into their vehicles.
Pedro then started his car, exited the parking lot. Next, he drove away, down the road, as he headed for him home.
Meanwhile, Lee got into his car and started the engine, he sat there for a few minutes, while he thought about someone. He then said, out loud, “As a courtesy, I have to ask her.”
He then put the car in reverse, to get out of his parking space. He then put the vehicle in drive, and he drove his car to exit the parking lot, as he headed down the road, to his next location.
(_)
Ten minutes later, Lee parked his car in the Rats Nest parking lot, and he walked into the front entrance of the Rats Nest bar. It was busy at that time of night, but Lee was able to make it to the bar counter, without any serious problems.
As Lee did so, the bartender noticed him. She walked up to him, from behind the counter, as she asked, “What are you doing here so late?”
Lee stated, “At the moment, I am not here to buy anything. There is something you need to know. Revy and the girls decided to have a talent contest tomorrow evening, around seven. And since you are a beautiful woman, well...”
The bartender took the hint, as she said, “No. I am not going. I have no interest in competing with those lunatics. But, thank you for asking.”
Lee responded, “Okay. I just had to inform you. I did not want you to be insulted.”
The bartender commented, “I appreciate your concern for my feelings. I might have been insulted, if you did not at least offered me the invitation. But still, I wish you good luck in how you are caught up in this. Knowing your luck, I am sure they roped you into being one of the judges.”
Lee said, “You know me way too well.”
The bartender let out a laugh. She then stated, “See you later, Lee.”
Lee replied, “You too.”
Lee then headed out of the bar, and for his car. He then noticed that the sun had finally fallen passed the western horizon, and it was dark.
When Lee reached his car, he got into it, and he drove back to the hotel. So, he could go to bed early. Though, he would have go find Sam, and take him to a private location in the hotel, to let Sam know that that he was just too emotionally drained to watch karaoke, or to play poker tonight.
(_)
The next evening, directly outside of the Devil's Hotel.
It was six forty-five PM, and Lee was standing, alone, outside the front entrance to the hotel lobby, under the large awning. There was no one else outside, in the general vicinity with Lee.
Lee was in his usual clothing, blue cloth jacket, baseball cap, and glasses.
Lee looked at his watch. He then look at the road across the parking lot from him, and he saw a car pulled into the parking lot.
Lee immediately recognized it as Pedro personal car.
As Lee continued to watch Pedro drive his car further into the parking lot, as a reasonable speed, Lee thought, with a bit of amusement, 'Good. He is right on time.'
Lee soon saw Pedro had parked his car.
Pedro got out of his car, shut the drive side door, and was walking towards Lee.
As Pedro came closer, Lee saw Pedro looking back at him.
Lee thought, 'You likely saw me when you turned into the parking lot.'
Lee then took a closer look at what Pedro was wearing his white button up shirt, brown tie, brown pants, brown leather belt, black boots, and his brown long coat. Though, he not wearing his hat, nor sunglasses.
Lee thought, 'So, Pedro. You want to humanize your first impression with the women here. That is an intelligent move on your part.'
When Pedro reach him, under the awning, Pedro came to a stop, six feet from Lee.
Lee stated, “Good to have you come.”
Pedro said, in english, “I am glad to be here. As I was coming here, I got to thinking. And I have a question you might be able to answer. Why do all hot women seem to be so damn crazy?”
Lee responded, “I figured it is some sort of cosmic balance thing. Where if the hot women were not crazy, they would be ruling the world. Now, don't get me wrong, some of the crazy one's might try to take over the world. But, there is a big difference between taking over the world, and ruling it.”
Pedro replied, “I guess that makes sense.”
Lee said, “Come on. Let's go inside. We both admit they are crazy. And it is not a good idea to keep crazy people waiting you.”
Pedro stated, “Good point.”
Lee commented, “Anyway, everything has been set up. The girls are in their outfits, in the hotel restaurant, by the stage. Melvin is by the stage, and Sam is sitting at our table.”
Lee thought, 'I even already figured out how I would score them. And I think I struck a good balance, between natural beauty, appearance of clothing, and talent, that the girls will like.'
Pedro replied, “Okay. How are we going to judge this?”
Lee stated, “Score, one through ten. Ten being the best. There is a pen and paper for you to write down your scores. We have the names already printed on sheet of paper. Also, there are laminated boards, with erasable black markers to hold us. The rag by the board is used to wipe off the previous score.”
Lee thought, 'I am so happy that this afternoon, Sam and I checked with Melvin, on this matter. And Melvin handled the supplies for us.'
Pedro inquired, “I understand. So, how did these women decide what order to go in?”
Lee answered, “From what I was told by Violin, they drew random lots from a hat.” He thought, 'And Violin was helpful in information us of their performance order, at lunch, here at the hotel restaurant. From what I understand. The women decided the order from pulling lots from a hat. A bit cliché. But, it works.'
Pedro replied, “Okay. And how many are we judging?”
Lee answered, “Counting Dutch, Benny, Janet, Eda, and Yolanda. Along with the rest of them. The number is twenty-three women.”
Pedro commented, “That is quite a lot of chances for trouble.”
Lee replied, “I agree.”
Pedro asked, “Did anyone else get asked to come to this little insanity waiting to happen?”
Lee thought, 'I might as well tell him.' He said, “Yes. Given I know her. I did ask the bartender at the Rats Nest, to join the contest. Though, from her response, she clearly knew better, and declined.”
Pedro commented, “Of all the hot women I know, she is probably one of the sanest.”
Lee replied, “That we agree on.”
Pedro said, “I even heard about that dance routine she pulled with some guy in a gray suit, at the hotel here, during the Day of the Dead dance party. I wonder which guy was lucky enough to get her into a dress and go dancing?”
Lee could not help but smirk, in response to Pedro's comment.
Pedro noticed Lee's smirk. He put two and two together, as he accused, “It was you.”
Lee continued to smile, as he said, “Yea. And she is a great woman. Though, we did not sleep together. We did have a great time together that day. Also, except for the bartender, no one else knows that it was me at that dance. So, keep that under your hat.”
Pedro stated, “I will do so.”
Lee dropped his smile, as he mentioned, “Thank you. Also, a reminder. Most of these women have enhance hearing. And not just the ones with the super-soldier serum.”
“Remember, Aeryn is an alien with enhanced senses. And Violin is half alien. And I am sure she has good hearing, as well.
“Also, these women are sharp in many ways. So, do not say any injokes. Say nothing that they might pick up on. On that matter, do not. I repeat, do not state their names. Since you have no been formally introduced to them, you should not know their names. To do so would immediately give us both always. Then, it would be all over.”
Pedro responded, “Those are good points.” He mentally added, 'Damn. When Lee is on the ball. He is on the ball.'
Lee commented, “Though, once this contest is over, you will officially know there names. So, there will be no problem on that matter, after tonight.”
Pedro said, “That is a good point, as well.”
Lee stated, “I know. Also, I almost forget. I know Melvin is your friend. But, along with everyone else, no one knows that we talk to each other a lot. So, pretend that I just asked you at the police station to come.”
Pedro stated, “I see where you are coming from. I remember what you said last night, on the matter. And I will keep that in mind.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
A thought them occurred to Pedro, as he asked, “On a related matter. As crazy as it sounds. Does this situation, we have found ourselves in, for the last few months, feel like a twisted spy thriller to you?”
Lee flatly said, “All the damn time.”
Lee thought, 'Though, with the time loop, it has been more like decades to me.'
Lee commented, “Now, let's get inside.”
Both men then entered the entryway of the lobby. With Lee opening the left door to them, for Pedro.
Pedro stated, “Thanks.”
Pedro then walked into the entryway, with Lee following behind him, while Lee let the door he had open close behind him, by itself.
When Pedro reached the doors from the entryway, to the front lobby, Pedro held the right door open for Lee.
Lee said, “Thank you.”
Lee then walked into the front lobby. Pedro walked into the front lobby, behind Lee, with him letting the door close on its own.
As the entered the lobby together, the lobby speakers changed to the nineteen eighty-six rock song, Tonight, Tonight, Tonight, by Genesis.
But, given the both men were in a hurry. They did not pay attention to the musical change.
Instead, both men turned to their left, as they continued talking towards the hotel restaurant.
(_)
A minute later, both men walked into the hotel restaurant. Lee walked beside Pedro, to Pedro's left side.
As the two men casually walked further into the room, Lee looked around, and he saw a number of things.
First, he saw Revy, Rock, and their crew, wearing nice clothing. The group of contestants, were sitting in the chairs, at the tables, on the other side of the bar, to the left of the stage,. Some of them even had a few instruments, and other things, with them. Either by their side, or on various tables beside him.
Though, Lee saw that none of the women had weapons on them.
Lee thought, 'Good. They took the no weapons rule seriously. That is a good sign for this contests.'
Lee then turned to look at the how the lighting had been set up around the stage. Which was slightly brighter than the rest of the room, but not to bright. Also, the rest of the room lights had dimmed a bit for the contest.
Lee realized, 'The lights must be on dimmer switches. I did not know that. I guess there are some things I missed in the time loop. And I guess the lighting outside of the stage, is twenty-five percent less than normal. Still, plenty of light to see with, but dim enough to get the lighting effect for performances on stage.'
Next, Lee looked in front of the stage, to see a small rectangular table, parallel with the stage. The table was set ten feet back from the stage, with nothing between the stage and the table. There where three cushioned, armless chairs, set in a row, at the table, with the chairs facing the stage, from across the table.
Lee was what was on the table.
Lee thought, 'This is the table for the three judges. Sam, Pedro, and I. With the pens, markers, papers, cloth rags for the marker boards, and other items, we need for the contest. There is even a pitcher of ice water, and four glasses sit out for us. Sam, Pedro, Melvin, and myself. I am sure that Melvin will get thirsty, as he acts at the announcer... Or, more aptly, ring master to this full blown circus.'
Lee then focused on Sam, whom was already seated at the table, to the far left. And even from behind, Lee could see that Sam was wearing his usual clothing.
Behind the judges table, opposite to the stage, was where the rest of the tables and chairs were place at, for the audience. And there was a mix of other customers, whom heard about the contest, and had already arrive, and sat at the tables, while they patiently waited for the contest to begin.
Lee thought, 'From what I heard on the grapevine, from Melvin. Is that the rest of the customers just consider this talent contest to be just a form of dinner entertainment, on a special occasion, to watch. They don't realize how dangerous this situation could be come.'
'And as much as I want to warn them, I cannot. If, or Melvin, warned them, either one of us, would likely ruin the night for the girls, and blow are cover towards them.'
'As such, I hope things turn out alright. Because, if things head south, I am get out of the hotel, as quickly as possible. Until things calm down, by tomorrow morning.'
Lee then noticed, that even though the bar was closed, there were waitresses taking orders from the customers.
Lee thought, 'Given the hotel is hosting them. I cannot hold it against them to make a buck off of this contest.'
Lee then saw Melvin, in a nice tuxedo, approaching them.
Lee thought, while being impressed, 'Damn. Melvin looks good. To bad I cannot break out one of my suits. But, then the girls would recognize me, as they put it, mister dance. And doing so, would raise too many question for me, from them.'
When Melvin reached Lee and Pedro. The three men stopped walking, as they faced each other.
Melvin look over at Lee, then Pedro, then back Lee. He stated, “So, this is the third judge. Nice choice.”
Pedro said, “Hi Melvin.”
Melvin replied, “Hi Pedro.” He then turned to Lee, as he questioned, “Lee, I didn't know you knew Pedro?”
Lee thought, 'Oh hell. My secretive nature has finally come back to potentially bite me in the ass.'
'I forget to tell Pedro a few things about this situation. Such as, that while I know Pedro and Melvin are friends. And that Pedro knows Melvin was in the Black Lagoon series. I forgot to remind Pedro that Melvin does not know that he knows this.'
'Also, Melvin doesn't know that I know about the Black Lagoon series. And we are surrounded by the girls, with a number of them having enhanced hearing.'
'And while, I do not mind Melvin knowing my connection to Pedro. I don't want the girls to know this. As such, this is a dangerous conversation, no matter how someone looks at it. I have got to change the subject, fast.'
Lee said, “Gentlemen, this is a discussion for another time. And it would be unwise to keep these women waiting.”
Pedro thought, 'Because you know the girls will overhear us. Good thinking, Lee.' Pedro looked at both Lee and Melvin, as he agreed, “Quite right.”
Melvin thought, 'Good point, Lee. The women can overhear us.'
Melvin said, “If you both will come this way, your seats and table are already prepared.”
Melvin then turned around, as the three men headed to the judges table, and the stage.
Half a minute later, Lee sat down in the middle chair of the judged table, with Pedro sitting down in the chair to his right side, and Sam was in the chair to his left side.
Melvin stood on the floor, between the stage, and the judges table, with a wireless microphone in his right hand.
All four glasses at the table, were filled. With one set in front of each of the judges. And the last glass sit on the other side, near Melvin.
Also, the judges had their pens, paper, marker, small marker board, and rags, ready for the contest.
Lee thought, 'Melvin is smart to not to want to share a stage with them. In his place, as the announcer, I would not want be on that stage, either.'
(_)
Nearby, on the left, back side of the room, at their tables, many of the women sitting at the tables, had noticed Pedro. Including, Revy. With Revy being the first to ask, “Who is the new guy with Lee, Sam, and Melvin?”
Yolanda answered, “I do not know.”
Eda said, “Me neither. Though, he has come to the food truck, on occasion. And he was nice to us, and we were nice to him.”
Rock suggested, “Perhaps we should find out, before the contest beginnings.”
Revy said, “Good idea.” She then stood up. She turn towards the direction of the judges table, as she yelled, “Hey! Who is the new guy?!”
Rock groaned, as she quietly said, “In a more dignified fashion.”
There were snickers among their group, from those that heard Rock's comment.
(_)
Meanwhile, across the room, the four men near the stage, overheard Revy's comment. And they turned their attention towards the group of women.
Pedro thought, 'I might as well get this over with.' He got up from his chair and turned to face the ladies.
Pedro firmly stated, in a calm manner, in english, with enough strength in his voice to carry over the room, but not enough to be a yell, “I am Pedro Del Soto, the chief of police for the city of De La Plata Podrido.”
Pedro turned to Lee. He then turned back to look at the women, as he lied, “Lee here, came to me, at the police station, and he asked if I was willing to be the judge for the contest, and to help keep things peaceful. I said, yes. And I consider it an honor to asked to be a judge for this contest.”
Rock thought, with concern, 'He is the police chief of the city.'
Eda muttered, “I am glad I was nice to him.”
Dutch mentioned, “So, Lee knows the police chief.”
Lotton stated, “Also, the first night we were here, Melvin mentioned knowing the police chief, as well. That was after he took Revy's pistols away from her hands, pinned her to the bar counter, and held a combat knife to her left eye, while threatening her life.”
Dutch, Benny, and Janet all looked over at Lotton, with surprised expressions on their faces.
Dutch forced herself to calm down, as she looked back at Rock and Revy, whom were looking at Lotton. She thought, 'I see those two have not told use everything that has gone on, during their stay on this island. I will have to ask them about that, later.' She turned to Lotton, as she continued her thoughts, 'Though, I would like to heard what Lotton has to say on this matter.
Janet made herself calm down, as she questioned, “And he is still breathing?”
Lotton turned to Janet, as she said, “I will tell you, later. But, the short answer is that there are a lot of badasses in this city, whom would just prefer not to fight.”
Dutch said, “We heard.”
By then, Benny had calmed down, as she commented, “Rock and Revy said the same thing. But, we will get the full story on Melvin, later.”
Lotton replied, “I look forward to telling you.”
Meanwhile, Revy was still standing. The redhead turned to look at Lee, whom was sitting across the room, as he was looking at her.
Revy stated, “Lee, you brought cops here.”
This caused all the women to turn their attention back towards the judges.
Lee continued to look in Revy's direction, as he casually shrugged. He replied, “Just one. To keep things honest.”
Everyone else laughed, as Revy rolled her eyes for a few seconds.
Revy then sat back down in her chair, as she stared at the judges, in silence.
Across the room, Pedro sat back in his chair, as well.
Everyone then turned their attention to Melvin. With them waiting for him to announce the start of the contest.
Just then, a waitress walked up to the judges table, to take their drink order.
With Melvin standing nearby, the waitress asked, “What will you four men have to drink?”
Lee thought, 'They water must be just in case we don't want anything else to drink. And I do need to remind these men of something.'
Lee suggested, “I suggest we stay sober gentlemen, so our judgments are not question.”
Sam said, “I agree.”
Pedro thought, 'Good idea. Also, I don't want to be drunk if things go to hell.' He said, “Good idea, Lee.”
Melvin overheard the three men next to him. Move his microphone away from his face, as he turned to look at the judges. He stated, “The last things we need to do is get drunk in this situation. So, I will take a glass of lemonade.”
Lee said, “I will also have a glass of lemonade.”
Pedro ordered, “Coffee for myself.”
Sam requested, “I will just have the water I already have.”
As the waitress left, Lee then looked at his digital wrist watch, it was seven PM on the dot.
Lee looked over at Melvin, whom was staring back at him.
Lee whispered, “It's time.”
Melvin nodded once in acknowledge to Lee's comment.
Melvin then held the microphone in his right hand, to his mouth, as he tested his microphone. He said, in english, “Testing. Testing.” And he heard the speakers work.
Just then, Pedro realized, in thought, 'Oh hell. Lee never stated how we will score the women. This is a talent show, not a straight out talent contest.'
Pedro turned to Lee, as he whispered, “How are we going to score these contestants?”
Lee thought, with mild annoyance, 'I knew I forget to do something.' He turned to Pedro, as he said, “Don't worry. I have an idea.”
Lee turned to Melvin, as he requested, “Can I borrow you microphone for a few seconds.”
Melvin replied, “Sure.”
Melvin handed Lee his microphone.
With the microphone in his left hand, Lee looked over at the women. He stated, into the microphone, “Okay ladies. Here is how the scoring is going to work. One time walk in, you perform your talent, whatever. Talent counts for fifty percent. Dress is thirty percent. Looks count for twenty percent. Does that work for everyone?”
Lee thought, 'That should keep the less sexy, though no less beautiful women, in the contest, happy. And it keeps things fair.'
Lee looked around him, he saw the ladies all nodding, along with Sam, Pedro, and Melvin.
Lee continued his thoughts, 'I see I was correct.'
(_)
At the table, left of the stage, Sawyer thought, 'Now, that is a fair judgment. That gives those of us, like myself, whom are not the most stacked, a good chance at winning.'
Nearby, Benny and Lotton were sitting near each other. Lotton commented, “Looks like we got a chance in this contest, Benny.”
Benny smiled, as she happily replied, “I agree.”
(_)
Lee then realized something. He looked behind him, and at the crowd. He suspicions were confirmed. He turned back to the women, across the room, to his left, as he stated, into the microphone, “Also ladies, there are a few children in this crowd. So, let us keep this clean.”
Lee could see some mild disappointment in a few of their faces, but they seem to react with understanding.
Lee thought, “Good. They realize what I am asking of them is reasonable. Now, to give this microphone back to Melvin. And we can finally start this circus of insanity.'
Lee then handed the microphone back to Melvin.
Just after Melvin received the microphone in his right hand, the waitress, whom took their orders, came back. She used a tray to bring them their drinks. She then set the drinks on the table, for those whom orders them.
A few seconds later, as the waitress left, Melvin took a sip of his lemonade, with his left hand. As he held his microphone with his right hand. He then sat it down at the corner of the table, across from Pedro.
Melvin then pulled out a small sheet, from his left outside coat side pocket, with his left hand.
He then looked at it. Next, he turned to this audience, as he said, in english, into the microphone, “Ladies and Gentlemen, I present to you tonight's entertainment. Which will be a talent contest between these gorgeous women to my right. I hope you enjoy it. And our first contestant is, Dutch.”
Dutch got up from her seat, as she carried a musical instrument with her.
When Dutch got to the stage, those in front of the stage, including Melvin, the judges, and the crowd, saw she wore a green bikini top, green light cloth, drawstring pants, and green flat sole slippers. Also, she was carrying a guitar.
As Pedro looked at the young, sexy, black women, he thought, 'So, this is Dutch. As a women. She does look nice. And with short brown dreadlocks, and the clothing she has on, that is a simple but nice look for her.
(_)
On stage, Dutch carried her guitar in her right hand, as she walked over to the corner of the stage, by the karaoke machine. She picked up a wireless microphone on it, on top the karaoke machine, and a stand for the microphone, that was by the corner of the stage.
As Dutch walked back to the center of the stage, she thought, 'It is surprising the things one will learn, when rich, to solve one's boredom. Not that I am complaining. I am glad I learned to play the guitar. And I have always liked this song. It somehow speaks to me.'
Dutch set the stand in the front, middle of the stage. She then inserted the microphone in the holder, at the top of the stand. With the microphone facing her.
Dutch then stood, as she got her guitar in position. When she was ready, she stated, “I am not going to use the karaoke machine. Instead, I am just going to play this song completely by myself.”
Dutch stood in place, as she started playing a guitar rendition of the song, Ghost Riders in the Sky, she soon began singing the lyrics, with her feminine voice.
And she sang the, Ghost Riders in the Sky, song, well, on key, and in tune.
After Dutch finished her song, the crowd applauded her. And she smiled in response.
As the applause ended, Dutch looked down at the score boards the judges held up for her. They judges turned the boards around so the audience, could see the scores as well.
Sam used his pen to write the score he made for Dutch, on his piece of paper. He then used his marker on his marker board. He then held up marker board for Dutch to see. He then turned around board around for the audience to see.
Meanwhile, Lee and Pedro used their pens to write down on their papers, Sam's score for Dutch.
Sam gave Dutch a seven.
Sam then lowed his board.
Sam turned to Dutch, as he commented, “Nice song.”
Sam then use his rag to wipe it off.
Pedro wrote down his score on his piece of paper. He then wrote down his score on the marker board. He held up the board, first for Dutch to see. Then, he turned the board, for the audience to see.
Lee and Sam used their pieces of paper to write down Pedro's score.
Pedro also gave Dutch a seven.
Pedro lowered his board. He turned to Dutch, as he said, “I believe you did a good job. Though, not a great job.”
Pedro then used the rag to erase his score form his board.
Lee wrote down the score he would give Dutch. He then wrote down the same score on his marker board. He held up the board. First, for Dutch to see. Then, he turned it around for the audience to see.
Sam and Pedro wrote down Lee's score for Dutch, on their pieces of paper.
Lee gave Dutch an eight.
Lee set his marker board down.
Lee turned to Dutch, as he stated, “You did a fine performance. And set a good standard for the rest of the contest.
Lee then used his rag to wipe off his marker board.
Dutch thought, 'That is a fair, respectable score.' She said, “Thank you.”
She returned the stand where it was, in the corner, with the microphone she had use, still being in the stand. She then left, with the guitar in her right hand.
Melvin looked at the list in his left hand. He then turned to the audience, as he stated, in his microphone, as he said, “Let us thank Dutch for that wonderful performance. A great way to kick off this contest. Our next contestant is Ranma.”
Lee looked over at the tables that we left of the stage, he saw not only Ranma stand up, but also Akira and Natsuru stand up.
Lee thought, 'What is going on?'
Ranma asked, “I was wondering. Since it is not against the rules, could I, along with Akira, and Natsuru, perform together for the same score for each of us, at the same time?”
Lee thought, 'Damn. I did not include a, only one person at a time, in the rules. Let's see what the others think.'
Lee looked at Sam, whom just shrugged.
Lee looked at Pedro, whom said, “It's okay with me.”
Lee then looked at Melvin, whom, “Whatever you want to do?”
Lee turned to Ranma, as he said, “Okay. You are allowed to perform, together. But, you will all get the same score. If you three get the winning score, it will be a tie, and you will just to share the prize. We will not be having any run off contests.” He thought, 'With this crew, that is just asking for trouble.'
Ranma cracked a smile, as she replied, “We can live with that.”
Melvin overheard, as he stated, “The judges have decided to let Ranma, Natsuru, and Akira will perform together, at one time. The redhead is Ranma. The blond is Akira. And the blue haired woman is Natsuru.”
Melvin turned to look at Pedro, whom was looking at the women. Melvin thought, 'Just so you know which one is which, Pedro.'
As the three women walked up on stage, those of the crowd saw that all three women were each wearing sundresses and flat slippers that match their hair colors.
All three walked to over to the karaoke machine. Each picked up a wireless microphone. Natsuru then set the karaoke machine, with all three women swiftly, though gracefully walked together, to the front, middle of the stage.
Ranma was in the center, with Akira to her right, and Natsuru to her left.
The karaoke version of the Fire Incorporated version of the rock song, Nowhere Fast, with Ranma as the main vocal singer. And Akira and Natsuru where the back up vocals.
The three women sang in key, in sync, and in tune with each other, and the music.
Pedro and Lee looked at each other. Pedro silently mouthed, “Streets of Fire movie?”
Lee just shrugged both his shoulders, in an, I don't know, position.
Both men then turned back to watching the trio continued singing.
While everyone in the room watched the performance, Lee thought, 'It figures that Ranma would take lead, considering she has singing skills. The Christmas party OVA, along the endings and openings to the OVAs proved that. In my writings, I just took the next logical step in her skills. Also, Akira, and Natsuru are doing pretty good, as well.'
The three women continued to do a wonderful job of singing the song, Nowhere Fast.
When the three lovers finished singing. The crowd applauded them.
Pedro gave them all an eight. He complimented, “I can tell that you guys worked hard on this. And I admire that.”
Lee gave them all a seven. He said, “Good form and talent. But, I was expecting more from you.”
Sam gave them all a five, as he calmly said, “Sorry. I just was not feeling song. But, when it came to teamwork, all three of you did do a good job.”
The trio silently bowed, returned their microphones where they found them. They then left the stage, so they could go sit back down in their seats.
Melvin stated, into his microphone, “Okay. That was a fine performance by Ranma, Natsuru, and Akira. Next up is Shenhua.”
Shenhua calming got up, and walked up onto the stage.
Shenhua wore an embroidered, white qipao, which was more elegantly than the red qipao she usually wears. Along with this, she wore flat white slippers, instead of her usual high-heels.
Shenhua looked down at the judges, as she stated, “I am going to perform a Taiwanese folk dance.”
Shenhua then walked over and set the karaoke machine to place some relaxing, Chinese style music.
Shenhua made it back to the center of the stage, and as the music started. She then began dancing.
Her dance was gracefully and fluid.
Her dance lasted close to five minutes. As the music came to an end, she stopped dancing.
She turned to the crowded, and did a simple bow.
The audience clapped at her performance, for a few seconds.
As the applause ended, Shenhua looked at the judges to see their scores.
Pedro silently gave her an eight, as he thought, 'I have no interest on getting on this woman's bad side. Nor, the rest of them for that matter.'
Lee gave her a seven, as he stated, “That was flawless, and graceful, as what I would expect from a lady such as yourself. But, I have seen you when drunk, and you performance just now lacked the passion that I was expecting from you.”
Sam gave her a six, as he said, “Lee is right. You could have done better.”
Shenhua just shrugged. She then turned to her right side, and walked back off stage.
Melvin stated into his microphone, “And our next contestant is, Benny.”
Benny got up, and she walked onto the stage, and over to the karaoke machine.
Everyone saw that Benny was wearing black balloon pants, yellow tennis shoes, and a yellow crop top, with a yellow sports bra underneath. She had her head in her usual ponytail
Lee thought, 'I guess she is going for more talent, than looks. Not that I mind. I wonder what she is about to do.'
A second later, some funk music began, and Benny starting break dancing.
Lee held back a laugh, as he mentally reflected, in thought, 'This I was not expecting. But, I like it.'
Benny then did a number of head spins, flips, and other movements, with flawless ability.
Lee thought, 'I am glad to see Benny make used of her enhanced physical abilities, from that super-soldier serum I gave her.'
When the music came to a stop, she immediately jumped back to her feet, with her facing the judges, and the crowd.
Benny smiled, as the crowd applauded her.
Lee gave her an eight. He stated, “Good job.”
Sam gave her a six. He said, “You movements are flawless. But, it is clear that you have no done them in a while. Also, you needed to better organize your movements.
Pedro gave her a six, as well. He commented, “Sam is right. You got the skills. You just need more practice.”
Benny did not respond. Instead, she turned and walked off stage.
(_)
When Benny got back to her seat, she sat down in his chair.
Nearby, Violin turned to Benny, as she asked, “Where did you learn to do that?”
Benny looked over at Violin, as she answered, “I was in college during the eighties. I did some break dancing, as a hobby with my friends. And Sam and the Police Chief, are right. I should have practiced and organized my moves better.”
Violin said, “Well, that just means there is room for improvement.”
Benny replied, “Thank you.”
(_)
Meanwhile, in front of the stage, Melvin stated, “Next up is Kristina.”
Kristina got up from her chair, and walked up onto stage.
In her right hand Kristina was holding a harmonic.
While Kristina went to get the stand with the microphone, the judges saw she was wearing a tanned long skirt, with a tanned long sleeved blouse, with tanned slippers. The clothing looked like a woman's style from the seventies. The tanned color clothing was lighter than her skin tone, but darker than her brown dreadlocks, which were pulled back into a ponytail. With the tanned color going well with both her skin tone and hair color.
Lee thought, 'Most people don't realize that, in this day and age, beauty does not have to show off a lot of skin. One can present oneself as beautiful, while maintaining modesty. I guess this modest trait is a carryover from when she was Claude, in her previous life.'
As soon as Kristina brought the stand to the middle, front of the stage, she starting playing her harmonic. While she stood in place, she played a piece of blues music. It was sad, but beautiful.
When Kristina was finished, the audience clapped.
Kristina looking down at the judges.
Sam gave her an eight. He complimented, “That music has soul to it.”
Pedro gave her a second. He stated, “I could feel the music.”
Lee gave her a six. Lee said, “You have skill. I hope to listen to your music sometime in the future. But, you need just stood there. Sam is right. You have soul in that music. And Pedro is right. I could feel the music. But, the blues is also about body, as well as soul. And you lacked movement. That cost you points.”
Kristina was silent for a few seconds. She then shrugged, as she agreed, “You right. I was so focused on playing that I forget to move with the beat.”
Kristina then picked up the stand, one handed, returned it to its place, and walked off the stage.
Melvin looked at his sheet of paper. He then stated, “Well, ladies and gentlemen, next up is Nodoka.”
Nodoka stood up from her seat. She turned to the judges, as she stated, “I have a request. I talked it over with my friends here. And we would like it if I, and my two sisters, can go one after another. Our talents would be best showed back to back.”
Lee stated, “Since you girls picked the order, that will be fine with us. But, this performance will not scored differently. You will each be judged solely by your own performance.”
Nodoka said, “Thank you. That will be fine. I will go first. The Mikoto, then Yurika.” She then walked up stage, and picked up a microphone.
Everyone saw that Nodoka was dressed in denim shorts, t-shirts, with a sports bra underneath, and tennis shoes. All of her clothing matched her purple hair.
Meanwhile, Melvin stated, into his microphone, “Well, it looks like there will be a slight schedule change. We are going to have three sisters coming onto the stage. One after another. First, Nodoka. Then, Mikoto. And finally, Yurika.”
Melvin then set his microphone on the table. Next, he pulled out a pin, and marked off Mikoto and Yurika from the list. So, he would not accidentally call their names later. After which, Melvin put away his pen, and picked up his microphone with his right hand.
(_)
After Nodoka walked back to the center of the stage to with the microphone, she stated, “My sisters and I have decided to show off some of our martial arts abilities, as our talent. And to keep things from becoming boring. Each of us will show a different style of martial arts. Though, we are masters of all three styles that are about to be shown to you. Please enjoy.”
Nodoka walked over and returned to microphone back by the kerokeo machine. Nodoka then walked to the back to the end of the stage, by the wall, in the middle of the stage, with her facing the audience.
Nodoka took a few deep breaths, and then let them out. One after another. She then started her kata. Which consisted of doing lots of acrobatics, flips, mid-air kicks, and butterfly kicks. And she always either landed on her feet, or her hands, while displaying much grace and skill in her performance.
After a few minutes she stopped her kata, and turned to face the crowd.
The crowd applauded her.
Nodoka then looked down at the judges, for her score.
Sam gave her a nine.
Pedro gave her a seven.
Lee gave her an eight. He said, “That was petty good. I looking forward to seeing what your sisters can do.”
Nodoka smiled. She then left the stage.
Melvin stated, into his microphone, “Next up is, Mikoto.”
Mikoto same on stage, she wore the same clothing at her sister, Nodoka, wore. Except her clothing was blue, with a few black stripes mixed in, to match her mixed hair color.
Mikoto perform a slow, graceful kata, that was mixed with swift, fluid movements, as she moved across the stage.
When Mikoto finished a few minutes after she began, the audience clapped for a few seconds.
Afterward, Mikoto look down at the judges.
Pedro gave her an eight. He stated, “It is nice when someone respects the basics.”
Lee gave an eight as well. He said, “I am sure that took as much practice to master, as the acrobatics your sister just pulled off. You earned this eight.”
Sam gave her a six. He commented, “I apologize. But, I honestly found the performance to tame for my tastes.”
Mikoto did not respond, as she turned and walked off stage.
Melvin then announced, into his microphone, “Next up, we have Yurika.”
Yurika then walked on stage. Those watching saw that she wore the same style of clothing as her two sisters, except her clothing was green, to match her hair color.
When she made it to the center of the stage, Yurika began her kata. Everyone could see that Yurika's kata was much more aggressive than the katas her two sisters had just performed.
While Nodoka's kata was aerial in nature. And Mikoto's kata was direct in nature. Yurika's kata was focused on lower level combat, as moving around.
Lee could see that Yurika's kata was likely of the same family of the fighting arts as capoeira. With her use of handstands, while kicks, while at the same time focusing on low sweeping kicks, somersaults, flips, side roles and a few cartwheels. This was mixed with leg sweeps, hand strikes. With most of these attacks designed to hit below the waist, and mostly attack the legs.
Lee thought, 'This looks like it is inspired by capoeira. I wonder if Fabiola had a hand in teaching these sisters some of the moves they just displayed for us. Especially, the moves I am seeing Yurika is performing, now. And she is good at it.'
As Yurika continued her kata, everyone could see that her movements were far better organized, and choreographed than Benny's break dancing.
Also, Yurika never lost her balance, nor fell on the floor.
A few minutes later, Yurika came to a slow stop, with her ending with standing on her feet, while she faced the audience.
The audience applauded her for a few more seconds than either of her two sisters got.
As the crowd quieted down, Yurika looked at the judges.
Pedro gave her a seven. He stated, “You, and your two sisters, performed marvelously. And Nodoka was right. It was better for you three to perform, back to back, in that order.”
Yurika responded, “Thank you for letting us do so.”
Pedro replied, “Thank, Lee.”
Yurika turned to Lee, and she saw that he had give her a seven. He said, “Pedro is correct. You three did a great job. And you're welcome.”
Yurika looked over to see Sam gave her a nine. Sam stated, “Your performance proves how proper organization of movements can bring out a good performance. Good job.”
Yurika smiled at all three judges. She then turned and left the stage.
Melvin said, into his microphone, “Our next performer is, Rock.”
Rock walked up on stage, picked up microphone, set the karaoke machine, and walked to the center of the stage.
As the music started, and Rock starting singing the lyrics.
Lee recognized the song as the karaoke version of David Bowie's China Girl.
But, instead of Rock facing the judges and the crowd, shed face her friends. And she was doing a great job of singing the song.
Revy could see that Rock was looking directly at her.
Revy just giggled, at Rock's romantic gesture.
Revy thought, 'It is not every day that someone blows a performance for me. I will have to thank Rock for doing this for me. Tonight, when we got to bed. And I just know how to do it.'
Meanwhile, on stage, as Rock sang, she thought, 'There is no way I am winning this contest. So, I am just going use this opportunity to win points in bed tonight with Revy.'
As the music ended, and Rock finished the song, she turned to the judges, and the crowd.
The crowd clapped, for a few seconds.
Lee gave Rock a six. He firmly said, “We both know who that was for. And I am giving this score for doing such a marvelous job. If you had been singing for us and the crowd, it would have been higher score.”
Pedro also gave Rock a seven. He thought, 'So, this is Rock. The breast reduction in book three did help her over all figure. And she is hot. Still, she was not performing to win, but for romance towards Revy. Too bad I don't officially know they are a couple. Or, I would compliment Rock for her romantic gesture. Still, it is a kind gesture.'
Pedro said, “Good performance. I feel whomever you directed that too will be very happy tonight.”
Rock responded, “That is what I am hoping for.”
Sam gave Rock an eight. He said, “I am a sucker for romantics.”
Rock smiled at the judges, as she thought, 'I got a better score than I was expecting. And I wasn't even trying to win. Nice.'
Rock then turned and walked off stage.
When Rock reached her table, and sat down in her chair, by Revy, Revy turned to her, as she said, “Nice performance. And I promise to give you a performance in bed to night.”
Rock turned to her lover, as she replied, “Thanks, Revy.”
In front of the stage, while facing the judges, and the crowd, Melvin stated, “Our next contestant is, Yolanda.” He mentally added, 'I wonder what we will see her do. That woman was always cagey in Roanapur. Even Balalaika could not figure her out.'
Yolanda got up from her seat, and she walked on stage, to the microphone and karaoke machine.
As Yolanda walked across the stage, everyone saw that Yolanda wore a flattering black dress that looking more like it fit in the nineteen forties. But, she pulled it off well.
After Yolanda walked back to the front of the stage, while facing the crowd, she calmly said, into her microphone, “They say guilt pleasures come in many ways. But, I found this song actually speaks to me.”
The music then start. And Yolanda started singing in spanish, to the lyrics.
Lee recognized the song as being the spanish version of the Ricky Martin song, Livin' the Crazy Life, which was Livin' la Vida Loca.
Lee thought, 'Okay. Her song selection is a bit of a surprise. Though, Yolanda is doing a great job. And given her life, I can see why she feels that particular song speaks to her.'
'And given her skills, and that she had the latin American, Rico, working for her, it is no surprise that she knows spanish, very well. It is too bad I cannot compliment her for her spanish language skills. Given I don't want anyone to know that I can speak spanish.'
Yolanda swayed her body back at forth, with the music as she did a great job singing the song she had chosen to perform.
When Yolanda finished the song, the crowd applauded.
Yolanda still turned to the judges.
Pedro gave her an eight. He complimented, “Your spanish is flawless. And we like to see the use of multiple talents at once. And you did that by using your talents in both your language skills, and singing skills. Also, you swayed with the beat.”
Lee gave her a nine. He stated, “This is what we are looking for. Passion, and talent, in a performance.”
Sam gave her an eight. He commented, “I am with them on this. You did a good job.”
Yolanda smiled at them, as she said, in english, “Thank you.” She then turned to her side, and returned the microphone to it's place.
Yolanda walked off the stage, as she happily thought, 'I still got it.'
Melvin announced, into his microphone, “Next is, Sarah.
Sarah came on stage. Everyone saw that she wore a simple yellow kimono, which matched her blond hair. The kimono, she wore a black sash, and wooden saddles,
Sarah then began silently performing the internal chinese martial art of Qigong
As Lee looked at this, with mild amusement, he thought, 'A modern samurai, reincarnate as the child of a hindi Indian and caucasian American jew, practicing the chinese martial art of Qigong.'
'I can understand why she would know this style. This martial art is all about learning to master ones attention, and personal energy, in direct, fluidic ways. Which is probably very useful in learning how to safely cut bullets in half, in mid-flight, with her katana.'
A few minutes later, Sarah finished her performance.
There were a few claps from the crowd, but not many.
Sarah turned to the judges.
Lee gave her a seven. He said, “That was... Interesting. And I feel you did a good job.”
Sam gave Sarah a seven as well, while he remained silent.
Pedro gave her a six. He commented, “I wanted to like your performance. I really did. But, I just could not bring myself to do so.”
Sarah just shrugged. She then walked off stage.
Melvin stated, into his microphone, “The next contestant is, Yukio.'
Yukio were a yellow long skirt, a yellow midriff shirt, with yellow flat soled slippers.
Yukio retrieved a microphone, set the karaoke machine, and walked to the center of the stage.
As the music started playing, she singing the karaoke version of the song, Why can't we be friends, by the band, War.
And she did a find job doing so, as she swayed with the beat.
After the song ended, there was a moderate amount clapping from the crowd.
As the clapping ended, Yukio turned to the judges.
Lee asked, “Did you do this song on a dare?”
Yukio sheepishly admitted, “Yea.” She mentally added, 'At least I got five dollars out of this, from the bet I made with Rebecca.'
Lee said, “Well, you did a good job.” He then held up his score card, which had a seven on it.
Yukio smiled, as she replied, “Thank you.”
She looked over at Sam and Pedro's score cards. Both silently held up a seven score on their marker boards.
Yukio returned the microphone to where she found it. She then left the stage.
Melvin stated, into his microphone, “Next up, is Molly.”
As Molly walked on stage, everyone saw she wore a short black shirt, a yellow short sleeved button up blouse, and black flat soled slippers. The outfit went well with her blond hair.
After retrieving a wireless microphone, setting the karaoke machine, and walk back to the stage, Molly look out among the crowd, as she thought, 'While stroking one's ego is fun. At least one of us should still be focusing on catching the writer. This might actually flush him out.'
Molly stated, into the microphone, “I found out about this song, from reading a story. It is one of my favorite song. And I hope you enjoy it.”
As the first few cords started playing, Lee realized what Molly meant, and what she was trying to do. He maintain a calm expression, as he thought, 'Now, that is nice try to flush me out, Molly. But, it won't work.'
To Lee's right, Pedro remained calm as well, as he thought, 'So, this is Molly. She is clearly very intelligent, by trying to use this song to flush
Molly then started singing the lyrics to karaoke version of the song, Bad Company, by the band, using the version performed by Five Finger Death Punch.
Molly sung the song well, and as she did so, she looked around the crowd, and the judges for any signs that one among them was the writer. But, no one was taking the bait.
As finished the song, with the music ending, she thought, 'Oh well. It was worth a try. I wonder what my scores will be.'
The audience clapped for a few seconds.
Molly looked at the judges, to see their scores.
Lee gave her a seven. He casually commented, “Nice song.” He thought, 'And nice try, baiting me. But, something that simple is not going to work on me.'
Pedro gave her eight. He complimented, “You nailed the song.”
Sam silently gave her a seven.
Molly then returned her microphone to the corner, and she then left the stage.
As Molly exited the stage, and returned to her friends, Molly saw her mother, Janet looking at her, while smiling. With Molly walked close to her mother, Janet complimented her, “Nice try, honey.”
Molly just smiled towards Janet, as she returned to her chair.
Melvin said, into his microphone, “The next contestant is, Violin.”
While Violin walked onto the stage, the crowd saw that she was carrying a flute in her right hand.
Violin wore a dark blue long skirt, which matched her hair color. She also wore a white, short sleeved blouse, and white flat soled slippers.
She walked over, and picked up the stand from the corner, with the microphone attached to it. She then head to the center of the stage.
After placing the stand in front of her, she held the flute to her mouth. She pleasantly thought, 'I am so happy that my parents, in my second childhood, had me take music lessons. And since I remember my past life, I now understand why I like this song so much. Besides, I am sure Lee will appreciate it.'
Violin then began playing a song by flute, while occasionally marching in place.
Lee muttered, “I don't believe she is playing that.”
Pedro just snorted, as he held back a chuckle. He thought, 'Not bad, Violin.'
Sam turned to Lee, as he softly asked, “What is she playing?”
Lees turned to Sam, as he whispered one word, “Dixie.”
Lee and Sam then turned back to the stage, to watch Violin's performance.
Violin rendition of Dixie by flute, was flawless. She did not miss a note, nor beat, in neither her flute performance, nor steps.
A few minutes later, a Violin was finished playing, Dixie, the crowd clapped for a several seconds.
Lee gave her a nine. He stated, “You know me to well, Violin.”
Lee thought, 'But, only Harvey knows I am the writer. And he clearly has not told you. Because, I am still feel. And this ten will help continue his silence on my behalf. Because, you earned this nine.'
Lee continued, “And that was an excellent rendition of Dixie. You earned this ten.”
Pedro continued looking at Violin, as he thought, 'Lee is probably joking. I hope.'
In response, Violin smiled. But, inside her head, Harvey was laughing.
Violin mentally asked, in a calm manner, 'What is so funny?'
Harvey mentally responded, 'I was just thinking about Lee's comment, and your cultural connections with him.'
Violin mentally conceded, 'Yes. We got a few.'
Pedro gave her a seven, as he said, “You're flute work was good. And your steps were good. But, I feel you could have done better.”
Sam gave Violin a six, as he stated, “Pedro is correct. While you flute skills are flawless, I am sure you could have done better.”
Violin conceded, “You both might be right.” She then returned the stand where she found it, and left the stage.
Melvin stated, “Next up is Revy.”
Revy came onto the stage. As she walked to to the karaoke machine, everyone saw that she was walking barefoot, while wearing a red bikini bottom, with a matching red tank top, with a red sports bra underneath. All the red clothing matched her dark red hair.
While Pedro looked at Revy, he thought, 'So, this is Revy. Given she much smaller than me, I might actually underestimate her, if I did not know better. But, I do know better. And like the rest of the women in this contest, I do not want to get on her bad side. And from the looking of her clothing, it appears that she is going to do something athletic. I look forward to finding out what it is.'
A few seconds after Revy made it back to the center stage, some pleasant techno music that had a fast beat to it, but light on the bass, began playing.
Revy displayed her gymnastics skills, with several flips, back flips, cartwheels, and somersaults. All the while, she never lost her footing, as she showed intense passion in her actions.
As the music stopped, Revy finished her routine by landing on her feet, while facing the audience. The audience applauded her for several seconds.
As the audience quieted down, Revy looked down at the judges.
Lee gave Revy a nine. He stated, “Revy, I feel that you put your all into that. You earned this nine.”
Revy smile at Lee's comment, and the score he gave her. She thought, 'I appreciate that he realizes the effort that went into that.'
Revy then saw that Sam gave her a seven. He said, “I disagree with my friend, Lee here. Like Benny, you have the talent, but you did not coordinate your moves in the proper order. You could have done better.”
Revy did not respond to Sam's comments.
Revy turned to Pedro, to see that he gave her an eight. He commented, “I was happy with what I saw.”
Pedro thought, 'And it is a fair score, like all the others I have given. I am not going to get on their sides, by either giving them a low score, or giving them to high a score, that will upset the other women in the contest.'
Revy thought, 'Oh well. All in all, this is a fair score.'
Revy turned to her right, and walked off stage.
A moment later, Melvin announced, “Our next contestant is, Aeryn.”
Aeryn walked on stage, while displaying graced in her stride. Everyone saw that she was wearing a black evening gown, with black soled slippers.
She retrieved a microphone, set the karaoke machine, and walked to the center stage.
But, as the music started, just like Rock, Aeryn faced her friends. She looked over at Violin, as she began singing the Pet Shop Boys version of David Bowie's song, Hallo Spaceboy.
Violin looked back at Aeryn, as she looked back at her wife.
Violin giggled at Aeryn's romantic gesture.
Aeryn did a good job, but it was not a great performance.
As the music ended, there was clapping from the crowd for a few seconds, then silence.
Aeryn looked over at the judges.
Lee gave her a seven. He stated, “Like Rock, you have interesting flirting skills.”
Aeryn giggled in response.
Pedro gave her a seven as well, while he remained silent.
Sam gave Aeryn a six. He said, “I am sorely disappointed in you, Aeryn. I was expecting so much more.”
Aeryn remained silent, as she returned the microphone from where she found it, and the walked off stage.
Aeryn soon reached her table, where Violin was sitting by her open chair.
After she sat down, she turned to Violin, as she smile wickedly. She said, “I believe that Rock has the right idea. And I expect to have a return tonight for that performance.”
Violin was looking back at Aeryn, as she returned her wife's smile. She replied, “Oh, you shall have that Aeryn. That and more.”
Aeryn giggled, as she continued to smile wickedly.
Melvin then announced, “Next up is, Sawyer.”
As Sawyer walked on stage everyone saw that she was wearing a white evening gown, and a pair of white, flat soled slippers. Which was in stark contrast to her usual purple and black goth clothing.
Lee thought, 'Sawyer wearing that is a statement in of itself. What is she planning to do?'
Sawyer walked over the karaoke machine, and set the song she wanted to sing. She then walked back to the center of the stage, with a microphone in her hands.
A few seconds later, the music started, and Frederica Sawyer. began singing, the classic version of Amazing Grace. And she was doing a near perfect rendition of the song, as she displayed her restored voice, and the voice talents she learned. She also swayed her body to the beat of the music.
Lee thought, 'She is good. I am so happy I fixed her voice, and gave her singing skills. Having done so might someday save my hide from the business end of her chainsaw.'
Meanwhile, Pedro thought, 'How the hell can the career woman of chainsaw wielding maniacs have the voice of an angel?... Oh yea. Lee, and his clear insanity. Still, it is wrong on so many levels. Though, I am not here to judge the morality of her previous actions. But instead, I am judging her current talents. And her singing is incredible.'
Sam was moved to tears, as he watched Sawyer's performance.
As the song ended, the audience gave her a standing ovation for several seconds.
While the audience calmed down, Sawyer looked at the judges.
Lee held up a nine, as he stated, “Flawless. Absolutely, flawless.”
Pedro held up a nine. He said, “If you ever want to sing professionally, please let me know. I will buy a ticket to see you perform.”
Sam held up a nine. He commented, “I feel that if you swayed a little more with the song, you would have likely gotten tens from all of us. Other than that, your preference was perfect.'
Sawyer grinned ear to ear, with a genuine, none sadist, happy smile. She walked over to returned her microphone, at where she found it.
As Sawyer left the stage, she thought, 'I have to thank the writer for this wonderful voice, and singing talent. On another matter, I will be nice to Lee, because the way Lee figured up the scoring has given me a real chance to win this contest. That score is going to be hard to beat. I will either be in first place, or a very close second.'
A few seconds later, Sawyer turned to her seat, at a table, by her friends.
Meanwhile, Melvin looked at his list of contestants in his left hand.
Melvin thought, 'There is not many contestants left. We might still get out of this mess, alive, and intact. Though, could use a bit of refreshment.'
Melvin pocket the piece of paper with the list on it. Next, he walked to the table by the judges. He used his left hand to pick up his glass of lemonade. He took a sip of it, to wet his throat. After which, he e gently set his glass back down on the table.
With Melvin's throat now back to no longer being dry, Melvin turned to the audience, as he stated, into the microphone in his right hand, “Our next contestant is, Lotton.”
Lotton got up from her seat, and walked on stage, and everyone saw that she were a white sundress, and white flat soled slippers, both of which matched her white hair color.
After retrieving a microphone, she walked to the center of the stage.
Lotton stated, “For my talent, I am going to recite a poem from memory. The poem is Edgar Allan Poe's, A Dream Within A Dream.”
Lotton then recited the entire poem.
Lee thought, 'I remember reading this poem in the time loop. Though, I don't remember all of it. Still, she is doing a good job of speaking it.'
Lotton finished reciting the poem in just under two minutes.
After Lotton finished, there was a few claps, but not many. She thought, 'Tough crowd.'
Lotton then looked down at judged.
Lee held up a seven. He said, “That was different. But good. And the fact you did this from memory shows you have talent.”
Pedro held up a seven as well. He said, “It is sometimes good to do something different. It changes up things.”
Sam then held up a nine. He commented, “You spoke the stanza and quatrain well.
The meter of your wording was properly time. And you did all this from memory. Though, you did not move around, I think you deserve this nine.”
After Lee wrote down Sam's score on his piece of paper, Lee turned to Sam. He thought, 'So, Sam knows poetry. Interesting. But, that is a question for another time.'
Lee then turned back to look at the stage, as he wait for the next contestant to be announced.
Lotton smiled, as she thought, 'Tough crowd, but nice judges.' She then returned the microphone from where she found it. Next, she calmly walked off stage.
A few seconds later, Lotton reached the table she share with Sawyer, and Shenhua.
As she sat down, Shenhua said, “Given what I know of you, I really shouldn't be surprised by your poetry skills. And it was interesting to listen to.”
Sawyer commented, “Good job.”
Lotton turned to her two lovers, as she said, “Thanks, to the both of you.”
Shenhua and Sawyer smiled, in response to Lotton's comment.
(_)
At that moment, in the front lobby of the Devil's Hotel, two individuals walked inside. As they did so, the music in the lobby changed to the song, Don't Let Me Be Misunderstood, played by Santa Esmeralda, from the soundtrack of the Kill Bill Volume One movie.
The two individuals walked up to the front desk.
One of them asked the clerks, in english, “Which way to the hotel restaurant?”
One of the clerk answered, in english, “Go to the left hallway. The door to the restaurant is just inside the hallway, to you right, on the far wall. You cannot miss it.”
The person, whom asked the question, replied, “Thank you.”
The two individuals then turned to their left, as they headed for the Devil's Hotel restaurant and bar.
(_)
Meanwhile, inside the restaurant, on stage, Melvin announced, “Next up, is Janet.”
Janet walked out onto the stage, wearing a nice yellow short skirt, and midriff shirt. As she did so, everyone saw that she carried a clipboard, with a few pieces of paper, and a pencil on it.
When she got to the center stage, she looking down at the judges. She said, “For my talent, I would like to draw you three. It will only take a few minutes. Though, I do need to not move for a few minutes.”
Pedro replied, “Okay.”
Lee said, with honest curiosity, “I would like to see what you can do.”
Sam stated, “Let us see what you can do.”
The three judges then relaxed, as they remained still, for the artist in front of them.
Janet pulled out the pencil from the clip board, and she swiftly began to draw.
Roughly three minutes later, she finished her drawing, as she placed her pencil back on her clip board.
Janet stated, “I am done.”
While there was no real applause, that didn't matter to Janet. It was the judges scores that mattered to her.
Meanwhile, the three judges relaxed, and stretched a little bit, while still in their seats.
Janet requested, “Melvin, could you pass this to the judges.” She then lean over and handed Melvin the clipboard.
Melvin took the clipboard in his left hand. He then handed the clipboard to Pedro.
The judges passed the clipboard around, as they saw the picture Janet drew of the three of them.
The picture was a good, hand drawn, lifelike representation of the three of them.
Sam then handed the clipboard back to Melvin, whom handed the clipboard back to Janet.
After Janet took the clipboard, she leaned back up, while she still looked back down at the judges.
A few seconds later, Lee gave her a nine. He stated, “Your speed and skill are impressive.” He thought, with mild delight, 'From counterfeiter to artist. That is a nice change of hobbies.'
Pedro gave her an eight. He said, “I am with Lee on this. Your skills with a piece of paper are impressive.”
Lee continued looking at Janet, while having a pleasant expression on his face. But, inwardly he frowned, a he thought, 'Pedro. I hope you did not just drop an injoke over Janet's counterfeiting skills. Still, if I look at Pedro, or change my expression, that will tip Janet off that I am the writer.'
Janet look at Pedro for a few seconds. She thought, 'Did he just make a subtle comment on my counterfeiting skills?... Nah.'
Sam gave then Janet an eight. He commented, “I am with these two, on this. You have real skill as an artist. I hope to see some more of your artistic works in the future.”
Janet grinned, as she said, “Thank you. All of you.”
While Janet walked off stage, with her items in her hands, she thought, 'I may not win. But, that was an impressive score.'
Just as Melvin was about to announce the next contestant, everyone heard a female voice yell, in english, from the entrance of the hotel restaurant, opposite to the stage, “Is this contest open to all hot women?!”
All eyes turned to look at where the voice came from.
As Melvin, Lee, and Pedro, turned to look at who it was, they remained calm, while they recognized not one, but two women they knew of.
Standing at the entrance was River and beside her, to her right side, leaning against the door frame, was Daiyu. Chang in her female form.
They saw that River had dyed her long, natural brown hair, back to red. With her hair draped loose, down her back. River was wearing red pants, red belt, a white t-shirt, over a red leather jacket, with red cowgirl boots. The boots zipper up from the interior sides of the boots. Also, her clothing match the same color as her long red hair.
Daiyu wore a black cloth pants, black belt, a white short sleeved blouse, and black flat soled slippers. Daiyu's black hair when down to her neck line.
In response to seeing, and recognizing, River, the super-genius telepath, Melvin, Lee, and Pedro, immediately cleared their minds. The three men each knew that to even worry about River being there, would get her attention. So all three kept their minds clear, and they played the situation by ear.
Meanwhile, Sam frowned, as he looked at the two women. A second later, he relaxed his expression.
Sam said, “If you two want to join. That is fine. Just state your names, and if you are going to do a talent, or a song. Then, join with the other women of the group. We will just put you two at the last of the group.”
Daiyu leaned up off the door frame, as she said, in english, “I am Daiyu. I will be singing a song.”
River stated, in english, “I am River. I am doing a talent. And I will be going after Daiyu.”
Sam stated, “Fine. Daiyu will go second to last. And you, River, will go last.”
(_)
Across the room, at the doorway, Daiyu thought, 'What is his problem? Still...' She said, “That works for me.”
River looked at Sam, as she cracked a grin. She stated, “That will be fine.”
Both women then walked across the room, as they joined with the other contestants.
As River and Daiyu made their way over to Revy and Rock's group, Daiyu thought, 'I am happy you suggested we wear these outfits today.'
River quietly said, “You're welcome.”
(_)
Meanwhile, across the room, to the left of the stage, Eda then stood up. She turned to the judges, as she requested, “If you judges don't mind. I would like to remain last in this contest. I want to see what they do, first.”
The three judges, along with the announcer, turned to Eda.
Lee replied, “I think I speak for all the judges, when we say, that is fine with us.”
Eda saw Sam, Pedro, and Melvin all nodded in agree.
Eda said, “Thank you.” She then sat down.
(_)
At the judges table, Sam looked back at Melvin as he stated, “All right. Let's continued this, shall we.”
Melvin nodded, as he stated, into his microphone, “Okay, everyone. Our next contestant is, Rebecca.”
Rebecca then walked on stage.
Everyone saw she wore tasteful red denim shorts, and a red crop top, with a red sports bra underneath. The red clothing matched her hair color. Also, she was barefoot, like Revy had been on stage.
Rebecca then began to show off her natural acrobatic skills, which she inherited from Revy, and whom Revy taught her how to refine her ability and skill.
Though, unlike Revy, Rebecca clearly had a choreographed routine, with flips, back-flips, cartwheels, and somersaults.
Meanwhile, from the corner of his left eye, Lee saw that the women made room for Daiyu and River, by Rock and Revy.
Though, given that River was a telepath, Lee knew he had to keep his mind clear. So, he turned his attention back on the Rebecca, whom was on still performing on stage.
(_)
A few seconds later, the two newcomers sat down in chairs, at a table, left of the stage.
Daiyu and River sat down between Rock and Revy. With Daiyu to Revy's left side. River was to Daiyu's left side. And Rock was to River's left side.
Rock turned to the Daiyu and River, as she softly demanded, “What are you two doing here?”
Daiyu turned to Rock, as she smirked. She said, “Rock, you should know by now that you cannot keep secrets from us.”
Revy turned to Diayu and River. She realized, as she guessed, “We told, Sis. And Balalaika told you about the stories, and our hunt for the writer?”
Daiyu looked over at Revy, as she answered, in a casual tone of voice, “Yes, Revy. The conversation came up while we were having a party at the Lowe family's house. Just her, me, River, B, the Serenity crew, the Lowe family, and the Bebop crew. And girl, we were all interested when we found out about the stories. We just had to do something, so I offered up a plan, and here we are. To see how your search is going, while we look into our own plans.”
Rock asked, “Who else knows? Do the maids, or Garcia, know?”
Daiyu turned to Rock, as she stated, “We have not told them. And given this city is still standing, I am guessing the maids do not know. We do not want to start a war, which is what would happen if the maid knew.”
Rock inquired, “So, what are you planning? You don't sound like you are after the writer.”
Daiyu said, “That is because we are not after the writer. We have other plans for this city. Plans I am more than happy to include you in. Plans that even Balalaika, and everyone else, I have included, have liked. But, that is a conversation for another time, in private.”
Revy stated, “Well, we are more than happy to hear you out, but first we need to find the writer.” She then turned to River, as she continued,“And River here can make the search go real quick. If you tell us who the writer is, River. I am sure he is in this room. The writer could not help himself, but to watch this contest. And once we have him, then we can move onto Chang's plan.”
River looked at Revy, as she smirked. She casually said, “Where is the fun in that, Revy?”
Daiyu stated, “Revy, don't bother trying to get the information from her. When she is like this, it is impossible to get anything from her.”
Revy thought, 'River is one of the few people that can take me in a fight.'
River complimented, “Thank you for your vote of confidence, Revy.”
Revy thought, 'Stop reading my mind, bitch.'
River giggled a little, from Revy's thoughts towards her.
Rock asked, “So, are you staying here, in the hotel?”
Daiyu answered, “No. We are staying at the hotel, on the other side of the island. It is all part of my plans.”
Rock said, “I look forward to hearing your plans, later.”
The women then heard clapping from the crowd, across the room from them.
The women turned their attention back to the stage, to see that Rebecca had finished her performance.
Rock sarcastically thought, with annoyance, 'Great. I missed my daughter's performance, because of these two.'
River said, “Sorry, about that.”
Rock just rolled her eyes, in annoyance, for a few seconds. She then, turned her attention to the judges, as they scored one of her daughters.
(_)
On staged, as Rebecca looked down at the judges, she saw that Lee has given her an eight. He stated, “That was good. And well put together.”
Sam gave her a nine. He said, “I could tell that your moves were properly choreographed. Well done.”
Pedro gave her an eight. He stated, “You have talent. And you earned this eight.”
Rebecca smiled, as she turned, and left the stage.
Melvin pulled out his list, from a coat pocket, with his left hand. He looked at his piece of paper. He saw Eda was the next, and last contestant. But, he then remembered Daiyu and River, and what order all three of them wanted to to in.
Melvin pocketed the piece of paper, as he stated, into his microphone, which was in his right hand, “Next up is, Daiyu.”
Daiyu calmly walked on stage with the commanding presence that those whom know her had come to respect.
After retrieving a microphone, and setting the karaoke machine, she returned to the center of the stage.
As the music started, Daiyu began singing to the karaoke version of Billy Joel's song, We Didn't Start The Fire. And she was doing a great job of it. Along, with this, Daiyu swayed her body with the beat.
To many in at the judges table, along Melvin, Chang ability to not miss, nor mispronounce, a lyric, while keeping in sync with the music, was impressive.
A little over four and a half minutes later, the song ending, and the audience applauded for several seconds.
As the clapping died down, Daiyu looked own at the judges, for their scores.
Lee gave her a nine. He stated, “That song if very difficult to sing. And you sung it well. You impressed me. You deserve this nine.”
Pedro gave her a nine. He commented, “I agree.”
Then, she looked to see that Sam gave her a six, while remaining silent.
Pedro, Lee, and Melvin did not react, nor even think about Sam's score, given the telepath, River, was nearby.
Daiyu's face remained unreadable to the judges, as she turned, and left the stage.
While Daiyu walked off stage, she calmly thought, 'Two out of three is not bad. But, I wonder what it is with that bearded judge, with the ponytail. I guess he just don't like latecomers. I can appreciate that. At least, he did not give me a one.'
After Daiyu left the stage, Melvin did not wait for her to return to her table. He wanted this contest over, as quickly as possible, for very good reasons. So instead, Melvin turned to the audience, as he announced, into his microphone, “And next up is, River.”
River got up from her table, walked to the stage. She passed by Daiyu, with the black haired woman sitting back into her seat, as River made it to the stage.
As River walked onto the stage, everyone saw that she was carrying two batons, together, in her right hand.
Given the situation, the judges, nor Melvin even thought about where she had them on her body.
When River reached the center stage, she came to a stop. She turned to the judges, as she asked, in a casual, relax tone of voice, “It is all right if my talent was fire dancing?”
As the judges looked up at her, Sam raised an eyebrow. Sam stated, “There is a no weapons rule in this contest.”
River just looked at Sam, as she raised an eyebrow, as well. A few seconds later, she replied, “But, these are not weapons.”
Sam calmly pointed out, “Though, they are dangerous. I will have to ask the other judges, and the bartender, of this restaurant. If they will allow the use of them.” He then turned to the other judges, and Melvin.
Sam saw that the three other men looking back at Sam.
Lee turned to Melvin, as he stated, “Melvin, this is your bar. This is not my call. Though, I will support your decision.”
Pedro and Sam also turned to Melvin, as Pedro said, “As long as we are careful. I don't mind.”
Melvin looked over at River. He then turned to look at the three judges.
Melvin commented, “We can allow this. But, as Pedro said, we have to be careful. First, the fire might set off the sprinkler system. I can shut off this section of the sprinkler system, for this room, from behind the bar counter. I will just turned it back on, later. Though, I need to get a couple of fire extinguishers, from the kitchen. Just in case.”
Pedro responded, “Good idea.”
Melvin looked at the audience, as he said, into his microphone, “Ladies and gentlemen, we will only need a minute of you time, to prepare for the next performance.”
(_)
A minutes later, the sprinkler system to the room was shut off. There was a large, portable fire extinguisher set by Sam's seat, on the outside of the table.
Melvin had another large, portable fire extinguisher in his left hand, as he held his microphone in his right hand.
Melvin turned to the audience, as he said, into his microphone, “Okay, ladies and gentlemen. We are ready to continue the show.”
Melvin then set his microphone down on the judges' table, as he held up the nozzle of the large, portable fire extinguisher in his right hand. He aimed the nozzle at the stage, towards River. Just in case he had to act in an instant, if things went wrong.
With the batons still in her right hand, River then walked over to the karaoke machine and set the machine to the song she wanted.
Next, River walked walked back to the center of the stage, as she faced the judges, and crowd.
After which, River used her left hand to pull out a nice lighter from one of her left side pants pocket. As she held both batons by the middle, with her right hand, she lit one end of both of the batons.
River swiftly pocketed her lighter, where she had it before, and separate the batons, so one was held in the middle, by each of her hands.
River used the lit ends of her batons to light the other ends of her batons.
River finished her preparations, just as the song began to play.
The song was not a karaoke version, but an actual song with lyrics. The song was the theme song from the nineteen eighty-five, american movie, Berry Gordy's The Last Dragon.
River then began her dance routine, while twirling around her fire sticks.
Lee thought, 'Interesting musical selection.' He then realized he was thinking. And he cleared his mind.
As the song began to quicken its pace, River began to be more aggressive in her dance routine.
While River used her twirled her batons, without harming herself, she began flipping, and back-flipping, as she danced with the music. Yet, she also landed solidly on her feet, without losing control of her baton.
At the same time, River was able continue dancing with the beat of the song.
As this went on, nearly everyone, including the judges, and Melvin, could tell that her moves were very well organization and choreographed.
River continued this dance for the full seven minutes and twenty six seconds of the song.
Just as the song was about to end, River did a flip forward, and landed facing the judges, and audience. As she landed, she bowed to them, just as the song ended, with her arms extended away from her, to prevent from burning herself on her two fire-sticks.
The audience went wild, as they gave her a standing ovation, for several seconds.
River walked over close to the edge of the stage, to where Melvin was standing at. She held out her hands, with the fire batons away from her, and over the edge of the stage, for Melvin to deal with.
Melvin used two quick bursts from his fire extinguisher, to put out all four ends of River's batons that were on fire.
River turned to Melvin, as she said, “Thanks.”
Melvin looked back at her, as he replied, “You're welcome.” He then set his fire extinguisher onto the floor, by the stage wall.
River then put back batons back into her right hand, as she turned to look at how the judges scored her performance.
As the crowd slowly died down, she saw that Lee had given her a nine.
Lee stated, “That was a great performance. I never thought I would even get to see that in person, in my life. I am glad I did.”
Pedro gave her a nine, as well. He said, “I agree. This was expertly achieved.”
River looked over at Sam, to see the bearded man had given her a six. Though, Sam did not say a work to her, as he just looked at her.
River frowned at Sam, but Sam does not even flinch.
Just as with Daiyu's performance, Lee, Pedro, and Melvin ignored Sam's score, given they were in the presence of a telepath.
As second later, River turned to her right, and walked off stage, with her batons in her right hand.
A few seconds later, River returned to the table she shared with Daiyu, Rock, and Revy.
After River sat down in her chair, at a nearby table, Dutch turned to look at River. She complimented, “You never fell to impress, River.”
River looked over at Dutch, as she replied, “Thank you, Dutch.”
(_)
Meanwhile, between the front of the stage, and the judge's table, Melvin picked up his microphone, with his right hand, off the judges' table.
Melvin then walked over to behind the bar counter. Next, he turned the fire sprinklers back on, while he announced, into his wireless microphone, “And here is our last contestant, Eda.”
Eda got up from the chair she was sitting at, around her friends. She then walked towards the stage.
As Eda walked towards the stage, Melvin returned to the front of the stage, between the stage, and the judges' table.
After Eda made her way on stage, everyone saw she was wearing a white, flowing evening gown, that was had only shoulder straps, and slits on the sides of her skirt to allow her movement. The gown showed off her shoulders, and the blue encircled cross tattoo on her right forearm. She also wore white slippers.
Eda left her long blond hair loose, to fall down her back.
As Eda walked across the stage, she thought, 'Given what I am wearing, plus what I am going to do, I should win this. I am wearing a nice strapless white bra, with Yolanda helping me with my hair. I am going to take these judges for all their wore.'
'And this will not be a repeat of the bikini contest. This is the reason I am after the writer in the first place. And I do have one other thing going for me. I did sleep with one of the judges. Though, I am not sure if Lee will give me points for just that. He seems to have a bit of integrity, and we both agreed it was one night stand.'
After she walked karaoke machine, she picked up one of the wireless microphone, while she found the karaoke version of the song she wanted to sing.
As she set it, she use the ten seconds, before the song started, to walk with graced across the stage, to the center of the stage, as she face the judges.
Eda happily thought, 'I must have song this sing in the shower countless times. And I know it by heart.'
Then, the karaoke version of Bonnie Tyler's song, Holding Out For A Hero, began playing.
And without missing a beat, Eda starting sing the lyrics on time, and in tune with the song.
As Eda did so, she moved around, by slightly dancing, and displaying her abilities as a former cheerleader, with her foot movements always in step with the beat of the song.
Within a minute of the song everyone was entranced by Eda's performance.
And while the judges were able to maintain neutral expressions, to her right, at the tables to the left of the stage, the other women in her group were left speechless at her performance.
Some of the women even had their jaws hanging in awe. Such as Sawyer.
(_)
At the tables to the back left side of the room, Sawyer watched Eda, as she thought, 'Damn. I did not know that Eda was this good at singing and dancing. I might want to ask her if she is interested in doing a few trio songs with Ranma and I. We could do sing some great songs, together. As we danced.'
(_)
Meanwhile, at the judges table, Pedro was so charmed about Eda's performance. That he forgot about River, as he thought, 'Eda is good. Also, it is strange that the first time I walked into the Devil's Hotel lobby, it was the Holding Out For A Hero song that started playing for me. Also, I will say that Eda's customers service at that food truck is a lot better than she was the Ripoff Church. And Lee was correct, in that customer service does matter.'
Pedro then remembered who was else in the room, as he immediately cleared his mind.
When the song reached it's climax, Eda skillfully knelt down on her left leg, as both her movements and voice did not miss a beat.
Eda then seamlessly jumped back up to her feet, while remaining in tune with the song.
As her feet hit the stage floor, the music made its famous clash sound.
Eda then continued to perfectly perform the rest of the song.
As the song ended, Eda only gave an innocent smile, outwardly, while she inward smirked, as she thought, 'Always play to the judges, and the crowd. That is how one wins.'
The crowd, including her friends, gave Eda a standing ovation, for several seconds. Only the judges did not stand up to applauded Eda.
As the crowd calmed down and sat back down, Eda looking down at the judges.
Eda was still smiling, as she watched while Sam held up his score board, that stated, ten.
A second later, she saw Pedro also hold his score board, which stated ten.
Then, Lee held up his score board, and there was a nine on it.
Eda continued to smile. Though, she did look at Lee, which an unspoken question.
Lee could guess the question, as he calmly stated, “I slept with you, Eda. I could not give you a perfect score. Other people might questioned that score. But, you nailed the performance, perfectly. I can already tell you. Congratulations, Eda. You won this talent contest.”
Eda's grin became even wider, as she said, “Thanks.”
Melvin stated, into his microphone, “You heard it right here folks! The winner of the contest is, Eda!”
The crowd gave Eda another applause, as she walked off the stage, and back to her friend.
When Eda reached her friends, Rock was the first to speak, as she complimented, “You did good, Eda.”
Revy agreed, “Yea. You were great.”
Sawyer complimented, “Now, that is how to end a talent contest.”
There were other compliments from the women sitting at the tables, nearby.
When the women were finished complimenting her, Eda though, 'Given their kindness, it is best not to rub this win in their faces. It would just ruin the mood.'
Eda looked around at her friends, as she said, “Thank you, guys.”
Eda then looked over at River, whom she saw was smiling towards her.
River complimented, “Good move.”
Eda nodded once towards River, as she thought, 'Thank you.'
In response, River simply returned Eda's nod.
Eda thought, 'I will collect my beer, later. I just feel to good about winning to go ask for it now.'
The women then began talking amongst themselves, with the audience already getting up, and leaving the room.
For while the audience enjoyed the show, they all knew how dangerous those women were. Especially, when the women in question celebrated. And none of the audience wanted to be around them, given the women presently had plenty of reasons now to celebrate.
(_)
Meanwhile, across the room, at the judges' table, the judges had just got up from their seats.
Lee looked around, he saw that the audience was leaving. He thought, 'they got the right idea.'
Lee turned to Sam, Melvin, and Pedro, as he softly recommended, “Gentlemen, I suggest we take our leave, while we still can. And talk in the front lobby.”
Pedro, Sam, and Melvin, turned to look at Lee.
Pedro said, “Agreed.”
Sam snorted, as he replied, “Why not?”
Melvin commented, “Best statement I have heard all night.”
Melvin then set his microphone onto the judges table. He thought, 'I will clean up after the girls leave. I will just be happy to be breathing, as I leave this room for now. And I can give Eda her reward, later, as well.'
The four men then joined the audience, as they started walking towards the double doors that lead to the hotel hallway, and away from the contestants of the contest.
(_)
Nearby, at the tables to the back left side of the room, near the stage, Daiyu was sitting her in chair, as she watched as Melvin, Lee, Sam, and Pedro get up, and calming walk out of the hotel restaurant, and into the hallway, with the audience.
Daiyu thought, 'I guess my friends have been here long enough, that everyone knows to avoid them. Still, I wonder why the announcer and three judges seem to be in more of a rush to leave, then the rest of the people here?'
River was sitting next to Daiyu. River leaned over, and softly whispered into Chang's ear, “Those four are more intelligent than they appear.” She then leaned back up in her chair.
Daiyu continued to look at the four men, from across the room, as they finally exited out the door. She thought, 'Then, we will have to watch them, closely.'
River quietly said, “Exactly.”
(_)
After the four men made it to the middle area of the front lobby, they came to a stop, as they looked at each other.
Melvin turned to the three other men, while he said, “Good night. I am going to go to my room, and stay there for the rest of the night. I suggest you three do the same.”
Lee said, “Oh. I agree. I have the same idea. And no one say anything to jinx our getting out of that situation with our skins intact.”
Sam responded, “I would not be one to do so.”
Melvin did not respond, as he turned, and walked towards the elevator bay, as he headed for his suite, for the night.
Pedro turned to Sam, as he requested, “Can I speak to Lee for a moment, in private?”
Sam said, “Sure.” Sam then walked away, close to the check in desk.
Pedro watched Sam walk away. When Sam out of earshot, Pedro turned to Lee, as he whispered, “Given River and Chang are here, in the building with us, how screwed are we?”
Lee quietly responded, “It depends. Did you clear you mind the moment you saw River?”
Pedro softly replied, “Of course.”
Lee whispered, “I did the same. Melvin and Sam do not know enough to get us into trouble. So, as I say, we are fine, for at the moment.”
Pedro quietly pointed out, “But, what if those two decide to check into the hotel. You cannot keep a clear head all the time. You have to think to continue this act you have going.”
Lee softly admitted, “I know. But, I don't think I have to worry. Because, I believe that is not the case. Chang always. Always. Kept Revy and the others at a distance from himself. Well, herself, at the moment. And since River is a telepath, she would keep her distance for the other women, as well. Yes. She is crazy. But, she does not like reading the minds of other crazy people.”
“And both of them like playing head games with people. With luck, they probably just stopped by to say hi to Revy Rock, and the others. Have some fun. Like what we saw on stage, a few minutes ago. With the two of them being gone by morning. If not. They are likely going to stay at the other nice hotel in town, on the other side of the city. So, we are good, either way.”
Pedro whispered, “I would not say our situation is good. But, our odds do increase, as long as we are away from those two.”
Lee quietly responded, “Trust me. I know better than to be anywhere near those two. Though, if they do stay at the hotel, I will leave a message with you, at the police station, saying, a river runs through it. Just like the title of that film.”
“That means they are staying at the hotel. And I am gone right after I leave the message. If I do not leave you a message, then everything is fine, or they have already caught me. Either way, it is no longer your concern.”
Pedro softly inquired, “Okay. Also, what is up with River's red hair color? Her natural color is brown.”
Lee quietly said, “I gave her the option of dyeing her hair red in the stories. I had her go back to brown. With her occasionally alternating. This was to show she was changing for the better.”
Pedro softly commented, “Oh yea. I remember now. This was done to show she is not a crazy as she once was.”
Lee softly stated, “Exactly. At this point, decades later, she is likely saner than Revy, and more of her crew. Though, her red hair further confirms this is the River that I wrote about. And we know that this is River, and by extension, Chang, from after book four.”
“Because, they regularly talked to the others. They would not keep my stories, secret for long. So, they likely only recently heard about it. And after all the time, River might be actually saner than even I may suspect.”
Pedro quietly replied, “Now, that I think about that. I find that actually comforting. It means she is likely not after you blood.”
Lee softly commented, “I hope she is not after me. It is all over if she is. Though, I doubt it. If she was. Even with keeping our minds clear. Thoughts slip out, and she likely had me. And I would be likely captured, right now.”
“So, I am thinking that, given she and Chang both are a bit mischievous. They are here just have some fun with their friends. They are likely not our enemies, at the moment. They are just here to stir the pot a little. And have a little fun. For them, catching me would only be a bonus.”
Pedro quietly agreed, “I can see that. But, why does River have her hair dyed right now, instead of having it the nature brown?”
Lee softly stated, “As to why her hair is red now, is anyone's guess. It is likely just her preference, right now. It is not like either of us can just go up to her, and ask her why she decided to dye her hair, before she came here.”
Pedro quietly responded, “Good point. Also, I will start asking around for information on Chang, the alias Daiyu, and River.”
Lee softly disagreed, “No. Do not do that, just yet. Those names are too uncommon here. If you do that, it might tip your hand, to them, that you know who they are.”
Pedro quietly agreed, “That is an excellent point. Damn, you really do think several moves ahead.”
Lee whispered, “It is the only reason I am still breathing. Anyway, go home, Pedro. Get some sleep. With luck, tomorrow will be a better day.”
Pedro said, “You too. Sleep well.” He then walked towards the front doors of the lobby. A few seconds later, he was outside, heading for his car.
As Pedro made it outside, he allowed himself to think. He mentally reflected, 'That was an interesting experience. Though, I was most in impressed with Daiyu... Well, Chang. And she is hot as a woman. Still, that Billy Joel's song, We Didn't Start The Fire, is a hard song to sing correctly. I have tried. It is especially hard for those whom are not native in speaking the english language.'
'Of course, with not only Dutch, Benny, and Janet, coming to talk. But, also Chang and River. They are going to bring a whole new level of insanity to my city. I better be ready for them. But, that is for tomorrow. I am to tired to deal with this now. Instead, I am just going to go home, and give some much needed sleep.'
Pedro soon made it to his car, and he drove himself to his home.
(_)
Meanwhile, in the front lobby of the hotel, Lee watched Pedro walk out of the building, and towards his car in the parking lot. Lee then turned to face Sam, whom he saw was standing by the check out desk, looking back at him.
Lee thought, 'Now, to talk to Sam. walked up by Sam, and continued walking towards the elevator bay.
Sam walked with Lee, as he asked, “So, what was that about?”
Lee honestly answered, “It is personal.”
Sam replied, “Okay.”
They then made it to the elevator bay. Lee walked over to one of the panels, between two of the elevators. He then pushed the up arrow, to summon one of the elevators to come pick up Sam and himself.
They stood side by side, with Sam to Lee's right side. They patiently waited for an elevator to come down, and open its doors for them.
Lee turned to Sam, as he said, “I hope you have a pleasant night, Sam.”
Sam looked over at Lee, as he stated, “Thank you. But, I am not going to bed, just yet. I got some things I need to do first.”
Lee asked, “No problem. So, did you have a good time?”
Sam stated, “A great time. You?”
Suddenly the elevator to Lee's right side, dinged, and its doors opened.
Lee walked in to the elevator. Lee turned around, to face Sam. He punched the button on the panel, by the door, for the third floor.
Lee looked up at Sam, as he sadly smiled. Lee said, “I have a great time, as well. This was likely one of the best nights of my life. And when I lay dying on my deathbed, in a few months, I will look back on this night, and smile.”
Lee's comment caught Sam flatfooted, as he inquired, “What do you mean, your deathbed?”
As the doors began to close, Lee looked Sam in his eyes, as he stated, “I am dying of cancer.”
Before Sam could respond, the doors fully closed, leaving the bearded, ponytail man speechless at finding out his friend was dying of cancer. And that his friend would be dead sooner, rather than later.
Sam then turned, towards the exit of the elevator bay. As he was about to walk back towards the lobby, he saw the long red haired, fair skinned woman, know as River, looking back at him, from across the lobby.
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 1: “De La Plata Podrido.”
Chapter 12: “Black Jade And The Rotten Silver.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
The next morning, after the talent contest, at the Devil's Hotel restaurant, because Lee went to bed early, he woke up early.
When Lee woke up, he looked at the clock on the nightstand beside him, and he saw that a six ten AM in the morning.
While it was still dark outside, he turned on the lamp light on his nightstand. And he quickly got ready to face the day. He then headed to the lobby, before anyone else was up, and he spoke to the clerks at the check in desk.
Given the clerks had heard about the contest last night. And they knew Lee, they were more than willing to answer Lee's question, concerning the contest and the contestants. They even pulled a checked a few records for him.
The discussion was in english, considering Lee did not want anyone to know that he knew spanish.
Lee was relieved to learn that the restaurant was still in one piece. Though, it was being cleaned up that morning. With the restaurant, with breakfast buffet being open at seven AM. Which was an hour and half later than when it usually open at Five thirty AM.
Not that Lee was complaining. He was not planning to eat breakfast, yet.
Also, while Lee did not show any reaction on the outside, he was happy to learn that neither no one, fitting the names, nor descriptions, of River, Chang, or Daiyu, had checked into the Devil's Hotel, previous night.
In addition, the clerks were more than happy to accept Lee's request, on keeping quiet about his inquires.
Lee thanked the two clerk. And he then when back to this hotel room, to watch TV.
(_)
At eight thirty AM, Lee received a phone call. Lee used his TV remote to turn off his TV.
Lee then tossed his remote onto his bed, as he walked over to the phone on his nightstand.
As he picked up receiver, he thought, 'Only Pedro and Sam have this number. And the girls would just knock at my door if they wanted to speak to me.'
Lee held the receiver to the right side of his face, as he said, in english, “Hello.”
Pedro responded, from the other end of the line, in english, “Hey.”
Lee recognized Pedro's voice, as he replied, “Hi. What do you need?”
Pedro stated, “First, did those two actually check into the hotel?”
Lee thought, 'He must be talking about Chang and River.' He answered, “Not as far as I know. I check with the front desk, this morning. And they said, no. I think we are in the clear, for the moment.”
Pedro said, “That's good.”
Lee pointed out, “Still, you should not called me this early in the morning for something like.”
Pedro admitted, “You are right. I called to ask favor from you.”
Lee thought, 'Whatever it is, it might be worth doing to stay on Pedro's good side.' He inquired, “Sure, what do you need?”
Pedro stated, “The real state agent I am using to sell my brother's beach house, called me this morning. About ten minutes ago. He found a buyer for the house. The guy wants to pay all of it up front, in pesos. Ten percent above the asking price. If this sale clears, my retirement savings is secure. And with what is going on, I do not have to worry about that.”
Lee questioned, “I fully understand. So, how do I fit into this?”
Pedro requested, “I was thinking, if I was chauffeured in a cool car, it might make a good impression with the buyer. With that cool car being the pink convertible my brother gave you. With you driving me. It is probably be an hour of your life. What to help?”
Lee thought, 'Oh hell. Why not? It is something I might do in his situation. And it will likely put him in good mood for the rest of the day. Especially, after what happened last night, at the end of the talent contest. When River and Chang showed up.'
Lee responded, “Sure. Where do you want me to pick you up? And at what time?”
Pedro answered, “The meeting is at ten thirty, so pick me up at the police station at ten AM. Being early would make a good impression, as well.
Lee agreed, “Yes. It would. I will see you there.” He then hung up the phone.
Lee thought, 'This is a win-win situation. I help Pedro, he becomes more loyal to me. And after last night's party crashers, I need to shore up that loyalty. Also, as far as he is concerned, he will owe me a favor.'
'Now, on the matter of Sam. As much as I want to spend time with this. Helping Pedro with this, is more important to my continued survival. So, in a little while, I will go downstairs, meet with Sam. We will have breakfast at the buffet, where I will tell him I have some errands to run. Without give details. So, the girls don't overhear us. Then, I will satisfaction that I will meet him, here, in the lobby. Where I will pick up up, and we will then head the Rats Nest later this morning.'
'Though, I will have to navigate around the issue of my telling him that I am dying of cancer. But, I was just so tired, and in such a good mood, that I decided to tell him, as a friend. And I cannot let the girls learn I am dying of cancer. Still, that should not be a problem.'
'Also, I doubt the girls will say anything to us about talent contest last night. They all got good scores from us. And they are not the type to talk about such things outside their own group.'
'So, all in all, my day is likely looking up.'
(_)
Half hour later, Lee came down into the lobby, and he met with Sam, whom looked well, given the news he had received from Lee, the previous night, about Lee dying of cancer.
Sam was sitting in one of the chairs on the right side of the lobby, facing the check in desk, near the elevator bay.
Lee also saw that none of Revy and Rock's group were there.
As both men saw each other, Sam got up, and walked over to him. He said, “Good morning, Lee. I hope you rested well.”
Lee answered, “I did. How was your night?”
Sam coyly responded, “Longer than I hoped it would be. But, I did get some good rest... About what you told me last night that you have...”
Lee interrupted, “Don't worry about it. Nothing either of us can do about it. All I am going to do is enjoy the time I have left.” He mentally added, 'And if Revy and the others learn I have cancer, it will blow my cover. Because they will realize that I am the writer, and the reason I am close to them is to steal one of their reality device, to save my own life.'
Sam replied, “Okay.”
Lee mentioned, “Also, after breakfast, I have an errand to run, for an hour, or so. If it is okay with you. I will meet back up with you here, and we will head to Rats Nest afterward. So, we can continue are day as normal. If not, I can dropped you off somewhere, before I go on my errand.”
Sam stated, “That is fine. I will wait for you here. Then, we will got to the Rats Nest later this morning.”
Lee said, “Glad to hear it. Now, let's get get some breakfast.”
Both men then exited the lobby, as they headed for the hotel restaurant, to get some breakfast from the buffet.
(_)
Lee found that he was correct about breakfast. As Lee and Sam ate their breakfast at the bar counter, with Revy and her group leaving them alone. With the women talking amongst themselves, as usual, as had they had their own breakfast.
After finishing their meals, Lee and Sam parted ways for the next hour, or so.
(_)
Nearby, at the tables in front stage, Revy watched Sam and Lee leave the room. She then turned back to her group, as she continued their conversation.
Revy, like many of the women at the table she was at, and the tables around her, had finished their breakfast, and they were just enjoying the discussion they were having with each other.
Revy was sitting at the table with Rock, Dutch, Janet, and Benny, as she commented, “Too bad Chang would not let us know in what his plan is, last night.”
Benny said, “That is completely understandable. The writer might have been in that crowd, and overheard our conversation.”
Revy conceded, “True. And I think that is the reason he and River are staying at the hotel across the island. The writer knows River is a telepath. If they stay here, they will drive away the writer. So, they are staying in a hotel, on the other side of the island. On the bright side, we can visit them, and find out their plans, then. Also, it is going to be a lot more fun with them here.”
From the table that Ranma, Akira, Natsuru, Yurika, Nodoka, Mikoto, shared, Mikoto commented, “Still, I wonder why the judges, and Melvin got out of here so quickly after the contest? They practically out paced the audience in leaving.”
Lotton commented, “Mikoto, if you were put into a position of judging very violent, questionably sane women, would you stick around afterward, and risk one of them being upset with the scores you gave them?”
Mikoto answered, “No.”
Dutch stated, “Been there. Done that. I didn't stick around for the aftermath, myself. So, I can understand why they ran right after the contest was over.”
Some of the women, including Dutch, started lightly laughing, for a few seconds, from her comment.
As the women calmed down, Rock said, “You know. That talent contest was similar to that bikini contest at Roanapur. But, that was likely because many of the contestants that were in the bikini contest, were in this talent contest.”
Benny remarked, “Yes. But, there were some differences. Like better taste in clothing in last night's contest.”
Akira stated, “Yea. And less bloodlust towards the winner, this time.”
Revy commented, “I hate to admit it, but Eda did earn her victory.”
From a nearby table, that she shared with her sisters, Kristina, Sarah, Yukio and Rebecca, Molly commented, “Yes. Who knew she was that good at singing and dancing?”
At a table, Sawyer said, “She never showed that type of skill at the bikini parties.”
Rock pointed out, “All of us have talents that we keep to ourselves.”
At another table, Violin stated, “True.” She turned to Dutch, as she complimented, “By the way, Dutch. That was a nice performance of, Ghost Riders in the Sky.”
Dutch turned to Violin, as she replied, “Thanks. You're flukes skill are pretty good. Though, I didn't care for the song you picked.”
Violin said, “It was a matter of personal tastes.”
At the same table that Violin was sitting at, Aeryn turned to the table that had Shenhua, Lotton, and Sawyer shared, as she asked, “Are we still on for today?”
Shenhua answered, “Yes. We are.”
Ranma turned to Shenhua and Aeryn, as she asked, “What are you guys up to, today?”
Aeryn answered, “Violin is going to be busy showing.... Someone around town today. While, she is doing so, I will be spending the day with Shenhua, Sawyer, and Lotton, training, and shopping.”
Ranma looked around the table, at their faces. All of them had the same unspoken question. Ranma asked, “Can we come with you?”
Aeryn shrugged, as she replied, “Sure.”
Revy turned to Violin, as she inquired, “And who is this mysterious person, Violin?”
Violin looked at Revy, as she coyly said, “Someone from out of town that I still talk to, on occasion. She is interested in this reality, and I am going to meet her in an hour, to show her around this town. Still, Aeryn can barely tolerate her.”
Revy realized who Violin was talking about. She replied, “Ah. That person.”
Violin responded, “Yes. And thank you for not mentioning her name. Her name might spook the writer into running. But, she is only going to be here for the day.”
Rock said, “It is always nice to have another set of eyes on the problem.” She mentally added, 'Especially a set that can read heat, and tell if someone is lying.'
Violin replied, “I agree”
Molly requested, “Violin. Aunt Rock, and I have something planned for today. If your friend is here, I would like to include you two also in our plan.”
Violin responded, “Sure. What do you have in mind?”
Molly told Violin her plan.
Violin stated, “I like this plan. It will put to rest if Lee, or Sam, is the writer, once and for all.”
Molly said, “Exactly.” She thought, 'And if Violin's friend is who I think she is. Then, even the writer will not be able to fool her.'
Then, women then continued their conversation for some time after they finished their breakfasts. They then separated, to go about their day.
(_)
It was ten fifteen AM, as Lee was driving, down the road, with Pedro, to Pedro's brother's Paciano's beach house, in his pink convertible. The top of the hood and side windows were down, as both men enjoy the fresh air of the sunny, cool morning.
Pedro was sitting beside Lee, in the front passenger seat, on the right side of the car, with both of them having their seat belts on.
Presently, Lee was driving at the speed limit, down the right lane, of the deserted, though will maintain, two lane, paved road. With the road running along the beach, with the beach to their left side.
As Lee drove, Pedro requested, “If you don't mind, I would like you to stay with the car.”
Lee kept his eyes on the road in front of him, as he replied, “Sure.” he Then sarcastically remarked, “Do you want me to open your door as well?”
Pedro let out a laugh. He then said, in a jovial tone of voice, “Nah. I have to draw the line somewhere.”
Lee grinned at Pedro's humor, as he stated, “That works of me.”
Lee then continued to drive them down the road.
(_)
Lee and Pedro made it to Paciano's beach house at ten twenty-five AM.
Lee drove his pink Cadillac on the drive, through the open steel gate, and passed the concrete walls on that inland side of the home.
Lee turned his car around in the driveway. He parked his car about twenty feet from the drive entrance door to the house, on the left side of the driveway. With his car facing the facing the open gate. In case he had to make a quick getaway.
After Lee put the car in park, and turned on the ignition. Lee pulled out the key, and pocketed the keys in his pants pocket. Next, Pedro and Lee took off their seatbelts.
Both men got of the car, with Lee leaning his back against his left side of his car, on his car door, while he watched Pedro walk to the entrance door.
Just as Pedro about about to open the door, the door opened up, with Pedro stepping out of the way.
Pedro and Lee then watched as a real estate agent walked outside, from the open door.
Lee saw the agent was a middle-aged hispanic man with full brown hair, and clean shaved face. He was of average height, with a slightly heavy build, but not fat. He worse a business suit, and black dress shoes. Also, he carried a closed briefcase in his left hand.
As the two men shook hands, the agent said, in spanish, “Good morning, Chief Del Soto.”
Pedro said, in spanish, “Good morning, Sans. How is the real estate business going with you and Isandro?”
Meanwhile, As Lee leaned against his left car door, he thought, 'Fortunately, I am close enough to hear them. And this is why I don't want anyone to know that I learned spanish. For conversations like this. Where others speak spanish, while thinking I am an ignorant american, whom does not know the local language.'
Meanwhile, at the doorstep, the door remained open. Sans walked a few feet away from the door. He then turned to face Pedro, as he answered Pedro's question, “Great actually. Isandro is handling another, bigger sell by this same guy. With the combined commission, we are thinking about taking a vacation for a few weeks and going shark fishing with Emily and Grace.”
Pedro replied, “Sound great. Tell them all I said, hi.”
Sans said, “I will.”
Pedro thought, 'Emily and Grace are sisters. Emily the eldest sister, by a few of years. Sans married Emily. Emily works as a cashier at the Devil's Hotel. And Grace works as a waitress at a good Italian restaurant in town. And Grace is married Isandro. Neither couple has any kids. Though, they are great people. Still, I need to find out who this buyer is, before I do anything else.'
Pedro asked, “So, when we will I be meeting this buyer.”
Sans answered, “The buyer is here. He is right behind me.”
A second later, second man exited the home, while closing the door behind him.
All three men looked him.
The man in question was a black hair chinese man in his mid-twenties. His hair went down to his neck line. He was in great physical shape.
The black haired, chinese man wore a black long coat, over a nice business suit. The black long coat ended half way down his shins. The suit consisted a white t-shirt, under a white buttons up shirt, with a dark blue tie. There was a pair of black men's formal dress pants. Over the shirt and tie was a black, closed waistcoat vest, that when down far enough to completely cover his black leather belt, which was around his waist.
There was a long white scarf, that went around the under side of the turtle neck of the man's open coat, with the white scarf being draped down the front sides of his coat, to just below where his waistcoat vest ended, around his waist. Also, on his feet, he wore a light shade of black side-gusset dress shoe loafers, over light black socks. And he wore browline sunglasses over his eyes.
Lee and Pedro both remained calm, as they immediately recognized the man as Chang, in his male form.
Though, in the inside, Lee thought, with worry, 'Oh crap. Chang isn't just visiting this city. He is planning to move here. I am starting to regret dragging Pedro into this. He doesn't deserve this type of mess.'
Meanwhile, Pedro thought, 'Of all the people to buy my home, it has to be this Chang. The sad part is he will likely give me the best offer. If I turn down his offer, I will definitely make him an enemy. I don't want to be in his sights just yet. Since it is a legal transactions, that is nothing wrong with accepting his money for this. It is not a bribe. Also, I have no interest in this home. So, I have no problems selling it.'
'And I am so happy that I have already removed the records, and other things in this home, that could tip off Chang about me, and my brother.'
'This includes my brothers anime and other fictional collections. And any weapons I could find. And boy did has have a number of weapons. Not counting what I kept myself. The department weapons locker got a minor upgrade in weapons, ammo, and equipment, from what I found here.'
'Finally, I met him last night, in his female form, as Daiyu. So, he probably knows who I am from the other women. Though, neither of us cannot reveal that to the other, without tipping our hand...'
While Pedro did not show it on the outside, on the inside, he continued his thoughts, with annoyance, 'Damn it. This must be how Lee thinks all the time.'
Pedro forced himself to calm down, as he mentally reflect, with mild amusement, 'Still, this cloak and dagger stuff can be fun.'
'I would not even be surprised if Chang didn't have replacement pistols, of those he had in the Black Lagoon series, that he lost at the end of book two of Lee's stories. With thise replacement pistols coming complete with the chinese dragons and heavily dragon chinese symbols engraved in his grips, in his duel holsters, behind his lower back, strapped to his belt, in dual hostlers'
Chang walked over to Pedro and Sans. He came to a stop, to where San's was to his left front side, and Pedro was to his right front side.
As Change looked around, and he recognized Lee and Pedro. He thought, 'Now, this is in an interesting turn of events. So, the judge Del Soto, no Police Chief Del Soto, is the owner of this home. Still, he does not recognize me from last night, because I was in my female form, last night.'
'So, I am going to have to get him to reintroduce himself, or it could cause problems, if I accidentally mention his name, without first officially knowing his name. Still, if that happens, I can just say that I have heard of him. And he should let it slide.'
'Also, the person by the car, is another judge from last night. From what the girls told me, last night, I believe his name is, Lee. Curiouser and curiouser. That those two would be here, together.'
Chang turned his attention back to San and Pedro, as he mentally replied, 'Though, back to the matter at hand. I am not fully fluent in spanish, yet. But, River is giving me lessons. So, I am going to have to speak english for right now.'
Chang turned to Pedro. He played dump, as he stated, in english, “Hello. I am Bai Ji-Shin Chang.” He then offered Pedro a handshake with his right hand.
Pedro thought, 'I might as well shake his hand. This is how some of the most dangerous conflicts start. And if I refuse, he will take it as an insult. So, it will be worse.”
Pedro shook Chang's hand, with his right hand. Both men noted the other man's grip was firm, but not tight.
Pedro thought, 'Well, with a handshake like that, I guess Chang is a better man then I thought.'
As they continued, to shake hands, Pedro stated, in english, “Nice to meet you, Mister Chang. I am Police Chief Pedro Del Soto of the city De La Plata Podrido.”
Chang thought, 'Well, unlike Chief Watsup, this Chief Del Soto's handshake is firm and not limpwristed. This is good.'
They then broke the handshake.
Chang turned to look at the home behind him. He then turned back to Pedro, as he complimented, “You have a nice home here, Chief Del Soto.”
Pedro thought, 'I do not know how much he knows about me. So, I might as well be honest.'
Pedro said, “It is actually my brother's home. He gave it to me. And I have no need for it. And I must say, the price you are welling to pay for this home is very generous.”
Pedro mentally added, 'I am sure you want to keep in the good graces of the local law here. That is why you are paying slightly more than the asking price. Not enough to raise any eyebrows, but enough to get my attention. And this is technically not a bribe. So, I am going to let it slide.'
Chang thought, 'The amount I am paying is nothing compare to the wealth I have access to. Still, if paying for this home, at the amount I offered, makes the local Police Chief happy, then it is money will spent.'
'Besides, I like this home. It is a really nice home. And after taking a tour of the inside, I found that his place comes almost completely furnished. I get the feeling his brother left here in a hurry. I will have to find out why, later.'
Chang said, “Thank you.”
Pedro thought, 'Now, to get some information. I need to know if he is still just visiting. Or, if he is planning on staying. Given the reality technology he has. He could literally do both. By him using time dilation. With him going on vacation here, but for us, he is here all the time. As such, when he left this reality, or even time, for business, or pleasure. He would only be going for a few minutes, for those of us in this reality.'
Pedro inquired, “Mister Chang. I was wondering. Are you planning on using this as a vacation home, or are you planning on moving to the island?”
Chang though, 'Given he is the police chief of this island city, it is only natural for him to ask these questions. So, there is not reason to lie.'
Chang stated, “Actually, I will have another place on the island. I plan use this home as a retreat and for formal parties. Though, I will keep up the place. So, the building and property does not deprecate in value.”
Pedro remained calm on the outside, as he inwardly winched. He thought, 'I was afraid of this. I wonder where the other place is. Still, I need to get out of here, and talk with Lee, on what our next move will be.'
Pedro said, “It sounds like you will make good use out of this place. And you will maintain it. Which is fine, with me. Anyway, I have to leave in a minute. I have city run.”
Chang grinned, as he said, “I can sympathize.”
Pedro thought, 'I bet you can. Now, to arrange for me to close this deal.'
Pedro turned to Sans, as he request, “Get the paperwork ready. I will meet you in your office, later this afternoon, to sign everything.”
Sans answered, in english, for the benefit of Chang, “That will be fine.”
Pedro turned back to Chang, as he stated, “Mister Chang, if you have any problems in the city, give me a call at the police department, and ask for me. They should transfer you to me.”
Pedro thought, 'I am heading off a whole host of problems by letting Chang know that he has the option of contacting me. I don't know what I would do, if I did meet him in an official capacity. But, by him calling me, I can make sure he comes into the station, alone. With River not being with him.'
Chang thought, 'I think that might be an olive branch.' He replied, “We'll see.”
Pedro looked at both of men, as he stated, “Okay. And good day, gentlemen.”
Pedro then turned around, and walked back to the pink convertible.
Lee saw him coming. Lee got into the driver's side of the car. A few seconds later, Pedro got into the front passenger side of the car.
Less than a minute later, Chang and Sans watched, as Lee and Pedro slowly drove away, and out the gate.
Chang mentally noted, 'Neither of them actually looked at me. They didn't even raise an eyebrow at the way I looked, nor that I was a foreigner. Interesting. I will have to dig a little deeper on finding out more about them both. Also, I have plans, later today, on learning more about Lee and the other poker player, Sam. Among other people.'
(_)
Meanwhile, in the pink Cadillac, after Lee turned onto the road, and he was about fifty yards from the beach home, he inquired, “Where to?”
Pedro answered, “The Last Resort.”
Lee joked, “You're getting an early start.”
Pedro flatly stated, “Can the injokes.”
Lee lightly chuckled, as he said, “Come on. In these situations, it is better to laugh, than to cry.”
Pedro questioned, “Perhaps. So, how much of the conversation did you hear?”
Lee thought, 'All of it. But, I don't want you to know that.' He coyly answered, “Enough.”
Pedro said, “Well, we will talk about this over coffee, at the Last Resort.”
Lee agreed, “Good idea.” He thought, 'Once Chang showed up, as the buyer. I figured you would want to immediately talk to me, about this. And the Last Resort is a good place to do so. Especially, at this time in the morning. Where there is no crowd. And few, if any customers.'
Lee then headed for the Last Resort Diner.
(_)
Twenty minutes minutes later, both men were sitting at their usual booth, at the back right corner table, inside the Last Resort Diner.
Given the situation, and how Lee wanted to keep Pedro in his good graces. Lee did not disagree having Pedro sitting with his back to the wall, while Pedro faced the entrance.
Fortunately, it was late morning, and lunch rush had not hit the restaurant rate. So, except for Lee and Pedro. The only other people in the dining room and cook area, were the staff of the diner. The two waitresses, Lori, and Mary. And the cook, George.
And the three employees knew to give Lee and Pedro their privacy. So presently, Lee and Pedro were not that worried about being overheard.
By then, Lori had already served them each a cup of coffee. And the danger they were in, from having both Chang and River in town, was finally starting hit them, as they were having problems keeping their cups of coffee from shaking in their hands.
As both men set their cups of coffee back down on the table between them, Lee quietly said, “Oh my, what have we done?”
Pedro heard what Lee said. He looked up at Lee, as he retorted, “Who's we, Tonto? You wrote that damn story. You lead them here. Now, a interdimensional warlord is here, in my city.”
Lee turned to Pedro, as he stated, “Chang is bad, but not that bad.”
Pedro flatly responded, “Okay. Instead of a interdimensional warlord. We have to deal with a reality traveling, dangerously genre savvy, gender bending, magnificent bastard slash bitch, of a criminal boss, whom has decided to move to my city.” He sarcastically added, “Sound better?”
Lee said, in an embarrassing tone of voice, “No.”
Pedro went onto say, “My point, exactly. As I was saying, Chang is here now. For some reason De La Plata Podrido has caught his eye. And I don't think the only reason he is here is for you.”
Lee pointed out, “Well, you and your brother, should have never compared Plata Podrido with Roanapur.”
Pedro admitted, with a hint of anger in his voice, which was more towards himself, than Lee, “I realize that, now. And by buying my brother's beach house, Chang is clearly planning on staying here a while. He even said he is planning to live elsewhere, on the island. My brother's beach house is just for business functions. And I did not ask where he was living, because I had no excuse to do so. Still, it does not take a genius to figure out that he is likely going to set up shop here, somewhere, on my island.”
Pedro thought, 'Somewhere I need to find out as quickly as possible. From back channels, that cannot immediately be traced back to him. I will look into that, when I get back to the station.'
Lee inquired, “But how? In my stories, I left Chang as a deck hand, on his, or her, way to being a hired gun, for Mal, on the Serenity. Chang didn't have any wealth to put back together an operation like that. Along those lines, I am still trying to figure out how Chang came up with the money to afford your brother's beach house. I doubt the Serenity crew loaned the money. Beside which, Chang never struck me as someone whom allow himself to intentionally get into debt with someone else.'
Pedro agreed, “That is a good question.”
Both men thought over Lee's question, for a few seconds.
A thought then occurred to Pedro, as he inquired, “Whatever happened to the gold that Chang took with him, or her, at the time, at the end of book two?”
Lee answered, “I already thought of that. River made Chang donate that gold to charity.”
Pedro said, “And trying to hack the banks for money would not work here. Too many eyes watching too closely. Chang could have created hidden caches of treasure and technology in other realities, before his organization was destroyed in book two?”
Lee thought about Pedro's comment for a few seconds. Lee then looked up at Pedro, with a shock expression on his face. He admitted, “I don't know. I didn't realize that. That was something I overlooked.”
Pedro sarcastically replied, “Just great.”
Lee slightly whined, “One plot hole.” He held up his right index finger in front of himself, as he continued, “Just one.” He dropped his right hand back to his side, as he went onto say, “And it comes back to bite my home planet in the ass.”
Pedro responded, “Yes. When you screw up, your screw ups are epic in their ramifications. Plus, the Serenity crew are very reasonable in such matters. So, they will probably now be working for Chang as his, men... women... err, whatever.... Damn it. Now, you got me doing that.”
Lee could not help chuckled, for a few seconds, from Pedro's reaction.
As Lee calmed down, he said, with a bit of humor in his tone of voice, “I wrote that running gag because I kept doing it myself, as I wrote my stories.” Lee continued, in a more serious tone of voice, “Anyway, I have a full plate of villains to deal with. Chang can be your arch-nemesis.”
Pedro calmly replied, “That is not funny.”
Lee flatly said, “It was not intended to be. If you think about, you are like Chang's shadow archetype.”
Pedro inquired, “What do you mean?” He thought, 'I would like to see Lee's logic on this.'
Lee answered, “I have been here long enough to learn the back story of this city. And your personal history, as well. Where Chang allowed the corruption around him to consume him, you rose above the corruption you dealt with. I admire that about you.”
“You worked your way up from rookie police officer, to being promoted to chief of police in this city. And then, with the help of your brother, you cleaned up this city to where the crime was directed, controlled, and at a manageable level. Where people could live in peace. That is why you hate bribery. Because you know once you start down that path, you may end up like Chang. Or worse.”
Pedro responded, “I see your point. And yes. That is why I loath bribery. And that is why I do not do drugs. Though, I have to allow there to be a market in town, given the smuggling is one of the sources of money for this community. Still, I only allow it within reason.”
Pedro mentally reflected, 'And with my brother gone, I have to remind those drug sellers what, within reason, is, on a nearly weekly basis. I miss you, Paciano. Without you helping me, everything has gotten a lot tougher for me here. On top of these violent lunatics, from other realities, coming to town.'
Lee requested, in a slightly comforting tone of voice, “Listen Pedro. We can still savage the situation. All you have to do is keep your ear to the ground about Chang. We know who he is. We know what he is. We know what he is capable of. He does not know we know this. That gives us an edge. We need to use that edge for as long as possible.”
Pedro replied, “I agree.”
Lee stated, “Still, keep in mind that Chang is one smooth customer. He is a ruthless as they come. But, he is also very practical. He prefers not to have a war, because it is bad for business. And he is not going to start a war here, with anyone, because it would attract unwanted attention, from outside the island.”
“Now Pedro, if you are as half as good, and as savvy, as I think you are. I think you can handle Chang, and his crew, in savvy ways. Though, Chang likely hired others to work for him. So, be ready for some wildcards to show up, and for some wild times.”
“Though, do not approach Chang. Have him come to you. That way you can limit the meetings to just you and him. If you go to him, there is a risk that River will be nearby, and if she reads your mind, then the game is over for both us.”
Pedro stated, “I already realized that last part.” He thought, 'Though, you make a lot of other good points that I should consider.'
Lee said, “Good. And if worse comes to worse, negotiate with him. You might be able to work something out with him.”
Pedro responded, “Just thinking about the option turns my stomach. I only dealt with my brother because I knew him very well, and since childhood. He is a decent guy. The same cannot be said of Chang. But, I will keep in mind what you have said.”
Lee replied, “That is all I ask. And, by the way, since we are meeting, right now. Let us skip tonight's meeting.”
Pedro said, “Agreed.”
The two men then continued their conversation for a while, then Lee drove Pedro back to the police station.
After Lee dropped off Pedro, head headed to the Devil's Hotel, where he met with Sam. Lee then drove Sam and himself, to the Rats Nest, for their usual poker game.
(_)
A few hours later, it was the early afternoon, as Sam and Lee returned to the Rats Nest, after having lunch together, at a good cuban restaurant, nearby the Rats Nest, in Plata Podrido.
Besides Sam and Lee, the only other person in the bar at that time of the day was the bartender.
They were sitting at their usual places at the back left corner table, as they bet against each other with their money, in their friendly, ongoing game. Sam had his back to the corner. And Lee was facing the windows to the left side of the room, with his back to the bar counter. This allow Lee to see the entrance to the Rats Nest bar, with the corner of his right eye.
Sam was currently having a beer, while Lee was having a bottle of lemonade.
While Sam looked at the cards in his hand, he said, with a bit of relief in his tone of voice, “I am so happy to get back into the groove of doing these.”
Lee looked at his cards, as he agreed, “Me too.”
Sam looked over at Lee, as he commented, “I will be honest. I look forward to when I play poker with you, Lee. It is honest. It is pleasant. And it is sane.”
Lee turned towards Sam, as he joked, “Like fishing. Only you don't get sea sick.”
In response, to Lee's comment, Sam chuckled, for a few seconds. Sam then stated, “Exactly.”
Meanwhile, Lee thought, 'I guess with a hellcat for a girlfriend, you would need a port in the storm of her insanity. But, hey. A long as she does not effect my personal life. I could care less what type of girlfriend you have.'
Sam commented, “Okay. Let's continue this poker game.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. Let's do that.”
The two men played out their hand, with Sam winning the pot for that round.
Sam collected all the cards from that hand, along with the pot.
As Sam was about the shuffle the cards, both men heard the front door to the bar open. And they soon heard the door close.
From their table, Sam and Lee looked at the newcomers, as did the bartender, from her location, behind the bar counter, across the room.
The three adults looked over to see Rock, in his male form, wearing his old business man's suit, and black tennis shoes. He had his long black hair in a ponytail, with a black scrunchy.
With Rock was Molly. She had her blond hair left loose, as her hair drapped down her back, to her shoulder blades. Molly wore a white blouse, a green long skirt, and green tennis shoes. She did not have her two semi-automatic pistols, nor shoulder holsters, with her.
Lee noted both newcomers were walking towards his and Sam's table.
Lee thought, 'Rock must be using a packet of instant spring of drown man. This could cause problems for everyone, if someone spills hot water on Rock, and Rock changes back into a woman in front of us.'
As Rock and Molly approached Sam and Lee's corner table, Lee calmly greeted them, “Hello Molly. Hello Mister Okajima. It has been a while.”
Rock replied, “Yes. It has.” He thought, 'Considering he met my past self, and my male form, when we first got here. I wonder.' He asked, “So, you remember out previous meeting?”
Lee said, “Vaguely.”
Lee thought, 'The only two times I met you Rock, as a guy, was a few nights after you first came. Then, I met your much earlier past self, right after the time loop. Though, the only official meeting with your male self, was when I was pretending to be drunk, when your crew first came here. So, the, vaguely, answer would likely work.'
Rock thought, 'Well, he was drunk at the time, as I introduced myself to him, as a guy. And I don't remember enough when I met him, decades ago my time, when I accidentally came here. So, I will have to let this line of inquiry go.'
Lee notice Rock had not said anything more, as he thought, 'Good. I believe he is going to drop the matter. Now, I need to know why they are here?' He asked, “So, what brings you down here this afternoon?”
Molly answered, “We wanted to get to the know two of the judges from last night's contest.”
Rock stated, “What my niece is trying to say is we would like to play a few rounds of poker with you.”
Sam commented, “As long as you got money, go ahead.”
Lee thought, 'If I say, no. I will only raise questions for myself. So, I might as well say...' Lee said, “I agreed with, Sam. Just give me a moment to move around, so you can sit down.” He mentally added, 'Also, I best not ask about the niece comment. That sounds like he is still baiting me. Or, us.'
Rock thought, 'Okay. They are not take the bait on the niece comment. Oh well.'
Lee moved a few chairs closer to Sam's left side, with Rock sitting next to Lee's left side. Molly sat by Rock's left side.
Rock pulled out some U.S. dollar bills for the both himself, and his niece.
After a few hands of poker, Rock won one hand, Molly won another hand, and Lee won a hand.
Meanwhile, across the room, the bartender looked over at the table, as she thought, 'Sam and Lee are usually quiet. Though, given who is with them, I am not surprised. I should watch my mouth, as well, in this situation.'
A few seconds later, everyone heard the front door open, and moments later, again.
All five adults looked to see that it that another woman had walked though the door.
While Lee did not show any outward reaction, inwardly he was not happy at who is was.
It was Chang in his female form, Daiyu. She wore a long black skirt, over some black women's boxer shorts.
Also, she wore a sport bra, under a white t-shirt. Over the white t-shirt she wore her a shoulder holsters, with a semi-automatic pistol under each of her armpits.
The pistols were replicas of her original pistols, with chinese dragon engraved grips.
Over her weapons and shirt, she wore a feminine styled, black cloth jacket, which was left open.
She also wore a pair white shocks, and black tennis shoes.
Daiyu also had on her browline sunglasses. Besides her weapons, this was the only article of clothing she had on, which she on during her earlier meeting, with Pedro, at the breach house, while she was in her male form.
Lee thought, 'What is Chang doing here? Probably checking out Sam and I. The girls probably told her we usually come here. And they gave her direction. Still, there not much I can do about this situation. Though, I thought she would be enjoying her new beach house, today. I guess I underestimated Chang's scheduling abilities.'
Meanwhile, Daiyu walked up to the table, where Sam, Lee, Molly, and Rock, were sitting at. When she reached the table, she came to a stop, as she just stood there, as she silently stared at both Lee and Sam for a few seconds.
Lee noticed Daiyu's staring. Lee remained calm, as he thought, 'Has Chang figured out I am the writer? No, she has not been here that long. And I was careful last night, in my thoughts, when River showed up. Along with Pedro. So, I should be fine for the moment, on that front. Though, this current front is a completely different matter.'
Daiyu then politely said, in the most innocent tone of voice she could muster, in english, “Hello. My name if Daiyu. I was in the talent contest, last night. I was wondering if I could join you four, for a few hands of poker.”
Lee could see Rock and Molly were trying to keep themselves from bursting out laughing.
Lee kept his poker face on, as he thought, with amusement, 'Oh, playing the innocent girl routine. I can see why those two are trying hard not to laugh. Well, nice try Chang. But, I know better. And I am sure Sam does, as well. Or, at the very least, I know that Sam has a girlfriend, so he will not fall for your tricks. Though, I still have to play along.”
Lee said, “Sure. Sit down. Your money is good here.”
Daiyu walked over to sit in a chair, between Lee left side, and Molly's right side. She then pulled out some U.S. cash, for her to bet with.
Lee made no attempt to stop her.
There were few more hands of cards, with Daiyu and Sam winning the hands.
Sam and Lee continued to remain silent, as the other three players talked with each other, while being careful not to give away their secrets to the two men, they were sitting by.
A few minutes later, everyone heard the front door open for a third time. And then close, a few seconds later.
The adults in the room turned to the front door. They saw Violin walk in. She wore brown pants, a black t-shirt, with dark blue tennis shoes. With her was a fair skinned woman, with short white hair, that Lee felt he had seen before, but he could not place her face.
The white haired woman was in her mid-twenties, and she wore a black short sleeved blouse, black pants, and black cowgirl boots.
Both women then walked to Lee and Sam's table.
A few seconds later, it was the woman's choose clothing, along with being with Violin, that tipped Lee off as to who the white haired woman was.
It took all of Lee's will power not to show any outward emotion, as he mentally screamed, 'Oh crap! That is Scorpius, with Violin! And I now remember, she was on TV, with that, we want the writer, broadcast, on all the TV stations. What is she doing here?!'
As the two women came to a stop, as the corner table, where the five adults were sitting, Violin and Scorpius turned to them.
Violin said, “Hi everyone. My friend here came to visit, from out of town. Her name is... Halley.”
Lee saw Scorpius take a quick look at Violin, before turning back to look towards everyone at the table.
Violin then started pointing out the people at the table, with her right hand, as she continued, “Now, clockwise. This is Molly, R... Rokuro Okajima, Sam, Lee, and Daiyu.
Scorpius calmly stated, “Yes. I am Halley. It is so good to meet all of you.”
Sam replied, “Likewise.”
Lee just simply nodded, as he kept himself from chuckling. He silently realized, in thought, 'Violin must have come up with name on the spot. But why Halley... Of course, Harvey and Halley. And Violin would introduce Scorpius to everyone, so that she would not slip up and state one of our names, without us knowing how she learned about us. I have wrote about that trick. I have personally pulled that trick. And I know how to recognize that trick.'
But, Lee's thoughts turned more grim, as he continued his mental reflection, 'Still, what is this?! A convention?! Oh no! If they are are working together, then the net is closing. They likely know who I am, they are playing with me, and I am fucked!... Calm down. Get a grip. If I freak out, and they don't know, they will figure out I am the writer. I have to remain calm.'
'The good news is none of them are mind readers. The bad news is Scorpius is the next best thing. She can read heat signatures with her eyes. She can tell if I lie. It is a good guess she already knows I am lying. Though, that cannot be helped.'
'Also, if this Scorpius is as devious as her comic counterpart. Which she is. From the TV series and mini-series, she is one hell of a bluffer. Her counterpart, in the comic series timeline, once convinced an entire galactic empire to surrender to him, on a bluff. And he was the best bluffer in the multiverse. She is likely on par with him.'
'The worst news is that all five of these people are incredibly sharp. Rock and Chang probably know every angle there is to play. For Rock at least, my only advantage is he thinks I am ignorant of the situation around me. Molly, whom is the reincarnation of Yukio, from Black Lagoon, is almost as sharp as these two. Violin, AKA reincarnated John Crichton, is extremely genre savvy. I crack an injoke with her, and she will nail me to the wall. And Scorpius could give Sherlock Holmes lessons on having an eye for the details.'
'Whether Sam is more intelligent than me is irrelevant. The only hope I have of getting out of this situation, with my hide intact, is to play this from the angle that I am the dumbest, ignorant person here, at this table. Though, like Mister Downey said in the movie, Tropic Thunder. Never go full retard.'
'My only lucky break is that half of them don't like the other half that well. And they officially are not suppose to know each other, in front of Sam and I. But, if a fight breaks out. At their level. I could still end up dead. I am going to have to play this real smooth.'
Violin requested, “We would like to play some poker with you?”
Sam sarcastically said, “Why not? As long as you have money, we're good.”
Violin moved to set beside Rock, to Rock's left side. With Scorpius sitting beside Violin, to her left side, and by Sam, to his right side.
As second later, Violin pulled out some cash, and handed some of it to Scorpius.
As Sam shuffled the cards, he asked, “Before I start. Halley, do you know how to play poker?”
Lee thought, 'Why are you asking that question, Sam? And why only, Scorpius? And not also Violin?'
Sam continued, “While I have seen Violin, and Molly play poker. It is logical guess that Molly's uncle knew how to play power. As well as Daiyu, since she is clearly a friend of Molly and Violin. But Halley, I do not know if you know how to play poker?'
Lee thought, 'Sam either a lot sharper than I thought. Or, he is playing his own game. Either way is not good me. Still, he is my only real friend here. So, I will not push the matter with him.'
Scorpius answered, “I have played this game a few times. A friend of mine, where I live, taught me. She learned to enjoy the game during her time in America.”
Lee thought, 'So, Meka taught Scorpius how to play poker. That does not surprise me.'
Sam said, “Good. Now, lets play a few hands.”
Sam then dealt the cards.
(_)
Across the room the bartender could see what was going on. She thought, 'Okay. This is getting interesting. And I think Sam and Lee could use a little help.'
The bartender than walked out, from behind the bar counter.
As the bartender walked over to the group, at the corner table, in back, across from the bar counter, she was that Violin won the hand.
When the bartender made it to the table, all eyes turned to her.
The bartender pulled out a small note pad and pent, as she inquired, “So, what does everyone want to drink?”
Sam and Lee said, in unison, “Coffee!”
Both men did not expect the other to say the same thing, a the same time, as they look at each other, then their eyes turned back to the group in front of them.
Rock stated, “I will have a bottle of chilled water, and a glass for it.”
Lee theorized, in thought, 'Rock is planning ahead. He probably has a packer of spring of drowned man on him, just in case hot water hit hims. He can run to the men's restroom, with the cup, while Molly provides cover. Where Rock would use the packet, with cold water, to change back into a man.'
Daiyu stated, “I am fine.”
Halley commented, “As am I.”
Violin said, “I could use a cold bottle of beer.”
Molly stated, “I will have a bottle of lemonade.”
The bartender wrote down the orders. She then put away her pen, as she turned and left to retrieve their drink orders.
Halley turned to Lee, as she stated, “Lee, I am surprised that you are losing so often.” She turned to Violin. She then looked back at Lee, as she continued, “Violin here stated that you have precognitive abilities.”
From the corner of his left eye, Lee noticed that this caused Chang to raise an eyebrow.
Lee sadly thought, 'Well, there are now two more bad guys, whom now have an interest in me. And there is no point in denying my ability. Since, Scorpius can catch me in a light. So, as the old rule applies. If you cannot deflect your quarry. Then, dazzle them with bullshit.'
Lee turned to Violin, as he continued his thoughts, 'I still need to know how much Violin knows. So, I know how much Scorpius knows.'
Lee calmly asked, “And where did you hear that from, Violin?”
Violin nodded once towards Molly. She turned to Lee, as she stated, “The teenagers in Rock and Revy's group.” She thought, 'It is best I not mention the parent and children relations. Given how young the parents look. That will cause questions to be raised.'
Lee continued to look at Violin, as he thought, 'So, Violin knows just about everything the girls know about my precognitive skills.' He turned to Scorpius, as he continued his thoughts, 'And likely Scorpius knows most of this, as well. So, I might as well be completely open about this.'
Lee said, “Yes. I am precognitive. I just do not use that ability often.” He looked around the table, as he continued, “And I have not used it with all of you, because I don't like cheating at cards.”
Scorpius complimented, “That is admirable.”
Lee turned Scorpius, as he thought, 'Now, to arrange the opportunity to dazzle them.'
Lee offered, “Still, I will even show you a trick after this hand.”
Sam then dealt the cards, with Molly winning the hand.
By then, the bartender returned with a tray for all their drinks. After setting the drinks in the right places, in front of the right people, she left with her empty tray.
As Sam collected the cards, Lee took a sip of his coffee, as he turned to Sam. He set his cup back on the table. Lee requested, “Sam shuffle the deck, and then hand me the cards.”
Sam turned to Lee, as he replied, “Sure.”
Lee then looked around the room, as Sam shuffled the deck.
Everyone noticed that Lee did not looked at the cards, as Sam shuffled them in his hands.
When Sam finished shuffling, he set the deck of cards, on the table, in front of Lee.
Lee looked down at the card. Next, he closed his eyes, as he concentrated. He then said, “Three of clubs.”
Without looking, he used his right hand to pull off the top card, and flip it onto the table, in front of the desk it had belong too.
Everyone saw that it was the three of clubs.
Lee said, “Two of diamonds.”
The next card was the two of diamonds.
Lee said, “Jack of spades.”
The next card was the jack of spades.
Lee said, “Ten of hearts.”
The next card was the ten of hearts.
Jack continued to call out the cards, right before he turned them over.
Out of the fifty-two card, he only missed four times.
When Lee was finished, he opened his eyes, to see looks of astonishment from the crowd around him.
Daiyu complimented, “Now, that is some trick.”
Scorpius agreed, “Quite right. Lee, have you thought about the applications of such an ability?”
Lee calmly answered, “Yes. And I have even thought of the consequences. And possible reprisals of using such an ability.”
Scorpius conceded, “Point taken.”
Lee stated, “While I try not to use this ability when I play other people. I realize that I can never walked into a casino, again. Nor, can I play professional gambling games. Because the moment I was found out, I would be killed. This is why I just usually play with Sam, here.”
Daiyu shrugged, as she replied, “Maybe. It would depend on the situation.”
Lee thought, 'I don't want to know what you are thinking, Chang.' He said, “By the way, Sam was the one that helped me with this ability. His patience in letting me play non-money poker with him, while I figured out how to work my abilities to where I could do this, was invaluable.” He turned to Sam, as he commented, “Thank you, Sam.”
Sam turned to Lee, as he replied, “You're welcome, Lee.”
Molly joked, “You two need to get a room.”
Sam and Lee ignored Molly's comment, as they turned back to looked at the rest of the group at the table.
Sam then collected the cards, and he began to shuffle them.
Lee thought, 'Now, my turn.' Lee asked, “So, what brings all of you to this bar? It cannot just be for a few hands of cards, with us.”
While Scorpius and Daiyu remained calm, Lee could see that the question caught Molly, Rock, and Violin off guard.
Violin lied, “I heard from Revy and Rock that this was a great place to get a drink. So, I brought Halley with me, to check this bar out. Before I brought Aeryn here.” She thought, 'I hope Scorpius is not too annoyed with this alias, I had to come up with, on the spot.'
Meanwhile, inside Violin's mind, Harvey was laughing.
Violin mentally admitted, 'Yes. I named her after you. Harvey and Halley.'
Harvey stopped laughing, as he mentally said, 'I know. That is what makes it so funny.'
Meanwhile, at the poker table, Scorpius snorted at the alias Violin had just given her. But, she did not reply.
Molly commented, “My reasons are about the same, as Violin. That is why I brought my uncle here.”
Rock said, “Yes. And I have found this to be a nice bar.”
Sam requested, “Then, be sure to leave a tip. This bartender here works hard at her job.”
Rock turned to Sam, as he replied, “We will.”
Then, it was Daiyu's turned. Daiyu was completely honest, as she answered, “Since you two judged the talent contest last night, I just wanted to check you two out. The girls told me where to find you.”
Lee thought, 'Nice way to answer, Chang. Straightforward honesty can be used as the perfect cover. Because it offers not questions in polite conversation, to dig deeper, for more information. And it confirms my suspicions.'
Lee around the table, as he said, “Thank you for the information. Now, let us go back to playing cards.”
Scorpius replied, “Of course.”
Daiyu commented, “Yes. I could use some more money.”
Rock said, “So can I.”
Sam then collected the cards from Lee. He put them back into one deck. Shuffled the cards. And he dealt out their next hand.
(_)
As the seven adults continued playing hand after hand of cards, they struck up a casual conversation, with all of them being careful not to tip their hands to the others.
Money moved back and forth from all seven of them.
An hour later, of playing, the stress of the situation was starting to get to Lee, and he poker face was starting to slightly slip.
Lee noticed the reactions from the other places, towards himself. He mentally realized, 'I am starting to get anxious, and they came tell. I have to come up with an excuse. And it is only a half-truth, and not full lie. So, it might not tip Scorpius off.'
Sam noticed Lee state, as well. He turned to Lee, as he asked, “Lee, are you okay?”
Lee turned to Sam, as he thought, 'Damn. He tips my hand. I will just has to use the excuse now.' Lee looked around the table, as he stated, “I sometimes had a problem being around so many sexy women at once.”
The rest the group just laughed, for a few seconds.
As the other adults at the table calm down, Molly commented, “That is very true.” She thought, 'He did something similar, when Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru, introduced him to us. And I believe him.'
Rock thought, 'Now, that Lee is slightly off his game. I can ask him some questions.' Rock turned to Lee, as he asked, “So Lee, why are you in Mexico?”
Lee thought, 'I cannot lie with Scorpius here. So, I just won't tell the whole truth. And then I will change the subject... That would work.' He honestly answered, “Because I am a wanted man back in the states.” He then turned to Scorpius, as he inquired, “So, Halley, are you related to Lotton?”
Lee could see that Violin, Chang, Rock, and Molly were trying to keep themselves from laughing.
Halley stated, “No. Though, I have met Lotton, and given we share the same rare hair color, and similar skin tone, I can see how the mistake could be made.”
Lee replied, “Okay.”
Rock thought, 'Damn. I see this is not going to work. And the longer I stay here, the greater chance of me being exposed to those whom are not the writer.' He looked over at Violin and Scorpius, as he continued his thoughts, 'Also, I will check with Violin, on if Scorpius has anything to say, later.'
Rock looked around the table, as he stated, “Well, to be honest, I think it is time for Molly and I to go.”
Molly turned to Rock, as she looked at Rock's expression. Molly saw that Rock was serious. She continued to look at Rock, as responded, “Yes. I believe I have to meet with my parents soon, anyway.”
Violin realized what was going. She cover Rock and Molly, as she lied, “Yes. And I think Aeryn is expecting me back soon.”
Lee could tell that Scorpius was failing at hiding her smirk, as the three adult make such obvious lies.
Daiyu commented, “And I have things to do today, as well.”
Lee smiled inwardly, as he thought, 'Chang is likely be honest. And it look like they are finally cutting their loses, and calling it a day for this attempt at catching me. And none too soon.'
Though, Lee did not let his guard down, as he watched the Rock, Violin, and Daiyu, collect their money.
Rock, Molly, Scorpius, Violin, and Daiyu, got up from their chairs. They walked over to the bar counter, to pay their tabs, while left their tips for bartender.
Lee watched all five adults leave out the front door, with the door closing behind them.
Lee then watched them, through the windows of the bar, walk to the left side of the building.
When the adults were out of side, at the left front corner of the building, Lee did not show it on the outside. But, he thought, with relief, 'That was too close. But, while I lost a little money. I manage to keep most of what I had on the table. From the look of cash by Sam, he did about the same. Also, my hide is intact.' He then felt that his bladder was full. He mentally added, 'Now, to take a piss.'
Lee turned to Sam, as he said, “I will be right back.”
Sam replied, “No problem.”
Lee then got up, to go to the men's restroom, as the bartender headed to the table, to clean up, for Sam and Lee.
(_)
Outside, near the parking lot of the Rats Nest bar, the five adults came to a stop, at the front left corner of the building, so those inside could not see them, through the windows of the building.
The five adults turned to look at each other.
Violin turned to Scorpius, as she asked, “Did either of those two men lie to us?”
Scorpius answered, “Not once.”
Violin replied, “Thank you, for doing this, Scorpy.”
Scorpius responded, “No problem, John. I am interested in meeting this writer, as well.”
Molly said, in a disappointed tone of voice, “Well, this was a bust.”
Rock commented, “Well, if that is the case, then neither of them are the writer. And that eliminates those two from the suspect list.”
Molly conceded, “Perhaps.”
Rock offered, “Do any of you need transportation to the hotel? Molly would be more than happy drive you there, with us.”
Violin shrugged, as she answered, “Sure.”
Molly commented, “It is parked across the street.”
Violin replied, “Okay.”
Daiyu said, “Well, I really do have errands to run. Though, I plan to swing by there later, this afternoon.”
Scorpius stated, “I have my own way home.” She turned to Violin, as she commented, “Thank you for the tour, John. It was fun.”
Violin turned to Scorpius, as she responded, “You're welcome. And see you later.”
Scorpius replied, “You, as well, John.”
The group then broke up. Violin, walked with Rock and Molly, across the street, to nearby the parking lot, and to Molly's car. Molly car was not the red GTO, but a more modern four door car.
Daiyu walked in a similar direction away from the bar. And Scorpius walked to the left side of the building, and towards the back of the bar, where she planned to use her reality jumping device.
(_)
Through the window, Lee saw the five adults come back in sight, though the windows.
A minute later, the five adults disappeared from his sight.
Lee then thought, 'Now, to deal with something I been wanting to do for almost and hour.' He turned to Sam, as he said, “I will be aback in a minute. To continue our game.”
Sam turned to Lee, as he responded, “Take your time. I am in no rush.”
Lee replied, “Thanks.”
Lee then got up from his chair, and he headed for the door to the men's restroom, near his and Sam's table, close to the middle of the back wall of the room.
(_)
A minute later, Lee was inside the Rats Nest men's restroom.
After Lee relieved himself in one of the urinals, and zipped the fly on his pants back up, he walked over one of the restroom sinks.
While he washed his hands from lukewarm water from the sink, and liquid soap, from a soap dispenser mounted on wall above the sink, he thought, 'The bartender really keeps these restrooms clean. Even the stalls have plenty of toilet paper. Though, I have only been in the men's restroom, I am sure she keeps the women's restroom just as clean, or cleaner.'
Lee finished washing his hands, turned off sink and shook the water off his hands. With him planning to use the blow-drier mounted on the wall, by the sink, in a few seconds. Though, there was a mounted roll of paper talks by the wall, above the trash can. With both those items being on the other side of the blow-drier, from the sink.
As Lee shook his hands, he heard a familiar feminine voice come from one of the stalls behind him, say, “You know. The interesting trick with these reality devices is that such a device will take a person anywhere, or at any time, across the multiverse, itself. Or, just to a nearby men's restroom stall, to wait for a stressed out fool to show up.”
Lee looked into the mirror above the sink to see the reflection of Scorpius standing in the open stall behind him.
Lee quickly turned around to face the alien woman, as Scorpius walked out of the stall.
Scorpius came to a stop, as she stood less than took feet in front of Lee. With Lee's back to the sink.
Scorpius complimented, “You gave quite the performance, at the poker game, Lee. Or should I say, Paul?”
Lee thought, 'Oh crap. My luck just ran out. She will know if I lie to her. So, I might as well play this straight, and out in the open.'
Lee soberly asked, “What tipped you off?”
Scorpius smirked, as she said, “You only lied to me once. And it was that one lie that tipped me off to your identity. You claimed that you were anxious because of sexual attraction, but your sex organ, below you waist never enlarged once. You clearly knew about my heat sense, and the only person from this reality who would recognized me as a woman, on the spot, would be the so-called writer.”
Lee asked, “Now what? Are you going to tell the others?”
Scorpius got closer to Lee, as she stated, “No. I won't tell the others. You see, Lee. You gave me everything I could possibly want, and more. Now, it is my turn to give you something in return.”
Without warning she suddenly kissed him on the lips.
Lee did not dare stop her, as he thought, 'I know where this is going. I am not going to be able to stop this. I might as well do my best to mitigate the situation.'
A few seconds later, as Scorpius broke the kiss, Lee requested, “Before we go any further, please let me pull out of a condom from my pocket.”
Scorpius complimented, “Intelligent thinking. Which is something that I like in any person I am with.”
(_)
Ten minutes later, Sam and the female bartender watched as men's restroom door opened, and Scorpius exited the men's restroom. Her clothes neat and mostly unwrinkled. She had a smile of satisfaction on her lips, as she elegantly walked by the two adults, and towards the front door. She soon exited the Rats Nest, through the front door, without looking back.
A minute later, the men's restroom door opened, and Lee stumbled out of the men's restroom. The front, left side of his shirt was partly untucked. He was missing his hat and glasses. And his hair was a mess.
Lee's look caused both Sam and the bartender to chuckle a little.
Lee walked over the bar counter, to where the bartender was right across the counter.
Lee put his right elbow onto the counter, as he laid the right side of his face, onto the open palm of his right hand. While having his face in his right hand, he turned to the bartender, as he ordered, “A bottle of decent liquor, and a normal glass.”
The bartender retrieved the two items for Lee request, from under the bar counter. She set the glass and sealed liquid bottle on the counter, in front of Lee. She then looked at Lee, as she inquired, “Did you and her?”
With the bottle and glass on the table in front of him, Lee sat up, as he took his right elbow of the table. Lee opened up the liquor and pour some into the glass.
After taking a swallow of the alcoholic drink, he set down the glass. He then looked at the bartender, as he answered, “This is a case where the sex was really good, though quick, with someone I really did not want to do it with. But, it could have been far, far worse. So, I am not going to complain. At least, I had the sense to use a condom.”
The bartender complimented, “Smart thinking. You don't want to get some crazy woman pregnant.”
Lee agreed, “Amen to that. You are preaching to the choir.” He then took another swallow of liquor. After which, he requested, “And could we keep this indiscretion quiet from the others?”
The bartender replied, “Of course.”
At their usual table, Sam overheard the conversation. He stated, with Lee's back to him, “Sure. And if you get drunk. I will even help you get back to the hotel. I am still fairly sober. And I will be fine to drive in about an hour.”
Lee looked at the bartender. He then turned to Sam, as he said, “Thanks guys.” He looked back to the counter, as he drank some more liquor. He thought, 'I am not going to get drunk. I am just going to drink enough take the edge off of the increasing insanity in my life. I am not even going to get buzzed. And I should be fine to drive in a few hours.'
A few minutes later, after Lee was able to collect himself, he returned to the men's restroom to collect his hat and glasses. He then put them on, returned to the main room. He then took the glass, bottle, and cap to the bottle, with him to the table Sam and him had been seated at. A few minutes later, he continued his poker game with Sam.
Though, Lee took his time in drinking. And he did not even get buzzed, as he drank his liquor. After he felt a little better, he capped the bottle of liquor. Which he was planning to pay for. And he then ordered some more lemonade to drink.
(_)
A few hours, after Rock, Molly, Violin, Scorpius, and Daiyu left the Rats Nest bar, around four PM, Chang, was in her female form, as Daiyu, as she walked into the Devil's Hotel restaurant, while wearing the same clothing she had on in the Rats Nest bar.
As Daiyu came to a stop right inside entrance of the restaurant, she looked around the room, and she saw that only other person in the room was the bartender.
The bartender, Melvin, was standing behind the bar counter, on the far side of the bar counter. Where the counter turned to faced the front of the room, with sitting in a stool, on that part of the counter.
With Melvin on the interior side of the counter, he was facing the back of the room, as he used a rag to wipe down the top of the counter.
Daiyu thought, 'Perfect. Last night, River stated these men are smarter than the look. So, I am checking them out. And after meeting Sam and Lee, there clearly is more to these men, than meets the eyes.'
'For example. All my research about this town states two interesting facts about Pedro. First, he is a serious badass. And second, Pedro has a brother that used to run the mafia of this island. And the two of them worked together. If my dates are correct, Pedro brother, Paciano left down a little while after Revy and the others showed up.'
'It is possible Pedro's brother realized whom Revy and the others were, and he ran. Which would be very intelligent of him.'
'Also, none of the cops here have come near this hotel, since Revy and the others came here. Except for collecting the corpses of some fools that underestimated my friends. And with Pedro coming to the talent contest. That could mean that Pedro knows who we are, as well. Which might mean he recognized me, and River, as well. That could cause problems. I will just have to keep an eye on him.”
“Lee and Sam are playing some type of game. I am not sure what. But, they are using poker as a cover. I cannot find anything on either of them. But, that only makes me more interested in them.'
'And now to find out about Melvin. All my research on him states that he has been here for five years. And that everyone seems to like him. But, before five years back, he is a ghost. No records. Nothing.'
'And when I saw his face last night, something in the back of memory makes me think I have met him before. But, that should not be possible... Unless, he is who I think he is. In which case, this city has become even more interesting. Still, he had no accent when speaking english last night. Though, being able to do that might be a sign that he is in hiding.'
'As such, I need to find out if he is who I believe him to be.'
'Now, I just have to play this right, to get what I want from him. While also confirming his identity.'
Then, Daiyu walked over to the bar counter. As she approached Melvin, she saw that Melvin continued to have his back turned to her.
After she sat down in a stool, near the front part of the bar counter, which was facing the left side of the room. She turned to her right side, in her stool, as she looked across the bar, to Melvin. She ordered, in english, “Bartender. I will have a Jack and Cola, with some ice in a glass.”
The bartender let go of his rag, as he leaned up. He then turned to look over at her for a few seconds, before he replied, in english, “Just a minute.”
As Melvin went over to fix Daiyu her drink, he thought, 'Oh crap. Chang is here. And no one else is. This is not good. This is a perfect time to ambush me. Though, if I play this cool, I should be fine. If not. I am going to have to shoot my way out of here. And I have to be honest with myself. My chances are not good.'
'Though, I am happy that she is sitting where Lee and Sam usual sit. Right in front of my Tokarev.'
Melvin first cleaned his hands in a sink, under the bar counter. He then dried his hands on a clean rag. Next, he got a clean glass. He poured a shot of Jack Daniel's whiskey into the glass. He opened a can of Coca Cola, and poured some cola into the glass. Finally, he dropped a couple of pieces of ice into the glass, without allowing the drink to fizz over the glass.
When the drink was finished, Melvin brought the drink over, and set it down, on the counter, in front of Daiyu.
Daiyu picked up the drink, took a sip. She swallowed, and set the drink back down on the counter. She looked up at Melvin, as she complimented, “Good job with the drink. It is just the right mix.”
Melvin flatly said, “I am glad you like it.”
Just as Melvin was about to turn to his left, and walked away, Daiyu requested, in an innocent tone of voice, that didn't fool Melvin for one moment, “Please stay. I like to talk to people as I drink.”
Melvin thought, 'I have no choice, but to play along. Still, it is best to be prepared. Fortunately, Change sat down in the middle of the long end of the counter, where I keep my pistol.'
Melvin turned back to look at Daiyu, as he walked up closer to the bar counter.
Melvin kept his right hand below the bar, right on the grip of the holstered TT thirty-three Tokarev pistol under the counter, in its holster. Though, his pistol had a bullet in the chamber, it was half-cocked, so the trigger could not be accidentally pulled, with the gun firing.
Melvin then slowly pulled his pistol out of its holster, though he kept his pistol below the bar counter, as he pointed it at Daiyu.
As the went on, Melvin maintained a calm mask, as he looked at Daiyu's face. Which him being careful not to look below Daiyu's neckline, and at her breasts.
Meanwhile, Daiyu looked at Melvin's face, as she thought, 'Hmm. Good drink. Now, to get to the heart of the matter.'
Daiyu inquired, “I have a question for you. Have you even been to Thailand?”
Melvin maintained his mask of calmness, as he thought, 'She recognizes me. And she is trying to bait me. Still, Chang is too good for me to try to directly lie to her. I am going to have to play this the long way around.' He coyly said, “Thailand is a long way from Mexico.”
Daiyu hid her smile, as she thought, 'Nice deflection. And that was not a, no. Now, to turned up the heat.' She stated, “I would like to tell you a story.”
Melvin thought, 'I would bet money that Chang's story is about me and her, with it leading up to her knowing who I am. But, I cannot stop the situation.' He said, “Sure.”
Daiyu commented, “A long, long time ago, when I was Thailand, I knew a woman there. She had bodyguards with her. Not that she needed them. And some of those bodyguards were one known as members of the VDV. Or, Vozdushno-Desantnye Vojska...”
Suddenly, Daiyu heard a click, and she immediately went silent. She realized that Melvin's right hand was likely holding a pistol, aimed at her, from under the bar counter, with him using his right thumb to fully cock back the hammer of the weapon. When the pistol hammer was fully cocked back. He removed his thumb to the side of the grip, away from the slide. And he placed his right index finger lightly on the trigger, with him ready to use his weapon at a moments notice.
Melvin thought, 'Screw this. We both know she knows who I am. And I am not good enough to convince her otherwise. I might as well make the first move.'
Melvin looked directly into Daiyu's glasses, as he calmly stated, “Fair warning, Chang. I am a, Han shot first, type of hero.”
Daiyu thought, 'Oh hell. He is Yuirck. And he had read the stories. Still, I can probably dodge the bullet. If I have to. But, I want to know more about him. This is starting to get interesting.' She smirked, as she looked Melvin his eyes. She asked, “So, you have read the stories?”
Melvin thought, 'No point in denying anything, now.' He flatly answered, “Yes. And I have seen the Black Lagoon series. It is interesting to see things through the other side of the looking glass.”
Chang responded, “That is very true. Let me guess. You are using a TT thirty-three Tokarev semi-automatic pistol? By the way, is your pistol a pre-nineteen forty-seven model? Or, a post-nineteen forty-seven model?”
Melvin complimented, “My pistol is a post-nineteen forty-seven model. And you were always sharp, Chang. I admired that about you. Even when we are were on opposing sides, in Roanapur.”
Chang pointed out, “Thanks. And you know you cannot take me. And I came here to chat. Not to fight. And I have no intentions turn you in, for Balalaika...” She then stated, in a more firmer tone of voice, “So, take you hand off your gun, before things turn ugly for you.”
Melvin thought, 'When Chang is in a playful mood, he, or in this case, she, tends to benefit everyone around her.'
Below the counter, Melvin pointed the pistol away from anyone, while he kept his right finger on the trigger guard. He then removed the magazine of his pistol. He set the magazine on a shelf below, and behind the counter. He then used his left hand to pulled back the slide and catch the bullet ejecting from the chamber. After which he dry fired it away from him and Daiyu.
Melvin then loaded the round into the magazine, put the magazine back into the pistol. And with the chamber of the weapon empty, he placed the pistol in the holster, under the bar counter.
Melvin turned to look at Daiyu, and Daiyu looked back at him.
Daiyu complimented, “Now, that is a good boy. So, you are Yurick, the Blade?”
Melvin answered, “Yes.”
Daiyu thought, 'Of all the places for him to end up, it had to be the same place as where Revy and the others think the writer is. I don't think this is completely consequential. But, I have no proof to back that up. Still...' Daiyu said, “Well Yurick, Balalaika has been trying to find you for over a year. She does not like it when one of her men, or except for you, now women, go off the reservation.”
Melvin deadpanned, “I am aware of that. And it has been five year for me. Also, I would prefer that you call me by my alias, Melvin?”
Daiyu commented, “Okay Melvin. And time dilation does have its benefits. You have enjoyed five years of peace, to Balalaika's one year of searching for you. By the way, did I hear correctly, from the girls last night? Did you really take away Revy's pistols from her, and put a knife close to her eyes?”
Melvin cracked a grin, as he responded, “Above her left eye. And yes.”
Daiyu complimented, “That is pure badass. I wish I could have seen it.”
Melvin offered, “Actually, this room has security cameras, and I kept a video copy of me doing that. I can get you a copy of that, if you want?” He thought, 'This might help get me out of this mess.'
Daiyu's smile turned more sincere, as she questioned, “Thank you. So, do you know who the writer is?”
Melvin answered, “I do not know who the writer is. But, it seems that Revy, and most of her crew have gone all, Ahab, on him.”
Daiyu stated, “I know. I almost pity that fool... Almost.”
Melvin countered, “Well, after reading the stories, I found that... Except for the gender bending, and associated problems, he didn't really do anything that horrible to any of you.”
Melvin thought, 'The others, in the vats, in book two, are a different matter. But, I am going to give the writer the benefit of the doubt on that, at the time he wrote book two, he likely didn't realize that was happening to real people, in another part of the multiverse.'
Daiyu replied, “Well, between you and me. I agree with you. I owe him a lot. And I have no intention of looking for him.”
Melvin said, “It is nice that some of you are seeing reason. Though, I fear for this city, if the maids ever found out about those stories.”
Daiyu agreed, “No arguments there. One of them is a handful. Both of them on the warpath, working together, terrifies even me... So, who told you about the stories?”
Melvin answered, “Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru told me.”
Daiyu thought, 'Those three told him. Interesting.' She questioned, “So, they know who you are?”
Melvin answered, “Only those three. And I wish to keep it that way. Anyway, they found out, by searching my room. But, they understood my reasons for hiding. And they agreed to keep my identity a secret to everyone else. Still, they would not have suspected anything, if not for the fact some of my old war buddies had come looking for me.”
Daiyu thought, 'I heard about that.' She complimented, “Outside of the Bloodhound, your group has some of the best trackers I know of.”
Melvin replied, “Yes. And not to brag, but I was a pretty good tracker myself, in my youth.”
Daiyu offered, “I could arrange for you to be young again. If you want.”
Melvin stated, “Oh, I know how you would accomplish that. And if I wanted to be young again, for the price of my manhood, I would have taken Balalaika up on her offer. Also, I know the only reason you gained the ability to change genders back and forth, is that the writer has a wicked sense of humor. And he wanted to see how the Serenity crew would act in such as situation. And you just got lucky that you were a member of the Serenity crew, at the time.”
Daiyu thought, 'He did not skim the stories. He actually did read all of those stories.” Daiyu said, “That is true. And boy was Mal pissed when he found out about the stories.”
Melvin inquired, “Speaking of which. How did you find out about the stories?”
Daiyu thought, 'I might as well tell him. He might even get a kick out of it.' She explained, “All of us were on Mars, having a cookout. The cookout was hosted by the Lowe family. That family knows how to cook some really good American food.”
“Anyway, since B is good friends with the Lowe family, and Jayne is good friends with Bob, I and the rest of the Serenity crew, along with Balalaika, but not her women, were there. Bob had even invited Annie. And I contacted Arcee to join us.”
Melvin stated, “Well, you did give Arcee everything she ever wanted in her revenge. I am not surprised you are still good friends.”
Daiyu responded, “Yes. She is a good friend. And she is one of the few people I trust enough that I don't have to worry, should I turn my back on her. Anyway, Ed also invited friends from the Bebop showed up. I have to say, Julia is really growing up. Such a cute girl. She is ten years old, now.”
Melvin thought, 'So, it has been a few years since the stories ended.'
Daiyu smirked, “I know what you are thinking. It has been a few years, for us, in the Cowboy Bebop reality, since the stories ended. And you are right.”
Melvin thought, 'Damn. She is good.'
Daiyu lips curled into a wicked grin, as she commented, “Yes. I am that good.”
Melvin inquired, “Did River turn you into a telepath?”
Daiyu answered, “No. I am just really good at figuring out what a person are thinking. So, as I was saying, we were at the cookout, talking about a number of things, then, for I guess, shits and giggles, Balalaika drops a few bombshells. And she tells us what she learned from Revy. About a four part stories series, titled, Badasses Of the Multiverse.”
“She told us that the stories were about us. And they actually directly effect us. She even gave us data CD copies of the stories for us to read later.”
Melvin sarcastically stated, “I bet that went over well.”
Daiyu said, “Actually, we took the news quite well. With it coming from Balalaika. Whom is not known for playing jokes. We took her claims at face value.”
“Of course, with her being a fan of the one-two punch, she then dropped her other bombshell. That Revy, and her group were in this reality, on this island, looking for the writer of these stories. So, they could have their revenge on him.”
“Balalaika even offered to set up a betting pool on the writer.”
Melvin asked, “What are the odds of the writer getting away?”
Daiyu stated, “Balalaika set the odds to be fifty to one against the writer in escaping this reality. But, given the army of badasses the writer is facing, I think those odds are very generous.”
Melvin replied, “I agree.”
Daiyu thought, 'I am not surprised you would agree.' She mentioned, “And it goes without saying that all of us agreed not to tell Garcia, nor the maids.”
Melvin responded, “Of course. Nobody wants to start a world war over one man. It has been done before. It did not end well for anyone.”
Daiyu stated, “Exactly. And the more time I spend in this reality. On this island. The more I like it. This town is similar Roanapur. Only this place is a lot more orderly.”
Melvin conceded, “Yes. It is. By the way, did that cookout include the Caxton family?
Daiyu answered, “No. Shane, whom is still alive, male, and in good health, along with his family, wisely avoids us. Except for the Lowe family, when we are not visiting. He really does not know what is going on. As far as I know, he still has that high school american football coaching job, on Mars. Well, that Mars.”
“Thought, I guess the Lowe family could have told him. Still, with the stories came to light, the Lowe family, and Bebop crew, politely asked us, including Revy's group, to leave the Caxton family alone, and we all agreed to respect their wishes.”
Melvin stated, “That is comforting to know. I was wondering about Shane and his family. After seeing the whole Blood Trail arc, from the anime point of view, I gained a measure of respect for that man. Not many people would literally put their lives into the hands of their victims. And at the end, he continued to make amends to the Lovelace family.”
Daiyu replied, “You got that right. Though, not the brightest of ideas. I do admire his guts for doing that. Before I knew of Shane. I did not even believe such men existed. Not even Rock, at his best, was that honorable.”
Melvin inquired, “I agree. Now, to the matter at hand. Let me guess. Eventually, you found out that Balalaika lost me here. And with Revy, and her group here, you decided to check things out.”
Daiyu complimented, “You are pretty sharp, yourself Melvin. A week later, after we had the chance to all thoroughly read the stories. And that was a long read. I learned directly from Balalaika, that she also traced you here, to the same hotel that Revy was in.”
“I know that Balalaika was baiting me. That she wanted me to check out this place, time, and reality for her. But, the bait was too tempting, so I came here anyway. When I learned about the talent contest, I decided to make my entrance then, with River by my side.”
Melvin thought, 'Okay. So, you already knew about this place, during that cookout, which happened a week before you heard Balalaika lost me here. Not good. Still, I need to find out how many I of your group, that I have to worry about coming here, to make a mess, while looking for the writer.'
Melvin inquired, “You always were one to make a dramatic entrance. So, how many of you, in your group, are after the writer's throat?”
Daiyu answered, “Not many. And before you ask, most of us could either care less, or want to thank the writer for various things. For example, River likes the writer for helping her become saner. Of those among us, just Mal and Spike want to make the writer suffer. Though, I feel that Balalaika wants to have a word with him, as well. But, even I admit that your former captain can be hard to read.”
Melvin replied, “Yes. She has always been like that. Though, I am surprise that Boris isn't pissed off at the writer.”
Daiyu commented, “Surprisingly, B is not upset. Because the writer gave B the time of both his, and her, life.”
Melvin responded, “From what I read, I do not disagree with your assessment. So, what do you want? You didn't just come here to talk, and out me, as a former Hotel Moscow member. You always have an ulterior motive to your actions.”
Daiyu said, “You are quite correct. I need eyes and ear here, on Revy, and her friends. In exchange, I will keep your secret.”
Melvin flatly stated, “I am not spying on them. Because anything you can do, they will do worse. I would rather turned myself over to Balalaika, than piss those women off.”
Daiyu thought, 'That does make sense. And he has given me a lot of information. So, I got something out this conversation. As such, I will cut him some slack.' She conceded, “You have a point there. And since you have been such a good host, I will keep your secret, for free.”
Melvin responded, “Thank you for seeing reason, Chang. And be warned. If you plan to move to this city, there are things you need to know.”
Daiyu asked, “Such as?”
Melvin answered, “I have been in this city for years. I know the people here. And I know how this town is run. In a lot of ways, this city is more dangerous than Roanapur. There probably more badasses per capita here, than in Roanapur.”
“The only difference is, unlike the rebellious attitudes of those badasses in Roanapur, the badasses of De La Plata Podrido have nothing to prove. They know they are badasses. They come here to live quiet lives, and raise families.”
“If you value your life, do not disrupt their lives. And do not harm them, nor their families.”
“And a number of these badasses are my friends. And a few of them could probably hold their own against the Bloodhound, after her upgrades.”
“In other words, do not cause too much trouble. I have seen what happens when trouble comes to this town. When fools come to this island to make trouble for the locals here. The reprisals are on par with just about anything we dished out, back in Roanapur.”
Daiyu said, “I will keep that in mind.”
Melvin mentioned, “By the way, the drink is on the house. And you can keep the glass.”
Daiyu thought, 'He is subtly telling me to leave. And I admire the way he is doing so. Given he has already told me what I wanted to know, I will respect his wishes, and leave.'
Daiyu said, “Thank you. And have a pleasant day.”
Melvin did not respond, as he watch the women pick up her glass, stand up from her seat, turn towards the front of the room, and calmly walk out the open double-door entrance.
Daiyu exited the room, and turning right, down the hallway, towards the front lobby, and parking lot, where she had her car parked.
When Daiyu was out of Melvin's sight, Melvin carefully pulled out his pistol. He pulled back the slide, to chamber a round, and cock the hammer. He then used both hands to very carefully set his pistol hammer back to being half cocked.
With that done, he placed his pistol back in its holster, under the bar counter.
Melvin then thought, with worry, 'I am so screwed. And there is likely nothing I can do about it.'
Melvin then reflected on his situation for a little while, before some more normal customers came into the bar, and Melvin went back to his job, as the bartender for the hotel restaurant.
(_)
Later that night, Lee was walking down a sidewalks, by a street in the city, to where he had parked his car.
After the long day Lee had, Sam respected his wishes that he wanted some time to himself. So, he skipped supper at the Devil's Hotel. He had not even gotten buzzed that afternoon from the liquor he had. He had not even been drink. With him only drinking for half an hour.
Lee then just had some iced lemonade for the next number of hours, that Sam, and himself, played poker, at the Rats Nest.
As such, Lee had sobered up, by the time he and Sam had to leave. They pay for bills, and left their tips. After which, with Lee sober, he drove Sam to the Devil's hotel, where he dropped Sam, at the entrance to the front lobby of the hotel.
After Lee dropped Sam off at the Devil's Hotel, he went to deserted part of the beach to watch the sunset, and think about his life. Both the recent events in his life, and the much older events in his life.
It was thirty minutes after dark, with Lee look at the waves crashing on the beach, from his car, as he sat on the front hood, when he finally decided to get some super.
Lee then got into his car, started the car, with the headlights on. He then decided where he wanted to go for a late dinner.
Lee wanted to take his mind off his problems, and felt like getting something to eat for dinner at the American Steakhouse he took Eda to, a while ago, would help.
And the meal there did help him. Also, the steak he had was tasty, and tender.
Presently, Lee parked he car, a block from the restaurant. The reason for this was that he didn't want chance any of the women in Revy's crew, nor Chang, or River, learning that he was eating dinner there.
Even Lee realized his pink Cadillac stuck out like a sore thump.
Lee did all this so that he could relax and let his guard down a bit. And it worked.
After paying for the dinner, and leaving a tip, he left the restaurant, to walk to his car.
As he passed by an alleyway, suddenly, several arms grab him from behind, and dragged him into a dimly lit alleyway.
His attackers placed his back against the wall, and he was who is was.
Lee said three girls, in their late teens. They wear all slender and athletic in build. One was a redhead. Another was a pink haired girl. And the third had black hair.
Lee also noted the black haired girl had a ring on her right fourth finger.
Still, Lee was not upset at the situation he was in, considering he know exactly how to handle this. He smirked, as he said in chinese, “From the look of your clothing and weapons. I am guessing that you are chinese amazons. First, I have no interest in fighting you, what so ever. That would be a no win situation for me, from either being engaged to one of you, or being killed. Though, it might not be a good idea to take me away, right now.”
From the shadows in front of Lee, a woman stepped out that Lee recognized.
It was River. She said, in chinese, “He is right. I told you girls this would not be easy. And you cannot take him from his past.”
Lee smiled, as he casually said, “Hi River. I believe this is the first time we have formally met, outside of that talent contest.”
River replied, “Given this is time travel. It depends on your point of view.”
Lee agreed, “Very true, River. And I want you to know. I am a big fan of yours. And it is not just because of your body. It is your intelligence and skills. I am so happy you were able get your head mostly back on straight, by the end of that movie.”
River smiled, as she commented, “Sanity does have its advantages. And you helped me out some more, in that department. Thank you.”
Lee stated, “You're welcome. Too bad about Wash and Book, though. But, I am sure they are in a better place.”
River replied, “I plan on looking into their situations, after this whole mess with you is resolved.”
Lee said, “Well, good luck. I am guessing this is Ranma's bright idea. And I admit, it is a good one. Given the tracking skills Shampoo displayed at the beginning of the Ranma Half series, it would be logical to send them after me. Care to introduce me to these women?”
River responded, “Sure. The redhead is named, Rose. The pink haired girl is, Violet. The raven haired girl is named, Dongmei.”
Lee cracked a grin, as he said, “Better than being named after haircare products.”
River grin got slightly wider, as she replied, “I fully agree.”
Lee casually joked, “River, and her pretty flowers.”
River giggled. She then asked, “Are you flirting with me?”
Lee smiled, as he responded, “River, you are one of the most badass individuals in existence. I would rather make you happy, than sad, or angry.”
River complimented, “Then, this is a good approach.”
Dongmei spoke up, “Why is this fool not worried about us?”
Rose stated, “Dongmei is right. You don't look so surprised to see us.”
Lee explained, “Well, I already had a groundhogs time loop in the present. Along with visitors from the past. So, I am due for a visit from the future. You all being here means I escaped, and they had to use other alternative means to catch me. Besides, take a look upwards.”
All five of them looked up, and it looked like small energy fractures were forming in the night sky.
Violet said, “Oh my.”
Lee said, “River, I would thought you would have explained the rules to them, by now. I guess I will explain them to you. Girls, that is a paradox forming. If you take me from this timeline right now, or blow my cover, reality itself may collapse. Even I didn't dare fully imagine how bad that would be for reality, itself.”
Everyone looked back at each other.
Rose asked, “How do you know the rules?”
Lee smirked, as he replied, “Honey, I literally wrote these rules.”
River said, “Girls, we have to leave him here.”
Lee said, “It is okay. Given how skilled you are, I am sure you will meet me, again. Anyway, have a nice day.”
Lee then walked back to the street, leaving the girls to their own devices, as he headed for his car.
Look took quick look up at the sky, and he saw that the night sky had returning to normal.
Lee dropped his grin, as he let out a breath, in relief. He then thought, 'That was a close one.'
Lee then began thinking of what those chinese amazons looked like.
He thought, 'They were pretty...' He eyes widened, as he remember a few things about one of the girls in that group.
Lee mentally realized, 'What a minute. That ring the black haired girl had on her right forth finger... Though the ring seemed bigger... And her name...'
Lee then recalled one of the more interesting weeks of his time loop, as he immediately reached under his shirt, from his neckline, for the necklace he wore.
While still walking towards his car, Lee pulled it out his ring, and he looked the ring he had looped the string thought.
Lee then tucked his ring necklace back under his shirt. He thought, with mild amusement, 'Ah hell. You got to be kidding me... Well, on the bright side, my cancer will be gone. But, why didn't she recognize me... Of course the amazon brainwashing shampoo. At least she is healthy, and from the look in her eyes, she is sane, and probably happy. And like before, magic explains the black hair.'
Lee continued walking, as he smiled, as he started laughing for several seconds. He continued his thoughts, 'I take this hiding in plain sight to the extreme.'
Lee soon reached his car, and he then headed back to the Devil's Hotel to get some rest.
(_)
The next day, was an average day for Lee and Sam. With things settling down for them, after the talent contest. Except for one difference for Lee.
Someone, driving a modern, black, four door sedan tried to follow him to his meeting with Pedro. Though, he lost the one following him. Lee did this, by doing a low speed chase, and use his extensive knowledge of the roads on the island of De La Plata Podrido.
It was seven ten PM, when Lee reached the Last Resort Diner. Lee saw that Pedro was not that.
As Lee walked to the back right corner booth, which he saw was empty, he thought, 'Before I got here, tonight, I had to lose a tail. And I need to talk to Pedro about who I think it is. I don't see Pedro here. I guess Pedro had similar trouble.'
Lee then sat in their usual booth, in the back right corner of the Last Resort Diner. It was his turn to set with his back to the wall, which allow him to look around the room, and entrance to the dinner.
By then, Mary, the waitress walked up to Lee's booth.
Mary asked, in english, “What can I get for you, Lee?”
Lee looked up at Mary, as he answered, “Nothing at the moment. But, maybe later.”
Mary replied, “Okay.” She then went to serve her other customers, whom were not near the booth Lee was sitting in.
Lee then patiently waited for Pedro do show up.
A few minutes later, Lee saw Pedro walked into the diner.
Pedro turned to his right. Lee and Pedro then looked at each other. After which, Pedro walked over to their booth. sat down, across from him, in their booth.
As Pedro got comfortable in his seat, he looked at Lee. He said, in english, “Sorry, I'm late. But, I had to lose a tail.”
Lee thought, 'I guess I was right? And I wonder if it was the same type of car. If so, it would confirm that the same group was following us. And we can guess who.'
Lee inquired, “Was it a modern, black, four door sedan?”
Pedro immediately picked up on the underlying meaning of Lee's question. Pedro asked, “Did someone follow you in a the same type of car, as the one that followed me, until I lost it?”
Lee stated, “Yes. And we both know who organized those tails for us.”
They said, in unison, “Chang.”
Pedro commented, “I was afraid of this.”
Lee stated, “I would not worry, too much. This is only a logical step he would take, if he plans to set up shop here. He likely doesn't know anything. He is just putting out feelers, considering he saw us judging that talent contest.”
Pedro agreed, “That is likely true. Do you still want to have these meetings?”
Lee answered, “Yes. We will both just have to be more careful in getting here. And leave a little earlier.”
Pedro stated, “Agreed. Speaking of setting up shop, on top of my brother's home, my contacts informed me that Chang bought the other large hotel in town. On the opposite side of the island, from the Devil's Hotel.”
Lee asked, “The hotel on the south end of the island?”
Pedro responded, “Yes. So, with Revy and her crew, in the Devil's Hotel, on the north end of the island. And Chang and his crew in the hotel on the south in the island. I am basically facing problems from both the north and the south.”
Lee thought, 'There is a War Between The States joke in there. But, I don't feel like telling it. So, instead...' Lee sarcastically inquired, “That is just great. Any idea what he plans to do?”
Pedro answered, “Yes. I was talking with another set of contacts on the mainland, this afternoon, and Chang has clearly been here a while. He has already made some very expensive bribes to some powerful players in the government, to look the other way.”
“If what I am hearing in town as well, is true. I think he is going to remodel the hotel as casino, with him setting up his criminal organization here. In your stories, you should have never made his front organization be a casino, with him the casino owner.”
Lee shrugged, as he commented, in a casual tone of voice, “He had the flair for it. But, are least we know where he is, that still gives us an edge.”
Pedro said, “Perhaps. Also, I won't have to worry about him for a while. It will take several months to renovate that hotel.”
Lee sighed. He then stated, “I would not be too sure about that. The man has resources. He will probably have that done within a week.”
Pedro muttered, “That figures.” He then looked at Lee, as he inquired, in a normal tone of voice, “Who should we expect to be with him?”
Lee answered, “Likely, some of his previous subordinates. Also, the Serenity crew, and maybe the Bebop crew. Though, I doubt Ed, nor Ein will be with them, for obvious reasons. Though, Spike will likely bring Julia with her.”
Pedro replied, “That makes sense.”
Pedro thought, 'Though, I will not do anything on Chang's personal, one way of the other, until I can confirm who is with him. Though, there is the elephant in the room, that needs to be asked.
Pedro inquired, “What about Balalaika, B, and Hotel Moscow?”
Pedro mentally reflected, 'If they show up in a big way. I might at least tip Melvin off to them. And help him get off the island. I have a few favors I can call if I want to help someone like that. Or, if I want to disappear, myself. Before, I am disappeared by someone else.'
Lee said, “I doubt Balalaika, B, and Hotel Moscow will come on board. At least not immediately. Balalaika likes to see how a situation turns out, before she walks onto the scene. So, we have some breathing space, on this front. But, not much.”
Pedro thought, 'Okay. Melvin still has a little time to figure out what he wants to do. And so do I. Still...' Pedro stated, “The worst part is that I cannot call for help. They would either not believe me, and perhaps have me committed to a lunatic asylum. With them, at the very least stripping me of my authority. Or, if they did believe me, they will more likely level the city with aerial bombardment, just to make sure they killed these badasses. With the reprisal, from the friends of these badasses, possibly destroying this planet.”
Pedro went onto say, with a sharper, more serious tone of voice, “And I don't think that Chang is going to follow you, once you escape.”
Lee pointed out, “If I can get Revy and her group to follow me, that just leaves Chang and his crew. They are dangerous, but you could probably handle them. You stated you have some badasses in reserve, if you needed them. You might have to call in those markers.”
Lee thought, 'I don't remember if Pedro told me about his reserves in the time loop, or before the time loop. It was just so long ago, that I don't clearly remember.'
'Though, given the seriousness of the situation, I am sure that either way, Pedro will let my comment slide. Still, I need to be careful about slipping like this, again.'
Pedro mentally wondered, 'How do he know about my reserves?... No that it really matters. I may have told him and forgotten.'
Pedro said, “You are right. I just might have to call them in.”
Lee then remember something, as he thought, 'I am going to have to tell Pedro about this yesterday afternoon. If he finds out on his own. Which he might, then he will be upset with me. But, I will give him the edited version of what happened.'
Lee said, in a calm tone of voice, “Oh. Onto a few other matters. I have some interesting news. I met Scorpius, yesterday. Yes. The female version from my stories. Post book four. Violin brought her by the Rats Nest bar for a visit with Sam and I.”
Pedro replied, with worry in his tone of voice, “Oh crap.”
Lee stated, “Calm down. It was not a bad meeting. Violin was there. And Violin gave her the alias, Halley.”
Pedro could not help, as snicker a little at the alias that Violin gave Scorpius. He then said, “Oh yea. Harvey and Halley. I get the joke.”
Lee grinned, as he responded, “I know. So do I. Anyway, she was in town, only for yesterday. So, she was not here to stay. The bad news is she realized who I was. The good news is she said she will keep my identity a secret from the others. And given I am still free, over twenty-four hours after she said she would, I believe what she said.”
Pedro pointed out, “Well, you did give Scorpius a healthy body, and an Empire to run. One of the positive traits that Scorpius has, is that he, or in this case, she knows when to be grateful to someone.”
Lee replied, “Very true. And I think she is very happy with what I gave her. So, I am fine there.”
Pedro noticed something was off about Lee. He took a close looked at Lee's face, as he realized, 'Is he using poker face, right now?... He is... Though, why would he?...' Pedro inquired, in a serious tone of voice, “There is more to this story? Isn't there?”
Lee began, “Well...”
Pedro said, “Come on. Spit it out. It is not like you had sex with the woman...”
Pedro then noticed Lee's expression slightly change to embarrassment, as he his cheeks blushed, at the mention of the word, sex.
Pedro guessed, “You did have sex with her? Didn't you? How could you? Eda, I could understand. But, Scorpius. Dear lord, I thought you had standards.”
Lee verbally defended himself, “First, as a woman, Scorpius is hot.” His lips curled into a mischievous grin, as he continued, “Damn, I do good work in the category.”
Pedro snorted, as he stated, “Yes. We learned that at the nights talent show, two nights ago. Even Chang was hot in her female form.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. I know. Anyway. Second, she ambushed me in the men's restroom of the Rats Nest. And with her super-strength, I did not have much choice in the matter. But, I did use a condom.”
Pedro commented, “That was a smart move. Likely, the only smart move, for you, in that entire situation. Though, still a smart move. So, how was it?”
Lee answered, “Quick, but good.”
Pedro said, “Okay. Still, that was a close call.”
Lee deflated, “I know.”
Lee thought, 'I better tell him about the amazons. It is not really bad news after all. Though, will be selective of what I tell him.'
Lee said, in a more calm tone of voice, “Well, I do have other good news. Last night, I was ambushed by some chinese amazons from the same reality, as I guess that Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru are from. And River, from the future, was there, leading them.”
Pedro pointed out, with concern in his tone of voice, “That does not sound like good news.”
Lee grinned, as he responded, “It does when I get to the good parts. The second the amazons tried to kidnap me, the night sky started to tear from the paradox. But, the sky returned to normal, the moment River stepped in, and made the three chinese amazon leave this reality, with her. That means we are working under the same time rules as I made in my stories.”
“And this also means that I will eventually escape this reality. And Revy and the others will at least follow me. So, all I have to do is be careful, and figure how to escape this reality.”
Lee thought, 'I will leave the other details of that meeting alone. It is best not even to think about those details, with River in town. She might read my thoughts, and then I am screwed.'
Pedro said, “Well then, good luck, Lee. Though, the fact that River from the future aided you might mean you did not get on her bad side. And you are probably on her good side.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. I consider that a plus.”
Pedro inquired, “So, any serious problem today, beside someone trying to tail us both, just now?”
Lee responded, “No. How about you?”
Pedro casually said, “No. Just another day at the office, for me.”
The two men then continued their conversation, with more casual subject, for another ten minutes.
When they concluded their discussion, they left the diner, and headed to their homes, to get some much deserved sleep.
(_)
A week later, Lee and Pedro found out that they were both correct.
That Chang did buy the large hotel on the island. It was located on the opposite side of the island from the Devil's hotel. With Chang's new hotel also being by the beach.
During the renovation of the hotel, Lee took an opportunity one day to drive by building, with his pink car. He saw that it was around the same size as the Devil's Hotel. Even during the time loop, he had not paid much attention to the building, so he was not sure.
Also, it only took Chang, with his interdimensional resources, a little over a week to completely remodel, and have the hotel ready to be opened. This included him bringing in his own people to be the employees for the new casino.
With the employees housing being located in the lower levels of the casino. Except for Chang and River, whom lived in an apartment, on the penthouse level of the building.
Pedro heard about much of them, except for the interdimensional information. He then informed Lee during a nightly meeting. With the two of them putting together the pieces and filling in the blanks for each other.
Also, they were occasionally tailed by other cars, during the day and evening. But, given the skills and knowledge both Lee and Pedro had of the roads of Plata Podrido, they had no problems losing those following them. Before they met each other, in the evening, at the Last Resort Diner.
Fortunately, during this time, nothing serious had happened to neither Lee, nor Pedro. With Lee spending his time with Sam. Though, Sam disappeared on occasion. But, Sam did leave a message at the Devil's Hotel check in desk. So, Lee would know how long Sam would be gone.
Though, Pedro know there was nothing he could do to stop the casino from opening. And he knew better than to try to oppose Chang so directly.
The day after Chang had finished with his casino, had held a grand opening, with him christening his new casino, Daiyu Palace Casino.
Both Pedro and Lee found Chang naming the casino after his female side to be arrogant, and in line with Chang's personality.
And while Lee and Pedro avoided the grand opening, for obvious reasons, such as avoiding River, Revy and the other women, whom went to the opening.
Though, it was reported that the people whom attended the grand opening, had a great time.
(_)
The next morning, after the grand opening of Daiyu Palace Casino, during breakfast at the hotel restaurant, Revy walked over to Lee and Sam, at the bar counter, just as the two men had finished their breakfast.
Revy bragged about how great the opening to the Casino was.
While Lee sat beside Sam, at the bar counter, at their usual place, they had both turned around in their stools, with their backs to the bar counter, so they could both facing Revy.
Eventually, Revy got to the point of why she had wanted to talk to them.
Revy stated, “Given you two are gamblers, I am surprised that I did not see you to at that grand opening of the casino.”
Lee commented, “Given I am precognitive, I am not going anywhere near a casino. If I can help it. They would likely accuse me of cheating. And I like my legs and arms to remain intact.”
Sam said, “I know better than to play professional sharks at poker.”
Revy shrugged, as she replied, “That is understandable.”
Lee thought, 'This would be a great opportunity to ask a simple introduction question. So, I don't later slip up with the information that I already know. And the information that Pedro is secretly giving me.'
Lee asked, “So, who is the owner of that place?”
Revy answered, “A man named, Chang. I have known him, off and on, for years. He is a nice guy. Just don't get on his bad side.”
Lee replied, “Okay. Thanks for the warning.”
Revy said, “No problem.”
Sam asked, “So, any problems with your group? Given what some of your group has done, during your stay here. And that we all currently live in the same hotel. I would like to know, for my continued well being.” He turned to Lee, as he continued, “Among other people.” He then looked back at Revy.
Lee continued to look at Revy, as he heard Sam's question. He also noticed that Sam had looked at him. He thought, 'Nice Sam. Real nice. Now, that is a fishing question, even I am leery on asking, for a number of reasons. Still, I would like that answer, as well. I can only be helpful to me. And since you, Sam, asked that question. Such inquiry cannot blow back on me.'
Revy answered, “Not really. Though, I am a bit annoyed, right now, with Rock, Dutch, Benny, and Janet. All of them of them wouldn't let me, nor the girls place any of the bets. Though, none of the others placed any bets, either.”
Sam stated, “Revy, consider that a good thing. If you gamble like you drink, you would likely be broke within an hour.”
Lee remained calm, as he thought, with worry, 'Oh crap. I hope Sam did not just piss off, Revy. Even after all the training in the time loop, I am not sure I can take her.' He looked over at the tables by the stage, where Revy's family and friends were. He continued his thought, 'Let alone her nearby friends.'
Lee looked back at Revy, as he forced himself to remain calm.
Revy was silent for a few seconds. She then said, in a calm tone of voice, “Perhaps you are right. I use to lose a lot of money to Eda, when we drank together, and played cards.”
Lee did not show it in the outside. But inwardly, he felt relief, as he thought, 'Good. She took the comment well. Though, I do have question for her.'
Lee inquired, “So, I take it that none of you will be moving to that new casino?”
Revy replied, “Nope. We are perfectly happy here.” She mentally added, 'Where we can be closer to finding the writer. It does not take a genius, that with River publicly showing that she is still with Chang. As they showed at the talent contest. That the writer will avoid the casino like the plague.'
'Still, these two fools also have good reasons to avoid the casino. And Violin confirmed, from Scorpius, that neither of them are the writer. So, I don't need to worry about them.'
'Though, Molly is not completely sure. But, we will allow her to continue her inquire, if she wishes to do so. But, that is another matter.'
Lee thought, 'I wonder...' He questioned, “By the way, speaking of Eda, what drinks did you two mostly have, when you played cards?”
Revy commented, “Rum and whiskey. Why do you ask?”
Lee kept his poker face up, as he thought, with amusement, 'Oh. This is going to be so much fun to ask.'
Lee inquired, in a casual tone of voice, “Well, some types of rum and whiskey look like apple juice. So, are you sure she was drinking alcohol, at the same time you were?”
Revy eyes went wide, as she flatly stated, with anger evident in her voice, “That bitch!” She then turned around, and marched back towards her friends, at the tables near the stage.
Lee forced himself to hold back his laughter, Lee and Sam turned back, in their stools, to face the bar counter.
Lee inwardly smirked, as he thought, with delight, 'That will get her off my back for a day. And I doubt she will hurt Eda. I just hope that Eda does not find out that I mentioned this to Revy. I do not her to be upset with me.'
Lee and Sam then went back to enjoying their day, together.
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 1: “De La Plata Podrido.”
Chapter 13: “Patrol Of The Grove.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
On the island city of, De La Plata Podrido, Mexico. A few days after Daiyu Palace Casino's grand opening. It was an early morning, right before sunrise. Though, from the twilight of the sun already peeking out, from the eastern horizon, and from the lack of cloud cover, the day was looking to be very sunny.
In the home of Police Chief Pedro Del Soto, in Pedro's bedroom, the first thing he became aware of, as he woke up in his bed, in his moderately sized, and very nice home, was the sound of music playing, at a conformable volume, from the jazz radio station that he set his alarm clock to.
While laying on his back, Pedro leaned up from his bed, as he turned to the nightstand, to his right side, where his clock and lamp were located. He turned on the lamp light on the nightstand, by his bed, as he looked at his alarm clock.
His alarm clock stated it was six thirty AM.
Pedro turned turned off his alarm clock, as he thought, 'At least I did not sleep late... Now, to face the insanity that has become my life. Always work of a hero. This city is not going to save itself. And it is work on a daily basis.'
Pedro then got out of bed, to get ready for the day. With him him quickly making, his bed, before head headed to his nearby bathroom.
Pedro was wearing only a t-shirt and a pair of boxer shorts. And though he was in his forties, he was still in great physical shape.
After a quick trip to his bathroom, for a piss, he walked into his kitchen.
He pulled out a cup, and a jar of instant coffee mix. He used the cup of water to fell the coffeemaker. He then scooped some instant coffee grounds, from a jar he opened, into the coffeemaker, over the filter. After he closed the jar with the coffee grounds, set his cup under the coffeemaker, for some coffee.
A few minutes later, he saw at his kitchen table, as he sipped his coffee, and ate some non-sugary cereal, with milk.
When he was finished, he used the faucet in the kitchen sink, to rinse off his cup bowl, and spoon. He set the dishes into the sink, for him to later put in his dishwasher.
Next, he headed for his bathroom, again.
Once in the bathroom, he shaved his face, and took a shower, among other things.
When he was through with his shower, he dried off with a towel, and he combed his short black hair. He then reentered his bedroom.
After he entered his bedroom, he retrieved the items he needed to put on. He laid the items on top of his bed.
Next, he replaced his boxer shorts and white t-shirt, he put on his socks. He then put on his brown pants, and leather belt.
Among other things, Pedro's pants already had his wallet, police ID, and badge in the side pockets his pants.
He put on his black boots. Next, he laced and tired his boot laces.
After that, Pedro put on his bulletproof vest, which made him look like he was thirty pounds heavier. He then put on his white, long sleeve, button up shirt.
He grabbed the tie he is selected to wear that day. The tie was dark blue. And he walked to the wall mirror in his bedroom. Which was right above his chest of drawers.
After he finished tying his tie, and putting it under the folded turtle neck of his shirt, he walked back over to his bed.
He then put on his shoulder holster. His semi-automatic pistol was already in its holster. With the weapon load, and ready to be used. His semi-automatic pistol was located under his left armpit, there were two full ammo clips, in pooches, in the shoulder holster, under his right arm pit.
He then grabbed his ankle holster, with his loaded, five shot, snub-nosed revolver holstered in it.
Next, Pedro leaned down.
After which, Pedro used his free hand to pulled up the right legging of his pants. He strapped on the ankle holster, around his right boot, with the holster on the outer side of the boot. He then lowered his pants legging.
The pistol the ankle holster held within it was a loaded Smith & Wesson Model thirty-six Chief's Special revolver. The revolver held five, thirty-eight special caliber rounds.
Pedro also already had a knife, a few speedloaders for his chief's special, his wallet, and a few other items in his side pants pockets.
After he leaned back up, he reached for his brown long coat. After that was one. He put on his horn rimmed sunglasses, and finally his dark brown, cowboy hat.
Pedro turned to the mirror to looked at himself. He said, out loud, “Looking good.”
He then turned off the lamp light in his bedroom. Next, he he turned out all the lights that were still on in his home, then he head for his car.
To exit his home, Pedro passed through his living room, which he had his entertainment systems, including both a blu-ray player, computer tower, with internet connection, hooked up to the thin, large, widescreen TV, mounted to the wall on a pivoting arm, across from his coach. With a coffee table between his coach an TV.
There were a few cushioned arm chairs surrounding the couch, in a semi-circle, facing the TV. On the table, there were remotes, wireless keyboard and mouse for his computer.
Instead of going through the front door, he turned and went into the laundry room. From there, he walked into his closed garage, where he had his car parked.
Pedro them walked to the garage door, and unlocked the deadbolt lock he installed on the inside of the garage.
He then walked over and got into this car.
Though, his car was clean on the inside and out, the black four door sedan that had seen better days.
He used the remote in his car to open his garage door. He then started his car as the garage door rolled up.
When he was clear, he back his car out into his driveway. After his car was completely outside, he used the remote to shut his garage back closed.
Pedro then check both ways of the to lane street he was on, then back up into the street.
He then drove forward, to the police station.
(_)
Around ten minutes later, it was seven forty-five AM, as Pedro walked into the Police Station, through the front entrance. A few seconds later, he clocked in, his time card.
After which, Pedro immediately retrieved the folder with reports from last night's events, which was left in the drop box, on the outside wall, to the right of his office door.
Pedro saw that fortunately, the folder was very thin, with likely only a few reports in it.
Pedro then headed for the meeting room of the station, for their daily meeting in the morning, at eight AM, with those officers coming on duty, for their shift. So, everyone was on the same page as to what their job would be for that day.
When Pedro reached the meeting room, he turned on the light. The room had a long rectangular table, with chairs. He sat down at the head of the table, and began looking at the reports, while he waiting for his officers to arrive.
By eight AM sharp, all of Pedro officers, for the day shift, had arrived. Along with a few officers about to get off their shift, but whom wanted to personally report their findings, and actions, before they left to get some sleep in their homes. The officers either sat down at the table, with Pedro, or stood by the back wall, as they faced Pedro.
The officers were mostly men, with a few women. All of whom, Pedro had hand picked for their job. A job Pedro knew they could handle well, and they did, without becoming corrupted by their job. Which none of them did.
Pedro stated, in spanish, “Good morning ladies, and gentlemen. Let us begin.”
Pedro began paging through the folder, looking at the reports inside it. He came to a stop, at one of the pages, as he asked, “It says here that we found a few floaters later night, in the marsh?”
The investigating officer, whom was sitting at the table, answered, in spanish, “Yes. Two bodies. Both male. In their twenties. Both known scumbags. We have suspects. What do you want done with them? Do we bring them in, or make them disappear?”
Pedro looked up from the folder, towards the office, as he asked, “Did the corpses show any signs of torture?”
The officer replied, “No.”
Pedro ordered, “Then, bring them in. If they cannot clean up after themselves, we don't need them here.”
Pedro thought, 'I am very happy that the only person I know of in the city that could do a thorough job of corpse disposal is Sawyer, the former cleaner of Roanapur. And she hated her job, and she likely has no plans to take back up her former profession. It is not the corruption that I worry most about in destroying this city. It is the foolish corruption. I cannot allow killer fools in this town. The military will step in if things here get to out of hand.'
Pedro then looked back into the folder in his hand, as he paged through, and found another report that interested him. He looked up at his officers, as he inquired, “Also, there are reports of a new gang moving into the city, from the mainland?”
Another officer answered, inquired, in spanish, “Yes. And this gang is already trying to extortion the local shops in the east district. We think it is a new group. Maybe twenty members, at most. We have a few leads, but nothing concrete on who they are, and where they are at based at.”
Pedro thought, with disgust, 'I hate extortionists. They are nothing but parasites. They use bullying tactics to take hard earned money from local businesses. At least the drugs dealers and whores bring money into this city.'
Pedro continued to look at his officers, as he ordered, “I want the usual crew to be ready to bust some heads by ten this morning. I am going to take care of this, personally.”
Pedro saw his police officers smile, in response to his comment.
Pedro looked back at his folder. He then found another report that he wished to learn more about. He continued to read the report, as he questioned, “I also see a notation some chinese individuals selling drugs in the open? But, the types of drugs are not list?” He mentally added, 'Please, don't be who I think it is.'
A third police officer, one of the women in the group, said, in spanish, “Yes. Young chinese women, yes women, in black suits were spotted drug dealing to the local pushers on the west area. The reason this has caught our eye was they were doing this pretty much out in the open. No subtlety, whatsoever. And the reason we did not list the drugs names because we wanted to not have an office report on them, until we were sure it should be a matter of record. Some of the drugs have some strange names on their packaging, like dust and spice.”
Pedro looked up at his officers. He did not show it outwardly, but he inwardly cursed, 'Damn! Chang is starting to make his move. And he is adding fictional drugs to the mix, in this city. If the rest of the world gets wind of this stuff, it will cause the army to invade my town, to figure out what is going on.'
'I wish my brother was still in charge of the local cartel. He kept things calm and smooth. But, he got smart, ran, and joined the priesthood. On the other hand, I got handed the crap he left behind as his organization folded up and every god damn crooked fool in a hundred kilometers thinks they can come in a replace him. With Chang being the most dangerous. And I am going to have to eventually confront that super-human, gender bending, dimensional, badass warlord sometime... I just don't want too.'
'He could take on my entire police force by himself and win. I know that. And I do not have any real options to stop him. The only advantage is he does not know I am on to him. At the same time, I have to avoid River, or that telepath will blow everything out of the water for Melvin, Lee, and myself.'
'My only lucky break has been the politics up north has made the land border so open that most smugglers prefer to go over land, instead of sea. This is kept the major players on the mainland from taking a serious interest here.'
Pedro complimented, “Wise thinking our your part. Do not list the names of the drugs on the records. Also, pick those sellers up. But, do so politely. Anyone this brazen, and wearing such fine suits, is either crazy, or well connected. We need to find out which. And keep the drugs for future research, and matching purposed So, we have a sample of them to compare later, if they crop up again, and they hit our streets again.”
“And no sampling. These drugs are new. We do not know how dangerous they are, or the effects they have on people. If any of you do so, I will have your ass, and likely your job. These could be extremely addictive, on part heroin, or worse. Where it is not easy to kick. And with such a limited subjecting yourself to hell, when you are forced to endure withdraw, from their being no more of those drugs.”
“Also, since these drugs are new, we need to keep this quiet, for several reasons. Along with not listing them in the official records. Do not talk about them outside of the station. Because, no matter how you look at it. These drugs are trouble. And we do not need trouble.”
Pedro thought, 'Especially since we have our hands full. And these new drugs showing up, is bad news for everyone. Chang just does not realize that yet. But, if I do this right, I will be able to inform him later today.'
Pedro looked back down at the open folder. The officers stated quiet, as he finished paging through folder, half a minute later. He did not see anything else that caught his interest.
Pedro closed the folder and held it in his right hand. He looked up at his officers, as he asked, “So, is there anything not in this report?”
A fourth officer spoke up, in spanish, “Yes. This morning, my partner and I found out, from our sources, that someone is trying to set up a new whorehouse.”
Pedro turned to the officer that spoke up. He commented, “Unless it is part of the slave trade, I do not see the problem with that.”
The fourth officer stated, “No slaves involved. As far as we know. But, they are selling kiddie porn, and snuff films.”
In response, Pedro grimaced, as he inquired, “That is a problem. Who is this fool with a death wish?”
The officer stated, “The person goes by the name, Rowan Pigeon. I guess that person has a sense of humor, and an anime fan.”
Pedro thought, 'Yes. I showed a number of your, the Black Lagoon anime, which is one of the reasons I am ordering you to stay away from the Devil's Hotel, and this new Daiyu Palace Casino. I do so, for you continued protection.'
'But, there is another possibility. The person really is Rowan Pigeon, owner of the Jackpot, in Roanapur. Likely the scummiest person to come from Roanapur. I thought Lee would have killed him off. But, the writer just refuses to kill the characters he plays with.'
'Lee even brings some of them back from the dead, through reincarnation. Just another mess caused by Lee that I have to clean up, without alerting Revy's group, nor Chang's groups.'
'Some days I am tempted to throw Lee to those wolves, whom are after him. But then, I would have no one to act as a buffer between me and the insanity he brought my city.'
Pedro ordered, “Go pick him up. I will deal with him this the afternoon.”
The fourth officer corrected Pedro, as he said, “Her, sir. Not a him. The suspect is a woman.”
Pedro grimly thought, 'That likely Rowan has undergone the vat process as well. And she is likely a super-human, as well. I am going to have to call, Lee. Again. I do not like calling that man for advice. But, his advice is almost always solid. And this cannot wait for our meeting, tonight.'
'Still, back to the matter at hand. Fighter, or no fighter, I have to have my officers use kid gloves on those that have super-human abilities. Or, my officers might be seriously injured, or killed.'
'What was that term that Superman used in Justice League Unlimited finale? Ah yes, the world of cardboard speech. To that end, inexperienced super-humans may no know their own strength. And if they panic, they might kill someone, before they realize it.'
Pedro ordered, “Pick her up, and bring her here. But, treat her gently.'
The fourth officer nodded once, as he replied, “Yes, sir.”
Pedro state, “Okay. I believe we have covered everything. Anything else, anyone want to say?”
Pedro waited for a few seconds. But, no one replied.
Pedro then said, “Okay. This meeting is over. If you need anything, I will be in my office.”
Those officers, including Pedro, that were sitting, got up from their chairs, and all the officers left the meeting room.
Pedro was the last one out. He turned out the lights, and shut the door to the room, behind himself.
(_)
An hour later, Pedro was sitting behind his desk, in his office. He had already booted up his computer, and logged on top his account.
He had spent the last hour reading online forums, and news websites. This including checking on the local news in his home nation, Mexico.
Fortunately, the reality traveling madness that had come to De La Plata Podrido, had yet to be picked up by anyone. No even the conspiracy websites.
But, Pedro knew that it was likely only a matter of time. And then the real insanity would begin.
He also checked his e-mail on daily police reports, sent to him from the mainland, on gang reports and movements.
Pedro looked over at the clock on the computer monitor.
He thought, 'Nine ten AM. Lee should be having breakfast, right now.'
Pedro picked up his wireless phone, from its base, on his desk. He dialed the phone number for the Devil's Hotel Restaurant, and Bar.
When the phone was answered, Pedro heard a woman say, on the other end of the line, in spanish, “Devil's Hotel. What can we do for you?”
Pedro instantly recognized the voice has he requested, in spanish, “Hello Emily. I thought you, and your family, would be shark fishing by now?”
Emily stated, “Hi Pedro. And no. Not yet. We are going on vacation, next week. But, thanks for asking.”
Pedro thought, 'It is nice that the management for Emily and Grace are flexible on given them time off. Though, it is without pay. But, if they, Sans, or Isandro, have any problems. They can call me, and I will help fix those problems.'
Pedro commented, “Be careful, and I hope you have fun. Now, can you please get Lee, for me? I need to speak to him.”
Emily said, “No problem. I see him nearby, with his friend.”
Pedro thought, 'Yes. Sam. Those two are clearly good friends.' He replied, “No problems.”
A few seconds later, over the phone, Pedro heard Lee voice say, in english, “Hello.”
Pedro inquired, in english, “Hey Lee. It is Pedro. I have an important question for you. Did you give Rowan the vat process?”
Pedro thought, 'I am sure that Lee will recognize my voice. And we have to be careful, in case the phone lines are tap. Though, given I had to get Emily, to bring the phone to Lee. With Emily mentioning my name. There is nothing we can do about it, with the call. We will just have to be more careful, when we contact each other.'
(_)
At that moment, in the Devil's Hotel restaurant, at the bar counter, Lee had stopped eating his breakfast, to answer the wireless phone in his right hand. Sam was to his left, beside him at the counter, eating his own breakfast. And Emily stood across from him, behind the bar, with a patient look on her face.
The problem was that Sawyer, Lotton, and Shenhua, wanted to do something different that day. Instead of eating with their friends, at the tables, near the stage, they decided to eat at the bar, by Sam and Lee.
To Lee's right, in the stool next to his, as Sawyer. On Sawyer's right, sat Lotton. And to Lotton's right was Shenhua. All three women were having their breakfasts.
And taking into account the close proximity to three people after him, and with their enhanced hearing, When Lee received the phone, he had pressed the earpiece of the phone against his right ear, so the women did not over hear what the person on the other end was saying.
Also, he had seen from the corner of his right eye, that the women by him had not paid much attention to Lee conversation. Though, he did not turn his head in the women's direction, for concern of catching their attention.
Lee looked ahead of him, at the shelves on the wall, across from the bar counter, as he maintained his poker mask. He thought, 'I am glad I took the precaution of pressing the phone to my ear, or Pedro my have accidentally blown my cover. And, from the corner of my right eye, they do not seem interested in my conversation. So, I caught a lucky break here. Though, I do not dare look at them, for they might then start paying attention to my phone call.'
'Also, I am glad Emily did not mention who it was in front of the girl. I do not think they noticed when Emily picked up the phone. And she was speaking in spanish. But, I noticed. And from their conversation, I can tell that Pedro is good friends with Emily. Though, that is a matter for another time.'
'Now, given how close the girls are, I am going to have to reply, to Pedro, in code. Though, this is not the first time I had to do so. And Pedro is quick enough on the uptake, to understand, and keep up with me.'
Lee continued to look in front of him, as he cryptically said, “Man, it is to early for jokes And you know I cannot say that in polite company. But, in all honestly, I found ignoring a problem is sometimes best recourse.” Lee then hung up the phone, and handed it back to Emily.
As Emily took the phone, she asked, “What was that about?”
Lee replied, with his face in his hands, “You don't want to know, Emily. Just someone with poor taste. And poor timing.” He thought, 'Which is mostly true. Those Pedro is polite to me, most of the time.'
Emily merely shrugged her right shoulder, in response to Lee's comment. She then turned and walked over to place the phone back one its base, before heading back to the cash register, at the end of the bar counter, near the entrance to the restaurant.
Meanwhile, Sam turned to Lee, as he said, “By the way, I am going to be busy today. So, you will be on your own.”
Lee turned to Sam, as he stated, “That is okay. I have other things I can do. Though, thank you for letting me know in advance.”
Sam replied, “No problem.”
Meanwhile, Sawyer, Lotton, and Shenhua did not pay attention towards Sam and Lee, as they continued eating their meal.
With, Sam and Lee also going back to finishing their breakfast, as well.
(_)
At that moment, in the Plata Podrido Police Station, inside Pedro's office, across town, the line went dead.
Pedro calmly placed the phone back on its base.
Pedro was not angry with Lee suddenly hanging up the phone on his end. Because, Pedro understood what Lee was trying to cryptically tell him.
Pedro calmly thought, “We played this game before. What he said, between the lines, was that the girls were nearby, and that he ignored Rowan in his writes. Which, from what I remember reading of his stories, is correct... And now that I think about it. I continue to feel like we are in a really intense spy thriller. Still, I will find out this afternoon. Right now, I have to prepare to kick ass, and take names, at ten, this morning.'
Pedro then when back to checking the internet, for any useful information, as hew patiently waited until it was time for him to leave, in the morning.
(_)
Forty-five minutes later, it was nine fifty-eight, Pedro set his computer to a password protected screensaver. He then got ready to head out.
Soon after, Pedro walked out his office, with his coat, hat, and sunglasses on. Also, his police radio clipped to the left side of his belt.
He sat that his personal crew of five plain clothes officers were ready.
Pedro smiled, as he said, in spanish, “Let me get mister justice, and I will be ready to go.”
Pedro walked back into his office, turn to his left, and retrieved his wooden baseball bat from the corner.
As he walked back out of his office, he shut the door behind him. He looked at his men, as he stated, “Alright boys. I am ready to go.”
One of the officers asked, “Where are we going?”
Pedro answered, “Delgado's.”
He then starting walking towards the back exit of the police station, and to the parking lot. With his five men behind him.
(_)
Ten minutes later, three, four door, black sedan cars parked in front of Delgado's. A local pool hall.
As Pedro got out of his car, with one of his officers, Pedro noticed that it has becoming a beautiful, cool, sunny morning, with a light sea breeze.
Meanwhile two officers got out of each of the other two cars.
Pedro had his bat in his right, hand as he ordered, “Gentlemen, follow me.”
Pedro walked into the pool hall first, with his five men right behind him.
Pedro looked around to see about eight men there, but not the man he wanted to see.
Most of the men were playing pool at some of the table, as they held their cue sticks.
Still, all eyes turned to look at Pedro and the newcomers.
Pedro held his bat behind his neck, with both his hands, as he loudly warned, in spanish, “Listen up boys. Behave, and things will not get ugly.”
Pedro then dropped his bat to his side, as he thought, he thought, 'Well, since I have no real leads, I will go to the one person still in town that could give me answers. The one guy in my brother's group that did not immediately run. A local bookie, money launder, and owner of this pool hall, whom knows his time here is limited.'
Pedro looked around the room, as removed his bat from his neck, as he held it downward, to his right side, by the handle, with his right hand. He firmly stated, “Novio Delgado. I know you are here. So, come on out. I am not here to arrest you.”
A few seconds later, a skinny, gray haired, hispanic man, whom looked like he was in his early fifties, stood up from his hiding place, behind one of the pool table, in the back of the room. The man's gray hair was short, and he wore a brown leisure suit, with a light brown tie, and black dress shoes.
As Pedro calmly walked over to the skinny man, he thought, 'Ah, Novio Delgago. A mobster of a previous age. And age that understood discretion was the better part of valor. That a mafia organization did not have to have a small army to function, and make a profit. Paciano was smart to hire him, years ago, after most of his previous group got busted, except for him, and a few others.'
'Also, I know for a fact that my brother showed him that Black Lagoon series. So, Novio at least has a clue about what is going on right now. And he knows better than to outright state who has come to town.'
When Pedro reached Novio, both men looked at each other.
Novio said, in spanish, “Hi Pedro.”
Pedro responded, “Hi Novio. Look... We both know who has come to town. With them setting up shop here. And we both know that you are desperate to raise enough money, to leave the city permanently, before they get around to coming after you.”
Novio stated, “That is an understatement. I will be honest, I really didn't believe your brother, that night our group left town. That is why I stayed in town. Then, I did some digging. And Mister Del Soto. And more are coming here. They even opened up that casino. He opened up that casino. We both know that behind that smile of his, he is a ruthless as they come.”
Pedro said, “I know.” He thought, 'Oh boy, do I know.'
Novio commented, “It is like the gates of hell just opened. And I just want get out of here. But, I am a man of specialize skills, and I don't know anyone outside of this city that would hire me. And I don't have enough money yet to leave town for good. To make matters worse, everyone in this business, that has a brain, is also jumping ship. Business has been on the decline.”
Pedro offered, “I know how you feel. You know I can help you get out of here. You help me. I help you. I am looking for some fools from the mainland that are trying to extort people here.”
Pedro saw Novio's eyes look into his, then shift to Novio's right side, near some thugs, playing pool, at the nearby tables. And finally, Novio's eyes shifted back at Pedro's own eyes. Novio stated, “Pedro. You know I cannot say anything to you.”
Pedro thought, 'Ah. But, you already did.'
Though, just as Pedro was about to turn to confront the men nearby, from the corner of his left eye, he saw one of the men rush at him, using a cue stick as a club against him.
Pedro immediately brought up his wooden bat, and he swung it at the cue stick.
The cue stick shattered the moment it made contact.
With Pedro's next swing, he knock the thug down onto a pool table.
Pedro lips curled into a feral, toothy grin, with a wild expression on his face, for only a second, as he used his wooden baseball bat to brain the man to death, against the pool table. Pedro's then caught himself, as he forced himself back to having a calm expression on his face.
At the same time, the other seven thugs charged at the Pedro's men. His men quickly pulled out their pistols and killed them where the stood. Though, his men angle their shots away from Pedro and Novio.
As the situation calmed down, Pedro turned to Novio, as he said, “Sorry for the mess.”
Novio stated, “No problem. Before you came in, those fools just kept bragging about how big and bad they were. And how they were going to clean out this town. All the while, they threatened me. If I did not help them, they would kill me. Fools. All of them. They just did not want to take the time to learn how crime was conducted in this town. Because of all that, I was planning to call you about them, later today.”
Pedro thought, 'Yes. Real posers.' He said, “I appreciate that. I will have some people come by later to take care of the bodies.”
Novio responded, “Thank you. And I do have the information you may want. I know where they are based all. I shit you not. They are hiding in the large abandoned warehouse, by the marsh side, north of the bridge to the mainland.”
Pedro thought, 'Interesting.' He asked, “I know which building you are talking about. How many are there?”
Novio answered, “Eight more. I think.”
Pedro stated, “Thank you. I will not forget your help, Novio.” He then turned to his men, as he said, “Come on boys. Let's go kick some ass.”
Pedro held his baseball bat, towards the ground, with his right hand, as he, and his men walked out of the pool hall, and to their cars.
(_)
Twenty minutes later, Pedro, and his men, parked their cars behind building, near the warehouse, where they were told the gang was in.
The six men stood beside their cars. All the men all had bulletproof vests on.
Pedro and his men had their weapons in hand. His men each had automatic rifle. Pedro held his his semi-automatic pistol in his right hand, with him already loading a round in the chamber. So, the weapon was ready to fire.
Pedro thought, 'My men are trained and experienced in this form of combat. If we rush them, and we are careful, we will be fine. Still, why did this gang use a warehouse as a base of operations. It is so cliche.
'Though, these fools using this warehouse, as a hideout, does make it easy for me, and my boys. I know this warehouse. There are three exits. Also, there are no windows. This is going to be a turkey shoot.'
'Also, since I have been to this warehouse a few time. And I know the owners. I believe they broke into this one. I will have one of my boys check with the owners this warehouse, later today. To make sure they are okay.'
'Though, since the owners just store stuff here, for long term storage. I am sure they are fine. And they are just not aware of the break in.'
Pedro walked over to the side of the building, to get a clear look at the warehouse entrance, no more than fifty feet from him. He saw the front entrance was cracked open, and there were no guards around.
Pedro thought, 'These idiots do not even know to lock the door, and guard the place. They are posers. And they are about to be dead posers.'
Pedro turned his men, as he used his empty left hand to point at three of his men, He quietly ordered, in spanish, “You three are team one. You will stay here, and go in the front.”
Pedro then used his left hand to point at two of his other men, as he quietly stated, “You two are team two. Circle around this building, and you will find there is side entrance nearby. I want you to go in there. Also, before you break in the door, first check the door to see if it is unlocked. These fools left the front door open. Also, I will win around to the back entrance and handle the stragglers.”
“Keep your radios handy, I will give the signal to break in. Also, keep in mind that Novio said there was around eight people in there. Not, exactly eight people. So, be ready, in case there are more people.”
“Also, while we are not taking prisoners, among the gang. Though, if you find any children in there, don't kill them, unless you have to. Also, they may have hostages. Given we are dealing with violent idiots, you never tell. So, don't shoot everyone you see, until you are sure they are a gang member.”
“Also, stay quite. Surprise is our best weapon here. Next to guns.”
“Am I clear?”
His men softly answered, in unison, in spanish, “Yes, Chief.”
Pedro quietly said, “Good. Let's go.”
Pedro and the two men he had assigned to break in from the side door, began walking briskly around the back of the building they were behind, so as to avoid any risk of anyone in the warehouse, walking outside, and seeing them.
(_)
A few minutes later, Pedro hand right hand gripped the semi-automatic pistol, as he stood beside the back door of the warehouse.
With his left hand, he tested the door knob, and he found that it was indeed, unlocked.
As he then used his left hand to reach for his radio, he thought, 'What idiots.'
Pedro set the radio volume to low. Pedro then quietly stated into his radio, “This is the Chief. I just checked the back door, it is unlocked. Are you all ready to go.”
Over the radio, one group said, “Team one, ready.”
The other group said, through the radio, “Team two, ready.”
Pedro stated, “Go.” He then clipped his radio back onto the left side of his belt.
After which, Pedro used his left hand to reach for the knob. He slowly turned the knob, and opened the door.
As Pedro walked inside, he gently closed the door behind him, so as to not alert the gang members.
Fortunately, Pedro found that the skylight windows provided plenty of illumination into the warehouse, to see with.
As Pedro looked around, he saw there were crates and junk around the warehouse.
Pedro thought, 'Not my first time doing this. But, all this stuff blocking my view is going to make this a bit dangerous for me and my boys.'
Pedro then slowly made his way to the far corner of the warehouse, opposite to the side and front entrances. He then slowly made his way further into the warehouse, as he checked row after row of crates.
After Pedro cleared the first two back rows of crates, he started hearing gunshots coming for the front half of the warehouse.
Suddenly, as just as he was able to check the next to row, two gang members ran around the corner, and ambushed him at point blank range.
Pedro had time to get off one shot, a head shot to one of the members, killing him instantly.
But, the other man, got a solid punch to Pedro's stomach, knocking him back to the ground, with him dropping his pistol, away from his hands.
As Pedro looked up at the gang member, he saw that the gang member had pulled out a metal rod, from a nearby pile of junk, which he planned to use as a club.
While the gang member approached Pedro, the police chief did even flinch, as he quickly pulled up his right pants legging. He then swiftly used his right hand to draw his revolver from his ankle holster, on the outside of his right leg. After which, Pedro took quick aim, and he fired one shot between the gang member's eyes.
The gang member dropped his metal rod, and collapsed, with him dead before he even hit the ground.
Next, Pedro holstered his revolver, and lowered his right pants legging. After which, Pedro stood up, and walked over to retrieve his semi-automatic pistol. As he did so, Pedro noticed that the gunfire stopped.
After he had his main weapon in his right hand, he leaned back up, while use his right thumb to turn on the hammer safety of the pistol.
Pedro then used his left hand to unclasp radio from his belt.
Pedro asked, into his radio, “Is everything clear on your ends? Any injures our our side?”
There was a reply through the radio, “Team one clear. No injuries for us.”
A couple of seconds later, there was another reply through the radio, “Team two clear. No injuries for us.”
Pedro stated, “I took care of two of them. How was it on your end?”
There was an answered, “Team Two. We took care of three.”
A second later, another reply stated, “Team One. We also dealt with three.”
Pedro thought, 'That makes eight of them, in all.' He inquired, “Anyone else here?”
There was a reply, “Team one. We found no one else.”
A second later, there was another reply, “Yes. We found three hostages. Warehouse worker. Other than being tied up. They appear fine. It seems that they came in this morning to work, and they were captured. From what they are saying, the gang was planning on ransoming them. We have already untied them.”
Pedro complimented, “Good work, team two. I want you two to make sure the hostages are fine, have transportation home, and they are told to keep their months shut about this. Team one, I will meet up at the front entrance. And as we move around. Be careful not to shot each other, and me.”
Pedro then put away his radio, and he started careful making his way to the front entrance.
(_)
A few minutes later, Pedro noticed there were no more gunshots, since he radioed his men.
By then, he met with team one at the front of the warehouse. After Pedro saw his men, had check the safety of his gun, to make sure it was one. He then holstered his semi-automatic pistol back into his shoulder holster.
When Pedro reached his men, he came to a stop, as he stood ten feet in front of them, Pedro asked, “Anything else to report?”
One of the officer stated, in spanish, “No sir.”
Pedro stated, “Good. Have a clean up crew come deal with the bodies. Check to make sure the property owners are fine, and let them know about the break in. Also, tell them to let us know if there are any damage claims that need to be attended to. I want a full report on my desk by five o'clock.”
The officer whom replied before, said, “Yes sir.”
Pedro replied, “Good. I leave this to you. See you back at the station, in an hour, or so.”
Pedro then walked passed his men, and out the front door.
As he headed for his car, he thought, 'Even though it is still early. I could use some lunch. And I am in the mood for cuban. And I think I will take my time in doing so. As I am not really looking forward to those I am going to have to meet this afternoon.'
Pedro was soon got into his car, and drove to a good cuban restaurant that he occasionally like to go to. So, he could have an early lunch.
(_)
Around an hour later, at the Devil's hotel theater room, with Sam busy that day, Lee had just finished an early lunch, by himself, at the hotel restaurant.
Lee had bribed the projectionist, with a hundred dollar bill, to show a Robert Downey Junior movie marathon of, Tropic Thunder, Sherlock Holmes two thousand nine movie, and Sherlock Holmes Game of Shadows.
Lee was sitting in the four row, to the left, on the seat nearest to the middle walking lane.
Lee was the only person in the theater.
Just as Lee was settling into his seat, in the theater, with lights dimming, meaning there was less than a minute before the first movie started, Lee heard the door open, from behind him.
Lee turned around in his seat, to his right, to see Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru walk in. The three women were wearing their casual clothing.
Lee thought, 'I might as well find out why they are here.' He asked, “Hello ladies. What are you doing here?”
The three women came to a stop, as they looked at Lee.
Akira answered, “We saw you head the theater, and we were wondering what you are going to watch?” She thought, 'And our children are with the Lagoon sisters. So, we have nothing better to do.'
Lee maintain a mask of calmness, as he thought, 'This should not be a problem. These three are the nicest of Revy's group. And except for them wanting my hide for being the writer, these three are nice to be around. So, as long as they don't know I am the writer, I should be fine. And these three movies will not tip them off. They are just good movies. So, I might as well answer them.'
Lee answered, “I am about to watch a movie Robert Downey Junior movie marathon. A comedy and two mysteries. Some of Mister Downey's most recent works. And they are good movies. And I never got a chance to see them on the big screen. So, I am going to take the opportunity now.”
Lee thought, 'Though, that is not completely true. I did watch them, and a number of movies, in their theater, during the time loops. But, if I mentioned that. You might ask around, and with no one remembering that. It would raise questions against me.
Natsuru inquired, “Which movies?”
Lee stated, “The first one is a comedy titled, Tropic Thunder. The second two movies a remake of Sherlock Holmes, and the sequel to that movie, which was release in two thousand eleven.”
Ranma asked, “Sounds interesting. While we have an idea about Sherlock Holmes is about. What is Tropic Thunder about?”
Lee thought, with amusement, 'This is going to be fun.' He stared, “As crazy as it sounds, it is about a bunch of actors filming a Vietnam war movie, starting in Vietnam. Without them realizing they made their way into the Gold Triangle of IndoChina, where they have run in with drug lords. With Mister Downey playing while in a black-face. And in characters. Extremely in character.”
Akira deadpanned, “You're kidding?”
Lee replied, “Nope. And he got an oscar nomination for his performance in this film.”
Ranma stated, “Okay. You got our interest.”
Akira said, “Mine too.”
Natsuru commented, “Same here.”
Lee offered, “You can sit by me if you want. I enjoyed our time watching that Tron movie.” He thought, 'Which is true. Though, it was a strange, and somewhat stress experience for me.'
Natsuru said, “Yes. That was fun.”
Akira replied, “That was a good movie.”
Ranma shrugged, as she commented, “It was okay.”
A few seconds later, all three women sat beside Lee, on the forth row. With Lee turned back around in his seat, to sit comfortably facing the screen.
Akira was to Lee's left. To Akira's left was Natsuru. And to Natsuru's left sat Ranma.
The movie then began playing.
At the beginning of the movie, the film showed the fake previews of fake movies, which confused the three women.
Ranma asked, “What movies are these previews of? This theater does not play previews.”
Lee answered, “You're right, Ranma. The previews are part of the joke of the movie. The movie is about actors making a movie. And this is a sample of some of the works those character actors did, in the setting of this movie.”
Lee mentally reflected, 'Though, given world as myth theory is real, I am watching a movie with three fictional characters, from three different series, from the same reality. Which is a different reality than this one. It is safe to say that a Tropic Thunder reality exists. That means the movies for these previews exist, in that reality. Along with the those movies existing, as real, in other realities.'
'Talk about a mind screw.'
'Still, if I get one of their reality devices, I might go to a reality where these previews exist in movie formats. And if I get the chance, I believe I will check out the Scorcher movies, the Satan's Alley movie, and the Tropic Blunder movie, within this movie.'
'It would be insane, if I ever had the chance to rebuild my video collect, and I placed a copy of Tropic Thunder, with the movies that were shown in the Tropic Thunder movie, that I had to go to two separate realities to get. One for the Tropic Thunder movie, the other reality, within the Tropic Thunder movie, for those movies.'
'Though, now that I think about. I better stop thinking about things from this point of view. This is starting to turn into a mind screw orgy.'
Meanwhile, as all four adults in the room, continued to watch the previews, the three women had heard Lee's comments.
Akira continued to watch the movie, as she stated, “That is so twisted, that makes sense.” She thought, 'Especially given our lives.'
They continued watching, to when the film reached the movie itself, with a the catchy theme song, Ball of Confusion.
A few minutes later, as the jungle was accidentally exploded, without the cameras, in the movie rolling, all four of them laughed at the comedic scene.
As they all calmed down, Natsuru stated, “Blowing up a jungle without getting it on tape. Now, that is an epic fail.”
They continued watching the film, as they got a few more chuckles.
Then, it reached the scene where the director is blow up by a land mine.
And the resulting situation, of the Speedman character playing with the directors head, while at the same time, the drug lord's patrol, hiding in the bushes, which Speedman's insanity unfold.
All four adult were laughing at the twist scene before them.
Between laughs, Akira stated, “That is the most sicked thing I have ever scene in a movie. And it so damn funny.”
Natsuru was chuckling, as she commented, “Thought, I find it interesting that the local drug cartel member think the actors are legit soldiers.”
Ranma was giggling, as she questioned, “How would they know any different?”
By then, they had all calmed down, as Lee stated, “That is true. And they are actors. They are very good at their craft.”
All four of them then when back to laughing even harder.
Eventually, the movie reached the point of the Speedman character meeting the local drug lord.
Ranma flatly inquired, “So, the local drug lord is a boy?”
Akira shrugged, as replied “We have seen far stranger.”
Natsuru commented, “There is some true to that.”
Lee was paying attention to their comments, as he thought, 'And I have heard of stranger things, than in this movie, in real life. And I am not talking about you three, and your family and friends.'
Then, came the Jeff's detox scene, of being tied to a tree, at night. With his comment on giving someone a blow job to get free of his bindings.
Everyone laughed at the joke.
Lee thought to himself, at watching the blow job proposition, 'Jack Black really delivers that line. This scene is the only time I have been tantalized by a statement of one man offering to do a blow job for another man.”
Soon after came the Lazarus character's awesome scene, of him saying, “Here's my motherfucking farm.” With Lazarus them firing his two rifles at the enemies, even though the weapons were armed with blanks. Then, when he finished firing his rifles, with his friends, and forcing the enemies to the ground. Lazarus knelt down, and pulled is rifles sideways, in a crisscross patter across his chest, as he stated, “I'm a lead farmer, motherfucker.”
Natsuru said, “Guys. We are going to have to tell the others about this film. It is great.”
Akira agreed, “You got that right.”
Ranma stated, “Yes. It is very funny. The characters in this characters in this movie are really shaping up to be awesome.”
Lee thought, 'You probably don't realize by how much. The hero characters in this movie are also probably as insane and badass you are women are. Because, their weapons were using blanks, and they were playing a magnificent bluff on a small army. And their plan worked.'
The movie soon showed the Four Leaf character using the flamethrower. The scene caused everyone in audience to lightly laugh.
Then, came the Lazarus character's famous statement, “I'm the dude, playing the dude. disguised as another dude.”
From the corner of his left eye, Lee saw the trio started to laugh very hard.
As they calmed down, Ranma said, “I have been there.”
Natsuru, stated, “We have all be there.”
Akira agreed, “You are right about that.”
A couple of minutes later, the movie showed the scene of the drug lord boy coming out of the fiery building, unharmed, while carrying shoulder mounted rocket launcher, as long as he is tall, and fired is at the truck the heroes are escaping in. Hitting the truck.
Ranma stated, “Okay. That is badass.”
Then, the Cody character made his statement, “Oh my god. I am moving to catering, after this.”
Ranma flatly commented, “He clearly does not know the dangers of catering.”
All four adults laughed, for a few seconds.
Lee thought, 'You would know, Ranma. You would know. Considering your series pioneered martial arts and crafts. With you being at the forefront of that insanity.'
Soon, the movie ended, and went to credits.
The three women turned to Lee.
Akira stated, “That was a great movie, Lee. It was true comedic gold. Thanks for convincing us to watch it with you.”
Ranma stated, “Yea. That movie had some good surprises in it. A real gem. I can see how Mister Downey got his oscar nomination from his role in that movie.”
Natsuru said, “It was fun to watch.”
Lee turned to the three women, as he politely commented, “You're welcome. And yea. That is a good movie. I even found it to be funnier the second I watched it.”
The three women giggled, in response to Lee's comment.
As the three women calmed down, Natsuru inquired, “So, how good are these Sherlock Holmes movies, that you have scheduled to show next?”
Lee answered, “Both movies have analytical ass kicking mixed with some great acting, good directing, wonderful plots, and good mysteries.
Natsuru grinned, as she said, “I think we will stay and watch.”
Ranma said, “I am up for a few more movies.”
Akira stated, in a happy, eager tone of voice, “Yes. We will most certainly have to watch those movies.”
Lee replied, “Good. Because, I believe you will enjoy them, immensely.”
And so, except for a few breaks, the four adults enjoyed the afternoon watching movies together, in the hotel theater. And Lee was proven right. As the three gender bender loves, did enjoy Lee's movie selection. And after the movies were finished, they thanks Lee for the opportunity to experience such entertainment.
(_)
Around the time the Tropic Thunder film ended for Lee, Ranma, Natsuru, and Akira, in the Devil's Hotel theater, Pedro returned to the police station, after he took his time in having a good lunch, from a nearby cuban restaurant.
It was around one thirty PM, as Pedro walked through the station, and towards his office.
As Pedro made his way down the hallways, and section off aisles of the building, to his office, he thought, 'Now, that was a good lunch. That cuban place really does have good cooking talent. Still, I stayed a little too long there. But, some things cannot be helped.' And I did need a chance to collect my thoughts, before my meetings this afternoon.'
'I wonder if Lee occasionally has problems like this? Where he has to collect his thoughts, in dealing with his problems... That is likely the case.'
While Pedro continued walking down the aisle, beside the rows of desks, to Pedro's right side, one of the officers stopped in front of him.
Pedro came to a stop, as he turned to look at the office. He calmly inquired, in spanish, “What is it?”
The officer answered, in spanish, “We checked on the owners of that warehouse, they doing fine. And we have informed them of the break in.”
Pedro thought, 'Good. That is a relief.' responded, “Good. Anything else?”
The officer mentioned, “Yes, We also have both that Rowan woman and those three chinese women in lockup. What do you want done with them?”
Pedro asked, “Are they together?”
The officer replied, “Yes. You did not say not to keep them separated.”
Pedro thought, with anger towards himself, 'Damn!... Well, the situation cannot be helped, now. Chang will eventually learn that Rowan is here, in town. Still, I have to gamble at how good of a badass cop I can be. Besides, I think it is time to flush Chang out. And bring him out of that fortress, which he calls a casino.'
Pedro forced himself to calm down. He then said, “You are right. My mistake. Still, bring Ms Pigeon to my office, in five minutes. And let the chinese women use the phone.”
The officer responded, “Yes sir.” He turned, and went to do as he was instructed.
Pedro then continued towards his office.
When he reached his office, he left the door open. As he walked into the room, he flipped on the ceiling lights of the room, from a light switch, on the interior side of the room, on the wall, between the windows, and right side of the door, when facing the inside of the room.
Though, when the blinds were open, Pedro could set at his desk, and look into the main room of the police station, and to the far right wall of the main room.
In his office, Pedro came to a stop, as the coat rack, on the interior side of the door. He took off his sunglasses, and put them in a coat pocket. He then put away his hat and coat, onto the coat rack, in his office. Finally, he sat down on his nice, comfortable, cushion chair behind his desk.
Pedro quickly logged back into this computer, from the password protect screensaver, he set the computer to, before he left to deal with the new gang members at Delgado's.
Next, Pedro propped his legs onto the left side of his desk, opposite side from where is phone and computer were. Pedro turned to his left, as he saw what was on the shelves of that side of the room.
Pedro thought, 'This is going to be so much fun.'
Pedro then turned back to look at the open door to his office, as he patiently waited for Rowan to be escorted into his office.
A few minutes later, Pedro watched, with an amused look on his face, as he saw one of his female officers escort a dark skinned woman with a black a afro walked in. The woman's body was slender, and she was young.
Pedro thought, I had to even think it. But, in the right clothing, or lack there of, she is admittedly attractive.'
Pedro took a closer look at the woman. He saw that the woman had a slender body, and was in her mid-twenties. She wore yellow leisure suit, with run sunglasses over her eyes. While the style of clothing looked like it was made for a pimp, but was fitted for her female physical frame.
Pedro thought, 'I am surprised to see that she had her sunglasses on. Then again, I did tell my boys to treat her gently. So, they likely let her keep her shades. Still, she is a walking oxymoron. Still, Lee does good work. Even when he does not even realize it.'
Pedro looked at the officer, as he stated, in spanish, “Shut the door behind you.”
The officer gently shut the door behind her, as she left the office.
Pedro turned to look at the dark skinned woman. He calmly said, in english, “Please. Sit down.”
Pedro watched as she sat down in the chair to his right, in front of his desk.
After Rowan was seated, she looked at him, in his face. With Pedro look back at her face.
Pedro flatly stated, with a bit of sarcasm in his tone of voice, “I am Police Chief Pedro Del Soto of De La Plata Podrido. You must be Rowan Pigeon. I hope you are enjoying your stay in my city.”
Rowan replied, in a casual tone of voice, in english, “Yea. It isn't a bad place. But, I would like to know why you had me picked up?”
Pedro answered, in a tone of voice that was dry as a desert, “We feel that you are attracting the wrong clientele to this city.”
Rowan smirked, as she said, “We both know how this is going to play out. You are the corrupt police chief, in a sewer of a town.”
Pedro dropped his feet back to the floor, behind his desk, as he sternly stated, “I will have you know that in the last ten years, since becoming police chief, I have cleaned up this town.”
“In this city, there are no more daily drive by shootings. No extortionists. No sex slavery. No more turf wars. I taught through hard knocks, sometimes very hard knocks, the criminal element of this town, that discretion and subtlety are the better parts of valor. I even cleaned out the station personnel that could not get with the program.”
“That program being keeping this city together, in one piece, from a very horrible world that wants to tear it apart, was our main priority. And as long as you do not pissed off the wrong person in this city, this town is now a very nice, pleasant place to live.”
Rowan quipped, “Yea right. Here is your bribe. And I will be going.” She then pulled out something from a coat pocket, and threw it onto the desk.
Pedro saw that it was a roll of U.S hundred dollar bills.
Rowan then began to get up, when Pedro sternly ordered, “Sit back down!”
Rowan did so, as she turned to look at him.
Pedro demanded, “Who do you think you are?”
Rowan's lips curled into a very wicked grin, as she said, “A women with powerful friends.”
Pedro called her bluff, as he inquired, “Really? Like who?”
Rowan looked around the room, as she tried to think up a passable lie.
It was then that she spotted on the shelf, in the corner of the room, to her right, the Black Lagoon blu-ray anime boxes, and collection of manga volumes.
When she looked back at Pedro, she saw him smiling a mischievous grin towards her.
Pedro stated, “You could also say I have strange taste in online fiction.”
Rowan accused, “You know who I am. You're the writer of those stories. I must say, you made my life more interesting.”
Pedro casually countered, “No. I am not the writer of those stories. I am just good that at my job. I put two and two together. And I know that among those from the city you came from, pretty much no one really liked you.”
Pedro used his right hand to picked up the roll of hundreds dollar bills. He then tossed the roll of money back into Rowan's lap
Rowan quickly picked up the cash, from her lap, and pocketed it. She then looked back up at Pedro's face, and from the serious expression on the Police Chief's face, she could tell that he meant business.
Pedro coldly stated, “I am not Watsup. I do not play golf. And I hate bribes. I am a wicked man in a crooked town. And you do not know who my friends are. So listen here, you sick excuse of a pimp. It is not the drugs and the whoring that bothers me. It is profiting off the suffering. And I hate that! Especially, when the content deals with CHILDREN!”
“I know your type. You do not start the fire, but you profit from adding fuel to that fire. You stir the pot, and attract the worst sort of people, making things worse for everyone involved. You bring out the worst in everyone. I was born here. I have lived here all my life. I will not let you turn my home town into ANOTHER ROANAPUR!”
“We already know about the kiddie porn and the snuff films you are selling here, in MY CITY! It stops now. I would think after the fiasco with the vampire twins, you would know better than to deal in that shit. But, I guess that is not the case. So, I am going to warn you right now to keep your filth out of my town.”
“And if you continue to try to attract the worst sort of people to this town, I will use my connections in the cartels, and you will personally find out what is it like to be in sex trade from the other side.”
Pedro then punctuated every syllable, as he continued, “Do. I. Make. My. Self. Clear?”
Rowan gulped. She then replied, in a weak, fearful tone of voice, that Pedro could barely hear, “Yes.”
Pedro smiled wickedly, as he said, “Good. Now, you can enjoy the city all you like. There is much this town has to offer. But, you will not set up shop here.”
Rowan pointed out, “I have noticed you have not done anything about Chang's operation, nor Revy's group.”
Pedro stated, “Actually, I am starting to focus on Chang. Still, Chang has style. Also, I admit that I find his female side hot. And I had an up close, and personal look of that body, when I was a judge at a recent talent contest, at the hotel Revy, and her group are staying at.”
Pedro saw Rowan's eyes widen, from his comment.
Pedro thought, with amusement, 'So, you did not know about that event. Good.'
Pedro went onto say, “On the other hand, I realize that Revy and her group, are like a hurricane. They are clearly not planning to plant roots here. So, I just have to do my best to help my city weather them, like a powerful storm, until they leave. Then, we will rebuild, and become stronger for the experience.”
“Now, that we have that clear, I ask you to keep what was I said here to yourself.”
Rowan swiftly replied, in a no nonsense tone of voice, “No problem.”
Pedro stated, “Good.”
Pedro then picked up his phone, and dial an extension within his police station. He said into the phone, in spanish, “Please, send an officer in here.” He then hung up his phone.
A minute later, and officer reached his door, knocked on the door. Rowan turned in her seat, to look at the door.
From inside the office, at his desk, Pedro stated, in spanish, “Come in.”
The officer opened the door, and walked into Pedro's office.
The female police officer then came to a stop, behind Rowan, while she faced Pedro.
Pedro looked at the officer, as he calmly instructed, in english, for Rowan's benefit, “Please escort Ms Pigeon out of the building.”
The officer nodded once, as she replied, “Yes, sir.”
Rowan silently got up. With the female officer escorting Rowan out of Pedro's office.
Rowan was soon lead out of the front doors of the building, where she was let go, to go about her day.
(_)
A few seconds after Rowan was out of sight, Pedro breathed a sigh of relief. He thought, 'I lucked out. She clearly does not have a clue of what she is capable of. Now, to do paperwork, as I wait for the other inevitable hammer to fall in front of me, this afternoon.'
Pedro them opened a drawer in his desk, and he pulled out some reports he had to do, along with a pen.
Pedro then spend the next hour doing paper work.
After he finished, Pedro surfed the internet on his computer until he got a phone call.
Pedro answered the phone, and he immediately recognized the voice on the other end.
Pedro thought, with annoyance, 'Ah. The daily bitchfest, from my mainland superiors. The only reason they don't fire me is they cannot find anyone else who cares enough, or stupid enough, to willingly replace me as police chief of this garbage heap.'
'Still, I have to downplay what I tell him.
Pedro responded to the other end of the phone, with a mix of downplaying and lies.
Pedro said, in spanish, “Yea, it's me... I don't think you would believe me if I told you... No. I have not seen that man since the talent contest... I don't care if D.C. is interested in him, I have my hands full, as is... You come down here if you want. I warn you though, you will not like what you find here... I am not joking... Go ahead. Send the army in. You will likely lose.”
The other end hung up.
Pedro hung up the phone, and he just sat there for a few minutes in silence, while he contemplated his life, and how he ended up where he was, in his life.
A few minutes later, Pedro pulled out his semi-automatic pistol, from his shoulder holster. He ejected the clip, and unloaded it.
He set it on his desk.
He then pulled out his revolver, from his ankle holster, on the outside side of his right leg. He leaned up, and unloaded the weapon on his desk. After which, he set the firearm on his desk, next to his semi-automatic weapon.
With his weapons unloaded, Pedro pulled out his gun cleaning kit from a desk drawer. He then closed the drawer, and opened the cleaning kit.
Pedro took his time, as he took apart both his guns.
Pedro then slowly cleaned the parts of his guns one at a time.
Pedro cleaned his revolver first, due to the revolver having fewer parts, and being easier to clean. And within a few minutes, he was finished with it. He loaded his revolver, and stuck it back into his ankle holster.
Fifteen minutes later, as he was finished putting back together his semi-automatic pistol, with the loaded, polished magazine for the weapon, set beside it.
Pedro has already put his cleaning kit up. And he was about to load his weapon with his magazine, and holster his weapon, when his phone rang.
Pedro answered into it, in spanish, “What is it?”
The police officer on the other end stated, in spanish, “Sir, there is a Mister Chang here, who wants to speak with you.”
Pedro said, “Do not search him. And send him into my office in one minute.” He then hung up the phone. He thought, 'I guess his women called him. And he finally got around to coming here. If I had him frisked, it would leave a bad first impression with him, on his first time to my police station.'
'Though, he is likely armed. He is not going to do something foolish in my station, unless I give him an excuse to do so. And I have intention of giving him an excuse to do so. Though, I won't let him walk all over me, nor my boys, either.'
Pedro then looked up at the Black Lagoon collection on his shelve, as he mentally added, 'I better do something about those.'
Pedro opened one of his large desk drawers. He then got up and dumped his Black Lagoon anime and manga into the drawer.
He quickly sat down, as he closed the drawer.
While Pedro got comfortable, he noticed he left his gun on the desk, unloaded, with the slide closed, and its loaded magazine beside it, just as the door to his office was opened.
Pedro looked up from his desk, and he saw that Chang was the one to open it. With one of Pedro's police officers right behind him.
Pedro thought, 'Damn. Chang really does want to see me. I cannot do anything about my gun right now.' He then looked up at Chang.'
Pedro looked over at the officer behind him, as he stated, in english, for Chang's benefit, “Officer. You can leave now. I will handle this.” He turned to Chang, as he requested, “And you. Please shut the door. And come over here.”
Chang did not verbally respond, as he looked at Pedro. Instead, Chang walked further inside the room, with him gently shutting the door behind him.
Chang walked further into Pedro's office, Pedro saw that Chang was dress exactly like he did in the Black Lagoon anime. Complete with black long coat and cool shades over his eyes.
Pedro thought, 'Chang looks pretty much the same way as when I met him at my brother's beach house... Well, his beach how now. And I did get quite a bit of money from that sale. With most of it being in a few safe places. And none of them being banks... Now, let us see how good I can play this situation. If Lee can do this, so can I.'
As Chang came to a stop, in front of Pedro's desk, between the two guest chair, Pedro stood up and offer his right hand out to Chang, as he said, in english, “Hello Mister Chang. It is not everyday someone as wealthy as you comes to visit my poor little police station. It is nice to meet you, again.”
Chang used his right hand to shake Pedro's right hand. Both men noticed the other man had a firm, but not tight grip to their handshake.
A few seconds later, they broke their handshake.
Chang said, in english “It is nice to see you, again, as well, Chief Del Soto.”
Pedro offered, while feigning sincerity in his tone of voice, “Please, sit down. And tell me what I can do for you.”
Chang sat down in the chair to Pedro's right side.
As soon as Chang sat down in the chair to Pedro's right, Pedro sat down in his chair, behind his desk.
Chang calmly said, “Chief Del Soto. I believe that you have mistakenly arrested a few of my employees.”
Pedro calmly stated, “Your employees are suspected of drug dealing, which I admit, that in this town it is not uncommon. But, it is the brazenness of how they did so, with them being out in the open that caught our eye.”
Chang thought, 'I loath it when I have to break in a corrupt cop. Though, from what I know of this man, he may present an entertaining challenge, from that front.'
Chang flatly asked, “How much?”
Pedro thought, 'Now, to see if I can deliver this punch line.'
Pedro casually explained, “It is not a matter of how much. It is a matter of attention. On top of the brazenness, your people are also selling drugs with names I have never heard of before. I cannot tolerate new drugs being allow into this city.”
“This city is a smuggling hub between latin and south america, and the U.S. and Canada. Any drugs here will filter outwards. New drugs always attract the wrong kind of attention, from both governments, and the suppliers of older drugs. They do not like it when their markets are tampered with.”
“But, you have brought a lot of business to the community. And while you are not hiring locally, your employees are spending locally. And spending a lot with the local businesses and services here. So, I am feeling generous, and I will let your employees go, if we have an understanding concerning this matter.”
Chang thought, 'So, he isn't so much corrupt. Or, at least intelligent enough not to be greedy about this. As he is concerned with attracting attention from more powerful players outside this island. I can understand his point of view.'
Chang replied, “I believe we understand each other.”
While not showing it outwardly, inwardly, Pedro mentally cheered, 'Yes!'
Pedro grinned, as he picked up his phone, and he dial the extension to another part of the building. He then ordered, in english, for Chang's benefit, “This is the Chief. Cut the chinese women loose.”
Pedro them hung up his phone, and put down the phone back on its base.
Meanwhile, Chang has watched this. He thought, 'This man is clearly not what I suspected I would find, in a position such as his. I need to know more about him. And the quickest way to do that, is to find out his personal tastes.'
Chang complimented, “Thank you. You are clearly not a by the book cop. I was wondering, what is you favorite fictional character?”
Pedro smirked, as he answered, “Gene Hunt. Police Chief of Purgatory.”
Chang agreed, “That is a good one... Well, I believe I am finished here. It was nice meeting you, Chief Del Soto.”
Pedro requested, “One moment, Mister Chang. I have a minor bit of information for you.”
Chang grinned, as he thought, 'I always welcome free information.' He replied, “Yes.”
Pedro stated, “We both know that you are setting up your organization, here in town. And in such situations, finding contacts and getting the logistics up and running can be difficult. There is a pool hall in town, called Delgado's. The owner is named, Novio. A man in his fifties. On top of being the owner of that pool hall, he is both a local bookie and money launderer. That being said, he is also on the level.”
“Novio is looking to retire. But, he does not have the money yet to do so. I am sure that if you make him a fair offer for his pool hall, along with his contacts, both on the island, and on the mainland. He would take it. And you would never see him again. Though, if I find his body floating in the marsh, or I cannot contact him, I will be upset with you.”
“Also, if you try to extort the people here. There will be war. Do you understand?”
Pedro thought, 'I hate doing this. Because I am helping Chang. But, I promised to help Novio. I made a promise. And I keep my word. I honor my bargains. With this being the best idea I can come up with.'
Chang thought, 'Interesting, Chief Del Soto is telling me that a member of the local competition wants out of the game. And the man in question would likely be willing to sell the information he has, so the he can retire, and I will have a contact list to help me set up my operations here.'
'If this, Novio, wants to retire, I will give him enough money to retire like a king. That way I can use him for a reference, should his contacts ask for Novio to vouch for me.'
'Also, the Police Chief is warning me not to extort the people here. Fine. There are a dozen ways I can make a fortune. Besides, I am already rich and near immortal. Besides, I am doing this more as a hobby, because I am bored. I will leave the local people, and businesses, alone.'
'Still, the fact that the Police Chief is so against extortion opens an insight into Chief Del Soto's mind. And from that, and the contact offer, I think I am starting to understand how he thinks.'
Chang replied, “I understand.”
Pedro said, “Good.”
Chang stood up from the chair he had been sitting in.
Pedro stated, “It was nice meeting you. Have a nice day.”
Right before Chang turned to leave, his eye caught the black colored, semi-automatic pistol on top of Pedro's desk.
Chang asked, “If you don't mind, what model pistol is that?”
Pedro looked down at his semi-automatic pistol. He looked up at Chang, as he thought, 'I might as well answer him. If I do not, it could cause problems for both of us, stiming from a simple misunderstanding.'
Pedro answered, “It is a slightly modified Argentinian model nineteen twenty-seven Sistema Colt. It fires forty-five ACP rounds. The pistol parts have been blued to where they are black, to prevent rust, and damage.”
“My pistol has custom front and back sights. With the back sights being adjustable. Also, there is a guide rod installed in the spring system. Along, with a custom trigger that goes a little further out than the original nineteen eleven trigger. There is a metal beaver tail added above the back grip safety, to prevent the pistol from biting into the webbing of the user's hand, when firing.”
“And I like this pistol because, not only does it have stopping power, but like most pistol models based off of the Colt nineteen eleven, it has both a grip safety system, and a slide safety, for when the hammer is cocked back.”
“Also, I find the model's slide safety lever on this type of model easier to adjust with my right thumb, than the safety level on the Beretta F series pistols. So, when I have a bullet in the chamber, I can just turned off the safety at a moment's notice, with ease, and be ready to fire my gun. Though, unlike the safety on this weapon, the Beretta F series safety lever also doubles as a decocking lever. But, that is a small price to pay for ease of use.”
Chang looked at the pistol, then back to Pedro. He inquired, “Yes. That is a nice gun. And those are good safety measures. So, where did you get your pistol from?”
Pedro thought, 'I might as well tell him this, as well.' He said, “I was a gift from my brother. Though, I had it customized by a gunsmith I know.' He mentally added, 'Burt. But, I don't want you to know that he is in town, as well. At least not until I have spoken to him, on the matter.'
Chang smiled slightly, as he commented, “Interesting. Well, I will be seeing you around Chief Del Soto. And thank you for be so understanding. That is so rare trait these days.”
Pedro responded, “Yes, it is. And as long as there is no trouble, I do not see any problems between us.”
Chang smile widened ever so slight, as he said, “Then, I believe things will continue to be fine between us.”
Chang turned, and walked to the door to the office. He opened the door, and left the door open, as he turned to his right, and headed for the front doors to the police station.
After Chang left the office, and his sight, Pedro thought, 'Chang was way too interested in my pistol. I only answered his questions because I could not figure out a decent excuse not to answer them. But, let us find out why he is so interested in my pistol.'
Pedro did a quick web search cross-referencing the pistol model of his semi-automatic pistol, the Black Lagoon series.
Pedro soon found that Roberta, the Bloodhound, also used the same model semi-automatic pistol in the Black Lagoon series.
Pedro inwardly cursed, in thought, 'Damn you, bro!' He forced himself to calm down, as he thought, 'Though, there is nothing I can do about this, now.'
Pedro picked up the pistol in his right hand, and the loaded magazine in his left hand. He then inserted the magazine into the bottle of pistol grip. Finally, he put his pistol into his shoulder holster, under his left armpit.
Just then, there was a knock at his open door.
Pedro looked up, and saw he that it was one of his officers.
Pedro asked, in a kind tone of voice, in spanish, “What is it?”
The officer inquired, in delicate tone of voice, in spanish, “Well sir. I am not sure how to put this. I did not want to say anything while he was here. But, Mister Chang... The way he looked... The way he dressed... And his name... Do not get me wrong, we love our weekly movie nights at your home. Even when you pull out your anime collection, and it is in english.”
Pedro thought, 'He is being careful with his words. And given the situation. I do not blame him for doing so.'
The officer continued, “And though, we are not sure where you find some of your stuff, like that series where the teenage boy turned into a girl with cold water. What you show up is mostly funny. But, sometimes strange. Or, intense.”
“Though, I was partial to the series set in the future with the purple haired cybernetic babe working as an intelligence cop with her team. But, still Chang looked so much like Chang from the Black Lagoon series to warrant the question being asked about him. It is just it would be impossible. And we are all scared of the answer.”
Pedro flatly answered, “He is him.”
The officer slowly pointed out, “Okay... Though, as I said, it is impossible.”
Pedro inquired, “Were you one of those that helped clean up that mess at the Devil's Hotel, around two weeks ago?”
The officer answered, “Yes.”
Pedro raised an eyebrow, as he casually questioned, “Did the girls from the hotel look familiar to you?”
The officer admitted, “Yes... Oh lord. What have we gotten ourselves into?”
Pedro stated, “Just keep this to yourself. I am already working towards a solution.”
The officer muttered, “I think we might, I repeat might, be able to take one of them down, but the rest would kick our asses.”
Pedro warned, “More so than you realize.”
The officer asked, “What do you mean?”
Pedro said, “Come here.”
The officer then walked up to stand in front of Pedro's desk, between the two guest chairs.
Pedro pulled out, from the middle draw of his desk, a piece of paper, and a pen. He closed the drawer. And he wrote down a weblink to Lee's stories, that he had memorized.
Pedro set down the pent, as he looked up at the office. He stated, “They have had... Enchantments since the series ended. Here, go online, and read this story. Because we are living its sequel.”
Pedro sudden realized, in thought, with worry, 'Oh lord. We probably really are... Though, it might be best not to say this to anyone else. Especially, Lee, Revy, Chang, nor the others. And I hope River does not read my mind about this. Still, there is nothing I can do but ride the situation like a wave, and hope the undertow of the wave does not drown me, nor those of my island.'
Pedro held up the piece of paper to the officer.
The officer gently took the piece of paper and look at it. He then folded it, and put it into his pocket.
The officer then looked at Pedro. He saw from the expression on Pedro's face, that the Police Chief was deadly serious, as Pedro stated, in a sober tone of voice, “Do not lose that piece of paper. And do not let that piece of paper leave your sight. If the wrong type of people find that, it is all over for us.”
“You need to understand that the only real ammunition we have against them is they do not know that we know about them. Inform those in the know to stay quiet about this. And share that weblink with them. I want you all to know what is on it, by the end of next week. It is a long read. It going to take you a while to go over the material. Read it from the beginnings. And do not skim these stories. Also, do websearchs, for stuff you don't understand.”
“We will have to let rest of those in the station, whom do not know what is going on, remain ignorant, for the time being. Still, the most important thing is that we cannot allow them to know that we know about them.”
The officer replied, “Yes sir. I will quietly inform the others. And share this weblink with them.” He though, 'I am glad I know english. And most of my fellow officers do, as well.'
Pedro said, “You are dismissed.”
The officer then turned and walked out of the office, to resume his assigned duties, until he had a chance to share the information he had received from Pedro, with the others, in more private, and quieter, surroundings.
Pedro leaned back in his chair, as he thought, 'If my boys have figured out what is going on. Then, it is likely obvious to anyone that is intelligent, on what his happening around them, on this island. This mess just keeps getting bigger and bigger. And I honestly have no idea how I am going to stop this mess from from spreading. Let alone, reverse this mess.'
(_)
Outside the front of the police station, Chang walked up to his limo, that was waiting for him, beside the curb, with the right passenger side of the vehicle facing him.
When those in the vehicle saw Chang, one of his chinese women, in a black suit, got out of the car, from the front passenger seat. She then opened the door to the back of the limo, for Chang.
After Chang entered the limo, the woman shut the door behind him. She then walked to the front passenger door to get in, so the driver could head back to Daiyu Palace Casino.
As the back passenger door closed behind Chang, the chinese man seated himself, in the seat facing the front of the limo.
Chang then pulled out where he had kept his to semi-automatic pistols, from a hidden compartment, by him, to his left side, in his limo. He then holstered the weapons in the dual holsters, on the back of his belt.
By then, Chang felt the limo had started moving, with the vehicle taking him back to his casino.
While Chang leaned back in his cushioned seat, he thought, 'Even though they did not pat me down, it would have been rude to walk in armed into a police station, without a damn good reason for doing so... Now, to deal with the matter at hand.'
Chang towards the front of the vehicle, and to Rowan, whom was sitting in the cushioned across from him. With Rowan having her back to the closed window, that connected the back passenger section, to the driver section of the vehicle.
Chang continued to look at Rowan, as Rowan silently look at him. He said to her, in english, “Rowan. I am glad you were willing to have this meeting on such short notice. I was not aware you were in the city, until my subordinates informed me just now. That is why I arranged us to have this little meeting.”
Rowan smiled, as she commented, “It is a pleasure, as always, to talk to you, Chang.”
Chang returned Rowan's smile, as he inquired, “Good. Now, do you know of anyone else that is here?”
Rowan answered, “Except for your group, and Revy's group, I heard a rumor that one of Hotel Moscow's members went awol, and ended up here. That is why I came to check out this place. But, I have no clue who he is, and where he is.”
Rowan thought, 'I don't think I will also mention that I know about the stories. And that I have read them. I trust my source too much, to risk being forced to divulged the identity of that person. Besides, that person only told me after a few drinks, and some fun. And it is so rare to meet a person that can keep up with me, in such matters.'
Chang stated, “It does not matter.” He mentally reflected, 'Let Balalaika deal with her own personnel matter. Besides, Melvin too much of a character, to just tell Balalaika whom he is. I want to see how that plays out on its own. Along if Revy, Rock, and their group, actually do find the writer. Both will be mildly entertaining, as I got my organization up and running here. With the casino being the first part, of my front operations here.'
Rowan asked, “So, what are we going to do about this police chief? He wouldn't take a bribe.”
Chang responded, “I learned that, as well. Still, we will do nothing about him. The more I think about it, the more I actually agree with him, on what he told me. I should not have introduced drugs from the multiverse here. It would attract the wrong kind of attention towards us. And from what you tell me, all he wants you to do is not sell kiddie porn and snuff films. Both of which, I find detestable, anyway. So, you will not do that.”
Rowan replied, “Yes sir.” She thought, 'I may not like it. But, if I do as requested, I will have less trouble to deal with.'
Chang stated, “Good. Also, I have been looking into that man's past. If what I have learned is true. He has been the only thing keeping this city, together, in one piece, for the last decade. His skills in combat, and leadership, are impressive. I honestly think, if we had met him in Roanapur, before the projects I started, he could have held his own against any one of us. He would have been on par with the badasses there, at the time. Even me, at that time.”
Rowan remarked, “That is a high opinion to have of someone, Chang.”
Chang grinned, as he responded, “I know. Yet, he clearly knows he cannot do that now. Also, I find his tastes in fiction interesting. But, best of all. He thinks I am not onto him. That gives me an even greater advantage.”
Rowan pointed out, “He knows you can change into a girl. He even said he found your female form to be hot.”
Chang lips curled into a smirk, as he thought, 'That just won him points with me.'
Chang stated, “It just shows he has good taste. After all, he is basically a Mexican Gene Hunt, with the pop culture and genre savviness of Michael Garibaldi. Which is kind of a cool combination. I am going to have so much fun figuring out how to fit him into my plans.”
Rowan commented, “Still, I do not understand his madness. From what I learned of him. Before, he had me arrested. He does not like bribes, sex slavery, nor extortion. But, he loves the drug trade and prostitution, being in his town.”
Chang said, “That is simple. He supports anything that could bring money into his community, unless it causes too much trouble. Or, the profession, or product, is against his moral code. While, at the same time, he is against crimes that take money out of his community. It is simple logic. And it works so well. I kind of admire him for that. If I was in his position, I might have set down the same ground rules.”
Rowan requested, “Even so. What about my business? Tail pays well, but even I need something to sell on the off seasons, to make ends meet.”
Chang inquired, “Well, we will just have to be more subtle. I have some ideas about the new S&M brothel you are working on. You might find it interesting that I have finally achieved getting a steady supply of two interesting packets of magic power. Do you know of the series, Ranma Half?”
Rowan answered, “Of course. I sold you a copy of that series back in Roanapur.”
Chang smiled, as he inquired, “Then, you know what the instant packets of spring of drowned man and spring of drowned girl are?”
Rowan responded, with a bit of eagerness in her voice, “Yes. And I think I know where you are going with this.” She thought, 'If this is what I think it is. This type of operation could both set me for life, while provide me with plenty of entertainment.'
Chang thought, 'I don't doubt that. Or, I would have not come to you, with this offer.'
Chang stated, “I can provide you enough for both personal use, for free. I am sure you would like to have some fun as a guy, again. But, I will also sell you the packets for you to use in your business.”
“Now, imagine the type of S&M brothel you could have when the client can choose what gender they are, as they take part in your business' services. And think of the possibilities of role playing when your employees will be able to swap genders throughout their sessions with your clients.”
“Imagine how much money people would pay for that kind of service. And all I ask is for a thirty percent cut off the top of the gross. With monthly payments. I will provide the supply. You will provide the services. You will be wealthy, and I will be even richer.”
Rowan smirked, as she thought, 'It is just as I thought. And if this works out, I will consider turning me into a woman to be water under the bridge.' She happily complimented, “You know what Chang? I love the way your mind works.”
Chang returned Rowan's smile, as he said, “We will work out the details in a few minutes. Once we get back to my office, at my new casino. But, I think we can do business.”
Rowan replied, “I fully agree.”
Chang's limo then continued driving them back to Daiyu Palace Casino. And towards a bright, more profitable future, for both adults, in the back of the limo.
(_)
Around six PM, Pedro just finished backing up his computer files, which he kept a backup on a USB memory stick he had on his key ring. He pocketed the key ring in his pants. And he then turned off his computer, his computer monitor, and his computer speakers.
Just as Pedro was about to get up from his desk, to punch out his time card for the day, and leave, the phone on his desk began to ring.
Pedro picked up his phone, as he said, in spanish, “Hello.”
Pedro heard Novio voice on the other end say, in spanish, in an obviously happy tone of voice, “Hello Pedro. I take back everything I ever said about you know who. He offered me a great deal for everything I had, and I took the deal. And I am gone. But, I am sure you were involved in someway, so I am just calling to say, thank you.”
Pedro cracked a grin, as he thought, 'I guess Chang kept his word. That is good.'
Pedro said, “Glad to hear it. And I hope you have great life.”
Novio said, “You to, Pedro.” Novio then hung up his phone.
After Pedro put his phone back on its mount, he stood up from his office chair.
He walked over the coat rack, and he put on his long coat, and hat. He then turned off the lights to his office, from a wall switch. Next, he locked and shut the door to his office behind him. He then headed to punch out his time card, head to his car, and get something to eat, before he met with Lee, at the Last Resort Diner, at seven PM.
Though, Pedro did not want to go to the Last Resort Diner first, because he did not feel like eating U.S. style food that night.
(_)
Around seven PM, after Pedro lost his daily tail, he met with Lee at the Last Resort Diner, to get the daily report on any trouble from Revy's group. With Lee sitting in their booth, with his back to the back wall.
Pedro sat down at the table, across from Lee. Lori soon took their drink orders. Several seconds later, she pour them both cups of coffee, and brought coffee mugs for both men.
After Lori walked away from the two men, Lee and Pedro look at each other.
Lee commented, in english, “I lost another tail, coming here, this evening.”
Pedro said, in english, “Same here.”
Lee stated, “Well, it cannot be helped.”
Pedro replied, “I agree.”
Lee asked, “So, how was your day?”
Pedro smiled, as he casually answered, “Same old. Same old. Just another day at the office. Now, how was your day?”
Lee said, “I spent the day watching a few movies with Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma. None that would tip them off as to whom I am. But, it was fun for all those involved.”
Pedro inquired, “That's nice. So, which movies did you watch?”
Lee answered, “Tropic Thunder. And both Robert Downey Junior Sherlock Holmes movies.”
Pedro grinned, as he complimented, “Nice selection.”
Lee agreed, “Thank you.”
Pedro grin got slightly wider, as he requested, “So please. Tell me what their reactions were to seeing those movies?”
Lee returned Pedro's grin, as he replied, “With pleasure.”
As Pedro listened to Lee's story, he picked up his cup, and sip his coffee, while he began to relax for the evening.
Eventually, the two men called their meeting over for the night. The paid for their bills, and left their tips.
They then exited the diner, and headed for their cars, in parking lot of the diner.
After they got into their vehicles, and started the ignitions to their cars, Lee headed to the Devil's Hotel, to watch a little karaoke in the Devil's Hotel restaurant, and then Lee planed to go to his suite, to get some sleep, in his bed.
Meanwhile Pedro headed back home, to get some much deserved sleep, for the night. Until Pedro would have to wake up, the next morning, and protect his city, from the same threatening insanity, one more time. As any hero should do, and would do.
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 1: “De La Plata Podrido.”
Chapter 14: “Gambling With Insanity: Part One: A Stacked Deck.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
During the sunny, cool morning, after Pedro met with Chang, in the De La Plata Podrido police station, inside the Devil's Hotel restaurant, Lee was having breakfast, alone, at the bar counter, at the usual stool in sat in. Though, he missed not spending breakfast, beside his friend, Sam.
Though, during the previous evening, after Lee returned to the Devil's Hotel restaurant, to watch karaoke. He has the pleasant surprise of meeting Sam. Whom had told Lee that he would be busy that day.
Sam and Lee sat at a right front corner table, by the entrance, so they could talk, without anyone paying attention to them, they watched the women sing karaoke. The two men found that most of the women were actually very good singers. The rest were tolerable.
As the two men watched the performances, Sam had told Lee that he would be gone for today, and likely, tomorrow, as well.
Lee did not protest, and he commented that he hope to see Sam again, soon.
Sam was happy with Lee's response. And around nine thirty PM that evening, they said goodnight to each other, as they left the restaurant. They then parted ways, as Lee went to his suite, to get some sleep.
Presently, it was around nine thirty AM, and Lee was eating breakfast, at his usual place, at the bar counter, when his precognitive abilities alerted him with a sense of danger.
While Lee continued eat, and he did not show any outward signs of being in danger, he thought, 'I wonder why I am sensing danger right now. Ever since I used the time loop to develop my precognitive abilities, I know can now sense danger. Though, I am not always warned of danger by those abilities. That is why I am still on my guard most of the time. Though, the level of danger I sense right now is not serious... It is more of a, could be bad, if I am not careful, level.'
Just then, he heard a Revy's voice, from right behind him, say, “Lee, could we speak to you for a moment?”
Lee put down his fork, on his plate. He then quickly took a drink from his glass of orange juice, to wash down his food.
He set the glass down on the counter, and he turned around in his stool, to see that Revy and Rock were standing in front of him. With Revy to Lee's right side, and Rock to Lee's left side.
While they were dressed in their normal clothing, Lee noted that Revy did not have on her cutlasses, nor shoulder holsters.
Lee calmly said, “Sure Revy. What do you need?”
Revy said, “I have an idea for some quick cash. And I would like your help. Rock approved of the idea, so we wanted to talk to you about it.”
Lee maintained his poker mask of calmness, as he grimly thought, 'This is trouble. Revy's idea of quick cash, usually involves violence. Lots and lots of violence. Let's see if I can back out of this, before I learn enough to be considered an accomplice.'
Lee casually inquired, “And Revy, what can I do that you cannot?” He mentally lamented, 'And with a package of spring of drown man, you can even pee standing up, and have sex as a man. Likely better than I can, and with more stamina than I have. Not that I am going to tell you that.'
Rock stated, “Molly told us about the card trick you did around two weeks ago...”
Lee thought, 'Damn. You have a point, Rock. Actually, you saw it first hand. But, you cannot say that to me, because you were in your male form. And if you did mention you saw that, without tipping your hand to me.'
Rock continued, “And given that you have developed your precognitive abilities to that point, we think you are ready to play at a professional level.”
Lee thought, 'Oh no. I see the train wreck a mile away. And I have no way of avoid it. So, I might as well ask the big questions.' He asked, “What do you mean? Where would I play at?”
Revy answered, “Chang's casino. I want to make some money. And this is a wonderful way to do it. With you playing, it will be a sure bet.”
Lee's poker face broke as his eyes went wide.
Lee looked at both of them. They could see that Lee was clearly rattled at Revy's comment.
Lee flatly said, “No. And I mean, no. I have seen documentaries on those that cheat at casinos. It never ends well for them. I actually enjoy breathing, without broken hands, arms, and legs.”
Revy smirked, while speaking in sickeningly sweet tone of voice, “And if you wish to remain breathing, with none of your bones broken, you will come with us, to Chang's casino, after breakfast.”
By then, Lee was starting to regain his poker face. While he continued to look at Revy and Rock, Lee used his peripheral vision to see the women of Revy and Rock's group, sitting at the tables by the stage, laughing their asses off, at the situation Revy and Rock was putting Lee in.
Lee thought, 'With their enhancements in their senses, including hearing, over half of them likely overheard every word of this conversation.' He mentally grumbled, 'Damn them all.'
Rock stated, “Listen. We still have to run this by Chang. And there is a real chance he will say, no.”
Lee thought, 'No, Chang won't say, no. Chang loves playing games, and toying with people. And Chang saw that poker trick I did over a week ago, at the Rats Nest. This will be too tempting an opportunity to pass up. Also, this means I run a real chance of meeting River, in a more direct way, than at that talent show. When she was likely distracted. And Pedro, Melvin, and I, lucked out in that situation, by not getting caught by her.'
'And there is no way I can talk about such a poker game, if River will be there, without giving myself away to her, that I am the writer.'
'Still, I have no choice in the matter. These two women will make me do this. One way. Or, another. At least, this way, I will be doing it under my own power.'
Lee forced himself to calm down, as he let out a breath. He said, “Fine. I will come with you.”
Revy said, “Good. We will wait for you to finish your breakfast, and then we will head over there.”
Revy and Rock turned around, and walked over to rejoin their friends.
Meanwhile, Lee turned back in his stool, to face the bar counter. As he went back to finish his breakfast, he felt like a condemned man eating his last meal.'
(_)
Twenty minutes later, Rock was driving down the road, on the streets of the city of Plata Podrido, in her family's red GTO. Revy sat in the front right passenger side. And Lee was in the back seat, on the left side of the GTO, behind Rock.
Lee asked, “So, where are we meeting, Chang?”
Without turning around, Revy answered, “We will be meeting him in his office, on the top floor, of his casino, by his penthouse apartment.”
While keeping her eyes on the road in front of her, Rock said, “We already scheduled a meeting with him, in ten minutes. So, we will not be barging into him, while he is conducting business.”
Revy admitted, “Yea. He hates it when we do that.”
Lee thought, 'Who doesn't hate that? Still, we are going to the top floor, and into the office, by the place he lives. He probably shares his apartment with River. So, the chances of meeting River just keep increasing. Though, if I do meet her, I will just have to clear my mind, and hope I can pull off the situation, by playing by ear...'
'Though, I think at this point, Chang does not mind being a guy, or a girl. So, I might walk into Chang's office while Chang is a woman. That could cause problems, on so many levels, for me.'
'Though, I have officially seen Chang introduced as Daiyu, at the talent contest. So, I could play off the situation, by asking is Chang in her female form, is the Chang, in his male forms, sister.'
'Though, it is extremely risky for me to do that. Because, I already played the sisters question act, with Revy, when her two past counterparts shoes up. And Revy will likely remember me asking her that question. And she is sharp enough to realize I might be playing an angle, and realize that I know Daiyu is really Chang.'
'At which point, my cover will all but be blown. With my cover being blown, when they go get River to confirm that I am the writer.'
'As such, it is best to ask if Chang knows I am coming. So, Chang will more likely be in his male form.'
Lee inquired, “Revy, it is pretty clear that you are friends with this Chang. But, does he know I am coming with you two, to meet with him?”
Revy answered, “Yes. He doesn't know why we are having this meeting. But, he did state that he wanted to meet with you, in person.”
Lee thought, 'What it comes to Chang, that is never a good thing.'
Though, Lee could only simply reply, “Okay.”
(_)
Five minutes later, Rock parked her car in the parking lot in front, right side of Daiyu Palace Casino. The three adults then got out. After Rock got out, she pulled her chair forward, to let Lee out of the backseat.
Meanwhile, Revy opened her passenger door, got out, and shut the door behind her.
When Lee was out of the car, Rock leaned the seat back up, locked the door, and shut her driver's side door.
Lee then followed Rock and Revy towards the front entrance of the Casino.
As they walked to the front entrance doors to the casino, the sunny day allowed Lee to get a better look at the casino's exterior.
The casino was very tall and wide. With the casino being at least thirty stories high. Likely higher.
The entrance had a two way, two lane carport, for car to drive up to, and let people out, directly into the a casino, without the weather bothering them.
The entrance doors were tinted windows. The there two sets of double doors to the casino. The awning of the carport extended several feet in both direction, away from the entrance.
Opposite to the building, there were three large, round, concrete pillars, set in a row, as support for the large awning. There were steel supports inside the concrete pillars. And the pillars were set in a small, curved, rectangular concrete median. The pillars were far enough apart, for a full grown adults to walk between, without a problem. And the surfaces of the pillars were painted to match the outside wall of the casino building.
Metal benches were placed on each side of the entrance, covered by the awning, for those waiting for their group to arrive, or for those waiting to be picked up.
Right above the carport, on the building, was a large neon sign, stating, “Daiyu Palace Casino.”
Lee thought, 'Daiyu Palace Casino. As in Black Jade Palace Casino. Cool chinese name for a female villain, and a casino. That is why I gave Chang's female form the alias, Daiyu.'
As they came to the entrance, there were chinese female valets, in uniform, on the sidewalk, near the interior curb of the driveway, under the awning. The uniforms they wore were very conservative. With shoes, pants, shirt, and sleeveless vests.
As Revy, Rock, and Lee approached the front doors, one of the valet walked over to the doors, and she the door to the far right, for the three of the adults.
Revy went in first. Then Rock. And finally Lee.
As they walked inside, the valet closed the door behind them. She then went back to the curb, with the other valets.
Meanwhile, Lee continued to follow Revy and Rock, further into the casino.
While Lee did so, Lee looked around, and he saw, right inside the doors, the restrooms to his right, beside the restrooms was a check in desk, with two clerks on duty. And there were three teller booths to his left, where people exchanged money for playing chips, and vise versa.
As they walked through the casino, Lee saw a lot of young women employees, of different raced, in business suits, or other types of uniforms.
Lee thought, 'I do not recognize any of these women. Given most of the badasses Chang worked with are late sleepers, none of them are probably up right now. I may luck out, River might be among them.'
'Also, Pedro mentioned that Chang did not hire anyone locally. So, these people mostly Chang's men, turned women, and others. And it is likely that several of them are armed.'
Lee looked in front of them, to see the elevator bays about fifty yards away from them.
As they passed into the gaming floor, Lee noticed that the gaming floor extended to both sides of them.
Lee saw rows of slot machines, and tables for dealers of different card games
There were some tables for dice games. And even a few tables with roulette wheels on them.
Also, across the gaming floor, to Lee's right side, was the hotel restaurant. And to his left side, beside the elevator bay, was a large hotel hallway, that went deeper into the hotel building.
Lee also noticed that there were several customers gambling on the game floor.
Lee also noticed that dealers and staff also wear casino uniforms, which were shoes, pants, shirt, and sleeveless vests. And the uniforms where gender neutral, and looked okay on both women and men.
Lee thought, 'Well, at least Chang has enough respect for his help, not to make them wear something skimpy. I will give him that. And I should not be surprised with the number of people here. Chang always did have a flair for getting people to do what he wants. In such a case, advertisement is child's play to him.'
Lee then noticed what song was playing in the background of the room.
Revy commented, “Nice song.”
Rock said, “I agree.”
Lee remained silent, as he thought, 'Yes. It is a nice song.. The song is titled, Sound of Madness, by the band known as Shinedown. The lyrics really speak to me, in the situation that I am in.'
Less than a minute later, they made it to the elevator bays.
Unlike the elevator bays in the Devil's Hotel, which had only four elevators, two on each side, this bay had five elevators. Two chrome elevators on each side, and a gold plated elevators in front of them.
The gold plated elevator had two chinese women, in black business suits, guarding it.
Even the button for the elevator required a key to use.
Lee thought, 'That is probably the express elevator to the penthouse.'
As they reached the two women, Revy stated, “Don't worry. He is with us.”
One of the women looked over at Lee, as she stated, in english, “Sir, if you wish to proceed, we will first have to pat you down.”
Lee thought, 'This is likely why Revy did not bring her weapons with her. And they know, Rock and Revy. Which is why I am the only one being patted down.'
Lee held up his arms, upwards, with his hands right above the sides of his head, as he stated, “Go ahead.”
Both women walked over to Lee.
One of them patted Lee down, as the other stood there. The woman patting Lee down did a gentle, through thorough job. She started from the top, and worked her way down. As she found something, she handed it to the other woman.
The woman patting down Lee first found a deck of cards. Then, a lighter. Next, the woman found three different folds of cash.
Revy and Rock just watched, as this went on.
Revy commented, “Damn Lee. I didn't know you carried that much cash on you.”
Lee looked ahead of him, at the gold plated elevator doors, as he tried to ignore the sense of violation he was feeling, from being patted down. He flatly said, “I don't trust banks.”
Lee's comment got a few giggles out of all four women, whom were present.
A few seconds later, the woman patting him down, stood back up, she said, in english, “He is clean.”
Lee turned to the woman holding his belongings, as he politely requested, “Can I please have my items back.”
The other woman answered, in english, “Sure.”
The woman then handed Lee back his belongings, and folds of cash.
As Lee put his items back on his personal, as he originally had done, the woman that had patted him down, walked over to the gold plated elevator, she pulled out a key, and used it to summon the elevator to come down to the ground floor.
Less than a minute later, the gold plated elevator doors opened, with Revy, Rock, and Lee walking into the elevator. Lee walked between Rock and Revy. So, when they around, Lee was in back, with Rock and Revy in front of him.
Which out punching any of the buttons on the panel, the doors automatically closed, and the elevator automatically starting going up to the top floor.
Several seconds later, the elevator doors opened, with Revy and Rock getting out first, with Lee following behind them.
Lee silently followed Revy and Rock down the hallway. And after a few turns, Rock and Revy came to a stop, with a closed door to their right side.
Lee immediately stopped behind Rock and Revy.
Rock and Revy turned to the closed door. Then, Lee turned to the door as well.
Lee thought, 'This must be the door to Chang's office... I hope.'
Revy knocked on the door, from inside, a male voice stated, in english, “Who is it?”
Revy stated, “Chang, it's us.”
Chang stated, through the door, “Come in.”
Revy opened the door inwardly, as she walked inside. Rock followed inside. Then, Lee walked into the room, as he gently closed the door behind him.
All three adults came to a stop, just inside the room.
Lee looked in front of him. He saw that Chang kept a very nice office. With Chang sitting in a nice, plush, black leather, cushioned office armchair, behind his black wooden desk.
Chang was in his usual black suit clothing, with his browline sunglasses on, to hide his eyes, from other people.
There was a large closed curtain window behind Chang. With white curtains that let sunlight in, allowed everyone to clearly see the inside of the room, while also offered privacy for those within the room, from the outside.
Lee thought, 'From the light coming in, that is likely one single, large window. And with Chang's resources, that window is likely bulletproof, if not rocket proof.'
Lee then saw noticed were two smaller cushioned armchairs in front of Chang's desk.
Lee thought, 'I will be the odd man out in this sitting arrangement. It is polite, and I am sure that Chang will notice. And I had best keep on his good side. Also, I do not see River here, so I should be fine.'
Chang smiled, as he looked at the three adults. He offered, in a kind tone of voice, “Come sit down. Ah, Revy, Rock... And I believe, Lee. Come sit down. So, we can talk.”
Lee thought, 'Chang's tone of voice is so smooth that I not tell if he was being sincere, or insincere. Though, I will just follow Rock and Revy, and see what happens.'
Revy and Rock walked forward, with Lee a few steps behind them.
Revy took the chair to Lee's left. And Rock too the chair to Lee's right. With Lee silently remained standing, behind, and between, the two of women.
Lee thought, 'Looks like we are playing the same game with each other.' He looked at Chang, as Chang looked back at him.
Lee calmly stated, “That is correct. You must be, Chang.”
Chang said, “Yes. I believe we have met before.”
While showing no outward reaction, Lee mentally cursed, 'Damn you, Chang.'
Rock turned around in her seat, to her right, and Revy turned to her left, turned around to look at Lee.
Lee looked at Rock and Revy, and the unspoken question on their faces.
Lee thought, 'Fortunately, I have already come up with just the excuse for this situation.'
Lee looked at all three adults in front of him, as he partly lied, “As a favor to Chief Del Soto, for judging the talent contest, I had to chauffeur him to his beach house, in my Cadillac, a few times.”
“One of those times, he wanted to head his beach house in style, because he was selling the place. And he wanted to make a good first impression. I believe Chang here was the one that bought the beach house. Since he was the one I saw Pedro shake hands with.”
Rock and Revy both giggled. Both women then turned back in their seats, to look at Chang.
Chang complimented, “Yes. And you both did an admirable job. I am quite pleased with my new beach home. Please, let the Police Chief Del Soto know that.”
Lee lied, “I will try to do so. Unfortunately, I am only an acquaintance of Chief Del Soto. But, if I do see him, I will let him know.”
Chang asked, “That will be fine.” He then turned to Revy, as he inquired, “So Revy, why did you want to arrange this meeting?”
Revy smiled, as she said, “I want to arrange a high stakes poker game with you.”
Chang stated, “I am listening.”
Rock took over where her lover left off, as she commented, “Standard five card draw poker.”
Lee inwardly smiled, as he thought, 'Thank you, Rock. For paying attention to the type of poker game I am good at.'
Chang responded, “Okay. But, I pick the dealer.”
Lee maintained his poker face, as he thought, with trepidation, 'I hope Chang picks and honest dealer from his employee pool. Though, I doubt he will.'
Revy replied, “Of course.”
Chang inquired, “So, how much is the bet?
Revy stated, “A million, U.S. cash in cash, in this poker game. Winner take all.”
Lee thought, 'That is a lot of money. Well, at least to me.'
Chang said, “Fine. Minimum bid is ten thousand.”
Revy shrugged, as she replied, “Works for me.”
Chang guessed, “And you plan to have Lee here, to play for you?”
Revy replied, “Of course. He is our proxy.”
Lee stated, “I want you to know this is not my idea. I did not want to come here.”
Chang turned to Lee, as he casually said, “I don't doubt that.”
Lee thought, 'Now, to see if I can still back out, by being honest.' He pointed out, “If you have asked around town, about me. It is known I have precognitive abilities. And, as such, I really do not feel that it is a good idea for me to gamble in your establishment.”
Chang crack a grin, as he commented, “Actually, I like the idea of pre-cog playing a high stakes poker game.'
Outwardly, Lee appeared calm, as he mentally cursed, 'I made this big to do about not wanting to cheat at cards, with Rock and Chang present. And because Rock was a guy at the time, and Chang a woman. With their genders reversed, right now. I cannot mention it to them! Damn! Damn! Damn!'
For a brief few seconds, Lee thought he could hear a woman laughing, coming through the wall, from a room nearby, to his right side. Though, given the situation, he ignored the possible sounds of laughter, as he focused on the three adults in front of him.
Lee looked at Chang, as he stated, “Listen, I prefer to be honest. And I don't like using my precognitive abilities in poker. Especially, in a professional environment such at this.”
Chang smirked, as he questioned, “You're afraid that I am going to break your legs?”
Lee thought, 'You one time had a man castrated. Though, you did give him a warning, beforehand.' He said, “If I am lucky.”
Chang, Revy, and Rock, lightly laughed, at Lee's serious comment, for a few seconds.
As the three adults calmed down, Chang admitted, “Well Lee, I won't lie to you. You do have some reason to worry. Still, I want you to play.” His voice turned a bit ominous, as he continued, “And if you do not play, I will be upset with you.”
Lee thought, 'There is no way I am getting out of this situation. I might as well just go with it.' He said, “Okay. But, it is your million to lose. When do you want to play me?”
Chang continued to smirk, as he stated, “Well, once I heard that you were coming with Rock and Revy. I knew this was going to be about a possible poker game. With bets between myself, and Rock and Revy. I just was not sure of the amounts.”
Lee thought, 'I see you are as sharp as ever.'
Chang smirk curled into a wicked grin, as he commented, “Also, I will not be the one playing you?”
Lee maintained his mask of calmness, as he thought, 'Who would Chang have me play?... Oh no... No. No. No.'
At that moment, Lee heard the door to the office opened behind him.
Lee turned to around, to his right. Rock and Revy turned around in their Chairs, and Chang just looked forward, in his seat, as he continued to wickedly grin.
Lee, Revy, Rock, and Chang all looked towards the door to see who was standing at the threshold of the door, facing them. They saw the person was River.
River was dressing in a blue jeans, and a red t-shirt, and red tennis shoes. Her long red hair was loose, as it fell down her back.
Upon seeing River, Lee immediately cleared his mind.
While Lee has his back turned to Chang, Chang casually said, “You will be playing my girlfriend, River.”
Revy and Rock both burst out laughing.
Lee forced himself not to react, nor think, at what was going on around him, as he kept his mind clear.
As the two women calmed down, Revy stated, “Now, this is going to be a game to remember.”
Lee turned back around to face Chang, Rock, and Revy. While, Lee did not want to think about the situation in front of the telepathic River, Lee flatly inquired, “Fine. Where?”
Chang stated, “In a room, here on the penthouse floor.”
Lee directly asked, “When?”
Chang questioned, “Tomorrow at ten AM, okay with you?”
By then, Rock and Revy, turned back around in their seats, to look at Chang.
Rock commented, “That is plenty of time to get some breakfast, and get ready. And I am sure the girls will love to attend this game, in the casino.”
Revy responded, “I agree. I cannot wait to tell everyone at the hotel. Tomorrow is going to be so much fun.”
Lee calmly said, “Yes. I will be there.” He turned to look at Rock and Revy, whom had their backs turned to him. He flatly stated, “Rock, Revy, I will meet you out front, under the awning.”
Lee then turned, as he calmly walked passed River, to River's right side, and out the door, towards the elevator bay.
After Lee walked out of the room, there was silence in the room for a few seconds.
Chang then looked over at River, as he asked, “What is he thinking about?”
River turned to focus on Chang, as she calmly answered, with only a hint of annoyance in her tone of voice, “He is wondering how his life has taken such strange turns.”
The Revy, Rock, and Chang, just laughed, while River frowned.
As they stopped laughing, River stated, “While you three catch up, I'll be in the penthouse living room.”
River mentally reflected, 'Wondering how good a precognitive Lee really is. And if he knows better than to knowingly try to use such abilities on a telepath? Or, not? Probably the former...'
'Though, there is a question I have for them. But, from reading Chang's mind, he will likely answer the question soon. And with me not here, Revy and Rock will likely be more open with their answers.'
While River turned around, and she stated walked down the hallway, towards the door to the apartment living room. She left Chang's office door open. And as she walked away, she overheard Chang asked, “So, how goes your search for the writer?”
River smiled, as she mentally reflected, 'Good. He already asked the question, before I was fully out of earshot.'
Revy answered, “The search has gone nowhere for the moment. But, I am sure that we will catch him, eventually.”
River continued walking, as she rolled her eyes for a few seconds. She thought, 'Revy can be so foolish, sometimes.'
River then looked in front of her, as she continued towards the penthouse apartment she shared with Chang.
Chang inquired, “So, how savvy is this guy?”
Revy stated, “Not much. Aeryn and Violin said that he did not even know about anime.”
Chang replied, “Mores the pity.”
By then, River was no longer within earshot of the three adults. A few seconds later, she found the door to the living room. Which she left unlocked. She then opened the door, and walked inside.
Meanwhile, inside Chang's office, Chang, Revy, and Rock, continued their conversation for some time.
(_)
A minute later, Lee made his way to an elevator. Unlike the bottom floor button, this one did not require a key. And there was only one button. A down arrow, that lead to the ground floor.
Lee pushed the button, and the elevator doors immediately opened.
Lee thought, 'These elevators must default to stay at the penthouse level. As both a security measure, and for safety reasons. In case someone needed to quickly escape the top floor.'
Lee walked into the elevator. He turned around, to face the entrance, just as the doors closed. Less than a minute later, the elevator opened on the ground floor, and he exited the door.
With River on the top floor of the very, thirty plus story building, and Lee being on the ground floor, Lee finally allowed himself to think.
Lee walked out of the elevator, and came to a stop, in the elevator bay, as he thought, 'If this is not far enough to avoid River's telepath. Then, I have already screwed myself at the talent contest. When Pedro, Melvin, Sam, and I, were in the front lobby of the Devil's Hotel, right after the contest, with River in the Devil's Hotel restaurant.'
'As such, I might as well hope this is far enough to avoid her telepathy, and not worry about it.'
'Now, onto other related matters. With such foolishness by Revy. I am starting to wonder if actually has now really lost her mind. And no matter what happens, there will be fallout for me, in the aftermath of this poker game. I am going to have to think on this for a little while, before I will be able to formulate a plan for me to get out of this mess.'
The elevator doors closed behind Lee, as he walked out of the elevator bay.
As Lee exited the alcove, he noticed that he was about teen feet into a large rectangular hallway, that was perpendicular to the entrance to the elevator bay, and he was not on gaming floor.
The lighting from the hallway were soft florescent ceiling lights, that provided plenty of light for Lee to see with.
Lee then turned around and he noticed there were no guards by the entrance to the express elevator. He thought, 'Maybe the guards are partly for show. Most people would not take the back way. Though, I am sure there are cameras monitoring almost every inch of this ground floor.'
'But, since I was leaving Chang's office and penthouse, with me already being invited there. As long as I stay in the open, non-secure areas, security could careless what I do. Besides, I really just want to exit the front of this casino. As I wait for Revy and Rock.'
'Along those thoughts. I guess I was so mentally wrapped up in clearing my mind around River, that it did not occur to me that there were at least two express elevators leading down from the top floor, to the ground. Though, from safety and security standpoints, it makes sense for them to have at least two ways off of top floor. That is not any emergency reality devices they have on hand, on the top floor.'
'But, given who is in the casino, with River and Chang being at the top of the list. Even I am not crazy enough to try to get up to the penthouse, and look for those reality devices.'
Still, I might as well look around, as I get my bearings.'
Lee stood in place, as he looked back around to see a large, clear plastic wall in front of him. Behind the wall was what looked to be a large garden. Nearby, there was an open door, nearby that lead into the room.
Lee thought, 'Yes. I must have gotten turned around. Now, that I think about it. I believe I may have turned the wrong direction, when I came out of Chang's office. Still, this is no problem. If I cannot find my way, I can ask for directions. The employees are likely more than happy to point me in the direction of the gaming area. That is where their customers foolishly gamble what they have, away to the casino.'
Lee was then heard a loud cat growl to his left side.
Lee turned to see some people transporting a tiger in a cage. He could see that the tiger was not happy.
Lee thought, 'I see Chang is taking a page from Scarface. It just shows that he has taste. I guess he truly believes to push it to the limit. Not that I blame him. If I was in his, or her, position, in creating this casino, I would likely do the same as he, or she, has done.'
A second later, one of the wheels to the cage snapped, causing the cage to tip over, and the latch to the cage came undone, allowing the tiger to jump free of her cage.
As Lee watched as the tiger approach him, he thought, 'And this day just keep on getting more interesting. Let's see. If I want survive this, I must remember to have no fear. Show no fear. Have no fear.'
'Also, from what I have learned, tigers do not like to strike their prey directly, when they are looking at the faces of their prey. They like to pounce from behind. That is why some tiger hunters in India, wearing human looking face masks, on the back of their heads, when they hunt tigers. As such, I must move very slowly, as needed, while I do not take my eyes off this tiger.'
'Though, there is a chance, as a big predator, the tiger might take me looking it in the eyes, as a challenge, and it will still attack me. Though, I have nothing else to use on it. So, this is the only thing I got.'
Meanwhile, the workers transporting the tiger, ran down the hallway.
Lee did not both to look at the workers, as he forced himself to be calm, and have no fear, while looking the tiger directly in her eyes.
Because of Lee doing this, the tiger became slightly confuse. Instead of just pouncing on Lee, the tiger slowly circled around Lee, in a clockwise direction.
Lee slowly turned to his right, with the tiger. As Lee did so, he never took his eyes off of the tiger's eyes.
After several seconds, the tiger came to a stop, and they just looked at each other, for several more seconds.
By then, the tiger's head was two feet from Lee' stomach.
Lee then cocked his head slightly, and the tiger imitated him.
Lee very slowly reached up with his right hand, and he scratched the back of the tiger's left ear.
After a few seconds, the tiger back to purr. After a few more seconds, Lee stopped scratching the tiger's ear, and instead likely ran his right hand down the back of the tigers neck a few times.
The tiger continued to purr.
A second later, Lee stopped brushing the tiger's hair on her back, and slowly move his hand away from her head.
Lee then calmly, yet slowly, turned, and walked towards the door to the enclosure.
The tiger followed right behind him.
When Lee reached the door, Lee stood near it. He slowly turned around, and he slowly lifted his right hand, for the tiger to see, as he motioned with it for the tiger to go through the door.
A second later, the tiger went through the door.
Lee then slowly closed the door behind her, and locked the lock on the outside of the door, that faced the hallway.
Just then, Lee saw Zoe, and a couple of asian women in black business suits, run up the hallway, with the clear enclosure wall being to the group's right side. All of them were carrying guns.
When they stopped near Lee, they turned, and saw, the tiger was already in the enclosure.
None of the women were pointing their weapons at Lee, as Zoe turned to Lee. She asked, in english, “What happened?”
Lee thought, 'It figures that all of Chang's badass friends, that Zoe would be up at this time in the morning. Still, given the situation, I think it is best if I be honest.' He answered, in english, “She is just tired and alone. Feed her and she will feel better.”
Zoe inquired, “How did you know the tiger is a she? I doubt you got a good look on that end of her.”
Lee explained, “Male tigers smell of urine, because they are constantly marking their territory. I smelled no urine from her.”
Zoe replied, “Okay.”
One of the asian women flatly inquired, “Now, why are you not dead?”
Lee thought, 'Because predators prefer not to eat the sick, and the dying. Along with that, dogs and cats can tell when someone has cancer, by their sense of smell. Though, it is best I do not mention this... Especially, since it is none of their business...'
'And to be honest, it is best, for everyone here, that this entire incident was swept under the rug. Besides, I cannot tell the truth about how I did this, without mentioning that I am dying.'
Lee responded, “I have experience with cats. This entire indecent is an embarrassment for everyone involved. If you are willing to pretend this never happened. I will do the same.”
Zoe replied, “Agreed.”
Lee said, “Thank you. Now, which way is it to the gaming floor?”
Zoe stated, “Just turn around, and in the opposite direction from which we came from.”
Lee replied, “I appreciate that. And thank you, again.”
Lee then turned, and walked away from them, with the intent on exiting the casino, and finding a place to comfortably wait for Rock and Revy to get finished with their meeting with Chang.
While Zoe watched the man walk away, she thought, 'I wonder what his story is?' She then turned to her women, as she stated, “Okay. Someone get a clean up crew to get rid of this cage. And make sure this door to the pen is secure. I do not want that cat to get loose, again.”
(_)
Meanwhile, Lee walked from the large hallway. After a few turns, he made his way into the back section of gaming floor, he saw the elevator bay to his left side. And he immediately knew where he was.
While Lee passed through the gaming floor, he noticed the music playing was another song he know. The song that was playing was, Been To Hell, by Hollywood Undead.
Lee recognized the song, as he thought, 'Talk about a meaningful title and song for my situation. I wonder if this speaker system here is just as strange as the one in the Devil's Hotel... I doubt it. Someone just has interesting taste in music.'
Lee soon made it out the front doors. He used the door to his far left, to exit out of the building. After he was outside, and under the awning, he sat by a bench, that was right outside the door he use, to his left.
As Lee sat on the bench, he patiently waited for Rock and Revy to get through with the meeting with Chang.
(_)
An hour later, according to Lee's digital wrist watch, that he had been sitting on the bench, outside of the casino.
A few seconds later, Lee watched as Rock and Revy exited the front entrance of the casino.
Lee stood up, as he turned to the two women. He said, “Over here, Revy and Rock.”
Both women looked over at him. Then, they turn back to looking in front, as they walked to their car.
Lee thought, 'At least they turned to look at me. To acknowledge my presence. Now, to figure out how to subtly get some answers from these two, without them realizing it.'
Lee silently followed the two women, a few steps behind them.
As they reached the red GTO car, with neither woman speaking to Lee, Lee thought, 'It is clear that they did not hear about the tiger getting loose. Or, they would have said something. Good. I caught a break on that.'
When the three adults got to the car, Lee followed Rock to the driver's side of the car.
Without saying a word, Rock pulled out her keys, and unlocked the driver's side door. She then opened the door, unlocked the other door for Revy, with the electronic door lock switch in the driver's side door. She then lower the driver's seat forward, so Lee could get into the backseat, behind Rock.
While Lee got into the backseat, Revy open the passenger door, and got into the front passenger seat.
As soon as Lee was inside the backseat, Rock raised the driver's seat, and got into the driver's side of the car. She shut the door behind her. She the used her car key to start the ignition to the car.
A few seconds later, Rock pulled out of her parking place, and heading onto the main road, back to the Devil's Hotel.
(_)
A few minutes later, as Rock was driving down the road, back to the Devil's Hotel, something occurred to her. She thought, 'Why was Lee slightly upset, and quiet, at meeting River?... Could he know who she is?' While continuing to look forward, she asked, “Hey, Lee. Why did you go quiet when River showed up?”
Revy did not look behind her, to her left, between the seats, at Lee, as she complimented, “Good question.”
Lee maintained his mask of calmness, as he thought, 'Damn. I forgot to give a reason for my actions. The problem was with River there, if I tried to think of a plan, she would have read my mind, and the game would have been over right then and there, for me. Still, I have two good excuses to use.”
Lee flatly answered, “Because the one thing worse than cheating a casino owner, is cheating the casino owner’s girlfriend. And I did not want to dig myself into a deeper hole. Especially, if it is my possible grave. So, I left.”
Lee saw Revy just shrug her left shoulder, in response to his comment.
Rock agreed, “That is a good reason.” She mentally added, 'That is a very good reason for shutting up. Lee already knows how dangerous we are. He knows from Revy that Chang and River are our friends. He saw River do that fire dance, and he can only guess how dangerous Chang is. Lee is not an idiot. He knows when to keep his mouth shut.'
Lee thought, 'Good. They bought my excuse. Now, for the joke.' Lee joked, “I take that back. There is one worse thing. Cheating with the casino owner's girlfriend.”
Rock and Revy laughed, for a few seconds.
Rock thought, 'Still, he also knows how to tell a joke.'
Revy said, “You would have to have a death wish to do that. Especially, to Chang, with River.”
Lee agreed, “No arguments there.”
Revy stated, “Still, I would be more worried that River does try to cheat at cards with you.”
Lee thought, 'Thank you, Revy. For bringing up the perfect excuse to ask about River's abilities.” Lee casually inquired, “What do you mean, Revy?”
Revy and Rock then started laughing again, without answering Lee's question.
Lee outwardly remained calm, as he inwardly grimace, while he thought, 'It figures that I going to have to find another way to officially find out about River's genius and telepathy. But, that should not be too difficult a problem. I just need to think about how to do this.'
'Though, once this problem is solved, I will start getting ready for the game tomorrow, and then meet with Pedro, tonight.'
'I am already coming up with a plan to beat River. And it might work. The question is, do I have the talent and skills to pull this off.'
Meanwhile, Rock continued driving them down the road, towards the Devil's Hotel.
(_)
Twenty minutes later, the three adults returned to the Devil's Hotel.
Rock parked the car near the front section of the parking lot of the Devil's Hotel, close to the front door.
Then, with all three of the adults inside, got out. Then, locked and shut the doors behind them.
When the three adults reached the lobby entryway doors, Lee opened the door for Rock and Revy, as he said, “See you at the game tomorrow.”
As the two women walked inside, passed Lee, Revy came to a stop, in front of Lee. With Rock stopping behind her.
Revy turned to Lee, as she warned, “Don't miss this game, or I will come for you.”
Rock turned to Lee, as she said, “Good luck.”
Both women then turned and walked inside the entryway.
Lee then followed behind them.
When the reached the doors to the lobby, they opened the doors, and they walked through the threshold, into the lobby.
Once, they were in the lobby, they split up, Lee walked to his right, to sit in a lobby chair and think, while Revy and Rock headed for the hotel restaurant.
The lobby was half full of various people. Including, two clerks, in hotel uniform, standing behind the check in desk, which was across the room from the outside entrance door.
As Lee sat in the white cushioned armchair, which faced the front doors to the hotel lobby, he looked at his digital watch. It stated, eleven two AM.
Lee looked around himself, without straining his neck, as he thought, 'Given it is around eleven AM, Melvin now on duty at the bar. And Revy and Rock are headed for the hotel restaurant, to each get a beer, before they had lunch with their friends and family in the restaurant.'
'Still, that doesn't held me one bit, with my current problems, which Revy, Rock, and Chang, have gotten me into.'
Lee looked in front of himself, as he maintained his poker mask. Though, he continued his thoughts, with worry, 'What am I going to do now? I am thoroughly screwed to the wall. There is no way I can get out of this situation. I am going to have to confront River, a telepath, in a poker game, that will likely be several hours long.'
'Being that long in close quarters with a telepath, the question is not if she will learn I am the writer? But, what she is going to do when she does learn that truth about me?.'
'And that is a big fucking question mark.'
'That is on top of River being a top level genius, and a badass nearly on par with Roberta. After Roberta's upgrades.'
'Though, between what happened in the Serenity movie, and what I wrote, at least River is somewhat sane. So, the situation is still somewhat manageable. She has always been playful, and she likes keeping secrets.'
'River prefers not to be mean, or violent, unless she has to. Someone sent a subliminal command to her. Or, her mental illness got the better of her.'
'And given River is saner, and no one here knows those commands. And I have no intention of provoking her. I do not have to worry about her being violent with me.'
'Unless, she is pissed off at me, for being the writer. Though, I doubt that for several reasons. And I cannot control that. One way, or the other . So, I might as well not worry about that.'
'And taking all this into account. As long as I stay in her good graces, she will likely not immediately spill the beans on my identity. That will give me a little breathing room, even after this casino poker game is over. But, not much. So, after this, things are going to have to start moving forward more quickly. And I have to be ready for that.'
'Though, I first have to make it through the game with my hide intact, and my cover not being blown. So, I will worry about the aftermath, until after the game.'
'Now, the problem is how do I stay in her good graces, and Revy's good graces, at the same time? If I don't win that game for Revy, even if she doesn't even learn I am the writer, Revy is literally going to skin me alive. But, if I beat River, that may upset River... Unless, I defeat her in a manner where she had a good time... That might work. And doing so falls in with the plan I am working on.'
'Yet. If I implement this plan, there is an off chance the girls might kill me after this. Still, it is my only shot.'
'Either way, I still need to review the rules in dealing with a telepath. Never deal with telepaths, if you have secret you need to hide, because they will eventually find out those secrets. Usually sooner, rather than later.'
'Never lie to a telepath, because the can tell when someone is lying.'
'And never cheat a telepath, because they can tell when you are cheating them.'
'And Revy still thinks I can win by cheating with my precognition. She actually hasn't figured out that I cannot win that way, even if I wanted to, because River will immediately know I am using my precognition on her.'
'On the other hand, Chang is likely laughing his ass off at the easy million he is about win, with my ass being the one that is kicked by Revy, when she loses her million dollars.
'The only good news out of this situation is that I set up Revy's family to be very rich. A million will not break the bank, for them. Especially, given the inflation the U.S. dollar is suffering against the value of gold in this world.'
'Still, the first step out of this mess, is for me to figure out how to get one of these badass women to tell me straight out that River is a telepathic genius. So, I can then explain to Revy and Rock why I cannot beat River in this upcoming poker game, tomorrow.'
Lee then noticed Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru, walked by him, from his back left side, with them having exited the elevator bay, from Lee's back right side.
Lee saw the three women heading for the front door.
Lee thought, 'Of all of Revy and Rock's group, those three are my best chance to pull this off. But, I have to play this angle just right,'
Lee got up from his seat, and briskly walked towards the three gender bending women.
As Lee approached them, the three women noticed him. They stopped walking and turned to towards his directly.
When Lee came to a stop a six feet from the three women, Ranma asked, “What is it Lee?”
Lee inquired, “Hi ladies. I have had an interesting morning.”
Akira snorted. She said, “I bet. We heard about the plan Revy has roped you into. So, how was your, Revy, and Rock's meeting with Chang?”
Lee honestly answered, “Interesting. That is the reason I want to talk to you three. You three seem to be the most... Reasonable of Revy and Rock's group.”
Ranma commented, “You got that right.”
Natsuru said, “I appreciate the compliment.”
Akira replied, “Thank you.”
Lee went onto say, “Well, I have a small request for you three. What can you tell me about Chang's girlfriend, River?”
Natsuru questioned, “Why do you ask?” Her facial expression turned grim, as she said, “Oh no... That is who Chang is having you play?”
Lee saw Ranma and Akira's expressions also darkened a little.
Lee stated, in a very casual tone of voice, “Yes. Is there something about River that I need to know?”
Akira answered, “A lot actually. But, we can only give you the cliff notes.”
Lee requested, “Such as?”
Natsuru flatly answered, “She is a telepath.”
Lee said, “That could be a problem.”
Akira then realized, as she inquired, “Why are you taking our claim that River is a telepath at face value?”
Lee answered, “I am a precognitive. A telepath is not that far fetched from my own abilities.”
Akira conceded, “True. And that is a good point. Also, she is a genius. Still, we need to talk to Revy and Rock about this. And Lee, you had better come with us?”
Ranma inquired, “Where is Rock and Revy?”
Lee answered, “I think they are in the hotel restaurant.”
Akira stated, “Then, let's go talk to them.”
All four of them then turned, and headed for the indoor hotel restaurant.
(_)
A minute later, in the hotel restaurant, behind the bar counter, Melvin watched at Ranma, Natsuru, Akira, and Lee walk into the room.
And while Lee appeared calm, the three women with him appeared unhappy.
Melvin saw them heading for Rock and Revy, whom were sitting at their usual table.
Melvin thought, 'From the look on their faces. This could get ugly. I am glad I am the only one here, besides Revy and Rock. Still, I don't want to know. I don't need to know. I know better than to need to know.'
He then grabbed a white rag from under the counter. Next, he turned his back to them, as he began wiping down the dust on the alcoholic bottles in the shelves, on the wall, behind the bar counter.
(_)
Meanwhile, in the back of the room, Rock and Revy were sitting beside each other, at that usual table, by the stage. Their backs were to the stage, with them facing the front of the room, as they quiet enjoyed each others company, while each had a bottle of beer to drink.
Rock look up to see who was approaching them.
Across the table, several feet away, was Ranma, Natsuru, Akira, walking towards them, with Lee following a few feet behind them.
And as Rock saw the unhappy looks on the three women's faces, Rock said, “Trouble.”
Revy looked up to see the four adults approaching them. She agreed, “Yep. And they do not look happy.”
When the four adults reached Revy and Rock's table, Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma stood across the table, from Revy and Rock. With Lee standing to the left side of the three member group of women.
Akira looked down at Rock and Revy, with a stern expression on her face. She stated, with slight anger evident in her tone of voice, “Revy, Rock, are you two, idiots? Having Lee here face River in a poker game is like sending a lamb to slaughter.”
Revy and Rock looked over at Lee.
Lee answered their unspoken question, in an innocent tone of voice, “All I did was ask about River. With such high stakes in this game, I prefer to know who I am going play.”
Rock thought, 'I need to know how much of Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru have told Lee, about River, before I comment further. I do not want native in this reality to know about reality travel. All that does is bring trouble... We should know. We are that trouble.'
Rock asked, “What did they tell you, Lee?”
Lee responded, “These three ladies told me that River is both a telepath, and a genius. And from that fire dance, I can guess she is as dangerous as any in your group.”
Rock thought, 'Okay. I can work with that.' She commented, “That about sums it up.”
Revy casually admitted, “Okay. Perhaps we should have told you about River, on the way back here.”
Lee inwardly smiled, as he thought, 'Good. Now, I officially know what River is capable of. Stage one, complete. Now, onto stage two.'
Lee pointed out, “River's abilities could present real problems in this poker game.”
Revy inquired, “How so? All you got to do is use your pre-cog abilities, and you will win me some money.”
Ranma jumped into the conversation, by saying, “You still haven't figured it out, Revy.”
Natsuru finished for her redheaded lover, “Since River is a telepath, Lee cannot use his precognitive abilities, without River calling him on it. He will be accused of cheating. And I don't want to think about what Chang and his friends at the casino will do to them.”
Revy replied, “Okay. At least River won't be able to use here telepathy either.”
Lee explained, “Don't be so sure. As the old saying goes. The house makes the rules. River will likely be able to use her telepathy, and genius. But, I will not be able to use my abilities to counter her. I am at a distinct disadvantage here. Besides not wanting to be accused of cheating, another reason I don't like gambling professionally is because the house always rigs to rules so they will ultimately win.”
“It is just a matter of percentages and time, as to how long it takes the house to win.”
Ranma commented, “What Lee is politely trying to tell you two is that you just made sucker's bet with Chang.”
It took a few seconds for what Ranma to mentally sink in for Rock and Revy.
When the information did, Rock remained calm, while Revy's eyes went wide at the screw up they just did.
Revy put her right palm in her face, as she looked upwards. She said, in a clearly upset state of mind, “I cannot back out on a bet with Chang. And Dutch, Benny, Janet, and the others are never going to let me live this down.” She then dropped her right hand down, as she tilted her head to look at Lee, while she stated, “You should have said something, Lee.”
Lee looked at Revy, with an innocent expression on his face. His expression then suddenly changed into a grimace, as he responded, in a forceful, though even tone of voice, “Me?... I should have said something? Even before I knew what River was capable of, I kept trying to back out of this mess... Face it, sweetie. This is your rodeo. And you roped me into this. Not the other way around.”
Ranma came to Lee's defense, by stating, “Lee is right. This is not his fault. This is your fault, Revy. Your greed has finally come back to bite you in the ass.”
Revy was silent for a few seconds. She then frowned, as she admitted defeat on the issue of blame, “Okay. I screwed up.”
Akira inquired, “So, how much did you bet?”
Rock viably winched, as she answered for her lover, “A million, U.S. cash'
Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru all winced, as Akira said, “Ouch.”
Rock thought, 'I have to attempt to salvage the situation, before Revy loses her temper. Though, given we met with Chang. And we have not yet been to our suite. At least, she doesn't have her weapons on her.'
Rock looked over at Lee, as she inquired, in a polite tone of voice, “Lee, even with what you now know, is there still a chance you can beat River?”
Lee thought, 'I am honestly not sure. But, I do realize there is a possibility. And I guess I need to explain how I still have this chance.'
Lee calmly answered, “That is depends on how honest she is. Also, dealing with a mind reader is not that much different than dealing with normal poker players. It just that people playing poker can read a person's face for their tails. If she has a lousy poker face, I could possibly beat her. Also, I am pretty good at play poker, in general. But, even without the telepathy, if River is a genius, and she starts counting cards, just holding my own against her could a problem.”
“Though, if she does not count cards. I have a chance. Due to her telepathy, I will not be able to bluff, I will have trust the skills I have learned, and not think to much about the cards. Also, I will have to rely more on the raw luck of the card draws, and beat her the long way. In theory, it is doable. Though, this way is a lot harder to do so.”
Revy rolled her eyes, as she questioned, “So, we are not completely screwed?” She then looked back at Lee.
Lee replied, “No. There is still a real chance I could win. But, it is a small chance.”
Revy continued to look at Lee, as she sternly warned, “Then, you will still play. And you had better win.”
Lee forced himself to remain calm, as he said, “I will try. But remember, you were the one that dragged me into this. Now, I have to know, for the poker game. How patient is River?”
Lee mentally wondered, 'I honestly do not know the answer to that question. I never wrote it in my story, and the Firefly series and movie was never that straightforward with River's personality. And I do need that question answered.'
Rock answered, “She is very patient.”
Lee stated, “Good. That means she will be less likely to cheat. Even though I will be forced draw out the game with her.”
Rock inquired, “How long are you looking at playing her?”
Lee answered, “At least all day. I doubt she has experience in playing poker all day long. While, I do. I have spent many times playing poker with Sam, all day long.”
Ranma questioned, “Speaking of Sam. Where is he? Sometimes I think you two are tied at the hip.”
Lee turned to Ranma, as he thought, 'I have no clue. But, I am not going to tell you that.' He answered, “He has personal business to attend too.”
Ranma shrugged, as she replied, “Okay.”
Revy thought, 'So, he can read a person's face. That is a nice trick... Hold it...' She looked at Lee, as she inquired, in an annoyed tone of voice, “Wait a minute. Have you been using your poker skills on us?”
Lee looked directly at Revy, as he thought, 'No point in denying that now. And it is one more card I can no longer play against them.' Lee smirked, as he admitted, in a casual manner, “Of course, I have, Revy. It is how I stay on your good side.”
While Revy slightly frowned, Rock, Ranma. Natsuru, and Akira burst out laughing, for a few seconds.
Lee continued to look at Revy, as he thought, 'Good. At least four of them took my comment the way I was hoping they would. If they laugh over the matter, they will not think to much of the negative sides of what I just admitted to doing to them.'
As the four laughing women calmed down, Lee continued to look at Revy. He stated, “Look Revy. Please, don't get upset. Reading someones face is just learning their general mood at the moment. Which comes down to whether it is safe to talk to someone, or not. And given I have personally seen how violent some of those in your group can be, first hand. I am justified in using my facial reading skills to keep from getting hurt, and starting trouble, with any of you.”
Revy was silent for a few seconds, as she thought about Lee's commented. She then shrugged, as she conceded, “You're right about that, Lee. And since you haven't used your skills to take advantage of us...”
Lee inwardly smiled, as he thought, 'As far as you know.'
Revy went onto say, “I am going to let this slide.”
Lee thought, 'Good. That is the response that I was hoping to get from you.'
Lee said, “Thank you, Revy. Anyway, have a good lunch. I have things I have to do to prepare for the game, tomorrow.”
Lee turned around, and he began to walked out of the room
As Lee made his way near the exit to the room, he overheard Akira state, “Well guys. We do have something to cheer you up. There were some movies we recently saw, that were pretty good. The movies star the actor, Robert Downey Junior...”
Lee did not bother hearing the rest, as he quickly exited the room, turned to his right, and headed down the hallway, for the front lobby.
Lee walked, as he thought, 'It is best I not stay for the conversation, because I am sure those three with mention that it was me that showed them those movies. And it will just get me sucked into another risky conversation with them. Besides, I have really do have things to do today, and talking about movies is not one of them.'
When Lee reached the front lobby, he soon exited out the front doors, and into the parking lot.
A minute later, he was in his pink car, as he began to run a few errands, and then get some lunch.
(_)
Ten minutes later, Lee drove his car down one of the side roads of De La Plata Podrido, towards his first destination.
Lee had the roof and windows up on his convertible.
As Lee safely drove, he thought, 'If I am going to do this. I will have to present myself in as professional manner as possible. Right now, everyone sees me as just some slacker, nobody, with a talent for playing cards. And that is the way I want everyone to see me. But, if I walk into the casino tomorrow, presenting myself as a professional gentleman gambler, it might throw all of them both off their game. Including, River and Chang.'
'I have done it before, at the dance, at the Devil's Hotel, during the last day of the time loop, that happened on the Day of the Dead. And no one recognized me, as whom they called, mister dance. And the Rats Nest bartender has since graciously kept quiet on my identity. Especially, from Revy, Rock, and their group. Much to their continued annoyance.'
'And this is mainly because the bartender had a great time on our date that day, and the dance that evening...'
'Though, back to the matter at hand. The problem is, that the women will realize I was the one at the dance, and that will cause them to eventually ask questions about that event. But, I don't have a choice. I have to give up something, so I have the tools to not just play this coming game, but win it.'
Lee looked at his fuel gauge to see that his car tank was half full. He thought, 'Good. That means I don't have to refill it. If Chang's women see me at a gas station, they might get the wrong idea that I am planning to skip to town, and that will only cause more problems for myself. Though, Chang probably has the bridge out of town staked out, as well. That is what I would do in his position.'
Half a minute later, Lee reached his first destination, a local car washing business that the clerks a the check in desk stated was very well liked, and did a good job, at a good price.
Lee thought, 'Here we are.'
Lee found that there was no line near the group of employees near the building.
Lee soon turned in.
As he came to a stop near the men in uniform.
A few seconds later, one of the employees walked over to Lee driver's side window.
Lee rolled down his window, as he stated, in spanish, “I would like my car washed, and have a good waxing.” He then pulled out a hundred dollar bill, and handed it to the employee, while he said, “This should cover the charge, plus a tip for all over you.”
Lee thought, 'That hundred is around ten time the combined total, for a car wash, waxing, and tip. So, they should do a good job.'
The employee looked at the hundred dollar bill, as he smiled. He turned to Lee, as he happily responded, in spanish, “When we are finished, you will be able to see your reflection in the paint job.”
Lee returned the employee’s smile, as he said, “That is what I wanted to hear you say.”
Lee rolled up his window, as the men at the car wash began to wash, and then wax his car.
(_)
Thirty minutes later, the car wash employees finished washing and waxing the outside of Lee's car, by hand.
Lee said, in spanish, “Thank you.”
Lee then turned on his car, and drove away.
As Lee entered the nearby street, he thought, 'I need to get some lunch now. I don't want to go get a burger from Eda and Yolanda. They are likely going to find out about the game. And them talking to me about the game will only complicate the matters for myself.'
'So, I think I will either get cuban, or italian... I could still use a sandwich. So, I will go cuban. Then, I will go to the beach and think.'
(_)
An hour later, Lee had finished his lunch, paid the bill, left the tip, and used the restroom, in the restaurant. Lee then drove his car to a secluded part of the beach on the eastern island, facing the sea.
Lee parked his car facing the beach, by about seventy feet away from the shore. He then lowered his car roof and windows, so he could enjoy the breeze, on the presently partly cloudy, cool day.
Lee came there to think, plan, and reflect on his life. With the only sound being the crashing of the waves.
And a nobody knew where he was.
After ten minutes of thinking, Lee noticed a gray, four door car drive by him, and park parallel to Lee's own pink car, to the left driver's side of Lee's own car, about thirty feet away from him.
Like Lee's car, this gray car was a left side driver car, like most cars in Mexico.
Lee watched as the man got out of, from the opposite side of car, that Lee was facing. As the man stood up, Lee saw over the hood of the gray car, to see that it was Sam. Whom looked over at Lee, while he shut his car door.
As the two men looked at each other, Sam walked around the front of his car, and over to Lee.
Lee saw that Sam was wearing his usual style of casual clothing, and his black cowboy boots.
Lee smiled, as he he said, “Hi Sam. You are quite probably the only person on the planet right now that I would be happy to see. Please, come sit down in my car, so we can talk.” He then used the electronic door lock on the driver's side door to unlock the both his door, and the passenger door to his car.
Sam returned Lee's smile, as he responded, “I would be more than happy to.”
A few seconds later, Sam opened the passenger door, got into the passenger side of the car, and shut the door.
Sam then settled into the white leather seating, by Lee, to Lee's right side.
Lee turned to Sam, as he inquired, “How did you find me? Let alone. I thought you didn't know how to drive? Let alone have a car?”
Sam turned to Lee, as he answered, in a sober tone of voice, “I called in a favor for use of the car, for today. And I lied about not being about to not knowing how to drive. I just did not want to chaperon those crazy women. And someone had too. And I thought you could handled the job.”
Lee did not even think, as he calmly responded, “I forgive you. I don't even blame you. I fully understand. You have been too good a friend to get upset over something so trivia.” He thought, 'Especially, compared to whom I am about to face.'
Sam stated, “Thank you... So... I heard about the poker game.”
Lee groaned, “You heard about that game?”
Sam answered, “I would guess that half the island would have heard by now. I believe the man's name is, Chang. Who has been putting out the word of a big poker million dollar poker game, and he is taking bets on who will win. It is his girlfriend, versus an anonymous player. I also learned from a friend that Revy forced you into this poker game. So, I am guessing that anonymous player is you?”
Lee sadly commented, “Yes. That about sums it up. That game is just going to be trouble, in so many ways.”
Sam joked, “Sometimes, I think you are the most troublesome person in that hotel.”
Lee could not help but smile. He let out a brief chuckled, as he admitted, “You might be right. Still, I don't want to talk about it... Though, I would like to now what my current odds are, for the game?”
Sam replied, “Two to one against.”
Lee honestly said, “That is very generous of, Chang.”
Sam commented, “Given how successful his casino has become, within a few weeks, that man clearly knows how to work a crowd.”
Lee requested, “That is likely very true. So, you want to join me tomorrow? I could use the back up.”
Sam answered, in a disappointed tone of voice, “I would love, too. But, I am likely going to be busy tomorrow. Though, I will try to drop by, sometime during the day, to watch some of your poker game, at the casino.”
Lee out a deep breath, that he had not realized that he was holding in. Lee then replied, “Thanks. Also, watch yourself at that casino. They are Revy's friends. So, you can guess they are likely as dangerous as her group”
Sam agreed, “I would not be surprised. But, I promise I will be careful.”
Lee inquired, “So, how did you find me here?”
Sam answered, “I was driving around myself, thinking about a few things, and I saw your car parked here.”
Lee requested, in a tone of voice that was barely above begging, “So, can you stay with me, for right now?”
Sam stated, “Sure. I can stay for the afternoon.”
Lee quietly said, “Thank you. I just want some company, as we enjoy the quiet peacefulness of our surroundings.”
Sam softly agreed, “I sometimes feel that exact same way.”
Both men then turned to look in front of them, as they leaned back in their conformable seat. While they did so, they silently watched the waves crash against the shore, as they just quietly enjoyed the company of the other. With both of them contemplating their own thoughts.
(_)
Several hours later, it was around six o'clock PM, and the sun was beginning to set, when Sam turned to Lee. Sam broke the silence, as he stated, “Well partner, I have to go.”
Lee turned to Sam, as he said, “Thanks for the company. I really needed it.”
Sam commented, “I know. Everybody needs to know that at least one person cares for them. And you really needed the company, and I was happy to provide it.”
Lee agreed, “You are so right, Sam. And I hope you have a pleasant night.”
Sam said, “You too, Lee.”
Sam then got out of Lee's car, closed the door behind him, walked around Lee's pink car, and to his own car.
Lee then watched as Sam got into the gray car, started the ignition, and drove away.
Lee pulled out his keys for his car, and he started the ignition.
Lee back up, to where he where he was facing the road.
As Lee put his car in drive, he thought, 'I think I will go to the Last Resort Diner early, and get some supper there, as I wait for Pedro to show up. This will give me time to check to see if I need to lose a tail. Though, I have no seen one since I left the city itself, for this beach. Also, when I get to the diner, I will roll up my windows, and pull up the roof of my car.'
Lee then drove back onto the road, away from the beach, and towards the Last Resort Diner.
(_)
It was seven PM sharp, as Lee watched Pedro enter the Last Resort Diner, from the corner, back booth the two men sat at, when they met at the diner.
And given the situation Lee was in, Lee ignored that it was Pedro turn that night to have his back to the wall. And instead, Lee sat with his back to the wall, as he faced the front of the diner.
Lee had already finished his supper, and paid for it, while tipping the redheaded waitress, Mary, for her service. And now, he was just sipping his cup of coffee. While he also had a glass of ice water by him.
As Pedro sat across from Lee, Mary walked by.
Pedro turned to her, as he ordered, in english, “Mary, I will have my usual cup of coffee.”
Mary replied, “Coming right up, Pedro.” She then turned, and went to get Pedro a cup of coffee.
Pedro then turned to Lee. Pedro calmly said, “I had an interesting day, today. The most interesting part being that word reached me that tomorrow morning, Chang is having his girlfriend, River, play some nobody, with the stakes being a million U.S. dollars…” Pedro continued, in a sarcastic tone of voice, “You won't happen to know the identity of the person that River is playing?”
Lee looked away from Pedro.
Pedro flatly accused, “As I thought. You are the one that Chang is shooting his mouth off, whom is playing his telepathic girlfriend?”
Just then, Mary came by with Pedro's cup of coffee. She set the cup of coffee in front of Pedro, then she left, to see to her other customers.
Lee looked back at Pedro, as he calmly admitted, “Yes. I am.”
Pedro picked up his cup of coffee. He took a sip, and then set the cup back down on the table, between them.
Pedro inquired, with more curiosity, than annoyance, in his tone of voice, “How did you get into this mess? I would think being in that casino, playing a poker game, against her, of all people, would be that last thing you would want to do?”
Lee agreed, “You are completely right. Still, this little piece of insanity was started by Revy. Whom thought she could make a quick buck with my precognitive abilities.”
Pedro raised an eyebrow, as he inquired, “You're a pre-cog?”
Lee thought, 'Ah crap. I never told Pedro I was a pre-cog. Well, too late now.' He replied, “Yes.”
Pedro inquired, with a hint of sternness in his tone of voice, “And why did you not tell me, until now?”
Lee gave the weak excuse, as he said, “Because, the subject never came up.”
Pedro stated, “Or, you just wanted to hold that card, in case I ever turned on you. You would at least have some early warning of me doing so.”
Lee flatly admitted, “Yes. Alright. I was intentionally holding that back from you. This is because it is one of the few abilities that gives me a slight edge in a given situation. The problem is Revy already learned of my abilities, when she first came here, during the Rats Nest massacre.”
Lee went onto say, in a sarcastic tone of voice, “You remember that little slice of fun? Don't you?”
Lee saw recognition show on Pedro's face.
Lee continued, in a direct tone of voice, “Well, me showing my abilities, and impressing her and her daughters, was the only reason Sam and I got out of that bar alive, that night. Also, Revy told her family and friends. So, they all know I am precognitive.”
“Unfortunately, Revy did not realize that Chang would have River play, and River's telepathy would tell her when I used my precognition. And she was not happy when I arranged for some of her slightly saner friends to explain the situation to her.”
“So, as you can see. I am screwed. Revy is screwed. And the whole fucking situation is screwed.”
Pedro thought, 'Okay. You usually remain calm in a given situation. But, you are clearly stressed out about what you have been forced into doing, tomorrow. And you have every reason to be stress. So, I might as well not add to that.'
Pedro said, “Okay. You made your point. And I am not going to hold that secret against you. You have a full plate, as is. On top of this poker game.”
“Still, on the matter of the upcoming game. Revy's greed has been known to make her shortsighted before. So, what are you going to do? I doubt running is going to help. And River is going to find out you are the writer. If you win, River will likely tell Chang about you, as a way to placate him, for her loss. And if you lose, Revy is going to kill you. I agree, you are screwed.”
Lee shrugged, as he countered, “Well, not necessarily...”
Pedro thought, 'Good. He has a plan. Like always. That means he has a chance for him to come up with a way to get himself out of this mess, without me stepping in. And risking my neck.'
Lee continued, “River likes to keep secrets The simple reason is if she didn't, people would not trust her with their secrets. She would alienate herself from those that know her. So, she won't immediately tell anyone that I am the writer, as long as I keep her happy.”
Pedro thought, 'That is not really a plan. But, it is a good approach, to start a plan from.' He asked, “So, how are you going to keep River happy, while winning a million dollars in chips from her?”
Lee flatly answered, “I have a plan.”
Pedro thought, 'And I wonder how crazy your plan is. Considering, you basically gambling with insanity, in several ways.' He inquired, “How insane is this plan going to be? From a, one, being your standard Indy ploy. To a, ten, being crazy awesome. Emphasis on the, crazy, part. How would you rank your plan for tomorrow?”
Lee shrugged, as he replied, “Hmm... I would say a six. Maybe a seven. Depending on how you look at it.”
Pedro thought, 'That is the high level crazy for a plan. But, he is likely going to need to be that insane to pull it off. And I can guess that I will fit into his plan... Oh well. That talent contest was fun, and no one got hurt. So, I will trust him one more time, concerning his plans.'
Pedro guessed, “And this plan involves me, in some way?”
Lee responded, “Yes. But, I am not sure how. I will call you in the morning, for the details. That game is at ten, so I will try to call between eight thirty to nine thirty.”
Pedro said, “Okay. I will look for your phone call in the morning. But, if you leave me holding the bag, I will be very upset with you.”
Lee calmly stated, “Pedro, I promise, should I find a way to escape, I will notify you before I leave. Thus, giving you time to implement your escape plan, as well. Which I am sure you already have on hand. Ready to use.”
Pedro said, “Thank you. And I do have such a plan.”
Lee replied, “Good. And you are welcome.”
The two men then continued talking about a few things, for about half an hour. After which, they decided it was time to leave.
They paid for their cups of coffee, and left tips for Mary, right before they left the diner, for their cars.
(_)
When Lee got back to the Devil Hotel, he immediately went when from the lobby, to the front elevator back. And when he reached the third floor of the hotel, he went to his hotel suite.
Fortunately, at that time of night, Revy's group was in the hotel restaurant, enjoying drinks, and karaoke.
Lee soon unlocked the door to his room. He removed the key, pocketed it, and shut the door behind him. He then locked the deadbolt lock of the door, above the knob lock.
Next, Lee turned around. And in the dark, he walked over and turned on the lamp light by his bed.
He walked over to his chest of drawers and he pulled out his black dress shoes, a white rag, brush, and some black shoe polish.
Lee spent the next twenty minutes polishing his black dress shoes.
When he was finished with his shoes. He discarded his rag and he put away his polish, brush, and dress shoes.
Lee then set his alarm clock for six AM.
With Lee finished with what he had planned to do that evening, he got ready for bed, early, for that night. And when he was ready for bed, he laid on his bed, and he reached over to turn off the lamp light.
And in the darkness, Lee went fast to sleep.
(_)
The first thing that Lee became aware of, as he woke up, on his bed, in the darkness, before sunrise, was the song, Blaze of Glory, by Jon Bon Jovi, playing on his alarm clock, at a conformable volume.
Lee opened eyes, and reached over to turn off the clock, which stated it was six AM.
A few seconds later, as Lee fully woke up, and his memories fully returned to him, he thought, with mild amusement, 'What a meaningful song to wake up too. Given the situation I am. And not just today. But, every day of my life, now, it seems.'
Lee then leaned up, and turned on the lamp light, on the nightstand, by the alarm clock.
After doing so, he stretch his arms, as he mentally reflected, 'Well, today is going to be interesting... To make it through today, I am going to have to beat a badass, genius telepath in a poker game, and then escape the casino before her boyfriend, the casino owner, and likely owner, decides that I don't deserve to win. With him taking me out back, away from the attention and cameras, to do horrible things to me.'
'At the same time, I will not be able to hide my identity for long from a telepath. Especially, a super-genius like River. So instead, I have to both be careful not to reveal that I am the writer to anyone else, while keeping the telepath happy, as I win the poker game. So, she does not tell anyone that I am the writer...'
'And given the showman that Chang likes to be. And he was already like that, before I wrote about him. As all this goes on, the cameras will rolling, and the microphone will open, for the rest of the casino to watch and listen to us. So, I have to keep from slipping up, to directly reveal I am the writer. Or, I am screwed, anyway.'
'And the worst part is I cannot think of anyone I know in fiction that was able to handle a situation like this, and successfully get out of it, alive, and in one piece.'
'I am walking a tight rope without a net... Well, if worse comes to worse, at least I know I tried. Now, I had better get ready to face the day.'
Lee the got up from his bed, as he headed for his bathroom, to get a cleaned up, shower, dried, dressed, and a few other things, so he could face the morning.
Lee then got dressed in his usual clothing, as he thought, 'I will come back before nine to get dressed for the poker game. I have other things I need to do first. Given I don't want to rest seeing one of the girls this morning. And that the diner is open, right now. I will get something to eat there, instead of the hotel restaurant.'
Lee turned off the lights in his suite. He unlocked the deadbolt. He opened his door to the hallway. He walk into the hallway. And he gently shut the door to his suite, behind him.
After which, Lee walked down the hallway, to the elevator bay.
A couple of minutes later, Lee walked out of an elevator, onto the ground floor.
As Lee passed through the lobby, he saw a two young men behind the check in desk. There was no one else in the lobby.
Lee then noticed the song that was playing was, Dangerous, by Roxette.
While continuing to walk through the lobby, Lee wondered, in thought, 'Maybe the reality itself is trying to tell me that this situation is not that bad. That song is about a woman that is slightly dangerous, but not too dangerous. That kind of describes River, to a 't'.'
Lee then made his way to outside of the hotel. As he looked around, he saw that it was around less than an hour before dawn fully came. Twilight already showed from the eastern side of the hotel.
Though, Lee used the lamp lights in the parking lot to see, as he soon found his car. He got into his car, started it up, and drove away from the Devil's Hotel, towards the Last Resort Diner.
(_)
Seven minutes later, Lee walked into the Last Resort Diner.
Lee looked around, and he saw that breakfast rush has not hit yet. Also, all of the other customers were already served their meals, and drinks.
Lee decided to sit at a booth by the door, with his front facing the entrance, and the window to the front facing his left side.
At the cash register, on the left side of the counter, when facing the back wall of the room, with the counter being in the center of the diner, Lori had just finished ringing up a customer.
Lee was wearing her waitress uniform, as she heard the door open. She looked up, at the front door, and she saw Lee enter the diner.
As Lori watched Lee sit down in a booth, near the entrance, that was not his usual place to sit, at a time he rarely came in at, she thought, 'What is Lee doing here so earlier? That that is not usually where he sits.'
Lori could tell that Lee's body language was off.
She thought, with worry, 'From the way he looks, I can tell that something is wrong.'
Lori walked over to Lee.
As Lori reached his table, Lee looked up at Lori, as he said, “Good morning, Lori.”
Lori replied, “Morning, Lee. You are up early. And not in your usual place.”
Lee shrugged, as he replied, “Just one of those days.”
Lori thought, 'There is more to this, than that.'
Lori sat down across in the seat, across the table, from the seat Lee was in.
Lori looked Lee in the eyes, as she directly asked him, “What's wrong?”
Lee deflated, as he admitted, “I have one hell of a day ahead of me. And I felt some food close to my native country might help me think.”
Lori inquired, with concern in her tone of voice, “How bad is it?”
Lee answered, “You know that poker game that starts at ten AM, today?”
Lori replied, “Yes.”
Lee stated, “I am the one playing the woman, over a bet of a million dollars in poker chips.”
Lori was silent for a few seconds. She then said, “How come I have the feeling that you are not the one betting the million dollars?”
Lee stated, “If I had a million dollars, I would likely not be in this town. No. The money belongs to some crazy redhead whom goes by the name of, Revy. She roped me into this mess.”
Lori commented, “Redheads can be dangerous if you are not nice to them.”
Lee agreed, “Oh. I have been nothing but nice to this woman. It is just that she really is crazy.”
Lori giggled for a few seconds. She then said, “That maybe true.” She then got up from the booth, as she continued, “Well Lee, good luck with your game. We, here at the diner, will be praying for you.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
Lori inquired, “So, what can I get you for breakfast?”
Lee ordered, “I will have two scrambled eggs, toast and grits, with glass of orange juice to drink.”
Lori pulled out her pen and notepad. She wrote the order down. She commented, “Coming right up.”
Lori then turned, and walked over to give Lee's order to George, the cook.
(_)
Ten minutes later, Lee had his drink and meal brought to him.
Lee then spent over an hour an a half, slowly eating his meal, while he worked out the final parts of his plan, for what he had to do that day.
By the time he was finished with his breakfast, the local barber he went to was open. After paying for his meal, leaving a nice tip for Lori, and thanking Lori for showing her concern towards him, he left the diner. He then got into his car, and drove to the local barber he used.
While Lee drove to the salon, where the barber was located, he noticed that he had a tail, in the rearview mirrors. He thought, 'I guess Chang thinks I might skip town. Well, I am not going to. If I am going down. I am going down like, the James Cagney character, in the film, White Heat. Top of the World!'
When Lee got there barber, he had the barber give him a professional shave on his face. Lee did not need his hair died, because he had his hair cut, and dyed black, at the same time, several days ago. During a day Lee was sure the Revy, Rock, and their crew, were busy that day. When the women went to the grand opening of the Daiyu Palace casino. And his hair roots were not yet showing.
The barber was so good, that while it was a very close shave, Lee did not have one nick on his face. He then pained for the shave. And he tipped the barber well, for doing a good job.
After Lee was finished with the barber, he saw on his watch, that it was eight thirty-two AM.
Lee then headed back to the Devil's Hotel, in his clean, nicely wax, pink Cadillac. While Lee drove north, on the main north-south highway of the island, he passed by a red GTO, and four other cars, by the median, on his left side. With the vehicles heading south. Lee saw that the GTO was driven by Rock, with Revy in the front passenger seat. The other cars had women from Revy and Rock's group, as well.
Lee thought, 'I guess, after they had some breakfast, they are heading over to the casino early. That works for me. It means I will not bump into them, as I go to get ready. Nor, when I head back out.'
Lee soon made it to the parking lot of the Devil's Hotel. After parking his car, he walked briskly into the hotel, passed through the hotel lobby, and to the front elevator bay.
A few minutes later, on the third floor, as Lee entered his suite, he switched on the ceiling light.
He looked over at the clock to see that it was Eight forty-three AM.
Lee thought, 'Good. I still have plenty of time.'
Lee then stripped down to his underwear, ring necklace, the digital wrist watch, on his right wrist. He then when to his chest of draws, he pulled out a white t-shirt, and put it on, which his ring necklace, under his shirt. Next, Lee walked into the bathroom, and he used some styling gel, and a comb to do a thorough job on pairing his hair. After he made sure a hair was not out of place on his head, he returned to his bedroom.
Lee then walked over to his chest of drawers and he pulled out a few items. Next, he went to his metal coat rod to the right of the chest of drawers, beside the hallway door.
From the metal rod, Lee pulled out his gray suit, which was hanging on a hanger, by his black suit.
Lee then gently laid the suit on his bed.
First, Lee put on his gray socks. Next, he put on his white, long sleeved button up shirt, and his gray pants. He then looped his black leather belt, around the waist loops of his gray pants, and he buckled his black leather belt.
Afterward, Lee put on his polished, black dress shoes.
Next, he when to the bedroom mirror, and he tied a teal tie around his neck, before folding down the collar of his shirt, over the tie.
After which, he put on his gray coat, his cool shades, and his gray hat over his head.
And Lee pulled out his money and other items, from the clothing he had taken off, and he put the money and other items into his gray pants and interior coat pockets. Among other things, these items included the keys to his car, the keys to his hotel suite, nailed clippers, a folded handkerchief, and one of his deck of cards, in its box.
Lee thought, 'I did notice the style of cards the use at the casino. And this is a different background pattern. So, there is no problem with me having these cards on me. Besides, these are my weapons of choice, if I get into trouble. It is just that no one else knows that... Except, well likely River, after this game. But, there is nothing I can do about that. So, I might as well see what I look like, in the bathroom mirror, where the lighting is best in my room.'
Lee walked into the bathroom to check himself over in the mirror. Because the bathroom offered better lighting than his bedroom, and the mirror in his bedroom.
As Lee looked at himself in the mirror, he thought, 'I look good. Now that I look the part. It is time to head for battle. But, first I need to call, Pedro.'
Lee walked back into the bedroom. He saw that it was nine twenty-one AM. He headed for the phone, and dialed the number for the local police station.
As soon as the other end picked up, Lee stated, in english, “This is Lee. I need to speak to Chief Del Soto. He should be expecting my call.”
A second later, the phone click, as it was switched to Pedro's extension. After a single ring, Pedro picked the phone, as he said, in spanish, “Hello.”
Lee stated, “Pedro. It is me, Lee.”
Pedro said, in english, “Hey Lee. Well, today is the big day. I take it you finalized your plans?”
Lee answered, “Yes. I figured out my plans for you. I think you are going to love this.”
Lee then stated his plans.
When Lee finished, Pedro responded, “You are right. You plan is brash, ballsy, and stylish. I do love it. I will be there, with company. At the time you are requesting.”
Lee thought, 'Yes. Timing is key for my plan to work. Timing for several things. And not just what I have planned for you, and your subordinates, Pedro.'
Lee said, “Glad to hear it. Also, if asked, I heard that River is a genius telepath from Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru. And that is the truth. So, use that as your cover.”
Pedro replied, “I will. And good luck.”
Lee said, “Thanks. You too.”
Lee hung up the phone, as he thought, 'That when as well as I could have hoped. Now, I had better get to the casino, as soon as possible. I do not want to be late.'
Lee turned off all the lights in his suite, and he exited his suite, with the door automatically locking, behind him. He then headed for the elevator bay.
A few minutes later, Lee was on the road, in his pink Cadallic, as he headed for Daiyu Palace Casino.
Lee had the roof of his car up, along with his windows up, as he drove towards his destination.
(_)
Several minutes later, as Lee drove up, by the front doors of Daiyu Palace Casino, under the car port part of the large casino awning. Lee came to a stop, by the curb, with his right passenger side facing the front door to the casino.
Lee put his car in park. He then checked his digital wrist watch.
His watch stated it was exactly nine forty-five AM, sharp.
Lee thought, 'I am taking not chances at being late. I best head for the elevator bays. I am sure the guards there will inform me of where I need to go. Still, I need to make this look good.'
Lee turned off the ignition to his car. He then got out of his car. He closed the driver's side door, but he did not lock the door. After which, he walked around the front of his car, and onto the sidewalk, where he was met by a female valet, in a casino uniform.
Lee silently handed her his keys to his car, to the valet, which was not attached to his key to his hotel. In return, the valet gave him a ticket stub for his car. Lee silently pocketed the stub, as he headed for front doors.
When Lee approached the front doors, another valet opened one of the doors for him, near the middle section of the doors.
As Lee walked inside the casino, he thought, 'I did not get this treatment, yesterday. I guess with this suit and car, they think I am a high roller... Well, actually I am. So, I guess I am going to get some special treatment. Though, it would be best not to let this go to my head. Still, I need to make this look good.'
Lee then walked though the casino, towards the gaming area, and the elevators, like he owned the place.
When Lee entered the casino gaming floor, he noted that the song playing from the speakers changed. With the new song begin to play being, Separate Ways, by the band, Journey.
Lee thought, 'What an interesting song for this situation.”
Lee soon made it to the front elevator bay. The two guards on duty took one looked at him. And they used their express elevator key to let Lee use the express elevator to the penthouse.
(_)
Meanwhile, one minute before Lee walked into the front casino elevator bay, inside the Daiyu Palace Casino restaurant and bar, to Lee's right, of the gaming area, a group of women sat in two table booths.
The booths, with tables, were set against the clear windows overlooking gaming floor. Two women sat beside each other, in each of the four cushioned couches, of the two booths. At one booth, on the left side, when facing the front of the restaurant, sat Shenhua, Sawyer, Lotton, and Dutch. With Janet, Benny, Yolanda, and Eda, sitting in the booth beside the other four women, with their booth being closer to the entrance, located in the center of the restaurant.
Lotton was by Dutch. Shenhua was by Sawyer. Eda was by Yolanda. And Janet was by Benny.
They were all wearing casual clothing. Even Lotton was not in her maid outfit, and she wore casual women's pants, shirt, and shoes, among other clothing items.
And with their enhanced hearing, the women in both booths could hold a conversation with each other, without speaking loudly.
The floor of the restaurant itself was set about three feet above the gaming floor, with steps, and gold plated side railings, leading up to the entrance to the restaurant. With the entrance being two open, windowed, double-doors.
On the other side of the restaurant, was the bar counter. Above the bar counter were thin, widescreen TVs mounted from the ceiling, and pointed towards the bar counter, and booth tables.
Usually, the TVs showed sports and horse racing. Though, today, the TVs and speakers in the restaurant, except for the speakers playing the music on the game floor, were tied to the game room several floors above, for River and Lee's million dollar poker game.
Currently, the video just showed an empty room, with a poker table set, with poker chips already divided and place beside the cushioned, armless chairs. With the third chair set opposite to the large window in the room, by the take.
Given how early in the day it was, the group was having either coffee, or juice to drink.
Eda inquired, “So, where is Rock and Revy?”
Benny answered, “Right now, I think they wanted to talk to Chang upstairs. And they will be back down in a little while. Still, they wanted to watch elsewhere... Basically, given how greedy Revy can be, we finally let her play the quarter slot machines, if she wanted too. Rock is making sure she doesn't do anything it more stupid. Than, blowing the million she already did.”
Janet commented, “Yes. Not that I will say it to Revy's face, but that million dollar sucker's bet is very stupid on her part.”
Dutch said, “Honestly. Given this was Chang, whom she was dealing with, we should have seen this coming.”
Benny stated, “Well, Rock did say that Lee has a chance. Which is better than nothing.”
Janet said, “Well, Lee better win, for his own sake.”
Dutch joked, “Nothing will light a fire under a man's ass quicker than a pissed of woman after him.”
The other women laughed at Dutch's joke, for a few seconds.
As they calmed down, Lotton inquired, “So, where is everyone else at?”
Benny answered, “The kids, both ours, and Akira's, are on their own today. They want just do not have the patience to enjoy a good poker game. As for Akira, Natsuru, Ranma, Violin, and Annie, they are somewhere around here, talking with Annie. Also, Akira mentioned they are planning something, if Lee loses. Considering they don't want Revy to kill Lee. Nor, let her seriously harm him. Since it is not his fault that he is in this mess.'
Dutch said, “Considering Lee did not have a choice in the matter, even I will say that Revy has no right to him. Let alone kill him. Even if he loses. And ultimately, it is our gold she bet in this mess.”
Janet replied, “True.”
Shenhua commented, “Yes. I agree. Lee has always been respectful towards us. I just wish more men were like that.”
Benny said, “Yea. Lee is getting raw deal from this. If he wins, he gets nothing, but being spared Revy wrath, at the risk of invoking Chang's wrath.”
Lotton stated, “Nah. Chang loves good sportsmanship. As long as Lee is on the level, and does not cheat. Lee will be fine. Even if he wins. Actually, if, by some miracle, Lee wins, Chang might make more money, from those betting out here. Those bets will more than recoup the cost of losing his million.”
Dutch commented, “That is a good point.”
Benny mentioned, “On the matter of Lee, Revy claimed that Lee said he was southern gentleman. And though he does not dress like it. He does ask like it.”
Eda stated, “Actually, Lee can be a gentleman when he wants too. And he can look the part.”
Janet rolled her eyes for a few seconds, as she commented, “You would know.” She then looked back at the table she was sitting at.
Sawyer changed the topic, as she inquired, “So, Annie is here? Considering, Annie hates Chang, that is interesting to hear.”
Lotton explained, “Actually, I talked to Chang about her. Chang stated that he is paying Annie quiet a bit of gold, and other types of treasure, to work for him.”
Shenhua commented, “I guess everyone needs to eat. Though, I am surprised that Annie is not on the warpath for the writer.”
Lotton stated, “Actually, from what I understand, Annie does not hate the writer, just Chang.”
Shenhua said, “That does not make sense.”
Dutch stated, “Actually, it does. Someone people just rub a person that wrong way.”
Janet commented, “Well, either way. Do not her tell I said this, but this would not be the first time that Annie worked for someone she hated.”
The other women got a good laugh at Janet;s comment.
As the women calmed down, Benny said, “Annie is never going to escape those jokes. Is she? And it is not really the writer's. Even I will admit the jokes write themselves.”
Dutch agreed, “Yep. Some things are fated.”
Shenhua inquired, “So, who else is here?”
Lotton answered, “Arcee is also here. Somewhere.”
Shenhua replied, “It would be nice to talk to her.”
Lotton agreed, “Yes. And Arcee and Chang are still on great terms. I think Arcee took your old job, Shenhua.”
Shenhua shrugged, as she said, “She can have it.”
Lotton said, “Also, the Serenity crew is here, working here as security. And the Bebop Crew is here... Well, except for Ed and Ein. For obvious reasons.”
Janet asked, “So, is Julia around here?”
Lotton answered, “Yes. Somewhere around here. I think that the Bebop crew is taking turns looking after her.”
Yolanda inquired, “So, what are the Spike, Jet, and Faye's jobs here?”
Lotton stated, “I am not sure. But, from what I understand, Spike and Jet are taking turns being the pit bosses for the gaming floor. With a few others Chang trusts, subbing on the shifts that those two are not doing.”
Yolanda complimented, “That is a good idea. Both of them are fairly honest, and have a sharp eye.”
Benny commented, “And the pay is probably good too.”
Eda pointed out, “With everyone here, I am surprised that the Lowe family has not turned up.”
Sawyer said, “I did not know you knew them... Well, outside of the writer's stories.”
Eda stated, “Anyone that can get Revy's goat like that on a regular basis is a friend in my book. And surprisingly, Bob and Ed are great conversationalists.”
Janet agreed, “That is true.”
Eda mentioned, “Plus, I will give the writer credit. He was able to point out, with Ed, that a woman could be a crazy redheaded chick, without being bitch. That must have really pissed Revy off.”
Dutch flatly said, “You have no idea.”
It was at that moment that Lotton took a look out the window, by her, and towards the gaming floor. She noticed someone in the distance, walking across from the them, through the center of the gaming floor, towards the front elevator bay. And she recognized that gray suit, and hat.
Lotton said, “Mister Dance is here, strutting across the game floor.”
Dutch asked, “Who is Mister Dance?”
Sawyer answered, “It was night before you arrived. During night of the Latin American holiday, Day of the Dead. The Devil's Hotel had a dance party that evening in the hotel restaurant. During the party this guy in a gray suit, came in with the bartender from the Rats Nest, and they immediately monopolized the dance floor for around a half an hour, as they did the nearly nonstop tango. Without missing a beat, nor a step.”
Benny said, “That must have been some tango.”
Sawyer said, “It was like something out of the movie. Only longer and better. And both of them were good at dancing.”
Shenhua stated, “Anyway, at the end of their dance, they left. We never did figure out who mister dance was. And the bartender refused to tell us. And it wasn't worth threatening her, given we like to go to her, bar sometimes. When we feel like getting more wild, than Melvin will allow at the hotel bar.”
Janet turned her head, and looked across the gaming floor, as she used her enhanced sight to look at the man in the gray suit. Janet then used her critical eye for detail, that had long since been developed, from years of experience in counterfeiting, took a good look at the man. She immediately realized who it was, as she flatly stated, “That man is, Lee.”
Lotton, Shenhua, and Sawyer, said, in unison, “What?”
Eda looked more closely at the man, across the room. She stated, “Yea. That is Lee. He wore the same outfit for our date.”
Yolanda looked out the window as well, to see Lee. She calmly complimented, “Yes. That man does know how to dress for the occasion.”
Benny looked more closely at Lee as well, as she commented, “Now, that is how a southern gentleman dresses.” She turned to Eda, as she asked, “Why didn't you say anything about Lee's dancing at that party, Eda?”
Eda turned to Benny, as she said, “I wasn't at the party. I didn't see him. And Revy never did give a description of the male dancer, when I talked to her about it. All she said was that the man was good dancer.”
By then, the rest of the women in their group were looking at Lee, across the room.
Sawyer commented, “So, Lee knows how do dance. And dance well. I may have to dance with him sometime.”
Dutch turned to look at those around her table, as she stated, “I get the feeling that Lee knows a lot more than that... Or else, this is going to be a very short game.”
Lee then left their sight, as he made it to the other side of the gaming floor, where the elevator bay was located. And the women started to turn and look back at each other.
Lotton inquired, “Anyone placed any bets?”
Eda said, “I am placing a hundred on Lee.”
Yolanda stated, “I have placed the same bet for Lee. Eda is right. He is a gentleman. And it would be nice to give him our support.”
Sawyer said, “I agree. I place two hundred for Lee. From what I have seen, and heard, the man can clearly keep cool in the most insane of situations. And, from what I understand, yesterday, Akira and the others told Lee that River is a genius telepath, and from the fire dance, he knows she is a badass, and he still showed up for the game. That takes courage.”
Shenhua mentioned, “I put down fifty for Lee for those same reasons. Lee knows we are dangerous, and yet he has been able to remain calm around us. He has the same type of reserved courage that Garcia has. If he can keep it together, this should be an entertaining game.”
Janet stated, “Or, he is just foolhardy. I put a hundred for River. No one can beat a telepathic genius.”
Benny pointed out, “While I also bet a hundred for River. I will admit there is always the chances she may play fair.”
Dutch commented, “I have always believed that it is wise to bet with the house. So, I placed a hundred on River.” She turned to Lotton, as she inquired, “How about yourself, Lotton?”
Lotton turned to Dutch, as she said, “Nah. I am not betting. I have come to realize that River is still too unpredictable. And Lee is like that quiet one that goes crazy when you least expect it. This could end up a draw. Still, I did talk to Chang, and he said he will give us a fifty percent discount on food and drink here, during the game.”
Dutch complimented, “That is what I like about you Lotton. You always plan ahead.”
Lotton smiled, as she replied, “Thanks.”
(_)
A minute later, on the top floor of the casino, Lee exited the gold plated express elevator at the top floor, he thought, 'At least the guards didn't pat me down this time. Also, they gave me directions to the room where the poker game is being held at. It should not be that hard find that room.'
After Lee exit the elevator, he took a left, as he was instructed to do. He soon turned the corner and he saw Revy and Rock walking towards him. Both women were wearing their usual clothing, those Revy did not have her weapons on her.
Lee thought, 'This would be a very bad time for them to talk to me about the dance...' He then continued his thoughts, in mild amusements, 'Let's see if they recognize, as I pulled off the stern gentleman, to the hilt. And I loved this, when I did it during the time loops. Though, it is best that I not think about that part of my life, while I am playing a telepath, in a few minutes.'
Lee changed his facial expression, and body language a little. As he made his way down the hallway, he stood his back a little ridged, but not too much, for it to him to move his back occasionally, like more body language allows for. Lee also walked more confidently, and he expression looked like it was chiseled in stone.
As Lee walked up to Revy and Rock, the two women stood in his way, as all three of them came to a stop, with Lee three feet from them.
Revy asked, “Who are you?”
Lee ignored her question, as he looked down at Revy and Rock, without showing any signs that he recognized them. He spoke in in a stern, direct manner, without a hint of his southern accent, “Please, move out of the way. I have business to attend to.”
Rock then realized where she has seen this man before. She asked, “Are you the one that danced at the Devil's Hotel party?”
Lee sternly said, “I am a man that has much to do, and little time to do it. Now, please move out of the way.”
Revy thought, 'Whomever this guy is, he means business. And I do not want to cause problems for Chang. Especially, right before the fun is about to start.' She said, “Rock. Let him pass.”
Rock replied, “Okay.” She thought, 'Still, this man look familiar. Though, I cannot place him.'
Revy and Rock, moved out of the way, allowing Lee to pass between them.
As Lee continued walking away from them, he overheard them.
Revy asked, “Still, I wonder what is his problem is?”
Rock calmly said, “Not a clue. But, let's get back down to the gaming floor, before the game starts... Though, given we haven't seen Lee. This game might not happen.”
Revy snorted, as she stated, “Oh. It will happen. Or, I will skin Lee alive.”
While Lee continued down the hallway, Rock and Revy started walking in the opposite direction from Lee, as the two women headed for the elevator.
A few seconds later, Rock and Revy turned a corner, away from Lee's presence.
As Lee walked away further away from the two women, he thought, 'You got to catch me, first. Now, to find the poker room, before it is too late. Still, I should have over ten minutes early. That is enough time to find my way around. Even if I had to knock every door in this hallway. Though, I believe I know which door to go too. So, I am good.'
Lee then relaxed his body, and face, as he made his way down the hallway.
A few seconds later, Lee came up to a door that he noted the door that was slightly open. He thought, 'That should be the door. But, I best to play it safe.'
Lee approached the door. As Lee came to a stop, in front of the door, he used his right hand to he gently knock twice on it. He then lowered his right hand back to his side.
From inside the room, Lee heard a male voice said, “Yes.”
Lee stated, in his normal tone of voice, “It is Lee. I am here for the poker game.”
A few seconds later, the door fully open, from the inside. And Lee saw that it was Chang whom opened the door for him. With the door staying open, without Chang holding it.
Lee noticed that Chang was male, and he wearing his usual black suit, with black long coat, complete with his sunglasses wore over his eyes.
Chang was smiling, as he looked at Lee. Chang said, “Good to see you, Lee. Come in.” He then looked at Lee, up a down, as he complimented, “And I must say. I admire that you dressed for the part.”
Lee looked at Chang's face, as he replied, “Thank you. You look good, as well.” He thought, 'Now, let's see what type of character, you truly are.'
Lee then offered his right hand in a handshake.
Chang shook his hand, with both mean having a firm, but not tight, grip in their hold.
Lee thought, 'Well, at least Chang has a firm handshake. That is something.'
Chang thought, 'A good way to tell whether someone is showing foolish bravado, or courage, is by their handshake. And with a handshake like this, Lee is clearly not intimidated by me. That is interesting. I will have to watch him even more closely that I planned to.'
A second later, both men broken their handshake, and Lee walked inside the poker room.
As Lee took a looked around the room, he found that unlike the gaming floor, this room was eerily silent.
Lee saw that the poker room was around fifty feet wide, thirty feet deep, and eight feet high. The room had carpet and panel walls of the room were the same color of red. With the ceiling painted white. The wall facing the outside, across from the hallway door, was just several large paned, tinted windows.
The door was to the far left of the room, when coming in from the hallway.
Given they were around thirty stories up, and the direction of the windows, which faced that side of the building, allowed for those in the room to look out into the cityscape of the island.
Also, there were red curtains, on the sides of the window, that were pulled back to the corners of the outer sides of the wall.
The only lights in the room were a yellow lighting from the ceiling. Though, those lights were turned off. And there was plenty of light coming from the tinted windows.
Just as on the gaming floor, Lee did not see any clocks.
Lee thought, 'I am glad have my wrist watch. Though, I will only look at it sparingly. Doing so is unprofessional.'
Lee noted that there were professional video cameras and microphones set around the walls corners, and centers, of the walls, close the ceiling. All of the cameras and microphone were barely noticeable.
Lee thought, 'There must be a video tech crew manning the audio and video, in a control room, somewhere else in the building.'
Lee then looked at the table set near the window. On the other side of the room, from the door.
The table was a round table, with a diameter of six feet. The table had four legs. And given the legs were black stained wood, Lee guessed the table top was stained black wood, as well. Lee was not sure, given the table was draped with a red cloth that match the carpet and walls.
Lee then turned to looked at were three chairs at the table. They were black stained, wooden chairs. The chairs were cushioned, and had armrests. There were cushions on the seats, and arm rests. With the cushioning being covered by red leather.
Two of the chairs face each other, and were parallel with the windows. The third chair faced the windows.
There two to sets of poker chips on the table. The two sets of chips were in front of the two chairs which faced each other. There was a single deck of cards, on the table, in front of the third chair, which faced the window.
And sitting in the chair, on the far side of table, to Lee's right side, was River. She was wearing a red evening gown that matched her dyed red long hair. River had her hair loose, and draped down her back. Lee saw that she was looking out the window, at the cityscape of the island below.
Lee looked out, passed the windows, as well, at the cityscape, in the partly cloudy morning daylight, which was blunted from the tint on the windows. He thought, 'I am glad I got over my fear of heights.'
From the corner of his eye, Lee noticed River crack a smile.
Lee mentally added, 'This is going to be a long day.' He then saw River's smile widen ever slightly.
Lee turned to look at River.
Lee saw River turned to him. Lee then saw the woman let out a laugh.
Lee sarcastically thought, 'A red room. A red table. Red chairs. Playing against a redhead. Nice motif Chang is going for here.'
Lee mentally reflected, 'I must be mindful, of my mind.'
River giggled, as she continued to smile.
Chang walked a few feet to his right, further into the room. He then came to a stop, as he looked over at Lee. He said, “I am glad you did not get cold feet, Lee.” He mentally added, 'And that you came early. I do admire punctuality.'
Lee thought, 'More like I didn't want to deal with hot lead.' Lee saw River's smile become even wider. He turned back to face Chang, as he inquired, “How will this game be conducted? We will be able to have something to drink while doing this game? And will there breaks be?”
Lee thought, 'This is not a movie. Nor, tv series. People do need to occasionally use the restroom. It is just a biological necessity of life.'
Lee heard River giggle, a little.
Chang stated, “Every hour and a half, we will have a ten minute break, for restroom visits, and to stretch one's legs. In a few hours, we will have a break for a half hour, for lunch. And you will be able to order drinks in a minute.”
Lee stated, “That is fine with me. I will have a lemonade.”
River turned to Chang, as she said, in english, “So will I.”
Chang stated, “I will see to it, immediately.” He then pulled out a cellphone, and dial a number.
Meanwhile, Lee turned and walked over to his seat. He then pulled out his chair, sat down. And moved his seat to be comfortably closer to the table, as got comfortable in his seat.
Lee was seated with his left side facing the window, and Chang to his right side, across the room from River, and himself. With the door being to Lee's back right side.
Lee looked down, and stared at the chips in front of him. There were ten stacks of green poker chips. Each stack at had ten chips. Lee picked up one of the chips, and he looked at both sides of it.
The chip was green. And in the center, of both sides, the chip had the stamp of, '10K'. Around the, '10K', was the name in a circle, 'Daiyu Palace Casino', in small lettering.
Lee then set chip back down on the stack it has been on.
Lee thought, 'Okay, the minimum bid is ten thousand. So, hundred times twenty is a thousand. So, these chips represent a total of a million U.S. dollars... A million...'
River looked over at Lee, as she asked, “What are you looking at?”
Lee looked up at River, as he honestly answered, “It is surprising how small a number of chips can present such a large amount of money. And these chips represent more money than I have ever personally seen in my entire life. And with the minimum bid being ten thousand, each bet I am placing will be more money than most people, back where I live, make in six months.”
From the corner of his right eye, Lee saw Chang crack a grin, while on he was on his cellphone.
Lee thought, 'Chang must have overheard me.'
River shrugged, as she stated, “Then, I suggest you bid wisely.”
Lee complimented, “That is a good idea. So, any idea when the dealer is going to show up?”
River said, “She will likely be here in a few minutes.”
The two players then waited for their dealer to appear.
A couple of minutes later, a waitress, in a hotel uniform, walked into the room, and delivered Lee and River each a glass lemonade, in front of them, by their poker chips.
The waitress then turned and left the room.
(_)
About a minute later, Lee heard a female voice say, from behind him, near the door said, in english, “I hope I am not late.”
Lee then heard Chang state, “No, my dear. You are right on time.”
Lee turned to his right, looked at who is was. And while Lee was still able to maintain his poker face, his mental train of thought came to a halt, as he immediately recognized her.
Lee sarcastically thought, 'This is our dealer?' He then immediately cleared his mind, so as to not reveal to River how much he knew of the situation.
Walking toward them, with Chang beside her, was Faye Valentine, of the Cowboy Bebop reality. And given she looked to be in her mid-twenties, with her as youthful and slender as ever, Lee could guess that she undergone the vat process. Including, the super-soldier serum treatment.
Lee saw that Faye was wearing a black evening gown, with her short purple hair in a black headband. But otherwise, Faye had the same hair style she usually had her hair in.
Lee never took his eyes off Faye, as she walked up to the table.
Chang pulled back the dealer's chair between River and Lee. And Faye sat down in the chair Chang was holding for her.
Chang the help Faye push her chair a little closer to the table, as she got comfortable in her seat.
After which, Chang move around to stand to Faye's left side, right behind the purple haired woman. With Chang now literally standing over Lee. And Lee noticed this, but he did not say anything.
Lee thought, 'I got a feeling our dealer is the type of woman whom just loves to upstage everyone else.'
From the corner of his left eye, he saw River just nodded once in agreement.
Faye looked up at Chang, as she asked, “Which camera do you want me to look into?”
Chang looked down at the purple haired woman, as he answered, “None. Just talk normally, and focus on your job.”
Faye smiled, as she replied, “No problem.” She then looked over at River and Lee.
Chang then stated, to someone outside the room, “Okay guys. Switch over. The game is about to start.”
(_)
At that moment, the people in the control room, elsewhere in the building, immediately switched all the TV monitors on the gaming floor, and nearby indoor casino restaurant, to the poker room, with the volume of the music in the gaming floor decrease, so people could hear the discussion on the poker room.
(_)
Inside the poker room, Faye looked at Lee and River, as she calmly stated, “For those joining in. The players are the redheaded genius, River, and the mysterious, Lee. I am Faye Valentine. I will be your dealer for this game. This game will be for a million dollars in chips. And this game will not end until one player, or the other, has busted. Each chip is worth ten thousand dollars. And the minimum bet is ten ten thousand dollars.”
(_)
On the gaming floor, Rock and Revy had just made it down, and were waking for the a TV screen mounted on the ceiling, hanging down against the wall.
They heard Faye introduce the players. Revy then stated, with surprise in her tone of voice, “So, mister dance is, Lee? And I did not even recognize him, while we were upstairs.”
Rock responded, “Neither did I.” She mentally added, 'And that worries me'
It was at that moment that they heard several food steps coming their way, from behind them, and across the room, from the main entrance of the casino.
Both women, along with several other, people, turned to see Chief Del Soto, with twenty of his police officers, marching into the gaming room, from the front doors.
Chief Del Soto wore his white button up shirt, brown pants, brown leather belt, black boots, and his brown long coat. But, Pedro was not wearing his hat, nor sunglasses.
On the other hand, Pedro's police officers were all in uniform. Most of them were men, but there were a few women mixed in the group, as well.
Revy smirked, as she commented, “This day is just just keeps getting more interesting by the minute.”
(_)
At the moment, on the top floor, in the poker room, from the corner of his eye, Lee saw Chang pulled out his cellphone and answer it.
Lee thought, 'His cellphone didn't ring, so it likely set to vibrate. That is very professional of him. And I think I know what that call is about.
Lee overheard Chang say, in chinese, “I will be there in a minute.” He then hung up his phone, and put it away.
Chang then looked down at Lee, and as he frowned towards Lee.
From his seat, Lee was looked up at Chang. He grinned, as he casually said, in english, “My. My. Here come the fuzz.”
Chang stated, in english, “I know that line.”
Lee's smile turned into a smirk, as he said, “The line is from a great movie. A modern comedic classic.”
Chang realized, as he thought, 'As I expected.' He accused Lee, “You called them here.”
Lee continued smiling, as he motioned with his right index and middle fingers, for Chang to lean over, towards Lee's head.
Chang did so. Lee then whispered, “Given the party your throwing, Chang. I would consider it an insult not to invite my friend, Pedro, and he employees. And allow them to get in on the action, and have some fun, as we play.”
Chang leaned up.
Lee then saw Chang let out a laugh. Which made Lee to feel relief, even though Lee did not show it on the outside.
Meanwhile, the two women by the two men watched what had just taken place. With Faye wondering what was going on. And River trying her best not to laugh.
While not outwardly expressing his feelings, Chang happily thought, 'Oh. This guy is smooth. I like it when someone knows how to pull something with style. And Lee knows with cameras here, if I hurt him, Chief Del Soto will not be happy.'
'Lee just took this poker game to a whole new level of entertainment for me. Well, I guess I have to deal with Chief Del Soto, now. And here I thought, I had Lee over a barrel. It seems that he has a few cards up his sleeve that I didn't know about... It is days like this, that make life worth living.'
Chang just turned and walked out the room, through the open door.
As Chang entered, and turned to his right, down the hallway, he left the door to the room open.
After Chang exited the room, Faye turned to Lee, as she pointed out, “You just pissed him off.”
Lee looked over at Faye, as he said, in a casual tone of voice, “Not really. His is the type of person that clearly likes it when things are done with style.”
River could not help but giggle a little at Lee's comment.
Lee continued, “Still, if he is focused elsewhere, he is not focused here.”
Faye agreed, “I see your point. Though, it is not wise to anger that man.”
Lee flatly quipped, “What part of this god damned situation is wise? Now, deal the cards, lady. The only lady I feel that I will have any chance with today is lady luck.”
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 1: “De La Plata Podrido.”
Chapter 15: “Gambling with Insanity: Part Two: All In The Cards.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
It was at ten AM, on the island city of De La Plata Podrido, Mexico. And the sun hid in the clouds, of the partly cloudy sky. The temperature was cool, but not cold, with a light breeze from the sea.
Inside Daiyu Palace Casino, on the main gaming floor, near the back of the room, Revy and Rock had just watched a good portion of the De La Plata Podrido police force walked right into the gaming area, with Chief Del Soto right up front.
Revy smiled wickedly, as she continued looking at the police force, while she commented, with a bit of excitement in her tone of voice, “Now, the cops have shown up. This is turning into a three ring circus, and we got front row seats.”
Rock shared her lovers smile, as she looked on at the police officers, while she agreed, “I know. And from what Lee just stated, I think he called them here.”
Revy stated, “Of course. You are not going to have a game like this, with the stakes like this, with the betting pools like this, without the cops showing up for their cut.”
Rock pointed out, “From what I understand, Chief Del Soto hate bribes.”
Revy shrugged, as she said, “That is a good point. Now, that I think about it, I do remember Melvin mentioning that to. In which case, Chang is going to have some serious explaining to do to them. Which make it all the more fun for us watch as this game unfolds.”
Rock suggested, “Speaking of which. Let's continue watching the game. I think this is just getting started, in so many ways.”
Revy replied, “I agree.”
Both women then turned around, to continue to watch the TV near them, as they listened to the conversation, in the poker room, that was broadcast to through the speakers, to the gaming floor, and casino restaurant.
(_)
Across the room, inside the restaurant, in the two window booths, the Dutch, Lotton, Benny, Janet, Eda, Yolanda, Sawyer, and Shenhua were dividing their attention between the screen in the poker room upstairs, and towards watching the cops walking onto the gaming floor.
Benny complained, “Who called the cops? This was just getting interesting. And now the cops are going to break it up.”
Yolanda stated, “I doubt that is the case. Look at the cops. They are not arresting anyone. They do not having their pistols out. I think they came here to bet on the game.”
Shenhua said, “I agree.”
Eda pointed out, “I see Chief Del Soto with them. He is right up front.”
Janet commented, “Then, that might be the case. We hope. But, still, who called them?”
Dutch calmly stated, “Lee called them.”
Janet inquired, “He did?”
Dutch pointed out, “Fuzz, is older english term for police. And given that word was in the quote Lee just mentioned, it is a good guess he called them.”
Benny stated, “And what was up with that quote. I have heard it before, but I cannot place it.”
Lotton commented, “It is from a British comedy action cop movie titled, Hot Fuzz. And Lee's right. It is a good movie too. The film is about a super-cop from London that does such a wonderful job, he makes the other police in London look bad. So, his superiors promote him, and use that promotion as justification to transfer him to a small town, in the middle of nowhere. The movie has good action, good mystery, great laughs, and one hell of a shootout towards the end of the film.”
Benny, replied, “Oh yea. I remember seeing it, now. I laughed my ass off watching it.”
Janet turned to Benny, as she stated, “You will have to show that movie to me, some time.”
Benny turned to Janet, as she said, “I will. And you will enjoy it. It is a good popcorn movie.”
Janet smiled, as she replied, “Then, I look forward to seeing it.” She thought, 'Though, after this poker game.'
Benny returned her wife's smile.
Lotton mentioned, “Still, it is interesting that Lee was quoting one of the head villains in that movie.”
Sawyer said, “I remember you showing Shenhua and I the movie, years ago. And it is a good movie. And Lee using that quote just shows that he has great taste in movie quotes.”
Shenhua commented, “I have to agree on this matter. Also, it is clear that Chief Del Soto, and Lee, are pulling something. But, we do not know what.”
Yolanda said, “Given Lee whispered something into Chang's ear, on the video-audio feed, I would guess that this was all part of Lee's plan to get Chang out of that room he and River are playing in.”
Eda pointed out, “But, that would mean that Lee was expecting Chang to be there in the first place.”
Dutch stated, “A professional gambler always thinks a few steps ahead. And that is what Lee is doing. He guessed Chang would be looking over his shoulder. That plus River, would be to much for him. So, he had the Police Chief act as a distraction, to lure Chang downstairs, and way from him.”
Yolanda agreed, “That is what I would do in Lee's position.”
Janet said, “This also proves that Chief Del Soto and Lee know each. And they would have to be friends for the chief of police to bring his officers with him, as he crashes this party.”
Dutch stated, “True. And we will have to find how those two men are connected. But, that will come later. When Lee, nor Chief Del Soto realize what is going on. But, for now, let's see how this poker game unfolds.”
Dutch, and many of those at their two booths, turned to look at the video screens, mounted on the back wall of the restaurant, behind the bar counter, as she listened in on what the TVs were saying.
(_)
At that moment, over thirty floors up, on the penthouse floor, at the top of the casino, in the poker room, at the table, Faye picked up the deck of cards in front of her, on the table. While River sat at the table, to her right side. And Lee sat at the table, to her left side. With the large tinted windows overlooking the city, behind in front of her.
As Faye began to shuffle the cards, she stated, “The rules are simple. This will be standard five card draw poker. No cards are wild. Three cards can be replace per hand. Each bet has to be at least ten thousand dollars in chips. And River will be receiving the first card. And she will be placing the first bet.”
River commented, “I am fine with that.”
Lee asked, “I agree. Ladies first. So, we are only playing with one deck of cards?”
Faye continued shuffling, as she answered, “Yes.”
Lee thought, 'That figures. It is easy for a genius to card count one deck of cards. I hope the cards are not marked, as well.'
River flatly stated, “They are not.”
Lee took River at her word, as he cleared his mind.
Faye then continued shuffling the cards, as she made sure the card were very well randomized on the first hand she dealt. Neither River, nor Lee, were able to complain about Faye's extended shuffling. For it gain them more time to get ready for the actual game itself.
(_)
Meanwhile, Chang had just reached the ground floor. As he exited his express elevator, into the elevator bay facing the gaming area, Chang saw Del Soto on the other side of the gaming floor, with his police officers.
Pedro was in his usual clothing, with his brown long coat. But, he was not wearing his sunglasses, nor hat. Many of his police officers were standing around Pedro. His officers were in armed and in their uniforms. Meaning Pedro was likely armed, as well.
In additional, while most of the police officers were men, there were a few within the group, whom were women.
Chang started walking towards Pedro, at a normal pace, as he thought, 'I need to talk to Chief Del Soto, and defuse the situation, before there is one. After the talent contest, I should have realized that Lee and Chief Del Soto are friends. The problem here is that Chief Del Soto does not like bribery, and he is badass. So, the standard bribery and intimidation tactics are not going to work on him.'
As Chang came closer to Pedro, Chang then noticed Pedro looking at him.
Chang continued his thoughts, 'Okay. He sees me. Now, to talk to him.' He then started walking towards Pedro.
(_)
At that moment, across the room, Pedro stood in place, as his police officers where standing around him.
Pedro has just seen Chang come out of the elevator bay. Pedro noticed Chang looked at him, as the casino owner started walking towards him.
Pedro thought, with mild astonishment, 'Damn. Lee's plan worked. When Lee is on the ball. He is on the ball. Now, to have some fun.' Pedro turned around to his subordinates, as he ordered, in spansih, “Boys, behave. I am will be right back, after I make arrangements for our entertainment.”
Pedro could see some of his personnel smile at his comment.
Pedro then turned back to look, as Chang approached him. He thought, 'As they say. Sometimes you have to meet people half way.' He then started walking towards Chang.
Several seconds later, the two man stopped and face each other, in the middle of the gaming floor. They were six feet apart from each other.
Chang inquired, in english, “So, Chief Del Soto, what brings you to my fine establishment?”
Pedro casually answered, in english, “We heard about the poker game with two million dollars on the line. That amount of money tends to attract the wrong kind of attention. I am surprised you did not call us, concerning this event, beforehand”
Chang responded, “I assured you that my security hand any problems that come up.”
Pedro thought, 'That would be an understatement. You likely have enough badasses and firepower to take on everything, short of a full on military assault.'
Pedro agreed, “I am sure they can. Still, my boys and I would like in on this action.”
Chang questioned, “And I thought you were against bribery?”
Pedro explained, “I am against, bribery, yes. Gambling, no. I view gambling like I do drinking alcohol. If you gamble responsibility, I have no problems. If not, you become my problem.”
Pedro continued, in a slightly sterner tone of voice, “And no one wants to become my problems.”
Pedro went onto say, in a calm tone of voice, “Over the years, I have had to deal with a number of loan sharks and gambling addicts in this town. Both are bad for this town.”
Chang thought, 'I wonder what you mean by deal? Though, you are subtly warning me not to be a loan shark. That is fine.'
Chang said, “I can admire that point of view. The more I learn from you Chief Del Soto, the more I realize that you are a very flexible man.”
Pedro stated, “You have to be in this world.”
Chang replied, “I do not doubt that. So, you, and your subordinates, wish to place bets on this game?”
Pedro answered, “Of course.”
Chang stated, “Then, I suggest you bet on the player known as River. I assure you she is better at this than Lee. And my money is literally riding on her.” He mentally added, 'Given River will likely win, I do not want these cops upset for losing, by betting on Lee.'
Pedro chuckled. He then said, “Nah. My boys can decide for themselves. But, I think I will bet on Lee. I prefer to bet on the underdogs, and wildcards. And Lee is both, in so many ways.”
Chang thought, 'The way he is acting. This is more than just a visit. Lee wanted him here. And I need to know what is going on. Even if I have to tip my hand.' He stated, “Let's cut the bullshit. I know, you know.”
Pedro thought, 'With the music and the game as a distraction, I doubt anyone, let alone the girls, will overheard our conversation. So, I can talk freely.' He said, “Yes. I know from the anime series, to those strange stories. And now I know, that you know, that I know...” He softly added, while he smirked, “Babe.”
Chang took a few quick steps closer to Pedro, to where they were nose to nose, with less than an inch between them, as he sternly stated, in a hushed tone of voice, which only Pedro could hear, “If we were not in a room full of people, including half your force, I would kill you where you stand for calling me that name.”
Pedro did not show any reaction to Chang's movement, nor threat, as he continued to smirk, while calmly pointed out, “You could try. Though, I know what you are capable of. While, you do not know what I am capable of.”
Pedro's smirk turned feral, as he continued, with a bit of eagerness in his tone of voice, “Either way, it would be one hell of a fight.”
Pedro then suddenly dropped his smile, as he went onto say, “By the way, lose the glasses. No one really does the glasses inside the building anymore. Unless it is for a special occasion. If you are going to live here, you need to get up to date with what is cool, and what is not.”
Chang was mildly surprised that he did not even get a reaction from Pedro, with this threat. He calmly thought, 'I guess intimidation really will not work on him. Though, I just confirmed that he knows who I, and the others are. Including, from the anime, to the stories. And he has a point about my sunglasses.”
Chang took a few steps back from Pedro. He then, took off his glasses, and put them in his coat pocket. Chang conceded, “Alright. And from what I have heard about you. You might be right. You would have to at least be a badass to clean up this city, and keep it together. And you are intelligent enough to avoid Revy, the others, and even this casino.”
Pedro commented, “As long as I can account for what River is. And avoid her. I do not mind coming here.”
Chang grinned. He was impressed with Pedro, as he thought, 'So, he really does know what is going on. Nice. I haven't has a challenge like this, since Balalaika and Hotel Moscow first came to Roanapur, all those years ago. Now, to dig for some more information.'
Chang commented, “You have a point there. Still, given what Lee said, and you being here, you seem to be friends with Lee.”
Pedro thought, 'Now, to get Chang off topic.' He said, “I make it a habit to get to know those that live in my fair city.”
Chang snorted, as he stated, “Fair city. That is a laugh.”
Pedro responded, “This city is a lot fairer than most.” He then lied, “Lee does not know what is going on. Though, with a million dollars, of a crazy woman's money, on the line, he did ask about River. He found out from Akira, and her two lovers, that River is a telepath and a genius. He then wisely called me for help, and I decided to come to his aid.”
Chang thought, 'A likely excuse. But, I do not believe that is even close to what really happened between you two. Though, this does confirm that Lee knows that River is a telepath and a genius. Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru, would at least tell Lee that. Out of simple human decency.'
'Though, given Lee knew this ahead of time. This shoes that Lee has more courage to show up here, this morning, than I gave him credit for. Still, I wonder...'
Chang inquired, “And what do you get out of all this?”
Pedro continued the lie he had come up with, in case he was confronted with this very situation. He stated, “Lee keeps tabs on Revy's group. After my brother left town, I did some digging, and I found out what was going on, with Revy's group being here. I also found out about Lee, at the same time. In exchange for me shielding him from the law. He is a wanted man in the states. He spies for me. It is a wonderful arrangement.”
Chang thought, 'Pedro pulled off getting a spy close to Revy, and the others, while I failed to do so... Not bad... And he provides for Lee, by being here, is to get me down here, away from him. I wonder who's plan all this is? Lee's? or Pedro's?.. I will find out later... For now...' He stated, “You are just a distraction for me.”
Pedro causally admitted, “Yes. I am. And with good reason.” He then continued, in a more direct tone of voice, “Chang, you have already stacked the deck against Lee. You and Revy forced him into a game, he told me, that he didn't want to play in the first place. You have him playing a telepathic genius. On top of this, you have Faye as a crooked dealer. Though, I doubt Revy and the others realize how crooked Faye can get with gambling games. Still, with all that set against him, you leaning over his shoulder is just overkill.”
Chang thought, 'He does have a point there. If I did stick around that game, and Lee loses, Revy might call me on all these actions.' He admitted, “You might be right.”
Pedro stated, “I know I am right. Also, I know your kind. You are likely making millions from those betting today. Both ways. I learned what the odds are, that you set up for this poker game. And the way you set up the odds, if you win in the game, you will break even. Or, you may even make a slight profit. But, if you lose your million in the game, you will likely come out more ahead, than River winning this game.”
Chang smirked, as he complimented, “It is so rare to meet someone with such a devious mind as I.”
Chang thought, with amusement, 'Chief Del Soto is right. If I lose, I will actually win more money, then if River wins. But, this is about more than just money. This is about the enjoyment of watching how a well laid out game can play out. If Lee is able to win, it will be very entertaining to see how he pulls it off. I will make a few extra million. And I will likely get to enjoy make up sex with River tonight, for her losing my million today.'
'Though, I will not be angry with her. But, I will enjoy the sex with her. Both ways.'
'And if River wins. It will still be a fun game to watch. I get a little profit out of this. I will likely enjoy seeing Revy pitch a tantrum like a little child. And I will still likely have sex with River tonight, with her having sex with me, as part of our celebration of her winning a million dollars.'
'Either way, I cannot lose. This is the embodiment of a Xanatos Gambit. And I am loving every minute of this.'
Meanwhile, Pedro could tell from Chang's body language and facial expression, that he was thinking about something.
Pedro thought, 'It is clear Chang is likely thinking how great he is, in that he planned and arranged this so he cannot lose today. Still, we need to get this conversation moving forwards.'
Pedro suggested, “I will take that as a compliment. Now, why don't you have a drink with your friends? I suggest you keep Rock and Revy company.” Pedro then used his right hand pointed at Rock, and Revy, whom were standing twenty feet away from them, watching the poker game about to start, on a nearby TV monitor.
Also, Pedro noticed there was no one around the two women.
Pedro saw Chang look in the direction he was pointed out.
Chang turned back to Pedro, as he commented, “That is not a bad idea.”
Pedro thought, 'It pays to keep an eye on one's surroundings.' He then dropped his right hand back to his side.
Pedro turned back to Chang, as he went onto say, “You three seem to have a platonic chemistry going on. When it comes to action, you are one of the few people that Revy respects, whom she immediately does not want to fight to the death. And when it comes to scheming, you and Rock seem to work on the same wavelength.”
Chang agreed, “You are right on all those points.”
Pedro requested, “Well, now to place bets for myself, and my friends. So, where do I go to do that?”
Chang admitted, “Honestly. I am not sure myself. I let my pit bosses, Spike, and Jet, handle where bets are placed, on this game floor.” He the used his right hand to point across the room, to a young, slender, green haired woman, in a blue leisure suit.
Chang then dropped his right hand back to his side, as he said, “There is Spike, right now. Just go over to her, and ask her where the bets for the poker game are being place? We are still holding them open for the next thirty minutes, or so.
Pedro responded, “That is a good selection on pit bosses. And thank you. Now, my boys, and I, will be placing our bets.”
Chang replied, “Have fun.”
Pedro thought, 'Now, to play this the same game Lee has been playing. On officially being known to know stuff.' He asked, “Does Spike have a clue on what's going on?
Chang answered, “Not really. All she knows is about our series, the stories that effect all of us, and that the writer is in town. You do know who we are talking about?”
Pedro commented, “It is my job to know such things.” He then lied, “Though, I do know not who exactly this person is.” He thought, 'That is a good excuse. And I stated I do not know who the writer is. Now, to screw with him.'
Pedro said, “So, that is why you are in town? You think the writer of those stories is here? Interesting. That does explained Revy, and the others, being here, as well.” He mentally added, 'By stating that, Chang will not think that I know the writer. And by extension, he will not think that Lee is the writer.'
Chang thought, 'Damn. I just let that out of the bag. Nothing I can do about it now.' He asked, “What are you going to do with that information?”
Pedro answered, “Nothing. All I ask is if you hunt and catch this person, you will do so discreetly.”
Chang thought, 'Interesting. He is giving us permission to go after the writer. But, he does not want trouble. That is nice balancing act he is maintaining. And he claims not to know who the writer is. Though, I do not know for sure if he is telling the truth, or lying. And going after a man in his position would be too risky. So, even if I want to find out who the writer is. Which I could honestly care less about. One will have to find the writer some other way, than to confront the police chief, here.'
Chang said, “I would hope that would be what happens, if he is caught.”
Pedro commented, “It sounds like you are not after this person?” He thought, 'I need to know this. One way, or another.'
Chang grinned, as he stated, “I have no intention of going after the man responsible for giving everything I ever wanted, and more. Though, Revy, and the others, have a different opinion on the matter.”
Pedro said, “I am glad one of you realizes this. By the way, as the police chief of this city, I have to know. Do the maids know about the stories, and the writer. I feel that my city would not survive if they found out.”
Chang stated, “No. They do not. We all agreed not to tell the Lovelace family.”
Pedro thought, with relief, 'Oh, thank you. That is a major relief. Sure, you, and your friends, are trouble, Chang. But, the maids are just too dangerous. Even for this city.'
Pedro commented, “Thank you for informing me. By the way, at the talent contest, due to the secrecy, I could not tell you then. But, you did a masterful job on that song. That is a hard song to sing, even if one's native language is english.”
Chang responded, “Yes. Billy Joel's song, We Didn't Start The Fire, is very difficult to sing correctly. And thank you for your compliment. Most people do not appreciate talent in other ways, besides destruction. But, I see you do, Chief Del Soto.”
Pedro said, “I like to look on the brighter side of life. Besides, if we are going to get to know each other this well, you might as well call me, Pedro.”
Chang replied, “Okay Pedro. And I do not mind you calling me, Chang. Everyone else seems to do so. Also, yours, and Lee's distraction were well played. Very well played.”
Pedro complimented, “What can I say? I was inspired by the presence of a master.”
Chang grinned, as he responded, “And don't you forget it.”
Pedro replied, “I won't.”
Chang said, “Have a pleasant time. If you need anything. Let me know.”
Pedro stated, “Perhaps, I will.”
Both men then walked away from each other.
As Chang walked towards Rock and Revy, he thought, 'I still haven't figured out how to fit Chief Del Soto... No, Pedro, into my plans. But, after this conversation, I just had with him, I am going to have too. The man is just too valuable not to do something with. Though, I will have to make sure none of the others accidentally kill him. We need him more than some would realize. Considering he is the one keeping this town in one piece.'
'Along that line of thought. I always wondered what Roanapur would have been like if a badass was in charge of the police force, instead of that lard ass, Watsup. Now, I think I have my answer, in the form of De La Plata Podrido, and Police Chief Pedro Del Soto.'
When Chang reached Rock and Revy, both women turned to him. Revy greeted, “Hi Chang. What are you doing down here?”
Chang lied, “I decided that it would be best if I keep you guys company.”
Rock said, “We are most than happy to watch the game with you.”
Revy commented, “Yea. You are always fun to have around.”
Chang replied, “Thank you.”
Chang then stood beside Revy, to Revy's left side. With Rock standing to Revy's right side. As the three adults turned their attention to the TV in front of them.
(_)
Meanwhile, as Pedro walked towards Spike, he got a closer look at the woman.
Pedro saw that Spike still had the same dark green hair afro as she had as a man.
Pedro thought, 'I will just play this cool, and I will be fine. There is no reason that Spike will not help me with finding out where to place the bets at, for the poker game upstairs.'
'Though, I just need to remember not to say her name to her. Still, I think I will place a thousand U.S. dollars on Lee. I can afford to lose that. And I will keep my boys from betting to heavily, as well. Though, I will let them bet on either player. Still, that way, there should be no serious hard feelings towards either player, if any of my boys lose their money in their bet.'
As Pedro reached Spike, he came to a stop, six feet from the women. There was no one else around them, dark green haired, asian woman turned to him.
Spike politely inquired, in english, “Can I help you, sir?”
Pedro said, “Yes. Where do I got to place my bet for the poker game upstairs?”
Spike answered, “Over there.” She then used her left hand to point at a nearby small table, with a woman in a card dealer's uniform in a chair, behind the table. There was an open lock on the table, in front of her. The woman also had a pen and paper, on the table in front of her.
Pedro looked in the direction Spike has pointed to, then back towards Spike. He said, “Thank you.”
Spike dropped her left hand back to her side, as she turned to Pedro. She calmly said, “You're welcome.”
Pedro then turned, and he headed in a different direction, than the small betting table. He walked towards the area of the gaming room, where his men and women were, so he could round them up, to place their bets, all at once. Before it was too late to do so.
(_)
On the penthouse level, in the poker room, Faye had just finished shuffling the cards, and she started handing out the cards, with River getting the first card.
Lee sarcastically thought, 'That took long enough.'
River snorted.
When Faye was finished, dealing five cards to each player, River picked up her five cards, and looked at them, in her hands. As she held her cards close to her body.
Meanwhile, Lee had yet to looked at his five cards.
Lee thought, as he looked over at River, 'Great. I got to deal with both a telepath, and a crooked dealer... Yea, I know you are reading my mind, River.'
River just smiled at him.
Lee turned Faye, as he thought, 'Faye said she is only using one deck of cards. Most casinos use multiple decks of cards, per table. Switching between them, after every hand, to help prevent card counting. But, Chang probably just wants to give you the option to card count, if your wanted to. On the other hand, I could never get the hang of card counting.'
Lee looked over at River, whom just shrugged towards him.
Lee then looked at his cards. Lee has a pair of eights. Which was worth betting on. While changing out the other three cards he had.
Faye stated, “As a reminder. River will place the first bet.”
River placed a single ten thousand dollar chip into the pot.
Lee matched the bet.
Both of the players then discarded a few of their cards. River discarded two. Lee discarded threes.
Faye replaced their cards.
As Lee and River looked at their new cards, Lee did not outwardly show it, but he now had three eights. Though, he tried to keep himself from focusing on his card hand, too much.
Lee thought, 'Now, for my plan.' He temporally broke his poker mask, and he smirked towards River.
(_)
On the gaming floor, Rock, Revy, and Chang were standing together, while watching the TV.
They continued to watch the game on the TV, as Revy inquired, “Why does that smile look so familiar?”
Chang answered, “Because you have probably seen Rock use that same type of smirk a dozen times over, when she has come up with an awesome plan.”
Rock questioned, “Really?”
Chang replied, “Yes.”
Revy stated, “I hope he lives up to the smirk, then.”
(_)
On the penthouse level, in the poker room, Lee continued to smirk, as he causally said, “River, since you are Chang's girlfriend, I have a question for you. Given the way Chang likes to act and walk around, he must be hung like an elephant, downstairs.”
Lee could barely as keep himself from laughing, as he saw both River and Faye look at him, with shocked expressions, while they went slack jawed over his comment.
Faye thought, 'This man has a death wish.'
(_)
On the casino floor, Chang jaw dropped, as everyone else laughed.
Rock and Revy were beside Chang, as they laughed.
Between laughs, Revy commented, “Lee has a death wish.”
As Rock forced herself to breath, between laughs, she countered, “No. He is just playing the only angle he can. Humor. And it is an awesome plan. He might still win this game.”
(_)
Nearby, Pedro had just finished making his bet for Lee. With his men and women still placing their bets.
Presently, Pedro was still trying to find a seat, as he saw and heard the spectacle on the very TVs around the casino. Pedro chuckled, as he thought, 'Oh my god. Lee, you were right. Your plan is a six, or seven, on the crazy meter. At least.'
(_)
In the poker room, River and Faye has finally composed themselves.
River regained her own poker face, as she calmly stated, “That would be a matter of opinion. I will raise you thirty thousand.”
River placed three more chips into the pot. She then inquired, “Also, what about Revy, in that outfit she likes to wear?”
Lee thought, 'Oh. You want to play this game, too. Nice.'
River smiled towards Lee.
Lee then could not help answered River's bait, “To be honest. And I know she is kill me after I say this. Yet, it might still be worth saying this. With those blue denim cut-offs and crop top, she looks like Daisy Dukes's asian cousin, from Dukes of Hazard.”
Lee thought, 'That is even what those style of shorts are sometimes called.'
River replied, “Interesting.”
(_)
On the casino floor, laughter erupted again.
Chang and Rock laughed, as Revy barely contained her anger.
Chang said, “Looks like the shoe is on the other foot, Revy.”
Revy grumbled, “He is right. I am going to kill him.”
Rock replied, “No, you won't.”
Chang stated, “Besides, I am sure that you already knew that those cut-offs, that you wear, are occasionally called, Daisy Dukes.”
Revy looked down, at the floor, as she forced herself to calm down. She quietly conceded, “Yea. I did.” She then look back at the TV near them.
(_)
Back in the poker room, Lee threw out three chips, as he stated, “Call.”
Both played showed their hands. River has a pair of jacks. Lee's three eights beat her two pair.
Lee collected his forty thousand in winnings, as Faye collected the cards, and began to reshuffle the cards.
A Faye shuffled the cards, River asked, “So, what about Revy's girlfriend, Rock?”
Lee shrugged, as he casually replied, “I don't want to know what it is about her, but her body language screams, office girl.”
(_)
On the gaming floor, the punchline of the third joke, roars of laughter erupted again.
It was Chang and Revy's turn to laugh.
Chang then stated, “Rock, it is looks like you have been demoted from salary man to office girl.”
Rock replied, with slight annoyance to her voice, “I will give him that one. And I think he is just getting started.”
Chang thought, 'Rock was right. Lee just used humor to when the first hand. And he just won forty thousand. Not bad. Not bad at all.'
(_)
In the poker room, This time, it only took Faye around thirty seconds to shuffle the cards, before she handed out another five cards.
Lee thought, 'Well, at least she was quicker, with shuffling the cards, this time.'
River let out a little giggle escape her lips.
Both Lee and River then looked at their cards. Lee saw he had nothing. Still, it was his turn to bet, and he felt a strong start was good for a hand where he had nothing.
Lee remembered what Sam had taught him that.
Though, while in the presence, of the telepathic River, Lee kept himself from thinking to much about his poker lessons from Sam.
Lee held his cards in his right hand, as he used his left hand to toss two chips into the center of the table. He stated, “I will start with twenty thousand.”
River toss two chips, as she asked, “I will see that. And what about Aeryn?”
Both players replaced three of their cards.
Lee answered, “When I looked into her eyes, I see a very sane individual, whom could easily snap me like a twig, if she wanted to.”
(_)
On the gaming floor, Aeryn, Violin, Akira, Ranma, Natsuru, and Annie stood together, as they were still finding a place to sit down, to watch the poker game from.
Aeryn was beside her spouse, as she complimented, “He is a very perceptive man.”
(_)
In the poker room, Lee looked at his cards. He still had nothing. He said, “I fold.”
Both players turned their cards over to Faye.
As Faye reshuffled, River collected her winnings, with her becoming twenty thousand dollars richer.
River inquired, “And what about Violin?”
Lee happily commented, “She is such an asian redneck that I would be tempted to breakout the Jeff Foxworthy jokes, for her. But, this is just not the time, nor place for such humor. No matter how tempting it is.”
(_)
On the gaming floor, Violin and Akira snickered for a few seconds.
Violin then said, “He's got me there.”
Akira replied, “I know.”
(_)
In the poker room, Faye handed out another five cards to each player.
Lee looked at his cards, he had three of a kind of sixes.
River threw five chips into the pot, as she stated, “I will start with fifty thousand.”
Lee tossed in five chips, as he stated, “I will see that fifty thousand.”
Lee discards two cards, while River discarded three cards.
River commented, “Still... About the asian redneck comment? Isn't that an oxymoron?”
Lee said, “Nope. There are asian rednecks. And I know a few of them, personally. They are crazier than the white rednecks.”
River inquired, “Interesting. And what about Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru?”
Lee commented, “Except for the threesome angle, they seem to be the most normal, sane, and well adjusted members of their group.”
(_)
On the gaming floor, in one group, Akira, Ranma, Natsuru, Annie, Aeryn, and Violin almost doubled over laughing.
(_)
Not far from the group of women, a woman, whom worked for the casino, saw them. She wore black jeans, a white t-shirt, a red leather jacket, and black leather boots.
The women recognized the five women, as she turned, and walked up to them.
_)
Nearby, the group of five women, it took all of Pedro's will power not to burst out laughing, as well.
Pedro thought, 'If I laugh. I risk blowing my cover, on how much I know about them.'
(_)
Elsewhere, on the gaming floor, Rock, Revy, and Chang were sharing a good laugh.
While Chang laughed, he thought, with delight, 'When this is over. I might hire Lee as a comedic stand up act. The guy has talent in delivering jokes.'
(_)
In the casino restaurant, while sitting at their booths, Yolanda, Eda, Janet, Benny, Lotton, Dutch, Sawyer, and Shenhua were all laughing at Lee's latest joke.
Benny commented, “This guy would be great at a roast.”
Eda pointed out, “If you haven't figured it out by now, both of them are roasting us. And doing a marvelous job at it.”
Janet commented, “And the fact that River is the straight man, in this two person act, just makes it even more funny.”
Dutch said, “Yea. The irony does make it funnier.”
The eight women then laughed even harder.
(_)
In the game room, Lee looked at his two new cards, and he found that he had a full house, of three sixes and two twos.
River looked at her cards. She tossed in six chips, as she stated, “I will raise you sixty thousand.”
Lee tossed in six chips, as he said, “I call.”
River had nothing, and Lee won the hand.
Faye collected the cards, and she reshuffled the deck.
As Lee collected his winnings, he thought, 'A hundred and ten thousand is not bad for one hand.'
River calmly asked, “Now, what about Eda?”
Lee's poker face dropped, for a second, has he looked up at River. He calmly stated, “I have nothing to say, but that she is a wonderful woman?” He mentally added, 'Eda, is a topic that we will not be discussing.'
River simply nodded once, as she agreed, “I can see why you would say that.”
By then, Faye finished shuffling, and dealt the two players their next hand.
(_)
In the hotel restaurant, Janet looked over at Eda, as she said, “I think he still has the hots for you.”
Eda looked at Janet, as she replied, “Nah. He is just being a gentleman.”
(_)
In the poker room, as the next few hands played out, River won two hands, and Lee won one hand.
None of the hands were big bets, and they pretty much were breaking even after every other hand.
With the next hand, both players looked at their cards.
Lee saw that he had a straight, of a seven, eight nine, ten, and jack.
And it was River's turn to place the first bet.
River placed three chips, as she said, “I will start with thirty thousand.”
Lee threw five chips into the pot, as he stated, “I will see that. And raise you twenty thousand.”
River then discards one card, she commented, “For a very nice suit, you picked a lousy tie to wear with it.”
Lee smirked, as he joked, “It is called power clashing. They teach such lessons at technical colleges, during the business courses. Where wearing a professional business suit to class is requirement.”
River giggled at his joke. She then looked at the card Faye had given her, to replace the card she discarded.
(_)
On the casino gaming floor, Chang looked around, as he noticed there were a few snickers, and some light laughs, except for Pedro. Pedro was laughing very hard.
Chang thought, 'I think the only person in this room whom got Lee's joke was Pedro. That figures. Still, even though I know about you, Pedro. None of the others do. And that is clearly the way you want to keep it. I will respect that. But Pedro, if you keep reacting to Lee's comment like this, my friends will notice you.'
Chang then turned his attention back to the TV near him, Revy, and Rock.
Chang then noticed his two friends were staring intensely at the TV. He thought, 'Something is going on here. But, I am not sure what.'
Rock wondered out loud, “Why does that tie look familiar?”
Chang looked at the camera showing the front of Lee's clothing. He realized, as he answer her question, “Because you use to wear a teal tie as well, with your old suit.”
Revy spoke up, “Probably coincidence.”
Chang thought, 'Maybe... Maybe not...'
(_)
As Pedro Del Soto sat at a non-gambling table, with a few of his subordinates, as they watch the game upstairs from a nearby TV, with the speakers allowing them to listen to the conversation upstairs, over the music playing in the room.
At the moment, Pedro was laughed hard at Lee's latest joke.
As Pedro started to calm down, he thought, 'Only you, Lee, you would make a Thirty Rock, Jack joke, at a time like this?... Wait a minute, that tie... Teal... Lee you are absolutely insane to wear a tie like that to a place like this. Around these people. If you get caught, you are on your own... Wait a minute. A Thirty Rock verbal joke, dealing with a visible joke about Rock, whom use to wear a teal tie, like that... A double Rock joke... Oh, I get it... A joke on the Rocks...'
Pedro chuckled a little more, as he continued his thoughts, 'Lee, you're not just insane. You might be the craziest person in the building... And that is saying something.'
'Either way, you still are the most imaginative. You still got that creative talent for humor. You are definitely showing it with your jokes. And it appears you plan to keep River happy is working. Because she is clearly getting in on the jokes.'
'Lee, you might actually pull your plan off.'
Pedro took a moment to look around the room. As he did so, one of the young women in the gaming room caught his eye.
The woman was standing with Aeryn, Violin, Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru. All of them were talking to each other, as they occasionally turned their head to watch the TV monitor near them, of the poker game.
The women was a pretty fair skin woman with long brown hair, that went down to hair shoulder-blades. Her hair was held in a ponytail, that was tied back with a brown scrunchy. She has an athletic physical build, and she was slightly over average height for a woman of her ethnicity.
The brown haired woman wore black jeans, a white t-shirt, a red leather jacket, and black leather boots. But, it was the metal cylinder strapped to the right side of her belt that tipped Pedro off to who she was.
Pedro kept himself from showing any outward expression, as he mentally screamed in terror, 'Oh crap. That is Annie. AKA, gender bent Anakin Skywalker. AKA gender bent Darth Vader. What is she doing here!? Last I read, she hates Chang! I mean, sure dealing with villains like Chang and Revy are one thing. For them. Being evil is a career option. But, for a Sith Lord, being evil is a religious experience.'
'Why did Lee have to write about, Annie? Because he is a fool. And why am I helping Lee? Because I am a fool, as well. Indeed. Who is more the foolish? The fool, or the fool who follows him?... Oh man, I am doing the Star Wars jokes, now. And the situation fits that joke, so well.'
'The only good news is that last time I read about Annie, she was a gray force user, and she really wasn't evil anymore.'
'Yet. In baseball terms, she is in a badass league beyond anything I could hope to counter. I am talking galactic scale. Meanwhile, Chang and Revy are more like in the majors. With myself being in the minors.'
'When it comes to Chang, Revy, and the other badasses at their level, if my back was to the wall, I could probably bridge the gap, and hold my own against them.'
'On the other hand, Annie is like River, she is to powerful for me.'
'With Annie around, this situation is getting a little too hot for me.'
'I came here today was as a favor for Lee. But, if he gets caught, he will likely talk, to try to save his own skin. That is just his nature. And I don't blame him for it. Still, if he talks, we both will be screwed. I hope River didn't read to much of his mind. Speaking of River, the only reason I would set foot in this casino was that I knew River would be too busy today to meet with me. She is like Annie. She is to much for me to handle. How Chang is still breathing, I don't know.'
'Though, either way, I have to stick around, to make sure Lee either makes it out of this casino on his own. Or, if he is caught, I will have about a window of a minute or two, to figure out if I want to dry to have my boys and I, make a run for it. Or, I would cut a deal with Chang.'
'In such a situation, I am not sure which option I would take.'
Pedro then realized, as he continued his thoughts, 'Oh crap! Force users can sense when someone nearby is expressing strong emotions about them. And if Annie catches me, then Lee and I are still both screwed to the wall. Fortunately, it can take the a few minutes to localized the person. And she has not moved her head yet, in my direction. I need to immediately calm down, and put my focus back on the poker game.'
Pedro forced himself to calm down, as he turned his head back to the nearby TV monitor showing the poker game between Lee and River. With Pedro making himself think solely about the poker game.
(_)
Nearby, Annie has been talking to Violin, Aeryn, Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru. As they caught up, would sometimes see what was going on with the poker game, between River, and Lee, in the penthouse level.
Annie then felt someone focus on her. She turned her head to look around the room.
'I just sensed someone feel intense fear towards me. Someone here, local, recognizes me. But, the fear was immediately cut off before I even realized what I was sensing. It has been a while sense I felt fear towards myself. Which is good.'
'Still, I checked. Star Wars exists in this reality as a fictional series. If the person recognized me, then he, or she, likely also has a basic understanding of how force senses work. And that person immediately reigned in their emotions, and focused on something else, before I could find that person... I am not likely going to spot this person. I might as well go back to talking with my friends. While occasionally watching River beat this humorous fool.'
Natsuru noticed Annie looking around. She asked, “What is it?”
Annie turned to face Natsuru, as she answered, “It is nothing.”
Ranma said, “I find it hard to believe that Lee was mister dance...” She turned to Annie, as she continued, “Annie, just so you know, Lee is the one playing River.”
Annie turned to Ranma, as she replied, “Okay. And who is this, Lee?”
Natsuru commented, “He is just a guy we know, at the Devil's Hotel. Though, the man clearly likes to hide things. And his jokes have been amazing. But, given who we are, we should not be ones to judge.”
Ranma agreed, “You got that right. And the man just wants to have a good time with a beautiful woman. And he likely doesn't want us to bother him about it, afterward. Though, I am starting to understand why Eda slept with him.”
Annie inquired, “Eda, slept with that guy?”
Akira answered, “Yea. From what we understand, Eda was the one that asked him out. And he went all out on their date. And they had a one night stand that night.”
Annie said, “Lucky guy.” She mentally added, 'Some people realize an opportunity when they see it. And it sounds like this, Lee, is one such person.'
While watching the monitor, Violin inquired, “Annie, I have a question.”
Annie asked, “Sure. What is it?”
Violin continued to look at the TV, as she stated, “I know you can force grip through line of sight, even via a teleconference. But, can you tell one's emotional state that way, as well? Like Deanna Troi from Star Trek? I mean, the jokes are funny. But, I want to know what is ticking inside River and Lee's minds.”
Annie answered, “Yes. I can do that. But, I considered it rude to do so.”
Aeryn commented, “Still, it would be wise to know what their emotional state is. Just in case we need to stop something from happen, and help, Lee.”
Aeryn thought, 'Anyone that would publicly compliment me. And also help me understand by husband, in a way no one has tried to, does not deserve to be seriously hurt, or die, because someone forced them into a situation. John and I have been in those situations. So, we can sympathize with Lee, on this matter.'
Akira said, “Thank you, Aeryn.” She thought, 'Maybe she is warming up to Lee.'
Aeryn turned to Akira, as she calmly replied, “You're welcome.”
Annie conceded, “Alright, you made your point. I will do it.”
Annie turned her attention back to the TV monitor near her, as she used the force to sense the emotion states of River and Lee.
A few seconds later, while staring at the monitor, Annie stated, “Well, River is annoyed at being put into the situation she finds herself in.”
Aeryn commented, “So, she does not want to play this game. Intriguing.”
Annie responded, “I would guess that would be the case. Or, she is just annoyed by the entire situation, for some reason.”
Akira asked, “What about, Lee?”
Annie stated, “Well... Lee, is just concerned at the situation he is in.”
Violin said, “That is completely reasonable.”
Suddenly, both River and Lee turned to stare at the camera that was piping the feed into the TVs on the gaming floor.
Akira immediately quit sensing the two people, upstairs, as she commented, “I think they both just sensed you.”
Annie replied, “I agree.”
With Annie no long trying to sense River and Lee, a few seconds later, both players turned back to look at their cards.
Annie stated, “I can understand River sensing me. But, how could a normal person like Lee, sense me?”
Natsuru explained, “Lee is not normal... Well, he is more normal than us. But, he has precognitive abilities. Very sharp precognitive abilities.”
Annie turned to Natsuru, as she inquired, “How sharp?”
Natsuru answered, “From what Rock and Revy tell me, he is as good with his precognitive abilities, in dealing with cards, as you are with your lightsaber.”
Annie smiled, as she said, “That is sharp. This should be an interesting game.”
Ranma pointed out, “Nah. Lee knows that River is a telepath and a genius. We personally told him that. And he believed us. Lee will not use his precognition on her.”
Annie complimented, “Smart man.”
Ranma agreed, “Quite.”
Violin said, “Well ladies, let's see what happens next.”
The women turned back to look at the nearby TV, showing the poker game.
(_)
Nearby, as Chang, Revy, and Rock, started at the TV, they had seen River and Lee look into the camera.
While none of them commented on it. Chang thought, 'I wonder why River and Lee stared into the camera at the same time?... Well, it doesn't matter.'
(_)
At the moment, in game room, both River and Lee look back at their cards.
Faye noticed that both her players had suddenly turned to look at the same camera, at the same time. With them turning back to their cards, at the same time.
Faye asked, “What was with the staring at the camera?”
River did not look up from her cards, as she said, “Someone was sensing us.”
Lee looked at his cards, as he inquired, “Ever heard the concept of knowing when someone is staring at you?”
With River present, Lee forced himself to not think about who it could be.
Faye replied, “Yes.”
Lee said, “Same concept.”
Faye commented, “Oh. Well, let us continued with this game. Shall we?”
River saw Lee's five chip raise, as she placed eight chips. She said, “I will see your raise, and raise you thirty thousand.”
Lee tossed eight chips, as he said, “Call.”
River and Lee showed their cards.
And River beat Lee's straight, with her flush of hearts, which was five cards of all the same type.
Faye collected the cards, as River collected her winnings.
Lee thought, 'Ouch. By losing a hundred and thirty thousand in that hand, I just lost all my gains, and went into the hole. Still, this is a good time to talk to, River.'
As Faye shuffled the cards, Lee looked over at River. A second later, their eyes met.
Lee thought, 'River. I know you are a telepath. And I know you are reading my mind. So, I figured, let's talk in private, for a minute. Given everyone is watching, and listening, to this is a poker game, if we make any body movements, facial expressions, or even blinking, about this situation, it will cause those viewing us to wonder what is going on. But, I figure eye movement will not be noticed. So, I need to ask you some questions. If you want, please use your eyes to answer yes or no. Does this work for you?'
River moved her eyes up and down in a, yes, answer.
Lee thought, 'Good. First, thank you for clearly not using her telepathic abilities to cheat. And you have a good poker face.'
River smiled.
Lee thought, 'I will take that smile as meaning, both you're welcome. And thank you. Now, my first question is, did you want to play me in this poker game?'
River moved her eyes side to side, in a, no, answer.
Lee thought, 'So, Chang put you up to this?'
River used her eyes to move up and down, in a, yes, answer.
Lee thought, 'Well, I am in a similar boat. Revy, and Chang, both put me up to this, as well.'
River rolled her eyes. She then looked back at Lee.
Lee thought, 'Yea. Exactly. And to think we do not even get anything from this, while everyone else profits from our efforts. Even if it is just for entertainment. Though, I would guess a lot of people are betting on us, downstairs.'
River raised her eyes, up and down, in a, yes, nod.
Lee thought, 'River, I have an offer for you. You likely already have found out I am precognitive. Though, I am trying not to use my abilities in this game. And you are telepath. How about we both do our best not use our abilities for the rest of the game? And no card counting. Because I really want to see how good a poker player you really are. Sound fair to you?'
River grinned.
Lee returned River's smile, as he thought, 'I will take that as a, yes. May the best person win.'
Lee saw that River's smile widened ever so slightly, by his polite gesture.
By then, Faye has started handing them their cards.
A few minutes later, Lee won the current hand of cards.
(_)
For the next two hours, River and Lee played cards. With both of them matching each other in wins, and losses.
Both of them kept their promises, not to use their more interesting abilities in their poker game against each other.
Though, neither were betting large amounts of chips in their game. With only a few raises in the betting pool. Both players knew better than than to risk more than they had to. And they realized it was a game of patience.
Fortunately, during those few hours, Lee was able to win back the chips he had lost, and both of them were pretty even in chips, by the time lunch rolled around, at twelve noon.
Around fifteen minutes earlier, at eleven forty-five AM, according to Lee's digital wrist watch, both of them, along with Faye, gave their meal orders, from a waitress that came by,
While both players continued to drink lemonade, River ordered grilled chicken alfredo pasta, and Lee had a chicken caesar salad.
Lee found the salad was good, but not great.
On the other hand, Faye had a glass of soda, with a hamburger and fries.
After the three adults finished eating, they continued their game, at exactly twelve thirty PM.
And as the hours passed, the two players continued their game. Their fortunes went up and down, with the chips going back and forth between each other. With neither player giving any headway to the other.
(_)
During the second ten minute break, after lunch, Lee went in the large men's restroom in the floor. And he was the only one in the room.
Lee looked at his wrist watch, which he rarely did during the game.
Lee thought, 'It is three forty-seven PM.'
After using one of the urinals to relieve himself. He zipped up his pants. He then washed hands in a sink, using some liquid soap, from a nearby liquid soap dispenser, on the wall. Next, he dried his hands with some paper towels, from a paper towel dispenser on the wall, near the door to the room.
When Lee's hands were dry, he wadded up the paper towels in his hands, and he dropped them into an open waste paper trash can, with plastic bag liner. The trash can was on the floor, right below the paper towel dispenser.
Lee walked back to the sink. He stood in front of the sink he was used, as he stared at his own face, with his hat and shades on, in the large wall mirror above the sinks.
He was deep in thought at how he got into this situation.
Lee though, 'I am breaking even at the moment. But, for how long? I am an amateur playing a professional game with a genius, and a dealer with a questionable background. Still, when it comes to using psychic abilities, and card counting, River had clearly kept her end of the deal. And so have I. Though, I have got to also keep an eye on Faye, while not appearing to be card counting.'
'Even though I do not know how to card count. In a situation such as this, the appearance of impropriety can be as risky as committing the very impropriety one is accused of committing.'
Suddenly the door open to the restroom opens, and he heard a vaguely familiar voice say, in english, “Two minutes till the game restarts.”
Lee turned to his left, to look over at saw that two men had entered the washroom. The two men were Malcolm Reynolds and Jayne Cobb. Both men were wearing black business suits. And Lee could tell that they also had pistols in shoulder holsters.
Lee did not even bad an eye, as he looked back at the mirror.
Mal noticed this, as he asked, in english, “Is there are problem?”
Lee continued to look at his reflected in the mirror, as he coyly answered, “I am just asking myself how I got here.”
Mal commented, “I ask myself that question everyday, and the answer is never good.”
Lee thought, 'Mal, as the writer, I am sure you probably blame me for a number of your problems. And you would be right. Still, I gave you, and your friends, a complete fresh start in another reality, after every place you knew was literally destroyed in your reality.'
'Why do I have to deal with so many ungrateful bastards and bitches?... Well, that is not fair to them. I did toy with there lives And there is that whole gender bending, and longevity, issues. Still, it is best that I talk to them. Before they grow concerned with me.'
Lee looked over at them, as he said, “You are not the only one that asks that question every day. And I didn't want to be here, in the first place.”
Jayne commented, in english, “If you did not, then why are you here?”
Lee stated, “I got dragged into this by a crazy redhead, and if you work here, your boss.”
Mal smiled, as he commented, “Been there. Done that. I can sympathize.”
Lee guessed, “Let me guess. The redhead I am playing against?”
Mal said, “Yep. Though, she had brown hair, to being with.”
Lee thought, 'Thanks Mal, for telling me that. Now, I don't have to worry about slipping up on that. But, let us confirm the dye job.' He asked, “Let me guess. She dyes it?”
Mal answered, “Yes.”
Lee replied, “That figures.”
Mal commented, “No kidding.”
Jayne smirked, as he stated, “You know? You are lucky you are doing this well, so far.”
Lee inquired, “Why is that? I have held my own, so far.”
Jayne said, “If she wasn't playing with you, it would be over, by now?”
Lee thought, 'I hate to admit it. But, Jayne is right. And both Mal and Jayne are very sharp. It is best I do not say things as hard facts.' He inquired, “Are you talking about the rumor that the girls at the other hotel told me? That River was a genius and a telepath?”
Jayne chuckled. He said, “That is no rumor. It is a fact. And that is the least interesting thing about her.”
Lee commented, “Well, I don't doubt she is a genius. And I am open to the possibility of telepathy existing.”
Mal said, “I am sure. I heard you are precognitive.”
Lee defended himself, “Yes. And before you ask. I would never cheat with the stakes so high. Especially, given that you say she is a telepath. I have been playing it straight because I believe in winning honestly.”
Mel responded, “That is respectable.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
Jayne commented, “Still, when River starts getting serious, you are screwed.”
Lee realized, as he replied, “Yea. If what you are saying is true, then I am probably screwed.”
Lee started chuckling, as he started to realize something, while he thought, 'I am screwed. It doesn't matter if they learn I am the writer, or not. I am likely not going to walk out of the casino alive.'
Jayne said, with concern in his tone of voice, “You sound like a man laughing at his own execution. That is not a good sign for you continued sanity.”
Lee explained, “That is because I am. The money I am gambling with is this crazy redhead's money. Her name is Revy. If I lose, she is going to kill me. If I win, Chang, on principle, is going to kill me. That is not counting the others that may lose money, depending on if I win, or lose. Including the police. No matter if I win or lose, I am not walking out of this casino alive.”
Jayne pointed out, “I heard you were the one to called in the police?”
Lee admitted, “It seemed like a good idea at the time.”
Mal stated, in a firm tone of voice, “Mister Lee. I am the chief of security here. If you play the rest of this game honestly, I promise that you will make it out of this building alive. Though, beyond this building is not my concern.”
Lee inwardly smiled, as Mal and Jayne continued talking to him.
Though, Lee was to caught in his own thoughts, to listen to them. As Lee just stared blankly towards the two men, Lee thought, 'Malcolm only promises something when he means it. And having them be security makes sense in how Chang fit the Mal and his friends fit into the employment chain here. Well, at least Mal, Jayne, and Zoe. I am sure Zoe is also a lieutenant in Mal's security force. Chang probably placed the others in jobs they would be fine with.'
'It is academic to guess that Simon is the casino's doctor. His set up here is likely better than at the local hospital.'
'Kaylee likely is the person responsible for maintenance on the local automobiles, electrical and computer systems in this building. She probably enjoys working on classic cars and such. That engineering woman also did appreciate the classics of anything mechanical in nature. From starships to intimate equipment. I cannot say that about many people.'
'And I checked with the girls. This place has a spa area. It is likely that Inara is the manager of the spa area. And she is also probably the chief masseuse for the casino. That would be good use of her companion skills, in profession that Inara, Mal, Chang could agree would be fine with all of them.'
'On a similar matter. When it comes to call girls, I would not be surprised, with Rowan being here. I am not sure either way. But, if Rowan is here, Chang would have Rowan handle that end of the equation.'
'And with if Chang was to create a whorehouse, it would be elsewhere on the island, away from the casino, and unwanted attention. Though, with Chang's creativeness, he is probably going to supply instant packets from Jusenkyo, for clients and employees to choose genders, per job, at their whorehouse.'
'With Chang, and perhaps Rowan. If Rowan is here. Likely charging a small fortune for their customers. Thus bringing very interesting, rich, and risk taking people to this island. The type of people that casinos make their fortunes from. So, once they are through at the whorehouse, the call girls will entice their customers to check out Chang's casino.'
'Oh my, Chang is as much a genius, in his own way, as River. They make a better couple than I realized. And I wrote them to be a couple.'
'And speaking of River. I don't know how she fits into the casino. Though, I doubt she works in the criminal area of Chang's employment. She never wanted to be an assassin. She just likes to do her own thing. And occasionally she is brought in when they need to know if someone is telling the truth.'
'On that thought. If Faye is here. It is a good bet that Spike and Jet are here. And I am sure that Faye is likely dealer on the game floor.'
'Though, I wonder how Spike and Jet fit in this place. They are likely the pit bosses for this casino. Or, at least two of them. And I am sure Julia is around here, somewhere. Also, there could be others here. So, this place is likely just full of surprises. Surprises that it would be best for myself to leave alone.'
Lee's attention was brought back to reality, as Jayne mentioned, “And you do have a car. We will even help give you a five minute head start.”
Lee thought, 'They must be talking about a possible escape plan, from the casino. If I need it. Even though I did not hear most of it. I should thank them, anyway.'
Lee smiled, as he extended his right hand towards the two men.
Mal took a few steps forward, closer to Lee. While Jayne stayed where he was.
Lee noticed this. He looked Mal in his eyes, as he said, “Thank you. I appreciate it.”
Mal shook Lee's hand with his own right hand.
Both men had a firm grip in their handshake.
Lee thought, 'This is a good sign. And it means he is serious.'
At the same time, Mal thought, 'This man has a good handshake. He is on the level... Though, something is not right with his hand...' Mal looked closer at Lee's face, as he continued his thoughts, 'And his face...'
A second later, Mal lightly gripped Lee's right wrist with his left hand.
Lee did not show it on the outside, though he thought, with concern, 'What the?...'
A few seconds later, Mal let go of Lee's right wrist, and right hand.
Lee though, with relief, 'He let go. So, it does not matter. Now, for me to officially get to know them.' He said, “I think we haven't been formally introduced. I am J. D. Lee.”
Mal answered, “I am Security Chief Malcolm Reynolds, and this is one of my lieutenants, Jayne Cobb.”
Lee thought, 'So, Jayne is not at the bottom of the food chain in the security of this casino. I am glad to hear that.' He greeted them, “It is nice to meet you, Mister Reynolds, and Mister Cobb.”
Jayne joked, “What does J.D. stand for? John Doe?”
Lee did not even react, as he lied, “Actually, my full name is Jefferson Davis Lee.” The two gave him confused looked. Lee continued, “Trust me. It is better if I just use my last name, Lee. Anyway, thank you for clearing up a few things.” He mentally added, 'Jayne, you really are sharper than most people give you credit for. I am glad I noticed that when I wrote about all of you.'
Mal responded, “You are welcome. And for the record, from the way River has been looking at you. I think she likes you.”
Lee lightly chuckled. He then stated, “Honestly. I saw River at that talent contest, at the Devil's Hotel. She did a wonderful fire dance, and in doing so, showed she was dangerous. And on a daily basis, I have to deal with too many dangerous women as is. I have no interest in adding a redhead, who happens to be the local casino owner's girlfriend, to that list.”
Mal let out a small laugh. He smiled, as he said, “I fully believe you.”
Jayne commented, “You are preaching to the choir.”
Lee thought, 'Now, to exit the conversation.' He commented, “Thanks for the talk, but I better get back to the game.”
Lee left the room.
After the door closed behind Lee, Jayne turned to Mal, as he stated, “He doesn't look like much, captain. Or, should I start calling you, chief?”
Mal turned to Jayne, as he explained, “Either way is fine. Though, the reason Lee doesn't look like much is because Lee is physically ill. When I gripped his hand, and arm, just now, there was less tissue than should have been there. Also, his cheek bones are slightly more exposed on his face than they should be. Also, the way his clothes hang off of him shows that his pelvic bones are slightly exposed. He is very sick. He maybe dying. And I think he knows it.”
Jayne commented, “It sounds like Lee has no luck at all.”
Mal said, “I agree.”
The two men then turned around, left the men's restroom, and head down the hallway, to carry out their duties, as members of the security team for the casino.
(_)
A minute later, Lee returned to the game room, and sat down in his chair.
River and Faye were already there, in their seats. Lee noticed that someone had already refilled their glasses. With River and his lemonade, and Faye's soda.
For the next half an hour, three adults only focused on the game, with Lee gaining about a hundred thousand in chips, putting him currently at a million, seventy thousand.
Lee had just won the last hand.
Then, as Faye shuffled the deck of cards, to give River and Lee their next hand, River spoke in chinese, “I have a question for you, Lee.”
Lee thought, 'Oh damn. River has just changed the game. And I am going to have to play along, and reveal my talents, to keep her happy.” He then saw River grin. Lee mentally added, 'Yea. River, I know you are reading my thoughts.'
Lee calmly inquired, in chinese. “What is your question?”
River answered, “I was wondering what your opinion was of the communist, Mao Tse-tung, was?”
Lee stated, “He was a brutal tyrant. Why do you ask?”
River commented, “Interesting. I was taught that Mao brought meaningful reforms to China that made it an economic power in the world.”
Lee explained, “Actually, it is more of the reverse. Mao only allowed those chinese, whom were totally loyal to him, to have food, and eat. He is responsible for overseeing the deaths of tens of millions of people. The reforms you are talking about happened after his death.”
“These reforms including instituting the concept of the, iron rice bowl. Cradle to grave policies on jobs and services. This was later changed in the mid to late nineteen nineties.'
“These reforms ran counter to Mao's personal beliefs. Though, as those reforms bore fruit, given the cult of personality the party leaders surrounded Mao with, the party leaders created propaganda that falsely claimed that the reforms were from Mao's teachings.”
River responded, “Thank you. That also answers some other questions I have.”
Lee stated, in english, “You're welcome. Though, Mao was correct in one statement. All power does flow through the barrel of a gun.”
River shrugged, as she replied, “Perhaps.”
(_)
In the casino restaurant, among the customers, eight women in the two window booths were watching as the poker game, as it took a strange turn.
Shenhua was translating for them.
Benny asked, “Where did Lee learn Chinese?”
Janet commented, “I don't know. But, at this point, I think there is obvious that there is more to him, than he lets on. He may not be the writer. But, he is not the idiot that he pretends to me.”
Eda said, “Yea. He would make one hell of a spy.”
Yolanda stated, “Yes. He does know how to keep a secret.” She thought, 'Or, secrets.'
Dutch said, “Given all that has happened today, I am not surprised that he knows chinese.” She mentally added, 'And Lee has a firm grasp of Mao.'
Shenhua complimented, “And his grasp of my native language is pretty good.”
Dutch thought, 'Yes. And for once, I am glad you are here, Shenhua. I know Chinese, but I would rather those outside my family did not know that. It would raise too many questions.'
Janet suggested, “It would be a wise idea to find out where he learned to speak that language, and what other secrets he has.”
Shenhua agreed, “Yes. It would be a good idea to learn where he gained such a wonderful skill.” She thought, 'And I want to know why he is speaking my own Taiwanese dialectic of my own language. Also, he seems to share my people's dislike for communism.'
Lotton commented, “That is easier said, than done. If he loses, Revy might kill him. Either he will disappear, or be in traction. If he wins, it would be belligerent for us to ask him questions, given he just won a million dollars for our friends, in a game he did not want to play in the first place.”
Sawyer cracked a grin, as she said, “Well... When you put it that way. We will be gentle.”
All eight women then began laughing, for a few seconds.
(_)
In the gaming floor, Revy, Rock, and Chang were sitting at a table, on the gaming floor, as they watch poker game.
The three adults sat beside each other. Rock sat in the middle. Chang sat to Rock's left side. And Revy sat to Rock's right side.
Each of them had a bottle of beer sitting in front of them, at their table.
Chang was translating what River and Lee were saying.
While Chang did so, he thought, 'Lee's dialect is very similar to Shenhua's. I need to find out why this is the case. Later on. When the game is over. And I have more time to look into Lee's background, and history. Also, it would likely help to review his time in my casinos. And not just at this poker game. I have a feeling he has more important secrets, than humor and language skills.'
As Chang took a quick break in his translation, Revy commented, “Thank you, Chang. And Lee is right. All power does flow through the barrel of a gun.”
Rock said, “That depends on how you define what power is.”
Revy replied, “It figures you would say that.”
Chang grin, as watching to two loves debate with each other. But, Chang did not feel like an argument. So, Chang commented, “You are both right. And let us leave it at that.”
Rock replied, “I agree.”
Revy said, “I can go along with that.”
(_)
Nearby, at the penny slot machines, another group of women were having fun. Aeryn, Violin, Akira, Natsuru, and Ranma were sitting at individual slot machines, playing them, as they drink bottles of beer.
Meanwhile Annie was on duty, so she just stood by them, instead of joining on her friends' fun.
Though, all six women were having a great time as they also watch the poker game, thanks to the translator microbes in her brain, Aeryn translated what the two players said, into english. A language that Aeryn learned the old fashioned way, decades ago.
Ranma commented, “Lee is full of surprises...” Ranma then realized what she said. She turned to Annie, as she commented, “Sorry, Annie. I am not trying to make a joke.”
Annie turned to Ranma, as she shrugged. She responded, “I know. And you are right. Lee is clearly more the foolhardy, than the fool... I might want to meet him, sometime. But, not today. Playing River, at such high stakes against him, is more than enough stress for anyone.”
Ranma said, “I fully agree.”
(_)
In the poker room, River said, in spanish, “I have another question?
Lee said, in spanish, “And what are you interested in, this time?”
River inquired, “What is you opinion of Che Guevara?”
Lee answered, “I do not have much to say about him, other than, unlike others, it is report that he faced death with courage and humility, that was lacking in many of his contemporaries. In the end, he stated that those whom were about to kill him, that they were only killing a man.”
River commented, “That is an interesting statement to make when one faces death.”
Lee agreed, “That it is.”
(_)
On the gaming floor, Chang and Rock both used their limited knowledge of spanish to partly translate what the two are talking about, for each other, and Revy.
Nearby, at the penny slot machines, Aeryn translates for her group.
(_)
Meanwhile, in the restaurant, Sawyer and Dutch translated the spanish, into english, for their group.
Benny asked, “Where did you two learn spanish from?”
Dutch answered, “I took a course, while back on her island. I figured it won't hurt.”
Sawyer stated, “I grew up in Texas. And a mexican family I know, that I was friends with, taught me.”
Benny commented, “Learn something new, every day.”
(_)
Back in the poker room, River said, in japanese, “I also would like to talk to you about Japan.”
Lee complained, in english, “This game is getting old. And we should to go back to playing poker.” He mentally added, 'I have a good idea that you will want to talk about communism dealing with Japan, in japanese. And we are not going to talk about that group, and that old enemy of the state man, in public, with an audience.'
River shrugged, as she said, in english, “I see your point.”
Lee and River then picked up their cards, and looked at them.
Lee saw that he had a pair of fives.
Since Lee won the last hand, he place the first bet, for the current hand. He threw in two chips, as he stated, in english, “Let's start simple. With twenty thousand.”
River tossed in two chips, as she said, “I will see you bet.”
The two then continued their game.
In the end, Lee won that hand. But, River won the next two hands.
(_)
In the restaurant, Benny and Janet translated the japanese to english.
Yolanda inquired, “Where did you to learn japanese?”
Benny answered, “Rock taught us.”
Janet finished for her spouse, “We need something to pass the time, on our island. Also, Rock taught Dutch, Revy, and the girls how to speak, read, and write japanese.”
Yolanda verbally mused, “Interesting.” Yolanda then thought about the implications of Benny, Janet, and Dutch's comments. And on the possibilities of what else they and their family learned while on their tropical island.
(_)
Near the slot machines, on the gaming floor, Akira, Natsuru, Ranma, and Violin, all knew japanese. Aeryn's translator microbes translated for her. And Annie had to force to use to understand what River was asking.
Violin said, “I guess Lee got tired of this game.”
Aeryn stated, “Yes. He clearly wants to focus on the game instead.”
Akira pointed out, “The only likely reason Lee would play this language game was to keep River happy.”
Natsuru commented, “That is a good reason to play along.”
Ranma said, “Though, I think it is a good guess that River knew Lee's language skills from reading his mind. Though, she is clearly not taking advantage of using her telepathy to win the game. I do not know how she can be so selective in what she reads in a persons mind.
Annie explained, “For telepaths, being in a room with people, it like listening to conversations in the background. A telepath can tune out most of it. But, not all of it. And these thoughts are usually only surface thoughts. Still, it is clear that River is not using her abilities to cheat at play cards. I admired her for developing a sense of honor and fair play.”
Ranma agreed, “Yes. She is clearly being honorable in the game.”
Aeryn stated, “That is a good trait to have.”
Akira commented, “And given what we told Lee, I am sure he realizes that River is playing fair.”
Natsuru agreed, “True. And Lee always preferred to play fair, as well.”
Violin commented, “Then, this game is more interesting than we thought it would be.”
(_)
At their table, Chang was pleasantly surprised that, instead of Rock, Revy was the one translating the japanese for him.
As soon as Revy finished, Chang complimented, “Nice job, Revy. I take it that Rock taught you.”
Revy smiled, as she said, “Yea. Rock is a good teacher.”
Rock grinned as well, while she shrugged. She turned to Revy, as she commented, “You were a surprisingly patient student.”
Revy turned to Rock, as she happily replied, “Thank you, Rock.”
Chang commented, “Yes. I have found Revy here to be an excellent student. I learned this when I taught her how to fight with two pistols.” He mentally added, 'Revy can be very patient when she wants to be. Like, when she wanted me to teach her the proper ways to use guns, and fight. She just prefers to be impatient in her day to day life.'
Revy stated, “I have always found that it easy to learn, when I am interesting in something. It is unfortunate, that those around me, when I was kid, thought it would be better, if I suffered.”
Chang said, “Mores the pity.”
(_)
Elsewhere, on the game floor, Pedro was sitting at his table, with some of his officers, as he had heard the entire multilingual conversation. He grimly thought, 'I may not know chinese. But, I do know spanish. And I know a little japanese. Now, why would Lee hide the fact that he knows spanish from me, and other people?...'
'Of course. Because everyone when everyone here meets him. They would just assume he is a dumb american. Though, I have long since learned that he is anything but that. And those people would speak spanish in front of him, thinking he would not understand them. And in doing so, that would give him an edge.'
'I might have done the same thing in his position. Still, where did he learn those languages from? And so quickly? I am fairly sure he did not know those languages when he first got here. So, where, and when, did he learn them? And how did he do it so quickly? To be that fluent in in each of those languages requires several months, to years, of learning and experience. Where did he find the time to do all this?'
'I will have to find out the answers to my questions, at our next evening meeting. And I get a feeling that he will have one hell of answer.'
(_)
Over the next forty five minutes, in the penthouse poker room, River and Lee played normally, at their game of poker room.
Currently, there was already fifty thousand in the pot, from Lee's chips. And another fifty thousand, from River's chips.
River then pushed over half her chips, as she stated, “I will raise you five hundred thousand.”
Without batting an eye, Lee lowered his cards onto the table, face down, as he calmly stated, “I fold.”
Lee's actions took River by surprise. River asked, in a slightly stunned tone of voice, “Huh?”
Lee looked at River, as he explained, “River, this isn't a movie. If you want your want this money, you are going to have to work at it.”
From the corner of his right eye, Lee saw Faye snicker.
Lee thought, 'Yea, Faye. You would find this funny. Considering you understand the gambling mentality. Still, it is better to lose fifty thousand in one hand, than risk losing five hundred thousand. I can regain that in the next half hour, without a problem.'
River shrugged, as she casually replied, “Fine.” She handed Faye her cards. After which, she collected her winnings.
Faye also picked up Lee's cards, as she then began to reshuffle the deck, for the next hand.
(_)
In the casino restaurant, Dutch stated, “That man is no fool.”
The other seven women, with her, nodded, or shrugged, in agreement.
(_)
At the slot machines, the six women group all snickered.
Akira complimented, “I will say this. Lee knows better than to be cliche.”
Annie said, “And River should know better than to take such a stupid risk.”
Aeryn pointed out, “It is only a risk, if she was bluffing.”
Natsuru agreed, “That is a good point.”
(_)
At a nearby table, Pedro was impressed with Lee folding his hand, as such a large bet. Though, Pedro thought, with concern, 'Smart play, Lee. River is too intelligent to call that large a bluff. Because, she might not be bluffing. And that would be a major hit to you reserves. We both know the stakes are to high for you, to roll the dice on you life, like that. If River loses, she has nothing really to fear. But, if you lose, you likely lose your life. If you are lucky.'
(_)
At another table, Chang commented, “Lee is smarter than he looks.”
Revy stated, “I don't understand this. All Lee has been doing is placing small bets. He hasn't gone for the big bets. The fun bets.”
Chang explained, “The reason being, Revy, is that Lee probably feels your proverbial vices, that you call your hands, around his balls. And he knows if he screws up, you are going to squeeze, hard”
Revy conceded, “You have a point there.”
Rock said, “Lee is clearly playing the long game. He knows what he is doing. He plans to win his victory by inches. Instead of risking a jump, and falling on his face. Considering it is our money he is gambling with, we should be happy he is winning this way.”
Revy agreed, “You are right about that. Though, I thought Lee would be a bit more of a risk taker.”
Chang smirked, “Well, let us be honest. He was pressed into playing a poker game by a violent woman, and a casino owner. Us. Against someone he knows is a telepathic genius, with money that is not his own. A lot of money. He knows he is already being forced to take a big risk, he is not going to push his luck.”
Rock asked, “Perhaps. Still, I was wondering. How experienced is River with poker?”
Chang answered, “Not as much as I apparently thought she was. I admit this was an oversight on my part. Though, now that I think about it, not many people would play poker with her. Except for Annie, Arcee, Ed, and myself.”
Rock replied, “That must have made for an interesting game.”
Chang stated, “Oh yea. Especially, when they cheated. Three of them can count cards for up to eight decks at once. And Annie used the force. I just shuffled, and dealt the cards, while having a front row seat to the entertainment.”
Rock requested, “You will have to tell us about it sometime.”
Revy commented, with interest in her tone of voice, “Oh yes. I would like to hear about that, as well.”
Chang said, “I will. But, not today.”
Revy inquired, “Okay. So, is that how you got Annie to work for you?”
Chang explained, “Partly. After those bikini parties, and what happened in that final story, Annie, River, and Ed, became good friends. And all three have a decent relationship with Arcee. It is more of a technological genius club for those four. So, having River help with convincing Annie to take my job offer got my foot in the door. The rest is the sizable, monthly salary I am paying her. And it is in gold and treasure. She insisted on it not being cash.”
Rock complimented, “Annie was also smart.”
Revy said, “I agree.”
Chang stated, “I know. And I don't blame her either for that.” He thought, 'Considering that I pay my staff in similar ways, either once, or twice, a month. Though, not at the amounts I am paying Annie, every month.'
Revy commented, “Still, those must be sizable payments.”
Chang answered, “They are. But, they are worth it.” He smirked, towards Rock and Revy, as he continued, “How many people in the multiverse can claim to have gray force using master on retainer?”
Revy let out a small chuckle. She then stated, “Good point. Still, if River was using her telepathy, this game would be over.”
Chang mentioned, “River like challenges. She may not be using her telepathy because she honestly wants to know which one of them is the better player... And there is also the fact that she did not want to play this game in the first place.”
Rock inquired, with interest in her tone of voice, “That is interesting. So, how did you get her to do it?”
Chang stated, “I told her that either she, or Annie, would be playing, Lee.”
Revy commented, “Siccing Vader on Lee. Even I'd say that would be mean.”
Rock said, “You know. If it was Annie, and Lee found out that she was once Vader. And he was being forced to face her, for an extended period of time. He might try to make a run for it.”
Revy said, “It that case. I wouldn't hold it against him. In his place, I would likely do that say.”
Chang conceded, “Neither would I. Though, I would have him brought back to play. I would like to see what two precognitive psychics, playing against each, other would be like.”
Rock commented, “Actually, that might backfire. It would get to the point that both players would start folding before the first bet is even placed.”
Chang thought about what Rock said for a few seconds. He then agreed, “That is a good point.”
All three of them then turned back to watching the nearby TV, in front of them, that showed the video and audio feeds of the poker game.
(_)
The poker game continued normally, for a few more hours, until it was six PM, and time for dinner.
By then, River was up by a hundred of fifty thousand, making her total being on million, one hundred and ten thousand in chips.
Just like before, a waitress came and took their orders, fifteen minutes beforehand, a
While Lee and River continued to have some lemonade, Faye drank her soda.
River had a cobb salad, with ranch dressing.
Faye had a steak and potato.
Lee had a club sandwich and potato chips, which he found to be tasty.
When dinner came, by a food car, pushed by a female bellhop, in uniform. Some of Chang's security members. Women in black suits. Came into the poker room.
They turned on the yellow ceiling lights. And they set the lighting to a comfortable setting.
Also, the women pulls the rope, from the sides of the outer wall of windows, to pull the red velvet curtains, from both sides of the room, closed. To where the curtains met each other, in the center of the outer wall, with them overlapping by around six inches, to prevent any gaps through the curtains.
By closing the curtains, this allowed the occupants in the room to have some privacy, from the outside, before night fully overtook the island.
When the black suited women was finished, they left the room, just as the female bellhop served River, Faye, and Lee, their plates of food, and drinks.
The bellhop then joined the other women, as she turned around, and pushed her cart out of the room, and down the hallway, to the back elevator.
After River, Faye, and Lee, finished their dinner, another bellhop with a cart, collected their plates, and left. With the three occupants resuming their poker game, at six thirty PM.
Though, things started to take a turn for the worse for Lee, as he kept losing hand after hand.
While Lee kept the bets small. They slowly added up over time.
An hour and a half after dinner was over, at Eight PM, the first ten minute break was called, by a black suited security guard stopping by to inform them. With all three adults heading out of the room.
Lee headed for the men's restroom.
(_)
Five minutes later, at eight five PM, Lee finished in using the restroom, and he had just washed and dried his hands.
He then look at himself, again, in the large men's restroom mirror, above the sinks.
Lee held his hands on the top sides of the sink he was standing over, as he leaned towards the mirror. Though, he did not touch the mirror.
Lee thought, 'The cards just have no been with me, for the last few hours. I am down to just over two hundred thousand, and I do not know why? I have been doing everything right. But, something is off.'
'Is Faye helping River. Possible, but I am not seeing anything. Though, I have no been looking that closely at Faye's hands.'
'Also, why did River choose to talk to me in those three other languages?... Does she know about the time loop?... That could cause me trouble for me down the line. But, there is nothing I can do about it.'
'Still, I did have to cut her off, when she started using japanese. If Revy and the other women knew that I am fluent in japanese, they would quickly put two and two together, that I am the writer.'
'Yet. How could River know this? I believe her telepathy is passive, and deals with mostly surface scans. I know I have not thought about my language skills, nor the time loop, even once in her presence... Wait a minute... The woman's laugh behind the wall of Chang's office, yesterday. River was reading my mind... Is that possible... Yes. She powers work on proximity, not line of sight.'
'What was I think about, then?... Damn my memory is not perfect... That is why I write stuff down!... Though, I cannot risk doing that in this situation I am in, since coming to the island. Someone could my break into my room, search my stuff, and find anything that I may have written down.'
'Though, not that I think about what I was doing and thinking yesterday, in Chang's office. River likely knows that I know that Rock use to be a man. And that Chang can turn into a woman.'
'But, I did not think about the time loop, nor my language skills, nor that I am the writer that everyone is looking for. Though, she probably knows about all three, by now. Yet, I already planned for that. I just keep her happy, and there should not be any problems with her.'
'She likes to keep secrets, there is no reason she will not keep my secrets as long as I amuse her. Which, is what I have been doing. And my plan seems to be working.'
'Still, that does not answer the question of how she learned all this in the first place? Has she been able to become a skilled deep level telepath, to the point I could not tell her looking into my mind?... No... Everything I read about telepathy states that a deep level scan, like that, would be felt by the person having their mind scanned.'
'It is possible she could have been tailing me yesterday. Still, I did not think about my language skills, then.... Something here does not add up... But, given this is River I am thinking about, that is par for course with her...'
'Though, none of this matters, right now. What matters is winning the game, while keeping River happy. I have to clear my mind of all other things, or River will likely learn about those things, as well.'
'And I have to take a deep breath, let it out, and get back to the poker room, before I am late.'
Lee took a slow deep breath. He then slowly let it out, as he cleared his mind. After which, Lee leaned back up straight, and let go of the sink, with both his hands. He then turned, to his left, from the mirror, and exited the restroom, thought the hallway door.
As Lee made it into the hallway, he turned, and started walking down the hallway, towards the poker. Though, a few seconds later, Lee saw one of the asian female women, in a black business suit approach him, from in front of him, down the hallway.
The woman was holding out a cellphone.
As the woman came to within ten feet of Lee. Lee came to a stop. With the women stopping a few feet from him.
The two adults then looked at each other, as the woman calmly said, in english, “You have a phone call.” She then held out her right hand, she has been holding an open cellphone with.
Lee took the cellphone, while being careful not to close, it nor, press any of the button on it. When he has the cellphone in his right hand, he looked up at the women. He politely replied, “Thank you.”
The woman did not response. She just turned walked away.
While Lee watched the woman walk away, and turned the corner, he thought, T'hat was rude. Though, I do not have time to worry about the small stuff. Though, I must remember that this woman, and the other chinese women here, have been given the vat process, and the super-soldier serum. And they have enhanced senses, such as hearing, like Revy, and her group has. So, I must watch was I say.'
Lee then placed the phone to his ear, as he greeted, “Hello.”
Lee then heard a familiar male voice, on the other end of the wireless communications, say said, “Hey buddy. Long time, no see.”
Lee inquired, “Where have you been, Sam?”
Sam answered, “Busy. But, I got back just in time to watch you in your million dollar poker game.”
Lee questioned, “Good. So, how did you get them to contact me?”
Sam commented, “Cash goes a long way.”
Lee replied, “True. Where are you now, Sam?”
Sam stated, in a firm tone of voice, “Downstairs, at the bar, having a drink, while I watch you make a fool of yourself.”
Lee defended himself, “I think I have shown myself well in this game.”
Sam responded, with concern in his tone of voice, “For anyone else. Sure. But, from playing you for so long, I can tell that you are scared out your mind. What is it about that redheaded woman that terrifies you?”
Lee answered, “Too long a list to get into. But, the short version is that she is smarter, crazier, and more dangerous than Revy.”
Sam admitted, “Okay. That is scary. But, ask yourself this question. Right after the talent contest, you told me that you were dying of cancer. What could this woman do to you that is a worse death than that?”
Lee thought about Sam's comments for a few seconds. He then conceded, “You may have a point there.”
Sam stated, “Exactly. Show some courage. You have nothing to lose by doing so. And good luck man. Also, I don't think anyone else had caught on yet, but take a closer look at the way the dealer is dealing the cards. If you do, you will see what I mean.”
Lee replied, “Thanks. And I will.”
Lee closed the cellphone, and he set cellphone on a nearby table in the hallway, as he walked towards the game room.
(_)
Five minutes later, all three adults had returned to the poker room. After they sat at their places, Faye shuffled the deck, and dealt a new hand of cards, as Lee and River resumed their game.
When Faye finished dealing the cards, both players looked at their cards.
Lee maintained his poker mask, as he saw that again, he had nothing.
Since River won the last round, before they took their break, it was River's turn to place the bet.
River threw in one chip, as she said, “I will start the ten thousand.”
Lee threw a chip in, as he replied, “I will see that ten thousand.”
Both players traded in three cards.
Lee watched as Faye handed him his three cards first, from the top of the deck. Lee quickly looked at them, as he saw that he still had nothing.
Lee then looked back down, to his right side, as he watched Faye dealt out River's next three cards. And he saw Faye pull the first card, from the bottom of the deck.
Lee thought, 'Damn! Sam was right. Faye is cheating! Considering that was a casino phone, with the line likely being monitored, he could not tell me outright. But, his warning was close enough.'
Lee then became very angry, with him barely able to maintain his poker face, as he continued his thoughts, 'That bitch! How does she toy with my life with so little disregard to my safety. Even Revy, and Chang were discreet in their threats against me. On the other hand, this woman is doing this on camera, and in public.'
(_)
As Faye tossed River her third card, suddenly, the card was nailed to the table by another card, which was standing on its edge. The top card had been embedded into both the red cloth, and the wooden table, under the other card.
From the angle of the card, to Faye's position at the table, Faye saw that the card that was standing on its side was the Jack of Diamonds.
Faye looked over at Lee, and she saw he had only four cards in his hand, where five cards should be.
Faye thought, 'Lee actually threw his card line a knife, into the table. I thought that card tricks like that were a myth.'
(_)
On the gaming floor, everyone was surprised and shocked at what Lee had just done.
Revy and Rock watched in disbelief, at what they had just seen on the video screen.
Meanwhile, Chang was impressed with what Lee has just done with his card. He grinned, as he thought, 'Now, that takes talent.'
Revy turned to Rock, as she asked, in slight disbelief, “Rock, when did Lee become a badass?”
Rock looked at Revy, as she responded, “I don't know. But, where the hell did Lee learn to do that?”
Chang complimented, “Well, wherever he learned to do that, it is one hell of card trick.” He mentally added, 'Yesterday, after Lee was patted down. After he, Revy and Rock, were in the elevator. The guards there called me. They informed me that Lee had a deck of cards with him. A deck he had when I met him. No wonder he didn't complain about the pat down. He knew that my guards would not think of a deck of cards as a weapon. I will have to inform them otherwise, later.'
(_)
At that moment, in the poker room, Faye continued to look at Lee. She then noticed Lee lips had curled into a feral, unhinged smile.
And at the distance Faye was at, with her enhanced sight, she could see Lee's eyes, though his shade. And those eyes promised murder for her.
Then, for a couple of seconds, Lee let out a very audible growl, that while the microphones in the room did not pick up, Faye's enhanced hearing did.
Faye thought, 'Oh crap. He caught me cheating, and he is pissed.'
Lee demanded, in a dangerous, low tone of voice, “I want a new dealer, and a new deck of cards. And I want it, now.”
River turned to Faye, as she stated, “I agree with Lee. We need a new deck, and a new dealer.”
Lee looked over at River, as he realized she had just read his mind. Lee also realized, that given the situation he was in, he was more upset, than he could afford himself to be. So, he immediately forced himself to come down.
(_)
On the gaming floor, Chang had heard both Lee and River's requests. He pulled out his cellphone, and he dialed a number. A second later, after the other end picked up, he said, to his subordinate on the other end, “Make it happen. Give them a new dealer, and a new deck. And kill the video-audio feed, until the change over happens.'
Chang then hung up. As he put away his cellphone, he thought, 'We need to keep this game moving. Before this delay causing problems on the gaming floor. Though, I am lucky that both Lee and River are professional enough to not openly accused Faye of cheating. Which I had Faye do. If they did, I would have to deal with a lot of angry customers.'
Chang turned to look at Revy, whom was still looking at the TV, with Rock. Chang continued his thoughts, 'With Revy in the front of the line. And even without her cutlasses, she can still be a very dangerous would to deal with.'
A few seconds later, the video and audio feed going from the TVs in the casino gaming floor, were cut off. With the TVs left on, showing silent, blank screens.
(_)
Inside the poker room, Lee heard a female voice from behind him, near the door, say, in english, “The cameras, and microphones, are turned off for the moment. And Chang stated that he wanted you, and the card deck, replaced.”
Faye looked over at the woman by the door, as she nodded. She then turned to the two players, as she said, “Well, see you two, later.” She the got up want walked towards the door.
Lee turned to looked at Faye, and the chinese woman in a business suit, as he barked, “No. This is not just going to be a trade out, without so much as an apology. This is low. Having a crooked dealer. It is not like I have enough problems to deal with. If I go down because of this dealer, I will not go down alone. I will make damn sure that Revy knows why, and who to blame. Remember, this is her money. Not mine.”
Faye turned to looked at Lee, as she thought, 'Oh crap. He is right.'
Lee continued, “You would have to be borderline suicidal to want do so open a con like that, against a violent lunatic, like Revy.”
Meanwhile, River had been paying attention to the conversation. She turned to Faye, as she stated, “Lee is right. It was unwise.”
Lee turned to River, as he stated, “How could you not say anything?”
River looked over at Lee, as she answered, “How would I do so without risking a riot downstairs?”
Lee was silent for a few seconds. He then conceded, “Good point. You are right. You are just lucky that my friend caught this on camera.”
River smiled, “I agree. It is fortunate for all of us.”
Lee then turned back around to see the other two women were gone. He mentally cursed, 'Cowards.'
River firmly stated, “That, they might be. But, I am not. Do you want divide up our chips, back to even numbers?”
Lee turned to face River. He sighed. He then firmly answered, “No. It will cause too many questions to be asked. And don't you dare let me win. That would be even worse. We will just play as is.”
River complimented, “You are better person than you admit to yourself.”
Lee said, “Thank you.”
A minute later, Lee heard a female voice, from behind him say, in english, “I hope I did not take too long. Getting up here, from the gaming floor, takes a few minutes.”
Lee turned around, to see a pretty, athletic, twenty something, pale skinned woman, with a full head of black hair, which was cut short, close to the neckline. She wore a sharp, black business suit, and black dress shoes.
As the woman walked towards them, Lee saw she was also slightly above average height for a woman.
Lee kept his eyes on her the entire time, as she walked up to the table, and she sat down in Faye chair.
The woman requested, “Can I please have your cards?”
River and Lee handed the woman their cards.
The woman said, “Thank you.”
The woman then neatly stacked the cards together, and set the stack of cards, to her far right side, on the table.
Next, she pulled out a deck of cards from an interior coat pocket. She opened the cardboard box the cards were in, and she set that deck onto the table, face down. With her pocketing the box, back where she has been carrying her cards, in interior coat pocket.
Lee saw that the back of the cards were a different pattern than the cards Faye had.
Lee thought, 'Good. There is no chance the two stacks of cards can be mixed up.'
River commented, “I agree.”
The looked between Lee and River. The woman said, in a kind tone of voice, “I am, Jetta Black. And I will be your dealer now. The cameras with be back on, any second.”
Lee did not even blink an eye in response. Though, inwardly, he was shocked, as he thought, 'Jet?! As in Faye friend? The big guy? When did this happen?!... I guess he took Spike up on her offer.'
Lee then noticed that Jetta was completely human, as he continued his thoughts, 'She no longer has her cybernetic left arm, nor implant under her right eye.'
Lee turned to River. River was looking at him. She said, “Long story.”
Lee thought, 'Then, it is a question for another time.'
River just nodded once in agreement.
As Jetta began to shuffle her deck of cards, she stated, “Since the last hand was interrupted. And with only two chips on the table. We will just divided those to chips, and carry on as if the previous hand never happened.”
Lee and River both took a chip from the pot.
Jetta then finished shuffling her cards.
While dealing five cards to each player, Jetta asked, “Now, which one of you will place the first bet.”
Lee looked over at River, as he stated, “Ladies first.”
River smiled at Lee, in response.
Jetta said, “Then, River it is. And I so do admire keeping company with a gentleman.”
Lee turned to Jetta, as he responded, “Thank you.”
Jetta slightly nodded, as she replied, “You're welcome.”
Lee then turned to his cards, as he picked them up. He saw that he has the beginnings of a straight.
Lee thought, 'This is not much. But, I can work with it.'
River looked at her cards. She bet three chips.
Lee quickly matched River's three chips.
(_)
On the gaming floor, at their table, Change, Rock, and Revy watched the TV and speakers come back, to show the poker room, on the penthouse level, just before Jetta introduced herself.
Revy asked, “What just happened?”
Chang stated, “One of my employees became a little too ambitious, in her attempts to impress me.” He mentally added, 'I will leave out the fact that I will not punishe her. She was only following my orders. And instead, I will reward her loyalty.'
Revy turned to Chang, as she accused, “She helped River win all those chips. How dare you, Chang?”
Chang looked over at Revy and Rock, as he thought, 'Oh well. It looks like Revy caught me. Though, there is not much she can do at this point.' He shrugged, as he said, “I could not help myself.”
By then, Rock had turned to look at Chang, as well. Though, Rock did not say anything.
Revy stated, “Just be happy that even I can tell this game is not over. Or, I would be very unhappy with you, right now.”
Rock said, “Yes. The game is not over, yet. But, no more tricks, Chang.”
Chang replied, “There won't be.”
Revy said, “Good.”
(_)
In the poker room, with Lee no longer having to deal with crooked dealer, he started slowing gaining back his holdings.
Out of the next twenty hands, over the next hour, he won fifteen of those hands.
They were all small bets, of less than a hundred thousand. But, he was back up to nine hundred thousand, in no time.
Over the next two and a half hours, Lee's fortunes took a turned for the better, as he continued to climb in his winning.
And it was not because of any large bets. Lee was just playing the hands he was dealt better than River was doing.
As time went on, while Lee was just slowly gaining in chips, Lee noticed a flaw in River playing style. A flaw he was able to clear his mind about, while still using the flaw to his advantage.
That flaw being, when River folded, she usually did so, after the cards were replaced, with some of her money already in the pot. Meanwhile, Lee usually folded, at the beginning of the hand, before he putting money into the pot.
Due to this glaring error, and Lee's frugal nature in betting, Lee was inching his way to victory.
Until finally, River was left with only four chips.
Jetta reshuffled the cards, and dealt both of them their hands.
Since Lee won the last hand, it was his turned. He looked at River, as he thought, 'River, I know you are reading my mind. I could out bid you in the betting pool, and finally beat you that way. But, I want to win this in a fair, polite manner. So, let us play this hand out.'
Lee saw River just nod her eyes, in response.
Both player looked at their cards.
Lee saw he had three aces. He tossed one chip in, as he said, “I will start this hand with ten thousand.”
River tossed in her fourth to last chip, as she replied, “I will see that ten thousand.”
River discarded three cards, Lee discarded two cards.
After Jetta replaced all discards cards, Lee looked at his two knew cards. He saw that he now had four aces.
Lee tossed in three chips, as he stated, “I raise you thirty thousand.”
River tossed in her last three remaining chips, as she said, “I call.”
Both player revealed their cards.
River had a full house, of two queens, and three kings. But, Lee's four aces beat River's full house.
Jetta looked between at the two sets of cards, on the table. She turned turned to Lee, as she casually stated, “And with that, Lee is the winner.”
Lee did not reach for the chips in the pot. Instead, he slumped in his chair, as he let out a deep breath in relief. He thought, with relief, 'I am going to live.'
River giggled at little, from Lee's thoughts.
Lee looked over at River, as he reached into one of his pants pockets. He pulled out a single U.S. one dollar bill, and placed the dollar passed the betting pot, and on River's side of the table.
Lee stated, “I was taught to never leave a person completely busted at the poker table.”
River looked at Lee, as she smiled at him. She took the dollar, and pocketed. She then got up, and walked to her right, around the table, opposite to Jetta.
River came to a stop beside Lee, to Lee's left side. She leaned down, and whispered into Lee's left ear, “Thank you. And I will be seeing you later, Paul.”
Lee forced himself to not show any reaction to that name.
Lee then looked up, as he watched River leaned back up, casually walk behind him, and out of the room.
After River was gone, Jetta inquired, “What was that all about?”
Lee turned to the black haired woman, as he thought, 'Good. Jetta did not hear us.' He answered, “That girl loves her secrets.”
Jetta agreed, “Isn't that the truth.”
Lee inquired, “Do you have a cellphone on you?”
Jetta answered, “Yes.”
Lee requested, “Please, inform the valet service downstairs, to have my pink Cadillac ready at the front entrance. I will be down there in a minute.”
Jetta replied, “Sure.”
Lee complimented, “Thank you. I will see you, later. Also, you are a good dealer. I appreciate honesty, Jetta.”
Jetta replied, “Thank you. And have a pleasant night, Lee.”
Lee said, “You too.” He mentally added, 'I best get out of here, while the getting is good.'
Lee then got up. And he he briskly walked out of the room.
At the same time, Jetta pulled out her cellphone, as she dial the building extension number to the valet service.
As Lee entered the hallway, he did not see River anywhere.
Lee then realized, as he thought, 'Of course. Chang's apartment is up here. And she likely lives here. She probably ducked in home, because she did not want to have to deal with Revy's gloat. And I want to get out of here, for the same reasons.'
Lee then turned, and he started swiftly walking towards the door. As Lee walked, he glanced as his watch, to see that it was eleven forty seven PM.
Lee looked in front of him, while continuing to walk, as he thought, 'Nearly fourteen hours since this game started. And I am starting to feel it. I best get back to the Devil's Hotel, and get some sleep, before I am too tired to drive. I will celebrate tomorrow. Because, right now, I am to tired to celebrate my survival today.'
Just then, in front of him, Lee came up to a corner, and he watched as Revy and Rock turned the corner, and head right for him.
Lee did not react to them, as he continued walking toward them, and the nearby express elevator to the gaming floor.
Meanwhile, Revy was so ecstatic, and she ignored Lee, as she headed for passed him, towards the poker room. Rock followed behind.
As Lee passed by Rock, with neither of them stopping, Rock said, “Good job.”
Lee replied, “You're welcome. Enjoy your winnings.”
Lee then turned the corner, and he was out of sight of the two women.
A few seconds later, Lee made it to the elevator. He pressed the down arrow button. The doors opened. He walked inside. And the doors close. With the express elevator then heading down to the ground floor.
(_)
While Lee rode the elevator down, Revy, walked into the poker game room, with Rock right behind her.
Rock then watched as Revy rushes to the table. When she reached the table, she leaned over the table, and she hugged her chips. With a few chips splatting around her, along the table, and to the floor.
By then, Jetta had gotten up from her seat. She and Rock silently watched this happen.
(_)
Meanwhile, as Lee rode down the elevator, Lee realized he had never felt more satisfied in his life, than this very moment.
He came. He saw. He conquered the impossible. Now, it was time to leave.
As the doors to the elevator open to the ground floor, he walked passed the two guards, without even given them a glance.
When Lee came to the threshold between the elevator bay, and the gaming floor, he stopped and took stop of the situation in front of him.
Lee saw people going about their business gambling and having fun.
Lee then noticed the music that had just started playing, and he recognized the song as one of his all time favorite anime songs.
Due to his mental weariness, Lee let slip one word from his lips, in a soft tone of voice, “Velveteen.”
Lee then started walking through the gaming floor, towards the front entrance, with confidence in his steps.
No one bothered him, nor approach him, as he continued walking.
As Lee did so, Lee found that he felt as if he was in a movie. After a major success, and he was taking victory lap, in front of the crowd.
Lee then heard his name loudly chanted, over an over again, to his left side, “Lee! Lee! Lee!”
Lee continued walking, as he turned head, to his left. Lee saw it was a group of police officers, whom were chanting his name.
As Lee continued walking, he waved at them with his right hand.
In response, the officers cheered even louder.
Lee smirked, as he thought, 'Given the good will I have obviously built up right now, with the police here. I could probably kill someone and get away with it. Not that I am going to. Still, those happy cops are likely the only reason Chang does not approach me right now. Because, if he did, it would piss them off. So, my plan to call Pedro worked for both the front end of the situation, and the bad end... Nice... Now, to make my fashionable exit.'
Lee continued walking, as he dropped his right arm back to his side, while he turned his had back to face his front.
Lee soon made it to the front doors. When he noticed one of the female valets open the door for him, which he was heading for.
As Lee passed through the door, he saw that his pink car was waiting there for him, under the carport, with the car roof and windows up. Just like he had left his car.
The female valet by the car even had the driver's side door facing him, as the woman held it open for him.
As Lee walked up to the valet holding the door for him, he pulled out his ticket stub, and he handed it to the valet.
The valet looked at the stub, and then handed him the keys to his car.
Lee then got into the driver's side of his car, with the valet shutting the door behind him.
Next, Lee inserted the car key into the ignition, and started the car. After which, Lee set the car into drive. And finally, he drove out from under the large awning, away from the casino, and into the night, towards his home, at the Devil's Hotel. The rest he had so richly earned on his bed, in his suite.
Walk away.
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 1: “De La Plata Podrido.”
Chapter 16: “The Toast To The Hangover.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
It was the next morning, after the poker game, between Lee and River, at Daiyu Palace Casino.
The time was around nine AM, as Lee came down the elevator, and into the Devil's Hotel lobby.
Lee had already gotten up, got ready, shaved, took a shower, and dressed, to face the day.
In addition, Lee felt well rested, from the sleep he had, on his bed, in his suite, from the night before. But, Lee was still coming down from the stress events of the previous day. And he was in no mood to talk to anyone that day, whom was not a friendly face to him.
Lee wore his causal clothing, including pants, shirt, tennis shoes, his blue cloth jacket, his blue baseball cap, and his large glasses.
As Lee entered the front lobby, from the elevator bay, he came to a stop. he looked around for Sam, but he did not see Sam anywhere in the room.
Lee thought, 'Damn it. Where are you, Sam?'
Lee then noticed the twenty-one women, in Revy and Rock's group, sitting across the room, in their usual seats at those rings of couches.
The only two women Lee did not see from their group was Eda and Yolanda.
Lee thought, 'Eda and Yolanda are likely already getting set up for their burger van, right now. Though, I think I will avoid them today. I really do not want to talk to anyone right now, except for, Sam, whom is not here.'
Lee then saw the women from across the room, turn their heads, as they noticed him.
A second later, they all got up from their seats, and they started walking towards him.
While Lee did not show it on the outside, he thought, with worry, 'Oh crap. They were waiting for me. To confront me about what I did yesterday. And if I run, it will only make things worse. It looks like I am going to have to face the music alone. And I am in no mood to do so.'
All twenty-one women approached him at once, with Revy in front.
And as all of them came to a stop, ten feet in front of him, they all of them began demanding questions, from Lee, at the same time.
“How did you do that card throwing trick?”
“What is with the gray suit?”
“Why didn't you tell us that you are mister dance?”
“Are you and the Rats Nest bartender dating?”
“Where did you learn those languages from?”
“What is your connection to Chief Del Soto?”
There were other questions, as well.
Then, Revy continued look at Lee, as she held up her right hand, causing all the other women to be silent.
Revy lowed her right hand. She focused on Lee's eyes, as she calmly ordered, “Answer us, Lee.”
For Lee, given his current mood, which was a mix of mental tiredness, and borderline stress endued emotional burnout, the women had hit a raw nerve with their ungratefulness towards him.
Lee looked down at Revy. Their eyes met, and Revy saw a hardness, that she had never seen, in Lee's eyes before. He firmly, yet honestly stated, in an even tone of voice, “Revy, yesterday, you put me in one of the most stressful and dangerous situations of my entire life.”
“Yet. Not once did I truly complain. Not once did I truly try to run from the mess you put me into.”
“I did what you asked me to do. And against near impossible odds, I still won that million dollars for you, Revy. Though, instead of something as little as a, thank you, I got nothing. And the only rewards you think I should have for my hard work is you all badgering me with questions.”
“Given your ungratefulness toward my help in aiding you, as of right now, as far as I am concerned, you can go to hell.”
Lee then looked around, at the women by Revy, as he added, “You can all go to hell.”
Lee then turned, and stormed away from them, as he headed towards the hotel restaurant.
The women were so stunned by Lee forwardness towards them, that they did not replace. They just watch, as Lee walked a cross the room, and turned the corner, into the hallway that lead to the Devil's Hotel restaurant.
As Lee disappeared from side, the women turned to look at each other.
Lotton said, “I told you this was a bad idea.”
Benny suggested, “Should we follow him, and make him talk?”
Revy stated, “No. We can talk to him, later. After he calms down. And he is right. He won the million for me, and that is the important part.”
Rock said, “Still, someone show apologize to him. He does at least deserve that. And I will handle this. Considering I am the best at this.” She then walked toward the hotel restaurant, alone.
As Rock walked away, Janet stated, “Still, we can find out about Lee connection with Chief Del Soto, from the police department.”
Benny said, “True. But, that can wait a few days. After things cool down. Right now, if there is a connection between the Police Chief, and Lee. After what happened yesterday. The Police Chief will be on his guard. We need to wait a few days. And then look into this. After the Police Chief has lowered his guard, some.”
Dutch agreed, “That is a good point, Benny.”
Janet thought about her husband's suggested for a few seconds. She then replied, “I agreement.”
Benny mentioned, “Good. And to pass the time, until then, I was looking into tours around here, and they have a nice mainland tour that you all might be interested in.”
Janet replied, “Sounds like fun.”
Sawyer commented, “I have always been open to learning about new cultures.”
Dutch said, “So have I.” She thought, 'That is one of the reasons that brought me to Roanapur, Thailand, in the first place.'
Revy stated, “Well guys, have fun with that.” She thought, 'Tours have never been my things.'
Molly asked, “What type of tours are you talking about?”
Benny stated, “Ruins. That sort of thing. I can charter a bus for us in a couple of days.”
Molly said, “Sounds interesting.”
As the women had a conversation about the tour, Benny realized that most of the women present were interested taking the tour, with her. Except for Revy.
(_)
A minute later, Lee did not even buy breakfast, as he walked over, and he sat at his usual play at the bar counter. While he got comfortable in his seat, he forced himself to calm down.
Lee thought, with concern, and mild surprise, towards himself, 'Did I just tell Revy, and the others, to go to hell?... Oh... Just great... I just made things worse for myself.' He then lowered his head onto the counter.
A few seconds later, Lee heard Rock's female voice, right beside him, to his left, say, “Lee?”
Lee did not raise his head, as he asked, with defeat evident in his tone of voice, “Have you girls decided to kill me, now?”
Rock answered, “No. You are right. What we did was uncalled for. And thank you for winning that million.”
Lee raised his head. He turned to look at Rock, as he replied, “You're welcome.”
Rock admitted, “We should not have asked you those questions. You have secrets. Everyone does. And in that poker game, you were forced to reveal some of those secrets. Though, I must say you are a very talented man.”
Lee responded, “I am happy you appreciate that. And thank you.”
Rock inquired, “Are we good?”
Lee conceded, “We will be in an hour, or two. I just need some time to cool down.”
Rock replied, “That is perfectly understandable. Have a good breakfast.”
Lee stated, “You to, Rock.”
Rock then turned and left the room, as she went back to the lobby, to let her friends know that everything was all right.
Meanwhile, Lee got up from his seat, and walked to Emily, whom was manning the cash register, so he could pay for a breakfast buffet, and have a meal, with something to drink.
(_)
Ten minutes later, Lee was sitting at his usual place at the bar counter, eating his meal, and drinking a glass of orange juice.
A few minutes ago, Lee has seen Rock's group come into the room and pay for their meals. They had left him alone, as they went to the buffet, and then to their usual tables by the stage.
Just then, Lee noticed Emily walked up to him, from behind the bar counter. She was holding the wireless phone to the bar, in her right hand.
While, Emily came to a stop across from Lee, she offer him the phone, she said, in english, “Lee. It's Sam.”
At the mentioned of Sam's name, Lee immediately perked up. Lee quickly, through gentle took the phone. After which, he said, “Thank you, Emily.”
Emily replied, “You're welcome.”
Lee then held the phone to his right ear. He said, “Hi Sam. Where have you been? I missed you at breakfast.”
On the other end of the phone, Sam responded, “Sorry. I have just been busy. How about you?”
Lee coyly answered, “Oh this, and that.”
Sam said, “Anyway. Congratulations on winning that poker game. I will see you around eleven at the Rats Nest. I can play with you for the afternoon, but I have business this evening, and tonight.”
Lee replied, “Okay. See you there.” He mentally added, 'I would rather have him for the afternoon, than not at all. Though, I would like to know what his business is? Still, given our arrangement. We both realize that it is best neither us digs to deep into the background of the other.'
Lee pressed the end button to hang up. He then handed Emily the phone, as he said, “Thank you, again, Emily.”
Emily gently took the phone. After which, she replied, “You're welcome.” She then walked away from Lee, and back to the cash register, where a few customers were waiting for her.
(_)
Two hours later, Lee sat in the lobby waiting for eleven AM to roll by. That was when the Rats Nest would opened for the day, he would drive over to the bar, and meet with Sam, to enjoy the late morning and afternoon with his best friend.
Currently, Lee saws sitting in a chair, facing the lobby entrance, on the right side of the lobby, as he was playing a game of solitary, with his deck of cards.
Lee glance over at the women of Rock and Revy's group.
They were all in their circle of couches, on the left side of the lobby, across the room from where he was.
Lee thought, 'They haven't bother me once, since before breakfast. I appreciate what every Rock said to me. And it is clear they had a talk about me. And decided to leave me alone, for now.'
'Still, they look like they have nothing to do right now, as well... As such, it looks like this day is going to calm down. Which is good, because yesterday's poker game likely attracted the wrong kind of attention towards me, from all the wrong people. And I need to start planning for those eventualities...'
'My time is growing short, and I may have to come up with a plan b, because it looks like I am not going to be able to come up with a way to steal one of the girls' reality devices.'
'Still, I can enjoy the day. For right now.'
It was then that, Lee looked over at the lobby entrance to see River walk in the room, from the outside.
Lee mentally reflected, 'Thought to soon. Still, what is she doing here? Though, at least she was a polite loser last night. And I admire her for that.'
River was wearing a nice red short sleeved blouse, a long black skirt, and red tennis shoes. Her long red hair was pulled back in a ponytail, by a red scrunchy.
And Lee notice that River was carrying a small, rectangular, brown, wooden box, on with a yellow ribbon running down the front of the box.
While Lee looked over at River, River turned to look back at him. She did not miss a step, as she turned to walk towards him.
Lee thought, 'Oh hell. She has could to see me.'
In response to Lee's thoughts, River just cracked a smiled towards Lee.
From the corner of his eye, Lee saw that Revy and the others had taken notice of River's presence, but they stayed in their seats.
As River walked over where Lee was seating, Lee swiftly gathered his playing cards, and put them in their cardboard box. He then pocketed the box of playing cards.
A few seconds later, River reached Lee.
As River stood there, a few feet from Lee, she looked down at Lee, whom was sitting in his chair, looking back up at her.
Lee smiled, as he casually said, “Good morning, River.”
River returned Lee's grin, as she replied, “Good morning, Lee.”
Lee inquired, “So, what brings you here this morning? I hope Chang was not too upset with you losing a million dollars last night.”
River said, with a straight face, and in an innocent tone of voice, “No. He wasn't. That is what makeup sex is for.”
Lee heard the girls laughing at River's jokes, all away across the room.
Even Lee's poker face cracked, as he lightly chuckled, for a few seconds.
As Lee calmed down, River stated, “Anyway, given you did not get any reward yesterday, and you were one dollar poorer for you victory. I brought this here for you...” She handed him wooden box, as she said, “For your troubles, yesterday.”
Lee stood up. He then reached over, and took the box from River's hands. He responded, “Thank you, River.”
River replied, “You're welcome, Lee.” She then turned, and left back through the lobby entrance, from which she had just come from.
Lee watched through the windows, as River exited the entryway, and to the outside. She then turned and waved her right hand at him, before snipping back around and walking up to a black car waiting for her, by the curb to the hotel parking lot. River then got into the back seat, and the car drove way.
With River gone, Lee turned his eyes downward, at the brown, wooden, rectangular box in his hand. The lid was on the long ways face of the box.
Lee gently opened the lid of the brown, wooden box, to see a green bottle of alcohol inside. The label both the box, and the bottle, was easy to read.
Lee immediately knew what brand of alcohol is was, but he showed no outward sign that he did. He thought, 'This is one hell of a gift from River. Though, I need say something, or the curiosity of girls here will get the better of them.'
Lee openly stated, as he lied, “Ardbeg Providence? Never heard of this label before.”
As Lee expected, across the room, the girls immediately overheard what Lee had said.
Revy's eyes went wide, as she quickly jumped out of her seat by Rock, and she headed towards Lee.
As Revy approached Lee, she stated, “River must have raided Chang's liquor cabinet for that bottle.”
Lee looked over at Revy, as he inquired, “So, you have heard of this brand? Is it a black label?” He mentally added, 'I always wondered that.'
Revy stated, “Yep. One of the blackest. Dutch loves the stuff. It is a nice brand where we come from?” By then, Revy came to a stop, a few feet in front of Lee.
Lee looked over Revy's shoulder, to see Dutch sitting in her seat, as she smiled towards both Revy and himself.
Lee turned back to Revy, as he thought, 'Let's have some fun. You want to ask awkward questions. I can play that game too.' He casually asked, “And where is that?”
Revy immediately became real quiet.
Lee then closed the lid to the box, as he looked over at clock above the check in desk. The arms of analog clock stated it was ten fifty-five AM.
Lee thought, 'Close enough.'
Lee then walking around Revy, and towards the front doors, with the brown, wooden box tucked under his right arm.
Revy asked, “Where are you going?”
Lee then turned to face Revy, as he answered, “To find Sam, and have a must needed drink.”
Lee then turned around, and he walked out of the lobby, and into the parking lot, with his prize in his hands. He soon reached his car, and headed for the Rats Nest.
(_)
Five minutes later, Lee made it to the Rats Nest, just as the bartender put the open side up on the window, to the left side of the front door.
After Lee parked his car, he walked inside the bar with his brown, wooden box.
As he looked around, he only saw the bartender sitting at a table, near the front of the room.
Lee thought, 'I guess Sam got caught up in traffic, or something. I am sure he will be here in a few minutes.”
The bartender looked up at Lee, as she said, “Good morning, Lee.”
Lee replied, “Good morning.”
The bartender asked, “So, what is in the box?”
Lee answered, “I gift I wish to share with friends. Including yourself.”
The bartender responded, “Thank you. By the way, I heard about last night. Congratulations on winning that poker game. Did Revy share any of the winning with you.”
Lee replied, “Nope. She kept it all for herself.”
The bartender commented, “Yea. It is apparent that Revy can be a greedy bitch, sometimes.”
Lee said, “You're preaching to the choir. By the way, can I borrow your phone?”
The bartender replied, “Sure.”
The bartender got up, and headed for the bar counter.
Lee followed her.
The bartender walked around the bar counter, and picked up a wireless phone from its base, and walked over to Lee, from behind the counter.
Lee gently set his box down. He then took the phone from the woman's hands.
Lee then dialed a number.
A minute later, Lee stated, in english, “This is Lee. Please, transfer me to Chief Del Soto office.”
A few seconds later, Lee heard the line click, and the pick up again.
On the other end, Pedro said, in spanish, “Hello.”
Lee stated, “Pedro. It's Lee. Come to the Rats Nest, right now. Don't ask questions. I got a gift that I want to share with you, and you are going to love it.”
Pedro replied, in english, “Knowing you, I am sure I will. I will be there in ten minutes.”
Lee said, “That will be fine. See you, then.” He then hung up the phone, and handed it to the bartender.
Lee then sat in a stool, by the bar counter, as he wait for Pedro and Sam to show up.
(_)
Ten minutes later, Pedro walked through the front door of the bar. After he had parked his own car in the Rats Nest parking lot.
Pedro saw that Lee was sitting by the bar counter, and the bartender was nearby, on the other side of the counter.
As Pedro walked toward them, he said, “Hello you two. And Lee, congrats on the win last night.” He thought, 'Since Lee invited me here. I think I will take the questions I have for him, until this evening.'
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
As Pedro came to a stop by the bar counter, next to Lee. He commented, “Most of my boys bet on you, and won big. The others are not sore about losing their money.” He thought, 'And I make sure of that. Both during the game. And afterward.'
Lee stated, “I am glad someone made money from my actions. Though, I did not get a dime from it.”
Pedro replied, “That figures. So, what did you call me for?”
Lee answered, “I was going to wait for Sam. But, I guess he is not going to show up, for a while. I would like to wait a few more minutes for him. But, I can still show you what I have with me.”
Lee then turned to the brown, wooden box on the counter. He open the lip to the box, and pulled out the green bottle of Ardbeg Providence. And he then gently set both the box, and the bottle, onto the bar counter.
Pedro immediately recognized the bottle for what it was.
Pedro took a few steps closer to Lee, as he whispered, “Is that what I think it is?”
Pedro thought, with amazement, 'Forget the questions for this morning. They will come this evening. Besides, it would ruin the mood. And Lee is giving me a once in a lifetime opportunity, to try a drink I always about, for yes. But, did not exist in this reality. Next to Romulan Ale, Ardbeg Providence is on my personal list of drinks I would like to try, that do not exist in this reality.'
Lee softly replied, “Yea. River gave it to me at the hotel, less than an hour ago. I figured you, Sam, the bartender, and I, would like to have a taste of it.”
Pedro quietly responded, “You got that right. But, are you sure it is not poisoned?”
Lee whispered, “Absolutely. It is not River's style to do such a thing.”
Pedro quietly said, “Okay. By the way, I saw Annie at the casino.”
Lee whispered, “Damn. Thanks for the warning.”
Lee thought, 'I lucked out not meeting her, during my trips to the casino. But, that is just another reason to altogether avoid the casino.'
'Though, given what I have done for Annie. I doubt Annie is after me. Still, if Annie wanted too, she could probably immediately find me with the force. It is likely that Chang asked her not too. Or, she is just wanting to see how those already after me, handle the situation.'
Pedro thought, 'Though, I better at least tell him, that I have questions for him tonight. So, he knows I am not blindsiding him.' He softly said, “You're welcome. And there other things we need to talk about tonight.”
Lee quietly replied, “Okay. I understand.” He thought, 'I am not surprised you would have questions for me, Pedro. And given what I have put you through. You deserve answers. But, not right now. Now, it is time for me to celebrate my victory, with my friends. With some priceless hootch.'
Pedro thought, 'Good. He understands. And realizes the importance of my statement.'
Just then, Sam walked through the door. After parking his gray, four door car, in the Rats Nest parking lot, by Lee's pink Cadillac, and away from Pedro's car.
The three adults turned to the newcomer.
Lee asked, “What kept you?”
Sam walked towards them, as he answered, “Errands.” When he reached them, he came to a stop, as he used his right hand to point at the bottle. He asked, “What is that?” He then dropped his right hand to his side.
Lee stated, “I am told that it is fine bottle of hootch. And we are about to find out.” He turned to the bartender, as he requested, “Please get us four glasses. Three for us, and one for you.”
The bartender reached under the counter, and pulled out three glasses, and a bottled opener. As she set them on the counter, she replied, “I appreciate you including me, on the fine endeavor.”
Lee smiled, as he commented, “As I said earlier. I wish to share this with my friends. You included. And you don't think I was going to leave out a beautiful woman, from a once in a lifetime toast.”
The bartender smiled at Lee.
Lee continued, “And the only reason I did not invite Melvin was that he is currently at work, at the hotel. Now, let's enjoy this.” He picked up the bottle open, and unsealed the bottle. He set the bottle opener, with the cock attached to its screw, on the counter.
After Lee opened the bottle and poured some of the contents into each of the four glasses, he raised his glass.
The others raised their glasses, as well.
Lee toasted, “To life.” He then took a sip of the Ardbeg Providence.
The other three replied, in unison, “To life.” And they sips from their glasses, as well.
Lee had to admitted, after sipping it, “Now, that is some smooth alcohol. Let us not waste it.”
The others nodded in agreement.
Soon after, they had polished off the entire bottle.
Lee put the cap back on the empty, green bottle. Then, he put the bottle back into the box. After he closed the box, he picked it up.
Lee then turned Pedro, as he stated, “You helped me yesterday, Pedro. And for that, I am very grateful. So, here...” He held out the box for Pedro, as he stated, “Keep this a souvenir of that day. I have no place to put it. And I am sure it is a rare brand. So, I want someone who appreciates it, to have it.”
Pedro took the box, as he responded, “Thank you, Lee. I will take it home, and put it somewhere safe.” He mentally added, 'Now, this is a gift to hold on to.'
Pedro stated, “Well, I have to get back to work. Thanks for the drink, the box, and the bottle. I am just glad that it was not that strong an alcoholic drink, or I would have to call a cab. See, you all later.”
Sam said, “Have fun.”
The bartender commented, “Glad you came by, Pedro.”
Lee said, “See you, later.”
Pedro then turned, and left the bar. He was soon in his car, as he left to return back to work, at the local police station.
The bartender turned to Lee, as she stated, “That was a nice gesture you did, with both the drinks, and giving the bottle away.”
Lee looked at her, as he smiled. He replied, “I know.” He then turned to Sam, as he asked, “So, are you interest in continuing our poker game?”
Sam smiled, as he pulled out his deck of cards. He stated, “Sure. I even brought my best deck with me.”
Lee said, “Good.”
Sam turned to the bartender, as he stated, “Since we are both driving. I think we will each have a glass of lemonade.”
The bartender replied, “Coming right up.”
Sam replied, “Thank you.”
Lee complimented, “Good choice.”
Sam turned to Lee, as he smiled. He said, “What can I say? I know you well.”
Lee thought, 'Not that well. But, that was still a nice gesture on your part.' Lee said, “That you do.”
Both men then turned, and walked over to their usual corner table, on the for left side of the room. They then sat down, at their usual places. And they soon began ongoing poker game. With the bartender bringing them each a glass of iced lemonade, a few minutes after Sam ordered their drinks.
(_)
Sam and Lee continued playing poker until lunch time. Lee then drove Sam and himself to an Italian restaurant, to eat. When they are finished, they returned to the Rats Nest to continue playing their game of poker.
While both players remained even in the overall money they bet that day, they did not care, as continued playing, and chatting, the day away.
(_)
Finally, at five thirty PM, after they finished their latest hand of cards, Sam looked at the clock on the back wall of the bar. He then put away his cards, and his money, as he stated, “Well, I need to get going.”
Lee said, “I am glad I was able to have your company, for at least most of the day. Especially this afternoon.”
Sam agreed, “So am I.” He continued, in a sadder tone of voice, “I don't know if I am going to be around, for the next couple of days. But, I will try to spent some time with you.”
Lee stated, in a supportive tone of voice, “Do what you can? I will be here for a long as I can. But, we both know, it will not be forever.” He thought, 'Though, if I was able to cure my cancer, and solve my other problems, I wouldn't mind spending as much time with you, as you wanted.'
Sam nodded once, as he said, “I understand.”
Sam then got up from the table. Sam walked out from around the corner, passed Lee, and by the bar counter, near the bartender, where he left some money for his tab, and a tip.
After Sam set the money on the counter, he turned towards the front door. He kept walking, as he said, “Good the change.”
Next, Sam walked out of the bar, and to his car, to leave.
Lee then collected his money, and put it into one of his pockets.
Lee then got up, and walked over to the bar counter, where the bartender was standing across from him.
As Lee pulled out a few dollars to pay his bar tab and tip, the bartender asked, “What did you mean, when you said you would not be here forever.”
Lee answered, “Please, don't take this the wrong way. But, it is personal.” He then placed the money on the counter.
The bartender replied, “Okay.”
Lee said, “Have a pleasant evening.”
The bartender commented, “I hope so. And you to.”
Lee then turned and walked towards the front door.
A few seconds after Lee exited the bar, he thought, 'I could use some dinner from the Last Resort Diner.”
As Lee faced the street in front of him, he then turned to his right, as he walked along concrete sidewalk in front of the bar, to the parking lot on the left side of the Rats Nest bar, where his pink car was parked. Several seconds later, Lee made it to his car. After which, he got into his vehicle, started the engine, and drove away, down the street.
(_)
Six minutes later, Lee parked his car in the parking lot, by the diner. He then walked into the Last Resort Diner.
Lee saw that there were a few customers there, but not many.
Lee thought, 'It looks like I made it before dinner rush.'
As Lee walked in, George, the cook, was busy washing dishing, in the sink, under the counter in front of the front doors. When George saw Lee, from across the counter, he stated, “Hi Lee. We heard about the poker game. Great job.”
Nearby, Mary and Lori heard what George said. They turned to see Lee had walked into the diner. Mary said, “Yes. It is always impressive when someone wins a million dollars.”
Lori was beside Mary. Lori inquired, “I am glad you won, as well. But, how much of it were you allowed to keep?”
After heading the comments, by the staff, Lee came to a stop, just inside the dinner. He looked around at the three diner employees, as he answered, “None of it. Though, thank you for your comments.”
Lori said, “Then, consider a meal, and drink, tonight, to be on the house.”
Lee grinned, as he responded, “Thank you. I was planning on eating here. That is why I am early. And it is customer service like that, which keeps me coming back here.”
Lori returned Lee's smile, as she replied, “I know.”
Mary and George went back to their jobs, as Lori follow Lee to the usual back, right, corner booth that he and Pedro shared almost every night.
Lee sat down, while facing the entrance to the restaurant. He then looked up at Lori, as he ordered, “I think I will have a club sandwich, with potato chips, and a coke cola.”
Lori pulled out her pen and notepad. As she wrote down the door, for the cook, she stated, “Coming right up.” She then turned, and walked towards George.
A minute later, Lori brought out Lee's glass of cola.
And ten minutes later, Lori brought Lee's meal, which had just been freshly prepared by George.
Lee then enjoyed his meal, as he watched for Pedro to show up, sometime around seven PM that evening.
(_)
At the moment that Lee was served his dinner for that day, at the Last Resort Diner, across town, in his penthouse office, at the top floor of Daiyu Palace Casino, Chang sat in his chair, behind his desk. With his door to his office being closed, but not locked.
Chang was wearing his business suit, but not his shades, nor black long coat.
Chang had his laptop computer open on the top of his desk, as he used it to help him review on what he knew about Lee. The laptop had a computer mouse hooked to it, and its wireless network card was connected to both the building's computer network, and the internet of the planet he was on.
The building's network, and computers, had some of the best firewalls money could buy, in the multiverse. Firewalls that were designed, and installed, by Ed Lowe.
As Chang leaned back in his cushioned, armchair, he thought, 'The sex River gave me last night, did a lot to calm me down, after losing a million to an absolute nobody...”
Chang smiled, as he continued his thoughts, in amusement, “Oh. Who am I kidding? I made more money from the bets on the game floor, with Lee winning, than River winning.'
'River already realized this. She told me so, in bed. Pedro told me he realized this, at the beginning of the game. I am sure that Rock realizes this. With her telling Revy, after the game. And if Lee is as good as I suspect he is. He likely realized this, as well.'
'So instead, River and I had sex to celebrate my brilliant planning. And while more people bet on River, than Lee. Once they realize that River was my girlfriend. The casino owner's girlfriend. I am surprised that so many people bet for Lee... Maybe there are just a lot of people that like betting on the underdog. Like Pedro.'
'And while I had already started to grow interested in Lee. After Lee's display at the game yesterday, and his win. I am now very interest in him. Besides, the principle of the matter demands I investigate Lee.'
'And the more I dig, the more questions I get about Lee, than answers. He has only been on this island for a few months. Yet, he has already either had a brush with, or become allies, with all the major players that are on the island.'
'Lee has clearly be able to deflect attention from himself. While, at least gaining a bit of respect from both Revy and her group, and me and my group. At the same time, Lee and Pedro seem to be working together. Though, I doubt Pedro's claim that Lee is his informant. I get the feeling Pedro is not in charge of Lee. Lee might even me the one in charge of Pedro... And giving how badass Pedro is. That is a worrisome thought.'
'Now, to start with. River reminded me that Lee did not have a choice in playing the game. It seems she has developed a soft spot for him. I guess when you read a person's mind, you learn their nature. And River has always been a good judge of character. Which means that Lee is on the level, and he did not cheat. So, taking all that into account, I not going to hold winning that game against him.'
'Still, for River to lose like that to Lee concerns me. Because, the means that whether Lee knows it or not, he has become a player in this game, we are all caught up in. It means that he is good enough, at what he does, that he could either be an asset, or a threat to me. And I need to which he is.'
'As such, I need to know what makes Lee tick. Because, given all the things he did in that game, and outside that game, he clearly is a man of many talents. One of those talents being intelligent enough know to hide his talents from everyone else.'
'It is clear that something is not right with Lee. He is playing some game in this town. And it involves Pedro. That means it could effect this city's future, and by extension, my business in this town. So, what is Lee's real reasons for being in town? And what is his game?'
'Also, after yesterday, it is obvious that Lee can keep his cool even in a prolonged, stressful situation. Pedro stated that Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru told Lee that River is a telepathic genius. So, he knew River was a telepath, before the game started. Yet, he still showed up, and played one hell of a game, without cracking. That is a very good trait to have. Even River agreed with me, on this.'
'Also, last night, during one of our breaks, between lovemaking, I commented that Lee had to have some stones to remain calm playing her. River mentioned that Lee could face a tiger without breaking into a sweat.'
'Speaking of tigers. I need to look into what happened with my tigress, two mornings ago. Zoe never did give me a straight answer on my tiger made it, unharmed, from its broken cage, to her enclosure, which was several feet away from said broken cage. And this game distracted me from looking into it.'
Chang leaned up, as he looked over at this laptop monitor. He pulled up the security camera for the hallway by the enclosure for that morning. Though, there was no audio on the building security camera, so even if the cameras were tapped into by an outside source, they could not be used to listen in on those in the casino.
Chang has other ways to find out what people were speaking on silent audio, if he wish to learn what they were saying. And he was a fairly good lip reader, himself. In both chinese, and english. Though, he preferred other people not know he had such skills.
Chang fast-forwarded the video, until he stopped it, when he saw Lee walked out of the back elevator bay.
Chang thought, 'Lee must have gotten lost.'
Chang then watched as the wheels on the tiger cage broke, the tiger got loose, the workers ran, with the tiger heading for Lee.
What happened next surprised Chang.
Lee did not run, nor show any fear.
And due to this, the tiger became interested in him.
As the large cat walked around Lee, Lee kept slowly turning to face the cat.
When the tiger came to a stop, both the tiger and Lee just stood there, until Lee did another expected thing. He reached up and lightly scratched the tiger behind her ear.
Soon after, Lee was able to convince the tiger to follow him to the enclosure door, with the tiger entering it.
Lee then shut the door, and locked it. A few seconds later, Zoe, with a few other security members, arrive on the scene.
Zoe and Lee talked, and from what Chang could read from their lips, both agreed to pretend this never happened. Then, Lee walked away, towards the gaming floor, as Zoe arranged for clean up of the broken cage.
Lee actions interested Chang, greatly.
Chang select the computer, using the time stamps of the videos, to select through the video feeds of Lee, from one camera to another, all the way to where Lee walked outside, and he sat on one of the outside benches, while he waited for Rock and Revy to show up, around an hour later.
As Lee followed Rock and Revy, out into the parking lot, to the Lagoon family's GTO, Chang paused the video.
Chang thought, 'Interesting. I will have to talk to Zoe about keeping things from me. But, I won't go hard on her. She has enough problems, as is. That woman has not had any real luck since Wash died. She has had a string of failed relationships, with nothing to show for them... Oh well. That is a matter for another time. And River briefly mentioned that she was looking into that problem. So, I will leave it to her.'
'Though, the fact Lee wanted to keep this secret shows intelligence on his part. I would have likely done things differently, if I had known in advance that Lee was this strong willed. And Lee showed how strong willed he was in the poker game.'
'I guess River was not joking. And dealing with Revy and the others, on a daily basis is either going to steel one's nerves, or break them. From what I heard, Revy's daughters pretty much gave Lee a front row seat to their brand of violence, and Lee didn't even crack in front of them. And compared to them, that tiger is a playful kitten.'
'Also, Lee is so skinny that it is unhealthy. Anyone with a sharp eye could tell that by way Lee's suit, and other clothing, hangs off of his body. Though, he likely bought his clothing when he weighted more, and the clothing fit him.'
'I have looked over a few older photos I had taken of him. From around month ago. Right after the talent show. He was skinny then, but not this skinny. And he would have no reason to willfully lose all that weight.'
'So, he wasn't that skinny a few months ago. So, why is he losing weight?... He has cancer... He's dying. And he knows it. With Revy and the girls do not realize this because the change is so gradual. I have heard cases where some people did not notice such things, from their friends and family members, because the person in question was with them so often, that as they got worse, slowly over time, it was not noticeable to them.'
'There is not much I can do for Lee, right now. But, this does allow me to have a card to have over him. But later. When he starts to become desperate, then I will make him my offer.'
'Now, to review the video feeds of when Lee came in yesterday, and came out.'
As Chang watched Lee strut into the casino, from yesterdays morning video feeds, he chuckled. He thought, 'Lee clearly knows how to be a showman.'
Chang then watched the feed videos from last night. He watched as Lee passed by Revy and Rock. He then took the elevator to the gaming floor.
And as Lee walked out to the threshold from the elevator bay and gaming floor, Chang read one word from Lee's lips. “Velveteen.”
Lee then started walking towards the front doors.
Chang thought, 'Velveteen... Where have I heard the word before... It is a music track... I wonder?...'
Chang pulled up another window beside the video on his screen, the window listed the music tracks that played in the casino gaming floor.
The music list time stamp match the video time stamp, of the song being played being, Velveteen, from the Ghost in the Shell, Stand Alone Complex, soundtrack.
Chang thought, 'Hold on... Revy says that he did not know about anime. But, only an anime fan would would know that song by name. Something is wrong with this situation.'
Chang then pulled up the video window, and he expanded it to the entire screen.
Next, Chang watched Lee exits the casino, with a valet opening the door to his pink car.
The video even continued playing, as the pink Cadillac began to drive off. Chang's eyes caught a glimpse of the back license plate of the convertible.
Chang immediately paused the video, and as he looked more closely at the back license plate of the pink car.
The license vanity plate stated, BCKLAGN.
Chang immediately realized what the license vanity plate stood for, as he thought, with disbelief, 'Black Lagoon. You got to be kidding. Wait, that isn't Lee's gag. From what I learned from Revy and the others, someone gave him that car. And if my sources, whom dug into the past of this city, are correct, that person was Police Chief Pedro Del Soto's brother, Paciano Del Soto. Whom also gave Pedro that Sistema Colt pistol. From what I managed to gather, both the Del Soto brothers are big Black Lagoon fans.'
'But, the young brother was a mob boss that learned that Revy and her crew were in town, and he wisely ran... I admire such common sense. I think I will leave him, and the former members of his group, alone.'
'Still, something does not add up. Lee met both Del Soto brothers. He should know at least something about what is going on. But, he doesn't do anything. He is intentionally playing dumb. Why? And that quote his made towards me, right before the game started. That was from the movie, Hot Fuzz... What a minute. Hot Fuzz. That movie parodies several genres at once.'
'And Lee also said that he was not Pedro's friend. Yet. He clearly was Pedro's friend. Even to the point that Pedro brought the force with him to the casino. And Pedro is clearly in on whatever Lee was doing... And Pedro knows all about us...'
'So, Lee lied to me, the day before the poker game with River, about him only being an acquaintance to Chief Del Soto. Though, he had no problem with me knowing. Yet, at the game, he whispered to me that he was Pedro's friend... He was not lying to try to fool me... And the only other people that he could be lying, to try to fool, are Revy and Rock.... But, why?... Ah. Ho. Ho. Ho...'
Chang then began laughing at what he realized about Lee. And whom Lee really was.
Several seconds later, as Chang stopped laughing, he picked up his cellphone. He then dial a number on his phone, as he though, with mirth, and amusement, 'Lee is as smooth as silk. But, he hasn't fool me. No wonder River did not want to spoil things.'
'This is just so much fun... And Lee is also crazy. As in, crazy as a fox. Such as that teal tie he wore to the game. He was literally flaunting the fact he is hiding in plain sight. Now, that takes balls to do. Especially, in front of the badasses he has seriously pissed off. Still, I'll decide what to do about Lee, tomorrow. But for now, I think I will have my personal duo keep tabs on him, starting in the morning.'
As the other end picked up, the female voice calmly said, in chinese, “What do you need, Chang?”
Chang ordered, in a casual tone of voice, in chinese, “I need you and Annie to tail Lee tomorrow. If he gets into trouble. Help him. Then, contact me. And immediately bring him to me, unharmed. If nothing happens, just leave him alone.”
The voice on the other end of the line replied, in chinese, “Understood. And no problem.”
Chang said, “Thank you.” He then closed his cellphone, and put it in his pocket.
Just then, there was a knock on Chang's door.
Chang said, “It is open.”
As the door opened, he saw River, wearing a red evening gown, like she had on the previous night, along with red slippers. River red clothing and slippers, matched the red color of her dyed hair. Also, she had her hair pulled back in a ponytail.
Chang smiled as the sight before him, as he inquired, in chinese, “River. My dear. What is the occasion?”
River returned Chang's smile, as she answered, in fluent chinese, “I thought you might want to have a nice dinner, with some pleasant company.”
Chang complimented, “What a marvelous idea. And it is nearly time for dinner. Is the restaurant downstairs okay with you.”
River answered, “Yes. That will be fine.”
Chang closed his laptop computer. He then stood up from his desk chair. He walked around his desk, and over to River.
As both of them walked out of the room, and into the hallway, Chang gently shut the door, to his office, behind him.
The romantic couple then headed for the front express elevator, to take them downstairs, to get some dinner, at their private room, inside the casino restaurant.
(_)
Later that evening, just after seven PM, while sitting at his corner booth, at the Last Resort Diner, Lee watched at Pedro finally entered the Last Resort Diner.
The dinner crowd had already left.
Pedro approached Lee, as Lee thought, 'Well, I knew this was coming, this morning. When Pedro told me to expect this. And I don't blame him for the questions he is about to ask. So, I guess I have some explaining to do to Pedro. And unlike the girls, I cannot just tell him to go to hell. And storm off, away from him.'
Pedro walked towards Lee, he saw that Lori was nearby. He turned to Lori, as he said, in english, “Lori, I will have some coffee.”
Lori turned to him, as she replied, “Coming right now.”
Pedro then made his to the right, back, corner booth, that he and Lee shares.
While Pedro sat down, Lori was right behind him, with his usual cup of coffee.
Meanwhile, Lee was still drinking his second refill of his glass of iced cola.
As the steam rose from Pedro's cup of coffee, which was between Lee and Pedro, Pedro just silently stared at Lee for the next few seconds.
Lee sighed, as he said, “Alright. Ask your questions.”
Pedro calmly asked, in an even tone of voice, “How?”
Lee calmly requested, “Not to sound like an ass. But, could you please be more specific in your application of the word, how?”
Pedro broke out laughing, as he thought, 'Only a writer would make such a comment.'
As Pedro calmed down, he responded, “Fair enough. So, how? Where? And when did you learn all those skills you that showed yesterday, at the poker game.”
Lee answered, “The poker skills are obvious. I spent months playing Sam, and a few others. I became skilled at playing that game, from experience. And a few pointers from Sam. The others skills... Well...”
Pedro stated, “Spit it out. I want to know where you learned to throw a card like that. To the point it was able to embed itself into a table. And where did you learned to speak those languages from. I suspect something happened in this city, that I don't know about, and I want to know what happened, right now.”
Lee was silent for a few seconds, as he thought, 'I am going to have to tell, Pedro. I got no choice.'
Lee said, “During the Day of the Dead, we all got stuck in a time loop that only I remember.” He mentally added, 'Except Harvey. But, we have an agreement, so there is no need to worry Pedro about him.' He continued, “The time lopped worked like a Groundhogs Day time loop, only it resets at midnight, back to five AM. And we were stuck in those loops for over twenty years.”
Pedro thought, 'I was right. This is one hell of an answer.' He commented, “So, that is why that day felt like it would never end?”
Lee replied, “Yes.”
Pedro inquired, “So, how did you use your time in the time loop?”
Lee answered, “For the most part, I spent my time well in that time loop. I learned a lot. And learned everything from throwing knives and cards, to learning to speak, read, and write, a number of languages. I am quite the artist now, too. And that is only the tip of the iceberg, of the skill sets I now possess.”
Pedro commented, “Sounds like the time loop was fun for you.”
Lee shrugged, as he replied, “It was.” He thought, 'I got to live twenty more years, or so, than I otherwise would have not. For that, I am grateful.'
Pedro picked up his cup. He took a sip of his coffee. He then set down his cup, back on the table, as he inquired, “You didn't do anything stupid while in that temporal loop?”
Lee thought, 'I am glad he did not ask me who I learned those skills from. He might have a different, more disappointing opinion of me. But, I have to admit to something. And I know just what to admit too.'
Lee admitted, “I played a few pranks on the girls. But, since they don't remember, we are fine.”
Pedro agreed, “Okay. And I have a feeling that the less I know about it, the safer, and saner, I will continue to be.”
Lee said, “That is because you are probably right.”
Pedro asked, “So, what are you going to do now that you have revealed your hidden talents to the girls?”
Lee responded, “I admit that I have pretty much blown most of my hidden advantages in that game. And I am starting to think about alternatives, to my current long term plans.”
Pedro thought, with concern, 'He is screwed, and he knows it. Still, he is taking it a lot better than I would, in his position.'
Pedro said, “That is wise. And the very fact you realize this is one of two reasons I am still going to help you. The other reason is you really have a talent for this cloak and dagger shit. Revy and Chang put you in a no win situation, and you still came out of it in one piece.”
Lee stated, “Well, River now knows about me. So, we should also be thankful that the playful, telepathic genius wants to play along.”
Pedro said, “Yes. We should. But, still you are a talented man.”
Lee replied, “I know... So, you said this morning, that Annie is at the casino?”
Pedro stated, “Yes. Though, I am not sure why she is working for a man she hates?”
Lee said, “Knowing Chang, he likely offered Annie a lot of money, and a lot of freedom, at whatever job he has for her.”
Pedro commented, “I pray that she is not one of Chang's assassins. If that is the case, we might as well just surrender, right now. Because I am not going to start a damn war with Darth Vader!”
Lee snapped, in a firm, even tone of voice, “Calm down. There are other people in this room.”
Pedro forced himself to calm down, as he conceded, in a normal tone of voice, “You're right.”
Lee stated, “Listen, Pedro. I doubt Annie would allow herself to become an assassin. She might be one of Chang's enforcers, but not his assassin. And if Annie is an enforcer, she would like use force mind tricks, and a telekinesis to keep from harming her targets. She has a lot of abilities she can use, to get what she wants, without being violent.'
Pedro said, “That is nice to hear. Still, her being in the city is scary enough, as is.”
Lee responded, “Not really. If you think about. Annie is no longer the self-loathing monster that Darth Vader was. Nor, is she the immature Anakin Skywalker. When I wrote about her, I put a lot of work into her character development. She has emotionally matured into a sane, well adjusted adult. Sure, she is more powerful than ever in the force. But, she now as a firm sense of right and wrong, along a sense of responsibility, behind that power.”
“Also, barring the gender change, and the associated problems with being a woman, she is likely very happy with her situation. She now has a completely healthy, youthful, adult body. She is out of that black suit. Also, she has friends, and a good life.”
“And given how I showed her what her life would have been like, if I had not had her captured by the Hell Sabers, I do not think she is unhappy with me. As such, I do not think she is after me. And I am so glad I wrote her that way. Though, her literally living in the same city we are in, does concern me. But, only for obvious reasons.”
Pedro replied, “I can see your point on this.”
Lee took a swallow of his glass of cola. He then set the glass down. He inquired, “So, anything else you would like to talk to me about?”
Pedro answered, “Yes. A few things. For example, the pit bosses for Chang's casino are Spike and Jet... Well, Jetta. I honestly did think that Jet would be turned into a woman, as well.”
Lee admitted, “That completely took me by surprise, as well. I set it up so that Jet would have the option to use the rejuvenation therapy that Ed used. No gender bending involved.”
Pedro responded, “I know. I guess something happened.”
Lee agreed, “Probably. Jet has always had good reasons for all his, or her, actions. As she is the most levelheaded of the entire Bebop group.”
Pedro stated, “Agreed. And I also agree with Chang's choice of making them the pit bosses.”
Lee said, “Yea. They are pretty sharp, and fairly honest move on Chang's part. And Jetta will likely keep the body count and violence low, on the gaming floor. Jetta has never been cold blooded.”
Pedro stated, “Yes. And that thought helps calm my nerves, given the situation at hand.”
Lee commented, “At least with Chang, the serenity crew, and the bebop crew, they will not play games. If they are going to hurt, or kill someone, they are going to be straightforward about it. And they will usually warn that person, first.”
Pedro said, “I know. I don't have to worry about being poisoned by them.”
Lee replied, “Yes. That is a good example of what I am talking about.”
(_)
Lee and Pedro then talked for another ten minutes, on a few other issues. Such, as what was going on in other parts of the island, that both men thought the other made need to be aware of.
At the end of their conversation, Lee stated, “Well, I guess I had better head out. I have some serious thinking to do about my future.”
Pedro requested, “Yes. You do. But, before you leave, I want to see how good you are at throwing. And not just at cards.”
Lee stated, “I am not throwing knives. I have found that things can break real easily.”
Pedro said, “Fair enough. How about a coin?”
Lee inquired, “How about a U.S. quarter?”
Pedro stated, “That will work.”
Lee mentioned, “And I will be using my precognition.”
Pedro replied, “That is fine, as well.”
Lee said, “Now to find something to use as a target.”
Lee and Pedro got up and walked out of the corner of the booth, and into the restaurant proper.
Lee noticed that there were no other customers in the room. Only Mary, Lori, and George. Mary and Lori had sat down, in stools, at the counter. George was talking to them, as he stood across the counter.
Lee thought, 'Good. There will be no witnesses, except Lori, George, and Mary. And they clearly know to keep quiet on what Pedro and I discuss here. Or, I would have been captured, a long time ago. Now, how am I going to do this.'
As the two man looked around, Lee saw a vase, with a pink flower in it, the other side of the counter. Though, the vase was near the three employees of the diner.
Lee thought, 'That will do. Though, the vase is near those three. So, I better talk to them, before I do this. Also, I probably need to move the vase. And I know just where to put it.'
As Pedro stood were he was, Lee walked over to the three adults. Lee said, “Hello guys. I was wondering. Would you like to see a trick?”
The three adult employees stopped walking, as they turned to Lee.
Lori asked, “What kind of trick?”
Lee said, “If you are willing to part with that flower. I was planning to do a throw trick.”
Lori looked back at Mary and George. Both of them each nodded once. Lori then turned back to Lee, as she said, “Sure.”
Lee walked over and picked up the vase with the flower in it.
Lee then turned around, and walked back to the side of the room, where he and Pedro had been setting, away from everyone else in the diner.
Meanwhile, Pedro walked over to stand beside Mary, Lori.
Lee then set the vase on the table right in front of the side window, where the diner turned towards the corner.
Next, Lee walked back to where he was about thirty feet away from the vase, and about ten feet from the four other adults.
Lee looked over at them, as he said, “Pay attention.”
Lee turned around to face the vase, as he reached into his right pants pocket and pulled out a U.S. quarter.
Lee used his hands to set the quarter on his right thumb.
Lee then flipped the coin a foot into the air.
A second later, after the spinning coin reached its apex, and started falling, in the blink of an eye, Lee caught the coin between his right index and middle finger. He then swiftly flicked his right fingers and hand towards the vase, while he let go of the coin.
A split second later, the coin sliced through the flower, where the bloom met the stem.
As the bloom fell to the table, the coin bounced off the wall, and hit the floor.
Lee turned around, as Pedro, Lori, Mary, and George clapped for him performing his trick, for a few seconds.
As the four adults finished clapping, Pedro complimented, “That was very good.”
George said, “Nice trick.”
Mary commented, “That must have taken a lot of practice to learn.”
Lori stated, “I have seen better. But, not by much.”
Lee joked, “Thank you. And you can keep the change.”
This caused the other four other adults to laugh, for a few seconds.
As the laughter died down, Pedro said, “Well, it looks like it is time to hit the road.”
Lee replied, “I agree. And I hope everyone has a pleasant night.”
Lori said, “You to, Lee.”
Lee then realized something, as he thought, 'I better tell Pedro something about my bill, or he will wonder why I am not going to pay it. And I don't want him to know my meal and drink were on the house. Still, I know just what to say.'
Lee turned to Pedro, as he commented, “I already handled the bill for my order, tonight.”
Lori snickered a little from Lee's comment.
Pedro ignored Lori, as he turned to Lee. He replied, “Okay.”
Given Lee's meal and drink were on the house. He did not pay for them. Though, he did leave a tip for the employees. Which they were grateful for.
Meanwhile, Pedro paid his bill, and he tipped Lori.
After which, Pedro and Lee left the diner, one right after the other, though the front doors.
As Lee and Pedro walked outside, with them heading for their own cars, Lee thought, 'That was fun. Still, I really do have some thinking I need to do. And I know a good place to do it, at this time in the evening.”
Less than a minute later, Lee made it to his car, and he was soon on the road back to the Devil's Hotel.
(_)
Eight minutes later, Lee had already parked his car, and walked into the hotel lobby. He soon made it into the hotel restaurant.
As he looked around, he saw Revy, and her group at the tables, by the stage, as they took turns singing karaoke. Though, the women did let others, in the room, whom were outside of their group, have turns at singing karaoke.
Right now, Dutch was doing a good job of singing a country western song.
As Lee turned and started walking towards the bar counter, he saw that Melvin was standing behind the counter.
Melvin was talking to man, from across the ground, whom had his back turned to Lee. With the other person was sitting on a stool, with an open bottle of beer in front of him. Also, there was no one else around the two men.
Lee thought, 'From the way the situation looks, I think this is one of Melvin's friends. It will be interesting to meet him.
As Lee walked towards them, he saw, that even from behind, that the man was a fair skin. He wore a green long sleeve shirt, brown pants, a black leather belt, black boots, and a white baseball cap.
From the man's skin complexion, on the exposed skin on the man's neck, along with the nearly white head of hair, that the man was likely in his mid-sixties.
Lee thought, 'It would make sense for Melvin to have friends his own age.'
Lee walked up to the two men, with Lee stating by the bar counter, to the left side of the man sitting in the stool.
Melvin turned to Lee, as he stated, “Hi Lee. I did not see you, nor Sam at dinner.”
Lee honestly answered, “Sam has been busy all week. And I decided to eat somewhere else. I just needed a break from a few things.” He the used his eyes to glance in the direction of Revy and the others in her group, by the stage.
Melvin understood what Lee meant, as he grinned. He said, “Got you.”
Lee turned back to the two men, as he inquired, “So, who is your friend?”
Melvin happily responded, “One of the most interesting people, I have ever met.”
Lee thought, 'Coming for you. That is saying a lot.'
The man sitting in the stool turned to face Lee, as Melvin introduced the two of them to each other, “Well, this is a good friend of mine, from way back. His name is, Burt. And Burt, this is Lee, one of my best, nicest, and most polite customers.”
As Lee looked at Burt's face, he instantly recognized him. It took every once of Lee's willed power not to show his fanboy side in front of Burt. And though he remained calm on the outside, he mentally squealed in joy, 'Holy shit! It is Burt Gummer. I am in the presence of a one of the greatest gun-nuts in the multiverse. A monster hunter extraordinaire. A survivalist with no peer. And while he can be rough around the edges. He is also a decent guy, once you get to know him. He practices gun safety. And he is one hell badass.'
'Rambo wishes he was this guy. I am so happy I wrote about him, so I would have a chance to meet him. And the best part is, I didn't really do anything to him, except give him the proverbial swift kick in the ass he needed to move on with his life, after his wife left him, and he blew up his home. To be honest, getting him out of Nevada was likely the best thing that ever happened to him.”
'And with the reality device he gained, he likely lead an even more colorful life than he already had. As hard as that is to believe.'
'Also, from Pedro, I already knew Burt was here. But, it is great to meet him in person. I would ask for his autograph, if I didn't know it would cause problems. And it makes sense that Burt would be Melvin's friend, since both of them are friends with Pedro.'
'And Melvin said, friends from way back. So, Burt and Melvin having been friends since they were in both Roanapur. With Burt knowing Melvin is Yurick, and he in hiding. And Burt likely knows while. And Burt keeps this quiet to protect his from, Melvin.'
'While, I am sure Burt knows about the Black Lagoon series. I know. I hinted at that, in my stories. I wonder if Melvin knows that Burt is a fictional character from the Tremors franchise? Not that it really matters. And asking that question would blow what little I have left of my cover.'
'In addition, even though I am sure Burt likely has a working reality device, somewhere on this island. Likely on his person, or in his own. I am not even going to try to even look for his reality device. Because I respect that man. And I do not want to drag him into my mess.'
Meanwhile, Burt extended his right hand towards Lee, as he said, “Nice to meet you, Lee.” He shrugged, to his right side, towards Melvin, as he continued, “And this Melvin here is a lot nicer guy than another Melvin I knew back home.”
Lee firmly gripped Burt's hand, with his own right hand. As Lee shook the badass' hand, he thought, 'I know who you are talking about, Burt. And no arguments there. And your handshake has the firm sincerity that I would come to expect from a honorable man such are yourself.' Lee said, “It is a nice to meet you, Burt.”
Both men noticed that the other man had a firm, but not tight handshake.
As they broke their handshake, Melvin stated, “I knew Burt from the town we both use to live in. He had the brains to leave long before things go out of hand. When the first signs started appearing.”
Lee thought, 'Well, that confirms that.'
Burt commented, “A long time ago, I learned to watch for the warning signs of trouble.”
Lee thought, 'That is an understatement, in so many ways.'
Melvin went onto say, “Anyway, Burt came to this town five years ago, and he set up shop here, on the island.”
Lee thought, 'That is around the same time you showed up, Melvin. That has to be more than consequence. But, I do not have the time, nor justification, to look into that little mystery.'
Melvin stated, “Burt, here, is likely the best gunsmith you will ever meet. If you ever need a gun repaired, let me know, and I will contact Burt here, for you.”
Burt smiled, as he said, “Lee, I would be more than happy to have your business. And I will do so at a reasonable price.”
Lee returned Burt's smile, as he replied, “Thank you for the offer.” He thought, 'Now to confirm something that Pedro said.' He inquired, “I take it the police know about you?”
Burt smile curled into a smirk, as he answered, “Of course. Their police chief took one look at my work and hired me, on the spot, to repair, customize, and help procure, their firearms. At a very good price rate, I might at. I got a wonderful contact with them. And the police let me get some good range time in with my weapons, on an outdoor field. Unlike the previous town I lived in.”
From the corner of his left eye, Lee saw Melvin roll he eyes for a few seconds. Lee then saw Melvin look back at Burt, and himself.
Lee then focused on Burt, as he replied, “I am glad to hear that.”
Melvin stated, “By the way, Lee. I heard about you win last night, at the casino. Congratulates.”
Burt inquired, “So, you are the person that won that million dollars in chips?”
Lee turned to look at both Burt and Melvin, as he commented, “Yes. But, it was someone else's money. I didn't even see a dime of it.
Melvin commented, “Well that sucks.”
Lee deadpanned, “No kidding.” He then continued, in a more normal tone of voice, “But, at least I still have bragging rights.”
Melvin smiled, as he agreed, “That you do.”
Burt complimented, “That is a good way to looked at it. And now you know you can handle playing high stakes poker.”
Lee thought, with amusements, 'On levels you don't even realize.'
Burt continued, 'And there is always, better luck next time.”
Lee agreed, “True.” He mentally added, 'That is what I like about you, Burt. You look the brighter side of things.'
Melvin asked, “So, what can I do for you, Lee?”
Lee answered, “I just came here for a cold bottle of beer.”
Melvin said, “Okay. One second.” He then leaned down, and pulled out a cold bottle of beer, from a decent brand.
Melvin set the bottle on the bar counter, between him and Lee.
Lee reached into one of his pockets, and pulled out a few one dollar bills. He checked what he had, to make sure he didn't accidentally give Melvin a couple of hundred dollar bills by mistake.
After Lee had the right cash in his hands, he pocketed the rest of the money. He then set the few dollars onto the counter, as he said, “This should cover it.”
Melvin collected the money, as he replied, “Thank you.”
As Lee picked up the cold bottle of beer, he said to Melvin, “Good night, Melvin.”
Melvin replied, “Sleep well, Lee.”
Lee turned to Burt, as he stated, “It was nice meeting you, Burt. I hope to meet you again, sometime.” He bitterly thought, 'If I live that long. Which is looking more like that won't be the case.'
Burt happily said, “You as well, Lee.”
Lee turned around, and started walking toward the exit of the hotel restaurant, as he thought, 'Now, to got to a quiet place to think. Somewhere I can walk around. Which means the tightness of my suite is out. And I have know just the place to go, on the ground floor, where no one will likely bother me, during this time of the year.'
A few seconds later, Lee was out the open double-doors to the restaurant, as he headed for his destination, in another part of the hotel.
(_)
A few minutes before Lee left the restaurant, near the Devil's Hotel restaurant stage, Natsuru was sitting with her two lovers, and their three daughters. She turned her attention to the door, as she noticed Lee walk in.
Natsuru thought, 'I am glad that Lee finally showed up. Given what happened this morning, I would not be surprised if he did decide to leave town.'
Natsuru then watched as Lee walked up to the bar with Melvin and another man. She mentally reflected, 'I wonder who that is?'
Natsuru watched the three of them talk for a minute, then Lee bought a bottle of beer, and left.
Natsuru thought, 'I think someone needs to talk to him.' She turned to her family, as she said, “Girls, I will be back in a little while.”
Akira looked over at Natsuru, as she commented, “Okay. Have fun.” She then turned back to watching Dutch doing a good job of singing a western song on stage.
Natsuru then got up from her seat, and she started walking towards the exit of the restaurant. As she do so, she turned her head to looked at Melvin and the other man.
While her angle to them changed, she eventually got a good look at the other man's face. And she immediately realized who it was.
Natsuru thought, in surprise, 'My god! It is Burt Gummer from Tremors films and TV series... Oh yea... In the stories, Burt set up shop in Roanapur for a while. He even made Akira and Bob's revolvers. Also, he had a good business relationship with Hotel Moscow, and the Triad, in the city. So, it would make sense that Melvin would know him. And from the look of it, Melvin and Burt are friends.'
'Since this is a city of badasses. Just badasses that like to live a quiet life. It fits that Burt would end up here, as well. Also, that it might be the reason Burt showed up. He likely used the reality device to think of a town, at a specific time, that he could enjoy living in. And this town, at this time, fits the profile.'
'Though, I better not mention Burt to the others. Violin will got into full on fangirl mode, and risk exposing our presence to the public, here. Yet, I think it would be best if I leave Melvin alone about this. The more we leave each other alone, the less chance of Revy and the others learn who Melvin really is. And from them, Balalaika learning who he is, and coming after him.'
'Besides, both those men have been through enough, already.'
'Now, to go talk to, Lee.'
Natsuru then turned her attention back to the exit, as she continued following Lee, at a comfortable distance, to wherever Lee was headed.
(_)
At that moment, back at the bar counter, Burt turned to the stage, as he looked at Revy's group. He commented, “I see the girls finally showed up. With company.”
Melvin leaned over, as quietly said to Burt, “Please, keep voice down. Some of them have some very sharp hearing.”
Burt turned back to Melvin, as he leaned closer to friend. He softly responded, “I take, they don't know who you are?”
Melvin whispered, “Nope. And I would like to keep it that way.”
Burt leaned up, as he said, “I understand. We will talk about it, later. In more private surrounds.”
Melvin leaned back up, as he replied, “That will be fine with me.”
Burt got up from his stool. He picked up his beer and finished the last swallow. Next, he gently set the empty bottle back down on the counter, as he commented, “Well, I better head out.” He then pulled out a five dollar U.S. bill. He continued, “This could cover the drink and tip.”
Melvin picked up the bill, and looked at it. He turned to Bert, as he responded, “It will.”
Burt stated, “See you, later.”
Melvin said, “You too.”
Melvin then went to the front cash resigster, to ring up the sale, and collect his tip from the change.
While this went on, Burt turned and walked out of the restaurant. He soon reached his pickup truck, in the parking lot. After which, he got into his pickup truck, started it, and headed back to his home for the night.
(_)
Meanwhile, as Lee walked outside, by the Devil Hotel's outdoor pool, by the front left corner of the hotel. With the privacy finished on the front side of the pool area, being floor with the front outer wall of the hotel.
Given it was late autumn, with the constant cool weather, no one was around pool, at that time of the year.
The pool was a very large, rectangular shaped pool. That was a hundred yards long, and fifty yards wide. With the pool facing long ways, away from the left side of the Devil's Hotel building.
The shallow end was six feet deep, with the shallow end being about a twenty percent of the pool floor, was on one long end of the pool, deep. With the shallow end dropping off, with the rest of the pool being thirty feet feet deep. The far deep end of the pulled had three different diving boards, at different heights, from three different parts of the side of the far deep end of the pool.
There were ladders at several points, along the sides of the pool, to allow people to get out. And the two far shallow end corners had small steps leading into the pool, with a stainless steel guard rail leading down the center each of the steps.
There was a concrete deck around the pool, that stretched almost to the buildings. The concrete was mixed with very small seashells. With the floor of the desk sanded, to be flat, and not have the seashells sharp edged cut the bare feet of the swims.
Except for the walked ways leading to the hotel and fence doors, there some dirt areas lining the pool area, around the privacy fence and building. With large bushes planted in the dirt areas.
On the outer hotel walls, there were black painted lamps. And along the fence, there were black painted lamps, of the same style, as those on the outer walls.
The pool itself was lined with padding, with a blue and white pattern. With the pooled itself using a saltwater regulation system, instead of chemicals, to keep things from growing in water of the pool.
Even in the autumn, as it was not, the hotel staff maintained the pool, and kept it clean. So, that even though, it was to cold to swim. Those customers that did check out the pool, would see it was well maintained. Allowing the hotel staff, to entice the customers to return to the hotel, during a warmer season of the year.
As Lee casually walked further outside, he saw that it had finally gotten dark. Though, the lamps on the outside walls, and fence, of the hotel, provided plenty of light to see with.
And Lee found the area to have the perfect eerie, yet comfortable, environment he needed to do some serious, deep thinking about his life.
Lee then opened his cold bottle of beer, in his left hand, and tossed the cap into a nearby trash can. Lee then began drinking from a bottle of beer, as he slowly walked around the outdoor pool at the Devil's hotel, in a clockwise rotation.
There was no one else there, and the solitude that Lee felt, let him relax enough think about how screwed up his life had become, compared to his already screwed up life.
Suddenly, Lee heard a female voice said, from behind him, “You look like a guy with a lot on his mind.”
Lee came to a stop. He calmly turned around, and he saw Natsuru, as a woman, wearing a simple blue pants, a white blouse, and blue tennis shoes, standing six feet from him.
Lee took another drink from his beer bottle. He then honestly answered, “You don't know the half of it.”
Natsuru offered, in a supportive tone of voice, “I am willing to listen. And I hope that by me doing so, it will help make up for our actions this morning.”
Lee mentally reflected, 'And I have to be careful about what I say to you. Still, you are trying to help. So, I will let you.'
Lee stated, “I am already over that... And alright, I will be honest with you. I am pretty much screwed. The hammer is falling down on me, and I cannot stop it.”
Natsuru asked, “How so?”
Lee replied, “I am a wanted man, back in the states. It doesn't matter if I did the crime, or not. The government wants my ass.”
Natsuru questioned, “What about the courts, and due process?”
Lee snorted, as he thought, 'Given I wrote it that you spent a few years as a cop, it is not surprising that you would bring up those details. Still...” Lee answered, in a sober tone of voice, “It seems due process, and justice, no longer exist in this world. Maybe such concepts never did, to begin with. But now, such concepts are like fairy tails. They don't exist here.”
Natsuru pointed out, “Are you so sure? We know you are friends with the local police chief.”
Lee inquired, “You heard about that?”
Natsuru commented, “After what you pulled in the casino, with that quote you made, at the moment the police showed up, everyone figured it out.”
Lee mentally reflected, 'Damn. I was worried that would happen. I knew if I ever quoted anything, or make any injokes, that it would get me in trouble. And I guess I am right. Also, Pedro was my ace in the hole, and I was forced to play that card in that game. Pun intended.'
Lee sighed. He then stated, “Ah, the casino game. I guess that was to be expected. Was Revy always this greedy?”
Natsuru replied, “She use to be a lot worse.”
Lee thought, 'Yes. Looting from the dead is about as greedy as one can get. Fortunately, she seems to have gotten much better, even before I wrote about her. She may have been a questionable influence on Rock. But, Rock was a good influence on her. That is why, even after everything I put them through, I made sure they stated together.'
Lee said, “I will take your word for that.”
Natsuru asked, “So, what is your relationship with Pedro? And why can he not help you with this?”
Lee thought, 'I might as well give her an answer. Ironically. Given our situations. It will be a fairly honest answer.'
Lee explained, “Well, to answer your questions. It is both a, yes and no, situation. It is more of a situation where we found ourselves in a mess, and we both are helping each other, as we try to work our way out of our mess. And I don't think he can help me with this. Before the talent contest, no one knew I was here. And the police chief could keep the heat off of me.”
“But, after the talent contest, and yesterday's poker game, there is not much he can do. While rumors of the talent contest only mentioned my presence in passing. After that poker game. Even if it is not directly hitting the media circuits. When a person wins a million dollars at the gaming tables. Even though I didn't get to keep any of the winnings. It is going to draw worldwide attention.”
“Everyone knows I am here. The problem is how they are going to come after me. And the police chief cannot protect me from that kind of heat.”
Natsuru suggested, “Then run, Lee”
Lee stated, with defeat, and tiredness, in his tone of voice, “Where? If you haven't noticed, I am don't have a lot of money. Plus, my options are extremely limited. I burned my passport, and other IDs, when I first got here, so no one could learn who I really am. So, I cannot leave this country. And I lucked out that the local government here ignores the strict Mexican immigration and foreigner laws. But, for me, there is nowhere left that I can run too.”
Natsuru began, “Well, I...”
From Natsuru's facial expressions and body language, Lee could tell she was mentally struggling with something important.
Lee mentally guessed, 'Yea. I know what you want to offer me the option of reality travel. But, Rock probably forbid you to mention that technology to outsiders. I am starting to regret making Rock so strict on that issue. Still, let us settle this before you say something you may regret later.'
Lee said, “Don't worry about it. I will deal with it myself.”
Lee saw Natsuru stopped mentally struggling with herself, as he body language and facial expression relaxed.
Natsuru inquired, with concern in her tone of voice, “Are you sure?”
Lee honestly replied, “No. But, I don't want to drag you into my mess.”
Natsuru grinned, as she said, “I appreciate that. Have a good night, Lee.”
Lee responded, “You too, Natsuru.”
Lee watched Natsuru turn around, and walk back inside the hotel.
Once Natsuru was out of sight, from the window paned double-hinged double-doors, that lead from the hotel interior, to the pool area, he turned around and started back to slowly walking around the pool, in a clockwise rotation.
And as Lee walked, he was careful not to get so caught up in his thoughts, that he accidentally fell into the pool.
While Lee slowly continued to walk around the pool, he though, with concern, and tiredness, 'I probably need to start trying to decide who to surrender too. I am not going to surrender to any government, over this. They will disappear me to some place where I would wish I was dead. I will kill myself first, before I willing go with them. Which, unfortunately, is an option.'
'If Natsuru, Ranma, and Akira were in charge of this hunt, I would likely have already surrendered to them. They are twisted, but I would likely weather the revenge they would have on me. And I would still be in one piece, afterward. They would likely also cure my cancer.'
'But, Rock and Revy are in charge. With Rock having one of the most creative, and devious minds, in the multiverse. And Revy. Well, I can name actual demons, across the multiverse, that are genuinely nicer than her, on some of her good days. Though, I have to admit, Revy has gotten a lot better, in her temperament, than she use to be.'
'Then, there is Eda and Yolanda. I haven't spoken much to Yolanda. But, all things considered. Given I restored her youth, and replaced her lost eye, I would guess I am in good standing with her. And I have no illusions about Eda. That was a one night stand, which meant nothing lasting between us. And we both slept with each other under false pretenses.'
'She pretending to be just a girl working a hamburger food truck, and I did not let her know that I was the writer she was hunting. People tend to become very unpredictable, and hypocritical, in such situations. And Eda can be just as dangerous, and scary, as Revy, when she wants to be. That is one coin toss I want to avoid flipping, unless I have no choice.'
'My instincts tell me not to discount Chang, as an option. The problem is I have no idea where I stand with him. I put that man through the ringer. I took him to the top of the world, in every possible way, and then I tore him down. Now, he is back on his way to the top, on my home Earth. Which honestly scares me on a few levels.'
'Still, River is clearly keeping my identity a secret, or I would be dead, or worse, right now. So that, and the gift she gave me this morning, are positive signs towards Chang's group.'
'Though, if I go to Chang, I need to take into account those under him, or nearby. Annie is likely on the fence. As long as I am nice to her, I probably have little to worry about from her.'
'Spike and Mal probably want my blood. And I am sure that many of the rank and file of Chang's employment, whom are mostly women, were under Chang's employment in Roanapur. And it is likely a number of the women I saw working at the casino, were originally men, that I had turned into women, and I had brainwashed. So, they are a question mark.'
'Though, given I have not seen any of the rank and file staff, looking around town for me. I can guess that Chang, and the others, have no informed them of my stories. And that more for me, in a number of ways, than against me.'
'Still, at worst, if the rank and file found out who I was, and what I did to them, they would likely just shoot me dead. Not a bad way to go, considering my other options. But, I doubt they would risk Chang's wrath.'
'Jet, Faye, River, and the rest of the Serenity crew could probably care less about me. Except, Jayne. Though, I gave him a good friend and drinking buddy, in the form of Bob. So, I think Jayne would probably just punch me in the jaw, or gut, and walk away.'
'I could confess to Sam. He seems like a nice guy. We agree we are good friends. If not best friends. And I know he has friends of questionable morality, whom probably have the resources, to at least help me escape this country, if I wanted too.'
'But, even if Sam believed me, it is toss up if he would help me. And I risk flushing my friendship with him down the toilet for keeping these major, life changing secrets, from him, for so long.'
'And now that I think about it, Pedro might be able to get me out of the county. But, like I said to Natsuru, there is nowhere for me to go. And the cancer is going kill me in a few months, anyway.'
'My situation is becoming a question of how, and where, I want to die?...'
'Though, whatever I decide, I am going to have to decide soon. If I don't, someone else, or the cancer, will decide for me.'
'But, for now, I need to get some sleep.'
Lee then finished his bottle of beer. After which, he began to head back inside the hotel.
Lee tossed his empty bottle of beer into the trash can, which he passed by, as he headed for the hotel doors.
Once Lee was inside the hotel, he headed for the hotel lobby, and the front elevator bay.
Soon after, Lee was on the third floor.
A minute later, he made it into his suite, where he would get some sleep, for the night.
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 1: “De La Plata Podrido.”
Chapter 17: “Crashing Down.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
Two days after the poker game between Lee and River, it was one five PM, on a cool, mostly cloudy day, with a light breeze.
Lee was coming back, in his pink Cadillac, to the Rats Nest, from having nice lunch at a wonderful cuban restaurant.
Presently, the windows and roof of Lee's Cadillac were raised.
When Lee reached the Rats Nest parking lot, to the left of the Rats Nest building, he parked his car near the back of the parking lot. So, it would not attract to much attention.
Lee got out, as he planned to head back into the bar, and wait for Sam to show up, to continue their poker game.
Lee and Sam had met that morning, at the Rats Nest. After Sam left a message at the Devil's Hotel check in desk, for Lee, to meet him at the Rats Nest bar, later that morning, right are the bar opened.
Later that morning, both Lee and Sam meet each other, in the Rats Nest parking lot. When they both parked their cars. Lee with his pink Cadillac. And Sam with his four door gray car.
They then both headed inside, and played poker, at their usual table, for over an hour. Then, when it was a quarter passed noon, they decided that it was time to get some lunch.
Though, the two men decided to get lunch at to different places. And with both of them having a car, this was not an inconvenience for either of them.
Now, at one five PM, Lee just had to wait for Sam to show back up, before they could continue to enjoy the afternoon together.
While Lee locked, and shut his car door, he heard thunder. He looked up at the ever darkening storm clouds.
Lee thought, 'This storm has been building all day. Except for that, this has been a good day weather wise. A nice pleasant breeze from the gulf, with cool temperatures. But, not cold. Still, I do not mind getting a little wet.'
'And I am glad that my car windows and roof are raised. So, I don't have to go to the trouble to do so, now.'
'Now, to get inside, before it starts to rain.'
Lee then walked around his car. As Lee walked to the side of the building, towards the front side of the Rats Nest bar, he noticed three men in casual clothing, consisting of pants and shirts. The three men were walking towards him, from across the street, from the Rats Nest bar parking lot.
What concerned Lee was that not only were the three men were approaching him, but they were doing so at a brisk pace.
Suddenly, Lee's precognition screamed danger.
Lee thought, with worry, 'If those men are who I think they are, I am screwed. And there is not time to get back into my car, or make it into the bar. I am going to have to run for it. Fortunately, passed the low hanging concrete wall behind the bar, there is an alleyway that leads into the heart of the city. And I know this town well enough, that if I can get there, I can lose them.'
Lee immediately turned around, and ran for the concrete wall.
As Lee started running, the three men behind him, gave chase.
It only took Lee two seconds to turned to his left side, as he leaned over, and rolled off the four foot tall the concrete wall behind the parking lot to the Rats Nest, with him landing on his feet. It was a trick that Sam had taught him in the time loop.
Once Lee was in the paved alleyway, on the other side of the wall, Lee started running down left of the Rats Nest bar building, away from the building and his car, as he headed towards the exit of the alleyway he wanted to go to.
With that exit to the alleyway, leading to two lane street, being sixty feet from where Lee entered the alleyway.
As Lee was running down the alleyway, Lee could hear the men chasing him, land onto the pavement of the alleyway. Their booted footsteps were loud enough that Lee could tell that they were only thirty feet away, and closing in on him.
Lee could see he was getting closer to the exit of the alleyway, as he thought, 'I just got to get to the exit, then I can lose them. After that, I will figure out what to do. I might have to surrender to someone. I am just not sure who.'
As Lee made it to twenty feet from the exit of the alleyway, a black van drove up in front of the exit, blocking the way.
Lee saw the right side of the van facing him. And through the windows, Lee noticed the driver sitting on the left side of the front seats of the van. On the right side of the van, directly facing Lee, was a large sliding door, that was currently closed.
A few seconds after Lee saw his exit had been cut off, he immediately came to a stop. He thought, 'If I believe what is about to happen, happens, I might as well take care of my hat and glasses, while I still have time.
Lee immediately took off his hat and glasses. He swiftly put his glasses in his left interior coat pockets. And he tucked his hat in the back of his pants, under his jacket.
Suddenly, Lee saw, in front of him, the sliding door to the van opened up, to reveal two men, in casual clothing, each with a sub-machine guns pointed at him.
One of the men yelled, in english, “Freeze.”
Lee thought, 'I have no other choice.' Lee immediately stopped moving, as he held up his hands.
Lee heard the three men from behind him finally catch up to him, and stop right behind him.
Lee remains expressionless, as he kept his hands in the air. He did not dare look behind him, nor make any sudden movements.
Though, Lee mentally screamed, 'Shit! What am I going to do now? None of my options are good. If someone is tailing me, these men are likely dead. But, if they are not, I am likely worse off.'
Lee felt one of the men, behind him, grip his right wrist, and hold it, behind Lee's lower back, with the man's on right hand. The man then reached up and gripped his left wrist, with the man's own left wrist, bringing it down, to Lee's lower back.
Lee then felt them slip on, and tighten plastic cuffs around his wrists, behind him lower back.
Lee thought, 'At least they are not too tight, and not blocking the blood circulation to my hands.'
From behind, another man swiftly slipped a black hood over Lee's head, blocking his sight.
Lee sarcastically thought, 'Just great. This is so cliche. Still, it is clear whomever is interested in me back home, does not want my capture to be on any official record. If that was not the case, they would have sent a Mexican state police officer to serve me an arrest warrant, back at the Devil's Hotel.'
Lee then felt sets of hands, on both side of his, grip his elbows, and force him to swiftly walk towards the van.
As they walked, in a hurried manner, Lee heard one of the men behind him say, “We have you now, scumbag.”
Lee did not respond.
A few seconds later, Lee felt himself being pushed into the van.
A couple of seconds afterward, Lee heard the others getting into the van, with the sliding door of the van being closed behind them.
(_)
At that moment, on the street, the van was park on, a hundred feet behind the back of the van, a pink motorcycle with a driver had just drove up onto the street, from around the corner, where the Rats Nest was.
The driver was dressed in white t-shirt, brown pants, brown belt, white tennis shoes, and a brown robes.
The driver also wore a brown helmet, with tinted visor, that completely covered their face and head. Along with that, there was a metal cylinder strapped to the right side of the person's belt.
As the black van drove off, the motorcycle and driver followed.
(_)
Inside the van, Lee felt the van begin to move. From the sound of the motor, revving up, their speed was picking very quickly.
Lee thought, 'They probably want to get out off this island, before anyone realizes I am missing.'
Just then, someone ordered, “Sitting on your knees, and bend downward.'
Lee complied.
Lee moved from his sitting position, to kneeling on both knees, on the vans bar metal floor, with him bending his upper body in a downward angle, towards the floor of the van.
Lee thought, 'This position is quite uncomfortable, and likely intentionally so. But, along with my cuffed hands, this position also prevents me from making any movements. Still, my conscience demands that I at least warn them about what is going on. Even if they won't listen to me.'
Through the hood cover his face, Lee stated, in a calm, yet clear, and strong tone of voice, in english, “I don't know what you have been told. But, you need to let me go, before the others after me, find us, and kill you all.”
Lee heard someone yell, “Shut up, traitor!”
Lee sadly thought, 'So, whatever lies they were told about me, involved false accusations of treason. That means I can never go home, again. Still, I have to try one more time.'
While making sure he did not sound desperate, Lee calmly stated, in a louder tone of voice, “I am not saying this for my benefit, but for yours! You have no idea what is really going on! And I am trying to save your lives!”
Lee suddenly felt a someone pull the back of his hood to were he leaned up.
Lee then felt the barrel of a gun press against his right temple, as he heard a male voice say, in english, “Shut up, or we will kill you! Understand?!”
Lee silently nodded.
Lee felt the barrel of the gun removed from his temple, as the same male voice said, “Good.”
Lee then was pushed back down into the crouching position
Lee thought, with annoyance, 'What idiots. And the worst part is they likely don't realize they are being used.'
(_)
At that moment, the captain of the black ops team that had just capture Lee, was sitting in the front passenger seat of the van, as one of his subordinates drove them as quickly out of town as possible.
Like the rest of his team, the captain was dressed in casual clothing. And they were all armed with pistols. A few of them even had a sub-machine guns, as well.
The captain had just listened to what their target has just said, as he thought, with concern, 'Even though we have the target, and we are heading out of this town, something does not feel right about the situation. This was suppose to be a simple snatch and grab operation. I was told this guy we got is a nobody whom got a hold of top secret information, and he fled to mexico to sell that information to the drug cartels. And by doing so, he is both a traitor, and a terrorist, to his country.'
'Yet, the way he was screaming at us, right now. It clear he is more concerned with our lives, than his own. A traitor and a terrorist would not be concerned for our lives. They would try to be cutting a deal, or something. This man is not.'
'Something odd is going on here.'
'This is further proven by the last few days we have been secretly following him on foot, and with this black van. The only ones he has talked to are some clearly insane women, a cute bartender, and bearded man.'
'And that poker game he was in, was just plain nuts.'
'He was clearly on the receiving end of that game, and was no friend to that casino owner. And what is with that owner and her girlfriend? Chang and River. They look like the characters with those same names, from those respective series. Except River dyed her hair red... But, that would be impossible...'
The captain then continued his thoughts, with even more concern, ''Though, now that I think about it. Those other girls the target was with looked familiar too... I think we may have stepped into something bigger, that our superiors didn't want us to learn about.'
Just as the captain was about to order the hood taken off Lee, to question him, his van came under attack.
Everyone in the van felt as the vehicle was turned on its left side, and slide to a stop, on the room. With the right side of the van, with the sliding door, facing upwards.
(_)
As Lee was left laying on the inside of the van, he heard the driver turned off the motor to the van.
A second later, a man asked, in english, “Is anyone hurt?”
Lee remained silent, as he heard other voices say, “No.”
The man then stated, “Alright. Get out. But, leave the target in the van.”
Lee thought, 'This is good. It means I have time to come up with a plan of escape. But, for now. I will listen, and hear how the situation plays out.'
(_)
The other men in the vehicle quickly opened the passenger and sliding doors, to get out.
As they swiftly got out, with them helped each other out of the van, and onto the ground, they noticed that the sky had gotten darker, with the clouds now blocking out most of the light. There was lightning a few miles away, that illuminated the area with flashes of lightning, accompanied with cracks of thunder.
When the men were all out of the van, and on the road, they had pulled out their weapons, as they looked around them.
Including the captain, there were seven men in total, in the group.
All of them had their weapons at the ready, as they looked around. Two of the men had sub-machine guns, while the others had their pistols drawn.
They all noticed there were no any vehicles pass by them, on the road, from either direction.
The captain looked around, as he thought, 'What tipped us over? I don't see anything. But, it had to be something. Still, we had just exited the town, with the buildings about a two hundred yards away from us. With the bridge right in front of us. And there was not on around, except for us. Not even any cars. Something is very wrong here.'
'Perhaps the target is telling the trouble. My orders, are orders. And I cannot just cut him loose, without a damn good reason.'
The captain then turned around, and he saw behind the van, about fifty feet from them, a woman in a brown robe, wearing a brown helmet over her face and head. She was standing beside a pink motorcycle, on the right side of the road. With both the woman and the motorcycle facing them.
The motorcycle was to the woman's left side.
The captain stated, “Six o'clock boys.”
All his men turned around, to see the woman and the motorcycle.
They watched as the woman the unstrapped a metal cylinder from her belt, and she held the item with both of her hands.
Suddenly, they watched as a red energy blade extended from the cylinder, upward, and away from the woman. With blade being around three feet long.
The captains eyes went wide, as he thought, 'Is that?... It is. And it is red!'
Then, the men watched as the pink motorcycle transformed into a tall, pink robot, whom was holding a flaming sword, in each of her two hands.
The captain thought, 'Oh shit. The target was right. We didn't know what is going on. And if that robot is who I think it, we are not getting out of this alive. But, we still have to try.'
The captain ordered, “Fire men! Fire!”
As the men started firing their weapons, the woman used her lightsaber to deflected the bullets that approached her, while the bullets bounced off the pink robot. With both the woman and the robot charging at the men.
Within a few seconds, the woman and the robot bridged the gap between them and the men.
As the two reached the men, they started using their energy weapons to literally slice through the men, with the men dying before their body parts hit the ground.
The captain was the last one remaining alive, as the woman and robot approach him.
A second before the two reached the captain, the captain ran out of ammo, as he thought, 'A Sith, and IDW Arcee. At least I am going to be killed by the best.'
A split second later, the woman used her lightsaber to decapitate him, killing him instantly.
(_)
Meanwhile, several seconds later, inside the back of the van, during on its left side, Lee was still laying on his side, on the interior left wall of the van.
Lee thought, 'Well, the gunfire stopped. So, whatever happened outside is over. The question is what is going to happen now? With the van tipped over, if these men won, they might just cut their losses, kill me, and escape the island on foot.'
'If someone else won, and left on their own, without checking the van. I may have to spend the next little while getting loose from my bindings. But, I know I can do it. It will just take time.'
Suddenly, Lee feel large metallic hands gently left him out of the van and set him on the onto the pavement, in a sitting position.
Then, some mysterious force remove his hood from his head, and snapped his plastic cuffs to pieces.
Lee quickly brought his hands around to his front, as he used his hands to rub his wrists, while he looked up to see his rescuers, standing ten feet in front of him.
While there was still enough light coming through the clouds to see whom his rescues were, it did begin to lightly rain.
And he forced him to remain calm, as he immediately recognized his two rescuers.
In front of him, to his left, stood Annie, whom had her lightsaber deactivated, and hooked to the right side of her belt. In addition, she tucked her helmet under her right arm.
To Lee's right side, standing to Annie's left side, was Arcee, in robot mode, with her swords sheathed.
He thought, 'It might be best to remain calm. And not just for the fact that Annie would immediately pick up something if I wasn't calm. But, these two are likely the two most dangerous women in the city. And given the women I deal with, everyday, in this city. That is saying a lot.'
Lee then looked around and he saw the sliced remains of the men that had kidnapped him.
Lee swiftly pulled out and pulled out his hat and glasses, as he grimly thought, 'Looks like I was wrong about Annie preferring to take the non-violent approach.'
Annie asked, in english, “Lee, are you unharmed?”
Lee looked over at her, as he thought, 'Given the poker game. It is no surprise that both of them know my name.' He answered, “I will be fine.”
Annie then walked over to Lee, and offered him a hand up.
Lee accepted Annie's right hand, with his own right hand.
As Lee stood up, Annie continued to hold his hand, as she stated, “You are ill, Lee. Very ill.”
Lee looked into Annie's eyes, as he gently used his left hand to grip Annie's right hand. He quietly said, “I know.”
Lee and Annie then let go of each other, and they both dropped their hands to their sides.
Arcee stated, in english, “Lee is dying. I believe the illness is called, cancer. And the cancer has riddled his body. The illness appears terminal.”
Lee turned to look at both women at the same time, as he admitted, “I am aware of this.”
Arcee commented, “That actually explains a lot.”
Lee inquired, “What do you mean?”
Lee then noticed that the lips of both women curled into smirks, towards him.
Lee realized, as he thought, with more out of concern, than worry, 'Oh crap. They know. But, how?' He said, “You both know? Don't you?”
Arcee continued to smirk at Lee, as she said, “Yes.”
Annie smirked, as well. She replied, “Anyone else would be presently freaking out by seeing Arcee in robot mode, me with my lightsaber, and this carnage around us.”
Lee thought, 'My poker face finally came back to bite me. Still, it is best to be polite.' He complimented, “Well, you two do excel in the carnage department.”
Both women giggled, for a few seconds, at Lee's comment.
Lee thought, 'Good. I made them happy. And while I am not happy that lives were lost, today. Given they had kidnapped me, and what was likely going to happen to me, if they had accomplished their mission, I feel nothing towards these men's deaths.'
As the two women calmed down, Arcee guessed, “So, you are trying to steal one of the reality devices, from Revy and her friends, in the hopes of not only escaping from them, into the multiverse? But, to also find a cure for your cancer?”
Lee stated, “Yes. To both questions.”
Annie pointed out, “I am sure you are aware that Bob was not able to find a cure for B's cancer? Except for the vat treatment.”
Lee flatly admitted, “Yes. I am aware of that, given I wrote the story in question. And I realize that story has now come back to bite me in the ass, big time.”
The two women erupted into full blown laughter, for a few seconds.
As they calmed down, Lee said, “Still, I have to try.”
Arcee stated, “Good luck.”
Annie then did a Yoda interpretation, as she said, “Do. Or, do not. There is no try.” She then added, in her normal voice, “That is for making me the butt of all those Star Wars jokes.”
Lee could not help both laugh with the two women.
As all three calmed down, Lee commented, “I am not going to apologize for the jokes. It felt like they wrote themselves. But, I did make the jokes clean, and they are not insulting. Just slightly annoying.”
Annie conceded, “True. Which is why I have not force choked you a little, over the matter.”
Lee asked, “And I appreciate that. Onto a more immediate concern. You two are not going to harm, or kill me, for what I did to you.”
Arcee replied, “Nah. Why would I? You gave me some greats friends, some good times, and a nice moonlighting job, with an employer I respect.”
Annie admitted, “Though, I am a little miffed with you, concerning a few things. You did get me out of that black suit, and made my body healthy again. So, no. I am not going to do anything to you.”
Lee breathed a sigh of relief. He then inquired, “Thank you. Now, one more question. You are not going to tell the others, are you? If so, please let me get to my car, and give me a day's head start.”
Annie said, “No. I do not plan too.”
Arcee smiled wickedly, as she replied, “There would be no fun in telling others. Not even Chang.”
Annie said, “Still, Chang wants to see you. And given this kidnapping attempt. I think it might be best if you come with us.” She mentally added, 'And since Chang asked us to follow you, I think he already figured out, who you are, Lee. Or, River told him. Though, knowing River, it is more likely Chang just figured out your identity, on his own.'
Lee stated, “I think you are right. I would prefer to see Chang, over what those guys likely had planned for me.”
Annie replied, “I agree.”
Arcee commented, “I will be ready in a second.”
The two humans then turned to look at Arcee. A second later, the two humans watched as Arcee transformed into motorcycle mode.
Lee thought, with astonishment, 'That is impressive. Though, I wonder...' He questioned, “I take it seeing that transformation, in person, never gets old?”
Annie cracked a grin, as she happily stated, “Nope. It never does.”
Annie then put up her brown helmet back on. Next, she got onto the motorcycle, with Lee getting on the bike, behind her.
As Lee got comfortable on the seat, he adjusted his blue baseball cap backwards, so the wind would not knock it off his head. He then said, “Just so you know. Given the way motorcycle safety is. I have to put my arms around your waist, while we ride. I do not mean to offend you.”
Arcee commented, from the speakers of her motorcycle mode, “He is correct.”
Annie said, “Okay. You may do so.”
Lee carefully put he arms around Annie's lower waist, while being extra careful not to accidentally brush against Annie's breasts.
Annie then started the motorcycle, and they roared down the down the road.
Fortunately, Lee's glasses and cap did much to protect his eyes and the top of his head. But, the rain drops still slightly stunt on the exposed parts of his face and hands, as they rode down the street.
A few minutes later, they reached the casino, and entered the back garage, through on of the back bays, that Arcee used a frequency signal to open.
After they rolled to a stop, inside an open area of the garage, Arcee then sent a signal for the garage door she used, to start to close.
The door closed, as both Lee and Annie got off the bike.
Lee then turned his baseball cap, around, clockwise, so the cap faced the right way. Fortunately, Lee's hair was so short, shift his cap like that did not bother him.
As soon as they got off of Arcee, the autobot transformed into robot mode. Fortunately, the garage was tall enough for Arcee to fully stand inside of.
Annie took off her helmet, and set it on a near by table.
Meanwhile, Lee looked around. Fortunately, the yellow ceiling lights in the room, provided plenty of illumination.
Lee saw that part of the garage was like an auto mechanic pit, while the other parts were parking spaces for Chang's fleet of cars and limo. Along with a few trucks.
Suddenly, Lee heard a female voice, to his right side, say, in english, “Hi guys.”
Lee turned to see Kaylee, wearing pink shirt, under green coveralls and black boots. The green coveralls were only zipped up to Kaylee's stomach, to show her pink shirt underneath.
Kaylee was about twenty feet from the three other individuals in the large room.
Annie and Arcee also turned to Kaylee.
Annie said, “Hi Kaylee.”
Arcee asked, “Hello Kaylee. How is the job going?”
Kaylee answered, “Great. It is always fun working on classic machines. Still, I think you are the most classiest.”
Arcee grinned towards Kaylee, as she replied, “Thank you.”
Lee thought, 'Well, I guess I was right about Kaylee job, and her mood at her new job. Damn. I am good at this.'
Kaylee then turned to Lee, as she asked, “Who is this?”
Annie introduced, “This is Lee. Chang wants to have a talk with him.”
Kaylee inquired, “So, you are the guy that beat, River?”
Lee answered, “Yes.”
Kaylee commented, “You don't look like much.”
Lee could here Arcee and Annie snickering beside him.
Lee thought, 'Compared to the men you work with, probably not. Still, it is best I don't stay here too long.' He said, “Perhaps. Well anyway, I don't want to keep Chang waiting.”
Kaylee said, “It would be unwise to keep him waiting. Anyway, nice to meet you.”
Lee replied, “Same here.”
Annie turned to Arcee, as she said, “I will see you later, Arcee.”
Arcee looked over and down, at Annie, as she commented, “I look forward to it.”
Lee turned to Arcee, as he said, “It was nice to meet you are Arcee.”
Arcee turned to Lee, as she replied, “Same here, Lee.”
Annie looked over at Lee, as she stated, “This way, Lee.”
Lee then followed Annie deeper into the hotel, and to a nearby door, to one of the back hotel hallways.
As soon as Annie and Lee were out of earshot, Kaylee turned to Arcee, as she commented, “Given how backwater this planet is, Lee sure is handling meeting a large talking robot, such as yourself, very well.”
Arcee turned to look at Kaylee. She thought, 'It might be best not to tell her. Still, I have to give her some excuse... Ah, that will work.' She said, “From what I have been informed, he has been living around Revy and the others for months, at the other hotel, on the north end this island. At this point, I doubt anything surprises him anymore.”
Kaylee giggled for a few seconds. She then responded, “Yea. Being around those lunatics for an extended among of time, would harden just about anyone to surprises. That is probably only of the reasons he was able to beat River.”
Arcee honestly asked, “I guess so. Did you lose any money on that game?”
Kaylee answered, “A little. But, just a little. You?”
Arcee stated, “Actually, I made a little money. I bet on Lee.”
Kaylee inquired, “Not complaining. But, why did you bet on Lee?”
Arcee smirked, “Because, by nature, I am a risk taker. And I figured that River was such a sure bet, that I would take a risk and bet on Lee. And I am glad I did... He has definitely been very rewarding to me.” She mentally added, 'In ways I cannot tell your right now, without giving away Lee's identity.'
Kaylee laughed for several seconds. She then stated, “Only you, Arcee. Only you.”
In response, Arcee smiled towards Kaylee.
The two friends then continued their conversation, for a little while. Before they went back to their duties.
(_)
Meanwhile, Annie silently escorted Lee to the back elevator bay.
They walked side by side. With Annie to Lee's left side.
As they passed by the enclosure, Lee saw the tiger inside, playing with a large ball.
While they walked, Lee asked, “So, how is the tiger?”
Annie answered, “She is doing fine. Why do you ask?”
Lee coyly said, “Just wondering.”
Annie stated, “Well, I did hear a rumor that the tiger to loose, and mauled some poor guy.”
Lee shrugged, as he responded, “Actually, the tiger didn't maul me. She even let me pet her. And I was able to get her into the enclosure before one of us was hurt.”
Annie turned to Lee, as she inquired, with a bit of surprise in her tone of voice, “That was you?”
Lee answered, “Yes.”
Annie asked, “How did you keep that tiger calm?”
Lee answered, “Most animals, such as cats and dogs, even large cats and dogs, can sense a person's inner emotions. I just kept calm, and I used my experience with pet cats to help keep the tiger from harming me, and convincing her to walk into the enclosure.”
Annie complimented, “Nice work.”
Lee mentioned, “Well, that, and the fact that I am so use to having to deal with Revy and her group, on a daily basis, that a tiger is tame in comparison.”
Annie laughed, for a few seconds. She then said, “No arguments there.”
They then reached the back elevator bay, and turned enter inside.
Several seconds later, Annie used a key that she had, on the panel back, by the doors to the express elevator. She then called down the express elevator, and put away her key.
A few seconds later, the doors to the elevator opened, and they both road up to the elevator to the penthouse floor.
(_)
Two minutes later, Annie and Lee mean it to the penthouse floor, and the exit the elevator. With the elevator doors closing behind them.
Annie then lead Lee down the hallways, to Chang's office.
When they reached the door to Chang's office, Annie came to a stop, with Lee standing beside her.
While the door was closed, and Annie just opened the door, without announcing herself.
As she did so, Lee saw Chang was male, and that he sitting in his chair, behind his desk. He had on his black suit, black long, and sunglasses.
Annie stated, “I have brought Lee here, unharmed.”
Chang looked up at the two of them. He said, in english, “Thank you, Annie. I can take it from here.”
Annie turned Lee, as she said, “Good luck.”
Lee looked over at Annie, as he sincerely replied, “Thank you.”
Annie then turned, and walked away from Lee, and down the hallway.
Lee turned back to Chang, to see the man looking back at him.
Chang said, “Please, come in. And close the door behind you.”
Lee thought, 'It might be best to keep the door open. But, he clearly does not want that.'
Lee then walked into the office, while leaving gently closed the door behind him.
As Lee came with ten feet of Chang's desk, he saw Chang get up from his seat, and walked around his desk, to standing right in front of his desk, between the two chairs in front of his desk.
Lee immediately came to a stop. Though, he took no other actions, as he did his best to remain calm, and maintain his poker face.
Both men were standing about set feet front each other.
Chang commented, “I see you made a good impression with, Annie.”
Lee honestly replied, “Yes. I feel that it is always best to be polite.”
Chang thought, 'You really are a gentleman, Lee.' He said, “I do not disagree.”
Lee calmly inquired, “So, what do you want to talk about?” He thought, 'Depending on his this goes. I might be able to walk out of here, within ten minutes, without giving away too many more of my secrets to him. Especially, the secret that I am the, writer, whom every seems to be looking for.'
'Still, with that attempt kidnapping. It might be wise to see what Chang has to say. I might be able to get something out of him, with little risk to myself.'
Chang said, “Well, it is not often that someone can fool me. But, you are a rare exception.”
Lee thought about his options, 'Okay. This is not good. He knows I have lied to him. The question is which lie is he referring to? I might be able to salvage this situation.'
Lee admitted, “In order to survive, I have told many lies. As paradoxical as it is, in all honesty, I don't know which lie you are referring to.”
Chang smirked, as he coyly said, “Paradoxical... Not many people use that word, while talking to other people. It is kind of rare word to use in a conversation. Those that do so have a better command of the english language than most people. Such as poets, singers, and writers.”
Lee did not show outward reaction to Chang's comment, as he mentally screamed, 'He knows!'
Chang continued grinning, as he complimented, “You have developed one hell of a poker face not to show any outward sign that I have figured out that you are the writer, that so many people are looking for.”
Lee looked away from Chang, way showing a scowl on his face. He thought, 'It seems this poker face is starting to backfire on me, more often. That is not good. But, that is a concern for another time... If there is another time.'
Lee then dropped his scowl, as he let out a deep breath. He turned to look at Chang's face, as he continued his thoughts, 'Well, there nothing I can presently do about that. Right now, I should focus on damage control.'
Lee continued to look at Chang's face, as he conceded, “Alright. Did River tell you?”
Chang stated, “No.”
Lee asked, “So, what gave me away?”
Chang held up his right hand, with four right fingers being pointed upward, and away from each other, while his right thumb was tucked into his palm, as it faced Lee.
Chang answered, “Four things.” He then dropped his right hand back to his side.
Chang continued, “Revy said you do not know anything about anime. Yet, right after the casino game, you verbally recognized the music song, Velveteen, from the Ghost in the Shell anime. Next, is that quote you made from the movie, Hot Fuzz. A favorite of mine, as well. That movie is practically soft core porn for the genre savvy. Then, there was that little tiger incident a few days ago. You are hiding your badass traits very well.”
Lee thought, 'I am glad you think that, Chang.'
Chang continued, “Also, I realized who you were hiding these traits from. Rock and Revy. You revealed that, when you whispered to me that Pedro was your friend. You are clearly playing a con on someone. That I had guessed after doing research on you and Sam.”
At the mention of Sam's name, Lee remained calm on the outside, as he thought, with concern, 'It is best I don't mention Sam's name. His thoughts and comments might gloss over Sam. And thus, he will think about something else. Which will help to protect Sam. While if I mention Sam's name, that will cause Chang to be more focused on Sam, and put Sam's life in danger.'
Chang went onto say, “And given you did not want Rock and Revy to know, they, and their friends, are the ones you are playing your con against. Given how open that group of women is with being violent, only the writer of those stories would risk trying to con anything out of them.”
Lee thought, 'You are right about that. And I am just desperate enough to commit to such a con.'
Chang stated, “From there it was a simple matter of backtracking your actions, while being in this town. And my, you have had quite the secret adventure.”
Lee raised an eyebrow, as he responded, “You don't know the half of it. Still, it is always the little details. Isn't it? So, what now?”
Chang explained, “Now, we talk. Then, I decide what to do with you. Maybe I will let you go. Maybe I will turn you over to Revy and the others. Be happy, that I have no intentions of turning you over to the Lovelace maids.”
Lee poker mask shattered, as he slightly paled, at the mention of the Lovelace maid. Lee quickly stated, “Thank you. Thank you, very much.”
Chang chuckled, as he thought, 'So, you can keep cool in front of Revy, River, or me. But, you crack at the mere possibility of facing the Lovelace maids. At least you understand how dangerous Roberta and Fabiola are.'
As Chang slowly stopped chuckling, he replied, “You're welcome.”
By then, Lee was able to emotionally collect himself. He asked, “Well... So, how do you want to have this conversation? This is the first time I have actually talked to someone, of whom I wrote about, in an open and honest way. This is kind of a strange situation for me.”
Chang let out a small laugh. He then said, “I guess it would be for you. Well, you can relax. As long as you keep me happy, and humored, you will be fine.”
Lee said, “Humor is one of my more enjoyable talents.”
Chang replied, “Oh yes. I still haven't forgotten that joke during the beginning of your poker game with River?”
Lee mentally lamented, 'Ah yes. He must be referring to the, hung like and elephant joke.' He verbally defended, “Think of it as a compliment. And there was no other way I could think of to distract River, in a manner that would keep her happy.”
Chang admitted, “You accomplished that quite well. She has even shown concern for you.”
Lee responded, “That is nice to know. Now, while I am sure that Rock was willing to let go of the, office girl, joke. How upset was Revy with the, Daisy Dukes, joke?”
Chang asked, “She was very upset. But, we were able to get her to calm down. So, where did you learn Chinese, and the other languages from. You speak the same dialect as Shenhua?”
Lee admitted, “I was afraid someone was going to notice that. It figures that it would be you. Well, right before you showed up, on November Second, the Day of the Dead, everyone on this planet got caught up in a time loop.”
Chang responded, with interest in his tone of voice, “Really? And let me guess. You are the only one that remembers?”
Lee answered, “Yes. It was a time loop that only I remember.”
Lee thought, 'Except Harvey, in Violin's mind. But, I am not going to mention that to you.'
Lee went onto say, “It was like a groundhog's day time loop rules. Only, if I didn't die, nor try to leave this reality, everything reset at midnight, to five in the morning.”
Chang said, “That must have been an interesting experience.”
Lee smiled, as he stated, “It was. And after I worked some pranks out of my system, I used my time wisely. I learned a lot. Including several languages. How I learned chinese was I conned Shenhua into teaching me.”
Chang requested, with eagerness evident in his tone of voice, “Please, tell me more.”
Lee thought, 'Well, I think I will leave out a lot of the more interesting talents I learned. And some of the more personal things I have done, including that story I typed. Along with some embarrassing personal details I learned about others. Also, I will not mention who is behind the time loop. Still, there is still plenty of things I can tell Chang, to humor him with.'
Lee smirked, as he began, “With pleasure...”
(_)
Over the next, ten minutes, Lee gave an abbreviated version of his time in the time loop. From some of the pranks he pulled. To some of the music, artistic, and language talents he learned. And how he had a fun time enjoying the time loop.
There was a lot of laughter from both of men.
Lee concluded his story, “I eventually reached the point where I was the life of the party, every night. Where I dressed in a black dress shoes, a pink tuxedo, with a pink top hat, pink sunglasses, and a feather boa.”
Chang snickered, as he happily admitted, “I am having trouble imagining you wearing that. That is really flamboyant. I am talking rock star flamboyant.”
Lee smirked, as he stated, “I know. But, remember the, no consequences, part of the time loop. I never abused it. But, I did use it. I did am amazingly embarrassing things. But, considering I was the only one that would remember my actions, it got to the point where doing such things didn't bother me that much.”
Chang replied, “I see your point.”
Lee went onto say, “Anyway, after playing one hell of a set on stage. And sometimes the dance floor. I started meeting the two hot, hispanic, identical, twin babes, every night. And we had sex until midnight. And I got to do it all over again.”
Chang was unable to remove the grin from his face, as he thought, 'Now, this guy had truly lived in that time loop. And I got a feeling some fun stuff happened, then. That he has not mentioned.'
'I think I will table to cancer discussion with him, for later. Perhaps for another day. Mentioned that would ruin the mood, and likely cause him to stop answering my questions.'
'Now, about the time loop. I wonder...'
Chang complimented, “Now, that is smooth, like glass. So, how did you get out of the time loop?”
Lee flatly stated, “I am not allowed to tell you. And please do not ask me that question, again. There are those I fear upsetting more than you.”
Chang thought, 'Someone was behind the time loops. Someone intentionally created the time loops. Lee knows who, but he knows better to say who it is. And I have no interest in upsetting someone that can bend reality. So, I will let the matter drop.'
Chang inquired, “Okay. Let's get back to these pranks. So, you made fun of female Rock taking it up the ass by a male Revy, and you got away with it?” Chang could not help but start laughing some more, as he thought about that prank which Lee pulled.
Lee also chuckled, as he replied, “Yep.”
A few seconds later, both men calmed down.
Chang wiped a laughter induced tear from his eye, under his shades, as he commented, “I got the feeling you did that more than once.”
Lee smiled wickedly. He casually said, “I did it seven times.” He shrugged, as he continued, “But, whose counting?”
Chang could not help himself, as he laughed some more.
As Chang laughed, Lee thought, 'Good. I got him happy. Real happy. Now, to add to his mirth.'
Lee mentioned, “Now, not all my pranks were intentional. Some, were accidental. Such as what happened with Shenhua, that indirectly involved a cherry bomb.”
By then, Chang had been able to make himself calm down. Chang then accused, “You didn't.”
Lee responded, “I did. I flushed a lit cherry bomb down a toilet, in the men's restroom, in the Devil's Hotel lobby. How was I suppose to know that the plumbing was directly linked to the women's restroom on the other side of the wall? And that Shenhua was sitting on the toilet at the time, in the women's restroom, next door?”
Chang started laughing again, to the point he had to place a hand on his desk, to steady himself, and prevent himself from falling on the floor laughing.
As Chang laughed, he thought, 'Lee really would do good as a stand up comedian.'
After Chang calmed down a little, just enough to speak, he stated, “Shenhua killed you for doing that? Didn't she?”
Lee said, “Yes. I don't blame her for doing so. And she was so quick that I was back in my bed, in the next reset before I knew what had happened.” Lee smiled, as he continued, “But, it was still worth it.”
Chang asked, “So, how did you con the girls into teaching you these lessons? I take it that Shenhua taught you to throw knives? And that is where you learned to throw playing cards?”
Lee answered, “Yes. Shenhua was the one to teach me that skill. And conning them to teach me lessons for free was real easy. I just appealed to their greed. I offered them two grand a day, for two hour daily lessons. Hit reset, and repeat. And they never actually got to keep the money.”
Chang thought, with amusement, 'This is beyond having a death wish. This is flat out insanity. And he actually pulled it off.' Chang commented, “Now, that is mean. And you better pray that those women never remember what you have done to them, during these time loops. I know they already have some painful plans for you. But, if they did ever remember what you did to them, what they will do to you will make hell itself recoil in horror.”
Lee calmly agreed, with a straight face, with no sign of fear of the consequences of his actions, “You are probably right.”
Chang inquired, “Besides the time loop, any other interesting things happen to you?”
Lee thought, 'I might as well partly tell him.' He stated, “Well, after the time loop ended, I met some amazons, from the future, that tried to come after me, for being the writer.”
Chang guessed, “Well, if this reality works on the rules you in the stories. Chances are that you finally found a way to escape this reality.”
Lee agreed, “That is what I am thinking.”
Chang casually asked, “So, what type of amazons were they? Space amazons? Chinese amazons? Greek amazons? Which amazons?”
Lee realized the oxymoron of the situation, of both the absurdity and seriousness of Chang's questions. Lee slowly said, “We have definitely lead interesting lives.”
Chang smirked, as he stated, “You got that right.”
Lee commented, “To answer your question. Chinese amazons. And I know better than to try to fight them.”
Chang agreed, “Given their dating and killing rules. Fighting those girls is a catch twenty-two.”
Lee replied, “Exactly.”
Chang inquired, “So, what happened?”
Lee coyly responded, “Once they realized that taking me with them, would cause a reality breaking paradox. Including the sky technicolor. They left me alone, and left this reality.”
Chang commented, “Good. Still, given the way you act, I don't think you have a clue of whom you are dealing with?”
Lee inquired, “Are you referring to the girls? Or, yourself.”
Chang answered, “Both.”
Lee stated, “I must know a few things, considering I am still breathing.”
Chang conceded, “True. I will give you that one.”
Lee said, “Let us take you for example. You are more loyal to others, than you let on.”
Chang thought, 'Lee, I would like to see where you go with this.' Chang stated, “You seem to think that I am some one that is loyal to others.”
Lee responded, “Yes. And I do know of the story that your subordinates, in the triad, were told, of how you joined their ranks.”
Chang smirked, as he requested, “Refresh my memory.”
Lee stated, “They were told that you killed your Hong Kong Police partners for the Dia Lo of the Triad, for money, and likely a position within the Triad.”
Chang sarcastically interrupted, “And you think I did it for my dear old mother?”
Lee flatly replied, “No.”
Lee's simple reply, which was the opposite to what Chang was expecting, caught Chang off guard.
Lee explained, in a calm tone of voice, “You are a very complex person, Chang. Anyone who took the time to study you would realize that. You do not do things for simple reasons. You think of life as a game. And you are correct. Life is a game. And everyone is a chess piece. There are only three other people I can think of that came play this game, at your level. Scorpius, David Xanatos, and Fox Xanatos.”
Chang thought, 'Now, that is a high compliment.' He said, “Thank you.”
Lee went onto say, “You're welcome. That being said. I honestly don't think you would kill a bunch of people that you worked with, just for money, and an entry level position, as a crook for the mafia. Even a low level cop would have more power than that position. If that cop played their situation well enough. Even from a corrupt standpoint.”
Chang mentally reflected, 'He is correct about that.'
Lee stated, “No. It had to be something else. Maybe they did something you disagreed with. Maybe you found out one of them had committed a horrible crime, under the guise of their authority, as a cop, with the rest of the police force covering up the crime. Such as one of the cops you knew may have falsely arrested a teenage girl, and then later raped her in a jail cell. It was not be the first time that has happened.”
Chang grimly thought, 'Like what happened to Revy.'
Lee said, “Learning such a crime, and cover up... From those you previously trusted... That would make a person become disgusted with the authority of the law. And make him start to feel like he is wading through a giant sea of shit.”
Chang sadly thought, 'My own words come back to haunt me.'
Lee stated, “Yet. It might have been something more simple. Maybe they pissed on your shoes one too many times. Maybe they did not respect you at all, and treated you like shit. And all the Triad did was make you a better offer. Or, maybe you have been a long term spy for the Hong Kong police, and you eventually realized you had a better deal where you were at, in the mafia. Or, your superiors cut you loose, leaving you in a situation that you could not get out of. So, you made the best of your situation.”
“I don't know... But, I do know this, you are a far more a loyal person than you give yourself credit for. For example, so far, I have never seen you waste resources. You don't waste lives. You don't torture, or kill, without reason. Take for example when those muslim terrorists, whom attacked Lagoon Company's apartment, with the RPG attack. Then, trying to storm the apartment complex, with armed personnel. At the beginnings of that Basilan island incident.”
Chang thought, 'I remember that first hand. Along with watching it from the point of view of both the anime, and reading the manga version.'
Lee said, “You knew how dangerous the situation was. But, instead of sending your men out, into the hallway, first, to deal with the situation. You, and Revy, went out first. If you were not a loyal person, you would have sent your subordinates out first, and likely to their deaths.”
“I think when it is all said and done. You are just a man whom thinks he lived in a fucked up world, and you are just trying to make the best of your situation. I can honestly sympathize with you.”
Lee saw that Chang's face was unreadable.
Chang sternly thought, 'While he is polite. He is also arrogant. I need to bring him down a notch.'
Chang then used his right hand to reach in his coat, behind his lower back, to pulled out one of his semi-automatic pistols. As soon as he pistol was out in the open, he used his left hand to pull back the slide, sending a round into the chamber, and cocking the hammer. He then pointed the end of gun barrel at Lee's head. Right between Lee's eyes.
Chang noticed that Lee did not reaction to the threat, and instead just continued looking at him, towards his sunglasses.
Chang thought, 'I should not be surprised. He has been living around Revy, Shenhua, and the others for a long time. Having a gun pointed to his head is likely one of the least threatening things he has had happen to him, while on this island. I am going to have to back up my action, with words.'
Chang coldly stated, “You think you know me. You think you can get inside my head. You think this world can handle badasses like me, and my associates.”
A few seconds later, Lee began to genuinely laugh at Chang, as Chang continued to point his gun at Lee's head.
Chang thought, with concern, 'You really are crazy.'
Lee smirked, as he said, “You think you can mind screw with me, by simply pointing a gun to my head. Counting the time loop, I have been constantly dealing with Revy and her lunatic fringe for way longer than you have. And I have been doing it up close and personal. While, you always, wisely kept your distance. You see, I am not the one getting their minds screwed with. When someone is getting their mind screwed, I am the one holding the screwdriver!”
While Lee's smile did not disappear, Chang saw that Lee's eyes hardened. Lee stated, “We both know, that until you get your answers from me. Which I am more than happy to freely give. You are not going to kill me. If you do kill me, we both know that word will get back to the girls, likely along with the fact that I am the writer. And neither of us want to risk the wrath of Revy, and her friends. That is why I am in hiding, and you basically set up shop on the other side of this island, from where they are staying.”
“And if you just try to hurt me, I will show you what I really can do. And while you will likely taken me down, eventually, I promise you are going to feel what I do to you, tomorrow morning. And it will not be a pleasant experience.”
Lee continued, in a direct, dangerous tone of voice, “Now, put away away your gun, and act like the magnificent bastard, we both know you are, and whom I have come to admire and respects.”
Lee could see from the look in Chang's eyes that was thinking about what he had said.
Chang mentally grumbled, 'At least he admires and respects me. And he does have a point. I guess this attempt to bring him down a notch, backfired. And he called my bluff. Which for a poker player of his skill, is par for course.'
Chang set the safety to his weapon. Next, he reached underneath his coat, and behind his lower back to holster his weapon, by his other semi-automatic.
Chang then let both his hands drop to his side, as he said, “Alright. You called my bluff. And I do have questions for you. And since you are willing to answer my questions. I will not threaten you any more. Now, my first question is why do you think this world can handle badasses like me, and my friends?”
Lee continued grinning. He was still slightly laughing, as he answered, “Simple. You actually think you know this world. You think this world is less badass than the home realities of your and your friends. It isn't. It is even more badass than you home realities. Where do you think our inspiration came from? And this world is far more messed up than yours ever could be. And a hell of a lot more dangerous.”
“Let us start with a straight out, badass example. Audie Murphy, the most decorated U.S. soldier in World War II. There was nothing really special about Audie background before the war. He was from Texas. And yes. We of the South breed badasses. He even had the usual screwed up childhood that he was able to get over. Unlike others, such as Revy.”
“Audie was just an average guy showing how badass awesome an average guy could be. Audie was so average was the first time he tried to join the U.S. military, all four branches. Army, Airforce, Marines, and the Navy. All four rejected him for being too average. Finally, the military accepted Audie, and Audie proved himself so badass that God had to give him malaria for the duration of the war, so he won't win the war all by himself.”
“For lack of a better term. When is comes to average people you know. The closest person you personally know, that could be compared to Audie, in your reality is, Benny. Not Rock. Benny. I have no doubt in my mind that Audie, in his prime, could have taken down, Roberta. Yes, even with Roberta's badassness, super-soldier serum, and cybernetics, Audie was so badass in his prime that he could have taken her down. Maybe the Audie of your world was reincarnated as Roberta. It would explain why she is such a badass.”
“Trust me. DNA and training can only go so far. The rest is just pure, raw human spirit.”
“Sometimes, I wonder if Balalaika is a reincarnation of Patton. It would make so much sense. Both were badass leaders that lead from the front. The comparisons even go right down to both of them being screwed over by their superiors over a single event. With a single incident severely injuring them.”
“Only, Patton died of his injures. While Balalaika survived her injures, with her baring the scars of what happened to her.”
“That is just a few examples. Let us look at the past of this world. Humanity of this reality have been badass for a very long time. Most of us just don't realize it. I am sure you have seen the movie, Three Hundred. Or, read the comic. Well, the Battle of Thermopylae happened here, in this reality. And though it was a very long time ago, we still remember it. It was that awesome, and legendary.”
“Hell, the badass undercurrent of the whole of Western Civilization. Of being willing to fight against insane odds. Can be traced back to that Battle of Thermopylae. King Leonidas put it best into two words. 'Molon labe'. Which translates to, come and take.”
“And people rarely talk about the following battle that happen several months later, after Thermopylae. The Battle of Plataea. The one where the Greek Alliance faced off against the Persian army. That battle was just too unbelievable, and badass, to be believed. This time there were no tricks. No choke points. It was the Greek Alliance versus the full might of the Persian army. Still, the Greek Alliance was only outnumber a paltry three to one. And the Greek Alliance kicked ass and won.”
“Also, don't even think that trying to make examples of those we care about will make us cower before you. For example, a long time ago, there was this man of peace from Bethlehem that was crucified, along with a number of his followers, later on. That did not make my people cower before our enemies. It just inspire us to be more badass. Even in mostly peaceful ways.”
Lee laughter than turned outright maniacal, which caused a shiver to run down Chang spine.
Chang thought, with slight worry, 'Only the crazy ones laugh like that.'
Lee slowly stopped laughing, while his smile turned feral, and his eyes became dangerous, as he continued, “And that is not all. The environmental, and political, dangers of this planet have been dialed to eleven, when compared to the home realities and you and your friends.”
Lee reached out, to his sides, with both his arms, as he stated, with crazed excitement in his tone of voice, “Welcome to the reality known as Death World Earth. The D.W.E. Reality.”
Lee then dropped his hands back to his sides, as he continued, “And that is not even counting the usual wildlife, plants, and diseases that can kill us, sometimes very painfully and slow. The general rule is the cuter something is the more dangerous that thing is.”
“That is likely where to the rule of how the hotter a babe is in Roanapur is, the more dangerous that babe is, originated.”
“And since we live with these dangers all the time, we hardly bat an eye to them. Though, we are aware of them, and avoid them when we can. We are desensitized badasses, not stupid badasses.”
“Every corner of this world is standing on the edge of oblivion. We have a super-rich class hell bent on driving the sum total of human civilization into the dark ages.”
“At the same time, corrupt governments of the western nations, from America, Australia, to Europe, have leveraged so much debt that collapse of those nation's currencies and economies are imminent, while at the same time those governments are turning into police states. Along with this, we Americans had a major oil spill back in April twenty, two thousand ten, in the Gulf of Mexico, around the coastal areas of the southern U.S. states there. On top of that, those in D.C. dragged their feet on sealing the broken oil pipe. While, in the name of stopping the oil spill, they poisoned the gulf, with other chemicals, contaminating the fish, beaches, and water, in, and around, the coastline on of the Gulf, in the U.S.”
“And to add to the fact that misery loves company, China and India are polluting themselves into an early grave. That is a third of the human species right there on this planet. Mexico and other latin america nations are dealing with narco-based civil wars, and other problems. Africa and the middle east have always basket cases, with the rest of the world going to war over them. Russia is slowing sliding back into a quasi-soviet dictatorship.”
“The islands of the Indian Ocean are still picking up the pieces of the two thousand four Boxing Day Earthquake, and resulting tsunami, that killed at least two hundred and fifty thousand people still missing. Countless dead. The quake leveled and flooded parts of northern Sumatra, Indonesia. And most of whose killed were just laying on the beach, when the water suddenly came in and pulled them back into the sea. Now, that is the stuff of nightmares.”
“And that is not even counting mother nature’s ticking time bombs. Such as the Yellowstone Caldera that is sixty thousand years overdue for a major, global nuclear winter creating, eruption.”
“And Japan... Sweet Jesus, Japan... What is happening there just breaks my heart to watch. On march March eleventh two thousand eleven there was the Tohoku earthquake and tsunami. It caused around sixteen thousand deaths, caused a the four reactors in a nuclear plant on the coast to go into meltdown. Now, the politicians say that every thing is fine. But, anyone with a brain can see Japan, as a whole, is slowly turning into a deadly radiation zone. With the politicians and companies assigned to the clean up of those reactors still arguing about what to do. If we, and I mean we as the human species on this Earth, are lucky, those reactors will only contaminate Japan, and the northern half of the pacific ocean. Which will poison a good chuck of the food supply we all get from the ocean.”
“That is, if we are lucky. And my life experiences have taught me, that we are probably not that lucky.”
“One of the reasons I want to jump realities is because this world will likely soon, finally destroys itself. I can feel it coming. And I am not just talking about my precognitive abilities.”
“And still, I think about the more personal levels. Governments and corporations have so brainwashed and corrupted the minds of most of the younger generations that our coping and relationship skills are nonexistent. These are governments that promote sadism being taught in public schools. There is virtually no one that I know of, that is my age, or younger, that is in a steady, healthy loving relationship.”
“The best relationships I have seen between two young adults have been closer to the relationship between Rock and Revy, before I got my hands on them. That is how intentionally screwed up my generation and the younger generations have been made.”
Lee suddenly dropped his smile. He face turned grim, as he spoke in a calm, deadly tone of voice, “But, that doesn't mean we don't know how to fight, and be badasses. That does not mean we do not know how to kill.”
“Still, being a badass will get you nothing in this world. Because we are all just so badass without realizing it. Actually, openly being a badass will usually get you disrespect, because people will rightly think the badass is being reckless, and dangerous.”
“Badasses are even disrespected by those in power in America. Even to this day, I wonder if any bloodhounds have been created from within the U.S. military personnel, as their jobs are relegated from protecting Uncle Sam, and apple pie, to guarding flowers in Afghanistan.”
Lee then caught the sight of what he wanted from Chang. For a very brief moment, he saw fear flicker in Chang's eyes.
Lee face relaxed, while he voice returned to normal, as he finished, “As I continue my own agenda, it is not just that I have been trying to keep the people here from being killed by Revy and her crew, but to keep Revy and her crew from being killed by some of the more dangerous people here.”
“Good look up information on the Zetas, sometime. They are as dangerous as Hotel Moscow can be. FARC here is far more dangerous in this world than the FARC in your reality. And none of you seem to realize any of this.”
“And while the mafia are scary in this world, the street level gangs are even worse. There are gangs in this very country, that kidnap kids and turn them into child assassins, like Hansel and Gretel, before they were killed.”
“What these gangs do is they kidnap these kids, they torture them for a little while. Break them down some, mentally and physically. Then, the gang in question tells the kidnapped child that if the child doesn't murder for the gang, the gang will murder the child's family. This is not a bluff. Next, the gang gives the child a gun, and tell the child who murder.”
“Sometimes the children can be twelve, ten, and even as young as eight years old, when they are kidnapped and forced to become hitmen. We know this for a fact because some of the child hitmen have crossed the border into the U.S. and turned themselves over to the U.S. border patrol, as a way to seek asylum from those that made them murderers before their voices even cracked.”
“So, while in your reality, the vampire twins were a fluke. In this reality, there are entire industries dedicated to turning children into cold blooded killers.”
Lee watched Chang swallow hard at what he had just said to him.
Lee calmly continued, “The dangers even extend from governments as well, in ways you don't realize. The U.S. government here, in this reality, conducts, on a regular basis, spying and assassinations by remote flying drones the size of model airplanes. These drones have missiles and guns. And this drones are deadly miles away from their target.”
“You will not see them coming. Which is one of the reasons I am living off the grid. It is a fact that they monitor almost all internet and financial transactions. I took a real roll of the dice with my bait to lure Revy, and the others, here. Them just coming in as group was one of the better possibles. There was a real chance that my homeland's government would invaded this island, on the pretenses of stopping drug traffic, to look for me, over the bait I left on the internet.”
“Still, it looks like they found me. Given that they just tried to kidnap me, with Annie and Arcee rescuing me. I am going to have to start making some sort of plans to leave town. That is, if you decide to let me leave this building alive.”
Chang thought, 'I need some time to think on these matters. But, if it comes down to it. And those outside the island, try to take you again. I will have you rescued. I have the best trackers in existence. I can find you. And help you.'
'Then, I will have you taken to a secret location in the multiverse. Where you will stay, until I figure out how to save you from everyone after you. From Revy, to the cancer slowly eating you alive.'
'But, I am not going to tell you this, until I have a working plan ready for you.'
'Also, you have pointed out some dangers, that I did not fully appreciate.'
Lee commented, “It is clear the government of my nation wants me over this shit, because they know something is up. But, they clearly cannot figure what is going on. Consider yourselves lucky they have not pieced it all together. Nor, that we are not politically important enough to them, to warrant their attention. Or, they would have bombed Plata Podrido, by now.”
Chang thought, 'That is a very good point.'
Lee went onto say, “Now, as upset as Eda made you in the Blood Trail arc, with her threat. There is some very real truth in her warning. And the worst part is my homeland's government is nothing more than mercenaries for foreigners, whom are hidden in the shadows. Anyone who follows the money can see that.”
“So, to prevent this from going bad for everyone, all of us have to tread very lightly. And most of you don't know how to do that.”
Chang thought about what Lee had just said, for a few seconds. He then soberly responded, “I admit you have a point. Actually, you have made several points. I didn't realize how different your Earth was from mine.”
Lee said, in a calmer, more normal tone of voice, “Now, you know better.”
Chang commented, “There are other things I would like to know.”
Lee replied, “Go ahead. Ask away.”
Chang inquired, “About that alias you picked out for me. Daiyu. For my female alias. We both know that it means black jade, but why did you choose that name?”
Lee warmly smiled, as he answered, “I originally wanted to use the name, Jade. But, that has been done so much, that it is practically cliche. So, using Daiyu made sense. As in black jade. You not only have dark hair, but your personality is somewhat dark to black. And jade is a precious stone that is a symbol of leadership.”
Chang nodded, while he agreed, “I can go along with that.”
Lee complimented, “By the way, I like the name of this casino. Daiyu Palace Casino. It works for you. This place really is your palace.”
Chang commented, “Thanks. And it seems there is more to you, than meets the eye.”
Lee let out a chuckle.
Chang realized his comment, as he continued, “Yea. Transformers. And from what I have learned about you, you refuse to be violent, but at same time, you show no fear.”
Lee stated, “It is not hard to understand if you think about it. I found the flaw. The weakness you all have. Except for Rock. Rock got really good at exploiting this weakness.”
Chang thought, 'Now, this I want to hear.'
Lee continued, “You all make assumptions, and react to those assumptions without thinking. And when the person does do as you expect, you have no problems dealing with that person. Such as, if a person is violent, you just kill that person without a second thought. If a person shows cowardice, you kill that person without a second thought.”
“But, if a person does something you don't expect, such as not being violent, but showing no fear to you, it draws your interest enough not to immediately kill that person. By doing so, you have time to think, and you likely decide to let that person live. And that is what makes both Rock, and I, so dangerous. That is why none of you were able to fully deal with Rock. He, and now she, doesn't fit into any of the tiny little boxes you categorize people for. That is also why Rock is able to drive Revy crazy, without being killed by Revy.”
Chang thought, 'That makes so much sense that it is scary.'
Chang asked, “So, how did you figure that out?”
Lee casually answered, “I am a writer. Understanding plots, settings, character developments, and motivations, all come with the territory of writing. But, do not feel bad. It took me years to figure out this secret. And you were busy at the time. So, it is completely understandable that you would miss such details.”
Chang stated, “You are right. It is the little details. And you make it sound like you had to work at your creating your stories.”
Lee said, in a matter of fact tone of voice, “Of course, I did. Do you honestly think I just watched these series and then wrote my stories? Nope. I first had to do my homework. I had to rewatch several series, a number of times. Not single episodes. But, entire series, multiple times.”
“In cases where there were multiple formats for a series. Such as anime, manga, etc. I had to go back, and look at them all. I also checked out official character profiles. Source books. Internet fan theories. All of this was done in a successful attempt to gain subtle information on what made you all tick.”
“How each of you spoke? And what syntax each of you used? What style of comments you prefer to make, when you talk? What clothing you preferred to wear? What weapons do you like to use? What food you preferred to eat? What beliefs you had? What are your own likely tastes in fiction?”
“All of this was done to figure out how to put you into my story. Where all the pieces fit together, like a well run clock. Such as, who does what? Who believes what? And why?”
“I am sure that you understand that learning what motivates a person is the key to understanding that person. And that once you have that piece of knowledge, you can control someone without that person realizing it.”
“And that is not including supplement information and research subjects, on places, things, cultures, peoples, languages, weapons, etc... To make for a more structured and enjoyable story. People enjoy reading stories by writers that know what they are talking about.”
“I also did this to make sure to know how far to take a character, without going too far out of character for each individual. If original characters are needed, I made sure to include them, without them overshadowing the rest of the characters? And given the number of people I was dealing with, this was one hell of a juggling act.”
“To give you an idea of how much background work I did. On average, when I write a story, a third of all the work I do on that story is just notes, and outline material.”
“Taking all this into account, when writing, and doing research, one learns a lot about their subject material. No matter if that subject material is an object, or a person.”
Chang thought, with concern, 'This man is not to be underestimated. He is thorough. And he puts a lot of effort into his works and actions. And the way he thinks, if he wanted to, he could be very dangerous towards his enemies. No wonder River has an interest in him.'
'I am starting to wonder if River was not so much trying to protect Lee from me. But, protect myself, from Lee. Or, maybe she was trying to protect both Lee and myself, from each other.'
Lee continued, “And I know what your next question will be. How did it all start? I'll tell you. I originally wanted do a crossover with several gender bending characters, from several series. But, that original idea was difficult to do. All those characters were very different, with very different backgrounds.”
“It took me six months of just thinking how I was going to fit it together, without the plot collapsing in on itself. Then, I realized that only way it would work was to use Akira as the main character, from his, at the time, point of view. I even played him as a parody of an audience segregate.”
“And that story grew into what I finally wrote. Honestly, one of the most difficult parts was figuring out how to fit Futaba into the story. The ending to the Futaba series was so hamfisted in its delivery that I had to literally surgically cut it apart, taking what I needed to make my story work. While discarding the rest. Though, I hate ignoring series canon. What we fan call facts within a given series. But, some things had to be done to make the story work.”
Chang inquired, “Interesting. Also, I was wondering, why did you add Janet to the main Lagoon Company cast?”
Lee stated, “Unlike other fans, I admire Janet for her personality. She is a breath of fresh air. She brings a whole different angle to the character dynamics of Roanapur. She is intelligent, funny, skilled, has good personality, she is nice to look at, and most importantly, she is sane. Unlike the other women in your series, Janet showed a level of sanity, and down to earth quarks, that I could respect. It was a wonderful contrast to the personalities of the bad girls of Roanapur.”
Chang jumped in, “I can see where you are going. And I have to agree with your point of view.”
Lee chuckled a little. He then said, “I thought you would. Also, she and Benny already had a relationship, and given her skill set, this would have allowed her to join Lagoon Company to be completely workable. She is not just a pretty face. She can pull her own weight at her job.”
Chang said, “You are right about that.”
Lee commented, “I know. And if you are wondering, Janet's nymphomania, along with Revy's bi-sexuality, are series canon. They came from the Black Lagoon manga story arc after manga version of the Blood Trail, El Baile de la muerte. The title is Wired Red Wild Card. You can find an english translation online, in this reality. If you want to read it.”
Chang stated, “I plan to.” He thought, 'And you never mentioned that storyline in your stories. You held back this information. That is interesting.'
Lee responded, “Good. Now, among the reasons I did not use that story arc in my story was that it is unfinished. And the creator took so long on the storyline.”
“Having a three year break between chapters is a bit much. And from a plot standpoint, it is risky working with an incomplete story.”
“But, that story did give a lot of good character nuggets of information on some of the cast. Take Janet for example. Chang, I kid you not, Janet outright stated, in dialogue, to the Lagoon crew, that one was of her sexual fantasies is to be gang raped.”
Chang raised an eyebrow, as he commented, “Maybe she is not as sane as you think.”
Lee shrugged, as he stated, “I am willing to cut people slack on their sexual fantasies, and what they do in bed. I am not one to judge. What is important is what they do outside their bedrooms, in their day to day lives. And Janet has shown remarkable restraint, and sanity, in her day to day life. She also has shown to have the brains and skills that I respect.”
“Janet is devious. She will not resort to direct violence. She prefers to arrange for a person to be killed from a distance. In that storyline, she pulls off a brilliant gambit, in which she entraps, and arranges, a chinese spy, sent to learn about her, to be killed by the spy's own superiors. Now, that is brilliant.”
Chang agreed, with interest in his tone of voice, “That is brilliant.” He thought, 'I believe I may have underestimated Janet's abilities.'
Lee mentioned, in a cautioned tone of voice, “On the matter of Revy. In those same chapters, Revy's bi-sexuality is confirmed. She stated that during her time in prison, she had a number of sexual encounters with other women inmates. And it was she whom took the role of the man in those encounters. She even claimed that the women she was with could not satisfy themselves, alone, afterward.”
“To underscore the seriousness of what I am saying. This is the only time in either the anime, or the manga, of the Black Lagoon series, where Revy directly talks about her sexuality, and past sexual exploits.”
“And given the type of woman Revy is, I do not think that was a baseless boast. It should also be noted that in the same scene that revealed Janet's sexual kinks, Revy was revealed to be extremely possessive of Rock. Which further proves that Revy cares very deeply for Rock. To the point the loves Rock. But, be aware that I did not change that part of Revy's personality in my stories.”
“Also, in the storyline I am talking about, Janet made a pass on Rock, and Revy warned Janet that she would rape her if Janet went any further with Rock. I do not believe that Revy was bluffing. Fortunately, Janet backed off, and Revy let the matter drop.”
Chang sadly commented, “The abused can sometimes become the abusers.”
Lee agreed, “True. That is why I added in that scene between Revy and Rico in book two, where Revy mentions seeing her rape scene at the end of the last episode of the Blood Trail story arc, in the anime. And by her doing so, she was able to work the trauma out of her system and become more sane. By the way, I apologize for the forty-eight hour whitman fever freakout that I caused Revy to experience in your Tower.”
Lee mentally reflected, 'And a sign that Revy is about to go whitman fever is when she lets her hair down. So, I always paid attention if Revy had her hair in a ponytail, or not. Which she has kept the ponytail, so far, in public. Because, if she ever removes her small, red scrunchie, that she uses to tie her hair back, and she lets all her hair hang loose, it is time to run like hell away from her. Or, more aptly, it is time to get into one's car and get the hell out of town.'
Chang shrugged, as he said, “It is understandable. You had to figure some way, how to handle Revy learning that horrible event in her life, was in the series, and was public knowledge. And Revy became a lot more easier to deal without after that. Sanity does have its advantages.”
Lee replied, “Very true.” Lee's lips curled into a mischievous grin, as he inquired, “Also, I was wondering. Revy's back story with Rowan was never revealed. I figured, as her teacher, one of the major leaders of Roanapur, and someone Revy trusts, you would know that story.”
Chang snorted, as he replied, “Trust me. You don't want to know. It could give what you had Revy, Shenhua, and Sawyer, do to Akira, a run for its money.”
Lee commented, “I believe you. Though, I never actually wrote that scene. I wrote the lead in, and gave some details afterward. But, I never wrote the actual scene... Wait a minute, you sound like you saw that event. Have you have seen incident?”
Chang lips curled into a wicked smile.
Lee stated, in a surprised tone of voice, “Rowan filmed it?! I had Revy warn him not to. And I thought Rowan wasn't that crazy to do so.”
Chang responded, “Apparently, Rowan is that crazy. The video shows multiple angles at once, with good quality video pictures for each of those angles. Also, the audio of that event is decent. And as porn, it makes for some great viewing, for the first few hours. Then, it gets really strange.”
Lee asked, “Well, given those three's personalities, it must have made for interesting viewing. You wouldn't happen to have a copy of that on hand?”
Chang answered, “Yes. I do. Actually, I have multiple copies. Six full copies, and six copies that Balalaika edited herself, for her own personal use, that she gave me a copy of. That I made more copies of myself. And digital transfers allowed for quality to be maintained, from copy to copy.”
“Though, most of the copies are hidden, and protected, in various storage places, to make sure this one of a kind event is not lost to time. And I am sure Balalaika has done the same with multiple copies and the original, and the her edited version, of that night, in Jackpot.”
“By the way, Balalaika really is good at editing porn. Though, why did you make Balalaika into a lesbian?”
Lee said, “Pure logic. She spent years sharing a building with a literal army of badass, physically fit men, whom were completely devoted to her. But, her attitude clearly showed that she was not getting laid.”
Chang started laughing. Between laughs, Chang conceded, “Point taken. And what about turning Boris into a woman?”
Lee responded, “Boris was originally shown to be a petty boy in one of the omakes. And I think the Black Lagoon series creator slipped that joke into the Viva Youth omake, because he forgot to include Boris in the Boys and Girls omake.”
Chang laughed even harder.
A few seconds later, after Chang made himself calm down, he offered, “You can watch the copies I have of that the night at the Jackpot. You of all people have a right to look at them. But, given who is with you, in that hotel. If they learn I have a copy, and I told you, they will slit both our throats. If we are lucky.”
Lee agreed, “You got that right.”
Chang offered, “Well, come by sometime, and I will let you watch them. Though, these videos are very long.”
Lee replied, “I may take you up on your offer.”
Chang thought, 'Good. That is one enticement to get him to come back, later. When we will discuss his cancer and my offer. Once I figure out what that offer is going to me. And I will try to offer him other enticements, as well. To come back.'
Lee thought, 'Oh. He is baiting me. But, I cannot help but at least be polite about his offer. Besides, I do want to see those videos. Now, onto another matter. Pedro mentioned Rowan by name, when he called me a few days before my poker game with River. I wonder...'
Lee inquired, “By the way, whatever happened to Rowan?”
Chang stated, “Rowan was our first test subject with the gender bending process, and super-solider serum. And she was a complete success. We of the family heads figured it was fitting that Rowan would be the first to undergo the process. And if something happened to Rowan, it was no great loss. Anyway, Rowan ended up as a part of the janitorial staff at the tower. And last I heard, she was back to trying to get her old business started in another city.”
Chang mentally added, 'I just won't mention she is setting up shop, in is this city. And I am helping her.'
Lee responded, “Thanks for the information.” He thought, 'Chances are, given Pedro mentioned Rowan, and what you just said, Chang. Rowan is setting up shop in this town. And since you know that Rowan is setting up shop. It is likely you are helping her. Though, the only reason you would help Rowan is if you had a plan to make a whole lot of money. And the only way I can think to do that with a whorehouse, would be if you supplied Rowan with instant man, and instant woman, packages. Which would make sense. Though, I will not mention this to you, Chang.'
Chang commented, “You are welcome.”
Lee thought, 'Now, to ask about, Jet.' He asked, “By the way, why is Jet a woman? I would think Jet would have taken the same rejuvenation therapy, as Ed did. That is what I set the situation up for Jet to do.”
Chang explained, “Jet did have that rejuvenation therapy. Though, he had a bad reaction to the first formula in their therapy. We were informed this is not the first time something like that has happened. It was just a bad drug reaction. And it was not a quick reaction. Jet was given a few hours to decide on if he wanted the process, or not. He choose to do go through with it. So, we got him into a vat, and processed him into her, to save her life.”
Lee thought, with concern, 'That is sad to here.'
Chang went onto say, “We flushed the drugs from his system, then used the first gender changing, and regeneration formula. Next, the super-soldier serum, which restored her youth. On the bright side, she now has a human left arm again. Though, we had to pause the process, at different stages, to remove Jet's cybernetic implants. For the record, Jet... Well Jetta now, is not upset with you. She understands that you were not at fault. And things like this happen.”
Lee sadly responded, “That is unfortunately true. I guess one cannot foresee some outcomes. Even if that person is writing the story.”
Chang said, “That is correct. And speaking of characters. And being one. I find it discomforting that someone imagined my wants... My needs... My views... My very personality.”
Lee countered, “That is actually incorrect. As I wrote, I came to realize that writing about someone, is not the same as completely creating that person. Yes. Someone imagined you. But, they only imagined the basics. You filled in the rest. As a writer, I will tell you, there is a vast amount of events and life experiences of a character, which is not written about. And that I did not write as much about the pasts of the characters I worked on, as you would think. And I include you, among these characters.”
Chang thought, 'That is interesting.'
Lee continued, “Think of the stories as set points, from a to b. I wrote about a, and, b. But, how you traveled from a to b was your own doing. Your own choices. Your own life experiences.”
Chang thought, 'Now, that is deep.'
Lee commented, “I long since realized that writing is like in the Matrix movie trilogy. While your creator may have created you, the creator could not define you as a person. Writing is partly an instinctual talent, from the imagination. We writers are not fully in control of what we write. Through our imaginations, we are pulling the information, and forming that information from someone else. And not just the inspirations in our lives.”
“There is another component there. A very important, and influential component, that is not in our control.”
“And I am not talking about the sex scenes. I am talking about the character development scenes, and plot.”
“Some of the stuff I wrote, I wrote because it felt right. Though, I can sometimes consciously tell when doing so feels right. It is like my precognition. It just feels right at that deep, mysterious level.”
“And the realization that I was not even close to fully in control of the content I wrote scares the hell out of me.”
Chang mentally reflected, 'And here I thought that he already deep before. This man is like sinking into an abyss... I must heed the warning not to let such an abyss stare back at me.'
Lee went onto say, “Though, I guess in Matrix terms. I would be like Agent Smith, after he went rogue. While you would be, Morpheus.”
Chang joked, “Morpheus? Wouldn't I want to be Neo?”
Lee deadpanned, “Would you rather be the cool, badass leader? Or, the guy that got superpowers, but he could never get his shit together?”
Chang grinned, as he replied, “Point taken.” He mentally added, 'Lee is clearly thinking at a deeper level than I expected. I need to get further into his head. And I know just the question to ask, to start digging deep into his mind.'
Chang asked, “Now, why did you take up the gambler persona?”
Lee smirked, as he stated, “I know what you are are thinking. You are asking a seemingly simple question to get inside my head.”
Chang thought, 'He is good. Though...' He pointed out, “You did say you would answer my questions.”
Lee responded, “Yes. I did. And I will. But, just to let you know, counting the time loops, I have been using that trick, countless times, on countless people, for several years.”
Chang replied, “I am sure you have.”
Lee said, “Now, to answer your question. The reason I used that persona is because none of you have dealt with a true gambler archetype before. Such as a Hawkes, or Maverick. Sure, you have dealt with the desperate, and the greedy, that love gambling. But, not one of you has experience with a true gambler. The type of person that does not gamble out of greed, nor desperation. They gamble because they love how the dice tumbles, as it rolls. No matter the outcome. They love the bluffs and calls of the card games more than actually winning.”
“The true gamblers are the ones that play the long hand of cards. Yet, they are the ones that occasionally take the insane risk, with the huge payoffs. And they do not take those large bets because they expect to win. No. They do so because they love the game.”
“And this entire setup by me is just one long hand of cards. And I have played it well. Except for River, whom is a telepath. Along with, Annie, and Arcee. Yes. They figured out who I was. And they agreed to keep quiet. for now.”
Lee thought, 'I will leave out that Scorpius and Harvey also know. Because that is none of your concern, Chang.'
Chang thought, 'It is obvious that River already knew. And I am not surprised those two figured it out. And I am glad they decided to keep quiet. Though, I will talk to them, later, about you, Lee. To see if they have any input they would like to add, concerning you.'
Lee continued, “Then, there is you. And you four are the only ones in this whole city, whom are from another reality, that knows the truth about me. And we both know that none you are going to tell the others.”
Chang baited Lee, “And why is that?”
Lee answered, with a wicked grin on his lips, and a crazed look to his eyes, “Because, babe, none of you want to spoil the climax. You want to see the train wreck, not be the cause of this train wreck. We both know this is only going to end in one of two ways for me. More than likely, it will all blow up in my face, in which case I will either suffer death, or worse. Or, I might, by some miracle, be able to pull an ace from my sleeve, and win by getting what I want from them.”
Chang stated, “You want a reality device, to escape with. Either from Revy and her group. Or, one of our reality devices.”
Lee replied, “Of course. But, I know better than to ask for one of yours.”
Chang complimented, “Smart man. Also, given the way you stated that, I am going to let that, babe, comment, slide.”
Lee continued smiling, as he responded, “Thank you. And either way, it is all on my head. For you, this is guilt free entertainment of the most extreme variety. And you are still asking why I did all this? Why am I here, instead of under a rock somewhere? And why do I want from them?”
Chang inquired, “Good questions. Care to answer them?” He thought, 'I wonder if he will admit to having cancer.'
Lee smile turned mischievous, as he teased, “And ruin the surprise. I think not. Chang, just sit back, and enjoy the show. I have a feeling this is going to wrap up and head to the next stage, one way or another, within less than a week.”
Chang thought, 'So, you are not going to admit that you are dying. But, that is an issue for another time. And one that is sooner rather than later.' He commented, “After doing all this, and writing those stories, you are likely more insane than any of the girls. Even River, and Revy.”
Lee grin became slightly manic, as he replied, “Yea. And none of them have figured out my lone sane man act, that I have been pretending to be, is completely fake.”
Chang let out a laugh. He then responded, “If Rock, Revy, and the others weren't after you, I would offer you a job. You have shown some skill, being able to play head games with them for months on end, without getting caught.”
Lee lips curled into a smirk, as he commented, “You of all people know what a person is capable of when they have to do something.... Extreme.”
Chang agreed, “Very true. And you know, you have been acting like an a villain explaining his evil plan.”
Lee conceded, “True. I admit, monologuing is fun. You have done this before, yourself.”
Chang replied, “True. It can be addictive.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. Besides, I rarely get a chance to talk about shop in my life. And this is too great an opportunity to pass up.”
Chang responded, “No arguments there.”
Chang saw Lee begin to calm down.
Lee inquired, “I was wondering. I hinted at it. Because the series itself hinted at it, But, did you actually realize you were in a fictional series, during the events in the Black Lagoon series?”
Chang shrugged, as he replied, “It became kind of obvious during the first time Roberta came to town.”
Lee agreed, “True. Onto another matter. I know you guys didn't tell Megatron about me, and my stories. Because if you did, he and his followers would be literally tearing this planet apart to find me, right now.”
Chang admitted, “You got that right. And don't worry. None of us have anything to do with him.”
Lee replied, “Good.”
Chang added, “Except, Annie. And that is your fault.”
Lee conceded, “True. But, that could be a good thing. I made it so that Annie and Megatron were friends. If things did get out of hand, Annie could handled the situation, without situation becoming a full scale war.”
Chang admitted, “That is a good point.” He thought, 'Damn. It is as I spectected. Lee has plans within plans. And as such, I might as well ask him about politics.'
Chang asked, “I have an another question for you, Lee, on politics.”
Lee questioned, “What is it?”
Chang inquired, “What is your opinion of the concept of democracy?”
Lee thought, 'I might as well be honest. He might be one of the few people in existence that would appreciate what I have to say.'
Lee calmly answered, “Democracies. Republics. Anything with a ballot system is just a lie. A lie to keep the people under the illusion they have some control of their lives, when in truth, a ballot system is just another way to enslave the people, by those pulling their strings.”
“Taxation with representation is complete bullshit. Every government is a tyranny, that hypocritically masquerades as being civil. This is no such thing as due process. In this world, a person is either a tyrant, or a slave. There is no in-between. Just because you don't see the shackles on your body, does not mean they are not there.”
“In this world, free thinking individuality is punished, and unquestioned subservience is rewarded. The subservience is especially rewarded when the sycophants are sadistic in the manner they carry out their orders, as a way to harm the people, and keep them oppressed.”
“And we have the worst sort of tyrants in this world. Instead of honest tyrants, such as Genghis Khan and Vlad the Impaler. Whom were open and honest with their brutality. We have the kind of tyrants that claim to have civility. We have Robespierres, and Stalins. Those that pretend to be civil, but whom will commit the most hideous of crimes. Those that would hide their crimes from public view, while piling the body counts to the point no single person could count them all.”
“These are the type of tyrants that would punish those that called them on their brutality, by seizing that person's family's wealth and property. Sending that person off to a gulag to be tortured, and worked to death. Executing the person's parents. Turning the person's wife into a concubine, to be raped and tortured by the tyrant and his friends. And selling the person's children into sex slavery.”
“That is the type of evil we have in this world. Mostly outside of heavily armed populations, such as in the U.S. And these tyrannical, sadistic tactics are a cottage industry, that is standard practice across the world. And the tyrants' servants in the press do all they can to hide such crimes from the public.”
“And these hypocritical tyrants are not even the masters of this world. They serve even greater evils, that hide in the shadows.”
“In such situations, I believe the best, pure, and only true form of government is an open, brutal dictatorship. Because, said dictatorships are honest, open about their oppression and brutality. Because, at the heart, that is what all governments and religions are about. Brutality, and control.”
“Constitutional republics, democracies, and other forms of representative governments are like marxism. They look good on paper, but they never actually exist in reality. No matter how much tyrants, behind the scenes, call the countries they control, democracies, or republics. And these shadowy tyrants do so as way to mentally shackle the people into thinking they are free and have rights, when in actuality, they are just well fed, and entertained, slaves.”
Chang noticed Lee voice slowly become more erratic, as he continued his speech, “There is not such thing as human rights. There is no such thing as constitutional rights. Such things are lies designed to enslave the people even further.”
“I remember as a child, as people from all walks of life abused me, they gave their justification for hurting me as being that it was their constitutional right to do so.”
“While, I had no rights, because I was born a white male, from the southeastern United States. As such, to everyone else, it is my fault I was born a dumb, mentally retarded, racist, sexist, bigoted, inbred, uncivilized, intolerant, willfully ignorant, hick, whom deserves TO KNOW ONLY SUFFERING IN LIFE!”
Lee realized he has become too angry to continue speaking. He stopped talking for a few seconds, as he forced himself to calm down.
Meanwhile, Chang was quiet, as he thought, with concern, 'It is best I remain silent, for now. Lee is pretty much showing me exactly who he is. And what he has been through. Which is clearly a lot. He is the embodiment of the tortured writer.'
'Also, from what I have known of him, both in person, and what I have heard from my friends. Lee is manipulative. Though, otherwise he has been civilized, polite, tolerate, and even caring, for other people. He is also extremely intelligent, and imaginative. He could not play at our level, if he was stupid. I believe many of his actions are genuine. In that, I heard he helped Melvin, when he did not have too. He even helped Revy and the girls, now and then.'
'And River would have blown Lee's cover, at their poker game, if he was not a genuinely nice, and truly polite, man. Even thought he has a bit of a mouth on him.'
'In addition, Lee's writings reflect a measure of fairness, and equality, in all areas, that I rarely see in real life.'
'It is clear that Lee has been the victim of everyone else's bigotry towards him, for a very long time. And he has had to swallow that pain and abuse, towards him, for years. Given his age. Likely decades. With all that repression inside Lee, even with my resources, I do not want to see what Lee can really do to someone when he really gets angry.'
By then, Lee felt he was calm enough to continue. He stated, in a calmer tone of voice, “I find documents that state such lies, that the people have rights and freedoms, are worth less than the toilet paper people use to wipe their asses with.”
“As such, I would take one honest tyrant over a thousand politicians, sucking up to their masters, while stabbing the people in the back. I am talking about the type of tyrant that is completely open with their brutality. Whom takes someone calling them on their brutality to be a compliment.”
“And in all this, I have found the most honest government in this world is the Iranian government, and their masters, the mujtahids. They do not pretend the people have a voice is how their politicians are picked. No fixed primaries. They openly select who is in government. There is no argument that the people have any voice in government. Which the people do not.”
“Still, they are just as bad at having mock elections. They openly select two people for the people to choose in the two card monte game we call a ballot system. Which makes them just as bad as everyone else.”
“And through all this, in this world, with an evil God overlooking its sadistic handiwork, this is how it has always been, and always will be, forever.”
“To that end. I don't care if they are ignorant of such evil, or not. Either way, I have no stomach, nor tolerance towards those people that worship, and preach lies, in the name of such evil. Especially, those who are willfully ignorant, and refuse to accept the truth, concerning such evil, when it is staring at them, in their faces.”
Chang mentally reflected, in surprise, 'And I thought Revy and Balalaika had negative outlooks on life. This guy has definitely been through some shit.'
'No wonder he writes. Writing is probably the only outlet he had to work through his pain, and make himself feel better. And considering what he is telling me, I surprised he is this sane. And that his writing did not reflect a more sadistic nature. Unless, he worked that out in previous writings that we were not part of. If so, I am not going to touch that subject with a ten foot pole.'
'Also, it is very clear he is knowledgeable about many things, and not just those he writes about. I am not talking to someone, whom speaks out of ignorance. And I need to remember that about him.'
Lee continued, “That is why I admire you, Chang. Your rule has always shown a measure of restraint, and reasonableness. Traits are are lacking in the leaders of this world. When it comes to violence, you tend to give people warnings when they cross you. It is their fault they don't listen to you. And while you are polite and nice, when you are called on your brutality, you freely admit to it. You are honest and open about it. You don't hide it. And you usually don't kill the person who does call you on your less savory actions, unless they are rude about it.”
Lee compliments caught Chang off guard.
Chang thought, 'After everything he said. I believe he just complimented me.' He replied, “Thank you.”
Lee replied, “You're welcome.” He shrugged, as he casually said, “Oh well. Fuck it all. Let the world burn. I intend to move on in life, or death. Whatever comes. Let them torture, and kill, each other. I just refuse to be a part of it. I won't sink to their level. Even if it costs my life, and my soul is sent to Hell forever, for refusing to be a part of God's sadistic, twisted game.”
Chang thought, 'Okay. So, you want to move on from this shithole that is life in this reality. And considering you think God is evil. Not that I disagree. I guess you would have to come to terms that, should you die in this reality, you would likely go to hell, no matter what you do in your life. Good. Bad. It doesn't matter. You believe you are eternally damned either way.'
'Including Balalaika, and a few others, Lee, you seem to be one of the rare people I know that looks forward to going to hell. That is a scary thought. Because compared to making peace with the possibility of facing eternal suffering after death, nothing scares them in their life...'
'So, that is the great secret to your poker face, Lee. That acceptance of such an unfair, and horrible fate, for you to personally suffer, is what allows you to remain calm.'
'I think I just figured you out, Lee.'
Lee said, in a kind tone of voice, “I hope you did not take offense to my comments.”
Chang responded, “No. I take what you have to say as a high compliment. Honesty is the last refuge a person can take in this sea of shit.”
Lee stated, “I agree. I just wish I could be more honest. But, given my situation, I cannot. Between you and me. I hate lying. I loath lying. And I have been having to do it all my life, just to survive.”
Chang thought, 'I would call you a hypocritical. But considering who is after you. I won't.' He said, “I am sure you will reach a point where you will be able to be honest, one way, or another.”
Lee replied, “Yes. I do look forward to that. Even if this winds up being my last days being alive.”
Chang thought, 'While I still have you here, I wonder what your opinion of Pedro is?' He asked, “What is your opinion of Pedro's moral flexibility? He is clearly not a by the book cop.”
Lee answered, “When compared to myself. Pedro is on the orange end of the morality scale, while I am on the blue end.”
Chang raised an eyebrow, as he inquired, “Tvtropes?”
Lee replied, “Of course. A few of the things I put you guys through, came from that website.”
Chang questioned, “Such as?”
Lee answered, “Like having Akira leave the toilet seat up, and Shenhua falling in.”
Chang chuckled for a few seconds. As Chang calmed down, he said, “I would guess that is why she is in on this hunt for you.'
Lee agreed, “I would guess so, as well. Now, I do have a couple of other questions of my own.”
Chang thought, 'Fair is fair. And he has answered most of my questions. So, why not?' He inquired, “What are they?”
Lee sighed. He then asked, “I used very broad strokes on those you kidnapped, and used, for you breeding projects. Do the victims know about me, or my stories? I have nightmares about some of those victims, and their children, coming for me.”
Chang thought, 'I regret that part of my life, and I rightly blame you for it. But, not enough to hurt you over those events. And I really don't want to know where you got the idea to write that from. Still...' He firmly stated, “As you should. You should feel fortunate that they do not know that you, and the stories, even exist.”
Lee inquired, “Thank you for that little piece of information. Anyway, did you ever go after pilots of the super-robot genre? And not just the anime characters, but others, such at Coop, Kiva, and Jamie, from the Megas XLR series?”
Chang answered, “No. I did not, for a number of reasons. First, you had that, no younger than eighteen, rule. Good rule, by the way. On those pilots that are older than eighteen, none of them I really needed. And only a handful stood out. And on the subject of Coop, Kiva, and Jamie. I left them alone.”
“On Kiva. I already redheaded asian badass. I did not need two of them. Jamie was useless to me. And Coop. Well, the only skills Coop has are piloting, and working on, the super-robot, Megas. And even I was not crazy enough to put a brainwashed pilot in charge of a weapon, with buttons that state such things as, smite the world.”
“The same goes for their alternate reality counterparts. Besides, I am not even sure we could even fit Coop into one of those vats.”
Lee chuckled, as he thought, 'That is probably true. Plus, if something happened to Coop, Kiva, and Jamie, it would likely piss off Ranma.' He then said, “I can see your point.”
Chang mentioned, “And to be honest, I was too uncomfortable with the concept of super-robots to mess with that genre. That is just more firepower than I am comfortable with. With no upper limit to their firepower. Like Lovecraftian beings. I did not want to get the attention of individuals with that kind of firepower, and other equally dangerous abilities.”
Lee complimented, “That is very wise of you.”
Chang asked, “Thank you. Anything else, you want to talk about?”
Lee replied, “Not really. You?”
Chang answered, “No. And I will call you a car to take you back to the hotel.”
Chang pulled his cellphone. He then dialed a number on it.
A few seconds later, Chang stated into the cellphone, “Yes. Please, come to my office to escort my guest out of here. Also, have a car waiting to take him, to take him back to the Devil's Hotel.”
Chang hung up and put his cellphone back into his pocket.
Lee focus on Chang, as he stated, “Thank you.”
Chang turned to Lee, as he replied, “You're welcome.”
Lee mentioned, “As a suggestion, you might want to switch to hardlines. The governments of this world tap into all cellphone communications, all the time, and they record that information. Also, they can even track people with them, even if the cellphone is turned off.”
Chang agreed, “That is a good point. But, all my cellphones are designed and encrypted to only work from a celltower in this very building, with a firewall created by Ed Lowe. The connection then moves through that firewall, and a few others defenses, before it connects to the local phone lines, and other hardlines, from a fiberoptic line we had installed, that leads into the mainland.”
Lee complimented, “Smart move.”
Chang smirked, as he replied, “I know.”
Chang then walked back around his desk, as sat back in his seat, behind his desk, as he look at Lee. He offered, “Sit down. It might be a few minutes before Annie gets here.”
Lee said, “Thank you.” He then sat in the chair, in front of Chang's desk, to Chang right.
(_)
A few minutes later, Lee heard the door to the office, open behind him. Lee turned around, to his left, to see Annie, standing at the threshold of the office door.
Annie looked over at two men, as she calmly stated, “There are a car waiting out front. It is ready, when you are.”
Lee said, “Thank you.” He then stood up, and turned back to Chang.
Lee extended his right hand, as he honestly said, “I enjoyed the chat.”
Chang looked up as Lee, as he used his right hand to shake Lee's right hand. He replied, “Same here.”
Both men noted the firm, but not tight, grip, the other hand in this handshake.
A couple of seconds later, they broke their handshake.
Lee turned and walked to Annie.
When Lee reached the exit out of the office, and to the hallway, he continued walking, Annie left Chang's office door open, as she walked beside him, to Lee's left side, down the hallway, towards the front express elevator that would take them to the gaming floor.
As they made their way down the hallway, Annie inquired, “I take it that your meeting went well?”
Lee continued looking forwards, as he answered, “Well, considering I am still breathing, and walking out of here under my own power, I would say, yes.”
Annie commented, “You do look on the brighter side of things.”
Lee commented, “It is the only way to stay sane in the situation I find myself in.”
Annie shrugged, she replied, “True.”
Annie and Lee walked to the express elevator, they turned the corner in the hallway, and they were met by River.
Annie, Lee, and River, came to a stop, as they looked at each other.
River was wearing a long skirt, t-shirt, and cowgirl boots, as she said, with concern in her tone of voice, in english, “Lee, I heard you were kidnapped? Are you alright?”
Lee turned to Annie, and then back to River. He answered, “Yes. I will be fine.”
River gave Lee a warm smile, as she replied, “Good. See you around, Lee.”
Lee said, “You as well, River.”
River then walked passed them, as Lee and Annie continued walking for the front express elevator.
As the two adults walked beside each other, Annie commented, “You to seem to be on very friendly terms with River?”
Lee commented, “I long since learned that being polite has its advantages.”
Annie responded, “I will admit that it does. And I am guessing that is why you were so nice to her at the poker game?”
Lee admitted, “Absolutely. Any other way, and I would have lost. And I am not just talking about the poker game itself. I was nice, friendly, played fairly, and that is why she kept my secret.”
Annie shrugged, as she responded, “I can see your point there. Do you think she is going to be in trouble with Chang for keeping your identity a secret?”
They then made it to the elevator, with Annie pushing the button for the elevator. The elevator immediately opened.
As they walked into the elevator, Lee answered, “Of course not. If River could not be trusted to keep a secret, any secret, she would have long since been dead.”
Annie thought over Lee's comment for a few seconds, as they turned around in the elevator, to face the door.
As the doors automatically closed behind them, Annie realized, as she admitted, “That is true.”
(_)
Meanwhile, River walked into Chang's office. She knocked on his open door, to get Chang's attention, as she continued walking inside.
Chang looked up at her, from behind his desk, as he replied, “I wondered when you would show up?”
River came to a stop, a few feet in front of Chang's desk, answered, “I was busy today.”
Chang inquired, “We both know why you are here. I am not upset that you kept Lee's identity a secret. I just want to know why you kept it a secret from everyone?”
River said, “As I have read his mind, I found that Lee is really a nice person, very down on his luck. So, he wrote those stories. But, he honestly did not realize what he was doing at the time. And he was writing to maintain his sanity. That man has issues. He does not deserve what Revy, and the others, have planned for him.”
Chang responded, “After the conversation I just had with Lee, I agree with you.”
River smiled at Chang, as she replied, “Thank you.”
Chang asked, “You're welcome. So, why is Lee staying around Revy, and the others, in the first place? It does not make sense?” He thought, 'Unless he has cancer. Like I suspect.'
River answered, “It is as you suspect. Lee is dying of cancer. He is gambling that he can steal one of their reality devices, so he can have a future of some kind.”
Given Chang was speaking to a telepath, he stated what he was thinking, as he replied, “That explains a lot. That is why he did not tell me the reasons he wanted to get his hands on a reality device. And after comparing current and older pictures of him, I already realized he had cancer.”
“And while my letting him know that he is the writer limits his options. Him knowing that I know he is dying, would further weaken his bargaining position. And while I could use that as a way to control him. But, I don't want to. Beside, he does not want to owe me a favor. Which is a good reason for both of us keeping what we know, on that matter, a secret, from the other.”
“Though, in all honesty, I would be tempted to give Lee one of my reality device, right now, if doing so wouldn't piss off Revy, and her amazon brigade.”
River complimented, “That is a good point.”
Chang questioned, “How long does he have?”
River answered, “Around two months.”
Chang said, “Okay. We still have time to work this out. Lee has shown some talent, with a number of abilities. He could be useful to us. The trick is how to convince everyone else after his hide, to back off. I am guessing that even with your super-genius, you don't have an answer? Yet?”
River admitted, “Speaking for personal experience, on the other side of the equation, it is hard to negotiate with violent lunatics.”
Chang commented, “You would know. Though, you are a lot saner than you use to be. And at least the maids have yet to come to town.”
River replied, “Let us count our fortunes on that one.”
Chang said, “Agreed.”
The two them talked for a little while on the matter. Though, neither was able to come up with a workable solution. And they agreed to think on it, over the day. To see if one of them came up with an idea to save Lee, while getting his enemies, off his back.
(_)
Meanwhile, a few minutes ago, just after Lee and Annie left River, and walked into the express elevator. The elevator doors had just closed, with the elevator beginning to take Annie and Lee down to the gaming floor.
As the elevator moved downward, the two adults sitting next to each other, with Lee to Annie's left side, as they faced the elevator door.
Annie turned to Lee, as she requested, “Lee... Can I call you, Lee?”
Lee turned to Annie, as he replied, “Sure. What can I call you?”
Annie answered, “Annie is fine. Well Lee, I am surprised you are not scared out of your mind to see me. Let alone meet, and talk with me. You know who, and what, I am. You are also partly responsible for who, and what, I currently am. Though, I will give you credit that most of what you have done to me, has benefited me.”
Lee said, “I am glad you think that. And that you are grateful.” He thought, 'I wish Revy, Rock, and the others after my hide, were as grateful, as you.'
Annie pointed out, “Yes. I appreciate what you have done for me. But, I am not sensing any fear from you towards me. All I sense is indifference to your situation.”
Lee stated, “Annie. Even though you are very powerful. At the end of the day, you are sane. You are very sane. Even when you were in the black suit, you were sane. You just had a bad temper. And I have been dealing with insane, violent women for a while, now. Compared to dealing with them, this is a very pleasant experience.”
Annie agreed, “I can see why you would think that. I sense you have another questions for me?”
Lee admitted, “Yes. Though, I do have a few questions for you. Though, they are questions I have no right to ask.”
Annie stated, “Go ahead, and ask the questions, anyway. I am not going to hurt you over asking your questions.”
Lee asked, “Why are you working for, Chang? I thought you hated him. Hell, I know you hated him. I wrote you that way.”
Annie responded, “Thanks to you, I have learned to be a more forgiving person. Still, I am charging Chang a fortune for my services. In gold and jewels. We have a good arrangement. Besides the money being good. I get to keep my own hours. And the spa perks here are amazing. Given Inara is in charge of the spa, that is not surprising. The things she can do as a masseuse, even without getting sexual, would blow your mind.”
Lee thought, 'That confirms that. Now, for my next question.'
Lee inquired, “I don't doubt that. And how can you be partnered up with Arcee?”
Annie answered, “I can sense that Arcee needs some emotional help. So I am helping her deal with some of her personal issues. I have helped others in the same way. And since I am not going to harm you over your hand in my current situation, that is no point in harming them, either.”
Lee replied, “Fair enough.”
Lee thought, 'Now, to have some fun. By asking one of those questions, one always wants to ask Annie, but was afraid to ask. And I wasn't sure how she would react to the question. Let alone what her answer would be.'
Lee casually questioned, in a relaxed tone of voice, “Anyway. In all sincerity. What is your opinion of the movie, Spaceballs?”
Annie giggled, for a few seconds. She continued giggling a little, with a wicked grin on her lips, as she answered, “Funniest movie ever conceived by man. I wish I had thought of Dark Helmet's idea for keeping his men in line. Sure, going for the throat, and killing subordinates is one thing. But, going for the balls is just plain mean. And his attrition rate must have been very low. And the idea made me ask myself, why didn't I think of that first?”
Lee thought, 'So, Annie finds a parody film about herself fun. That is good. Like River, keeping Annie happy is always good.'
'And Annie agrees with what some of her parody counterpart, Dark Helmet, did in that film. I guess that makes sense. I agree that some of the ideas that Dark Helmet employed were intelligent. And Dark Helmet and Mel Brooks, did come up with the, good is dumb, comment. So, while Dark Helmet was a parody of Darth Vader, he was an intelligent parody.'
'And Annie always did have a wicked sense of humor. Even as Anakin, and later on as Vader. I am glad has her keep that sense of humor, in my stories, as well.'
Lee agreed, “Yea. Dark Helmet had the best of both worlds on that one. It was too bad that he was surrounded by Assholes.”
Annie grinned widened at Lee's joke, as she giggled a little more. She happily responded, “Yes. And I have had those moments before, myself. Where I had to restrain myself from not just killing all the officers under my command, but everyone under my command, for their collective stupidity. And it wasn't mostly the clones that were at fault. It was the sycophants that made it up the ranks, that were the problem for me.”
Lee commented, “Now, that I think about. I can see that you must have killed a number of your subordinates, because they were sucking up to you. And through the force, you knew they were lying, and you just had to wait for an official excuse to kill them.”
By then, Annie had calmed down. She still slightly grinned, as she stated, “Exactly. And most of them were sycophants. And even at my worst, I respected honesty, as long as the person was not being a jerk about it.”
Lee commented, “That is nice to know.” He thought, 'Also, it just occurred to me. On a related matter. Annie might not like some of Monty Python. Such as the movie, the Quest For the Holy Grail, and the black knight skit. That might hit too close to home for her. Though, now that I am having a nice conversation with her. There are other topics I wish to speak to Annie about.'
By then, the elevator door stopped, and opened on the ground floor.
Lee sadly thought, 'Too late. I just hope we get to continue this conversation, later.'
Both of them stepped out, into the elevator bay, and passed the two female guards, standing at the sides of the express elevator, as Lee said, “We will have to continued this conversation for another time.”
Annie agreed, “Yes. We will. And thank you for not saying any Star Wars injokes.”
Lee stated, “I think we both agree that I already worked those injokes out of my system.”
Annie said, “True. Well, see you later.”
Lee replied, “You too.”
As the two adults continued walking into the gaming floor, Annie slowed down, so she could turned towards her left, behind Lee, as she towards the restaurant, to get some lunch.
Meanwhile, Lee continued heading straight, towards the front entrance doors.
When Lee reached to the front doors, he pushed opened one of the doors, and walked through, to the outside, with the door automatically closing behind him.
As Lee continued walking, on the concrete sidewalk, under the large awning of the hotel, he saw in front of him, there was a black, four door sedan, under the carport that was attached to the awning. With the right passenger side of the car facing Lee, by the curb.
A young, slender, chinese woman, in a black business suit, held the passenger back door, on the driver's side of the car open, as she looked over at Lee.
The woman said, in english, with a slight chinese accent, “Mister Lee. If you would come with me.”
Lee continued walking towards the black car, as he turned his head towards the woman. He stated, “Yes. I have a minor request. Instead of taking me to the Devil's Hotel. Could you please take me to the Rats Nest, so I could pick my car.”
The woman replied, “Most certainly.”
With his request confirmed, Lee silently walked over, and got into the right side back seat of the car. The woman closed the back door, and then walked to the driver's door, open it, got in, closer the driver's door, used the key to start the engine, she drove the car out of the casino parking lot, and onto the road.
Lee was silent, during the entire drive to the Rats Nest, as he thought about what had happened today.
Lee thought, 'Well, I can now add at least three more people that know who I am. Chang, Annie, and Arcee. And unlike River, those three are both dangerous, and they can be mean. Even when she was insane, River always tried to be nice, unless something triggered her to be violent, sometimes against her will. The same cannot be said for the other three.'
'Still, they all agreed to keep my secret. For now. But, I do not know how long their lips will stay sealed.'
'Adding to that, my government has finally found me. Though, I doubt they will do anything for a few days. Given the embarrassment for them of what just happened. Also, they won't make another move until they figure out what exactly is happening on this island, to this subordinates. That could be a while, given the answer to the truth would probably not be accepted by the bureaucrats that will be likely assigned to work on the case. The truth is just to insane to accept.'
'So, either way, I have time. But, either way. In the long run, I am screwed.'
Lee continued to thinking about his situation, as he was being driven to the Rats Nest bar.
(_)
Fifteen minutes later, the chinese driver dropped Lee off at the front entrance of the Rats Nest.
After Lee exited the car, and gently closed the door to the car, driver drove off.
Lee wasted no time checking on the Rats Nest bartender. Instead, Lee ran to the parking lot, where he found his car, where he left it. He used his keys to get into the driver's side of the car.
A few seconds after Lee sat down in the driver's seat of his car, he used his car key to start the ignition, and drove to the Devil's Hotel. Though, he did go at the speed limit. So, as to not attract any more unwanted attention, than he already had to deal with that day.
(_)
Five minutes later, Lee parked in the middle part of the parking lot, in front of the Devil's Hotel entrance.
After Lee got out of his car out, he locked and shut his car door. Lee then swiftly made it across the parking lot, and into the hotel, from the front lobby entrance.
Once Lee was through the entryway, and inside the front lobby, quietly, through quickly, walked his way to the elevator bay.
Lee soon made it to the third floor, and into the bedroom, of his suite.
Lee shut the door, as he pocketed his key to the hallway door to his suite. He then locked the deadbolt to the lock. After which, he turned on the ceiling light, as he turned around to face his bedroom, as he leaned against the back of his hallway door.
Lee took off his baseball cap and glasses. He tossed them both onto his bed, to his left side, across the room. Both items landed on the bed, without a problem.
By then, the anxiety of situation was starting to take its toll on Lee. With Lee starting to take slower, more deeper, stronger breaths, with each breath, as he replayed the scenes of the day, over and over, in his mind.
Lee rubbed his face, to try to help himself calm down, but it doing so did no good for him.
All Lee's careful planning was falling apart. He has been found out by multiple people. The authorities knew where he was. Chang knew who he was. It was only a matter of time before his plans fully collapsed, and the girls in the hotel, he was in, learned the truth about him
Then, there was the cancer that was slowly killing him. The cancer that was making him thinner and thinner, until he was a living skeleton. Then, he would die.
Along with all those facts, people were now dead because of him. And not just today. But, from his writings. Real people. Not just sentences on a word processor he was typing. But, real people. People he saw first hand, that were dead because of his existence.
And it all hit him at once, as something broke inside of him. With the tight control over his emotions finally slipping away, allowing the leash on the darkness behind his mask to show on the outside, allowing his repressed, insane rage to come out to play.
Lee needed to damage something, or he knew he was going to hurt someone. And damaging a thing was a lot easier to deal with, in the aftermath, than physically hurting someone. He could just simply pay for damages to something. The same could not be said for hurting a person.
Lee looked over at the steel coat rod beside him, to his left, that was attached to the wall.
Lee swiftly ripped the coat rod off its attachments, allowing the suits he had hanged on the rod, to fall to the floor.
He then use the rod as a baseball back to beat against the bedroom side of the wall that divided his bedroom with his bathroom.
He beat on the wall for two straight minutes, creating holes and gashes, to work out his anger.
Finally, he just dropped the rob, as he collapsed to the floor. He began to cry at how much hell his life had been since he was born. And no matter how much effort he put into trying to improve his life, God just pulled strings on people, and events, to make his life even worse, and more painful.
(_)
Twenty minutes later, after Lee has finally be able to collect himself, to where he would not break out into tears at the pain hell his life had been for as long as he could remember, he stood up. He then went to his bed to collect his baseball cap and large glasses.
Lee put on his baseball cap, and large glasses. And he head back to the hallway door.
When he reached the door, turned off the ceiling light, from the light switch by the door.
Lee undid the deadbolt to his door, opened his door, and he exited into the hallway. He pulled the door closed behind him, with the knob lock to the door to his suite locking behind, as he headed for the elevator bay, and to the lobby.
When Lee entered the lobby, from the elevator bay, he walk over to the check in desk.
As he walked, Lee looked around and he did not see any Revy's crew present in the room.
Lee thought, with a bit of gallows humor, 'At least I don't have to worry about them bothering me. Given the state of my mind, right now, I would be tempted to start a fight with one of them, just so I could die in battle. All my other options such when compared to that.'
When Lee reach the check in desk, he came to a stop, as he turned to face the counter, with the two clerks on duty, standing behind the counter.
One of the clerks on duty look across the counter at Lee. The clerk, in question, asked, in english, “Is there something I can do for you, sir?”
Lee answered, “Yes.” He then pulled out a rolled of money, and he set it on the counter, as he stated, “I had an accident in my room, just now. This is three thousand U.S. dollars. This should pay for the damages to the room, and then some.”
Lee did not even both to maintain his poker face, as he grimly thought, 'There goes over a third of my money. Well, I wasn't planning to live to spend it, anyway. And if I had decided to escape. That would have probably only bought me a few weeks, anyway. Compared to the month or so, the cancer is going to take to kill me. And I am not going to go, dying on the street, alone in the middle of a foreign city. I have more self-respect than that.'
The clerk picked up the roll of money. He undid the roll. As he counted the hundred dollar bills, he commented, “It must have been one of those kinds of accidents.”
Lee admitted, “Yes.”
By then the clerk finished counting, and he found that it was indeed three thousand U.S. dollars.
The clerk set the money under the counter. He looked at Lee, in his eyes. Lee could see there was no anger in the clerk's eyes. Just a calm state of professionalism. The clerk stated, “We appreciate you telling us up front, about what happened. And you have also immediately paid for damages. So, there will be no problems from us, towards you, for your actions.”
Lee said, “I glad to hear that.” He thought, 'I have enough problems, as is.'
The clerk inquired, “So am I. I will make you a receipt. Do you wish to be relocated to another room?”
Lee answered, “No. The damage is not serious. So, you can repair them, later. Besides, I have a feeling I am not going to be here for much longer.”
The clerk said, “We are sorry to hear that. We hope you have enjoyed your stay.”
Lee sorrowfully stated, “The sad fact is that the time I have spent here has been some of the best parts of my life.” He thought, 'And given most of my time here has been intensely stressful on me, that is not saying much.'
The clerk calmly replied, “We appreciate that.”
The clerk then made Lee a receipt, and handed it to him.
Lee pocketed the receipt. He then turned to his right, and headed back towards the elevator bay.
While Lee walked, he grimly thought, with anger and disappointment lacing his thoughts, 'Forget Sam. He seems to disappear without notice. Well it is my turn. Forget Pedro. The man has barely been any help to me, at all. Forget everything. I am going back to my suite, and I am going to stay there for tonight, and tomorrow. So, I can relax, and figure out what I am going to do next. I will dine in tonight, and tomorrow. Hopefully, by this time tomorrow, I will have figured out what I can do to salvage my situation.'
'And I have already figured out what to do, for my worst case scenario. That being I may have to bolt from this town at a moments notice.'
'I still have close to five grand, U.S., in my pockets. That is enough for food and lodgings, for the immediate future. So, I am not hurting for money. For at least a few weeks. In which case, I will let the cancer take me.'
'And if I run out of money, I will just end my life by my own hand.'
'Same difference. It is only a matter of how long the span of time that I remain breathing. And such a short different in lengths of time is insignificant to the eternity of pain and suffering, that I have to look forward to, in Hell, no matter what I do.'
'Besides, my alternatives seem to be far worse.'
Lee then made it to the elevator bay. He soon took an elevator to the third floor, and after he unlocked his door, he walked back into his suite.
Once he got to his suite, he shut, and locked, the door behind him. He walked over to the lamp light, and turned it on.
Lee then spent the next five minutes repairing the steel coat rod, the best he could. He got it to where he hung on the wall, and he could set his suits to hang from it.
After which, Lee turned off the lamp light, with the curtains blocking the outside light, he was sitting in a mostly dark room, safe for the light coming from around the curtains of the room, which provide just enough light to navigate around his room.
Lee walked over to his bed, he grabbed the remote, as he sat down on his end of his bed, with his feet on the floor, in front of the bed.
Next, Lee used his remote to turn on the TV, and find something watch. Anything to watch. To take his mind off his own horrific problems. In his past, present, and future.
(_)
Around an hour later, in his suite, Lee was sitting on his bed, in the dark, from the turned off lights, and shut curtains. He was still watching TV, which did little to take his mind off of his problems.
He then started hearing the phone on his nightstand, on the left side of his bed, begin to ring.
Lee used his remote to turn off the TV. He toss the remote on his bed, as he moved around his bed, to reach the phone.
When Lee reached the phone, he picked up the receiver to his phone.
Lee was sitting up, as he held the receiver to his right ear. He said, “Hello.”
A familiar voice said, in english, “Hello Lee. It's Sam.”
Lee replied, in a tired tone of voice, “Hey Sam.”
Sam asked, with concern in his tone of voice, “What happened? We were suppose to meet back at after lunch, but you never showed up?”
Lee thought, 'I believe it will be best not to tell him that I was kidnapped, then rescued by a Transformer, and the woman whom was formally Darth Vader. Though, that would likely give him a good laugh. Instead, I will just keep this simple.'
Lee answered, “Sorry. Something came up at the last moment. And I think I am going to need some time alone for today, and tomorrow. I will see you the day after tomorrow. And thanks for calling.” He mentally added, 'At least someone gives a damn about me.'
Sam responded, “No problem. Take the time you need. I will be here, when you need me. I will see you the morning after tomorrow, at the Rats Nest.”
Lee said, “Thanks Sam. I will see you, then.”
Lee then hung up the phone. A few seconds later, something occurred to Lee, as he thought, 'I might as well call Pedro. It is better, for myself, if I tell him what happened, than for him to learn what happened from someone else.'
Lee then picked up the receiver, and dialed another number.
That was just enough ambient light coming from the outside, around the curtains, to see the outline of the phone key pad, for Lee to dial a number.
As the phone picked up on the other end of the line, Lee did not wait for the other person to say, hello. Instead, Lee stated, in english, “It's Lee. Please, transfer me to Chief Del Soto. It is important.”
A few seconds later, the call was transferred, and Pedro picked up the other end of the line. Pedro said, in spanish, “Hello.”
Lee stated, “Hi Pedro. There are some things, today, that happened me. That I need to tell you about, right now. It cannot wait for this evening.”
Pedro replied, in english, “I can guess. My boys had to clean up some bodies on the highway leading to the bridge, out of town. From the hardware, I am guessing a hit squad, from your homeland, was sent after you, and bring you back to them.”
Lee thought, 'Keeping it vague is a smart move, Pedro. We do not know if this call is being monitored.' He said, “Yea. What you likely guessed what happened, likely happened.”
Pedro commented, “I found some cauterized wounds on the bodies. Are those injuries from who I think they are from?”
Lee said, “Yes. She helped me, along with her large, pink friend.”
There was a few seconds of silence. Pedro then replied, “So, she is here, as well?”
Lee answered, “Yes. Do we have to worry about reprisals?”
Pedro stated, “I doubt it. I bumped this up to my superiors on the mainland. This is not the first time you homeland's government tried something like this, on my island. And this is not the first time they did not return.”
Lee thought, 'Good. That is the answer I was hoping to here. Though, do need to know what the local authorities are going to do, in response to this. I need to know if the mainland authorities might send someone to investigate the matter, and arrest me.'
Lee inquired, “So, what is going to happen behind the scene.”
Pedro answered, “Well, behind closed doors, away from the press, my country's government will complain. Your country's government will deny everything. The entire incident will be swept under the rug. And nothing will come of it. I will probably have to get rid of the bodies. I think I will have them buried, in unmarked graves, with a priest preforming last rites.”
Lee thought, 'Good. Nothing is going to immediately come out of this mess. Meaning, I still have some time to figure out what to do. But, right now, that is looking like a matter of days. A week at most. But, that is still a little time. And I have worked with less time before, while being successful in my goals. Now, to compliment Pedro. To help keep him happy with me.'
Lee complimented, “That is kind of you.”
Pedro questioned, “Thank you. So, what happened next?”
Lee thought, 'Given that he has been covering for me, all this time. I am going to have to tell him. Though, I will keep my story vague. And I am sure he will be able to read the lines. This is not the first time we have done this. And he has not complained once about our speaking in code.'
Lee stated, “They took me to see their boss. And I had a long talk with him. They know about me. But, they are not going to do anything to me, for right now.”
Pedro commented, “Okay. Still, it looks like your con is collapsing in around you.”
Lee grimly thought, 'Even you can see the obvious, Pedro. And it is bad, if you are willing to openly tell me this. And as such, I need to get you out of the line of fire, that I am sure is to come. With what happened today only being a taste of that.'
Lee suggested, “As sad as it is for me to admit, you are likely correct. Also, for your sake, I believe we need to stop meeting each other.”
Pedro replied, “I agree.”
Lee said, in a sincere tone of voice, “And listen. If this is the last time we talk, I thank you for your help. You have saved my life a few times. And I appreciate that.”
Pedro responded, in a firm, thought supportive tone of voice, “You too. You saved my brother's life. And kept me and my boys out of trouble. I thank you for that. And good luck.”
Lee said, “Good luck to you, as well.”
Lee then hung up the phone, as he sat on his bed, in the darkness of his suite.
Lee said, out loud, in a sad, disappointed tone of voice, “Back to fucking square one.”
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 1: “De La Plata Podrido.”
Chapter 18: “Sealed Can Of Savvy Awesome.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
During the morning after the chat between Lee and Chang, around ten thirty AM, Melvin walked into the Devil's Hotel restaurant. He was ready to face the day, and begin his shift, as the bartender for the hotel restaurant.
As Melvin entered the room, he noticed Revy sitting, alone, at the bar counter, on the side facing the left wall of the room. And she had her guns with her.
Also, Melvin noticed that Revy was the only other person in the room.
The morning staff had already cleaned up, and taken down the breakfast buffet for the day, and left to resume their other duties at the hotel. The other customers, besides Revy, had finished their breakfast and left to have some fun for the day.
Melvin grimly thought, 'This is not good. Revy, by herself, in a bar, is never a good thing. It usually leads to trouble. Plus, she is armed. Still, I better find out what is going on, so, I can mitigate the situation.'
Revy heard Melvin’s foot steps, as she turned to her left, in her stood, to to face him. She stated, “Hey Melvin. I have been waiting for you to show up, so we can get this party started. I would like to start off with a beer.”
Meanwhile, so not to keep Revy waiting too long. Melvin briskly walked through the front entrance to the bar counter, and around back for of the counter. He came to a stop where he was standing across the counter from Revy, as he asked, “What is going on Revy? And where is everyone else?”
Revy said, “Well, Benny convinced them all to take a bus tour of some ruins on the mainland. I didn't feel like going.... I have seen plenty of collapsed buildings, in my life. I don't need to see any ancient ones.”
Melvin mentally reflected, 'This is worse than thought. Revy left alone is like leaving a bored, armed, teenager alone. She will just get into trouble, unless I do something... I could get Lee. But, I think that game with River, that Revy and Chang forced him into, which he won, burned him out a bit. I know he ordered into his suite, yesterday evening, so I can guess he just wants to be left alone. So, I will only contact him, if it is an emergency.'
'Still, I need to find out how long until the others get back.'
Melvin inquired, “So, when will the others been back?”
Revy answered, “They left around nine this morning, and the tour was suppose to end around three this afternoon. So, I would say, they will all get back, in around four and a half hours.”
Melvin thought, with relief, 'That is not too long. Now, to get down to basics of why I am not going to let you get drunk, Revy.'
Melvin pointed you, “Revy, you should remember that I still have the rule where I am not going to let you get drunk while armed.”
Revy shrugged, as she said, “Okay. Fair enough. I will just few beers, until the Rats Nest opens up in half an hour, and then I will head over there.”
Melvin deadpanned, “I hope by taxi.”
Revy replied, “Of course.”
Melvin commented, “Though, I doubt you will get much service from the bartender over there, at this time of day. Especially, while armed.” He thought, 'Beside, I like that woman. And I don't want her getting mixed up with you, Revy.'
Revy's lips curled into smirk, as she stated, “I promise to be nice, and tip well.”
It took all of Melvin's willpower not to laugh at Revy's comment. Melvin thought, 'I highly doubt you will. Still, I don't want to serve you any alcohol this early in the morning. But, I have to keep you attention busy someway, for at least half an hour. And I don't think you are going to settle for a few movie suggestions... But, I have something else in mind. Something I learned while here in Plata Podrido, as a hobby.'
Melvin then noticed from Revy's facial expression, that she was growing impatient. Revy asked, “So, are you going to get me that beer? Or not?”
Melvin inquired, “Well, first Revy. I was wondering if you would like to play a little game?”
Revy stated, “It depends on the game. This better on be a ploy to get me to have sex with you. It will not work on me. And it will likely upset me.”
Melvin scoffed, “Please, Revy. I am at work. And I don't date crazy women. You included.”
Revy let out a laugh. She conceded, “You got me there. So, what do you have in mind?”
Melvin asked, “Revy, have you ever heard of past life regression?”
Revy smiled at Melvin, as she answered, “Yes. Sounds interesting.”
Melvin suggested, “Would you like to know to know about your past lives?”
Revy thought, 'That is not a bad idea. My kids are reincarnation of people I know it my current life. And I do wonder who I was in a passed life. And it might actually be fun.'
Revy shrugged, as she replied, “Sure. You are not going to pulled out a pocket watch, are you.”
Melvin pulled out his pen. He held it up, in front of Revy, as he said, “No. I learned to do it with a pen, or a pencil. Now, I just need focus on the pen, and relax your mind.”
Revy did as she was requested to do.
(_)
Half an hour later, Lee was making the most of his morning, in his suite.
It has been a few hours since he had awoke. He had long since gotten ready to face the day. Among other things, he had brushed his teeth, flossed, shaved his face, gotten a shower, and gotten dress.
He was dressed in his casual clothing, such as t-shirt, pants, leather belt, tennis shoes, and wrist watch.
Also, while he had on this blue cloth jacket, he did not have on his baseball cap and large glasses. His cap and glasses were on his nightstand, by the left side of his bed.
Lee has already ordered breakfast in earlier that morning. With the bellhop returning for the tray and cart, half an hour ago.
Lee made sure to tip the bellhop with a ten dollar bill.
Currently, Lee was sitting on his bed, watching TV.
The curtains to the outside were drawn open, with the sliding door to the balcony open, to let in some fresh, cool air, from the sunny day outside.
The light from the outside provided plenty of illumination for his room.
As Lee watched TV, he thought about his life, 'Well, all things being equal. Which they are clearly not. This morning has been pretty normal, considering how my life has become a carnival for the violently insane. That I have some of the most dangerous, badass women in the multiverse after my hide, for screwing them over, from a literary standpoint... Well, literary for me. Given what I wrote actually happened to them, in other realities.'
'In addition, besides Pedro. The other four people in town, whom know I am the writer, is gender bending, former dimensional warlord, mafia boss, turned back to casino owner. Along with his telepathic genius girlfriend. And their two main enforcers. A borderline insane autobot, and a former sith lord turned gray force using master. And they all are good friends with the women whom after me.'
'The only thing going for me in that situation, is that all four seem to like me, and they agreed to keep my secret, for the moment. Though, I have no idea how long said moment is going to last.'
'On top of all this, yesterday, one of the most powerful governments on this Earth tried to kidnap me off the street.'
'And if none of these people are able to get me, the cancer that is slowly killing me, will.'
'I have a few months until the cancer will kill me. But, first I have to steal one of the reality devices from the women after me, and use it to escape. That is the main problem. Fortunately, I had a few ideas on how to cure my cancer, once I am gone. Though, I first have to escape these women, which even I will admit is not going to be an easy task.'
'And the only four real friends I have here is a shady drifter, who is good at playing poker, and great at playing pool. A corrupt cowboy cop. A bartender, who is former military, and ex-mafia member, who is in hiding from his comrades. And another bartender, whose name, and past, I have no clue about.'
'Of those four, only the cowboy cop knows the truth about me. And as of yesterday, me and him decided it would be best for him to put some distance between us... Yep. I am screwed. I am so screwed to the wall, that I am likely now part of the wall.'
'So, I am just going to spend today in my suite, and shut out the insanity, for one god damned day. So, I can think, and plan my next moves, in this constantly shifting playing board which I call my life.'
'Still, at this point, the only question now is when the grim reaper will show up?'
Suddenly, there was a knock at his hallway door.
Lee turned to his right, in the direction of the door, as he sarcastically thought, 'That might be her, right now. Best get ready, and face whomever it is. Upset badasses make for poor company.'
Lee quickly used his remote to turn off the TV. After he set the remote on the bed, he got up, and reached on the nightstand to put on his large glasses, and blue baseball cap.
While he did so, he saw that the clock on the nightstand stated that it was eleven two AM.
As Lee walked around his bed the right side of his bed, he stopped at his sliding door, just long enough to shut and lock it.
He then turned and walked to the door to the hallway.
As Lee looked into the peephole, he saw that it was Melvin, and he breathed a sigh of relief.
Lee thought, 'Even if Melvin knew the truth about me. I doubt he would hurt me... Besides he owes me, for saving him from his former friends, whom came looking for him. In all honestly, he is in a similar situation as me. So, I sympathize with his problems.'
'And I didn't really do anything to bad to the member of Hotel Moscow. Barring Balalaika and B. I was not the one responsible for turning Hotel Moscow into an Amazon Brigade. That is on Balalaika's head. And I didn't do anything to serious to Hotel Moscow.'
'Still, from the way he vaguely talked about his past, I get the feeling his reality device is broke. So, I might as well not brother him with telling him the truth. Still, I will see what he wants. He would only come to me if the situation was serious... It also might give me a good laugh. And I could use a good laugh, right now.'
Lee opened the door, as he greeted, “Good morning Melvin?”
Lee then noticed Melvin had a worried look on his face.
Lee expression turned grim, as he thought, 'Melvin being worried is a very back thing. And the last time he came to my door, a few member of his old military group, hotel Moscow, has come to town to look for him. And we barely got out of that mess in one piece.'
Lee asked, with concern in his tone of voice, “What is the matter, Melvin?”
Melvin said, with worry in his tone of voice, “Lee, and I am in big fucking trouble here. Probably more trouble, than the last time I came to your suite, looking for help. And you are the only one I can turn to for help. Please, help me.”
Lee thought, with concern, bordering on worry, 'Oh this is bad. If this retired Hotel Moscow badass says he is in trouble, that is saying something. I might as well help him. I cannot save myself, but at least I can save him.'
Lee calmed himself, as he put himself into his poker face frame of mind. He then inquired, in a calm, reassuring tone of voice, “First, tell me what is going on?”
Melvin stated, “Well, this morning, the girls decided to take a bus tour to the mainland, to see some ruins. Revy stayed behind. She was in the bar, getting an early start at drinking, and I didn't want problems. So, I suggested we play a game.”
Lee maintained his poker face, as he jump in, in a firm, borderline threatening tone of voice, “If this game involved sex, or violence, in any way, shape, or form, you are on your own. And my next action, after shutting the door, will be to call Pedro.”
Melvin shook his head, as he explained, “It was nothing like that. First, I want you to know we have roughly four hours to fix this. So, there is time. And well... You see, I have been here for a few years, and in that time I have studied a few hobbies. One of them is hypnotism.”
Lee entire demeanor completely changed to happiness, as he realized the possibilities of Melvin's comment.
Lee was barely able to contain his laughter, as he smiled. He said, with a bit of excitement in his voice, “If she is acting like a kid... Well, more than normal. Or, a chicken. I want to see this with my own eyes.”
Melvin calmly said, “It is not that type of hypnotism. Though, that might be tempting to do to here. I wish I had thought about doing that, earlier. But, no. What I am talking about, is that I studied past life regression, through hypnotism. And I got it worked with Revy. And it was not trick on her. She even liked the idea of learning about her past lives. The problem is I cannot turn it off.”
While, Lee began to realize what Melvin meant, his laughter died in his throat, as he dropped his grin.
Lee grimly thought, 'Oh no. Revy is literally not in her right mind. And Melvin wants me to return Revy to normal... Or, more aptly, what passed for normal, for her.'
'Also, with Revy having the personality of one of her previously lives. Knowing her. And my rotten luck. Chances are the older personality is more violent, and ill tempered than Revy usually is. Well, let's find out, what is going on.'
Lee responded, with worry in his tone of voice, “Oh no... No. No. No. You should have known better with that crew. That is like playing with fire, Melvin... Have you ever seen the Hellraiser movies?”
Melvin questioned, “Yes. Why?”
Lee answered, “Because if we don't fix this, they are going to skin you alive, and then really show you what true suffering is like...” Lee then stood a few deep breathes. He then inquired, “Okay... How bad is it? What person was Revy in her past life?”
Lee saw Melvin's body squirm, as Melvin coyly said, “Well, it is not really that bad... Well, it is. You can see for yourself. She is right here.”
Lee walked out of his room, and into the hallway, as Melvin moved out of the way, and to Lee's left side. Lee came to a stop, just inside the hallway, with the door to his room still open.
Lee then saw Revy with her pistols holstered, in her usual clothing, about ten feet away from both him, and Melvin, to Lee's right side. Lee also saw Revy quietly looking at them.
But, by the way Revy positioned her body, as she stood in place, along with the playful look in her eyes, Lee could see that something was off about her general demeanor.
Such as her eyes, and facial expression, were more relaxed than normal.
Revy then walked up a few feet towards him. As Revy walked, Lee noticed Revy's mannerisms were completely different, yet eerily familiar. As if her body language belonged to someone else he knew of.
Then, Revy came to a stop, in the middle of the hallway, about six feet from Lee and Melvin.
Revy then held her hands up in from of her, She made hand gestures, as she spoke, in a very calm tone of voice, in english, with the accent she used tipping Lee off as to who she was in so many ways, “Hello. I am told that you, my dear follow, could be of some use to myself... It seems I have found myself in a strange situation... Well, stranger than my usual affairs... Still, it all comes down to what you can do for me... A question... A parley... A twist of style... A twist of fate... All to answer the question, are you...” She cocked her head to her right side, as she continued, “Savvy?”
Revy then dropped her hands back to her sides, and straighten her head upwards, as she maintained a slight smirk on her lips.
As Lee continued to look at Revy, Lee stayed mostly calm on the outside, as he barely maintained his poker face. But on the inside, Lee was a tempest of worry and concern, as he thought, 'No. No. No. Revy cannot possibly be the reincarnation that person. Of all people... Dear god, I know you are cruel. But, not this cruel... No!...'
Lee calmly asked, “And to whom am I speaking to?”
Revy leaned down in masculine bow, as she answered, in the same accent she had previously used, “Captain Jack Sparrow, at your service.” She then leaned back up straight.
Lee was barely able to maintain his mask of calmness, as he mentally screamed, 'Oh god NOOOOOOOOOOOOOO!....' Lee then forced himself to calm down, as he continued his thoughts, 'I have to calm down. I have to focus. I have to save the world for the most dangerous pirate in the multiverse. A pirate that is now even more dangerous...'
'And while the, how could Revy be Jack's reincarnation, is a big question. This still does explain a few things about Revy's personality. Such as Revy's bad karma in her rotten childhood. Also, there are parallels between Revy and Jack. Both like rum. Both are manipulative. Jack is just a whole lot better at it, given he was taught manners. Both are genre savvy. It is just that Jack dials it up to eleven.... Which could be a problem for myself.'
'Both are selfish, greedy, arrogant, amoral, bi-sexual pirates. It is just that Jack prefers to be nice about it. Also, Revy prefers to be honest with those around her, while Jack prefers to lie to others.'
'And Jack was enslaved at one point, and escaped. Revy was imprisoned, and raped, but she later escaped. Both have problems with their love life. I just fixed hers. The only real difference between the two, besides their genders, is that Jack has positive outlook on life. And Revy has a negative outlook on life.'
'That, and the fact that Revy is monogamous, while Jack is promiscuous.'
'And both of them stand by their friends, even when it is against their better judgment.'
'If it wasn't for the fact that Jack just being here is a danger to the world. Along with screwing over Revy's personal life. I would leave Revy like this. Unfortunately, I have to put this genie back into the bottle. And I think I know how. With Revy now being a sealed can of awesome. That is, savvy awesome.'
'The problem is that Jack Sparrow is so awesome, and savvy, that you only open that can when you are ready to end the world... Or, you just need someone to throw a really good party.'
'Still, I might as well deal with this situation, because this is way out of Melvin's field of expertise.'
Lee turned to Melvin. He stated, with annoyance in his tone of voice, “Melvin, when you fuck up, you really go for the gold.”
Melvin turned to Lee. He could not help but smirk, as he inquired, “It is a gift. So, are you still going to help me?”
Lee said, “Yes. You go back to the bar. I am taking Revy out on an... errand.” He turned to Revy, as he continued, “If Revy's friends show up early, tell them that Revy did have a few drinks. And with her already having some alcohol. She talked me into taking her to the casino, to have some fun.”
Melvin thought, 'That might work.'
Melvin replied, “Alright.” He turned to Revy, as he said, “It was a pleasure meeting you, Jack.”
Revy looked over at Melvin, as she commented, in a relaxed tone of voice, in Jack's accent, “You to, as well, Melvin.”
Melvin then turned around and walked down the hallway, towards the front elevator bay.
Meanwhile, Revy turned to Lee, as she asked, “So, what makes you so special for Melvin to ask you to help in this situation?”
Lee looked at Revy, in her eyes, as he flatly answered, “I am the only person crazy enough to take the job, with the limited time we have, while remaining calm enough to pull off this job.”
Revy cracked a grin, as she said, “Now, that is an answer. So few people appreciate the advantages to being both crazy and calm at the same time.”
Lee admitted, “Yes. Being crazy calm does have its perks.”
Revy commented, “And you seem to know me.”
Lee retorted, “Who has not heard of the great Captain Jack Sparrow? Or, for that matter, the great Revy?”
Revy's grin got wider, as she replied, “Touche.”
Lee requested, “Now Jack. If you would please follow me to my car. We need to head to a few places? If that is alright with you?”
Revy said, “Absolutely. I want to see where this situation goes. And you do have a nice pink Cadillac.”
Lee thought, 'So, Jack has Revy's memories. That just means I will have to be even more careful. I will ask her about this, after we get into the car.' He joked, “Then, right this way, my lady.” He then turned and started walking towards the front elevator bay that went to the hotel lobby.
Revy let out a laugh. Though, Lee noted her laugh was more like one of Jack's laughs, and not Revy's laughs. Revy then turned, and caught up with Lee, to walk beside him, to Lee's right side, as the two of them headed for the front elevator bay.
Unfortunately, they missed Melvin, at the elevator bay, but they were about to get another elevator, within a few seconds.
(_)
It was a nice, sunny, cool day outside, as few minutes later, they were both in the front seat of Lee's pink Cadillac.
Lee was driving, with Revy beside him.
Lee had put the hood and windows down, so they could enjoy the nice day.
As Lee drove them to their first destination, he continued to watch the road in front of them, while he though, 'We will soon be to the first place we need to go, in a few minutes. Also, I will put the top, and windows, back up when we return to the hotel. For now, I need to keep Jack happy, while I work out my plan for this immediate situation. Speaking of which, this is a good time to ask about how much of Revy's memory, that Jack has access too.'
Lee commented, “I noticed that you are not surprised by the technology of this age.”
Revy turned to look at Lee. Revy stated, in a relaxed tone of voice, in Jack's accent, “That is because I have all of Revy's memories. Just not her personality. I believe this is due to my having my own memories, as well. And mine are a whole lot more fun that hers... Well, most of them... Still Lee, my boy, while I review Revy's memories of you, it is clear you more than you appear.”
While looking at the road in front of them, Lee commented, “That is true for everyone.”
Revy complimented, in Jack's accented, “Correct. And by the way, that is a nice dodge. You have been dodging every question I have made towards you, as Revy, since Revy has met you. That is very savvy of you. More savvy than, the fool, that Revy thinks you are. But, I know better. There are two types of fools. The foolish, and those who fool others. And you, my dear sir, are the latter.”
Lee thought, 'With someone as savvy as Jack. There is no point in denying that. She will spot a lie a mile away. And right now, I am on her good side. And I want to continue to be on her good side.' He admitted, “Okay. You got me there.”
Revy went onto say, “Quite right. It is quiet foolhardy, but commendable that you, the writer, would be able to hide so closely to your pursuers. Only the crazy of the crazy would suspect. I guess that fortuneteller was right. I would find you soon after doing some soul searching. Oh, the irony.”
In response, Lee immediately slowed down. He then parked on the side of the road, and put the car in park, with the engine idling. With the car no longer in motion, Lee turned to Revy. He stated, “You're right. Now, what?”
Revy looked over at Lee, as she smirked. She said, “Well, if I was Revy, I would be beating you to a pulp. But currently, I am not. I admire you, Lee. If for any other reason than the courage it takes to do all this. But, the question becomes, why?”
Lee answered, “I am dying of cancer.”
Revy stated, “That does explain a lot. And with that answer, it is obvious you plan to steal a reality device, and use it to find a cure in the multiverse.”
Lee stated, “Either that, or find a decent reality to die in, so I can be reincarnated. You, and your children, are breathing proof that reincarnation is possible.”
Revy said, “That is not a bad plan. And you have a nice fall back plan, as well. And for you playing this game so well. If I had the device that Rock and I use, I would give it to you. Unfortunately, Rock keeps it on her person.”
Lee thought, 'And you realized, that given you are not in your right mind, right now, you know you won't get into that much trouble. Melvin, on the other hand, will. So, I would still have had to save him. But, that is another matter. Also, I now know that Rock keeps a reality device on her person. This is the major break that I needed. Though, I cannot use that information right now. Though, this does open a chance, for a later opportunity. But, first I have to save Melvin, myself, and even Revy, from Jack's mischievous personality.'
Lee responded, “Thank you for the information. That is still helpful. By the way, I do not know how you, as Revy, could be the reincarnation of Jack Sparrow. Honestly, that comes completely from left field for me.”
Revy commented, “I know. As Revy, I read your stories. You mention me, as Jack, a few times. But, you clearly had nothing to do with this.” She used her hands to point at her chest, as she continued, “I guess it is just one of those things that came out of the blue.” She then dropped her hands to her lap.
Lee replied, “I guess so.”
Revy stated, “By the way. I know what you are thinking. I promise not to tell the others that you are the writer.”
Lee thought, 'You may promise that. But, given both you natures, as Jack and Revy. I doubt you can keep your promise. Still...' He replied, “Thank you.”
Revy said, “You're welcome.” She continued, in a demure tone of voice, “Still, even though you are dying. That does not mean we cannot have a little fun.” Her lips curled into a lecherous grin, as she continued, with a bit of eagerness in her tone of voice, “I swing both ways, mehearty.”
Lee commented, in a calm tone of voice, “Jack, I admit that it is tempting. But, we cannot. We have to get you back to sleep, and Revy's personality back in control. And we are on a tight schedule to do so.”
Revy dropped her grin, as she asked, in an annoyed tone of voice that was closer to Revy's voice, than Jack's voice, “Why should I go back to being that stick in the mud?” Her lips curled into a grin, as she said, in a more chipper tone of voice, with Jack's accent, “You got to admit that I much funner to be around. And I like being me, right now.”
Lee caught the accent slip, as he thought, 'Good. Revy is still in there. Though, I believe this is clearly not a case of one consciousness taking over another consciousness. So much, that Revy remembers being Jack. And she liked Jack's memories so much, she has become Jack.'
'Though, she is Jack. There is just not two personalities in her mind. Just one personality, that prefers to be the Jack persona, instead of the Revy persona.'
'Not that I blame Revy for this. For the short time I have knowing Jack, he is clearly a fun person to be around. And Jack is likely a very fun person to be.'
'But, if stress is applied, Revy's personality starts to come to the forefront.'
'This is very good. It means sealing Jack personality will not be hard. Because there are not two personalities trying to fight for dominance, inside Revy's soul. It is just a case of one personality preferring to use one set of memories, over the another set of memories.'
'Meaning all we have to do is seal Jack's memories. And the memories Revy has for today, to prevent her from realizing I am the writer. And I know just the two people whom could probably do it. And since they are both my friends. And Revy's friends. They would likely be more than happy to make the attempt.'
'Revy, Jack, or whomever she think she currently is, clearly does not realize this. This works for me. Though, if my plan A fails. I will just have to point this out to her, and hope that myself, and those I plan to seek help from, can encourage the Revy persona to come to the forefront. With myself then dealing with the fallout of her knowing that I am the writer, afterward.'
'Though, if we had the time. I am sure Revy's persona would eventually come back, in part, or in full. With Revy growing tired of the Jack persona, like a child growing tired of the new toy she has.'
'Unfortunately, by that time. Jack's persona would have wrecked havoc with Revy's personal live. Especially, Revy's love life with Rock. And I put much work, and effort, into helping Revy and Rock's relationship, to have a past life, of one of them, ruin it.'
'Besides, in the meantime, Revy would blow both my cover, and Melvin's cover. And the sad part is she would likely not intentionally do so. The information would just slip out of her mouth.'
'During my time around these lunatic women has taught me many lessons. Among those lessons, is that you can turn you back on a promise. But, you cannot turn your back on a lunatic.'
'No. I got to get this genie back into her bottle. This Jack has got to go back into his box.'
'Now, to convince Jack to want to do this. And I know just how to do it. I will use Revy's memories against Jack. If there is only personality in there. Deep down they will want the same exact thing. It is just that the two personae would prefer to go about getting the same thing they want, in two different ways.'
'And I know what they really want. The one thing that Jack likely never had in his previous life.'
Lee stated, “That maybe true. But, I want you to answer two questions, for both myself, and yourself. First, in your entire life as Jack, were you ever able to find true love, like Revy has with Rock? And do you still love Rock?”
Revy stopped smiling, as she when silent for a few seconds, as she thought over Lee's questions. She then replied, in a sober tone of voice, “I see your point. Perhaps I should go back to the way I was. The question is, how?”
This time, it was Lee's turn to smirk, as he stated, “Leave that to me. Still, I take it you would like to get changed into something more conformable.”
Revy let out a laugh. She then said, in Jack's accent, “Yes. I would. And I would guess your plan involves, Chang, somehow. He is the only one with the resources in town to help you with this. And that means, if you are going to Chang, for help, that Chang knows who you are.”
Lee stated, “Yes. Chang knows. And so does Annie, Arcee, and of course, River. But, none of the others know. So, when we go to the casino, please keep what is going on to yourself?”
Revy responded, “I will. And I would guess your plan for me to change into some clothing that is closer to my old style of clothing, to make it easier to convince Chang of the situation.”
Lee replied, “Of course.” He thought, with mild admiration, 'Jack, you are as good at this game, as I expect you to be.'
Revy smiled. She giggled, as she said, “Oh my student, the things I could teach you, if we only had more time.”
Lee flatly commented, “Mores the pity. Now, before we head out. I do have an important question for you. How did your pirate life end for you, Jack?”
Revy soberly answered, in Jack's accent, “A hangman's noose, in Caracas, Venezuela.”
Lee wondered in thought, 'Interesting. Now, that I think about it, there are a lot of Latin American connections in the Black Lagoon series. Specifically, Caracas, Venezuela. But, I just don't have the time to think about that mystery, right now.'
Lee politely requested, “Please, go on. I am sure there is more to your story than that.”
Revy gave Lee a weak smile, as she stated, in Jack's accent, “Oh, there is. I had gained the eternal youth I had sought for so long. But, I found that though I did not age, it did not make me immortal. It did not give me eternal health. Decades later, I started to get sick. Year passed, and I got worse. Though, I sought a cure, I did not find one. And so, before I got to weak to walk, I sought to go out a death that would be proper for a pirate of my pedigree.”
Lee held back a snort, when Revy mentioned the word, pedigree. He thought, 'Jack. You may have grown up around pirates. But, you did not become one, until you were forced to do so.'
Revy went onto say, in Jack's accent, “I decided to attempt the near impossible. My crew, and I, tried to raid Caracas, which was protected by coastal mountains. I failed.”
“We were ambushed in the pass we used to get into the city. Half my men were killed in battle, while the other half ran to my ship, and left with it, again. Without me. Though, I expected that, considering was part of my plan, to have a proper.'
Lee thought, with concern, 'Just like the situation I presently find myself in. No wonder you complimented my plans. You were in a similar situation. And since you could not find a cure. You went with your plan B.'
'Even if you could not directly confirm reincarnation. After all our adventured, you knew there was life after death. You have been dead before, yourself.
'So, you rightly viewed that dying in the manner you sought was not the end for you.'
'And here you are, to prove that you were correct.'
Revy continued, in Jack's accented, “At the end of the battle, I was surprised to find that I was mostly unharmed. So, instead of dying in battle. As I expected would happen. I was instead, captured. But, I soon found out, in person, that the man in charge of Caracas, at that time, the Governor of Caracas, was a big fan of my exploits.”
“And I have nothing but good things to say about my host, the Governor of Caracas.”
“While we both knew he had to hang me, and I had no plans to stop him. He treated me well. We had a wonderful conversation, which he provided a scribe write down what we talked about. I may have to look at up those records some time. I am sure they are still around.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. That would be interesting.”
Revy smiled, as she said, in Jack's accent, “That it would. And I am glad you agree. Also, the Governor of Caracas then offered me a priest to confess my sins to. Then, a good dinner with fine rum. And finally, he provide a beautiful woman for a last evening of pleasure.”
“Later that night, after the woman of the evening had left my cell, under escort of a guard. With no one else around, Calypso visited me, while I was alone. And we had an interesting chat. She told me that I did not have much to worry about. That I had done such a marvelous performance that I was going to be allowed to be a pirate in my next life, as well. I was very happy to hear that. She even added that in my next life, I would be just as wild, but in a different way.”
“She then told me that given the way I treated women, I would end of being born a woman. I found to be surprising, but not that disheartening. All the women pirates I knew were tougher, and meaner, than most of the men. She promised that I would not be the exception to that rule. And I see now that she was correct.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. Revy truly is a cut above the rest.”
Revy let out a laugh. She then stated, in Jack's accent, “Very true. Anyway, the next morning, at six thirty AM sharp, I was lead to the gallows, by wagon, at the crest of one of the mountains overlooking the ocean. As I was read the my charges, the angle of the gallows allowed me to see the ocean one last time, during a beautiful sunrise.”
“It was a glorious sight, indeed.”
“After the charges were read, I politely thanks my executioners for their generous hospitality. Then, they put the black hood over my head, and a noose round my neck. And promptly at seven AM that day, I felt a quick dropped, and a sharp snap of my neck. I then remember nothing, until I was reborn as Revy.”
Lee complimented, “I must say, Jack. You went out with as much style as you lived.”
Revy smile got wider towards Lee, as she replied, “Thank you, Lee.”
Lee turned to face the road. He checked to make sure he was clear, as he put the car in driver, and he he drove back onto the road.
When Lee was back on the road, he said, “Now, let's get you some clothes with a little more style to them.”
Revy laughed, in Jack's style of laughter, for a few seconds, at Lee's comment, as they drove down the road.
(_)
Around five minutes later, Lee drove into the parking lot of a local costume shop.
Lee came to a stop, by the curl, to a sidewalk, in front of the doors to the customer shop, with Revy side facing the doors. Lee put the car in park. He then looked at Revy, as he stated, “This is the best costume shop in town.”
Revy looked at Lee, as she raised an eyebrow. She inquired, in Jack's accent, “And how would you know?”
Lee thought, 'This is where I got some of my more flamboyant clothing during the time loop. And I am glad it was open during the Day of the Dead. Though, that three day holiday, of All Hallows Eve, Day of Little Angels, and Day of the Dead, are likely some of their best sales day for the year. Now, I better be honest with Revy. Though, vague.'
Lee honestly answered, “It is a long story, that we do not have time to get into, now. So, do you need money for clothing.”
Revy giggled. She said, “We are rich, thanks to you. And I have money on me.”
Lee sadly thought, 'Damn it. Now, she is grateful for what I have done for her? I hate myself, that I am going to have to get the old Revy back for all our sake. Jack really is just so much fun to be around.'
Lee calmly said, “You're welcome. Also, I suggest you keep your old clothing, for when you regain Revy's personality.”
Revy replied, “Of course. Though, Revy has such simple tastes in styles. While, I am much more flamboyant in my choices of clothing.”
Lee agreed, “That you are.”
Revy let out a laugh. She then stated, “The things I could do with this body. And I am not just talking about sex and violence. There are dozens of clothing styles that would look great on this body. And those are just off the top of my head.”
Lee commented, “We do not have time for you to spend all day picking out a new wardrobe.”
Revy responded, “I understand. I will just get something quick. That I think we agree will be... Me.”
Lee replied, “That sounds good.”
Revy offered, “So, would you like to come in with me?”
Lee said, in a calm tone of voice, “No thank you. I know your mischievous side. I wrote part of it. We do not have time to play dress up, for either of us.”
Revy shrugged, as she replied, “A girl can at least try. I should be out in half an hour.”
Lee stated, “Good. I will park nearby, and watch for you walk out. When you are ready, I will pick you up, here, by the curb.”
Revy said, “That will be fine.” She then got out of the car, and shut the passenger car door behind her.
While Revy walked inside the costume shop, Lee looked in front of the car, as he put the car in driver. He then drove his car around, in the parking lot, until he found a nearby parking place that faced the entrance to the costume shop.
(_)
Around half an hour later, from the driver's seat of his car, Lee saw Revy walk out of the customer shop.
Lee's only thought was, 'Wow. She pulls that off well.'
Revy wore old style pirates clothing, and a tricorne hat, that looked almost exactly like the clothing Jack Sparrow use to wear. The only two differences were that the clothing Revy wore fit her female frame. And where Jack Sparrow kept his muskets by his belt, Revy kept her semi-automatic cutlasses on her belt.
She also held her bag, filled with her old clothing, in her right hand, by the bag's top straps.
Lee noticed that the bag had a logo of costume shop, on the two large sides of the bag.
Lee started his car, put it in drive, and drove up to the front door, beside her, by the curb, with the front passenger side facing her, and the doors unlocked. He then put the car in park.
Revy walked up to the curb, where the car was able. She turned to Lee, as she said, in Jack's accent, “Thank you.”
With the roof and windows down, Revy tossed her bag in the back car seat, open the front passenger door, and got in.
After Revy sat down, she leaned back in her cushioned seat, she looked over at Lee. She asked, “Well, how do I look?”
Lee looked over at Revy, as he honestly admitted, “I wish I had a camera. It is so hard to pull off the same look as both a man and a woman, but you pull it off nicely.”
Revy warmly smiled towards Lee, as she responded, “Thank you. If nothing else, when this is over, Revy will finally have a set of stylish clothing to go into her closet.”
Lee laughed for a few seconds, at Revy's comment.
As Lee calmed down, he then looked in front of the car. He put the car in drive, and drove them both out of the parking lot, and onto the road. After which, Lee headed for the Daiyu Palace Casino, on the south end of the island.
While the drove, Revy commented, “Speaking of clothing. I may have Revy's memories, but even I don't understand some of the choices she made in her life.” She looked over on her cover right shoulder and upper arm. Which her clothing covered her tribal tattoo. She continued, “Such as the tattoo on my upper right arm and shoulder.” She then turned back to look at Lee, to her left.
Lee paid attention to every word Revy said, as he continued to look in front of him. He said, “Let me guess. She thought it would look cool on her?”
Revy responded, “Yes. I know you are very knowledgeable, about a lot of things. You stories reflect that knowledge. So, I have to humbly request. And please be honest. What is the current attitude about tattoos, like I have.”
Lee answered, “I won't lie to you. Tribal tattoos went out of style over a decade ago. It was a big thing for the nineteen nineties, which is when the Black Lagoon series was set. Though, you have such a hot body, most people could care less about the tattoo.”
Revy replied, “Thank you.”
Lee commented, “Well, for myself, Revy is not hard to understand.”
In response to Lee's comment. Revy laughed, for a few second. Though, it was more like Jack's laugh, than Revy's laugh.
As Revy calmed down, she said, in Jack's accent, “You are not the first man to mistakenly believe they understand women.”
Lee continued to look ahead of himself, as he countered, “Not women. Just Revy. I understand some of what makes Revy tick. Let me guess, Obviously, due to your lifetime's worth of memories, and experiences, plus Revy's one lifetime, the crap that happened Revy, when she was youngr, including her rape, does not effect you as much? The greater depth of wisdom from having practically doubled the lifetime's worth of memories, blunts Revy's early childhood traumas. Though, it still does effect you. Just not as much.”
Revy admitted, “That is correct.”
Lee thought, 'That confirms the one personality, two personae theory, I have for you. Which is good for everyone involved.'
Lee said, “As I thought. Unlike most people, I understand that the rape itself was not what caused Revy to finally snap. The rape was just the final straw of a long list of acts of abuse and neglect, from those around Revy, when she was a child.”
“The final moment that caused Revy's mental breakdown, with the resulting, and justified bloodshed she caused afterward, was soon after Revy being raped by that cop. After she her father hit her with a bottle. I can guess, when she got out of jail, she went to her abusive father over the matter of the false arrest and rape, and her father, whom likely either ignored her, or abused her some more, instead of aiding her.”
“It was then that she realized that everyone she knew around her wanted her to be in hell. And she decided to send them to hell, instead. She then got a gun, practiced with it. And when she felt she was good enough, she used her gun to kill people. Starting with her father.”
Lee's comment caught Jack off guard, as she leaned up from her seat, to looked at Lee most closely. She stated, “You do understand, Revy. And I am slightly afraid to ask what happened in your own life that allowed you to reach that understanding, yourself.”
As Lee continued driving them towards Daiyu's Palace Casino, he said, “Though, I was not raped, you really don't want to know what it took for me to gain such wisdom through pain.”
Revy replied, “I will take your word on that.”
The two then sat in silence, as Lee continued to drive them to the Daiyu Palace Casino.
(_)
Minutes later, Lee and Revy reached Daiyu Palace Casino.
Lee parked the car, about a hundred feet from the front entrance to the casino, which was covered by a large awning.
After Lee parked in a parking space, he put the car into park, turned off the ignition, pulled out the key to the car, and pocketed it.
Revy turned to Lee, as she asked, in Jack's accent, “So, how are we going to get into a meeting with Chang, on short noticed?”
Lee looked over at Revy, and smile. He answered, “Simple. The guards at the express elevator know you. If you haven't figured it out, they were likely some of the guys in Chang's Triad at Roanapur. Them seeing you in that dress will be all the proof they need to let us by, to see Chang.”
Revy pointed at her pistols, as she commented, “But, they won't let me take my weapons with me.”
Lee pointed out, “Put your weapons in the bag. They likely won't search us, if they don't see any weapons on us. And I mean this as a compliment, when I say that they know better than to pat down a lunatic like you.”
Revy giggled. She complimented, in Jack's accent, “Good point. And it is always nice to talk to someone who appreciates proper deviousness.”
Lee responded, “Thank you. And I take it there are no bullets in the chambers of your weapons?”
Revy said, “That is very perceptive of you.”
Lee shrugged, as he stated, “I watched your series. And I liked other subtle gun safety practices that you, Chang, and others, did in that series. Such as placing your trigger fingers against the trigger guard of your weapons, and not the triggers.”
Revy replied, “Yes. Chang was a good teacher. And it is clear you know how to use a gun.”
Lee said, “I am from the southeastern U.S., we are taught to use guns as children.”
Revy smiled, as she commented, “It must be a fun place.”
Lee commented, “It has its moments. I honestly think that if Revy had been born in the southeastern United States, instead of that toilet, New York City, she might have had a great time.”
Revy said, “Looking through Revy's memories, of her fascination with guns. And your people's love of guns. You might be right.”
Lee inquired, “Glad you agree. Also, don't take this the wrong way. I know Revy has an ass fetish, but I was on the fence on if she had a gun fetish.”
Revy stated, in Jack's accent, “Yes. I do have an ass fetish. Or, at least Revy does. It comes from after she was raped. She fantasized of revenge, by raping the man that did that raped her. And since men only have that one hole, that is where she fetish for the ass come from.”
Lee hesitantly commented, with concern in his tone of voice, “That... Does make sense.”
Revy responded, in a sober tone of voice, in Jack's accent, “Sadly. Yes. And you are correct on the other part of your comment. Revy's obsession with guns is more of a borderline fetish. It depends on the weapon. And yes, in the Black Lagoon series, when Revy talked to Shenhua about nukes, she was getting wet, down there, thinking about using a nuke, herself.”
Revy's tone of voice turned more warm, towards Lee, as she continued, “By the way, thank you for everything you have given me, as Revy, and for my family. I know as Revy, I am not grateful to you. And neither is the rest of my family. But, I am grateful to you, now.”
“I am even grateful for the nuke the Lagoon family has. Just having that weapon brought Revy a lot of pleasure, in a lot of ways.”
“And when I got back to be Revy, I wish I could continue to be grateful to you. Though, I doubt that. Because, we both know for your plan to work. I cannot remember any of this. Including, myself realizing you are the writer.”
Lee sadly said, “I know. And you're welcome.” He went onto say, in a more sober, than sad, tone of voice, “And at least are grateful to me, now. And I know at least a part of Revy will be grateful for what I have done for all of you.” He sorrowfully thought, 'That that will likely only be a small part.'
Revy understood the subtext of Lee's comment. She stated, in a sad tone of voice, in Jack's accent, “Yes. It is tragic.”
Revy then continued, in a curious tone of voice, “Still. The one thing I don't understand is how did you pulled off that ass joke, in the hotel theater, with Rock and Revy, seven times, without Revy killing you over doing that even once?... Actually, now that I think about it. Those memories are kind of jumbled. It was like Revy repeated the same day, over and over again.”
Lee thought, 'Jack is going to figure it out, eventually. So, I might as well, just tell her, now.' He admitted, “That is because, that is what happened. We were stuck in a time loop that only I remember.”
Revy guessed, “And it is a the long story?”
Lee smiled wickedly, as he replied, “To say the least.”
Revy commented, “That is intriguing. It is unfortunate that we do not have the time for you to tell me that story.”
Lee thought, 'Given how Jack is so happy with me right now. This might be my only chance to apologize about something, with Revy killing me over it. And it would make for a bit of closure on my part.'
Lee apologized, “I want you to know, that I apologize about something, during the time loop. If I had know that you and Rock were having your periods during that time, I would have tried to stop that loop sooner. And I did find a way to stop that loop, soon after I learned that was the case, with both of you.”
Revy inquired, “I believe you. But, how did you find that out?”
Lee answered, “Rock blurted that it was that time of the month for her. And I guessed from Revy's attitude, and closeness to Rock, that it was the same case for Revy.”
Revy said, “Good guess.”
Lee suggested, “Now, let's go see Chang.”
Revy offered, “Yes. I will like to see his face when he seems me like this. Want to bet that Chang will demand what is going on?”
Lee replied, “Nope. I am not taking a suckers bet. And if Revy had listened to me, she would not have taken that suckers bet, with Chang, in the first place.”
Revy let out a laugh. She then commented, “But, you did win me that million.”
Lee grumbled, “And you didn't let me keep a dime of it?”
Revy apologized, “Sorry about that. And thank you for winning me that money. And I am sure that was not easy for you.”
Lee replied, “To say the least. And I appreciate the thank you.”
Revy offered, “Unfortunately, I don't keep that much money on me. And I blew most of what I have on me, on the clothing I am presently wearing. But, would you take a check?”
Lee looked at Revy, in disbelief, as he flatly pointed out, “From a pirate, literally twice over?”
Revy realized what she had said. She sheepishly agreed, in Jack's accent, “Oh... Good point, love.”
Lee visibly deflated, as he suggested, in a slightly tied tone of voice, “Let's go see Chang, before we get on each other's nerves.”
Revy replied, “I agree.”
Both of them then got out of Lee pink Cadillac. With them shutting the doors behind them. Given the top and side windows were down, Lee did not bother to lock the vehicle.
Revy reached into the backseat, behind her, and opened the top of her bag. She then dropped her pistols into the bag. Next, she took off her hat, and dropped her pirate hat into the bag, over her pistols. After which, she picked up, and carried the bag with her, by its top straps, in her right hand.
Lee and Revy then walked side by side, with Revy to Lee's right side, as they headed for the front entrance.
As Lee walked away from the car, he thought, 'No one is going to steal my car. It stands out too much. And Pedro will have their hide, if someone tried to do so.'
A minute later, they made it to the front doors.
As the did so, Lee open one of the doors for Revy.
While Revy walked inside, she said, in a polite, cheerful tone of voice, “Thank you.”
Lee replied, “You're welcome.” He then follow her inside, with the door closing behind him.
Lee then caught up to walk beside Revy, to Revy's left side.
As they walked, Lee thought, 'The one thing I like about Jack, above all else, when compared to Revy, is that Jack knows her manners.'
While the two adults walked through the front lobby, they passed the front check in desk, and the casino tellers, to their left side. With the couched, seats, and small tables, lining the walls of the lobby, to their right side.
The two adults soon made it to the gaming floor. With the rock music that being played, by the speakers around the game floor, being, Bring Me To Life, by Evanescence.
Lee thought, 'What a proper song, for this situation. And it proves that Chang, and his staff, have good taste in music.'
Lee and Revy continued walking to the elevator bay, right in front of them, on the other side of the gaming floor, from the corner of his right eye, Lee saw Jetta, walking around the tables.
Jetta was wearing a black pants suit, ad she looked as if she was looking at the gaming playing around her, with a critical eye for detail.
Lee guessed, 'Well, Jetta does make a good pit boss. And she, Spike, and likely a few others, probably take turns, so the others can have a break. Spike is probably also watching Julia, with Faye and Jetta's help. And Faye is probably one of the dealers.'
'Though, after that game I had with River. Chang will probably give her the week off. To let the heat die down. And have the customer turn offer. So, no one, but the staff with recognize her, when she goes back to the gaming floor. And with Spike and Jetta present, they will keep her on her job, and from gambling away her money.'
'I am so glad I wrote it, so that I dealt with Faye's gambling addition, and I got her debt problems straighten out. That, with she and Jetta becoming rich, will probably keep them from killing me, if they found out who I was. Spike though, it is not going to so easy to appease...'
'Oh well, I better focus on the matter at hand, and fix Revy's mind, before Rock and the others get back from their tour. Or, my other worries will be insignificant, compared to what they will do to Melvin, and myself.'
'Also. Now, that I think about it. We need to take the front elevator, instead of going around back, because it lessens the chance of bumping into someone that would ask Revy questions. The less people that know the truth, the easier it will be the pass the lie off, later.'
The two adults remained silent, as they continued to walk towards the front elevator bay.
Several seconds later, they made it to the front elevator bay.
The two adults came to a stop in front of the two chinese female guards, in black suits and black dress shoes, whom were guarding the express elevator.
Lee thought, 'Given the other express elevator, around back, is not guarded, I am starting to think these guards are only here not to keep the drunks and gamblers from wondering into the wrong elevator. While also keeping a couple of arm guards on hand, near the gaming floor, if they are needed. If that is the case, then it is not a bad idea on Chang and Mal's part.'
'Though, now I need to convince them to let us pass. Which, given the situation, should not be too hard.'
Lee looked at the two guards, as he calmly stated, “Ladies, I know this is on short notice. But, please let us through. This is important.” He turned to Revy, to his right side. He then turned back to look at the guards, as he continued, with concern in his tone of voice, “As you can see, Revy is not in her right mind. I need Chang's help to fix this, before Rock and the others come looking for her. So, please let us through.”
Both women looked at each other. Then, they turned back to Lee and Revy. One of the women stated, in english, “You are right. This is important.”
Revy requested, in Jack's accent, “And I humbling request, that you two, please do not alert Chang that we are coming. I want to see the look on his face, when I show up in this.”
Revy different accent, and polite manners, set off all kinds of warming bells, in the minds of the two other women in the elevator bay.
The woman calmly said, “Whatever you say.”
The other women turned, pulled out a key from one of her pockets, and used it to summon the express elevator.
Several seconds later, the elevator doors open, Lee and Revy walked inside, without being searched.
Lee and Revy then turned around in the elevator, to face the doors, with Lee now to Revy's right side. A few seconds later, the elevator doors closed, and began to quickly take them up to the penthouse floor.
After the doors closed, the guards turned to face forward, towards the gaming floor. As they stood to the sides of the express elevator doors.
One of the guards asked the other guard, with concern in her tone of voice, in chinese, “Do you think we should contact Chang, that Revy and Lee are coming up to see him?”
The other guard faced forward, as she calmly answered, in chinese, “And risk pissing off Revy. On a good day, she is crazy. And this is clearly not one of her good days.”
The first guard responded, “I agree. And at least she is polite, right now. Though, I still agree. We should not chance it. And Chang has always respected intelligent decisions. And he can take care of himself. Or, herself.”
The other guard replied, “Yes. And sometime, I am going to find out how he can switch back and forth between genders.”
The first guard said, “Actually, I talked to Chang about that. He did not go into detail, but he said he was willing to offer us, his employees, some packets of powder, for free, that will temporally turn us back into men, if we wanted the packets.”
The other guard smiled, as she said, with interest in her tone of voice, “Sounds like fun.”
The first guard returned the smile, as she happily replied, “Exactly.”
The two guards then resumed their duties, in silent, for their current shift.
(_)
A minute later, the elevator doors to the penthouse opened, and Lee and Revy stepped out of the elevator, and came to a stop, in the hallway, with Revy being to Lee's left side.
The elevator doors then closed, though the elevator remained in place, in its shaft.
Revy turned to Lee, as she asked, in Jack's accent, “Do you remember the way to the office?”
Lee looked over at Revy, as he calmly answered, “Yes. One does not forget such details when dealing with powerful people.”
Revy commented, “Yes. It makes it easier to escape when you know the layout of the floor.”
Lee replied, “Exactly.”
Revy said, “That is precisely what I wanted to hear from you, my student. Now, let us go see Chang.”
Lee stated, “With pleasure.”
Both of them turned to their left, and they started walking down the hallway, towards Chang's office.
Less than two minutes later, after turning a corner, they made it to the shut door to Chang's office.
They came to a stop, in front of the door.
Lee then gently knocked on the door.
From inside, Chang asked, through the door, in chinese, “Who is it?”
Lee answered, in english, “It is, Lee. And I am not here for myself. It is, Revy. And it is very important. You got to see this to believe it.”
Chang stated, in an annoyed tone of voice, in english, “Then, come in.”
Lee gently opened the door inwards. After which, Lee let Revy walked in first, with Lee following right behind her.
Revy came to a stop, in ten feet from Chang's desk.
Lee left the door open, as he walked up beside Revy, to Revy's left side.
Lee saw that Chang was sitting in his chair, behind his. He was wearing his black business suit, but not his long coat, nor glasses. Lee then noticed a coat rack to his far right, in the corner, with Chang's coat hanging it.
Also, there was a pen and some papers on the desk, showing that chinese man was doing some paperwork.
Lee thought, 'I guess no one can look cool all the time. Occasionally, one has to take off the extra items, and relax, as they do some work. His sunglasses are likely in his coat. And he is just doing some managerial paperwork. That is just the price of running a business. Any business.'
Lee remained calm on the inside, as he continued his thoughts, with amusement, 'Now, to see what his reaction to this version of Revy, will be.'
As Chang looked up at the two of them, Le saw that as Chang looked at Revy, he did a double-take.
Lee and Revy both held back a laugh, at Chang's reaction.
Though, Revy smiled, while Lee maintained a neutral expression.
Chang flatly questioned, “Is this a joke? Because, if it is, it's a good one. But, one not worth wasting my time over.”
Lee commented, in a calm tone of voice, “I do not think Revy could pull off a joke this elaborate. It is just not her style.”
Chang replied, “I agree.”
Revy commented, in a polite tone of voice, with Jack's accent, “A pleasure to meet you, Chang. Lee, here, tells me that you can help myself. And I do look forward to your aid.”
Revy's mannerisms and polite tone of voice, set Chang on each.
Chang thought, with concern, 'Revy has never been this polite to me before.'
Chang turned to Lee, as he asked, “Is that really, Revy?”
Lee coyly answered, “It depends on your point of view.”
Chang demanded, “What have you done to Revy?”
Lee shrugged, as he responded, “Actually, it was Melvin who did this?”
Chang all but commanded, as he said, “This I have to hear.”
Lee explained, “First, we got a few hours to fix this. Rock and the girls when out of town, on a tour, on the mainland. Revy stayed behind. She was in the hotel bar, and Melvin, not wanting her to get drunk so early, suggested a game.”
Chang commented, “I do not fault that man for preventing Revy from getting drunk. I have done that before, myself.”
Revy calmly said, in Jack's accented,, “I hold nothing against that man, either.”
Chang thought, with concern, 'As much as I am enjoying a more polite Revy, I need to know what happened. If it is reversible. And if it is controllable. Because, occasionally I would like her to be this polite. And even my brainwashing techniques could not help to make such a radical change of personality, on someone, as what I am seeing presently with Revy. Also, that clothing and her accent seem familiar. But, I cannot place them. And they do not remind me in a good way.'
Chang inquired, “So, what happen?”
Lee stated, “Short answer. Past life regression, on Melvin. And Melvin could not figure how to turn it off. So, he came to me.”
Chang thought, 'I doubt Melvin knows that Lee is the writer. Still, Lee likely figured out Melvin's past, and he is helping Melvin, due to Melvin being a nice guy. I will be honest. I feel for Melvin's situation, as well. Still, I have to know whom I am talking to. And I have a bad feeling I already know. If I am right, it can only mean trouble. And Lee was wise to come to me about this situation.'
Chang looked over at Revy, and he took a hard look at her. He questioned, “Are you whom I think you are?”
Revy looked at Chang, as she smirked. She commented, in Jack's accent, “Chang, if you are as sharp as Revy's memories indicate, I think the costume and accent pretty much states the obvious of who I am.”
Chang realized, as he thought, with concern, 'Oh no. Now I remember. It could only be that one person. And not that I think about it, the similarities between him and Revy are downright eerie.' He guessed, “Captain Jack Sparrow?”
Revy bowed, as she said, “At your service.” She then leaned back up.
Chang just silently looked at Revy for a couple of seconds. He then pulled out his cellphone, as he quickly dialed a number. As soon as the other end picked up, Chang calmly stated, “Annie, find River, and get up here, to my office, as quickly as possible.”
Chang then closed his cellphone, and put it away.
Chang offered, “Please, sit down. While we wait for River, and Annie, to come here?” He thought, with worry, 'And I pray that Lee and I have the savviness to keep Jack under control, until they get here.'
Revy and Lee walked up to the two chairs in front of Chang's desk. Lee sat in the chair to Chang's right, while Revy sat down in the chair to Chang's left. With Revy setting down her bag, beside her, to her right.
Revy requested, “So Chang, is there anything you want to talk about, besides the obvious?”
Chang sighed, as he replied, “Not really.”
Revy said, “Don't be that way, Chang. Think of how cool... How suave this is.”
Chang responded, “I am thinking about this. And it scares me on several levels.”
Chang mentally reflect, with concern, 'The fact that you, as Jack, have a very devious mind, and Revy had some of the best gun fighting skills out there. I know. I taught her. Makes you very dangerous. And that is not even counting the super-soldier serum in your body.'
'You clearly remember being Revy. That is how you recognized me. And Even thought, I also have the super-soldier serum in me. With you combined skills, as both Jack and Revy. I am not sure I could take you in a fight. Even on a good day.'
Chang looked over at Lee, as he continued his thoughts, 'And give how intelligent and savvy you are, Lee. I am sure you have already realized all this.'
Revy inquired, “And why is that, love?”
Chang turned to Revy. He raised an eyebrow, as he inquired, “Are you coming on to me?”
Revy gave Chang a lecherous smile, as she casually answered, “Of course.”
Lee commented, “Don't feel bad, she offered herself to me on the way over here.”
Chang inquired, “You didn't take her up on that offer?”
Lee replied, “Of course not. I do not sleep with crazy.”
Chang pointed out, “You slept with, Eda.”
Lee questioned, “You heard about that?”
Chang answered, “Of course. She must have been desperate if she had to go to you for sex.”
Lee defended, “I am not that bad at catch.”
Revy stated, “Lee's right. He's got a charm to himself. At least, he knows his manners. When Eda talked to Revy, Eda mentioned that she was impressed with Lee's manners on their date. And that the sex with him was okay.”
Lee said, “Thank you.”
Revy replied, “You are welcome.”
Lee commented, “Besides, where do you think all those manners that Bob had came from.”
Chang conceded, “Point taken. Still, you slept with, Eda.”
Lee responded, “Actually, Eda is much like yourself. Eda is very sane. She can be mean. She can be vicious. She can be immature. But, she is not insane.”
Chang replied, “Now that I think about it, you are right.”
Revy stated, “Still, if either of you are interested, I am open to a threesome between the two of you. And since Chang here can change back and forth, it can be two male, one female. Or, one male, and two female. Hell, let's invite River. And Rock is always fun to be around. Though, I am not sure Annie is open to do this kind of fun.”
Lee thought, with concern, 'Pansexual insanity. The one type of sexual grouping of adults, that I did not deal with, in the romantic and lemon parts of my stories. Sure, in my stories, I did some threesomes. And the occasional foursome. But, no more than that. And I do not believe in having orgies. I just do not care for that.'
Lee turned to Revy, as he commented, in a calm tone of voice, “I believe Annie would decline your offer. Besides, I doubt Rock would be open to a five way.”
Revy looked over at Lee, with a lecherous smile. She stated, “Actually, Rock, Benny, Janet, Dutch, and I have done it, together, a few times.”
Lee said, “I honestly do not want to know.”
Revy teased, “Lee, you are such a prude.”
Chang could not help but to started chuckling, at the banter between Lee and Revy's persona of Jack Sparrow.
Meanwhile, Revy playfully suggested, “Along with some packet of spring of drowned man, we brought some packets of spring of drowned girl. Come on, you will enjoyed sex as a woman.”
Lee blushed.
By then, Chang started to calm down, as he commented, “She is right about that. Sex as a woman is pretty good.”
Lee turned to looked down, in front of him, as he quietly said, “I am quite sure.”
Revy stated, “Now, that I think about it, there were a few times, in the time loops, where those packets of spring of drowned girl went missing.”
Lee swiftly turned to look over at Revy, as his blush got a little redder.
Chang noticed Lee's blush getting brighter, as he accused, “You didn't?”
Lee turned to face Chang, and both Chang and Revy could see that Lee's face was now turning a very bright shade of red.
Chang flatly stated, “You did.”
Lee remained silent.
Revy giggled, as she playfully teased, “I take it back. You are not a prude. You are a closet case.”
Revy and Chang then burst out laughing.
Lee stayed silent, as the other two adults laughed for several seconds.
While Chang and Revy began to calm down, both of them turned to look at Lee.
Revy inquired, “So Lee, what female position is your favorite? And did you prefer to be with a man, or a woman, as female?”
Chang stated, “I doubt Lee got to that point. Lee likely stayed in her suite, and used the powder to play with herself.”
Revy asked, “Why do you think that?”
Chang explained, “Simple. Lee would probably looks like his younger sister, and you all would have recognized Lee, even with the gender change. If he, or in this case, she, left her hotel suite, one of you would have likely caught her, and asked her very tough questions, in a harsh manner. So, Lee here stayed in her room. Now, I would like to know, Lee. How young did that powder make you?”
Lee thought, 'That is no point in denying I did. If I do not answer them, they will only drag the situation out, for my own suffering, and embarrassment.'
Lee turned to Chang, as he quietly answered, “Around eighteen years old.”
Chang and Revy snickered even more.
Meanwhile, something occurred to Lee, as he suddenly all but begged, “Can we please think about something else, before the telepath, and the empath, get here?”
Less than a second later, Lee heard Annie voice behind him, say, in english, “Think about what?”
Chang and Revy saw Lee's eyes grow wide, causing the two of them break out into further laughter.
A few seconds later, Chang calmed down, as he looked pass Revy and Lee, over at River and Annie, by the door, on the other side of the room. Meanwhile Lee turned to his right, to look between the back of the guest chairs, to see the two newcomers. And Revy's laughs had become giggled, as she turned to her left, to look between the back of the two guest seats, to see River and Annie.
Just inside the doorway stood Annie and River. The two women were standing beside each other, with River to Annie's left side.
Annie turned to River, as she inquired, “What is going?” She mentally added, 'I sense much embarrassment from, Lee. And much humor and amusement from Chang, and Revy.'
River continued to look at the three sitting adults, before them, as she giggled. She coyly answered, in english, “Where to start? Where to start?”
Annie turned to look at Chang, Revy, and Lee, as she stated, “Simple answers work for me.”
River turned to look at Annie, as she said, “It involved temporal events, reincarnation, and gender bending.”
Annie looked over at River. She shrugged, as she questioned, in a casual tone of voice, “So, a standard day at the office?”
River said, “Pretty much.”
Annie requested, “Please, give me the details.” She mentally added, 'Just the facts, ma'am.'
River giggled, as she commented, “We should have not invited you to that nineteen eighties comedy movie marathon. You have been cracking jokes from those movies ever since then.”
Annie said, “Well now, the shoe is on the other foot. I found the Dragnet movie to be a truly underrated movie. And very funny. Still, what is going on?”
River stated, “Well, it seems that Revy is the reincarnation of the pirate Jack Sparrow, and the Jack persona is the one in the pilot's seat. I am guessing that Lee brought Revy here because of that.”
Annie commented, “Revy as Jack's reincarnation makes some twisted sense. And I could see why Lee would bring her here. Along with why Chang would call both of us two up here, as quickly as possible. We are the only two people that could possibly fix this problem.”
River stated, “My thoughts, exactly. And we have a time limit. Rock, their family, and friends have gone on a tour, out of town. They will be back in a few hours.”
Annie said, “That figures. Still, we should be able to handle that problem in that amount of time. If Jack is willing.” She mentally reflected, with amusement, 'And I hope Jack is willing in more ways than one. Jack Sparrow, in Revy's body, gives me so many ideas.'
River giggled, as she requested, “Mind on your work.”
Annie deadpanned, “Okay. What else?”
River mentioned, “It seems before you got here, Lee, Revy, and the others, were suck in a time loop. During this time loop, Lee raided Revy and Rock's stash of magic powders. Specifically, the spring of drowned girl powders.”
Annie giggled, as she commented, “That really doesn't surprise me. I guess the temptation would be too much for anyone.”
River turned to look over at Lee, with Lee looking back at her, with a mix of annoyance and embarrassment. Though, River sensed Lee's emotions were more towards himself, than anyone else.
River commented, “Well, to be honest, if what I read from Lee's mind is correct. It was several years into the time loop, before temptation got the better of Lee. And she had some fun in her room. For a week during the time loop.”
Annie caught the female pronouns that River was using in regards to Lee. Annie complimented, “Then, Lee here is a better person than most.” She turned to look at Lee, as she continued, “But, given what he wrote, and did to us, I am just surprised it took that long for Lee to decide to pull something off like that. Or, in this a case of putting something inside?”
In response to Annie's joke, Annie and River giggled, a little.
Across the room, as Chang, Lee, and River, watched and listened to Annie and River.
Chang thought, with amusement, 'They are like a couple of giggling school girls. And that thought is wrong on so many levels. Not that I blame them for their reactions to finding out what is going on.'
Meanwhile, across the room, in front of the doorway, Annie giggled, while she said, “Still, I am surprised that you learned about this, now.”
River giggled, as she joked, “Actually, Lee's memories of those events slipped out during the poker game. I wasn't going to say anything, because I doubt anyone would believe me. Even in this group.”
Both women then giggled some more.
Having heard the entire verbal part of their conversation, Lee continued to face Annie, and River, as he complained, “Come on. Is everyone going to be a hypocrite on this?”
In response, the other four adults laughed even harder at Lee's comment about his secrets being revealed.
A minute later, as everyone calmed down, Chang requested, “River, Annie, please come over here.”
As River and Annie walked closer to the three other adults in the room, they left the door to Chang's office open.
Meanwhile, both Revy and Lee were turned around in their chairs, to face Chang, at River and Annie approached them, from behind.
As the two women came to a stop, River stood by Lee, to Lee's left side. While, Annie stood by Revy, to Revy's right side, with Revy's bag on the floor, between the two women.
Chang looked around the group, as he calmly stated, “Before we continue. I request that you keep what you have learned of Lee's... indiscretions, to yourselves.”
River said, “Of course.”
Annie commented, “I make it a policy not to judge such personal actions by others.”
Revy replied, “I will try.”
Lee said, “Thank you.”
Lee turned to look at River, as he thought, 'By the way, River. This pass life regression was done with simply hypnosis. And I believe this is not a case of two personalities in Revy's soul, vying for dominance. Just two personae. With Revy choosing to be the Jack personae, like a child playing her new toy. Though, telling Revy this might make things more difficult, in putting Jack back in his box.'
By then, River was looking down at Lee, as she read his thoughts. She commented, “I will keep that in mind.”
River and Lee then turned back to look at Chang.
River thought, 'I will inform Annie, about this. And if this is the case, then, it will be easier to seal Jack's memories, than I originally thought. But, if we do tell Revy this. Jack may just decided to stay Jack, under the justification, she will eventually turn back into Revy, for the most part, later on.'
River's lips curled into a slight grin, as she continued her thoughts, 'And Lee, you really are a genius. And I should know. I am one.'
Meanwhile, Chang stated, “Good. Now, to the heart of the matter. I need you to bring Revy back. As fun as Jack is. We need to seal Jack's memories, and get the old Revy back, before Rock and the others return from their trip to the mainland. I feel I do not need to explain why?”
Revy turned to Annie. She then looked at River, as she inquired, in Jack's accented, “So, you two want my memories sealed, as well?”
River looked over at Revy, as she said, with sympathy in her voice, “I wish there as another way, but Chang is right. Still, it is your choice.”
Annie turned to Revy, as she stated, “River is correct. Jack, it is your choice. But, while I would prefer you to stay in the Jack persona for a little while longer. I can see the reasons why that would be a bad thing. Still, the question comes down to, do you want to go back to being Revy?”
Revy turned to Annie, as she calmly responded, in Jack's accent, “I need some time to think about this.”
Lee turned to Revy, as he thought, 'She is stalling. This is a classic Sparrow trick.'
River turned to Lee, as she complimented, “That is a good assumption, Lee.” She looked over at Revy, as she continued, in a calm tone of voice, “Still, Revy here does need to think on this matter. Before she makes her choice.”
Revy looked over at River, as she said, “Thank you, River.”
River gave Revy a weak smile, as she replied, “It's okay.”
Chang commented, “That is fine.” All eyes turned back to him, as he continued, “I agree that an important discussion such as this, first needs to be thought over. So, take Revy, or in this case, Jack, to the spare office, down the hallway, while I talk to Lee.”
River replied, “Sure thing.”
Annie looked over at Revy, as she requested, “Come on, Jack. I would love to have a chance to talk to you.”
Revy got up, and picked up her bag, by its top straps, with her right hand. She walked around her chair, to her left. She came to a stop, between the two guest chairs, as she turned to Annie. She smiled, as she stated, “And I would love to talk to you as well, Annie.”
The three women then turned, and walked out of the room. Lee turned his head to look at then, as Chang and himself, watched the three women leave.
When they exited into the hallway, and turned left, with them out of sight, Lee turned back to Chang, to see that Chang was looking back at him.
Chang lips curled into the slightest of grins, as he commented, with only mild amusement, “I must say. You continue to surprise, Lee. I did not know you had the guts to experiment like that. You, of all people, should know that once you play around the gender bending, going back is next to impossible.”
Lee calmly responded, “A person can only imagine so much, before that person wants to try out what he, or she, imagines, in real life.”
Chang agreed, “True.”
Lee said, “As far as I know, it is a once in a lifetime opportunity. So, I was not going to waste it.”
Chang responded, “That is completely reasonable. Now, let us get this ball rolling. What is your plan to solve this mess with Revy and Jack? I know you have a plan. You always have a plan.”
Lee said, “Yes. I do. The question is can those two women fix Revy's problem, and bail our asses out of the fire.”
Chang asked, “If the women cannot fix this, how screwed are we?”
Lee answered, in a firm tone of voice, “To the wall, if we don't fix this.”
Chang inquired, “Any good news?”
Lee commented, “Well, I did not want to tell Revy this. Because it would complicated matters with her. But, I let River read my mind over the matter. I expect this is not the case of two personalities vying for dominance. But, one personality, with two sets of memories and personae. With Revy deciding to try out of the Jack persona like a child getting a new toy she is interested in. Though, I suspect that Revy does not realize this.”
“During our car ride over here. We talked, and at one point, Revy did become annoyed, and she slipped back into Revy's accent and mannerisms, for only a second. Before Jack's accent and mannerisms, reasserted themselves. But, I did notice this. So, I believe that even if we are unable to fix this, the Revy personae may eventually come out on her own.”
Chang felt mild relief, as he replied, “Okay. That is good news. And that does not sound so bad.”
Lee pointed out, “The problem is. That could be a while. We both know how Revy is. Once she is interested in something. It becomes an obsession for her, until she can work it out of her system. Which can take a while to happen."
Chang begrudgingly agreed, “True.”
Lee commented, “If River and Annie are unable to find a way to seal Jack's persona, and memories away. I will tell Revy the truth. That she is still Revy, whom is mostly acting like when she was Jack Sparrow, in her previous life. But, she is still Revy. And I believe, within the next few hours, we can encourage the Revy persona to come to the forefront. With her only retaining a few of Jack's mannerisms.”
Chang inquired, “Yes. I believe we can still accomplish that, with the limited amount of time we have. And her still retaining some of Jack's manners, would be a bonus. Though, what problems do you foresee for us?"
Lee thought, 'Besides the fact Revy, as Jack, currently knows I am the writer. Several problems.' Lee said, “A number of problems. The top of the list being that Jack has a wonderful talent for screwing over other people's plans when they least expect it.”
Chang stated, “You got that right.”
Lee mentioned, “But, given you called the two women here, whom I am hoping can fix Revy, without me first suggesting to do so. Which I was going to. With you already seeking to fix this before her family gets back to town. I believe we are thinking along the same lines.”
“But, this still comes down to River and Annie's abilities. And in that respect, given you have known them for years, you likely have a more detailed understanding of their abilities, than I do. So, how good are they? Can they fix Revy? Or, do I need to make other plans?”
Chang thought, 'Now, is probably the best opportunity I am going to get to play my hand. And use what I know about him, to get him to accept what I am offering. I am glad River and I were able to finally come up with a workable plan for Lee, this morning. But, I will have to do so, slowly. So, he does not realize what I am doing.'
Chang inquired, in a calm tone of voice, “What other plans are you thinking about doing? I know you have cancer. It is kind of obvious, given how skinny are you.”
Lee commented, “I am not surprised you figured that out. Though, I am not dead yet. And I am nowhere near to the point of being bedridden. I still have some fight left in me. Though, I admit, Jack already figured out who I am. And given Jack's talkative nature, if she stays this way, she will tell Rock and the others about me. Even though she promised not to do so.”
Chang hid his emotions, as he thought, with amusement, 'Oh Revy. As Jack, knowing that Lee is the writer, puts me in an even better position. And with me already helping him on that matter, only strengthens my hand with Lee. Now, for my offer.'
Chang calmly offered, “Yes. That could be a problem. But, what if I could remedy the situation for you?”
Lee inquired, “How so?” He thought, with mild interest, 'I might as well hear him out. Given my lack of options. If it is a good enough pitch, I might even accept his offer.'
Chang did not show it outwardly. Though, he thought, with amusement, 'Good. He is interested enough in at least listening to my offer.'
Chang said, “You could surrender to me. I won't lie. They will have a measure of revenge on you. But, I will insure that in the end, you will survive, you will recover, and you will still be passably sane.”
Lee chuckled, a little. He then smiled, as he said, “Passably sane. That is a new one. I will have to remember that one. So, what would be the price?”
Chang answered, “You come work for me. I will set you up with a decent place to live, here at the casino. Good hours, good pay, and I will even cure your cancer for you.”
Lee guessed, “The vat process.”
Chang replied, “Of course. You have shown that you do not mind being female. And the brainwashing will only be minimum. Same Boris, Rock, and I, had. You will be comfortable in your new gender, and bi-sexual.”
Lee admitted, “Tempting. Though, that is neither here, nor there. The question is can you handle the heat it would take to protect me. I am sure you can convince Revy and Rock's group. Along with keeping your employees in line. Though, let's be honest. I only have to worry about Mal and Spike. The rest either don't know, or they don't care.”
Chang complimented, “That is very astute of you.”
Lee responded, “Thank you. But, there are others you will have to worry about, in protecting me. Given how many already know about my stories, from your little group. I am sure that Balalaika and B knows about the stories, as well. I heard, from a friend, what Balalaika did to her men, now women. Hotel Moscow was already a badass army. Now, they are a super-soldier amazon brigade. I even met a few of those women, as they stopped by looking for someone.”
Chang stated, “I already know Melvin was a former member of Hotel Moscow, and Balalaika is after him. I am guessing that it was Melvin whom told you about what happened at Hotel Moscow.”
Lee inquired, “Correct. How did you know it was Melvin they were after?”
Chang answered, “I recognized him, from our days in Roanapur. We even talked about the matter. And I agreed to keep his secret from the others.”
Lee said, “Thank you. Melvin is a friend. And I appreciate you remaining quiet on that matter. And fortunately, I was able to help get those women off of Melvin's trail.”
Chang thought, 'So, Lee does know about Melvin's past. And he is still helping Melvin. Both then and now. And the fact that Lee is helping Melvin, even it if is to hide Melvin from Balalaika, may help me convince Balalaika and B to back off on Lee. Balalaika does care about her subordinates. Even her wayward ones. Lee helping Melvin will only help my case in convincing her to not come after Lee. Because, she will admire such friendship towards those she cares for.'
Chang stated, “That is kind of you. Though, Balalaika is more amendable to comprise than you may believe. Remember, I had to deal with that women on a near daily basis, for years. She likes to bark a lot. But, she only bites when provoked.”
Lee said, “I hope you are right. Still, both of us realize that eventually, word of my existence, and the stories existence, will reach the Lovelace household. With Roberta and Fabiola coming after me. Those two together are a force that few people would want to tangle will. Especially, those that know what each of them are capable of.”
Chang begrudgingly thought, 'That is a good point.'
Lee went onto say, “Then, there are others. When it comes to revenge, the line forms to the left for me. I literally made a lot of badasses across multiverse my enemy, by writing those stories. Especially, book two, and parts of book three. Any of them that learns of my existence is going to come after me.”
“I have no illusions of my situation. All I am doing is trying to delay a horrible fate. Yet, all my selections are increasingly more horrible fates.”
Chang thought, 'Damn. I really did think about Lee's situation that way.' He admitted, “Okay. I will admit that I am not sure I could handle that much heat. And you clearly understand your situation better than I. So, let me look into this, for later?”
Lee replied, “Agreed. And for the record, from what I know of you, you are a good boss to your subordinates.”
Chang cracked a smile, as he thought, 'That is not exactly a, yes. But, he is clearly leaning towards accepting my offer. The only reason he is declining right now is due to what he pointed out. And I free admit, that I did not fully taking into account all the dynamics of the situation. But, he did accept the olive branch, and that is the important part.'
Chang said, “Thank you.”
Lee suggested, “Now, let's get back to what we were talking about. Can those two girls fix Revy?”
Chang pointed out, “This could still be difficult. River's telepathy is passive. She cannot really connect to another mind, bar a few exceptions. And Annie was not really that well trained in the mental aspects of using the force.”
Lee answered, “Yes. I know. But, it is all we got. And I think this can work. As long as Jack is willing to allow it to happen, I think that River and Annie can reseal Jack's memories and persona, without harming Revy's memories and persona. Annie can use the force to establish a mental link between her, River, and Revy. Then, Annie can check the emotional state, and River can work on Jack's memories.”
“Remember, this was done with simple hypnosis. So, undoing this might not be that hard, as long as all parties are willing. And with River's genius to guide them, I think they can pull this off.”
Chang agreed, “While I said it could be difficult. I agree with you. And as much as I like to have Jack around. I am not going to screw over Revy, Rock, and their family to do it.”
Lee complimented, “That is kind of you.”
Chang replied, “Thank you.”
Lee stated, “I even have a cover story, for after we have Revy's mind repaired.”
Chang inquired, with interest in his tone of voice, “Which is?”
Lee stated, “We first need to make sure that Revy does not remember anything from today. When Revy wakes up, in the guest office, nearby, with not memory of today. You can tell her that she took a cab to the casino, for some early drinking, while talking to a few of her friends, over here, such as yourself. She got a hold of some bad hooch that threw her for a loop.”
“Fortunately, you guys realized what was about to happen, and you stopped Revy before she made an ass out of herself. With no one getting hurt.”
“You brought her upstairs, to the penthouse, to keep and eye on her, and keep her away from everyone else. She then found a pirate costume, in a storage area, on the floor. A costume which you bought for yourself, from a local costume shop. You like pirates. Along with your female form and Revy's female form being close in body measurements.”
Chang replied, “Thank you.”
Lee said, “You're welcome. And the bag she is carrying has the logo of that costumer shop. So, it will check out. Even if she kept the receipt. She walked out of the costume shop wearing that clothing, so the receipt would be in the pockets of that clothing, or in the bag. Either can be explained away, as you bought it, and put it there yourself.”
“Moving on. You then, went to check on her, and you found her with the costume, and her clothing and weapons in the bag. You took her to the office. Which she will wake up from. To sleep off the bad alcohol. When Revy wakes up, you can say that the bad reaction caused her memory loss.”
“Since no one was hurt. Revy will not dig too deeply into the situation. Also, you can tell Revy to keep the costume, as a gift, to further smooth over the situation. And Revy will likely be waking up in a good mood. Being Jack Sparrow for a day would put anyone in a good mood. Even if she does not remember why she is in a good mood.”
“As for myself. By then, I will be long gone. If this plan works, you can leave a message with the check in desk, at the Devil's Hotel, to get in touch with Rock and the others. And they will come pick her up.”
Lee smirked, as he stated, “And if this all goes off without a hitch. All in all. Everything will go back to, for lack of a better word, normal, and we all move on with our schemes, plans, and general deviousness.”
Chang returned Lee's smile, as he happily complimented, “Brilliant. Absolutely, brilliant.”
Lee continued smiling, as he asked, “Thank you. The only minor problem is that you will need to speak to the two guards, at the elevator bay in front.”
Chang said, “That will not be a problem. They know to keep their mouths shut.”
Lee responded, “Good... Now, onto a related matter. How is this even possible? I mentioned that Rock knew of Jack Sparrow in book two. With the Pirates of the Caribbean films existing in your reality. So, how can a character be reincarnated from one reality to another. That is not easy. For example, look how much effort it took for me to get John to become Violin. That was an epic odyssey that span the entirety of my four books.”
Chang explained, “Jack Sparrow was a historical figure in my reality. Though, the Johnny Depp movies were pretty good. And from what I understand, they truly captured Jack Sparrow's character, and the history of his life. I take it that this is not the case in your reality?”
Lee sighed, as he though, 'The simple answers are usually the most obvious.' He looked over at Chang, as he responded, “Nope. For us, the Pirates of the Caribbean were just total works of fiction. And when it came to Jack Sparrow, it was just Johnny Depp, being Johnny Deep, while channeling Keith Richards. And to remind you. Revy being Jack, is still a very big problem for both of us.”
Chang said, “True. But, even if our plan does not work. It is not the end of the world. I can see the problems. But, at least, this way, Revy is a lot more positive, well mannered, and fun to be around.”
Lee pointed out, “That is the problem, Chang. She is likeable as she is now. Very likable. But, even beforehand, next to you, and the maids, Revy is likely one of the best dual wielding gunslingers in the multiverse. She is also a hardcore badass. Just this makes her extremely dangerous. But, having Jack at the wheel dials the danger level to eleven for her abilities.”
“You think you, and I, are good at manipulating people? That we are magnificent bastards? We are amateurs when compared to Jack Sparrow. She is more genre savvy than you, Rock, Violin, Deadpool, and me, put together. She is fast on the uptake. She figured I was the writer within five minutes of me meeting her like this. Either we fix this, or I am in real trouble.”
“Also, if we let her remain this way. Even if Revy's persona comes back, for the most part. She will still have access to Jack's memories and persona. And Jack clearly has an addictive personality. In the most literal sense possible. Revy probably had one brush with Jack's persona. And now, Revy likes being Jack, so much, that she is literally addicted to being Jack.”
“As such, what every she calls herself. Revy, or Jack. It does not matter. She will be ruling this city within the year.”
“Keep in mind. As impossible as it sounds. One time, Jack literally walked away with a fleet of ships, in a burlap sack. And he even got someone else to tote the sack for him.”
“Think about of the tools she now has at her disposal. She now has Jack Sparrow's seductive abilities, savviness, and intelligence, Revy's sexy body, Revy's street smarts, and Revy's fighting skills. And Jack was no slouch in the fighting skills department, either. And that is not counting her youth, health, and other abilities, she has, due to the super-soldier serum running in her veins.”
“Give her long enough, and you, River, and everyone else, will be eating out of her hands. So, you can see the problems of her remaining the way she is.”
Chang thought about what Lee said for a few seconds. He then stated, “Okay. You have a point there. Still, as I have been thinking about it. As we talked. I can come to be on fence with Annie, on this matter. We can have some fun here, with Jack, for a few hours.”
Lee flatly commented, “That would be a very bad idea. Along with their taste for rum, Revy and Jack are both escape experts. Jack knows he, or in this case, she is great at parties. Jack will use this, and her body, to lull you all into dropping your guard, and escape. And we do not want that to happen. If that does happen, I will not be the one that is going to explain to Rock, their family, and friends, about what happened to Revy.”
Chang realized what Lee was saying. He said, “Yes. You are right.”
Lee stated, “As savvy awesome as Jack is, we have to put Jack back into his box.”
Then, over the course of a few seconds, both of them then realized the pun that Lee said.
They started chuckling, for a few seconds.
As they calmed down, Lee admitted, “Yes. That was bad pun. Though, it was still funny.” He thought, 'And the second time I thought of it. I just did not have time to appreciate it, last time.'
Chang complimented, “You really have a gift for humor.”
Lee agreed, “I know. One of the reasons I am in this mess is my wicked sense of humor. I got a real mischievous side.”
Chang suggested, “Have you ever considered stand up comedy?”
Lee joked, “Nah. The audience would kill me for my jokes, while laughing.”
Chang snickered a little. He then said, “Okay. Let us settle this matter with, Jack, before something does happen.”
Both men then stood up. Chang walked around his desk, to his left side. As Lee turned around, and walked around to his right, of the chair he had been sitting in.
When Chang walked passed the guest chairs, Lee followed behind Chang, as both men continued to walked towards the door to the office.
After the exited the room, Chang turned left, down the hallway. With Lee following Chang, down the hallway, to the nearby guest office.
(_)
Meanwhile, three minutes ago, in the guest office, down the hallway. With the office door being to their left.
River opened the door. She then let Annie and Revy go into the room. River followed behind them, as she left the door open.
As the three women walked into the room, Revy took a look around the room. She saw the room was just a standard office, and the room was less plush than Chang's office.
There was a curtained window, with white drapes, on the far, exterior wall, which let enough sunlight in the room, to see with. So, the women did not have to turn the lights on to see with.
The window three feet by three feet. It was placed in the middle, top half, of the far wall.
There was a desk directly in front of the door to the hallway, several feet away from the door, on the other side of the room. Below, and in front of the white curtained window. The desk was sit about eight feet away from the far wall, with the desk facing the door.
There was a chair behind the desk, and two chairs front of the desk. With a large couch set against the left wall of the room, when walking into the guest office.
As the women came to a stop in the room. They stood there, for a few seconds.
Annie then took a few steps away from Revy and River, as she turned and looked at Revy. Revy turned to Annie.
Even without the force, Annie could tell that the woman was looking her up and down, as Revy was mentally undressing her.
Revy turned to River, and from the blush River had, Revy could tell that River was reading Annie's mind.
Revy turned to Annie, as she joked, in Jack's accent, “You know the one problem with this situation. Since there is no mirror in the room. I am unable to mentally undress myself.”
The other two women laughed, for a few seconds.
As Annie and River calmed down, Annie teased, “That can be easily solved. Still, I must say, Jack. You are well dressed.”
River commented, “I agree.”
Revy said, “Thank you. And you are both look lovely.”
In response, the other two women smiled towards Revy.
Annie inquired, “Where did you find a costume that looks like your old pirate outfit?”
Revy answered, in Jack's accent, “Lee knows of a local costume shop in town. And it is a very nice shop. I found the store to be well stocked, with helpful employees, and good prices. And I have a feeling that Lee shopped their during that time loop. I seem to remember seeing Lee at parties, wearing a pink tuxedo, pin feather boa, black dress shoes, sunglasses, and pink top hat.” She shook her head, as she continued, “That boy really is a closet case.”
The other two women giggled, a little.
Annie turned to River, as she asked, “Did Lee really wear that, during the time loop?”
River answered, “Yes. Lee did wear that. Complete with a pink feather boa.”
Annie giggled a little, as she commented, “I guess Lee is a closet case.”
Revy complimented, in Jack's accent, “Perhaps. But, that boy has real talents in knowing where to go, and how to get someone to do what he wants.”
River stated, “Well, he has a lot of experience in doing that.”
Revy said, “Considering the time loop, he has likely reached the level needed to be a master manipulator.”
Annie stated, “But, he is probably nowhere near your skill level, Jack.”
Revy inquired, “Not yet. But, if Lee lives long enough, he might reach me level. So, why did Chang want to talk to Lee alone?”
River answered, “Both of them are very good at coming up with ideas and plans. And they know you are just as good. And from what I read of their minds, they were both planning on how to handled the situation, once we restore you personality back to the way it was.”
Revy turned to River, as she pointed out, “That is if I want to do it.”
River said, in a comforting tone of voice, “Don't worry. We are not going to force you. Besides, I am not sure we could do this, unless you were willing.”
Revy questioned, “So, how would you do it?”
Annie stated, “I would link both you minds, with my own. And River and I would then see what we can do. The force does allow for suppressing memories. And River's genius and telepathy would help. Though, I will be honest, we have no real training in this.”
Revy turned to Annie, as she flatly said, “I do not want to have a split personality. That would be worse. Imagine having this body and soul with two crazy personality running in tandem. That would be very bad for everyone involved. I can live with be either Jack. Or, Revy. With me preferring to be Jack. But, I cannot live with being Jack and Revy at the same time.”
Annie responded, “We agree. Beside the ethical reasons. You being willing to do this, will decrease that chance. Though, your memory might eventually return.”
Revy smirked, as she stated, “I guessed as much. You cannot keep this much awesome buried forever.”
River said, “True.”
Revy inquired, in Jack accent, in a demure tone of voice, “So Annie. I noticed the way you were looking at me. What would you liked do, while we wait? I have a few ideas.”
Annie looked at Revy, as she grinned. She said, in a sultry tone of voice, “So do I. And it involves uses of the couch by us.”
Revy returned Annie's grin, as she said, “That would be a good start.”
River just smiled mischievously, as she said, “I will be elsewhere.” She mentally added, 'In a nearby room, as you to woo each other.' She then turned around and walked out of the room. She gently closed the door behind her.
Revy set her bag near the desk. Then, she and Annie, walked over the couch, and sat down, while facing each other. Revy sat on the left side of the couch. While Annie sat on the right side of the couch.
Revy requested, in Jack's accented, “So, love. What do you want to first?”
Annie lecherously smiled, as she responded, “Anything you want.”
The two women then began to have some fun.
(_)
A minute later, Lee followed Chang the hallway, in the penthouse.
Lee then saw Chang stop by a closed door, to their left side, with Lee standing a few feet behind him, to Chang's left side.
Chang said, “I hear River giggling.”
Lee commented, “I bet those heightened senses come in handy in a lot of other ways.”
Chang looked over at Lee, as he smirked. He admitted, “Yes. And they work in both genders. I am happy that you made it so the super-soldier serum benefits carried over not only with gender bending, but with children, as well.”
Lee stated, “It solved a lot of other problems. Also, for those with the serum to safely bend their gender, and have healthy sons. Instead, of just healthy daughters.”
Chang replied, “True.”
Lee said, “Also, while you are still with River. I see neither of you are clearly parents. So, you are planning to have any children in the future? Are you just going to keep being a childless couple. Not that I am judging, either way.”
Chang stated, “Yes. We talked about it. We do plan to have children, eventually.” He then cautioned, “And don't you dare crack any jokes of which of us would be the father, or the mother, to any of those future children.”
Lee confessed, in a casual tone of voice, “I admit. I did have a few jokes on mind.”
Chang replied, “At least you are being honest about it.”
Lee countered, “No. Just being polite. So, this is door to the office.”
Chang answered, “No. This is not the office door. The office is a few doors down.
Lee stated, “So, River giggling by herself. That is never a good thing.”
Chang deadpanned, “I know.”
Chang then turned back to the door. He then casually opened the door, in a slightly slow manner, without allowing it hit the wall, inside the room.
As the door opened, Lee saw that it was a standard office break room.
There was a small refrigerate on the floor. Nearby, on the wall, was a snack table, with a turned off coffee pot, styrofoam cups, plastic utensils, paper plates, and items to make coffee.
There was a rectangular table in the center of the room. The table had six chairs, two on each of the long sides, and one on each of the short sides.
And they saw that River was sitting in a foldout chair, on the long way side of the rectangular table that was facing them.
River continued giggling, as she looked up Chang and Lee. She happily greeted then, “Hi guys.”
Chang sternly inquired, “Dare we ask, why you are giggling?”
River happily answered, “You are going to love what is going on in the nearby office.”
Lee stated, “That can only mean one thing.”
Chang turned to Lee, as he deadpanned, “I know. So, want to guess which one is on top?”
Lee replied, “I decline to answer, on the grounds I prefer to continue breathing.”
Chang looked over at River, as he pointed out, “Remember, we have a telepath here. I can ask her to answer for you.”
River just giggled more loudly, as she looked at the two men in front of her.
Chang looked over at Lee.
Lee turned to Chang, as he responded, “Damn, you are good, Chang. Well, whether Revy, or Jack. Both of have dominate personae. They never settle for being second best at what they do. Annie on the other hand has some dominance issues. As a child, Annie was a slave, with a rebellious strike. After he was freed from being a slave. He became a servant of the Jedi Order. As such, he was eventually taught to obey with out question. First, as a padawan, in the Jedi Order. Then, as a Sith. And as a Sith Lord, Annie was always the apprentice, never the master.”
“This lead to a lot of issues to Anakin, and later on, Vader, dealing with indecision, emotional immaturity, and extreme anger issues, that I worked hard to fix in my stories, when I turned Vader into Annie.”
Chang said, “And I am glad you did so. Annie may hate me. But, I am happy that she is the way she is. Instead, of the way she was.”
Lee continued, “Yea. As Annie, she makes for a more stable employee. Though, even without the brainwashing. Which she eventually overcame. Annie likely is still a bit submissive, at the subconscious level. A level that Jack excels at exploiting.”
Chang replied, “Too true.” He mentally added, 'And it is insights like this, which make me want to hire you, Lee. I just have to figure out how to do it without getting us both killed. Though, I still want to have a little more fun with you'
Chang asked, “And who do you think is the dominant one in the relationship between River and I?”
Lee looked over at River for a few seconds. He then turned back to Chang. He flatly answered, “At this point, I am not sure myself.”
River stated, “He is telling the truth. He honestly does not know.”
Lee said, “And for the record, Chang. I sincerely apologize for making you, River's bitch.”
River commented, “He is honestly sorry about that.”
Chang responded, “Well, considering the sex was good, and how it turned out, to this point. I forgive you, Lee.”
Lee responded, “Thank you. Now, let's go stop those two, before one of them winds up pregnant by the other.”
Chang asked, “They are both women at the moment. How would that even be possible?”
Lee shrugged, as he halfheartedly joked, “With those two, you never know.”
River laughed, in response to Lee's joke. While Chang did not even so much as chuckled.
Chang agreed, in a serious tone of voice, “True.”
Chang then turned and walked down the hallway, with Lee following Chang.
River quickly getting up from her chair. She briskly walked around the table, to her left side. As River came to the door, she turned off the light to the room, and she gently closed the door, behind herself.
After which, she quickly caught up with Chang and Lee.
(_)
A few doors down, to the left, the three adults came to a stop, and even Lee could hear the moaning coming from the other side of the wall.
Chang was in front, with Lee, behind him, and River being Lee.
They all turned to the door, to their left.
Chang gently opened the door, and all three of the adults walked inside.
What they saw was interesting, to say the least.
On the couch was Annie and Revy.
Annie was sitting on the right side of the couch, with the clothing above her waist discard to the floor.
Revy was leaning over Annie, as they were passionately kissing on their lips, while Revy used her right hand to gently massage Annie's left breast.
And both of them were clearly completely oblivious to the presence of the other three adults intruding into the room.
Chang thought, 'I see Lee was correct, on which one would be on top. Damn. I have to save that man's life. If for any other reason than the fact he is so polite, while still being able to play at my level. Now, to get their attention.' He stated, in a strong, even tone of voice, “Ladies.”
Both of women suddenly stopped kissing, as they turned to the two men, and one woman, looking at down at them.
The three adults saw embarrassment showing on Annie and Revy's faces.
River smiled mischievously, as she giggled at the sight before her.
Lee thought, 'At least they have the decency to show embarrassment with their situation. Still...' He said, “Annie, I wrote you to have better standards than this.”
River laughed for a few seconds, at Lee's comment.
Meanwhile, Annie defended, “It is Jack Sparrow, Lee. Who would turn down Jack Sparrow, the rock star of piracy? Sure, it is Revy's body, but it is Jack's soul.”
Lee conceded, “You have a point there.”
By then, Revy had leaned up off of Annie, and back on the left side of the couch.
And Annie quickly used the force to pulled her white bra, shirt to her. She then swiftly put on her white bra, shirt. After which, she pulled up her robe, which was laying under her.
Just as Annie finished dressing herself, she got up from the couch, as she looked over at Chang, River, and Lee. She requested, “Just please don't tell Arcee about this.”
Lee said, “Don't worry, I am not going to say anything, to anyone, about this. You keep my secrets. I keep yours.”
Annie smiled towards Lee, as she replied, “Agreed.”
Lee turned to Revy, whose facial expressions had gone from embarrassment, to confusion.
Lee thought, 'Now that you have had a few seconds to think about your actions. I bet you are realizing what you were about to do. With Revy and Jack's natures conflicting with each other.'
Lee said, in a firm tone of voice, “Jack, this is why we have to reverse was was done to you. Revy, for all her faults, is a very monogamous woman. On the other hand, you are not. If you are allowed to stay the way you are, your promiscuity will destroy your relationships with not only Rock, but the rest of your family, as well.”
Revy was silent for a few seconds, as she let what Lee said, sink in. She then looked over at Lee. She agreed, in Jack's accent, with the hint of disappointment, “You're right, Lee. I love, Rock, and my family. We need to do this. But first, do you have a plan for when I wake up?”
Lee answered, “Yes.”
Revy asked, “So, what is your plan?”
Lee turned to Chang, as he requested, “Chang, please explain.”
Chang looked over at Lee, as he stated, “Thank you, Lee.” He turned to Revy, as he continued, “Yes. We have a plan. Lee came up with it. And it is workable. But, it requires that you have no memory of this entire day.”
Revy said, “I can live with that. Will the lie be embarrassing for me?”
Chang answered, “Quite the opposite. The story is that you got drunk, from bad batch of alcohol, and you found that pirate costume, and put it on. You honestly look great in your pirate outfit.”
Revy replied, “Thank you.”
Chang went onto say, “But, we stopped you from doing anything embarrassing, nor harming anyone. And you slept off the alcohol, with no memory of the events of the morning.”
Revy stated, “That will work.”
Chang said, “Glad you agree.” He looked around, as he asked, “Everyone okay with this plan?”
Annie said, “I can see the logic in it.”
River commented, “It works, without upsetting anyone. I think we can pull it off.”
Revy looked over at Annie, as she requested, “So, what do you want me to do first, to go back to being sleeping beauty.”
Annie gave Revy a sad smile. She said, “Just lay back on the couch. Then, River and I will get to work.”
Lee and Chang then watched a Revy shifted her position to where she was laying on the couch, on her back, with her head resting on a vanity pillow, against the interior side of the right armrest.
While River walked up to Annie and Revy, Lee turned to Chang, as he said, “We need to go. Distractions will only cause problems.”
Chang turned to Lee, as he responded, “I agree. Let us wait in my office.”
Lee agreed, “That will work.”
The two men then walked out of the room, and towards Chang's office. As they left the room, with Lee being the second man out the door. Lee gently closed the door behind him. With him turning the knob, so that it did not click as it closed. And he slowly turned the knob back, so as to not make a sound, and disturb the three women inside the guest office.
(_)
Half an hour later, Lee and Chang were in Chang's office. Chang was sitting in his chair, behind his desk, while Lee was sitting in the chair in front Chang's desk, to Chang's right.
They left the office door open.
Currently, they were talking about very fictional series. And they were having a great time within their casual conversation.
Chang inquired, with relaxed interest in his tone of voice, “So, they actually continued that series, after thirty years?”
Lee answered, in a casual tone of voice, “Yes. I know, it also surprised me when I first heard about it. From what I understand, the series picks up from where the first series left off. And to be honest, the first series was pretty good. It has aged well. And soundtrack is still amazing to listen too.”
Chang agreed, “Yes. It is. That soundtrack has an eerie vibe to it, that was still pleasant and relaxing to listen to. And the series was not that bad a watch. It was different. In a good way.”
Lee pointed out, “It was one of the first TV series of its time to have a completely laid out, over arcing plot, for the entire series. And it predated the Babylon Five series, by a decade.”
Chang asked, “True. By the way, why did you not have us mess with the Babylon Five reality?”
Lee answered, “I could never figured out how to fit the B Five reality into the stories. When I create a story, there is a reason for everything I put into that story.”
Chang commented, “I can see your line of reasoning.”
Lee stated, “Speaking of which. Since you know that series, did you ever steal that mechanical, golden, flying condor? On the cool meter, that is one of the coolest flying machines in the multiverse.”
Chang responded, “I know. And while were are not interested in the group that flew the machine. The problem was we needed that medallion to get the machine to work. And those that flew that machine that medallion. Even with that darkness weakness for the machine itself. We could never catch them. Those three kids really are sneaky. Very sneaky. And damn, does that spaniard knows how to fight dirty. Real dirty. And those two cowards know when to run. After my forces failed on the third attempt, I decided to leave them alone.”
Lee chuckled a little, as he thought, 'I am not really surprised that group could best Chang's forces. They are crafty enough. And they have plenty of experience with escaping. And I am happy they got away, with their giant, golden condor.'
Lee complimented, “Deciding to leave them alone, and let them keep that flying machine, was an intelligent move on your part. And in that reality there are still six cities of gold left to be found. Those cities might be worth checking into.”
Chang said, “Perhaps. But, I would have to watch the new series, first. It might be best to see how that series plays out.”
Lee replied, “I agree. As I stated. It is not wise to mess with a series that is not complete.”
Chang asked, “Then, why did you have Annie kidnapped in the middle of her series?”
Lee stated, “I had my reasons. Mostly for an interesting plot. I wanted a younger Vader, whom had not lived the events of the original trilogy. So, I could have Vader, as Annie, watch the entire series and see where her life went wrong, and how it would have gotten worse.”
Chang inquired, “Sort of a, this is what would have happened, scene?”
Lee replied, “Exactly. And in doing so, I made Annie a better person.”
Chang inquired, “Yes. You did. So, are there any other series of that vein, as The Mysterious Cities of Gold?”
Lee stated, “Actually, yes. There is a series titled, Da Vinci's Demons. Very adult. But, very good. It is about Leonardo Da Vinci's as a young adult, trying to solve ancient mysteries, while deal with the cutthroat politics of Europe at the time. Leonardo is portrayed as a crazy awesome, genius, badass, artist and inventor... Well, more so than he was in real life. Good acting. Good plot. Good direction. Well thought out characters.”
Chang said, “Sounds interesting. I will have to look into that series.”
Just then, they heard a knock at the open door to Chang's office.
Chang looked behind Lee, as Lee turned around to see River, and Annie, walking into the room.
As the two women came to a stop, about six feet from the two sitting men, River stated, “The operation was a success. Revy is now asleep. She should sleep for the next few hours, then wake up with no memory of today, nor Jack's memories.”
Chang inquired, “Good. I hope Revy did not suffer any during this.”
Annie said, “No. There was no pain involved. Jack was very willing to do this. And because of that, the entire operation went like clockwork.”
Lee said, “That is nice to hear.”
Chang requested, “Ladies, if you do not mind. I would like you to stick around the penthouse, and monitor Revy for a little while. Just in case there are any unforeseen problems.”
“You can order lunch in, if you want. But, I want you to keep your senses tuned to Revy. Monitor her, as she sleeps. And when she wakes up, I want you to immediately contact me, and the three of us to check on her, at the same time. And I will be the one that tells the cover story.”
Annie said, “No problem.”
River stated, “Works for me.” She then turned to Lee, as she smiled. She offered, “Lee, would you like to join us for lunch.”
Lee honestly answered, “I would love to. Though, my plan requires me to be far away from Revy, before she wakes up.”
Annie and River giggled.
Annie complimented, “A wise idea.”
River turned to Annie, as she suggested, “Want to watch a movie in the penthouse living room? The large widescreen TV, mounted to the wall, along with the sound system, makes it feel like it is a theater experience.”
Annie looked over at River, as she happily replied, “That sounds like a great idea. Though, I would prefer it not to be a pirate film, nor a sci-fi film.”
River cracked a grin, as she said, “I fully understand. How about a romantic comedy?”
Annie responded, “At long as it is not to sappy one. Though, I am a woman, that does not mean I like chick flicks.”
Lee mentally wondered, 'Given how badass this group is, I wonder who among this group actually likes sappy chick films?'
River turned to Lee, as she answered, “Inara... And Faye, after a few beers.”
Annie inquired, “River, what did Lee just mentally wonder about?”
River looked at Annie, as she stated, “Lee, was just wondering who among us like sappy chick films.”
Chang said, “I always wondered about that, as well.”
Lee commented, “It was a fair question. And now we know.”
Lee turned to River, as he thought, 'River, on the matter of your film selection, I suggest the movie, America's Sweethearts. It is a funny parody of romantic comedy that is not to sappy, but very hilarious, with a well rounded plot.'
While River continued look at Annie, Lee saw River smile. River suggested, “How about the movie, America's Sweethearts?”
Annie answered, “I have seen that movie before. It is very funny.”
River said, “Then, we will watch it.”
Annie shrugged, as she replied, “Okay.”
Lee stated, “Before you ladies go. I want to thank you for your help.”
Annie turned to Lee, as she said, “No problem, Lee. The laughs we have had about you today, are more than enough payment.”
River looked over at Lee, as she calmly stated, “You're welcome, Lee. And I don't mind. You are a nice person, Lee. And Revy did need the help.”
Lee replied, “Have fun ladies.”
River said, “We will.”
Both of the women then turned around, and walked out of the office, and turned down the hallway, towards the living quarters of the penthouse level.
When they were gone, Chang inquired, “You recommended that movie? Didn't you? You told River telepathically about that movie, and she went with it.”
Lee looked over at Chang. He cracked a smile, as he said, “You, of all people, know that telepathy does have its advantages.”
Chang thought, 'What a minute, the poker game.' He accused, “River's eye rolling at the poker game. That was, yes and no. You to were telepathically talking to each other during the game?”
Lee admitted, “Of course. And with only stating yes and no, and a mix of facial expressions, she is a wonderful conservationist. And remember, I wrote those telepathic conversations you had with River.”
Chang thought, 'Lee is a genius, to not only be about to do that on the fly, but in front of everyone, without getting caught. In the next few days, I am going to have to look into finding a way to get everyone to back off on their vendettas with the writer. So, Lee can come work for me.'
Lee then got up. He stood up straight. He looked down at Chang, as Chang looked up at him, from the chair Chang was sitting in, across the desk, between them.
Lee said, “Well. I better get out of here, and work on an alibi. Before Revy wakes up.”
Chang commented, “Good idea. And as soon as Revy waits up, and I am sure she is back to her usual, bitchy self. I will leave a message at the Devil's Hotel front desk, for Rock to come to get her. If something goes wrong, I will instead, leave a message with you, at the front desk of that hotel.”
Lee replied, “Okay.”
Chang inquired, “What are you plans, if something does go wrong?”
Lee admitted, “If something does go wrong. I don't know what I am going to do. But, I will think very hard on your offer.”
Chang requested, “Please do.”
Lee turned turned, and walked out of the room.
As Lee walked down the hallway, towards the front express elevator that would take him down the to gaming floor, and eventually to his parked car, outside, he thought, 'I think I will get some lunch at the Last Resort Diner, and stick around there for a little while.'
'And while I am there, I will call Melvin at the hotel bar. I will let him know that everything should be fine, and for him to play it cool, and pretend that Revy never showed up this morning, when Rock and the others get back from their tour.'
'Then, I will head to the local library, to unwind in the music room. It has been a while since I have practiced on a few instruments, and this would be a good excuse to do so.'
Five minutes later, Lee had made it down to the ground floor, out of the building, and into the parking lot of the casino.
Lee soon reached his car. He got into his vehicle, he started the engine, and he drove to the Last Resort Diner.
(_)
Twenty minutes later, it was around one PM, as Lee walk inside the Last Resort Diner, after parking his car in the diner's parking lot.
The diner was quite full that time of day, with the lunch crowd. And Lee directly walked to the counter, and sat on one of the cushioned stools, at the counter, across from the cooking area, with his back to the front doors.
A few seconds later, Mary walked by. She came to a stop, by Lee, as she asked, “What can I get for you, Lee?”
Lee turned to Mary, as he said, “Hi Mary. I will order in a minute. But, could I borrow you diner's phone. I promise it will be a local call.”
Mary replied, “Okay.” She then turned and walked around the counter. She picked up the wirerless phone, off its mounted base, on the back wall.
Next, she turned around, and walked to the counter, across from Lee, and handed him the phone.
Lee gently took the phone, as he said, “Thank you.”
Mary stated, “No problem.” She just stood there and watch.
Lee thought, “Mary being here, listening in, will not cause a problem. Because, she will not know what I am talking about. And she is a dear to get the phone for me. Also, I will order in a minute. This phone call is more important.'
Lee then dialed number to the Devil's Hotel restaurant.
Lee held the phone up to his right ear, with his right hand. He heard the phone ring a few time. Then, the other end pick up.
Melvin said, in in spanish, “Hello. Devil's Hotel and Resort. How may we be of service?”
Lee stated, in english, “It is me, Lee.”
Melvin said, in english, “Oh. Hi Lee. So, did you fix our problem.”
Lee answered, “Yes. Everything should be fine, Melvin. Just keep quiet on your end, and things will likely work themselves out.”
Melvin replied, “Can do. And thanks man. I owe you.”
Lee responded, “Don't worry about it. Your reasons were justified. But, if there is a next time, just make some movie suggestions, and arrange for the hotel projectionist to immediately play them.”
Melvin agreed, “Good idea. So, how did you pull it off?”
Lee replied, “You don't want to know.”
Melvin said, “Okay. You're probably right. Well, see you, later.”
Lee commented, “You too.”
Melvin then hung up his phone, and Lee did the same.
Lee then looked across the counter at Mary. He handed her the phone, as he said, “Here is your phone back.”
Mary took the phone with her left hand, she replied, “Thank you.” She then turned and walked back to the wall, to hang of the phone.
A few seconds later, Mary returned to stand across the counter from Lee. She looked at Lee, as she pulled out her pen and notepad. She asked, “So, what can I get for you?”
Lee stated, “I will have a cola, hamburger, and fries.”
Mary smiled, as she replied, “Coming right up.” She then wrote down Lee's order. Next, she headed towards George, the cook, to give him Lee's order.
As Lee watched this, he thought, 'After I eat. And wait a little while. I think I will got to the library after this. Still, that will have to wait a few hours. I first need to stick around the here for a little while, as an alibi.'
By then, Mary had brought Lee his glass of iced cola.
Lee did not use a straw. He instead sipped his cola, as he quietly waited for the rest of his order to be filled, and he could eat lunch he ordered.
(_)
Two hours later, it around three PM. In the spare office, at the penthouse level of Daiyu Palace Casino, Revy woke up on her back, laying on a couch, her head resting on a vanity pillow.
Revy sat up, with her feet on the carpet of the room, as she thought, 'Where am I?'
She then looked down at herself, and saw she was wearing some strange, pirate clothing.
Revy pulled at her coat, as she thought, 'What the hell is going on here? This better not be a joke.' She then looked over at the office window, and she saw daylight.
She mentally reflected, 'That last thing I remember was going to bed with Rock. I hope nothing kinky happened to me while I was out.'
She then heard the door to the office open.
When Revy saw who walked into the room, she relaxed.
Revy saw that it was Chang, Annie, and River, standing ten feet from her, looking down at her. Chang was in the middle. River was to Chang's left side. And Annie was to Chang's right side.
Chang said, “Ah. You're up. You had us worried.”
Revy looked up at them, as she inquired, “What happened?
Chang lied. “Well. It began this morning, when you took a taxi to the casino. You said that Rock and the others went on a tour, and you were planning to start drinking early.”
Revy admitted, “That sounds like me. So, what happened next?”
Chang thought, 'Good. It is Revy. And she does not remember a thing. I thank you, River. And I will thank Annie, later. For doing such a good job.'
Chang saw, from the corner of his left eye, River smile at him.
Chang stated, “You drank a bad batch of some strong alcohol, before you realized it, and it threw you for a loop. You started acting a little crazy, well crazier than you usually were. But, you were not violent. No one was hurt.”
“Though, were able to get to the penthouse, where you found one of my female pirate costumes, in a storage room. And you put it on. Fortunately, River and Annie here were able to get to you, before you did anything embarrassing. And they brought you here to sleep it off.”
Revy commented, “Well, it appears to have worked. I feel fine. Though, I guess that is why I don't remember anything. Still, I feel fine. Actually, I great. And I am happy for some reason.”
Chang thought, 'So, Lee was also right about Revy's mood, after she woke up. That man seems to be batting a thousand. But, in this game, all it takes is one strike, and the game is over, in defeat.'
River smiled, as she commented, “Consider it a good aftereffect of the alcohol.”
Revy replied, “I will. I hope I wasn't too much of a bitch, when you got me up here.”
Annie cracked a grin, as she answered, “No. You were a perfect lady.”
Revy giggled. She then responded, “Yea. Right. So, what time is it?”
Chang said, “Around three PM. And before you ask, I already called the hotel, a few minutes ago.” He mentally added, 'After River and Annie sensed you were starting to come to.' He continued, “I got in touch with Rock. She said they got back early. She said she is coming in the GTO, and she will be here in about twenty minutes.”
Revy stated, “That is great to hear. So, where are my clothes?”
Chang answered, “In that bag, over by the desk. Your cutlasses are also in there. And you look so good in that outfit that I would prefer you to keep the pirate clothing.”
Revy replied, “Thanks.” She looked down at herself, as she said, “I kind of like it. I always liked pirates, even before coming one. And this costume fits me well.”
Revy then looked back up at her three friends, as she requested, “Now, shoo. So, I get dressed.”
Chang cracked a grin, as he replied, “No problem.
The three adults left the room, with River gently closing the door behind them.
(_)
A few seconds later, as River, Chang, and Annie, walked beside each other, down the hallway, towards the living quarters of the penthouse, Chang whispered, “Just to make sure. Did it work? Completely?”
River quietly answered, “Yea. It worked. Completely. And from you thoughts. You're welcome.”
Chang whispered, “Well, again. For Annie's sake. Good job. And thank you.”
Annie softly replied, “I appreciate it.”
(_)
Five minute later, inside the spare office, Revy had gotten dressed in her usual clothing, with his pistols in their shoulder holsters, under her armpits.
She then opened the door to the office, to help her listen out for Rock.
Next, she sat on the couch, with her bag of pirate clothing, including the pirate hat, and pirate boots, on the floor beside her. With Revy wearing her usual green boots, that were tied at the top of the laces.
Twenty minutes later, Revy started hearing the footsteps. She recognized them as the footsteps of her lover walking down the hallway, towards her.
Revy yelled, “Rock, over here!”
A few seconds later, Rock walked into the room, and she came to a stop, a few feet from Revy, with the redhead still sitting on the couch, looking up at her.
Rock turned and look at Revy, as she commented, “It figures you would get into trouble while I was gone.”
Revy replied, “Actually, I wasn't that bad.”
Rock stated, “Yes. Chang told me Annie and River got to you before things got out of hand.”
Revy conceded, “Yea... So, how was the tour?”
Rock answered, “It was okay. But, I felt it could have been better.”
Revy then grabbed her bag with her pirate clothing in it, with her right hand, as she stood up.
Revy said, “Well, you can tell me all about it in the car.”
Rock replied, “Fine with me. So, where to first?”
Revy requested, “If you don't mind, Rock. I would like to head back to the hotel, and drop this bag of clothing off.”
Rock inquired, “Sure. What is in the bag?”
Revy answered, “A pirate costume that Chang gave me. I will show you what I look like in this pirate costume tonight, right before we go to bed. It might give you ideas for some fun we can have, while in bed.”
Rock gave Revy a lecherous smiled, as she replied, “Nice.”
Revy suggested, “Also tonight. Before we do that. I would like go to the Rats Nest, with the girls, and get some drinks. I am not talking about heavy drinking. Just a few beers. I don't feel like going to the hotel bar tonight.
Rock responded, “That is fine. I will even be designated driver. So, who do you want to bring along?”
Revy stated, “Well, the girls can take care of themselves. So, I guess, Benny, Dutch, Janet, Shenhua, Sawyer, and Lotton... Wow that is a lot of people. We are going to need two cars, and a second designated driver. I think Lotton would be open to being a designated driver.”
Rock replied, “I guess so. We can always ask.”
Revy agreed, “That true. Now, let's get out of here.”
The two women left the office door open, as they walked into the hallway, towards the front express elevator, to the ground floor, to the parking lot, and to their car.
When the got into their red GTO, Rock drove them back to the Devil's Hotel.
(_)
Around that time that Revy and Rock left the Daiyu Palace Casino, to head for the Devil's Hotel, across town, Molly was in the local library. She was dressed in casual clothing, without her weapons on her person.
Molly walked into the library about fifteen minutes ago. After she took a taxi from the Devil's Hotel, to the building.
Presently, she was sitting at a table, in the main room, across the room from the library entrance. She was reading a spanish book. The book was about the Mexican-American war, told from the Mexican point of view.
Molly thought, 'This is an interesting read, from a historical standpoint. And I am glad my parents and I politely convinced Fabiola to teach me spanish, years ago. Knowing spanish is now coming in handy, during our stay on this island.'
She then heard the front door to the library open up.
She looked up to see Lee walking into the library.
Molly thought, “What is he doing here?”
She then saw Lee turned to his right, and walked into the music room.
Molly thought, 'Lee is going to play some music. This I got to see.'
Molly set her book down, as she got up, and headed for the music room, to spy on, Lee.
(_)
After Lee walked the musical room, he shut the door behind himself.
He then walked over to the piano, that was across the room, and sat down at the piano bench.
Given the position of the piano, Lee was facing away from the door.
Lee then began spending the next several minutes playing the entire Moonlight Sonata from memory, without him missing a single key.
When Lee finished, he moved on to play a much shorter, more modern, and rarer piece of music, by piano, that took him two minutes to play.
As he concluded his playing. He heard clapping coming from behind him.
Lee turned around, to his right, to see Molly standing several feel behind him, clapping. The door to the music room was also open.
While Lee did not show any negative reaction to Molly's presence, he grimly thought, 'Damn. I cannot even let my guard down for one second. Oh well, I will take the complimented for what it is.'
A few seconds later, Molly stopped clapping.
Lee said, “Thank you for the applause.”
Molly complimented, “You are welcome. You have a real talent.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. I do. But, I do not like to boast about my talents.”
Molly commented, “I can appreciate that. Anyway, I recognized the Moonlight Sonata. But, I do not recognize the other piece of music you played, afterward.”
Lee thought, 'That is because the last piece is rare, and if I told you what it was, it would likely get me found out as the writer.' He lied, “It is just a piece of music I learned years ago. It is not important.”
Molly replied, “Okay.”
Lee got up from the piano bench. He turned to face Molly. He hid his annoyance, as he calmly stated, “Well, I just wanted to play for a little while. To get it out of my system. And I have done that. I will be going now.”
Lee continued to use his poker face, as he thought, with annoyance, 'Actually, I wanted play the music instruments in this room, for the next few hours. As a way to unwind. But, I cannot do that with you in the his building.'
'Doing so would reason to many questions with you, your family, and friends. And I lucked out over the questions you had for me, the morning after that poker game I had with River. I do not think I will be able to be that lucky again.'
Molly said, “Have a nice day.”
Lee replied, “You as well.”
Lee then walked passed Molly, as he exited the room, heading for the library exit.
As Molly turned around, and watched Lee walked away, she thought, 'Oh well. At least I got to to listen to a good performance, without paying for it. Now, to go back to reading that book.'
Molly then walked out of the music room, as she head back to the table, across the room, where she left the book she was reading, so she could continue to enjoy learning from it.
(_)
A minute later, as Lee walked through the parking lot, he sternly thought, 'I have to be more careful. Still, this con is starting to collapse. But, I still have a little time to figure out what to do next. I think I will spent the rest of the day in my hotel suite, trying to figure out what to do next. And I will order in tonight.'
'Still, this has been a productive day. Chang made me a good offer. If I can buy some time, he might solve some of the problems with his offer. If he does, I think I will take him up on his offer.'
'And if anything else, at least I can look forward to playing some poker with Sam, at the Rats Nest, tomorrow morning.'
A few seconds later, Lee reached his car. Before he left the diner, he had already pulled the windows and hood up.
Lee got into his car, started the ignition, and drove himself back to the Devil's Hotel, to spend the rest of the day in his suite.
(_)
Around seven PM that evening, inside the Rats Nest.
Behind the bar counter, the bartender noticed that her place was not even half full that evening.
She thought, 'Given it is the middle of the week, this is not a bad turnout. And most of those here are regulars that leave good tips.'
She then heard the front door open. She turned toward the door, to see who was walking in.
She thought, with annoyance, 'Why did those bitches have to show up?'
The bartender watched as the eight women, in casual clothing, walked into her bar.
Bringing up the front was Revy, in her usual clothing, completely with her two semi-automatic pistols in her shoulder holsters.
The other women were Rock, Lotton, Janet, Dutch, Benny, Shenhua, and Sawyer. Though, the bartender did not see any weapons on the other seven women.
The bartender turned away from them. She overheard their conversation, as the women shut the front door behind them, and made their way further into her bar.
Lotton said, “Look. I do not mind being designated driver. As long as I am not the one who is going to clean up any vomit in the two cars we took to get here.”
Rock stated, “As the other designated driver, I am with you on this.”
Janet commented, “I don't drink that much.”
Benny replied, “Neither do I.”
Revy said, “I will try not to.”
Dutch commented, “Being around Revy, I know better.”
Revy replied, “Hey.”
Shenhua stated, “A lady does not do such things.”
The other women snickered a bit. But, Shenhua ignored them, and she did not reply.
Sawyer said, “I know my limit.”
Revy suggested, “Well, if you guys do not want to be designated drivers, we could always ask Lee, to substitute for either of you.”
Rock flatly said, “No.”
Revy stated, “You are still upset about that chase Lee took us on.”
Rock commented, “Anyone who plays chicken like that is not completely sane. And I am not putting my life in the hands of a lunatic, whom I do not completely know.”
Revy agreed, “Fair enough.”
The bartender then turned back to the eight women, as she watched as them walk to the large table, that Lee and Sam usually sat in, located in the far back left corner of the room.
The eight women then sat down at that table, with one of them using a spare chair from another table, to sit down.
After they were all seated, they talked for several seconds.
A minute after they sat down, the bartender watched Revy get up, and walk over to her.
The bartender thought, with dispassionate annoyance, 'It figures that Revy would be the one to come place their orders.'
When Revy reached the bar counter, across from the bartender, the bartender looked over at Revy, as she stated, “Hey Revy. I hope you don't plan to get drunk while having those on.” She used her right hand point at Revy's pistols. She then dropped her right hand back to her side.
Revy shrugged, as she replied, “Don't worry. I only plan to have a few beers.”
The bartender responded, “Good. So, what can I get for you all?”
Revy answered, “I want a cold bottle of beer for myself. Rock wants a bottle of coke cola. Lotton wants a bottle of seven up. As for the rest. One bottle of rum. And a bottle of whiskey. With five small glasses.
The bartender said, “I will your order ready for you in a minute.” Then, something occurred to the bartender, as she thought, 'This might be a good chance to ask Revy a question I have been wanting to ask her, since they all got here.'
The bartender inquired, “By the way, I have a question for you.”
Revy cracked a smile, as she said, “Shoot.”
The bartender commented, “For a while, I have been watching you guys come and go in this town. And from what I hear, it is clear that you, and those women with you, are not here on vacation. You are clearly after someone.”
Revy thought, 'There is not reason not to tell her. We have no really made it a secret that we are after someone in this town.' She admitted, “You're right.”
The bartender asked, with more concern, than curiosity, “What the hell did the person, you are all after, do to get on your bad sides?”
Revy smirked, as she coyly answered, “The guy we are after scorned a whole lot of women. Us included. And we are going to find him, and burn him for messing with some major mojo..”
Bartender suddenly remembered a conversation she had with one of her customers, months ago.
The bartender thought, with disbelief, 'Nah... They couldn't be after him?... Could they?... And if so, I need to know why. If for any other reason, than to know if I need to leave town, before he is caught. Still, it is best I thank Revy for answering my questions.'
The bartender said, “Okay. Thanks for the information.”
Revy replied, “No problem.”
The bartender then watched as Revy turn around and start walking back to the corner table, where her friends were sitting.
As the bartender began to round up the drinks for Revy and the other women, with her, the bartender thought, 'Now, to figure how to confront Lee tomorrow, so I can find out what is going on.'
A few seconds later, as the bartender puts the bottles and glasses on a tray, she came up with a workable plan, as she thought, 'That should work. And even with his precognitive abilities, he will not see it coming. Now, to see Revy and the others, before they cause any more problems.'
Soon after, the bartender delivered Revy's order to corner table, where the women were at.
Fortunately, she had a pleasant night. Though, she doubted that the next day would be as pleasant for her, and those she knew.
To be continued.
Badasses Of the Multiverse Book 5: “The Gambling Man.”
Volume 1: “De La Plata Podrido.”
Chapter 19: “One Day Too Late.”
By Paul Cousins.
Copyright Disclaimer: All copyrighted places, characters, items, and events, within the story, are held by their current owners. No profit is being made on this work of fiction.
(_)
In De La Plata Podrido, Mexico, it was the next morning, after Lee learned about Revy's previous life, and he secretly help Revy return to normal. It was eleven two AM as Lee walked thought the front door to the Rats Nest.
The outside weather was clear, slightly cool in temperature, with a nice, pleasant sea breeze.
That morning, it took Lee a few extra minutes to get to the Rats Nest bar, considering he parked his car a few blocks away, to help prevent him from being ambushed, again.
Lee was dressed in his usual, casual clothing, including his blue cloth jacket, large glasses, and blue baseball cap.
As Lee came into the bar, he gently shut the front door behind himself. As he stood right inside the room, he looked around. He saw no one, but the bartender, standing next to the outer side of the bar counter.
Lee saw that the beautiful, slender bartender, was wearing a black t-shirt, blue jeans, with a black leather belt, black socked, and black tennis shoes. From the outline of her t-shirt, Lee guessed that she was wearing a regular black cotton bra, to support her decently sized breasts. Lee knew that the bra was black, because white would show through the black t-shirt.
Lee saw the woman looking at him, and he decided to approach her.
While Lee walked to bar counter, he thought, 'It will be nice to see, Sam, this morning. He is suppose to meet me here in a little while.'
Lee then continued his thoughts with concern, and slight worry, 'Though, my main concern is, why I cannot shake this growing sense of doom, that I feeling, since I woke up this morning.'
'My precognition has been screaming at me this morning. Like a doom meter that is slowly becoming more serious as the day has gone on. And I do not even know why. Everything was fine at breakfast. Even Revy appeared to be normal... Well, as normal as she usually is. And those brief moments I risk a glance at Revy and the girls, a the restaurant, this morning. Revy showed no signs of being under any influence from her previous life's persona, Jack Sparrow.'
'And I believe that River and Annie were able to seal Jack Sparrow memories and persona, yesterday.'
'Because, Chang has not since left a message for me, with check in desk, here, on the matter. Like he said he would, if there were problems. So, everything is fine, on that end.'
'Still, I feel if I just let this day play out as normal, I should be fine.'
When Lee reached the bar counter, he came to a stop, as he turned to the beautiful bartender. With the woman being six feet from him.
The bartender continued to look at Lee, as she calmly said, in english, “Good morning, Lee.”
The bartender thought, 'Just as I thought would happen. Lee was the first one here. Like usual. I pulled out my some of my good clothing. And I stand on the outer side of the counter, so he can see me. Now to implement my plan to get some answers from him.'
Lee replied, in english, “Good morning.”
The bartender requested, “Lee. I could use your help. If you don't mind.”
Lee shrugged, as he inquired, “What do you need?”
The bartender said, “I got a little behind this morning, in my stocking of items. And I had to open up the bar on schedule. I could use your help stocking a few items from some boxes that are still out. With us working together, it should take about ten minutes. Maybe less.”
Lee thought, 'There is no reason not to help her. It would be good karma. And I could use all the good karma I can get. Especially, now that my con is starting to fall apart around me. Though, I just need to buy a little time for Chang to get his ducks in a row. When he is ready. I will take his offer, and in the end, I should be fine.'
Lee said, “Okay. I will help you.”
The bartender grinned, as she responded, “Thank you. You go first. I need to get the inventory list, I left out here.”
Lee said, “Sure.”
Lee walked passed the bartender, and to the end of the bar counter. He then turned to his right, and walked to the door set against the right wall of the room.
Lee pulled the door open, and he walked inside. Though, he left the door open for the bartender.
As the bartender followed him, she took a moment to quickly walked behind the backof the bar counter. She quietly pull something from under the counter, with her right hand. Next, she turned around and she swiftly heading for the back storage room, with Lee.
After she passed through the door to the storage room, she gently shut the door behind them.
Meanwhile, Lee heard the door shut behind him, as he walked further into the storage room. He soon came to a stop in the center of the room. He then looked around himself.
The yellow ceiling light was on, so Lee could see around the room.
There were several shelves lining the walls, with boxes of items on them. Also, there was a large freeze nearby. Along, with the back exit to the building.
And there were two plastic chairs, in an open area of the back room. The chairs were set six feet apart, and facing each other.
Still, there were no boxes that appeared to be in need of being stocked.
Lee heard the bartender's foot steps come to a stop, ten feet behind him.
Without turning around to face the women, Lee began, “I do not see any boxes that need putting up...”
Lee then realized what was going. He thought, with annoyance, 'Ah hell. And I was going to do this out of the kindness of my heart.' He deadpanned, “This is a trap, and you are pointing your pistol at me.”
The bartender complimented, “You have always been very perceptive.”
Lee turned around from his left, to see that the bartender was holding her black semi-automatic pistol in her right hand. The hammer of the weapon was cocked back, meaning there was a bullet in the chamber. And the weapon was ready to show.
And while she had her right index finger resting on the trigger guard, she was pointing her semi-automatic pistol on him.
Lee then noticed that the bartender's facial expression was unreadable.
Lee maintained his own poker face, as he thought, 'She is showing a mask of calmness, almost as good as my poker face. Though, give her job. I am not surprised she can do so.'
The bartender order, “Go sit down in the far chair.”
Lee turned back around, and calming walked over to the far chair, and sat down in it.
Lee then turned back to looked at the bartender.
He saw that as soon as she saw him seating, she walked over to the other chair, and sat down, as well.
Lee took a hard look at the woman, and her weapon, as he assessed the situation. Lee though, 'With my precognition to both help and guide me. I could probably take her in a fight, without getting shot. But, I need to know what is going on first. Though, I doubt she is the danger my precognitive abilities are warning me about. '
Lee looked the bartender in her eyes, with the bartender looking back into Lee's eyes.
Lee asked, in a firm, though polite tone of voice, “Okay. I have one question. Why? I have always been nice to you. I paid my tab. I tipped you well. And I always treated you like the lady you are.”
The bartender laughed, for a few seconds. As she calmed down, she said, “Well, my main issue is that you brought trouble to my bar. I do not like that one bit. Other than that, you have been a great customer. Which is why I am giving you a change to explain yourself, before I decided what to do with you.”
Lee continued not no show outward reaction, as he thought, with concern, 'She figured out out something about me. The what and how are the important questions. Though, she is giving me a chance to explain myself. Which is a good sign for me. But, I will have to be careful what I tell her. And I better not directly lie to her. So, I need to start off with asking...'
Lee inquired, “What do you mean?”
The bartender stated, in a direct, yet even tone of voice, “What I mean is that Revy, and her friends, came here last night. And don't worry. This is one of the times they did not cause any trouble. Hell, Revy didn't even try to get drunk.”
Lee thought, 'Actually. After getting to know these women. None of them, including Revy, try to get drunk every night. They only occasionally try to do so.'
The bartender went onto say, “Anyway, Revy and I got into a discussion. Soon after they got here, months ago. I could already tell that they were after someone. And I finally got around to asking Revy on the matter. While Revy was vague, she did mention that the one she, and her friends, were after had scorned them. Then, I remembered that conversation we had the first day I met you. And I agree with you. There is nothing worse than scorning women. As in plural. Not singular.”
Lee immediately recalled their conversation. He lowered his head, as he groaned. He said, “I should have never joked like that.” He mentally berated himself, 'I am such an idiot. Though, it was my first day here. Well, second day. Considering, when I first got here, I checked into the Devil's Hotel, headed to my new suite, and slept for several hours. Still, that day can count as my first full day here.'
Lee then looked back up at the bartender's face. Lee saw the bartender still had a calm expression on her face.
Lee also swiftly resumed his calm poker face.
The bartender commented, “Perhaps. Still, this conversation might be beneficial to both of us. But first, I need to know.”
The bartender demanded, in a stern tone of voice, “What the hell did you do to piss those women off? Given the time you have spent here has shown me that you would never knowingly anger such women. You have always treated them with cautious respect. Which I admire. But, now that I think about it, this also shows that you know them. And while they are after you. They clearly do not know you are the one they are after. Or, they would have already captured you.”
The bartender flatly inquired, “What is going on?”
Lee did not show any reaction on the outside, as he mentally cursed, 'Damn! Damn! Damn! She was able to put many of the pieces she had together. And I was right. All it takes, is one slip up, and it is over. I should never said that, women scorned, joke, to her. Now, it has come back to bite me in my ass.”
Lee then forced himself to calm down, as he continued his thoughts, 'I need to calm down. And at this point, while my con is collapsing. With my cover being all but blown. I do not need this woman as an enemy.'
'She still might consider me her friend. She is just currently upset with me.'
'She already pulled a gun once to protect me. If I stay in her good graces, she might do so again. So perhaps, it might be best to admit everything, and hope for the best. That is if she wants to hear my explanation.'
Lee admitted, calm tone of voice, “You are right. But, I do not think that you would believe my explanation.”
The bartender smiled, as she dared, “Try me?”
Lee thought, 'Alright. If that is the way you want it.' Lee calmly began, “Before I came here. And the reason everyone is after me. Is because I wrote a series of stories. Books. All together, the stories were a few thousand pages long. This is why they refer to me as, the writer.”
The bartender stated, “I heard the them talk about a writer, now and again. But, I did not realize the connection between that was the same person they were looking for. Let alone, that it was you. All I figured out was Revy and the others were the ones after you.”
Lee said, “Well, now connection is made. And there is more.”
The bartender inquired, “I am sure. Though, I am a bit confused about this. How would writing stories piss these women off?”
Lee stated, “I am getting to that part. And this is the really far fetched part. But first, how much do you know about multiverse theory?”
The bartender coyly replied, “A little.”
Lee went onto say, “Well, it is not a theory. The multiverse is very real, and it seems that all realities, even fictions ones, exist. And those women are from fictional realities.”
The bartender raised her right eyebrow in interest, as she requested, “Do tell.”
Lee explained, “Due to these women coming to this reality, after my hide, and the way they present themselves, I have come to realize that it is possible to write something in one reality, and have those writings effect the people, things, and events, within one or more realities.”
“And I wrote stories about those that are after me. Very strange and twisted stories, that actually happened to this set of people, or characters, along this branch of the multiverse.”
“To add to that, my stories were works of fanfiction, and not parts of the canonical stories. Which is another reason they are after me. I did not create them. I am just an absolute nobody whom toyed with their lives in an extreme manner.”
The bartender asked, with concern in her tone of voice, “How extreme?”
Lee let his poker mask drop. He gained an embarrassed expression on his face, as he answered, “Well, long story short. Most of the women that are with Revy, use to be men, before I got my hands on them. And they learned about the stories I wrote. And they tracked me down to this reality. My home reality. Now, with their presence, I am on the run from everyone. From the government of my home nation, to these women. It is just that they don't know who I really am.”
Lee emotionally deflated. He slumped in shoulder down, as he looked down at the floor between them. He continued, in a sad tone of voice, “As such, everybody wants a piece of my ass. And not in a good way.”
Lee then slowly looked back up at the bartender, and what he saw pleasantly surprised him.
Lee watched at the bartender used her right thumb to turn on the safety to her pistol. She then tucked her pistol into the back of her pants. Next, she began laughing for several seconds.
Lee thought, 'Her putting the gun away is a good sign. The laughter... Not so much.'
After, the bartender stopped laughing, she looked at Lee. Lee saw the woman's eyes hardened, as she casually stated, “Well, it is nice to be wanted... Still, this explains a lot. And you know you are truly screwed to the wall?”
Lee calmly said, “That is an understatement.”
Lee saw the woman's eyes relax, while she giggled for a few seconds.
The bartender commented, “Well, I have another question for you.”
Lee questioned, “Sure. What is it?”
The bartender mischievously smiled, as she playfully asked, “Who do you think I am?”
Lee thought, with concern, 'That is never a good question. Especially, coming from a mysterious woman, whom I do not know the name of.' He inquired, “What do you mean?”
The bartender grinned wickedly, as she stated, “You haven't figured it out? Have you? None of you have. And I like it this way, because I prefer my anonymity. I like not being known. As such, I never did tell any you my name. It is not hard to lie when you do not tell the answer in the first place. Still, given the situation, and who you are, I will give you a clue. The bar I was most well known for was the one I managed in Thailand.”
Lee thought, 'She is right. It is hard to catch someone in a lie if they don't tell the lie in the first place. Still, who could see be? She is a no nonsense, badass bartender... And the bar she is most known for operating was in Thailand.... No... She could not be... The dress!... It is an ao dai. A Vietnamese dress... She is!...'
Lee's eyes slightly widened, as he stated, “Bao?!”
Bao continued smiling, as she said, “Got it in one.” She the started laughing for several seconds.
Lee remained silent, as he let Bao continued laughing.
And Bao's laughter gave Lee time to collect himself, as he made his eyes returned to normal.
Bao some calmed down.
Lee said, “Oh hell. That dress you wore at the dance. It was a vietnamese ao dai, and I completely missed it.”
Bao responded, in a comforting tone of voice, “Don't feel bad. Very few non-vietnamese whom would recognize that style of dress. And I do not mind wearing it because the style uses pants, and it also looks good on me.”
Lee commented, in an honest manner, “Listen Bao. I am sincerely apologize for the gender bending. I did that just as joke scene. At the time, I didn't realize it was really happening in another reality...” Lee then realized something, as he contineud, with worry, and concern, in his tone of voice, “Oh no. You weren't forced into Chang's breed projects?”
Bao answered, “Fortunately, no. They really did want a good bartender.” While still in her seat, she used her hand to gesture down the front of the sides of her body. From her shoulders, to her stomach, as she continued, “And I am not sore about being this smoking hot woman you see before you. So, there is nothing to apologize over this.” She then put her hands in her lap.
Lee let out a breath in relief. He said, “I am happy to hear that.”
Bao stated, “That I am sure of. And I mean you gave me so much in return. I am now younger, healthier, and I age very slowly. I am stronger and physically tougher than almost anyone I know around here. Except for those after you. That saves me on having to hire bouncers.”
“Monthly periods are annoying. But, I am so sexy that can I get laid every night I want, by almost any man, or woman, I approach. I just have to be careful not to get pregnant. Condoms help with that.”
Boa smiled wickedly, as she continued, “And the best part is that redheaded demon bitch, and her friends, don't have a clue it is me. I can finally enjoy some peace and quiet.”
Lee commented, “Given you are a veteran of the army of the republic of Vietnam, I have a feeling that what I know about the Yellowflag, and yourself, in Roanapur, is only the tip of the iceberg for your past.” He mentally added, 'That is why made it so you and Shane Caxton knew each other from the U.S.-Vietnam war.'
Bao stated, “You are probably right. Back in Roanapur, I had to deal with psychotic customers. Corrupt cops. Greedy mafias. And a whore house above me.”
“Though, here. I presently run my own business. And I have this bar insured at a cheap rate. I now have the power to control who my customers are. And thanks to me being friends with Pedro, I don't have to worry about extortionists. One phone call and they are taken care up before the next day is over.”
Lee thought, “That is true. And there is also the fact you separately slept with both Pedro, the police chief of the city, and his brother Paciano, the former mafia boss of this town. Whom left immediately after learning what was going on. Though, I think both of them would get a kick out of finding out who you really are. Even after you slept with them.”
Bao went onto say, “The only reason I did not throw Revy and her friends out is because I know better. They pay well, and I do not want to piss them off. And I realized they would likely move on.”
Lee complimented, “That is very wise of you.”
Bao responded, “Thank you. Anyway, the police, and crooks, here, leave me alone. Should this place gets destroyed one too many times. I just pull up stakes, and move to the next place, I find interesting.”
Lee said, “I am glad you're happy.”
Bao agreed, “So am I.”
Lee inquired, “Now, how did you leave your home reality for a second time?” He thought, 'I wonder that. Considering I did not write about it. I was not even sure it happened. Until you confirmed who you are, Bao.'
Bao answered, “I used my bartending skills to get a few of the techs, working on reality devices, drunk, From there, I learned what those reality device are, and how they worked. Then, I waited. When the time was right, I stole one of those small reality devices. That time being during the chaos in Rock's attack of the Tower.”
Lee complimented, “That is some intelligent thinking.”
Bao replied, “I know.”
Lee thought, 'I might as well ask.' He requested, “You wouldn't happen to have that reality device, on you, that I could borrow?”
Bao flatly said, “It is not on me. And I am not giving you, mine. Still, do not worry. I am not going to turn you over to them. You are such a good friend and customer. I have no intention on telling them who you are.'
Lee replied, “Thank you. And it was worth asking about.”
Lee happily thought, 'Well, Bao. I am glad you still consider me your friend. And oh well. Back to my original plan.'
Bao agreed, “You are right. In your situation, I can understand you asking about such a device. Also, thanks for including me in that toast with the Ardbeg Providence.”
Lee replied, “No problem. You are nice to me. So, I am nice to you.”
Bao agreed, “Yes. It pays to be nice to each other. Though, I do have another question. What was with that Tex-Mex joke?”
Lee answered, “Tex-Mex is an alias of the creator of the Black Lagoon series, the series you, and the others from Roanapur, are from. That series being in both anime and manga formats. You are from the anime timeline. Anyway, he uses the Tex-Mex handle when he draws pornographic manga. Included in these manga he uses the babes from the Black Lagoon series.”
Bao laughed for several seconds. As she calmed down, she still giggled a little, as she stated, “That is evil. Just pure evil.”
Lee mischievously smiled, as he said, “I know. But, I had to come up with a way to keep them here. To let them know I was here. While not blowing my cover. And my plan worked.”
Bao commented, “True. But, you did make mistakes. I did recognized that attack you did, during the time you disarmed the man in the bar. It was like something Akira did, the night he first came into my old bar.”
Lee stated, “You are right. And I did write that scene. And come to think of it, it is similar. Only, I had to deal with one idiot, instead of two idiots.”
Bao said, “I am surprised none of the girls recognized what you did then.”
Lee responded, “By then, they were too drunk to care. And they likely do not remember much of that night. Also, the guy in question, pulled a gun on me. So, it was worth the gamble.”
Bao nodded once, as she replied, “You got that right. I would hate to lose you as a customer. You are so polite, and a nice tipper.”
Lee stated, “Thank you. I long since learned to treat the help with respect.”
Bao pointed out, “And your manners may save your life in this messed up situation you are in.”
Lee agreed, “You are right. And it cannot hurt. Since I am nice to Revy, and the others, if they catch me, they may just put a couple of bullets in my skull, instead of torturing me for ten days straight, then killing me.”
Bao replied, “Exactly.”
Lee thought, 'Now, that I think about it. I have been, petting the dogs. And it has been worth doing so. Being polite to all the women after me, plus everyone else I could, since I came here. Though, I for that matter, I have been polite most of my life. And that will likely help me a lot. Still, there is another question I want to ask Bao about.'
Lee inquired, “Though, I do have a question. Where did you come up with name, the Rats Nest, for this bar?”
Bao answered, “Believe it, or not. The younger maid one time called the Yellowflag, a rats nest. After I got to thinking about it, I realized that insult, would make a nice bar name. So, given the name, Yellowflag, was too well known with reality travelers. When I had a chance to open my own place. This place. I named this bar, the Rats Nest.”
Lee began, “But, when did Fabiola called the Yellowflag...” Lee immediately stopped talking, as his jaw dropped, while he remembered something he should have known in the first place.
Bao giggled at the expression on Lee's face.
As Lee collected himself, he stated, “Of course. Fabiola called the Yellowflag a Rats Nest after she shot up the bar, in the american english dub, at the end of episode twenty-five, Collateral Massacre, of the anime.”
Bao commented, “And I found that to be hypocritical of her. How dare she criticize my bar after she wrecked it.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. You are right about that. Also, you didn't own that bar, in the U.S. midwest, when you had that beard, while you were hiding out?”
Bao answered, “No. I just ran it. The owner called the bar, the Western.”
Lee sarcastically said, “How original.”
Bao responded, “Well, at least he had it insured for arson, so he is probably okay. And considering you wrote about that bar, how could you not know that?”
Lee admitted, “I kind of used broad strokes with that bar. I stated what the bar looked like on the inside, and outside, along with music playing in it. And you being the bartender. I did not give it a name. Nor did I state what you had been up to while in that reality. I guess it makes sense that reality would fill in the blanks.”
Bao inquired, “So, you didn't write about my dates with several beautiful woman while in that town?”
Lee answered, “No.”
Bao said, “Interesting.”
Lee agreed, “Very.”
Bao commented, “And to think, during that time, I had some really good sex, with some of those women.”
Lee shrugged, as he replied, “I hope you used a condom.”
Bao requested, “Of course. By the way, I might want to see that Black Lagoon series sometime.”
Lee mentioned, “Pedro has a copy of the series, and he knows where to find my stories on the internet. My stories are titled, Badasses Of the Multiverse, books one through four.”
Bao commented, “Now that is an ambitious title.”
Lee pointed out, “I know. But, look what I had to work with.”
Bao complimented, “Good point. I would say you lived up to that title.”
Lee responded, “Thank you. Anyway, I am sure if you ask Pedro, he would be more than happy to loan his copies of the Black Lagoon series, to you. Along with showing you a copy of those stories. And don't worry, that anime has a really good english dubbing. And you would probably enjoy both the Black Lagoon series, and my stories. Or at least, you would get a good laugh at Revy's misfortunes in both series. Barring one scene, in the last episode of the Blood Trail arc, at the end of the Black Lagoon series.”
Bao inquired, “Which scene is that?”
Lee quietly said, “The scene that showed Revy as a teenager. A cop falsely arrested her, and then he raped her in a jail cell, while she was laying on her back, on the floor, with her hands cuffed behind her back.”
Bao softly replied, “Oh... Well, that does explain some things about Revy's personality. Still, to get back on track. It might be best, when I talk to Pedro, that I don't tell him who I really am. Considering, that I slept with both him, and his brother, separately, on two occasions.”
Lee thought, 'That confirms that. Though...' Lee mentioned, “Actually, I think you could bring up the subject, if you delicately handle the matter. Pedro might take it the news quite well. For example, we both agreed a number of the men turn women here, from your reality, and a few others, are hot. Such as Chang's female form.”
Bao asked, “Chang's a woman, now? I know, with the casino, that Chang is in town. But, I didn't know Chang was a woman now, as well.”
Lee explained, “Yes. Well, it is more of part time situation for Chang. You know that black hair chinese woman that came here that day you saw Rock, as a guy, and the others, whom played Sam and I at cards?”
Bao cracked a grin, as she said, “Yes. I remember that day. And how you had sex with that woman in the men's restroom, right after.”
Lee winched, as he responded, “Don't remind me... Anyway, that was Chang's female form. And Chang's female form's alias is, Daiyu. Which means, black jade, in chinese. And I found it kind of narcissistic to name his casino after himself, or in this case, herself. Though, I will admit that it a good name for a casino.
Bao agreed, “Yea. Chang can sometimes be full of himself.”
Lee replied, “No kidding.”
Bao asked, “So, what gave you the idea to turn us into women?”
Lee admitted, “Honestly. It was not originally my idea. Your creator came up with the idea to gender bend a number of the other people of the Black Lagoon reality. To be specific, the idea was shown in both the manga, and anime, in omake comedy short stories. There are seven Black Lagoon omakes in all. There is also an eighth omake in the manga series, that was not animated. It is about the Lovelace family.”
Bao inquired, “What happened in that one?”
Lee stated, “Roberta went crazy, again. This time protecting Garcia. With her planning to go after women with a-cup breasts. Which, at the time, included, Fabiola. Though, after Garcia calmed things down, it was Fabiola who snapped. Due to Garcia being unable to do calm Roberta down so quickly, when they searched for Roberta, in Roanapur. Fabiola reaction was so intense that she even scared both Roberta and Garcia. With her chasing them.”
Bao chuckled a little.
Lee continued, “Given I was using the anime timeline. And how Roberta was maimed and crippled, at the end of anime timeline. I felt mentioning that omake was in poor taste.”
By then, Bao calmed down. She said, in a calm tone of voice, “I heard what happened to Roberta. Both her injuries in the jungle, and Chang's repairs. And at least you have a sense of decency not to mention something like that in poor taste.”
“Though, I am not surprised, that Roberta could go overboard like that. Or, Fabiola could respond with just as much insanity. Though, I did see the younger maid once, after that fracas in Roanapur. And the younger maid, Fabiola, has definitely blossomed since then.”
Lee thought, 'You must be talking about that screwy, three chapters, that happened around the same time, when you were captured by the Hell Sabers. Still, I do agree with you.'
Lee commented, “Though, I have no seen pictures of Fabiola, since the end of the Black Lagoon series. Given, what I wrote, I would have to agree with you. Also, in a fan magazine Tex-Mex made about Black Lagoon, Tex-Mex hinted out working on a ninth omake, dealing with Revy as a dominatrix, call Queen Revy.”
Bao stated, “Been there. Done that. I have seen her like that one time, during one of her more crazier periods. Long before she ever met Rock, and she started to calm down.”
Lee thought, 'Bao's comment can be taken in so many ways, that I do not want to know the details. My life is insane enough, as is.' Lee replied, “I don't want to know.”
Bao complimented, “That is a wise a reply to make, on that matter. Now, which omake are you talking about, with the gender bending?”
Lee responded, “To be specific, the gender bending idea came from the fourth omake, the Boys and Girls omake. Still, all the omakes are hilarious. You were not in it. That is probably why no one has recognized you, while you have been here.”
Bao agreed, “That is very likely.”
Lee went onto say, “But, you could probably already guess who was. You might get a kick out of watching the anime versions of the omakes. You can find english fansubs of them, and the manga versions, online.”
Bao commented, “I will have to check those videos, and manga, out sometime.” She inquired, with curiosity in her tone of voice, “Now. Given I am stuck as a woman. Though, at hot, strong, sexy woman at that. But, still a woman. I have to ask. How can Chang and Rock change genders back and forth? Is it like Akira's sneezing ability?
Lee answered, “For Chang, yes. Rock uses a magical powder, with water, that works once per dose, with cold water. And hot water reverses the effect?”
Bao asked, “From the Ranma Half series?”
Lee guessed, “Pedro showed you his anime collection?”
Bao stated, “Yes. Some of it. We just never got around to the Black Lagoon And let me guess. That redhead with Akira is Ranma. And the blue haired woman with them is Natsuru, from the Kampfer.”
Lee replied, “Yes.”
Bao questioned, “I thought so. Are given the physical similarities, are the three teenagers sometimes with them, their children. I believe their names are Nodoka, Mikoto and Yurika.”
Lee answered, “Correct. Those are their names. And they are Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru's children.”
Bao asked, “I suspected as much. Which one is the mother and father to each one?”
Lee answered, “Ranma, Akira, and Nodoka, each gave birth to one of them. Ranma is Nodoka mother. Natsuru is Nodoka's father. Natsuru is Mikoto's mother. Akira is Mikoto's father. Akira is Yurika's mother. And Natsuru is Yurika's father.”
Bao inquired, “You came up with those three daughters in your stories? Didn't you?”
Lee admitted, “Yes.”
Bao commented, “You have a sick mind.”
Lee causally responded, “That goes without saying. Along with me being an idiot. But, those three teenagers are good people.”
Bao agreed, “Yes. From what I have seen of those three teenagers. They seem to be good kids. And can they gender bender like their parents?”
Lee stated, “All three can change at will. And Mikoto and Yurika can change with a sneeze.”
Bao said, “That is interesting. And it does not take a genius to figure out who those five other teenagers are the children to.”
Lee replied, “Yes. They are.”
Bao commented, “I will find out the details, later.”
Lee mentioned, “Just ask Pedro. He will help fill in the blanks.”
Bao replied, “Okay.” She thought, 'So, Pedro knows what is going on. In part. Or, in full. That was not hard to guess, after overhearing Lee and Pedro, talking about that bottle of Ardbeg Providence that Lee brought into the bar. And I will find out the details in a minute.'
A thought occurred to Lee, as he asked, “Now, that I think about it. I find it hard to believe that Pedro would show you the Kampfer and the Ranma series. But, not a series that showed strong adult women. Such as the Black Lagoon series.”
Bao admitted, “During our time together, I did mention to Pedro that I was interested in the gender bending genre. And yes. He gave me a strange look, due to my request. But, given I am such a hot woman, he let the matter drop.”
Lee said, “Okay. And it too bad I cannot get you some of those packets without revealing to them who I am.”
Bao responded, “True. And I cannot approach them, about that without risking them finding out who I am.”
Lee said, “Yea. It is kind of a catch twenty-two for both of us.”
Bao shrugged, as she stated, “Oh well. It is the thought that counts. Sex is still enjoyable as a woman. So, I am not going to complain. And Pedro, and Paciano, were both good in bed.”
Lee replied, “I will take your word on that.”
Bao let out a laugh. She then thought, 'Now, to find out more how much Pedro knows. And what happened to Paciano.'
Bao inquired, “By the way, what happened to Paciano? And how much does Pedro know? I could not help but overhear your conversation with Pedro, when you brought that bottle of Ardbeg Providence by, three days ago. You both clearly knew that bottle originated from my home reality.”
Lee commented, “Given your enhanced senses, that is understandable. Okay. The Del Soto brothers are big Black Lagoon fans. Paciano found out that Revy and the others being here, at the Devil's Hotel. And that they were from the stories I wrote about, as well. Just like you. And from what Pedro told me, Paciano gave away nearly everything he had, left town, and joined the priesthood.”
Bao giggled. She then commented, “I can actually see that happening. Most of the mafia members I knew of back in my reality were stupid enough to try to insult Revy, and the others like her. But, the people of this world seem to have a savviness that is lacking in my reality. And Paciano realized it might be best to get right with God, than face Revy. Honestly, I think he made the right choice.”
Lee replied, “No kidding.”
Bao inquired, “And Pedro?”
Lee stated, “Pedro knows what is going on. Revy, Chang, the others, and the stories. But, unlike his brother, he stuck around. We have been working together to figure a way to steal a reality device, so I can escape to the multiverse, with the others following me.”
Bao commented, “Nice plan. And I think Revy, and her group, would follow you. But, I don't think Chang, and his group will. It looks like Chang is putting down stakes here.”
Lee responded, “Pedro and I both realize that, as well. But, if we can get Revy and her group to follow me, at least Pedro, and this town, have a chance.”
Bao agreed, “True. And I hope your plan works.”
Lee replied, “Thank you.”
Bao asked, “By the way, I noticed you are getting thinner. And with that, not going to be here forever, comment you made a few days ago... What is going on?”
Lee admitted, “I am dying of cancer. I got a few months to live, unless I can find a cure in the multiverse.”
Bao stated, “Ouch. And good luck. On second thought, in that case, if I wasn't afraid of reprisal from Revy, and the others, I would loan you my reality device.”
Lee responded, “I fully understand. And I would have returned it, when I was finished.”
Bao agreed, “I am sure you would have.”
Lee commented, “Well, I am glad we had this conversation. I can now have a casual conversation, about this, with someone who is sane, and who does not have a personal agenda, besides just living their life.”
Bao stated, “I guess you would consider that refreshing. And like any good bartender, I am more than willing to listen, and offer advice.”
Lee chuckled a little. He then said, “Thank you.”
Bao inquired, “By the way, who else knows who you really are?”
Lee grimly stated, “The number seems to be dreadfully climbing by the day. Besides yourself, those in town, that know I am the writer, are Pedro, Chang, River, Arcee, and Annie. At the moment, all of them have agreed to keep my secret. But, I don't know for how long.”
Bao commented, “Be happy that Chang loves playing his games. So, you have a little time.”
Lee replied, “True.”
Bao questioned, “So, Sam does not know who you really are?”
Lee responded, “Nope. He is a genuine friend to me. And I do not want to get him dragged into my mess.”
Bao complimented, “That is kind of you”
Lee said, “Thank you.”
Bao inquired, “So, I know about Chang, and Pedro. But, who are the others. I know you played River in that poker tournament. Though, all I know about her is her name, and that she is Chang's girlfriend. What is so special about her?”
Lee asked, “Have you ever seen the Firefly sci-fi series, and Serenity movie?”
Bao answered, “Yes.”
Lee flatly commented, “Same River. Though, she doesn't look it. She is several years older. And she is saner. Also, she likes to occasional dye her natural brown hair red.”
Bao's jaw dropped. A few seconds later, as she collected herself, she stated, “I take it back. I have seen that series, and movie. You winning that poker game against her is balls to the wall awesome.”
Lee could not help but smile at Bao's compliment. He said, “Thank you.”
Bao realized, as she inquired, “Wait a minute, River still looks young. How is that possible? Did she have the vat process?”
Lee explained, “No. When I wrote my stories, I created a gender bending virus that Chang, River, and the rest of the Serenity crew head. Do not worry, the virus is not contagious after it ran its course, over the first few weeks of infection. With the infected being confined to the Serenity, for those weeks. With no physical contact to the outside. So, they are the only ones that were affected by that virus. That gender bending virus gave them the same gender bending sneezing ability that Akira has.”
“At the time, Chang was a woman, like you with the super-soldier serum in her veins. The virus allow her to change back into a man, at the same youthful age has her female form. In addition to Chang still have the physical enhancements the super-soldier serum gave him as a woman.”
“Along with the gender bending, this virus also slowed down their aging to a very slow crawl. And that added longevity, has a multiplier effect to other forms of longevity. Such as those of the Verse's natural longevity, compared to people, here on Earth. And the longevity from the super-soldier serum that you and Chang have.
Bao commented, “No wonder Chang is not pissed off at you. And River did not turn you in. You gave them both so much. And their love life must be interesting.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. Given Chang's creativity, and River's genius, I would guess so.”
Bao giggled. She then questioned, “So, who is Arcee?”
Lee answered, “Arcee is a autobot. As in a transformer?”
Bao questioned, “From that old cartoon series?”
Lee pointed out, “Actually, Arcee is from a newer comic series, inspired by that old cartoon. The comic series is from the Transformers. IDW comic series. She goes from pink robot, into a pink motorcycle, and then back again. And she is as crazy, if not crazier than Revy.”
Bao inquired, “Is she the pink robot I heard that worked with Revy and the others, at the Tower.”
Lee replied, “Yes.”
Bao commented, “That figures. And dare I ask who Annie is?”
Lee admitted, “You are not going to like the answer. But, here is a clue. What Stars War badass was nicknamed, Annie, as a boy.”
Bao began, “There is only one character, a male one, that I can think of, who was nicknamed Annie, as a boy, was...” Her eyes went wide, as she stated, “No?!”
Lee replied, “Yes.”
Bao said, “No.”
Lee stated, “Yes. Annie is, or actually was, Darth Vader.”
Bao exclaimed, “Oh god! That rumor from the Tower was true?! You are crazy to rob Vader of his manhood! That is insane!” She forced herself to calm down, as she continued, “Doing that is crazier than Roberta on a bad day.”
Lee soberly admitted, “I know.”
Bao pointed out, “I see you are right, concerning what you said, early, about yourself. You would have to be an idiot to do that.”
Lee quietly repeated, “I know.”
Bao inquired, “After she learned who you are, why has she not force chocked you to death, yet?”
Lee answered, “Annie is out of the black suit, and in healthy body, with restored limbs. Because of this, she is happy with her current situation, for the most part.”
Bao conceded, “I can see how that would help your case with her.”
Lee went on to say, “Plus, I did a whole lot of character development for her. She was kidnapped between the prequel and the original trilogies. And I had her watch all six movies.”
Bao commented, “That is mean.”
Lee countered, “But necessary. She saw how her life would have ended up. And she rejected that path, and became a better person. You could consider her a good guy, or in this case, good gal. But, she is no saint. And she is more than willing to kill those whom threaten her.”
Bao stated, “I am glad you convinced her to be good. Vader as a bad girl, with her force powers, and the super-soldier serum, would be scarier than the Bloodhound.”
Lee agreed, “You are preaching to the choir.”
Bao asked, “So, what does Annie look like?”
Lee answered, “Annie is the one with the brown hair, in the brown robe, with the lightsaber clipped to her belt, at Chang's casino.”
Bao said, “I will be sure to avoid her.”
Lee pointed out, “No need. She is likely one of the nicer people you will meet at the casino. Just don't crack any Star Wars jokes in her presence.”
Bao cracked a grin, as she inquired, “So, how many of those Star Wars jokes did you crack at her expense, in your stories?”
Lee admitted, “More than was healthy.”
Bao let out a laugh. She then said, “I will keep that in mind. Now, that I think about it. I do have another question. I heard about Melvin putting Revy in her place. I would pay money to see what happened.”
Lee agreed, “So would I.”
Bao commented, “Anyway, I have met Melvin a few times, and I just get the feeling I have seen him somewhere else, before.”
Lee stated, “It is not my secret to tell.”
Bao inquired, “Okay. But, how big a secret is it?”
Lee answered, “Melvin is in hiding from badasses that are more dangerous than those after me.”
Bao stated, “The only badasses I know of, that are more dangerous than Revy and the others, are Balalaika and Hotel Moscow... Of course. Now, I remember. He is a member of Hotel Moscow.”
Lee softly replied, “Damn.”
Bao snorted.
Lee said, “Well, since you figured that out, you need to know that Melvin is actually on the run from Hotel Moscow.”
Bao pointed out, “Why is he on the run from them? He does not seem like he would willfully cross Balalaika. And the only good thing that everyone can agree about her is that she takes care of her troops.”
Lee explained, “First, I didn't write this. I just pieced it together from some sources. And this is all on Balalaika's head. After the fall of the Chang's Tower, Hotel Moscow continued with business a usual, only at different locations. And as the years passed, Balalaika stayed young, while her subordinates did not. Eventually, it reached a point that she made them an offer, the vat process, to make them young. At the price being they would be women. Only Melvin objected. It was then that Melvin learned that Balalaika's offer was more of an order, than an offer, and so he ran.”
Bao asked, in a firm tone of voice, “Are you saying that Hotel Moscow is now composed of young, badass super-soldier women?”
Lee replied, “Yes. And that isn't my fault.”
Bao said, “I believe you. And here I thought the members of Hotel Moscow were dangerous before.”
Lee responded, “Yes. I am just happy that Balalaika does not know who I am.”
Bao said, “If she did you would be better off with surrendering to Revy and her group.”
Lee agreed, “I know.”
Bao commented, “Well, we better head back out before more customers show up.”
Lee replied, “Agreed.”
Bao stood up from her chair, as she said, “Anyway. I wish you luck, and I am rooting for you.”
Lee stood up from his chair, as he replied, “Thank you.”
Both of them turned, and walked towards the door, leading to the dining area of the building.
Lee walked passed Bao. And he pushed opened the door for Bao, and let her walk through first.
As Bao passed by Lee, she said, “Thank you.”
Lee replied, “You're welcome.”
Lee then followed behind, with him gently closing the door after he was through it.
Lee then walked around the bar counter, and sat at one of the stools, in the middle of the bar counter, with him facing the right wall of the room.
Lee then patiently watched for his good friend, Sam, to show up.
Meanwhile, Bao walked behind the bar counter, and placed her pistol in its holster, under the bar. She then turned to Lee, as she asked, “Can I get you anything?”
Lee turned to Bao, as he answered, “Not yet. And your secret identity is safe with me.”
Bao grinned, as she replied, “Thank you.” She then pulled out a bottle of water, from refrigerator, under the counter, to drink.
Lee turned turned looked down at the bar counter, as he continued to wait for Sam to show up.
A few minutes later, Lee was still sitting in his stool with Bao behind the bar counter, as both of them heard the front door to the bar open.
They both turned their heads to see Sam walk through the front door.
Lee stood up from the stool he was sitting in, as he turned to Sam. He said, with joy evident in his tone of voice, “Good morning, Sam.”
As Sam reached Lee. Sam came to a stop, in front of his good friend, as he happily replied, “Good morning, Lee.”
Lee inquired, “So, back to the usual poker game?”
Sam replied, “Yea.”
Lee asked, “How long can you stay?”
Sam smiled, as he answered, “All afternoon.”
Lee returned his friend's smile, as he happily responded, “Good.”
Lee turned to Bao, as he ordered, “We will have two glasses of lemonade.”
Bao continued to look at the two men, as she said, “Coming right up.”
Sam grinned, as he said, “You know me so well.”
Lee turned to Sam, as he warmly said, in a happy tone of voice, “What are friends for.”
Both men then turned and walked to their usual corner table, in the left back corner of the room, to continued their ongoing poker game.
(_)
Later on, it was the late of the afternoon, near sunset, inside the Rats Nest, Lee and Sam were at this usually table, playing poker against each other, at their corner table.
Lee had treated Sam to a nice lunch at the local American steakhouse that he had previously taken Eda to. He drove Sam to the restaurant, in his pink Cadillac. Where Sam and Lee both enjoyed the meals that Lee paid for. Lee then left a tip, And Lee returned this to the Rats Nest.
We then returned to the Rats Nest to continued their poker game, at their corner table. With Bao giving them both fresh glasses of lemonade.
Currently, Bao, Sam, and Lee, were only three people inside the bar.
As Sam and Lee saw in chairs at the large table, in the back left corner of the room.
Sam had his back to the back right corner of the room. Lee sat with his back to the right wall of the room. Which allowed Lee to see the front door, with the corner of his left eye.
And while Lee was enjoying his time with Sam. He was still dealing with a minor personal concern.
Throughout the afternoon, Lee was unable to shake off the growing sense of impending doom he had been feeling all day, since he woke up.
Lee looked at his poker cards, in his hands. It was a good hand. Though, Lee was just more interested in continuing the current hand, just for fun. The pot for the hand was only a few dollars, with him and Sam just presently playing for the fun it. As the two friends sent time with each other.
While Lee continued to look at his poker hand, Lee thought, with concern, as he fought off the creeping dread he was feeling, 'I don't get this feeling. It is like my precognition is redlining. This is way worse, than when I sense an actual possible threat from Revy. That is just a minor annoyance, compared to the down right, apocalyptic sense of danger I am feeling right now. And I cannot figure out why.'
'If they girls finally figured out who I was, they would have dragged me off at breakfast, or come after me by now. It has got to be something else. Maybe the authorities of my homeland are going to take another shot at me... Nah. Pedro said they wouldn't... At least not this soon.'
'It cannot be Chang. He already knows who I am, and he let me go. He even made me a nice offer, that I am willing to accept, as soon as he works out the kinks in his plan. And I told him as such.'
'Annie, River, and Arcee know who I am, and they clearly don't care. The rest are in the dark. And I am still in Pedro's good graces. So, that cannot be it. So, what is it?'
Suddenly, to his left side, he heard the front door to the bar open, with footsteps of people walking in.
Lee did not paid any mind to whomever walked into the bar, as he looked at the cards in his hand.
Lee had a pretty good hand. A full house of three queens, and two aces.
A few seconds later, Lee heard a bottle dropped on the floor, from behind the bar counter. Though, from the sound, the bottle did not shatter, when it hit the floor.
Lee thought, 'Well, let's see if Bao needs some help cleaning that up. The bottle may be intact, but it likely that it was full, and the liquid inside spilled its alcohol onto the floor. Anyway, I owed Bao, for what I did to her, and for keeping my secret. Helping her clean up a mess is the least I can do.'
But, when Lee turned to his left side, to look at the bar counter, whom he saw, standing in front of the bar counter, nearly caused him to have heartattack in fear.
As Lee's cards fell on the table, with the cards facing upwards, he felt intense fear at the two individuals he saw, He immediately understood what his precognition had been trying to tell him all day long.
It took all the will power Lee had not to break his calm poker mask. Still, it was extremely difficult to prevent himself from immediately freaking out, jumping out of his chair, and running for the front door. But, he knew if he did, it would give him away as the writer.
For whom he saw were two women. One woman had long purple hair, that went below her waistline. The other woman had long green hair that went below her waistline. Both had their hair in ponytails, tied back at multiple points. The purple woman's hair was so long that her hair was tied every two feet, and was tied three times in all. And the woman with the purple hair was closest to him.
Though their clothing, Lee could tell that the purple haired woman appeared to be in her mid-twenties. While the green haired woman appeared to be in her late-twenties.
Both had very athletic physical builds. And while the green hair woman had a respected set of breasts on her chest. The purple haired woman had a large set of breasts on her chest.
From the angle they were standing at, he could see that neither of them were wearing glasses, nor bonnets.
Yet, both were wearing classic, black and white, long skirt, long sleeved, and white gloved, maids outfits.
The two women could only be two people.
Aside from the fear, Lee was beyond happy that both of the women were turned towards the bar counter, with neither of them looking at him. Though, the purple haired woman, the more dangerous of the two women, was the one being the closer to Lee, as she stood to the left of the green haired woman.
Still, Lee mentally screamed, 'It is Roberta! And Fabiola! The Lovelace maids! They can only be those two. No one else would wear those outfits, and have those hair colors, at those hair lengths, in those ponytails. And the only reason they would be here would be to look for me.'
'Chang told me that all those after me agreed not to tell the maids about the stories, and about my anonymous alias, as the writer. So, who the hell among the Rock and Revy's crew called them in?! No one in Chang's group could be that stupid, because they know Chang would have their hides for ruining his fun.'
'Though, the answer to that question really does not matter at the moment. These two badasses will literally tear this town apart looking for me. I have got to get out of here. Out of the city. They will eventually chase me. Though, my running will get everyone else out of the line of fire. But, how? I go for either the front, or back door, I am had.'
'And they are literally way too close for my comfort. Roberta is less than ten feet from me. I would guess the Bloodhound is eight feet, nine inches, and three quarter inches from me. To be exact. I am literally two steps from an absolutely, horrible, horrible fate. I just pray that I can get Bao to stall them, while I figure out a plan that can save all our asses.'
'Fortunately, Bao knows the situation, and she has no love for the maids. So, we still might be able to pull off a miracle. And I have an idea to buy time. The question is, can Bao pull it off, on the fly.'
(_)
Meanwhile, Bao was standing, behind her bar counter, and in front of one of her worst nightmares, come to life.
Bao had dropped the bottle out of fear, when she looked up, and saw Roberta and Fabiola standing right in front of her.
Only after years of experience in dealing with Revy, and other lunatic women, kept Bao from showing any outward fear towards the women.
Though, Bao thought, with intense fear, and worry, 'Oh fuck! Lee is fucked! And maybe I am too!' She then risked a glance of at Lee, and their eyes met each other, before she looked back at the faces of the maids. She continued her thought, “And from the look in his eyes, he knows he is fucked!'
'At least the these two women don't look pissed off at the moment. Given the situation, that could be worse. And I see that Roberta replaced her cybernetic parts, with more human looking ones.'
'The only thing I have going for me is they clearly don't know who I am, nor do they know that Lee here is the writer.'
'I need to play up the babe angle, until Lee figures out a plan. At least, I learned spanish when I first came to this town. So, that may help put them at ease, while in my presence.'
Bao kindly said, in spanish, “I apologize for my clumsiness.”
Fabiola said, in spanish, “That is quite alright. We all make mistakes, sometimes.'
Bao thought, 'It is tragic that you are likely not going to apply that rule to Lee.'
Roberta spoke in a calm, polite tone of voice, in spanish, “Yes. We all do. Now, excuse me, ma'am. We are looking for the Devil's Hotel and Resort? Could you provide us with directions?”
From over Roberta's left shoulder, Bao saw Lee still looking at her.
Lee silently mouthed the words, in english, “Stall them.”
Bao thought, 'I think I can do that.' She offered, “Well ladies. If you give me a minute to get a pen and paper, from in back, I can draw some directions for you. And if you can wait a few more minutes than that, I can call you a taxi.”
Roberta responded, with a cute, innocent smile, “That would be nice.”
Bao thought, 'If I did not know better, I would have fallen for that smile.'
Bao asked, “Can I get anything for you, before I head to the back?”
Bao thought, 'If it is milk, we may make it out of this alive. If it is hard alcohol, we are screwed.'
Roberta answered, “We will each have a bottle of beer.”
Fabiola commented, “Something nice, and cold.”
Bao thought, 'I am confused now. I cannot read their answer.'
Bao quickly pulled out two cold bottles of expensive beer, from a small refrigerator, from below the bar counter. She swiftly set the cold bottles on the counter, in front of the maids.
Bao then turned, and walked to back of the room, where she opened the storage room, and ended the storage area of the building.
Meanwhile, both maids opened their bottles, and they each of them took a drink their cold bottles of beer.
(_)
As Sam saw Bao leave for the back area of her bar, he could tell that she was scared for some reason. Also, he saw a bit the fear Lee's eyes, as well.
And all of the fear, from both adults, were directed towards the two women that had just walked into the bar.
Yet, for Lee, Sam could see the fear had lessened considerably within the last few seconds.
Though, Sam wisely decided to be remain silent, as he watched the situation play out.
(_)
Meanwhile, Lee saw what Bao had done.
As the Bao left the room, and maids drank their bottles of beer.
Lee turned back to face Sam, lest the maids notice that he was staring at them, and wonder why he was doing so.
Lee thought, 'Okay, Bao. Good job. You bought me time. Not much, but some. I may have seconds to a few minutes. But, I can work with this.'
'Though, when I first saw the maids, just now, I was so scared, I almost pissed my pants. Sill, I need to figure a way out of here... Wait... Could my escape be that simple?... It is worth a try. I just have to calmly get up, and walk casually. As if nothing is wrong.'
Lee slowly stood, and he calmly turned and walked to the men's restroom.
(_)
Though, at the same time as Lee did heading for the men's restroom, from the bar counter, Fabiola had decided to take a look around the room. And she noticed Lee walking to the men's restroom door, open it, and walked inside, with him closing the door behind himself.
Fabiola set down her beer bottle on the counter, as she thought, 'I wonder.'
She walked over to the men's restroom, and opened the door to it.
She saw Lee next to, and facing, one of the restroom urinals.
Lee turned to Fabiola. He inquired, with annoyance in his tone of voice, as he spoke in spanish, “Do you mind?”
Fabiola blushed, as she said, in spanish, “Sorry.”
She then stepped back into the dining are of the bar, as she closed the door behind her. She then turned, and walked back to her place at the bar counter, by her teacher, and long time friend, Roberta.
(_)
Meanwhile, in the men's restroom. Right after the door shut, as Fabiola exit the room, Lee let out a deep breath, in relief. Lee thought, 'And she was modest enough to not even check to see my fly was zipped up. And she would likely not expect the writer to know spanish.'
(_)
As this went on, in the main room, Fabiola walked away from the restroom door, and back towards the counter.
Sam watched this. He then set down his cards, got up, and passed by her, as he entered the men's restroom.
After Sam entered the restroom, he let the door close behind him. He turned, as he saw Lee standing by a urinal, a few feet from him. Sam began to ask, in english, “What...”
Lee quickly rushed up to Sam, and cupped Sam's mouth, with the open palm of his right hand.
Sam could see that Lee has a serious expression on his face. Lee whispered, in a serious tone of voice, in english, “Speak only in whisper. The purple haired woman has sharp hearing. And do not use my name, nor your name. Do you understand?”
Sam silently nodded.
Lee the removed his right hand from Sam's mouth.
Sam softly inquired, with concern in his tone of voice, “What is going on? You are acting like Santa Muerte just walked into the bar.”
Lee quietly responded, “That would be pretty close to the truth. We have to get out of here. The window in here is our best bet. We are lucky it is big enough, and it is not painted shut. And we have to do this quietly. Also, forget the money on the table. It is not worthy our lives.”
Lee mentally reflected, 'I am glad I still have most of my money on me. And I can live without that five hundred dollars, and change, I left on the table. Plus, the maids will not suspect us of leaving without first collecting the money off our table. So, we got that going for us. Now, to get out of here.'
Lee softly turned around, and walked to the window.
The window, as three feet wide, and six feet high.
The window was set three feet above the tiled floor, in the middle of the back exterior wall of the building, with the window reaching the ceiling. There was a simply turn lock on the center of the window.
The window faced a concrete block wall, six feet from the back of the building.
So, privacy was not an issue. Though, the height of the concrete block wall dropped down to four feet, when it was no longer parallel with the building.
The window was clear, and provided light for the large, restroom. There were ceiling lights, and a suction fan in the ceiling that could be turned on, but both machines were currently turned off.
The window was a standard tile and slide window, and pushed upwards from the bottom to open the lower half.
Lee careful, undid the lock in the middle. He then slow, and quietly, pushed the window up to where it was open enough to get out of.
Meanwhile Sam quietly walked across the room, to where Lee was. And he stood a few feet behind Lee.
As this point, Lee had opened half of the window, all the way up. Lee then checked, and found, that the window stayed in place. After which, he let go of the window.
Lee was the first to walk outside through the window. He was soon followed by Sam.
When both men were standing outside, Lee whispered, “Just follow me. We will talk, when we are about a city block from here.”
Sam softly replied, “Okay.”
Lee then turned, and started walking to the along the back side of the building, towards the right side of the building, which had not windows on that side of the building, that could be seen from the middle part of the bar counter, where the maids had been quietly drinking their bottles of beer.
Lee did this, so Sam and himself would not risk being seen by maids as they left the area.
As Lee walked, Sam followed right behind Lee.
Soon the two men would be the concrete sidewalk, where Lee would then take them to a nearby intersession, and he will turn right, to go up another road, that did not face those outside of the Rats Nest Bar.
And while Lee was taking a different route to where he parked his car. He knew the road so of Plata Podrido, well. And he was still heading to where he parked his car, a few blocks away from the Rats Nest Bar. He did this so that he would not have to double back, and risk accidentally running into maid.
A minute later, Lee lead Sam to an intersession, where they cross the empty street, to their right. And they walked down another sidewalk, with the road to their left.
Both men were silent, as Lee briskly walked, with Sam following right behind him.
Though, Lee did plan to make a quick stop, on their way to his car.
(_)
At the moment, inside the Rats Nest bar itself, Bao had just re-entered the dining area, form the storage room. She walked around the back of the bar counter, with a pen and paper in hand.
As Bao walked, she noticed that Lee and Sam were gone, but the maids were still there, calming drink their beer.
Bao thought, 'Good. Lee figured a way out. And he was able to get Sam to go with him. That means no one is likely going to die right now. I helped give Lee a head start. He is now on his own.'
A second later, Bao came to a stop, to the left of the maids. Though, not right in front of them. She looked at the two maids, whom had been silent, and losing in front of themselves.
Suddenly, a group of eight men walked into the bar. The men were in their late teens, to early twenties. And they were all in casual clothing. Such as shirt, pants, and shoes. A few of the men were holding wooden baseball bats. But, none of them had any other signs of weapons on them.
Bao thought, 'From their clothing, and ages, they are likely another mexican gang. These guys seem to come here every other week to cause trouble. As least with Revy and the girls coming by regularly, most of them got the clue to stay away.'
'And Pedro, and his men, usually handle the rest of these fools.'
'If the maids were not here, I would pull my gun, and they would leave. And some of them also have yet to learn, the hard way, that I was physically stronger, quicker, tougher, and a better fighter than them. But, if I do that, with the maids here, it is going to result in a bloodbath. With maybe my own blood being shed as well.'
The leader of the gang said, in spanish, “Hello senoritas. We are looking for Lee? Where is he?”
The maids left their nearly empty bottles of beer on the counter, as they turned to look at the newcomers.
Roberta asked, in a sickeningly sweet tone of voice, in spanish, “Who is Lee?”
Bao mentally whined, 'These idiots are not only going to get themselves killed, but lead the maids right to Lee. Sure the boy did some questionable things, but he doesn't deserve the fate these two will dish out on him.'
Bao turned to Roberta, as she spoke up, in spanish, “Just a guy in town.” She turned to the gang, as she inquired, “So, what do you want with this, Lee?”
The man answered, “We heard he recently came into some money from that big poker game, at the casino in town. We know he stays at the hotel with those crazy women. But, that he also comes here. So, we figured it was safer to confront him here.”
Bao thought, 'You fools picked the wrong place, at the wrong time, on the wrong people, to pull this stunt on.'
Bao stated, “Nice plan. But, I hate break it to you. But, Lee is almost broke. It was Revy's money, not his. Revy took all the winnings with her. With Lee not seeing a peso of that money. He did not even want to play that woman, in the first place. Revy made him enter that game.”
The man replied, “Really? How sad. Our fallback plan was to kidnap him, and hold him hostage.”
Bao responded, “Good luck with that. No one here would pay any ransom for him. Especially, not those women at the hotel.”
Fabiola question, in spanish, “What money? What poker game? What woman are you talking about?” She thought, 'Though, with Revy involved. And it has to be our Revy. No one else is called, Revy. This is getting more interesting by the second.'
The man answered, “A few days ago, Lee played a poker game against this woman at the local casino. It was a million U.S. dollars, bet against a million U.S. dollars. Lee won the game.”
Roberta requested, “Describe this woman?”
The man said, “Some redheaded chick named, River”
Fabiola raised an eyebrow, as she inquired, “River? As in Chang's girlfriend?”
The man answered, “I guess so. I believe that the guy who runs the casino is named, Chang.”
Roberta thought, 'This Lee beat a telepathic genius in a poker game.' She stated, “I would like to meet this man. What does he look like?”
The man smirked, as he said, “What does it matter? You are never going to see him. We came here to make money today. And if we cannot make it off of his ass, then we can make it off of yours. And we can have some fun in doing so.”
Bao watched the two other women, beside her, as it was like a mental switch have been flipped for both maids. Bao saw their body language go ridged, as both of them grimace, and growl, in unison.
Bao thought, with disgust, 'I have seen this dance before. First hand. Twice. By these very two women. I know what is happening next. Screw it. I am out of here.'
Bao turned to the maids, as she flatly stated, “The beers are on the house. The place is insured. And the bar counter walls are armored. Have fun girls. I am gone.”
Bao swiftly walked over to a nearby section of the back of the bar counter, where she pulled her gun from the holster under the counter. She then turned around and ran out of the room, to the back of the store, and out the back door, while not looking back.
A few seconds later, Bao was in her car, driving away, down the street, from the violent insanity that was about to unfold. With Bao planning to call the fire department, when she was over two blocks away.
(_)
Back inside the bar room, by the counter, the maids had kept their eyes on the men, by the front door. Though, the maids had heard what the bartender had said. They saw from the corner of their eyes, as she pulled out a gun. And they heard as she ran out of the dining area, through a door in the back of the room.
As the maids and the men continued to silently look at each other, Fabiola thought, 'So, the bartender was armed, and she did not pull her pistol on us. Nor, these scumbags. Something is not right here.' Fabiola said, “If I didn't know better. I would think she knew us.”
Roberta turned to Fabiola, as she responded, “She might. From what I understand, our series exists here. And is fairly well known for those that have heard about it. With Revy, and her friends, around, it is possible for some people, in the local area, to put two and two together.”
Fabiola turned around, to face Roberta, as she agreed, “True. And that would explain why she ran, while letting us know the building is insured, and the bar counter is armored.”
The leader of the gang stated, “Hey senoritas. We are right here.”
The two women ignore the men.
Roberta said, “Yes. So, we don't have to worry about the destruction.”
Fabiola commented, “That actually makes me feel better about this.”
Roberta suggested, “Curtsey?”
Fabiola agreed, “Curtsey.”
Both women turned to the gang of men. A second later, both women curtseyed, and dozens of grenades, with their pinned pulled, fell out from under their skirts, and onto the floor.
A second later, both maids, jumped over the bar counter for cover, seconds before the grenades went off, and destroyed the room, while taking the gang members with it.
A few seconds later, both maid jumped back over the bar counter, and they calmed walked around small few fires in the room. When the reach the blown out, from door, the two women walked around the slightly burnt corpses of the gang members, as they calmly exited the building.
As soon as they stood right outside the entrance, under the awning, they looked at each other, to see they were both unharmed.
Meanwhile, a few cars passing by them, on the street.
Fabiola said, “Well, it looks like we will have to find someone else to give directions to the Devil's Hotel and Resort.”
Roberta agreed, “Yes. It looks that way. And with our luck, it will likely take a while.”
Fabiola stated, “I am in no rush. How about you?”
Roberta shrugged, “Not really. We will capture the writer, eventually. And if it gets to the point we become hungry this evening. We will stop for dinner, and then resume our hunt.”
Fabiola complimented, “Good plan.”
Roberta suggested, “Since we already learned, from a few other locals, this is an island, that borders the Gulf of Mexico. With those same locals suggesting we check out this bar for questions. With them giving us the direction to get here. I suggest we head to our left, and head for the eastern beach area. I am sure someone there will be willing to give us direction.”
Fabiola replied, “I agree.”
Both women then turned and walked side by side, down the left side of the building. With Fabiola walking to Roberta's right side.
Less than a minute later, the two women had passed by the Rats Nest parking lot, on the sidewalk, as they headed to the eastern beach of the island.
(_)
One minute ago, a block away, and half way to where Lee had parked his car, from the Rats Nest, to prevent from being ambushed again at the Rats Nest. Or, at least for Lee to spot those that would ambush him, before they spotted him.
At the moment, Lee and Sam had stop by a payphone.
There was no one else around them, on the street, in the area they were in, at that time of day.
Lee picked up the receiver, put in the needed amount of coins, and he dialed a number. He then used his right hand to hold the receiver to his right ear.
Sam saw the number that Lee dialed. He knew the number was for the local police station.
As the other end of the line picked up, Sam overheard Lee say, in spanish, “This is Lee. Please give a message to Chief Del Soto. Tell him that maids are in town. He will understand.”
A few seconds later, Lee said, “Thank you.”
Sam guessed that the person on the other end of the line had replied to Lee first comment, on the phone.
Lee hung up the phone, by putting the received back on the hook.
Lee then turned and start walking about from Sam, in the direction of his car. With the road to Lee's left side, and the buildings to his right side.
Sam decided to silently walk right behind Lee.
Suddenly, they heard an explosion come from the Rats Nest, a block behind them.
Sam stopped, and turned around, to look at the smoke rising from the explosion.
Meanwhile, Lee just kept walking, without looking back.
Sam turned back to Lee, as he started walking behind him. With Sam catching up to Lee, to follow Lee, by a few feet behind Lee.
As they walked, Sam commented, in english, “I hope the bartender is okay.”
Lee kept this back turned to Sam, as he stated, in english, “Trust me. That bartender has been through worse. She will be alright.”
Sam asked, “Okay. But, what is going on, Lee? You are not acting normally. You are acting scared. Really scared.”
Lee kept his back to Sam, as they two men walked. Lee said, “That is because I am scared, for very good reasons. Listen Sam, you have got to get away from me. It is not safe to be near me, right now.”
Sam offered, “Just tell me what is going on. Maybe I can help.”
Lee shook his head, as he responded, “The heat is just too much on this. The short answer is the Lovelace hammer of righteousness is about to hit me, and I am not sure why...”
“Anyway, you cannot help me on this. If you try, you will just get yourself killed. Like I said. You need to get away from me. A five hundred mile radius should be good start. But, I recommend getting to the other side of the planet, as quickly as possible. Besides, you won't believe me, if I told you the full truth.”
Sam looked at the back of Lee's head, as he suggested, “Try me. I can believe a lot.”
Lee kept his back to Sam, as they walked. Lee stated, “Not like this. I know how this is likely going to play out. I tell you the truth. You don't believe me. You stick around, get yourself kill, and likely me captured. So, cut the bullshit. You are one of the few friends I have in this life. And a good friend at that. I don't want to see you get hurt. Let alone killed, due to my own stupidity. You said you have friends and a girlfriend. Go to them, and use their help to get the hell away from me.”
Sam said, with warmth in his tone of voice, “Lee, I am truly touched by your sentiments, concerning my welfare. And I think this is the best time to show you something about me.”
Lee continued to have his back turned to Sam, as he asked, “What?”
Then, Lee heard Sam sneeze, from behind him.
Lee immediately stopped walking, as he thought, with concern that swiftly turned to worry, 'A sneeze?... Oh no... Which one?...'
Lee slow turned around, clockwise, and he saw, the young woman, River, looking up at him.
Lee was in so much emotional shock, that he did not react. Even his face was stuck in a, huh, expression. He was like a deer caught in the headlights, as he continued to look at River.
River had on a full red fake, fully groomed beard, like Sam's full groomed beard. Her hair tied back in a ponytail, the same way Sam tied his hair back. Her hair was dyed the same shade of red as Sam's hair. River was wearing Sam's clothing, which was several times bigger in size that her current physical body needed.
While still in emotional shock, Lee thought, 'Sam is River Tam. And all this time, she had gender bended into her male form, and used a fake beard. Such an obvious trick, and I missed it. They even had the same shade of dyed hair. And I didn't seen. I have been played since before I even got to this town. And I didn't even realize it.'
Lee then began to laugh, because he did not really feel like crying.
River did not say a word, as she let her friend laugh for several seconds.
While Lee began to calm down, as he stopped laughing, he said, “Sam. Tam. I should have seen that coming.”
River shrugged, as she replied, in a comforting tone of voice, “Lee, don't feel bad. I can be a very good actor.”
Lee agreed, “Yes. You clearly can.” He then teased, “You know. That fake beard looks so funny on you, when you are a woman.”
River giggled, as she answered, “I know.”
Lee commented, “And I see you went back to dying your hair red. I have been meaning to ask you about that. But, doing so, in front of the others, would have blown my cover.”
River said, “Yes. Asking me about my hair would have likely alerted the others. Still, the red hair helps people not recognize me. By the way. Thank you for showing me that option.”
Lee replied, “You're welcome.”
Lee thought, 'First, Bao. Then, the maids. And now this... The whams just keep on coming. And I guess I do not know you that well, after all.'
River took off her fake beard, and put it into one of her right side pants pocket. Next, she tighten her belt a few notches. After which, given their height differences, River looked up at Lee, as she commented, “It is not that bad. And you do know me a lot better than you think. You just did not know Sam was me.”
Lee took a few deep breaths. With him slowly letting out each breath. He then said, “Okay... Sorry, about that. I got lost in the moment. And I honestly forgot you could read minds.”
River said, “It is okay. It happens more often then most people think.”
Lee asked, “So, do I call you, River, from now on? Or, can I call you, Sam?”
River commented, “Either is fine.”
Lee replied, “Alright, Sam.”
River smiled, in response to Lee's comment.
Lee commented, “I take it that Chang, nor anyone else, knows about you befriending me?”
River said, “No. They do not. So, how do you feel?”
By then, the shock of the situation had begun to feel wear off for Lee. And Lee was beginning to feel better and calmer, as he thought about the upsides of his situation. He said, “Well, I honestly feel a lot better, now. My chances for survival have just dramatically gone up.”
River happily agreed, “That is true.”
Lee inquired, “I hope you don't take offense to this question. But, about your sanity? Because, as Sam, you acted like a pillar of sanity. You were practically the straight man of our two person act.”
River grinned, as she stated, “I know. I am much saner than I use to be. I got a lot of help. You even hinted at a few of the things that helped me, in your stories.”
Lee replied, “That is nice.”
River said, “By the way, thanks for that. I enjoy having my sanity back.”
Lee asked, “You're welcome. So, about the poker game? You did call me, as Sam, to cheer me up. And you tipped me off to Faye's cheating.”
River stated, “You won that game fairly. I tipped you to Faye, because she was cheating on my behalf. If I had said something, it would have raised questions. And you really needed to be cheered up. Sorry about scaring you like that. I know I have a bit of reputation.”
Lee said, “Now, that I think about, as River, you were always nice to me. And I just did not realize it was you. Looking back on what really happened, it is okay.”
River stated, “Glad to hear it.”
Lee commented, “I think it is academic that your girlfriend is, Chang.”
River joked, “Well, half the time.”
Both friends laughed, for a few seconds, at River's joke.
As they calmed down, Lee commented, “Given you read my mind, and you already know about the time loop, from our conversation with Chang and Annie. You must know some of the things I did there, besides what was discussed.”
River's lips curled into a mischievous smile, as she complimented, with mirth in her tone of voice, “Oh yes. And you are absolutely insane to pull some of the stunts you did during that time.”
Lee returned River's smile, as he joked, “It is only insane if I am caught.”
River let out a laugh. She then agreed, “True. And that ass joke you pulled on Revy and Rock was brilliant, and hilarious. I had to keep myself from laughing in your presence, the first time I read your mind, while you were thinking about that.”
Lee responded, “Thank you. I try. Anyway, I know you don't have a clear memory of that day, during the loop. But, what were you and Chang up to then. Or, more aptly. What were you planning to do, they day before? That you hinted with me, while you were Sam.”
River commented, “From what we planned, and what I pulled from your memory, we just spent a good time together, that day. By the way, not to sound like a hypocrite, but I admire that you respected my privacy.”
Lee replied, “It is okay. I know the telepathy you have has no real, off, switch.”
River said, “I am glad you realize that. Anyway, from what I can vaguely recall. And what I have pieced together, from reading your mind. Except for the time I was teaching you. Chang and I spent those days making love to each other every way possible, that two gender benders could.”
Lee admitted, with warmth in his tone of voice, “I envy you.”
River replied, “I know. And if we get out of this mess, Chang and I are always open to invitations.”
Lee raised an eyebrow, as he said, “I just may take you up on your offer.”
River giggled a little. She then asked, “So, since you are the idea man... Person... How do we deal with the maids?”
Lee answered, “My main plan, right now, is to run.”
River said, “That is not a plan. You even literally wrote entire books on the subject, that running is not a plan.”
Lee commented, “I know. Those books are the reason I am in this mess. And well, hiding does not work on the Bloodhound. And all the other plans would mean confronting her, and her student. And that would be suicide, or worse. So, my options are sort of a process of elimination, here.”
River replied, “You may have a point there. I have never seen you this scared over Revy, nor the others. You were not even this scared when confronting me, as River.”
Lee stated, “That is because you are only dangerous when provoked. And I can probably come up with a plan to handle the rest of them, if I had to. But, not the maids. Nor you, for that matter.”
River calmly said, “I am glad you realize that.”
Lee stated, “Still, what I don't get is why they are here for me... Well, I can understand Fabiola being upset with me. I did some things to her. But, those things weren't that bad. And I made sure the situation turned out well for her. It is Roberta, I don't understand. I repaired her body completely, and helped her regain her sanity. Much like I did for you. Also, I made sure Garcia fully recovered from his wounds that he sustained at the end of the Blood Trail arc. So, why is Roberta after me?”
River thought, with concerned, 'Besides my identity, this is one, of two, big issues, I am not sure how Lee is going to react too. I do not think Lee realizes what Lee did, and whom Lee did it too. But, since Lee is asking, I might as well answer the question.'
River calmly said, “I read some of their thoughts, while we were all in the bar. They are angry with you about what you did to their master. While you did help Garcia recover. You also did something horrible to him. Or, should I say, her?”
It took about a minute for Lee to think over his long story, on what he could have done to Garcia. Then, it hit him, as he face-palmed himself with his right hand, as he looked down between at the concrete side walk, between River and himself.
Lee blurted out, as River watched Lee emotionally go to pieces, and she telepathically sensed him go to mental pieces as well, at the same time, as Lee realized the depths of his stupidity, “Oh no... The throw away line at the end book three. I just did that as a gag. It was just a case of, why the hell not. And I threw it in. No wonder they are pissed off at me. I turned Garcia into a girl, with a spring of drowned girl curse.”
“Shit. I am dead. I am deader than dead. I am dead, ten times over. I am so dead, I might as well lay down in my own grave, and let you throw dirt on top of me. I am that dead.”
“Nobody hurts Garcia and lives... Well, except for Roberta. But, that a special case. And even she regrets shooting him... Still, those two badass woman will literally track me across existence itself, to exact their revenge on me.”
“It is just a matter of time.”
“Damn. Even death may not be an escape. I am sure Roberta would find a way to follow me, and bring me back, just so she could bring on the pain, and kill me again. Over and over again. And likely multiple times after that...”
He finished in a deflated, desperate tone of voice, “I am so screwed.”
Lee removed his right hand from his face, as a thought occurred to him. He turned to looked at River in her face. He asked, “You won't happen to have a reality device on you?”
River looked at Lee, in his eyes, as she stated, with a bit of sadness in her tone of voice, from seeing her good friend like this, “No. After Chang had his casino up and running, he even made me give him the one I originally used to get here. And Chang keeps a tight lease on those devices. They are in the casino.”
Lee cursed, “Damn. That would be the easiest way to escape the Bloodhound, for the time being. Though, I can see why. It would be disastrous if that technology got into the hands of some of the more savvier people, or organizations, on this planet.”
River stated, “I agree. And you do not need to run. I can take Roberta in a fight.”
Lee flatly countered, “No. I do not think you can. Now, that I think about it, you likely never saw the Black Lagoon series.”
River admitted, “I didn't have time. I was the one piloting the Serenity, while that series was an inflight movie run. The rest of the crew loved the series. When they found out that the Chang from the series was my girlfriend, I think they envied me. Hell, I know they envied me. And Mal didn't dare throw her off the ship, considering my relationship with her helped me with my sanity.”
Lee suggested, “Well, I apologize for depriving you of the opportunity of seeing that series. But, you really need to see that series. After you see that series, you will begin to understand how screwed I truly am. But, I need to inform you of who you would be facing. To give you the cliff notes, of whom you would be facing.”
River stated, “You do know what I am capable of.”
Lee realized, as he thought, 'I know your comment was meant as a statement, and not a question.'
River replied, “Yes. It is.”
Lee said, “Well, yes. I have a good idea of what you are capable of. So, keep in mind, that even before the upgrades I gave Roberta, she could take you in a fight. When it came to being a badass, the Bloodhound was already in a league of her own, even before I got my hands on her.”
River was taking their situation seriously, as she requested, “Please, explain.”
Lee responded, “Sure. No problem. Black Lagoon was filled with several badasses, but when those badasses talked about Roberta, her name was the one mentioned in hushed tones, behind closed doors. She was their dreaded monster under the bed. The scary thing in their closet. That one person they compared to everyone else, when it came to the last person you would want to meet, alone, in a dark alleyway.”
“When Balalaika confronted her, she brought her army with her. When Revy went after her, a second time, she literally called for help. This is the only time in the entire series that Revy openly asked for help about anything. And when Roberta was in the city, for a second time, Chang spent most of his time, surrounded by his bodyguards, while pulling everyone's strings to get her out of his city.”
“That is how dangerous Roberta is. And Fabiola, Roberta's student, whom you know is now an adult, is almost as dangerous as Roberta, herself. So, you would not be fighting just one badass, that could take you in a fight, you be fighting two of them, at once.”
“Still, how about an easier way to explain things to you? I am going to pull up everything I know about the maids, to the surface of my mind, and you just read my thoughts.”
River did as Lee suggested, and Lee watched as River's face paled in fright at what Lee was facing.
Lee sarcastically thought, 'It is really says something to watch, as a telepathic, super-genius, badass assassin goes sheet white in fear, from learning about who is after me.'
River began, “I had no idea...” Her voice then trailed off at realizing how dangerous the people she was planning to face were.
Lee said, “Now, you do. And you are wiser for the knowledge.”
River commented, with concern in her tone of voice, “Still, you don't have to run, Lee. I know how your mind works. I know what you are likely planning. And you have long been forced into the habit of planning to face your problems alone. Well, you do not have to do this alone. You are no longer alone. I am with you.”
Lee politely disagreed, in a sober tone of voice, “River, you are a telepath, but you clearly only read my surface thoughts. There is a lot of stuff you don't know about me, that I intentionally don't think about. And I am sure this is the case for other people, you know, as well. Still, as Sam, you were my friend. My good friend. And you still are my friend. Aren't you?”
River answered, “Yes. We are still friends.”
Lee said, in a somewhat quiet, sober, serious tone of voice, “Good. Though, I am a bit annoyed with this revelation, that you and Sam are the same person. I can move passed that. I am already working towards that, as we speak. Still, it is looking more likely, no matter the case, that I am not going to live very long. And I do not want you to get hurt. Let alone, killed. Go back to Chang, and screw each other anyway you want. I will deal with my own problems.”
Lee then offered, in a halfhearted tone of voice, “And when you two decide to have kids. You can name one of your kids after me. My real name. Which I am sure you know. Or, my alias, Lee. Either way. I would find it flattering.”
River was deeply touched by Lee's offer. She held back tears, as she stated, with concern in her tone of voice, “Lee, I am not just going to leave you to die.”
Lee admitted, “River, there is not much you can do. I am have several crazy chicks after my hide. You just happen to be one of the nicer ones. Hell, I am basically dealing with crazy chicks all the time. And this is not counting the cancer that is slowly eating me alive. The fact I am still breathing is a minor miracle.”
River thought, 'Now, to deal with the one other bombshell issue, am I sure that Lee does not want to talk about. But, we need to discuss, between someone catches. This is likely the only catch with have. With no one, I sense, around, to over hear us.' River calmly asked, “Does you include yourself?”
Lee stayed silent, as he looked away from River.
River said, “I read your mind regularly. I know what you are thinking upstairs. And that is why you like writing about gender bending. And it explains why you used those magic packets, that Revy has, in the time loops.”
Lee turned to look at River. He frowned, as he flatly stated “That is a low blow... Okay, I admit I do not like my body. I hate my body. I loath my body. I used writing to work through many issues I have. And not just that one. That is why I am precognitive. Because, I would rather be anywhere, than here.”
Lee then both his hands, with his right and left index finished, to point at his chest.
River remained silent, as she was not sure how best to reply to Lee open admission.
A few seconds later, Lee dropped his hands back to his side.
Lee looked at River, as he continued, in a sad tone of voice, “And I never had the money, nor the opportunity to do anything about this. Let alone afford to treat the cancer that is slowly killing me.”
Lee then took a deep breath, and he slowly let it out. After which, Lee went onto say, in an even sadder tone, than before, with pain lacing his voice, “Though, through all the hell I have been through, the one thought that has kept me sane, in this waking nightmare, that has been my existence. And I am not talking about these last few months. But, my entire life. Was one thought. That no matter how much suffering and pain I endured, there was a finite end to it. That I will die. That I will eventually my soul would be free to move on from this living hell.”
“Those three words. I will die. Kept me from going insane. And the reason I did not kill myself, was that was in no rush to go to hell. Which I figure, is where I am going, no matter what I do. For me, I was just playing out a screwy, bad hand of cards, that I was dealt by a crooked dealer called fate. Along with this, curiosity kept me going, to see what will happen next.”
“When I learned that I was going to die of cancer, my first thoughts were that this nightmare, that is my life, would finally be over in a matter of months. That my issues would soon resolve themselves, even if it was in death. And I would deal with my problems in hell, when I got there.”
“I was even planning on how to make the most of my last days in my current life.”
“Then, this mess started. If the others had been as low key as you were, then likely nothing would have happened to me. Cancer is one of the worst ways to die. Most of those after me would have likely been satisfied to have me die by my body literally eating itself alive. And I would have died a quiet death at home.”
River could no longer hold back her tears. She shed a few, as she sorrowfully commented, “That is a very sad way to look at life.”
Lee smiled, as he replied, though his voice held no passion to its tone, “Well, I have since come to realize that I want to live. But, wanting to live, and living, are two different things, and my time is quickly running out.”
River used her right hand to wipe away the tears from her eyes. She then lowered her right hand back to her side. She looked back up at Lee, in his eyes. She suggested, “We could always talk Chang about this. I know you are open to taking his offer. Which I helped talk to him about. And I read from you mind, that you are open to taking you. And I would give you my word. He would help you, if you asked him too. I would make sure of that.”
Lee responded, “I respect you, River. I even care about you. But, I am not so sure about Chang. Though, he made me a nice offer.”
River said, “Yes. He did. It is a good offer. And Chang would keep up his end of the bargain, and so would you.”
Lee inquired, “And you read my mind, about why I did not immediately take his offer?”
River sadly admitted, “Yes.”
Lee pointed out, “So, you realize that Chang knows better than to cross Roberta?”
River conceded, in a disappointed tone of voice, “Yes.”
Lee sighed, as he asked, “You know the worst part about all this?”
River sadly commented, “Yes. I am reading your mind. But, say it out loud. It will make you feel better.”
Lee calmly stated, “Thank you, River. And the worst part is the hypocrisy. If all those after me were not so hypocritical, in this situation, I would not be so against them having their revenge against me. Even Revy's, or Roberta's, revenge. Unfortunately, they are damn hypocrites on this matter, and they don't even realize their true hypocrisy on these issues.”
River said, “But, I do. And it is only human nature.”
Lee agreed, with a mix of frustration and bitterness mixed into his emotional state, and tone of voice, “Exactly. I am being judge by human nature that I, nor them, can help doing. You cannot stop people from having an imagination. From dreaming and creating stories. It is part of our nature. And it is a great part. And those are me are hypocrites because of that. When I was with them, watching the Tron Legacy movie together, in the theater, at the Devil's Hotel. I saw their faces as the characters on screen suffered through their trials, and achieved their goals.”
“They enjoyed watching that movie more than I did. It is all entertainment for us, and thought we all knew better, we could help ourselves. And we all know those characters are just as real as you, me, and everyone else, they are just located in another reality, in the multiverse.”
Lee tone of voice then became very firm, thought a bit shaking, on the verge of breaking, as he continued, “In my heart, I am not a sadist. I like happy endings. But, for the main characters to achieve their goals, they had to suffer through their journeys. That is just the way it is. That is how life here, is, in this reality. And there is no way I can explain that to the those after me. They just would not want understand those facts.”
River felt intense sadness, as she empathized with her friend's plight. She responded, in a comforting tone of voice, “I understand. And I can vouch that they are not willfully blind on the issue. They just do not understand that situation, like you and I do.”
Lee signed, as he said, in a sad tone of voice, “Yes. Mores the pity.”
Lee looked away from River, as he took a few deep breaths.
River could see that Lee's poker mask was completely shattered, and the look on Lee's face showed he did not know what he was going to do.
Lee turned back to River, as he said, “River, I want you to know, that whatever happens, I thank you for your friend with me. Still, I have to head back to the hotel, to collect my belongings, and get something to eat. Before the maids get there. Once I do that, I am not sure what I am going to do. I am overwhelmed. It is just too much for me, right now. And if I think about it too hard, I feel like I am going to crack.”
River stated, “I understand. I will see you back at the hotel, in little while. Likely, half an hour, or so. I need to do some thinking about this, as well. Besides, my car is parked by what is left of the Rats Nest.”
“If you are back at the hotel, when I get there, we will see what we can do, before the maids get there. If you are not there, when I arrive, I will try to help you on my end. Chang has an interest in you. In a good way. So, that is a good sign. And I have his ear, so all is not lost.”
Lee said, “Thank you, River. You have been a true friend.”
River smiled at Lee, as she responded, in slightly quiet tone of voice, “I know. And you really do deserve more than one. Good luck.”
Lee returned River's smile, as he replied, “You as well, River.”
The two friends then parted ways, as they headed for their vehicles.
As River walked out of sight, Lee turned around, and continued to walk to where he parked his car.
While Lee walked, he thought, 'I need to get to the hotel, pack up, check out. I will decided what to do after I am ready to go, and I have something to eat at the hotel restaurant. I am glad I filled up the tank to my car, this morning, before I came to the Rats Nest.”
“Now, it is forty-five minute walk to the hotel, from the bar. Even if they knew where the hotel was. Which they don't.'
'And these two are known to walk, and take their time. I am guessing that I have at least an hour, if not more time, before they show up. So, I need to take the opportunity to eat, before I start running. Because, I will likely never stop running... At least until the cancer kills me.'
'But, to be honest, dying of cancer is a far better death, than allowing those two to get their hands on me... On that thought, turning myself over to Revy and Rock would be a far better fate than letting the maids have me... I have much too think about. Still, if I am lucky, River might come up with something, when she meets me back at the hotel.'
Lee turned a corner, on the sidewalk. A few minutes later, he reached his pink Cadillac, with the roof and windows being down.
A minute afterward, Lee was inside his car, driving his vehicle, down the road, to the Devil's Hotel.
(_)
At that moment, inside the De La Plata Podrido Police Department, in the open lobby cubical area of the police department, Police Chief Pedro Del Soto had just gotten a cup of coffee in his mug, in his right hand, as he was walking back to his office, on of his officer walked up to him.
The officer said, in spanish, “Chief, I have a message from, Lee.”
Pedro requested, in spanish, “What is it?”
The officer stated, “The maids are in town. He said that you would understand.”
At first, Pedro did not register what Lee's words had meant. But, as he was about to take a sip of his coffee, he immediately realized what Lee meant with his message.
Pedro's eyes went wide, as he face paled, while he dropped his mug to the floor.
The mug shattered on impact with the floor, spilling coffee and pieces of porcelain, on the linoleum tiled ground.
The officer noticed this. He turned to look at Pedro's face, as he asked, with concern in his voice, “What is it, sir? What did Lee mean by, the maids?”
Pedro calmed himself, as he thought, 'I have to remain calm while in front of my subordinates. Though, I am freaking out on the inside. I knew there was a chance that the Lovelace maids would come for Lee. And Lee said, maids, not maid. Meaning both of them. Roberta and Fabiola are in town, together, looking for Lee. This situation is too hot for me... For my boys... Lee is on his own. But, I have to say something to my subordinates, whom have a clue as to what is going on. Or, they could end up in danger, even if I skip town, on my own.'
Pedro said, “Lee meant those maids.”
The officer inquired, “What maids?”
Pedro questioned, “You know who is staying at the Devil's Hotel?”
The officer answered, “Yes sir. That is why we avoid that hotel, and the casino... Oh crap! Those maids! Rober...”
Pedro immediately put a right hand over the officer's mouth, as he quietly warned, “Do not say those names out loud. Do not speak of the devil, for that bitch, and her student, may suddenly appear.” He then removed his right hand from the officer's mouth.
The officer asked, with worry, and concern, in his tone of voice, “What do we do?”
Pedro answered, in a firm tone of voice, “Simple. We get out of town before the fireworks start. It is no secret that Lee has ties to us. Ties to me. The maids will eventually come here looking for answers. We do not want to be present when they arrive here.”
“I am taking an immediate, long term leave. Quietly tell those that know what is going on, that the maids are in town. We have to keep a few people here, for appearances. I hate doing that, but it must be done. For those who know, they can take a long term leave, as well.”
The officer nodded once, as he responded, “Yes sir.”
Pedro commented, “And get someone to clean up this mess.” He then rushed to his office, to get a few things, before he left town, in his car.
(_)
Five minutes later, Pedro was in his car, heading out of town.
As Pedro drove his car, he thought, 'I am not even stopping by my home. I am out of here, right now. I have an escape plan, and I am using that plan, right now. Besides, I am sure I left everything turned off in my home, with the doors locked. So, it will be find in my absence.”
Meanwhile, several other civilian cars, pickup trucks, and mini-vans, from the police station, filled with staff, were following him out of town.
Pedro noticed the other vehicles in his rearview mirror, as he thought, with concern, 'I hope they have their escape plans. Because mine is a one person deal.'
A seconds after Pedro turned a corner on the street, and he drove down one of the roads that would lead him to the only bridge to the mainland, he noticed, from the right side of the road, two women, standing beside each other, on the nearby sidewalk.
While Pedro passed by the women, he saw the two of them were dress in black and white maids outfits. One had long purple hair. The other had long green hair.
It took all his willing not to floor the gas pedal, as he thought, with fear, 'Oh crap! That is them. They are real, and Lee saw them already.'
'Though, I do not think they saw me. But, they are real. And they are here, in town. I have to get out of town, now! But, if I floor the gas pedal, it might attract their attention. Though, I believe, that once my boys, and I, reach the bridge off the island, and into the mainland, we will be fine.'
'And when I get to my safe-house, I will say a prayer for, Lee. Because, with those two after him, he is going to need it. And there is nothing else I can do to help him.'
Pedro kept driving. He soon made it to the bridge, and onto the mainland, along with a number of his other officers. As he crossed the bridge, he noticed that the sun was starting to set, in front of him, towards the west.
Pedro thought, 'Talk about a metaphoric symbol for the end of this part of my life.'
Pedro then soon made it to the mainland. At the intersection, across the bridge, from the mainland, Pedro came to a stop at the stop sign. He then turned to drive south, down the coastal road, as he headed for where he planned to hide for the next several months of his life. Until the heat died down, for him. Or, he came up with another plan of his own.
(_)
Meanwhile, As Roberta and Fabiola stood on the sidewalk, watching the convoy of cars pass by them, Fabiola commented, “Do you get the feeling that something is going on, that we are not aware of?”
Roberta flatly answered, “Yes. Now, let us find directions to the Devil's Hotel.”
(_)
As Pedro, and half his police force were leaving De La Plata Podrido, on the north part of the island, Lee had already parked his car at the hotel parking lot. He then made his way through the front lobby, up one of the elevators, to the third floor, and he swiftly used his hotel key to enter his hotel suite.
After entering his suite, he turned on the ceiling light, as he shut door, and locked deadbolt to the door, behind.
Lee quickly went over, and knelt down under his bed. He pulled out two items, which he set onto the bed.
Lee stood up, and looked at the two large items on his bed.
Lee checked the digital clock on the nightstand. With the clock stating it was six twenty-five PM.
Lee turned back to the two large items on his bed. One was his large gym bag, the other was a slightly smaller suitcase, than his gym bag, that he had bought, a few weeks ago.
Lee had bought the small suitcase as part of an escape plan, that he was now starting to implement.
Lee thought, 'I am glad I did not buy many clothes. Because, for part of my plan, I need to put everything I have into my suit case. Also, I need to get a few plastic bags, I have, for my toothbrush, shaving items, and a few other items. Though, since all my clothes are folded, or hung to where I could fold them, this should not take long.'
Lee went to work, as he opened the suitcase. He pulled out his clothes that were in the chest of drawers, and set them in the suitcase, in a specific order. So, he could get to what he needed, without digging to much into his suitcase.
Next, Lee retrieved his suits from the hanging rod. He removed the hangers, and he neatly placed his suits in his suitcase.
Then, he pulled out some small, plastic bags, and collective his toiletries in this. Such as his toothbrush, comb, toothpaste.
After that, he collected a few other items, such as his dress shoes. He then place the plastic bags, and other items around the interior sides of the suitcase, so, he could get to them, should he need too, without messing up his clothing.
Lee checked to make sure everything was out of chest of drawers. Once that was done. He closed the chest of drawers.
Then, Lee turned back to his bed, and finished packing.
When, Lee was finished packing, he was lucky that all his stuff barely fit into the suitcase. But, all his clothing and other items were able to did fit in the suitcase.
Lee made sure the latches on the suitcase were secure, and would not allow the suitcase to burst open.
He then grabbed his gym bag and unzipped it.
He put the suitcase inside the bag, with it was sitting up on it's bottom side, with the top of the suitcase set against the opening of the gym bag. And he set his black fedora hat, and gray fedora hat, near the front of the gym bag, while placing his dress shoes in the back of the gym bag. Lee then zipped closed his gym bag.
Lee thought, 'Fortunately. As I planned, when I bought the suitcase. This gym bag is big enough that unless a person looks closely, they will not notice the suitcase inside it. Now, to deal with some personal business, before cleaning up, and heading downstairs to check out.'
Lee then walked into his bathroom, to relieve himself.
A few minutes later, as he walked back into the bedroom area of his suite, he pulled out a spare trash bag he had, and he collected the bottles of water, food. Including the food in his small refrigerator and freezer. Along a few other items that needed to be junked. He put these items into this garbage bag, and tired up the bag.
He set the bag down, as he walked back to his bed.
He collected his second hotel key from the drawer in the nightstand, and placed the TV remote on the nightstand. He also picked up his cool looking sunglasses from the nightstand, and he put them inside his left jacket pocket.
Along with this, Lee looked over at the clock on the nightstand. It was six thirty-five PM.
Lee thought, 'It only took me ten minutes to do all that. That is great. I am making good time. Now, to check out of here.'
Lee then collected his gym bag.
He carried his gym bag by it's strap, on his right shoulder. He then was over, and picked up his trash bag, which he put in his right hand.
When he reached the door, used his right hand to unlock the deadbolt. After which, Lee turned around, and looked at the room that he had called home for so long, for about a minute.
Lee thought, 'This was a good place to sleep, and think. I am going to miss it.'
Lee then turned back around.
As Lee opened door, as he turned off the light switch, to the ceiling light.
He walked out into the hallway, shutting the door behind him.
Lee then made his way to the elevator bay to the lobby. By the entrance to the front elevator bay, there was a large trash can. Lee dumped his trash back into the bag in the large can.
With that done, Lee made his way to the elevators, and took one downstairs to the front lobby, so he could check out of the hotel.
(_)
A couple of minutes later, Lee walked up to the check in desk, he looked around the room, and saw that none of Revy's crew were in the lobby.
Lee thought, 'At this time of the evening, they are all usually in the hotel restaurant, having dinner, anyway. Which I am going to do, very soon, before I make the most important decision of my life. How I want to go out.'
Lee saw there were no other customers at the desk, as he reach the check in desk.
As Lee came to a stop in front of the counter of the check in desk, with the strap of his gym bag slung over his right shoulder, he looked at the two clerks, in uniforms, whom were on duty, across the counter from himself.
A second later, one of the two clerk on duty, looked up at him, as the man asked, in english, “Can I help you sir?”
Lee calmly stated, in english, “Yes. My name is, J.D. Lee. I would like to check out.”
The clerk said, “I am sorry to hear that you are leaving. But, we hope you had a pleasant stay here at the Devil's Hotel and Resort.”
Lee cracked a grin, as he stated, “I won't say it was pleasant, but it was enjoyable.”
The clerk replied, “Good. And we hope you may return sometime.”
Lee responded, “If I am able too do so. I just might. And I will be recommending this hotel to others, for it quality rooms and services.”
The clerk smiled, as he said, “We are happy to hear that.”
Lee pulled out, from a pocket, and turned in his two keys to his hotel room. He then set them down on the counter between him, and the clerk, as he inquired, “Here are the keys to my hotel room. Is there anything that you need me to sign?”
The clerk looked at the keys, sitting on the counter, and the room number on each of the keys. He then looked back at Lee, as he answered, “No. This will be all.”
Lee requested, “Before I leave. Can you watch my gym bag, while I go get something to eat at the hotel restaurant?”
The clerk replied, “Sure.”
Lee said, “Thank you.”
The clerk responded, “You're welcome.”
Lee then handed the clerk his gym bag, and the clerk set the bag on the other side of the desk.
After which, Lee turned to his left, and he walked towards the hallway that lead to the hotel restaurant.
A minute later, as he entered the hotel restaurant and bar, he looked around.
He did not see River, anywhere, in neither of her gender forms. Though, he did see Revy, Rock, and their entire group, at their usual tables, by the stage. And Revy did not have her pistols with her.
Lee then walked over to his usual place at the bar counter, and sat down.
From behind the bar counter, Melvin noticed Lee, as he walked up to stand across the counter from Lee.
Melvin faced Lee, as he said, “Hi Lee.”
Lee turned to Melvin, as he thought, 'Best not to mention that I am leaving, or the girls might overhear me.' He replied, “Hey Melvin. I will have club sandwich, with potato chips, and glass of lemonade.”
Melvin responded, “Sure. No problem.”
Melvin turned, and went to fill Lee's order.
As Lee watched Melvin walk away, he thought, 'I am going to miss Melvin. He is living proof that that there were some actually sane, reasonable people in the badass mafias of Roanapur. And I wish that I could wish him luck in his continued hiding from Balalaika, and Hotel Moscow. But, stating that, here, might blow both our covers.'
'Still, I hope River shows up soon. I could use the company. As I think about some very important decisions, that I now have to make, about my personal life, very, very soon.'
Lee then stared across the counter, at the bottles on the shelves, on the left wall of the room, as he quietly waited for both his meal, and River to come. As Lee did so, he deeply thought about what he was going to do next.
(_)
Half an hour later, across the road from the eastern beach of the island, as the twilight of the day completely faded, Eda and Yolanda were in the back of their burger van, as they were cleaning up, and closing for the night.
They then heard the window bell ring.
Eda said, in spanish, “Coming!” She thought, 'I told Yolanda we should not have extended our business hours to six-thirty PM. But, at the time, she did make a convincing argument, in that it would attract more of the supper crowd. And while we have not caught the writer. We have make a nice bit of change from this burger van. So, this trip has not been a total waste.'
As Eda walked up to the order window, on the upper right side of the van, by the sidewalk curb, she commented, “We are starting to close, but we will see if you can still fill your order.”
When Eda reached the window, and she saw who is was, she did a double-take. It was the two Lovelace maids. She snapped, in english, “What are you two doing here?!”
As the maids stood on the sidewalk, in front of the order window of the food truck. They calmly looked up at Eda.
Fabiola calmly greeted, in english, “Hello Eda. I take it that Yolanda is in back.”
From the back of the truck, Yolanda asked, in english, “Who is it?”
Eda turned to her, as she answered, “The maids. Roberta, and Fabiola. Both of whom are dressed to kick some serious ass.”
The maids giggled a little from Eda's commented.
Yolanda calmly replied, “Really? I will close up. You handle them.”
Eda thought, 'It is so nice to have competent, sane friends.' She turned back to the two maids, as she continued her thoughts, 'Now, to handle these two lunatics.'
Eda inquired, in a more calmer tone of voice, than before, “So, what are you two doing here?”
Roberta calmly said, with a hint of aggression in her voice, in english, “We are after the writer of those stories that affected us, and the master?”
Eda mentally grumbled, 'What idiot told them about the stories and the writer? Yolanda and I, will find out later. And we will have their ass. But, for now, we have to keep these two from destroying the town, as they look for the writer. Though, I make as well ask the question. It might save me some time finding the idiot that did tell them. And I would like to know why they would be after the writer, in the first place.'
Eda questioned, “Who told you about the writer, and the stories? We all agreed to keep that a secret from you, because we didn't you to destroy this city, looking for him? And what did he do to you, to have you come all this way, after him?”
Fabiola commented, “It does not matter how we know. Just that we know someone harmed Garcia.”
Eda thought, 'So, they are hear over Garcia. That is not a surprised. Though, what did the writer do to Garcia.' She then thought about the story. A few seconds later, Eda mentally realized, 'The gender bending curse. No wonder they are pissed. Still, I need to try to defuse the situation.'
Eda inquired, in the most sincere tone of voice she could muster, for the given situation, “Roberta, given how wrecked your body, and mind, were at the end of the Grey Fox incident. Could you just consider what happened to Garcia to be a trade off for what was personally given to you? And let bygones, be bygones? With you two going back home?”
Fabiola snorted, as she said, “Nice try, Eda. But, no.”
Roberta flatly answered, “Like Fabiola, my answer is, no, as well. Though, I will take what he has done for me, personally, into account, when we have our revenge on him.”
Eda sternly cautioned, “Fine. But, we did not want to create an interdimensional incident. The series, and the stories, obviously exist here. Our bare asses are hanging on in the wind here. If we are not careful, we could attract the wrong kind of attention, towards us.”
Roberta smirked, as she stated, with a touch of venom in her tone of voice, “What is the matter, Eda? Are you afraid to face your red, white, and blue hydra?”
Eda flatly said, “Yes. If they are anything like back home, they could be very, very dangerous. And that is just one government, of many, here.”
Fabiola thought, 'A fight between us will get us nowhere.'
To keep a fight from happening, Fabiola spoke up, in a neutral tone of voice, “Be that as it may. What matters now is that we know about the stories, and the writer. And we intend to find him, and have our revenge.”
Eda deadpanned, “That line forms to the left. And from what I understand, Revy called first dips on the writer's ass.”
While continuing to give Eda a dangerous smile, Roberta commented, in a calm, even tone of voice, “I believe the line will part for me. And so will, Revy. But first, we heard about a man in town that I would like to meet. His name is, Lee. I would like to know more about this man. I even want meet him.”
Eda thought, with worry, 'Dead lord, why would these two walking death machines be after, Lee?'
Eda requested, “May I ask, what you want to know about, Lee?”
Roberta questioned, “So, you know, Lee?”
Eda answered, “Yes. He is a regular customer here for lunch. He is always polite, and a good tipper.” She mentally added, 'And he was not that bad in bed. But, I am not going to let you two know that.'
Roberta responded, “Interesting. The reason I am interested in him was that I heard that he beat River in a million dollar poker game. Someone beating a telepathic genius, such as River, catches my interest. So, what can you tell me about him?”
Eda mentally cursed, 'Damn you, Revy and Chang, for getting Lee into this mess.”
Eda stated, “Well, first of all, Lee is just a nice guy, whom is down on his luck. From what I understand, he is wanted by the law up north, over a construction deal gone bad, and owed taxes. Still, he is very clever. Most of us figured that out, after he beat River at the poker game. Though, the one thing that can be said about, Lee, is that underneath his slightly rough edges, he is a true U.S. southern gentleman. He can even dress, and act the part. When he needs too. We found that out, as well, as a few other things, at his poker game with River.”
Eda thought, 'Actually, I found out that during our date. But, I kept it to myself. Except for talking to Yolanda about our date. And I believe she saw Lee, as he picked me up, for our date. Though, the morning, after my date, Yolanda and I both decided not to mention that side of Lee, to the others. Until much later. During his poker game, with River.'
Roberta asked, “What does Lee look like?”
Eda thought, 'I might as well tell them. They will find out, anyway.' Eda answered, “Lee has short, black hair. He is caucasian america. While his clothing varies, he always wears a blue cloth jacket, a blue baseball cap, and large glasses.”
Eda watched as Roberta dropped her grin.
Both maids looked at each other, and then they turned their heads back to face Eda.
Eda thought, with worry, 'This is not good...'
Fabiola quickly questioned, “Does Lee have a bearded, male, redheaded friend, with a ponytail?”
Eda thought, 'Oh crap. They already met them both. And they did not realize that it was Lee, at the time. But, why didn't Lee just introduce himself to them? They are not that dangerous, except for those they target.'
Eda replied, “Yes. His name is Sam. They are good friends with each other. They are thick as thieves.”
Fabiola responded, with disbelief in her voice, “Lee was right by us, the entire time... Wait a minute, Lee and Sam never came out of the men's restroom.”
Roberta growled, “Lee played us... Even the bartender was in on it.”
Eda inquired, “Are you talking about the Rats Nest?”
Fabiola smirked, as she said, “Yes... What is left of it.”
Eda warned, “You better not have killed any of them.”
Fabiola spat out, “Well, they ran, while we dealt with some idiot gang members.”
Eda replied, “That is fine. As long as those three are okay.” She mentally added, 'Sam and Lee are nice. And the few times I have been to the Rats Nest, the bartender was nice to me. And good bartenders, whom can handle us, are a rare kind. And this town has at least two good bartenders. The one at the Rats Nest, and Melvin at the Devil's Hotel bar.'
Roberta forcefully, though not loudly, stated, “Lee knows we are here. He is going to be running. We have lost the element of surprise.”
Eda mentally wondered, 'Why would Lee immediately run front them, when he first saw them?... Unless, he knew who they were, beforehand... He may have known who I was, beforehand... Lee is the writer. I was not fucking him. He was fucking me... And skull fucking all of us.'
'And he did such a damn good job of it, that nobody around him realized it... Still, to be fair, it was I who asked him out on our date. And he was a perfect gentleman for the entire time. Even in bed. I would have asked questions if he turned me down. And he likely realized that. Besides, a guy like that would be crazy to turn down a hot blond with my reputation.'
'And while, he probably deserves some punishment for his actions. After getting to know Lee. I feel he does not deserve what these two have in mind for him.'
'So, I need to try to save him, or buy him time to escape, from these two bitches. While giving myself the chance to find him first, and talk to him, before any of the others reach him.'
Roberta requested, in a low, dangerous voice, “Now Eda, where is the location of the Devil's Hotel?”
Eda said, “I will tell you. The hotel is the south part of the island.”
Eda then gave them directions. She then maids turned and walked away from the food truck.
When the two women were out of earshot of Roberta's enhanced hearing, Eda quickly shut the window teller window to the food truck. She then turned to the back of the inside of the truck, as she look at Yolanda.
Yolanda noticed Eda looking at her. Yolanda calmly said, “I guess the meeting went well, considering we are still alive.”
Eda thought, 'I guess she did not pay much attention to the conversation.' She responded, “Yes. But, both I and the maids, at the same time, realized that Lee is the writer. And we have to go to the Devil's Hotel, and get to Lee first. So, we can help him.”
Yolanda casually stated, “I can see Lee being the writer. Yet. I do not understand why you are helping him? He literally screwed you.”
Eda smirked, as she said, “I know. But, he was such a complete gentleman about it.”
Yolanda laughed, for a few seconds, at her friend's comment.
Eda went onto say, “Anyway, I gave the maids directions to Chang's casino, instead of the Devil's Hotel. We need to get to the Devil's Hotel and find, Lee. Maybe we can save Lee from them, and Revy's group.”
“That being said. I have a general idea of what Revy, and the others, have planned for Lee. He would likely survive the experience, with most of his sanity intact. But, if the maids get their hands on him, there is likely not going to be enough of him left to bury in cigar box.”
By then, Yolanda has calmed down. Yolanda then turned off the electricity to the fryers, as she replied, “I see your point. Personally, I am more than happy to help you, and Lee. I like what Lee did for me. I got my lost eye, and my youth back. He can have my help, and me, if he wants, anytime.”
Eda cracked a grin, as she asked, “That is what I thought. If I see him, I will be sure to tell him. So, how long on the fryer?”
Yolanda answered, “Ten minutes until I can get grease cooled, and everything locked down.”
Eda thought, 'Ten minutes to finish. And five minutes to get there. That is plenty of time. And work will go faster if I assist.' She offered, “I will help. Then, we are heading for the Devil's Hotel. And I hope that we get there in time to help, Lee.”
The two women then prepped their food truck for travel.
(_)
At that moment, across town, at the Devil's Hotel restaurant, Lee had finished his dinner, and he was still trying to figure out what he was going to do about the situation he was in.
He held his glass of lemonade, with his left hand. He swallowed some lemonade from his glass. He then set his lemonade back down on the counter, in front of himself.
Lee thought, 'I am running out of time. The maids will likely be here in less than an hour. And River has yet to show up here. Also, the more I think about it, using my car to run will likely not work for long. The Lovelace maids have reality devices. And I don't... I am not going to be able to out run them.'
Lee turned around, in his stool, to look at the stage, he then saw that most of Revy and Rock's group had finished their meals, and left the room for the evening. The only left, that Lee saw, was Rock and Revy at one table. Along with Ranma, Akira and Natsuru at another table.
Lee mentally wondered, as he began to formulate a very insane plan, 'Hmm... The only women of Revy and Rock's group, that are still here, are Revy and Rock, themselves, along with Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru... They would be far more merciful than the maids. And those five together, out of their group, is the best combination I am going to get, with turning myself in to them. Rock, Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru are levelheaded, generally good natured, and kind. Revy is the only hothead of the five. So, that will help my chances of survival a lot.'
'I would prefer to go with Chang's offer. But, as I told River, Chang is not going to cross the maids. But, with them fighting over me, it would by time to give River and Chang time to figure something out. Thought, it would be a coin toss if my plan work.'
Lee cracked a grin, as he mentally reflected, 'Though, taking chances is the whole point of being a gambler... Still, I am starting to get tired of taking chances...'
'So, how do I turned myself in to them? I could just walk up to them, and confess. It would be that easy. But, doing so would completely lack any class, nor tact. And they would feel cheated in their hunt, and thus likely put them in a bad mood. And that is the last thing I want to do...'
'I have to make them work for it, but my effort be easy enough for them to figure out on their own...”
Lee then noticed, the karaoke singing, which had been hearing during dinner. That he had long since gotten use to, as background noise, in the restaurant, at present time in the evening.
Lee looked beyond Revy, Rock, Ranma, Akira, and Nataru, as he focused on the stage, behind them. He saw a male customer on stage, doing a decent job singing a rock song. And he noticed there was no line by the steps, on the left side of the stage.
Lee continued his thoughts, 'That might work. And I know just the song to sing. If I am going down, I am going down in style.'
Lee turned to Melvin, as he said, “Hey Melvin.”
Melvin turned to Lee, as he replied, “Yes”
Lee requested, “Is there a list tonight, for the karaoke machine?”
Melvin replied, “No. You can go ahead.”
Lee said, “Thanks.”
Lee got out of his stool, and walked onto the stage, from the side steps. He made his way steps on the left side of the stage. There was no still no line there.
By the time, Lee reached the steps, the customers whom had been sining his song, had finished, he put away his microphone, back where he had found it, and he was heading off stage.
As soon as the man was off stage, Lee walked up the steps, and across the stage, to the karaoke machine.
When Lee reached the karaoke machine, he selected the rock song he wanted to sing. The version of the song he picked was the full seven minute, fifty second version. Which he long since master in singing, during his time in the time loop. Due to the face the song was one of his favorites, with the music and lyrics speaking to him.
Next, Lee picked up a wireless microphone.
Lee then walked onto the center of the stage. He turned to face audience, with his microphone in his right hand, being held near his mouth, while the ceiling stage lights facing him.
As the music started, Lee watched for the proper time. Given he had memorized the lyrics to the song, Lee did not even use the video screens, showing the when to sing the lyrics, as without missing a beat, Lee began singing, and dancing to the song, Twilight Zone, by Golden Earring.
The entire audience soon became shocked at how well Lee was singing, and dancing to the song.
And Lee let his body flow with the music, as he sang the lyrics, on time, and in key.
(_)
At that moment, across town, three women, wearing their usual, casual clothing, had finally gotten around to checking out a lead they had been meaning to follow up on.
They had parked their car nearby their destination, and walked inside the building they were intent on finding answers from.
As they open the doors to the front entrance of the De La Plata Podrido Police Department, and walked inside, Jenny commented, “I am glad we are finally doing this.”
Dutch said, “We would have done it sooner, if Benny had not be so slow in eating, at the hotel bar.”
Benny defended, “I like to enjoy my meal, and at least we are finally here.”
Janet turned to Benny, as she said, “I know honey. And I like how you take your time in other activities, as well.”
Benny teased, “We will work on those activities, later.”
Dutch chuckled at Janet and Benny's comments, for the next few seconds. She then softly commented, at a tone of voice, only the three of them would hear, “Still, remember the plan, and our cover story.”
Janet and Benny nodded in agreement.
Benny softly mentioned, “One thing about change that I am happy about, is Janet taught us how to get most, unsuspecting men, to eat out of our hands, by turned on some feminine charm.”
Janet quietly complimented, “You were both such good students.”
Benny softly replied, “Thank you.”
Dutch commented, “I appreciate that.”
As all three women made it to the front desk of the police station, the tall, male police officer, acting as receptionist, for that shift, silently looked down at them.
Janet calmly lied, in english, “Hello. We are detectives from America. We could use you assistance.”
The police officer thought, 'Why not? At least I know english. And it is always nice to help some hot women.' He said, in a calm tone of voice, “Sure. What can I help you with? We are kind of short staffed, right now. So, please bear with us.”
Janet answered, “We are investigating a J. D. Lee for possible criminal actions in the U.S., and we learned that he has a connection to your Police Chief. Please, understand we have no interest in embarrassing your Chief. Nor, your department. We are just looking into Lee's past.”
The police officer replied, “We appreciate the discretion on your part. Since that is your approach, what do you want to know?”
Janet asked, “How did Lee meet your Chief of Police?”
The police officer answered, “It all started with the Chief's brother. This is not widely known, and given that it has changed, I guess it is okay to tell you. The Chief's brother use to run the local mafia here. And even though they were on two sides of the law, they still kept in contact. From what I hear, they even shared the same tastes in anime, and crazy fiction on the web. The mob boss even sometimes joked this island city was like a Thailand island city from one of their favorite anime series.”
That caused all three women to raise an eyebrow in interest.
The police officer continued, “Then, one afternoon, for some reason the Chief's brother had Lee brought to him. Something about a wild chase the night before. Lee convinced him to the Devil's Hotel.”
“Something happen there. I do not know what. Maybe he met the devil. I don't know. The next day the Chief's brother dissolves his organization, gives away most of his wealth, leaves the island, and joins the priesthood. And most of his men left the island, as well. His brother even gave the Chief his beach house. And he gave his pink convertible to Lee.”
“The Chief wanted to know what happened to his brother, so he had Lee come in the next day. To be fair, Lee did willing come to the station, of his own free will.”
“They talked in private, in the Chief's office. Later that day, they went to the hotel he was staying at. When the Chief got back, he started acting very strangely. All he would say is that demons now lived in the Devil's Hotel. And that he, and Lee, were trying to keep the city in one piece. And the Chief gave us all order than under no circumstances were we to approach the women staying at that hotel, unless given direct orders by himself.”
Janet requested, “Can we speak to the Police Chief Del Soto?
The police officer answered, “I apologize. But, he is not here right now. And he likely won't returned for some time. He received a message from Lee. And he then suddenly left.”
Janet asked, “What was the message? And how did he react to it?”
The officer replied, “Lee's message was simple. Even I heard about it. Though, I don't understand what it meant. That message being, the maids are in town. When the Chief heard this, his face paled. He suddenly declared he was taking an immediate, long term leave, and he disappeared, along with half the police force.”
The three women looked at each other. Janet quickly looked back at the man, as she inquired, “What was the title of the anime series that Chief Del Soto, and his brother, liked so much, that they compared this city to it.”
The police officer responded, “Give me a moment to remember... It something, Lagoon. Ah yes, Black Lagoon. I have never seen it, but those two loved the series. The Chief said the mix of babes, and gun play, that series had, would have to be seen to be believed.”
Janet said, “Thank you for your time, officer.”
The officer replied, “You are welcome.”
The three women then turned, and briskly walked out of the station, the same way they had entered it.
(_)
A few minutes later, the three Lagoon members got into their car, with Benny sitting at the driver's seat, with Dutch on the front passengers side, and Janet sitting behind Dutch.
Benny compliment, “So, Lee is the writer. Good job, honey.”
Janet smiled, as she happily replied, “Thank you, dear.”
Dutch stated, “Hiding in plain sight. One of the oldest tricks in the book. And I got to give him credit. Given what he knows, what he has done, it take guts to be around Revy and the others, day in and day out. Especially, considering they are out for his blood. He is either crazy, or he wants something from us. Perhaps both.”
Janet requested, “Before we kill him, I want to know why he baited us all, and he didn't just run?”
As Benny drove their car out of the parking lot, and she headed for the hotel, Dutch coldly stated, “Oh. We are not going to just kill him. Death is too quick, and merciful, for that son of a bitch. And we will get our answers from him.”
The trio rode in their car, as they continued down the street, on their way back towards the Devil's Hotel.
(_)
Around that time, at the Devil's Hotel restaurant, River walked into the room. River was in his male form, wearing the same clothing that he had been wearing for most of the day. He did not have on his fake beard, which was in his right side pants pocket. But, he did have his long red hair in a ponytail.
River stood just inside the double-door entrance to the restaurant, as he looked around. He saw Revy, Rock, Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru, were sitting at their usual tables, by the stage. Though, none of the rest of their family and friends, were present.
Then, River noticed, Lee was on stage, and he was singing and dancing to a song.
River knew that song from reading Lee's mind.
And River understood the subtext of the lyrics.
River thought, with surprise, and concern, for his friend, 'Is Lee trying to confess to the girls in the room, that he is the writer? With that song, I would say that answer is a, yes.'
'Though, he is so focused on the song, right now, I cannot read his mind for an answer.'
'Lee must be more desperate, or insane, than I thought, to pull a stunt like this. Still, I will wait for him to finish singing, and see how the women in the room, that are after him, react, before I talk to him.'
'Though, from the thoughts of Ranma, Akira, Natsuru, Rock, and Revy. None of them have figured out what Lee has been doing on stage. Which gives me time to figure a way to help Lee. And I wish I already had an answer for him. But, I don't. At least not, yet.'
River then noticed that Lee saw him.
River smiled back at him, as he thought, 'Good. He saw me. That means he will come talk to me, after he finishs his song. Which from the lyrics, will be within a minute. Now, to sit down in a usual place, that offers some privacy, where I can enjoy the rest of the performance. And he is good. In both singing, and dancing.'
River turned to his right, as he walked along the front wall, to the corner table, which was empty. He sat down in a chair, while still facing the stage.
(_)
Meanwhile, on staged, Lee had just noticed River walked into the room.
While not missing a beat, as he sang, and danced, Lee thought, 'Good. River, is here. And from the look on the faces of Revy, and her group that is here, they have not figured out what I am doing. Which is mildly disappointing. I have put a lot of effort into this confession. Still, River might have some solutions to my problem. I will just go over and talk to her, after I finish this song.'
As Lee continued to sing and dance, Lee watched as River walked over, and sat down at the front, right corner table, that both of them usual sat at, during the evenings karaoke entertainment at the restaurant.
A few seconds later, Lee wrapped up his song.
Right after he finished the song, everyone applauded his performance. Including Revy, Rock, Akira, Natsuru, Ranma, River, Melvin, and the rest of the audience, and staff, whom were present.
Lee bowed in responded, as he happily thought, 'I still got it. And now to talk to River.'
As he leaned back up. He turned to his right and he walked over to the karaoke machine. He placed the wireless microphone he had been using, back on to of the machine.
Lee then turned around, and casually walked off stage, on the left side of the stage. Then he made his way around the restaurant, and towards River, who was sitting at a corner table, across the room from him.
Meanwhile, another customer walked on stage, to being singing a song with the karaoke machine.
As Lee did so, he noticed that Rock, Revy, Ranma, Natsuru, nor Akira, had approached him, while he walked by.
Lee thought, 'At least I have a few more minutes to work with. And I will take every minute I can get.'
Less than a minute, Lee reached River's corner table.
River sat a chair, with his back to the corner of the wall. Lee walked around, to River's right side. And Lee sat in the chair next to River, to River's right side, by the corner of the room.
This allowed both River and Lee, to see the rest of the room. Including, the five badass women, by the stage,
After Lee got comfortable in his seat, River turned to Lee, as he questioned, “I know, I am not one to ask, but are you crazy to sing that song in front of them?”
Lee turned to River, as he calmly answered, “Let us just say that I thinking asian would be more merciful than latin american.”
River conceded, “You might be right.”
Lee inquired, “So, any ideas out of this mess?”
River said, “Nope. But, I can bring you back to the casino. That would buy you a little time.”
Lee countered, “That would be a bad idea. Because I would be bringing trouble to their doorstep.”
River complained, “Damn it, Lee. How can you be so damn good at pointing out the negatives, while still making sense?”
Lee sadly answered, “A lifetime of experience.”
River suggested, “Well, we do have a few minutes. Before you have to go. We might just sit and think. We might come up with a plan, in the meantime.”
Lee complimented, “Good idea.”
The two then sat there for a few minutes, as they thought.
It was then that Lee watched as Rock and River got up from their seats, and walked over to the bar counter, to pay Melvin for their meals and drinks.
Rock was standing to Revy's left.
Lee then saw Rock pulled out her reality device, from her left side pants pocket. She set the device beside her, as she pulled out the money, from the same pants pocket, to pay their bill with.
And Lee also noticed that Rock's reality device, was to her left side, opposite to where Revy was standing. And the two women's left sides faced the exit to the restaurant, allowing for a clear path of escape, with the reality device, if Lee could figure out how to effectively distract both Rock and Revy at the same time.
Lee mentally realized, 'The multiverse just handed me a golden opportunity. This is likely my last chance to escape. Thankfully, the women I wrote about in my stories don't use purses. So, it makes sense that neither does Rock. Now, how do I create a distraction?... That might work, and Sam... Err, River owes me a favor.'
River turned to Lee, as he softly asked, “Am I reading your mind correctly?”
Lee looked over at River, as he quietly said, “Yes. And if you want to save my life, I need you to do something that is going to hurt, a lot.”
River softly inquired, “What?”
Lee whispered, “I see that Rock has her device out. But, I need to distract them to get it. I need you to quickly walk up between Rock and Revy, and use each of your hands to cop a feel from one of their butt cheeks, at the same time. And I am no talking about just a simple pat. But, a full grab, and squeeze.”
River pointed out, “If I do that, they are going to kill me, afterward.”
Lee stated, “I believe you will likely survive. Considering, at the moment, Revy is unarmed. Anyway, if you got a better idea. You got about ten seconds to come up with one, and ten seconds to implement it. Because we have twenty seconds at best. Due to the fact that is how long, at most, until Rock is likely going to put that device back into her pocket, when she pulls out the money she wants. The clock is ticking, and the window is closing.”
River looked over at Rock and Revy, as he relented. He replied, “Alright.”
Though, before River could get up, Lee turned to River. Lee said, “Hold on.” Lee grabbed something from his left pants pocket, and he hand it to River.
River took the item, and he saw that it was a set of keys on a key ring.
Lee stated, “These are the keys to my pink caddy. The gas tank is full. Either way this goes, I am not going to need the car anymore. So have fun. And live out your sexual fantasies with it.”
River smiled, as he put the keys into one of his pockets. He kept his smile, as he turned to Lee. He responded, “Thanks. Also, with this plan, I can safely say you are crazier than me. And that is a statement in of itself.”
Lee returned River's smile, as he said, “I will take that with a compliment. Though, you are the one that is about to carry out this plan. So, we are both pretty crazy.”
River stated, “Agreed. The fool, and the fool who follows.”
Lee continued to smile, as he replied, “Exactly.” He thought, with amusement, 'One more Star Wars joke for the road.'
River said, “Of course. You need the humor. And goodbye.”
Lee responded, “I appreciate that. And see you, later.”
River then got up, and walked around the table, to his left. Away from Lee. He then briskly walked to the bar counter, between Rock and Revy.
A second later, Lee got up from the table, and slowly approached Rock and Revy, as well.
As River approached Rock and Revy, he used his assassin training, to do so quickly. With him not making a sound with his steps.
River then came to a stop, to stake between Rock and Revy. She looked at Rock, then Revy, and back to Rock. River said, in an excited tone of voice, “Ladies.” He then used each of his hands to grasp and squeeze a butt cheek from both of them. His left hand went on Rock's right clothed butt cheek, and his right hand went on Revy's left clothed butt cheek.
River then let go of Rock and Revy.
A second after both of them felt River's rough groping, Rock and Revy immediately turned to looked at River, with fury in their eyes, as they started beating him to a pulp.
Meanwhile, Lee quickly walked by the three, and palmed the device, from the bar counter, and into his left side pants pocket.
No one had noticed what Lee had done, given they were all looking at the three other adults by him.
Lee thought, knowing River was reading his mind, 'Sorry about this River. I hope you make a full recovery, and get to feeling better. I truly consider you a good friend.'
On his way out of the bar, he walked over to Melvin, over the bill.
As Lee came to a stop, across the counter from Melvin, he saw Melvin looking at him.
Melvin quietly said, “I saw what you stole. So, you are the one they are after?”
Lee lightly nodded once. He said, “Live free. Die free.”
Melvin smiled, as he replied, “Good luck.”
Lee dropped a fifty dollar bill, on the bar counter, by the bartender. He said, “Keep the change. And see you around, russian.”
Melvin immediately realized, as he thought, 'Lee, figured out who I was, and he still knowingly helped me. Now, that is man who does not deserve what it coming for him.'
Melvin said, “Stay safe.”
Lee grinned, as he replied, “I should be, soon enough.”
Lee then turned to his left, and exited the bar.
Lee immediately headed for the front lobby, and the check in desk, to retrieve his gym bag, so he could finally escape, before the hammer came completely down upon him.
(_)
A few minutes before Lee left the hotel restaurant, with Rock's reality device, a few floors up, the eight teenager women that were part of the group after the writer, were in one of their four hotel suites.
At their request, and to keep things simple, their parents put them near each other. They slept in four, two bed suites. The rooms were beside, and across from each other.
Though, their parents were not ignorant of their relationships. And the bedding order was that in one suite, the redheads, Rebecca and Yukio shared a room. The sisters, Nodoka and Mikoto shared a room. Molly and Yurika shared a room. And Sarah and Kristina shared a room.
This did little to discourage them.
The suite the eight teenagers were currently occupying together, as they killed time, was Rebecca and Yukio's room, which had an out door balcony, along with Nodoka and Mikoto's room, which was beside their room. The other two rooms were interior suites.
The eight teenage women were dressed in their casual clothing.
The ceiling lights were on in the suite.
At the table, in the room, by the sliding glass door to the balcony, Molly looked up from her cards, so she could look around at her friends.
She, Sarah, Mikoto, and Yurika, were play five card draw poker, while sitting at the table. They were only betting with low amounts of U.S. dollars, from one to ten U.S. dollars, per bet. Which was pocket change, compared to the wealth their families had access to.
On the bed, nearest to Molly, were Yukio and Rebecca. The two redheaded sisters were looking at their laptop, while playing various pieces of music from its speakers. Since the music was good, no one said anything about it.
On the other bed was Nodoka and Kristina. They had been kissing, and were now talking about where they wanted to go tomorrow.
Molly thought, 'Fire and ice. It makes a lot of sense. Kristina is a slight pyromaniac, while Nodoka has ice, and water powers. But, Kristina informed me, a while back, that while Nodoka has ice powers, she is passionately hot in bed, as both, female, and male.'
Molly giggled to herself, 'When Dutch, Ranma, and Natsuru, learned their kids were dating, that caused quite an uproar. All five of them met, and Dutch warned Nodoka if she got her daughter pregnant, she would kill her. Ranma countered by pulling a packet of instant of spring of drown man from Kristina's back pocket, and she showed it to Dutch. Dutch was not happy. With Natsuru working to keep the peace between everyone. Afterward, those five had a very long talk about responsibility, and avoiding teenage pregnancy.'
'But, none of us are ones to talk. Those three sisters, or brothers, depending on their moods, have had a few one night stands with each of the five of us.'
'At least, we were careful, and did not get pregnant. Condoms are a wonderful things.'
'And that is only the tip of the iceberg, on how interesting those three are.'
'Due to all three being a parent to Natsuru. With Natsuru being the mother of Mikoto, and the father to Nodoka and Yurika. The three siblings inherited Natsuru's Kampfer abilities. They can change genders at will, and each of them have an elemental ability. Also, they will remain young, much like the longevity, and health, the five of us inherited from our parents.'
'Though, due to Mikoto and Yurika being the children of Akira, those two also change gender with a sneeze. All the genetic testing done on them show they will age very slowly in both their gender forms, and they will not lock in either gender, like two of their parents will do, eventually. With Natsuru and Akira becoming full time women. But, all three their parents have gotten to the point they spend most of their time as women anyway. So, that is no great loss.'
'Yurika and Yukio use to date, but they found that they were not compatible for an intimate relationship. But, they are still good friends. Reflecting on that, is good that all eight of us are good friends.'
'Ah, Yukio. I still find it slightly annoying to call her that name, given that was my name in my previous life. But, considering she was named after me. Which I found touching by Aunt Rock, I let the issue side. And I call her, Yukio, as well.'
'Of course, when it come to wrecks, my love-life is probably one of the worst. I am in love with my sister, and she is in love with me. And it is exactly as it sounds. This is due to us being people that loved each other in a previous life, but died tragically, before we could do anything about it.'
'After seeing the series that showed our lives, we were able to remember, and piece together most of our previous lives. And over time, I realized that Sarah took the situation worse than me. Given in the previous life she was far older that I was, when she was killed, and she was a man at the time. But, except for our relationship, we wisely put our past lives behind us. And Sarah is okay with being a woman.'
'Though, our parents were not happy when the found out about our relationship. Sarah and I could not blame them for being upset.'
'Sarah and I both have talked about this several times. We know it is wrong, on several levels. But, right on a few others. Considering we crossed through death itself to be together.'
'At a conscious level, we both knew it was wrong due to us being sisters, but we cannot stop ourselves, either. And we have tried more than once to break our relationship off. We have even dated other people. But, we just cannot stop what our hearts feel for each other. But, we at least have the decency to show our affection for each other only in private, and away from our parents. Out of sight is out of mind for our parents.'
'And we only do it girl on girl. And we both agree not use any instant spring of drown man, on the off chance one of us got pregnant. So, we do not have to worry about pregnancy. If that happened, it would complete this Greek tragedy.'
'Why the hell did that writer have to make us sisters? Sarah and I hate the fact we are blood related, because we do love each other more than blood ties should. If we were not sisters, we would have married each other by now. That is how much we love each other.'
'If we ever catch the writer, Sarah, and I, are going to have a long talk with him.'
Suddenly, Molly heard a familiar piece of piano music that broke her train of thought.
Molly turned and she saw that the music came from Yukio and Rebecca' laptop computer.
Molly put down her playing cards, as she got up, and walked over to the two redheaded teenage girls.
Molly kindly asked, her two sisters, “Where did you get that piece of music from?”
The two redheads looked up form their laptop. Rebecca answered, “It is the Botcon Ninety-Seven version of the Vince Dicola music track, Training Montage, with the piano lead in. It is a rare track.”
Molly had a seeking suspicious of where the conversation was going to lead to, as she inquired, “How rare?”
Yukio answered, for her sister, “Very rare. You have to even know it exists to look for it. Rebecca and I were just reviewing what we know of the writer. We were playing music he mentioned, or hinted at, in his stories, in the hopes of finding a clue to his identity.”
Molly complimented the two redheaded sisters, in an excited tone of voice, “Good work, you two! I know who the writer is!”
The other seven teenagers immediately stopped what they were doing, and looked over at Molly, as they heard Molly say she knew who the writer was.
Molly looked around, at her family and friends, as she stated, “I heard Lee play that exact piece of music, on a piano, yesterday. Lee is the writer.”
The eight girls looked at each other. They then rushed put the hallway door of the suite they were in. And to the front elevator bay, in the hopes of getting to the front lobby, to both inform their parents, and friends, of what they learned. Along with catching Lee.
When they reached the elevator bay, they pressed the down arrow, on one of the panel, between on of the two sets of elevators.
A few second later, they heard a ding, and they saw one of the elevators with the lighted down arrow above it. The eight women walked to the specific elevator. They faced the elevator doors.
As the eight women walked the doors opened, they saw the doors reveal Aeryn and Violin were inside the elevator. With the two women inside looking back at the eight women.
Violin stated, “Let me guess. You figured out Lee is the writer, and your are heading downstairs, to tell everyone, while catching Lee.”
The eight teenager girls just nodded their heads.
Violin said, “Then, get inside.”
The eight teenagers then entered the elevator, with the two other adults, as all ten women headed down to the lobby floor.
Fortunately, given how slender and small the women were. They were nowhere near exceeding the weight limit of the elevator they were on, as the doors closed, and took them down to the ground floor.
(_)
Two minutes before Lee stole Rock's reality device.
A few floors above where the eight teenage women were staying, Aeryn and Violin were inside the hotel suite they shared.
The only light in the room, was the lamp light, by the single, large bed they slept together on.
The spouses were currently working on getting in the mood, to become intimate with each other. Though, they were still dressed in their usual clothing.
As Violin approached her wife, she noticed something was troubling Aeryn.
Violin asked, “What is it, honey?”
Aeryn answered, “It is just something about poker game between River and Lee. Something about it is bothering me. I just cannot place what it is.”
Violin said, “We will worry about it tomorrow.” She then started to lightly kiss the right side of Aeryn's neck, slowly leading up to her face.
It was then that Aeryn suddenly realized, “The first dealer.”
Violin stopped kissing Aeryn, as she leaned up straight. She looked at Aeryn, in her eyes, with Aeryn looking back at her.
Violin thought, 'From the expression on her face, I believe she just figured out something.' She asked, “What about the first dealer?”
Aeryn stated, “The first dealer was Faye Valentine. She even introduced herself, by her name. That name. She is same Faye Valentine from the Cowboy Bebop series. You remember when we tested Lee with the Bubblegum Crisis episodes. You mentioned the series Cowboy Bebop, and Lee let slip he knew the series, and he even mentioned Faye Valentine by name.”
Violin's eyes widened, as she understood what Aeryn was pointing out. Violin responded, “I see where you are going with this.”
Aeryn went onto say, “Yes. When Lee saw Faye, he didn't react at all. He is not that blind to the obvious. The fact he has survived around us, for months on end, proves that. Instead, he is always caution and one guard. As such, the only reason Lee would not react to seeing Faye in person, is that he already knew to expect the possibility of meeting a fictional character in real life... Lee is the writer.”
Violin suggested, “Then, let us go get him.”
Aeryn smiled, as she said, “Yes. Let's do that.”
Both of them then headed out of their suite, and towards the front elevator bay.
(_)
A minute before Lee stole Rock's reality device, in the hotel restaurant, at their usual table, Ranma, Akira, and Natsuru sat next to each other, as they were having some bottles of beers to drink.
They had just enjoyed watching Lee sing, and dance, a wonderfully strange rock song.
Akira commented, “Damn. What a performance. I knew that Lee was a good dancer, but he can sing, as well.”
Natsuru said, “It must have taken him years to master that singing ability.”
Ranma stated, “Speaking from experience. You got that right.”
Akira sipped her beer, as she watched as some idiot decided to cop a feel of both Rock and Revy, at the bar counter.
Akira thought, 'What an idiot.'
It then Akira noticed who is was.
Akira thought, 'I recognize that red hair, and ponytail, anywhere. That is Sam. Lee's good friend. And he shaved his beard. And he looks good without his beard. Actually, he looks great. But, why would he do something that stupid, towards Rock and Revy? Does he have a death wish?”
Suddenly, Akira noticed that Ranma and Natsuru were giggling at something.
Akira turned to her two lovers, as she asked, “What is so funny?”
Ranma said, “After, seeing Sam get get his ass kicked by Revy and Rock, reminded me that about something I was talking with Nodoka about, earlier. And she had an interesting story she heard from Kristina, about the night the Lagoon girls and Revy met Lee and Sam. That Lee told a joke that saved, Sam and his lives, from them.”
Akira questioned, “What exactly was the joke?”
Ranma answered, “That only a fool would wear a suit and tie in a town like this. And doing so would just be asking for trouble.”
Akira suddenly realized the hidden meaning of the joke, as she inquired, “Let me guess, right after Lee told the joke, the girls mentioned Rock, or Rokuro, to Revy, and the girls then laughed hard at that joke.”
Ranma replied, “Yea.”
Akira said, “That bastard. Only a person who as seen the Black Lagoon series, or lived it, could come up with a joke to get that kind of reaction.”
Natsuru immediately understood what her blond lover mean, as she asked, “You don't mean?”
Akira stated, “Yes. Lee is the writer.”
Suddenly, Natsuru realized what the song lyrics, to the song Lee had just sung. And what the lyrics meant. She mentioned, “And Lee just sang us a song that was practically a confession to us.”
Ranma replied, “Oh hell.”
All three turned to look at Rock, Sam, and Revy.
Revy had just kicked Sam in the balls, when Akira noticed look on Rock's face.
Rock and Akira looked at each other, and they both realized what the other was thinking, as they turned at looked at where Lee usual sat, in the corner table, with Sam. During the evening. And they saw that Lee was gone.
Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru all got up from their seats, as all five women immediately left for the restaurant exit.
(_)
Thirty seconds ago, across the restaurant, at the bar counter, Rock and Revy had just felt someone cop a feel on each their butt cheeks.
Rock was rarely a violent person, but this was one of the few times she instinctively became violent, as she and Revy turned to look at the person between them. She and Revy then began beating the man senseless, as Rock thought, 'What kinda idiot would do this? Especially, to us.'
It was then that Rock started to recognize the man they were beating.
The reason why Sam, or more aptly, River, knew if he fought back, it would give himself, and Lee, away.
As River allowed himself beaten, he made sure to slightly move his body out of the way of any possibly debilitating blows, without Rock and Revy realizing it. he thought, 'They longer they are focused on me. The longer, they are no focused on Lee. And I saw him already leave the room, with the reality device, a few seconds ago. Though, I am a bit annoyed that he stopped to talk to Melvin. But, Melvin noticed him. So, he had to. As such, I understand.'
Rock stopped hitting him, as she ordered, “Hold it, Revy. Something isn't right here. That is Sam.”
Revy stopped hitting River. She used her right hand to grab the scruff of River's shirt. She hauled him down by his shirt, to look at her and Rock, more closing in the fast.
Revy demanded, “Sam, you look good without a beard. Now, tell me why you would knowingly do something this stupid, before I really hurt you?”
River thought, 'I might as well be mostly honest.' He casually responded, “Would you believe I did it on a dare?”
Revy did not buy River's explanation. She let go of River's shirt, as she kneed him in the balls, while allowed him to dropped to the floor, in pain.
The blow caught River off guard, as he collapsed to the floor.
River grabbed his groin with both hands, as he stated, in a slightly higher pitch octave, than his normal male voice, “I freely admit that I deserved that.”
Revy looked down at River, as she stated, “Then, consider us even.”
River replied, “Good.” He then muttered, “Damn it. I never knew being hit there hurt this much.”
Meanwhile, Rock looked around the room, as she thought, 'Why would Sam really do this? Wait a minute, that song Lee was singing.” She remember the lyrics, and she suddenly realized what the lyrics meant.
Rock then looked over at Akira, sitting across the room, and their eyes met. Both of them then turned to look at where Lee usually sat, and she saw that he was long gone.
Rock turned to Revy, as she stated, “Lee is the writer.”
Revy looked over at Rock. She then looked down at River, whom was laying on the floor, in a sitting position, between Rock and herself. She looked back over at Rock, as she responded, “Crap.”
Both Rock and Revy started for the door, as they were joined by Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru. All five women rushed out of the room, without realizing what they had overlooked something, in their haste to leave the room.
The five women then left the restaurant, for the front lobby, where Lee usually was, when not in the restaurant, or his suite, during that time of night.
Though, as they walked out of the restaurant, Rock felt like she had forgotten something. But, give the situation, she felt that it was not important, as she went with her friends to finally catch the writer. The man none as Lee.
(_)
At that exact moment, in the lobby, Shenhua, Sawyer, and Lotton were sitting beside each other, one some couches, on the right wall of the lobby. Which was a change of pace, given the three usual sat in the couches on the left side of the lobby.
They women were in casual clothing. Even Lotton. Given, over time, during their stay at the Devil's Hotel, Sawyer and Shenhua agreed that Lotton's maid uniform, was attracting to much attention from the hotel staff, and other guests. Including, a few of their own friends.
The three adults women had finished their diner ten minutes ago, and they came out to hotel restaurant, and to the front lobby, for the quiet and peace. As they relaxed after having a pleasant dinner.
The couch the three sat on allowed them a view both the entrance to the bar, the check in desk, and the lobby entrance doors.
Lotton watched as Lee when to the check in desk, and retrieved his gym bag. She saw that Lee slung the strap of the gym bag over his right shoulder, as he turned around as started walking towards the front doors of the lobby, to the outside parking lot.
And with it being dark outside, the parking lot was lit with yellow lamps, placed throughout the parking lot. Along with the lights place along the walls of the hotel.
It was then that Lotton noticed that Lee's stride had changed. He seemed to walk with more confidence.
Lotton mentally reflected, 'Is Lee leaving the hotel?'
Suddenly, Lotton heard Sawyer say, beside her, “Did you hear? The Rats Nest got blown up? Though, the bartender is fine.”
Shenhua commented, “I heard. I was there when you talked to that guest, that came in a few minutes ago. The one whom had just drove by the Rats Nest. From the outfits he told us about, of those that walked out of the front of the bar, while it was burning, I think it was the maids. I wonder who told them? I thought we were in agreement not to let the Lovelace family learn about the stories?”
While Lotton paid attention to the conversation by her. She continued to watch Lee walk closer to the front door. She stated, “We did agree on that.”
Sawyer admitted, “I told them. During our Hell Saber days, Roberta and I became good friends. And I decided to keep in touch with her. I sent her a copy of the stories. I figured it would not cause any harm.”
As Lotton heard all this, she watched as Lee passed through the front doors, and into the entryway.
As Lee walked through the entryway, Lotton saw Lee throw down his blue baseball cap, to his right, and large glasses, to his left, onto the ground. He then used his right hand to pull out his sunglasses, from the left inside coat pocket. After which, he put his shades on over his eyes.
Lee then unzipped his bag, and pulled out his short rimmed, gray fedora hat, he also wore at Daiyu's Palace Casino. He was careful not to pull out his black fedora hat on his head. He continued walking straight out into the parking lot, as he zipped his bag back up.
By then, Lotton saw Lee exit the exterior doors that took him outside, and into the night.
It was then that Lotton heard Sawyer finish speaking, about why and how she had informed the maids of what was going on.
Lotton stated, “I love you both. But, Sawyer, do you realize what you have unleashed? All three of us have seen how dangerous Roberta is up close and personal. And Fabiola is nearly as dangerous as Robert. Given the writer cursed Garcia to change genders, both maids are going to be out for his blood. If he is lucky...”
Suddenly, everything clicked into place for her, as she thought, 'Why did Lee go to Akira about Chang and River? Because they have the least connection to Chang and River, and therefore they are the most none bias on talking about those two. He knew that beforehand.'
'Lee also knew H.P. Lovecraft would scare the hell out of anyone in my position. And he has always tried to get the troublemakers to steer clear of us... The night we five got drunk at the Rats Nest. The moves Lee did on the man who was clearly interested in us. They were the exact same moves Akira used on those two guys, the first night we three saw him at the Yellowflag.'
'Lee played us! And that is why he is leaving this hotel, with his bag packed. He must have run into the maids at the Rats Nest, or some other part of the city. Maybe he just saw them, as he drove by, in his pink Cadillac. And seeing those two badasses would make anyone want to run... For what good it will do him...'
Lotton did not take her eyes off of Lee. Whom she saw through the outside windows beside her. She calmly admitted, “Girls. I was wrong. Lee is the writer. And I think he saw the maids at the Rats Nest, right before the bar was destroyed. Or, somewhere else. And that is why he is leaving, with his bag packed.”
Sawyer and Shenhua just looked at her. It was then that Lotton look over at both Sawyer, and Shenhua.
A second later, all three of them got up, and they headed for the lobby front doors.
Though, at that moment, the three adults saw the ten adult women, they knew, come towards them from the front elevator bay, across the room from them.
At the same time, they saw Rock, Revy, Akira, Ranma, and Natsuru come towards them, from the hotel restaurant.
By then, they had all met up, in the middle of the lobby, between the front doors and the check in desk, on the back wall.
As they all met up, Lotton looked around the group. She said, “I see you all figured out Lee is the writer, as well.”
Molly stated, “We figured it out from the fact that Lee played a rare music piece yesterday, that we found out was mentioned in his stories.”
Aeryn stated, “Really. Well, we figured out it was Lee by the fact he knew about the Cowboy Bebop series, but didn't blink an eye when he met Faye at Chang's casino, as his card dealer.”
Rock commented, “We figured it out after I thought about the lyrics he sang. The song was titled, Twilight Zone.”
Violin asked, “By the band, Golden Earring?”
Natsuru said, “Yes.”
Violin questioned, “He actually sung that song in front of you, and you all did not realize what the song meant, at the time?”
Rock conceded, “I admit that it was not one of our brighter moments.”
Sarah asked, “But, why would he do something that stupid?”
Sawyer stated, “The maids are in the city, and we think Lee saw them.”
Natsuru said, “Well, that does explain a few things. And if he saw the maids. Then, I believe that, given the lyrics of that song, Lee was trying to confess to us, and no one took him up on his offer. So, now he is just trying to outright escape.”
Yurika stated, “Between us and Roberta. I would take us any day of the week.”
Mikoto said, “That completely understandable on Lee's part.”
Aeryn asked, “So, how did the rest of you figure it out?”
Lotton stated, as she turned to look at Akira, “Well, many things came together. But, the one item that stood out was that I remembered that night we went drinking at the Rats Nest, we had forced Lee to be our designated driver. Even though I was drunk at the time, I now recall how he took down a guy that pulled a gun on him. Lee kicked the guy in the balls, forcing the man to drop his gun, and he then slammed his head onto the counter. It was all done in a similar fashion as what you did, Akira, against those two guys, the first night we saw you at the Yellowflag.”
Akira raised an eyebrow, as she stated, “Really. Well, besides the song, we figured it out when we were informed at the joke Lee told you Lagoon girls, the first night you met him and Sam, at the Rats Nest. I cannot believe you did not realize how Lee phrased the context of that joke. Only someone who has seen the Black Lagoon series, or lived it, would get that joke.”
Molly responded, with disbelief evident in her tone of voice, “He blinded up with humor.”
Shenhua sternly commented, “If you all had taken my suggestion, and just taken him out back, and beaten him some, we would have saved us all a lot of time and trouble.”
Violin quipped, “Where is the fun in that?”
In response, all the women, laughed at Violin's joke. Even Shenhua could help, but laugh at Violin's comeback to what she said.
As the calmed down, Shenhua smiled, as she conceded, “Good point.”
Kristina inquired, “So, where is Lee now?”
Lotton used her right hand to point at the lobby entrance, and out the windows of the doors, as she answered, “He just went outside.” She then dropped her right hand back to her side.
Though, the front lobby windows, and door windows, everyone could see Lee walking away down the parking lot, directly away from them.
They saw Lee was about twenty feet from the outside entryway doors, passed the sidewalk, and on the black pavement, as he continued to walk away from them.
Revy smirked, “Well, let us not keep him waiting.”
They all started walking towards Lee, as a group of eighteen women.
As they opened the entryway doors, from the lobby side, Sawyer pointed out, “The only question is, do we start torturing him before, or after we get some sleep?”
Shenhua suggested, “We can rotate shifts.”
Revy complimented, “That is a great idea.”
A few seconds later, as they exited the hotel, to the outside, though the exterior doors to the entryway.
By then, Lee was fifty feet from the entrance to the hotel lobby, with him walking down a two car lane, that lead to the far side of the parking lot, opposite to the Devil's Hotel, itself.
It was then that they noticed Lee pulling out a something, from a jacket pocket, along with him pulling out his lighter.
Revy inquired, “Is he doing what I think he is doing?”
Akira answered, “It appears so. I remember seeing that scene, in that movie. And it was a great movie. And it fits this situation, perfectly.”
Revy grinned, as she commented, “He's got guts to do that. And besides us, I also admire his taste in other fiction. Also girls, let us at least leave him sane enough to answer some questions, before we fully break him. I would like to know where he got some of his ideas from, on what he wrote about us.”
Rock lips curled into a wick grin, as well. She stated, “I second that motion.”
The women then continued to quietly approach Lee, from behind.
(_)
Thirty seconds ago, Lee exited the hotel from the front lobby doors, he saw that it was a night outside, with the outside building lights, along with the parking lot lights, illuminating the area.
The air outside was cooler that earlier that day. Also, there was a nice breeze blowing on him, from the sea.
Lee continued walking with confidence, straight out from the hotel entrance, and into the parking lot.
Lee thought, 'I need put a little distance between me, and those woman, before I use my new reality device. Still, the hard part has now been accomplish. I can now implement the next part of my escape plan, without a moment to lose. And I know the perfect way to celebrate this monumental achievement.'
Lee then used his left hand to pull out a cigarette from an interior jacket pocket, that Revy had given him months earlier.
Next, he put the cigarette in his right hand. And he used his left hand to also pulled out his lighter, from his left pants pocket. The same pocket he had his reality device in.
As Lee pulled out his lighter, he was careful not to accidentally hit the reality device's buttons.
Given the sea breeze, Lee had to use his lips to help himself light his cigarette.
Lee put the filter end of the cigarette, to his lips. He then bought both of his hands up to mouth.
Lee used his right hand to cup his lighter from the wind, while he used his left hand to hold, the lighter, as his left thumb ignited the lighter.
Lee next brought the lit flame to the end of his cigarette, as he sat the smoke from the paper signal to him that it was lit.
Lee dropped his right hand to his side, against his gym bag, as he used his left hand to put his lighter back into his left pants pocket, beside the reality device.
With the lit cigarette between his lips, Lee thought, with a bit a gallows humor, 'It is not like these things are going to kill me. The cancer I already have will kill me long before these will. And to think, I never smoked, nor serious drank, nor did any illegal drugs, before I came to Mexico. And I still got cancer... Talk about the term, clean living, being a load of crap.'
Lee then slowly inhaled the smoke. He was surprised to find out that he able to do so without choking on the smoke.
As Lee continued walking, he heard Rock's voice behind, say, “Nice Keyser Soze attempt. But, it is over, Lee. Or, should I say, Paul?”
Lee immediately stopped walking forward. Though, he did not instantly turn around. Instead, he took a slow drag on the cigarette. He then dropped his cigarette with his right hand, and he used his right foot to put it out, on the pavement floor, beneath him.
Next, Lee calmly turned around, to his right, and he saw the assemblage of the Badasses of the Multiverse, thirty feet from him. With Rock and Revy standing in the front of the group.
The look of sadistic happiness on their faces promised much pain and misery for Lee.
But, as Lee stood in place, facing the assemblage of badass women, Lee remained as calm as ever, while he slowly blew out the smoke from his lungs, and out his mouth. As he did so, he used his left hand to pull out the reality device from his left pocket. He had a firm grip on the device, with him left palm set against the back of the device, so he would not accidentally touch the buttons on the face of the device.
Lee then held up the device, with his left hand, for the women to see.
Suddenly, as everyone recognized what Lee had in his left hand. They immediately dropped their smug grins. Rock quickly checked her pockets, as she realized Lee had stolen her reality device.
Lee continued to look at the women, while his lips curled into a wicked grin, with his shades masking the wild look to his eyes. Then, just as Lee had wrote it, Lee thought of where, when, and what reality, he wanted to go, and he held that thought, as he used his left thumb to press the middle red button in the center of the face of the device, and with his gym bag hanging off himself, he instantly disappeared into the multiverse.
The only sound heard after Lee's disappearance, was half the party of badass women screaming, in unison, “NOOOOOOOOOOO!”
Run.
The end of Badasses Of the Multiverse: Book 5: “The Gambling Man”: Volume 1: “De La Plata Podrido.”
To be continued in Badasses Of the Multiverse: Book 5: “The Gambling Man”: Volume 2: “Total Badass.”